A grammar of the Greek language

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.

We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at http : //books . google . com/|

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized by VjOOQIC

Digitized

byGOQgk

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized by VjOOQIC

GRAMMAR

GREEK LANGUAGE

aLPHEUS CROSBY,

MOS or THB ORBSK LANOUAOB AMD LmBATDRB Ul
DABTMOUTH OOLLBOM,

BOSTON:

CROSBY ANI> NICHOLS.

117 Washington Strket.

18G4.

Digitized

by Google

*' The Lav«va<3k of thb Grebes was truly like themselvea, it mis
eonformable to their transcendent and universal Genius. * * « * The
Greek Tokoue, from its propriety and universalityf is made f&r all
that is great, and all Utat is beautiful, in every Sutject, and undet every
Form of writing.*' — Harris's Hermes, Bk. III. Ch. 5.

** Greekf — the shrine of the genius of the old world ; as universal
as our race, as individual as ourselves ; of infinite flexibility, of inde-
fatigable strength, with the complication and the distinctness of nature
herself; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was exQiud-
ed ; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the mind like English ;
with words like pictures, with words like the gossamer film of the sum-
mer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and
the intensity of iEschylus ; not compressed to the closest by Thucydi-
des, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thun-
ders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean toouh of
Demosthenes ! *' ~ Coleridge** Study of the Greek Clastic Poets^ Geu.
Introd.

3<^i7f

Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by

Alpheus Crosby,

II the Clerk't office of the ihstnct Court of the DisUlct of New HampbhUe

Digitized

by Google

PREFACE TO THE SEC50ND EDITION.

The following pages are the result of an attempt to supply what
was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-books ; viz.
a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put into
the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently scien-
6fic and complete to accompany him through his whole course. The
▼olume from which the elements of a language are first learned be-
comes to the student a species of mnemonic tables, and cannot be
changed in the course of his study without a material derangement
of those associations upon which memory essentially depends. The
femDiar remark, *' It must be remembered that, if the grammar be the
first book put into the learner's hands, it should also be the last to
leave them,^' though applying most happily to grammatical study in
general, was made by its accomplished author with particular refer-
ence to the manual used by the student.

In the preparation of this work, the routine of daily life has obliged
me to keep constantly in view the wants of more advanced studentu ;
and, for their sake, an attempt has been made to investigate the prin-
dples of the language more deeply, and illustrate its use more fully,
than has been usual m grammatical treatises, even of far greater size.
At the same time, no pains have been spared to meet the wants of the
beiginner, by a studious simplicity of method and expression, and by
the reduction of the most important principles to the form of concise
rules, easy of retention and convenient for citation.' Many valuable
works in philology fail of attaining the highest point of utility, through
a eumbrousness of form, burdensome alike to the understanding and
UtC memory of the learner. They have been the armor of Saul to the
youthful David. I have not, however, believed that I should consult,
the advantage even of the beginner by a false representation of the
language, or by any departure from philosophical accuracy of state-
ment or propriety of arrangement. Truth is always better than fals^
bood, and science than empiricism.

To secure, so far as might be, the double object of the work, it haa
I constructed upon the following plan.

Digitized

by Google

nr PREFACS.

Firat, to state the usage of the language in comprehennve rales
and condensed tables, to be impiinted upon the memory of the student.
For convenient examples of the care with which brevity and simplicity
have been here studied, the reader will permit me to refer him to the
rules of syntax, as presented to the eye at a single view in ^ 64, and
to the elementary tables of inflection and formation.

Secondly, to explain the usage of the language, and trace its Am-
tarical development, as fully as the limits allowed to the work, and the
present state of philological science, would permit. The student whc
thinks wishes to know, not only what is true, but why it is true ; and
to the philosophical mind, a single principle addressed to the reason
is often like the sUver cord of JBolus, confining a vast number of facts,
which otherwise, like the enfranchised winds, are scattered far and
wide beyond the power of control.

Thirdly, to illustrate the use of the language by great fulness of
remark and exemplification. In these remarks and examples, as well
as in the more general rules and statements, I have designed to keep
myself carefully within the limits of Attic usage, as exhibiting the
language in its standard form, except when some intimation is given
to the contrary; believing that the grammarian has no more right
than the author to use indiscriminately, and without notice, the
▼ocabulary, forms, and idioms of different ages and communities, —

" A party-color'd dre«
Of patch'd and pya-btU'd languages."

The examples of syntax, in order that the student may be assured
in regard to their genuineness and sources, and be able to examine
them in their connection, have been all cited from classic authors In
the precise words in which they occur, and with references to the places
where they may be found. In accordance with the general plan of the
work, these examples have been mostly taken firom the purest Attio
writers, beginning with .^^hylus, and ending with JSschines. It
was also thought, that the practical value of such examples might be
greatly enhanced to the student by selecting a single author, whose
works, as those of a model-writer, should be most frequently resorted
to ; and especially, by selecting for constant citation a single work of
this author, which could be in the hands of every student as a com-
panion to his grammar, in which he might consult the passages re-
ferred to, and which might be to him, at the same time, a text-book
in reading, and a model in writing, Greek. In making the choice, I
eould not hesitate in selecting, among authors, Xenophon, and among
his writings, the Anabasis. References also abound in the Etymology,
!iiit ehiefly in respect to peculiar and dialectic forms.

/Google

PREFACE. V

llie sabject of euphonic laws and changes has reoeiTed a higer

dan of attention than is usual in works of this kind, but not laigei

dMm I lek compelled to bestow, in treating of a language,

" Whose law was heavenly beauty, and whose breath
EniapturiBg mosk."

The student wiU allow me to commend to his special notice two
fmnciides of eztensire use in the explanation of Greek forms ; yii.
tiie precession of vowels (i. e. the tendency of vowels, in the progress
of language, to pass from a more open to a closer sound ; see §§ 28,
S9, 44, 86, 93, 118, 123, 259, &c.), and the correspondence be-
tween the consonants v and a, and the vowels a and 8 (§§ 34, 46./},
50, 66-58, 60, 63. R., 84, 100. 2, 105, 109, 132, 179, 181, 200, 201,
213, 248./, 300, &c.).

In treating of Greek etymology, i have wished to avoid every thing
like aibitraiy formation ; and, instead of deducing one form from an-
other by empirical processes, which might often be quite as well re-
versed, I have endeavoured, by rigid andysis, to resolve all the forms
mto tlieir elements. The old method of forming the tenses of the
Greek veib one finmi another (compared by an excellent grammarian
to *' The House &at Jack built "), is liable to objection, not only on
account of its complexity and multiplication of arbitrary rules, but yet
more on account of the great number of imaginary forms which it re-
quires the student to suppose, and which often occupy a place in his
memory, to the exclusion of the real forms of the language. To cite
but a siBgle case, the second aorist passive, according to this method,
is formed from ike second aorist active, although it is a general rule
of the language, that verbs which have the one tense want the other
($ 255. /S). • Nor is the method which makes the theme the foundation
of all the other forms free from objection, dther in declension or in
conjugation. This method not only requires the assistance of many
imagmary nominatives and presents, but it often inverts the order of
ftature, by deriving the simpler form from the more complicated, and
commits a species of grammatical anachronism, by making the later
form the origin of the earlier. See §§ 84, 100, 256. V., 265. la
the following grammar, all the forms axe immediately referred to the
root, and the analysis of the actual, as obtained from classic usage,
takes the place both of the metempsychosis of the obsolete, and of the
metamorphosis of the ideal.

Those parts of Greek Grammar of which I at first proposed to form
a separate vdume, the Dialects, the History of Greek Inflection, the
Formation of Words, and Versifieaftion, I have concluded, with the

Jigitized

by Google

tl FREFACB.

liidviee of highly esteemed friends, to incorporate in tliis ; so ttiat a
•ia^U volume shoukl consiituie a complete manual of Greek GiammaiN
To accomplish this object within moderate limits of size and expense,
a very condensed mode of printing has been adopted, giving to the
volume an unusual amount of matter in proportion to its size. I thank
my printers, that, through their skill and care, they have shown this
to be consistent with so much typographical clearness and beauty. It
has also been found necessary to reserve for a separate treatise those
parts of the first edition which were devoted to General Gramwar^
and which it was at first proposed to include in the present edition aa
an appendix. I submit to this necessity with the lees reluctancey
because a systematic attention to the principles of Genei^ Grammy
ought not to be deferred till the study of the Greek, unless, in accord-
ance with the judicious advice of some distinguished scholars, this
should be the first language learned ailer our own ; and beeaose the
srish has been expressed, that these parts might be published separ-
^ly for the use of those who were not engaged in a eourse of clltssical
•tndy.

J cannot condude this preface without the expression of my most
pveere thanks to those personal Mends and friends of learning wht
iMive so kindly encouraged and uded me in my work. Amoi^ those
to whom I am especially indebted for valuable suggestions, or for the
loan of books, are President Woolsey, whose elevation, while I am
miting, to a post which he will so much adorn, will not, I trust,
withdraw him from that departiaent of study and authorship in which
ha has won for himself so enviaUe a distinction ; Professors Feltoa
•f Camhridge, Gibbs of New Haven, Ha^ett of Newton, Sanborn,
B^ highly esteemed associate in dsssical instruction, Stuart of An-
dover, and Tyler of Anherst; and Messrs. Richards of Meriden,
Sophocles of Hartlbrd, and Taylor of Andover. Nat can I conclude
without the acknowledgment of my deep obligations to previwis la-
borers in the same field, to the gskat uvins, and to the orbat
DSAO ^ Bequiescant in pace ! it is aliDost superfluous that I should
mention, as among those to whom I am most greatly indebted, the
honored names of Ahrens, Bemhardy, Bopp, Buttmann, Carmickael,
Hscher, Hartung, Hermann, Hoeigeveen, Kuhner, Lobeek, MaiV
Itixe, Matthis, Paasow, Rost, Thi^seh, and Vigor.

AG

HAWnrsa, Oel. 13, 1646

Digitized

by Google

PREFACE TO THE TABLES.

Tbi following tables hare been prepared as part of a Greek Gnnn
mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater con\ : i*
iencc and economy in their use. The advantages of ^'Tabular vr^
rangement are too obvious to require remark ; nor is it less obvm...
that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when priiiirn
together, than when scattered throughout a volume.

The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been ct.i.
•ttrucled, are the following : —

I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gra:ii
matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only \Ut ■
material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which ;r>
sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student \.'m
learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, Htnf
▼oeative are always the same, why, in each neut^ paradigm thai fi*
fltodies, ncist his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of nut:
forms instead of three? why, in his daily exercises in declensiu.).
must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weariness «>.
the teacher^s ear? With the ellipses in the following tables, the p:p
adigms of neuter nouns contain only eight forms, instead of the tivt/r.
which are usually, and the fifteen which are sometimes, given; atui
the paradigms of participles and of adjectives similarly declined cont:i!^
only twenty-two forms, instead of the usual thirty-six or forty-Jiv^
See 114.

n. 7b give the forms just as they appear upon the Greek pane .
that is, without abbreviation and without hyphens, A dissected an i
abbreviated mode of printing the paradigms exposes the young stud. w.
to mistake, and familiarizes the eye, and of course the mind, with
fragments, instead of complete forms. If these fragments were s* j
arated upon analytical principles, the evil would be less ; but they h i>
usually cut off just where convenience in printing may direct, so ^h-i'
they contain, sometimes a part of the affix, sometimes the whole z^w-
«nd sometimes the affix with a part of the root. Hyphens are useiai

Digitized by VjOOQIC

VIU PREFACE TO TUE TABLES.

in the analysis of forms, but a table of paradigms se6ms not to be the
most appropriate place for them. In the following tables, the affixes
are giyen by themselves, and the paradigms are so arranged in col-
umns, that the eye of the student will usually separate, at a glance,
the root from the affix.

in. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not
according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine
grammarians. Hence, for example,

1. The first perfect active imperative, which has no existence it
pure writers, has been discarded.

2. For the imaginary imperative forms lOTa&iy Ti&fjiy dido^t
diUvv&i^ have been substituted the actual forms mjti}, t/^m, dldov^
ddxvv,

3. Together with analogical but rare forms, have been given the
usual forms, which in many grammars are noticed only as exceptions
or dialectic peculiarities. Thus, flovXsvhmaap and ^ovXtvovitav^
fiovXivoaig and flovUvaHag, ifls/iovXfvxsiaav and ifisl^ovXsvxfaap
(^ 34) ; fiovXevia&waav and fiovXevda&wPy fiovXsv^Biiioav and fiov
Xiv^sUv (Tf 35) ; hl&tjv and id&ovv (Tf 60) ; ^g and ^a&a^ sof
Tffi and IWai (^ 55).

4. The second future active and middle, which, except aa a eupho-
nic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly
rejected.

IV. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What
student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impression,
sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluperfect , the
second aorist and future, and the third future belong as regularly to
the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name ; when, in
point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, presents
only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect and pluperfect ,
eighty-five, which have the second^ aorist active ; fifty, which have the
second aorist and future passive ; and forty, which have the second
aorist middle ? The gleanings of all the other dialects will not double
these numbers. Carmichael, who has given us most fully the statis-
tics of the Greek verb, and whose labors deserve all praise, has
gathered, from all the dialects, a list of only eighty-eight verbs which
have the second perfect, one hundred and forty-five which have the
second aorist active, eighty-four which have the second aorist passive,
and fifty-eight which have the second aorist middle. And, of hit

Digitized

byGobgk

FBEPACE TO TBS TABLES. IX

flatalogne of nearly eight hundred verbs, embracing the most commoB
▼erbs of the language, only fi%-fiTe have the third future, and, in
the Attic dialect, only twenty-eight.

To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the vener-
erable shade of n/Tirw, but alas ! it is little more than a shade, and,
with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced,
after examination, to ezdaim, in the language of Electra,

'Ayr) (piXreiritt

and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to tn;ith, a
false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth aa
the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes' bed
to which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned. The actual
future of Ti/Tiro) is not rvipat, but rvTirifaof, the perfect passive is both
thvfi/juxi and isxvnjTjfjim^ the aorists are in part dialectic or poetic,
the first and second perfect and pluperfect active are not found in
classic Grreek, if, indeed, found at all, and the second future active
and middle are the mere figments of grammatical fency. And yet
all the regular verbs in the language must be gravely pronounced
defective, because they do not conform to this imaginary model.

In the following tables, the example of Kuhner has been followed,
in selecting /iovXfvat as the paradigm of regular conjugation. This
verb is strictly regular, it glides smoothly over the tongue, is not lia-
ble to be mispronounced, and presents, to the eye, the prefixes, root,
and affixes, with entire distinctness throughout. This is followed by
shorter paradigms, in part merely synoptical, which exhibit the dif>
ferent classes of verbs, ^with their varieties of formation.

From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in writ-
ing Greek, to employ the form in -lis&ov^ little suspecting that it \a
only a variety of the fhrst person dual, so exceedingly rare, that the
learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere invention
of the Alexandrine grammarians? ^ The teacher who meets with it in
his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier called the
Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, ** to gaze
upon that which they had never seen before, and would never see
again." In the secondary tenses of the indicative, and in the op-
tative, this form does not occur at all ; and, in the remaining tenses,
there have been found only five examples, two of which are quoted
by Athensns from a word-hunier (ofo/nxTodifpa;), whose aflectation
ho is ridiculing, while the three classical examples are all poetic, oo-

Digitized

by Google

X PR£FAG£ TO THE TABLES.

tuning , one in Homer (II. ^. 485), and the other two in Sophoclet
(El. 950 and Phil. 1079). And yet, in the single paradigm ci
tvntiOy as I learned it in my boyhood, this " needless Alexandrine, "

** Which, like a wounded snake, drags its slow length along, "

occurs no fewer than ^wenty-six times, that is, almost nine times at
often as in the whole range of the Greek classics.

With respect to the manner in which these tables should be used
80 much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that
no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly
modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend,

1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse, but gradu-
ally, in connection with the study of the principles and rules of tfie
grammar, and with other exercised.

2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference,
than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that
some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting
differences of accent, or individual peculiarities.

3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student
should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of
terminations, and with the rules of the grammar.

4. That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service,
tiU the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as
legibly as upon the printed page, — till they have become so familiar
to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, ** the
words,'* in the expressive language of Milton, " like so many nimble
and airy servitors, shall trip about him at coinmanJi, and in well-
ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places."

In the present edition, the Tables of Inflection have been enlarged
by the addition of the Dialectic Forms, the Analysis of the Affixes,
the Changes in the Root of the Verb, &c. Tables of Ligatures, of
Derivation, of Pronominal Correlatives, of the Rules of Sjmtax, and
of Fonns of Analysis and Parsing, have also been added. Som«
references have been made to sections in the Grammar.

A. a

Hanover, Sept. 1, 1846.

**« Tht volume of TktalM eontaint pp i, 11, vU -zU, f - 81

Digitized

by Google

CONTENTS-

TABLES.

1. Tables op Orthography and Orthoept.

A. AXPRABBT,

B. LlOATUBBS,

Page.

. 9

10

C YOGAL EUEMKSn,

II. Tables op Etymology.

Paftt

11

Introductory Remarks, • 12

A.' Tables of Declension.
I. Affixes of the Three Deden-

•ions, . . . .IS

n. Aiial3rsi8 of the Affixes, • 13
ID. Nouns of Declension L

A* BiaMculine, Ta/iiaf, vavmst

VvCfvmtf • • • 14

B. Feminine, ^-^t^ ^^c^h

Dialectic Forms, . • 14
IV. Nouiis of Declension II.

A. Masculine and Feminine,
XiyHt itifitHt iiist »Mf, NMf, 15

B. Neuter, rvxav, «'rf^«», fU'
ft»f, iwrin, mwyitt^ • 15

Dialectic Forms, . . •15
f . Nouns of Declension IIL

A. Mute,

I. Labial, yv^^,, ^xi^, 16

S. Palatal, »i^al, all, ^i(.

^•rf. ^r5» ... 16

3. UnguaL

«. Masculine and Femi-
nine, V'atf, 9t9Utt &*»\,
X»(*(* »XiUt • •16

$. Neuter, rSfiut, fSu
^^raf, M^r, 0it, . 16

B. Liquid,

Syncopated, v-ar^, M^

C. Liquid-Mute,

D. Pure.

«. Masculine and Feminine,

ivt^nvt, $0Vff y^rnvt, mug,

^^x^fi ^•>-tfj ^e'^^nu •

/}. Neuter, rtt%ot, &fru, yi-

Dialectic Forms^ . . •

VI. Irregular and Dialectic De*

deasion, Zi of, Oi^^tvt, FXm,

Vi«f, fttvi, ^«(«, ririaf, iVflri^,,

vn. Adjectives of Two Termina-
tions.

A. Of Declension II., «Qt»4tt
myii^aaf, • • •

B. Of DeclennoD III^ i^^9,

C«», ....
vra. Adjectives of Three Termi-
nations.

A. Of Declensions IL and I.,
^iXi«f, r«^«(, • •
Contracted, ;^f vrt**, )i«'X««f,

B. Of Declensions HI. and 1.,

17

17

18

19

19
19

91

SI

29
Si

S3

Digitized

by Google

xli

.CONTENTS.

PagB.

GL Of the Three Dedensions,

f»iy»t, «'«Xvf, • • .23

Homeric Forms of vtXvf, 24

"'(«««fl • • • •24

□c Numerals, tTr, §Mf, )v«, i^

f A», Tfttff rl«-r»(tf, • .24

X. Participles, (iooXivtv, Ttfiimv,
^ottSjty Xi^atff r • • 25

^0USt Ivft . . • m 26

zi. Substantive Pronouns.

A. Personal, ly^, rv, •S, • 27

B. Reflexive, Iftmifrw, ri«»-
r«v, Iavc^v, • • •28

C. Beciprocul, iXXn>.m, • 28

D. Indefinite, hTtm, • • 28
zn. Adjective Pronouns.

A. Definite.

Artide •, Iterative mMt,
Relative 7#, Demonstrative
Hi, Possessive, • • 29

Demonstrative •urt, r»^»S'
r§t, . • • • SO

B. Indefinite.

Simple Indefinite r}r, Inter-
rogative riff Relative Indef-
inite $fTti, • . .SO

B. Tablb op Numebalb.

L Adjectives.

1. Cardinal, 2. Ordinal, • SI

S. Temporal, 4. Multiplay

5. Propordonal» • • •32

n. Adverbs, • • • 82

III. Substantives, • • • 32

G. Tables of Cokjuoahoii.

I. The Tenses Classified, . • S3

n. The Modes Classified, • S3

m. Formation of the Tenses, 33

IV. Affixes of the Active Voice, 34

V. Affixes of the Passive Voices 36

VI. Analysis of the Afiixes, • 38
▼n. Dialectic Forms, • • 39
Tin. Active Voice of fL§yy.i6m

Translated, • • • 40

EX. Acdve Voice of /3«vXiv«, •

X. Middle and Passive Voices of

^oXtyatf . • •

XI. (A.) Mute Verbs.

L Labial, 1. y^i^m^ •

2. XfArAT,
ii. Palatal, ^^iw^tty
iiL TJnfflial, 1. ti'Jty •

2. K^fAi^a, •
xn. (B.) Liquid Verbs.

1. ayyiXXtiy • •

2. Ifothtt, . • •
xn. (C.) Double Consonant Verbs.

1. aS^v or mu^ivty • •

2. xixekftfAiUi \XnX%yf/tm4y

XIV. (D.) Pure Verbs.
i. Contract,

1. rtftati, •

2. ^tXut, •

3. )«fA.«*», •
ii^ Verbs in -/m,

1. %rnfu, •

2. vt(mw0M4t

3. riftifu, •
4« iiittfUf •

5. ^ii»9VfU, •

6. ^nfit, •

7. hfiij' • •

8. i/^/, •

9. {$fi4, .

iiL Second Aorists,

1. ICnv, . •

2. k^Q^af^

3. tyt»i9f •

4. tiuf, • • •

XV. (K) Preteritive Verbs,

1. «n«, • . •

2. }i^«i»« and >l>i«, •

3. iT/tMM, • • •

4. jteifitifMtif • • •

JKIljlMM, . • •

XVI. Changes in the Root, •

D. Tables of Fosmahov.

I. Table of Derivation, •
n. Pixmominal Correlativei^ •

42

44

47
48
49
50
51

52
54

55
55

S6
58

eo

69
€S
64
66
68
69
70
71
72

73
73
73
73

74
74
74
75
75
76

77
78

ni. Principal Rules of Syntax,
IV. Forms of Analysis and Parsino^

A. Of WOBX38,

B. Of Sehtsnobb,

82
84

C Of IfRTBUi

84

Digitized

by Google

CONTENTS. ^

Xlli

INTR0D7CTI0N. — DiALECTS,

Pa««
85

BOOK L ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.

Ch. 1. CHARAOTEBa,

Page
90

C. Apostrophe, •

104

Pronandatioii, .

• 93

'Dialectic Variations, .

104

Hiatoiy of Orthography, .

95

Ch. S. Consonants,

108

Ch. 2. Vowels,

. 97

£uphonic Changes,

!• Precession, • •

99

A. In Formation of Words, 108

IL Union of SyllaUes,

. 100

B. In Connection of Worda

, 113

A. Contraction, • •

100

a Special Bules,

114

B. Crasis, . .

. 102

Dialectic Variations, .

114

BOOK n. ETYMOLOGY.

Ck. I. Pbinoiplbs of Db-

C. Mode, .

171

OLENSIOK, • • •

116

D. Number and Person, •

171

A. Gender,

, 116

K Histoiy of Conjugation,

172

B. Number, . • •

118

Ch. 8. Prefixes of Conju-

a Case, D. Methods,

. 119

gation, • • •

182

£. Histoiy of Declension,

121

I. Augment,

182

Ch. 2. Deojension OF Nouns.

II. Reduplication,

184

L First Declension,

126

III. Of Compound Verbs,

185

Dialectic Forms, .

127

Dialectic Use, .

186

IL Second Dedenmon, .

128

Ch. 9. Afftxkb of Conju-

Dialectic Forms, •

» 129

gation.

m. Third Declension, •

129

L Classification and Analysis,

187

A. Mutes, .

130

A. Tense-Signs,

188

B. liquids,

131

B. Connecting Vowels,

190

C. Liquid-Mutes, D. Puree, 133

C. Flexible Endings,

193

Dialectic Forms, •

. 139

IL Union of Affixes and Root,

196

lY. Irrqgular Nouns,

140

A. Regular Open Affixes,

196

B. R^ular Close Affixes,

(96

146

C. Verbs in .^,

200

152

D. Complete Tenses,

203

Ch. 5. PaoiroinfS.

Dialectic Forms,

208

I. Substantive, • •

155

Ch. 10. Root of the Verb,

215

IL Acyective, .

159

A. Euphonic Changes,

217

Ch. 6. COMPABIBON, •

163

B. Emphatic Changes,

219

L Of Adjectives,

. 163

C. Anomalous Changes,

241

A. In -ri^«#, .r«r«f, •

163

Ch. 1 1 . Formation of Words, 243

. 165

L Of Simple Words,

244

C. Irregular, • •

166

A. Nouns, . .

244

n. Of Adverbs,

. 168

B. Adjectives, •

248

Ch. 7. Pbingeplbb or Coi

f-

C Pronouns, •

249

JUOATIOV, • •

> 169

D. Verbs,

250

A. Voice,

169

£. Adverbs, .

251

B. Tense, . . ,

170

n. Of Compound Worda

252

BOOI

C ffl.

SYNTAX.

Ch. ]. The SuBmsTiTX.

IL Use of Numbers,

259

L Agreemeow

257

IIL Use of Cases,

860

Digitized

by Google

CONTENTS.

Page

A. Nominative, • . 26"2

B. Genitive, . . 264
1. Of Departure, . 264

1. Separation, • 264

2. Distinction, • 265
n. Of Caiue, . 967

i. 1. Origin, • . 267

2. Material, • 267

3. Supply, . . 268

4. Partitive, , 269
ii. I. Motive, &c^ . 274

2. Price, Value, &c, 27$

3. Sensible and Men-
tal Object, . 276

4. Time and Place, 278
la. Active, • . 279
iv. Cktnstituent, . 279

1. Property, . 281

2. Relation, • 281
C Dative Objective, . 285

I. Of Approach, . 286

1. Nearness, . • 286

2. likeness, • 287

II. Of Influence, . 287
D. Dative Residual, . 293

L Instrumental and Modal, 293

n. Temporal and Local, 295

£. Accusative, . . 296
I. Of Direct Object and

Effect, • . 297

Double Accusative, SOI

n. Of Specification, . 302

m. Of Extent, 303

rv. Adverbial, . . 304

F. Vocative, . . 304

Cn, 2/ Thb Adjectivb.

I. Agreement, . • 305

II. Use of Degrees, • .312
Ch. 3. Thb Article, • 315

I. As an Article, • • 316

BOOK IV.

^rt. 1. QUANTITT, . • 410

L Natural Quantity, • .411

II. Local Quantity, . 414
C'li. 2. VsKsiKicATioai, • 416

A. Dactylic Verse, • 4t-'l

B. Anapastic Vove, . . 423

C. Iambic Verse, • • 425

D. Trochaic Verse, . . 427
K. Other Metres, . . 428

(II. 3. Au;knt, . • • 429

Pi.fe

II. As a Pronoun, .

326

Ch. 4. The Pkonoun.

I. Agreement,

327

II. Special ( )l)8ervations, .

329

A. Personal, &c..

329

B. Ai/TOff . . •

332

C. Demonstrative, •

3.'}3

D. Indefinite.

336

£. Relative,

3:i7

344

G. Interrogative^ •

346

H. 'AxA.*}, .

347

Ch. 5. Thb Verb.

I. Agreement, . •

.348

n. Use of the Voices.

.352

A. Active,

353

B. Middle, .

354

C. Passive,

356

III. Use of the Tenses,

358

A. Definite and Indefinite.

360

B. Indefinite and Complete,

364

C. Future,

36d

IV. Use of the Modes,

367

A. Intellective, .

367

As used in sentences.

I. Desiderative,

372

II. Final, .

374

in. Conditional, •

.S75

IV. Relative,

378

v. Complementary,

378

B. VoUtive, .

381

C. Incorporated,

381

I. Infinitive,

385

u. Participle, •

390

m Verbal in *Ti#f,

396

Ch. 6. The Partici.b, .

396

A. The Adverb,

.S97

B. The Preposition,

397

C. llie Conjunction, .

4()C

D. Concluding Remarks,

40J

PROSODY.

I. General Laws, • •

431

11. Accentual Changes,

4^4

Contraction, &o..

4i2

Grave Accent, Anastrophe,

4S3

Proclitics, Enclitics,

434

IIL Determination of Accent-

ed Svllable,

435

In Declension, . •

436

In (>»ni|'anson, Conjugation,

, 4.39

In Particles,

440

Indexes,

441

Digitized

by Google

GREEK 'tables.

L ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
1 1. A. The Alphabet.

18810-12,17-22.]

Orda

Forms.
Large. SmalL

Roman
Letters.

Name.

Numeral
Power.

I.

A a

a

"Akfpai

Alpha

1

II.

B p,6

b

Brita

Beta

2

III.

r r.r

gin

rcifi/ia

Gamma

3

IV.

d

JiXra

Delta .

4

V.
VI.

E t

^

V 2

Ep^on
Zeta.

5

7

VIL

U 1,.

e .

V/ra

Eta

8

VIII.

e &,d

Ih

Otjra

Theta

9

IX.

I *

1 1^

i

*Ima

Iota

10

X.

K X '^

c

Kanna

Kappa

20

XI.

A X

I

jittfA^da

Lambda

30-

Xll.

Jlf A.

m

Mv

Mu

40

XIII.

^ U

n '^^

Nv

Nu

50

XIV.

' « A

X

SI

Xi

60

XV.

0 o

d

0 (4ixQor

Omicron

70

XVI.

// w, a

P

m

Pi

80

XVII.

P (?. P

r

'P^

Rbo

100

rviii.

J? a,S

8

Zl/fxa

Sigma

200

XIX.

T T,7

t

Tav

Tau

300

XX.

T V

y-«^

V iplXov

Upsilon.

400

XXI.

* V 7

^ ph,

07

Phi

500

XXII.

^ch ,

Xi

Chi

600

XXIII

tp V,

ps

m

Psi

700

XXIV.

JZ 01

0

Jl fiiya

Omega

800

EPI-
SEMA.

f
q

Bav
Konna

"Vau
Koppa

6
90

' ^

8h

2^a/4nZ

Sampi

900

Digitized

by Google

10

TABLES.

[1HJ.

Ha. B. ]

Ligatures.

(I10.S.)

ec4

at

f^

jMfV

iif»

dno

(^

05

CUJ

av

a

01/

^

ydg

«fe

TTfpi

7f

7Y

esf-

pa

^

■yiv

e*

pi

K

79

&

po

.3k

D

8i

^

(ra-

it

Si

^

a&ai

^

Sia

ox

aa

:l

ft

f

ax

iS

%

n

OK.

ix

D

xai

»

y

tv

^

xav

^

im

^

xi^v

e|

H

4

xifs

dj

€V

V

xo

lu,

riv

§•

lOV

t\

Ml

i6v

xal

es

uv

vv

;\

XX

•WOT

VTtO

Digitized

by Google

^] 3.|. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 11

TL 3. C. Vocal Elements.

I. Vowels, Simple and Compound.

[Sf 24-26.]

ClaM I. n. in. TV. 9
A O E U I

Ordera. Soundi. Sou nds. Sounds. Seonda. Soandft

{Short, Lao s v I

!Long, % a (o 71 V i

; Proper, 3. di oi u ifi

\ Improper, ^. q, o ff vi

I Proper, 6. av ov €v

! Improper, 6. du tav rfv

n. Consonants.

Simple Vowels.
Diphthongs in i.
Diphthongs in v.

(ff 49-61.]

A. Consonants associated in Classes and Orders.

Class L
Orden. Labials.

1. Smooth Mutes, n

Class IL
Palatals.

X

Class in.
Unguals.

X

2. Middle Mutes, fi

7

3

3. Rough Mutes, (p

4. Nasals, fji

X

7

e

V

6. Double Consonants, rp

1

I

B. Additional Semivowels.

X e

(T

CoHSOKAirrB (Second Asbangement).

C Smooth, or, k, t.

i Mutes, < Middle, /9, /, b.

SiDgle Consonants, \ ^ Rough, y,^, ^.

Double Consonants, ^, {, {;•

ni. Breathings.

C« 13.]

Rough Breathing, or Aspirate (* ).
Smooth or Soft Breathing ( * ).

Digitized

by Google

•"-d TABLES. [H 4

11. ETYMOLOGY.

^ 4* Remarks. I. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome
lo teaclier and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application
of cule, the tables of paradigms have been constructed with the following
edipses^ whifch will be at once supplied firom general rules.

1. In ihe paradigms of dkclihsioii, the Voc. sing, is omitted whenever
It has the same form with the Nom., and the following cases are oiqitted
throughout (see § 80) ;

u ) The f^oc. pLur.y because it is always the same with the Nom.

/9.) The Dtik. dualj because it is always the same with the Gen,.

/.) The jScc. and Koc. dual^ because they aj-e always the saino with
the Noin*

d.) The jIcc and Voc. neut.j in all the numbers, because they are al-
ways the same with the Nom.

2. In the paradigms of adjectives, and of words similarly inflected,
the Jfeuter is omitted in the Gen. and Dot. of all the numbers, and in the
jYom,dwU; because in these cases it never differs from the Masculine
(§ 130. «).

3. In the paradigms of conjuoatioii, the 1st Pers. dudl is omitted
throughout, as having the same form with the 1st Pers. plur., and the 3d
Pwrs. dMU if omitted whenev^ it has the same ibnn with the 24 Pen.
dual, that is, in the primary tenses of the Indicative, and in the Subjunc-
tive (I 212. 2). For the form in -^c^o», whose emptv shade has been so
multiplied by grammarians, and forced to stand, for idle show, in the rank
and file of numbers and persons, see § 212. N.

4. The compound forms of the Perfect passive bubjuhctivb and
OPTATIVE are omitted, as belonging rather to Syntax than to inflection

§234,637).

II. The regular formation of the tenses is exhibited in the table (IT 28),

which may be thus read ; " The tense is formed from the root by

atiixing ," or, " by prefixing and affixing (or, in the nude

l>rm, )." In the application of this table, the forms of the root

must be distinguished, if^it has moie thga a single form (§ 254).

III. In the table of translation (U JiS), the form of tlie verb must, of
course, be adapted to the number and person of the pronoun ; thus, / am
p'anmng^ thou art ■planning^ he is planning^ &4i. For the middle voice,
rhanae the forms of ";»7an" into the corresponding forms of " c/«/tfr-
etaie ' ; and, for the passive voice, into the corresponding forms of " be
planned"

IV. The Dialectic Forms^ for the sake of distinction, are imifbrmlj
printed in smaller type. In connection with these forms, the abbrevia
tions JEo\ and y£. denote iGolic ; Alex., Alexandrine; Att., Attic,
U(bot. and B., BoBotic ; Comm , Common ; Dor. and D , Doric ; Ep. and
B , Rpic ; Hel , Hellenistic; Ion. and I., Ionic; Iter, and It, iterative;
O., Old ; Poet and P.. Poetic.

V. A star (*) in the tables denotes that an affix or a form is wantin|f.
Parentheses are sometimes used to inck>se unusual, donhtfiil, peculiar, or
f<iipplement.'try foriiis. In ITII 2U, 30, the k and *<^nr the tease-signs, as
dropped in tlif» srrond Uiiar.s (§ 1!)0 II ), arc scpnrHted by n hyphen from
the rest of th^ affi v.

Digitized

by Google

^ S* I. Affixes of thb Three DECLSNsioiis.

Dec. I.

' Dec. ri.

Dec in.

Masc Fein.

M.F. Neuu

M. F. Neu

Sing. Nom.

ag, ^g a, tj

og 1 ov

t 1 •

Gen.

ov ac, fjg

ov

og

Dat.

?i/?

V

J

Ace.

uy^nv

OP

f, « •

Voc,

f^n

$ 1 OK

• •

Plur. Nom.

at

o» 1 a

H 1 i

Gen.

Ap

WP

tiV

Dat.

mg

oig ^

. "'^'V

Ace.

Sg

ovg a

ag a

Voc.

m

0$ a

eg A

Dual Nom.

a

10

t

Gen.

aiv

OIP

OIP

Dat.

mv

OhP

Olf

Ace.

a

M

t

Voc.

a

M

•

116. «. Analysis of the Affixes.

[Tbe figuree in ihn last cdumn denote the declensions.!

Flexible Ln«/i' a*

<?. Fern. 1, •. Nriii i > , . ,

(o^) o;. 2 and Mace, x, c^.

t.

v« «. Neut. 3, iiH

•

fQ, 1 and 2, f Neut a.

(ctfi). 3, tfi. 1 and 2, i^.
(vg) ag* Neu^ «.

ty. 3, oip*

Connecting ^wels. ||

Dec. 1

DecO. Dec mil

Sing. NAn.

»M

0

«

Gen.

« W

0

•

Dat

«W

0

#

Ace.

«W

0

•

Voc.

»M

o(0 .

Plur. Nom.

n

0

•

Gen.

a

0

«

Dat.

a

o

«

Ace.

a

0

•

D'wtl Nom.

a

0

#

Gen.

«

0

•

Digitized

by Google

14

TABLES. FIKST DECLENSION.

1117,8.

51 T. in. Nouns of the First Declension.
A. Mascuunb.

#1 iteward, i, tailor, i^ ton of Atreut, i. Mercury,

S. N. tafuag

G. TttflloV

D. xafdtf
A. xttfjti&v
V. Tor^/a

r. N. Tttfilat
G. tafuw¥

ravtiig
vavxov

vavta

*AtQfidris
^AiQtldov

*AT^BldjJ

'AiQsldtjv

*ATQsldfi

ATQsidai
AxQSidmp

vavrai

vavtmv

D. raiilaig vavxaiq *AiQsldaig

A. xafilccg vavxSg ^AtQildSg

D. N. xafild vavxa 'AxQslddl

G. xafilaiy vavxair ^Axgeidair

^^ shadow, ^y door.

if north wmi-

fioQQoip

S. N. (jxttf
G. axtag
D. axi^
A. axtay

P. N, (Txta/

G. axifuly

D. axuxig

A. (7Xtor9

D. N. uxta
G. axtatp

&VQdg
d-vgSv

&VQ(ap
^VQUig
&VQdg

E(}fi6ag^ 'Egfitig^
EgfASOV, ^Eg/iov

Egfiidv^ ^EQ/ifjp
Egfiid^ 'Egfifj

Egfiiai^ 'Egfiai o, Gohryas.
Egfjimv^ ^EgfiWP N. FatSgydg
Egfiiaig^* Egfioig G. HnSgvou
Egfiidg^ ^Egfidg rmSgvd

B. FEaCENIME.

^, tongue. 1^, honor,

yXtaaaa ilfni

yXmaarig xtftijg

yXwoarj xifjfj

yXuaaap xifiiiv

yXtaoaai xifial

yXwaataP xifimp

yXtuaaatg xifiaig

yXoiaadg xtfiag

yXeiaad xifiti

yXiaaaaip xifiolp

fj^ mtna,
fipda^ fiva
fivddg^ fipdg
fivda^ ^y^
(ipddPy fApdp

/Avdm^ (APoi

fipamp^ (APWP

fipdatg^ fivaig

lipadg^ (ipdg

fivaS^ fipd
fivdaip^ fiPttiP

51 8« DiAUBOnO FOBMS.

S. K. £tt Ion. nf • rmfitns^ fi*(ns.

ntj Dor. St * fttvrdf, 'Ar^iUdf

Old, d • i^r^rird, ftnrUrd.
Mj Ion. n* wxtnt ^v^n.
d, Ion. n • Ep. iktiB-itfii »fiwwn»
If, Dor. S • rtfAOt '4^vx'h y*-
6« «», Old, d0 * *Ar^f /2a«, B»^(4«.

Ion. i«>, 4» • *Ar#«<^i4», B«(t4».

Dor. d * 'Ar^f id«, 'E^^Mt.
Mi (Ion. «f# • r»i?f, ^u^tif.
Hi (Dor. Sg • ^tfuify yk$twffdt.

D. f (Ion. 9 • raf/tiift B^.

Ep. nf /(») • Si;^fi(»).

. /'Ion. fiv, tae (masc.^ ; r«»
< (/i/ify^'A^/rray^^Kv, -tJ.
''' (Dor. df • ftturdp, TtftMf,
V, #, Ion. u« rafiifi.

dj Poet, fi • AiifTf! Ap. Rh.
«f, Dor. « * 'Ar(«<^, Mcv«Xxir.
Old) » • fufi(p&^ A/x<l.
P.O. £», Old^M^y *Ar(U%MHv.

Ion. t*>v • *Ar^ii)i«rv, B-tfiMfk
Dor. Sv • 'Ar^ii^Sy, St»^«v.
D. Mf, Old, «uri • fmvrmrtf 3>v^r«
Ion. ^r4, 1ft • Bv^p^t ^rirfft
A. dtf Ion. i4lf (masc) ; h^itirtdt
Dor. 4lf • MM^^r, f^/A^dt.
,MoL tut * «'«^f TiftMit.

Digitized

by Google

tl 9, 10.]

SECOND DECLENSION*

15

If 9. IV. Nouns of the Second Declension

0, word.

0, people.

^, way.

0, mind.

0, temple.

S. N.

loyog

drjfiog

odog

voog^

vovg

y«oV,

vioig

G.

Xoyov

drifxov

odov

voov^

vov

VOLOV^

VBci

D.

Ao>^

8jfi(^

6Sv

yo^,

vw^

y«<^.

v$^^

A.

Xoyov

dfifAOP

odov

voov^

vovv

vaov^

VtUIVfVSU

V.

XoyB

d^fit

o8i

yoe,

vov

P.

N.

Xoyoi

dij/i^i

o8ol

vooi^

vol

vaoly

vi4

G.

Xoyiov

d^fiiov

odaiv

votav^

v6iv

ytfafi', yewv

D.

Xoyoig

dr^fioig

odolg

vSoig-t

volg

vaolg^ vs^g

A-

Xoyovg

di^fiovg

odovg

voovg^ vovg

vaovg^ vmg

I).

N.

Xoyw

dnfi(o

odd)

yoo).

vto

vSitay

G.

Xoyoiv

drifAOiV

odolv

vooiv^

> volv

vaolv^ Vf^v

to,Jig.

TO, vnng.

TO, part. TO,

hone.

TO, chamber.

S.

N.

avxoy

nxfQov

(aoqXov

oaiiov^ oarovv

aviiysfav

G.

avxov

ntsgov

fiOQiov

oaxiovy ooTOV .

aveiytm

D.

^m

(logliff

00li(i^j OOT^

avwyB(^

p^

N.

avxd

nttQa

fiOQia

ooTca, ooTcr

ivtoysm

G.
D.

avxmv
avxoig

nttgwp
meooig

fAogUov
uogloig

ooTsW, oaimv
oarioigj oatoig

avfoysmv
avwytrng

D. N. ovxoy Tnegto (loglm ootco), ootoi ixvtaytm
G. avxoip msgoiv (logloiv oarioiv^ oaxdiv avwytfj^y

H 1 O* DiALEono FoBxa.
8. K. «f, Isomdc, #f • ir»>.ti(, § 70.4. S. D y, Boeot u • mMy rv ^dftc.

O* M^ £p. 0t» * r«r« X«y«i«.'
Dor. it* rS Xiym.
(Ion. i«r • B«rrt«r, K^«/«V«r.)

£p. «;^(v) • «v^«v«:^y.

«r (contracted ihnn ««v), Ep. «« <
Iltrcw*.
D. f. Old, «i • 'IrS^MT, r«r ^i^^CM.
Ep. «^(9)* »vTi(pif Zvyifi9.

P.N. «!, Boeot. 0» »aXv,*'Ofit9i^6.
(G. 4»v, Ion. itt9 • vTifffiw, o'tf^iATv.)
D. 0tif Old, M«'4 * rflr^i Xdyot^i,

BoBOt. (7# • rv# &kXO( iffoliivSt
A. «vf , Dor. »if, •$ • Titff Xtf^^ATf, rift

r§)s vifAdif,
D. G. uf, Ep. «!?» • ^vvuTf, ifMttf.

Digitized

by Google

16

TABLES.

[II n

nil. V. Nouns op the Third Declension.
A. Mute.

1. LABIAL. 2. PALATAI^

o> vulture. ^, vein, o, raven, o, ^, goat, ri^ phalanx. ^, hair

S. N. ;'i5^
G. yvnoq

D. /i/Tl/

A. yvna

(pXitp^
q>X(p6q
(fXsfli
q)Xipa

xoQa^

XOQOLXOq

xoQnxi
xoQiuxa

aiyoq

aiyl

cclya

qjixXay^
(paXuyyoq
qtdXnyyi
(fidXayyu

X(Mx6q

IQlXl

T(,lxa

P. N. ;^i/7iffff
G. yvnwp

A. /iJ7r«i»

q>Xtfitq
q>Xsl3wp
(fXfipl
<fXipaq

xoQaxtg
xogiixmv
xo^h
xoQaxaq

aJysg
aiywp

aJyaq

q>dXnyyiq
ipaXfiyywp
qxiXny^i
(pdXayyaq

iQt'xfq

1(JtXM9

iQiXnq

D. N. yvTiB
G yvnolv

ipXipe
(fXsfiotp

xogaxt
xoQiixoiv

alys
miyoiv

qxiXnyyt
ff>ttXdyyotv

T()lxe
rgixoi*

3. LINOUAL.

«• MascnHne and Feminine.

€

», ^, child.

IJoot.

0, sovereign. ^, grace-

i5,%.

s

N.

nalg

novq

avai

Xaqiq

xXslq

G.

naidoq

nodoq

avaxjoq

xdQiioq

uXuSoq

D.

naidi

nodi

civnxTi,

xdgtTh

xXtiSi

A.

naVia

n68a

avaxia

xdqira^ xdgiv

xXfida^ xXhp

V.

not

Sva

p.

N.

naXdeq

nodsq

SvttXTiq

Xdgiteq

xXtidfq^ xXsiq

G.

naidoav

nodtav

ardxTOtv

Xnglrmv

xXfid^v

D.

naufi

noal

SMi

Xdgtat

xktiai

A.

natdtxq

nodaq

Svaxraq

xdgittxg

xXudaq^ xXfiq

D.

N.

nalde

nods

SvaxTt

xdqiTi

xXtidf

G.

naldoip

nodo7v

avdxTOiP

XagiroiP

xXiidolv

fi. Neater.

TO, body.

TO, light. TO, liver

. TO, horn*

TO, ear

S.

N.

acifioi

(fdiq^

'^nng

xiga^

ovq

G.

aoififXToq

q}(ot6q

flniiroq

xigiitoay xigaoq^

, xigiaq moq

D.

aaifiaxi.

qxail

tjnaii

xegari^ xiga'iy

xigtt wtI

P.

N.

awfiona

qtwia

tjnaTa

xf^nta^ xignct^

xfga Qiror

G.

0(Ofi(XT(av

qxoTtap

^ndtmp

xigdiitfp xigdmv

,, xtgmr a>Ta»

D.

awfiaai,

qxaai

fjnaai

xigaai

wal

D. N. atofjiaxs q>MX9 ^naxs xtgatt^ xiqnn^ xigS (»t«
G. oo)/ifXTOtv (ftaioiv fjnatoiv xtgdxotv^ xrgdoip^ xig^v wtoiP

Digitized

by Google

II 12 13.J

THIRD DECLElfSION.

17

a N.

G.
D,
A.
V.

P. N.
G.
D.
A.

D N.
G.

S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.

P. N.
G.
D.
A.

D.N.
G.

S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.

P. N.
G.
D.
A.

D.N.

G.

Of harbour, o, detiy. ^,nose, 6, beast o^ orator, riJiana

Xiftsvog

kiftivi

Xifiiva

Xifiivfg

Xifiivag

XtfiivB
Xifiivmv

daifiovog
dttlfiovt
dalfioya
dotlfiov

dalfiovtg
datfiovuiv
dalfioai
daifiovag

dalfiovB

qCvog
qlvi
Qiva
qtv

Qivtg
^Ivug

^V8

■d-fiQog
&fJQtg

■&7)QWV
&T]Qal

&iJQag

&TJQ8

QTITOQOg

Q^TOQ
^7]TO(3fg

XH(j<yg

Xn^l

X^ga

XHiJfg

daifiovotp {^it'oTv driQoXv ^i^jogoiv jff^oti'

Sjncopated.

o^ father. o^man. ri, mother, o^f^^ dog, o^f^^lamb.

natr^Q avriq

nmigog^ nargog avigog, avdgog

Ttttisgt, naigl txvigi^ ardgl
natiga
ndttg

xvaiv {oifivog)
xvvog ocgvog
Hvvl agvl
xvva agva
xvov

avsga^ uvdga
avfg

ntnigtg at'f'gfc^ nv^g*g

natigtav avigtuv^ urdgaii

nmgdai> oivdguai

naihgag avtgttg^ ui'iigag fir^rigag xvrag dgvag

ntttfgB arigf^ avdgi fiiitigt xvvs agr^

naxigoiV nvigoiv^ urdgoiv fAtirigoiv xvt^oiv ag^viv

fitiirig

HV^gog

fiTjTgl

fi7}iiga

fjTfTfg

/jrjTegsg xvyfg agvfg
firjTfg&tv xwav agrwv
jjrjrgdai xval agvnai

U I 3. C. Liquid-Mute.
o, Zton. Ot tooth, 6^ giant, ri^vnfe.

0, Xenophon.

XbMv idovg ytyug dufing

Xionog odorxog ylynvrog dnfAagiog

Xiom odovji yi'yavn ddfingu

Xeovra odovta ylynvxa ddfiagra

Xiov yiyuv

Xiovtsg odovTfg ylyartsg ddfiagtfg

XsovTOtv odoTToiv ytydvxfav dafidgxbtr 3. N. ^Onove

Xfovai odovfji yiyixai ddfingai G. 'Onovfrog

Xioviag odovtag yiyavrag ddfiagiag D. 'Onoptri

,, >•/ , »» A. 'onovfia

XiovjB voovTf yiyai'Tf On/jngrf

XtovToiy odot rniv yiydrioiv dttfiiigtoi.v

2*

JlfVO(pbiV

Sf'»'oq)MrTog
^, Opits.

Digitized

by Google

18 TABLES. [fl 14

U 1 4. D. PUBB.
•. Masculine and Feminine.

0, jackal.

0, hero

0, weevil.

0, ^, sheep, o.fish.

s.

N.

Ooig

2^tt)ff

xig

oh

Ix^vg

G.

&oi6g

^^010?

ittog

oiog

ix&vo^

D.

&(ot

^^a)V (

[VQ(?) ^l

oil

iX^vi

A.

&ma

riqtaa,

^^01 XIV

oh

ixdvv

V.

ix&i

p.

N.

^atg

i^QtaBg

xtfg

oifc,

olg IxSvtg, ix^vi

G.

&(a(av

TjQWmP

Kimv

oi(av

ix^vuiv

D.

a mat

iJQatat

9ttoi

oloi

ix&va&

A.

&wag

^Qtaag,

rj(fwg xtng

olas,

oig ix^vag, Ix^Vi

D.

N.

^wt

^QOiS

xts

oh

iX&ts

. Ix&v

G.

Swoiv

rJQtaotv

xiolv

oiotv

Ixdvoiv

0, knight.

0, ^, ox.

^.oU

' woman.

^, ship.

S.

N.

innevg

fiovg

YQavg

ravg

G.

innitag

poog

ygaog

ptag

D.

imti'i,

In nil

pot

rc«t

»,t

A.

Innid

Povv

ygam

t

vavr

V.

innsv

fiov

rgctv

P.

N.

innitg,

Inniig

pitg

YQnfg

rlJfC

G.

iTixreW

/Jowv

ygHoiv

VBWP

D.

innivai

Povai

yqaval

yaval

A.

innidg, inntlg

poag^ Povg

ygaag, yqavg

vavg

D.

N.

innsB

POB

yqdt

pijB

G.

innioip

pooir

yQttoiv

ptolp

0, cubit.

V> city.

^, trireme.

S.

N.

Ttrixvg

noXig

TQlfJQTig

G.

TTlj/fOlf

noUfag

XQllJQSOg,

TQll^QOVi

D.

njxfh

nrixti

noXf'i, noln

TQiriQH,

TQirJQtl

A.

nrixvv

noXiv

tQir,Qtay

rgLi^gri

V.

TT^^U

noXi

tg^tJQfg

P.

N.

nrix^ig.

mmg

noXtfg, noXiig

jQi^Qftg,

XQii^gBig

G.

nrixitov

(TTiyfwv)

noXfiop

IQirjQfbiV,

tgtfigwp

D.

nrjxsot

TtoXfOt

jgiiigBai

A.

Ttijxiag,

nr^xBig

noXftxg, noXttg

rgi^giag.

XQir^QBig

D

.N

m^X^B

noXff, noXri

iQii^gn,

IQIVQV

i:

nrixtoiP

noXioiv

jQttfgioiv, rgtrigolp

Digitized

byGobgk

If 14, 15.]

THIRD DECLENSION.

19

^, echo, ^, shame. o, Socrates.
S. N. rjxw aldwg ^axQattig

G. i2;|foo^, ^ov; aldoog, aidov; ^taxQaTSog^ SaixgaTOvq

D. ^o'/, ^/o7 al^dt, aidol ^taxgnTfi^ ^uxQUTti

A. ^oa, i^jifO) aidoa^ aidii .Staxffdieaj ^(ux^ofrf}, ^cax^arij^

V. ^oZ aldof 3i)x^aTe;

o, Pircseus.

S N. Uhiqaiivg

G. Jliiqauioq^ IliiQumg

D. ntigaitC^ JIsiQnin

A. IlfiQuiia^ I28i(^aia

V. JUiqauv

0, Hercules.

^HQaxXirjg, 'HgaxXijg

'HgaxWiog^ 'llgaxXiovg

'llQaxXds'Ci 'HgaxXisi, 'HgaxXn

^HgaxXiiay 'HgaxXidf 'ifgaxXtj

'fIgdxXftg, ^HgdxXiig CHgaxXBg)

fi. Neuter.

TO, ITOZ/

TO, tovm.

TO, honor.

S N.

ttixog

oiatv

yigag

G.

xtlxtog, ^slxovg

atnfog, aaxtfog

ydgaog, yigatg

D.

ttlxn, %dxH

aatn^ aotsi

yigal^ ytgtf

P N.

uixsa, filxfj

ooTca, Saiii

yigaa, yiga

G.

THxtmv, xsixojv

iaxiviv

yfgdny, y$gav

D.

ttlxtot

aojta^

yigaai,

D.N.

iilxfBf tUxn

Satts

yigasj yegS

G.

tHXioiv^ Tsixoiy

aatsoir

rsgdoiv, ysg^p

U IS* DlAI^BCnO FOBMB.

8. 6. MTHi Ion* *t * «^*0r, ri^uf.

w$t. Ion. %vs • ^S^itff , ^eififitvs.
iatf, £p. if«f • ^9tXn9i.

Ion. and Dor. Ut • /3«riX(«f .
tmti Ion. and Dor. t9t * *i>-iot.
iisf, Ion. and Dor. set • Kv«'^/0f .

Dor. tT§t • &ifur0f.
§St, Dor. and iEol. Sf, ut • ^x*^'*
^. is, Ep. ifi** /3«^/Xffr. [&•*§•

Ion. li** fia^tXit.
u, Ion. F • riXT, ^vtifu.
4^, Ion. 7- eSrT, ^«'«xr.
A. 9, Poet • • tv^im, txB-va.
im. Ion. ^^^ * 'Itft/v, Aiir0?y.
Dor. ivv • II^Arf , A«Tivy.
u^ Ep. rM • /3«#iX?4U
Ion. ia • $mriXii.
Dor. If • fi»riXti.
Y. If, iEol. t * Sj^x^ari.

P. K. !?# , Old Att. nt • fiet^tXns.
£p. ff«f • /3«#vXffir.
Ion. itf ^rtXiif,
nf, Ion. and Dor. nf • «'«Xiif .
•«, Poet, d • yi^«, »^$il.
Ion. i« • yi^$e^ ri^M.
G. «fy, Ion. Sivy • ;^fifiM9f ivi^Utf.
Ut9t £p. if«^y • fia^iXnfv.
Uf9, Ion. and Dor. wt • vrcXimf.
D. ri(»). Old, iri(y) • x*'(*^*-
Poet. m(f) • Xvetm.
irri(y)* «'«Wri9.
iri(»), Ep. i*'^i(i') • S^ta^^n,
Ion. <r<(i') • 9'iXtrt.
A. Uf, Ep. ifd(f • ^rtXnAf.
Ion. ti(f • ^«0'<x«4U.
Comm. uf ' fia^tXuf.
tit. Ion. and Dor. t»t • ^rixmt..
D. G. tf/y, Ep. Mn* • «'«^«rr», Sij^iiM Ty.

Digitized

by Google

20

TABLES.

Ill 16

II 1 6. VI. Irregular and Dialectic Declension.

i, Jvfiter, I, (Ediptts, «, O/m

S. N. Zii/j, Zi> (Dor.) Otiiv-fius Txodt

6. A/«f, Zmisy Z£*is 'Ot^im'^9ei Otit^w OtiirS^Ms, -d^ -tm, TXav

D. Ai<, Zfivi, Zufi 0/%V«^i, [(poet.), [D. -9, -^ A. -»!>!, FX/jtr

A. A/«, Znvet, Zava OtH^oia^ Ohl^ttn [-«i», V. -«, -« FXw*

V. Ztv OiXV«» [(Ep and Lyr.) YXtIi

Attic. ^ MM Homeric
8* N. vitf^ v/«f

6. olw, vtUt vltS, v7oty iui§t

D. utS^ vlit v7ty viiif vu7

A. vtiv v/«9, vlet, vied

V. i/ii

Doric. «f, sh^. Ionic
vmif »«»f, «•?

fain (yfty) »ii«) VMS, ynvt

G. Mwv, t/a<tfv v/a>v, viitit fdHf tnHf^ vtiiv

D. viaT§, viiirt utaio't, viAffi^ • utuffi^ MUfft vnvrs, tnirtf'/, yScrtf"!,

A. vUuf, vlits vUuff VMSy vtiat nutf 9n»$* vuts \yav^

Attic «■«, spear,
8. N. ^9^1/

G. Jflfar»f, ^«^flf (poet.)

D. ^o^art^ }o^4y ii^u (poet.)

P. N. ^o^etretj
G. ^e^Amt
D. Vo^a^t

Vo^n (poet)

Homeric

Homeric ri, nve,

W^lltVf

0, knight.
S. N. iir«rii/f
G. isrv-tict
D. <«•«•«?

A. iT^^»

Homeric Pabadigxs.

fTdXif

«'0Xi0f, «'r0X/0f, iraXitff (w^XiVfTheog.), vroXn^

(4r«Xr Hdt.), 9'roXu, viXfi, waX^r

«'0Xiir, vrtfXiv (wtfXfftf Hes.

p. N. lir^mt^ iV**!?; «'«Xiif (wtfXfj Hdt), «'«Xifi«

G. iWit^ttt VtfX/ivf

D. I^^rtvrt 9-0X/ir#i (<rtfX/iri Find., frdXiV'/ Hdt.)

A. i^9nat «'0Xia((r^Xrf Hdt.), frtfXfif, «'«Xif«r

J, Ulysses, 1, Pairoclus,

G. O^z;0-0-q0f, 'O^vtf'tf'Stff, *O^i;0-«0f, 'O^i/tf-c^f n«r^«xX0V) -0i«, n«r^««Xn«f

D. *O^V0'm\ *05t/<rir n«T^fl*Xy

A. 'O^f/tf-^Sc, 'O^f;0'ri«, *05e;^«f«, 'O^c/rq Xlar^axX**, n«r^0»XS«

V. *0Wrii7, '02i/#iv n«r(«xXi, Ilar^tfxXt

Digitized

by Google

M 17. J

ADJECTIVES.

t^l

fl I 7. VII. Adjectives of Two Terminations.
A. Ov THB Sbcond Declension,
o, ^ (laijusi) TO Of rj (unfading) to

ayiiQUOv^ uyiiQw
nyf]{)ua)f i'ty^if^tij
vty/iQttOv, viyt\{^wvy ayi]qm

s

N.

wJixo^

G.

adlxov

D.

ttdUt^

A.

cldixop

V.

adixs

p.

N.

udtxoi

G.

adixfap

D.

adixnig

A.

ttiHxovg

D.

,N.

udixu

G.

adixoir

ayrii/aa, ajnifm

S N.
G.
D.
A.
V.

P. N.
G.
D.
A.

D.N.
G.

adixa ayt]i/OLoif otyrigta
uyrjgdbiVf ayt]{i(tt¥
ayri(}(ioig, i>y»\{fbj%
ayri(jdov<:, ayrj(jotg

nyfifjavHf ayr/qat
uy»iQuoiVy ayriQtav

6. Of the Thikd Declension.

o. ri (male) to o, ^ (pleasing) to o, ^ (two-footed) to

t'Qi^flP ag^sv kvxuQtg ivxi'Qt dinovg dinow

aQQtvog H'^nqiiog dlnodog

itQ^fvi ivx^ifiti d I nodi

tig^tra fixi^ita^ tv/ngiP dlnodit, Slnovr

itQufp iv^ngt dinou

u(gfy$g Sg^fva evxugii^g ivxagita dlnodfg
uQ^ivbiv tvxttgitoiv dinodojv

dlnoai

dinoda

uggfoi
uQ^fyug

aggtvB
aggivotv^

ivxngiat
tvxdgijag

tv/tigns
tvj^ugUoiv

dlnodag

dlnods
SmodoiP

0, ^ (eindent) to

S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.

P.N.
G.
D.
A.

D.N.
G.

o, ^ (greater) to

fitV^o%og
fifi'^ovi

fifiCova^ fitlito
fiflior

oaq)ifc^au(pitg atxqiia^aaifrj juf/forfc, ^f/fov? fitiZova^ (abIC^

oiitpiui fitl^oai

outpiagt aaq>ug fisiCovag, fidiovg

antpftg oag>cg

anq)iog^ aaq>ovg
an(fn\ aaq>t7
onqx'n^ aaq>ri
otxifig

oaq>st^ aaq>fi
oa(pioiy, at'q>o7p

/iBli0P8

fiuiopoip

Digitized

by Google

22

TABLES.

[1Iie»

fl 18. vi:i. Adjectives op Three Terminations.
A. Of the Second and First Declensions.
o (friendly) ^

S. N. q>Uiiog

G. (piUov

A. ipiXtov

V. <piXl9

p. N. <pato*

G. (ptXlatv

D. gnXloig

A. ifiXiovs

D. N. 9)iA/ai

G. qtiXioiv

S. N.
G.
D.
A.

P. N.
G.
D.
A.

D.N.
G.

S. N.
G
D
A

P. N
G.
D.
A.

D. N.
G.

q>iXlug

(piXl^

q>iXtar

gdXiai
q)iXloiV
gullatg
ifiXlixg

q^iXiii
(fiXiaiv

o {golden)
Xifvasog^ XQvaovg
XQvaiov^ Xgvaov
XQvaif^^ XQV^f^
Xifvoiovj jf^vaow

XQVOtOl^ XQi'itoi
XQVodoit'f ^f^vacuy
XQvaioiq, XQ^'^oig
XQtJiovgy X9^*^ovg

XQVosb)^ XQVata
XfJvoioiVf ;|f^i;ao7y

6 (double)
dinXoogt dtnXovg
diTtXoov, dinXov
dinXoo}, dinXui
dtnXoov^ dtnXovv

dtnXooi^ dtnXol
dmXuwVf diTiXciv
dinXooig^ dinXolg
dinXoovg^ dtnXovg

dmXootf dmXta
dinXoitiv, dinXolr

10

tplXiov

(jplXia

o (toise)

aoq)Gg
ao<pov
aoiffo
aoapov
oo<pi

ao(f(a
aoifdiy

Contracted.

c

n

XQVoia^ XQV^rV
XQvaiag, Xlfvorjg
XQvaia, XQ^^V
X(jvaidy, ^^va^v

X^vafai^ XQVoai
XQvatwv^ X(fvawv
X(iVoimg, jf^vaal^
XQvoiikg, jt^vtfce?

XQVom, jif^vaa

dinXofj^ dinXi]

dinXoTig, diuXrjg

dmXorjy dmXjj

dinXoi)^^ dinXfjv

dinXoai^ dinXni
dinXoiov, dinXcov
dinXoaigt dinXal^
dtnXoag^ dinXag

dtnXoSf dinXa
di^Xouiry dinXnlv

aog)fi
ao<prjg
ao(ffi
aoq>r^v

t

aoifol ao(pa

aoq)uv aoq>eap

aoq>oig (jo<paig

aog>ovg ao<pag

TO

aofpof

ao<pS

aoq>a
aoq>alv

JO

XQVUBOV, XQVOOVP

Xgvaiu, XQvaa

HmXioVy dmXow

dinXoa^ dmXi

Digitized

by Google

If !»,;

20.1

ADJECTIVES.

23

IT 19. I

L Of the Third and

First Declensions.

i {Mack)

«
V

TO

S(all) i TO

S. N.

fAiXag

fiiXmva

HiX&p

itag nSaa nap

G.

fiiXavof

fitXaivrjg

navTog ndar^g

D.

fiilavi

fifXalvji

navxl Ttaarj

A.

fiiXafa

fiiXaiv&v

ndrta ndoav

P. N.

(liXavtg

fitXatvnt,

(tiXava

Ttdvttg ndaai ndrta

G.

fieXdvoiV

fitXatvay

ndvTiop naamv

D.

fiiXaai

fitXahatg

naai ndaaig

A.

(liXavag

(isXalvag

ndvtag ndaag

D.N.

fiiXnvs

fisXalva

ndvts ndaa

G.

fiiXdroiv

fisXahtxiv

ndvToir ndaaiv

0 (agreeable) ^

JO

0 (sweet) fi TO

S. N.

Xayttig

XaQltaaa

XaqUw

r^dvi rfina r^dv

G.

XaglevTog

Xa(fu'aiJtjg

^diog ^dtlag

D.

Xo^Uvu

XaQtioarj

Tldit, '^dt% ^delijt

A.

XaQlsvta

XuqUaaav

fidvv fidHav

V.

XaqUv

T^dv

P. N.

XotgisPTtg

XaglBaaai

Xaqiivxa rfiitg, ^dtig ^dnai ^ii§

G.

XaQiivxmv

X^Qtidamv

fjdi(0¥ tjdtioip

D.

Xnqltai

Xot^uoaaig

'^diai fjdBiaig

A.

XaQUrrag

Xnqiino&g

'^diag^ ^dng ^Sdag

D.N.

Xagliyrs

XotQitaaa

^dis ^dsla

G.

XagiiptoiP

X^qUaaaiV

idtoip r^^tlaiP

nao

K C. Op the Thru Declensions.

0 (great)

^ %o

0 (much) ^ to

S. N.

fiiyas

fifydXri fiiya

noXvg noXXfj noXv

G.

fifyuXov

fifydXrig

noXXov noXXrjg

D

fitydXw

fiiydXfi

noXXta noXXfj

A

fiiyar

fitydXriP

noXvp noXXi^v

V.

fifydXs

(many)

r. N.

fif/iiXoi

fiiydXat fitydXa

noXXoi noXXat noXXd

G.

fitydXotv

fitydXtov

noXXciv noXX^p

D.

fitydXoig

fiBydXmg

noXXoig noXXaig

A.

fitydXovg

fitydXiig

noXXovg nolXdg

D.N.

fifydXti

fifydXti

G.

fitydXoiP

fifydXu^y

Digitized

by Google

84

TABLES. HUXEKALS.

[1120,21

lof ««A^.

S. o (m/4f ) j TO P. ol cS ra

N. nguof Mfafia n^ior n^aoi^ xpctflp it^ot^m ji^om

A. 71 ^ a o r Ti^af lar Hfgaovq, nf^uq n^iiaq

M. (om) p. N.
S. N. fiq fila Iv
G. irog fituq
D. kri fiia
A. tra fiiiii'

Ep. Dor. loo. Ep.

HSI. iz. Numerals.

lL(«o<»e)F. K. lL,a0iit.

ovdfi^ ovdfftia ovdiw P. oidirtg
ov^trog ovdffttag ovddrmv

ovdira ovdr^fiiap ovdivuq

Late. loo. • Late. loo.

M. F. N., tew.
D. N. A. ^i;o, dvm

G. D. dvo7r, ^i/fif (Att) P. D. dvai (rare)

Ep. Ep. Ion.

G. S»^

M.F.N.,&)<iL
Ufopta

M.F.(rtr«!)N.
P. N. rpfl^ T^/a

G. JQtiJ$¥
D. T^tl//

A. T^cT^
Poet.

M. F. (/o«r) N.

Ttoao^e^, TCTTa^s^ tiaaagu, riiioQa

Ttoadgwv, rf rra^iuy

xiaaaQO^t TdnuQat

ttatfuQag, tiiHM{jag

Ion. rim^iff Dor. rSrc^ir and r(mff;»
JEol. and Ep. iriffv^tt, &c ; Dat, Ep. and
in late prose, rir^«r«.

Digitized

by Google

^22-1

PARTICIPLES.

25

IT 33. X. Particiflbs.

1. Present Active. '

o (advising)

S. N. ffovXivuip

G. fiovlsvovTog

D. l^ovXivovn

A. /iovkivona

l\ N. fiovUvorftf

G. povXtv6v%oiV

D. ftovXtvovat

A. /iovXBVQnag

D. N. povXtvovTt

G. fiovXtVOVTOlP

fiovXtvovaa
/iovX$vovaiig
fiovXsvomjj
fiovXtvovaap

povXevovaai
fiovXevovaoir
flovXtvovaaig
fiovXsvovijag

fiovXevovaa
fiovXivovaaiv

TO

fiovXtvw

flovXt^ovta

2. Present Active Contracted.

ttfidovaa,

Hfuxovaijg^

Tifiaovaj)^

tififoarig
Tificiatj

TO

Ufiaovaavy ttfiotaar

xifAOovta, Ti/ift»rra

o (Aonorin^)
S. N. -dfnaiovt Xi(imv
G. rificiortog, Tifmvxoq
D. tifidorti, ttfi^vti
A. Tifidovtaf Tifiwrta

P. N. ttfinorttQf xtfiAvxtq
G. tinaovxtov^ jifiiavfoip
D. xtfjuiovai, xi,(imai
A tifidorxag, xifimvxag

D.N. xifidovxi, xifioivxB
G. xtfiaorfoiVfXifuirtoiv

3. Liquid Future Active. 4. Aoritt ii. Active

o (o^ofi^ to «Aoto) { TO o (having left) ^
S. N. ipavnv qxxvovaS fpavovr Xindv

xifiaovavtiy
xifiaovamv^
xifiaovaaigy xifinaatg
xifiaovaagy xifjuaaag

xifiaovaa^ xifuoaa
xi/iuovaaiv, xifnaaaty

G. q>ayovvxog g>avovafig
D. 9(xyot/vT» (pavwaij
A. 9»yovvra ^ayovaoty

TO

Xtnovaa Xinov
Xtnovxog X^novaT|g
Xinortt Xmovaji
Xmovxa Unovaar

P N. (parovvxsg <pavovaat> g)avovvxa Xmorttg Xmovaat liirovta

G. g>avovpttav fpavova^v XinovxBiP Xinova£v

D. (pnrovui fpavovont^ Xmovai Xinovaaig

A. <pitvovyx(tg ipavovoug Xmovxag Xmavaag

D. N. fpnrovrfB (pavovoa Unorrt Xinovaa

G. ^avovrxoiv {pavwaaip Xmovxotp UnovaiMtP

Digitized

by Google

26

TABLluS.

«

L1122.

5. Aorist I.

Active.

6. Ac nst Passive.

o (having raised) ^

« r
TO 0

(Jkacing appeared) {

TO

S. N. a^ag
G. uQartog
D. Sqccth

oQaaa
aQ&Qfig

<paviiisa
q>onfdarig
(pctpsiap

tfoph

A. aqarta

agaaSp

(pavByja

fpeePiiaoP

P. N. &qmntg
G. iftartnv

A. aftartag

Sgaaai

agaaatg
aQauag

afOJ^a

q>o9irt9g
q>avirtvtp
ifavuai
ifayspzag

^puamt
q>avuamp
q>apilaaig
q>aP6iaag

(papipta

D. N. ^^aira

aQuam

q>€rpivTB

^ptha

G. agdrtoir

aqaaaof

q>avimoiP

q>aptUfm'P

7. Perfect Active.

o (knowing) {
S. N. tideig sldvla

G. SA^OTO^ sidvlag
D. tidoti tidviq

A. uHoxa Bldvtap

TO 0 (standing) { to

Cf^oc kartig katmaa iariog,iotof

kotoitog kvtBtafig

iarmn kotaiaif

IotcJto iajoia&p

P. N. sldoteg sldvtai tldora loTfluTt^ katoiaai iattitu

G. ai^oToiy tldviw ioroiTCDV ioindwy

D. e»<)oa» (Idviaig kattiat hattiaaig

A* ffl^oTa; BidviSg katoitag iuifaodg

D. N. eldoTC Bidvia

G €*^0T0ir BidvlaiP

katmB katniaa

9. From Verbs in -^.

o (Aootng gtven) {

S. N. ^OVff ^OVOrt

G. doPTog dovatig

D. JoiTi ^ovoiy

A. dorm dovaup

P. N. doPTBg dovaat

G. doPTVtP dovamp

D. dovoi dovaaig

A. SoPTog dovaag

D.N. Wra
G* donoiP

TO o (having entered) ^
dop dvg dvaa

dvpxog dvofig

dvpii dvatj

dvpta dvaap

dovaa
dovauip

dovra dvpxBg
dvpimp
dvat
dvptag

dvpJB
dvvjoiP

dvaat
dvamp
dvaatg
dvQ&g

dvaa

dtp

dvpra

Digitized

by Google

f23.J

PRONOUNS.

27

fl 23. XI. Substantive Pronouns.

fTo those fonns which are used as enclitic, the sign t is aflized. The initials affixed M
dialectic forms denote, &. JEolic, B. Bceotic, D. Doric, £. Epic, L Ionic, O. Old,
P. Poetic]

A. Personal.

lit p. /.

2d P. eftoK.

8d P. Am, Aer.

S. N. i'/f^

G. iuoxi^ fiovf
D. ifiol, fiolf
A. dfii fiif

aout
oii

olt

P. N. ^julg
G. rjfdav
D. ylp
A. nt^ag

'vfittg

'vfiWP

'vfiSg

098%

D. N. ,.0?
G. ^^r

Homerio Forms.

a9)(»tvf

6, ^^ Ifiiioj l^tv,
D. l^i. ^^

rt, rum

rwt, »'•?'•» •'«S't>

P. K. V'^V* «^^^<f

Ufllif, Sftfttt

G. V*^»* Aa**''*'
D. liyttT^ «/*rs ^^1^

r^tejf, -Jit, rftSf.

a N. «?;(•;:;»?)

G. mIiV

D. »^ry

A. f*rr, MV

Additional Forma.

p(pm1A

r^*rit, #^t or #^»*

8. N. Iii,, Xi; B.

r!$D., r«v'6.

G. S^i0#» i/«iv;, l^vr D. rf vf, rSn , rtvf , riM/f , Fi5i» iE., Ut/f D,, tiM B»

r%w D.
D. l/tJy D. Wv D.

A. ri, r«t D.

F«rt -«., 7f or r» D.
F«t -^1 w't t). P. •

G. *Mfi£v D., ^^^U#f JEL v^^Sm* .^

A. *i^i IX v/ftS, t^^/fti D.

D. M. Mffi B.

Kent rf Ut L

Digitized

by Google

26

TABLES.

11125^.

5. Aorist I. Active.

o {having raised) ^
S. N. a(^ag

G. S^avtog

D. Sgarti

A. aQotvta

P. N. aQarttg Sgaaai Sfona

6. a^eciTQiy agaatiy

D. a^odi UQaaaig

A* Sqavxag agaoag

TO

agaaa agw
aQaofjg

agaaap

6. Ac nst Passive.

» (having appeared) ^ to
q^avdg ipavsiaa (pavir

g>avirtog (ponftlatig
g>avivu (pcofsiap
(pavivta (petpeiaop

q>avirt^
q>avivxtiv
(pavsiai
<pavirtag

^avuam q>apirta
q>otrBtawp
(pavelaaig
q)avslaag

D. N. Sgayts aQuam q>ayirtB ipmvtksa

G. agdytoip agaaatP qtopsmotp (poptUftup

7. Perfect Active.

o (ibtOK^n^) {
S. N« cMoi; eld via

G. SA^oTO^ etdvMS;
D. eldoTi tldvltf

A. eMoTO tldvtap

P. N. «M0T«ff

G. fidoToiy
D. tidoat
A« cMoia;

D. N. tidoTB
G udoxoip

8. Perfect Active Contraeted.

TO 0 (5/anc^tn^) { to

Cf^oc lorw; lavcSoa hntag^latif
loxtitog loieKJi}9
ioTWTi iaTcooi;

eMt/ta* eldora lorfluTtc loTfuoffi loTftfTcs

siihiiip iatvTWP haimavp

ddvinig iatmat iattoooug

BidviSg kateiiag ianooag

sldvloi kawxi iatiuaa

ddvtaip iajtitoip katciaaip

9. From Verbs in -^.

o {having given) ^ to o {having entered) ^

S. N. dovg dovan dov dvg dvaa

G. doPTog dovarig dvvxog Svarig

D. SoPtt dovorj dvpii dv(jfj

A. dorm dovoap dvrta dvaap

P. N. diptig

G. doPTWP

D. dovoi

A. doPTog

D. N. dovTs

G. doptoip

dovaui dopta dvpxeg
dovawp dvPTiOP

dovanig Svat

doyaug dvptag

dovan
dovaaip

dvPTB

dvPTOlP

dvaa^
dvamp
dvaatg
dvoag

dvaa

to

dtip

dvpta

Digitized

by Google

f23.J

PRONOUNS.

27

II 23. XI. Substantive Pronouns.

[To those fonns which are used as enclitic, the sign t is aflized. The initials affixed M
dialectic forms denote, M. JEolic, B. BcboUc, D. Doric, £. Epic, L Ionic, O. Old,
P. Poetic]

A. Personal.

lit P. /.

N. fym

G. iuov, fiovf

D. 4fioi, fioli

A. dfit, (lif

N. ^fuls
G. rjfim
D. ^filp
A. ^fiag

N. r^^

G. p^p

ftdF. Aou.

aovf
ooif
aif

'vfifig
'vftwp

'vfiag

0(p(0

8d P. hi$, her.

evf
olf
It

atpttg
a(p&p
a^iji{p)i
<sipag

G. IftU, lfAit»j ifiuZy
D. i^M, fl»f\

A. W^lt

P. K. ^C*;, &fAfAlt

G. ii^u#y, n/At4t9
D. tt/tftTy, S/tTN ^/»i»,

D. N. »;?r(»i?;»?)

G. tiitf

D. f^r?

A. tUt, w

Homeric Forms.

ri;, ri/Mf

tf'itff, rir«) rivfy

ffipSitf 0'^^y

Additional Forma.

r^Mit, r^t or #^»*

8.N. «», WB. rUD., «»'B.

G. i^S«#y S/«iv#) tAMi<V D. rf vf, rStff, Tivf , rtM/f, Fi5iv iE., Usv D,, tiM B»

ritfv D.
D. if^if D. «•;» D.

A. ri, rvf D.

P. K. fif^Ut h, 'Mfitit D. vfititf I., vA«(f D.

G. *dfuiv D., ^^S«#» ^. v/A/utiett J&,

A. *i^S IX !tfi,i, Sf*fM D.
D. M. fSt B.

Fit -fi^ »«t I>. P. •
Kent «flat L

Digitized

by Google

28

Tables.

[1133

B. Reflexive.

2d P. M. (of ihytelf) F.

OBavxov, aaviov (jfavji^g, aavj^g

IstT.'il, (of myself) F.

S. G. ifiaviov (fAitvxrjs

D. ifjiuVTt^ ^fiavTJj oBavT^, aavra

A. f/iavjov ifjtavti'iv ataviov, oavtov

P. G. r^ftwp aviaiv Tffiav aii^p Vfitar avitov

D. ri^lv avTclig rifiiv avtoitg Vfilv aviotg

A. fifiug avtovg rinag aitag vftdg aitovg

VfAtav aviwv
Vftip aifTaig
Vfiug avTug

3d P. M., of hktuelf.

S. G. kuvTov, avTov

D. kavtt}, avi^

A. korvTOV, aiftov

P. G. havTmVy atrtwv
D. kavTolg, avTciig
A. kavtovg^ ctixovg

F., of henelf,
kuvt^gt aVTfjg

kavrmr, avttjv
kavTtxtg, avtaig
kuvtag^ airtag

New Ionic

8. 6. IfumvreS
8. 6. Uvr«v

D. UtOTf

A. Imvriv

IfAtm

htvrw

Itfuri

9tttVT(f

P. lanfrSf

htUTSVt

N., of ittdf

kavrS, avtH

0-iJvvrS

\mvratt

\ivrm

8d P. S. G. •bruurut •£{, D. •ft -^ , A. •«*, •£%, •§ •

P. G. mltravTtn, D. -Mf, -•mf, A. -«#;, 'df, -4, Dor.

M. (of one a$iaihier) F.

P. G. aXXriliaP ilXtiXap

D. ttUijloic oiUifilai;

A. iXXrjXovg aXXrjXag

C Bbcifbogal.

JH» M. N« F*

D. A. aXX^Xm aXX^Xa

SlXtiXa

G. iXXi^XotP alXriXait

P. G. ^x«x«ry Dor. JikXmXm Dot. D. G. J^XX^Xmw Ep.

D. ^XX«X«ir<, -Mf JiXXmXmtfi, -mii

A. ^xXtfXtfvf ^x«x«if IxxiTXil Dor.

• D. Indkfdirb*

IC F. a»t flMCA a one*

IL

N. 0, J, TO 3wr«
G. T0i3, T^5 ^fti'oc

D. T^, T^ 3c7vi

A. Toy, T13V, TO Huva

p. of «««

tw dtii

•

TOVC ^ftll

Digitized

by Google

v**.l

PRONOUNS.

*Z9

11 84.

•

XII. Adjective Pronouns,

Artide.

IteratiTSu

S. N. 0 ^
G. tow

A. toy

P.

c

V

N. M.(«ery,««««,frf/)P. N. ^

TO avTo'c avi^ avto

avtov avtrjg

avt^ avtfi^

ainop avtifp

F.N. ol

G. TCUK

D. tolg

A. TOVC

%&p
taXg

toi avtol
avt^p
avtolg
avtovg

avtal aitS

avxmp

avtalg

avtag

D.N.Tii
G. To*r

taip

avtti
avtoXp

» 4

avta
avxaip

S. N. 'J D.

D. rf D.
A. . m D.

mMfL

•^^D.,4iil.
•iw L murif D., .{«# L
«^r^ D., 49 L
•^A» D., .in* I.

P. N. r#; E. D
6.

D. r»49t 0.
A. r^.r^

•. rm E. D.

TM#yO.,r«»D. avriA^y I.

r«rri 0., T^^h ml*rt>7fft 0.,
D. [rjtr L mvruvs I.

BflUthre.

Demonstrative.

PoaseasiTe.

S.N. 5c
G. ov

A. oy

P. N.

m m

e

ods rids tods 1 P. S. ifiog
TovdB tiiadi P.^fOtB^og

P.N. of
G. iJr

A. ovc

D.N.iS
G.oIp

of •«

«c

• •

alp

oidt aXdi 1

toladt taladt
tovadt taads

taidt rdde
Tolvdi taivdt

rrfJ«2P.S.flro'c

P. iffAStBQOg

D. aa>flotTff^oc Ep.

SP.S.S' Poet.
P. a<ptteQog

Dialectic and Paragogii

B Fonna.

a N. jfo. -jd. s^ i^f 5

D. #D. &c
A. Uf D.

P. D. fri, ft E. r.i^'Ji 0., r«rrJ(
r«?0-)i0-r< E.

r^* I P. P. 'tf^'f . '^^f 0.,
*£fiirt^0f D., «^<^Mf,

2 P. S. «tff D. E.

ir<, P. V^f 0., v/uMf .£
8 P. a \i* E. D.

P. Wifit 0.

Digitized

by Google

30

TABLES.

-PRONOUNS.

[fl24

S.N.
G.
D.
A.

P.N.
G.
D.
A.

D.N.
G.

M. (M) P. N.

DenuMistnithre;
IL (ao muck) F.

N.

oi/Tog autti foi/TO roaovTo; loaavn} voaoi/ro, roaot/rof

jovxov tavtfi^

toaovTQV joaavtrig
Toaovioi Toaat;?!;
toaovTov toaavttiv

ovtoi avttu tavta foaovroi toaavitu voaavta

toaovtfov Toaovtmw
toaovioig toaavxaig
Toaovtovg joaavtdg

toaovT&i toaonna
jOQovtoiy Joaavtm$p

S. N.

G.

D.

A.
P. N.

G.

TOVtfOP TOVTtfy

tovtoig lavrmg
tovTovg ravtag

tovtm tavta
tovtoir tavtaiv

Paragogic Dedension.

0UT»n «v«Sft rwn «i«r«v<rM-i, i«i<M«-1, ^g^, t«vt«>^, Tttn-Jit*

T«VT^< ravvfi rvfvovr^u Adv. •i;r«f^, ln^*^, vvW} )iiifi.

•vr^ft MiirM]! riM>«i Titurttfj retauraiti, rtsavrt, r»vrm^»

Mixed Paragogic Forms.

B. Imdkvimite.

Simple Indefinite. IntenrogatiTe. BelatiYe Indefinite.

M.F.(<my,«ome)N. M.F.(urAoON. M. (ioAmmt) F. N.

S. N. t\g ti itg tl oatig wxtc o t»

oviti'o;, oTov natipog

ortiva ^rtiwa

attivfg Stiya^Stta

G. nyoVfToif iitog,tov
D. T«y/, T^ t/fi, tf
A. Tiva t/va

P. N. TiWc Tiya, t/»'«c
G. Ttycoy [arra r/yoir
D. Tia/ tlai

A. Ttyffff t/yoff

D.N. tivi tlv8

G. T«yo7y T/yo«y

tlva oXtivtg

oavtivfav^ otu> tartipwp

olffTtat, otoiai alatiai

ovativag iativag

totivt ativB

ohtivoiv atvtivoip

Homefic Declension of rht rSg, and trtg .at trrtt.
S. N. r)t ri rit ri Urtt ln,tm

G. ri; rtv t(#, « J

D. rif,T^

A. rif» riMK

t* N. riyif Jlrr« r/vif

G. rU

D.

A. riviCf

D N rM

trtu, tm$, 9m»
irUi^t

i^em

Digitized

by Google

1I25.J

MVHBBALS.

4£.7?0Eli

«|.>

liSff. B. Table

OF NuMERSfiS?^

I. Adjectives.

I. Cardinal.

2. Ordinal.

Intetrog.

witt 1 Aow mo)^ f

wUrni iMA m order f o^

Indef.

one qf how many f

ReLInd.

hro0r0t9 whichsoever in order.

Dimin.

iKiyi»,fem.

U*yerit9 <»«« of few.

Augment.

wXliM, maty.

wkXfTHf one of man^t «,

Demoiuu

▼•w W^ ^W WWwi^W#

one faUowng many.

Bekk

lr«i, Of mai^.

1 «l

flj, filci, fv, <m«.

Ji^coTOf ,-^,-or, /rst.

2/y

dvo* di/<»> two.

devteQog,'&,'OP, second.

3/

t^iig, xQlOf three.

rgitogrVrOv, third.

4 «'

tiaa&gsg, xiaaaga, four.

tixagtog, fourth.

St*

nivtt, Jive,

nifiittog, ffth.

6^*

U, SI*.

txxoq, sixth.

7P

hna, seven.

iddofiog, seventh,
oydoogt eighth.

8,'

oxTw, eighi.

9^

iwia, nine.

tvatogt h>vaiog, ninth.

10.'

dixa, ten.

dsxatog, tenth.

11 vol

hdexa, eleven.

hdixarog, eleventh.

12 ./f

dtadsua, twelve.

dwdixarog, twelfth.

13 ,/

TQiaxaidixa, dsxatgeig

TQiaxaidixatog

14 li'

ttooaQBoxaldBxa

tBaaaQaxatdbxttJog

15 (('

ntrtsxaldexa

nsrxBxaidixatog

16 .ff*

ixxal^txa

ixxaidixaxog

17 OC

hnaxaldsxa

httaxmdixatog

18 «q'

oxwxaldexa

oxtaixaiddKajog

19 ,d'

iPTiaxaldexa

iwsaxaidixaiog

20 «»

itxoai{v)

Bixoatog

21 w

ttxogiv tU, tig xal $fxoQ$

Bixoaxog ngutog

30 i'

tffidxerta

XQiaxoaxog

40 ^

TsaottQaxovta

TeaatxQttxooxog

60 »<

nsptiixopta

nsrxfixoaxog

60 r

i^xopta

ihixoarog

70 0'

IQdofA^xovxn

iddofiiixoaxog

80 n>

oydoi^xorta

oydotjxoexog

90 ?

ivinixona

ivevfixoaxog

100 «'

ixatov

kxaxoaxog

200 a'

dif2xoaiOi,«ai,-o

didxoaiotfxog

300 I'

TfftSxoatoi

rgidxoaioaxog

Digitized

by Google

TABLES. •

• NUMERALS.

[fl 25

400 V'
500 (p'
600/

700 y;'

800 00^
900 7^
1,000 ;«
2,000, /J

10,000 ;»

20,000 ,K

100,000 ;^

JBTQttXOaiOi

ntvtaxoaioi

k^axoaioi

kitraxoutoi

oxiaxoaioi

irvaxoaiot

diaxl^io^

flVQlOh'Olh'O

dBxaxiafiv(fioi

3. Temporal.
Inter. Wi^rmTn i on wkaiitajff

1. (av&i^fiiQog, on the same day.)

2. dBVTBQoiog, on the second day.

3. x^naiog, on the third day.

4. iftaQTolog, on the fourth day
6. nffiJiToiagt on the fifth day.

6. ixxaloq, on the sixth day.

7. kjSdofiatogt on the seventh day.

8. oydoaiog, on the eighth day.

tSTQaxoaiooTog

ntvtaxooiooiog

k^axoaioaiog

knjaxoaioatog

oxtaxoaioaiog

iwaxooiooTog

Xdutarog

diaxt'^toaiog

fiv(fioat6g

diafivffMotog

dBxaxwfivgiooTog

4.- Multiple.

anXoog, anXovg, simple, singk.
dmXovg, double.
TQinXovg, triple.
TiiganXovg^ quadruple.
nsrtanXovg, quintuple.
i^anXovg, sextuple,
kmanlovg, septuple.
oxtanXovg, octuple.

5. Proportional. II. Adverbs. III. Substan«

TIVES.

inter. wwrn^yA^tH i how many vfamt % how many vr^irns, quantity,

fold 9 times 9 number.

Dim. iXtyduiff Jkw times. iktydrtift Jewnesi.

Augm. frtkXavrkarMStnutny/old. ir»\Xdxis, many times.

1. (taog, equal.)

2. diTtXdaiog, twofold.

3. TQtnXaaiog, threefold.

4. tiTi^anXttQiog

5. mvtanXdifiog

6. k^anXdaiog

7. iTitanXdaiog

8. oxranXdaiog

9. irvBanXdaiog
10. dixanXdatog
20. BixoaanXdaiog

too. kxatovtanXdaiog
1,000. x^X^onXdaiog
10,000. pvQionXdaiog

onia^y once.

fjovng, monad.

dig, twice.

dvdg, duad.

jqlg, thrice.

TQidg, triad.

Tsr^dxigtfour timei

i. TBjgdg, tBT(faxtvt

ntrtdxig

nBvidg

i^dxig

Hdg

hndxig

ipdopdg

oxjaxtg

oydodg

ivvBdxig, hvdxig

iwsdg

dtxdxig

dBxdg

tixoadxig

Hxdg

kxonovrdxig

ixntortdg

XiXidxig

XiXtdg

fiVf^idxig

pv^iiq

Digitized

by Google

M 26, 27, 28. 1

CONJUGATION.

»8

C. Tables of Conjugation
U 36* I. The Tenses classified.

TL Sbcondabt.

1

RetaUont.
Definite.

HiDA. 1- Present. 2. Future.
Pbksknt.

a Past.
Imfertect.

y^afprn, •
lamufriHng. I shaU be writing.

J tea$ writings

a.

Indefinite.

Future.

AORIST.

Jmrite, JahaUwriU.

I wrote.

3.

Complete.

Perfect.

Plupertbct.

yiyffaq>a^ m

'mt^

II 37* II. The Modes classified.

L WSTINCT.

I. AOoiL

iHDICATiyi.

Itunwri

writing.

1.

A. Imtxllsctxvb.

a. Contingent.
m. Present. B. Ftot
SUBJUNCTIVX. QPTATiyi.

ff«

rs^ra.

R VounvE.
Imperatiyb.

«'•

A. Sobetantiva.
Infer iTiYB.

n. incorporated.

•

B. Adjectire.
Particiflb.

Towrite.

«"'.

If 38. in. Formation of the Tenses.

Pbxpuui.

Tbnbm.

Afpixss.

Actlre.

Middle.

Passive.

Pbbbbrt,

^f^

ytm^fuu

Angm. Imperfbot,

«f, f

•/»«», /»«v

FUTUSB^

r«»

r«/MM

5<(n^

Fur. iL,

iCn^MM

Angm. Aorist,

r«

n^M-t

»•»

Angm. AoR. n.,

#», V

$f*n9, t^nw

f»

Bedpl Perfect,

MM

Ituu

EedpL Perf. n..

m

Angm. RedpL Pluperfect,

»iif

/M|»

Angm. Redpl. Pluperf. n.,

M

Redpl. Fur. Perf.

r#/(

MM

Digitized

by Google

84 TABLES. [5f 29

KS*. IV.

Affixes

OF THE

PresenL

Imperfect.

Nade.

Eophonic

Nude.

Eaphonk

ind.

S. 1

/<*

m

p

CP

2

S

9*f

f

•6

3

a.(.)

a

•

•(')

P 1
2

iuw

OfUP

lUP

0(199

T«

m

T«

m

3

yai(y), aai{v)

ovai{p)

aop

OP

D. 1
2

iitp

OfiiP

lUP

O/ASP

top

now

TOP

tTO»

3

TOP

now

«V

fT^

Subj

. S. 1

2

3

P. 1

2

V
mfitp

V

3

mai(p)

D. 1
2
3

VfiiP

fllOP

igroy

Opt

S. 1
2
3

Ifjg

in

P. 1

Itjfisr^

l^itp

Ol/ABP

2

iTJJB,

1X8

Ol%8

3

ifioav^

ley

Oi^

D. 1

V»y,

ifAip

OiflSP

2

irjiop,

txov

OITOP

3

tijiijv,

/t^v

olttjP

Imp.

S. 2

3

P. 2

Tfl

«

fra

3

TWaOF,

trtiv

itiooap^ OPUHP

D. 2

loy

nop

3

TOII'

ixnp

Inf.

yii»

UP

J^art.

N.

Piff rtooit 9

wp, ova&t

OP

G.

•Wfff yraijff

OITOf , OVC

ffig

Digitized

by Google

tI291

CONJUGATION.

Sfi

\cTivB Voice*

Future.

Aorlsl.

Perfect fluperfect

Ind.

S.

1

a«

ak

K-a ih-Mis nt-^

2

ang

aag

^ :nVg n-ug

3

an

«(')

it'i{p) je-e*

P.

1

aofitv

a&ftip

«-a^cy K-tifitp

2

attt

ame

K-OTf fl-€tH

8

aovai{v)

aa¥

»-oat(y) n-tiaap, x-eaorr

D.

1

aoftev

aafiBP

n-afitp K-9i(tep

2

aitov

aatev

X'Cnop x^Htop

3

anop

oaTip

n-atop x-e/irr

•Subj.

S.

1
2

00

•

3

^V

P.

1

aotfitv

(u^lisp)

(X-1JT«)

2

aijTB

8

0<»ai(y)

(x-coai-y)

a

1
2
3

amfiBP
atiTOP
atitop

{x-WfABp)

(x-^rop)

Opt

s.

1

aoifii

aaim

1 X-^^fil)

2

aois

aaif, OBiag

X-Otf)

3

aoi

aai, atiM^p)

X-Oi)

p.

1

OOlflBP

amfitp

X-OlfitP)

2

aoixB

aaiTt

] x-oitb')

1 X-OlBp)

3

aoisp

OttlWi OBtSP

D.

1

COlfitV

aaiusp

X-O^IIBP)

2

aoitop

aanop

X-<HtOp)

3

aohfiv

aaitUP

x^itnp)

(mp.

S.

2
3

aof

(x-e)
(x-eVcu)

P.

2

aatB

[wp

fx-m)

*

3

o&tmaotp

yOWh'

(x^twaop, u^ptmp\

D.

2
3

QOTOP

aStmp

(x-Btov)

Inf.

any

aai

x-cVa*

Pturt

N.

am^ &c.

a&g^ oaaSj aw

«-«C» «-i^» »-«f

G.

aovxoq

ootPTog^ aacfig

X-OTO;, X-V^C

Digitized by VjOOQIC

w

«

TABLES.

III 30

1130. V,

. AiTIXES OF THE

Nude.

Pref.

Euph.

Imperf.
Nude. Euph

Perf. PIup.

Ind, S. 1
2
3

fiat

OjUffi

fiflP
aoj 0

JO

ofin^

ov

CTO

fiat fiTiP
aat 00
tat to

P. 1
2

a&9

a^8

oi^t&a
ta&8

fAB&a fi8&a
0^8 a»8

3

rta$

ortM

PXO

ovto

pteu vto

D. 1
2

ofis&a
ta&op

Ii8da
a&op

Ofif&ei
ta&OP

fts&a fdB&a
a&OP o&o>

3

O&OP

ia&ov

a&flP

iat'hiP

adov a&^

Sutj.S.i
2
8

V

{fispog «)
(fiipo,:^,)

(f48POgtl)

P. 1
2
3

tifit&a

ttllTflf*

{fispot Wfitv)

{flBPOt O)0A-y)

D. 1
2
3

tifiB&a
fia&op
fja&op

iiiipw ifiiv)

{fiipm Yop)
{fOpu fitop)

Oot. S. 1
2
3

to

olunp

OlO

otto

{fiipog Bhip)
iliipog «%)
{fievog ttfj)

P. 1
2

olfis&a
oia&B

•

{/iipot Btflfltp)
(fiipot ittits)

3

iV%0

oivto

{fiBPOt Btfianp)

D. 1
2
3

olfis&a
oia&op
oh^fiP

IfiBpm Btvifitp)

{fA6P» (tfitOp)

(^m» Binr^p)

Imp. S. 2
3

00, 0

ov

ifo

P. 2

a&$

ea&8

a^B

3

a^maav, a^oav ia&maap^ ia^mp

a&waaPy adtt*

D.2

a&op

iO&OV

a&op

3

a^mp

ia^o^p

a&BBP

Inf.

a&a$

ia&M

a&m

Part. N.

^fvog^ -i;, -ov ofisvo^f -ij, -of

/u«Voc,-i|,-oir

G.

fii'vov -

■r)Q GflSVOV,

-V9

fiivov, -IK

Digitized

by Google

ffao]

CONJUGATION.

87

Middle and Passive Voices.

Fut.Mid Aor. Mid.

buL S. 1 aoftm oifiipf

3 ajj, an ati

3 anm aazo

P. 1 Go/iB&a aafM&a

2 ata&s 0aa&»

3 aorrat aarto
D. 1 ao/ii&a adfju&a

2 asa&op aaa&op

3 aea&op aao&tip

Subj. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 1
2
3

Opt S. 1 aotiAijp

2 0Oio

3 aoiTo
P. 1 aolfi8&a

2 aDMT^f

3 ooipvo

D. 1 aolfit&a

2 aoia&op

3 aolo&fiP

amfktu

arfrm
atifiB&a
aiiad-B
atartm

aeifii&a

OflG&OP

Imp.

S.2
3

P. 2
3

D.2
3

Aor. Paw.

d-fiaap

^«

&-§
d-'mfup

d-'waiijf)

d-'fixop
&'tItop

Fut. PaM.
d'l^aofttti

d-i^asTM
&'iia8a&op

aalgifip

aaw

aaito

&'dfig

&'8lfJ

aalfi8&a

aata&8

aatrto

d-'8iflfl8P, &'8'ifl8V
^-f/l}Tf, &'8it8

^'8ltiaap,&'8ltv

aalfM&a
aaia&op
aala^fpf

^'8lflll8V,^'8Xll8W

&'8llJT0V

&-8t^T1lP

aat
aaa&»

aaa&8
oda&waop,
aaa&mp

d-'iitwaop^
&'irtmp

aaa^op
aaa&nr

^'fjftOP

&"ntup

d-'ijaolfifip

^-ijaoio

^-ifaotTo

^'fiaolf$8&m

&'^aota&8

^-i^aoipjo

&fiaoliA8&m

d-'^aota&op

S-'iiaola&ijp

hi

Furt

ata&ai aaa&at ^^^pm

N. aofispog
6. aofiipov

attfi8Pog '&-8lf^&»tlaS^&^ip &'Tia6fi8Pog
aafifvov "d-'ivTog, ^-datig •d-'riaofupov
4

Digitized by VjOOQIC

TABLES.

11181.

o

g

o
O

b.
O

b)

H

fib

O

•J

C9

a'

'HxgnoMs

ii

t"8

i^

n

'XivaiiJj

liil^i

t^^

••AltlUUUI

*«A{isnaui]

•XjrepQOMS

!!

2 r

ill

»Xnai|JU

^ii

it

11

3

■•Jmn J pire luseajj |

••IppjWpOT»A|idVT8iJ0V I 2 9 s } 9 i

•Mntft J pthi looswd

3 S « 3 51_

g i g

3 3 9

-9AI88VJ tBUOy

'lit- %t\ 8qj9A JO »A^^?v

•»W. u| iqjOA io »IPP!W

'■AUOKaroxis

^OAiWBj 'Tjocfnu pro ^jioj ^-joy

'9A{ioy t9ojJ8dnu

•OAIIOV t08JJ9J

••IPPIW |w» •Aiioy Vfioy

C 5 5

5 f ?

l««)«9 «»*

• ••«•« ••*

a a a a a

*« HI )« i« m «« HI '« HI

'Mnin J pov 'to^pjodiui 'laasejj I

.'9Ain«j t30|j9ditu pm toojjoj
•loajjodoi] pun luaeojj

««««•« ««*«

•«A|«raa wntn J

r?^iil

^ ^ '^ ^ «

•8AI8rtd 181J0V 1

J4^^ 7^

'5'5'i <<

'9A|t3V tooji9dnu pov toeji9j

Ullllllllll Ullllllll

•1PPIH pW9^noV hlJoy puB aIn^nJ

%%%%%% %%%%%

o5 cl; d 3'

digitized

by Google

1(82.J

CONrTOATION.

89

d

CO

o

o
. o

H
O

H

69

•^js iffJlit?H

iij.

T si S
i « 5 :

4*S g-

iiCs- •SB'S

E ,-

%<• xji *W

'1.i'

c-^ i

•» do

I ii

'a-i

? \\

f .7 J
. » 8 8 '

1 tJ!-•-^r-

i *

.is,

2-11 ^ 9 *£ «-i .?

i

d

i

"•a

1

2|l

1-5 r

I J ^ S « cS^S 8^ i.^«S

Digitized

by Google

40 TABLES. [n 33

1 33. VIII. The Active Voice of the

Ind. S. 1
2
3
P.I
2
3
D.l
2
3

Subj. S. 1
2
3

P. 1
2
3

D.l
2
3

Opt a I
2
3

P. 1
2
3

D.l
2
3

Imp. S. 2

3

P. 2

3

D.2

3

InfinitiTe,

/ )

Thou, You
He, 8ke, It
We

Ye, You
They
We two
You two
They two

1

Thou, You
He, She, It
We

Ye, You
They
We two
You two
They two

I

Thou, You
He, She, It
We

Ye, You
They
We two
You two
They two

Do thou
Let him
Do you
Let them
Do you two
Let them two ^

am planning.

was plamdng

or

or

plan.

plamud.

may plan,
can plan f

or
plan.

might plant
should phm,
would plan,
could plan,

or
planned.

be planning^
or plan.

Participle^

' To be planmmg^

or
. To plan.

Planning.

Digitized

by Google

II S3.] GONJUGATTON.

Verb povXevc9 (H 34) translated.

4f

IWiire.

Aoritt

FeiftcL

Fh^eifeet

planned,
shall plan f have planned,
or had planned,

will plan, or

plan. *

have planned, had planned

may plan,

may have planned,

can plan,

can have planned,

plan, or have planned.

might plan,

might have planned,

should plan,

should plan, should have planned,
or would plan,

would plan, would have planned,
could plan,
could have planned,
plan, or have planned^

plan, or have planned.

To he about To plan, or
to plan. To have planned.

To have plannetL

Abcuttoplan.l^^'^J^P^;^' Having planned

4»

Digitized

by Google

«

TABLES.

11184.

H 84. IX, Active Voice of the

Kcfent
Lnd. S. 1 fiovXevv

2 PovXfvuQ

3 fiovUvst

P. 1 fiovXtvofiiP

2 fiovlevnB

3 /iovXevovai

D. 2 fiavUvnoy
3

Subj. S. 1 jiovlwrn

2 PovXtvjig

3 liovXivp

P. 1 fiovlivmfAW

2 jiovXiviitB

3 fiovltmtai

D. 2 fiovXevtitov

Opt. S. 1 fiovXtvoifu

2 /^ovlcvoK

3 fiovXsvot

P. 1 (iovXsvoifiSP

2 jiovXtvoiTt

3 /iovXtvotti'

D. 2 jiovXtvoitop
3 povXtvolifiv

Imp.S. 2 fiovXevB

3 fiovXsvhm

P. 2 fiovXtvtJt
3 povXsvitmaar
fiovXtvorMV

D. 2 /9oi'X«i;«roy
3 fiovltviTȴ

Infin.
Part.

fiovXBVUt

fiovXtvmw

unp6inot«
ifiovXtvov
ifiovXtvtg
ifiovXwe

ifiovXsvofjiev
ijiovXfVfiB ^
ifiovXevov

dfiovXtvnov
ipovXwhfiP

FttCuiCb
PuvXtvam

fiovXtvoBif
fiovXsvaei

fiovXtvaoftof

(iovXtvaitB

fiovXivaovai

fiovXtvanw

fiovXiyaoifu

fiovXBvaoig

povXsvffoi

(iovXsvaotiJLep

(SovXiveonB

fiovXivaoiw

povXtvaotxov
fiovXsvaoitfjv

fiovXtvatfv

Digitized

by Google

1134.J

HEGUtAR CO^JDGATION.

4»

R£(^irLAR VsAd fiovXiJm, to plarij

to counsel.

AodiL

ipovXs¥oa

t^ovXtvoaq

i/SovktvoB

IMbet.

fis/k)vXBVHa

fitfiovXsvxag

fisfiovXevxB

ifiifiovXtVXHP

ifiifiovXtvxBtg
ifitfiovXevxH

ifhvXtvifttfiw

ifSovXsvaaxt

iPovXiVMav

fiffiovUvxttfAev

fitfiovXevxajB

fiifiitvXtvxaai

ilkfiovtevxtifiep
ifitfiovXivxtuB

ifiBfiovXBVXBWOP,

ififfiovXtvxBaap

iPovUvxjtnw
ipovXskntut^v .

fitftovXevxarop

iftBftovXtVXBttOP

ifiifiovXevxilttiP

ill

fiovXwvaiofin

fiovXtuafjTt

fiovXtvama^

fiovXtvaiiiop

povXtvamiu

fiovXtvaaiq, fiovXwcBiag
fiovXtvOai, fiovliVQUt

jiovXBvaaifitv
fiovXtvaant
fiovXivaaitr, fiovXivasuKP

fiovXtvaaiTov
QovUvaaituP

(iovXevaov
fiovXsvadw

fiovXivaoTB
fiovXtvadtttaop,
flovXtvadrt»p

jiovXtvaenov
PovXtvamttr

fiovUvomi

ftifiovUvuipcii

ficvXtva^

fttPovXevxv^

Digitized

by Google

TAALS8.

11I3&

K 39. X. Middle and Passive Voices of

(la the Middle Vaum

Ind S. 1 fiovXivofjuu

PovXivu
3 fiovXiVBtm
P. 1 fiovltvo/AM&a

2 fiovltv8a&e

3 fiovUvortat
D. 2 fiovUvw&op

3

Sabj. S. 1 povltvmfuu

2 fiovXevfi

3 fiovXtwitiu .
P. I fiovltvmfii&m

2 fiovUviia&$

3 povUvwrtat
D. 2 povliVfia&ap

Opt. S. I fiovlBvolfifiP

2 (iovXtvoio

3 jiovXevotto
P. 1 fiovXtvolfiB&m

2 fiovXsvoia^i

3 fiovXsvoiPto
D. 2 (iovXivoM&ap

3 flovXsvola&ipf

Imp. S. 2 fiovXt^cv

3 fiovXiviad-m
P. 2 fiovXtvta&8
3 fiovXivio&maopf
fiovXtvia&mp
D. 2 fiovUvsa&w
3 povXxvia&wf

Infin.
Part.

fiovX»ita&0$
fievXfvofifvoi

Inpcfibet*

i/iovXtvofiijp

ifiovXivov

ifiovXtvrto

ifiovXtvofit&a

tfiovXtvsa&9

ifiovXtvorto

ifiovXivta&ow

ifiovXivia&n^

Future Mid.
fiovXsvaofUU
fiovXtvat],
§ovXiva%$
fiovXBvatTou
fiovXavaofiB&a
fiovXtvata^n
fiovXivaortou

fiovXivaolfiijp

ftovXtvaoio

fiovXtvaoito

fiovXivaoifit^a

povXsvaoia&$

fiovXivaoino

fiovXivaota&oP

fiovXiivmSm
fiovXivoifitvo^

Digitized

by Google

i;35.]

REGULAR CONJUGATION.

45

THE Regular Verb ^ovXavo^ to plan^ to counseL

f deUberatet to retobseJ)

Aoritt Mid.

Perfect.

Pluperfect

iflovXivauuriif
^fiovXivaia

Pl^uVktVfiOH

PeflovUvaai,

ifiitiovXfVfitiv
iptPovXtvao

^ovXsvaato

fispovXevrnn

i/Ss/SovXBVTO

ifiovXtvaafAS'd'a

ifiovXtvaaa&B

iPovXMvaarto

fiifiovXtvfit^a

fitfiovXtva&B

fii/SovXtwrai

ilii/$ovXtVfit'&a

ifii/iovXivai^t

ifis/iovXtvrt^

iflovXivaaa&itP
iflovXsvaiad^

fitfiovXtVfjdow

djitliovXsva&op
ifiifiovXiva^tlP

fiovXevap

fiovXlVOfJTW

fiovUvai6fi9&a

(hvXsvafiad-B

povXtvamnak

OovXevofia&op

povXtvaalfniP

fiovXivaau}

fiovXivaaiTO

, *

fiovXtvaalfi9&a
(hvXtvaauf^B

fiovXtvama&cp

fiovXtvaa&
povXtvada^m

fttflovXtvao
ftsfiovXM^a&m

fiovXtfiaaa^t
fiovXtvada&maaPf
PovXwaaa^mw

p$liovXtva&B
fltfiovXtvad^memf^
fitjiovXtva'&wf

dovXtvaaa^op
fiovXtvada^mw

fttflovXtva&OP
fltfiovXtva&mp

fi§flovXtva^a$

PiftinfXeviUpQf

Digitized

by Google

46

TABLES.

11135

Table x. completed.

AoriitFut.

[nd. S. 1 i/iovUv&fiP

2 ifiovXiv&tis

3 ipovltv^^

P. 1 ifiovXsv&fifASP

3 i/iovXev&fiaap

D. 2 ifiovlsv^fijov

Subj. S. 1 ffovXsv^a

2 fiovXsv^j^g

3 povXsv^ji

P. 1 fiovXiv^isfisp

2 fioyXsv^rjis

3 fiovXsv&^ai
D 2 fiovXsv&ijtop

Opts. I ^ovXsv&dfiP

2 fiovXsv^Blfig

3 fiovXtv&elfi

P. 1 flovXev&stfiiiBP, fiovXsv&itfiBP

2 povXtv^dr^xBt fiovXtv&BlTB

3 fiovXBV&slfiOctP, /iovXev&ucp

D. 2 fiovXsV&tifJTOP I

Imp. S. 2 fiovXsv&fiT$

3 /5ovAevi9^i}Toi

p. 2 jiovXsv&fjiB

3 PovXtvd^fixioaap, ficvXtv&inmp

D. 2 fiovXsv&fjTOP

3 povXtv^t^xtiP

Infin.
Part.

§OvXtvd^PM

fiovXw&itg

Future Fui.

flitvXev&i^aoiiai
fiovXiV&i^af],

fiovXsv&ria 6t
fiovX^v&rnJStiU
fiovXsv&fiaoiiB^a
fiovXtv^^ata&B
povXsv&r^aovxun
fiovXev^iltfea&op

flouliv^woifafp
fiovXw&^90io

fiovXiy&fi9olfU&m

fiovXtv^r^ota^t

fiovXtv&iiociPTo

fiovXtv&ii9ota&(0

fiovXiv&iiinh^ilP

ftavXiv^ipfifitPOf

Digitized

by Google

IF 36.1

»nJTB VEKBh.

47

H 30. XI.

(A.) Mute Verbs.

1. FgdifG)^ to write.

Active Voice.

L Labial.

Present

Future.

Aoritt.

Bote.

Ind. ygaqxa

yf«y«

c;^^ay;a

yiygaq>a

Subj. ygdipia

y^«>fti

Opt. yQd(poifi&

ygdiffOtfn

ygaysaifiir

Imp. y^d(p%

ygaipop

Inf. ygdiptip

ygdipHP

ygdipm

ysygaqtipm

Part. yQU(pt}P

ygdif,(OP

ygdtpag

yfygaq^wg

Imperfm.

Fiaperfcet

ind. ^yffuifop

iytygdi^HP

Middle and Passive Voices.

Frftent.

Future Mid.

AoristMid.

SFbUrn.

Ind. /QuqiOfiat

ygdfOfim

iygaipdfifip

ytygdiffOfiai

Subj. yffd<f>»fin^

yodtptofjuu

Opt y(fa<polfi7iP

ygaipolfiny

yoatpalfifip

yeygaipolfAn*

Imp. ygdifov

ygdipai

Inf. y(ffx(pfa^ai

yQoii/fsa&ai

ygdiffaa^ai

yfygd^ta^at

Part. y{faq>6iitvoq

yguipofitvof

yQUif/dfiiPog

ytygatpofitpog

Inperftct.

8 Aor. Fkss.

SF^P^Mi.

Ind. iyi^ip6ftrj[r

iyQdq>fiP

ygufpr^aofim

Subj.

y(fa<f>w

Opt

yQaipnriP

ygaiptiaoliiiiP

Imp.

yQUiffidi

Inf.

yQaq>ripai

yQttq>ria%aatti

Part

ygtiiptlg

yQafptjaofitpog

Pnraci^Iiid.

Impb

hd.

pLUrBKFICC*

S. 1 ytyQOfifiat

y(ygdq>&ai

iytygdfifiijp

2 yi/ifttipai

ysygatffo

iyiygaipo

3 yiyqunttth

ytygdipam

FuL

iyiyqanxo

P. 1 yfygdfifis&a

ysygaiifAivog

iyBygdfifiB^a

2 yiyQaq>&B

yiyQa(p&8

iyiygaip&t

8 yiyqannhoi

ytygdqi&taaotp,

yBygufAUBvoi

^*^^

ysyQdqy&tiP

D. 2 yiygaqt&w

yiygaq>&op

iyiygatp^op

3

ytygd(p&tiP

iytyga<p&n9

Digitized

by Google

tH.

TABLES.

11137

H 37. Labjal. 2. Auna, to kaxie.

Active Voice.

IV«tent»

Imperfect. Future. 8 Perfect

S Pluperfect.

ind. Uinia

(Icmoy

Xetif/m XiXoina

iXeXomup

Subj. Xtlnia

Opt. XBlffOlfU

XdiffOifju

Imp. XuTiB

Inf. 2«/nr«y

XsliffHP XiXomhw

Part Ulntap

Xdtf/fov Xthnma^
AoEisr IL

Ud.

suy.

Opt. Impi

Inf.

8. 1 Umop

l/nai

XlnoiiAi

UTIC^y

2 IXi9r6(

;/7ri?ff

Xlnoig Xlnt

3 Ili7l«

^^1?

Xlnoi Xmitm

Fkrt.

P. 1 iXlnofiBP

XlnoDfUP

XlnoifAtv

hntip

2 il/7im.

XlntiTt

Xinoixe XlntrB

Xinovaa

3 shnov

Xlniaah

Unoup XinireiKfap, XtnoPTOiP Xmop

D. 2 ^;U7i«oi'

XinriTov

Xlnoitop Xlnsiop

XtnoPTog

3 iXiniitiP

Xinohfjp XinhaiP

Xinovatu

m

Middle >

\ND Passive Voices.

FttaeaL

Future Hid. Perfect.

Aorist Tua.

Ind. Xtlnofiai

Xsiipoiiai XiXBififiUh

iXdq>&fiP

Subj. Uinwfim

Xtup&m

Opt. InnolfAfiv

XtiipolfifiP

Xtt<p9BlfiP

Imp. Xflnov

XiXfikpo

Xft(f&t,u

Inf. Zc/7iea^a»

Xtlif/Bodai XfXu(p^tti

X(iq>&ijvM

Part. il«7io/i€yo? Unpoftfvog UXsififiivog

Xsiq>dili

ItnpNvBct*

8 Future. Pluperfect.

Future Fkii.

Ind. iktmounv

XiXslipofittt iXtXstfifiiiv

AOEIST XL MlOOLX.

Xet(f&^ao(iou

lod.

Suy.

Opt. Imp.

ltd.

S- ] iXmSfifiP

iltnbi/<at

XiholfiflP

XiTtijdon

2 ^A/^ov

«»//

Xlnoio Xi,nov

3 ^X/;rfiTO

Xlnfirai

Unono Xinia&oi

Pfcrt

P. 1 iXiTtofii&a

Untufis^a XmolfieSa

XinofiiPOf

2 ^A/7ica^«

Xlntia&B

Xlnoia^e Xinta&s

3 iXlnorto

Xlntavxtt^

Unoirto Xinia&aaap, Xmia&utp

D. 2 mn%a&op

Xlmia&of

f Unoia^op Xlmodop

3 amiaai^

hnola&fiP Xmh&tiP

Digitized

by Google

flS8.J

MUTI VK££S«

4^^

1 88. ii. Palatal. Ilgdaam or nqdrxm^ to do.

Ind.

Sub).

Opt.

lino.

Inf.

Part.

Active Voice.

Pkcsent. Future. Aorist 1 Perfect 8 PerfiBct

nQctoati, nQattm ngd^ Bn^a^a ninQ&xot ninqaya

ngnaaoifu, fiQarroifU nqaloifn n^a^tfn
nfaaatj nQarxB nga^^v [vai [vui

ngdaoHP, n^atrtiP nQo^tiP n^ii^ni nt-nqaxi'^ nsnQays-
nqiowaatp, nQatiav ngd^atp n^^ag nen(faxf^i ntngaywc

Imperfect I Pluperfect 2 Pluf '^rfect

hsqaaooVf mgartop insngdxsiv insngdytitr

Middle and Passive Voices.

Imperfect Future Mid.

ingaffaofirpf, inganofiijv ngd^ofiw

ngaloifATiv

nga^Ofiiyvi

8 Futufe.
nsngd^ofMti •

Ind. nQaatFOfuxh ngditofiai
Subj. ngdaaotfiai, ngciTtwfiai
Opt. ngaaaolfiijv, ngaTtolfjiTjv
InU). ngtiaaoif, ngartov
Inf. ngdaaea&ai, ngaTtfa&cn
Part. ngaaaofjiBvog, nganofisvog

Aofitt ARd*
Ind. inga^dfiriy
Subj. ngd^fiai
Opt. nga^aififip
Imp. ngd^ai
Inf. ngd$aa&ai
Paft. ngalifiBvog

Ind.
S. 1 nsTtgayfiat

2 ningnl^irn

3 ningautai
P. 1 n^ngdy^n&a

2 ningux^e
8 nengayfiivoi
[stal
D 2 ningmx^op

Aoriit FiMi^

ingdx&fiv

ngnx&ti

ngax&dfiP

ngnx&fjTi

ngnx^i^^^

ngaxd^ilg

Pbrpicv.

Imp.

ningn^
nsngiix9(a

Futuie Fus.
ngax^VOOfiai

ngax&riaoifiTiP ntnga^olfiiiP

ningnx&B
nfngnxd^caooiP,

mngdx&tiP
ningnx&op
ntngdxd^P

ngax&iiofa&ni
ngnxOriijofitvog

Inf.
ntngdx^ah

Furt

nsngayfupog

nengd^a&at
mnga^ofibpog

PUSTEMWECT,

fnsngdyftrip

iningaio

iningaxio

inengdyfit&u

iningax^B

ntngayfihot

iningax^OP
dmngdx^fi^

Digitized

by Google

00

TABL£S.

[1139.

H 39. iii. Lingual. 1. Ileidiaj to persuade.

(2 Perfect, to trust / Middle and FassiYe, to believe, to obegf.)

Ind.

Subj.

Opt.

Imp.

Inf.

Part.

AcxrvE Voice.

Future*
niloet

I'reMot.

nsl&a niiuta inBiaa

nd'&ta mtlaw nldut

nU&oifit nslaoifit ntlaaifit ni^oign

ml^B nrlaov ni&»

nei&eip ntlotip ntlaon nidiip *

nUdiav ntlawp ntluug mdfov

Imperfect.

S Aoriit. 1 Perfect
mi^op ninuxa

S Perfect
ntaotda
ntnoi&ta

nsntixivui nanoi^ivat
TtBnuxwg nenoi&wg

I Pluperfect 8 Pluperfect
inBntlHHv inenol&iip

Middle and Passive Voices.

Pt^etent*
Ind. nil^ofAat
Subj. 1i$i&aifiai
Opt. n$i^ol(iriP
Imp. nd&ov
Inf. ntl&ta&ai
Part. ns$&6fA6yog

Imperfect
inn&ofifjp

Future Mid. SAor.Mid.

nsiaqliifir nt^olfiriv
n&dov

niiooiieyog ntdofifyog

AorittPkMi. Future Pksa.
intia&riv itHo^iioouat

nitadU^v nita&fiaolfifiv
ntia&dg nBia^rjaofiBvog

S. 1 nin BIO fiat

2 ninBtaaB

3 ninBiojoiB

P« 1 TIBTlBtafiBd'et

2 ninsio^B

3 -nBUBtOfiivot

[bIqI

D. 2 niuBta^op

PsRracv.
Imp.

ninBiao

JtBTtBladw

ninBia&t
TiBJiBla^iaoap,
nBnBlij-&wp

TtBTtBta^OP
nBTtBh&BBP

hit

ntTtBta&ai

Piurt

aBJlBtOfABVOg i7tBnBiaiAB&9

ininBia&9
fiBTiBtauivoB

PLon&ricv.

inBTiBiafiriP

ininBtao

ininBiato

[jjoay

ininBiad'OP
inBnda^v

Digitized

by Google

1140.1

MUTE VERBS.

Ind.

Subj.

Opt.

Imp.

InC

Part.

Ind

Opt

Imp.

Inf.

Part

1140. 2. Koiiito,

(Middle^ to receive.)

51

Active Voice.

Bfewnt.
Ind. xofilia
Subj. xofiliu

Opt KOfliioifU

Imp. xd/ii{8
Inf. KOfilidv
Part HOfAiZwv

InpuMcL

ixofjiiioy

Futura*
xofiiuio

xofdaotfju

XOflloHV

xofUatop

AorUL

ixofiiaa

xopiofa

xofilaciifu

xofiiaow

xofilaai

xofUaag

xVtwot

xofiiioiAat

xofiij^wfia^

xoiiiCoifiijv

xofiiCov

xofAlinj&ai

XOfitiOfiBTOg

Imperfect.
ixofiiiofitiP

Future Mid.
xoiiiaofiUi

xofiiaolfiiiP

xofilata&a$
xofiiaofnyog

P^ect
xsxofiiafiai

xixofiiao

xtxofiladai

xexofiMtfiiifog

Aoritt Mid.

ixoftiaufifiv

xofiloaifiai

xofiiaalfiTjp

xofiiaai,

xofjilaaa&a$

xofitadiitpog

Pluperfect.
ixnxofiliSfiriv

AcnTB.
lad.
S. 1 xofim

2 xofAitig

3 xofiiti

P. 1 xofiiovfiiP

2 XOfAltiU

3 XOlitOVQi

D. 2 KO§UUt<tP

Attic Future.

hd.

XOfAlHP

Put

XOfitWV

xofitovaa

KOfitOVP

MOfuwytog

Ind.

XOfAiOVfiUi
XOfilfi

xofiisiTa^

,xofiiovfiB&a
xofiieia&9
KOfitovrtm

Fernet
xcxdfiixa

utxofiixiVM
xsxofitxmg

Pkiperfeet
ixtxoiilxHP

Middle and Passive Voices.

Aorist P^M.

dxofilo'&iiP

xofiia&w

xofna^UfiP

xofiiad-riTt

xofjiia&fiVtt$

xofita&tlg

Future Fkii.

xofiia^rieofAat.

xofiia&fiaolfifiP

xofita&iiaea&ai
xofita&jiaontpog

Inf.

xoiAitiada$

Put

XOfUO^/ltPOt

Digitized

by Google

m

TABLES.

ffl 41.

T[ 41. XII. (B.) Liquid VERBa.

1. ^AyykXkta^ to announce.

Ind. ayyillti

Siibj. ayyilXfa

Opt. ayyillotfu

Imp. uyysklt

fnC ayyfXltiP

Part. uyyiXknp

Ind.
S. 1 ayyfXii

2 ayyfXftg

3 ayytXu

ACTITB VoiCB.

ImpofiMt S AoriaL
ijyyMov fjyyilov
ayyilia
ayyiXoifU
uyyflB
ayyhkttv
ayyiXav

FOTUBB.

Opc

Pcffsct* PhipgffacC

ilyytXxa rfyyiXxjfiP.

fiyytXxiptu
^yyfXnmg

hd.

Part.

ayyfXoifH, ayytXoltjv ayytXttP ayytXwP

nyyiXovaa
ayyfXovp
ayyfXovrtof
iyytXovom

ayytXalg, ayyfXoitig
iyyfXoi, ayytXolij
P. I ayytXovfAtP ayyfXotfitP, ayytXoiiifiiP

2 ayyiXfliB uyyfXoitt, iyytXolfiu

3 iyytXovoi ayyfXolfp
n. 2 iyytXnjoP ayytkoirop, ayy(Xolr}TOP

3 ayytXoiitiv, ay/fioiifxiyy

AoEur L
Ind. Sutj. Opc

S, 1 ijyytiXa ayyflXw ayydXaifii

^^yyftXttf ayydXfif ayytiXaiCt ayystXttng SyytiXop

3 fiyytiXt iyytlXij ayytlXai, iyytiXtu iyytiXaitt

P. 1 fjyytlXafiiP iyyflXwfitp iyytiXmfUP

2 fiyytlXoTM ayyslXi^tB iyyttlaitt ayyitXart

3 fjyytiXa^ ayytlXwai iyytlXaiiP, iyytlXtiap ayyttXartanPi

ayyiiXmnrnp
D. 2 fjyytlXatop ayyilXfitOP iyytlXattoP ayyslXmop

3 fiyyeiXmtfiP iyytdahriP ayytiXatmp

luf. iyyiiXai. Part. iyyelXaq,'daa,»ap • G.-oyzof^aai^;.

MlDDLB AND PASSIVE VoiCBS.

Ind. ayyeXXofi€t$

Subj. ayyiXlBf/iM

Opt. iyytlXolnnp

Imp. ap'/tlJtov

Inf. fiS;9^^iUl8a«>o*

Part. iyytXXofUPog

S Aor. Ifid.

fjyyfXofiriP

ayyiXw/iai

iyytXolfiriP

iyytXov

iyytlia^M

iyytXofiiPof

1 Aor. Flit.

fjyytX&fjp

ayytX&m

ayyfX&flffP

ayyiX&fit&

ayyBl&^pat

iyyiXdelg

SAor. FlMh

ayytXilffP
ayyiXij^t
iyytXi^ptn
iyytXilg

Digitized

by Google

1141.]

LIQUID VERBS.

5.^

Inipsncct*
I nd. Tfy/tkXofAfiP
Opt.
Itif.
Part

lod.

S. 1 ay/flovfim

2 ayyfXj, ay/ilii

3 tt/yfkeitai
P. I ayytXovftt&a

2 uyydfla&B

3 ayytl<nfrta$
D. 2 otyyBltia&or

3

1 Future.

ayytkitT^'aofiai

ayyfX&rfoolfiiiP

iyyfki^T^ata&ai,

iyyfk&rfao/Mtvog

SFutura.

ayyikrjaofiat

ayyfkrjooifiriv

ayyek^otadat

ayyikfioofitvog

FoTUEi Middle.

Opt
txyyhAolfiiTjV
ayytkoio
iyytkolio
nyyfkolfjtx^a
iyytkoia%f%
ayytkolno .
iyytkola&ov
iyyikoia&fiP

AOUST I. MiDDLX.

Subj. Opt.

Inf.
ayytk(7a&ai

Part
ttyyfkovfitrof
iyytkovfiir^
iyytXovfifPOP
iyytkovfAfPov
ayytkoviiivfig

ttyyukulfifjy

ayyhihtiu

ayyiikttixo

Impb

ayyfikat
ayyHkda&m

lod.

S. 1 fiyyftktifiijv iyyUkonfiai

2 ijyytikm .ayyhlXrj

3 t/yyiikaro ayytlktjtai (•y^/c/v^.v m^/^c»«m*vvi»
P. 1 ^yytiXaftr&a iyyciktifitd-a ayyeikatfis&a

2 iyyiikva^B ayyflXrja&8 ctyyilkaia&B ayytlXaa^i

3 ^yyUkarto iyytlktavxai ayytlkaino ayyeikda^nactp,

^ ayyfdad^faw

D. 2 iyjiiMaaSor iyytlkija&op nyytUatadop ayyUkaattov

3 "Ifyytikaa&fiP ayyiikixiod^rjv ayyfikaudwp

Inf. ayytikaaSaim

M. Imp.

S 1 Jfyyfkfini

2 T,yytlaoti rjyypkao

3 Siyytkrai %yyikdm

P. I riyyiXiit&a'

2 nyytk^t ^yytk&M

0. 2 f//a^ov yy«A^oir

3 fiyyfkdtur
5 •

ayytikalo d^rjv ctyyf
Part, (tyygikttfitroc:.

PiRPxcT, PLursmFBcr.

Imp. Inf.

Tiyyik&ni fiyyiXfjfiy

ilyytkao
PiMt. Tfyyfkio

fiyyfkfiivog ^yyikfit&a
iiyyfkd^t
fiyyikfiipoi tiamp

fiyyfk&op
fiyyfk&fjv

Digitized

by Google

51

TABLES.

[1142.

H 4S. Liquid. 2. 0aivQ, to show.

(S Perf. and BTiddle, to tqtpearJ)
Active Voice.

Prcient.

Fiitttre.

Aorist I Perfect 8 Flerfeet

fnd.

q>aivw

(pavfii

tcpriroi niipayxa niq>fiva

Subj.

q>alvto

<pnvw

Opt.

ipalvoifu

ipavdifii, (pupolij

¥ <f>r^vmfu

Imp.

ipalvB

iffivop

Inf.

(pah'uw

q>avilp

fpt/vat

7tt<ptipiptt$

Part

qtalftop

Imperfect

Btpatvov

fpavoip

ffffVag

mtptiPtog
8 Pluperfect

iniq/^PHP

Middle and Passive Voices.

Present

Imperfect

Future Mid.

AorittMid.

Ind.

(paivofifn

iipaivofitjp

(pavovfiai

ifpfiyafifiv

Subj.

ipaivwfiai

(pripoDfKU

Opt

q>aivolfifiv

ipavolfiijp

q>rjpaififiw

Imp.

ipalvov

<p^pm

Inf.

q^aivia&un

q>aPHa&tti

q>^Ptta^a$

Part

(paivofiByog

ipupovfitvog

q^fipafiipog

1 Aor. Pkst,

8 A<)r. FkM.

1 Put P^M.

9Fut,Fua.

Ind.

4q>ay&riV

iq>ayT)v

q^apdi^aofiM

q>apriaofAat

Subj.

q>av&w

qtavta "^

Opt

(ponf^ilflP

(jpaff/i^y

qxtv&fiaolfiijp

Imp.

(fay^flTi

q>avr)^i

Inf.

<pav&fjwM

(partjvui

gxKP&rjasaStn

q>av^aia&tn

Part

<f>av&iig

q)avtlg

PntFICT.

q>av&ria6fievog

q>otprio6fiiPog

pLVmFBCT.

Ind.

Imp.

Inf.

S. 1

niqxtafjitu

niq>ap&€n

intg>aafirip

2

nfxpavuoii

n^{pavao

iniqtavao

3

7tiq>anat

nf<fa>doi

Fkrt

^ iniq>avTO

P. 1

nf(paafii^a

rnqMOfiivog

infquxofit&a

2

nBipav&8

n^g>ny&B

ini<f>ap&8

3

ntqiuofiivoi

niq>av-dtiiip

nupaagiipoi tiaccp

n. 2

niipap&ar

nfq)ttw^op

initpavd^op

8

n«polp&b99

intq>dp^TiP

Digitized

by Google

1143.]

DOUBLE CONSONANT VERBS.

55

H 43. XIII. (C.) Double Consonant Verbs.
1. -^v|fi) or av^dvo^ to increase.

Active Voice.

rnd.

fiubj.

Opt

Imp.

Inf.

Part.

av^^aoifit

avirjaaifn
av^ffaov

Pketent Fiitnre. Aoritt

av$ot(ii, av^avoifii
avUt av^avt

Imperfect

Middle and Passive Voices
Future Mid.

av^arofiM

Pketent
Ind. av^ofim,
Subj. av^tofiat, av^dvufiai
Opt. avMfifiv, avlavoififip
Imp. av^ov, av^dvov

Jnf. avUo&M, ai^vto&tti
Part, av^fievog, ai^ayofisvog
Inpenect

Perfect
Ind. fiv^tif^M
Subj.
Opt

Part, tiv^fffiivog

144. 2.

Flnperfect

ccv^ijaouai

av^rjata&at
av^fiaofitvog

Aoritt FuM,
ai^fl-d-iig

Perfect

fiv^r^xcag
Pluperfeet
fji'litixt' if

Aoritt Mid.
fjv^riaoifitiv

avhiodfisi'og

Future Past.

av^Bfloolfiflif

ai^fj^riaofievog

Perfect Passive of xdfinxoj to bendj
and iXi/x^y to convict.

Infleitive*

S« 1 xexetfifiai ilr^XtyfMH

2 XBxafiipai, iXfilty^ai

8 udxauTtttti iliiXfyxrai'

P. 1 Mtxa/ifiS&a ilrjXfyfit&a

2 nixafiip&i ikriUyx^^

3 xtxafifiivoi iXfiXtyfUi'oi

[iial [tial

D. 2 Mixafiq>&oy HijXtyx^^

ImpeiAuve.

Mfxafttpo iXifXfy^

»Bxdfi(p&Wt 6lc. iXriXiyx^fo, Slc

IndnitiTe.
»9xdfi(p&tti iXviXiyx^M

Fhrtidple.
xexaju/ifi'oc iXriXfy/iivof

Digitized

by Google

b&

TABLES.

[1145

1[4ff.

xir. (D.) Pure Verbs, i

1. Tifid$9^ to honor.

Active Voice.
rExtnrr lam. Pmbbipt

Tl/iCU

tifiog

rifiuaf
1 1 fiat or

Contract

SUBf.

S. I iifidati

2 tifitUtg,

3 TlfiUft,
p. I TlfidofiBV,

2 tifidttt,

3 ufAaovai,

D- 2 rifidsTov,

hanmna,

8. i hlfiaot'f ittfimy

2 hlftafg, itlfiag

3 Hifiui, hlfia

P. 1 iTifAaofitv, ittfiOifiiv

2 itifidtiB, itifidjB .

3 itifiaov, HlfAWV

D. 2 Hif^aeTOP, itifidtop
3 itifiaitriv, itifidtfiP

pEBMiiT Imp.

xifin

S. 2 Ttfiixe,
3 Tifiairw,

P. 2 tifittittf
3 TtfiertTOiffor,
rifiadpTVP,

D. 2 Uftdtjov,
3 tifiahoiv,

Fttturt.

Ind. Tiiitjtfoi
Subj.

Opt jifitlaoifn
Imp.

Inf Uftfjasip

Part xi^^ouip

tifidta, itfm

tifidjfg, tifi^

itfia/j, ''^i"?

tlfidttfitP, Tlfi^HBP

ItfidfilB, JlfAUTB

tifidfoai, itfitiai

ttfidriioPf tifiatoP

Pumr On.

Jtfidoifn, ttfi^fju, tiftt^ffp
ttfAiiotg, tifitagt f-M^VS
ttfiaoi, ttfiia, rifAt^m

UftdoifiBP, Tlf/^fiBPf Ttfi^flftBP

tifidons, TififMjB, iiin^rjiB
tt/juioitp, tifi^ip

jifidoitov, . rifjwtov, tifii^ritop
Pkbsbmt Iirp.

TlfidtW

tifinTB
tifidtwaotp,
tififuyrtap
jtfidiop
tifiuimv

Aoritt.

iilfitfOn

Itf^tfUfO

Hfii^ijaifit

lljUtjOOP

TifirfOai,
Jiftiioug

PunsifT Pam. ^•/f'^^

Tiftmp

ttfidtot't
ttfidovaa,
tifidov, .
G.jifidovtog,
Ti(iaov0iig,

Tifioiaa
ftfi^p
Jifmrtog
jifitaatig

MTWfnCU

jttifAtiHet

tnififinipm
TBtifitintag

BtBllfi^XBtV

Digitized

by Google

M W.J

CONTRACT

VERB^.

57

M.

DDLS AND Passive Voices.

t%MUXT Im,

PaxsxiiT Sow.

S. 1 iTfidofittt,

TlfioifUU

rifiaitf/io».

UlMtSfiW

2 ufiiiff.

Ufl^

TI^«V,

Tl/i^

3 tifiautitt

xifAUxai

TifMtl^TCI,

Ttfidra«

P. 1 tifiaofit&a.

jifuufis&a

Tifiaft^c^a,

TifttifAi&a

2 tifuita&t.

jtfta9&8

Ti^di^a^a,

Tifida&9

3 Tl^lM»TCt<»

ufmvtai

Tt/tfdctfyTMi,

tifi^rtM

D. 2 u(imw»op.

ttfutad^op

Ttftdll9&0P,

tifjMa&w

Ixnxnct.

Prbsbmt On.

S. 1 irifiaofifiy.

itifitafifip

UfiaolfiiiP,

tifit^jiflP

2 itifiaovt

iTifiai

tifidoio,

TljU^iO

3 hifidita.

hlflttlO

tlfldoiTO,

Ti/il^TO

P. 1 iufiaofMt&af

HifiWfit^a

tifiaolfisda.

tt(i(j^fi8^a

2 Hiftdfoitt,

iitfitiodt

tifieioio&e,

Ufiwa&9

3 itifiuovto.

irifttui'jo

ttfidoiVTO,

tlfi^PtO

D. 2 HiiAnta^w,

Hifittad-op

tifidoia&op.

tifjt^a&OP

3 ittfiata&f}v,

infiuo&riv

iifiaolu&rjp.

tifif^a&fiP

Pmbdit Ixf.

Fmmmkkt Ivf.

S. 2 tifidov.

Ti/idi

Tr/i«ra%i»ai,

Ti/iia^M

3 ufiaia&Uf

Ti/idtfi9a>

P. 2 Ti^aea^e.

Tifida&B

3 Tifuts'a^oiaar,

jifiua^toanv,

PknnT Pa»t.

Ti^ac'tf^ciiy,

XifAdo&(OV

Ti^ArOjU»l'OC»

TtfidifiiPog

D. 2 Tifiofv^on

tifida&op

Tf/iMo/UfVi;,

rif*wfi6Pfi

3 TificUa&bif,

Tifida&ufP

Tt/itto/uei'ov

jifjuafiBPOP

FbtmMid.

AoristMid.

Perfect.

AorittP^M.

Ind. TifiijoufAai

ijiftTjOiifAriP

itiifififiai

ixifii^i^rip

Subj.

• T/jUlfcl«/i««

TlfifJ^W

<>|H. ttftfiaolfinr

Tififiuaififjp

rifiTi&elfiP

Imp.

jlfitiaai

TBrlfiTjao

xtfirjO fiTi

liif. Jiftiat(f&a$

ttfiiiaaa&on

mi/ifja&ai

tl/lfl&ijvM

Part. Ti^f}(90fi8roc

jifi^d/uwo^

miiififtivog

tififl&tlg

SFutura.

Fuperfect

Future Fisi

Ind. T(Ti/«i}ao/ia»

^iTlfilJ/iljr

iifiri&iiao/An.

Opt tniftfiaolfitip

Tifuj^ijaolfifiP

InC Ttn^i2tffai9<M

Uftfi&iiaea&a&

Part, jittfiiiaofiirog

tifirjdfjaofiBPOf

Digitized

by Google

TABLES.

[^46

SL

1 4«. CoKTRACT. 2. 0iXia, to love.

ACTITB YoiCB.

5 I

3

^Jms

■tflr'ai<ri_

Pusrar Sw.

1 ^*2f4M\

3 ifO^.
3 »f4i<«rfa\

f4lmx<»

Pusnir Onw

ipilolfpf

q>iloifi

qnXolri//t 'J
<f>iXoiriT4

q>tXoltjtOP

Punmr ivf^

Pexssmt Ikf.

9 ^f9.
3 ^4lHm»

3 ^Mr«Nf«^
8 ^Uf4tP»v»

AotkL

PftxsKMT Pass.

Auiecia

JTf^ilijxtyttt

Plupcffecta

Digitized

by Google

V46.1

CONTRACT VERBS.

69

Middle and Passive Voices

S

Pkbsimt Iiro.

q>ilovfiai

S. 1 g>tXiofjiatt

3 iptlisTm,

P. 1 <pil$6fii&tt,

3 iftyortai,

D. 2* (piXi$a'&ov,

Impsepict.

2 iq>iXdov, j-.-i-r.

3 ^^(ileero,

P. 1 iq>ili6fit&ti

2 iq>iXita&t,

3 iipiXiorto,

D. 2 ifptlifa^ov,

3 iipilfia&fiv,

(ptXovfif&a

ifiXeio&t

g>iXovvTM

i(piXov

iq>tXovfiiSot

^q>iXtXa&B

iipiXovrro

iq>iXsta&op

PEsmrr Iicr.

2 9>ll80t;,

3 ipiXeia^w,

P. 2 9«Xie<y^«,
3 iptttia^maav,
iptXtiad-wr,

D. 2 ^fl^ca^op,
3 (piXtia&mv,

FuturtMid.
ipiXrjoofiai

Ind.

Subj.

Opt

Imp.

Inf.

Part

Ind.
Opt
Inf.
Part.

^iXfiaolfifiP

(piX^ata&ai
ipiXfiaofitro^

SFittvre.

ntipiXiqaofion

ntipiXfiaolfifiP

nHpd.iiaHr&ai

nt^ptXfiaoi/Ltvog

q>iXov
q>iXila&ia

q>iXHO&t
(piXtia&tuaay,
q)iXsla&mv

tptXtla&ov
q>iXila&wp

Aoritt Mid.
iq)iXriaafifiP

q>iXriaalfiriP
g>lXfiaen
(ptXi^aaa&at
iptXriodfitPog

Prsskmt

tpiXimfim,

fpiXir),

iptXifitait

tpiXmfitd-a,

(piXdfia&tt

(piXifoviai,

^tXifia&ov,

Suir.
(f>iXwfia&

<piXfjt(u

<piX(ofi8'&m

<piXija&»

iptXeirtttt

q>iX7ia&op

PaxtsKT Opt.
g>iXsolfifiv, q)tXot(ifjP
q>iXioio, q>tXoii^

(piXioiTOt q>iXoiTO

q>iXtolfit'&oit <piXolfi9&a
q>kXioia&t, q)iXo'ia&9
q>iXsoivTo, q>iXoivto

q>tXioia&ov, qaXoia^ov
q>iXBola&fi¥, q>iXolo^riP

PunifT Inp.

q>tXiea&ai, q>iXB7a^at

PEmifT Pakt.

q>tXB6fitPog, (piXovfiBPog
g>iXeofiBvti, q>iXov(iBPfi
q>iXf6fiBP0P, q>iXovfiBPOP

Perfect
ns<plXT)fiai

nBg>tXjiao

n«pd^ad-tti

ntipiXrifiBPOQ

Fuperfect
inBiptX-^fAfiP

Aoritt Fm.
iq>dfj&fiP
q>dri&n
q>dfi&Blipf

{pd^&TjH

q>dfi^^paB
q)dfi&Blg

Future Pms.

ipdrj^^aofitu

ipdfjdiiiaoifirip

q>dfi^iiaBa^m

(pdti^ijaofiBPOt

Digitized

by Google

G6

tAble».

J11 47;

H 47. Coi^TRACT.

3. JtfloiDf to manifest.

AcTiTB Voice.

pEimrr Imd.

SOBf.

S. 1 aijXo'ai,
2 diiXottg,
8 dr^XoH,

dijXol.

dfiXoia,
dtfXoif,

dTtX£

dfiXuU

dfiXoi

P 1 dfiXoofitP,

2 d}}Ao»TC,

3 di^Xoovat,

^9lX0VT9

drjXovoi

dtjXowfifv,

dfiXo^tt,

ditXoatoi,

6iiXmft9P

diiXtijr

^^|Xl|iif^

D 2 di9Jl«aio^

diiXvvtop

dtiXoffTOP,

dfiX^jvp

IxraiiricT.

Prmknt Opt.

S. 1 idnXoov,

2 /a^^Ao*^,

3 ^dijAof,

ddi^Xovp
^diqXovg
idriXov

driXooifAi, dtfXdifii,
drfXooii, dfiXoig,
dtjXooi, drtXoi,

dijXoifiP
dnX^fig

dtjXoifi '

P. I iStiXioiABP,

2 i?3,jAosT«,

3 idi^Xoop,

idriXovfji9P

idT,Xovt%

i^Xovp

drjXooifitPt dtiXo7fiiVi
dfjXooitt, dijXo7jet
driXooup, SfiXoiuf

» dtiXoltifiiP
dt^XoifiTt

D. 2 ^dijAocToy,
3 idtiXoitfiP,

idfiXovxop
idijXovtiiP

dfiXooiJOP, dTfXohop,
dijXooitTfP, dtiXoljtir,

' dflXolflTOP

driXoirjtJiP

Fmqm Jitf.

PftmMT Ihf.

S. 2 dij'Aot,
3 diiXoirm,

dr^Xov
di}Xovna

dijXoHv, dt^Xovp
Pftissirr Pamw

P. 2 «ijXo««,
3. ^Xoixwaop
dfiXoovrmPi

D. 2 dr^Xonov,
3 ^ijAoinuy,

dijXovjt driXouty,
, dfiXovimoar, dr^Xoovaa,
, drfXovimp dtjXoop,
dfjXovtop G. driX6opto9f
driXoviwp diiXoovatig,

dijXaiaa
drjXovp
dfiXovpTog
dtiXovaijq

Futon.
Ind. dfiXuioM
SubJ.

Opt. dfiXdao^^i
imp.

Inf. dfiXmatAP
Part. dijAiJ<r<k>»

Aoritt.

idt',kotoa

di,Xwam

dijXwaaifn

dnX^aop

driXwoM

dtiXwoag

JrtfvBtL

dtd^XotKU

dfdfiXtanivat
dtdfiXnntig

i^k^^XmMHP

Digitized

by Google

1147.1

CONTBACT VfiRBS.

6i

8.

S.

P.

MlDpLE AND PAi»a»lVI£ VoiCf^S.

Punxt Ind. Prsunt

1 dfiXoofiui, dfiXovfiai dijloiufjiai,

2 dijlo//, drploX dijlotjy

3 ^ijJlofTaiy ^jjilovrat dijAoijTai,

1 dfiXoofiB^a, Sfilovfit&a d'tjXomfit^a,

2 di}Zoea^«, drjXova&i di}Aoija^e,

3 ^^Aoorraiy dijAoVFTat ^ijZdcDyrcu,

2 ^Aoea^oy, driXovad-oP d^Adi}(j^or»

PEnpiT

dtiXooif/^fiv,

dfiXooio,

d^Xooito,

bflXoolfit^a,

drjXooiodt,

dtiXooirto,

dfiXooiaSoTt
dtiXooiadtiy,

8,

hawanet.

1 4driXo6fifiVf

2 i^v^XooVt

3 i^tiXotiOf

1 idtjXoofif&a,

2 id^Xota&B,

3 ^dijldoyroy

D. 2 idfiXoia&or,

3 fdi2Aofff^i}y,

idi^Xovfitda

idfiXova$^t

idfiXovPTo

idfiXova&w
idriXov9&H¥

Sow.

dtiXa^M&a

dfiXwu&i

dtjXuinat

diiXm^&OP
Onw

dtiXolftt^a

dtiXoia^$

dtiXolvio

drjXolaSor
dfiXoiadfiP

PeuhiT' Imp.

2 dfjXoov,

3 SiiXoiadti,

P. 2 dfiXota&i,

D. 2 dfjXoeadov,
3 dfiXoiadwy,

Future Mid.

Ind. S'^Xtauofiai
Subj.

Opt. dijXmoolfifir
Imp.

Inf. dfjXtiota^at

Part. dtiXttaof/Bifog

8 Pkitara.
Ind. d$driXwaoiAa$
Opt. dtdfiXmuolfifiP
IbC Mi}Aft)(j€0^ai
Pirt df^i}AflaffdjuC9'0(

driXovod-i
dffXova&waav,

dtiXovadfov
dfiXovad-or
dfiXova&ay

AoiiitMid.

idtiXutadfifiy

driXwawfiai

dfiXetaalfiflP

di^X»aai

ifiXwaaa^ai

drjIXmaaiuvog

PEmifT Ixr.

dfiXotoxfai,, dtiXoV0^ut

Vmaaxn Pabv.

dfjXoo^if'og, dr/Xovfttrog

dfiXoiifitvrit
dTfXoofifrov,

drilovfABVn
dr^XoviAtvov

ineneci.
dkdr]Xv»^iiai

dfdi^Xmao

dfdfiXwad^ai

dfdr,Xmfjiivog

Ptuperfect.
fdtdiiXdfifiP

Aoriftt Hmil

^dfjXw&fiP

d7iXio&ti

dijXm^diir

dtiXoid'tin

dtiXti&^vai

d'9jXtad-tlg

Vntnn Put*

dfiXmd-JiaoifjkUP
dr^Xn dtf aa^m^
dtiXw&fiocftfii'og

Digitized

by Google

03

TABLES.

[1I4a

1 48, Pure Verbs, ii. Verbs in -^i.
1. "lajriniy to place, to station.

(S Aor., Perf., Hup., and S Fut, to aUmd.)

ACTIVE VOICE.

Present.

Ind.

Subj.

Opt

Im^

S. ] laxfifi^

2 Xaxriq

3 latriai

MJTO)

ioTJjg
lotji

iajalnjg
Unaitj

loTfl

lardtta

P. 1 Xara/itp

2 ?aT«T«

3 laraa^

iatiJTS iaralfjTe, iataitt

larart

lajartmp

D. 2 latoTOP
3

iajijjop icrtalijTOP, laxatTor

lataTOP
tardrmv

Inf. iatavat Part. Mrrer^y-afaaray *

Q-aprogr»Ofig.

Imperfect.

S. 1 I<JT1?r

2 'Mni^ff

P

^ larofttp
Xarntt

D.

tarator

3 VtfTij

XuTaaar

iotdxijv

AORIST II.

Ind.

Subj

Opt.

Imp.

Inf.

S 1 tarrfV

2 rarrjg

3 taxij

OTOJ

OTfjg
ojfj

oraii^g
arairi

arrj&i (<ft«)

P. 1 EOtrjiisv

arwfKP

aTalrjfifv, aratfar

amg

2 eoTi^Tt

arfjts

araifjte, araUt

arljji

3 eatrjaay

armai

otaiijaar, ataUv

atijtmaap, atdrtav

D. 2 lariytoi'
3 iari^Tfiv

atrixov

aralrjror, atairav
atairiTfjVf atalxtjv

Future.

1 Aorift Perfect. Pluperfect

. S FiKiire.

Ind. ai^tfO)

Subj.

Opt. oTiiaoifii

Imp.

Inf. oTiiaHP

Part. aTiJawy

arifaei) lorifxo)

oxf^aaifM iaxrfioifi^

atrjaov

Digitized

by Google

f\ 48J

VERBS IN 'flU

63

Pkrfkct II.
Ind. Subj. Opt Impw Inf.

S. 1 • larui koTulijp iaravai

2 ♦ • katalijg tata&i

3 • • kutalfi iatdtat TuL

P. 1 Tarttfitp iajafi$y &C.

2 FfJTare •

3 koToiiSi ioTfuai
D. 2 faTMToy •

3

S.

Ind.

3 XojttTai

P. 1 latdfieOa

2 laraa^f

3 Icrratrat
D. 2 Soraa^oy

3

S

kaifog
ioTUTt kaxwaa
&c. laiiu?, iaiog

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.

Present.

Opt

laiaio

laratTO

Itnaifii&a

laraivto
taraia&ov

Imperfect
P. iordfis&a

Pluperf. II.

iataftsv
taruaar

taTfitTOP

Subj.

iaimfis&a
iatrja&s

iatija&op

Imp.
Xaraaot Tcttw

Inf.
XaTtMO&at

Part.

iardfiBvog

Xaxna&e
iatdodmaav, laTaadtar

Xaraa&op
iotaa&iav

1 iatdfifiP

2 Xaraaot Xatw ^tijua&s Xaraa&ov

3 Xaiajo XfTtaivTo ioTda&tjv

Fut. Mid. oTfiaofini. Aor. Mid. iarrjadfiriv, Perf. tarafiah
Pluperf. iatdfifiv. 3 Fut. Mid. kani^ofiai. Aor. Pass. ioTd&tjv.
Fut. Pass, ata^iqao/iai,

1 49, 2. The Second Aorist ngiaa&ai^tobuy.

Opt Imp. Inf.

TTQiaififiv TtQiaadat

nqlttiTO ngida&to "Put.

ngiaifjii&a ngidiifvog

nglaiad^t nglttij&f

nglaivto nqida&oiatxv, nQida^ttP

S.

Ind. Subj.

1 inQidfifiP ngitofiui

2 ingito ngifj

3 inQlaTo TTQlfiTai
P. 1 inQidfisd-a ngiiofit&a

2 inQiao&t nQirjad^s

3 inglarto nQltartai
D« 2 inf^lttadop nQlfja&op

3 ingido&rip

nglaiad-op nglaa&op
ngialo-^'^p ngida&ciP

Digitized

by Google

64

TABLBb.

[ITsa

s.

1 so. Verbs iN-fii. 3. TY^^u, to piU.

1 Tlxtlffll

3 lid rial

2 t/^6T«

3 tidi&ai,

ti&elai

ACTIVK VOICE.

OUDf.
tt&WfifP

D. 2 tl^nov rid^jop

Prbsrnt.
Opt

ti&ihjv
t'.&driq
tidtiri

Ti&tififitv, Ti&fyfify
ti&BlfioaP, ti&fUP

ti&BlfjToy, Ti&elrov

Imp.

iiditta

xidixE
Tldixbuinv,
TldivTWP

uddtwv

Inf. ti&dpai. Part. T»^8/^,-etaa,-rv ' G,-e>Toc,-f*aiK»

1 iTl&fjp, itlx9ovp

2 iri&fig, hldiu;

3 iil^fi, iil&n

Imperfect.
P. hl&ffitp

hl^BTB

Hl^taar

D.

ixt &ijtip

A0RI8T I.

lod.

1 tOfixn

2 i&Tfxag

3 t&fixt

1 i&f]Kafi(P

2 i&I^XUTt

Ind.

B&tfitP

tdtts

^rjts

3 i&iiXttP $&taap &mai

AORIST II.

Opt

^fifip

&dti

^drifttPt ^f7 fiiP

^tifiaap, ^eliP

D. 2

eSiTOP d^Tjrop
3 i&irrjp

A OR. IL Inf. ^f««m. Part ^t^, ^eXaa, ^tV' G. ^iiro?, ^ec(ji)C

'&titlTOP, &e7T0P
Seii^iTiP, deiTyp

Imp.

&ig

^stetottP,

&8PT(UP

d-hop
diifap

Ind.
Opt.
Inf
Part.

Futura

•Striata
^rjuoifn

^TjOltP

^rjutap

Mrerwcu
Uxffina

tB&Hnipa$
ts&HMtig

FlupedbeC.
itB^fUtiP

Digitized

by Google

1160.]

VERBS IN 'fit.

65

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present.

Ind.

Subj.

Opt

S ] ri&tfiM

XlxfUflM

ti&tlfjiriV, Tit^o//iiyy

2 €l»€OMf Tl

l&H Tl

^5

tidaie^ ti&o^9

3 tl^nai

ti&^ta$

tldmo, tl&otto

P 1 ji»dfiB&a

T«

^mu8&a

tidtlfii&a, u&olfit&a

2 tiataai

Ti^^a^f

ri&Biad^B, ri&oia^t .

3 ti&Brtai

Tt

^t^rtoi

tidtinOf rixtoirro

D. 2 ti&t6&09

T«i^{a^oy

tl^sm&op, ti&oia&09

8

n&th&riv, ti6oio&fiP

Imp.

Inf.

Imperfect.

S. 1

titfta&m iji&ifiTiP

2 T/^«ao, ti&w

iti»(ao, Hl9o¥

3 fA^^Cff^OI

VuU

iil&no

P. 1

U&ifttrQg iri&ifAt^a

2 t/^w^«

ills tad 9

3 ti&ia&viaav, ti^ioBrnv

iridfpxo

D. 2 ri^ta^or

iridsa&op

3 ttd^io&wy

itidfa&fiP

AoRisT II. Middle.

*

lod.

Sulj.

Opt.

Imp. lot

8. 1 ^d6>jjy

xttafiai

&ilfi7if {&olfjiiiy) &da&M

2 ?dov

^?

^tlo

dov

3 r^cTo

i^^Ttt*

&tito

dia&w Ito.

P. 1 i&ifii&a

^OjUf^a

^slfAt&a

difitvo§

2 r^w;^«

^5ad«

&Ha»t

diadi

3 l^fw

^oiFtaA

^thro

diadtaaar, dio&tiP

D. 2 r^fad«y

^{a^oy

^flQ&OP

&iadop

3 ^^io^ijy

Sllo&flP

&iadmp

F^IIU.

Aor. Fmi. Fbt Fmi.

«*--j», -. ¥Ttiiiii iiif. ^

Ind. d^fiaofum

iri9tiv

tst^iioofiai ti&tifia$ ixedtifjiiip

Subj.

rt&m

Opt. ^fiaoliAfiP

tB&tllJP

tsSfjaolftfiV

Imp.

Int. ^^ata&at

T«'dj?T*

tidtioo

rt&^vat

i rs^fietaS

m xtdtia&m

Part ^ficoforoq

6*

tt^^0ofupot tt^tifiiP9g

Digitized

by Google

b&

TABLES.

[11 «

H 4ff. xiy. (D.) Pure Verbs.

1. Tlfjidta^ to honor.
Active Voice.

i. Contract

PmnBirr Iwa^

PuHBipr Suw.

S. 1 iifidfa.

tifiw

ttftuta,

11 fm

2 Ttfiiingt

tifidg

itfidj^g,

ti(i^

3 tl/AUH,

rifi^

tifioip.

tifia

P. 1 tifidofiiP,

tlfiW(49P

ttfidiafitP,

jifAiiiAiP

2 Tifidtjf,

xiindtt

xifidtiJt,

tifiart

3 Tifidovai,

rifitiat'

tifidmai.

tifioia&

D. 2 rifidsjov,

Tifidrop

tifidfiiop.

Ttfiatwf

hanwmcT,

Tmmmwwt On»

S. 1 Hlfiaoi^t

2 hlfAatg,

3 hifAaf,

dttfitiP
iilfiag
hlfia

Uftdoifii, ttfif^fu,
tifidoig, rifit^j,
iifidoi, tifii^.

Uft4n

P. 1 dtifAoiofitP,

2 it I fid ne,

3 ixifiaov.

infiWfiiP
iufidit .
hlfiwp

rifidotfiip, rifi^tfitp,

tIfidoiJt, tlfit^TB,

ttfidoisp, Uft^ip

D. 2 Hifiditor,
3 ittiAaitriP,

hifidtop
itifidtriP

ttftdoirop, ti/iWTOP,

HfiUoltljV, Uflt^TIJV,

UfitftftOP

Pumr iMPb

Pmshit Iwf.

S. 2 T/iu/xr,

xlfin

• "" tifidftv.

3 tifiair».

TlfidtU

Pebxiit

P. 2 tifidtttf

Tf/infrt

ttfidtov.

llfiSv

3 Jifiaiiwaav,

tifidtuatxp, lifitiovaa,

Tifjiwoa

tifiaoprtp

f ti/AtiliVTtiP ttfidor, ,

tifiiiP

D. 2 Tf/i«noy,

ttfidiop

Q^ufidopxeg,

rifuiytog

3 uftantiP,

rifidiwp

%ifAaov0iig,

iifdtaafig

F^itwt.

Aorift

IVfMd*

FH^MffiKli

Subj.

Opt tifii^aoifn

Imp,

Inf. ufiiiatip

irlfAf^aa
UfjffOW
tiftr^ifnifu
ilfitjaop

tnlfAnua

dt%Ufi^Ki$9

Tl/i^fJffi

tnmniUpm

Part tl^^ooip

T«^1}0tf«

%nlfi^u9»g

Digitized

by Google

M 4&.J

CONTRACT

VERB^.

57

M.

DOLE AND Passive Voices.

Frissmt Ind.

PiucsKiiT Subj.

S. 1 jTfittOfiaif

tlfiWfUU

rifiaoijuaty

ufiSfiut

2 tifi^li.

Tlfl^

Tt/U«;y,

Tl/l^

o tiuanm.

tifiuTai

jifidnTeu,

n/icxra»

P. 1 ttftttofit^a.

rifnufis&ti

Tiftat»ptB^a,

jiftdfju&a

2 xi/juxia^t.

Jlfttt9&$

Tt/uai/a^e,

tifAcia&i

3 t^aovrai^

Xifimwtai,

fi/MXiiii'Tni,

li/AtirtM

D. 2 tifia^&oy,

jtftaa&op

T//£di;«^oi',

jifMia&w

iMTBRraCT.

Prmknt Opt.

S. ] hifiaofitiv,
2 iufiaov,

dtijitafii^p

3 iTlfAoifiO^

itifidjo

Tt/uaoiro,

TifilJtiXO

P. 1 itifiaofif&ttf

iiifibtfitK^a

tifiaolfisda,

ttfiffffiB&a

2 e'ji^fiufaitt,

iitfAiiudi

tifidoiox^s.

Tifiwa&$

3 ijifidovjo.

iiifioitTo

tlfidoiVTO,

XlfJU^VXO

D. 2 itifittso^ov,

iiifida^ov

Tifidoia&ov,

Uft^a&op

3 itifiuta&fiv.

iiifidoi^fjp

tiliuola&i}y.

tifji(aa&riy

Prbosit Imf.

PEnBMT IlTF.

8. 2 tifidov,

tlftOi

tifjtdfOx^ai,

tifida^ai

3 ufMUa&€9,

tifidif^oi

P. 2 ri/Adea&t,

rifiuads

3 tifiaiif&maav.

tifidadwanv.

PknniT Part.

tifAttiaStap,

ttfidod^tar

TI/IAro^»l'OC,

Tifi(afAtvog

D. 2 TlfmHf&OV,

Ttftda&oy

Ti/uwo^tVi;,

ttfUU/iivfl

3 Tifiaia&wv,

Ufidadtav

Ti^ao^ei'oi',

llfjlWfABVOr

T^tmMid.

Aorist Mid.

Perfect.

Aorist FkM.

Ind. ttfifjoofiai

iiifiTiadfiriv

ittifitjfiai

hifii^itfjp

Subj.

• T//uiJ(ja)/u»i

7tfirj&(o

Opt. tififfoolfinv

tilAtiuaififiv

rifiri&slfiv

It

lifiTiam

TSTififlfJO

xifir^^fltt

Itii. Tiftiiat(f&a$

tifArjaaa&ai

tttifi^a&ai

tififl&fivon

Part. tifniaofiBvof

tififfodfuvo^

mififjfiivog

ttfifj&tlg

SFutnm.

Pluperfect

Future Pisi

Ind. 7111(11^00 fia$

^tTi/iij/ii^r

Xilif^^riaofAn.

Opt. jftifiijaolnfjv

Tlflfjd^fiaolfAfiP

InC Tefifii}tfftfi^aft

Tififl&fiaBa&M

Part. tiufiJiaofitvot

Tifiti&fiaofiBPog

Digitized

by Google

58

TABLES.

[1146

H 46, Contract. 2. 0ili(Of to love.

Active Voice,

D.

S.

1 qnXiiat

2 gnXisig,

3 q>tXisi,

1 (piXiofiiv,

2 q>ildsTt,

2 ifiXistor,

P.

P.

Peuiit Ijfik.

q)dovai

Peiixht

q>tXita9
tfiUfig,
ffdiji,

<piXi»fiBV,

<ptXfijt8,

(piXimah

q>iXifitoPf

Sw.
qnXw

iptXwfiiP

fpiXrjts

fpiXmat

q>iXriTW

1 iq>iXfov,

2 ^(fiXugf

3 iq>iXft,

1 i<fiXioijiSVi

2 ^<piitceTSy

3 ifplXtov,

D. 2 iq>iXisTOV,

3 ig>tXeiTfjv,

Imfcbfbct.

iq>tXovf4tP

iquXsttB

iifiXovv

iqiiXstrov
iifiXiltriv

Prisknt On.

ifdioifiit

q)iXdotg,

(piXioi,

q)iXioiftfv,

qnXeone,

(piXioup,

ipiXeoitop,
q>iX$olT7iVf

ffiXoifiiy

(fiXolg,

ifiXolf

q>iXo7fievp

q:iX6ttt,

ipiXoitP

q>iXoiTor,
q>iXoirfjv,

(ptXolfiP
(piXoifjg
(fiXoifi

q>iXolriiA :/
(fiXolrit^

(piXoifiXOP
ifiiXoii^xvi^

Frmmeht Imp.

Present Ikf.

2 iflXfSt

3 (piXiSTt),

2 (ftXhrB,

3 qnXfirwaat',

(flXtOVTIOV,

D. 2 ffiXftJoy,
3 <]()tAe£Taiyy

Future.

Ind. ^fAifao)
Subj.

Opt. <piXi^aotfii
Imp.

Inf. q>iXi^aHP

Part. ^iXifaoiy

9/Xe«

<y)cXcm

(^dovPTfloy
q)iXetror
(f^iXtixtav

AorUt

iipiXfjaa

(ptXrjaoi

ipiXriaaiiii

q>lXf)aop

(fiXfjaai

q>iXi^aag

(fiXinVy ifiXflv

Present Part.

G,

(piXsmVt

q>iXfovaa,

WiXioy,

q>iXiqvtog,

q>iX6ovatfgf

Perfect
nBq>i-Xijxa

nBq>iXtiitivai
niq>iXfixf»g

(piXSr

(piXovaa

q>iXovy

q>iXovvTog

g>iXova7ig

Pluperfect
ine<piXiix$i,9

Digitized

by Google

M 46.]

CONTRACT

VERBS.

59

Middle and Passive Voices

Prbsint Ind.

Presekt Suit.

S. 1 q^tXiofiai,

2 q>iXBij,q>iXiH,

3 qnXdftai,

(fiXjj, q>dsl
qfiXsirai

qnXiwfiai,

<piXifj,

<piXiilTm,

q>dwfiai

<fdji

q>dfinM

P. 1 q>iX€6fie&€it

2 <piXit<r^t,

3 ffiXtortai,

. qnXovfAfd^a
fpiXeia&€
q>tXovyTai

q>iXfWfiB&a,

q>iXiria&t,

qtiXitavtat^t

qtddfit&a

q>dija&9

ipiXmrtat

D. 2' yiZiIw^oy,

q>iXiia&op

qnXiiia&ov,

(pdiia&op

Imterpict.

FtLMSEurt Opt.

S. ] ifpiXBOflV^V,

2 ^q)deoi;y

3 /9>lii€T0,

iiptXovfir^p

iquXov

i(piX$ito

q>iXBolfitiv,

q)iXioio,

(piXdoito,

<pdolfifiP

q>iXoU

gidoito

P. 1 itptXiSfiiaa,

2 i(piXita&t,

3 ^^flcolTO,

i(piXovfi(&a

icptXBlo&t

iquXovrto

q>dBolfiB&a,

g)dioi,a&B,

q>dBoiyTO,

q>iXolfi8&m

q)doia&9

qydoivto

D. 2 iq>iUta&ov,
S i(fiXf8a&ijv,

itpiXna^ov
i(piXBla&fiv

tpdioia^op,
q>dBola&flP,

q)tXoia^op
q>dola^flP

PuEmrrlicr.

Pkksxmt Inf.

8. 2 9)cZsotfy
3 q>iXBia^nt

(piXov
(fiXBla&ta

q>dBBO&at,

q>dBia&at

P. 2 9)a^€a^«,
3 ipdiia&ttaav,
<piXtia&wv,

D. 2 9)fliea^oy,
3 g)iilffia^(»y.

(ptXfio&8
q)iXBia&i»aaVf

qnXBla&»p
q>dBia&op
q>iXBl0&tt)r

Punnrr Part.

(pdBOfiBvog, g>dov/ig¥og
(fdtofiivijf q)iXovfiipfi

ifdfOfiBVOV, (fdoVfJlBPOP

FiitUTt Mid.

Aoritt Mid.

Perfect.

Aoritt Fmi.

Ind. ipdfjaofiai

8ubj.

Opt. ^fZijcroZ/ii^y

Imp.

Inf. q)iX^ata&ai

Pait ^i}ao/ifyo(

i<piXfiaafifiv

qnXi^amfiai

qaXriaalfAfiP

q>lX'naai

gnXriaaa&ai

qnXfiadfttPog

nBiplXf^fjiai

7rBq>tXiiao

nfg>dria&ai

nBq>dfifiBn)Q

iq)diQ&flP

q)dri^£

qidri&Blfiv

q)d^^ijrt

q>dTi^^vai

qfdfi&slg

SFutme.

Piupeilect.

Future Fmi.

Ind. ntfptX^aofttti
Opt. irff9fAi7cro/jui}y
Inf. nnpiX^ata&at,
Part. 9te9«Zqaofifyo(

iuBipdiififiV

tpdfi^riaofiai
<pdfi&fiaol^ipf
tpdfid"iia80^ui
q>dri^fia6(iS9^o§

Digitized

by Google

(»

TABLES.

J1I47.

H 47. Coi^TRACT.

3. JtfXoOf to manifest.

AcTiTB Voice.

pEimrr Imd.

VtMoan Buwtm

S. 1 aijXoV

2 diiXoti^f

3 dfiXoti,

dfiXS.
dtiXoTf
d^Xol

dijXoio,
dtiXotf,

dfiXm

dfiXuU

dtiXoi

P 1 dfiXoofitp,

2 di^Aofie,

3 di^Xoovait

dfjXoofitv

dfjXovu

dfiXovai

dtiXouififv,

dtiXoTiTt,

di,X6aio^,

dfiXmftiP

duX^jt

dtiXiHifi,

D 2 JijAmio^

dfiXQVtop

dtiXoTfTOPt

dijXvJVP

biniir»:T.

Prmknt Opt.

S. 1 ^diflooy,

2 /a^'io€<?,

3 idiXoi,

idiiXovv
^di^Xovg
id'nXov

dtiXoOlfAlt dfiXoi/Al,

driXooti, driXolg,
duXooi, dr^Xoi,

dijXoiiiP
dfjXoifi '

P. 1 ^^JjioO/llOy

2 ^3i?io«w.

3 /aijioo^

idtiXovfiiP

idT,Xovi9

idiXovw

dfiXooifiBP, dtjXolfiiPi
drjXooiTt, dfjXoilTi,
dtiXooitP, itiXoUp

dfiXoimitp

dr^Xoiiji%

D. 2 idfiXonop,
3 idtjXoitfirt

idfjXovjov
idiiXovtuP

dfiXoonop, driXoltop,
duXooljup, dtiXohriPf

driXolfiTOP
dfiXoiijrUP

Fmqm I>^.

PftmMT Ihf.

S. 2 ^ij'Aos,
3 dnXoirm,

dr/Xov
dtiXovm

dijXonv, dtfXovp
PRissirr Pamw

P. 2 dijXom,
3 ^Xoixwaen^
driXoovtmv,

D. 2 ^T/Aoffoy,
3 dtiXairatv,

dilXovt$ dtiXouty,
, dr^XoviwaaPt dtiXoovaa,
drjXovi'tviy diiXoov^
dtiXovtop G. dfiX6orjo9,
dtiXovimv dtiXoovufig,

. dtjXmp
diiXaiaa
drjXovp
dijXovPTog
drjXovarii

Futon.
I lid. d>^Jlitfua»
8ubj.

Opt. dfiXtaaoifii
Imp.

InK SfiXtitrtiP
Part. dqAci»(rflo»

Aoritt

idi'tXoma

di^Xwam

dijXfuomfn

dnXfaaop

dfiX^aai

duXoioug

PerfbcL

dtdtlXwua

dfdtiXmnipm
dtdifiXwn9»g

ddkdtiX^ixHP

Digitized

by Google

!f 47.1

CONTBACT

VfiRBS.

6J

Middle and PAiiMVi:; Voicp«.

PESIBlIt }

[KD.

PRUfNT Sow.

H. 1 iiriXoofiui,

2 bnXofi,

3 duXottah

d^Xovrai

dnjXowfjiai,
di]X6i}tai,

diiXwfia*

d>iXol

dfiXmrai

P. 1 driXoofii&a,

2 drjXoea&B,

3 dttXoQvjm,

di^Xovfit&a

driXova&t

^1|Xovy^a^

drjXomfit^a,

dtiXofio&s,

djiXoiaPttH,

drfXiafit^a

dfiXoiu^s

driXwPtat

D. 2 dfiXosa^op,

dijXova&op

dr^Xoija^iiP,

dnkm^&OP

Peopit On.

S. 1 ^dr,Xo6fiTiP,

2 f^dov,

3 <d/^il0tT0,

idfjXovfifiP
i^^Xov

dfjXooifAfiP,

dfiXQOM,

dtiXooivo^

dfiXalftrjP
dnXoto

p. 1 idfjXo6fA$&a,

2 idfiX6(a&8,

3 idiiXoopTo,

idiiXovfit%$a

idfiXovo&t

idf)XovPTO

dtiXoolfiS^a, driXolfit^a
djiXooioSf, dfjXoladB
dtiXoowTo, dijXolvTO

D. 2 idtiXoia&op,
3 fdriXoia&ijv,

idijXova^op
idriXovadfiP

drjXooia&op
diiXooiadrtv

, driXoia-dop
, dfiXoiadfiP

PrmbnT' Imf.

PftlSllIT IkF.

S. 2 ai}Xoov,
3 ^fjAosff^M,

diiXov
diiXova^fa

drjXotoOai,

dfiXovo^ai

P. 2 «ijZo«a^f,

D. 2 driXoiaSop,
3 dfiXoia&mp,

dfjXova&$

dijXova&waap, Pmwwt Part.

dtiXovadwp dfiXoofiitog, dr^Xovftspog
dijXova&op drjXovfifVfi, drjkovfiipti
di^Xova&iup dfiXoofAft'OP, dtiXovfiSPOP

Future Mid.

Aoiiitllid.

Perrect.

AorifttBMi.

Ind. dijXijiuoiAat

Subj.

Opt duXuaolfi'^p

Imp.

Inf. dfjZcJaea^at

Part di}X«oo/ieyo(

idriXiaaafifiif

dtiXwafUfiai

driXtmaixlfifiP

di^XmoM

iriXniaaa^ai

driXtoaafAtvog

dtdTfXotfjioii

dfdi^Xwao

dfdriXwa&m

dtdr,Xfofjiipog

^dtiXw&fiP

dfiXto&ti

driXn^dup

dtjXw&Tin

dijXta&^vat

dfjXiu&Big

8 Putarib

PluperfeiA

FbturePbM.

Opt dtdriXmaolfitiP
IbC Mi}lftia€0^ai
Pirt MriXoiirofitPos

^dtdtiXnififiP

dviXt^l^^OMiu
diiXwd-iiaoi/jk^
dtiXoid^ata&m^
driXtit^flocfi9P0i

Digitized

by Google

03

TABLES.

[1I4a

1 48, Pure Verbs, ii. Verbs in -^i.
1. "Icxrfiii^ to place^ to station.

(S Aor., Perf., Plup., and S Put, f» Mand,)

ACTIVE VOICE.
•Present.

Ind.

suy.

Opt

fav^

s.

1 latfiiAt

MJTIU

iaialriv

2 Xaxfig

MJT,^?

iuTttlnjg

Xaiti

3 lattioi

«ri^5

Unaitf

iaxdxta

p.

1 Xaraptr

Icrrco^sy itnaltifisr,

iatcufitp

2 tatat$

iar^TS

iaralfizt,

iaxaZtt

urtortt

3 itrtaa*

iatwai

iajoUfiaaVf

laraUp

hstatviaay.

iatartmp

D.

2 laxaiov

iatiJTOP icrtalijxer,

latatTOP

tatatar

3

*

tarmifitiip.

iataitfjp

iaxdx»9

Inf. iataycn Part, Sara^y-aaarcry *

Q—artogrf*Ofig.

Imperfect.

S.

1 TOTIJV

P

. latttfitv

D.

2 IVfTi^ff

tatntt

Xaratop

3 IWi,

lataaap

iojotriv

AORIST II.

Ind.

Subj

Opt.

Im^

Inf.

s

1 ttnrfV

OTW

aiiutfv

<rr»J»'«i

2 r&Ti??

0^fi9

axair^q

atrial, (<yT«)

3 ^atrj

Olfi

araifi

arifroi

P^

p.

1 Eatfjfisp

arwf/iv

aralrjfiey^ aiaifiiv

axiig

2 COTI^Tt

OTfjtS

oralfjTt, aratte

IFT^Tf

3 e(JTi}tfay

armai

axairiaar, axultv

aTiiiftKrov, oraiTwy

D* 2 Boxtftov axrjxov araltjxor, axtxlxor axr^xov
3 iaxiixfjv axaifjxfip, axalxriv axr^xtav

Future.

1 Aorift

FOTOCt.

Ind.

axriista

• Boxrjaa

iaxfjxa

Subj.

axi^ato

kaxi^xa

Opt.

axtiaoim

ati^aatfit

Imp.
Inf;

ax^aov

axfioHP

ax^aai

•

Part.

oxiiamp

oxfiaag

iaxfiniig

pluperfect • S Fufiire.
iaxi^xtiVf iiuxrjxtiv Icrri;^

Digitized

by Google

D. 2

^J

\ VERBS IK -^».

6S

Pkrfect 11.

Pluperf. H

Ind.

Subj. Opt Impw Inf.

1 •

l^JT^lj karalijv karavai

•

2 •

• katairjg tara&i

•

3 •

• kuTolij iajdtu Pwrt

•

1 tatttfttv

iajwfisv &C. kaifog

fatafnv

2 ftfTare

• Icrraxfi iariuaa

Ratals

3 kataai

l0T(tt(JI ^C. itfTO)?, laTO?

fuTuaay

2 eoTuxoy

• kOTCJTOg

laTfitjov

3

iattuatig

ioToixfiv

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present.

s.

Ind.

1 tttrafiai

2 Mjaaai

3 XoTatai

MJT9]rai

Opt

Xoiaio
XoToiiro

Imp.

Inf.
taraa&ai

Part.

p.

1 UfTafieOa

2 %aTaa»9

3 l^rraira*

iotria&s

iaralfit&a

Xataia&s

laxaivTO

laidodeDaav, lardadon^

D.

2 lataa&oy
3

iatija&op

I

laraia&ov

MPERFECT

laraa&ov
ioTda&av

S.

1 J«TT«VlJf p.

3 laxaro

iardfis&a
larnvto

D.

Xaraa^ov

Fut. Mid. axTiaofiai* Aor. Mid. iarriadfirjv, Perf. taxotfiah
Pluperf. iaidfifiv, 3 Fut. Mid. iaTi}|o/iai. Aor. Pass. ioTd&Tir.
Fut. Pass, ara&iiaoiiai.,

1 49, 2. The Second Aorist ngiaa&ai^tobuy.

Ind. Sutj. Opt

8. ] inQidfiTjr ngifofiut ngiaifiiiv

2 ^TT^/oi TTQifj nglaio

3 inglato nQiriTai nglaito

Imp.

P. 1 inQidiAS&a nQi(6/i$&a ngiaifiB&a

2 inQtaad^B nQlrio^B nglaio&B

3 inQlarto ngltartai nglairto
D« 2 ingitxa&op nglria&ov nglauf^op nglaa^op

3 ingtdo^i^r ngiaio-^'^v nQida&mp

Inf.

nglnaOf nglta
ngidadto Vni.

ngidfisvog
nglaa&f
ngida&ioaav, ngido&ttP

Digitized

by Google

64

TABLBb.

[ITsa

Hso.

Verbs

m-fu. 3. TYfli^/Mt,

to piU.

ACTIVR VOICE.

Prbsknt.

Ind.

S. 1 tKtiffii

2 ti&fig

3 TidTjat

SubJ.

Ope

ti&lttjy
t'.&Bvriq
udiifi

Imp.

xL9bi
xi^itia

P. 1 tl»fflBP

2 fl^txt

3 ti&idatf

Tl&WfifP

Tl&fitifiBV, tt&flfifP
ri&BifiJB^ tlx^ filB

xi&BifjaaP, Tt^fiiP

xlHixB
xtdixwtfnp,

XldiVTWP

D. 2 T/^rtor
3

rid^^jov

Tl^BlritOP, Tl&BirOP
tl& BllitlJPt tld^BixTjP

xli^BTOP

xi&exwp

Inf. ti&ivm. Part

. ri^Bl^t^uaari^' G.-e>To^,-f*aiy^.

Imperfect.

S. 1 /r/^i?v, itl&ovp
3 iti&ri, iti&H

P. hl&Bfiep D.

hl&BlB

ixi^Boap

M^BXOP

ixi9ixnp

A0RI8T I.

AORIST 11.

Ind.
S. 1 tdr,xa

2 rdr/x«j

3 t&fixi

Ind.

•
•
•

Sulj. Opt
•^ii^ ^df,g

Imp.

^SXI0

P. 1 i&i}xa(4fP

2 i&1^XUX8

3 r^ijxfXF

B&tfiiP
B^iaop

^wfisp ^BirifiBP, ^f7fiBP

^^TB ^BirjlB, xffllB

&mai ^tlfjaap, ^bUp

^ixB
^Bxwaop,

■d'BVXWP

D. 2 €^<Toy ^^Toy ^BirjTov, &Hrov &hop

A OR. IL Inf. ^c««m. Part, ^^fe, ^cTaa, ^tv' G. ^irrfx;, ^ecai)C

Future.
Ind. '£^ijaa»
Opt. ^i^aotfn
Inf ^ijacty
Part. ^votup

•

tBxfnxa iiixffiKtiP
tB&Btnipat

Digitized

by Google

IF (M).] VERBS IN 'fit.

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present.

65

Ind.

S 1 ti&ifia$

2 *l&4aw,ti

3 tl&na$

Su^.

Opt

u&ttfirfV, ji^olfiiip

P 1 tt&iiie&a

2 ji&tadB

3 ti&ttnm

Ti&elfit&a, Tt&ol/ieS^a
ti&Hyto, tlx^oiPto

D. 2 jl&td&op
3

T$&^a&op

tl&tia&op, tl&ota&op

loip.

Inf.

Imperfect.

S. 1 tltfta&ai iu&ififip
3 ti&ia&» Pwrt. ^i/^CTo

P. 1 Tf^s/ici'o; hi&ifit^a
3 n&ia&tsaav, ti^iadmp iri&tPto

D. 2 ti&ta^op
3 n&io&up

irl^Bo&oP
iu^ta&fiP

AoRisT IT. Middle.

*

Ind.
8. 1 ^d«>ii?v

2 r^ov

3 r^cTo

Sulj. Opt. Irap^ Int
&rJTai &tito ^ia&» Pwt.

p. 1 ^^^/ie^9

2 r^ea^a

3 l^t>TO

^ifttvoi
Sia^aaap, ^ia^tP

D. 2 li^fa^ey
3 ^^c'cy^ijr

^^a^op ^fia^op
Sila&tiP

&ia&op
^ia&»p

F^lfid.

Ind. &rjaofAat

Subj.

Opt. ^aoifitip

Imp.

Inf. &^afa&a$

Part ^i}ao/i€r(K

Aor. Tub, Fut. Tub, F^riwt. FlnpedMl,
Hi&fiP XB^^fioOfiai ti&H/iM itt&tifitit

xt&tlflP jB&fiaolfiUP
ti^tiu ti&ttao
ti^^PM tB&fiata&M xi^tia&M
rt&ilf tB&ii06fUPOt tB^tifiipof
6»

Digitized

by Google

66

TABLES.

rii5i

p.

HSl.

Ind.

1 dldmfti,

2 mtag

3 didmai

1 dido/ifv

2 dldore

3 didoacTi,

2 dldoTov
3

B.

Verbs in-jmi. 4. Jii&fii^ to give.

ACTIVE VOICE.
Present.

opt* Imp^

didw
didtarop

didolijg

didolfifiW, dt9oifitr

didoifiaav, didoUy

dldolfJTOVf didolTOv

didoLiJTfiP, didoltriv

9ldov

didott
didoTvaap,
didovrmw

didotop

dldoTUP

Inf. dMpui, Part. 9idovg,'Ovaar6p' G.-oi^05,-ovaijff.

1 WdtOP,

2 Adidas,
AORIST I.

Ind.

1 tdtuxa

2 idtaxng

3 t'dwxe

1 idaxafitp

2 idcixajt

3 tdtixop

idi^ovp
ididovg
ididov

Imperfect.

P. ididofisp
idldoit
^didoonp

D.

idldoTOP

(dMxr(P

AORIST II.

Ind. * SubJ. Opt. Imp.

• dbi dolfjv {i^catjp)

• dotg doirjg dog

• d(a dolfj doTfiH

t9ofi(P dSfitP dolfifitp, do7fiiP

idoit d^Tt dolrjti, doin

tdoantp daiai dolfjoap, dottp

D 2
3

doTf

dojwaap,
dovraip

WoTOP dwTOP dolfJTOP, dotlOP dotOP

idoxfiP donitT^p, doirrjp dorotp

AoR. II. Inf. dovpai. Part. 9ovg, dovaa, dop * G. doptog, dovarfg,

VutnuB.
Ind. dtiati

Opt. 9«iaoifu
Inf. dtoanp

Part dwotap

iidtaxa

did^txiptti
dedtaxag

ididdxHP

Digitized

by Google

H 51.] VERBS IN -/!»•

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present.

67

Ind.

Bali. Opt

Im^

S. ] dido ft ai

didoifiai didoififjp

2 didoaai

6idf^ didoio

didoao, didov

3 dldorai

didutat . didoito

didoa&io

P. 1 dtdofitda

didftifis&a didolfis&a

,

2 didoa9t

didaw&e didoia&e

didoa&s

3 dldovrm

didbiytui didotvto

didoa&aiatxp
didoa&up

f). 2 didoaSov

didwa^op dldoia&op

dldoa&op

3

didoia&fjP

didoa&wp

Inf. dldoa&ai. Part, didoftivog.

Imperfect.

S. 1 ididofifir

P. idiiout&a D.

2 ^^/doao, ^d/dov ididooi^t imoa&op

3 ^a/aoTo

idldovxo ididoa^fiP

Aorist II. Middle.

Ind.

Sidj. Opt Imp.

Inf.

S 1 /^o^jjy

dwfitti doifirip

doa&M

2 rdov

dia dolo dov

3 I^OTO

dmai dolio • doa&m

IVt

p. 1 /^o^t^a

9tofif&a 9olfis&a

Sofitvos

2 ^^oo^a

daa&B 9oio&6 doa^8

3 r^orro

dmpiai doiPTO 66a&iaGap,d6a&»p

D. 2 r^oo^ov

dSa&ov doXa&ov doa&op

3 ^iJoav'^i/y

dola&t^p doa&otp

Fat MUL

Aor. Ptett. Fut Fkss. Perfect

Pluperfect.

Ind. doiaofiui

iSo&TiP 6o&i^aofiai didofiai

idtdofifiP

Subj.

dod^

C>pt. dmaolfitiT

do&tlrip do&fiaolfitiP

Imp

do&ffri didoao

Inf. dAfio&m

do&rjvm do&Tjata&m dfdoad^m

Part. Swaofitro^

6o&flg do&iiaofitpog dfdofiivog

Digitized

by Google

69

TABLBS.

[IT 52

8.

1 159. Verbs iN'/iu 6. Juxvv^a^ to show.

ACTIVE VOICE.
Present.

Opt* Imp*

Ind.

1 dtUvHiu

2 bdxvvq

P. r dtixvvfAfv

2 dflxrvte

3 diixvvaaif

D. 3 duKVVtOV

s.

s

8

dfixivti

duxvvjn

dHXVVUifttP

dfixvvTiit
dtixyvatai

dtixr6fitov

dtixvvoi

dBlXVVOlfttP
dBlXVVUlT€

duxvvoitp

Inf. dnxrvvm.

dttxrvoiTOP
duxwohtiv
Pari. dnxvvg,'vatt,'VP'

dslxrS
dtixrvi»

dtlxvvTS
duxrvittaav,
dtixvvrnuw.
dtlxifvtap
hnxviimv

Imperfect.

1 idelxvvv, idtlxvvov

2 idfixpCg^ 4^tlxvvtg

3 idtixvv, iddxrvt

Future dtl^.

idtUvvfiBP I

idtixvvaop
Aorist tdttia.

i^tlxvvxufp

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.

Present.

1 dtixrvfiw

2 ^Uxwaai

3 dtlxwvTai

1 dtixvvfit&a

2 6%lxvva&t

3 ^c/xyvyio*

Sab|.

duxvvTitai
dtixvvmfif^a
dsixrvritf&t
dtixvvuvtat

D 2 dtlxvva&ot dHxrvfia^oP
3

Inf. dtlxpva&at.

Opt

duxpvolfitiv

dBtXPVOlO

dfixvvono

dHxpvoia&i
duxvvoirto

dsixrvota&ov
buxrvola^v

dtlxrvGO
dHxr6a^m

dtUrva&$
dfiurvtfdmaap^
ditxt'vaSmv
dUxvvatfov
bHxvvii\im¥

Part dunrvfitvog.

1 ^dtixrv/ifir

2 idtixvvao

3 ideixvvio

Imperfect.

P. idBixvvfifda
iddxpvadi
idtixwvxQ

D.

idflxwa&op

idHXVVO&fjP

Flit. Mid. dtiSofiai. Aor. Mid. idtt^afirip. Peri dihty/ia^,
Pluperf. ^MfiyfiTiV, Aor. Pass, (dnx^ttv^ Ful. Pass, dtt/dn"

Digitized

by Google

1153.]

VERBS III -^A.

f as. 6. ^fjiij to say.

Ind. Subj.

S. I q>f)fjil, Tifil <f a)

8 yija/ '««

P. 1 q>afjiir

2 ^MTi

3 gfdal

D. 2 <paTOP
* 3

8

1 ^pyy, ^f
8 £9)i}» i|

Present,

■ Opt. Imp. InL

q>tJilfi (parw But*

<palrifitp, q^alfitv fpag

(faltjUf <y>aire <fnxr$

(fuiffoar, ipatsr ipawaar, ipartmp

<pulrjTov, ipaliov iponov

ilfPBRFeCT.
P. f(pafi$p

S(paai*p

Synopsis of Associated Forms.

Ind. (ffiftl, (pdaxa

Subj. q>iUf ipdaxttt

Opt. ipaliip, (pduHOifii

Imp. (pd&i, q^anB

Inf. (pupm, fpaauHP

Part, ifds, (pdoxav

1 AOfiit. 0% jf » 9

Ind. Iqpi^frcsy tlnn

Subj* ^awf stnn

0|it. ^iqamfu, tinatfu

Imp. • tlnop

Ini. ^^aof, elna$

Part ^ifaa^f ct^jra;

Acnvx Voici.
Imperfect.

SAoritt.

tVnm
ttnoifu

tiniiv

Futim.

igdtfii, igolt^p

PcfnBCt*

iXi^flxa

tl^fjxtig

FliqwnMtt
li^iixtip

M1BDI.B AVD PAtinrs Voicn.

Pr«6w Inf. fpda^tti. Part, ^^/ufyo^ * Perf Imp. S. 3 nti^€&m *
Iraperf. iipaax6fi»ip ' Perf e{i^^aft» PI up, fi^^i^y, 3 Put. li^ao*
|Mu« Aor. Pass, i^&fjp, i^^i^n^, FuU Pass. ^ij^ijVo^cm.

Digitized

by Google

70

TABLES.

11154

P.

S

I[a4.

Verbs

IN'llU

7.

"IflfAh to send.

ACTIVE VOICE.

Presrnt.

lod.

8^

Opt

Imp.

Inf.

1 %*

Ui

Uifip

itpa*

2%

W

Ulng

\h

3 liia$

y

idf,

«

Ut»

Hiu

1 li^ty

Uofisy

Ultifitv,

itifitp

Uig

2 Utb

li}t*

Ulntt,

Ult9

ltt8

3 iciac, kuTi

uia$

Idr^aaw,

UUp

Utmitap, Unvp

2 1jto»

iiftop

Uifitop,

Uitop

Xttop

3

UtiixfiP,

Uitfjp

Utup

Impbrfbct.

AORIST I.

AORIST II.

Ind.

Ind.

SiOj.

Ope Imp.

loC

1 XfiVttow {Uip) ^Kfl

•

T
III

(XfiP

. ilpm

2 %. I«iC

•

9

fXfjg fg

3 I,,, Ui

•

tXri,Stc era)

Fkrt

I If/uty

{xa/iey tlfiiv nfi$p

*

2 rm

nxtnt
fiHttP

fira

Trt

3 Uaap

tiaa¥

huoapi tptmp

2 liTor

HtOV

r

miop

hop

3 Utup

tltiip

htiP

Future, ^ow. Perfect, tiKa.

Pluperfect,

nntip.

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE

VOICES.

Present.

Ind.

Sulj.

Opu

Imp.

InC

1 UfiM

Uiuai

hififiv,

iolfitiP

♦

Ua&ai

2 ttaa^Jfj

ifl

Iho,

Xoio

Xiao, Xov

3 i:*ia*

iiJTat

tflTO,

Xoito

Ua&ta

Ftet.

d&C.

6lc.

6lc.

&C.

6lc.

Untpog

Imperfect.

AORIST

[I. Middle.

Ind.

Subi.

Opt. Imp.

lot

1 ifVipr

2 Uao, lov

fiao

olo ov

ta&ok

3 ?eTo

tiro

oho ta&tt

FuL

&c.

6lc.

6lc.

&,C. 6lc.

fytpog

Fut. Mid. liaoftat. 1 Aor. Mid

. ^xafAfiP. Perf. cf/4

M. Plup

s.

ilXfitip. Aor. Pass. tX&ijp. Fut. Pass, k^^aofiai.

Digitized

by Google

II 55. J YE&BS IN -^i. 71

H SS. 8. ElfAij to be.

Present.

Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. iii£

S. 1 eifAl «i etrip dvtu

3 iatl ]j itii Itftw (^7co/

P. 1 iafUP wfiip itrifjitv^ iJfiiP Part.

2 iori itB itriti^ alrt cart wy

3 fia/ ' mat i fijaay, clfy ItfTOKray) ovaa

foTikir, oiraiy oy

D« 2 iotov f^xop ttriTOP^ shop tat op ortog

3 u>J7i}y, cfrijy Itfioiy oSafig

Imperfect. Future.

Ind. Opt. Inf.

S. 1 nr, n, iffif^p taofiai • iaoifiiiP lafat^o*

2 ii;, i}a^a laijt caei iooio

3 i^y ftarEai,laTO(» saoiio Part.

P* 1 fuup iaofit^a iaolfii&a iaofitPog

2 nrc, ^ait $ota^B tooui^B iaouhti

3 ^aay tisovxak taoiPto iaofiipop

D. 2 ijioy, i^aror laeai^oy laoia&op

3 ^T^y, ^unjr daola&tip

JhAlMCtlO FOBMB.

Prbsebtt.

Ind. Subj. Imp. Part
S. I If^iD. a 1 U L S. 2 f#«» f##« P. U, Uft
S i2f I. i2t» E. i]i£ F. Uv0M L

U#<F. 3 J#<E. liMfE. Ur#«D.

S IfW D. !«#« E. ij;^^ E, iZ^» D.

P. 1 i/^if L P. 1 if*u D. f^^,y p. f^« D.
•V*tf D. 3 i»00t L Ifuf^tuu £. JE. N. Uf L

*^^»P« Opt iS/KifD. Gen.

« i»ri D. g. s f7iir/« P. iT^t D. «m-w L

^^' ^ fMf» 3 f « L i7/M»M D. i^M-^f D.

Impbbfbct.

a 1 f«» B. a s Uf P. a 3 fn* i. p. s fr«» i. p.

!«• E. f«W« E. ^Tf D. Irr«» P.

f#»«f It f«r !• f#«i It frs«f It

U L 8 4«» E. P. 1 V D. f«r«» L

|« I. <f(0 1. 8 I«rt L i7«r« E.

Digitized by VjOOQIC

70

TABLES.

[1154

S.

TL 44. Verbs iN-^nt. 7. "/i^^i, to send.

ACTIVE VOICE.

Present.

Opt

Ulfig
Ulfi

UllJfltP, UlfiBP

UlritB, ItUt

UlriOar, itttr

Ulritop, lettop

Uniriir, UittiP

AORIST I. AORIST [I.

nd. Sub|. Ope Imp.

• tal HtjP

• f^g Hfjg fg

lod.

ftlfig
3 tfiai

1 UfiMP

3 iaai, iua^

2 Utop
3

Imperfect.

l»(Jl%p
ifjiB

l^tOP

Inf.
Uig

trra

iitmitap, Upjkp

XSJOP

Uxup

8 I XtiP,Xovp {Uiv) vxa

2 iij^, 1:81^

3 li}, Ui

2 Ina

3 Uaap

2 IcTor

3 Utup

Future, r,aa.

^xag
fixt

ffxaftBP
vxaji

tlfiiP Wfisp

illB IITB

tlaav i»*ai

Hfi, && hut

laL
tlpa

Ftet
itg

Ind.

1 hfiM

2 Uaoi, Xri

3 i:fra»

Imperfect.

1 ItVip'

2 Xtao, Xov

8 fcTO

fia

HJOP fit OP hop

ux^lP hwp

Perfect, tlxa. Pluperfect, tXxup.
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present.

Opu
Ulfiijp, iolfiTiP
Xho,

XflTO,

AoRisT [I. Middle.
Sub). Opt Imp.
Uifia$ oX/itiP

n olo ov

fjTttt oIto fcr^ti

6lc. d&c. 6lc,

In

6lc.

Xoio
Xoito
6lo.

Imp.

Xtaot Xov
6lc.

Ind.

iifiilP

tlao

tho

Xia&ai

Put*
Ufitpog

Put*
tfiipog

Fut. Mid. ijaofiai. 1 Aor. Mid. {xa/iijy. Perf. tlfiM. Plup
fSfATiP. Aor. Pass. tX&i^p, Fut. Pass, i&^aonai.

Digitized

by Google

1I66.J

YE&BS IN -/!».

71

HSff.

Ind.

S. 1 iifil

2 ilg, d

3 iatl

P. 1 iofUP

2 ioti

3 tiol '

D. 2 ioxow
3

Subj.

Imperfect.

2 ii;, i}ai^a

3 r^p

P« 1 ijiMr

ntf , ijart
3 ^aay

D. 2 ijTor, i^arey
3 ^tfip, ^uttip

8. ^Vp,

Feesemt.

ttrixoy^ ihop
Ind.

Baot'tat
tata^op

to be.

imp.
loTia (^f 00/

lOTt

tatop

Future.
Opt.
iaolfir^p
iaoio
iaotto

iaolfit&a
sao^pto

MOtO&OP

diiolu^iiP

Iii£
tiptu

Part.

top

^

ovaa

OP

ortof
otaiig

inf.
tlaBa&a$

Part.

iaofitpog

daouBPti

iaofitpop

DiALBOIIO FOBMB.

PRBSESTT.

a 1

Ind.

a

S ilf I.

u#; p.

8 Itr/ D.
1 i/^ffL

•i^if D.

Wf P.
ft iwri D.

1 UL
tS^ E.

S ^#1 £.

f «#i B.
1 /^ff D.
3 U0t L

Opt
S tlfirim P.

Imp.
2 f #«, f r#« P.

ln£

f/MNM E*.
f^/M» P.
Iftftlteu EL JS.
JS/Mlf D.

f7/Mf D.

Uitt 3 fii I. i7/6i»«M D.

Part
M. U«L
F. U»»« L

iv#« D.
I^« D.

N. Uf L
Gen.

a 1

f«>B.
I««E.

fr»«f It

UL

i«I.

2 Iw P.

8 4iiȣ.
«i(0 I.

Impbbfbct.
a 3

fii» I.

Ir«i It
«/i»if D.
i«riL

P. S 7r«» I. P.
U^mt P.
frs«» It
!«#«» L

Digitized

by Google

12

TABLES. — TfiRBS IN -^i.

[^55 56

DiALKono F0B1I8 or tlfu, to it
FuTURB Ini>.

A. 1 I##«/mmS.

& 3 «rir«i E.

I 1 U«^ir/«P.

9UuuL

Urt^m E.

i^ri/»i^« &

IrrMuE.

lrarT«j D.

8 f rrt#^i E.

IrrjP.

UriiVci D.

S Uftfrm E.

Ur^O.

IrtVVTM P

H 36. 9. EifAif to go.

Present.

Ind.

1 ft/U

1 f/Bfy

2 Tjb

3 iSa»

Subj.

D. 2 i«o» fi^oy

Opt.

rot
Toifitr

toiT8

toitp

lOlTOP

lo/rijy

Imp.

Inf.

Part

froy
tritfy

S. 1 ^jiv^ ga (^)

2 ^ti^y jiua&a

3 .^ciCf)

Pluperfect II., or Imperfect.
P. fjttfitP^ nfttp D.

ijeiToi^, lytor

Middle {to hasten). Present, Uiiai. Imperfect, U/Atjp,

DiALBono Forms.

Present.

Ind.
a S iTf I.

P. S fJr4 P.

& 1 47«L

8 f/f L

J(tE.

& 1 iSWP.
8 7iiW« E.
S 7^1 B.
7«/Mf E.

Opt.
& S i7ii F^
hin B.

P. 1

Imperfbot.

p. 1 fofiUvE.
3 7r«v E.
^ir«» I.
^7«. K.

Inf.
7^f E. D.

7jMII«4 E.

7»mP.

D. S Truf S.

Mn>. Fat Jo/am, Aor. iW/tKv, Ep. (4 252).

Digitized

by Google

1157.]

NUDE SE1.OND AORISTS.

n

Hat. Pure Verbs, iii. Second Aorists.

I. A0RI8T U. of fialvb), to go.

8. I
2
3

P. I
8
3

D 2

S. I
2
3

P. I
2
3

D. 2
3

S. 1
2
J

P. t
2
3

D. 4
3

8 1
2
3

P 1
2
3

D. 2

lod.
ififjg

Subj.

Bflrjaav fioiat

Opt.

puhig

Imp.

pijiuip

Inf.
Pot.

2. AORIST II. 6f uTtodid^fiayrtt, to run awmf.

Ind.

anid(fag

anid(fS

antdgatfjitp

anidgntov
aiiidQUTriv

Sul§.
anoouai
anoo^ng
anodgqt
cinod(joifi(v
anod()uis

anod^tttop

Opt.
6lc.

Inf.

Ftet.

anod^ug

tyfwv
i/Vbig

iypuu

3. AoRiST II. of yiyvfaania, to kfioio.

Imp.

Iil£

yvbivat

Ptet
yrovg

Subj. Opt.

yiw yvolrji' (yrolrir)

yvwg ypoirig yratdt

yvia yvoiri y rut fa

yr^fitv yvolr/fifv, yvolftetf

yrmxt yroirjTt, yvoliB yvwrt

lyvtoaav yroaai yvolr/aavt yvoltv yvwtwaav, yvovx^p

tyvtito^ yfmtov yroltjtoVf yroi rov yvdioi'

iyvtaxriv yronjttjVf yvoirtjv yvtatbtv

AoRisT II. of 6vvta, to dith^, tif put on.

4.
ttO.
Xdvv
idvg
idv

tdfftiap
d6inf,p

Sulj.
dvftf

dvf)g

dvotfiiP
difTjTi

dvrjiop

Opt.

dvbig

dvot

dvotfifp

d volute

dvoKP

dvoiro^

dvoitfiP

dvxfa

dvtt

dvxop
9vxtA^

bifvai
Pert.

Digitized

by Google

74

TABLES.

[II 58, 59.

HffS.

S

ola&a

lad.

1 ol9a

2 oldtxg,

3 oldB

1 otdafitp, tafiw

2 o29ara, tan

3 ol^^aaiy {bJ(f»
2 otdatov, tatop

XV. (E.) Preteritive Verbs.
1. OJJa, to Amou?.

Perfect II.

tidmfiw

BidfJTB

iidmai
Pluperfect II.

Opt

Lnp.

InL

Biddr^¥

tidhai

Btdtlfiq

to^i.

BidBlfi

Xaiw

Tut

&c.

tOTB

tawaar

Bld€k

t&top 3 tatmp

fi^n

P. ^dilflBT, fJOfiSP D.

1 ^^dciy*

fjduad^a, ^dfia&a
3 i7dai(y), lyi^ fjdtaap, ^aar ^dBltfjP, paittP

Future, itaofim, eid^iaw, Aorist, Btdtiaa.

2. Jiioixa or iiiM^ to be aJraUL

Perfect II.

Pluperf. II

Ind.

Sulj;

Imp.

InC

S. 1 mia

a<d^

dtdispm idtbUip

2 Miag

d<%ff

dtdi&t

iMUiq

3 diiiB

^f%

dedixm

VbxL idtdUi

P. 1 ^€^t/iey

dedlotfitp

dtdifog ididifiBP

2 de^m

dedlfiTB

diditB

^didixB

3 dfd/ffa»

didlwat

dtdUmaap

ididiam

D. 2 m^op

dldlfJTOP

didixop

^didnop

3

dtdljiop

idsdltnr

1 Perf. dfidoiita. 1 Pluperf. idtdolxBip. FuU dklaofiat. Aor.

«(5«iaa.

^S9.

3. ''Hfiaij to sit.

Perfect.

Pluperfect.

Jbd.

Imp.

hd.

Rit.

S, 1 1JfMl$

2^aa»

r

^U&M

nfi^pitg ^np

ijao

3 i}(7Ta»

^a^«

P. 1 ^B&a

2f&B

3 4rr«»
D. 2 ^a^oir

jja^^t

iifiB&a

Sa&B

nrto

^a&OP 3^^]yf

na^maap, fiad-wp
tia&op 3 ^a^wr

Digitized

by Google

II 59, 60.]

PR£T£E1TIVE VERBS.

75

Preteritive Verbs.
4. KddTjfiui, to sit dovm.

Perfect.

Ind.
S. 1 xdd-Tifiai

2 xd&riaai

3 xd&ijiai.
P. 1 xadi^fif&a

2 xd&fnj&8

3 xd&firtai
D. 2 xd&fia&ov

3

Subj. Opt. Impi. IbL

xd^wfiat xa^olfiiiv xa&Tfad^at

xd&ij xd&oio xd^fjao

xd&ritat xd^ono xax^ria-&u Pwt

xaS(ofif&a xa&olfifda xa&i^fitvog

xd^fio&e xd^oiad^t xdd^iio&e
xd&wrtai xd&oivto xa&rja&maar, xa&i^ad-tP
xd^TiOdop xd&oia&ov xddrjo^ov
xa&oia&fiv xa^ria&iov

Pluperfect.

1 ixu'O^i^fiijVf

2 ixd&fiao^

3 ixd&r^to,

2 ixd^fia&oVf

xad^'^/ifjv
xa&rjao
xa&'ijaTO
xadr^a^op

P. 1 ixa^TJfifda,

2 ixd&TjO&f,

3 ixd&fivTO,
D. 3 fxa&r^adfip.

xadi^fAfd^a
xadrjad^B
xa&Tjrto
xa&i^a^rfif

1[ 60. K€ifjiaif to lie dovm.
Present or Perfect.

s.

Ind.

1 xBlfiai

2 xtlaai

3 xiltai

SubJ. Opt.
xioifiai xtolfir,v
xiri xioto
xdfijai xioiTO

Imp^ InL

xBto^ai
Xflao
xiia&m Pwft.

p.

1 xtlfit&a

2 xtla&B

3 xttnai,

KfiifitSa XtolfiS&tt

xdfjo&B xioia&B
xfOitviai xioiPto

xilfifvog
xita&B
xtla^oioar, xda&wf

D.

2 xtla&op
3

xiria&or xioia&op
XBolodr^v

xtia&ov
xtla&wr

Imperfect or Pluperfect.

8.

1 intlfifip

2 ixBiao

8 IxfiTO

P. ixslfieSa

BXtia^B

Bxtirro

D.

Bxtia^op
ixBla^np

Future, xbIoo/am.

Digitized

by Google

76 TABLES. -^ CBAMOBS Hf THE ROOT. [1(61

1[61. XVI. Changes in the Root

Euphonic Changes.

[S§259>a64.]

Precession

fa. of « to fl.

(b. of • and » to u
S- Csntraction.
S. Syuoo|^

4. Metathesis.

5. To avoid Double Aspiratioa.

6. Omission or Addition of ConsonanU

7. From the Omission of tlieDigamnJU

1. £to n.

S. «t0M.

8. Vario^ks Changes of «.

R Emphatic Changes.
Bt IflNGTHSiniio A Shobt Yowxl.

[««866-270.]

4. f to M.

5. r to r.

6. ttou.

#tO ««tr
ffUtSs

a to tth

I. Of •

S. (Hi

{I

II. By thb Addition of Ck>N80NANT8.
[H 271 -282.]

To Labial Roots.
To Other Roots.

«. Prefixed.
/3. Affixed.
Uniting with a

y. Palatal to form #v(rr).

J. " " c.

I. yy " t

C. Lingual " Z-

/.Labial " ?;,##.

S. Of

4.0f#

Prefixed to a Consonant
Affixed to a Consonant.
Affixed to a Vorvrel.
Prefixed, to «.

«. Without ftirther change.
fi. Vowel changed by ^rec4^
y. Vowel lengthened, [sioii
i. Metathesis.
•« Coiteonant dropped.

5. OfKr^^.X'

III. Bt Incbsjuhno the Number of Syllables.

[$$283-300.1

1. By RedupUeaium (§§ 283-286).

Proper.

Attic.

Improper.

«. In Verbs in .^m.
fi. In Verbs in -r»«.
y. In Other Verbs.

a. « and i.

/'«. Without further change,
b &» -</3. With the Insertion of ».
(^v. With a» prolonged.

«. N.

2. ^ SyOabie Affixes (§§ 287 - iJ99).

(«. To Pore Roots.
d* r» -1^. To Palatal Roots.

(y. To Lingual and Liquid
e. «#». [Boots.

f. .:.

g. Other Syllables.
8. By Exchange of Letters (§ S00>
r becoming I.

Anomalous Changes.

[I301.J

Digitized

by Google

1I«2.J

DERIVATION.

77

D. Tables of Formation.

U 63. I. Table op Derivation.

1. Fbom Verbs, denoting

1. The Action f in .«-r<, .r/4, -n, •«,
-•I (-♦»), .r#f, -•# (-•#*), -^tfj, -/«ii.

2. The ^ec* or Object^ in ./*«.

3. The Iher, in -mj, -t»j^, -t4»{^
(F. -r^iA, -rii^A, -Tgr^, -T/|,) -ii/j,

4. The F/actf, Irutrmment^ &c», in

IL Fbom Aojbotivbb, expressing
the AbatracU in -m (.»4a^ .«i«), m-ik,

A. Nouns.
IH 305-313]
III

4.

5.

Prom Otueb Nouns.
FfttrialSf in -nw (F. -r/f), -i^

(F.-r,>

Patronymics, in -IJnf, •«^ff^9
-<2»J»il (F. ."f#, -«;, -^«l)» -'Aw^
(F. .M^yff, -/wf).

Female Appellatives, in -/#, -«/y^
-•Me, -wf& {-rr&)*
Diminutives, in -r«» (-1^i«», -l^i««t

'*X*1i -'i**^» 'UXkif, -tXoft &C
AugmentcUiveSf in •«*, -«»<«, -«^

B. ADjEcnyss.

[§§ 314-316.]

L FiMMC Verbs ; in Knit, -rn^J*/, I patrial ; .^ig, -i^^, .if^, -ItXist,

MM ; -IffMf , fitness ; -d^ist -as, &'c | quality,

n. From Nouns ; in -ra; (-«i«f, •!/«{, i III. From Adjectives and Ad-

-•f«f , -ytff , -V40;)» belonging to ; 'Xnit, TERBS.

•»««, •««««, -«'»«f> relating to; -<•«, | 1. As from Nonns.

'iftt -«»t material; ^mi (t), <>ir« 8. Strengthened Forms ; Ck>Bft*

9r |imNifaic» ; .o*f, -nMf, -«v«f, I parative. Superlative.

0. Pronouns.
^ 11317.]

D. Vbbbs.
rH 318, 319.)

L From Nouns and Adjechves;
in 4», -f VM, ^4», Id fe or efo ; -«*>,
.«i»M, 4mv, to moAe; .i^*>, Me^«s
fnu/uliM, oc^roe, &e. ; -m with penolt
strengthened, active, &e.

E. Adverbs.

(U 320-322.]

n. From Other Verbs; in -^Im^
-met, •««, deuderathe; -^*>, -r»»^
&c, frequentative, intensive, me^
five, c&nmutive, &c.

I OnuQUB Cases of Nouns and
AugutonvBS.

1. Genitives, in -fit, place whence i

-,90^ place where; -nst &0.

S« JDoftVMi in .»i, '•il, -neJ, 'A«X,

♦ place where; -ii, -«, -«/, -T, way,

pUve where, time when ; &c.

3. Accusatives, especially Neut.

Sing, aud IMur. of Adjec-

IL DERrVATIVES SIQNIFTINO

1. Manner, in -ivf, .ff^«t, -in, 4«%
•aitif, -^Of -A -«'» -*•

2. TtfM tt^A^n, in •««, -Ts*.

3. F/ace whither, in .#i.

4. Number, in •«»/;.

in. PRttlNlSmONS WTTH THEIR CaSBIL

IV." Dkrivath'es from Preposi-
tions, or Pkkpiwitions

OUT CAMfcS.

Digitized

by Google

73 TABLES. [U 631

5T 63. II. Pronominal

[Obsolete Primitives are printed ia capital*
Negative. Relative.

> •

r

Q

£

Orders, L U. lU, TV. V. VL

Interrog. Indef. Objective. Subjective. Definite. Indefinite

Positive, rii i r)f, #tfT/f, fi^TtSy h, ?•"«*,

no2 1 no2, cvh'if, f^Ms, 'onos,

»v^aftisf fAfihafAOf,

Compar., irirt^ts t 9^•r^^os, •wJiTif**, fAnHnfof, Mrt^$s^

Superl., v'irrcf i Mrr»t,

Quantity, «•**•«# i «••••« j, •rot, Mrf,

Udrtoff

Quality, m'oTof i ^roiiff oitriiavif, Mt, W^t,

Age, Size, wmXtKot \ iikiMs, iv^Xitui,

Country, iroiav'it t ««'«^««'/r.

Day, wo^Ttitot i i^ot^ratH

Whence, wfl^ivi w**^!*, fi^^oStty «^fv, wriitf^

Wliere, sr*? i flr^v, ftv^rav, oSt Met, twu,

0vhct»OVt fAnhetfAOV, irtt^OVj

Whither, «'mi wa/, ftn^a/Atltt •!, Wt^

I a. Way, or w-jf i «^, oS^ift y^ X«^,

^ Place where, •vliv'if,

^ «'««'«;)^^l ^thetftl^t fifUnfA^ i^»XVi ^•'••'•aA

3. Manner, frSf i «■«!;, «^ir4wf, f^nvts, if, t^rmi,

cviec/Atisf fAijheifii£sf

olttf, •«'«/«#,

9'og'axSt I [«•», [«••», Uax'^h

trS I «*«, tt^vAr, «v2i. fifi^ttf fjiniim

General, «'«ri i watI, olhrtrt, /Kit9'0rt, 7n, isrirtf

Specific, ttn/tiui % hintt^ lwmf»^

Various, ^n/Aot i ^A««*» ^•'•'t «*»V**'>

tats, i<p(», •

6. Number, «'0«'4^»«f i §^ifdMiif l^AxiSt ittordma.

i'

Dertvativb N0DN8. m'tvoTtift v9i0Tfit^ 9'irX/x0r*ir, tvietfuvirns, hr»iimi
In^irnft Irt^oiirnst ifAnornt, <V«Tiff, iri^a/ftf, iftotato'tt, ifuftf, etWoittta, &0.

digitized

by Google

1163.J

PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES.

79

Correlatives.

Pbetle and Dialeaic Fonna ara not markad.]

Deflnita or Demonstrativa. UnivarsaL

vn. vm. IX. X XL

SImpIa. Emphatic Deictic. Dlitributiva. OoUactira.
T02, imMt, Af»^^,

[ruffif.

Ttftif T^tVT9t%

veiAu

TMty rttwr0f.

rMt%,

WMfTMt,

i»tiws.

.mXinUU,

TffriV) awfiviVi

Uirr0/f»,

«'«fr0/iv.

tvitv, IvrifViy,

i»^i4i,

U«rr«;^0^iv

, Wtfvrtf;^^^!*,

UfiVif,

l»iin^#»v.

WJe«#.t,

Utiri^ar^iv,

iift,^»r%^»0iiu

M«, lmS#«,

Iv/i^i,

Uu,

^

l»«rr«;);«^

9'»v'rmx»»,

rH^

l»«rri^/,^

weitrittt

\»u9i,

&««rr«;^0^<,

9»9Taxitt,

Iri^^H

U-riH*.

kt^M^mi^

\fia$^ Xwrmwiu,

Xnmerax***

wmitrmx^.

UiTn,

irmvriri.

lrs^«»n.

•MU9y,

rmSr^ ry^

rt^mttrmxSti
r«rt.

Itut^mxp, 9'»frttx?*

xiL xm.

Of Like- Of Idantl-
neaa, and ty, Diranl
Equality, ty, 4ec.

AXXmxiStn

kkXitu
kXXMxi^i*

iftw,

'a*?.

IXXmxf.

ifuif, mSrmt*
ifftatf, kXXiimi*

DsBXYATivv Verbs. «'«r««, «^vMf, Irt^iitt (fW>m !«(•*•;, omitted
■bore), ifttittj iV«», AkXssiet, •v^ivi^«#, Aftftrtd^h Umti^Sm, AXA^rw, &C.

Digitized

by Google

BO T4BLE9. n S^

III. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.

IT 04* I. An Apposititk agrees in ease with its subject § 331.

II. The Subject of a finite ybrb is put in the Nominative. § 349.

III. Substantives indepenoent of grammatical comstkuction art
put in the Nominative. § 343.

General Rule for the Genitive. The Point of Departure and
THE Cause are put in the Gemi-^'ve. § 345.

fV Words of separation and distinction govern the Genitive. § 346

V. The comparative degree governs tl^e Genitive. § 351.

VI. The origin, source, and material are put in the GenitiTe. § 355

VII. The theme of discourse or of thought is put in the Genitive.
1356.

VIII. Words of PLENTY and want govern the Genitive. §357.

IX. The whole of which a part is taken is put in the Genitive
I 358.

X. Words of SHARING and touch govern the Genitive. § 3G7.

XL The motive, reason, and sud ir view are put i^ th% Genitiv«
I 372.
XII Price, value, merit, and crime are put in the Genitive. § 374.

XIII. Words of SENSATION and of mental state or action guvera
the Genitive. § 375.

XIV. The TIME and place in which are put in the Genitive. § 378.

XV. The AUTHOR, AGENT, and giver are put in the Genitive. § 386L

XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING OR PROPERTY is put iu the Gen-
itive. § 382.

General Rule for the Dative Objective. The Object of Ap-
proach AND OF Influence is put in the Dative ; or. An Indirect
Object is put in the Dative. § 397.

XVU. Words of nearness and likeness govern the Dative § 398.

XYIII. The OBJECT OF influence is put in the Dative. § 401.

General Rul» for the Dative Residual. An Attendant Thivg
OK Circumstance, simply viewed as such, is put in tb« Dativ^.
§414.

XIX. The MEANS and mode are put in the DatiTf* § 415.

XX. The TIME and place at which are put in the Dative. § 420.
General Rule for the Accusative. An Aojuect expkessino

Direct Limit is put in the Accusative. § 422.

XX-I. The DIRECT OBJECT and the effect of an action are put in the
Accusative. § 423.

Advrbbs op swearino are followed by the Accusative. % 496.

Oausativbs govern the Accusative together with the case of the includsd verb, f 430l
The aame verb often governs two acci»ativb8, which may be, — (I.) The birboi
OBJBOT and the bfprct in apposition with eachoiher: as with verbs of moJb'n^, appoint*
ing, ehooHngf eateeming^ naming, A^. — (IT ) The dirbct objbct and the effect, not
hi anpo9ition; as with verbs of tSoing, saying^ ice. — (HI.) Two objects diSbrently re-
lated, but which are both reirarded as niRBCx; as with vertw ofuy^kinv and rtquiringt of
WqfWwf ^d unclothing, of nonMoUng and aeptiving^ of persuading and isaching^ iw.
ff 4M — 496.

Digitized

by Google

PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 81

XXIi An adjttiiGt applying a word or expression to a r^RTiciiLAm
f ART, PROPERTY, THING, or PERSON, is put in the Accusative. § 437.
XXIil. Extent of tims and space is put in the Accusative. § 439.

XXIV. The Accusative is often used apverbially, to express d«-

eRER, MANNER, ORDER, &C. § 440.

XXV. The CoMPELLATivE of a sentence is put in the Vocative. § 442.

XXVI. An Adjective agrees with its subject in gender^ number j and
ease. § 444.

XXVII. The A&TiCLX is prefixed to sobstantives, to mark them ai
definUe. § 469.

XX VIII. A PRONOUN agrees with its subject in gender ^ number, and
ftretm. | 494.

The RBLATiVB eammanly takes the ease pf the antecedent, when the AirTBOBin»T la a
Genitive or Dative, and ihe r^jltivb would properly be an Aectuative defending upon
a verb. S 586.

XXIX. A Verb agrees with its subject in number and person. § 543.

The Nbtttbr Plural has its vbrb in the singular. $ 549.

The Passive Voicb has for its subject an object of the ilc/iue, commonly ^direct,
but sometimes an indirect object. Any other word governed by the Active remains un^
changed with the Passive. The subject op the Actitb is commonly expressed, witk
the nssive, by the Genitive tnth a preposition. § 663.

An .Minn I. r.nm.*nt«<l hv th« \ Definite Tonses, as (a.) eontinuid or prolonged ^
An action is represented by the J j^^^ ^ ^^^ momentary or tranwnt,

Sib.) a habit or continued course of conduct; (c.) doing at the time of, or untA tn^
} (6. ) a single act ; <c. ) simply doTie in its own time ;

S other action ; (d.) begun, attempted^ or designed; (c.) introductory. ) ,, KTn^sJd,
i {d.)aecomplished; {e.) conclusive. ^ ^^" **^*

The generic Aorist often supplies the place of the specific Perfect and PiupeiAct
1580.

The XioiCATiVB expresses the actual; the Subjunctive and Optative, the contingent,
1587.

Prbsbnt continobmct is expressed by the primary tenses ; past coivtinobnct, by tlM
s^ondary. i SSQ.

The Sttbjunctivb. for the most part, follows the primary tenses ; and the Optativ%
the itfcondary. S 592.

Suftposition oh fact is expressed by the appiopriate tense of the Indicative ; supposi'
twn fhnt may hpcomf fact, by llie Subjunctive; supposition ttithout regard to fact, by
t1»e Optative: and supposition contrary to fact, by the past lensea of the indicative.

Tlie OpTATivB is the distinct mode appropriate U» the oratio obliqua in past time. 5 608.

XXX. The Infinitive is construed as a neuter noun. § 620.

The iNPiNrriVB often forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutaHon, exdm-
mti/ion, or question. $ <J26.

XXXI. The Subject of the Infinitive is put in the Accusatim,

XXXII. A PARTICIPLE AND SUB5TANTIVF. are put absolute in the 6fei»
kive; an impersonal participi.k, in the Accusative. § 638.

The Iktrrjbction is independent of grammatical construction. § 645.

XXXIII. Ai»VERB8 modify sentences, phrases, and words; particularly
ierbsy adjectives, and other adverbs. § 64o.

XXXIV. Prkpositions govern substantives in the oblique cases, and
mmtk their relations. § 648.

XXXV. Conjunctions connect sentences and like parts of a sentence

Digitized

by Google

83 TABLBS. [II (

IV. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING.
11 eS. A. Op Words.

ba

Ooimnon

Proper

Abstract

Collective

Irregular

Nouvof the

^ Comm. J

(*^)'[^::Snror-.l«~'-

IToin.
Gen.
^ Affix---; tlM Dst.
Aoc
Voc

Sing.
Plur.
Dnal

}

the subject of — ,
governed by — ,
the Gen. of — ^
the Dat of — ^
^the Ace of — f Ac,

" Rale. JUmarki,

P09 ">

— — is an AiiJBOTiyB [in the Comp. >• Degree, from — . .— — . («om|mv«V
Sup. )

•r2| Termination. (^«»e);[^;^;^^^^ Root -, Affix ..

,) Sing.) Masc )
Y Phir. y Fern. ^ ;
) Dual) Neut. )

^Nora.
^Gen.

(&0.

agreeing with — \ .

used substantively, &c.) *

Rule. JbtMrii.

Personal "|

Reflexive I H

— is a Relative ( Proitoun, of the 2 >• Pers. i- , ttom — — — (di»>
&c. J S)

Article
r-Tk • A !> n Norn.) Sing.) Masc.)

rthe subject of — ^, ) Q K* t >

^governed by , ^ Rule. [It refers to — as its A^^e„. k Rule;

(agreeing with — , &c.,) '

■nd connects — to — .] RemafkM.

•is a

Transitive Verb,
Intransitive "
Deponent **
Barytone **
Contract "
Verb in /m, &c., .

from

-(->^)» KSS-

Digitized

by Google

1F6a.j

FORKS or ANALYSIS.

rlj i^--}' CP««x T.] ^ -' «- a

{wary and
mileet);

Bole.

.11

Act
Hid.
Paas.

Pros. 1 Ind.
Impf. Sabj.
Fut. 1 Opt
Fut Imp.
1 Aor. Inf.
&c J Part _
_ Sing.)

(if/nite) the 2>- P«n. Phir.S- , agneing with — ,
S) Dual)

(if Inf.) having for ite .abject -, and {f^g^^ ^

(ir /•art) the gT'I Rufil ^l ; "^Jf^"!;^^ "? .

^ &c ) Dual) Neut) ««^~b«tantovely, Ac,

1

Pes. )
, [in the Comp. > Dt*
Sup. )

Interrogatiye ^ Place

Indefinite I Time

■ is an Demonstrative V Advbbb of Manner

Complementary I ' Order

Ac J &c.

le&ra to — at its antecedent and connects — to — .] JUtmark$.

its relation to — , Rule. Remarks.

Copulatiye "j

. . Conditional I n^^r^w^^^^ p)erived from — , ] ..^..^^

» • Complementary f Cc»-^<^oir, ^Compounded of -,j «"""**•

&c J

ing — to — i Rule. Remarks.

is an lOTEiuEcrioN, [^^^^ o7'- j "* ^^^P~^* ^^ «™-

matical construction \ § 645). Remarks.

Noma (a) When dec/ension in./W{ is not desired, gire the Nom. and Gen. In Sub
■tantires and in Adjectiras of I Term., and the diflerent forms of the Nom. in Adjeaivas
of 9 or 8 Term. (6) In eot^ugating, gire the Theme, with the corresponding Put. and
PerC (if hi use), to which it is also well to add the 3 Aor. If used, (e) The term
**i»ry " is used abora in a specific sense, to denote giving the different modes ^f a
fense, or, as it Is sometimes called, giving the synopsis of the tense; and the term "<»>
Jlcel," to denote giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declensionf of
course, takes the plhce of this), (d) After completing the formula abore, which, to
aroid confusion and consequent omission or delay, sliould always be giren in the pro*
•eribad order, add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the form, signiJicaOon,
and tiss of the word ; as, hi respect to contraction, euphonic changes of consonants,
Uteral or figurative senss, the force or use of the number, case, degree, reice, modi^
tansa, Jbc. ; citins, from the Orammar, the appropriate rule, remarlc, or note, (e) SosM
particulars in thv forms aljoye, which du not apply to ail wordd. are inclosed In brackals.

Digitized

by Google

M TABLES. ANALYSIS. [H 66) 97

1I66» B. Of Sentences.

\ followf og Iqr ample ■nccwioo.

SBubstantiTe
Adject ine.
Adrerb. «

IL Ana/^«e <A£ Sentence into tte Logieai mnd Orommatteal Divm&nat ii» Primary
and Secondary Parte, jfc.

Compellative ) ««,«i* > ^*>»'

Thf Logical SuWact S it , eontaiaing the cUSpSaad ( Gtammellcri Sub-

AdjectiTS n

pellative ; Adverb /

jna > — — , modified bj the AppoeiUr* \ <— ^ Shorn how tkme an mo^

d.cate ] Adjunct L

Dependent Clause 7

^^, and OMo/yM Subordinau or Incorporated CZoneet, «nf»l Me .^lenleiice if a^

1167. C. Of Metres,

I. CMm a gefieni/ deecription of the Metre in which the Poem. i§ tpnflen.
IL Deeeribe the particular Veree,

Iambic ) Monometer ) Acatalectic ) 1 )

It ia Dactylic > Dimeter } Cataiectic } , constatinf of 2 > Paat, wUch «f
. Ac ^ Jce, S ^Bc S ^tc )

tiMmm^ ^ Penthemlm, )
. The Caaura is the [g'™j Hepbtbttroim, 5 after

m. Analyse by [Dipodiee and] Feet.

Dactyl, ) 1 ) . ^. , Nature, )

— la a Spondee, S the 9 V Syllable |^^* \ by Position, > Salt.

Digitized

by Google

INTRODUCTION.

^ 1 • Thb Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal
races ; the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric
and the MoWc, These races spoke the same general language
but with many dialectic peculiarities.

The Ancient Greek Languaob (commonly called simply
the Greek) has been accordingly divided by grammarians into
four principal Dialects, the Attic, the Ionic, the Doric, and
the iEoLia Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most
refined, and had far the greatest unity within themselves. The
Doric and JEkAic were not only much ruder, but, as the dialects
of races widely extended, and united by no common bond of
litemture, abounded in local diversities. Some of the varieties
of the Doric or iEolic were separated from each other by dif-
ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished
them in common from the other dialects. Of the iEolic, the
principal varieties were the Lesbian, the Boeotian, and the
Thessalian. The Doric,' according as it was more or less
removed from the Attic and Ionic, was characterized as the
stricter or the milder Doric ; the former prevailing in the La-
conic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ;
the latter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian,
Rhodian, and some others.

^ 9» The Groek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and
the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the
mother country in refinement; and the first development of
Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions,
was among the Asiatic lonians. This development was Epic
Poetry, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining
to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. The language
of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric, is the old Ionic,
with those modifications and additions which a waqdering bard
8

Digitized

by Google

86 INTKODtrCTION.

would insensibly gather up, as he snmg from city to city,
and those poetic menses which are always allowed to early
minstrelsy, when as yet the language is unfixed, and critics are
unknown. Epic poetry was followed in Ionia by the Elegiac
of which Callinus of Ephesus and Mimnermus of Colophon
were two great masters ; and this again by Ionic Prose, If
which the two principal names are Herodotus and Hippocrateb,
who chose this refined dialect, although themselves of Doric
descent. In distinction from the Old Ionic of the Epic poets
the language of the Elegiac poets may be termed the Middle
Ionic, and that of the prose-writers, the New Ionic.

§ 3. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera
ture was the .£olic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains ot
Alcaeus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short-
lived, and we have scarce any thing remaining of the dialect
except some brief fragments. There arose later among the
iEolians of Boeotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which
Pindar was the most illustrious ornament; As writing, however
for the public festivals of Greece, he rejected the peculiarities
of his rude native tongue, and wrote in a dialect of which the
basis consisted of words and forms common to the Doric and
iEolic, but which was greatly enriched from the now universal-
ly familiar Epic. He is commonly said, but loosely, to have
written in the Doric.

§ 4« Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race,
were gradually rising to suQh political and commercial impor-
tance, and to such intellectual preeminence among the states
of Greece, that their dialect, adorned by such dramatists as
iEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and Menander,
by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon, by such phi-
losophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such orators as Lysias
iEschines, and Demosthenes, became at length the standard
language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted by the edu-
cated classes in all the states. It became the general medium
of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, which will be here-
af,er noticed, the universal language of composition. This
diffusion of the Attic dialect was especially promoted by tlie
conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it as their court
language. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its
peculiarities, and received many additions ; and thus diffused
and modified, it ceased to be regarded as the language of a
particular state, and received the appellation of the Common
Dialect or Language.

The Attic- and Common dialects, therefore, do not differ in

Digitized by VjOOQIC

DIALECTS. 8^

any eflsential feature, and may properly be regarded, the one
as the earlier and pure, the other as the later and impure, form
of the same dialect. In this dialect, either in its earlier or
later form, we find wn'tten nearly the whole that remains to us
of ancient Greek liten^ture. It may claim therefore to be re-
garded, notwithstanding a few splendid compositions in the
other dialects, as the national language of Greece ; and its
acquisition should form the commencement and the basis of
Greek study.

The pure Attic has been divided into three periods ; the 0/rf,
used by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes; the
Middle, used by Xenophon and Plato ; and the New, used by
the Orators and the later Comedians. The period of the Com-
mon dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjec-
tion of Athens to the Macedonians.

§ •!• Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent,
we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our
knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon-
uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it-
self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch
of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the* more refined Dorian
colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by
the Pythagoreans { Archytas, Timeeus, &c.), in Mathematics by
the great Archimedes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his
successors, and in Pastoral Poetry by Theocritus, Bion, and
Moschus.

§ O* To the universality acquired by the Attic dialect, an
exception must be made in poetry. Here the later writers felt
constrained to imitate the language of the great early models.
The Epic poet never felt at liberty to depart from the dialect
of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic language was regarded by
subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred tongue, the
language of the gods, from which they might enrich their sev-
eral compositions. The iEolic and Doric held such a place in
Lyric Poetry, that even upon the Attic stage an ^olo-Doric
hue was given to the lyric portions by the use of the long of,
which formed so marked a characteristic of those dialects, and
which, by its openness of sound, was so favorable to musical
effect. Pastoral Poetry was confined to the Doric. The Dra-
matic was the only department of poetry in which the Attic
was the standard dialect.

^ 7, Grammar flourished only in the decline of the Greek
language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the die-

Digitized

by Google

88 IMTSODVCTION.

lects with litde precision. Whatever they found in the old
lonie of Homer that seemed to them more akin to the later
cultivated MoWcy Doric, or even Attic, than to the new lom'c
they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dialects. Even in the
common language, whatever appeared to them irregular or pe
culiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects, terming
the regular form x<hp6v^ common^ though perhaps this form was
either wholly unused,* or was found only as a dialectic variety
On the other hand, some critics used the appellation xoiv6<; as a
term of reproach, designating by it that which was not pure
Attic. In the following Grammar, an attempt will be made to
exhibit first and distinctly, under each head, the Greek in its
standard form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common usage ;
and af\erwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities.
It will not, however, be understood that every thing which is
ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through-
out, or is found in no other. This applies especially to the
Doric and .£olic, which, with great variety within themselves
(§1), are closely akin to each other; so that some (as Mait-
taire) have treated of both under jthe general head of Doric ;
and in the following Grammar some forms will be simply men-
tioned as Doric, that also occur in the iEolic. By the term
iEolic, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the
cultivated .^olic of Lesbos ; as the term Ionic is usually con-
fined to the language spoken (though, according to Herodotus,
with four varieties) by the lonians of Asia Minor and the adja-
cent islands.

,§ S. It remains to notice the modifications of the later
Greek. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude
and semi-barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused
some of the peculiarities of their native tongue. These are
termed Macedonic^ or, sometimes, from Alexandria, the prin-
cipal seat of Macedonian,' and indeed of later Greek culture
Alexandrine.

The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world,
was employed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and
the composition of the Christian. When so employed by na-
tive Jews, it naturally received a strong Hebrew coloring ; and,
as a Jew speaking Greek was called 'ii'U^vi ari/V ( from lUi^v/^w,
to speak Greek) ^ this form of the language has been termed the
Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical) dialect. Its pecu-
liarities naturally passed more or less into the writings of the
fathers, and through the diilusion of Christianity exerted a greai
general influence.

Digitized

by Google

DIALECTS. 89

Another influence modifying the Greek came from the lan-
guage of the Roman conquerors of the world. Of necessity,
the Greek, notwithstanding the careful compositions of such
scholars as Arrian, Lucian, and iElian, and the precepts of a
class of critics, called Atticists, was continually becoming more
and more impure. The lai^guage of the By^^antine pejriod was
especially degenerate. Since the destruction of the . Eastern
Empire by the Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Eccle-
siastical Greek with the popular dialects of the different dis-
tricts and islands of Greeoe has produced the Modern Greek,
or, as it is often called, by a name derived from the Roman
Empire in the East, Romaic This language has been es-
pecially cultivated and refined within the present century, and
has now a large body of original and translated literature.

§ O. Tlie Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has never
ceased to be a living language ; and it offers to the student a
series of compositions, not only including many of the highest
productions of genius, but e^^tending through a period of nearly
duree thousand years.

Digitized

byGoo^e

BOOK I.

ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.

JBKhylus, Prom. ViosU

CHAPTER 1.

« CHABiLCTEBS.

[inr I, 2.)

^ lO. The Greek language is written with
tu^nty-four letters, two breathings, three accents^
four marks of punctuation, and a few other char-
acters.

1. For the Letters, see Table, f I.

Remarks. 1. Double Forms. Sigma final is written q\
not finals a ; as, axaa^q. In compound words, some editors,
without authority from manuscripts, use g at the end of each
component word ; thus, n^ogtiggfigtui. The other double forms
are used indifferently ; as, ^ovg or 6ovq

2. Ligatures. Two or more letters are often united, except
in recent editions, uito one character, called a ligature (liga-
tura, tie) ; as, j^ for xal^ 8 for ov, cS* for a^, ^ (named ail or
atlyfia) for or. For a list of the principal ligatures, see Table,

512.

§ 1 1. 3. Numeral Power. To denote numbers under a
thousand, the Greeks employed the letters of the alphabet, as
exhibited in the table, with die mark ( ' ) over them ; as, a 1,
*' 10, */r 12, Q%y 123. The first eight letters, with Vau, rep-
resented the nine units ; the next eight, with Koppa, the nine
tens ; and the last eight, with Sampi, the nine hundreds. The
thousands were denoted by the same letters with the mark be*
necUh ' as, «' 5, / 5,000, x/ 23, x^y or *^ 23,000, ^atufti 1841.

Digitized

by Google

r

CH. l.J LETTERS. — BREATHINGS. 9l

Konm. «. Tan, in its usual small fbrm (r\ resembles tbe figature for #v
(§ 10). Henoe some editors coofoond them, and employ 2T, as the lai^ge form
if Van, to denote 6.

/3. Sometimes the Greek letters, like onr own, denote ordinal numbers, ao-
eording to their own order in the alphabet, ta this way the books of Homer
are marked; as, 'Du^dtr, A, Z, H, TAe Iliady Books /., F/., XXIV,

y. Another method of writing numerals occmv in old inscriptions, by which
1 denotes one, n (for Iltvrf) /m, A (for Aixa) ton, H (for Htx«r0v, § 22. «)
a hundred^ X (for XiXtu) a thouaaad^ M (for tUv^toi) ten thousand, 11 drawn
around another numeral multiplies it by five. Thu^, BiXX^H^ AAIII
— 12,676.

^13. 4. Roman Letters. By the side of the Greek
letters in the table (U 1)) are placed the Roman letters which
take their place when Greek words are transferred into Latin
or English ; as, Kvxlwy/^ Cyclops.

Notes. «. The letter y becomes n, when fbllowed by another palatal ;
but, otherwise, g ; as, AyytXf^ Lat. angduiy £ng. angd ; ^vymeTny nfneope g
Xu^vyi^ larynx ; Ai^f »«, ^glna,

fi. The diphtiumg m becomes in Latin « ; ti, ce ; «#, { or e (before a conso-
nant almost always i) ; «(/,«; and m, yi ; as, <I>«i^^«f, Phadnu ; B«i«r/«,
BoBotia; NiiXtr, NUu$; A«^t7«f, Darim; Mii^tiff, Medea; M«(7rff, Mu$a,
EiXfiVviA, Hithjia.

A few words ending in »ta and m« are excepted ; as, fAmm^ Mma^ '^C**'h
Troia or Trofa ; so also A7«;, Ajax,

y. The improper diphthongs f, }?,**, are written in Latin simply a^e,oi
as, @f fxn, TAroce, 'Ai^n^ , HadeSy O^Jftf-r*, TAreno, ^^ ode. But in a few
compounds of ^^, f becomes or; as, r^yfiimj trag(Bdiay Eng. frc^ecfy.

}. The roM^ breathing becomes, in Latin and English, A, while the tmooth is
not written ; as,*Exr*r(, Hector^'^viy Eryx^ Ti«, Bhea (the A being placed
after the r l^ the same inaccuracy as after the w in our whUe^ pronounced
koo-Ue; since in both cases the breathing introduces the word).

^13. IL The Breathings are the Smooth or
Soft ('), and the Rough ('), also called the As-
pirate (aspiro, to breathe). The first denotes a
gentle emission of the breath, such as must precede
every initial vowel ; the second, a strong emission,
such as in English is represented by h. One of
these is placed over every initial vowelj and over
every initial or doubled g.

Notes. 1. An mitial » has always the rough breathing to assist in its
utt(>r.ince (as in English an initial long u is always preceded by the sound <^
y ; thus, Ss^ &fiti*s^ as, in English, use, pronounced yttee, union) ; except in th«
JColic dialect, and in the Epic forms Sftptts^ Sfifu or t>/«^v, t^u^i.

Digitized

by Google

93 eBABACSEBS. [book &

S. Am trnttof ^ Teqrim, fiw its pnpar vibrMioii or volfliici» • stioiig a^jdn-
tion, and is tharefore always Buu^rad with the roqg^ breathiiig; as, ^uw.
When ^ is doubled^ the first ^ has the smooth breathing^ and the second the
rough ; as, Uufpot* See § 62. /3.

8. In diphthongs (except «, y, and y), the iHeathfaig is placed over the
second yowd ; as, avris, cSt§s. See § 26.

4. In place of the rongfa breathing,. the .£olic seems oommonlj, and the
Epic often, to have used the digamma (§ 22. %\ or the smooth breaUiing. In
Homer we find the smooth for the rough particularly in words which are
strengthened in some other way ; as, ilUnA,*;, «vX«f, oZ^of^ liiXi*;, iV^^t;, for
f «iiX«f, (i>.Hy •(•Sy «Xi»f, vfiu$,

^ 1 4f HI. The Accents are the Acute ('), the
Grave ('), and the Circumflex ("or ;. For
their use, see Prosody.

^ tS. IV. The Marks of Punctuation are the
Comma ( , ), the Colon ( • ), the Period ( . ), and
the Note of Interrogation ( ; ), which has the
form of ours (?) inverted.

To these, some editors have jadicioosly added the Notb of Exclaxa*
WON ( I ).

§ 16. V. Other Characters.

1. CoRONis and Apostbophv, The martc ( * X which at the begmmng of
a word is the smooth (n-eathing^ over the mielidle is the Coroni^ (»M*rviV, oroo/^
td mark)j or mark of crasif^ and at the end^ the Apostbophb; (§ SO) ; as, r«tf-
rd fbr r« aura, &XX* \yu for aXXit \y»t,

2. The Htpodiastola (Jbir»^evX^ aeparatUm henea^i)^ or Diastoue (I/.
«irT«X«, 8eparation\ is a mark like a comma, placed^ for distinction's sake,
after some forms of the article and relative pronoun, when foUewed by the en-
clitics ri and ri ; as, |i,ri, r9,rt, 0,r«, to distingiiish them from the particles
•rt, r«Tt, ert. Some editors more wisely omit it, and merely separate the en-
clitic by a space.

3. The Hyphen, Dl^resis^ Dash, and Masks of Pabbmthbbis and
QvoTATioH are nsod in Greek as in En^sh.

4. Among the other signs nsed by critics and editors, are Brackets C ], to
faidose words of doubtful authenticity ; the Obbusk ( f or — ), to mai^
verses or words as faulty ; the Asterisk ( * ), to denote that something ii
wanting in the text ; and Marks of Quantitt, viz. ( - ), to mark a vowel
or syllable as long ; (^ ), a^ short ; ( « or " ), as either long or short.

Digitized

by Google

PRONUNCIATION,

^ IT* There are three methods of pronouncing
Greek which deserve notice; the English, the
MoD£RN Greek, and the Erasmian.

The ptommdatkm of 6v«ty language, ttom the very laws of laHgaage, is in
a continual process of change, more or less rttpid. And in respect to the Greek,
there ia full internal evidence, both that its pronunciation had materially
changed before its orthography became fixed, and that it has materially
changed since. Therefore, a» there is no art of embalming sounds, the an
dent pronunciation of the Greek can now only be inferred, and, in part, with
great uncertainty. Modem scholars have commonly pronounced it according
to the analogy of their respective languages. The English method, which has
prevailed in the schools of England and this country, confonns, in general, to
the analogy of our own tongu^ arid to our method of pronouncing the Latin.
The Modem Greek method (also called the Reuchlinian, fh)ni its distinguished
advocate, the learned Reuchlin) is that which now prevails in Greece itself.
It is given below, as exhibited in the Grammar of Sophocles. The Erasmian
method (so named from the celebrated Erasmus) is that which is most exten-
sively followed in the schools upon the continent of Europe, and which con-
forms most nearly to the prevailing analogy of the continental tongues.

Note. To avMd eonftision, the terms protraeted and abmpt are employed
below to denote what, in English orthoepy, we oommonly call Umg and Aori
sounds ; and the term ieha (ttroke^ beat\ to denote that stress of the voiei
which in English we commonly call accent. For the proper use of the terms
kmg and Aart^ and acceaiy in Greek grammar, see Prosody.

A. English Method.

^18. 1. Simple Vowels. i?, v, and « have always ih^
protracted sounds of e in metey u in iubey and o ih note ; as,
^"THfol^ tvniUy a^ctfy.

e and o have the abrupt sounds of e in let^ and o in dot ; ex<<
cept before another vowel, and at the end of a word, where
they are protracted, like e in real^ and o fn go ; as, Ac/ai, Xoyoq '
■^«o^, roog ' diy to.

a and I are, in general, sounded like a and i m English ^
when protracted, like a in hate^ and i in pine ; when abrupt,
like a in Ao^, and i in pin. At the end of a word, i always
maintains its protracted sound ; but or, except in monosyllables,
takes the indistinct sound of a in Columbia ; as, ^17^/9 leom '
stifayfMtt, (ptXla * id.

NoTPE. If « or 4 receives the idus^ whether primary or secondary, and is
foHowed by a single consonant or ^, it is protracted in the penult, but abrupt
hi any preceding syllable ; as, &yit^ ix^i^it • y^ti^trty ^<xi«r, 'ASn9m7»t. From
this rule is excepted « in any syllable preceding the penult, when the vowel of
the next syllable is 1 or 4 beforo another vowel (both without the ietus), in
which- case « is protracted ; as, «*«rU, nmtftttj yMkuf»v§fm;^m,

Digitized

by Google

94 PRONUNCIATION. [boSk I.

2. Diphthongs. The diphthongs are, for the most part
pronounced according to the prevailing sound of the same com
bmations in our own language ; c« like ei in height ^ ot like oi in
boUy VI like id in quiety av like au in aughtj sv and ijv like eu iu
Europe^ netUerj ov and cut; like ou in thou ; at is sounded like
the affirmative ay (oA-ce, the two sounds uttered with a single
impulse of the voice), and vi like whi in while. Thus, tidma
avTo/, nXtvaoijfAmi ^v|oy, &»v/Aa^ vlog,

3. Consonants. The consonants are pronounced like tlie
corresponding letters in our own alphabet, with the following
special remarks.

7, «, and x "^ always hard in sound : y heang pronooBoed like ^ in ^
(except before a palatal, where it has the sound of ii^ in iong^ § 49) ; » and x
like c in eap^ and eh in ehao$j L e. like k ; as, yiin^ &yyH (pron. aMg-^09\

S has the sharp sound of e& in Hum ; as, ^tit,

0 has the sharp sound of « in uxy ; except in the middle of a word before
^ and at the end of a word after « and «, where it sounds like z; as, rCsr«M •

r and r never have the sound of «A ; thus *Ar/« is pronounced A'^d-a^ not
^-Mt-a ; K^tTMSy Krit^'i-a$y not Kriah'-t'OM,

At the beginning of a word, | sounds like c, and ^ like « ; and, of two
cooaonants which cannot both be pronounced with ease, the first b silent ; as,
MiMfMv, ^n^it^tt^ \lr^X^fAm,7^s^ fiiiiXXin. So, in English, «e6ec, p§aim^ &c.

4. Breathings. The rotigh has the sound of A; the smooth
has no sound ; as, oqoq^ ogog. See ^ 13.

6. Ictus. The primary ictus is placed according to the fol-
lowing

RuLB. In dissyllahleSy the pentdt takes the ictus. In polp'
syllables^ the penult, if Zon^,. takes the ictus; but, \£ shorty
throws it upon the antepenult Thus, narif^, pron. pd-tiTj yqa-
V'JT*, gra-phe-te^ /Qaipsuy graph'-e'te,

KoTB. If two or more flyllables precede the primary ictus, one of these,
receives a secondary ictus, in pkuung which the ear and formation of the woil
will decide.

B. Modern Greek Method.

V ^ ^* ^ « and f are pronounced like a in father ; after the sound I
V, «f, K, M, V, vi) it is pronounced like a in peculiarity, mt like i. ««, m^
fft/, «v, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute (/i, y, 2) are pronounced
like avy «?, ew, rw, respectively ; in all other cases, like a/, c/, ec/, o/f. ^ like Ir.
y before the sounds E and I is pronounced nearly like y in yes, York; in all
other cases it is guttural, like the German g in Tag. yy and ym like n^ in
ttrongeat, yl like nar. y;^ Uke ng-h^ nearly. ) like <ft in Mot t like
e m /eOw, nearly. w like i. ii;, see «v. ?; like «. n and ^ like i.
nv, see m». S like «& in (Am. 4 like t in mocAtiM. » like A. A. like /|
before the sound I, like i? in WUlianu ft, like m. ^4- like m^i, as, S>«^f«.

Digitized

by Google

UB. l.J HISTORY OP GREEK ORTHOGRAPHT. 95

rStf pfoooimoed Smbrotthtn, pt-^ 0*^0 ^^ ^""^ ' ^^ * » I'Cfore the
aotmd ly like n in oNunu The words tm, rjiv, Iv, rv*, before a word beginniiig
with » or I, are pronounced like «-«y, viiyy ly, rvy bdbre » or | (see ytt^ y|) ;
6. g. T«v tuufivy Iv IvAi;^*^ [Hx>noanoed T«yjMu^0y, ly^vkix^ ; before «* or ^
they are pr<moanoed r*/*, r^/t, l/«, rv^ ; e« g. ro «*«# if^v, rvy ^v%^t pro*
noonoed rift^^wn^^py ^ofA^vx?* 9t like nd^ as, \mft»t pronounced indknot*
\ like » or At. « like o in porUr, m like «. •« like oo in moon. «*, f,
Hke pyV, r like « in toft ; before ^ 7, 1, ^ ^, it is sounded like ^ ; e. g.
s«r/Mf, #)3irM, S^v^m, pronoonoed »«^f, CiS^'m, ZfAv^m 1 so also at the
end of a word, rws fia^ikttt riff yif, pronounced T§v^fimrt>,ut rn^ynt, r Hke
t in /eflL » like «. v< like <. ^ like ph ot f» x ^® German aA 01
Spanish j, ^ like ps. «r and ^ like o. ««, see «v.

** Ilie roM^ breathing is silent in Modem Greek. So fiir as quantify is ooa*
oemed, all the short vowels are equivalent to the long ones. The written a«*
eent guides the stress of the vdce. The aoooit of the mcHiie, however, is
disregarded in pronunciation. But when the attracting word has the accent
on the antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary accent ; e. g. hTliw /««f|
pronounced Ii^m^mi, but kikiurMt fAt has the primary accent on the first syl*
laUe A.I, and the secondary on mrm/* — Soph. Gr. Gr^ pp. 21, 22.

C. Erasmian Method.

^ 30« The Erasmian method differs firom the En^ish chiefly in SGU4Ad-
hig m j^otracted like a in father^ t protracted like t in machme^ n like ^ in
lh§yj m» like om in onry w like om in ragout^ m like our pronoun we^ and ^ like a
softde.

mSTORT OF GREEK- ORTHOGRAPHY.

§31, That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the
Phoenician is abundantly established both by historical and by
internal evidence.'

According to common tradition, letters were first brought into Greece by
Cadmus, a Phoenician, who founded Thebes. In illustration, we give the com-
mon Hebrew alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Phoenician,
placing the corresponding Greek letters by the side. It should be remarked,
however, that the forms of the letters in both alphabets have undergone much
ehange. It will be noticed that most of the Oriental names of the letters,
when transferred to the Greek, require modification in accordance with the law
nqwcting final letters (§ 63), and that this is commonly effected by adding «•

Hebrew.

AwtaV
VXVcK.

Hebrew.

Greek.

K

Aleph

A

•

Alpha

S

Lamed

A X Lambda

3

Beth

B

c

Beta

D

Mem

M ^ Mn

1

Gimd

r

y

Gamma

J

Nun

K » Kn

T

Daletli

A

)

Delta

D

Samech

2 r Sigma

n

Ha

E

•

E(pdkm)

P

Ayfai

0*0 (micron)

1

Van

P

F

Van

fi

Pe

n •• H

?

Zayin

Z

:

Zeto

y

Tsade

S C Xi

n

Hheth

H

n

EU

p

Koi^

? Koppa

»

IVth

e

B

Theta

1

Resh

P e Rho

«

lod

I

t

lou

V

Shin

"^ San «r Sampi

3

Kaph

K

»

Kappa

n

Tau

T •• Tan

Digitized

by Google

§ 9f3. Thk borrbl^ed ^Ipfidt)^ receiydd id ttl« coiifSe tif
tiitie important modificatiohd.

«. The original Phoenidan atpiudiet bad no proper vowdi. The 6redE8|
tii«refore, employed as each those letters wbidi irere nearest akin to Towdil ,
Tis« A, E, F, H, I, and O. In ilie transition of these letters into vowds
there appears to hare been nothing arUtraij. A, as the soft or entirely open
breafthing, natoraSy passed into the most open and deepest of the vowels.
B find H, as weaker and stronger fbiins of the palatal breatMng, natnraUy
became signs of the shorter and longer sounds of the palatal vowd e ; in liktf
rtanner, the lingnal breathing I ftassed into the lingoid vovrel i, and the labial
breathing F into the labial vowel u (eompare t and y, or in some langoages
J, and also u and v or w); O appfeikrs to btfve been originally A nasal breath-
ing, and was hence employed to represent the vowel most akin to a nasal, tf.
The aspirate use of £ and F itill ccmtinaed for a pmod, yid hence tbestf
tetters whoi employed ma vowds Wke distingaished by the addition of ^TXit^
§mooA ; thus *£ i^rx«*, ^ ^TXit. It will be observed that the Ust of these
letterd, Wlieti used as a vowd, was tomewhat changed in form, and was put ate
the end of the old alphabet Th^ aspirate nse of H prevailed still fattery evefr
to the period of the highest Greek refinement, and when at length it had
yielded to the vowel use, tbe gnfmmari^ Aristophanes of Byzantium, who
flourished at the court of Alexandria, about 200 years B. C^ is said to have
divided the old character into the two marks, h for the roughj and H for the
smooth breatliing. These marks were abbreviated to »- J or *] '', and were
afterwards rounded to their present forms, * '. To the same Aristophanes has
been ascribed the first use of marks of accent and punctuation.

/3. The sibilants 2, 3, and 'Pf exchanged places hi ttih alphabet ; so that
S came a^Ster N, '^ after £1 (hence called 2«/»W,eAe 8 which Uobd nixiibPt),
and 2 after P.

y. To the Phoenician alphabet, the Greeks added the aspfantes ^ and Xy
the double consonant T, and the sign for long o, H. These new letters they
placed at the end. tn distinction the short o was now termed "0 /uz^iff
smafl O ; and the long o, ^H fiiyec^ great O, The names of the other new
letters were formed by simply adding a vowel to aid in sounding them ; thus,
<I>7, Xr, as, in English^ ^ ee,

t. In the softening of the language, the labia! breathing F, «nd also <f and
'^ which were only roughei' forms of K and S, fdl into disuse, and theses
letters were retained oiAy as numeral characters ; F and 9 ^ ^^ proper
places in the alphabet, but ^ at the end. Thus employed, they were termed
Epiaema (IrivufAtv^ gign, marK), See f 1, § 11.

F was also named firom its form the Digamma^ L e. the double gamma ;
and from its being longest retained among the .^olians, the JEalic Digamma,
It is still fouhd upbn some inscriptions and coins. In L&tin it commonly ap-
pears as tf; thus, Wthlv^ video, to «ee, F«iV«;, vinum, wine. Its restoration by
Bentley to the poems of Homer has removed so many apparent hiatuses and
irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence in the time of Homer,
though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. The general law in
respect to the disappearance of F, appears to be the following : Before a vowel
or an initial ^, ft is uauaUg dropped^ or become$ one of the common breathingt ; but
otherwise^ it usually passes into the cognate vowel v ; thus, /StfF'f * fi^F*^ fiiFif
(Lat. bovis^ hom^ boves) become (itify ^w, fiits ; but /3«Fi, fitPp^fiiF^ fisfri be-
come /5#«f, /3w», 00V, /SwW (^ 14).

Digitized

by Google

en. 2.] VOWELS. 91'

^ 33* The alphabit in its prwent complete form wu flnt adopted by
the loniane (cf. § 2), and hence termed *litfi»k y^Aptftmrm, In Attic in.
scripHons it was first used in the arehonship of Euclldes, B. C. 408.

The Greeks first wrote, like the Phoenicians, from right to left { and then
alternately from left to right and right to left (as it was termed, /3«vrrf «^ff)^y,i.e.
at the ox turns with the plough). In this mode the laws of Solon were written.
Herodotus, howeyer (II. 36), speaks of the meAod of writing from left to
right as the established cuftom of the Greeks in his time. TQl a veiy late
period the Grreeks wrote entirely in capitals,' and without marking the division
of words. The tmaU cursive character first appears in manasciipta m the
eighth oentuiy, though there is evidence d its havkijg been used eariier in thtf
transactions of common life.

That there should be great variety in the orthography of tbe ^akets re-
sults of necessity from the imst, that in each dialect wofds wws written ••
t^ ir^n pivPoaBoed. The Greeks had no 8t«n^|^ of 9r\iixignit>^ v^ U^
«eTale^99 / i^ Qommop dialect (§ 4).

CHAPTER II.

VOWELS.
(IT 81

<^ SI4. The Greek has Jive simple vowels^ and
seven diphthongs. Each of the ^mple vowels. may
be either long or short, and each of the diphthongs
may have either a long or short prepositive, or first
vowel.

REMARKS. 1. Of three vowels, the long {iiul short flowidg
are represented by the same letters (a, a ; T, r ; v^v); but of
the other two, by different letters (I, ^ ; o, «?).

NoTBB. m. The long sounds of these two voweb occur fkt more fteqnently
than those of the other three, and are hence distinguished by separate char>
acters.

fi. When speaking of letters, and not of sounds, we say that the Greek
has seven vowels ; and call i and s the fhort voweUy because they always ivp-
resent short sounds, « and « the long vowels^ because they always represent
long sounds, and «, i, and 0, the doubtful voweU, because their Ibnn leaves «.
doobtfal whether the sound Is long or shorC

y. There is strong evidence, that. In general, these vowels w^re pronounced
in the same manner as the corresponding vowels are now pronounced upon the
continent of Europe ;!.&«, like a m father^ waUj ftm (not as |n hat$) ; 9f h
like e in they, then (not as in mete) ; t like t in machitu, pin (not as in pine) ;
t0y •, like o hi note, not; v like « in tube, bull. They wUl hence be thus pUoed
9peo ttm tctilt of prtetfman or c<<«ntMrfK>».

Digitized

by Google

Scale of •tt^^.^ ^ •

^^"^^^bytheBpt. * Qpemng.

In genera], % i, and • are termed tibe opea, and p and « !!»• c&w TOfweia
but m b mom open than f and «, and i is aomewhat doaer than m,

§ 9S. 2. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes
from a more open to a closer sound ; and the subjunctive, or
last vowel is always i or v. Hence the combinsftions possible
are only seven^ or, counting separately the proper and unproper
diphthongs, fourteen. Of these, atv scarcely occurs, except m
the Ionic dialect.

A Aort prepositive left time fbr the foil ntteranoe of the sabjoncttve vowel,
and the diphthong was then termed proper^ as really comlnning two aoonds;
tmt a kmg prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the sound of the subjunc-
tive, and tiie diphthong was then termed improper^ as thou^ diphthongal
aoly in appearance.

3. AAer « long, 17, and w, the subjunctive 1 so lost its sound,
that it was at last merely written beneath the prepositive, if
this was a small letter, and was then termed iota subscript (sub-
scriptus, written beneath). With capitals, it still remains in the
line, but is not sounded. Thus, '^Aidtjg or adtig^ pron. Hades^
"Hidfi or jjdfi^ idi ; *Jltdrl or ^^if, ode.

Notes, m. The t subscript is often written where it does not belong, ftom
(Use views of etymology ; as in the Epic dative Sv^^<, for Bv^ti^t (f 8);
and in the aorist of liquid verbs, which have «i in the penult of the theme ;

tfanS, from ^/y«r, «7^«r (rootS ^r-, «^), I^JfMt, pfetj «^«r, for l^ffM, fT^s, &^ •

•0 Perfl n. «'i^^y«t, for vi^mr*.

/3. In some cases the best critics diffisr : thus, in the infinitive of verbs in
-dm^ some write T«^f », as contracted from ti^iCmv, and others r<^y, as con-
tracted from an older form rtf^Uu So in the adverbial forms vjf, Urif^ or «^
Tr«, and the like.

$ 96. 4. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned
(^, 17, and ^), the breathings and accents are written over the
second vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels
as, avTij, herself but avj^^ cry; ^Wa, but ijiJae • aXqiaiq (a)
but "Aidng (o).

If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced separately
the second is nuu^ced with a diieresU (§ 16. 3) ; as, kvrl^ HS^t.

' For a full exhibition of the Greek vowels, simple ana

Digitized by VjOOQIC

CH. 2.] PLECESSION OF VOWELS. 99

compoond, see the Table (ff 3). They are there divided into
classes^ according to the simple sound which is their sole or
leadnig element, as A sounds^ &c. ; and into orders, according
to the length of this sound, or its combination with other sounds,
as short vowels, &c. The classes are arranged according to
the openness of the vowel from which they are named. Vow-
els belonging to the same class are termed cognate,

^ 3T. The Greek vowels are subject to a
great number of Euphonic Changes, which may
be referred, for the most part, to two great heads,
the PRECFifisiON OF VowELS, and the Union of
Syllables.

These changes diminish the effort in speaking, by reducing the Tdmne of
Bonnd employed, or by preventing hiatus, and lessening the number of eyh

I. Precession of Vowels.

^38. The great tendency m Greek to the pre-
cession or attenuation of vowel sounds shows it-
self,

1.) In the change of simple vowels.

Precession especially aflTects or, as the most open of the
vowels, changing it, when short, to e and o, and, when long,
to 1}, and sometimes to o).

Henoe these three Vowels may be regarded a^ kindred^ and are often inter-
changed in the formation and inflection of words. Thus, in the verbs r^i.
WM, rr^i^«r, we find the root in three forms, r^av-^ ^(^^'^ ^^ ^t^^'y ^'*'i»<p-j
rr^i^-, and rr^«^- ; and in pnyvvfu, we find the forms ^ety-, pfiy-, and ptity-*
This interchange is also illustrated by the connecting vowels inserted, for the
sake of euphony, in the inflection of words. Thus, in the first declension,
the connecting vowel is «, but in the second, «, for which in one case • ap-
pears. In the indicative active, the connecting vowel in the aorist and per«
feet is » (passing, however, into i in the 3d pers. sing. ; compare the imper-
ative /3«vXsvr0v), while in the present, imperfect, and future, it is • before a
liquid, but otherwise u

^39. 2.) In the lengthening of the short vow-
els, and in the general laws of contraction. Thus,

a. The long vowel is regarded as the short vowel doubled
that is, ff = aa, i} = e; , w = oo, v = vv, and r = u. When-
ever, therefore, in the formation of words, a short vowel is
lenicthened, or two short vowels of the same class are uniie<*

digitized

by Google

100 VOWELS. [book 1

in sound, the corresponding long vowel ought to result. Bu
through precession, which especially afieets the long opec
vowels, «, unless it follows «, £« ^, or qo^ is usually length*
ened, not to a, but to the closer 17, and $e and 00 commonly
form, not rj and ai, but the closer diphthongs n and ov, whiok
are hence termed the corresponding diphthongs of t and o.

/?. Contraction more frequently exhibits some attenuation of
vowel sound. See §§31-87. This naturally appears less in
the earlier than in the later contractions* Compare fiaadiii
with ^aoiXng (§ 37. 2).

l^OTE. A similar tendency to pqw from $■ more open to a dosor aowad ap*-
pears in the general law for the formation of diphthongs (§ 25. 2).

II. Union of Syllables.

^ 30, The most important changes belonging
to this head ai«, A. Contraction, which miites
two successive vowels in the same word ; B. Cra-
sis (^xgdaiSj mingling)^ which unites the final and
initial vowels of successive words ; and C. Apos-
trophe or Elision, which simply drops a final
vowel before a word beginning with a vowel.

In poetry, imo yimtla are often onited In pronundation, which are written
separately. Thid imion is termed tynize$i$ (jrwUfin^tt-, fUnmg *o§Atr\ er lyn-

I

A, COJTTKACTION.

^31. Contraction takes place in three ways ; by simple
union, by absorption^ and by union with precession. From the
law of diphthongs (§ 25. 2), two vowels can unite without
change only when the latter is i or v, and the former a more
open vowel. In other cases, therefore, either one of the vow-
els is absorbed^ i. e. simply lost in the other, which, if before
short, now of course becomes long ; or else precession takes
place, changing one of the vowels to « or v, which then forms
a diphthong with the other vowel. The following are the gen-
eral rules of contraction, with the principal cases belonging t»
each, and the prominent exceptions.

Note. An <, when absorbed in «, «, or «, is writ^ beneath it 11m
laws of contraction take effect, without regard to an s subscript, or tho BidH
Junctive « of the diphthong •< ; as, «fi ^ , mu f (§ 33).

Digitized

by Google

CH. 2.J OONTBAOTION. lOl

^39. I. Two yowelsj which can fiwrm a diph-
thong, imte without further change. Thus,

rtfuit

rSfO.

«•

•h

^X^

nx^'

rtfUuf

rtfift.

mm

•%

rtfutm

TtfU!.

rif€»nrt

Ttfuiru

mm

•»>

il(m«n

v^.

rtaaif

«A*f-

mm

t»

TtftfjU,

yi^M

yie*.

m»»

•»

Ttfui»&n

Ti/tM^U

A**«f

f***l

$ym

•»

t3etT»t

iris.

flVMM

fftvaT.

(40*n

•S

^itXtfifn

"^xZru

vt/Am»fiitf

TffAsi/Mf.

*9

V'i

laifft

i;^s.

tr iif Ttix^t nix*** mt f^ XitrrH >Ji^»t.

EzcEPnoir. 4^ like mT, becomes f ; aa, yiS^^ET, y^f * nalesey with Thiench,
ir« pie^ to write 7<(;«4.

^ aa. II. a, (T.) before an E sound (IE 3),
absorbs it ; but (2.) before another A sound, is it-
self absorbed. (3.) a, or (4.) ijj with an O sound,
forms o. Thus,

become m beoome m

•J f,
(2.)- ^

MM M,

C3.) M m,

ExcfSi^cm, A. The doser m takes the place of ^ in the contract fbruu
of four etenf'day verbs ; viz. letnam^ to hungeTj h^putt, to UiirtHy xt^'f^'^h ^
^Ifff and («4», to Iwe; as, iri/vtft/y «'i<v^i>, ;^f«iri^du ;^^0'^aM. Add the verbs
»MM#, r/MM», and ^j'tfU • the Subjunctive of verbs in -^ aa^ hrmy (ftom Xrm.
/m) /r^f • and the liqdd Aorist (see § 56).

fL In mdftethett $ belbre • and n is absoibed ; na^ WXmi )i«rXS, livXtJw
WXau, ibvXilt ««'X«.

7. in ifmtj w, the Komtoativo sfaigukr becomes §h hy an absorption of
fke «, bot the other fonns are oontnMSted aodotding to the role $ as, mrit^ Zrm.

}. For the change of mi into m, in verbs in -tt^ see § 37. 3.

% 84* Rbmakks. 1. a, taking the place of v before o
(§ 50) is contracted like s ; thus, in the Ace. plur., {Xoyovq^ 16^
yoag) ko/ovf, {yX^aaavft yXo^aoaag) ylo^aaSg, {ohg) olng olg, ixd^V'-
mg ijc^vg, noXco? noktig^ fi6ag §ovq, fitliovag (fttlCoag) fitlSovg * in
themes of Dec. III., (fr^, kng) flg^ {ipocvtvrg^ (pavrag) qtavtig^ {odovtg^
idong) odovgy (^Ivgy (lag) ^ig' In feminine adjectives and par-
ticiples, {q>avfvtaay q>arfaa(*) tpttvtiact^ {^ayovtaa^ ayoaaa) ayovaa *
m the dd pert. plur. of verbs, {fiovltvovaiy fiovltvoaai) jiovXev^
o«vi, (W^rat) ti&i&ai tt^fltfi, {dldopai) didoSai didovat^ {diL*
Mvwnn) dtixinjaai, dtixinjai.

Notes. «. By a similar contraetionwith jS/xr fim^ we find also tmmt tmSt
and y^mt y(mv$ (^ 14). In like manner tetuf occurs in the Nom. plur. by
OOStfaotii^ frotn mi;, but only in late writers.
9^'

Digitized

by Google

102

VO WBLS. CONTRACTION.

[book

fi. For x^ X»^'» ne § 116. C For Kxi^, Oiixns, see § 109. /3.

§ 3S. 2. When a long is contracted with an O sound
there is usually inserted before the «> an t, which, however, is
not regarded in the accentuation as a distinct syllable ; as, vao^
Irotq) >««(r (fl 9), M^iXdoq MiviXtvt^y ^Atqtldao ^AtQiidtm (fl 8).

So sometimee, chiefly m the Ion. (§§ 48. 1, 242. a), when « is short.

^36. III. (1.) ea becomes tj, and (2.) ££, bi.
(3.) € and o, with o, form ov ; but (4.) with other
O sounds are absorbed. (6.) In other combina-
tions not already given (§ 32, 33), € b absorbed.
Thus,

(1.)
(2.)

i.8.)

becomo

as

become

as

la

«>

rtix^

TUXfl-

«i

«f

^.f

•Tt.

H»

?»

Are*""?

Xt^'V'

•Mr

•«»

f<Xi«0r<

ftXmfn.

tt

w.

o'tfXiff

woXut*

•ar

*S

iifX««»

inXS,

tl«

«.

^/Xitiv

ptkttf*

•y

t»

,iy

"T:

fit

«.

leXmr

rnXuf.

Ml

«i

'fist

DM.

M

«»,

l^/Xi«f

Ipikstn.

•0¥

w,

inX.i»»

^x«SL

•t

•»»

2l}X0ITt

^Xtfvrt.

(5.)».

-S

Xtv0uu

X(*^»*'

«M

•«>

^iXiTtffif

fuXtrovf,

tir

«>

PtXiiirt

ftXnru

M

Ml,

»••?

fWf.

•?

9»

ptXiif

fiXj.

U»

•t

Piki»0

^iXS.

«<

•»

rt/&nt9rtt

ri^fiv«'«f<

•y

f>

Uriof

i^rf.

nu

9>

Ttftnttt

ri^.

tM

«f

ptXitiTt

^tXctrt,

M

»,

:x^i

'a;^.-

(4)

§37* Exceptions. 1. la preceded by i, «, ^, or ^« (§ 29), or in
the |)ft(ra/ or dutd of the ./SrsT or aeeond dedennon^ becomes & ; as, vytim vysm^
mfyu^iaf it^yv^af^ &(yv(if i»yv^f, rv«l«f rv«2f , rv»S« rvMt, irrS* m-tS. Yet
f^i«^, Gen^ ^^i«r«f ^^nrit (§ 104).

2. In the tfMo/ of the third deekiukm, m beocmies 4 ; aa, n/;tM rt/;^. In
the older Attic writers, we find the same contraction in the Nom. ^nr. of
nouns in .ivf ; as, (iM^sxUt fia^tXnf (incorrectly written -ft), instead of the
common fia^tXtTt.

3. In verbs in .mm, the flyllables Mf and mi, except in the Infinitive, become
M (i. e. the « and s unite, absorbing the n and •) ; as, ifixiy ^Xai; ^xius )«•
Xm;. But inXou9 (Infin.) InXsv*^ ^thpt (from ^sffM) It'ift (§ 33).

4. In the termination of the second person shigular passive, mm is oott«
tract ed into ji or u, and ««i into y ; as, /StvXtvMM fiwXiwf or /^Xtvu, /S^vXi mhu

«vXtv)).

5. For special contractions of • in the augment, see §§ 188, 189*

Remark. Contraction is omitted in numy words fai wfaidi it might taka
I^ace according to the preceding rules ; partJcalarly in nouns of the third da-
Ciansion, and in dissyllabic verbs in ••«.

B. Crasis.
^ 38. Crasis (1.), for the most part, follows the

Digitized

by Google

CB. 2.J CRASIS. 108

laws of contraction, disregarding, however, an i
final, which, according to the best usage, b not
even subscribed. But often (2.), without respect
to these laws, a final, or (3.) an initial vowel is
entirely absorbed.

Crasis ooccm mosCj in poetry. It is oommonly indicated by the coronis
( ) (S l^X oxc^^ whea this mark is excluded by the rough breathing ; as,
rm^j •vfA»i, When an initial vowel has been absorbed without any farther
change, the words are more frequently separated in writing ; as, m *^/. The
same is sometimes done when a final vowel has been absorbed, ^d, hence,
cases are oftoi referred to apfueregU and apostrophe which properly belong to
crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate rough, when the
second word is aspirated, see § 65. For the accent, see Prosody.

^39. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub-
ject to crasis are the following :

rt. The article; .thus, for

a.) ; 1*, ; !«-; ^U, •^«-i. For a i^tr^
ti Ifui, •uffi. Mi AymS-mij
i i^ftf, tS^ftt. rtS «VT«S,

(2.) i &fnc, Mc, or, less (3.) i •%•*,
Attic, 4^^. ol ifi»!y
«iy it^fiy r&vi(i rtu v)«T«f,

KoTBS. I. The neuter forme ri and r« are especially subject to crasis
tbnsyibr

(1.) rl lMi»r/(Mi, rthatrria*. For vk 2>frX«,
W ifUirte^y ^tifUrff, (3.) rk MXi'h

SJo'X*.

:i. In crasis, Iri^, other, retams the old form Irtfts • thus, for

^2.) i Irt^tr, in^. For tw Wi^tv^

§ 40. fi. The conjunction xaiy and ; thus, for

(1.) m) !«, m) Ut, »if. For »«) ;, »«) «;,

mm} I», mm} i», »^y, »&». (2.) ««) i/, »«< »u,

mmi t7r«, »frM, (2, 3.) tta) « «fy;t«v'«i

X^i XV*
»ll, ««&•

x^yx**^

y. A few other para'cfe*; thus, for

Itm i^m, irSf, For ^n^ifl-^r l»,

Digitized

by Google

1(14 VOWELS. APOfeTROPHfi. [BOOK .,

I. Some forms of the pronou$ts ; thud^ for

\ym •il«, lyS^tt. For i \(pe^ii^ tvipifth

flu few cases which remam are best learned frook observation.

C. Apostrophe, or Elision.

§ 41. Apostrophe affects only the short rowels
4, «, f, and o, and sometimes, in poetry, the passive
teroiinations in ai (and perhapis oi in the enclitics
fAoi^ aoij Toc). In monosyllables (except the £p. ^e^
and a few rare or doubtful cases)^ « only is elided.

For the mark of apostrophe^ see § 16. For the accentuation, see Prosody.
Elision is most common,

1.) hi the prepositions, and other [>articles of constant use ;
as, a^ imviov (for ano knvrov^ § 65), in innvov^ xai ifii^ and,
in composition (where the sign ' is omitted), airi^j)fdjum, diilavrtu^
nuQHfil' ixil iyoi3^U(f oi/y, / ovosvy fiul ar, oo- o (oiso), xoe^ ar.

3.) In a few pronouns, and in some phrases of frequent oc-
currence ; as, Tovi' aXlo^ xnvi i^dij ' yivoix ay^ lad" onov (lai»
OTTot;), kiyoifi av, old or/, qn^/i fyta.

§ 43* Rkmarks. m. Elision is less frequent in i, than in the olher
short rewds above mentioned. Particularly, it is never dided by the Attics
in w%fi or Hn (which might then be confounded with «ti) ; and never in the
Epic irW (2d person singular of i/yMi). It is never in prose, and very rarely*
in Attic poetry, elid^ in the Dative siiq^ular, which might th^ te coktfounded
, with the Accusative. The forms which take » paraoogic (§ 66) are not eHded
in pruse, except W/.

fi. Elision is least frequent in Ionic prose. In Attic prose, it is found chief-
ly in a few words, but these often recurring. In poetiy, where hiatus is more
carefolly avoided, its use is far more extended. In respect to its use or omis-
sion in prose, mwh seems to depend upon the rhythm of the sentence, the
emphasis, the pauses, and the taste of the writer. There is, also, in this
respect, a great difference among manuscripts.

DIALECTIC VARIATIONS.

^43. The dialectic variations in the vowels may be mostly
referred to the heads of Precession, Union or Resolution,
Qttantity, ano Insertion or Omission.

^J 44. I. Precession prevailed most in the sofi Ionic, and

Digitized by VjOOQIC

en. 2.J DIALECTIC VAKIATIONS. 105

least in the rough Doric and iGolic ; while the Attic, which
blended strength and refinement, held a middle plieuse. E. g.

1. Long «, for ihe most part, is retained in the t)oric and .£olic, but in the
Idnic pluses into n ; while in the Attic it is retained after i, j, ^, and (0, but
Otherwise passes into n (§ 2^). Thus, t)or. *afti^d, Att. V'^'S ^^^ V'$*> *
Dor. "ieifitbtj 9rAyL, ixvr&Sy Att. and loh. %infAosy vriyny MKVTti$ * Dor. and Att.
r«^<«, vfayfia^ Ion. wo^iti^ vfnyfMi. So, even in diphthongs, Ion. vfivf, yonvs,
for 9u»s^ y^»*fs, and in Dat. pL of Dec i., -ifo-t^ -pt, for ^asn, -«<;•

NoTB. The use of thi» long a produced, in greAt measure, the Doric f^tun
called v-Xartm^fiify broad pronunciatim, Which Was imitated by the Attics ill
the lyric parts of their drama (§ 6).

2. Short m is retained hj Uie Doric fft «ome words, wfa«^ in the Attic, H
pB«es into i ; and te some (partlcularty verbs ia .«») by the Attic, where it
becomeil 1 in Um Ionic Thus, Dor. r^iftty 'A^rdptts^ txi, ^dri, Att r^(^4#,
*A^%tMf , irtj P^i ' Att* i^sutt ^dtrtut^ risra^if^ A^vnv^ Ion. i^ut^ ^atriat,

3. In nouns in wr, -i«f, the characteristic 1 commonly passes, in the Iomc»
into I throughout ; as, w»Xtt, 4«f, u (ccmtraeted into t according to § 29. «)^
t9, ntf /«»», /«'!, lett (contr. r^).

4. An the long of t and «^ o¥ the omtiaction of ii and «« or a, the stricter
Doric prefers the long vowels n and «r to the closer diphthongs u and «0 $
while, on the other hand, the Ionic is particularly fond of protracting • and t
to u and tv or «. Thus^ Dor. x^^* iH^t * Gen. of Dec 11., vS i^MvS • Iiifin*
iv^ify, X'^'f^h vTyZv • tor x**iy mvA.0;, t«v w^ettov, ti^th^ ;^ct^uv, vwfcuf. Ion*
(sr»«s, fMWft, raitit for ^11*0;, /mm;, «r««. Att. »0^0f, Ivofia^ S^og * Ion. »ou^»u
»vt»/Atiy »S(»f • Dor. wAr^f, ZfofMi, tlf^tf. Both the Doric and Ionic have «y for
•vy, therefore^ contracted from \of. ,

5. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowete
('> 28) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general law of
the dialects, the Ionic has a morb open sound than the Attic, or the Attic than
the Doric or Aolio ; Att *dtU *4i4<f, Ion. ttltit, akrit • Att* »««r, nXetv^ Ion.
and Com. »«<W, «X«i«» • Att ^iut$u Iob- >M*«r ' Ion. <r^«4w, ^eifitftt, ftiya^i
Att. r^lTm^ rifiVM, /Atyt^t • Ion. a^^Vui, Att iff^tf • Ion% /Ki0-cyie^^/a, Att
finvnfA^^iat • t>or. and Ep. «i, Att. tl • Dor. ^avxat. Ion. and Att ^vin^xtt^
^k^ BimifKtt • Att fr^etroft /39«;^««f, ^ra^iecXtf^ i£ol. 0-r^«r0;, /3^o;^i«r;, ta^^**
Xif ■ Att Svofuif i£ol. «v(YM( • Att. i^iWr, j£ol. S^^rtrov,

§ 4S. II. Union or Resolution. A. The Contraction
of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and least in
the litxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or
omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are
also dialectic difTerences in the mode of contraction, which, for
the most part, may be explained by precession. E. g.

I Ib contracting « with an 0 sound, the Doric often prefers a to the
ekM«r «» ; iii the first declension, regulariy. Thus^ Dor. 'Ar^ii^w, rZv ^veiv
(^ 8), riM'K^iiy, -av9Sj wuvifTtf ^«a4ri/m^sr, «'^£r«f, for *Arfu^ov (uncontracted
•d»\ rS* d-v^f (-«*ry), Htfrii^wv, •Svof (-««;», -acv^t^, 9U*eitTt (-««yri), ^lawinZ-
0U9 ('••^if), irfS^rtg (^«r«f). A like contraction appears in proper names in
-%Jtn ; IKS Dor. M«viXil>, for Mtfix*»t,

Digitized

by Google

106 VOWELS. [book f

2 For the oonlractum of it and •• or «f, see $ 44. 4.

8. With the Ionics sod some of the Dorics, the fiivorite contraction of f *
and t0v is into tv, instead of •«. This nse of f« for *v sometimes extends ta
cases where this dipbth<Hig resolts tmrn a difiierent oontractiun. Thus, ftXw*
ft49f f <Xsv, ifikiv, St^iv^ for ptXiv/fUf (-ca^iv), ^k»» (-mv), ifi^ ('**)* ^*^m^»
(-M#) * Qtxaiio, iiimahuv, iimtutv0-t, m HerodotuS for Hdxtcitu (-««), ih»a4§m.
(-Mv}, ^txa49V0'i (-Mvr/) * Xafrctifvrw M. 283, for XMVtvrra (-iiwc).

4. The Dorics (bnt not Pindar), contrary to the general hnr of the dialect,
Cionunonly contract « with an E sound following^ into a ; a8» i^^rn^ ^tynv^ Xjff,
ftom i^ratf 0'tymuff Xmifg. CL § 33. m.

5. In the contractions which follow the change of » before r (§ 58), the
JEolic often employs m and ««, for d and «« ; as, Aoc pL rmis Ttfutig, rtit v«-
f$stfj for r»$ rtfitdf, Tohf fifMVf • Nom. ang. of a^. and partic. fuXmtj rv^Mf,
ru^pMt^a, tx»*'»t for ftiXdfj rv^pds, Tvypd^m, \x***^* * ^ P^"^ P^ ^ verba,
f «<«■«, ttevrroift, for ^^ri, »^vmv€u The Doric has here g^ieat rarietj, both
employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though t were simfdy
dropped before r), the common diphthongs of contraction (§ 34), and the
.£oUc diphthongs; thus, Ace pL ri^^df and rixf^tf (Theoc. 21. 1) ; r»uf
Xvxtvt and TMt Xv»»f (Theoc 4. 11) ; iTf and tig, one; M«(/r<K, BiLwr« (Theoc.),
"Mm fa (Find.), and Laconic MJUtt • Kom. sing, of partic ^^awtug (Pind. OL
2. 108), tiotwm. (lb. 73). So, likewise^ m for •» before r in «»«/r«, Theoc
n. 78.

6. The Ionic nse of «0v for av in a f^ words, appears, at least in some of
them, to have arisen from a union of • and a to form u ; thus, for ralriy
XfAaurw^ netvrau, Itturw, Ion. rttlri^ t/tttvrsu, etmtfr»Vf i«rvr«v, from r§ «vr«,
I/aU avrov, 0U mvrcu, %• »vr6v. In the reciprocal pronouns* the «v passed
into the other cases. We find also Ion. ^»w/Mt, r^atvfia (yet better r««i/ec«),
for ^avffM^ TfMVfia, In all these words, «;v-is written by some with a diiere-
iis ; as, ^t^Sfut,

§ 46. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the
Attic are often resolved in the other dialects, especially the
Ionic and iEolic, into separate sounds. In the Ionic, the reso
lulion of €4, with e prolonged, into iji', is especially common ; as
fiaaiXrfirj^ xXrfl'g^ for paodtla^ xldg.

Notes. «. On the other hand, the Ionic in a few cases employs contrac-
tion where the Attic omits it, particularly of •n into «r ; as, /^«;, ifim^m, lv«»<>
/«, /3«d^«ar, iyisixcfTo, for it^«f, ifiefurett Uon^m^ /3«>i^tiv, »ylon»o*Ta.

fi. The fondness of the Ionic for a concurrence of vowels leads it, in some
cases, to change ► to » (§ 50) after a vowel (which, if before c, now becomes
•) j as, 'A^tfTayo^taf I'ivviaTtf for 'A^t^retyo^KVy ihvvetvTo,

C. In Crasis, the Doric and Ionic often differ from the Attic
by uniting the o of the article with « and at initial, to form n
and bt ; as, to aXri&ig, twlrj&ig * oi avd^fg^ atrdgfg ' ol ainoloi
(rtnokoi.

In the following erases, which are found in Herodotus, and the two first
also in Homer, the smooth breathing has taken the place of the rough ; • 4^-

Digitized

by Google

CH. 2.J DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 1Q7

rrt, Jt(i0TH * i etvriff mhrit • «/ Ixx«i, JxXm. Other dialectic erases are,
Dor. i tXM^»$t SXti^H • iV^ i^' »«2 Iff, un» « »«) iTri, »fw% • Ion. • Irf^«f9

§ 4T. III. Quantity. For a short vowel in the Attic, the
other dialects oflen employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the
converse. Thus,

loo. ^wkfiftt for hirXM^tf • Ion. Iv'irn^uty tv^iw, ivH^tl^f, ^i^^vv, x^frrm^
far *irtrnhtH^ tv»t7a, itire^ulfft fiui^t'h »^Mwmt ■ Dor. and £p. XrA^$t for ir«r-
9* • MoL *A>.»S«f, «eX«««t for *AXMm7»u J^eX'^*^' See §§ 44. 4 ; 45. 5.

KoTB. The poets, espedaUy the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a -vowel
according to the metre. A short vowel when lengthoied in Epic verse
usually passes into a cognate dipthong ; as, %iXnk»vSat for IknXuB-ettf A. 202.

^48* IV. Insertion or Omission. Vowels are often
usetted in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here,
as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial-
ly the Epic. These oflen double a vowel, or insert the half
of it (i. e. the short for the Umg)^ for the sake of the metre,
particularly in contract verbs ; as, xgijtivov iiXdw^^ for ngri^op
tXdmQj A. 41, q>aav&t9y ^finimaa^ oq6o»^ oQoi^g^ /iXtaovtrg^ tpoo};*
yaXoutg, itlxooh for q>dv&BPy '^fiaaa^ o^cJ, o^^, ytlmvitg^ <pwgj yd^
ia>C« etxoir«*

RmfARga. 1. The Ionic is espedally fond of the insertion of t ; as, Gen,
pL kv^^t X^^h »l»rUif^ for «i^^, &C. ; 2 Aor. infin. i v^im, Xtwun^ tot

2. In the Doric and Epic, the partides i^ tttly «««•«, ^m^ k^i, iiri,
and ir#ri (Dor. for ^^if^ often omit the final vowel before a consonant, with
such assimilation of the preceding consonant as euphony may require ; as,

§r^i) &fit fittfiaT^i, l'y»(t0'ts, k^trris (§ 68. 3), ««^ ^u*»fu*^ ttkw ^tiXM^m
62. jS), »«» xtfaktift My ynvi tcmm^tvtUt »»( fic*^ MMkknr§9y ttm/tfJl^tf
WM( Znf'h kv^ifif^tu WmkXuf, ^§T riv. When three consonants . are thus
hrmight together, the first is sometimes r^ected ; as, tUxran, kfitfrn^u^ for
mmx»rtt9i, kfitftwu. So, sometimes in the Doric, even before a single conso-
nant ; as, icmfimtMf.

NoTBS. m. From the dose connection of the preposition with the ftDow*
faig word, these cases are not regarded as making any exception to the rule
fai § 63. Compare § 68. /S. The two words are often written together, even
when there is no composition ; as, xMlivfafuvt WTrit.

j3. In these words, the final vowd was probably a euphonic addition to the
original form. Comp^ue k^i and ^«r« with the Latin ab and mib. The old
foim w^y in accordance with the rule (§ 63), became v^W and v^^r^ idience
writ

y» Some of these forms oven passed into the Attic, and hito Ionic prose ;
M, MM-9«ftr» (poet), k/t^mmt (Xen.), k/twrnw/Mu (Herod.).

%. 'A^ has ilso, by aphssresis, the Epic form fm, whidi is enditic

Digitized

by Google

^Q$ CONSONANTS. [BOOI

CHAPTER 111.

CONSONANTS.

^ 49* The Greek has eighteen coNSOitANrs,
represented by seventeen letters.

They are exhibited in the Table (% 3) according to two methods of divis-
ton, employed by orthoSpists. Consonants of the same class, according to tha
fiisit method, are termed coffmUes of the same order, codrtUntOi,.

SraiABKS. 1. The letter y peribrms a doable office. Whtti fbllowad hy
another palatal, it ia a nasals otherwise a middle mute. As a naslkl, it has r
for its corresponding Roman letter ; as a middle mute^ g (§ 13). For its
pronnndatioo, see $ 1^. 3.

2. IVom the representation of the Latih v by j3 (VhyiBu8, Bt^iXm), it to
probable that in the andent^ as m the modem Greek (§ 19\ the middle
mutes approached nearer to the aspirates than in oor own langfoage, and that,
iA fbrining them, the oilgans were not wholly dosed.

§ ffO* 3. The semivowels v and a have oorresponding
vowels in m and t ; that is, a may take the place of y, and c of
a, when euphony forbids the use of these consonants ; as, itp&A-i-
gatai, for tififaQvrai^ onf(}iia (contracted anfQ^) f&r a'tidivat
See §§ 34, 46. /J, 56 - 58, 60, 63. R., &c.

Note. In like manner, v is the corresponding vowd of the old consonant
iF. Sde § 22. i.

^ St. The following laws, mostly euphonic, are
ObiSerVed in the formation and connection 6f Wtjrds

A. In the FoRMAtior^ of Words.

[. A labial mutt before tf forms with it t^; aftd a
palatal^ | ; thus,

becdme n become as

P9 ^, y^a(p9m y^i-^m, x' t ^i^X* ^v\'

KoTB. In like manner, ^ is the union of a lingoal with a sibilant sotm^
and in man^ words has taken the place of r$ ; e. g. adverbs of place in -^i
■s, for *kMi>Kir\%^ *A5if»«^i, fer 0i$i3«»-^, 0*fj3&?i • And many verbs in -t*»
as, for ^iX/r$*>, ;*«X/^M, for ^*«rJ»», ^e«C*». In these verbs, the old forms re-
m^n in the ^Eolic and Doric <% 70. V.). For a lingual btjore r, see § 55.

Digitized

by Google

CH. H,] EVTkOHit LAWS. itJfy

^ S9. II. Before a lingHfd mute, ^ 0*) ^^bi^^
or (2.) palatd mute become^ €odhiin&te (^ 49, H 8),
and (3«) a lingu<d mtUe^ € ; thus,

tocome as become as

«I.)/3r

»•'»

rlr^<^r«i

TlVWIirTiM*

;c^

^f^n

^

•V,

*l^r

yiy^mvvm.

«s

IrXi;^;]^

«••

/»,

?0Vf-

y^

A;^» l*j««y^»

Wtdx^^*

^

i)}.

yfw^»

y?^^*f..

(1)^

rr, tttifun^rk

JitifiM^n^U

irS

f^,

lX«V^if»

tXi/^Siry.

u

wTy sfft^^nf

.Sffi^THf.

^

^^,

XSXiyr*!

'iTei>Sif».

^

#r, irivud^M

wivurraut

(l)yr

«r.

XiXi»r«/.

rS

r^, «iy0^a<»'^n»

tivtfit»ff^nf*

;t;'-

*«•,

rirvxrmt

«^rvxr«M«

);^

irS, lip^^i,

l(p^^9.

»)

1^

9ki»int

•-xi^^nv.

»»

r^, Ui;»;»ii»

fixcittmok.

Two Imgnal motet maj renudn togethtf, if both ard radi-

ca) ; as, w^drrat^ *ArSif.

^ tl8. III. Before /i, a labial mute become^ ^,
a palatalj y, dnd a lingual, a ; thus,

becnmft

as

becdme as

«1»

/»^

XlXii«'/tMi4 KiXtifi/tmt.

Xf*

Tf* riruxfuu rirtfyfimt.

/»i»

f^

TfififUt T^/flfM,

Tft

r^ dtifntT/tms ttvift.ita'fuu.

f/»

f*/h

'y(d^/»m y^df^fta.

^f*

ir^u, ^^« ^^^*.

M

y/-.

4iirXi»fUtt wivXiyfuu.

V

#^ «4«tiS^eai 4'i«'U9;^NU.

Except in a few such words as a»f»^ xtu^fidf, ntx/^^s* ^er/if • and some
others from the dialects ; as, in Homer, i^^n, T^/miv, ivivi^/uiy, xf»0^v5/Kfy«i,

^ ff 4. IV. V before a (1.) labial or (2.) pala-
tal, is changed into the cognate nasal (^ 49, i 3) ;
and (3«) before a liquid, into that liquid ; thus,

becomd as

(l.)t*

beeoiiM

0tn^drx«t

at

f 9»f*ird^xat,

•d

i»A

itHdxxm

\^XXm.

»f

i*^

r#tfff«#

90ft^.

•^

f^/^

hfti*M

lf.fA.^.

W'

t^^y

ifypCx»$

tf»'4'0xt*

(2.).«

y»»

lf»aXu0

lyifXim,

XX,

wvtytims
tvXaytf

tXXayf.

»^

ff*

9Wt^d^rm

wv^fdvtm.

Notes. «. Enclitics are here regarded as distinct words; thns, T*ri#,
ri9yu We find, however, final » changed in like manner npon old inscrip-
tions ; tA, MEM4>2TXA2) for ^i» ^(/a:«« (I"^- Potid.) ; so, APKAI,
TOAAorON, and even feSSAMOI (cf. §§ 57. 5, 6d. 3), for At nai, t$p
Xiy§9, Iv 2df»f.

^. Before ^ in the Perfect passive, t sometimes becomes r and is soma-
. times dropped • as, for iri^«*/i*«i, Tt^a^fiai • for «ixX<f/iMt«, »i»Xifitu,

y. Before « in the Perfect active, » was Commonly dropped, or the fbrm
"woided, except by later writers ; as, for si»(4*««, «i«:ix*.
lO

Digitized

by Google

110 CONSONANTS. [bOOK I

^ SS. V. A lingual or liquid should not pre-
cede a. This is prevented in various ways.

I. A Ungual mute is simply dropped before a ; thus, awfAatat
ncudg^ nU&am become aoifiaai^ nalgy ntLoti.

^ «I6« -2. In liquid verhs^ the a formative of the Future
and Aorist is changed into e (§ 50), which (I.) in the Future ia
contracted with the q^^ but (2.) in the Aorist is transposed
and contracted with the vowel of the penult.

Thus, in the Fat and Aor. of the liqoid verbs, ityyixxt^ to announce^
•ifibi^ to distribute^ n^/pt, to jtuigcj wXuva^ to w€uh, and ii^M, to ftoffy for

(\,)kyyiX9a^ (JtyytXut) ityy*^' (2.) 4fyy«Xr«, (nyytiXm) HyyuXm.

pift^M, (vi/MUf) ftfiui* tnft^a, (Ivm^m) hufut,

»^/vrM, (x^/vim) *('t^ * f»(ivr«, (l»^iiv«i) fx^iMt.

«>Xvv^«f, (4rXvfUf) 9'XvfS* titXtntm, (iwXvtfa) iwXOfm,

){(#«#, (}i^) h^» i^t^^^h (fi**vO Uu^

Noras, m. Here si commonly passes into «, unless / or ^ precedes ; tiuis,
#^i^XAiv, to cause to aUp^ ^altm, to thow (roots r^cX-, ^cv-), have m the Aor.
(fr^Xr*, irf«iX«) lr^X«, f^ifv« • while ittmiptt, to fatten, m^mJtat, to com-
plete (roots «■<«»-, 9'f^fff.), have Mdm^ Imifdm. But UxpttJwat, to make leaUf
»i^c/vM, to ffotHj MiXuhv^ to hoOaw otOj Xgv»aUt^ to whiten, i^ymita^ to enroffe,
ittTaUatt to ripen^ have « in the penult of the Aor. ; rt^^ifm, to bore, n ; and
etiftMifm^ to give a signal, fuaitmy to stain, both n and d, AS^m, to raise, and
£xX0fitut, to leap, have d, which in the Indicative is changed by the aogment
into n ; thos, i^m, ^^m, i^mfju,

/3. A few poetic verbs retain the old forms with r ; as, n\xXm, to land^
»%Xwm, IxiXwu • *u^t*, to meet withy to chance, xv^rm, ixu^vot • S^pO/m (r. i^-'),
to rouse, i^^m, Z^em • ^t^ to kneadj t^v^ra. Add these forms, niostly ftx>m
Homer, i^ra, <Xr«, f^r«, ^i(r§/MU, ni^^tt, ixi^u, }taip^^^tt, H^^fu,

§ S7« 3. In the Nominative^ the formative a (1.) after ^,
and sometimes (2.) after v, becomes f, which is then trans*
posed, and absorbed (§ 31) by the preceding vowel ; as, for

(1 .) ^1^, (^^«<() ^i^* (2.) ^mtAp$, (srumtp^ wudp,

v'mri^, («'«irii^) wur^, Xiftipt, (XtfMiP^ Xtftnp.

f^»(t, (/nr«i() fnrtt^. htif^Pt^ (hu/Mip^ imiiun.

Except in imf^d^ (§ 109).

4. In the Dative plural of the third declension, v preceding
a without an intervening r, is dropped ; as, for

ftiXxprt, ftiXm^i. For ^uifjt§p0t, ^ifi0n.

XtfAtpn, XifM,iru h^'*» f*^^

So also with r, in the Dat pL of adjeethes in -ut ; afl, for ;^«^/ifrr<, ;^« •

5. In the feminine of adjectives in -f/p, v before a becomes
0 ; as, for x^i^Uvxna^ (x^Qtsyan) x"Qlfoaa,

Digitized

by Google

LB. 3.]

EUPHONIC LAWS.

Ill

^ «I8^ 6. Otherwise, v before a is changed into <k, which ii
the^ contracted with the preceding vowel (§§ 34, 50) ; as, for

NonuMasa

Norn. Fern.

IIh

For ^dvtrm,

hi*

(J*»i)

fii.

Dat PluT

Terbs in Sd Pen. Flnr.

r/^i»^4» Tt^id€4, ri^ufi.
}iin^U ithmfi, }ii9urt,
iii»9V9€tj iuufvdt'it iu»fV0t.

Ilii

Fature.

fc„,

ISn.

(r4rMrM)

Notes. «. Hie ibrms rAUiwi, Wii^t, and )i/»»tfii^i were naed by the
Attics, for the most part, without contraction ; fa^t received no contraction.

fi. In noons, if »^ precede r, the » is retained ; as, for tXftn^t^ Ix/Mvf , for
tXfut^it Ikfuwt (yet others, iXftitri), It is also retained in some forms in
trtii and derivatiTes in ^n, from verbs in -«/»«, as «'i^«vrM from ^»i9t^
wiwatnt from v^^ttitm • and sometimes in the advorb wdXtt^ and the ac^ective
«'«», in composition. Add the Homeric »iirr«i, If. 337. For l», rvy, and
<l^ jwe § 68. 3. In the rough Aigive and Cretan, » seems to have been
extensively retained befwe r ; thus, iut «S^»«} for iif , ri^if

% S9« 7. In the Dative plural of syncopated liquids^ and
of tttfTi^V, 8tar^ the combination -e^o-, by metathesis and the
change of t to «, became -^acj- ; as, for naiiqai^ natqaa^ ' for

8. Elsewhere the combinations la and qo were permitted to
stand, except as o radical after g was softened in the new Attic
to ^ (§ 70) ; as, «^(Ji?y, male^ ^agfogy courage^ xo^^jj, temple^
cheeky for the older agarivy ^agaogy xo^ai}. The combination ^a
is unknown in classic Greek.

^60. VI. Between two consonants, a forma-
tive is dropped, and v is changed to a (^ 50) ; as,
for

yty^Lp^^mt, yty^dip^mi • for XiXty^B-tj XlXi;^Sf • for l^^a^fratt i^^d^^rmi,
NoTS. So the compound ^^tw^x*** is written bj some ^•ft^x'**-

^61. VII. Before x formative^ a labial or
palatal mute unites with it in the cognate roughs
and a lingual mule is dropped ; thus.

Digitized

by Google

112

coiisojCAirrt.

[sods

tounM

;«;>
»»
»>
*>

)<)il«;e»

^63. VI 11. If raugh mutes begin two succes-
sive syllables, the Jirst is often changed into it»
cognate smooth^ especially (1.) in reduplications, or
(2-) when both letters are radical; but (3.) in the
second person singular of the Aorist imperative pas-
sive, the second rough mute is changed ; thus, for

(1.) ft^iXn»my wt^iXnumi (2.) ^(t^it, *VX^f*

T^X^f*^ »tX^fmm. ^»X^t r»x^*

^a^tifn^ ri^fifii, (3.) ^tfvXiu^^i, $«»ktv%rt.

K0TB8. at. Upon the same prindple, tx*' beoomds };^m • and whenever /
li t«da]ilioated, the first / becottieB tmnath^ and, as it then cadnot sltfid at the
beginning of a word ($ 13* 2^ is transposed ; as, for fifupt, Vfff^ ^^ ^^
ted, by a softening of the second ;, fi^ifirm/tiv* ^. 59, ft^witftitM Anaer. Ft,
105^ ^^t^^tu Find. Ft. 281.

/3. So, to avoid excessive aspiration, a rough mute is never preceded by th«
s&me rottgh mate, bat, instead of it, by th6 cognate smooth ; as, the £pi6
*m9- fciXm^M, for »it^ ^^Xaftt ($ 48. 2) ) SO, 2tt*^ ^i^X'h ^Ar^if • and,
upon the same principle, liu^fti (§ 13. 2).

§ 68. IX. The semivowels v, p, and ^, are the
only consonants that may end a word. Any other
consonant, therefore, falling at the end of a word,
is either (1.) dropped, or (2.) changed into oAe of
these, or (5.) assumes a vaioel ; thus, for

(I.) r«^r.

^Sfta,

Foi

»ij«n

»«f«#.

fciXiT,

ftiku

tiiir.

tiiif

kynr.

My9f,

^•••fl*.

4'«'«^.

Xf^^wUww,

IfitvXivt,

ifi»vX990H

ft^.

wm.

liTTtlft^

%Tfl9,

ywtttn^

yvftti.

IW^n^

Ir'Ant.

&fm»r.

I»«.

(3.) fi»uktuMf*f

^»vXti»4fU.

y»X»»ry

ytikK,

ri^fif^

ri^nm.

(2.) ^Sr,

f^r.

^riiBi

0ri^t,

Remark.

A word, can

end with

two consor

lantB, only y

the lost is a ; as, mA^, yvift {yvng), ii/J (viJx?), xo^«5. Hence the
formative v of the Accusative is changed into a (§ 50) after a
consonant, except in a few cases, in which a Ungual mute
preceding v is dropped ; thus, for

yv4rv, 7«Kr«. FOT »Xiidf, »Xt/^s and nXut,

»«^s»f, »«^«4(ai. I'^N^v, S^*iJ^M and l!fMw.

«r«<)*, «'«4)a. yiktiTv, yiXira and >tX*f»

L-iyiii^tJU uy -«^-J v_^ x_^ -t IV^

elL 8.j StMOKIb L.iWft. 113

§ 64. X. A consonant is sbtoetimesi inserted or
transposed^ to soften the sound. Thus,

1. When a simple vowel is brought by inflection or composi-
tibd before an initial ^, a smooth o is inserted ; as, iif^aaa,
aQfwatog, im^(}(6wv(ju, from fmyviifAi (i-^ a-, and int prefixed)
but sv^maiog (the diphihang hi prefixed).

2. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought be
fore I or ^, the cognate middle mute is inserted; as, from
ipif^of^ {jm^^oq) opdgogy from fitoti^tqia^ fitaiififiiqlai

KoT^ It the nasal is hiittal, It is then dropped fitom th6 difflcalty of
tonndidg it ; e. gi^ the roots of fikirrm and j3x^»* are thus changed ; fttXsr-t
ftXiT-, /nfiXsr^ /SXir.; /mX^ ^X«^ ^^X»-, /3X«.; 80 fi^tT§$, morta^ derived
ttom fiti^tSf Lat mors,

3. Transposition especially afl^cts a liquid c6ming before
another consonant ; as, for* &6(faxtay &qwoxtit^ for ^d^aXxa^ fli"

^ 6«l. B. In the Connection of Words,

I. When a smooth mute is brought by (1.) era-
sis or (2.) elision before the rough breathings it is
changed into its cognate rough ; as, for

(1.) »*} ;, »«} .j;

X^y Xi'

For wxtm yxnr, ^x^* '' *»»•

r« ifUTt»9,

^•lfUrt09.

And in composition, ftsM

Tw lrif§tff

^Ari^^y.

k^h and Inioy «^/if/»«.

ir§» iftiutf

i»0im»a.

^%nM and A^lf«, ^t^nfAt^*

(«.) M .i.

k<p' tJ.

\trrm, and V^«f i^^>e'«*

KoTB. In some ooinpoands, this change takes place with aa failervening
^ ; and in some words, it i4>peafB simply to have arisen finom the tendeDcj of
^ to aspiration (ct § 18. 2) ; as, ^dht (from w^ and •}•! )| f^^fit (we*
^«itf), rii^e'^*''* (rirr«e*f > 7«'«'0f ) ; ^($ifM»9 («'(•> 'V'^ )) '^f <*' ^^ ^'"^ ^*

^ 66. II. Some words and forms end elthei
t(n^ or unthoui a JincU consonant according to (^u*
phony, emphasis, or rhythm

In most of these cases, the consonant appears not to belong to the iri^pnal
form, but to have been assumed. In some cases, however, the reverm appears
to be true ; and some cases are doubtAiL

1. Datives plural in «, and verbs of the third person in »
%nd I, assume w at the end of a sentence, or when the ne5«
word begins with a vowel ; as,

nSri yk( tl*t rw»r» • but, E^'TIv »M «'Sr«».
n«r< kiyw^t Twrt • but, Flsriv miri kiytpetw,
i\J *

Digitized by VjOOQIC

114 CONSONANTS. EUPHONIC LAWS. [BOOK I.

Notes. «. So, likeirifle^ adverU tf place m .#» (piroperiy datives phiral
the advert) 'ri^vrs, last year^ the numenl ttrnt^t (comraonlj), the deraonstra*
tive -i preceded bj r (sometimes), the Epic case-ending ^ and the Epic
particles »!, 9v, and fU^t • as, li Uxmramm tiyt/t^ia' %t»»0n fm. See § 21 1 . N.

^. The y thus assomed is called v paragogie. It is sometimes employed by
the poets before a consonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most
kinds of verse, some of the best editors write it nniibrmly at the end of a line.
In Ionic prose it is generally neglected, bat in Attic prose it is sometimes
found evm before a consonant in the middle of a sentence. In grammars
and lexicons, a paiagogic letter is commonly marked thus : <7»dri(y).

§ 67» 2. The. adverb ovrcucr, thus^ commonly loses a before
a consonant ; and a/^i and /iixgt^ urUU^ often assume it before
a vowel ; as, ovt«» qnjal ' ftixQ^^ <>v*

3. Some other words have poetic or dialectic fcnmn, in which a final » or f
is dropped or assumed : aa, local adverbs in 3fv (poet , chiefly Ep., St>, nn-
meral adverbs in -tug (Ion. -tu), 4bvt4»^v;, «r#i^f, tftwrng^ wmXiPy tv^v(jt\

^ 68. C. Special Rulks.

1. The preposition ^$, out of^ becomes ^x* before a consonant,
and admits no further change ; as 4% xaxoiy, ^xas i;ai^ ixytXdtt^
Ix^ero;, ixfidaaw.

2. The adverb ov, not^ before a vowel, assumes x, which
becomes/ before the rough breathing; as ov yijai, ovx IVeorii',
ovx vtiy ovxirt.

Notes. «• The advert) finxirt, from ftn and lr<, follows the analogy of

fi. In these wordM, U and tv» may pertiaps be r^:arded as the original
^rms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to thdr
ckMe connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the fbllowing word, and
therefore forms no real excq>tion to the rule in § 63. When orthotone, they
conform to the rule, the one by assuming r> and the other by droi^ing s.

3. In composition, the preposition ^r, tn, retains its r before
^ and (J ; while avvy toitk^ drops its r before a followed by an-
other consonant, and before f; but before a followed by a
vowel, changes V to a ; as, ivQamta^ ivadta (yet e^^v&fiog often-
er than h(fv&fio^); avaxrma (for avvaxrina)^ avivyUt' avaatvu
(for avyasvtf), avaanln,

KoTB. The ^ic A» ibr &fd (§ 48. 2) here imitates It • as, &9^Ti$, It^^rn

DIALECTIC VARIATIONS.

^ 69. A. The dialects often interchange consonants ; most
frequently,

1. Cognate Mutes ($ 49) ; as, Ion. mZnt^ VvitfMt^ for mZ^t^ Hxf^'

i?M\. JiM^ri for i^^i.

Digitized

by Google

CH. 3.1 DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. Il5

Notes. «. The soft Ionic was less inctined than the Attic to the rongli
mutes ; hence, in the Ionic, the smooth mute remains before the rough breath-
ing (§ § 65, 68. 2) ; as, £«■' »S^ hxtiftt^og, •hx Sn, In some compounds, this
passed into the Attic ; as, a^n^uirnsi fix)m £«■• and ^Xt§t*

fi. Aspiration is sometimes ircmspoaed; as, Ion. »i5«#», iv^avrm^ lydif/nv,
K«A.;(;if^Ary, for X*^''** ^*'''»v^'h i^Ttu^iy XaX«f}d4i/ir.

IL CooRDiNATB MuTBS (§ 49) ; as. Ion. and .^1., « for r in interrogct-
tive and ind^nite pronouns and adverbs; thus, itoTee, xov, Ȥrif for ^ms, wtvy
wri • Dor., » for r in «'«»«, X»s, r«»«, for arari, 2Vi, rirt, and in similar
adverbs of time ; JBoI. fri/MVi for rifft, ^( for ^^ • .^1. and Dor. yXipKf§9
for jSXi^c^dy, ii for ytf • Dor. iitkit for o/SiXtf;, S^nx«S for tgyr^df .

in. Liquids ; as. Dor. M«ff fiivrurtsy for ^k^n, fiixriwrts • Ion. wXii^
fuf* for trMv/c««>y.

§ 70. IV. r with other letters; e."g.

1. The Ionic and Old Attic ^g- and ^r pass, for the most part, m the later

Attic, into TT and p|» ; as, rotwm rarret^ yXu99ot yXeiTTttj H^^tif cjp/fff. See
§ 69. 8.

2. Dor. r for r ; as, n«rti^«v, f inrty, tltntrt, for Htf^-ii^Aly, f ff*! r«y, i7»0r4.
This appears especially in the 2d personal pronoun, and in the 3d pefs. of
verbs ; as, ri;, ri, for ^i;, V< (Lat. ^ te) ; ^ar/, ^aprij kiyttrt, for ^uri, ^aW,
XiydV0$ (Lat. legunt),

3. Dor. r for » in the verb-ending of Ist pers. pL /Ai$ for /A$f (Lat. mut) ;
as, xiy«/uif for Xiytfitv (Lat. iegmtts),

4. The Laconic often changes ^ to r, and final i to ^ ; as, *ttXtdf Ar. Lys.
988, ri«(, WAi», for vuktueg, B%«ff Six« • w^ri* for ireiTs (Lat /m«r, compare
3larc^iw)»

T. The Double Consonants with other letters;- as, old ^vir, later and
common rvv (in the Lat. cmn the ^ has been dropped, instead of the ») ;
.£d. "Vttw^at for 2«r^4i(' iBol. #»•»•;, r»/^«f, for ^im^, ^/^«f - Dor. ^i, ^iis
f<Mr r^i, r^i» • loiL 2<^0;, r^t^og, for isg-g-ig^ r^tr^ig.

For ^, we find, in the iBolic and Doric, r^, )), and ^ ; as, S0'hg, fttxith^

(^ 51. N.)» WAl'^IV, fuC^ Altff, for •^«f, ^iXl^A^, «'«/{«, fMS^A, Ztvg,

§71* B. Consonants are often doubled^ inserted^ omitted^
and transposed by the poets, especially the Epic, for the sake
of the metre ; as, tXXajSovy <f^daaofiai^ vittvaai^ ooao^^ onntag^
iddsiaBj foT tkapov^ &c. ; nxiXffioq^ nroXtg^ dix^f*^ vmvvfAVoq^ ana"
ImfiPog^ for TtoXffiogy noXig^ ilx"^ vtorvfiocy nndXafiog * tqtiov^
*Odvatvg^ *JxtXtvgy (paQvyog^ for i^^iSov^ *Odvaaivg<, jixtXXevg^ <]pa-
ifvy/og* ir^d/q, xagtigogj fidgdiaiog^ for naqdia^ xgdugog^ /^^<'~
ii0Tog»

Digitized

by Google

BOOK II.

ETYMOLOGY.

*Einm itn^ftiu

^ 7«, Etymology treats of the Inflection and
of the Formation of Words ; the former includ-
mg Declension, Comparison, and Conjugation,
and the latter, Derivation and Composition.

For the distinction between the radieal and the fomuOhe part of Words,
and the use of the tenns rootf prejix^affix^ open, and dMe Or vmod and eontommi
affixes, eharaeUriMtie^ ^mre iod impure Words, nmUt iiqmd, Kqmid-^vte^ labial,
palatal^ and Ungual words, thenuj juxradigm, &c., see General Grammar.

CHAPTER I.

PRmOtPLES 01* DBCLElf SIOK.

§ 78. The two classes of Substantives (in-
cluding Nouns and Substantive Pronouns) and
Adjectives (including the Article, Adjectives com-
monly so called. Adjective Pronouns, and Partici-
ples) are declined to mark three distinctions, Gen-
der, Number, and Case.

Note. Acyectives receive these distinctions merelj fbr the sAke cf €QO«
ibrming to the substantives to which they belong. ^

A. Gender.

^74. The Greek has three genders ; the Mas-
culine, the Feminine, and the Neuter.

Notes. «. Noons which are both masculine and feminine, are said to b«
of the comnum gender.

Digitized

by Google

•». I.J Gj^MPER. in

(^ To mask the mmden of Greek nomui, m employ the different forBu of
the article , in tlie singular, for the masculine, 0 ; for the feminine, « ; tor th^
oommon, «, h ; and for the neuter, r« : in the plural, for the masculine, «/ :
hf the feminine, «/ ; fi>r the common, m, at ; wsv^ for the neuter, v^ : as, i

Id l|ke manner, the different cfiaes and numbers, according to their gtndei^
■re marked ^y different fofma ^ ^ article ; as the Qeo. dng. niase^ by

y. In the case of most animals it is seldom important to distinguish the
gender. Hence in Greek, for the most part, the names of animals, instead
of being common, h^ve but a smgle g«nder» which is used indifierendy for
both sexes. Snch nouns are termed ej^cene (IrifCMts, promiscuotu), ThuS|
i Xi/s««, wolf, h itXMxnll, fox^ whether the male or the female is spoken of.

y Words which change their fonps to denote change of gender are termed
movabk; and this change is termed motion; as, i fianXtug, king, 4 fiarikumf
fMeeii ; • ^*fifi vise, 11 r«^tf, t^ r«^«y.

1. In words in which the fbninine may either have a eomtmm form with
the maemfine or a dtsUnet form, the AUie sometimes prefers the oommea
form, where the Ionic and Comtnon dialects prefer the distinct form ; as, <^ 4
^ify god, goddea, and li df« or S-mmmk, goddess. So, likewise, in adjectives.

^709 The masculine gender belongs properly to words
denoting males ; the feminine, to words denoting female9 ; and
the neuter to words denoting neither males nor females. In
Greek, however, the names of most things without life are
maaculioe or feminine, either from the real or fknoied posses-
sion of masculine or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in
their formation to other nouns of these genders.

Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and riverf
(from their power and violence), and also of the months^ are
masculine ; and the names of trees^ plants^ countries^ islands^
and cities (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants)
tire feminine ; while nouns denoting mere />rorft*€^, or imply-
ing inferiority (even though names of persons), especially
diminutives^ are neuter ; as, 6 avf/xoc, loind^ 6 Bogduq^ Boreas^
o notttfiOQ^ river^ 6 NtlXog^ the Nile^ 6 fn^v, months o *E%aiofApai'
oiy, June - Jvly^ 17 ot/x^, fig-tree^ ^ fjitjlia^ apple-tree^ ^ umogy
pear-tree^ ij auntlog^ vinCy ^ fivlSXog^ papyrus^ ij x^ga^ country^
fi Atyvntog^ ^gypU V ^V^og^ island, rj Safiog, Samos, { noktg,
^tty, 5 jtaxfSnlfimr, Laced(Bm,on ; to avxar^Jig, to fiijlov, apple,
jI Tf'xroy, childy to nvdgdno^Qv, slave^^ to yvvmov, dim. of yvvri,
woman, to naidiov, little boy or girL

$76. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the
signification, may be, for the most part, inferred from the form
of the theme or root, according to the following rules.

I. lo Ibe FUST pscLSNsioif (H 7), all words in -a; and *ni

Jigitized

by Google

118 DBCLENUON. [BOOK U

are masculine ; all in -a and -f^, femimne ; as, o ta/ilag^ o i^av*
Tijg' ij oixia^ ^ "^^M*

n. In the SECOND declension (H 9), most words in -oq and
-atg are masculine^ but some are Jfemimne or canmum ; words
in -w and -«r are neuter ; as, o io/o^, o mi0( * if odo$9 17 IW9
dawn ; o, 19 ^f o;, go(^, o, ^ agxrog^ bear ; to ovxWf to at^/emr.

Except idien the dmuimtive fini in ^ is giren to iNmininfl proper names;
III. In the THIRD DECLENSION (HH 11-14),

a. All words in -tvg are masculine ; all in -eo and -«tv« fi"^
nine ; and all in -a, -i, -v, and -o;, neuUr; as, o tTTTrf v;, o a/*-
^^ci;;, amphora; r^ ij^ctf, { yav$* yo augiOy 16 iidXiy honey ^ to
aatVy TO T«T/off.

b. All abstracts in -^ijg and -i^, and most other words in -i^
are feminine ; as, ij yinvxvtfigi sweetness ; { dwaftigy power, ^
nolfiaig, poesp ; ij ^ig, 17 noltg.

c. All labials and palatals, all liquids (except a few in
which ^ is the characteristic), and all liquid-mutes are either
masculine or feminine,

d. Nouns in which the root ends in,

1.) -«»T-, -tr-, or -yt'y are masculine ; as, o /sImc, -etroc, /ot^
ter ; o Ufti^r, 'hog * o lce»y, -oyro^, o odovg, o ylyagt o Iftag, '■artog^
thong.

Except Ti «?f , tf^r^f , ear, ri ^2$, ^•trit, SgM (both oontracts), 4 ^fiit, fftMf.
MMd; and a few names of cities ($ 75) ; as, h 'Fmfifwe, '§inT»ty Shammu,

2.) -^-, or -1^-, are feminine ; as, ^ Xafindg, -ddog, torch, ^
iifig, -idog, strife, ^ /Aa^i/;, -vdog, cloak ; 11 x6(fvg, -v&og, helmet.

Except •, 4 itati, Ttuiie, diUd, § 9»ut% ^•iit, foot, i, h S^iSf -lS«r, bird,

3.) -aT-, or -a-, are neuter ; as, to r^nuQ, -aiog, to Kigag, -atogf
TO yigag, -^og.

B. Number.
^77. The Greek has three numbers; the Sin-
gular, denoting one; the Plural, denoting more
than one ; and the Dual (dualis, from duo, two)^
a variety of the plural, which may be employed
when only two are spoken of.

Thus, the singalar &9^(MTf signifies man, the plaral &v^(t0*§t, mm (whetn
er two or more), and the dual 4»S^4^4r«, two Msa.

BKMAnc. The dual is most used in the Attic Graek. In the JEoIio diakd

Oigitized by VjOOQIC

n

CH. l.J CASE. 119

(at in the Latin, wtdch H apinmu^es tiie mott neaify of the Greek dialeote^
and in the Hellenistic Greek, tiia dual doei not ooeor, except in )«•, iwo^ and
Mm^ both (Lat. dmOj ambo).

C. Case,

^78. The Greek has five cases;
1. The Nominative, expressing the subject of a sentence.

2.

** Genitive,

44

the point of departure, or cause.

3.

« Dative,

44

the indirect object, or accom-

4.

" Accusative,

4C

paniment
direct limit

5.

** Vocative,

(4

address.

KoTBS. «. From the general character of the relations which they denote^
the Nominative, Aocosative, and Vocative are termed the direetj and tha
Genitive and Dative, the indireet cases.

/S. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus reed, the right eaam
and the other three, casu* oMiquif the oblique C€uet,

^ For a fiiDer statement of the use qf the cases, see Syntax.

D. Methods of Declension.

^79. Words are declined, in Greek, by an-
nexing to the root certain affixes, which mark
the distinctions of gender, number, and case.
There are three sets of these affixes ; and hence
arise three distinct methods of declining words,
called the first, second, and third declensions.

The first of these methods applies only to words of the mas-
culine and feminine genders ; the second and third apply to
words of all the genders. In some of the cases, however, the
affixes vary, in the same declension, according to the geiider ;
so that, to know how a word is declined, it is necessary to
ascertain three thbgs ; 1. its root^ 2. the declension to which it
belongs, and 3. its gender.

Hie mode in which the gender is marked has been aiready stated (§ 74, /3).
Firom the theme (L e. the Nom. sing.) and the gender, we can often determine
■t once the root and the declension. If it is necessary to marlc these expli-
citly, it is commonly done by giving^ with the theme, the Genitive singular, or
its ending. If the Genitive nngular ends in ^mt or -nu or in .«» from a theme,
m -uf or -n$, tiu word is of the first dedensions if it ends m .»ufrom a theme m
-09 or -sfi the word is of the second declension ; if it ends in -tt, the word is of
Ae 0ttrd declension. The root is obtained by throwing off the affix of the Genitive $
or it may be obtained by throwing off any afl^ beginning with a voweL

Hins the nonns, I rafttmty steward, ^ •ixUt house, h yX^rr«, tongue, i ^f*t^

Digitized

by Google

ISO DECLENSION. — #¥|fERAL RULES. [bOOK II

pep^ imd i^A^^t Arab, milkd ill the Genitive, r«^y, fhrnt, yXmt^nti M
f4,0M, a?i4 "A^fif^f. FroiQ (kese genitives, we a4c«rtain ^t rafnitu, •Uitty an^
yXZrrtt belong to the first declension, ^iifA»i to the second, 4nd "A^*^ to th^
third. By throwing off the affixes -«&, -as^ -nt^ and -«f, we obtain the root!
TKfU'y eUs-, ykmrr-, itifA-^ and 'A^t($-, The words are then declined by an-
nexing to these roots the affixes in the table (^ 5).

^80. In the declension of words, the follow-
ing GENERAL RULES are observed.

I. The masculine and feminine affixes are the
same, except in the Nom^iative and GenUtve sin-
gular of the Jirst declension. The neuter affixes
are the same with the masculine and feminine,
except in the direct cases, singular and plural.

II. In neuters J the three direct cases have the
same affix, and in the plural this affix is always d.

III. The dual has but two forms; pne for the
direct J and the other for the indirect cases.

IV. In the feminine singular of the first declen
sion, and in the plural of all words, the Vocative is
th^ 35me with the Nominative.

% 8 !• RracARKS. 1. The use of the Yoc as a distinot form is atll
furtW limited. Few svbetantives or adjectives, except proper names and pern
sonal appellatives and epithets, are sufficiently employed in address to require
a separate fonn for this purpose. Hence the participle^ pronovKj artieje, and
uimeral have no distinct Yoc. ; and in respect to other words which 9re de-
clined, the following observations may be made.

a. JkTeucuIimet at Dec I. are commonly names or epithets of persoaa, and
l^ierefore fonyi the Yoo. sing.

fi. In Dec. 11^ the distinct form of the Yoc. is commonly used, except for
euphony or rhythm ; as,^n ^/X«f, Z ^i>.»s^ my friend I my friend! Ar. Kub.
1 167. ' a>;x0( Z UinXgLi A. 189. *HiXii$ rt F. 277. To avmd the 4ouhIe
I, Si0;, god (like deus in Latin), has, m classic vrriters, no distinct Yoc. ; yet
0M St. Matth. 27. 46.

y. In Dec. III., few words, except proper names and personal appellative^
and epithets, have a distinct Yoc. ; and even in those which have, tiie Nom.
i9 sometimes employed in its stead, especially by Attic writers ; thus, ^Sl trSra
xtfXi Ar. Ach. 971 ; but *^n viXtg Soph. Phil. 1213. Ai»» Soph. Aj. 89 ; but
*ft ^<X * A7«f lb. 629. In many words of this declension, the Yoc. cannot
be formed without such a mutilation of the root as scarcely to leave it inteUi-
^ble($$ 63, 101).

Digitized

by Google

CH. I.J HISTORY. 121

^892. An tnspection of the table (If 5) will likewise
show, that, in regular declension,

*.) The Nom. sing* mase. and (ezc^t in Dec I.) fern, always ends in f

fi.) The Dat. mng. always ends in $, either written in the line or subscribed.

y.) The Ace sing, (except in neuters of Dec. m.) always ends in v, or its
corresponding vowel a (4 50) ; aiid the Ace. plnr. maac. and fern, is always
formed by adding g to the Ace. sing. (§§ 34, 58).

h) The Gen. pins', always ends in m.

^.) In Dec I. and 11., the affixes are all opem (i. e. begin with a vow^
and iH oonstttute a distinct syllable In Dec III., three of the affixes, r, 9,
and n^ are dote (i. c begin with a eonmmantX and of these the two first,
hanng no vowd, must unite with the last syllable of the root*

^.) In the singular of Dec. III., the direct cases neut, and the Yoc. masc
and fem., have no affixes.

NoTR. It foOoMTS, from nos. i and ^, that words of Dec. I. and 11. are
faruyWdne (par, equal), that is, have the same number of syllables ic all
their cases ; but wofds of Dec. III. are hnftaruyUabic, that is, have more
sylhibles m some of their cases than in others.

3. The Table (U 6) exhibits the affixes as resolved into
their two classes of Elements ; T. Flexible Endings, which
are tignijicant additions, marking distinctions of number, case,
and gender ; and II. Connecting Vowels, which are euphonic
in their origin, and serve to unite the flexible endings with the
root For farther illustration, see the following sections upon
the history of Greek declension.

E. History of Greek Declension.

§ S3* The early history of Greek declension is beyond the period not
merely of written records, but even of tradition. It can be traced, therefore,
only by the way-marlcs which have been left npon the language itself, and by
the aid of comparative philology. The fbllowing view of the subject has
much evidence in its support, and serves to explain the general phenomena of
Greelc declension, and of the use of the numbca^ and cases.

Greek declension was progresdve. At first, the simple root was used, as in
some languages even at the present day, without any change to denote num-
ber iir case ; thus, i^^y fi»h, ywr, imiitere, whether one or more were spoken
of. Then the plural number was marked, by affixing to the root i, the sim- ^
pie root, of course, now becoming nngular, as each new formation limits the
^se of prior forms ■ thus.

Singular, Ix^i, fidi. Plural, Ix^* /«*«•

yvr, vulture^ yv^t, tuthiret.

The next step was to make a separate form, to express th« wdtreel, as
distinguished fh>m the direct reUtions. This was done by aimezing i to the
root, and this form became phiral by adding one of the oommon signs of the
pharal, » We hava now the disthicttoa of case ; thus,

Digitized by VjOOQIC

122 <»ECI«E2)i310N. [bOOK H

^ECLZJ^mon,

Singular.
Direct Case, ix^v

Pluwl.

Indirect Gate, Ix'^ut

yuvi

yvm^

- ^ S 4 • Each of those cases was afterwards subdivided. (A.) From
the Direct Case were separated, in the mascniine and feminiw. genders, twi
new cases, the one to express the subject^ and the other the lUrect object^ of an
action, i. e. the Nbminativef and AccuatxHoe ecues.

llie Nominative was formed by adding $, as &e sign of ^the tmijeei, to tka
old Dii*ect forms ; tbus^ Sing. Ix^^h yw, Plur. Ix^^^t yvwu^

The Accmatwe was formed by adding tq the root, as the sign of tbe ^^r^
obfect, 9t which in the plural took one of th/9 Qommon signs of the i4ural, t ;
thus, Smg. ix^vyt yvfPj Plur. ix^h Y^*fi ^i hy the euphonic ctuwge of t
into its corresponding vowel (§§ 58, 63, R.), Sing, yvret, Plur. tx^^»t,
yvTas,

(B.) Prom the Indirect Case was separated a new ease to express the
ntf^edhej as distmguished from the ol^jecHve relations, i. e. the OenHive, This
was formed by affixing ^, or commonly, with a euphonic vowel, «^w In tha
phiral, this took tfaa plural affix » ; thus, fSv. But by the laws of ouf^ony,
which afterwards prevailed, neither S, nor ^v could end a word (J 63).
Therefore, S either was changed to $, or was dropped, or assumed the vowel i
(commonly written with y paragugic iv, § 67. 3) ; and a^v became »t* by the
absorption of the ^ (^, perhaps, first passmg into r, as in the singular, then r
bebig changed mto its corresponding vowel i, and this absoHted). Ttuia «^
became «# , «, or ^Siv ; and «3ir, i»«.

The old Indirect Case remained as a Datha, witkont diaoge, exeapt tliat a
new plural was formed by annexing the dative sign 4 (§ 83) to the Komioa-
tive plural.

§ 8 «!• The plural had now throughout a new form, but the old form
had 80 attached itadf to various names of incessant oso, that in most of the
dialects it was still preserved. But these household plurals, which could not
be shaken off, would be principally such as referred to objects double by natnre
or custom, as the eyes, hands, feet, shoea^ wings, &e. Hence this £r>nn oaina
at length to be iq>propriated to a ^tai sense, though in the time of Uomer
this restriction of its use seems not as yet to have been fully made. IIm
simple form of die root was likewise retained in the smgular as a caae of ad-
dress ( Vocative), in words in which there was occasion for such a form, and
the laws of euphony allowed it. In the plural the Vocative had never an>
form distinct fVom the Nominative. We have now the three numbers, anc
the five cases, which, with the euphonic dianges already mentSened, appeal
thus.

• Smg. Nom. -» hx^t yi*t (y^)

(Jen. 'H ix^*i ytHtU

Dat. •» *x^^* yvTs •

Voo, ♦ !x^

Vkr. N.V. ^ Ix^f ywt

Ace. Hif hc^^ y^«i

Digitized

by Google

CH. 1 * HISTORY. ISfc

Dual Da*, -i Ix^St yftn

For the sake of completeness, ^e have added in the table above two later
modifications; viz., the common shorter Dat. plur., formed by dropping i
(unless one chooses to fbrm it from the Dat. sing, by inserting the plnral sign
r) ; and the Indirect Case dual prolonged by inserting «, after the analogy of
the Gen. sing, and plu^.

^ HO. We have exhibited above the primitive nude declension, now
cilled the third. Bat snbeeqfaently *wo ether modes of declension sprang np,
having oonneethig vowels, which united the ileidble endings to the root ; liM
one having «, now cidied the §ecomd dedenslen ; and the other, •, now odM
the firtL These dedensbns dioee rather to drop than to change the final ^ of
the Gen. shig., apparently to avoid oonftision with the Nom. ; and likewise to
FHain the old Dh«ct Case as a Nom. plur., which became afterwards distiiH
giiished from the dual by a difi^crent mode of contraction, its more finqaent ose
leading to precession* In all the affixes of these declensions in which two
▼owels came together, contraction natwally took plaee m one or another of iito
forms ; and in the Dat. plur. a shorter form became the more ooomon 000^
made either by drapping < in»i the longi^ form, or by folding tite plnral sign $
to the Dat. sing. For « in the Yoc., inatoad of •, see § 28, We give as an
nple of DoD. II., i Xiyt, word, and of Dec L, ^ r«/M#f, ttmoard.

Sing. Nom.

X#y-#-f,

X#Vf

vm/At-m-tt

rm/iUH

Gen.

Xiy^~4i

Xiytm

mmfti-m^

rmfum

Dat.

Xiy-t't,

Xiyf

T«^|.«.4,

^#^

Ace.

Xiy^-r,

Xiyw

rmfiti-m-f.

rm/»m9

Voc

Xiy^

Xiyt

rm/ii-m.

r«/J«

Bw. N. v.

Xiy-^*

Mym

vmi^i-M^

Vfl^CMU

Gen.

Xiym

rmtM-d-m,

rmfiuSp

Dirt.

X»r4^;

Xiytm, •«#

«Mw-4-M»,

TrnfMUfi^^MH

▲00.

Xiy.*^,

Xiym

«W^*^«-#f»

wmftmf

DualN.A.V.x;y^.i,

Xiy.

T«/*'-«-i,

rttfiU

G.D.

X«7-«-if,

rtt/u-m'tf.

vafiititf

In the Nom. and Aoc. sing. <of these dedensionf, the primitive dhfeet form^
without f or t appended, waa tometimee retained ; as, Nom. &vi^rd, twirird
($ 95. 2 ; Qompare the Latin mauta, pogta), i - Aec vm^, U, 'AS» (§ 97). So
the neuton ri, ixx$, mM, Uum, H (§ 97).

•^ ST. We have thus hr treated only of the fnateuline gender. In the
nmOtt (wbitk ooeoKS 011^ in the second and third declensions), since things
without lift htv<e no volvotary action, the distinction of subject and object io
obviously of far less consequence, and therefore in this gender the separation
of the Nom., Ace., and Yoc. was never made. The place of these three cases
«contin led to be sappHed by a shigle Direct Ctee, which in the singular of
Dec. in. was the simple root, and in die sinyrular of Dec II. ended in tt (the
9 being either euphonic, or more probably having the same foree as in the
Jop«, «nd mivfcing the otyeetive character of the gender). The plnral has the
same form in hoth declensions, simply appending, instead of the old 1, 4 (which,
|W t}ie corresponding vowel of » (§ 50), is more objective in its character), and
Vrithout a connecting vowel. We give, as examples, rt ^dm^v (poetic), ttar,
«tr fkr* tlL, and « i #t;»«», Jkfy of Dec. II.

Digitized

by Google

124 DECLENSION. [bOOK |I

Sing. N. A. y. i^^v m-w

Gen. imu^'H 0v»'4tf

Dat. idftfV'i rvx-y

Plur. N. A. y. ImM^v-m * ' rv»^
Gen. tmmfu-mf w^x-mv

Dat. ia»^v-ffi 9V»^*$f

Dual N. A. y. ^«»^ff.s r^x.«r

G. D. %«itt^V'»n rtf»-Mf

§ 8 8* The distinction of sabject and object is less striking in the yew-
^iM-e thaii m the masculine ; and benoe, in the Jim dedmision, wliere then
««K no nonters with which a distinction must be maintained, Uv* feminine is
^ttinguished from the masculine by not appending the suUfective $ in the
Num. sing. (§ 84 , and by retaining the form »$ in the Gen. sing., as tha
reason for preferring the shorter form does not now exist (§ 86). The « of
this ending is absorbed in the preceding «, unless one chooses to consider the
t as here appended without the euphonic vowel (§ 84. B). In all the other
eases, the feminine has precisely the same form as the masculine. Thus, i

Sing. Kom. nM-i, 0»t£ Flor. Nom. 9m»i

Gen. ^Mi-d-Hf 0»mt Gen. 9»tm *

Dat. fsu-ti-T, 0Mtf Dat. ^tumg

w^Loc r»4-«-», r»MB» Ace eiudg

For the ).n<ee8sion which has taken place so extendvely in the singular of
Dec. I., see ^ 93.

§ 8 0v In the earlier Greek, the prevalent mode of avoiding hiatus was
not, as afWw%i js, by contraction, but by the insertion of a strong' breathing
or aspirate omr^mant (cf. § 117). Of these the most prominent- appeaia tk
have been the digamma (§ 82. T), And, although this has disappeared ttom
the language, yet it has left other consonants which have dther> taken its
place, or idikh were used in like manner with it. The insertioa of these
consonants, to^y^ether with different modes of contraction, has given an especial
variety of form, in ihejirst and teeomd dedenshm, to the Dative tingular, which,
as the primitive induct case (§ 83), originally performed the offices of both
the Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find, .

1.) The I appended with the hisertion of ^ the natural successor of the
digamma. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and Dat.,
and sometimes fiven supplying the place of these cases hi the plural, is evi-
dently of great antiquity. £. g.

Gen. Sing. Dec. I. i| litiif i O. 580, /3. 8 ; iri n»fip9 O. 300 : Deo. II.
kvi irm^^akip H. 268 ; in vtfri^tv ». 83 ; Jkwi wXmri^ irrvi^tp N. 588
IXiip ftXurm rtix*» O. 295 ; ^r' eturi^n A. 44.

Dat Sing. Deo. L Up fi'mp ^Mwmt X. 107 ; if** Jim fmsptftimfn ). 407,
I. 618; iri^efi 11. 734; S^p* t. 238: Dec IL wm^* mvript M. 802 ; lir*
hiiopv N. 308 ; ^ii^tv H. 366.

Gen. and Dat Plur. Dec II. iTrri Un^viipi wXnr^f P. 69S, T. 897, I.
705 ; A^' Urtiipiv ^ 134 ; i^* Urti^tv r. 145 ; I'x^iifiv /». 414.

NoTBB. «. Tlie ^ likewise appears m the Datwe j)htral of a few wordi ot
the third dedauiom, v^ere it seems to have been inserted for the sak) of

Digitized

tjy Google

^H. 1.] HISTORY.

lengthening tbe pceeeding syllable ; aa, fi^ir^ ^ fixr S^^'t, These fixrms were
also used as both Gen. and Dat.; thus. Gem. »««•* S^i^^i A. 452; w^i^B'*..,
•X*^P" B* 107 ; ««■• 0vti^trft9 S, 214 ; ^il % rnf^trfi* £. 41 : Dat. rvv
;;^irf< IL 811 ; ;^>rfi A. 474 (cf. 479), X. 139.

fi. Tlie following forms in -f '(0 require special notice ; (a) U^m^ipv t. 59,
ard »«rvXii)«»«^/» i. 433, whidi are formed as firom nouns at Dec. II., while
the themes in ase are Ux^^ ^ ^^ ^*) ^^^ xtfrvXn^^t of Dec IIL ; (b)
i^rtV^i K. 156, and *E^ii3cr^y (probably the correct form for *E(ifi$v(rp¥ I.
572, Horn. Cer. 350, Hes. Th. 669), which appear to have plural forms^
though singnlar in then* use ; (e) vmufn, an irregiilar plural form for imufs, N.
700 ; also used as Gen. 11. 246, &c ; (<i) the Epic adverb Tf «, with m^,
k» 38, which appears to be an old Dat. sing, from ft,

y. Compare with these forms in .^i, the lAtin Datives tUn, nbi, nobiSf
wbit, deabui, aermoitibuSf rebus, and the Latin adverbs of place in -bi ; as, tbi,
aUbij vtriJbi, from if, aUus, vter. The forms in .n^« when used as Datives are
fliten written incorrectly with an i subscript {-i^p, § 25. «), as though ^i had
been added to the complete Dat. form. For the » paragogic, see § 66. «.

§ 0O« 2.) The I appended with the inserticm of i^. This form became
adverbial (chiefly poetic), denoting the place where; as, •1*»^ at home, «{XX«-
S«, dmuhare, rnvri^t, t^t^ KpfivBoBi. It was mostiy confined to the eeeond
deeleiuioH, and, in the few instances in which it was made from nouns of other
declensions, it still imitated the forms of this. Traces of its old use as the
Indirect Case still remun in Homer ; thus, Gen. ov^avoBt r^^, ss v^i w^cifv,
T. 3, *l)uiBt w(i 0. 561, fiH^t w(i C* 3^ ; I>at. Mti^i^t I. 300, •. 370.

3.) The I appended with the insertion of %. This form appears only in
the Epic i}^i (improperly written by some ^x** ^* ^^* y)> ^^ ^ advcobial
Dative f, where, A. 607.

4.) The < ooatracted with the preceding • in the seoond dedension Into h
(§ 82). This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in
adverbial Datives; as, «7»m, at home (but «7»^, to a house; cf. in Latin, domi
and dbuMt), rs^ *UBfUi^ t^ tvt. Yet U *UB/»m S^fm, Fr. 209; i§
n^tfif r<M Inscr. Ciet. ; tm ^/mj Inscr. Boeot.

5.) The common form, in which the i is absorbed by the preceding vowel;
as, •-« ^ t^ f] thus, ^(fy «&^ 'l^^/^f'

^01* The forms of the Genitive in ^tv or ^» (§ 84. B) remained
*io the eomaon language only as adverbs, denoting the place whence; as,
9i««dt», from homcj ilxx^^it, mvroBtf, 'Ad^vffStf. As examples of their use
as decided Genitives, may be cited l| KWvfAn^t 0. 304, V^ «v^f«di» 0. 19,
ir* «^«»£^» A. 18; and the pronominal forma ifai!^*, rsi^v, l^», which
tnn ooenr in Attic poets.

11 •

Digitized

by Google

ISMT DECi.BI«BIO^. [book II

CHAPTER II-

DECLENSION OF NOUKg.

L The First Declension.

[For the affixes and paiadifrnt , .aee f IT 5 -a]

^08. For the original affixes of Dec. I., which all had a
as a connecting vowel, see §§ 86, 88. In most of these affix.
es, a either became part of a diphthong, or else, either through
contraction or the force of analogy, became long. Short a
however remained in the singular^

1.) In the direct cases of femininesy whose characteristic
was a, a double consonant, or Xk ; as, yXwaaa^ ylmaaup (^7),
diipii^ thirsty ^o|fli, opUiioUy qI^u^ root^ afnHn^ earUesL

Notes. «. Add a few feminines in -Xa, and some in -tm, particulaily^^mdle
ap/>ellativet ; as, wmukd and mveiv-mukSLj rest, txt^fA, viper^ fti^tfAnt, eore, iUTt
fdj mutrets, kUtvd, HoneMs; likewise axmvB'm, thom,

i3. Add, also, many ieminines in -m pure and .^«. These have mostly a
diphthong in the penult, and may aU be recognized by the accent, except the
proper names Kip^o, Hvp^M, and the numeral ftiiy one. The principal classes
are, (a) Polysyllables in -cm and .m«, except abstracts in -ua from verbs tn
.^S0 ; as, JiX^B-uSy irm^, cA>m£, good-wiU, fittriXuit, qweeM, but /B«r«Xt«li; mym»
iirom $ttf 1X160 • (b) Female designatioM in -tftmi at, ^^4kXrftSi, fimak mttai^
dan: (c) DitsyflaUes and some pdysyllabitf names of plaoes in -4m«; as,
^r«, goid motiitt, 'UrUuit' (d) Words in -w*; as, /luTSit Jfy' (*) HMt
words in .^ whose penult is lengthened by a diphtttoag (tzospl mm), by S^ or
by ;/ ; as, fUx»4(A, tword, yi^Sfi, bridge^ Ilvffi.

y* The accent commonly shows tlia quantiQr of final • in the theme.
Thus, in all proparoanfttmes and properupomenaf it must be ahort by the general
laws of accent ; while, by a spedal law of the dedeoslon. It is long in all
octytones, and in all /lomtytonet in •«, Gea. -mt, ttceepc tha time tteatioiisd in

Note /3.

2.) In tlie Vocatioe of nouns in -tfic^ and of genttUs and
vompound verbals in ^17; ; as vavtijg (5[ 7), JWu^^, ScjftkUm^
Uf^arjg^ Persian, yfwfiiiQtig (y?, earthy fUTQiio^ to measure)^
geometer^ fiVQonwXrig (fivgov^ perfume^ nwUw^ to sell) ^ perfumer ^
Voc. vavia^ 2%vSiiy flfqaa (but UsQafig^ Perses^ a man^s name,
Voc. niqori)^ yftofihiqa^ fiVQonmla*

^ 03. In the singular, long a passed, by precession, into
fly unless precedod by ^, t, t», or po (§ 29) ; as, vavri;;, rctittj^
Aiffetdtig^ AtQtldijv^^AT^Hdriy ykbluo'igy ykulooj,, ti^ij, tifi^g^ Tf/iijV'

Digitized

by Google

OH. 2.J FIRST DECLENSION. ] St

butt ttt^MBpf trnfii^y auti^ OKiag^ &v^i^ Siif&p (51 7), idiiJiy it ea
HiffiSy need^ X9^^y color,

NoiB. Long a likewise remains in the pores, «■««, grois, rr^a, jxirck, yvM^
fieldf r<»vc, gourd, tm^vd, walnut-tree, iKaS, olive-tree^ "Setv^txadf Nau$icaa ; in
tiie W(HXls, mXmxif war-ay, itri/S^*, day after a feast, ^ttavldXd, trofy-iprmg,
y*99m$dtf nMe ; and in some proper names, particulariy those which are Doric
or foreign ; as, *Af)(0/ts)c, a4«E, <I><x«^iix«, At^piidf, TX£f, ^vkXdg • and it
became n after ^ or (0 in the words Zifti, neck, xa^n, maiden, xif^nt cheek, Jt^^^fi,
pap, fmi, stream ; in some proper names, as Ttiffit * and in oompoonds of ^1-
r^, to meaturetf as y%mfiir^9i$ (§ 92. 2). In some words, usage fluotnatos
between long or short « and n ; as, 'A^arr^f Cyr. vi. 1. 31, 'A^icrmf lb. y. 1.
4, iruni and n/m, w^vp.'td and w^vfAvn*

§ 94* Contracts. A few nouns, in which the cbamcter*
istic is a or e, and feminine adjectives in -(& and -017, are con-
tracted ; as, fivda pvoiy ^Egfiidq ^Egpr^^ fioQSug fio^faf (ff being
here doubled after contraction), avxen iri'xij, fig-tree^ ZQ^^^^
Xifwjn^ dinXoti SmX^. For the rules, see ^§ 33, 36, 37 ; for .the
paradigms, fl^ 7, 18.

DIALKCnO FORMS.

§ 0«S. I. In tha affixes of this declension, the Dork dialect retains
throughout the original « ; while in the singular, the Ionic has n in most of
thtM ihitdB hi trliich the Attk and Common dialects have long «, afid even in
some in which they have short «, particularly derirfttives iii -iMt and "tSt
( ^ 44) ; thus, Dor. n/^a, ri(Mis<, rs/A^ rtfiat • Ion. ^Ksn, fntnSi ^»in, r«w •
Ep. JkXn^uMt ivwXaifit New Ion. aXnd^niii, fiin, for mXvi^ui, iSTk^iA, /AtiL,

S. ih ilrofds In ^f, the primitive Direct Case hi 41 is somethntt rebtmed by
Hanwr attd some of the other poets as Nom. (§ 86), fof the sUkd of thA
metre or euphony : as, • «vrc Qvi^rd B. 107; i^nrirA Nirriv^ B. 356; ^n-
ritra Zit/f A. 175 ; fia^vfitnTtt Xi/^wt Pind. N. 3. 92 ; iv»rk M«y«Xx«f Theoc.
8. SO. 80 in ftminines in .«>, th6 poets sometimes retain the old short a in
the Voc. : as, fCftfM, piXfi T. 130 : *n Ai»«, Sapph. 66 (44). On the other
hand, Mvn Ap. Rh. 8. 886, fhr At^rA, Voc of AiMmf.

8. The old fnttttw aMxes^ «« tod dm, whidi dten oo6ur hi thi Epic writ-
ers, were oontntotod at follows :

«.) In the Anit dialect, they were regularly contracted into 0 and m, with
the hisertion of s after a consonant (5 35) ; as, 'Ar^uhf (*ATfiii0) 'Av^tiiw,
Ar^uitUn (*Ar^ii0«ry) 'Arfuiiat*' B«^i«« B«(i«, 'K^fuitt O. 214, IS/ifUkitt A.
165, 'Ar;»B. 461.

/3.) Ib tiie Doric', d aheorbed the fallowing rowel, and the affiites bM«in0 d
and S» ($ 45. 1 ) ; aa, 'Ar(tlita§ *Ar($!Zd, *Ar^uhutf 'At^uHv,

y.) In the Attie, d» and dmt were contracted into «v (by precession from m,
h% 28, 29) and »» ; as, *Ar^itim9 ('Ar^ i/J«») "Ar^tth»u, *Ar^uiat9 *Ar^i£9.

^ OO. 4. In the Aeeu^aHve of matdkEnee, the Ionic oft«n changes t
tol, tiie old oonnectiiig vowel « now becoming • (S 40. /I) ; wm, 'U^^Mi
Hdt i. 11, pi. Zifxirtit lb. Ill, for ^i^irorif*, h^riTdg.

5. The dative plural in Homer commonly ends in .iir<, or .ft before a

Digitized

by Google

12^ SECOND DECLENSION. [BOOK II«

vowd (wfiJch may be referred to apostrophe). There are, however, a few in
Btances of -pf before a consonant (^Jj »«/ A. 1 79, <rir(tit w^it q. 279, &c.)
and two, where we even find -«if, which ought, perhaps, to be changed to -91
(ixraif M. 284, ^i»7s c. 119). An old contraction into -cr/, instead of -tit^t,
remained m the common language in adverbs of placd ; as, Ilxara/ari, ai
PlatatBf B^u^&ffu

6. For the Epic Gen. in -i^iy, see § 91. For the Epic Datives in ^«, Sif
and 'Xh see §§ 89, 90. For the Doric and .£olic forms of the Aoc plnr.,
*ee § 45. 5.

7. Antique, Ionic, and Doric forms are sometimes ibund in Attic writers
particularly,

«.) The Dor. Gen. in -«, firom some nouns in .«;, mostly proper names ;
as, i(9i^0^^msi fovsier^ Tmfifuctt, KMkXiat • Gen. •«vi^43ii^a, Tmfifvaf K«X-
Xm» So all contracts in 4^^ ; as, fi»ff»i, G. fi»f^a (^ 7).

i3.) The Ion. Gen. in .i«, ih)m a few proper names in -iif ; as, 0mXngf
rn^ns • Gen. 0cXi«, Tn^m,

yJ) The old Dat. phir. in .«i^i, which is frequent in the poets. So^ in Fla-
tOb rixfatn Leg. 920 e, hf»i^ettri Phsedr. 276 b.

li. -The Second Declension,

[For the affixes and par&dlgms, see Sf 86, 87 ; ITf 6, 6, 0, 10.]

$ 97* The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa
ave singular are wanting (§ 86),

1.) In the theme of the article ; thus, o for og.

2.) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns SXlog,
WTog, ixslvog, and og ' thus, to, ailo^ aito, ixiivo^ o, for rof,

Note. In crasis with the article (§ 39), and in oompoeitiQn with the pro-
nouns vMt and riets^ the neuter «wr« more frequently becomes mMv • thus^
rahrit and rmbrif for ro ai/ri • r«i«tfr«v and «-0m«»t«, rf§Sm and r»wtvr»*

8.) Frequently in the Acckisatioe of the Attic declension
{% 9S)» particularly in ^ eo><:, dazwi, ^ aXw^, threshing-floor^ 13
K^fiCk)^, ^ KoJff, ^ Tew<:. 6 "Af^wg ' thus, Acc. r€«f and vtm (fl 9)i
f«, *^^w. So, in the adjectives ap^ij^wc (IT 1*7), avanUiag, fidl^
n^ioXQBtog, competent,

§98. Contracts. If the characteristic is o, ?, or o, it
may be contracted with the affix according to the rules (§§ 33-
37). See ayriQiwg (H 17), oaxiov, voog (U 9). The contract do-
clension in -wg and -o»v, from -aog and -aov, is termed by gram-
marians the Attic Declension from its prevalence among Attic
writers, although it is far from being peculiar to them (§ 7).

Notes. «. The number of words belongiriir to tlw Attic declension it
unalL In some of them, the uncontracted form dues iioi tifcur, m ocean

Digitized

by Google

CH. 2.] THIRD DECLE

only with somo change. Thus, for kutyaot, s^

y§M, the original fonn of ynt earthy and

iuiywtt %yyu»s) we find the extended forms ktmyafi"'

yu»s» Some of them are variously declined. See §5 123. y, 124. y,

$. If the diaracteristic is long «, i is inserted after the contraction (§ S9)
thus, 9dif (jMif) 9Utf (^ 9), 9«tw (y«) »u», vo^ {yf) vi^, utit (nv») vmmt • PhUW
§m»i {yif) vtff &C.

7. In the Attic declension, the Norn. plur. neut. is contracted, like the
Khe caseB, into t» ; thus, myn^^ (f 17), as if from Ayrifd-t-m, a ftrm with
the o^nnecting voweL See § 87.

DIALECTIC FORMS.

"^ OO. 1. The affix of the Geo. img. «•• (§ 86), which was com«
monly contracted to «v, or, in the iBolic and stricter Doric, to m (§ 44. 4),
waft often prolonged by the .poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the
Tragic in Ijnric portions), to m«; thus, witrov^Xttet^icu B. 145 ; ^•/^•u v>pn^»i»
«. 126; J* UfM4* «. 330; ^%o» Pmd. O. 2. 37 ; S^tct* lb. 6. 60 ; fi,*y»Xf
Aif Ale 1 (20) ; l(x»/*i*M§ Id. 37 ; «'«r«^«r«...'Ay«4r» Theoc 1. 68 ; /««-
km»Z ;^/^r«M Id. 4. 18. The Epic genitives Ilcrc*;* (A. 327, &c.) and Iln^
ukuM (S, 489) are made by a single contraction, witii the osoal insertion of
« (§ 98. ^), from the original forms IIiriM, nnnJjU*. The Epic dual forms
in Mr», which alone are used by Homer, arise frinn a mere poetic d'mbling of
' (§ 48).

2. Some proper names in -h have the Gen. sing, in Herodotus, aft»r the
analogy of Dec. I.; as, E^«iV«f, K^mVi** viil 122, but K^mw L 6; BAmm
IT. 1 60 ; KXtftft^irw Y. 32. The Gen. plur. forms rirrMrv (Hdt. L 94) and
Tu^imv (Id. iL 36), if genuine^ may be referred to the Ionic insertion of t
(§ 48. 1).

3. The old Dat plnr. in .Mr< is common in the poets of aU classes, and m
Ionic prose. So, even in Flato, ^»irt Leg* 955 e.

4. For the Epic Gen. in .0^9, see § 91. For the Ei^c Datives hi ^< and
•^4, and the oLd Dat. in .m, see §§ 89, 90. For the Doric and .folic f^irms

of the Ace plur., see § 45. 5.

5. Contracts in -tvs from .««# occur in Homer, though rarely ; as, w»t
»..240 (elsewhere w«f). In words in .i«f, -•#?, he sometimes protracts the •
to u (§ 47. N. , and sometimes employs synizeeis (§ 30).

III. The Third Declension.

[For the affixes and paradigms, see ff 85, 87; W 5, 6, II - 16.]

^ lOO* In this declension, the Nominative, though regard-
ed as the theme of the word, seldom exhibits the root in its
simple, distinct form. This form must therefore be obtained
from the Genitive, or from some case which has an open af
fix (§§ 79, 82. e).

Rkmarks. 1. Special attention must be given to the euphcmk: changes
which occur in those cases which have either cloae aflUxes, or no affixes ; that
b in the Nonunative and Vocative singular, the Dative plural, and the Ao-

Digitized

by Google

t9D TBIRO DECLENSION. [bOOK 11

cttsativc abgnlar in •». For these changes, see in general $$ 51, 55, 57 -
59, 63.

2. Tlie flexible ending of the Aoc sing. In this, as in the oflier two de-
clensions; seems to have been originally ». But the v was so extensively
dianged into m in aooordanee with § 63. R, that the m beeauie the prevailing
affix, and was often osed even after a vowd. It will thurefure be understood
that the affix is «, if no statement is made to the contrary. When the affis
is V, the root receives the same changes as in the theme ($ 1 10).

W(Mrds of the third deel^usioH are diTideJ aocoftiing to the
characteristic, into Mutes, Liquids, LtquiD^MifTES, and Pures.

A. Mutes.

§ 1<^1« Labials and Palatals. These are alt either
masculine or feminine, and in none is t&e Voc formed except
yvyii (N. y).

Notes. «. Cor the >^ and ( in the theme and Dat |fl., see § 51.

$• In S^tl, the root to ^e'T** ^ *''<'"* ^""^ ^ wMch x Nmaiito, 5 be-
oones r, aeoordiniir to § 6S. In « JkXmwnl^ -tiMf, /Mr, tbn UmI vowel of th?
root is lengthened in the thene. Cempaie $ lit. «.

y. Ft/Mf, wamoHj wife, which is irregular in having its theme after the form
of Dec I., and abo in its aooentnatioii, is thnt deeliaed : S. K. ytnf, O. yv-
9m»itt D. yvjmmii A. ymmsuMj Y. tywmi • P. N. y»wriWt#^ G. ytMutuh, D. yp^
mtJ^/j A. yvtmsmmt • D. N. yvtrnTxt^ 6. ywmmstv. Hie oM gnamarians have
alsd cited from Condc writers the ferms, A. ^vmI^ P. V. ymmi, A. yvwdf, ac-
cording to Dec. L

§ lOSI, Masculine and Feminine Linguals. These
lose their characteristic in ihe theme and Dat. pi. (§ 55), in the
Ace. sing., when formed in p (§§ 63. R., IGO. 2), and in the
Voc. {§ 63).

NoTRS. «. If a palatal is thus brought before #, it unites with it in ^
(§ 51), as (&*m»TSy itaxi) Si^al (f 11), h (yvxri) fv^, night \ if to the end
of a word, it is dropped (§ 63), as (&9a»r, *(»«*) afy«. This distinct Voc.,
however, is used only in addressing a god ; otherwise, 2 &fti^ (or, hj frequent
crasis, Zfml).

$. For the change of • when brought before the affixes t ani », or to tljs
end of a word, see §§ 112. «, 113. 3.

y. Baritones in wr and -ut form the Aoc sing, in both « and y, the latter

being the more common affix ; as, x»(*t (T 1 >)* 4 '('«« «^>^) i* A ^e»t^ hird;

Aoc x*f'^* *^^ X^i" (^ <^ name of a goddess, the fbrm in ^ is always

used, and sometimes, also, in poetry ; but, otherwise,, the fonn in -t, yet aee

H. Gr. iii. 5. 1 6), i^n and poet, t^tim^ i^vtv and poet. d^»r^«. So also, xXwf

i yi>^tt^ laughter^ and the compounds of vvt, foot ; thus, Aoc »Xiii*

', yikmrm and yik^tf, 0/Jf«-#J« and O^ii'rn* (^ U), Ji<r^m and >/•

17). Add • 1^, /bM, Aec l^nr^w and rare poetic fom f^. Sc

in rsMlved by the poete into rii>, dwy hwm Aoc wdTf, Ap. Rh.

Digitized

by Google

CM. 2. J MUTES. — LIQUIDS. 131

4. 697. In ozytooes, the accent served to (ireveat the lingual from fidliog
away.

§ 103. Neuter Linguals. In these, the characteristic
iS always t, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after
/4«i, but otherwise becomes ^ or ^ (^ 63) ; as, ow/ick, (pdtg^ ftsgag^
lnui^ (^ 11), tidog (IF 22), from the roots atifiai-^ qport-, jce^orr-,
i*7r<»T-, tldot-m

Note. The r is also dropped in ^kcXi, /MXtrs§y Aoiuy ; in ymk», yukmnrtt^
milk, which also drops x ; and in yivv^ ycf«r0s, knee^ and io^Vy ii^mrttt V^o^t
vvhith then diange « to t; (compare § 113). In the poetic ^/ak^ HftttTot,
dty, r is changed into ^ after /mk ; m& \A tis^, Ifiarsu wtOeTf and fjuif, nus.
c iiy JlUh, r is changed into ^, and « into *. S«e § 123. y.

§ I04» Contract Linguals. A few linguals drop the
characteristic before some or ail of the open affixes, and are
then contracted ; thus, xXflSfg (xiHig) xlel^, xlBtSag (xlstag)
yXfyg' iCfgarog xi(jaog xigug, xignia xigaa xiga (IT 11) ; to rigag^
prodigy^ P. N. tigoja xiga^ G. xtgartav tsgmv * 6 XQ^^t skiUf

5. D. xgoitl Or^6/t) XQ^^ (k» ^ phfase A> X9^)' So, inf Hoih^r,
from o idgwg^ iwe»ty ^ yUm^i ktughtert I t^g, lave, S. D. iSg^,
fih^ Bg9fi for idifmt, dec. } A. Id^oi, /iXw, for 2d^to (i^^cr),
^'flwTtf. Compare §^ 107, 119, 12S. or.

liToTB. In the fbllowing words, the contraction is confined to the root

ri tZff i^rhi ear (^^ 11), contracted from the old tSagy •imr»t (§ 33. y).

ri ^sXmb^, bait. Gen. hxUtroff iiXnr0s»

r$ ^ria^, oontr. rrnf* teUlow, Gren. rrt«r«|, rrnrot*

vi f fU^} tw/Z^ Gen. ^^utrtf (» or a), ^^nrie (§ 37. 1 ).

Remaek. Those linguals in which a liquid precedes ^
lingual will be treated as a distinct class (§ 109).

B. Liquids.

[IT 12.J

§ 109. Masculine and Feminine Liquids. In ^se,
except aU^ salty sea (in the singular, only Ionic and poetic), the
characteristic is always either v org. For the changes in the
<heme and Dat. pi., see §^ 57-59. When the characteristic
is »•, it depends upon the preceding vowel whether the v or the
I is changed in the theme ; as follows.

1.) If an £ or 0 vowel precede, the g is changed ; as in
Juftiip, "ivogt dalfimv, -opog (IT 12) ; o fiify, fiffpog^ month, o /n^oiy,
-Mi'oc, stamif winter.

Except i »riif, »ny<f, eomh, the nomeral iT«, l»d«,0R« (^ 21), and the lonie
i fuU (as from root ^t-, yet Gen. ftn^is) for ^if», momA. (Hdt. ii. 82).

2.) If a precede, in nouns the g is changed, but in adjectioe$

Digitized by VjOOQIC

132 THIRD DECLENSION; — LIQUIDS. [bOOK II.

the V ; thus, o //«V, /Zkvoc, Fan^ o naiav^ -^vog^ paan ; but
^ik&S, -ai'off (IT 19;, TuAa;, -avoQ, loreiched*

3.) If & or v precede, the v is changed; as in gig, (nog
(IF 12), o deX(plg, -Ivog, dolphin^ 6 06(jxvg, 'Vvog, Phorcys,

Notes. «. The » remains in ^•rw, -i7f««, wooden tower ; and meet woKls
fn 'if and •&« have a second, but less classic fonn, in .<» and -vy ; as, p/r an^
/;», )fXf /f and {iXf /», 0*^»vf and 0«^xv».

/3. In the pronoun rUt (1 24), the v of the root rtt- is simply dropped i«
the theme. Tet see § 152. fi.

Hf^atht. YocATivifi. In the Yoc of 'AiraXX^v, •«»•«, Apollo, JJ^^iiiSv,
-£v0St NeptwM^ and i wmr^^, -n^, «avurafr, the natural tone of address has
led to the throwing back of the accent, and the shortening of the last sylla-
ble ; tilUS, ''A«'«XX«v, Iltrci^ay, rwri^.

§ 106« Syncopated Liquids. I. In a few liquids of fa
miliar use, a short vowel preceding the characteristic is syn-
copated in some or most of the cases ; as follows,

1.) In these three, the syncope takes place before aU the opm tenninations :
ifi^, num (Y 12> For the insertion of the ), see § 64. 2.

. »im^ dog (Y 12), which has, for its root, »vf^ by syncope, »V9-* In this

word, tlie syncope extends to the Dat. plur.

^y«f. Iambus (f 12), which has, for its root, ^^ly-, ^y syncope, k^^. Hit

Nom. sing, is not used, and its place b supplied by ktAfo$»

2.) These five are syncopated in the genitive and dative dnguXar :
^nrn^, father, and ^ijrn^, mother (^ 1 2).

I* ^vykrfi^, daughter, 6. ^uyetri^at B^vy«r^c$j D. S-vymri^i ^vyMV^u
i ya^rn^, etomach^ G. yavri^tt yn^r^it, D. ym^ri^t ynvr^u
4 An/Hfirff^, Cere», G. A«^nrf^«f Aii/nnr^t, D. Anfiinn^t Aiif»nr(i • also,
A. Anf/tnrifm Anfitir^n*

Notes. «. In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and
sometimes employ it in other cases than those which are specified.

/3. For the Dat. pi., see § 59. Ftfrrif^ has not only yawr^n^t (Dio Cass.
54. 22), but also in Hipp. yafrH^^t,

§ 1 Oy. II. In comparatives in -wy, the v is more frequently
syncopated before « and f , after which contraction takes place ;
as, fitl^ovn (fiUion) |iif»'fft), fisliovfg (fiuioeg) fiiiiovg, fitiiovui
iliBiioag) fAfUovg (fl 17). Compare §§.104, 119, 123. «.

Note. A similar contraction is common in the Ace. of 'Am'Skkatv, ApoUo,
and IloetiiSvt Neptune; thus, 'A^aXX^va, QATiXXvn) 'A^aXX^^ (iii. I. 6) ;
HwuiZtm, Tlowii^ii. See, for both the uncontracted and the contracted forms,
PI. Oat. 402 d, e, 404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, ; nuKttif, .;;»•#, mixed drink ;
Ace. nvMtiStm, and, rather poetic, nvxtS (*. 316 ; *v»tiS A. 624) : f} yXnx»'h
-•»•#, pennyroyal; Aoc yXnx*»*»» y^fix" (Ar. Ach. 874) ; and by a like
syncope of ^, ; i^^ti^^ ichor ; Ace. i;^i^f« and (only E. 416) Z;^^.

§ 108. Neuter Liquids. A few nouns, in which g is

Digitized

by Google

3H. 2. J LlQmD-MUTBS. — PURES. 1^

the characteristic, are neuter. Tliey are, for the most part,
confined to the singular, and require, in their declension, no
euphonic changes of letters.

Note. In l«^, fn^t and the poetic »S«^, hearty contraction takes place
in the root ; thus, N. I«^, poetic 4f , G. I«^«f , commonly ^^0$, D. im^s, com-
monly ^^ • K. «U^, in Homer alwajrs »«(, D. »n^t,

C. LlQTJID-MuTBS.
[f 13.1

§ 1 09« All nouns of this class are either masculine o
feminine. The characteristic of the class is vx, except in the
feminines dnfiaQ^ -^Qtoc:, wife^ tlfiivg^ -iv&og^ worm^ ntlQivg^ -if-
tVo^, carriage-basket^ and Ti^wg^ -vvdog^ Tiryns, The x or ^
is affected as in simple linguals (§ 102). When, hy the drop-
ping of ^ V is brought before g in the theme, it depends upon
the preceding vowel whether tfie v or the g is changed (§§ 57,
58), according to the following rule i If an 0 vowel precede^ tlie
g is changed ; otherwise^ the v.

Thus, xUt9, '•rrti Stvc^iv, -ifTH (f 13), i )(«»«f, ••tr«f, dragon; but
yiymtf -uvrt (^ 13), i i/^iSi -avrof, thong, i 'Sifioug, -ivrot, the SimoUf iuttvui,
'VVTf, Ammng,

Notes. «. Except 0^*1;^ .«»r0f, tooth (T 13 ; jet Ion. }!im Hdt. vi. 107),
md participles from verbs in -*r^; as, ^ovt^ )«irr«f (f 22), from "hihvftt^ to give,

fi. Some Latin names received into the Greek have -ns in the theme, instead
of -tif ; as, KXn/enf, -ivr*;, Oiemeiu, OviX^f, .«yr«f, Fia^ieM.

y. If the characteristic is -ti^., the » remains before f (§ 58. /S). In )i^/t«^
(f 13), tiie f is simply dropped in the theme.

Rbkabks. I. A few proper names in -«#, .«yr«r, form the Voc after the
analogy of the theme ; that is, t becomes «, and is then contracted ; thus,
•ArX^f, -nnrt, V. ("ArX^w, "ArX**, "XrXmm) 'ArXd' Jlckiitif^s, V.
ritXvimftm,

2. Nonns and a^ectives in .t<f, .i»T»f, preceded by • or n, are nsoaOy con
tracted; as, i wkuMUf 4rX«««vr, ee^ 6. ^rkaniivrct itXa»»vtT»s' rsftnut
riftlii, honored, P. rtftntrra «■!/«?##«, N. ri^Ssy ri/eqv, G. Ttf^nitrot Tifinvres, &c.

D. PURES.

[iri4.]
§ 1 1 0» The euphonic changes in the declension of purcs
may be mosiiy referred, (I.) to a special law of Greek declen-
sion, and (II.) to contraction.

I. Special Law of Greek Declension. The
short vowels^ b and o, can never remain in the root,
either before the affixes s and v (H 6), or at the end
of a word. Hence,
12

Digitized by VjOOQIC

IM THIBD DBOLfiMlilON. [bOOK li

^111. (A.) Before the affixes $ aad v, € be-
comes ff, ij Vj or €V ; and o becomes c» or ot; ; as
follows.

1.) In masculine nouns^ $ becomes bv in simple^ and ^ in
compound words ; as, simple^ i Inntv^i ^ttag (^ 14.; root innB')^
6 (iaudsvg^ -sw(, ^'i^i o Ugevg^ -«Vw^, priest^ 6 QriOBvg^ '((^fj The-
seus^ o MtyagBvg^ -ioag^ MegOriAH ; compound^ 6 ^oix^ari}^, - fog
(tf 14; from awg^ entire^ and xqoitog^ strength) ^ o'Ai^taioTiXrig,
-<09, AriskftU^ i Jr^fiotf&iviii^ -to^

Except the i^mples i "A^m, •««») Mars, i ^f, nig, fnoth ; and the following,
in which i beoomes « or i, j v^x^fit -^*» -^cc <r«;^iw (^ 14), i «-iXi«v«, -i«f,
ai«, i «'^«#0i'#, •!»#, tffcfer (properly an acy*) ; ^ f;t'^ '**"* *^t ^ '^«i -M^i
mrpeiUy i ^^irmuff -t««, president, and alio ««f<f) »v^ts, fttd^ti$ >nd %;^«f*

2.) In feminine and r^mzYTton notm«, s becomes i ; as,*^ ^roAf^
-rwj, Ace. TToAtv (fl 14), ij dvrafiig^ -«<»ffi power ; o, ^ fiotrttg^
-tw?, prophet^ prophetess.

§ 113. 3.) In adjectives^ c becomes i; in simple^ and i} in
compound words ; as, simple^ ridvg^ -iog^ Ace. ij^uf (fl 19), /iv-
xi;^, -eo^, «i/7ee^, o^v^, -co^i sharp ; compound^ aXti&rig^ -^ogt true^
fiuXi^g^ -iog^ cheap^ aqmxMdrjgy -fog^ wasp-like^ T^<i2pi!}(» -£o^, haV"
ing three hanks of oars^ or, as a substantive {vavg^ vessel^ being
understood), trireme (fl 14).

Except a few simple adjectives, in which « becomes «; as, Mif«ff 4h
Cl 17), ••Xfi^fif, •i0ttftUlj ^PtvinSi 4cf,fuUe.

4.) In monosyllables, o becorines ov; otherwise, oi; M, /9ot;;^
^oo(, Ace /^oi/y (II 14), 0, 17 ^ov;, ^00;, sumachy i x^^i% X^»
heap of earth} but uMg^ -oog (IJ 14).

Notes. «. This rule applies also to UnguaU m which « precedes the char-
Acteristic ; thus, «-«vf, «-«^di (111), and its oompomids, 0Ai«'«»f, ^c^ (f 16)^
riir»vt, .«^ (^ 17); hot liX^f, 4t«« (f 22).

/3. Tn feminines of more than one syllable, in which the characteristic is 0,
the affix f 16 changed to c, and is then absorbed. Thus from the root ^x'^- is
formed the theme (fix»tt ^X'*) ^X'* (Y ^^ • ^^ ** v*''^^ -««r, pertuationy li
Anrttj 'C0Si LatoHOt &c. Except, as aboVe, at^t, and the Ionic if iUvr, daum.
These feminines in -m and .*rr have no plural or dual, except by metaplasm
(§ 122) ; unless, perhaps, tliMvs (§ 123. «) is to be regarded as simply con-
tracted from tixcetf.

^113. (B.) In cases which have no affix^ h
characteristic becomes «, v, or £v, or else assumes a
euphonic 5; and o characteristic becomes oi »f ov.
as follows.

1.) If the theme ends in -lyc, « becomes tg ; but, otherwise

Digitized by VjOOQIC

CH. 2.] PUBES. IK

b changed at in ihe theme ; thus, Norn. neut. aa^ (M 17),
^dv (11 19) ; Voc. T^/i2^€(, JS^x^aic^*, TidXi, ti^i/, In^itC (^ 14),
^5iJ (U 19).

2.) In the theme of neuter nouns^ t assumes ^, becoming
itself 0 (§ 28) ; as, to ih^o;, -tog (fl 14), to B^og^ -eoj, nation^
ri o^iy -«oC9 maimtaiiu

Except «-• if TV, •••<, town (f 14), tbe Epic vi mv, .c«f, >Zoci(, and a tsw
fioreigii names of natural productions in -<» as t« trio'i^i, -•*>$, pepptt.

8.) In the Vocative^ o becomes o? , if the theme ends in -w or
-^^ ; but «tr, if it ends in ^ovg\ as, ^oi, al^oi^ fiov (t[ 14) ; and
in like manner (cf. 112. a), Oldinov (fl 16).

^ 1 14« Rebcarks. 1. After the analogy of s and o, a
characteristic becomes on/ in /^auc and i^avg (^ 14), and as-
sumes c in the theme of neuters ; as, to yigag^ -aog (H 14), to
yi^ag, -aog^ old age,

2. In the Accusative singular of pures, the formative v be-
comes a {§ 100. 2) except when the theme ends in -«<r, -i^,
-vc, ^ etv(, Or Hive ; ^US, &mg^ V^^^y Inrnv^^ rgtifgrig^ aidwg^ ^ai

- ^i] 14), aotgifig (51 1*7) ; Aco. i^wtf, {^Of tTtTtea, tQii^gtet^ aidott^
flXotM^ aa<pim ; but o Ao^, <ton«, k^, olg (contracted from oig),
noliC, Ix^^y ntjzvg^ re^vg^ »'^i /^v? (fl 14), v^vg (11 19) ; Aec
Hvj nl»^ ohy noltr^ Uf^i^f ^VJ^^ y^^^j yavr, /^ovf, ^dvw,

NoTB. Proper names in •«# , .s*f, for the most part, admit both fonns o(
the Aoc; as, :i»»»(drtif (1 U), A. 2«»^iir« (Flat.), 2«»«^«fy (X«n.); I
"Attif, Marsy A. 'A^n and "A^nv.

3. When the characteristic is changed to a diphthong before
a in the theme, the same change is made before ai in the Da*
tive plural ; as, Innfvoi^ poval^ ygavol^ vavai (fl 14).

^119. II. Contraction. For the general
laws, see §^ 31-37. . The following remarks may
be added.

1. Pures in -17$, -oc, -e», and -oi^, -00^, are contracted in all the
cases which have open terminations. See T^ir^pi^^, 2Vux(»ariic*,
'NffttxXirtg^ tftxog, iJjtw, nidtig (H 14), aaq>/,g (fl 17). Add a few
neuters m -ng ; as, to yf(fng (fl 14), to xging^ meat.

Notes. «. Of nouns in .<# and -^t, 4»ti the nncontracted form scarcely
occurs, even in the poets and dialects.

/3. In proner names in -xkifiiy contracted -»Xm (trom xXi«;, rennwn), the
Dat. and sometimes the Ace. sing, are d&ubfy contracted. See *H^«»x<nf
(1 1 4). For the later Voc II^AxXff, compare ^ 105. R. The Nom.pl
H^MXlsf, fa> tha loB. fyrm (§ 121. 4), oocun, with 0nfit§, FL The«t

Digitized

by Google

136 THIRD DECLENSION [bOOK 11

2. In other pnres, contraction is, for the most part, con
fined to three cases ; the Nom. and Ace. plur., and the Dat
sing.

The contractions which are usual or frequent in these words are exhibitea
in the tables. Contraction sometimes occurs in cases in which it is not given
in the tables, and is sometimes omitted in cases in which it is given. Thest
deviations from common usage are diiefly found in the poets.

§ 110* 3. In the Attic and Common dialects, the endings
80^, -8a, and -tag^ instead of the common contraction, receive
in certain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last
vowel. This change takes place,

a.) In. the Gen. sing, of nouns in -i^, ^vg^ and -«t;?t and
sometimes of nouns in -i and -v ; as, noXig^ Gen. noUog noXwg^
nrjxvg^ -«ft>$, imiBvg\ -cwj, aatv^ ~iog and ~fwg (fl 14), ninf^i^-Brng
(§ 1 13. 2). Also 0 "AQijg^ Mars^ G. *'A(ifo<: and sometimes *'jgmg
(as if from a second theme "jQsvg^ cited by grammarians from
AlcsBus).

b.) In the Ace. sing, and plur. of nouns in ^svg ; as, tnnfvg^
Ace sing, innia innea^ pi. inniug innsikg.

Notes. «. This change appears to be rimplj an early and less po-fbct
mode of contraction. From the accentuation of such words as riXfUt it it
evident that the s (as in 'Ar^ii3i*r, Mi»fXs««, $ 35) has not the full force of a
distinct syllable ; while it is equally evident from the use of the poets, that it
has not wholly lost its syllabic power. It seems, therefore, to have united as
a species of semivowel (of the same class with our y and w) with the follow-
ing vowd, which consequejitly, as in other cases of contraction, became long.
An especial reason fbr regarding this method of contraction as early, consists
in the fact that it b confined to those classes of words which have dropped F
or A from the root (§§ 117, 118). The poets sometimes complete the con-
traction by synizesis ; as, /3ariXi«f Eur. Ale. 240, *£«i;^^utf( Id. Hipp. 1095,
*A;^iAAi« Id. Iph. A. 1341. Sometimes^ also, the unchanged Gren. in -ias,
and rarely the Ace. in -ti and -tis occur in the Attic poets : as, Nn^b; Eur.
Ion, 1082, 9-oXt0s Id. Hec. 866, ^•fi& lb. 882. The poets likewise employ
in the Ace. sing, the regular contraction into « ; as, lvyy»m^*i Ar. Ach. 1 1 50,
' *Oiu9^ffri Cur. Rh. 708, and even tt^v Id. Ale. 25. The r^^arly contracted
Ace pi. in -!<;, instead of -ntst became in the later Greek the common form,
and although regarded as less Attic, yet b not unfrequent in the manuscripts
and editions of genuine Attic writers, particularly of Xenophon ; as, fiK^sXiit
Mem. iii. 9. 10.

fi. If another vowel precedes, the i b commonly absorbed by the «;, a, and
Af ; thus, n.iiftui»t§ Huf»m(, Tlti^et/im TLu^eiii (^ 14){ X^'^fi /C^> X'**
(§ 123).

y. For the earlier contraction of the Nom. pi. of nouns in -ivf into n;, see
§ 37. 2. The uncontracted &nfiit occurs PI. Thest. 169 b.

). The form of the Gen. in .i«f is termed by grammariant the Jttie Gem^
twe. For its accentuation, see Prosody. The Gen. pi. in -$m accented tipoii'

Digitized

by Google

GH. 2S.J P0RES. 13%

tbe antepenidt iA also tenned Atdc ; as, wSXun. The f^gnlai^y eontnictod
^rnx*** occurs iy. 7. 16.

u The Gen. in .i«f is also found in a few adjectives in st (as, »«XX/ir«Xif ,
•mm; ), ^ flfu^vf^ half (Gen. commonly -tMf , but also -iot and -«»«), and, in
later irnters, in other adjectives in •»$ (thus, /3(«^iivf Flut.).

§ 1 1 7« RKMATtys ON THE DECLENSION OF PuBEs. The various
and peculiar changes in the declension of pures appear to have chiefly arisen
from the successive methods which were employed to avoid the hiatus pro-
duced by appending the open affixes to the characteristic vowd. Of these
methods, the eaiiier consisted mainly in the insertkm of a ttnmg breathin0-or
tupiraU coMonant (cf. § 89) ; and the later, in contraction. The insoted
aspirate became so intimately assodated with the root, that its use extended
even to the cases which had not an open affix ; and although it fell away in
the refining of the language (cf § 22. ^), yet it left distinct memorials. of it-
self, either in a Idndred vowel or consonant, or in a prolonged syllable. The
aspirates chiefly inserted appear to have been the labial F, and a dental breath-
ing, which was most akin to *■ (in Latin it passed extensively into r ; for dis-
tinction's sake, we here represent it by a capital 2). From the classes of
words in which these aspirates were resi)ectively inserted, the former appears
to have prevailed in an earlier period of the language, than the latter. In
the modifications which subsequentiy took place, the foUovring law prevailed :
When I.) foUowed bjf a vaweLy both Ihe aspirates were simpiy dropped. When
not foUowed by a vowd, the labial breathing united (2.) wiUi «, «, and • pre-
ceding to form «v, iv, awd «v, and (3.) toilh I and B (except in the Dot. plwr,\
to form I and S ; while the dental breathing (4.) at the end of a word beeame^ t,
and (5.) b^ore the affix g lengthened a preceding Aort voweL Thus,

(1.) /5#F^f ^titj y^&fit y^diff tctfig xtit, ix^vfog ix^vog, iV«-iFi« <V«riif •
mt^'Sag mtiiogf ri/;^i2«f rux^^ft yi^a^og yi^dg (^ 14), ra^t^tg €a^i$g

(t").

(2.) y^tifg y^aSgt ^mfg f»vs (Lat. navis), fetJF^i vmtwS, SirwiFg iirvrm, iVtrSF
•m», fiiWg /5#S», /WFr fitv*, /5#F fiw (1 14).

(3.) xlFg nig, »tF» »U ix^'^ft ix^tg, tx^tW ix^i (t 14) ; but Dat. pL
«f W, ix^i^i*

(4.) Nom. neut. r«fi2 wa^ig (T 17), «r;^«2 rttxt (« passmg into ita
kindred vowel, § 28), yi^a^l yi^ag (^ 14) ; Voc. 2«$»^«ri2 ^tuK^angt r^m-'
fi2 r^in^tg (1 14). The peculiar form of the Voc of nx** and mthtig has
arisen from the change of « to its correspon^ling vowel (§ 50) and then con-
traction with precession (§ 29) ; thus, «;ttf2 «;^#i hx** (c^* §§ 45. 5, 86,
112. /3).

(5.) zaftig ra^fig (T 17), 'Smm^drt'Sg ^utM^arfig, mtH^g mt^g (^ 14).
For if;^», see § 112. iS, and compare fix«i above (4.). In the Dat. p!. thA
short vowd remains unchanged ; as, va^itt.

Note. In adjectives, and in a few masculine and neuter nouns, the diph-
thong IV appears to have been reduced to a simple short y ; as, HhiFg ^^v<» «^(F
ntt (1 19) ; ^nx^Fg vnx^f* v-nx^Fv ^x^h '^nx*^ ^^X^t HvriF A^tH
(1 14).

§ I I N« In feminineSf it was natural that the inserted breathing or
consonant should commonlv assume a softer form. In this form, it appear* to

Digitized

by Google

138 THIRD DfiOItBlfSION. ' [bOOK U

tavn bMB radit umiIj afein to th» lingaal niddlo mate % (cf. $ 49. 2} ; tad
in a great number of feminines, it acquired a permanent place in the langnaet
as this letter. In its previous, and as yet unfixed state, we represent it, wr
cfotincti(m's sake, by n capital A. Befolre this inserted U&gtia]^ tt ixrald i^
' main, but thefe Wiis a nnifbtm tekidekiC}' in c to pass by preeiMiien into «. It
is a remarkable illostratioli of this, that ift ^bo irfaole dedcnfliotij there is not
a single instance of t before a characteristic lingual mute. In the progress
of the bmguage, feminines in -i^ or with the inA6Kdd Ungtud .tA-, assumed
three forms:

1.) The A kSk away, leaving the vowel of preoessiaB « in the Kom., Aca,
and Ybc aing., hot the original « in the other cases ; thus, wiktu ^i^ttf, «*«•
Xi«, wiXi9, wiXt • wikuft wiXtwv, T«JLi#v, <t0k4n {\ 14)^ This became the
OMial form of ftminine pores in wf^ in the Attic and Common dialects.

2.) The A fell away, imd precession took pla6d thfodghotlt. This became
the regular form of feminine pnres in -tf in the Ionic dialect (§ 44. 8) ; Ihus,
Ion. N. -Tfi G. -r#f, D. -T/, always contracted into -r, A. -fi', V. -f; PI. N. -Uf,
sometimes contr. into -r; , 6. -tvt, D. -r«-/, A. •!«;, commonly contr. into -Tf ;
as, viktfy ir0X/0f, irikTf ToXiv • viXngj -/^y, ^oXirij 9C*Xiaf, -Tf* The i was also
the prevalent vowel in the Doric ; thus, Dor. vreXtg, «r«X<0(, wJXr and ir^ku»
triXtv ■ vikitf, irokitVf vXitrc-t and ^riXirs, veXietf,

3.) The A became fixed in the root, and the word passed into the daas of
Kngnals. Thus, the root Mty^^t-, Megarian, had two forms, MiT^tF- mate,
and with precession Mty«^i A- fern. ; firom the fbnner we have Mtyaifttfit -Uff,
Mufttrian tkan, and firom the latter, Mtytt^if, ./^««, Meg<trtan woman. Thia
became the prevalent mode of declining feminines in ^^ , if we except the
large class of abstract nouns in ^/f. EspedaUy many feminine acyectives, or
words which are properly such, are thus declined.

Note. We find, also^ the same forms in a few masculine or common
nouns and adjectives (§§ 111, 119. 2), and even, in a few words, a ooir^
■ponding neuter formation in w (§ 113. 2).

§ I 1 9« As might have heed exptcA^A, these three forma iuv for firoa
bong kept entu^ly sopanite. Thus^

1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pore infleetioBi the latlct
espedaHy in the Ionic and Doric dialqct^ which were less averse than th«
Attic to hiatus (§§ 45, 46) ; as, « fthth ^orcOhj Cr. ft.nu%»s and (»,nn«s * 4 r^«-
wif, hed, 6. v^Uri^afy r^««'««f, and r(««rf«f • particularly proper names, as,
Kt/v^if, G. w)«f, and -tag • '^r<(, G. -tiot and -fs • ®tr/f, G. 0fr/}«« 0. 370,
D. 0tTr 2. 407. For similar cases of the use and omission oi a lingual
characteristic see § 104 ; of a liquid characteristic, §$ 107, 123. «.

2.) In some pores in -tt^ the Attic adopts, in whole or in part (particolarly
in the Gen. sing.), the Ionic forms ; as, Si rv^r/f, towery G. rv^fuf vii. 8. 12
but PL N. vu^uf iv. 4. 2, Tv^rtmv H. Gr. iv. 7. 6, rv^rtn <)yr. vii. 5. 10
i 9-wf, 9p<nue, G. •!««, D. -ti • ii /jtayatitt^ •/«;, a kmd of harpf D. ftmymk
vii. 3. 32 ; i, H riy^t, tigeti G. ^iy^ttt, and in latar wiitors W>^«f, PL N.
t/y^ttfj G. riyftm' some proper names, as, i 2vif»fr«f, G. -mi, L 2. 12,
i *l^is, G. -ff vL 2. 1 1 and the acyeotives Hm, mttUigmdt vtirnij tAitemiotu
In like mannet, », li iyx^kvt (§ 117. K), ed, Q, lyxi^"*f* PI* N. iyxU^ut
G. iy)^ik$m»' ri wiw%(i (§ 118. N.),/Mf:per, G. .i^vf and ^««.

Digitized

by Google

HR. 2*] DIAI.B0T1C FORMS. 19B

0IALBCTIC FORMS.
§ 1 90. (A.) Dialectic changes affecting the affix.

1. In the poeti^ especially the Eihc, the Aoc. sing, sometimes ends in -«, in .
words in windi it has commonly -t; as, ih^im Z. 291, »«« or vsa, viXuxj for
f^^, Mii;», 9rixtf tx^uA Theoe. 21. 45. On the other hand, the New Ionic
udm forms the Ace of nouns in -« or ^;, 4asf m .«?» ; as, '!«, /o, Anrw,
Zxi^ono, wvf, daum, Aoc. *hivf Hdt. i. 1, AwTM/t, ntvv. The ^olic and stricter
Doric have here -*ry for -tuv (§ 44. 4); as, *'H^*rv Sapph. 75 (91), A«rivy
Inscr. Cret.

2. In the Gep. plnr., the Ionic sometimes inserts t (of. §§ 48. 1, 99. 2).
m, %nfi^9 Hdt. ii. 45, fAy^mhmy Ai^^i«y, for ;^4»«», /»»;/it^wv, Av^Hf,

3. In the Dat. plar., for the common affix -0-/(0) the poets often employ
the old or prolonged forma -«»■/(»), -»«■*•/(»), and -••*■<(»). See §§ 7 1, 84, 85.
Homer uses the four forms, though .tfi(v) rarely. The forms .t0^0-/(») and
.«r<(i») are also common in Doric and i^olic prose • and -••"/(») is used in Ionic
prose after the characteristic ». Thus, xH^'* ^' ^^» x^k**"'* T. 271, x^k^'*
T. 468 ; iroffi E. 745, voviri B. 44, voiifffftv P. 407 ; t-rttrn B. 73, i^trr$ h
697, Mtwtf B. 75 ; teuTv/Aensi Hdt. vi. 57. So, F not passing into v be-
fore a vowel (§ 117), fi^ai B. 481, tatrn Find. P, 4. 98, it^tvTvut^t A.
227.

4. In the Dual, the Epic prolongs .«/» (as in Dec. II., § 99. 1) to -««?» ;
thos, wtiaitv S* 228, ^u^fuf [a, 52.

§ 131. (B.) Dialectic changes affecting the root, either
tfimply or in connection with the affix.

1. Many ehanges result from dialectic preferences of vowels ; As, Ion. ^m^%i
ttiSft y^nvSi for ^ti(»lit &c; D<Hr. frsi^Av, «xvr«#, rtf*&%iu oontr. ^ifiity fto
*0ifi4ft &c ; ^n^ for ;^t/(, is for «J|, j3*?f , jSivt, for (iovtt i9«v» (the Aoe. fiSv in
the atnse of a Meld eoverad wkh ox-hide occurs i^ H. 738), kx^it for itx*^i
&e. See §§ 44, 45.

2. The dialects and poets vary greatly in the extent to which they employ
o6ntraction, and in the mode of contraction. The Epic has here especial li-
cense. In the poets, contractions are often made by synizeds (§ 30), which
an not written. In respdct to the niage of Homer, we remark as follows :
(a) In the Gen. sing., contraction is oommoidy omitted, except in neons hi
•m and .«f , 6' 4t* In a few words, the contriiction of -t«f hito ^ws occnxs
($ 45. a>« and thore are a few instances of synieesia (idiksh we maifc tiius,
m); e. g. *£ei/3ti>f 0. 368, a«^fOf ». 894« i^lewif. 118; linxU$ A. 489,
M««#r«& B. 566, wiktn B. 811. {b) In the Dat. sing., both the contracted
and nnoontraeted forms are used ui most words with equal freedom ; as, yi^T
a^4 yiiff, Si^ii'and S«^, rt/;^t7and rtixu, IlifXii'and FlirXt/, <riXn7t vrix%7f
and vtfXu, !?(«/' and ^^m H. 453. The enchngs .«, -m, and .m (except in xt**)
are always contracted (§§ 118. 2, 115. «); as, »M$rri A. 640, ti»m H, 526
(this contraction of -v7 into -w is Epic), <«? I. 618. (e) The endmgs .t«,
•u»», send 'i»t are commonly unoontracted, except by synizesis ; as, StM<^i«
r. 27, p^^•e«^U ^. 757, «Xyi« IL 7, jStXii O. 444, yU i. 283; rvn^U* K.
95; «'«x<«; A. 559, v-iXlxMrT. 114. So ir;xi«r ^. 560. {d) The ending
•Mf is used both with and without contraction ; as, ^^rawetyuf n»vtvxm
S. 1^4. («) The neat. plur. ending ^« is always contracted, or drops &ak

Digitized

by Google

149 'iKBSGi:i.AB MMnn. [book b.

«^c£4.WMr);aii.«^»»,Y^BL2S7. 11b fini wtt te ait

iimiliii iimiii Hi '-F | r ^" '- '^- '^ O^) Of J^

A9.«^,«r,aiidyc«i^«tf»>Mii.ti«f*mi>sins«e»i>Haacr; X.

»«r DtBcL

3. bflMBMB ««■■* m -MPS. fls ^MattBDrtie iF Wftve a mad ifjgalady
finrnaiw «» ia Oe E|k; aa. Srmim^ Uwm, ^nSl, ;«««£ lows ia Horn. lar.
n^ A. 151, dbD «mA<« Hek Op. 24S). ;«««» (Y IS^ j^nm^wu A. 227
(», lij niilalioa, fimmM^Jms Em, An. tt29> TUa^^.ate OEtoids to

V ahot TiMRl aeonfias to Oe aMtre}, to 'A^k. Mmn (5 116. a), and to

mXjf. See Hoscrie Piafig—, 1 16. b 1 1 n ■ aoam ia .»?, thia

^kange aecKS abb ia Herodotas^ aMboagh nai Hiiiai fl by critics; as. ^«#iXi*;,
^naW, TB. 137, ^m^MkSi m. 137, ganli^ tL 5S. TW »i;aiM mflectioa
of Boam ia .«a^ la looie prwe, aad abo ia &e Dane; ii m .««, 4e. Tlio
Aec ia .«■ fir -M b wiMiliiiM i cotiaeted \tf tiha ports lato -« ; as. Xttwr^ r.
136, T.3« JL 3M, ^«AJLi Hdl. tI. 220 (Okaefe^ We i^ ^mmOJm with
srniaKs Hes. 0|iw 261.

4. Ia ndi vboea net caife ia »^ Ae Sfie aftoi lails s iato « ^as rqga*
larij ia pvoiMr aaMei ia -aJLass), or iato «; baft aoHNtaBOft iatiha E|ae and
otber ports, aad ia Adectie pnae; «Ba • b Ao^ed. SdD ftvtber Taiie^ of
form b aaaMOHHS gi^rea \tf &e Efic fotiaitiua «fitoi«flr«,or hj the
ioab or poefeie aegbrt of ceaUa>liiM Tba^ 'Hpraaiw Hak T¥. SIS, Hdt.
S. 43, Find, a 6. 115; a*H^«ja«.s B. 266. *He»iki« Hdl. fi. 43, Find.
O. 3. 20 ; D. "He^JLiT S. 224. Find. L 5. 47, "H^iuaiT Hdt. S. 145, "H^^
«X«7Find.P.9. 151; A. *H«nJL«B & 324. 'H^ttlU HiL 2. 43» Find. O.
10. 20, 'H«««JLia» Tkeoc 13. 73 (ftr tbe Attic ins of *H^uAi;, see i 14
Md Mrta.n. 1.21-26); iymmX^s IL 738: ImJUmc (AtcpLof tmJUw>
K. 281, MOidf Fiad. a 2. 163 ; \Sifmm, (Gaa. of sa^t^) Z. 508 ; sXiS
(pLoTsXttc) Hob. Tb. 100: W>am a 115. ^*te^ F.330: iaXmh (Norn.
pL of 4ia««() M. 318. ¥^ tbe Homrie fcnai of #«l«, Md ftr dioee of
rUr^MX^, vbkh, fike sqbm odier fowB|wiaa<b of aJiW, bas forms both of
Dec n. and of Dec IIL. see ^ 16.

5. ¥^ Oa loaie Md Doric dwrbaniaa of meirdi ia .«, .Mif, and ftrlba
embakmof ^mvanfem .«, .iW,8ee|§ 118, 119. Tbe loaie fikewbe omits
tbe r in wi^m and «sf«« - and tbaa ia tbeB^ as ia otitor aeaian in .««, .4Mf ,
tbe kter loaie aftoi rbiiye « iato ■ (§ 44. 2.X «n)iVt ^ «he theme; as,
«e*^. «^ »<f««. ««cM«k WeMs, y<gta, Hdt

6. Ia «m«, tbe Doric letaias tbiaagboai «be oi^^Hd «, aad b bere sobm-.
timei imitated by tbe Attic porta, in tbe km; tbe « pmsm Araagboat by
prcoeeajn eitber into «, or vitb abort qaaaitity, eapeoa^y m tbe ktor lonip»
into t. Tbe Attic retaios Oe « ia Oe dlphtboiy m; bat bai otbenrise « or %
(tbe latter bsTini^ parbap% been inserted ia Oe Gea. ai^. and pL after the
Qontracttoii of 4l« and ^b», accordinf to § 3V and tbe Gen. dnal having fol-
lowed tbe snalogT of tiie olber aamben). Der tbe Ionic «id Doric forma,
•mi 16; for tbe Attic, 1 14.

!¥• Irregular Nouns,
^ 1 99« Irregularities in the dedensioo of nouns which

Digitized

by Google

CH 2.J METAPLASTS- Hi

nave not been already noticed, may be chiefly referred to two
heads ; variety of declension^ and defect of declension.

A. Variety of Declension.

A noun may vary, (1.) in its root; (2.) in its method of
declension; and (3.) in its gender (§ 79). In the first case, it
is termed a metaplast {utranXninoc^ transformed) ; in the sec-
ond, a ketereclite (brfgoxhrnc^ of different declensions) ; in the
rfiird, heterogeneous {ktfito/fvrig^ of different genders).

Words which have distinct double fonns, either throughout or in part, are
termed tedundant. Those, on the other hand, that want some of the usual
forms, are termed defective.

The lists which follow are designed both to exemplify the different kinds of
anomaly, and Ukewise to present, in a classified arrangement, the principa
anomalous nouns. It will be observed, that some of the words might have
been arranged with equal propriety under other heads, from their exhibiting
more than one spedes of anomaly.

§ 1 3 3« 1. Metaplastb.
Metaplasm has mostly arisen from a change of the root, in the progress of
die language, for the sake of euphony or emfrfiasis, chiefly by the precessioii
oi an open vowel, or the addition of a consonant to prevent hiatus ; whfle, at
the same time, forms have remained frt>m the dd root, especially in the poets
and in the dialects.

«. With a Double Root, in «t- and in ••.

A Msifj nightingale, 6. Motaf, &c. ; from the root inh-, 6. Mouf Soph.
Aj. 628. D. &tii^ Ar. Av. 679.

n r«^«, -avf, and F^^yivy, •«?«;, Gorgon,

h f/jM^y, tmage, 6. tUifOf, &c. ; from r. i/««., G. tUtug Eur. Hel. 77, A
i/W Hdt. vii. 69 ; from r. i/«., by the second dedendon, PI. A. tUcvg Eur.
Tro. 1178, Ai'. Nub. 559. Yet see § 112. /3. *

4 ;^ixr^wir, swaUoia, G. ;^iA.r^#i'#f , &c ; from r. ;^f X<^«-, V. ;^i>.rJ#r Ar. Av.
141! from Simon.

Compare §§ 104, 107, 119.

fi. With a Double Boot, in «- and in f<

r§ fi^irmt, wooden image, poetic, G. fi^irtifj D. fi^iru • PI. N. ^im, G.

r* M9if»f, darknem, G. Epic niA^mn, Attic »A^»ut Ar. Ecd. 291, latei
^»Sf«ci« Pdyb., D. xti^mt »*i^tf Cyr. iv. 2. 15.

r* »Sat, fleece, poetic, w. 47 ; PI. N. Miu%m v* 3, D. xtitrt y. 38.
r« 0u^»s, floor, poetic, Q* tvltn, D. eS^tt oSiu (aQ in Horn.).

y. Ifiscellaneoiu Examples.

r« yiv9, knee, and ri ti^o, tpear, G. yitant, ^i^arog, &c. (§ 103. N.). For
the various forms of ii^v (of which in the theme there is even the lat^form
hv^mg AntiphiL.9), see ^ 16* Those which occur of yifv correspond;
Urns, Ion* and poet. yvvarH, ywrn^m, ywwt and ywrnttt (I. 488, P. 451,

Digitized

by Google

1^ IRRBGVLAR NOVNS. [bOOK Ir

tor wfaidi loine write y»^9U0i); abuL poet ytnit, ymn, ymhm, y^Awv, nl
yiMtf Sappli. 14 (S&), ytmnw0»*

A l4»f, ifoKm (r. *£-, Attic Deo. n.)i Q. 1^, D. t^, A» U and tmw (§ 97. 8)
Dor. *tuis (r. *il«.}, Q. ii«f ^vf • loa. in^, G. ^h, D. dUT, A. 4« and ««»
(§ 120. 1).

If 0ifuf, Themiit at a common nomi, right, law, Q. OI^}«f , l^pio 0iMtTT^
fii 68, Ionic &ifuf Hdt. ii. 50, Doric 0ifur»f Find. 0. 13. 11, also PL Rep.
880 a. In the Attic, ^ifuf occurs mostly in certain fbnns of e3q>re88ioa,
where it is used without declension, as an a^feetiTe or aeoter nomi ; thns^
^ifuf Writ it it lawfid; pm^) ... ^is tTiww, thej^ mt^ ^mt it i$ lam^ PL Qatg*
505 d ; ri fith ^ifuft that which it not lateful, JEadu Sup. 335.

; l^f^w^v, attendant, 6. ;^^r«ir«f, &c ; poet. A* ^»*a, PL N, 3t%^»^*$
Eur. Ion, 94.

i tuiXms, cable (r. jmAjb., Att Dec II.}, 6. »«X«, &c ; Ion. «MiX«i, -•», ^c^
I. 260 and Hdt ; in the later Epic, PI. tctiXMs, &c, Ap. Rh. 2. 725.

; Xmyaif, hare (r. X«7»-, Att. Dec IL), G. Xao^, A. x«9^, A«yM> &c ;
Ion. X«r«f, ^tf, &c., Hdt., also PL N. Xayl Soph. jFV, 113, A* Dor. (§ 45, 5)
X«y«f Hes. Sc 302 ; Epic x«7««i, -Mt, Horn.

i, 4 fU^Of (in late writers ^u^rS^), witnestj G. fi^riffn, D. fU^rv^t, A»
mA^Tv^, rarer fU^rS* • D. pL /lUf «ifr« • Epic < ft^vt^H, ^», ft. 423.

4 4 j^,, Ur«i, G. ^'^.f (Dor. %«r;^, § 69. IL), a J^n3«, A. ^^c9« and
^t-« • PL ^'a«#, &c ; ftom r. ^^ Sing. K. j^r^ , A. i«^», PL )$[. j^, a
^vMrr, A.i^andi^f (§ 119). Another fbrai is <^ JtfMM, «««.

f «^r and J^f ^> ^ sea-fiali, G. i^ and jffML Oemparo ndxm, Xmytit,

4 «^^, pnyXf G. vi/xy*^, D. «rv»»i, A. wvm9« • later G. vnvmis, D. «wi»/, A.
vvvM. The proper root is ¥»m- (oompare the tuS^ erytms) ; but ftom the
difficulty of appending f in the theme, transposition took place ($ 64, 3^
which afterwards extended, through the influence of analogy, to die oblique

i nif , moth, G. ri«f, and in later writers mrit'

4 4/^4, weal, B. 267» G. tfn^tyy0s, &a ; N. pL ^/uShyytt T. 716.
; ^^iTs, contr. f a«rr, cake, G. ^S«i«^ • N. pL f^Mf and f S^cif • also 4 fS«tr
-;)«f • N. pL ^^«tic(. See § 119.

ii x**t* ^"*^* ^' X**€^* ^^ XH*ft ^ ^^ ^® common fonu, sea 5 ^^
The other forms are also found ui the poets and in Ionic prose,

i X»uf, the name of a measure, G. x»it, &c, like fi0vg (f 14); from r.
X»i; the better Attic G. x*^* X*^fi ^ X*^ X**^ ^ ^ X*^^ X^
(§ 1 16. i3) ; alao Dat. ion. ;^«^'Hipp.

ri xi^** (Ep. Are*"**. 5 47). dAt, G. x^\m • PI. N. ;t;^U (5 37. 1) ? from

; xfl^U «*«»» sw/oce, G. ;c;«»r^, D. x^ Ocrf* § *^) ^ Xt^^' I«*
and poet. G. xt^f* D. ;ce»'i -^ X^
For Ztvf, Ot^iwm* Udr^nkHt and m^ sat f 16.

NoTB. Add the poetic Norn. 4 ^ Hea. Op. 854* -• Ijrir, ^/if Ace x/ii«
iEsch. Fr. 49, 65^ » X<i3i()« from A X//3iir, /i&Kum ; Nom. ; Jjf O. 275, Aoc
XTv A. 480, » Xiar* F. 23, xinra 2. 161, ItoM (!n the later Epic, PL X/if,
X/tr^ ; Dat. ^rrl T. 500, Aoc ^^-tiv «. 182, » ^r«fyi £. 748, ftdgrty^
E. 296, from A ^rr«(, teoici^ ; i 2«(«r,r^, 6. Sufrif^JMr and 2»gr<(>wT»>,
V 2«^«9l«v • Nom. pi rrii^if Ap. Ih. 4. <??«, ^rrc^otf from k ^rmy^

Digitized

by Google

«^H. 3.J HBTSROOLtTBS. 143

dtcps Dit. On Has. Op. 61, Thwig^. 955, -= Shcn fhmi ri A^^, mater fto
Norn. 0)«« Call. fV. 466).

§ 134. 2. HiTBBocLnm

«. Of the First aiid Third Declensions.

• "A^^m, pMdc 'Athit, Hadn, a fis &c ; Dec. III. Epic a'A^^f, D.*Ai1b

Another poetic form it 'Ai)«»iKf, G. -mv, Iob. -iiff.

i 0aA«f. Thaiet, G. e«Xi*^ (> 96. 7> and SaXtiT»f,

i Xims, contracted Xm$, fiotw^ Q. ;^«9f, and XeUv Sopl^ CEd. C. 196, D )«i^
A x««», x«y, and kact Call. lY. i 04, PI. N. x«tf , &c«

0 fitvxnft mushroom, 6. /Ki/x«tf and fivKfir^f,

n 9'Tvx^', -nst and mostly Ep. «rTw|, G. ^rvx^h f'>^
n ^^»nt -ns, poetic ^^/g G. ^^r«/f , ahudder, ripple,

NOTti^ a. Add aQm« piopor names in -nf ^ of which a part admit a doubU
formation throughout, as Xeifns • but others only in particular cases ; thus
Sr^f^/aoff;, -•», has (Ar. Nub. 1 206) Voc 2r^i-v^/«)tr. Some rrfer to this
bead the double Ace in ^ 1 14. N. For yvvn, see > iui« y.

b. Add, also, the Epic Pi^t. mXtti (always ia the phrase Mkx) «'i«rM^i»« E
299), = Jik»y («. 509) from mX»ti, might; Nom. h u^^al Ues. Op. 354, »
k^wmyn, robbery; Ace. IZxa A. 601, kb ia»«ifv from jWti (E. 740), 6aM2»-i^
Ace. K^ixrn Hes. Op. 5^i6, ss «^«xifv from x^«»t), tcpoi^f (also PL K. «f«»cf Antip*
Th. 10. 5); Dat. pi. ^^i«rr4y Ap. Rh. 8. 1020, a ^^c from fSiet, rote;
Dat. vr/ftTyi B. 863, 0. .56, =s v^-^/y}} (T. '245) from vr/«iv)t, 6ai</ie; Ace. ^vy
(only m ^vt^a^i, to fiigktt 0. 157, &c.^ =s ^i/ynv from ^vy4, Jligkt; and the
Doric Gen. fem. mlymv Theoc 5. 1 48, 8. 49, for miySf from mT^, goat (sa Gea
nir«*»» CalL Del. 66, '^75, for niruv from n Hfr«f of Dec II.).

fi. Of the Second and Tlurd Declensions.

ri ld»f»f and poet, ^^x^u, teof, G, ^9^m$», D. ^;ir^f < PI. N. 2^(fM, O.
Vut^^y, D. 2mM(V04$ and idx^vn Th. vii. 75.

r« }|y^^«v and Ion. }i»^^i«», ^ee, G. )i»}^«v, &c. ; Dec III. D. ^ty^^n, A.
>f»^ Bdt yi. 79, PI. K. )«*);% D. ^»^t0-« (the more oommon form of the
DaL pL even in Attic prose ; e. g. Th. iL 75).

i &«7Mf, AmxA, G. ;»n»«v, &c. ; Dec III. ranr A. 7«vfMi Ar. ¥r. 525, PI.
N. fxrlftf Pansan. 5. 14.

; »x£i»s, twig, G. MXaho, &c ; Dec. III. poet. D. *Xmii, A. »xi2«, R D<.
sAii2i#:i Ar. Av. 239, »Xa}$i0^h A. »>JUin

1 MH9t»90t, •harer, G. »Mim9Hk £«. ; Deo. III. PL K* xu^Znt Cyr. viii. 1. i5,
A. »tfSif§it lb. 16.

ra »^;y«», %, G. »^<v«tf, &0. ; Dec III. PL N. k^Uui Hdt. H. 92, D. »^/.
nr« Ar. Nub. 911.

vl int^n and « Svu^0t, dream, G. iutcv and iui^mrts • PI. 0yfi(«, and mon
ftoqnontly mi^wi. DeriTod from hm^ (f 187).

4 «'(»%••:, contr. «'^«;^«vf , «icw, G. *r^«;c**'» ^ » ^^®^ ^^* ^' ^' ■'^^^'••^
Ar. Nub. 272.

ri ifvfy fin, G. «^^f, D. «^e/ Dec II. PI* N. «^eiC, walth-firtt, D

Digitized

by Google

I4i IRRSGULAB NOUNS. [bOOK II

i ^iX»» '■»»> G. €vtxw, &c ; Dec. III. poet. fem. 6. frt^^i II. 173, PI.
N. frixu Find. P. 4. 373, A. 9rlx»f At, Eq. 1 63.

Note. Add the poet Dat. pi. iri^etv'i'ita-ft H. 475, ^= itii^irSius from
«v2^air«$0y, slave ; Nom. }^«f H. 315, Ace i^n I. 92, ^ • 7#*rr F. 442, iove,
A. I^ftrra Horn. Merc 449 ; Gren. pi ftuXtirmv Lye 106, «= ^nXwv from fAtiXofy
«/tee/i ; Ace Jxc (only in gtxuh, homeward, often in Horn, and even used in
Attic prose, vii. 7.57), = •!*•» from «Tx««, htmaei PI. N. w^ntmvmrm, r. 192,
D. v^arttvan H. 212, ss flr^^rwrc, Wf9^mr»tff from ^^immwny Jwt* FoV
Ot^i^r^tff, Tltir^tMXaSi And i/Ztf; , see ^ 1 6.

7. Of the Attic Second and Third Dedensions.
n <8[x«f , threshing-Jloor, 6. afx«, aiXntvs, and poet. i[fXi»0r.
« fk^Tfttg, maternal unde, G. fAnv^w and /fti}r^*>«; • PI. ftnr^ttit.
i MtNtff, Minos, 6. M/yw and Miyw«f.

« «r«r^*r«, paternal unclCf 6. vmt^v and 9riT^t**t * PI* «r«r^*>f f«
« r«utfr and r«Mvv, jteacock, G. tmv and raZvos * PI* N. ra^, r««/, andf^iuMtf
• rS^mt whirlwindf G. rt/^^^ and rv^mvaf,

^ 13ff» 3. Hbterooeneous Nouns.
«. Of the Second Declension.
i W/Mf, Aond, PL r« hr/Aa and m hffitti,
ri ^vyiv and • C^^y^^* 5^^ ^1* ^^ ^f^**
« d^ir^tff (Dor. Tt^ftc(\ institute, PI. 0/ ^ttrfitai and ri^ i^r^i^.
i Xvx9»ey lamp, PI. r« Xtf;^i'« and ei Ai/;^m/.
r« y<vr0v and i fZr*i, back, PL rk vHrtt*
0 rrr0f, com, PL rm f7rat.

i rra^fMf, station, balance, PL 0/ fraB-fA»i and ri^ erm^/td, ttatkmt, v2k rr»-
S^fua, balances,

§ Td(Ta(t (n Pmd. Pr 1. 29), TartanUj PL ri^ T^^tw^m.

/3. Of the Third Declension.

ri *»^i and (Soph. Ph. 1 457) »^arc, heed, poetic, G. n^drU (rns, Em.
£1. 140), D. K^dri and x«(f Soph. Aiit. 1272, A. r* Mm^d, r» and ri M^StTm
Eur. El.' 148 (c£ 150), Fr. Arch. 16, Soph. (Ed. T. 263 ; PL A, reut m^irmi
Kur. Phoen. 1149. The following forms are found in Homer:

a N. »i(n

G. x«^)tT0( Mtt^^ros »(»Tot Mfi&rt »^^9 X, 588 ui^»m

D. xd^rt »a^ti»rt z^Mri Mf&mrt

A. »«;«, tUi^ n. 392 x^mret S. 92

P. N. »ii^« Cer. 12 na^n^rm n^iSirm $ut(n9»

G. «(«rw» »«^MM

D. »(«rl, »^«irir^i, K. 152, 156

Other poets (not Attic) have also forms of »d^ as a fun. of Dec I. ; thni«
a nd^nt CaU. Fr. 125, Moech. 4. 74, »dfy Theog. 1018.

7. Of Difiiirent Declensions.
Dec. I. and II. i wXtv^d and ri v-Xtv^iv, rib; i f^tyyit and i fS«ry4.

Digitized

by Google

•:H. 2.J DEFECTIVE. 145

^foict ; 'h x*^(* ^^^ ^.X''t*** ^pace: Dec. I. and III. h li^att -nt, and ri Vt^f
-ttf^, thirst; n taiv-n and r« va«'0f, deU; ti ^Xa^n and r« fikeificst injury; n yw-
ftr and Ion. and poet. r§ yfufAtt^ -etTtSt opinion ; ri vd^ag and ti v-aSfi, mffier^
tni : Dec. II. and III. • •x^'f (Dor. Sk^os), -ov, and W 0;^0f, -10;, and also ri
•X *f^* -etratt carriage; i ahd ri c-xirof (and also 11 vxarim)^ darkness; i and
«* -xu^of, cup; &C.

B. Defect of Declension.

^ ISO. 1. Some words receive no declension^ as tlie
iv\mes of the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few
ot/ier foreign words. Thus, to, tov, tw al(f>a • o, tov, taJ, t6>
A^SQtxdfi ' TO, Tov, r^) ndaj^a^ possover.

Note. A word of this kind is termed indecUnabU, or an aptote {&9rmr9$t
without cases),

2. A few diminutives and foreign proper names, whose root
onds with a vowel, receive g in the Nom., v in the Ace, and,
i^ the vowel admits it, an iota subscript in the Dat., but have
no further declension ; as

« ^anie (dim. from Jitovdragf Bacchus)^ G. Ai«yv, D. Aiavv, A. Ai«yv», Y.

A|0VV.

i yLnms (dim. from t/Lnvoim^at^f G. M)}»S, D. Mnt^t, A. MnvSy, Y. MiivS.

« Metfxist G« Mm^-ka, D. M«r«^ A. M«0-«ay, Y. M«rjM(.

i *la¥fnsi G. *Iavtn, D. 'I«iry^, A. 'lavv^y, Y. 'lawn.

• 'Itifovf, JesuSf G. 'I^rtfv, D. *Itifov, A. *I*i#«i/y, Y. 'In«'«v.

« r>.«?;. See 5 16.

3. Many nouns are defective in number. Thus,

a. Many noons, frY>m their signification, want the ploral ; as, «, li &n(^ the
o^r^ 0 ;^«Xx«f, oopjteTy ri iktuatj oily h retxynnfi swiftness. Propesr and abstract

nouns are seldom found in the plural, except when employed as common nouns*

•
fi. The names of festivals, some names of dties, and a few other words,
want the singular ; as, r<^ Aitvvrta, the feast of Bacchus, ctl 'A^veci, Athens^
«i tTfitriett, the trade-winds,

§ 1 3 7* 4. Some nouns are employed only in particular
cases^ and these, it may be, occurring only in certain forms of
expression. Of this kind are,

Uftxsi body, form, Nom. and Ace. neut.

iv-UXtiv, surname^ Acc.^em. (= IwixXnm), commonly used adverbially.

A/xoe, with od, Dat. neut., perhaps shortened from xJiraT, Some regard it
as Ace

fieixtif, arm-pit, Gen. fem., only in the phrase uiri fJiXtit, under the am,
secretly ; also, in late writers, &«*« fuiXnt, Otherwise the longer form, 4 f^t
'X^^^i is employed.

ftikt, Yoc masc. and fem., used only in fi»niliar address ; Z /tiXt, my good
friend,

J3

Digitized

by Google

146 DSCLENSION. [boor II

M«^ §hep, dnam, and Wm^ waUag^'remHiy, N. «nd As ntmU Se» 9mi^
(§124./8).

i^c-t, eyeSf Da. N. and A. neut. ; IH. 0. jrrwy, D. i^vtt*

«^sX«f , advantage, and i^^^f (Ep*)* pleature, N. neat.

ri» or ray, only Attic and in the phrase £ vi*, good dr, sirrah.

Notes. «. Add the poet. Nom. and Aoo. neat. ^£ (root ^w^-, § 63) A
4'26, -= )w/MB, Aoitte, »e'' (»*• »e'^-) ®- •56**. = »» »e^^» *<w&y» ^^^'^^ (r« et^pr-)
Horn. Cer. 308, « Jix^ir«», barley-meal, yXJ^v, hoQow, Hea. Op. 5S1, i^t Flii-
lat. ap. Strab. S64, » {^mv, umw/ (compare, with theee neuters, ^(i and ^ ^
§ 1:)6. /3) ; Dat. fern. %a.1 {l\ batUe, N. 286 (akin to this, Ace. Uiv CalL Fr.
243); Dat. Xtri 2. 352, Ace. smg. masc. or pi. neut. Xit» a. 130, = Dat.
and Ace of r* Xiv^v, linen ; Acc. fern, vi^a, enow, Hes. Op. 53.^ (from which
h vt^dty -ultu tnow-fiake) ; Yoc nXi O. 1 2H, =s liXfi /3. 243, Arom nX%ii, crazed,

/3. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a fnonoptote
(^v«i, single^ vrisHt ^o^ t ^ <>k> cases, a diptaU ; m three, a triptoU ; in
yoicr, a teirapMe.

CHAPTER III.

DECLENSION' OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES.
[mr 17-20, 22.]

^ 138. Adjectives are declined like substan
rives, except so far as they vary their form to de-
note variation of gender (§ 74. 8). In this respect,
they are divided into three classes, adjectives of
one, of twOf and of three terminations.

Note. In adjeddves of more than one tennination, the maseuUm ia re-
garded as the primaiy gender, and the root, theme, and declension of tiio
masculine, as the general root, tiieme, and declension of the word. The mode
of declining an adjective is commonly marked by sutgoiniog to the theme the
Ather forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings; and, if necessary, the form
jf the Qea, sing. Thus, S^mt, •«» ■ sa^nf^ 'it * piXttg, -d, ^n • i, n ^<«tff »
•«3«f , vi )j«r«(n>.

^ 139» I. ApjECTivBS OF Onb Termination are de-
clined precisely like nouns, and therefore 'require no separate
rules or paradigms. They are confined, in the language of
prose, to the masculine and feminine genders, and some of
them are employed in a single gender only. E. g.

1. MascoUne. Dec I. ; ytn£Ut, ^v, ndbh, i futim%, -•», soUtaty, i i9flX«f
rw, -•5, vokmtaryi Dec IIL i yi^m. -errt, old, i irivnt* -•«••#, jwor (y«l
Hesyoh. gives 4 vimr^tt).

Digitized

by Google

OH. 3.] ADJECTIVES AND t»ARTlCIPLES. Ii7

T^vdtj 'dhti Trojan^ h ^(ist -t^oSi Dorian, *

S. Masculine and Feminine. Dec. III. i, fi iy^s, -Urat, vnknoum, «, «
liir»ifi 'eu^tSi ckUdlesSf •, n nA/|, -i»oe, of the same agcy ij i hfti^vmi -^rog, half'
dead, i, n ^vyeif, dhfj fugitive.

Note. Tbe indirect cased of a^jectivea of one termination and of Dec. III.,
Bfe sometimes employed by the poets as neuter ; as, yy^v^y r% fuytiXw U wifnm
TtitfA»Ti £ur> £L 072| /utw^tv Xugon^vn Id> Or. 270, )^/ac«r« ^mim* .^Xt-
^d^eis lb. 837.

§ 1 SO. II. Adjectives of TVo Terminations have tie
same form for the feminine a» for the mascuMne, but baye j
distinct form for the neuter in the direct cases singular and
plural. •

RiaiABKS, «. A4iectives which form the neater most be either of Dec.
II. or lU. (§ 79), and| if of Dec. III., cannot have either a labial or a pala-
tal characteristic (§101). To adjectives which cannot form the neuter, this
gender is sometimes supplied from a kindred or derived root ; as, •, ^ ^^v^S*
•^yst, rgpoMOUSf ri A^^tmnruciiit,

fi. The neuter must have two distinct forms, and can have only two, one
(br the direct cases singular, and the other ftnr the direct cases plural (§ 80).
Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neuter plural
Is sometipies given, though rarely, to a4i^eti^^ whiah do not iarm the neuter
singular; m, fimm wmr^it mirmr^m Mnr, Hare. U4, tdin»,., IwvXtiim Hdt
viji. 73.

y. In ^/r0tf# (5 1 7), and in similar compounds of vrwt, foot^ the Neuter
aiqg;, on account el tbe difficulty of formmg it ftem the root, is formed from
the theme, after the analogy of eontrae^ of Deo. IL (^ 18) ; thua, «, ii U-
«wf, r* }/T0f/»* i^ k TftTeMSt -'hi, thre$-faot»d^ ri rftwwv, C£ §^1S6« 2.

§ 181* HI. Adjectives of Three Terminations differ
fiom those of two in having a die^aot form: for the feminine.

It is only in the first declension that the feminine has a
distinct form from the masculine. These adjectives, therefore,
jnust be of two declensions, uniting the feminine forms' of the
first with the masculine and neuter of the second or ihireL
The feminine is formed according to the following rules.

Rule i. If the theme belongs to the second
declension, the feminine affixes of the first are an-
nexed to the simple root

If the root ends in f, i, p, or ^o, the feminine is declined like
amn • otherwise, like n/wij (If 7, § 93).

•Hnia, ftXU, ^iktdt ' 00^^, 0»(finf • x^^u^ifi, hwkin (t is); /»»»(•{, -«, 49^
Sbng, ASf^0Hn -£, .«t, dmte; «cXif, ^, -m, beauiifiU, ftXrty -fit '•p,ndtUtej yty^ftim
fM9Hi -9, '*h vrkten.

Digitized

by Google

148 ADJECTIYEb. [bOOK n

^133. Rule ii. If the theme belongs to the
third declension, the feminine affixes of the first
are annexed to the root increased by a (i. e. to the
theme before euphonic changes).

Thus, from the roots «'«yr., xx^nvr' (f 19), fiavXiunr-^ A^ttfT', ^tiufr
(^ 22), are formed the ftmmines (wdvrsetf w^f^m) wrA, {xm^Uvrrm, x*'

»fiV& (§§ 55, 57, 58).

The following spbcial kules are observed in the formation
of ^e feminine, when the'' theme belongs to Dec. III.

1. Afler B or o, the ^ which is added to the root becomes 0
(§ 50), which is then contracted, with e into ci, and with o
mto vt. Thus, from the tDots {jde- (fl 19), and ndot- (fl 22),
are formed the feminines (j^ddua^ ^Jeea) {^eZa, {eidotaa^ tUdoaa^
ddoBo) sidvTa.

K0TB8. «. The dijAthoiig w mmr stands before the affixes of Dec L
The ooDcmTenoe of open, rowels whidi woold be thns prodnoed seems to have
cBspIeased the Greek ear. Hence the oontractioii, in this case, of «• into the
doser diphthong ou

$. In the eoniraeted pmfiei partie^piet, irbicb. have a kmg vowel in tiie last
syllable of the root, the r remains. Thns, from r. Wrttr- (oontr. from irr«M'^
ih>m the vecfo Trr^^, to ttand) is formed the feminine (Irrwrra) UrSr&
rt 22).

y. The fern, terminatimi -cT^i is commonly shortened m Ionic prose, and
sometimes hi Egao and other poetry, to U (sometimes Ion. in, espetaaSly in
Hipp.); as, fim^im, tifU Hdt. L 178, fia^nt lb. 75, fia^int £. 147 (bat
fia^itif B. 92), ti»i» B. 786, «)m Theoc 3. 20, t»x^S9 Theog. 715. So,
even in Attic prose, Buttmann edits from the best Mas. n/uAag PL Meno,
83 c On the other hand, the poets, in a ftw instances, prolong .U of the
Nevt {d. to 'Ua for the sake of the metre (§ 47. N.) ; as, •^i/'k Hes. Sc 348,
Huk Soph. Tt. 122 (so rMtiiv for ^xtUv, Ap. Bh. 2. 404, Uiftfitn Id. 4.
1291).

2. After a liquid, the a which is added becomes e, which i»
then transposed, and contracted with the preceding vowel into
a diphthong. Thus, from the roots fisXav- (fl 19), tsQev- (r. of
Ts^i/y, tender)^ msg-^ are formed the feminines (fUXavaay /i»-
Xaspa) fiiXatySf (tigsvaaj itQCtva) Tigsiva^ nUtga (^ 134. d\
Compare §§ 56, 57.

3. If the root, after the addition of a, and the consequent
changes, ends m & or ^, the feminine is declined like ontd ' but
if it ends in a or y, like yXuaaa (fl 7, §§ 92, 93) ; as, ^^«Idf,
'^ddag • nao&y ndaiig ' fiiXat^va^ (itXalvrig (fl 19) ; nUiQa^ mdoag.
Observe that the a in the direct cases is always short See
§92.

Digitized

by Google

CH. 3.] OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 1^

§ 1SS« Of those words which belong to the general class
of ADJECTIVES (§ 73), the following have tiiree terminations :— r

1. All participles ; as, fiovXeviav^ agag^ tldag (U 22).

Note. In participlesy which partake of the verb and the adjeetive, a cha-
tinction most be made between the root, affix, connectmg vowd, and JUxSM
ending of conjugation, and those of declension ; thna, in the genitive fiavktu^vr^St
the root of conjugation 1b fiwktv-, and the affix .Mr«f • while the root of de-
clension Is fitvktunr-, and the affix .«; •

2. All comparatives and superlatives in -og ; as, ^ro^oiTc^oii
-fi, -01', toiser ; aofptaiaiog^ -i?, -or, toisest.

3. All numerals, except cardin^ils from 2 to 100 inclusive ;
as, diaxoaioi^ -ai, -Oy two hundred^ rgliogj -i}, -of, third,

4. The article and adjective pronouns, except ife (rig). See
1124. ..

5. Simple adjectives m -o?, -etj, and -vj, with a few other
adjectives ; as, qtlXiog^ aoq>6gy xQ^^^og (fl 18) ; /or^i^, ^dvg ' tioj,
fiiXag (f[ 19) ; Ixcoy, -ovact, -oy, G. -orro?, tvilling ; taXagyaivaj
-cry, G. -ai'og, wretched ; tiqrivy -uva^ -cy, G. -ivog^ tender*

Notes. «. For the number of terminations in adjectives in .«# , only gen-
eral roles can be given. Fot the most part, simples have three terminationay
and compounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many sim-
ples, particnhiily derivatives in .ii«f , .<«f , and -t/Ms, have but two. Deriva-
tives from compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, espedallj
those in -a^f , -r«f, and ^Uf, have more commonly three terminations, la '
many words, usage is variable. See y.

fi. Adjectives uk .i^, of the Attic Dec. 11., have but two terminations ; as^
l^(it\^ 17), i, li >^i«f, r§ tSytt*, fertSt. For *XU»$, see § 135.

y. In (a.) words in which the Fem. has commonly a distinct form, the
form of tlM Masc is sometimes employed in its Mettd. And (b.), on the other
Inuid, a diMinct form is sometimes given to the Fem. in words in which it is
commonly the same with the Masc Thus, we find as feminine,

(a.) Aiiyectives in -^ (particularly in Attic writers, § 74. i), ^nkt Eur. Med.
11 97, ^X«f Id. ffipp. 435, Th. vi. 21, iti»y»Mu Th. L 2, xkvrit B. 742 •
Adjectives in -of (particularly in Epic and Doric poetry), nivs ft» 369, iiim
Theoc. 20. 8, ^Xug T. 97, trevkvv EL 27 ; Comparatives, Superktives, Parti«
dples, and Pronouns (all rarely, excqst in the dual, see ^.), atx^^^rt^af Th. v.
110, %u0%ft^»XMTmvt Id. iii. 101, §k»mv^es ). 442; rt^frts JEsch. Ag. 560;
mXiMVTH Soph. EL 613, (Ed. C. 751.

(b.) ^KMsrH K. 404, ^^•^0vir Theog. 1 1 , wXt^USt VmSi. N. 3. 3, wXvrim
fiim Ar. Pax, 978, for the common h it^m^mres, &c This use is espedal^
q>ic and fyric

1. This use of the dnasc. form for the fem. is particularly frequent in th«
dual, in which, from it« limited use, the distinction of gender is least unpor-
tant; as, r*r ;^i7^i vi. 1. 8 (the fem. form r« scarcely belongs to dassie
Chfeek) ; r*vr^ rw A/ai^m C}T. 1. ^. 1 1 ; r«vr«4y %h relv mtvn^ietf FL LfQPi

Digitized by VjOOQIC

150 ADJSOTIYBS. [book U

898 a.; ^ ^ni Urn Siim i^x**^* '^ iyswrh •^^ MfU^tt* ^.rtirm
PI. Fhadr. 237 d.; ;)#fri f^mi w'm^twm Soph. (Ed. O. 1676; «'A.iirl»r«
e. 455.

^ 134* To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied
from a kindred or derived root These fonriB may be eithei
required to complete the adjective, or they may be only specia
feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by tl e
side of forms of the common gender (cf. § 74. s). The fem-
inines thus supplied most frequently end in -ig^ G. -idog, but
also in -a?, G. ^adogj in -em, -eipa, &c. (for the use of ^ as a
feminine formative, see § 118). Thus,

m, MascnUnes in .iff of Dec I., and in -tv; of Dec. III., have often coi>
responding femutines in ^f , •<)««. These words are duefly fiatriids and gen-
tiles, or other personal designations, and are o(»nmonly used as substantives.
ThnSf • iraxfriff, .«t/, bdongmg to a cUy (d-i«2 ^rtXTTttt iEsch. Th. 253), eifSzen,
n taktrtf, -ihf ii»imt,n Uirif, ntpg^iatU.'f i "Skv^s, ii ^»v^if, Scythian;
i Miym^$^ 4mft 4 MsyecfU, MBgarian.

. JL Tlie eompoHods of l«w, year (in -«# , -if of Deo. UL, bnt somttiiiMi fat
Kf, G. -tftf of Dec I.)i hare often a q)6cial fem. in -ts, -^«i ; as, i, li l«^r«f,
T« itrrirut 9eom year$ old, and h IvrSrif, -tht • rit l^irn ^^»i <^» V^Uw PI.
Log. 794 c ; rkg v^uumwvtus wirovUis Hl L 23, bnt r^Mrravritm twn^Sh
lb. 87. _

y. Soma oompeonds in .im» -i# have « poetio (partioilaify Epie) fan. in
«Mi; as, 4^<ytMif, -if, A 4e<7i»uA A. 477* So ttkunoyiHtStt ittiiinA, ^uW-
irt«A Soph. (Ed. T. 463.

• }. Add #, li Wivy, and it «r/>i^ ri «-?«», /a<; 4 «'^lr/3iir, oZi^ twMroNSe^ Fem.,
chiefly poet, «r(i«-/3iE, rfi^/Sii, o-^Sj-jSii^ wfwfinfs, vAv^n • #, li ^jum, and
li ^»«i^il^ blessed, poetic ; ^, i^ «r^«^^*»y, and Ep. il fr^s^^arr* K. 290, kmd,

^ 13tS« Irregulab Adjectives. Among the adjectives
which deserve special notice are the following.

fuymti grtaty and •'#x#f, mmh (5 20)« In thaie acyecUves, the Norn, and
Ac»Q. sing, masc and neat are formed fiom the xoots fuym^ and «'«x«^ accord-
ing to Dec. IIL The oti)«r caees are Cnmed firop the roots /(•ir^x. and wXX^
according to Dec I. and IL The Yoc iAtyAx% occurs onty iEsch. Th. 892.
From its signification, ^•x6t has no duaL For the Homeric faifleetien of «i-
Xuf, see 5 20. In Herodotus, the fbrms from wKXit prevail throoghont, yet
not to the entire exdosion of the other fbrms. The %le forms sometimas
occur in the Attic poets.

; wxims, A wxU, ri wxit*, fvU, The Kasc and Neat are formed ton r*
rX«^ according to the Attic Dec U. (§ 98) ; tite Fern. Is formed from r*
«'Xi.. Ion. rXitff, Ep, vX%7os, -ir, ^». So, likewise, in Att writers, the plural
compounds tfi^-Xtos, t««-Xi<( Cyr. vi. 2. 7, rt^irXim lb. 33. In Hke maanet
7xut PI. Phsdo, 95 a, N. pi. from fXtmi, •«», contr. from Ixmtt, -•*•

i vfitf (by some written ir^f «f), if v-fmuet, r§ r^«M («'^f «»), mUd. In this
wiy., forms from r. ir^a-, of Dec II., and from r. «^m-, at Dec IIL, An

blended (see ^ 20). Ion. ^^nit.

i, 4 >«lf , ri w, aa/k In this a^j., contract forms from r. ^m- are blandad

Digitized by VjOOQIC

CM, 3.] IBRBOULAB* 151

wilb fionns from z riw. (ecmtr. ttom mm-% bdaqging ptrti|f to Dm. IL mad
puiiLj to Pec. IIL Thus,

i i ri *

P. K. r««i, (r^rf () r«f (^<^) ^'b '***

Tbero li alio aa Epic haa r^r. With tfa« abofv may be eompand tbB
Hbmerio (i^ EL 87, Jlm. (i<» II. 445, oontr. from C«^s C*^* "" the oommon

§ 1 3 G» KitMABKR. 1. Some oompooncU of yixms^ Jaughtar^ and «if«i»
Aom, may reoeive either the Attic second, or the third declension ; as, f iX«7t.
XtHt -tfv, 0. ^ and ^rvf, loMghter-lovmg, xi'^^'^^^fi '•»** C^* -^ "''^ -«'«'•(,
goUen-hornedL Shorter forms also occor, according to the common Dec IL ;
as, Vm*^«9i 9n»*^M, M»t^

2. Some compomids of T»6ff foot, have secondary fbrms according to Dec
n. ; as, w\v^»vt (poet. w«ykuir$tii), manjf-footedf 6. wKuw»i0s and ircXvittp •
r^iVnff, -^ttt and £p^ t^iitH, «Mr, X. 164, tkre^/Mied; *l^is JUXXiirtf 0.
109; WwMiv ^iX>.««'«)frri» Horn. Yen. 218. See Oi'2<t«v (5 16), and
compare § ISO. y.

3. Among other examples of varied formation, we notice the Homeric i Hi
B. 819, and Hit U. 464, good, brave, ri IS T, 2:^5, tS £. 650 (both adverbial),
and «l^ r. 456. Gen. I««f A. 393 (cf. § 121. 3), Aoc U» 0, 303, and ii$f E.
6^8 ; Gen. pi neat Uutp H. 528 ; • ifin(»t A. 266, tnutyf fL l^iniHt l^^e^t
r. 47, 378 ; i w*X^fh^H X. 257, rich in iheqa, PL fraXMf}nn$ I. 154 (see also
w§X^f9i below, 4. i) ; AiVvf tXt^^^f N. 773, "IXso* etlvrv O. 7 1 , IXft ttiwuf^
N. 773, «^A4f mir^ N. 625, «;«-« ^li^e« ^' ^^^> nif)«r«* «Mtrr«y <l». 87 ;
i^ri r. 419, ^fcer*(«'« ®' 13^> ^r^*"' a. sis, i^^ir* <|>. 127; i^y^iM 2.*
50, i(yvf*9 n. 621 ; wiXn ... toT$i%U9 A. 129, r«Xjv tttrtix— II. 57 ; T^«f«9
I^A«X«M» r, 74, Tf 04919 l^ifistXM 1. 329 ; 9'tXyTXmg f. 171, «'«JLirrJli(^M»9 «v 319,
wtXvrXurM X. 38 ; &c Examples of adjectives of double formation, or of
flTnonymoos adjectives with dif^rent forms, might be greatly multiplied.

4. Among defective acyectives, we notice,

«.) The foDowing, chiefly poetic : i, h £ia,»^us, r§ £im»(v, tearktt, Ace jOm.
s^ (the other cases supplied by iiti»^r«(, -«v) ; wXv^ax^vf, tearfmi (supplted
in like mamier by ^txMK^irtf); i w^U^f (for fom. see § 134. )), oU, aa
tfubst. aUr, ambanmior (in Uie last sense G. w^rfi^m Ar. Ach. 93), A. w^*
/itnr, Y. v'^isfiu ' PL w^Ufiuf, v-^irfifits Hes. Sc 245, eldert, mnbauadorg, G.
ir^lr/3i«», D. w^Ufiirij w^r^iS^n Lye 1056, A. 9'fUfiuf, Dn. r^ir^n Ar. Fr.
495 (the plur. in the sense of ambaatadora was in common use ; otherwise, the
word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by i trft^fiimtt old
Man, and i v^i^^t^c, ambeusador) ; ^f0S!icsy •«» •«*, gone, wfaidi, with the
Nem. throughout, has only the Gen. f^^»» Soph. A^. 264.

^y Poetio feminlnea and neuters, which have iio oorrespondiag masc; a^
li wirtti (and sometimes «■•«•»£), reoerad^ rjiv vinniv, ml wirrumt • 4 SmXud,
r« ^dXm, blooming, rich (Hoip.), li ^f and Xsm (always with vim), ^ 64,
7y, yg 293, •.412, — Xii«, fem. of Xi7«, emooth; ri ^7 (r. ^<^-) Hea. ap.
etrab. 364, = neut. of ^t^vs, heavy ; r# /^ (r. /fJ-) Soph. Fr. 932, » neat,
of ^d^H, etuy (compare with /3^7 and /f, the neuters )w, »^r, &c, § 187. «) ;

k ^ and Iwtnfm, jtUtoMg (Hom.).

Digitized

by Google

£53 NUMERALS. [BOOK l\

y.) Poetic plurals which have no corresponding sing. ; as •* ^mf*U$ K. 264,
and r«^^iif A. 387 (yet raa^vt iEsch. Th. 535), thick, frequmt, mi ^itfmai

A. 52, and raf^uai T. 357 (accented as if from ^afituog and Tei(^uos)t ril
raffia A. 69, l^vtrd^futrts —Imrti EL. 370 ; m vrXUt A. 395, rohf wXi»$

B. 129 sss frkievtf, rX'utebSt more,

^.) Poetic oblique cases which have no corresponding Nom. ; as, rw 'tvff^at
fiut^rcst unhappily wedded, Mach. Ag. 1319 ; »aX.Xi'yv9»moSy having beauH/u*
women, Sapph. (135), tuckksyufosKB Fvad. P. 9. 131, *EX)Mti Mkiuyvmixa
B. 683 ; wXum^n 0tfSrrii B. 106 ; x«>.tfir^rmym. ^ftkKm* Pratin. ap. Ath.
617 c; v^pixi^Ara trir^av Ar. Nub. 597; xk*'*f» XH^^* X^f*^*"^ ^* K**
tn*f, xU'*'^ (P^ which xk*** ^* ^^^* v. 310, is a doubtftil yariation), A. 80>
A. 400, &c a* X**i***h ^^ vfone.

CHAPTER IV.

NUMERALa

[TTir 21, 25.1

^ 1ST* L NuMEBAL Adjectives. Of numeral adjectives,
the principal are, (1.) the Cardinal, answering the question
noaoi; koto many ') (2.) the Ordinal, answering the question
noatog; which in order 7 or, one of how many 1 (3.) the Tem-
poral, answering the question, noatmog; on what day 7 or, in
how many days 7 (4.) the Mitltiple (muhiplex, having many
folds) ^ showing to what extent any thing is complicated; and
the Proportional, showing the proportion yvhich one thing
hears to another.

1. Cardinal. For the declension of the first four cardinals,
see IF 21. The cardinals from 5 to 100, inclusive, are inde-
clinable ; as, ol, oi, Tix, T(i)y, toX^, toilg^ tovg^ lag^ naVrc, fve.
Those above 100 are declined like the plural of (plliog (IT 18).

Notes. «. ETf , from its ngnification, is used only in the singnlar ; )i}*»»
only in the dual and plural ; and the other cardinals only in the plural (except
with coklective nouns, in such expressions as a^^'h i^v^m »m\ riT^sM-ZM,
10,400 infantry, i. 7. 10, 7inr«y UvaKscx^^'inv, 8,000 harm, Hdt. Tii. 85).
For the lialectic as well m common decisis, of the first four cardinals, see ^ 2 1.
We add references to authors for some of the less frequent forms : tut Ues.
Vi. 145, tii Theoc 11. 33 (in some AIss.), Inscr. Herad., ttf 2. 422, 9i!iafi,U
att (by some written •viafUf) Hdt. iv. 114, hiti V. 236, luHv Hdt. i. 94,
itw^i lb. 32, r^teTn Hippon. Fr. 8, Tirofts Hdt. yiL 228 (Inscr. Lac.), rirt^m
Hes. Op. 696, Ttri^mt Theoc. 14. 16, vUv^ig i. 70, 9ri<rv^t 0. 680, rir^Mt
Hes. Fr. 47. 5. Find. 0. 10. 83. Dialectic forms of some of the higher
nuiiiben) are, ft xi/^vt Mo\,, 12 W^ixa aiid IvoxatliKu Ion. and Poet.,
20 iii»0#i Ep., iUmrt Dor., 30 r^tn»»trm, Ion. (we even tinU Gtm. T^«ii««»r««

Digitized

by Google

CH. 4.] NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 153

Hes. Op. 694, Dat -»$nxofTtf«'tp Anthol.), 40 TMft^t*nrm and rt99t^Mnrm
lon^ rfT^x«M'A Dor., 80 iyhttxatraf {^ 46. «) lon., 90 UA»§fTm r. 174,
200 'itntiftu Ion., 9,000 Iwax^Xu H. 148, 10,000 h»dx^Xu lb.

fi, Etf has two roots, iv- and.^-. Its compounds §»i$if and finittf (which,
for the sake of emphasis, are also written separately, «»& irir, ^n^i tJi) have
the masa plnr.

y. Tile eommon form of the second cardinal is ^v«, shortened from the
regolar 3vw, which is by some excluded entirely from the Attic and from He-
rodotus. Tlie second form of the Gen. iuut is only Attic, and is even ex-
cluded from some of the best editions of good Att. writers. The Dat. pL
Wi occurs Th. viii. 101. Both ^m Qum) and a/^^«, both (which is placed in
^ 21,<as partaking of the nature of a numeral^ with that of an emphatic pro-
noun), are sometimes indeclinable (in Hom. never otherwise) ; as, )v« fAwSi*
Vii. 6. 1, ^u» fMt^&mt K. 258, 'ivm xettiftg-n N. 407, x^^^h Sfitififti Hom.
Cer. 15.

t. For the double forms of rUfo^tt, see § 70. 1. lu the compounds ^i»a.
TfiTti TiccmfifKetiitxti, and its equivalent it^aric-c-a^tt, the components r^iti
and rif^a^ts are declined ; thus, ^txar^tts, itxar^itt, ^t^mr^tSv ■ r«7ir nffec^g't'
Maiitxa. Tet we sometimes find T$ff»^ic-Katit»a (Ion. rt0'9't^»0'»aii»x»), and
even rtr0'a^«»ai^i»« used as indeclinable. See Hdt. L 86, Mem. ii. 7. 2, and
Lob. ad Phtyn. p. 409. The compounds from 13 to 19 are also written sep-
arately : rUg-M^if »»i y»»a. So r^Uf yi »m,) ii»m, Find. O. 1. 127, r^ia xui
iiz» Hdt. i. 119.

i The cardinals become coBeethe or distrHnawe by composition with ru» •
as, ^tff^M, two together, or two at a Hme, vi. 3. 2, fvtr^uf i, 429, g-whtHtJut
Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also expressed by means of the
prepositions «»«, narAy and, in some connections, $h and Sir/ • as, 1^ >.ix^vt
itfk ixetrot eifi^at, fix comptmies, each a hundred men, iii. 4. 21 ; xurm rtr^»-
xt^X*^Uvs, 4,000 at a time, iii. 5. 8 ; tU S»«r0», 100 deep, Cyr, vi 3. 23 ;
I9) rtrrd^v, four deep, i. 2. 15.

^. The numeral fAv^m, 10,^000, is distinguished from (tv^it^ plnr. of f*ufi»u
vast, countless, with whidi it was originally one, by the accent.

§ 1S8. 2. Ordinal. The ordinal numbers are all de-"
rived from the cardinal, except ngmiog, and are all declined
with three terminations. They all end in -loi^ except dsvtfgog^
fSdofiog^ and oydoog. Those from 20, upwards, all end in ^oatog.

Notes. «. Dialectic forms are, 1 irfirof Dor., 3 r^irarot Ep., 4 rir^mrtt
f p., 7 IfiHofMiTat £p., 8 iyioar»f Ep., 9 tlvxt^f Ep., 12 3i;«^i««r«f lon.,
1 1 7im^irx«/^s«ar0f Ion., 30 r^rnxo^ros Ion., &C.

/3. Instead of the compound numbers from 13 to 19 m the table (Hf 25),
we also find the combinations r^irot xai ^inmvHi Th. v. 56 ; rira^ros »»\
lii»«r««, lb. 81 ; «-i^<rr#j xmi iixattf, lb. 83 ; &C -Also, »7if »ai tlxa^rif, Th.
Tiii. 109. See 5 140. 1.

3. Temporal. The temporal numbers are formed fron\ the
ordinals, by changing the final -og into -aiog^ -5, -ov; thus,
dfVTfQogy divtiQaiog, -a, -oy. From ngmog^ no temporal number
is formed. Its place is supplied by ov^i^/i^^off) -ov*

Digitized

by Google

}54 NUMiSMts. [book m

4. MuT.T^Fi.^ TUq ipultiple numbers end ia -JvJtoo^, con
^raqted «9iU»V(« and ^re declined like dinkoog^ dinXovg (IT 16).

Other forms are dioee in -^d^tt, chiefly lon^ as, hpd^itt, r^ipm9t§f • als<^
V'M> T^fisn !««• Ml^* *t4»* ($ 70. v.), Ac

5. Proportionai The proportional numbers have double
forms, in -nXoiaiog^ -a, -of, andi njowj rarely, -rJiluaimv^ -or
O, -avog. Thus the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by 9^nXaai09
-a, *oy, or d^nXaQliav^ w>v, G. ^oyof * and that of 10 to 1, by dt^
M0Jiluoiog or diMnnhxaioiP. The ratio of 1 to 1, or of equality
is expressed by toog (Ep, hog)^ -i?| -ov.

^ 130. II. Numeral Adverbs. I. The numeral ad-
verbs which reply to the interrogative noaaxig; Juno many
times 7 all end in -dxig^ except the three first ; thus, ftTfdxig
ten times J ivvfaxa^HxoaixMsmfino0io^liuJMin^%^29 tynfiS^ Pl« Rep#

687 e.

These adverbs are employed in the formation of the higher
cardinal and ordip^l Qi^mbejrs ; thu9f S*^lXifiHt Ud9 tl^mmd^

2. Other numeral adverbs relate to divisioriy orders place,
manner^ ^. ; as, d/^a, in two divisions^ ^qU^j ^^ three divis*
ions ; dsmtgoy^ secondly , xqliov^ thirdly ; tQix^v^ in thr^ places^
ntrtaxoV'i in Jive places ; ntyxot^^g^ in fiv^ v>ays^ ^/(^S% i^ ^
ways,

III. Numeral Substantives. The numeral substantives,
for the most part, end in -«?, -ddog^ and are employed both as
abstract and as eolleetive nouns. Thus, ^ fiugtag may signify,
either the number 10,000, considered abstractly, or a collection
■of 1Q,000. The^e numeral^ often take the place of the ordi-
nals, particularly in the expression of the higher numbers ; as,
dixa fivfidde^^ ten myria4s 7=- }00,QQO ; Ixoroy fivgiddtg^ a miU
lion,

§ 1 40. Remarks. 1. When numerals are combined^ the
less commonly precedes with koI • but often |he greater wiAout
xa/, and sometimes also with it.

Thus, «*»» »ai i7»«r/», ,fif» and fippU/f, i, 4. 2 ; T4rr»^dft«»r^ f iori, fofiifT
fiot^ V. 5. 5 ; T^Mi^nra. »at\ «*<«», tkirty amd Jh^^ i^ 4. 2 ; 0rm^fUi vf^

»»in-ec x») lletxtr^^iXtoi xet) fcu^tctt ii. 2. 6 ; rrm^fco) ^taxivm ^cjuerivri, «*»•
^^rdyyxt x*^'** Ixmrn ff'f»nf»«»r# f^vri, 9r4^t^ f^t^f^u^t* r$r^mxt^xJ^^Mi
lletttSina «-«»ti»«mt«, vu. 8. 26. See v.. 5, 4, and § 138. fi.

Notes. #.. From the division of the Greek month into deeadeg, the daji
were often designated a? foUovs ; fin»h f^^^sf^m ^^9 M ^ix*, «S»fi th»

Digitized

by Google

CH. 5*] PRONOJIfS. l&b

[6th 9fter IQ] 16tft of the month BoSdromiomy Dem. 261. 12 ; »f^irm^««f
Uvif W) )f»«rfl, Id. 279. 17 ; fi«tii^»fuiiws Urif t/t$r* tixtcim, * the 26th,' 14
265. 5. In like maimer, r^W yt yinw w^if )U* &}<>Mtft9 ynms, MasAi
Prom. 773.

/ft. Instead of adding eight or nine, nAtraetion fa often employed \ as, tm
...fiumt iiwrm Tirr«^«»«vr«, Jbriy sj^pt wanting one [40 — 1 »■ 39}, Th.
viii. 7 ; nbvW ittoip havrmt wifrnMPra [50 — ^ 2 ^ 48 J, lb. 25 ; ivtitt iuv-
watt t1»»9t mvrit H. 6r« 1. 1. 5 ; wivr^opru tutlh httra tm, Th. ii. 8 ; Uit
)t«f ii»«rr«» trt, Id. viii. 6 (c£ Syhtt xui ^xmtm Ir^f, Id. vii. }8) ; Im
2i«vr«f r^Mt»«r«^ tru, m the thirtkth year^ one wan*in§y Id. iv. 102. In like
manner, r^nt^im* inr^iUtrm. f/kv^tn. Id. iL IS. It will be observed, that the
partidi^ may either agne with the greater nnmber, or, by a rarer eonstrac-
tion, be pot absolute with the less. See Syntax.

y. The combinations of frcuthne with whole numbers are variously ex-
prassed; thus, (a) r^tet fi/Atia^uxti, three half-daricsj i. e. 1^ darics, L 3. 21
(b) Particularly in Herodotus, rfirm nfU9^?L»9T«M, the thhd takiU a half one
L e. 2^ tqilente, Hdt i. 50 ; tfiii^ftM hfurmXwtrtv + wirm^n nfiurtiXnwn ««•
^Xtcvrn ^»#, 16^ 4- 3^ ae 10, lb. (oompase in Lat. eeettsiiUtt, shortened from
eemktertiia) : (c) Less classic, )m nml i/u'wum* fitWt )«« f^ ii/**fu i^^f^
P(^ ix. 56, 69 : (d) WiT^irth a mrd Uk addiikm, I e. 1^, Vect. 3. 9i WU
wytwrov, \l, lb. : (e) nfuiXjt*, half <r« much again, L e. 1^, i. 3. 21.

2. The Tabte (YI 25) e^ibits the moet eoinmon auraemls
wiU) BOQie Qf the mterrogatives, indefiBites, diminutives, &c.
which eorrespond with them.

CHAPTER V.

PRONOUNS.

I. Substantive.
tir23.j
^141. Personal, fy4, ov, ov. The declension of these
pronouns is peculiar.

The numbers are distinguished not less by difference of root, thah jsf ajgHx.
Thus, the Ist Person has the roots, Sing. /!•-, or, as a more emphatic form, l^-,
PI A^, Du. p. ; the 2d Pers., Sing. «--, PL if*-, Du. ^(p. ; the 3d Pere., Sing,
the rough breathing, PI. and Du. r^-. Most of the forms have a connecting
vowel, which in the Smg. and PL is -t- (in the Dat. sing, passing into the
kindred -♦-, § 28), but m the Du., -•-. The JlexiMe endinge are Sing. Gen.
^ Dat. -r, Ace none (the primitive Direct Case remained as Ace, while the
Nom., in the 1st and 2d Persons, had the peculiar forms iyti and wu, and m
the 3d, from its reflexive use, eariy disappeared ; compare the Lat. me, te, «e ;
egoy tu, Nom. of 3d Pers. wanting) ; PI. Nom. -•*, Gen. -«»i», Dat. -Xp (the
flexible ending of the old Indirect Case, § 83), Ace. -dt ; Du. Nom. -« (in the
prolonged forms p£7, 9^7, the -t appears to have come from an imitation of

Digitized

by Google

156 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOXmS. [bOOX 11

the Gen.), Gen. -ip. In all the forms in common ose, the connecdng row^
and flexible ending are ountracted ; thus, i/t-i-* i/fZ^ a-i-o etHi, *4-« §»• (l^i-*
l/»-«-4) Ififif (r-f^) r#^ C-i-*) «• nftt'i-tt fiftutt vfi-i-ts vfius, (a^-i-u) ^^ut \

exMbitB a dlfierent fonnation without a connecting vowel) ; hfA-i-dt iifitas
u/A-i-itt vfitMff 9<P'i-if 9'^ms * gS't mv, ^P'S^t r^4w (v«^and 9'(pm are aometiroes
written incorrectly »f and r^, as if contracted from vSt, f^m, § 25. «) ;
v^.iV v^y, rf-w-iV rff » (f^m9, from its limited use, remained unoontracted)

^ 1 43. RBMABKft 1. The Table (If 23) exhibits^ 1st, the common
forms of the peisooal pronouns ; 2d, the forms whidi ^ccur in Homer, whether
oommon or dialectic ; 3d, the principal other forms which occur. The fonns
to which the sign f is affixed are enclitic when used without emphasis (see
Prosody). When the oblique cases ISng. of lyti are not enditic, the loi^ger
forms ifUvj IftMf Ifti are employed.

2. The pronoun »v is used, both as a simple personal pronoun, and as a *»-
flexive. ia. the Attic and Common dialects, however, it is not greatly n. ed
in either sense, its place bemg commonly supplied by other pronouns. Hie
plur. forms ^fut and rff« first occur in Hdt. (viL 168, L 46). For the lim-
itations and peculiarities in the use of this pronoun, see Syntax.

3. Besides the forms which are oommon in prose, the Attic poets also eai-
ploy, (a) the Epic Genitives t^fS^*, ri5i», Z^» • {b) the Accusatives »/» and
r^, without distinction of numba* or gender ; (e) the Dat. pL rfh, which
even occurs, though rarely, both in Attic and in other poetiy, as sing. ;
Id) the DaLpL of iyti and ^i with the ultima short (especially Soi^odes) ;
thus, ii/iiv, vfiutt or fyift ^/ifv. See 5. below.

4. The DiAUEonc forms arise chiefly, a) from want of contraction, as,
4»i«, Sec ', (6) ttom protraction, as, ifttU, ^m, im, nfttifv, vfuu^t wptimt
(§ 47. K.> ; (e) from peculiar contraction, as, ifttZ, nv, iv t§ 45. 3) ;
{d) from the use of different affixes, as Gen. Ep. -^t* {ifci^%f, ri^y, ;^»,
$ 84), Dor. -0« (l/Atofj oontr. l^«vf, lutvf, ri*t, contr. r$ut, with t doubled
ri#£v, and, similarly formed, iovs) ; Dat. sing. Dor. -tp (i^;», rt?f, tiV, h, ;
(e) from the retention of primitive forms without the flexible ending, as *dfti,
i/itfiUj ifiit vffk/tttt r^i (compare the sing. I^i, ri, I, and see ^^ 83, 86:;
(/» from variation of root ; as. Dor. t- for r- (rw, «?, r«, ri, Lat. tu, ha,
tibi, te, § 70.. 2) ; JEol F- for the rough breathing {Fi^u, foT, ft • Lat «-:
nut, gibi, k) ; Dor. *S/a., JEoL and Ep. «^^, for i^*. {'A/^Ut »f*fiuf, &c) ;
Mo\. and Ep. i^^. for 'Cf/t- (Sft/ttf, &c.) ; T>or. >^- and ^, iEol. «^f>, for r^
(y^ip, ypij ^it, if^t, ««-^;. See Table, and 5. below.

5. We add a few references to authors for the dialectic and poetic forms
iytit* A. 76 (used by Horn, only before vowels), Ar. Ach. 748 -Meg. , Ar.
I>y8. 983 (Lac. , Theoc. 1. 14, iEsch. P^. 931, J^pym (==Jfy«yr Ck)r. 12,
i^ymr Ar. Ach. 898; if^U K. 124, Hdt. i. 126. l^i?* A. 174, i^tZ A. 88,
Hdt. vii. 158, fuu A. 37, Hdt. vu, 209, if^iftp A. 525, Eur. Or. 986. ifn^p
Sapph. 89; Ifiip Theoc. 2. 144, Ar. Av. 930; ifcUf Hdt. ii 6, •«^if Ar.
Lyj«. 168, &fAfcts <^. 432, Theoc. 5. 67; ^tfiu^p l\ 101, if^t'mp E. 258,
'£fcSp Theoc 2. 158, ^^tf^imp Ale. 77; Ufap A. 147, ^^r» or ^i^tr, X. 344,
Soph. <Ed. T. 39, 42, 103, Ar. Av. 386, *£fi7, Theoc. 5. 106, if^fu A. 384,
Theoc. 1. 102, &f^f,„ N. 379, Ale 86 (15), i^^.iriy Ale. 91 (78); ifsUt
e. 211, Hdt. i. .30. ^fidi T. .172, 'afjti Ar. Lv.«<. 95, 5^^ A. 59. Sapph.
93 (13). Theoc. 8. 25 ; .^» Cor. 16, pi\- A. 418, U. 99 (y^a?), m E. 219,

Digitized

by Google

CH. 5.] PERSONAL. 157

wTf X. 88 : Tu Ar. Lys. 1188, Sapph.!. 13, Twri E. 485, r»v Cor. 2; n» '

A. 396 Hdt. i. 8, etTt T. 137, ri5 T. 206, Hdt. i. 9, ^i^i* A. 180, Eur
Ale. 51, rtM 0. 37, 468, rtZf Theoc. 2. 126, nm Theoc. II. 25 ; tm A.
28, Hdt. i. 9, rtU J. 619 (not in 11.), Hdt. v. 60 (Inscr.), Ar. A v. 930, r/»
Theoc. 2. 11, Find. O. 10. 113 ; ri Theoc. 1. 6, «/ Theoc. 1. 56, Ar. Eq.
1225 ; u/iitt Hdt. vi. 11. ^ig Ar. Ach. 760, Sfifinf A. 274, Sapph. 95 (17),
Theoc 5. Ill ; ifiiatf H. 159, Hdt. iii. 50, ifittiuv A. 348, vfiftiuv Ale. 77 ;
vfiiv or ^^f». Soph. Ant. 308, Sfifuf A. 249, Theoc. I. 116, Sfifn Z. 77, S/tf/b
K. 551 ; ofiiietf /3. 75, Hdt. i. 53, ufii, Ar. Lys. 87, Sfifit Ih. 1076, Sfifct T.
412, Find. O. 8. 19, Theoc. 5. 145, Soph. Ant 846 ; ^(pZT A. 336, c(p^ A.
574 ; ^(pSTv A. 257, ^. 52 (here conadered Nora, by some), r^^y i. 62 : 7«

B. 239, t7» A. 400, UT^ Ap. Rh. 1. 1032, ij" T. 464, U Hdt. iii. 135, ?^«»
A. 1 14, iEsch. Sup. 66, Fi5i» Ale. 6 (71) ; l« N. 495, Vt (or 7») Hes Fr. 66^
F« Sapph. 2. 1 ; Fi Ale. 56 (84), « T. 171, ftsf A. 29, Hdt. L 9, m Find.
0. I. 40, Theoc. 1. 150,iEsch. From. 55 ; trifta Hdt. i.46 ; r^f«v 2. 311, Hdt.
i. 31, ir(ptia>* A. 535 ; g'(pn A. 73, .^sch. From. 252, as sing. Hom. H. 19. 19,
^ach. Pens. 759, tr^ B. 614, Hdt. l 1, r^' F. 300, ^^«» Soplu*. 83 (87), ^i»
Call. Di. 125, ii^(pt Sapph. 98 (40); g'(p$eif B. 96, r<pien Hdt. i. 4, (rpiTas n
213, e<p&s E. 567. r^i A. Ill, Tlieoc 15. 80, Soph. Ant. 44, y^t Theoc. 4. 3,
«r^i Aic. 92 (80); g-iptu A. 8, <r^« or <r^A>* F. 531 ; tr(pmf A. 338: i^t^;,
lfft»u(t if**vfi fAt^i*^ riosf rioy ieus, &c., dted by Apollonius in his treatise on
die Gceek Fronoun.

§ 1 43« 6. History, a. The distinction' of /)er«on, like those of ca«« and
number (^ 83), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely separating the
person speaking from all other persons, whether spoken to or spoken of. We
find traces of this early use not only in the roots common to the 2d and 3d
persons, but also in the common forms of th^e persons in the dual of verbs.
The most natural way of designating one*s self by gesture is to bring home
the hand ; of designating another, to stretch it out towards him. The voice
here follows the analogy of the hand. To denote ourselves, we naturally
keep the voice at home as much as is consistent with enunciation ; while we
denote another by a forcible emission of it, a pointing, as it were, of the
voice towards the person. The former of these is accomplished by closing the
lips and mmrmuring within, that is, by uttering m, which hence became the
great root of the 1st personal pronouns. The latter is accomplished by sending
the vmoe out forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place
of the aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a
linpial, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as roots of the 2d
and 3d personal pronouns. In the -progress of language, these two persons
were separated, and their forms became, for the most part, distinct, although
tbur^ed, in general, upon common roots.

^ The M- of the 1st Fers. passed in the old Flur. (which afterwards be-
came the Dual. § 85) into the kindred y- (compare Lat. nos) ; and in the
Sing., when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial A (compare the i£ol.
Ar^it «r^i), which passed by precession into i. In the new Flur., the idea of
plurality was conveyed by doubling the f* {afitfit-t in the £p. and ^EoL a/4fttt,
dftfcimPf tif*/nv, afcfuft, AfAfAi) \ or more commonly by doubling the 4( to n
(§ 29), pronounced with the rough breathing (V-* i^^ A/uirf, &c.), or, in the
Dor., to « (*«/(*-• in *itft.Uy *iltAZfy *£fA4f, *afii). From this the new Flur. of
the 2d Fers. appears to have been formed, by changing, for propriety of ex-
pression, «, the deepest of the vowels, into v, the most protrusive (^^/a-, in the
£p. and ^Eol. Sft/Atiy lffi/titit*t SfA/AtVy Sfitfitt • and '9/u-, in u/u.t7s, &c) With the
14

Digitized

by Google

168 PRONOUNS. — SUBSTANTIVE. f BOOK II.

ttxoeplon of this imitative plural, the pltir. and Pa. of the 2d and 3d per-
sons have the same root, in jRrhich plorality is expressed by joining two of the
signs of these persons (r^. a r -|- F)- bi the separation of the two persons,
the dgn r- be»une appropriated to the 2d Pers. (but in the Dor., r-, aa in the
Lat, and also in the verfo-endings -n, ^«», 'tis) ; and the rough breathing if
the 3d Pers. (in an early state of the language, this was F-; in Lat. it be-
came t- ; while in the iurtide we find both the rou^ breathing and r-i and in
verb*ending8 of the 3d Pers. both r, and more frequently r).

7. In the Noou img., the subjective fbrae appears to have baso expresnd
by peculiar modes of strengthening ; in the 1st Pen. by a doable prefix to
the /M, thus, i-y-i-ft (the y being inserted simply to prevent hiatus), or, as ^
cannot end a wordj Xyiv^ which passed, by a change of * to its corresponding
vowel (§ 60) and contraction, into (lytt) tym (compare the Sanscrit oAam,
the Zend azem, the Boeotic mt, the Latin «^, and the verb-ending ci the
Ist Pers. m in Greek, and o in Lat.) ; ui the 2d Pers. by aifixing F, which
with the praoeduig % passed mto tf in die oonunon Greek (cfl § 117. N.), but
in the Besot, mto •» (compare the Lat Mi, § 12. /3) ; in the 3d Pers. by
affixing A (perhi^M chosen rather than F, on account of the initial F), before
which precession took place (§ 1 18), so that the Ibrm became FiA, and from
this, 7A or 7A, and, by dropping the A, 7 or 7 (this obsolete form is cited by
4-pollonins ; compare the Lat. is, eo, id). With this Nom. there appears to
have been associated an Ace ?» or 7», of which ^i» and m are strengthened
fM*ma.

§ 144* B. Rbflbxivb, ifiavTov, aeenttovy iavjov. These
pronouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first
also the neuter. They are formed by unitmg the personal pro-
nouns with avro^.

In the Flur. o# the Ist and 2d Peraons, and sometimes of the 3d, the two
elemaits remain distinct ; if*£v «vr«y, ifUiv atorUft ^^9 myrHv 99 ImttrSt* In
Homer, they are distinct in both Sing, and Plur.; thus, tft* «vrM ▲. 271,
lyMiStv 9%^im9ofui$ »vrm ^. 78, avvah fut I. 244. In the common compound
tbrms, the personal pronouns omit the flexible ending, in uniting w^ ««r«f,
and in the 1st Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place :
ifM-mtfTM i/MiiM'«C, 0t.mttrw fmmrtSf l-«iMr»S miv'fu. In the New loaic, en
the other hand, the flexible ending of ttie Gen. is retained, and is contracted
with «0 into m» (§ 45. 6) : ifiut-ubrM Ifurnvrau* The other cases imitate the
form of the Gen. : \f»u*w^i -•». The Doric forms «vr«vr4w, «(Kmvr«*, «v-
r«vr«y, aSreturat &C., wliich ocour chiefly in Pythagorean fragments, are
formed by doubling mhrit, ApoUonios dtes the eomie N(Hn. ifut»ri$ frmn
the Metoed of the oomedum PUto.

§ 1 4ff • C. Reciprocal, HXXr^Xvtv. This pronoun is formed
b^ doubling &lXog^ other. Prom its nature, it wants the N ^m.
and the Sing., and is not common in the Dual.

Note. For Ikxi)^* (Theoc. 1 4. 46), see § 44. 1 . For kKK^XiT* (E. %h\
see § 99. I.

$ 14A. D. Indefinite, I hlva. This pronoun may be
termed, with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite. It
is used to designate a particular person or thing, which the

Digitized

by Google

CH. 5.J ADJECTJYB. 15^

spe^Qr ^itbeic caanpt, or does not care to name ; or, io the
language of Iiktthi8e,it ^^ indefinitely expresses a definite person
&r ming " ; as, Tov Ssiva yiyveiaxsig ; Do you know Mr, So and
1^0 ? Ap. Thesm. 620. *0 dstvfi jov dityog tov dslva (iaayyiXkti^
A. B.y the son of C, D., impeacfies E, F., Dem. 167. 24. In
the Sing, this proqpun is of the three genders ; in the Plur. it
is masc. only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indeclina-
ble ; as, xov dfiva Ar. Thesm. 622.

KoTB. The aitide is an ttsential part of this pronoim ; and It were better
written as a single word, ^iSV«. It appears to be sfmpty an extoision of the
4emonstrative ^, by addiqg «i»- or -iv«, which gives to it ao . indefinite force
(cf. § 152. I), makLog it a demonstrative ifid^nUe. When -iv-was appended,
it received a double dedension ; when -/»«, it had (noty the dedenncm of the
article. It belcogs properly te the oollaqnial Attie, a^d fint appeara ia Arift*

II. Adjective.

§ 147* All the pronouns which are declined m ? 24 may
be traced back to a common foundation in an old definitivb,
which had two roots, the rough breathing and ?- (cf. § 143.
or, /?), and which performed the offices both of an article and
of a derrCbnstrativej personaly and relative pronoun,

REBfABKS. a. To this definitive tlM Gr«8to g»y« tbt nvm ^^(^h J4»i^
from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or Uiing spoken
•f as one which had been spoken of before, ar which was about to be tp<^en
9f (\trt)ier, OP which wdf faipili«r to the aiini^. The Greek name i^^f** b«*
can»^ in Uitin, ariieufm (amaU joints from artus, jomt^ a word of the same
origin with «e^^^M*), firom which has come the English name^ articie. This
definitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as ^e definite artide,
naturally pivcedes the name of the person or thing spoken of; but when
^^sed as a relative, usually foUowg it ; as, f Jrfr i^nt i &ffi( 8* iT^if, thȤ is
THK man wuoit you saw ; ri ^ihw S £f^iTy tub rose which bloonu. Hence, ii^
the fprmer qse, it was termed the fnvposit^j and, in the latter, the posipositivt
article. When prepositive it was so closely connected with the foDowing
word that its aspirated forms became proclitic

jS. In the progress of the langua^ the forms of this old DBFmrnvE be-
came specially appropriated, and o^er pronoims arose fron) it by derivation
and eompoflition (see the following sections). The forms rit and rq of the
Nem. ong. beeame obsolete.

A. Definite.

^148. 1. Article, o, {, to. The pr^nrntive artieU^ or.
as it is commonly termed, simply the article^ unites the pro*
clitic aspirated forms of the old definitive, q, r,, oi^ ai^ w\\h the
T- forms of th^ neuter^ the oblique case^-i a^d the dual,

N019. Tl|e |<^ms r*/ and rW are also qs^ ffitT tfa« sake of metre, tophooyi

Digitized

by Google

160 ADJECTIVE PKONOUNS. [bOOK H

•r empAods, in the Ionic (chiefly the Epic), and in the Doric ; e. g. «*«/ A
447, Hdt. viii. 66. 1 (where it is strongly demonstrative), Theoc 1. 80 ; t»'
r. 5, Theoc 1.9. So, even in the Attic poets, r§i ti Mach, Pen. 423, Soph.
Aj. 1404 ; rai Ar. Eq. 1329. For the other dialectic forms, see §§ 95, 96
99. For the forms « and ri, see § 97.

2. Relative, o?, ^, S. The postposUive^artide^ or as it is
now commonly termed, the relative pronoun^ has the orthotoM
aspirated forms of the old definitive.

Note. For the dd Mase. I (11. 835, /3. 262), as irell as for the Neat t,
■ee § 97. For the redupUcated Xw (B. 325) and Ut (n. 208), see § 48.

§ 149, 3. Iterative, a vTo?, -iJ,-o(§ 97). This pronoun
appears to be compounded of the particle av, again^ hacky and
the old definitwe tog (§ 147. /?). It is hence a pronoun of
RETURN (or, as it may be termed, an iterative pronoun), mark*
ing the return of the mind to the same person or thing.

Notes. «, The New Ionic often inserts t in avrit and its compounds,
before a long vowel in the affix (see § 48. 1, f 24). This belongs especially
to Hippocrates and his imitator Aretsus ; in Hdt., it is chiefly confined to
the forms in -^ and -4*$ of «vr«f and ^Jr^f • e. g. auri^j aMttv and avrih^
Hdt. L 133, »vritf r^urimv lb. iL 3. For the other dialectic forms of •vritf
see §§ 95, 96, 99.

/3. The article and mvrit are often united by craas (§ 39);* as, tturit,
rmuTov (§ 97. N.) or rauri (Ion. tmvt§ Hdt. i. 53, § 45. 6), rmir^Z^ rmyrm,

^ ItSO. 4. Demonstrative. The primary demonstratives
are ovro^, this, compounded of the article and aitog • o^«, this^
compounded of the article and de (an inseparable particle mark-
ing direction towards)^ and declined precisely like the article,
with this addition ; and inuvogy thaty derived from IxeT, there.

Note. Of 1x17*0; (which, with &XXh, other, is declined like alrott § 97)
there are also the forms, Ion. xiTvti, which is also common in the Att. poets,
Mo\. nmas Sapph. 2. 1, Dor. riiMf Theoc. 1. 4. In the Epic forms of tl%y
rtiJivhrt (p, 93, roTg'hff'g't K. 462, rMta-rtv ^.47, there is a species of double
declension.

Remarks. «. The definitives toiogy suchy Toaogy so greaty
ttiXUogy so oldy and ivwogy so litthy are strengthened, in the
same manner as the article, by composition with aviog and 5« •
thus, loiovtog and totovde, just suchy Toaovrog and xoaoodty just
so muchy tTiXixovtog and TtjXixoadty rvvyovtog. These compound
pronouns are commonly employed, instead of the simple, even
when there is no special emphasis.

/?. In declining the compounds of aitog with the article and
adjective pronouns, the following rule is observed : — If the ter*
mination of the article or adjective pronoun has an O voweL ii

Digitized

by Google

PR. 5.] DEFINITE* - INDEFINITE. 16l

U7tites toith the Jirii byllahle of avrog^ to form ov\ biUis other*
wise absorbed.

. Thus, (« nlrii) «Jr«f , (Jk aurn) mtrtif (rj avrS) vwr§ • G. (reS auroS) rou
wv, {r^f etvrnf) rttvmt -* PL (ai avr»i) *tjr4i, («< murai) «?r«M, (r« avr«)
r«trr« • G> (r*l» «vr«i>) T0vrtf* (^ 24) • (r«#«« «vr»f ) ra^tSrHf (vMti »urn)
Ttwaum, (tm**? «vr«) fMwr* and rtrMrrw (§ 97. N.)

y. To demoustratives, for the sake of stronger express! jn,
an $ is affixed, which is always long and ac^te, and before
ivhich a short vowel is dropped, and a Jong vowel or diphthong
regarded as short ; thus, ovtoai^ avi^, toi/t/, thii here ; PL oif~
ToH, avitul^ tavti * ixtivoal^ that there ; odlj toaovroal.

NoTB. This tparagogie is Attie, and belongs espedaUy to the style of con-
versation and popular discourse. It was also affixed to adverbs ; as, ^vrMfi,
i^i, fttfi, Ivrttv^i, ifrtv^pL So, in comic language, even with an inserted
partide, vm^m Ar. Av. 448, UytruvBi Id. Thesm. 646, U^cvrtvl^vi Ath.
269 £

§ 1 15 1 • 5. Possessive. The possessive pronouns are de-
rived from the personal, and are regularly declined as adjec
tives of three terminations.

We add references for the less common possessives : v«/rt(«r, O. 39 ; ffanU
rt^§ti A. 216, in Ap. Rh. =» r^fri;*;, 1. 643, 2. 544 ; ?;, P. 333, Hdt. L
205, Soph. Ai. 442; &ftit or Afiit, Z. 414, Find. O. 10. 10, Theoc 5. 108,
Madi. Cho. 428 (used particularly in the Att poets as sing.) ; kfMin^H,
Theoc 2. 31; «^c^0«, Ale 103; iftfAirtf^tt Ale. 104 ; riofy y. 122, iEsch.
Prom. 162 ; hfMt, «. 375, Find. P. 7. 15 ; l«$, «. 409, Theoc. 17. 50 ; r^«j,
A. 534 ; F«f (=» ?; ), tftkiAt^ cited by Apollonius. For the use of the posses-
fives, particularly 7f, U; , 9^'%t\^h% f<pis, and ^^mtrt^, see Syntax.

B. Indefinite.

^ 1 ff 3* 1. The siMPLB indefinite is t^, which has two
roots, Tiv- dnd t«-, both appearing to be formed from t-, the
root of the article, by adding -iv- and -«- to give an indefinite
force (cf. § 146. N.).

Remarks. «. The later root rt9- is declined throughout after Dec. III., but
the earlier rt- only in the Gen. and Dat., after Dec. II. (except in the Gen.
Sing., which imitates the personal pnmouns) with contraction ; thus, rig, t^
Tlvtiy rtfiy &c. (§ 105. ^) ; G. ri« rav, D. riy rf, and, in the compound^
PI. G. IrM*» trmty D. Mart irtfi (also Ion. rliwr, ritt^t, § 153. y). For the
accentuation, and the forms eirTm, Jif^My see 2. below, and § 153. «.

/3.«The short s of rtf, rUiy and the omission of v in rr, suggest an inter-
mediate root «-, formed from «- by precession, and afterwards increased by
9 'cf. 5 119, and •;»«, k 123. y). To this intermediate root may be referred,
according to Dec II., the iEd. rif ; Sapph. 55 (34), riMrit Id. 109 (1 13).

2. The interkogattves in Greek are simply the vndefimUs
with a change of accept (see. Syntax).
14*

Digitized

by Google

163 AOJEOTivs PRoaiovNs [book It

Thvi, the forms of tha indefinite rig (exoipt tlu paeuluu* irr^ which it
rarely used except in connection with an adjective, and which is never nsed
interrogatively) are encUtic ; while those of the interrogative ris are orthottmef
and never taka th« grave accent. In lexioons and grammars, for the sake of
distinction, the forms of the indefinite, wit and ri, are written with the gram
maoBDi, or withtmi an accent.

§ 1 tS3. 3. The composition of og with tig forms the relative
iNDEFiifiTB oorig^ whoever^ of which hoth parts are declined in
those fonns whi#h have the root jip^i, but the latter only in those
which have the root Tt- ; thus, oSupogy but hto 3tow. The
longer forms of the Gen. and Dat are very rare ill the Attic
poets.

Notes. «. The forms tUrm^ Att irr« (§ 70. 1), appear to be shorter
forms of 4rtin»y and are said by Euatathius to be compounded of ^ and the
Doric ra ■■ Tiv«. In certain oonneotions, they passed into simple indafinitst,
and then, by a softer pronunciation, became Mrtf-o, Arrm^

fi. The forms which occur in Homer of rUj rU, and on;, which is the same
with a^rit, except that it has no double declension, are exhibited in f 24.
Homer has also the r^^ar forms of t^rts* The doubling of r in some of
the forms is simply poetic, for the sake <ii the metre.

y. References are added for many of the forms of rh, rUt and 9^rt% : tnt
r. 279 (arr« 167), ? rri 0. 408 J r#w Cyr. viii. 6. 7, rw i Soph. (Ed T.
1435, t'Ttv i. 9. 21, 4-f» «-. 305, Hdt. i. 58,- r(« ; B. 225. irrt» «. 124, n»
(§ 45. 3) B. 388, Hdt. i. 19, riv 2. 192, Hdt. v. 106, tnv ^, 422, Hdt. L
119, irrtv e. 121 ; r^ A. 299, i. 9. 7, f^ i Soph. EL 679, 7t^ ii. 6. 28,
ny Hdt ii 48, r<y, Hdt i. 117. trt», fi. 114, Hdt i. 95, irZ M. 428;
h-tta a. 204 (Unva B. 188) ; tUr^k arrx Cyr. ii. 2. 13, imT* 2r#« t,
218, Irra Rep. Ath. 2. 17, ^^em A. 554, Hdt 1. 138, Utfet X, 450 (&rs*»
A. 289); rt«rf Hdt v. 57, rifw , H. 387, r&» ; ». 200, •Vur» ». 39, Hdt
viii. 65, 7r*09 vii. 6. 24 : rm<rt Hdt ix. 87, irU*ft9 O. 491, M«tn Hdt IL
82, 7r«ir< Soph. Ant 1335 ; Snfaf 0. 492 (ati^nfat A. 240).

^ 1 «S4» Rkmarks. 1. Adjective Pronouns which have not been
specially mentioned are regularly declined as adjectives of three terminations
($ 1 33. 4). For the GorreUtive Pronouns, and for the Particles which art
affixed to pronouns, see t ^^) §§ ^^7, 328.

2. Special care is required hi distinguishing the forms of i, ht fJ, rtt, and
rif . F(Mrms which have the same letters may be often distinguished by the
accentuation ; as, «/, J, «?. Spedal care is also required in distinguishing the
forms of »STtfj those of avrit, the combined forms of i »vr§$t the tame, and
tiie contracted forms of U»r«».

Digitized

by Google

08. &J C0IIPABI80N* 169

CHAPTER VI.

COMPARISON.

^ ISS. Adjectives and Adverbs have, in
Greek, three degrees of comparison, the Positive,
the Comparative, and the Superlative.

I. Comparison of Adjectives.

In adjectives, the comparative is usually formed
in *T<^o$, -d, *ov, and the superlative in -raro^, -17,
•ov ; but sometimes the comparative^'^ formed in
'imv, 'Jov, Gen. -iovosj and the superlative^ in -unosj

A. Comparison in -ttgog^ -ruTog,

^ 1S6. In receiving the affixes -jsgos and
-TttTog, the endings of the theme are changed as
follows ;

1.) -og, preceded by a long syllable, becomes
-o- ; by a short syllable, -o- ; as,

aofpig^ wisest aofpwttifog^ ooiptitaTog.

RiEMARKg. «. This change to w». takes place to avoid the succession of
too many short syllables. Three successive short syUablas are inadmissible in
hexameter verse. We also find, for the sake of the metre, x«xtf|uv»ri^«f
V. 376, Xd(^rtiT§s ^ 350, iiZogtirt^^p P. 446, iTt^v^mrmr^t i. 105. In req)ec(
to »t*i$i emptyj and mvis, narrow, authorities vaiy.

fi. A mute and liquid preceding -§f have commonly the same efitBct as a
long (syllable ; as, rf 4^0^, pehemmtj f^oi^in^t, f^9i^ira*ot. Tet here, also,
the Attic poets sometimes employ .«. for the sake of the metre ; as, ^v^'v*.
t/a^rt^ Eur. Ph. 1348, fim^iMrtrfiutrArMt lb. 1345, tvrt»9^rmn Id. B.9C 620.

/. In a few words, -og is dropped ; and, in a few, it becomes
-««-, -«a-, or -«a- ; as,

naXaiog^ ancient^ naXaluQog^ naXaltaiog.

iplkog^ dear^ (plXTSQog^ qflXtarog,

friendly^ (ptXairtgoc, q>tXalTatog>

ravj^og^ quiei^ tjavxnljfQog, ^avxaitarog,

f^^Wfiivog^ strong, i^fotfifviartQog^ ^^^wjucWototo^.

JUrlo^*, talkative, XaXhrf gog^ XaXlatatog.

Digitized

by Google

1M couPARison. [Boot a.

NonsB. (a.) Yet abo r«X«i«ne«^, Pind. N. 6. 91, ^/Xi^n^^*, Mem. fit 11
18, ^X4»f9 (§ 159) «. 268, (piXt^ras, Soph. Aj. 842, i»ri;;t;«Ti^«f, Id. Ant. 1089

(b.) The change of -«f into -ir- belongs particubuiy to contracts in -Mf
These contracts, and those in ••«;, are likewise contracted in the Comp. and
Sup. ; as,

kirXitf, simpk, mirXoi^n^tf iwX»irr»r§f,

But i9rX»^rt^t, less ft for MO, Th. yu. eO, »vx^Htr$^H, (Ee. 10. 1 1, ti
w99t0T*z0$, £q. 1. 10, &C.

(c) Other examples bf '§$ dropped in comparison are yi^aiit, cld^ r;^«-
XtM9s, at leisure; of -«; changed to -ms', tS^tas, clear, fitoff private^ 7r«f, eqwxl
flints, middle (see ^. below), S^B^^ttfj at dawn, i^i»sy late, ir^7»s, earfy; of •«#
changed to -<r-, ett^otts, august, &K^£vot, unmixed, &fffuv«f, glad, ti(p^n«s.
b&uniiful, lw$irii§t, Ifpd, ttH^M^ts, pure, niu/tff sweet (poet.) ; of -h chai^ged to
wr-, fi*9tptiy0t, eating alone, r4^»^tiys, dainty, vrrmxitt poor,

\ Wt<ro§ and vltff have old saperlatiyes of limited and chiefly poetic use in
.««-«< ; thus, fiUarf, midmost. At, Vesp. 1502, £p. fA%wrm,r§t, 0. 223, tiart^
last, lowest, A. 712, Soph. Ant. 627, £p. uiarof, B. 824. Compare U^'^rss^
(tr^Mcrtff) 9r^r«s, and Straref (§ 161. 2).

^157. 2.) '€is and -ijs become -sa-; as,

Xtxghig^ agreeable^ XaQuaugog^ XotQUaxatoq.

aaqiT^q^ evident^ aaipioTSQog^ ' aa<piatatog.

neVij^, poor J n(viaxtQoq<i nsviataxog,

T^KMARK. In a<^ectives of the first declension, and in yptv$fif, -nt beoomes
-<r- ; as, vXtofixrvii -«v, covetous, «'Xf 0yi«cirr«7«f * ypttt^g, -i«f , folse, yptm
VirraTH* Except, for the sake of euphony, Lfi^i^rnf, -w, utsoknt^ v^t^rirt
ft Y, 8. 3, ttfi^irrivmrt, lb. 22 (referred by some to Sfi^t^t)'

3.) -vff becomes -v- ; as,

TtQta^vg^ oldy ng$a/ivT$Qos^ ngtafivrmog*

For the sake of the metre, l^vfrarm 2. 508.

^158, 4.) In adjectives of other endings,
'Tsgos and 'taxos are either added to the simple
root, or to the root increased by -fcr-, -icr-^ or -«- ;
as,

tdXag, -avog^ toretched^ xaXavxtQog^ TaXartarog.

oui<pQ(av^ -^vog^ discreet^ an<fQoviax8Qog^ awpQovi(naTog»
OQna^, -ayog^ rapacious^ agnqyUnatog.

inlxngig^ -itog^ pleasing, inixngniaTtgoe^ imxagiTtotaiog,
KoTRs. A. Other examples are fUnm^, blessed, prnxd^rmrH X, 483 ; ^»Sx««

Digitized

by Google

C|l. 6.] APJECTIVES. 165

-Mfft blttekf fAiXatnfa:^ A. 277, and MiX«iwn^«f, Strab. ; l^tiktl, -<»«;, e&fer-
1^, ^^Aixim^tf • /3X«(, -£)tisy ttupid, ^X«c»ivTi^«r, ^tat*;, Mera. iii. J 3. 4,
iv. 2. 40, for which some read fix^xirt^oij and fiXa»irar9s or /SXaxiVrttr^f
From ix'^V^y ^^^^ogreeaJblej we find the shorter form a;^a(/<rri^a;, v. 392.

fi. The insertion of -tf- is particularly made in adjectives in -«r. Tet some
of these employ shorter forms ; as, «-ffra>y, ripe^ ^n^ettrt^of i£seh. Fr. 244 ;
«ri*>f, fat, ^lirtftt, Hom. Ap. 48, neretr^s, I. 577 (as from the rare vUf,
Orph. Aig. 608) ; Wtkn^fut*, forgetful, Iv'tknrftor^rof, Ar. Nub. 790 (l^nkti-
r/Mrim^tff, ApoL 6).

B. Comparison in -imv^ -latog.

• ^ 1S9. A few adjectives are compared by
changing -V5, -ag, -05, and even -po5, final, into -/©v
and -ioxos. In some of these, -imv with the pre-
ceding consonant passes into -acciiv (-ttov, ^ 70. 1)
or -fov. Thus,

^dt;^, pleasant^

{^ittiy,

ijdiaTog,

xaxvf, swiftf

&daamv^ ^artny^

taxioiog.

noXvQj muchj

nXBlwv^ nXimr^

nXnoTog*

fityag, great^

ftsl((OP,

fiBpatog,

xaXog^ beautiful^

HttXXt(»Vj

xaXXiOTog.

alaxQogy base^

aiaxtfoy^

ataxioTog,

ix^Qogj hostile,

^X^ioiVy

tX^tatog.

Remarks. «. For the declension of eompaiatiyes in -^», see f 17 and
§ 107. The I in the affix -/«» is long ui the Attic poets, but short in the
Epic, and variable in the later.

/3. The forms in -rr«» and -^«y observe tins distinction : ^^mv can arise
only when the consonant preceding -ut* is », ;^, r, ^, or ^ ; ^«v, only when
this consonant is y. The vowel preceding becomes long by nature, perhaps
from a transposition, and absorption or contraction, of the i. Thus, T&^^f
(originally ^A^vfj § 62), d>a;^/«» ^«rr»y, Neat BZcrw (the regular rA;^/*rv is
also common in late prose) ; 1>m%vs (£^ic ; lx«;^i/« Hom. Ap. 197), naoff,
Ixiafmt • wix^h <^*^> «'a;^i«v (Arat.) ^mtt9, t* ^30 ; from r. fix-, Comp.
nrgMv, inferior (Ion. Sfrrw*, Hdt. v. 86) ; yXSitvij tweety yXoximf (2. 109)
yxtr9m*j Xenophan. ; ^x^ity long, lAMomf poet., d>. 203, ^sch. Ag. 598 ;
x^&rvt (Epic, n. 181), $trtmgy xptirvatv (Ion. x^irrwy, Hdt. i. 66) ; fif&^vt,
•low, /3«a^/«« (Hes. C^. 526) fisMtuv K. 2^26 ; fii^vt, deep, fiaS^wt (Tyrt
3. 6) ^ar^tn, Epicharm. ; i»\yxt (the only adj. in -xt compared in ./«v, -i^ret),
fttyitn fttiZtf (Ion. ^iC«v Hdt. i. 202) ; iXiyot, ixflm. Call. Jov. 72 (vv-*-
Xi^tns 2. 519). It will be observed that many of these comparatives are
*ii«rely poetic Compare the formation of verbs in -^fM and .^«.

y. T^e root of w0Xui is «-»Xf-, by syncope rXi-. From this short root are
formed the comparative and superlative. Tlximt is a yet shorter fonn for
irXiittf. The longer form is more common in the contracted cases and phml,
but the nent. wXUv is more nsed than 9rXM9, especially as an adverb. The
neat, rxt?** sometimes becomes rXi?*, but only in soch phrases as wXtTv 4 ^•
ft0$, more <ftiw tm thomeamL The Ionic oontncta .i«- into -iv- (§ 45. 8) ; aa,

Digitized

by Google

166 coMFABnoif. [book fir

«M0», «r>4ir»«f, #Xf»vir/fte. Hdt ii. 19, L 97, 199, ftc The Ep. trXtu
A. 895, and rkUt B. 129, an comparative in seoae, thongli positive in form

). In the Comp. and Sap. of MiXif , X ia- donbled, as in the noon wi »^»XXh
'Utt btauty. In the directives in -(•# wbick are compared in ./«» and -ivrtt,
the Comp. and Snp. i^pear to have come eilher fixm a simpler form of the
ppeitiive, or from a oorrespondii^ nomi. See § 161. B.

I. Most ac^actives whidi are compared as above have also fbrms in -n^
and .r«T«f ; thus, fif»i«ff alow, fi^Mrt^ost ^^atUtv^ and fi^^tn, ^^t^Urart^
^^dhfTH, and by poetic metath.(§ 71), ^d^hfros, T. 310 ; fiMx^it, long, fi»»
tt^ivt^sf and /M»rr«», f»M»^iTmrH and (if beocnning by precession n, as in tlie
nomi ri ftmtui, -Uf, lengik) mut^rat, Cyr. iv. 5. 28, Dor. fuixt^r^s. Soph
CEd. T. 1301. Other axamplfls of double formation are ttl^x^it, Ix^fit, »»•
ii«t (poet), remwnedf Mxrf*;, pUiaNe, Bt^vt, ^ttx^u «*«<, y\»i2it ^^X^
^(trfiuf, r»x^» •'»^t «»^ *»»«s (§ 160), ^ixtf (§ 156. a), Ac

C. I«1lSGTILA]l CoiCPABISOIf.

§ 100* Some adjectives in the comparatiTe and superb-
tiye degrees are formed from positives which aj^ not in nse«
from words which are themselves comparative or superlatives.
or from other parts of speech. Some of these are usually re
ferred to positives in use, which have a similar signification
and some of which are also regularly compared ; thus,

iym&oqy good, cifislvwp^ S(^ajog.

ToeL IftmirtfH Mfann. 11. 9; J^un iBsch. Ag. 81, Jk^uirt^0s, Theog-
548 ; fiikn^H, Mack. Th. 837, fiiXrmTH, Id. £am. 487 ; f l^rt^H, Id. F^
768, ft^rmTH H. 289, pifirrts. Soph. CEd. T. 11&8, and evtti PL Phfldr
238 d, fi^n^Tf, Find. Fr. 92; A^^>», ^ 169, X»4rt^0t, «. 376 (the pes.
form Xmm occurb Theoc 26. 32) ; nA^trrHt A. 266 (§ 71 ; so alvaya in
Hom.). Dor. fiifr»^»f, Theoc. 5. 76, md^^ Tim, ap. PL 102 d ; Ion
M^Urmf (§ 159. /S). Late ^ytt^mruTH, Diod. 16. 85.

aXystvogj painful, aXyiavy Sl/tmog.

ilysivoxi^ogf aXynritmTog^

xaxoVt had, Kotnttav, xaniarog,

fjaaoav, ^tt«»k

Poet Mm»«irtM, §, 343; x"i*^*f* 0. 513, XH***'* ^ ^^^ X'€"^*^*t'*
1 248 (for the Epic ;^S^«f«f , Scc^ which, though positive in fonn; are coo^
p -• tive hi sense, see § 136. 3) ; ^Merst or Hms^th T. 531 (Jltu^rm as an ad*
veA'Was eomnioB in Attic ptose ; jEBan uses Untfrt as an acy.), Ion. t^wm
(§ 159. «.

fiixg6e,8maU, ( funQ^tiifog fi^nffitans.

Digitized

by Google

Poe^ U«;^^» iXiim ($ rSf». $) ; ftttirt^ Ap. Bh. r. 968, ^MSrrvf , BIqB|
ft. 10 (jtik eonuBOii reMfing ftftm)*

Poet intit0(, X, 146, f^»s, Theog. 574, fntrt^, 2. fiftS^ /^{n^ PbkU a
8. 78, /4rrr«i, I. 5€6, /iiVr^r, Theec. lU 7, ftil^urt, r* 597. Hie oomrnon
fonndatioii of the fonns of this word «ppe«Di- Iwhare been /aTA- (eee $$ 118,
119).

^ 1 6 !• 1. Examples of double comparison.

t^ar§ty loMt^ extreme^ U;^ar4wn^«c (OtKn yit^ r«v WxdT§» U%«m#n{«» •&§
i» r<. AristL Metjq)tk. 10. 4), Ux«iri^«rif, H. 6r. U. S, 49.
w^rt^§s, before, comic tr^Tt^irt^t At. £q. 1164;

AA. *AXA.* fv r^^tcf {«», aXX' lyiM 91f«7i^«un^*
W(Sir§s, Jlnt, ^^iiri0rH$ firU of aJl, B. 228.
IXmxi^^tf least, ix»xt0Tirt^§f, lecf ifton the least, Ep. Ei^ies. 3. 8.

KoTB. See also examplee of a poetic doable formation of the Compi
(JiftutirtfHt Jt^9»irt^i, &c) in $ 160. For »«AAtf^i^»y Til. iv. lifl^ ia now

2. Examp^ of adjectiyes in the oomparatiye and saperla*
tive degrees, formed from other parts of speech.

fimetXtvt, Mng, fia^tXiin^Bt^ more kmglg, a ffrtater kmg, L 160, f^tXt&rm-
TH, ^ greatest king, L 69.

%Tm^§S, friend, Irm^imrBf, best friend, PL Qctg. 487 d.
sXirmff, t/uef, xXt^rifrarti most adroit (Ate/^ At. Phit 27.
»vmt^ dog, xmrt^tt, more dog-like, more impudent, 0. 483, »iW«Mvf, K. 603.
. nif^H, -iH, gidnf ntfiUn, mtme g0is^ T, 41» «l|)irr«, ^Eaeh. T^. 385.
siMu kmsflf, mwrinMf £pich..2 (1), mivirmmH (ijpwaimwttf Flaql^ "RfaHBP.
hr. 2\ Ms very self, Ar. Plat. 83.

iyx^ or iyx*** i»«oir, ky^irtfttt nearer^ Hdt. viL 175, AyxirnrtSt Sor.
PeL 2, oftener iyx^trvn Soph. (Ed. T. 919.

ivm, sip, k9ttr$^Ht ^fppe''* iftimrsi, t/pperwuet, Hdt &• 125*

ififuh ^melfyf i^t/iUn^tf, more qniet, Cyr. -viL 5. 63.

xXffr/«9, near (wXti^Ut poet and Ion.), ^'kn^tnin^ U 10. 5, rXartfiirafHf,
Tfi. 3. 29, also wXti^sUrt^H, 'iermrt*

w^ou^yov, of tmportanee, ^r^tv^intrt^, mors importani^ PL Goi^. 458 %

^omtof, f r;^«r«f , <JiiieaMw

fir^i, fe/bre, ^^irt^t, former, ^fSh-t (§ 156. I), /nt (Dor. r^Sr^r Theoo.
8. 5, § 45. 1).

M0, abope, i^i^n^, ss^eriur, Iwi^m^fiH «mI Amt^, jiyi— m (»igrf»iwffH|
Pind.N. 8. 73).

^«C)> ^«e«^ ln^* t^rmrt, lo^

RwfABiHi Wii ind an eocplanatieo ef th«e fbtmatioiis fai the nae of prtp-
oaitkmB aa advwha, and of adverbs as adjectives ; hi the ftct that many noons

Digitized

by Google

IGS COMPARISON. [book II.

are originally adjectiyes ; and in the stUl more important Ud, that in tha
earliest period of language there is as vet no grammatical distinction of the
different parts of speech. For other examples of comparatives and snperla-
tives which appear to be formed from nomis, see, in § 160, aXylatf, -i^th
(fhmi &Xyt^ .t«f, poin)t and aai^Tt (like a^trfi, from "A^ns or a common
root, and signifying originalfy best in war\ and also § 159. 2, t. Add the
poetic M^i^0f, L 642, ^lyimf, -irv$, A. 325, £. 873, ftuxtTty Ap. Rh. 4.
170, fAux^irart ^. 146, ivrxirt^tf, -Tttrtf, B. 707, Hes. Th. 137, &c. ; and,
from adverbs, MrWi^«f, -rarcff 0. 342, vrofain^tf, -Taraf, "i^. 459, Ap. Rh.
2. 29, vypiri(»f, Theoc. 8. 46, vi/'uvf. Find. Fr. 232, S'4ft^T»ff JEech. Pr.
720, &c

11. Comparison of Adverbs.

^ 163. I. Adverbs derived from adjectives are
commonly compared by taking the neuter singular
comparative, and the neuter plural superlative of
these adjectives ; as,

aoq)mg (from aog>6s^ ^ 156), aoqtwtnqov^ aoqwiata^
wisely^ more wisely^ most wiset

aaq>£g (from aaqujg^ § 15*7)9 aaipiattgov^ aoKpiaiara,
clearly^ * more clearly^ mostlclearly.

taxiatg (from ta^vg^ § 159), &aaaov^ ^atrov^ taxvQta,

aiaxQwg (from aiaxQogy ^ 159), aXax^ov^ oXaxiista*

Note. The adverbial termination -mt is sometimes given to the Comp.
as, xaktTttri^s, more teverefy, l^^B^tiMtf, m a more hottUe manner. So Sap^
l^Tofutrnretti nioit concieely. Soph. CEd. C. 1579.

§ 163. II. Adverbs not derived from adjec-
tives are, for the most part, compared in -riga and
-TaiG^; as,

kxdg^ afar^ Ixaore^oi, ixaataTU,

RsiiABKS. «. The following aie compared after the analogy of adverba
derived from ai^ectives : *

So T(»ttf early, and i^pi, late, employ forms of the adjectives w^t^t i^tn
(§ 156. c), derived from them. In &^^M^ 0. 572, we have a poetic dooUa
form (§ 161. N.).

fi. Some advertM vaiy in their oompariaon; as,

lyyvg, near, lyyvri^, lyyvrdrm*

Digitized

by Google

CH. 7. J CONJUGATION. 16d

CHAPTER VII.

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OP CONJUGATION.

^ 164. Verbs are conjugated, in Greek, to
mark five distinctions, Voice, Tense, Mode, Num-
ber, and Person. Of these distinctions, the first
shows how the action of a verb is related to its
subject ; the second, how it is related to time ; and
the third, how it is related to the mind of the
speaker^ or to some other action. The two remain-
ing distinctions merely show the number and person
of the subject.

Greek verbs are conjugated both by Pbefixbs and by Affixes. For the
prefixes, see Ch. VIII. ; for the affixes, see ^^28-31, and Ch. IX.; for
the modifications which the root itself receives, see Ch. X.

A. Voice.

^163. The Greek has three voices, the Ac
tive, the Middle, and the Passive.

The Active represents the subject of the verb as the doer
of the action, or its agent ; as, lot a nva^ I wash some one.

The Passive represents the subject of the verb as the re^
ceiver of the action, or its object ; as, Xovfiai vno uvog^ I am
washed by some one.

The Middle is intermediate in sense between the Active and
ihe Passive, and commonly represents the subject of the verb
as, either more or less directly, both the, agent and the oJ-
ject of the action ; as, iXovaii/irjv^ I washed myself, I bathed.

§ 166. Remarks. 1. The middle and passive voices
have a common form, except in the Future and Aorist. In
Etymology, this form is usually spoken of as passive. And
even in the Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense between
the two voices is not always preserved.

2. The reflexive sense of the middle voice often becomes so

indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the active in its

lise. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the

middle voice lakes the place of the active. This is particu*

15

Digitized

by Google

170 CONJUGATION. — TENSE. [ BOOK II.

larly frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme
(§ J70. «), the verb is termed deponent (deponens, laying aside
sc. the peculiar signification of the middle form). £. g.

(a.) Verbs, in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the tnid^
dU form : §ix$vm, to hear, a»ov9fuu • fi»iw, to go, finrfuu • ytyttig^tut, to
know, yt^foftat • ttft,t, to be, U$/Aeu • fiatfavm, to learn, fiainffMU,

(fi.') Deponent Verbs: atMtafuu, to perceive, yiytiftMt, to hecom^ ^xH"^^
Is recave, iytaftai, to be able, t(ia/teu, to rejoice.

NoTB. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middle, or deponent paedoe^
•ooording as its Aorist has the middle or the passive fbnn.

B. Tense.
^167. The Greek has six tenses; the Pres-
ent, the Imperfect, the Future, the Aorist, the
Perfect, and the Pluperfect.

1. The Present represents an action as doing at the present
time ; as, /Qatpw^ I am writing, I write,

2. The Imperfect represents an action as doing at some
past time ; as, iyQaq>ov, I was writing.

3. The Future represents an action as one that will he done
at some future, time ; as, y^dtpa, I shall write.

4. The Aorist (ao^toro;, indefinite) represents an action
simply as done ; as, t/Qatpa, I torote, I home written, I had
written.

5. The Perfect represents an action as complete at the pres*
enl time ; as, yiyf&(pa, I hone written.

6. The Pluperect represents an action as complete at somA
past time ; as, iy8yQdg>6iVy I had written.

% 1 6S. Tenses may be classified in two ways ; I. with
rospect to the time which is spoken of; II. with respect to the
relation which the action bears to this time.

I. The time which is spoken of is either, 1. present, 2. fin'
tare, or 3. past.

Tlie reference to time is most distinct in the Indicatiye. In this mode^
those tenses which refer to present or ftttnre time are termed primary or chief
tenses, and those which refer to past time tecondary or historical tenses.

n. The action is related to the time, either, 1. as doing at
the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time.

The tenses which denote the first of these relations may be termed definite f
the second, indefinite; and the third, complete. For a classified table of ths
Greek tenses, see ^ 26.

Digitized

by Google

CH. T.] MODE. I7l

NoTBB. «. Some robs h«ve a compibie fiebtrt tense, called the Fvtwrt
Perfect, ot the Third Fmtmi (§ 239) ; but, otherwise, tilie three tenses which
are wanting in the table (^ 26), viz. the tndeftnite pretentf the definxU future,
and the complete future, are supplied by f(Hrms belonging to other tenses, or
by participles combined with auxiliary verbs.

/3. Foi the general formalion of the Greek tenses, see f 28.

C. Mode.

^169. The Greek has six modes; the Ir<-
DicATivE, the Subjunctive, the Optative, the Im-
perative, the Infinitive, and the Participle.

1. The Indicative expresses direct assertion or inquiry ; as
y^qito^ I am writing ; yQWftvt ; am I writing ?

2. The Subjunctive expresses present contingence ; as, ov»
older, onot rgdniofjLai^ I know noty whither 1 can turn.

3. The Optative (opto, to wish^ because often used in the
expression of a wish) expresses past contingence ; as, otSx ^deii^»
Znoi tQttnolfitjVy Iknew notyWkUher Icouldtum.

4. The Imperative expresses direct command^ or entreaty ,
as, /^9)£, write ; tvntia&ta^ let him be beaten ; dog fioi^ give me.

5. The Infinitive partakes of the nature of an ahstract
noun ; as, yqdipuvy to write.

6. The Participle partakes of the nature of an adjeetwt^
as, yqdfp^av^ writing.

Notes. «. For a table of the Greek modes daasified aocording to the
character of the sentences which they form, see ^ 27.

/B. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Present and Aorist have
all t}ie modes ; bat the Future wants ttie Subjunctive and Imperative ; and
the Perfect, for the most part^ wants tilie Subjunctive and Optative, and like-
wise, m the active voice, the Imperative. The Imperfect has the same form
with the Present, and the Pluperfect the same form with the Perfect, except
in the Indicative.

y. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative aie related to each other ai
present and past, or as primary and secondary, tenses (§ 168. L) ; and some
have therefore chosen to connder them as only different tenses of a general
conjunctive or contingent mode. With this change, the number and offices
0^ the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspond-
ence between the Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes
more obvious.

D. Number and Person.
^170. The numbers and persons of verbs
correspofid to those of nouns and pronouns (^ 164).

Digitized

by Google

172 CONJUGATION. [bOOK II

NoTB. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the p-tt permm ; th«
Infinitive, from its abstract nature, wants the distinctions of number and per-
son altogether ; and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an Acyective^
has the distinctions of gender and case, instead of person.

Remarks. «. The first person singular of the Present indicative active, of
in deponent verbs ("> 166. 2), middle, is regarded as the theme of the verb
The ROOT is obtained by throwing off the affix of the theme, or it may be
obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing off the prefix and affix, and
allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is conjugated by adding to the root
the prefixes and affixes in ^^ 28 - 30.

jS. Verbs are divided, according to the characteristic^ into Mute, Liquid
Double Consonant, and Pure Verbs; and according to the affix in the
theme, mto Verbs in -a*, and Verbs in -fit (§ 208. 2). For a paradigm of
regtdar conjugation without euphonic changes, see Tf^ 34, 35 ; for shorter para-
digms of tiie several classes of verbs, see ^^ 36 - 60.

y. For a fuller view of the use of the Greek verb in its several f(nins, see
Syntax.

E. History of Greek Conjugation.

^171* The early history of Greek conjugation can be traced only in
the same way with that of declension (§ 83). The following view is offered
as one which has much in its support, and which serves to explain the general
phenomena of the Greek verb.

Greek conjugation, like declension (§§ 83, 143), was progressive. At firsts
the root was used, as in nouns, without inflection. The first distinction ap-
pears to have been that of person, which was, at first, only twofold, affixing /$
to express the first person, and a lingual or sibilant to express the other two.
Of this second pronominal affix, the simplest and most demonstrative form ap-
pears to have been -r (cf. §§ 143, 148). By uniting these affixes with the
root ^a., to say, we have the forms,

^afA, I or we tay, far, you, he, or they say,

§ 1 7S« A plural-was then formed by affixing the plural sign t (§ 83\
with the insertion of i to assist in the utterance. Thus,

1 Person. 2 and 3 Persons.

Sing. fdfA p»r

Plur. ^eifitf ^artf

Upon the separation of the 2d and 3d Persons (§ 143. jS), the 2d, as being
lass demonstrative, took in the Sing, the softer form s (in some cases, re
or #, in both which forms the # would, by the subsequent laws of euphony,
pass into St unless dropped or sustained by an assumed vowel, § 63) ; while
in the I'lur. there was a new formation (cf. §§ 84, 85), in which plurality
was marked, in the 2d Pers. by affixing i (cf. § 83), and in the 3d Pers. by
inserting » (cf. -f-t, § 85). The old Plur. now became, as in nouns (§ 85), a
Dual, and the S3rstem of numbers and persons was complete. Thus,

1 Pers. 2 Pers. 3 Pers.

Sing. ^dfA ^as ^T

Plur. ^dfjitf (part pdfT

Dual ^df*t9 f»r$9 ^drtf

Digitized

by Google

CH. 7.] HISTORT.

r>

§ 1 7 3* The ^tinction of tense, like thw^Sjfejfe, case, and per*>
HOD (§§ 83, 1 13), was at first only twofold, limpl jmrfrtT|fpi|igliiii||| r prr Tf ac-
tion firom a present or future one. This was nataniUy done by prefixing «. (is
Sanscrit, Sr\ to express, as it were, the throunng back of the action into past
time (§ 187). This expression, it will be observed, is aided by the throwing
'uack of the accent. With the prefix of i-, a distinction was also made be<
tween the 2d and 3d Persons dual (perhaps because, the more remote the
action, the more important becomes the specific designation of the subject).
In the 3d Pers. the inserted • (§ 172) was lengthened to n, while in the 2d
Fers., as in both the 2d and 3d Persons of the unaugmented tense, it passed
into the kindred • (§ 28). We have now two tenses, the unaugmented Pri-
mary Tense^ which supplied the place of both the Present and the Future, and
the augmented Secondary Tense, which expressed past action both definitely
and indefinitely, and supplied the place of all the past tenses (§ 168). Thua«

Pbdcart Tensb.

Sbo

Oin>ABT Te

NSE.

IP. 2 p. 3 P.

S. ^^ (pds pdr
P. pdf.if (pirt ^rr
D. ^fM3 pAr$f ^T§9

IP.

l(p«fHf

t(pafUf

2 p.

i(parsf

8 P.

t(pafr
Ipdrtif

^17 4* At first, there was no distinction of voice. The affix merely
showed the oonnecti<m of the person with the action, but did not distinguish
his relation to it as agent or obfect. This distinction seems to have arisen as
follows. A transitive action passes immediately from the agent, but its efiect
often continues long upon the object. This continuance would naturally be
denoted by prolonging the affix. Thus, if I may be pardoned such an illus-
tration, while the striker simply says with vivacity ru^rofA, I strike, 'the one
struck rubs his head and cries rv^r»/Mu, tuptom-ah-ee, / am struck. Hence
the objective form was distinguished from the subjective (§ 195), simply by the
prolongation of the affix. This took place in various ways, but all afiectmg
the personal and not the numeral element of the affix. If the affix ended with
the sign of person, it was prolonged by annexing, in the Primary Tense, eu ;
but in Uie Secondary Tense (on account of the augment, which had a natural
tendency to shorten the affix), the shorter 0, except in the Ist Pers., where a
species of reduplication seems to have taken place (-/»»/«, passing of course
into •fififf § 63). Thus -f* became -/am and ./uqy ; -f , -^eit and -^a ; -r, -reu
and .7« ; .vr, -vrai and -trs. If the* affix ended with the sign of number, the
preceding sign of person took a long^ form. In the 2d and 3d Persons, this
was r# (which might be considered as arising from the r by the addition of #,
since 7# must pass into r#, § 52). The 1st Pers., in imitation of the others,
inserted # (or, if a long syllabTe was wanted by the poets, *■#), after which
either « was inserted, to aid in the utterance, or, what became the common
form, the final v passed into its corresponding vowel « (§ 50). Thus .re, -rtf*^
•Ttif became -##•, 'O^fot, -^finf^ and -/aiv became 'fA%hf {•fAt^fiof), or commonly
"fAiia (.fii^fia). In respect to the form -/ut^tfy, see § 212. 1. We place the
•nbjective and objective inflections side by side for comparison.

i

SUBJECnVB.

OBJBCmVB.

1 p.

2 p.

3 P.

1 P.

2 p.

3 p.

Prim. S. p»-/»

P. (pd'ft49
I>.fd'fASS

<pd-,

(pi'Tt

15

<pi-r
pd-.r

{id'TSS

•

pd'iMu

pd'fAt0a

fd'fAtim

pd-reu
pd'^h

pd'TOi
pd'9T0

pd'^4s

Digitized

by Google

174 coJOVcATiOJi. Ikook If.

IF. J F- « F. IF. 2 F. 3 F.

•fee. ftl^^/R ff»-f Sf*-^ Ifa'/il tfm-^ ffm n

§179. ft«a be

iBi^ Willi A mwdy
gRaternoBber of looli

IbcIi wm purd

»a]

tioD 4jr tibe Opt. ad theaBflkgfor Dwl IL fead ■snOcrtDoaniider&e -i-
MAcqilMBe fobidtDtB ftr Ae^Oa Ob ievcne,§iS8,86, 177> ilj
•a ewmpifl of wpfcwrif iw/l«fiwi (m <!ii<iiirtaiBi fiam wUdi the mUrrtkm
wftfaoot oonnertmg roweb m tenned mmtk), we Miect tbe not yggf , «» write

«»>

IF. « F. S F. IF. 2 F. 8 F.

P. jf£p tfU9 f«« -frr }^af lyiiAi -mA orw

D. yyi^j^yy -mw -scfp yyf i/iilw -iWU -iWU

flee* 8. f7f«f-4|fR -•# -tr t^ifsf-tf^uiv ^ -«#» -•«

§t^9» The <B8tfiieCion of fMiA in flie inflection of veriM conu^^
irfth tfaet of penon. For the rerj attadiment of personal aflizas makes a
distinction between a permmai mode (L e. tlie vob need as finite} and a noa-
permmai mode (L e. the ▼eib need as an infinitive or participle). Hie bttei
had donbtiesB, at first, no afiix. But fbe InfinhiTe is in its nse a mAetaaOhe,
c/mmotSj iostaining the office, either of a dinet^ or yet more fteqaendy tmH-
reet object of anotlier word. Hence it natorally took the objectire en^igs of
noons. Of tliese the simplest and the earliest in its objective force appears to
have been v (§§ 84, 87), which was, accordingly, affixed to the Int, to ex-
press in general the ot»)ective diaiacter of this mode. To jwre roots this affix
was attadied dkeetfy ; bat to mpure roots wiA Ae vuertiom of t to assist the
ntteranoe. Thus the Inf. of ^- was pdf ; and of y^ap-, yf«ft». Snbee-
qnently, to mark more specifically the prevalent rdation of the Inf., that of
tndirect obfect, the dative affix of Dec. L (§ 8() was added to these fi>rm8 ;
thus, pdvmt, y^Aptvtu, Yoice appears to have been distinguished by the in-
eertion, in these forms, of r# (b^sre which the » fell away, cf. §§ 55, 57), after
fhe analogy of § 174 ; thus, Act (or Subject.) Form, pavat, y^tipitmt • Ifid.
and Pass, (or Oltj.) Form, {pAv-st-ai) pd^fai, (yfiptf^i-ai) y^ap*e0m. But
the verb is also used as an adjeetioe, and, as sudi, receives declension. Hie
root of this declension, in the Act (or Subject) Form, may be derived flx>m
the original form of the non-personal mode in -v, by adding r, which is used
so extensively in the formation of verbal substantives and adjectives ; tilius,
pait ^«fr-, or, with the affix of declension (^ 5), ^avr-f, y^tipg* y^aiptfr-g
(the kindred « was here preferred as a connecting vowel to •, cf. § 175). Tlie
Bfid. and Pass, (or Obj.) form of the Partidple may be derived fixnn the
, by a rednpUoation aBak)gou8 to that in § 174 (since the Aoe. affix, § 84,

Digitized

by Google

en. 7.J HISTORY. ITS

is strictly a nasal, which could be either ^ or 9, according to euphonic pref-
erence ; as, jStf^idcy, bat Lat. boream) ; thus, ftiv ^ai/Att-tt, y^a^tf y^pi/uf^g
We have now the single n(m-personal mode developed into a system of Infini-
tives and Participles ; thus,

SUBJBCnVB. OBJECnVB.

Inf. ^avett, y^a^ttm ^a^ffai, y^ei(p%^0au

Part. ^afTff y^a^trrs ^dfittaf, y^a,po/Atf$s

^ 1 T T • In the penonal modtf a threefold distinction arose. Donbt
leads to hesitation in closing a word or sentence ; and hence the idea of con-
tmgatee was naturally expressed by dwelling upon the connectihg vowel (<«
upon the final vowel of the root), as if it were a matter of question whether
the verb oo^t to be united with its subject. The strongest expression of
contingence, that of past contingence^ protracted the connecting vowel, or final
vowel of the root, to the cognate diphthong in 1 (^ 3), and thus formed what
is termed the Optatwe mode, which, as denoting past time, takes the secondary
affixes ; thus, l^a^t ^«^) l<p»f*nf ^etifitif, ly^a^o/* y^a^atfA, ly^a^ftrif y^»'
^•ifMHf, The weaker expression of ccmtingenoe, that of present contingence,
as less needed, seems to have arisen later, after the conjugation with the cr/u-
necting vowels ••- and -1- had become established as the prevailing anal<»gy
of the language ; and to have consisted simply in prolonging these vowels to
-IT* and 'ti't attaching the same afiixes to all verbs. This weaker form, termed
the Svibjunctwe mode (yet see § 169. 7), as denoting present time, takes the
{nimary affixes. Thus, y^a(p$fi y^ei<pvfAt y^i^^/Mtt y^a(pMftaty pdfi ^tuifif
pifMu (pautfMu. llie original mode now became an Indicative^ expressing the
aetwd, in distinction from the contingent.

A third mode arose for the expression of command. This obviously requu>4
no 1st Pers. ; and in the 2d, it required no essential change, as thi^tone of
voice would suffidentiy indicate the intent of the speaker. There would,
however, be a preference of short forms, as the language of direct command
is laconic ; hence, we find in the objective inflection -0-0 rather than -roi, and
in the subjective, a tendency to drop the affix of the 2d Pers. sing. The
3d Pers., on the other hand, has throughout a peculiar form, in which the affix
is ttnphaticaHy prdonged. This is done in tiie Sing, subjective by adding m ;
thus, 'Tm. In the objective inflection, -r«, of course, becomes -sSm (§ 174).
The dd Plur., afterwards the Du., was formed by adding the plural sign »
(§ 172) ; thus, -Tt^ 'fitn. The new Plur. was still further strengthened by
prefixing » (whidi hi the ot^. form would make no change, cf. h 176), or by
adding the later plur. ending r«f (§ 181. y) instead of t ; thus, -vr«fy or
-r«raf, (-f^^Mv) -^iaif OX 'tittraf. In the 2d Pers., it is convenient to regard -#
as the proper flexible ending (§ 172). The system of personal modes is now
complete; thus, *

Subjective Inflection.

Indicative. * CoyjUNcnvE.

IP. 2 P. 8 P. IP. 2 P. 8 P

Prim. S. y^dp-Bf* 'if -ir y^dip't/A 'tit -ifr

P. y^»^§fttf -iri -#»r yfti^-tt/Atf -««

D. yftiip'fttt -ir** -tTO y^ip'ttfittf -uro

-«r#f

Sec. S. ty^tclp'tf* -If -«r yfdp'UfA

-^t

P. ly^dp'tftttf -in -#»r y^d^M/Uf -nrt -t*^

D. ly^df-»fi%r -irw -irii» yf«f-w/*i» -«w» -Wtii*

Digitized

by Google

176

CON JUG ATI Olf.

[book II

Impebauvb.
2 P. 3 P. 2 P.

P. (pA-Tg (p»'9r»nf (pd'rairatif y^a(p-trt

3 P.

Objective Inflection.

Indicative.
1 P.

Pnm. S. y^d^tf^at
P. y^a^o/A%4a
D. y^ap-ifuPa

2 P. 3 P.

See

S. ly^aP'Oftfif
P. \y^a^i/At4m

CoxjuNcnvK.
IP. 2 P.

y(d<P'»tfiMt -nrm
y^a,ip-dfA%4m ^n^h
y^a^dfMfim, 'nriof

y^ap-oiftn*

y^a<p-»ifn4»

y^et<P'$if*ii»

3 P.

-ArVTM

Imperativb.
2 P. 3 p.

S. (pd'^t (pd'ffSm

P. ^d-ah (pd'ff^tnf, ^d'cfim^at

D. ^«-r#«f <pd'04mf

2 P.

y^d(p-t9»
y^d<p-i9h
y^d^tfiof

8 P.

^ 1 7 S* We have, as yet, but two tenses, the Primary, denoting
p-ewnt and future time, and the Secondary, denoting past time, both definite^
and indefinitely. In a few verbs, mostly poetic, the formation appears never
to have proceeded farther. In other verbs, more specific tenses were developed
from these, as follows.

1. In most verbs, the Future was distinguished from the Present, and the
Aorist (the indefinite past) from the Imperfect (the defitdte past) by new forms,
in which the greater energy of the Fut. and Aor. was expressed by a r added
to the root (cf. ^ 84) ; and consequently, if the old Primary and Secondary
Tenses remained, they i^emained as Present and Impetfect The Fut. followed
throughout the inflection of the Pres., except that it wanted the Subjunctive
and Imperative, which were not needed in this tense. The Aor. had aU
the modes, following in general the inflection of the Pres. and Impf., except
that it preferred -a- as a connecting vowel, and simply appended the later af&z
-«i in the Inf. act. (§ 176) ; thus,

Subjective Inflection.

iNDIOAnVB.

SuBjuNonrrvB.

S, ty^ap-^afs. -rat
P. ly^dip-^afAtf 'fart
D. ly^d^^etfUf 'warcf

•ffar
-ratr
-^drnt

Optativb.

Imperativb. ,

S. y^dip-rtttfA 'fftiif
P. ygd^fatfAif '^atrt
D. y(d^reii/A$f "ffutrot

y^d^'fai -adrm
y^d<p-fart 'vd^rtn^^vdrmtmis
y^d<p-fUTo» "vdrvn

INI-INITIVB, y^d^'^mi

pAKTlCirLK, yod^'va^^t

Digitized

by Google

3h. 7] history. 1t7

Objective Inflection.
Indicative. Subjunctivb.

8. iy(Mf'^»finv -rAo •#««*« y^ai<P'ffotfAat 'rti^ms "mrtu

P. \y^m.(P'feifAt$m •ra^'/c 'fatTi y^aip-rtu/AtSa '^nvh 'wmitrm

D. iy^m^eafAtim "waatw ^tmttvt y^^-tiiAttm. 'vn^^n "^nvi^f

Oftahyb. Imperauvb.

8. y^»^^aifinf 'fmt^§ "^mr* y^a^ea^t 'tioitt

P. y^m.^0$k\iA%9» "^atfh -rduvr* y^ip'^avh "^avtvtyeiftoitmv

InFUllTlVB, y^^9m0$m Pabticiplb, y^Qk^^JiitAft

2. In many verbs, by a change of root, a new Pres. and Irapf. were formed,
which expressed more specifically the action as doing ; and in some of these
verbs, the old Secondary Tense remained as an Aorist (called, for distinction's
sake, the Second AorUt, § 199. ») ; and in a few, the old Primary, as a Fa-
tore (§ 200. b).

§ 1 79* Tlie complete teruee were, probably, still later in their forma-
tion. These tenses, in their precise import, represent the state conaequent upon
the completion of an curtum (rnv Wt^raXnv yiy^*^*, I have the letter written),
or in other words they represent the acdon as done, but Its effect remaining.
This idea was naturally expressed by an initial reduplication (§ 190). These
tenses admit a threefold distinction of time, and may express either present^
poMty or future completeness. The present complete tense (the Perfect) nat-
urally took the primary endings ; the past complete tense (the Pluperfect),
the augment and the secondaiy endings ; and the future complete tense (the
Future Perfect, or Third Future), the common future affixes. In the Perf.
and Plup., the objective endings were affixed without a connecting vowel ; and,
of course, with many euphonic changes. See tiie inflection of {yiy^^-fiai)
yiy^a/A/MMt (^ 36), vi^^y-fuu (^ 38), (^wiwut-fMu) ^iv'ttr/utat (^ 39), &C.
The subjective endhigs appear to have been at first appended in tiie same way ;
thus, Perf. Ind. yiy^uf-fSj Inf. yi^^^^-MM, Part. yty^»^9Tf, But all these
forms were forbidden by euphony. Hence in the Ind. -/a became -m (which,
since fi final passes into v, may be considered the corresponding vowel of ;« as
well as of V, § 50) ; thus, yiy^a^f* yiy^tt^a • and after this change the in-
flection proceeded according to the analogy of the Aor., except so far as the
primary form differs from the secondary. The « in this way became simply a
connecting vowel ; thus, yiy^a^a (or, if the analogy of the Aor. be followed
here also, yiy^m^-a-fA), yiyfec^-m-ff >a-r, -a-^ff, •«-ri, -A-vr, -a-rtv. In the
Part, 9 also became «, which by precession passed into a (^ 28). Indeed, in
Dec III. no masculine or fbminfaie has a root ending in -ar- (§ 76. d. 3).
Thus, yty^a^-irt. The » in the Inf., instead of a similar change (as it was
followed by «), took -i. before it ; thus, yty^a^-iveu. In the Plup. act., there
was a kind of double augment, prefixing i, both to the reduplication, and also
to the connecting vowel of the Perf., making the connective of the Plup. •!«- ;
thus, Uyty^^'tm-fA, This i« remained in the Ionic, but in the old Attic was
oontnuled into n, which afterwards passed by precession into u.

^ 1 SO* The middle and passive voices were at first uncUstinguished.
The fbrm simply showed that the subject was affiscted by the action, but did
not determine whether the action were his own or that of another. In tha

Digitized

by Google

179 coifJiH^ATioif. [book u.

defimiie and eomptde tenses* the aetun is w npfVKated, that tihis would bt
oommoiily andentood withoot spedal deaignatioa. But in the imlejimiit tenaei,
there woold be greater need of marking the distinction. Henee, a spedal Aor
and FnL patswe were fimned by employing the Tcrb ufu, to ^ as an mmnBm^
and compoonding its past and fotiire tenaes with the root of the Tcrb (the
angnifnt being prefixed in the Aor.^ as in odier past tenses, and the t being
lengthened in some of the forms firom the Hifliwuce of analog}- or for eophony) ,
thns, Aor. i-y^df-nw, ¥nt. y^mp-n^fuu. The old Aor. and Fat. now became wad-
dlt, and the two Toioes were so fiur distinct. They had still, however, so mn^
in oommon, that it is not wooderfnl that this distinrtinn was not always ob-
senred {k 166. \\ The Aor. and Fkit. pass, were aflat waids strengthsned by
the insertion of ^, which came, perhaps, finom employing in the composition
the passive verbal in -7«f , instead of the simple not of ths Teri) ; thus,
v^wr-H h U-ftix^' P^^om the prevalence of the ^, the tenses formed with
it were denominated ^Cni; and those formed wiOont it, seoontf tenses (§ 199. II.).

^181* The system of Greek coiyngstion was now complete, having
three permms, Arm nmatbers, three coices, six sKides, if the Snl^ and Opt. are
separated, and no fewer than eUvem tentes, if the Jirtt and efvomd an counted
separately. Some remarks remain to be added, chiefly upon eaqoAome ekemgee,

L By a law which became so estsbBahed in thelaqgoage as to allow no ex-
ception (§ 68), final ^ r, and ^ could not remain. Hiey were, therefore^
either dropped, dumged, prolonged, or botii changed and prohmged; as follows.

!• Fhial^ after ••- OMaeeim, was dropped ; after ^. or .«».einuMe<nM,* was
dianged to -« and then contracted with the preceding -vowel ; after -m- and
"sw eonmsethey and in the primary node form (§ 173), was prolonged to -fu \
and, in all other cases, became -». Thus, ly^^^^ yiy^mfrnft, lysy^mpi^fii
became ly(«>^, yiy^tt^ lyty^dftm • y(»p*ft and y^m^uft became (y^iifM,

y^P»tm) yfti^Mj and y^ti^^tfA and y^^mfa. became y^m.^^ • yfdfMft, y^«>^M/H»
yfm'^oiftj ^f* became y^iptfu, yU^^fu, y^^lmsfu, ^tifu • iy^m^ft, iyiyfd*
fuuf ifitfA became iy^mfn, lyty^m^uf, l^f .

2. Final r, in the secondary forms throogfaont, and in the Per£ rfqg., was
dropped ; but, in other cases, was changed into ^, iHiicfa aftxr -t. or hi- eom*
nectwe passed into .land was then contracted, bat otherwise was prolonged
to 'Tt. When, by the dropping of -r, ^. eomneetioe became final, it passed
into .1 (^ 28). Thus, I^r tp», ty^mftr tyfaft, ly^mftfr ty^m^n, iy^'^far
ly^^i, ty^a't^avT iy^a4'»9, y^ti<p»tT y^m^M, y^^mr y^a-^mi^ yiy^m^ar yi"
y^tt^ ' y(»p.t.T {y^mpth y^dp**) yfdfu, y^^P-i-r y^d^th y^dp-n-r y^dpif
(written with the i sabsc in imitation of the Ind.), y^d^-n-r y^d^if * pdr
fdrt, pdfT {pdfr$, § 58) ^«ri, y^df^tr (^y^dptfri) y^mptvrtf yfd^pavr y(d^»vri,
yiy^tipavr {y%y^dpa9rt) yty^dpdrt, y^dftttr {y^pe^trt) y^ipmri.

Notes. «. In the prolonged forms of the endings -r and -t r, the Dorie
retained the r (§ 70. 2) ; as, pttri Theoc. 1. 51, nVnn 3. 48, pa^ri 2. 45,
ptXUvTt 16. 101, ^Inxavri 1. 43, xiyvrt Find. 0. 2. 51, Wtr^i'^^nrt 6. 36.

/}. Epic forms of the Subjunctive, with -f* and -r prolonged to -fu and •#«,
are not unfrequent ; as, WtXvfu A. 549, rvx^t^ E. 279, 7jm#/m I. 414, Utfu
X. 450, i^fir/f (§ 66) A. 408, vavr^t I, 191, difir/v 2. 601 ; so' Dor.
UiXifrt (N. a) Theoc 16.^28. A similar form of the Opt., though not fires
ttom doubt, occurs in wat^apiatinn K. 346.

y. A new form of the 3 Pers. pL secondary was formed by changing ^r of
the %ng. into -r«y (L e. by t^ing v instead of prefixing it, with a change
of r into *•, &) above, and the neoesaary insertion of a union-vowel, irtiieh
* In primary forms (i 300),

Digitized

by Google

•;h. 7.] HISTORY. 139

here, as after «■ in the Aor^ was -«-, § 185). This form, m the Attic, is noi
used in those tenses which liave as a connecting vowel .«. or -a-, and scaroelj
in those which have -m- or -at. ; but in most other tenses is either the com-
mon form, or may be freely used ; thus, for i^atr, lyty^ti^uvr^ Iw^ixi^vtr,
S^«r«y, ly%y^Jiipu^tt9, W^ti^inrm,* (§ 183).

8. Final i was dropped after -t. eonnecHoe ; after a short vowel in the root,
It became in the 2 Aor. -g, and in the Pres. (except ^f*i and i/f*/) -i, which
was tlien eontracted with the preceding vowel (m becoming n) ; in other eases
(except the irregular substitution of •«» for ^ in tilie Aor.) it was prolonged
to •#!• Thns, y^dpti y^a^i, W ^ig, )/^«/ Qt^ai) ^/i»Vf ^mi pd4t, y^d^nf
y^i^nii,

^ 1 8 S* II. A stronger form of the 2 Pers. sing, subjective was in
-r^ (compare the Eng. and German -s^), which, according to § 63, must either
drop t and thus become the same with the common form, or assume a voweL
In the latter case, it assumed «, l)ecoraing .^^« (compare the affix -ati of the
Lat Perf.). This remained the common form in Jf^n^^a (If 53), j»r^» (T 55),
fu9$a (^ 56), «7(f^«, ifiu^at^ and fin^im, (^ 58). Other examples are fur-
nished by the poets (particulariy in the Subjunctive, by Homer) ; as, riinfta
I. 404, "i^ttwU T. 270, WiXi^^ia A. 554, ^^uXti^^U I. 99, lU^fU t. 250,
fidXMf4» 0. 571, »>Mi$t0U n. 619, 7;^fir^«, plXurfim, Sapph. 89, WtXnfia
Thooc 29. 4, xfii^a Ar. Ach. 778. This fbrm, like many others belonging
te the old language, is termed by grammarians JEoBe.

UL The objective endings of the 2 Pers. sing., -rat and -r*, commonly
dropped r in those tenses in which a vowel uniformly preceded (ct §§ 117,
900. 2, 201. 2), and were then contracted with this vowel except in the Opt. ;
thus, y^Mftrm y^dfuti y^d(pif or y^i^u (§ 37. 4), y^tl^ptroi y^»^tf or .14,
y^a^nras y^dppf ly^d^tra iy^d^* iy^d^aVf y^dftr§' y^dftv, ly^d^p»0§ iy^d'
^a» ly^d-^^m^ y^d'^»r» y^d^l^m* yfd'i^tti (the contraction is here irregular),
y^p§tf y^d^^t y^d^auft y^dyptua*

§ 1 83* lY. In the Greek verb, there is a great tendency to lengthen
a short vowel before an affix beginning with a consonant. This will be ob-
served in pure verbs before the tense-signs (§ 218) ; in the tense-^gns of tlie
Aor. and Put. pass. (§ 180); in the -<- often inserted in the Opt (§ 184);
in verbt m .fu before the tubfective emUngSy especially in the Ind. sing. (§ 224) ;
in the euphonic affixes -n and .i» of the Pres. and Put act (§§ 203. «,
206. j3) ; &c This tendency does not appear before endings. beginning with
vT, since here the syllable is aheady long by position. Of other endings, it
appears chiefly before the shorter ; hence, before the tubjecthe far more than
the objective, and in the Sing, more than the Plvr. or Du<d, We give here ex-
amples of the two last only of the cases that have been mentioned above : ptfu
pp.fAt (we now change the regular accentuation of the word to that which is
vsoally given to it as an enclitic), fds^ptiff ^«r« ^nW, but PL pdftiv * i^Af
I^f, t^t tfnf, ipt 1^, but PL tpifU9 (^ 53) ; 2 Pers. y^d^ts y^d^ut
(so some form y^^u and y^d^u by lengthening the connecting vowel and
dropping the flexible ending), yfd^tt y^d^ttt • y^d^tv (the old form of the
Inf:, S 176) y^d^f (this became the common form of the Pkes. and Put
iil£ act), y^d^it y^dypuf,

NoTB. The old short forms of the 2d Pers. and Inf. in .i# and -tt remain
in some varieties of the Doric; as, ^u^Uhg Theoc. 1. 3, Ji/AiXytf 4. 3, ey^Uhw

1. 14, j3«r»i» 4. 2. ym^^f Pind. 0. I. 5, r^d^if Ar. Ach. 788.

Digitized

by Google

180 COHJUGATIOW. [book II

§ 1 84* y. The Opt snbjecthre was often rendered sdD more f>x
pnadre, bj adding to its oonnectiTe «, which was lengthemd to « exoep'
before rr ($ 1 83). This addition was most common before the endmgs which
have no rowel, -^ -«, ^, -rr. In the 3d Pers. pL thu addition was always
made ; but, exoept here, it was never made to wm- eamMeetive, and rardy to
«i. amiteethe except in contract forma. Thos, {y^mp-M-rr) y^mfmv, (y^a'^-

fc7n pMinrt, (^-7-rr) fMv and fsMK«f^ ityytXaai* (T" 41), riftfm (T 45)»

NoTTEB. «. In the Aor. opt. act., a special pndonged form amee, in whidi
the connective was that of the Ind. with u prefixed, lliis form oocnrB only
in the 2d and 3d Persons sing, and the 3d Pers. pL ; bat in these persoiis was
for more ccnnmon than the other form. Tiras, y^ti'^'U-^'tj (y^cA^-ci-c*^,
§ 181. 2) y^a'^ut, y^a^pumf. This form, like many other remains of old
usage, was termed by grammarians JEo&c. It was especially employed by
the Attics ; yet was not confined to them, nor empIo3red by them to the ex-
dnsion of the other forms ; thus, 7<rw«» A. 42, /^ummg T. 52, il^avrm Pind.
P. 9. 213, JtyytiXutp Theoc 12. 19, 'hmf^iSiiumt Hdt. iiL 12 ; aXyvmsg Soph.
^ T. 446, 2iMd^Mtf Ar. Yesp. 726, fn^mt PL Goig. 477 b, A^aXl^ms Macb,
, 983, (ptaemat Th. uL 49.

^ In analyziiig Opt Amuis of the 3d Pen. pL, it Is often conveniflnt to
•oin the inserted t with the flexible endings ahhoo^ in strict ptmniety it it
an extension of the connecting vowd. See f 31.

§ 1 S 9* YL One important analogy we onght not to pass nnnotioed.
The oldest inflection both of vvrbs and of noons, that of the node Pres. and
Impf., and of Dec. IIL, had no connecting vowels. The next inflection in or-
der of time, that of the enphonic Pres. and Impf., of the Fat, and of Dec. 11.,
&M)k the connecting vowels ^. and -t - ; while the latest inflection, that of thCi
Aor., of the Perf. Act, and of Dec I., took the connecting vowd -«- (cf.
^ 176). Bat the analogy does not stop here. As some nouns flactnated
between the diffisrent declensions (§§ 124, 125), so eome forms of verbs fluc-
tuated between the difi^erent methods of inflection. Thus we find,

c.) Verbs in both -/u and -«, particulariy the laige class in -Vfu and .v«» ,
as, hixvvfu and ht»futt, to show,

$.) That verbs in -/m whose roots end in i, «, or », have, in the Impf. act
sing., a second and more common form in -«f ; as, •4'i#s» and (IriVf-o) WiSun
(t 50), U;)«f and i^i^ain (t 51)> i^</«»v» and Qu»t6»9 (t 52).

y.) Tliat verbs in -« have the 2 Aor. nude, if the root ends in a vowd,
oxcept I ; as, (^ 57) ifitiv (r. /3«-), tyfo/v (r. y»»-), t^vf (r. J*-) ; but Win
(r. «•<•), 2 Aor. of w/t^, to drink,

2.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) 2 Aorists itiddle which want the connecting vowd
even after a consonant ; as, ixr* A. 532 ; Si0ft%*n (Part) 2. 600 ; yttr§
(— »7Xir#) 0. 43 ; ynro (= iyUiri) Hes. ITi. 199, lyiw* These. I. 88 ;
i^fy^*if I. 513, ^i»r« O. 88 (so even Pres. 3 Pers. pi., %ix'^reu U. 147, for
ytx^rmt, $ 60), Imp. 2i^« T. 10, iix^t Ap. Rh. 4. 1554, Inf. hx^tu A. 23,
Part. yiyftiPti B. 794 ; IXiXsxrg A. 39 ; Txr* Hes. Th. 481 ; Ikiyf^ti* t. 33.5,
xUr§ %, 451, xilo fl. 650 ; fAtititif (3 Pers. do. for 4^«»»^>i», § 60)*; ifM»T§
«. 433, f^Uro A. 354 ; J^r* E. 590. iEsch. Ag. 987, •e'* ^- 204, i^m
0.474, S^ui^^u A. 572.' Soph. CEd. T. 177; »«At« O. 645; ^k^fou (for
wifiaUt, 5§ 55, 60) r 708. * A. U6.

Digitized

by Google

TH. 7.] HISTORY. 181

4 NoTB. These Aorists, bdng nude, agree In their formation with the Perf.
and Plup. (§ 179}, except that they want the reduplicatiuu.

I.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) Aorists which have the tenae-sign -r- with the
connectives -o- and -t-, and thus unite the forms of the 1st and 2d Aorists;
as, «iiVi« Horn. U. 16. 1 ; iCwiT§ v. 75, fivvio £. 109, 221 ; iv^tro H. 405,
iiirto n. 129 ; :i»f E. 773 ; kili6 I. 617 ; S^^to \\ 250, contr. S^^tu § 45. 3)
A. 264 . «r<rf X' 481, Call. Cer. 136, Ar. Ran. 482, ^Uir*, T. 173, »;<r»Ti
V. 1 54. The use of this form in the 2 Pers. Imp. will be specially nuticedi
Perhaps the common 2 Aor. t^iwat, fell, and the rare, if not doubtful, ix*^»h
belong here.

^.) Aorists without the tense-sign -••-, but with the connecting vowel -«-.
See § 201. 2. Compare the omission of -^ both here and § 200. 2 with
§§117, 182. III.

«.) Reduplicated tenses, having the connectives -*- and -i-, and thus unit-
ing the forms of the Perf. or Plup., and of the 2 Aor. See § 194. 3.

NrrrB. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as Ist or 2d Ao-
nst according to the connective ; a classification which is rather convenient
than philosophical.

^ 1^0. VII. The formation of the complete tenses requires further
remark. The affixes of the Perf. and Plup. seem to have been originally
nude throughout, and they continued such in the objective inflection, inasmuch
as here each flexible ending has a vowel of its own. That this was the reason
appears from the fact, that in the subjective inflection also we find remains
of the nude formation, but only in cases where the flexible ending has a vowel
of its ovm. These remains abound most in the old Epic, but are also found
in the Attic (^^ 237, 238). The inflection with the connecting vowel, how-
ever, became the established analogy of the language ; so much so, that even
pitre verbs, no less than impure, adopted it (cf. § 100. 2). Here arose the
need of another euphonic device. The attachment of the open affixes to pure
roots produced hiatus, and to prevent this, » was inserted. TMs insertion
appears to have been just conunencing in the Homeric period. It afterwards
became the prevalent law of the language, extending, through the force of
analogy, to impure, as well as to pure roots. Other euphonic changes were
now required, for which see §§ 61, 64. 3. The history of the Perf. and Plup.
active, therefore, is a history of euphonic devices, to meet the successive de*
niands of pure and impure roots. The latter first demanded a connectin|
vowel : then the former, the insertion of -«- ; and thai the latter, that tliii
-X- after a labial or palatal mute should be softened to an aspiration uniting
with the mute. We have thus four successive formations : 1. the primitive
nude formation ; 2. the formation in -a, -uv ; 3. the formation in -xa, -xu9
after a vowel; 4. the formation m -»«, -»t<» after a consonant (after a labial
or palatal mute, softened to -&, -cit, ^61). The last formation nowhere ap-
pears in Horn., and the third only in a few words. The forms with the in-
serted » are distinguished as the Itrtt Perf. and Plup. ; and those without it,
although older, as the Second (§199. XL).

16

Digitized

by Google

IfiS PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK It

CHAPTER Vlll.

PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION.

^18T. The Greek verb has two prefixes
I. The Augment, and II. the Reduplication.

I. Augment.

The Augment (augmentum, increase) prefixes £-
in the secondary tenses of the Indicative^ to de-
note past time (^^ 168. I., 173).

A. If the verb begins with a consonant^ the «-
constitutes a distinct syllable, and the augment is
termed syllabic £. g.

Thieiiie. Impf. Aor.

^«vXf »«, to eommad, IC«vXcv«y, IC«^Xtcmu

ytm^t^m, to reoognizey iyMw^i^tfv, ly^m^t^m.

ftTTit, to Orow, i^tvrn, tfft^m, (§ 64. 1>

B. If the verb begins with a vowel^ the b- unites
with it, and the augment is termed temporal.

NoTB. Hie tyUaiie augment is so named, because it increases the number
of ty1laJbiU$; the temporal (temporalis, fit>m tempns, time), because it bcreases
the txme^ or ^Konttty, of an initial short voweL For the syllabic augment
before a voirel, see § 189. 2. The breathing of an initial yowel remains the
same after the augment.

§ 1 8 8. Special Rules op the Temporal Augment.
1. The prefix e- unites with a to form ly, and with the other
vowels, if short, to form the corresponding long vowels ; as,

*ii2<»l4M, to mfure, (!«)/»««») iiiuMn, (U)/»«#») Uttwufm,

*dix'ufy t9 eomteitd, ^\mf9, iMa««w.

iX^r/^, to hope, ^Xri^*?, HXwsem,

'Utrtvtn, to nyofSeale, *r«inM9, 'fminvrm.

i^Mty to erect, &fitn, M^mwm.

VC^iX«', to mmM, 'i7C^<C«f, "S^^t^m.

2. In like manner, the f- unites with the prepositive of tha
diphthong at, and of the diphthongs at; and oi followed hy a
eonBonomi^ as,

«iVU, to aek, fr»pf (§ 25. 8), ^#».

«^«»«, to inereaee, ni^w, «i2^r«.

•iMTi^m, to pity, #»'riC*», fmrt0».

^o also, ^r^fim, to ^mk, ^i^m^, ^„.

Digitized

by Google

CH. 9.J AUGMENT. 168

3. In other cases, the «- is absorbed by the initial vowel or
diphthong, without producing any change ; as,

nytafuut to had, ityvfunf^ hy^tifin**

«i^Xi«», to profit, «^fX«ify, ^iXntrm,

t7»0tj to yidd, %4»»9f i3^«.

§i»niZ»fuu, to OMtgrnTf «M»M^«^ir», tlmwatiftum

•vrm,T^t0f to woundt §STmt^»», tSrm^m,

Note. In verbs beginning with tv, and in tltUH^m, to conjeeture^ and «l
•/»«, to dryy usage is variable ; as,

iSx^fttUy to projf, tlfx»/»n9t nhxifn*, tw^*/**!*, ifi|«/tif».

See, also, the PIup. ^tn (f 58), and Ijut (f 56).

§ 1 80. Remarks. 1. The verbs flovXofim^ to mUl^ dv-
raftni^ to be ablCy and fiiXXuy to purpose, sometimes add the tem-
poral to the syllabic augment, particularly in the later Attic ;
thus, Impf. iSovXofiijv ana ^SouXofitit^^ Aor. P. iGovXf^&tiv and ifiov^
Xii^tjp.

2. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the s- constitute*
a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment ; as,

JiyvfffUf to break, Iml^.

Ataiytt, to open, kfitfyn (§ 188. 2), Afitf^

Jtiitt^ to puik, Xmtatn, %i«rm»

Add kxietMftMt, to be eaptmred, kvitiftt (Ion. and Poet), to please, iftltt, to
•09, •»0im, Mdfuu, to bwf^ and some Epic forms. Cf. ^ 191. S. The sylla-
bic augment in these words is to be refterred, in part, at least, to an original
digamraa f% 22. I) ; as, iF«^«» ?«|a» y, 298, iv. 2. 20 ; Ifm^^mn UiUmn Hdt
ix. .V XA^'mn y. 143. IF«)< U%% HdL i. 151, irFF«)i» i^«2f» (cf. §§ 71, 117. 2)
S. 340.

3. In a few verbs beginning with <, the usual contraction of

ff into u (§ 36) takes place ; as, ^. 3 / ^*

l«*r, to permit, tXvy, t7«ir«.

Add Ui^ttt to ttceuatom, Ixieeat, to roll, tk»at, to draw, twtt, to be oeetqried
oith, i^m^tfttu, to work, ^wtt, to creep, Wr^aUt, to entertain, tx^i to haoe ; the
Aorists trx««, took, iUm, ( Ion. and poet. ), eet, %t/An and tl^ify (f 54) ; and the
Plnp. liVntxuy {\ 48), etood,

4. An initial «, followed by a vowel, remains in the augmented tenses of a
yer>' few vertM, chieHy poetic ) as, kit*, to hear, tin (yet iw-ifiri Hdt. 9. 93).
See, also, A»«XiV»« (^ 280). An initial m sometimes renuuns even when
Mowed by a coiksonant ; as, mt^'u^, to tting, tUr^tirn Eur. Bac 32 (cf. «n«,
$ 191. 3). So Uxifvir/ify (that the word "Exxn* may not be disguised), Th.
fi. 68, and in poetry l^tf^n*, tta0t!^if*nv, iEsch. £um. 3, Prom. 229. In these
words I is long by position.

5. An initial t followed by § unites with this vowel, instead of uniUng with
the augment ; thus, U^tit^^, to celebrate a jeoMt, (lt«^T«^«v) M^raJ^n. So,
fai the Phip., \if%%n, and the poet Uxwmv, Ui^w, from Pert Xunm, l«X«>«,

Digitized

by Google

1H4

PBSriXES OF COfVJITGATIOR.

[book

II. Reduplication.

^ too. The Reduplication (reduplico, io re
double) doubles the initial letter of the completb
T£NS£S, in all the modes (§^ 168. II., 179).

Rule. If the verb begins with a single consonant, or with a
mute and liqtdd (except ^, and, commonly, /U and //), the
initial consonant is repeated, with the insertion of t ; but, other
wise, the reduplication has the same form with the augment.
In the Pluperfect, the augment is prefixed to the reduplication,
except when this has the same form with the augment. Thus

Theme.

Perf.

Plop.

641/XfMw, to ammmit

^Z«uX,itnut,

imtCwXttmUf,

yt*^»0, to write,

yiyf^*

iyty^m^.

^tXu0, to love.

rtpiXnx* (§ 62).

lvtf*Xn*tt9m

Xt'^f^^ to uae.

xixetifuu.

«««A:r>'»»-

S^irxM, to die^

rittnxa,^

irtitnMUw.

^^^'U0, to prate.

l^^ayP^%,xm, (§ 62. m).

lff«^f^'»M.

r*s^»X^, to recognize (§ 187),

iyvmftmM,

fyMV^<XS4».

$>M0-Ta9t0, to bud.

iCXMtrmxm,

iZkM^rnxuw,

fiXmirrat, to hurt.

fiiCXM<pa,

ICtCXa^uw

yXv^m^ to tcutpturt.

iyXvf^tn.

l^nXiu, to emulate.

i^nXiixM,

yPivitfitu, to He,

iyPtwfuu,

i^Ptv^ftn9.

aTi^*99t0, to emum.

irr>^«y«»jM*,

IsTf^mMiMUV.

Haxi^ (§188. 1'.

{mmii»n»») n^ixnxm,

iHixixUf.

av^awaft to increate ( §

188. 2),

nu^nf^Ms,

ni^nfcnt.

hyttfjuLi, to lead § 188. 3),

nynfiai.

nyn^nt.

i^eitt.to tee (§ 189. 2;

,

U^«x«,

tiw^aauiv.

iviofteuy to Imy {^ 189

.2,

l^ttlfAMt,

u»^„,.

i^yal^ofMu, to work (§

189.3),

iS^ya0fuu,

^ lOl. Remarks. 1. In five verbs beginning with a
liquid, n- commonly takes the place of the regular reduplica-
tion, for the sake of euphony :

i3Xnx» <uid Xix»yj^m, tlXny/uu*
itXn^^ %7Xnf*/iuu and XiXnftftMt*
|7X«;^«, tlXiyfieu and XiXty/cau,

if^tixay ttffiftat (5 53).

2. Some verbs beginning with a, e, or o, followed by a single
consonant, prefix to the usual reduplication the two first let
trrs of the root ; thus,

&Xi!<pe0, to anomt, ixAXt^at, JiXnXiUfiuu.

\Xa{nte»t to drive, XXnXaxat, iXnXafjktu.

•^iirr«*, to dig, ^(i^X** i^fvyfitu.

Thb prefix is termed by grammanans, though not very appropriately (§7),

Xatyx^^f* to obtain by /b^
Xafi.Cecve0, to take,
Xiyaj to collect,
/iti^«/iait to share,
r. /i-, to tay,

Digitized

by Google

oa H.] COMPOUND \rj£RBs. 185

the Auk JteihqpBeatKm. It MUom reoefves an angmen^t in the Flap., except
in the verb itttv^t, to hear ; thm, ^Xi(X4^«, aXnXi^v • but, from a»outt, aicn^
»MB, nxtiMiuv, This reduplication prefers a short vowel in £he penult ; as,
k>,ftXt^a, thou^ HXu^ (§ 269); MXvim (§ SOI).

3. The yerb fAtfini(rM$t, to remember^ has, in the Perf., //tif/tvnfMti * xreiofAtci,
to acquire^ has commonly »i»Ttifiuu (i. 7. 3), but also tuTfifua (properly Ion.,
as Hdt. ii. 42, yet also JSsch. Pr. 795, PL Prot. 340 d, e> There are, also,
apparent exceptions to the rule^ arising from syncope ; as, ff-irr^x*, virret
fim. For iuMMj to «eem, and the poet. Ux^m^ i»(y»j cf. § 189. 2. For oi^»
(^ 58), cf. § 189. 4. The poet, ivmy^ to command^ receives no reduplication.

4. When the augment and the reduplication have a common form, this form
is not to be explained in both upon tiie same principle. Thus, in the Aor.
Xytm^i^m (§ 187), i- is prefixed u> denote past time, but in the Perf. lytu^txet
(§ 190), it b a euphonic substitute for the full redupl. y*- In like manner,
analogy would lead us to regard the Aor. HiUn'tt (§ 188. 1) as contracted
fVom U^/»«}^«, but the Perf. Hi'ncnKm (§ 190), as contracted fh>m autiUnttet^
the initial vowel being doubled to denote completeness of action. In the Per-
fects %lftM^tutt (R. 1 ), and X^m** (5 ^^\ the rough breathing seems to supply,
In part, the place of the initial consonant. Some irregularities in the redu-
plication appear to have arisen from an imitation of the augment ; as, Uv^«x«,
Unifuu (§ 190).

III. Prefixes of Compound Verbs.

^ I OJl. I. Verbs compounded with a preposition^ receive
the augment and reduplication after the preposition ; tlius,

^^•ey^a^ttf to cucribe, v^oa-iy^a^dv, v'^aryiy^m^m*

i^iXavftt, to drive out, f^«iX«t/v0V, i^tXnXtiita,

Rebiarks. 1. Prepositions ending in a vowel, except ti^/ and r^*, suffer
elisi<m (§ 41 ) before the prefix t-. The final vowel of «*(« often unites with
the I- by crasis (§ 38). Thus, m^gCtlxXa*, to throw away, mwiCmXXn • Tt^i^
CmXXtt, to throw around, xt^dCaXXn • ^rftCaXXv, to tiirow before, vr^siCaXXt
and w(»SC»xx»9,

2. Plrepositions ending in a consonant which is changed in the theme, re-
sume that consonant before the prefix t. ; as, ifiCdxx^, to throw m (§ 54),
UiUXXtf • UUxXtt, to throw out (§ 68), lliCaXXaw,

3. A/ew verbs receive the augment and reduplication before the preposi-
tion; a few receive them both before and after; and a few are variable; as,
itric-TM/uu, to understand^ *i9'i0'rafAri9 • Uo;^Xiai^ to trouble^ fi^uj^Xcuf, fivti^X9fK» •
jus/fi^d*, to sleep, iica4tv^of, »a4nvh»9^ and »a4tvt»v (§ 188. N.).

4. Some derivative verbs, resembling compounds in their form, follow the
same analogy; as, hatraM, to regulate <firom i!euT»y mode of ltfe)y ^t^mre
vnd i^i^rnrc, ^i)i^rn»«) iittn^riifAnv * inxXti^'tti^v, to hold an oMembly ( tKuXn-
I /«), l5i»X»»»'««J»» and tx»X*i<r/a^av, l^ntXnriaret • Ta^MyfM, to act the drnnkara
{*i(W9s)i i^ec^tf^fica V. 8. 4 ; lyyvaat, to pledge, for the various forms of
which see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 155.

^ 1 03. n. Verbs compounded with the particles dva-^ ill^
ana eJ, weM^ and beginning with a vowel which is changed by
the augment (§ 188), commonly receive their prefixes afer
16*

Digitized by VjOOQIC

186 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK U

these particles ; as, dvaaifsariu^ to be diipletuedy 9^v0fig€atovp
tiftf/ytiiw^ to benefit^ evijgytrow and tvf^/novf.

III. Other compounds receive the augment and reduplica
tion at the beginning ; as, Ao/otiou'q), to fahle^ iXuyonolovp
SvaTvxdti, to be unfortunate^ kdvatv^iiaay S&dvaivxHxa' ivivxi»
to be fortunate^ divxovy or tiirrvxovr (^ 188. N.) ; dvtmndm^ tc
shame^ idvannovp* Yet lnnojft(f6qnjxa^ Lycurg. 167. 31.

DIALECTIC USE.

^ 1 04l» I. It was long before the nae of the augment as the sign
of past time (§ 173) became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets
it appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be used or omitted at
pleasure ; thus, l/if»i» A. 2, Snxi 55 ; *lf i^«r« A. 33, 457. 568, «}; far*
188, 245, 345, 357, 511, 595; KaXi A. 459, 473, ^«Xi 480, 499, 519,
527 ; i^tifu 2. 493, «^«^ii 498. This license continued in Ionic prose in
respect to the temporal augment, and the augment of the Pluperfect* and was
even extended to the reduplication when it had the same form with the tem-
poral augment ; thus, «y«v Hdt i. 70, iiyov iii. 47 ; AxtiXkaJ^ Id.L 16, avaX^
Xaeetrt 17; itvr%Xmv9»9ro Id. vii. 210, airn^Mvvn 211 ; h^vXt^rt Id. i. 94;
m^^fl, £yp»Tt Id. i. 19, »f*f*iitnt 86 ; i^^a^Avra lb. 66, »aci^«0'r«, xmru^yar/U-
99U 123 . &wt^yfiMt ii 99 (so £p. t^x^^Trnt 11. 481, t^x»^» ^- 354, cf. § 189.
4). So, more rarely, in respect to the syllabic augment, and the reduplication
having the same form ; as, mii or iv«fi Hdt. i. 155 ; «'«^i0'xfv4)«T« vfi. 218,
m-afarutvaimr* 219 ; and even, for euphony's sake, iv-mXiXXiymro 1118. In
respect to the augment ot the Pluperfect, and of the impersonal i^fi** ^^
freedom remained even in Attic prose ; thus, tS^n TtrtXturnttts vi. 4. 11, ^r*.
Ithaxu lb. 13, luiCtCnMi vii. 3. 20 (this omission of the augment occurs
chiefly after a vowel) ; Ixfi* Cyr. viii. 1. 1, oftener x^nt Rep. Ath. 8. 6.
Of tlie poets, the lyric approached the nearest to the freedom of the old
Epic, while the dramatic, in the iambic trimeter, were confined the most closely
to the usage of Attic prose. Yet even here rare cases occur of the omission
of the syllabic augment (though not undisputed by critics), chiefly in the
narratives of messengers and at the begmning of a verse ; as, »rvmrt Soph.
CEd. C. 1606, fiytir»9 1607, ^^v^tt 1624, »dXu 1626.

2. For such forms as S^i^y ^p, 56, l^i^v B. 274, I^i^^^ty Hom. Merc 79,
and for such as l^uriy A. 33, ixx»U 0. 371, tfifJjtv #. 226, Un»9 <fr. 11,
Upturn E- 208, see § 71. For the Dor. iyw for Hyv (Theoc. 13. 70), &c,
see § 44. 1. For ft^vrm/AUm^ &e., see § 62. «. On the other hand, we find;
after the analogy of verbs beginning with /, %fAft.«^t A. 278, Ua-vfuu K. 79.
For hiiixr* L 224, hiittum A. 555, ht^it 2. 34, tm»v7m 2. 418, see $ 47. N.
Compare »wx4it9Tmt Ap. Bh. 4. 618, and UA.«i>r«i lb. 990, with words be-
ginning with /3A.. and yX^ (§ 190).

3. In the Epic language, the 2 Aor. act. and mid. often receives the redu-
plication (§ 185. n\ which remains through all the modes, while the Ind. ad-
mits the augment in addition (especially in case of the Att redui^.) ; as,
%%iat 3. 448, »t»«^«y A. 334, Mx£inr» A. 497, Mxi/ut A. 168, %t%v$M9
C. 303, XiXAx^'t H. 80, XiXMvim X 388, \xXkXa6n B. 600, X%XiJ*9T\
A. 127, XtXinnro Horn. Merc. 145, fAifta^otM Hes. Sc. 252, ft,ifia^wt9 lb
245, i.ft-rt^mXtit T, 355, irtraftTv or v^^-tfuv Pind. P. 2. 105, Ttvlfatfjutt
K 100, ff-iff-Z/Mr* K. 204, rtruytiv A. 591, rtrm^ifMtt a. 310, rirt^n hi

Digitized

by Google

on. 9.] AFFIXES OF CONJUQATlOJf^ 187

Hesych^ nr^xnrt A. 467; mrvwirrts Call. DL 61, m-i^H/tnv t. 277, mx*^
fofT0 II. 600 ; with the augment sometimes added, Ki»XiT» A. 508, SxixAtr*
Z. 66, wivrXnyn ^. 264, m'txXnytro M. 162, Iv-iff-Xn^o £. 504, 9ri(p(tch
B. 500, Iri^^c)* E. 127, rir/Aiy Z. 374, IriT/ccfy 515, rfr^M/«iy Theoc 25.
61, 9r%pt N. 363, f<ri^M A. 397 ; Att. BedupL Hyaytv A. 179, ^^ayir* X
116, ii»»x* n* ^22> it»ax*^^* «*• 3"^^' «iX«X»i Y. 185, Si^a^n M. 105, ijf^o^t
A. 110, m^mfamrt Ap. Bh. 1. 369, «'«(«tr«^y ff. 360, ilawi^otro I. 376,
^ |yi>r«'i» (also edited hinmi and biN^trtv) O. 546, 552, T. 473, if^^^i B. H6.
Two Second Aorists are reduplicated at the end of the root : nn^r&T-cf from
r. iMflp-, B. 245, and 9i^t»&»-99 from r. i^t/»-, £. 321.

KoTB. Some of these lednplicated forms occur in Att. poetry ; thus, &^~
^9 Soph. £L 147, »i»xif*tfH Id. (Ed. T. 159, SflrtfM lb. 1497, l^«'«f«» Eiar.
Ion, 704. '^y^yov remamed even in Att prose ; as, L 3. 17.

CHAPTER IX.

AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION.

[inr28-3i.]

I. Classification and Analysis.

(^ 195. The Affixes of the Greek verb may
be divided into two great classes ;

I. The Subjective, belonging to all the tenses
of the active voice, and to the Aorist passive.

II. The Objective, belonging to all the tenses
of the middle voice, and to the Future passive.

Nons. The affixes of the Aor. pass, appear to have been derived from the
tmpf. of the verb il/^i, to he ,* and those of the Fut pass., from the Fnt. of this
veib ($ 180). Hence the former are snligeetive^ and the latter, objective.
Of the affixes which are not thus derived, the tubfeetive represent the iubject
of the verb as the doer of the action, and the objective^ as, more or less directlj,
its obfeeL See § 165.

^106. The affixes of the verb may likewise
be divided into the following orders ;

1. The Peimaet, belonging to the primary tenses of the
Indicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjuncliye
(§§ 168, 169. r).

2. The Secondary, belonging to the secondary tenses of the
Indicative, and to all the tenses of the Optative..

Digitized

by Google

i^ AFFIXES OF CONJUOATION. [bOOK U.

3. The Imperative, belonging to the Imperative mode

4. The Infinitive, belonging to the Infinitive mode.

5. The Participial, belonging to the Participle.

^107. These affixes may be resolved into the
following ELEMENTS ," A. Tense-Signs, B. Con-
necting Vowels, and C. Flexible Endings

Note. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may be dO'
nominated simply sigitSf connectwea^ and ending** For a synopsis of thest
elements, see ^ 31.

A. Tense-Signs.

^198. The tense-signs are letters or syllables
which are added to the root in particular tenses^
and to which the flexible endings are appended,
either immediately or with connecting vowels.

In the Future and Aorist, active and middle^ and
in the Future Perfect (^ 168. a), the tense-sign is
'O' ; in the Perfect and Pluperfect active^ it is -x- ;
in the Aorist passive^ it is -ds- ; in the Future pas^
sivcj it is 'dtfa" ; in the other tenses^ it is wanting
See 1 31.

Thus, /Jovilsv-a-w, i6ovksv-(T-a^ fiovXsv-a-ofiai^ iSovXiV-a-dfAfi'*
(If 51 34, 35) ; mfpilri^a-ofiai (|f 46) ; ^tSovkfy-K-a^ iSt-SovXev-X"
Eiv * j3ovXsv-df-lrjP ' fiovXsv-di^a-ofiai, ' ^ovXtv-ta^ PovX^v-o^ai^
iSovXfv-ov^ iSovXfV-ofitjv^ ^tSovXev-fiai, i6f6ovXsv-(iriv,

§ 1 00. Remarks. I. The sign -^f-, except when followed
by a vowel or by vt, becomes -^i;- (§ 183). When followed
by a vowel it is contracted with it. Thus, i6ovXsv-d^f)-v^ ^ovXiv-
&rf-Tij fiovXiV-d^ij-vai ' {povXiV-^t-m^ § 36) /iovXev&cj^ (/Joi/Asu-
^S'lriv^ § 32) fiovXfV&sltjv ' fiovXtv-d-i-vTOiv^ {ffovXsv-d^i-vTg
§ 58) /SovXsv&slg.

II. The letters x and ^, of the tense-signs, are sometimes
omitted. Tenses formed with this omission are denominated
second^ and, in distinction from them, tenses which have these
letters are denominated Jirst ; thus, 1 Perf. ninnxa, 2 Perf. ni-
noi&a ' 1 Plup. 4nfntliiuv^ 2 Plup. inmold^nv (IF 39) ; 1 Aof
pass. TjyyiX&Tjv^ 2 Aor. pass. riy/fXtiv • 1 Fut. pass. ayytX&i^ao^
(iui, 2 Fut. pass. ayyeX^uofint (fl 41). See §§ 180, 186.

Digitized

by Google

«-II. 9.] TENSE-SIGNS. 18if

NoTFS. «. The tense in the active and mieUBe voieeSf which is tenned the
Second Aorist, is simply an old form of the Imperfect (§ 178. 2).

/3. The regular or Jirst tenses will be usually spoken of simply as ihe Ao'
ristf the Perfect^ &c.

§ 300. III. In the FUTURE active and middle, changes
affecting the tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which
are then contracted.

1 . Th. tense-sign -a- becomes -«- (§ 50),

«.) In tho Future of liquid verbs. See § 56.

^.) In Futures in Arm, from verbs in -iT^M ; thus, Msfiirm (xtfitim) xofut,
»»fi,Uut Ktftttlvy »afAifft09 KafAMV • Mid. xafitirofitat {»»fuio/Aai) »»fn»dftmt, »•/*{'
atfffiat xofAttitafiett, xafiurifAtfos KafAitVfitvof (^ 40;.

y.) In the Future of xaH^afiett, to sit (root I'i-) ; thus, (xetfiiia-afMCt, xeth'
yt0/uai) Kafiiit!vfjM$, Add the poetic (^rixrtc-^at) rtx%7a6ett Hom. Yen. 127, and
{jAa.$99fAMy -MftMf § 45. 3) fiahvfuti Theoc 1 1. 60. See ^dso b. below.

2. Some Futures in - auto and -eaw drop -a-.

Thus, IXkvw, to drive, F. Ikeirm (iX«w) U«, iXarus iX^St iXti^u IXf •
IXdffUf iXSf.9 • Ixdffoiv IXeiv * TiXiaf, to finish, F. rtXirv (riXitt) riXZ, riXiff%tt
rtXi7s * rtXiiru9 r^Xtlit • T%Xi9uit TtXSv * Mid. rtXio'afMti ( riXiofAai) rtX»v/MU,
r%Xir%w4at rtX%Tr^eUf rtXivc/AUaf rtXavfuvas ' X*^t ^ P^^^*^i ^* ix^''*'^ X^'^f
ix'^'tifi X"'f) X*'f ' ^*^* (x't^ofMtt) ^MfAxu Add xaXtat, to call, fAa;^«fMcty
to fight, afc<ptivvvfitt, to clothe ; all verbs in -eivfufitt ; sometimes verbs in -d^u,
particidarly ^iSti^ai, &c.

Note. The contracted form of Futures in -aaoi, 'irot, and Aw, is termed
the Attic Future, from the conmion use of this form by Attic writers. It is
not, however, confined to them ; nor do they employ it without exception ;
thus, ixivatvett vii. 7. 55, rtXirovvn Cyr. viii. 6. 3. It is not found in the
Optative. A similar contraction appears, in a few instances, to have taken
place in other Futures; thus, %^fi[Ativr% \ will you lay waste? for l^tifuirtTif
Th. iii. 58.

3. A few^ verbs, in the Future middle with an active sense,
sometimes add e to -a-, after the Doric form (§ 245. 2).

Thus, crXiw, to sail, F. ^Xtweftat, oftener (jorXtv-A-afiai) xXtwoufAxt * ^tvyvj
to flee, ^tvlafiiai and (^tv^Ufctti) ^tu^avfixs. This form of the Future is termed
Hi Doric I\tture. Other examples in Attic Greek are xXaiu, to weep, vim, to
gwtm, «'«i^«, to sport, w^iirrm, to folly ^ti»i, to blow, 9rvv6iinfAeuy to inquire^
X*l^'

BxAkBXi. a.) The liquid, Attic, and Doric Futures, from their formation,
are inflected like the Present of contract verbs (ft 45, 46). It will be ob-
served, that in a few verbs the Pres. and the Att. Fut. have the same form.

b.) In a very few instances, the Fut. is in form an old Pres. (§ 178. 2) ;
as, Ufim, to eat, F. ti»iMu, A. 237, Ar. Nub. 121 (m later comedy l^»tl^««,
cf. y. above) ; r/w, to drink, F. «-/#/tMei, ». 160, Cyr. i. 3. 9 (later vfvfjutt) ;
CfM, to go, commonly used as Fut of t^x^/Mit. Add a very few poetic fermf ,
which will be noticed under the verba to which they belong.

Digitized

by Google

190 AFFtXES OF COHJUGATION. [bOOK K

§ 90 1. IV. The sign of the aorist,

1.) Becomes -i- in liquid verbs. See § 56.

2.) Is omitted in iT«r« (^ 53), HvtyKa (r. Uty*-, to bear), f;^i* (Ep. tx*f»)
fVom x**'* ^ Pf**"^* And the poetic txtx (Ep. 7x»a and ?xfi«), from »«/», to &»m
Add the £pic nUd/Anv and 4Xft/«^*f», N. 436, 184, lr«-it/« £. 208, iarUr^a
Hes. Op. 765. See § 185. ^

3.) Is the same with that of the Perf. in Uti»», tUix*, and « »«. These
Aorists are used only in the Indicative, and rarely except in the Sing, and
in the 3d Pers. phir. In the mideBa twice, the Att. writers oae onlj tl\e Ind.
hxi/Afiv Ear. El. 622, with the very rare Part. hxmjAivot, iEschin. 72. 9
llie other dialects add Unxeifinvy K. 31, ^xxa^tya; Pind. P. 4. 52.

NoTB. These Aorists in .k» are only euphonic extensions of the 2 Aor.,
after the analogy of the Perf. First ^e final -» (originally -/t*) passed into
.«, which became a connecting vowel; and then -»- was inserted to i»^
vent the hiatus (§§ 179, 186) ; thus, Un-t Uti-» Uft-x-tc, Ufix^t^ ihxi, UnxMt •
ttuv ^x«, iv ^xm. This form became common only wh^re the flexible end-
ing had no vowel (cf. § 186), i. e. in the Sing, and in the 3d Pers. pL ; and
was properly confined to the Ind. act., although a few middle forms are found
after the same analogy. The nude form disappeared in the Ind. act. sing,
(cf. § 186), but was elsewhere either the sole or the common form. Sea
i\ 50. 51, 54.

B. Connecting Vowels.

^ a09. The connecting vowels serve to unite
the flexible endings with the root or tense-sign,
and assist in marking the distinctions of mode and
tense.

Notes, a. In each tense, that which precedes the connecting vowel (or^
if this is wanting, the flexible ending) may be termed the base of the tense
(fiti^it, foundation) ; as, in the Pres. of- /Sai/Xi t/«, ^uXtu- ; in the Fut., /Smt.
XtM-. ; in the Perf. act., /SiCflvXii/*..

/3. The regular additions, which are made to the base in tlje Present and
Future, are throughout the same ; as, ^avXiv-tt, ^ouXivv-et, li^yXtv-ut, fitvxUe
tiS * fiotfktv-tiftit ^ovX%v9'«tfu • fiavXiv-o/AOi, fiavXw-o/Aettj ^ovXtvHff-ofMu

§ 3 OS. I. In the INDICATIVE, the connecting vowel is >a-
in the Aorist and Perfect, and -h- in the Pluperfect ; in the
other tenses, it is -o- before a liquid^ but otherwise -<-.

Thus, A. lC«t/Xiv0'^-^y, KtvX%W'$i.fAn9 * Pf. fiiUuXtux-m-tAiv ' PIup. iCiC«v.
Xit/X'%t'* • Pres. /S«tfXi^-«-^v, ^vXw-%'Tty (/^i>Xii;-«-v^4, ^ 58) ^uX%y»u9i • /3«v.
Xtv-tf-^uii, (/3«i»Xsv-i-«i, § S7. 4) /SmXii^, j3««Xii/-f-r«M« Impf. iCtfvXiff-*-*, ICau-
Xiv-i-f • \C»uXtv-i-fAn9f iC0oXiv-i-r« • F. /3«vXfV0'-«-jMtv, iS«t/XiV0'-t-rM> • /3«c/Xim%

Bemabks. «. In the Sing, of the Pres. and Fat. act the connectives -—
and ^^ eiHier by union with the ending, or by simple protraction, become -iv.
sni <.«i^; as, (jS«vXw/-«*/M, -•-«) B^vXivtti (fi^vXt»'^-t) /3#»Xitfi<f, (j3M$Xi»-t-«%
i-t) ^•vX*v%t ' )3«t^x«vtr«, ^0vXiv^H , ^^Xw**t. Se« -^^ 181. 1, 2; Its.

Digitized

by Google

OH. 9. J C0NN8CTING VOWSLS. .191

/3. Ib the 8d Pen. sing, of Ute Aor. soA Perf. act., -t- takes the place </
«- ; as, (iCtvXiwm-r) ICtvXtun, fitCtvXtvzt, See § 181. 2.

7^ In the dd Pen. pi. of the Plop., -t- common^ takes the jdace of -u-
NoTB. The origmal connective of the PIup. was -i«-, which remained in
the Ion. (§ 179);.as, ^M S. 71, Hdt. ii. 150, IrtMwut ^. 166, i«WikMif
A*. 90, pu B. 832, pn'f 2. 404, lytyivu Hdt. i. 11, ^-t/y^^Un Id. ix. 58.
The earlier contraction into -if- is especiaOj old Attic, but also occun in the
^p. and Dor. ; as, I Pen. ftti Soph. Ant. 18, In^rovfiti Ar. Ecd. 650, xtx^vn
Id. Ach. 10 ; 2 Pers. ^^hns Soph. Ant. 447, ^hiaia, r, 93, Iktkn^nt Ar. £q.
622 ; 3 Pen. ^n A. 70, Soph. (Ed. T. 1525, iktknfti Theoc. 10. 38. By
precession (§ 29), -n- passed into -t/-, which became the common connective^
and in the 3 Pers. sing, is already found in Hom. (arising from -ii) ; as, 1^x4^
»u 2. 557 ; so XtX^iitu Theoc. 1. 139. In the 3 Pen. pi., -*»- became -t-,
by the omission of the «, which was only euphonic in its origin (§ 179). So,
hLthe 2 Pers. pl^ pir* tor pitn, Eur. Bac 1845.

§ 304# II. The SUBJUNCTIVE takes the connecting vowels
of the Pres. ind., lengthening -«- to -ij- and -o- to -»- (§ 177).

Thus, Ind. ^•vXtu-m, Subj. /SfvXfv-w, /3«0Xivr-«* fiaukiv-u-t, fiovktv-if't,

Xiv-t-rt, fiwXU-n-rt' (/SfyXitf-tf-ytf*/, fi§pXtP'0t-90t, § 58) fi»¥Xtv»»n, fiifXw&mtri*
fiwXtu-^'fuUf fi»yXiv-^-/tMty ^«vXivr-«f-/iMM ■ (idvXtv-t-reuj fiwXU'n-rmf ^ttXtue

%99S. in. The OPTATIVE has, for its counective, i, either
alone or with other vowels (§§ 177, 184).

Rule. If the Ind. has no • connecting vowel, and the hase
ends in a, s, or o, then the i is followed hy ri in the subjective
forms, but receives no addition in the ohjective. In other
cases, the i takes before t< a in the Aor., and o in the other
teases. The connective i always forms a diphthong with the
preceding vowel.

Thns, t^vm-m'h Urm4-ttm (t ^^)t r/^t^-v, nit^^n* (t ^)> ^—XivH
in-9 (5 35), )i}«-iif-v, )«^../'^if» (5 51); fiwXtv^-as'fu, fiivXivr-ui-fun* ' /3«v-
Xtv-M-/u, ^vXW'^i'finff fi^yXtu^-M-fUj ficvX%vf'9Ufi.n^ ^•uXtvin^^m-fAnv • l-tt-fH
(5 56), iuxti'i'fUt iuMw-^i-fitfit (^ 52).

Bemarks. I. In Optatives in .inv, the n is often omitted in the Plur.,
cspedaUy in the 3d Pers., and also in the Dual ; as, UrmTfitVf IrretTrt, irrmttv
Urmrn {% 48), ^x$v0%T%f (^ 85). In the 3d Pers. pL of the Aor. paai.
the longer form is rare in dassic Greek (U«'M*^<i«r«y Th. L 88).

S. In eoHtraet mibfeetive forwUy whether Pres. or Put, the connective m often
assiynes «; as, p^xi-ti'/m, ocntr. px»t-/u or ^tXo'm-f (If 46) ; ibyytX^'m-f
(1 41, § 66).

Notes. «. Tlie Ibrm of the Opt hi ^di^ fbr .m^, is called the Attie Op-
tathet though not confined to Attic writers ; as, Utt^fii Hdt. i. 89, dtxatnrt
llieoc. 12. 28. This form is most employed in the Sing., where it is the com-
mon form *n contracts in .i« and .am, and almost the exclusive form in con-
tracts in -Ae0, In the Sd Pers. pi, it scarcely occurs io»»iv'»* Mt^Wm. 41.

Digitized

by Google

192 AFFIXES OF COMJUGATIOIf. [fiOOK U.

29 >. It is likewise found in the Perf., as w%w»6oUi (^ 39) Ar. Ach. 940
ixvt<pivy»ifit Soph. (Ed. T. 840, vr^^tXnXvioint Cyr. ii. 4. 17 ; and in the
2 Aor. of f;^4», to have, which has, for its Opt., ^;^«/»i» in the simple verb
(Cyr. vii. 1.36), but ^;^0i/«i in compounds {xetr&vxoti Mem. iiL 11. 11).
So Ulm (^ 56) Symp. 4. 16.

^. See, in respect to the insertion of n (i) m the Opt., § 184.

3. The Aor. opt. act. has a second form, termed jEoUc, in which the con
nective is that of the Ind. with u prefixed ; as, ^avktar'ua-t. See § 18 1. a

§ 206# IV. In the imperative and infinitive, the con-
necting vowel is -a- in the Aorist, and -«- in the other tenses.

Thus, fiavXtv^-et-Tti ^tvXtug'-et-e-^t, )30c/Xit>^-«-i, fiovXtuc-a-viat • /StfvXiv-f-ri,
&ovX%v-%-rhy fisvXtv-t-o'ficUf fitCauXtux-i-waif fi»vX$u^'t-^fiai, fiovXtvH^r-i'ff^m,

Remarks. «. Before » in the Imperative, -•• takes the place of .|., and,
in the 2d Pers. sing,, of ^. ; as, fitvXw-c-vruf, fiduXtv^-*-* (§ 210. 2).

i3. In the Infinitive of the Pres. and Fut« act, -i- is lengthened to -ii
(§ 183) ; as, ^«uXt6-ii'V, fiovXtv^-u-u

§207. V. In the participle, the connecting vowel is
-a- in the Aorist, and -o- in the other tenses.

Thus, (fiovXtvc-a-tTfy § 109) fiavXsvraff fiouXtuc-a-fiuvat * (/3«vXiv-«-vrr,
§ 109) ^auXtvattj (fitvXtV'i-vr^a-, § 132) fitvXtitvra, ()3at;Xfi;>«-vr, § 63) /Smt-
Xitftfv • fitvXtuffw (fiiC»uXiv»-i-rSj §§ 112. «, 179) j3iC«f;Xii;xjwf, (/3fC«vAit/»*
«-r0'«, § 132. I) fitSovXtvxvTa, ()3fC0vXtv»-«-r, § 103/ fiiS»yXtviccf * /3«cXiv-i-
f*tt«S, ^•uXiVff-c-fAi¥»f, ^»uXiv4nf-i-(A%i>os»

§208. The INDICATIVE, imperative, infinitive, and
participle are nude (nudus, naked) ^ i. e. have no connecting
vow^jI (§ 175),

) ) In the Aor,^ P^f'% and Plwp,^ passive^ of all verbs,

U the Aor. pass., the flexible endings are affixed, in these modes, to the
tenae^eign (§ 198); in the Perf. and Plup. pass., they are affixed to the rooti
as, iC^uXii-in-f (§ 199); fitCtuXty-fMUyiCtCtuXtu-fitif.

2.) In the Pres, and Tmpf, of some verbs in which the char
acteristic is a short voweL These verbs are termed, from the
t:Tiding of the theme. Verbs in -jut, and, in distinction from
them, other verbs are termed Verbs in -oi (§ 209).

The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, l^rm-fttv, *lrrm-9af
Hfra.fun, Ur^-fufif (^ 48). In the Inf. and Part., the connecting vowels -i-
'and .0. are inserted after t ; thus, l-i-vas, (J-i-prf) mv» (| 56). So, in thff
Imperative, /tfyr^y. Cf. §§ 185. 7, 205.

3.) In a few Second Perf, and Plup, forms (§ 186).

The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, frr^.^m, tfra-iif
Ura-tett (^ 48). In the Part., the connticting vowel is inserted ; as, himt
(5 58). So, in the Inf., hliimi, with which compare /i»«i, above.

Digitized

by Google

CB. 9.1 FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 193

C. Flexible Endings.

^ 300. The Jlexible endings (flexibilis, change
able) are the chief instruments of conjugation,
marking by their changes the distinctions of voice^
number^ person^ and, in part, of te^e and mode.
They are exhibited in H 31, according to the classi-
fication (^^ 195, 196).

Spbgeai* Bulbs and Rkmabkb.
First Pers. Sing. The ending -fi, after -a- connective^
and, in primary forms (§ 196. 1), after -o- and •«- connec"
tive^ is dropped or absorbed ; after -oi- and -ah-, and in the
nude Present (§ 208. 2), it becomes -fn; in other cases, it be-
comes -»' ; as, (Ind. PovX^v-o-fi^ Subj. ^ovXtv-a-fi) PovXfv-v»^
P^SovUvH-n^ fOovXfva-a (so after -f«-, contr. -i^-, § 203. N.) ;
(iovXiva-ai-'fii^ jiovXfV-oi-fjii^ fiovXfva-oi-fii^ XtjTri-fii (^ 48) ; iSov^
Afw-o-F, i6h6ovXfvx-hi-v^ iCmvXfv^ri-f^ pfvXfVxtiiri-v • (fiXoiri-v^
iyykXoin-v (§ 205. 2) ; I'oti^-i', laxalri'V (IT 48). See § 181. 1.

Note. T^i^iv, for r^i^tifHf occurs for the sake of the metre Eur. Fr. Inc.
152.

^ 3 I O. Second Pers. Sing. 1. Fi>r the form -a^a, see
^ 182.

2. The ending -& is dropped after -f- connectii^e ; after -«-
connective^ it becomes -v, with a change of -«- to -o- (§ 206. « ) ;
after a «Ao^ri votbel in the root^ it becomes in the 2d Aor. a, and
in the Pres. «, which is then contracted with the preceding
vowel («« becoming i^) ; in other cases, it becomes -&i (see
§ 181. 3). Thus, jiovXfv-s ' ^ovXiva-o-v • i^«-?, 5o-?, %-q
(UU 50, 51, 54) ; (iarrVf) loii?, (r/de-*) t/^«, {dl-6o-f) didov,
{dfixvv-f) diUvv (ITU 48-52); ipavri&i (1142), liovXtv»fiu
(§ 62), «rr«^« (U 48), fa^i, didl&i (H 58), and, in like manner,
y«^i, l^t (flU 53, 56, § 181. 3), and the poet. XXa»i Theoc.
15. 143, in6iAvv»i Theog. 1195.

Note. In composition, rrn^i, /3?^i, and 16^ (5Y 48, 56, 57) are often
shortened to rr&t /3<i, and u • as, vtt^Aars for vm^m^rtiSt, xarmCs for »«r«
Cfi^i, m-^ig-u for 9^69t4i,

3. The endings -aa* and -«fo drop the a, except in the Perf.
and PI up. pass., and sometimes in the nude Pres. and Impf.
(§ 208. 2) ; as, (/5oi/A«;-f-at, § 37. 4) /iovXevrj or flovXivtiy (ffioth.
Xtv-(-o) jSovXfvov^ {^6ovXfv-f-o) 66ovX$vov^ [iSoyXBya'a-o) iSovXtv-
out ' ftovX(v-ot-u^ ^oikfvo-m-o ' fifSovXfV-ani^ ^iSovXfv-ao^ iStSov-
Xtv-ao ' Vara-a«<t, Xom-ao and (1'cjt«-o) taioi (fl 48) ; xl^i-om

digitized

by Google

194 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BuOR II ,

and (T/.^«-«t) T/^iy, (t&s-o) Uov (11'50); mo-ao and (^/cJo o^
mov,i86o) dov (Vi 51). See § 182. 111.

Bemarks. (a) The Aor. imperat. is irregularly centractei ; thus, (/J«»-
Xivff-et-t) fituXwce^i. (b) The coDtraction of -tm i»to -li (§ 37. 4) is a
special Attic form, which was extensively used by pure writers ; and which,
filer yielding in other words to the eoramou contraction into -»j, remained ia
&»vXu, tSit, and ••v/^. (c) In verba in .^, -cdu remained ooare ^quaitly
than -»■«, and was the* common form if • or » preceded. Yet poet, i ritv^
^seh. Eum. 86, ^uv<f. or Jy»»j (^ 29) Soph. Ph. 798. Further particulars
respecting the use or omission of the -«-• in v^bs in -fit s^ye best leanied from
the tables and from observation.

§311. Third Pers. Sing. The ending -i becomes -ai
in the nude Pres,^ but in oth* r cases is dropped, or lost in a
diphthong ; as, {Xorti-j) l'ur»yai, Xojt} {^\ 48) ; (6ovlfvt^ i%6ovXevxt,
(povltv-i-T^ ^ovktv-t-f) ^ovXfVfi. See ^ 181. 2.

Note. The paragogk v (§ 66), which is regularly affixed only to i and
simple I, is, in a few instances, found after -n in the Plup., and follows ^ in
the Irapf. of ilfil, even before a consonant; thus, 3 Pers. piiv is {^ &8)
Ar. Yesp. 635, f^n •iVt^m (f 56) Id. Plut. 696, Wtxsi^M •U Id. Nub.
1347, \9rn»%n ahrav Y. 691, ^iZXnMn ettxf^n £.661, h h i. 2. 3. In all
these cases, the y appears to have been retained from an uncontracted form in
.•(»)• See § 203. N., 230. y. So Impf. tf^»M tl^ta F. 388.

^$812. First and Second Persons Pl., with the Dual.
1. The 1st Pers. is the same in the Plur. and Du., having, for
its subjective ending, -^cy, and for its objective^ -fitda^ or some-
times in the poets, -fiBo&a ' thus, fiovUvo-fisv, povltvo-fAh&a^
and poet. fiovXevo-fieo^a.

Note. Of the form in 'fitfw (§ 174), there have been found only three
dasaica] examples, all in the dual primary, and all occurring in poetry before
a Towel: wi^ih^fAiSof Y. 485, \tXu/».fu6»f Soph. £1. 950, i^/buifit^tv Id. Ph.
1079. Two examples more are quoted by Athenseus (98 a) from a word-
hunter (if»/*ecTo4n^ccs), whose affectation he is ridiculing.

2. The 2d Pers. pi. always ends in -«. The 2d Pers. du. is
obtained by changing this vowel into -op ; and the 3d Pers. du.,
by changing it into ~ov in the primary inflection, into -lyv in the
secondary^ and into -wv in the imperative. Thus, PI. 2, fiovlsv-
ftty i6ovXtv8T8 * Du. 2, PovXimtov^ iSovXeveToy * Du. 3, povXsitxov^
iSovXsvstfiv^ PovXivixoiv,

Rbkabk. In the $eeondary dual, the 3d Pers. seems originally to hare
had the same form with the 2d ; and we find in Horn, such cases as 3d Pers.
^iiwxir«v K. 364, nrivj^^m N. 346, XM(pvra-iT»9 2. 583, ^M^n99%0^6a¥ N. 301.
On the other hand, the lengthening to -ify (with which compare the lengthen-
ing of the Plup. affix, § 179) was sometimes extended by the Attics even to
the 2d Pera. ; as, 2d Pers. lixirnf Soph. CEkl. T. 1511, hxXmH^mv Ear. Ale.
661, ivfirnt, IxtififMirn* PI. Euthyd. 273 e.

§918. Third Pers. Pl. 1. The en ling -it, in the pri

Digitized by VjOOQIC

^.•H. 9.] FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. I9ft

mary tenses ^ becomes -vat. In the secondary, after -o- or -«-
connective, it becomes -v ; after a diphthong in the Opt., -sv \
but, otherwise, -aav. Thus, {^ovXfvovai, ^ 58) ^ovXsvovai^
fiovXtvaovai^ fieSovXtvxaat, PovXbvvusi, * ioxaai, haraai (]\ 48) ;
i6ovXsv~o-v, i6ovXsva-a-v * ^ovXsvoi-sv, fiovXBvaai-aVj PovXnv^il-tv •
iStSovXsvHS-aav^ i6ovX6v&i}-auv, SoyXsv^sirj- aocy ' lata-aav^ laiij-
iay, iatairiHjar (U 48). See §§ 181, 184. (i.

2. Tn the Perf. and Plup. pass, of impure verbs, the 3d Pers.
d1. is either formed in -atai and -aio (§ 60), or, more com
monly, supplied by the Part, with sial and ^oav (fl 55) ; as»
fipdii^ajiMi Th. iii. 13, from (p^Hgat (r. qy&aQ-), to waste, ys"
yqafifiivoi tial, ys/gafifiivoi, rjoav (jj 36),

Rebiark. The forms in -arm and .«t« are termed lomie. Before tl^ese
endings, a labial or palatal mute most be rough (^, ;^), and a lingual, middle (S) ;
as, from r^i^rai (r. t^***-), to turri^ {rir^aTt-vTeu) rtr^i^arat PI. Rep. 533 b ;
from ri.99m (r. r«^-)|r/o«arwzitae, {v'tray-vrett) t»t«;^«t«i iv. 8. 5, »t«t»;j^«t*
Th. vii. 4. . , V

3. In the Imperative, the shorter forms in -nwy and -a&np
(§ 177), which are termed Attic (§ 7), are the more common.
In Homer, they are the sole forms.

Note. In t^^v and Irttv (f f 55, 56), :he old plur. form has remained
without change.

§ 9 1 41. 1. Infinitive. The subjective ending, after -«*•
connective (§ 206. ft), has the form -v ; after -a- connective, -*
forming a diphthong with -u~ ; but, in other cases, -vat. ; as,
povXtii-H'V^ fiovXivo-H-v * PovXfVO-a-i ' /ieSovXevx-s-vai, povlsv^rj"
rai ' hrtd-vai, orii-vat, koTcl-vai (fl 48). See §§ 176, 183.

2. Participle. For the change of »' to a connecting vowel
in the Perf. act., see § 179. For the declension of the Paru,
see Ch. HI., and the paradigms (IT 22).

^ 31ff* Bemarks. I. For the reoulab affixbs of the verb,
whicn are those of the euphonic Pres. and Impf., and of the regularly formed
Fat., Aor., Perf., and Plup., see H 29, 30. These affixes are open in the
I*res. and Impf., and date in the other tenses. For the affixes of the Pres.
and Impf. of verbs ih -/m (§ 208. 2), see 5T 29, 30. The affixes of the
2d Aor. fct. and mid. are the same with those of the Impf. (§ 199. «), or,
except in the Ind., the same with those of the Pres. (§ 169. /3). The affix-
es of the other tenses denominated second (except the nude 2d Perf. and Plup.,
§ 186) differ from the regular affixes only in the tense-sign (§ 199. II.). The
Fat. Perf. or 3d Fut. has the same affixes with the common Fut. act. and
mid. (§ 179).

2. Special care is reqpiired in distinguishing forms which have the same
letters. In ptovXivM (55 34, 35), we remark (besides the forms which are the
nme in the Plur. and Du., § 212) the following: Ind. and Subj. ^tvXtvw
Y\it. Ind. and Aor. Subj. /3«vXivr«» • Ind. and Imp. ^•vXtdrt, ^0vxU%r4t • Ind.

Digitized

by Google

j l96 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION.— -CONTEACTION. [BOOK IIj

n. 3, and Part R. Dat. ^•vXtvtuwt, $ouXtvr»v^i • Imp. PI. 3, and Part PI
Gen. fi»vXtu»vT(UVt /Sai/Xf c/^avrwy, (itvKtv^ifTMV • Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, fi9U
Xti/f4, fiauXtvffu ' Subj. Act. S. 3, and Ind. and Subj. Mid. S. 2, ^ovXiwf • Fut
Ind. Mid. S. 2, and Aor. Subj. Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, ^»vXivv^ • Aor.
Imp. fiovXivcov, Fut. Part. fiouXtvc«9 • Opt. Act. S. 3, fiavkiwttty Inf. Act.
^•vXivaai, Imp. Mid. S. 2, /Sai/Xfi/rai.

3. With respect to the changes which take place in the root, or in the unioi^
of the affixes with the root, the tenses are thus associated : 1 . the Pres. and
Impf. act. and pass. ; 2. the Fut. act. and Mid. ; 3. the Aor. act. and mid.
4. the Perf. and Plup. act. ; 5. the Perf. and Plup. pass. ; 6. the Aor. and
Fut. pass. It will be understood, that whatever change of the kind mentione*!
above takes place in one of the tenses, belongs likewise to the &<^sociated tensi^,
if nothing appears to the contrary. For the Fut. Perf., see § 239.

II. Union of the Affixes with the Root

A Regular Open Affixes.

^ a 1 6. When the regular o^en affixes (^ 216. 1 )
are annexed to roots ending in a, f, or o, contrac-
tion takes place, according to the rules {W 31 - 37).
See the paradigms (HH 45-47).

Notes. «. Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed Cow-
tract Verbs, or, from the accent of the theme, Perigpomena, In distinction
from them, other verbs are termed Barytone Verbt. See Proeodj.

;3. The verbs x««, to bum, and kXom, to weep, which have likewise the
forms na'iM and xX«i«, are not contracted. Dissyllabic Verbs m -iai admit
only the contractions into u ; thus, 9fXm, to saU, v'Xiuf m-XtTg^ vXiii 9'Xu,
itXufttVf fl'Xifri ^XtiTt, 9rXi»u^t. Except ^i*>, to bi$ui; as, to ^ovv, rip levvr
PL Crat. 419 a, b.

y. The contract Ind. and Subj. of verbs m -«m» are throughout the same. *
See ^45. The contract Inf. in i^y is likewise written without the i subsc. ;
thos, rtfiZft as contr. from the old nfiatv (§§ 25. /3, 176, 183). So ^4Xu9,
InXouv may be formed from the old pxitv^ inXitv,

B. Regular Close Affixes.

§ 917. I. When the close affixes 9re annexed
to a consonant, changes are often required by the
general laws of orthography and euphony ; as,

^(^(pot (^ 36, root y^«^-) » y^lB^^«, lyf«^^•, yiy^m^peti (§ 51) ; yiy^m^m^
lytyea^tit (§ 61) ; yiy^afAfun^ yty^ttfAfM^of (§ 53) ; yty^at^rrm (§ 52)
yiy^a^hf yty^eiffv (§ 60). •

Xiivru (f 87, r. Xi*--, Xuir-) ; Ut/>^»»», X%i^iw»/Mtt (§ 52).

«'e«''*' (5 38, r. fl-fAy-); r^c^of, «-f«$fl^uM, W^atlafAnVy «>ir^«^« (§ 61)
^U^ax* (§ 61): wiv^M'-m W^eix^nt, lW<rg«;^;^i, vrtr^mx^m (§§ 62, 60)u

Digitized

by Google

CH. 9.] OTHEE EUPHONIC CHANGES. 197

" m'tiitt (^ 39, r. W-, Tfi^-) ; Ti/aM, Wfrti^tf MxticrPif 9ri'rt7^§mt (§ 55)
^ivrttftu (§ 61) ; vi^rtiJfMCif IfriniV/uify (-) 53); «-iTi<0'rai, Wtlff^nv (§ 52).

eiyyiXX*) (^41, r. ityytX-)'y JiyytXii, ayytkw/tmtf ^yyttXetf nyytiXtifin*
.5 56), iryyiX^t(§,60).

Remarks, m. In the liquid verbs »X/»m, to bend^ x^htt, to judge^ xTtivtt,
to sUti/, rtifVy to stretchy and frAi/v4v, to wash, » is dropped before the affixes
which retncdn close (§ 56), except sometimes in the Aor. pass, (chiefly in po-
etry for the sake of the metre) ; as, xcxXz/^ai, IkXI^v and UXi»^*}v, F. 360,
H. Gr. iv. 1. 30 ; »i»^i»«, »ix(4fMn, ix^i^m and £p. U(i»^*}y, N. 129.

jS. In other verbs, » characteristic, before ^, more frequently becomes *-, but
sometimes becomes f* or is dropped (§54) ; as, Ti(paff/Aett, <ri^«^ftivos (^ 42) ;
ra(0^(;v«, to exasperate, Pf. P. Part. ^a^M%vfA/Ai*»f or va^uj^o/iiv^t^

y. Before fn in the aflix, neither ft nor y can be doubled ; hence, xixaftfiat,
IXnXty/cau (^ 44), for xixetftftfiMi, iXfiXtyyfiets,

§ 318. II. Before the regular close affixes^ a
^wrt vowel is commonly lengthened ; and here d
becomes ij, unless preceded by «, t, p, or go
(^29); as,

Tt/uit^ (^ 45), rtfun^atf IrtfAfira, rtTtfAtixa, rtriftfiaai, Xrtftnin**

<Pikiti (^ 46), ^4X^«'«, ^tXnff6fjuti, <ri^ikfifi»ii irt^tXtiffofAeii,

iflXoM (^ 47), ^uXtfitf'tf, l^ffXAr^-^i^tfy, i^i)»X4w^i|y, ^nXv4vtr»/tMU

rtt0, to honor, poet., F. »■<*••», A. ttr^m, Pf. P. rirTftMu

^tm, to produce, F. ^V0'«, A. t^Sra, Pf. frS^i7xa.

i««», to permit, F. I«ir«, A. i?«ra (^ 189. 3), Pf. %!Axm,

^^mm, to hunt, F. ^(00*0, A. yn^dret, Pf rf/i}(«»a (§ 62).

Notes. «. X^ib**, to uMer an oracle, ^^Adfiat, to use, and nr^a/MvCr. r^a-),
to Acre, lengthen £ to n ; as, F. xz^^**^ x^n^'f^h 'r^^iw, 'Ax«««, to thresh,
with the oomm<m F. aXtnam, has also the Old-Att. etXoartt,

/3. In the Perf. of tw&a m -^, t is lengthened to u, instead of « (§ 29) ;
as, ri6u»m, rihtftMt (^ 50) ; ilxat, tJfitai (^ 54).

§910* Remarks. 1. Some verbs retain the short, vowel^
and others are variable ; as,

0'rim, to draw, F. r«-«^«r, A. Uvriwm, Pf. Uwiuu, Pf. P. Uwm^fuu (§ 22 r,
A. P. U^tifffi*,

rsXist, to finish, F. rtXi^m, rtXS (§ 200. 2), A. IriXi^m, Pf. nrf>4»«,
Pf. P. TtriXtr/MMs, A. P. IriXir^ifV.

^0«», to p&m^A, F. «(«r«, A. ^e*'*. A. P. Itfi^nf (Ion. Pf. P. Part A^fs^
ttUof, 2. 548, Hdt. iv. 97, § 191. 2).

Vu0, to bind, F. U^it, A. Uti^M, 3 F. Wn(r»fMu • Pf. )i)i»«, Pf. P. ^i^i^cmu
()i)i^^Mu Hipp.), A. P. i^i^it*.

^vm{'ii), to sacrifice, F. ^^«, A. tfiuira, A. M. US^^fAW Pf. ri#<;»«,
Pf. P. rUi/^/, A. P. Wth^ ( 62).

Notes. ». Verbs in -avvO/M and -twOfAt, and those in which the root enda

Digitized

by Google

198 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK 11.

in \A', for the most part retain the short rowel ; as, yiXatt, to h^h, F. vi*
kd^tfMU, A. lyiX&ra, A. P. lytXeifffn**

|S. The short vowd remains most frequently before ^, and least fiwqnentl^
before r. In the prrfect and pluperfect, it remain* more frequently in
the passive, than in the active voice.

^330. 2. In seven familiar dissyllables^ mostly imply-
ing motion^ f appears to have been once attached to the roo
(see ^§22. 5, 117):

Bi^ to run (r. ^F-), F. (^^if^t/imi) ^v0»/mu (^^%u0m only Lye. 1119). See
§ 166. «.

>!«» to swim, F. nuvtfuti^ -w/im (§ 200. 3), iy. 8. 12, A. fMvr«, Pf. tluoza,

v-kui, to udL, F. wXUtrm, commonly w-Xtt/rtf^uM, v. 6. 12, or vXtwrM/MM, v.
1: 10, A. WXtutret, Pf. «r«<rXii/*», Pf. P. v-itrXtu^ftm (§ 221).

«*»!*», to breathe, F. wnvff^»t, Dem. 284. 17, commonly wviuetfAtu Eur. Andr
5(5, or mtwv/tmt, ki. Ran. 1221, A. Ivrnvrtt, Pf. ^riinttma*

Add y%i, to flow, iM4A», to bum^ and »X»im^ to wetp,

391. IIL After a short vowel or ?l diphthongs
a is usually inserted before the regular affixes of the
Passive beginning with 0, ^, or r ; as,

tr^recM, to drtuo (§ 219), Pass. Pf. ftf-cra-ff--^*/, iwetveti, %99rm-fv»it U^ri-f'
fiiffu • Irvu-ff-fiivos • A. lr<ra-r-^nv • P. rvF»''r'fnirefAut.

rtXitt, to finish (§ 219), Pass. Pf. rtriXtefuti, rtviXttrfthtt • Hup. IrtnXi-
«/«})», iririXia-0, IrtriXttf-r* • A. tTtXir^nv • F. riXi^iir«^«.

xtXtvM, to command^ Pass. Pf. «ixiXi»rfMu, xtxiXivrrm, »t»fXiM/»lMf •
Plup. ixixiXivr^iiy • A. ixtXiv«-^)iir • F. ji%Xtuff6ft9tfun,

Remarks. «. In some verbs, <r is omitted after a «Aor/ ootrd or diphthong
in some it is insetted after a nm;?/^ iScm^ vowel; and some are variable ; thus,
n^o^fi*', VthfAMi, iiUtitf riffvfut^ irtfiriv (§219) ; fitSovXtuf*ai, tCtvkivfnv (^ Sb^ '
;^9A>, ft> heap up, xi^tffitau, i^^i'^nv • x^aofitu, to use, x%x,^n/Attt, \x^^90n*
ftifAVfifieu, to remember, Ifivw^nf • <rav»0, to stop, Tiwetuftas, ivetva-frif and Wau'
0fiv • peitvCfiti (r. p0-), to strengthen, tppatfctu, ifprna-^nv ' i^aet, to do, iii^afAMi
and yt^^ec^ficeu^ i^^g-^nv * B-^avt*, to dcuh, rii^tLvwiteu and rii^tiUfAmt, Mfttvtin^,
It will be observed that the «> is attracted most strongly by the affixes begin-
ning with d-.

^. Wben r is inserted in the Perf. and Plup., the Sd Pers. pi. wants the
simpl irm ; as, PL 3, UvawfAift tltri, xtxtXii/r^ivM ffr«v. See § 218. 2.

^ 333. IV. The regular close affixes are aa-
nexed with the irhsertion of ly,

1.) To double consonant roots, except those which end in a
labial or palatal mute not preceded by cr, and those which end
in a lingual mute preceded by v\ as,

aSI^-m (r. all'y ^ 43), aul-n-ft, nvi-n'f», ir»l^-ir-»«, ntl^-tr/MM, if^^-4-Ai»

Digitized

by Google

3H. 9.J BUPHONIC CHAKGBS* 199

tif^, te koO, F. li^«Mi, A. fy^n^M. i{ity to meO, F. iC<^«, A. «^if#«.

ftiXktf, to te about to, to purpose, to delay, F. ^ikX^^, A. i/tiXXnr* and
4/»iXXifr« (§ 189. 1).

Iffm, to ffo awa^ S. iffii^m, A. iffn^et,Tt HffnMM.

fiitrttst, to pasture, to feed, F. fit^Mn^m.

But >AfA9nt, to shine, F. yJitA^tt, A. 7x«^'\/^«, 2 Pf. XiXc/cv-m • 'e^^*) to
had, to rule, F. i^, A. ^ei** P^ P* ^nf*»h A. P. |^;t;^ii» • «•«•&»)«, to moib
a Ubaihn, F. (rv-iy^-r**, §§ 55, 58) fwu^t*, A. 7«-9Y4r», Pf. P. (ttrtnvhfun,
tfwtfffuu, § 53) iv^uffMu, A. P. \^^ur6nt, late Pf. A. i^iruMm*

2.) To /i^ut(2 roots in which the characteristic is preceded
Ly a diphthongs and to a few in which it is preceded by e ; as,

^yK»fMt, towm,¥. fietfX4^»fMt, Pf. ^CwXnfuu (Ep. S P£ /WC«vX« A. US),
A. lC«</Xf*#irv and iiUvkti^fif (§ 189. 1).

i^ftX*», and shortened S^ix«, to wish, F. i/t Xiitm and diXif****, A. nHktm and
i/iXifr«, Pf. nfiXn»», and l&te n^Xirx*.

AuX«, to concern, F. fAiXnrt, A. l/ciXff«'«, Pf. ^t^iXnxa (Ep. 2 Pf. as Pres.
/*VeirX«, B. 25), A. P. i/MXtf^iiv. This Ttrb is common^ used impenonalij :
f^\X^t, it concerns, ^iXifrii, &C.

^tM^, to remain, F. ^it*!, A. l/ftiif», 1 Pf. fuftimnm (cf. 54. y), 2 Pf. /»S-

»S^Mr, to distribute, F. M#Mf, and later n/A^i^m, A. Ivm^mi, P£ nv^s«, Pf. P.
Hfiftfifuu, A. P. Ivi^ii^ifv and Iftfii^nv (R. «).

3.) To a few other roots ; as,

)i«, to need; F. ^iifr*r, A. Hiti^u (^0-iv 2. 100), Pf. Witixtt • Kid. )i«/MM,
to fwcd; to 6c|r, F.'^tii^'c^i, Pf. UiinfMit, A. P. S^TiVn*. The Aot. is most eom-
mon as impersonal : hi, there is need, M^n, tUvfi, &c See E. y,

tSitt, to sleep, Impf. i^m and m^»f (§ 188. N.), F. tSin^st,

eJtfiai, to think, F. •m^t/juu, A. P. ^n^nv. When used parenthetically, the
1st PcArs. sing, of the Pns. and Impf. has the nnde forms Ji/MUi f/in»> In
fiom. we find the forms iU/Mu, Hm, tim (Dor. tlii Ar. Lys. 156), m^upmf,
mUint, with I commonly long. See R. y,

•txf*-^ to depart, to be gone (the Pres. having commonly the force of the
Perf.), F« tlj^nvtftMi, Pf. Jfj^nfuu^ and poet. m;^a»»« or f^micm (R. fi) Soph*
Aj. 896 (t;t;*>»<» ^ ^^^)*

«-«/«», to <trifte, F. e-ciV**, in Att. poetry vctt^trm, Ar. Nub. 1125, A. fnurc,
PL xrkxtunm, A. P. imirfnt*

REifAJtKa •• In a few verbs, « is inserted instead of « (c£ 219) ; as,
ix^9fiun, to be vexed, F. A^^^fAm, A. P. iix^irin*.

fUx^puUf to ./^S?*** F« iMtx^'*"^^ iMtx,wiMu (§ 200. 2), A. i/««;(;fr«S^j|», Pt
fi.iftAxnfuu (Ion. #Mt;^Stf^4, Hdt. vii. 104, F. fia;^rt9t/j^$ A. 298).

^. In a very few verbs, we find the insertion of « or *». See •Ixfttu
(3. above), fftvOpu, Uitm, Aym, t1ti4u (in the two last the inserted vowel even
fveoedes Uie characteristic).

y. In most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake of
^mphon^. That the vowel should be commonly n, rather than %, results firom

Digitized

by Google

200 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK II

§ 218. In Vitt, to need, and «7«^mm, fo thimi, there «pjpean to hire been onot
a digamma, of which we find traces in the Homeric (}if»/uu) hv*fuu, ^unir**
fuiij iiivfif»t And in the long t of itofuu,

^ 333. V. In a few liquid root^, metathesis
takes place before the terminations that remain
dose (^ 56), to avoid the concurrence of conso-
nants (^ 64, 3) ; as,

^XXm (r. fimX'f tnuup. fiXa-), to Arow, F. fimXS, and m Att. poetry Ux
X^m (§ 222), Ar. Yesp. 222, 2 A. IC«X«f, Pf. i3sCXii«« (§ 218), Pfl P. 0t-
CXnfuit, 3 F. fitCkti^»fMu, A. P. IC>.i)#ffy.

M^^f jw (r. ««^, transp. ^fut-), to labors to be weary, F. mmftrnftmi, 3 A. l»m
jMff, P£ »iitft,ntt**

C. Verbs in -/if.

(For the paradigms, see ITT 48-57.]

^834. I. Before the nude affixes^ the char-
acteristic SHORT VOWEL (^^ 183, 208, 2) is
lengthened (a becoming i^; unless preceded bj p,
^ 29 ; and /, «e),

1.) In the Indicative singular of the present

and IMPERFECT ACTIVE,

Thus, Xarriiii, (H 48; r. ai«-), wjTijr' T/^iy^f (H 50; r. ^«-),
itl&fip* dldatfu (H 51 ; r. ^o-), ididtov ddxvvfii (If 52; r. ^etjc-,
dBixvv-)j idtUvvv • fl/it (fl 56 ; r. **-), «I, da*.

S,"^ In the SECOND aorist active throughout,
except before vx (^ 183).

Thus, loTijy, soTfifier, arrj&ij ajiJTttactv^ oTfjpai * orairaiy,
(ora-i'Tj) OTof^ • an^fid^ay (fl 57 ; r. Sga-)^ anodqStvai ' typwp
(II 57 ; r. y»'0-), c/yaijuey, Byvmor^ yy«3^*, yv£vai ' yvovxwv^
{yponq) yvovq.

Exception. Tlie short rowel remmnsj in the 2 Aor. of rihifUy ^/^m^m, and
Ts^ except in the In£) where it is changed into its correspon^ng diphthong
(§ 29) ; thus, Uifitw, ^U, ^Tfcu, {^i'tTf) ^tif • Sf)«^i», ^, iuitmt, (}i-*Ts)
iwt • ff/cciv (5 54 ; r. i- ; for the augment, see § 1 89. S), If, i7v«m, (I-vrf)
«7f (fbr the Sing, of these Aorists, see § 201. 3). Except, also, the poeU
tmrkf and «Zra9, *

3.) In a few middle forms, mostly j^o^iic.

Thus, dV^rifini (r. 5/^f-), to seek; ovlvTjfti^ /o profit^ 2 A. M
bwrifitir^ and later wvuftrip ' nlfinXTjf4i^ to jli/, 2 A. M. poet

Digitized

by Google

•)H. 9.] VERBS IN -/I*. 201

§ 285« 11. If the characteristic is e, o, or v, the singidar
of the IMPERFECT ACTIVE is comiTionly formed with the con*
necting vowel (§ 185. /J) ; thus, dri&sov^ contr. iii&ow^ iu&ss^
itl&sig^ hi&ie hi&Bi ' ididoov ididovv idsixwov (JI^j 50-52).

Remark. In like manner, the regular affixes sometimes take the place of
the nude, in other forms, particolariy in verbs in -vfn^ which may be regarded
as having a second but less Attic theme in -vm (§ 1 85. «) ; thus, hixtu/Ai and
iti»9Vt0f itixvS^t and ttiJtvvu, ihtixvvtrmv and ihtixfveVf tttxyv§ and iuxfvtuu

§ 296. m. Subjunctive and Optative. 1. In the
Subj., verbs in -/it differ from other verbs only in the mode of
contracting -ari and -otj (§§ 33, 37. 3) ; thus, faia-ai tatuj
iata-jjg Un^g ' latd-tofiai iatcafiai^ iatd^ii latfj ' ri^i-m Tt^w,

dido-ijg did^g ' dido-ta^ai diddi/iaiy dido-tf didat * detxvv-(a^ dsixvv^
ttuai ' i-a (tf 56). If, however, q precede -«iy, the contraction
is into a ; as, anodgag (fl 57).

2. Verbs in -Wjui have a second form of the Opt. act. in
-^97v, H hich is most frequent in late writers, but is not confined
to them , as, aAwij I 183 {dXolrjv X. 253), /Jt^'ijy Ar. Ran. 177
(the other form is not used in this word, perhaps to avoid con-
fusion with the Att. Pres. opt, § 205. 2), /Ji^ij PL Gorg. 512 e.

3. In the Opt. mid., «*, if not in the initial syllable^ is often
changed before the flexible ending into oi^ in imitation of verbs
in -0) ; thus, n^olfitiv^ Xolfitiv (^^ 50, 54), and the compound
forms, ini&olfAfjv^ aw&olfifjPy i. 9. 7, Jigoolfitjv^ lb. 10. So even
xgifioiade for xQifiaia^s^ Ar. Vesp. 298 ; fnxgvolfn&a for fiag^
vaifif&a^ I. 513 ; and a<ploiT8 for aq>Unt^ PI. Apol. 29 d.

4. In a few instances, verbs in -vfu^ instead of inserting a connecting vowel
in the Subj. and Opt., simply lengthen the y (cf.,^ 177) ; as, ^mtxiiitw^t,
tix^xiirnvturat for iteta-xi^ectvui^, iiet^xiietvvvn'reiti Pl< Phaedo, 77 b, d; vny^Br^
for irti'yvu»$T«, lb. 118a. Add the poet. Ixiufin* II. 99, (pun Theoc. 1 5. 94,
taivOrt fl. 665, ^«iirtf«r« (for -Sfri) #. 248 ; and the similarly formed ^ifftn*
«. 51, ^^T0 X. S30.

§ 227. IV. Second Aorist. The 2 Aor. from a pure
root retains the primitive nude form^ whatever may be» the
form of the theme (§ 185. y) ; as, Iffiyy, am'dguv^ syviav^ sdCr

(115"^,.

Notes. «. Except ?«•««» (cf. $$ 205, 208. 2, S), which yet has the Imp.
tr70t,

fi, A few roots are transposed, in order to admit the nude form ; thus,
j»ikX»fiuny to dry «p, 2 A. (r. ^xak-, rxX*-) IrsXift, Opt, rxXmint, Inf. rxXir
MM Ar. Vesp. 160.

y. We add a list of nnde 2 Aorists, which may not be hereafter mentioned :
nXmv, to break, 2 A. Part xX^t AnacT. Fr. 16 ; xXw, to hear, poet 2 A.

Digitized

by Google

5^03 AFFIXES OF C »NTUGATION. [sbOK II

Imp. kXj^s a. 37, Eur. Hipp. 872, »xS^i B. 56, JEach, Cho. 399, rednpL
»U\G6t K. 284, xixkvrt F. 86 ; Xi/«, to loote, 2 A. M. xtftnv <I». 80, xir9
114, )JvT« H. 16 ; ^vu^ to produce, 2 A. ipvv, Cyr. u. 1. 15, 8ubj, ^um, OpL
^vnv (§ 226. 4), /n/. ^?v«j, Fart. ^vg.

RKMARK8 UPON PaBTICULAB YeRBS.

0fltdi to say,

(IT 53.1

^ 3S 8* (a) In certain connections, ^d^/^ f^n*, and \^n are shortened,
for the sake of vhacity, to VA ^') ^nd JT * thus, jft S* t^'^^, mnd /, Ar. £q. 634 ;
iV U, Mdd he, PI. Rep. 327 b, c; S, he qtake, A. 319; ««7, 4^i, «-«r, ^eu,
hoy I I toy, boy! boy! Ar. Nub. 1145. (6) The 2 Pen. sing, of the Ptres.
ind. is commonly written ^^t, as if contracted from ^m/#. For t^ntrfia, m
the Imp., see § 182. (c) To the forms in the table, may be added the Ep.
Pres. M. PI. 2 ^«r^i x. 562, Imp. ^Ao «•• 168, ^r^A» v. 100, ^cM I. 422
{Inf. ipiviett A. 187, -^Isch. Pors. 700); Pf. P. S. 3 wi^mrm Ap. Bh. I.
088, Fart «ii^«#/<$i«f, H. 1?7.

Ifjfih to send,

[ff 64.J

^ 839* (a) Many of the forms of this verb occur only in compooi*
tion. (b) Of the contract forms ««« and ItTtn (for 7«-»ri, il^n, §58), the
former is preferred in the Attic, and the latter in the Ionic, (c) T^e Impf.
form hiv, which occurs only in composition (v^^mv i. 88, rjfUiv PI. Euthyd.
293 a), seems either to have come from h* (which is of doubtful occurrence)
by precefsion^ or to have been formed after the analogy of lug, 7i/» or of th )
Plup. (d) For the Opt forms UifAWf and UfAn*, the latter of which can be
employed only in composition, see § 226. 3« (e) In the diidect8> we find
forms from the simpler themes ^ and tut * thus, Impf. Ivmp A. 273, Imp.
IvM Theog. 1240, Pf. P. Part. ^v*»ri^w«# Hdt. v. 108 (§§ 69. a, 192. 3;
cf fttfAihtxet, Anacr. Fr. 7S) ; Pr. avittrat Hdt. ii. 165. In the S. S. w«
find ti<pu Mk. 1. 34, &^uf Rev. 2. 20, Pf, P. k^imvrm Mt 9. 2, 5.

Elfd, to he.

rirss.i

§ 330* In the Present and Imperfect of this verb, the
radical syllable ^-,

1.) Before a vowel ^ unites with H ; thus, {i-v<n^ iSatj § 58)

2.) Before yi, becomes o (cf. §§ 203, 20^ ; thus, (t-vxg^
O'vrgy § 109) wv. Imp. {e-vrnv) ovrnv (less used than tie other
forms, PI. Leg. 879 b).

3.) In other csises, is lengthened^ as follows.

«.) It becomes u* m the forms i^ iT#, iT, JtM (cf. §§ SI 8. A, 224. £)•
The form iT, both here and in ^ 56, is either shortened from Jf (which ia iMft
used by the Attics), or is a middle form employed in its stead.

fi.) In the remaining forms of the Pres., it assumes «• (comparo § 221) ;

Digitized by VjOOQIC

GH. 9.J COMPLBTE T£lf«E8. 203

thxm, l-r-/ftl», l-r-rl, l-e-^if, l-rMw, t-f-^m^mtf Uw-rmv (§213. N.). After
the r, the r in the 3d Pers. smg. is retained ; thus, i-r-r/. Before the #, i in
tiie 2d Pers. smg. of the Imperative becomes ibj precession (cf. $ 118);
thns, 7-^ti,

y.) In the Impf. it becomes n, and may likewise assume r before r ; thns,
h, ^r% or rather ^-r-n. The Old-AU. f&rm of the 1st Pers. ^ {Ai, Av. 1 363),
and the Sd Pers. jr»» appear to have been contracted from ^m, and Hit (cf. $ 1 79,
fiOl. N., SIl. N.). For il^U, see § 182. The middU form 4/»*f» is little
nsed bf the more classic wiitan (pyr* vL 1. 9). Hm Imp. iir«, which foDowi
the analogy of the Impf., occurs but once ia the classic writers (PI. Rep.
36 1 c), and is there doubtfuL

Remarks, a. In the Put., ha^ead of U%rtuy the Attics always use the
Kudt form Urm.

b. Some regard the root of this verb as being U-, and adduce in support of
this view, the Lat. (e»mn) smm, «t, mi, (e)giimu$t mim, (e)timt, tmd tbi dan-
acrit u$mi» tuL oitL &o»

ElfUj to go.

[If 66.]

^ 33 1* (a) The Pres. of iT/m has commonly in the Ind., and some-
times hi the ottier modes, the socise of the Fnt. (§ 200. b) ; tiius, itui, (/ am
fomg) I w^ go, {b) For fuf, in the Plup., the commion Attic form was fm^
which appears to be a remnant of the old formation noticed in § 203. K. ' A
Perf. sTk, oorrespon(fing to this Plup., nowhere appears, and some regard Hu*
(omitting the < subec.) as an Impf. doubly augmented (^ 1 89). For the use
of this tense, see § 233. (c) For Jm^ and Uinr, see § 205 ; for 7fwf, § 213.
K. ; for avAi, iiif, and iitratf, § 208. 2 ; for fuf^m, ^ 182 ; for jfm in the
Sd Persn § 21 1. N. ; for f^it, fri, &a, ^ 237. {d) The middle fomu U/Mtt,
liftnf are regarded by seme of the best critics as incorrectly written for IiJimm,
iifAn*, from 1n(u (^ 54).

Kfifiaiy to lie down,
[Tea]
% 333* (a) This verb appears to be contracted from »(i/mm, a de-
ponent inflected like rfitfuu (5 50) ; thus, »««/mm mT/mm, mUfrm t$t!frmt, sito
jmT^'*, nUtrtm tuSfitUi Miftt^t »»/|^ 9H • l»9if$m Uttiftn* • mtifcfcm »%i^fuu%
In the Subj. and Opt. the contraction is commonly omitted ; thusi «U^mm,
(Ec 8. 19, xtM^irv, iy. I. 16, like rtfUfuu (also accented riitfAm) and rtfio'f
ftnt * yet «irr«4 (also written MtiTot), for »ifi«-M, T. 32, /3. 102. (6) The
Subj. sometimes retains the form of the Ind. (§ 177) ; as, Subj. ^sdrnttfuu PI.
Ph»do, 84 e. (c) We find the following forms in the dialects, some of which
bare the shorter root »i- : Pres. S. 2 Mt7»t Hom. Merc 254, S. 3 mUrat Hdt
iri. 139, PL S ziatrat X. 510, »ti»Ttu H. 527, s(««-«i A. 659, Hdt i. 14;
Impf. PL 3 Uumrt Ap. Rh. 4. 1295, »f/«r« f. 418, !»(««« Hdt. L 167, mUr*
K. 763 ; Fut. »w%vfutt Theoe. 3. 53 (§ 200. 3); old Pres. as Fut (§ 200. b)
AIM, n. 342, Mtiat r* 340. (d) Some of the best grammarians regard MtTfmt
as a Perfl having the sense of the Pres. (§ 233).

D. CJoMPLBTE Tenses.
^333* I. Id some verbs, the sense of the complete

Digitized

by Google

2M AFFIXES OF CONJltoATIOlf. [bOOK !i*

tenses, by a natural transition (see S3mtax), passes into that of
other tenses ; and the Perfect becomes, in signification, a
Present ; the Pluperfect, an Imperfect^ or Aorist ; and the
Future Perfect, a common Future. Thus, loirifii (51 48), to
station^ Pf. l<jTi?xa, (/ have stationed myself) I standi Plup. iari;
xfir, I stood^ F. Pf. l<rri}3o>, I shall stand ; fiifivrioxtay to remind,
Pf. P. fjiifivtifiai^ {I have been reminded) I remember ^ Plup. i?/i«-
/ifif/iiyy, J remembered^ F. Pf. fie/Ari^oofiai, I shall remember ;
Plup. ^^sii' (fl 56), Jt(>en«.

Remark. In a few of these verbs, ihe Pres. is not nsed, and the Pbrf. is
regarded as the theme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the theme,
are termed PBETBRmvB. See ^^ 58, 59.

§ 984. II. Modes. 1. The Perfect Subjunctive and
Optative are commonly supplied by the Participle with the
auxiliary verb tifii (fl 55, ^ 169. /?) ; thus, Pf. Act. Sulj. /Jc-
SovUvntag co. Opt. fliSovXBVxwg tifjv ' Pf. P. Subj. (itSovUvfiivog cJ,
Opt, fii6ovX$vfiivog etfiv,

Rbmabks. «. Sometimes, however, the Perf. /bmu these modes according
to the general roles (§ § 204, 205, &c.), chiefly when it is employed as a
Pre$.; as, imf««, vi. 5, 10, Irw, PL Gorg. 468 b, Wrmifif, T. 101 (^ 48),
^iTthin* (§ 205. «), hVm (5 58), Rep. Ath. 1. II ; tlXtt^mrn PL Pot
269 c, 9%9rm»9i V. 7. 26, /3i€>j(«0ii» Th. ii. 48, vtivrtnxM Id. viii. 108.

/3. In the Perf. pas$.y these modes are formed in only a few pure verbe,
and in these without a fixed analogy ; thos,

»«Xi«, to call I Pf. P. MxXnfMth J Aow ^««> eaBed, I am named. Opt.
(xixXffUfHii) Mixk^/Aiivt »i»kif Soph. Ph. 1 1 9, xi»Xifrtt &c.

xT^t/iatf to acquire; Pf. xixTfifMu, I have acquired^ I possess^ Subj. (xixrc-
u-ftmt) xtxrHfAMif xtxrpf xiXTnrmt Symp. 1.8; Opt. {xtxTti-i-fcnv) xixrfftnPy
xfxrt)«, xixryr* PI. L^. 731 C, or {xtxreft^fim) xixrifftnt, »i»r^«, xixrur*
Ages. 9. 7.

ftifinifuu (§ 23.3), Subf. ^i^n^/mm, PL Phil. 31 Ay •Opt. i^t^t^fAnt H. 74.5,
fMfttnrt Ax, Vint, 991, w ^i^v^^jfn, ftt/t.vf» (or /t.i/t9M») L 7. 5, /ttfi^Sre
Cyr. L 6. 3.

For xitnfun, see If 59. Add 5^;. fitCxMt Andoo. 22. 41, rtr^ff##tf» PL
Rep. 564 c ; 0/)<. XfX?T# r. 238 (cf. § 2'26. 4).

§ 333. 2. The Perfect, in its proper sense^ may have the
imperative in the Sd Pers. pass. ; but, otherwise, this mode
belongs only to those Perfects which have the serise of the
Pre^. ; and, even in these, the Imperative active is scarcely
found except in the nude form of the 2d Perf (§§ 237, 238) ;
yet nvatyf^ xexgd/tte (§ 238. /J), yfyavs Eur. Or. 1220, /Jctfij-
x«Tw Luc. de Hist. Scrib. 45, ioixhm lb. 49. •

§ 336. in. Vowel Changes. The affi.xes in -a, -nn of

Digitized by VjOOQIC

CH. 9.] COMPLBTfi TENSES. 206

the Second Perfect and Pluperfect are annexed with the
following changes in the preceding syllable.

1.) e becomes o, and n becomes ot ; as, fisva, to remain^
2 Pf. fiifiora * diyxofiai^ to 566, poet, dsdoQxa ' X$inoty IsXoma
(fl 37) ; n$l&a, ninoida (U 39).

Notes, (a) The same changes take place in the Ist Perf. and Flap,
of a few verbs ; as, «Xi«'r«», to steai^ »i»Xo^a • rfivfj to *«m, rir^o^a • vifA*
«r«, to send, vmfi^m • 'hiluxct (^ 58). (6) Analogous to the change of i
into «, is that of n into •$ in fytyvvfju, to break, 2 Pf. iffttyet. (c) In the fol-
lowing Perfects, there appears to be an inseition of # or •» (§ *22i>. fi) : &yat,
to lead, ayn»x» (^ 191. 2), Dem. 239. 1. Uft»t, to eat, iUlojKt, iv. 8. 20 (Ep.
Pf. P. iJ«3«^«i, X' 56), «W« (r. U'\tobewont, preteritive, o'!x»'*» (§ 22i :J).
{d) In the following dialectic forms, the change or insertion of vowels has
extended to the patthe : it^ittvrttt (§ 229. e) ; it^v y. 272, Theoc. 24. 43,
for Ht^Tt or if^Ttf, Phip. S. 3 of ai/(*> or «?'(«», to raUe; inix'^To li. 340, Plup.
PI. 3 of Uix" ' i^^'>/*»t (N. c).

2.) Short o, I, or u, before a single consonant^ is lengthened
(a, not preceded by e or ^, § 29, becoming jj) ; as, (puiro)^ ns-
<pi?i'« (H 42 ; r. (pav-) ; ^dUo), <o bloom^ Tt^i^ka • ayvifii (r. «/-),
to breaky %uya * x^a^ai, nixqaya (^ 238. /?) ; xcx^(/nr (r. x^(/ ),
to creaky pret. ; fivxtiofiai (r. ^vx-), to bellow^ fiifivxa.

Exceptions. After the Attic rednplication, the short vowel remains ; as,
KiiXvlai (§ 191. S). In xirjKw (r. Xcx-), to Mmiu^, « is not changed into ir
in the Att ; thos, 2 Pf. x.ix£»a, Ar. Ach. 410 (XtXuxo, X. 141).

§98 7. IV. Nude Forms. In the Second Perfect and
Pluperfect, the connecting vowel is sometimes omitted in the
Indicative plural and dual (^ 186). When this omission takes
place, (a) the Ind. sing, is commonly supplied by forms from
a longer base (cf. § 201. N.); which forms likewise occur in
the plural and diudy but less frequently ; (b) the Subj., Opt.,
Imp., and Inf. are formed after the analogy of verbs in -/i* ;
(c) the Part, is contracted, if the characteristic is a or o.
Thus,

Pf. Ind. Sing. Urtixm (^ 48 ; r. ^rm-, base l^r«-, prolonged to lrri»»-,
§ 186), Uni»»frt^rfixt, PL trTd-fAiv PI Gorg. 468 b, and rarely Urii»a^iv,
t^ri^t, (trr«-fri, Xrra'ttet^ § 58) \0rei01 (i^rnxtfri A. 434) ; Subj. (Ivra-J)
UrZ, and Iff-nix** • Opt Irvainv (poet.) ; Imp. Uri-ft (poet) Ar. Av. 206 ;
Inf. Wrifms iv. 7. 9 ; Part Ep. Irra-tif, -irot T. 79 (also Urnt^s Hes. Th.
519), commonly oontr. Xwrif (^ '22. 8) i. 3. 2, (lrT«-fl-<rr«) i^r«lr«, (Itf-rae-
«-f) \rrt»t and sometimes, by syncope, \»rcs PL Parm. 146 a, Ion. \9Tu*i
(§ 48. 1), .^r«f Hdt li. 38 ; also UrmUts PL Meno, 93 d. Plup. Sing, i^rn-
»tn or iiVnfJKiif, -ij#, -i/, P/. t^ru-fttf, t^rA-rt, X^rA-trat L 5. 1 3 (irTi{»ir«»
Cyr. Tiii. 8. 9).

i^rxM, to die (r. ^«»-, ^»«-, § 64), Pf. Ind. ^injr. ti^»»j»« (base n^v«-,
ri^vn*.), ^f, -I, FL riitm/itt PL Gorg. 492 e, rifpari, rtfvin It. 2. 17, />«.
ri#»«r«» iv. 1. 19 ; Suhj. rt^9n»»t, Th. viii. 74 ; Opt. rt^tminf, Cyr. iv. 8. 3 ;

18

Digitized

by Google

20l') AFFIXKS OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK II

Imp. rUfm^i X. 865, rt0*dTt0 PI. Leg. 933 e, &o. j Inf n^Straw Mem. i. %
16, Ttivfixitat Soph. Aj 474, and Poet. (Tf^i»«-«.i'ai) Ttfititai JEach. Ag. 539
Part, ri^mw (fern. J. 734), r%hS.-vt^ Find. Nem. lO. J 39, commonly contr.,
with « inaerted (cf. §§ 3«, 4^. l)» n^M^^. -i5#«, '«;i or .«^ vii. 4. 19, r. 331,
£p. rt^yiMvi or ri^»ii4v^, ^r^f or -«<rtff, «. 289» P. 435. Plup. Sing. IrtStfi'
muff 'USt '*h ^^' ififvttf***, 'Ti, -r«y H. Gh% tL 4* 16.

PC Ind. Sing. m*iM Cyr. i. 4. 12, and )i^i« Soph. (Ed. G. 1469 (^ 58 ,
base ^1^/-, hhtK'), Vthsxmf and ^i^Mf , ^Hmxi and ^t^n • Fl ^/^it Th. liL 53,
^i^ri, ()i)<y0-i» § 58) ^i^ari PL ApoL 29 a ; Stibj. Witt • Imp. ^<^/^i Ar.
"^esp. 373 ; Inf. ^i^atM (§ 208. 3) Rep. Ath. 1. 11, and h'^otxiyat Eur. Sup.
548 ; Part, h'^mt PI. Prot. 320 a (contr. or sync. h/^uTat Ap. Rh. 3. 753),
and WMKsit Eur. Ion, 624. Plup. Sing. ihhtMuv PL Charm. 175 a, and
*MUn, 'Utt 'U • PL *%iiiifAt9y Ui^iri, iititfat PL Leg. 685 C (Ui^MSf^Av ilL
5. 18).

Pf. Ind. Sing. <31« (^ 58 ; base 1*^, «j'^), «?r^a (for «n-r^«, § 182 ; «!)«»
scarot occurs m the Att, yet Eur. Ale. 780 ; the Att. poets, by a mingling
of forms, sometimes use •tv^ms Eur. Ion, 999), «Di • PL (T^^iv, § 53) 7rp*f
ii. 4. 6, (7^«-i, § 52) /rrf, (^^vr/, the I becoming f in imitation of the other
persons) Udirt, and rarely •t^fA%t PL Ale. 141 e, tfT^n, •Tim^f Imp. (T^^j)
7^^4 ii. 1. 13. Plup. Sing. Hiuf, PL fhifitt. Sec, and poet, (^/km) ftrfut Eur.
Hec 1112, (p-rt) fim, (^W«f) fr«y .£sch. Prom. 451.

Plup. Sing, fkt* (^ 56), ^lif, jIm, i% jfttftn, -n, commonly ^» PL Bepw
328 b, frt vii. 7. 6, ^trjM Cyr. iv. 5. 55, sometimes Ion. J^ttv r. 445, Hdt.
ii. 163.

§ S3 8. In the following examples, the nude forms are
chiefly poetic, and, in part, Epic only.

«. PXTRE. &^i9Tm»t, to dine ; Pf. PL I fi^UvUfut Ar. Fr. 428, Lsf. H^t^ttm
Ath. 423 a. In imitation of these comic forms, we find also, from iuw/ut, te
tup, tthi99&/Ai9 and hhivviimi Ath. 422 e, Ar. Fr. 243.

fietifntf to go; Pf. (iiCtixei. (r. (itt-), 2 Pf PL poet. ^iCetfAttf ^iZari, (itCadn
B. 134, 3«f«(fi» Soph. El. 1386 ; Subj. PL 3 ^if«/i PI. Fhaedr. 252 e ; Inf.
^iZivai Eur. Heracl. 610, Hdt. iii. 146 , Part Ep. jStfo^f, -!/?«, -«^«f, E.
199. n. 81, Att. contr. ^if«#, -*!#«, -M^r^f, Soph. Ant. 67, 996, (Ed. C. 314,
H. Gr. vii. 2. 3, PL Phcdr. 254 b. 2 Hup. PL ICifa^t*, -An, -<r#«f B. 720.

^t^^^trxm, toMti XVt /3iCe«'«« (r. f^*-), 2 Pt Part {^^t-^i) ^S^,
'Sroe, Soph. Ant 1022.

yiyvafiect (r. y«-, yi»-, yiyt-), to become ; 2 Pf. tyiyovu, poet iV. 2 ytyauiTt
(Ep. for yiy&Ti) Horn. Batr. 143, 3 ^ty^^tf'/v A. 41 ; Inf. yiyeifiiv (Ep.
for yiy«i»aM) E. 248 ; Part Ep. ytyMf, -u7et, -tirot, V. 1&9, I. 456, Att
contr. yiyMti -»i(rat, -ttrcft Eur. Ale 532, 677. Plup. Du. 3 yiytirny ». I .^8

(AifMvet (r. ftM', Miv-, § 236. \), to be eager, pret, E. 482, f*ifA4vets iEsch.
Sept 686, ftifAon Soph. Tr. 982, PL /«t/««^i» I. 641, /tM/*«rt H. 160, fu-
fieimft R. 208, Du. fiiftavot 0. 413 ; Imp. S. 3 /itfAirat A. 304 ; Part /m*
fn&mi 'vTm, 'tHroi, A. 40, 440, 0. 118, and fitueUigy 'irtf, II. 754, B
818. Plup. PL 3 fii/ui^m9 B. 863.

Ttvrtf, to fall; 1 Pf. vivrtxet (r. «•«-, <rT#-) ; 2 Pf. Part.Ep. «^irri«f
'£rt, O. 503, and ^t^rrfms, •!/;«, -ir^j and -«r#f, ». 98, Ap. Rh. 2. 832
Att contr. «r««rrjwf, -«rr«f, Soph. Ant 697, 1018.

rirX»»»« (r. TX4i-), to Acer, pret, P/. rtrXm^it y. 311 ; Imp. rirXmii A.

Digitized

by Google

01... 9.] €OK?LKT£ XETiSfiS. S67

586 ; Inf. TgrXafAtf (Ep. for rtrkdveu) y. 209; Part, rirkn^s^ -i/7«, -«m.
w, 23, E. 873.

/5. Impure. In the nnde, fonns of the fifst four verbs mentioned below,
r passes mto h<t after the analogy either of the 2d Pers. sing., or of the
•bJKtim iaflectioii.

ivetyetf to commandy poet, preteritive, PL awy/Lnv Horn. Ap. 528 ; Imp.
avetyi Eur. Or. 119, and &vti>x^t Id. Ale 1044, kvttyirv /3. 1 95, and (»iwy«-*>)
l*ix^t0 A. 189, PL aviyirt >^. 132, mtatx^i Eur. Here. 241.

K^ot^t, commonly 2 Pf Kin^&ytt, to cry; Imp. jtix^ax^t Ar. Yesp. 198,
FZ. tcttt^ayirt lb. 4 1 5, and Jtkn^etx^i Ar. Ach. 335.

• Syi/^w, 4t> rotMe; 2 Pf. iy^vyt^ • Imp. PZ. 2 Xy^v^yt^h 2. 299 ; Inf. i^^n*-
yo^0at (as if from iy^vy^^fMu) K. 67.

Teifx**t to suffer ; 2 Pf ir<T«v^«, -P/. 2 («r«<rflf^ri, «'ir0i>rri, § 52, wi^tvTi^

1 55) «'i«-»^^ r. 99, «. 465.

fwjMB, to bt Wte, pret. (base uV, l«»-, §^ 191. 3, 236. l), PL trag. I«<y^»
Soph. Aj. 1239, Du, Ep. i;«r#y J. 27, Plup. «f*rn» A. 104.

hX'^f*^*^ *ocome; 2 Pf. lAiiXi/^a, Ep. PZ. 1 tlXnXwfifctv (§ 47. N.) 7. 81.

v-ivM^M, to <nw^ (^ 39 ; base ff-iW-, wntui-, 9t9^t0-, § 236. 1 ) ; Im]L
trag. irUuttt .^sch. Earn. 599 ; Plnp. Ep. PL 1 Iv-i^r/^^iy B. 341.

^339* v. FxTTURE Perfect, or Third Future. The
Put. Perf. unites the hose of the Perf. with the c^es of the
tui, act. and mid. ; as, (laTi^x-ao), fl 48) I(jt^^, {y^yftafp-oofim^
\^ 36) yfyQoiipofim.

Rehabks. 1. The Fat. F^. is scarcely found in Uquidjretha, or in verbs
.eg^ning with a vowel (9np6^nfiau Find. Nem. 1. 104, tl^^a-aftMi, 5 ^8, Cyr.
vii. i . 9), and is f^nent in those verbs only in which it has the seme of the
eommon future (§ 233).

2. (a) Of the Fut Perf act, l^e only examples in Attic prose are hrvniit
and ri^vii^M, both formed from Perfects having the sense of the Pres., U»rn»»
and ri^Mixa (§§ 233, 237), and both giving rise to middle forms of the same
signification (§ 166. 2), Irni^fl^MM and rt^tn^tf^MB/. (b) Other examples of a
reduplicated Fat. in the active voice are rtv^wtt Ar. Pax, 38 1 , and the Ep.
itxetx,^^»»i Horn. Merc 286, Mtxniwmj p. 153, vtmHft X. 223, «i;^«^«^A»,
O. 98 (also »f;^«^ifr0^4, y^. 266), all fh)m verbs which have reduplicated

2 Aorists (§ 1 94. 3). (c) Other examines of the Fut Perf. ndd, with the
Perf. cui.f are xixXayy^ »%xXtiyl^»fMu Ar. Yesp. 930, xix^Myet, xtx^al«fuu
Ar. Ran. 265, «i»ii^«, xtxainv^ftai, 0. 353. (d) An example of a redupli-
«ated Fat mid. with a reduplicated 2 Aor. is vri^tinrtfAeuy 0. 215.

§ 940. VI. The student will observe, in respect to the
complete tenses, the following particulars, which are far more
striking in the Act. than in the Pass, voice (§ 256) ; 1. their
defective formation ; 2. the entire want of these tenses in many
verbs ; 3. the comparative infrequency of their use ; and 4. their
more frequent occurrence in the later than in the earlier
writers.

Digitized

by Google

208 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [bOOK U.

DLAXECTIC FORMS.

A, Contraction.

§ S 411 • Forms which are contracted in the Att. (and which are alat
commonly contracted in the Dor., but often with a different vowel of contrac-
tion) mure frequently remain uncontracted in Ion. prose, while the Ep. has
great freedom in the employment of either uncoiitractedy contracted^ or variously
protracted forms. Here belong, Ontract Verbs in .«*>, -lar, and-«M (^ 216)^
the Uquid, Att., and Dor. Fut. (§ '200), the Aor. Pass. Sabj. (§ 199), the
Subj. of Verbs m -fii (§ 226), and the 2d Pers. Sing, in -tu and -« (§ 210
S). In these forms, the first vowel is either (I.) a, (II.) i or i}, or (UL) e^
Of these, i or fi is far the most frequently uncontracted.

§ 343* I. TTte first vowd a. (a.) In the Ion., the « is commonly
contracted or changed into i (§ 44. 2) ; and when » with an O vowel is con-
tracted into «, i is often inserted (§48. 1, cf. § 35). Thus we find, as va-
rious readings, i^mtTu^ i^iovrtf^ and a^Lvtrif, Hdt. i. 82, 99. So IttfSfAiw
i. 120, ot^iofMt ii. 131, ;^(«(r^dM vii. 141, ;^(nr^aM ( SB. a) i. 47, ;^^ii«-^ai
157, ix(iti*T» 53, x^it* (for ;^(««i') 155, ifAn^mviar» (for Iftn^atinrt^ one f
dropped ; see §§ 243. 2, 248, /) y. 6'6 • Subj. of Verbs in -fu, ^wutfttim
iv. 97, 2 Aor. srU^iv or xriAf^fv ;^. 216, for «r<uv^iy, contr. »T£fitt (see also
b. below).

Note. In the 2 Pers., the termination -m* commonly remains ; as, 1;^^*
r«« Hdt. i. 117, Wlfrmt viL 209.

(b.) In the Ep., protracted fbrms are ipade by doubling the vowel of con*
traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements, or
its corresponding short vowel, commonly « with *», and £ with «, § 48) ; and
sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly i used for « to n ; as,
i^auty contr. 0^*1 r. 234, protracted i^itt E. 244, i^atit i^ig A. 202, i^mft
H. 44^, i^ecMv i(£v E. 87-^, e^ot^v A. 350, i^cmvatt A. 9, i^ar^ai X. 156,
i^matfffiat r. 107, i^ivn A. 347, avrioMretv A. 31, ««-;^«X«^ B. 2!)3, uv^xXm'.
fv 297, ifAvaiovTo 686, ytkietvTK 9» 40, ytXtitvrts HI, aA.«M (Imp. for ayAoVj
-«) f. 377 ; fA^eutvSxt «. 39, fAtvottmm N. 79 (/ui»«/»i«y M. 59), $^a^*i0'/ «. 324 ;
%ftio4ftt 317, iiZm9t(M H. 157 {itZSfAi 13:^), {fnveito^ fitti^Vy fi*»i) fAVM» Ap. Rh.
]. 896, »«<i<r««r>j F. 387 ; fAtfMvnria-i 0. 8', for fi-ttotvari, xi^otn I. 20:^ for
si^ai* Att. Fut.'U««»r< N. 315, ii.'319, sXaay i. 290 (see § 200. 2); x^tfMi
H. S3 *. 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in .^<, mi»jj P. 30, rrjtjj E. 598, ^rtUftt* O.
297 (rTift»A*«» A. 348), ^Htt^t P. 95, ^Tii«T«» «•. 183; '/Si/*» Z. 113, for ^S
(1 ^7), /3i)i} I. 501, fit/»fAtt K. 97 {^iufittt Udt. vii. 50. 2).

Notes. I . « is not prefixed, when the flexible ending begins with r ; as
in «(«-«-i, ifi-rat. Yet "i&reti Hes. Sc 101, for irat (« being resolved into
«i, § 29).

2. We also find in Ion. prose, in imitation of the Ep., xofAi»t^i Hdt. iv. 191t
ny^^iatw vi. 1 1. So Dor. xoft^tttrt Theoc 4. 57.

(c.) The Dor. sometimes contracts « with an O sound following into £
and commonly a with an E sound following into n {h 45. 1,4); as, vtivivn
Theoc 15, 148, ^i«<r««y«^«f Ar. Ach. 751 ; 1 Aor. Sing, 2 Wmla Theoc. 4
28, for iT*i^««, ^, H^m. Ar. Ach. 913; roXft^s Theoc. 5. 35, X^i 64, o^nn 1 10
r«y«» Ar. Ach. 778, \^»trn 800. The latter contraction appears in some Ion
prose-writers (as Hipp. ; so ^vfunrm Hdt iv. 75) ; and in the Ep. ifim I

Digitized

by Google

OH. 9.] DIALECTIC FORMS. 209

S43 (written hy tamit t^m, as if from If^/u^, and in the Dn. forms, «*£«#•»
hiTti9 A. 136, ^vXtlrn* N. 202, etnmfrnrnf «*• 333, ^mthVhv M. 266.

§ 343*- II. The JirU vowd % or n, (a.) In Ion. prose, contraction
m commonlj omitted, except as m and too often become %v \ as, tm/« Hdt. i.
88, iTMUf 39, l«'«/ft 22, v^itifUff 78, w'Mftf/cciftff 68, w-Mivn 131, v^tttufjtm-
i^tvfitfos ix. 1 1 ; Fat. rtiftmtim lb. i. 75, »t^)cf luf 35, l^utf 5 ; Aor. Subj
mrat(i0ii0 lb. ill 65, f«v/A»#4 i. 41, ^Urrj iv. 71 (see § 226. l) ; 2 Pers. fitu.
XtMSy rtuiitat lb. L 90, iyiM* 35, Utu vii. 209.

Notes. 1. In like manner, t«, used for «• (§ 242. a), may become v ; as,
•i^Tivf Hdt. iu. 140, tl^mnvfrmt 62 (ii^ArruvvTM v. 13). So in the Dor.,
^urtvf X^AOC i. 81, TtXivvri 90^ fbr ytk^ptrt, &C

2. If If is followed by another distinct vowel, one t is often dropped ; afl^
faCimt, ptCU Hdt. vii. 52 (f tfCiv i. 9), for poCiuu, poZuo, So Ep. Uxi« fl,
202, flrjwxtt or ff-A^xUi ^ 8 1 1 . A similar omission of • appears in dt»*Mtu
Theog. 73.

3. After thto analogy of the contract Pres., the Ion. extends the 2 Aor. Inf.
in 'ii9, as if formed by contraction, to -tuf ; as, tiiup, vu^iu* Hdt i. 32, ^v.
yiu9 1, B. 393 {(pvyiTv 401), Wtiiw A. 363.

4. The Ion. oft^i renders impure verbs pure, by the insertion of its favorite
• (§ 48. 1) ; as, ^u/*CeiXXMfit94f (cf. ^intCtikXiro) Hdt. L 6S, lyi/;^if 118, «yi«.
fiU9§f iiL 14, itivtioua-s 98.

(b.) The Ep. conmionly omits contraction if the last vowel is *», ^, m, or tv
(^except in the Aor. pass, snbj., and in the Perf. subj. tii£) ; but otherwise
employs or omits it according to the metre (i«, when contracted, becoming tv ;
yet tvo^avf A. 308, etn^ fibroin v. 78). Synizesis is frequent when i pre-
cedes a long O vowel, and sometimes occurs in 101*, and even in tat. The Ep.,
also, often protracts t to li, and sometimes doubles the vowel of contraction 4.
Thos, ^iXtM ; 305 (yet pXoln \ 692, and ^•^•in «. 320), ptXi^/itf 4, 42, 0/»tM-
r* A. 18, 9tt(fifi£/itf X. 381, tiiS A. 515, tt^Ut w, 236 ; (ptXu B. 197, p.
Xiu I. 342, 7/^11 P. 86, Vfftt N. 539, U^ r. 254, Utctt A. 563, Utrteu 2. 95,
IrriM Z' 33, ytmrtm B. 367, ^viwrf 365 ; ftuitlat i. 1 80 (jAvfictt or /cu/^iif
/3. 202, § 243. a. 2), m7«< X. 114, for fAvfttai, »»mm • frXi^ X. 281, Wxt»

Y. 69, f^«C" ^ ^^0» ^e*?**' ^* 395, MXfv A. 477, ««Xt«f ^. 550, xaXtutv
B. 684; viixiitf A. 359, WtXtitr* A. 5, i^tiefttv 62, }^i/0 A. 61 1, tf-frirtf K.
285 , Aor. Pass. Subj. ^m/ntiat ^. 54, ^a/uiiin r. 4.S6, ia/tnif X. 246, )aA«S''*«^
H. 7V ; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -^, :^i/« FT. 83 (;»«•» Hdt. i 108 ., Si/jw
». 341^ i^f/^ 301, «»i)^ B. 34, S^iAf^iv ar. 485, :^i«Vif A. 143, ;^i/d^ai 2. 409.

REiiABKS. «. Some varieties of the Dor. change t» into t« or la^ and tm
into i«; as, fMy'f^ts Ax, Lya. 1002, ifum^ttm 183, ftr«iv/«f 198, for ^yu^tv,
-tfv^iy, if»»ufAt0»f i^mttSt

fi. The later Dor., frt>m the influence of analogy (§§ 44. 1, 248. d), hai
sometimes m for n, in verbs in -U ; as, pXM^S Theoc. S. 19, )«#«# 5. 118
80. Aor. Pass. Irv^Af Id. 4. 53.

Digitized

by Google

21t> AFFIXES OF OONJOOi^TION. | BOOK IK

^ 844« ni. The ftrtt wmd «* (a.) fieratiSe loitv and T>«r. vidatSkf
employ contraction, following the ooromen rultt, exeepi ttuU tbe Ion. some*
times uses %u for ou, and the Dor. m and w for «v and «* (§^ 44. 4, 45. 3) ; as,
^txtuivtrt Hdt. i. 133, l^jaMc/it/v vi. 1.5, »lM%twvrai i. 4, rrt^itytt/iKraM tUI. 59;
vTvftly Ar. Lys. 143, /MirrfyZt Epich. 19 (1). The Dor. « is likewise iiee4
by other dialects in fHyojm, to be cold, and in the Ion. li^iw, to awe&t ; as, ftyHv
Ar. Yeip. 446 (^/yflv* Cyr. v. 1. 11), ^tyf PI. Gorg. 517 d ; j\»i<rmi A. 598.

(b.) The £p. sometimes protracts the 0 to *», and sometimes employs tho
combination mw after the analogy of verbs in -ii*> ; as, t^^mavra, 2. 372, t^^at.
MW« A. 119, y^nvtfrat 1. 48 ; msimm *, 108, ^7imr9 N.675, ^0^*1'^. 2\16\
2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -fn, y^m ^118, kh^tt A. 405, latif ft. 216, Im^n^
A. 324 (^fri 129), l^^f^u H. 299 (^a*«v "F. 537), ^ii^iy A. 137.

B. Tknsb-Sions.

^ 94:4B« 1. In verbs in .^«r, the Dor. commonly employs | for 0-, in
the Put and Aor. ; as, xaftlat Theoc. I. 12, for xai'tcatt from xet^i^m, x'^i'^
5. 71, ixafn^ttv Find. N. 2. 31. This change appears also in a few o^er
verbs in which short « precedes; as, y%Xa^as Theoc. 7. 42, l^^a^a 2. 115,
from ytkeiv (§ 219. «), pieipw (§ 278). Similar forms sometimes occur in
other poets besides the Dor., for the sake of the metre ; as, ^^tn^tldfttv*
Mach, Sup. 39, iXj^tt Ar. Lys. 380, U^Xi^cj (^Xvm) Ap. Rh. I. 275.

2. In the Put act and mid., the Dor. commonly adds to the tense^sign 1,
which is then contracted with the connecting vowel ; as, (f 0-i*») f^Z Theoc
1. 145, {ftritfuu, § 45. 3) f^tvfuu 3. 38, wtmtrtTt .3. 9, &lp I. 11, «r4^^/^l7 6.
81, hliurmt Call Lav. 116, y^vXKt^Trt Ar. Ach. 746, wtt^mrtt^h 743, for
^«, fW0fuu^ &c See $ 200. S.

3. The Ep. employs the Att Fat (§ 200. 2), both uneoniracted, contracted,
and protracted; and has also other examples of the Fut with «* dropped (or
df the Pres. used as Fut) ; as, ifou A. 365, l^vov^s 454, ;^ii;a» /3. 2-22. Sd
i»yiym»9rtu (from Pf. base ytym», see §§ 238. «, 239. c) Horn. Yen. 198.

4. The formation of the I Aor. withont r is extended, (a) in th6 Ion. and
poet language, to a very fow liquids, in which the characteristic is preceded
by a diphthong (cf. § 222. 2), or by another consonant; thus, itvrw^f A*
mSy Jt9rnv(M .£0dL Ptom. 28, l^av^dftn* Hipp., tS^mr* Ap. Bh. 4. 1I33»
w^^mtv Hipp. L 80 : (6) in the Alex, and Hellenist dialects, to A number of
verbs which in the dassie Greek employ the 2 Aor. ; as, Mmr% Mt 35. 36,
m9itXmr» Acts 7. 21.

5. For the doubling of r by the poets, especially the Ep., to make a short
vowel bng by position (jMiXirrtr« A. 54, tfttwtrn 76, Ix^w^trnt 147), See § 71.
For Ep. examples of r retained in liquid verbs, see § 56, &, In jf (xxm» H
651, ^. 334, the X is doubled to compensate for the loss (f the r.

C, Ck)NNECTlNO V0WEU8.

^ 346* 1. For -««. eoMfMcdve, the Dor. and .£ol. sometimes employ
n- (§ 44. 4); as, UiXnr^a Theoo. 29. 4, for i^iXi«f, iv^«» 11. 4, for tv^i7v,
&yfi9 Sapph. 1. 19. For the Dor. forms in -tf and -ly, see $ 183. N.

2. The Dor. and .£ol. sometimes give to the Perf. the connectmg vowd of
the Pros. (§ 185), especially m the Inf. ; as, hhixst Theoc 15. 58, for ^«i»
•a, w*9-09^nf 10. 1 (see 1. above), ivai<rii 5. 7, ^%9»i$u 5. 28; lof. %^%t»m

Digitized

by Google

CH. 9.] DULBJTIC FORMb. 211

1. 102» ytySiMu* Find. O. 6. 81), rt^fcmi* Sapph. S. 15; Part. •i^.X^avrcf
Find. P. 4. 318, rtp^»*9Tiit 325. Instances likewise occur in the £p. of the
Peif. passing over into the form of the Pres., and of the Plop, into that of
tiie Impf. ; as, »$»kny»9Ttti M. 1 25, if^ytvrt Hes. Sc. 228 ; I^i^hxm* i. 439,
irip9M0f Hes. Th. 152.

KoTB. In this way new verbs arose, not confined to the £p. ; as, from
ifitytti kftiytt, vo order, O. 43, A. 287, Hdt. vii. 104, Impf. iif0yf I. 578
{i^atyft H. 394), F. avj»^ «-. 404, A. Htmltt, Hes. Sc 479 ; from «fXi»«,
«Xi»«, to destroy f 2. 17^, A. 10, Soph. Ant. 1286 ; from yiy^fttf yiyinat
and yi9<«viVxA», to cry aloud,

3. In the Snbjnnctive, the Ep. often retains the old short connective
(§ 177), for the sake of the metre; ba^ ityii^ofAiv A, 142, ttfttty \yu^9fi,tt
B. 440, ^tifAi0ta. H, 87, ^^itreu T. 173, ii^«^i» A. 363, tfittt 0. 18.

4. In the following poet chiefly Ep. forms, the connecting vowel is omitted :

•.) Of Pure Verbs. «yvAr, to accomplish; Impf. HvOr* «. 243, '£»£«-•
Theoc 2. 92, "ifefitg 7. 10.

i^vM, Ion. and Poet, si^v^t, to draw. Mid. to draw to one^s sdf, to protect ; Act
Inf. i/^v^iMii Hes. Op. 816; &Iid. t^Dras Ap. Kh. 1208, ti^tarat A. 239,
iciif* X. 507, if^5r« A. 138, gt^iir^ 11. 542, t^vvro Theoc. 25. 76, «7^i/»Ttf M.
454, t^ufPat i. 484, il^vf^ttt yj,, 82 ; Pass. ?^t/r« Hes. Th. 301 ; fh)m the
shorter ^ueftmt, iffvr* Soph. (Ed. T. 1352, ftetT« 2. 515, /v0'^a< 0. 141 ; Iter.
fvwxiu ft. 730.

nuft to thake, wivrtu Soph. Tr. 645^

frtvrmt, he tahee his stand, purposes, F. 83, ^Ttvfrmi JEach. Pen. 49, mv««
B. 597, X. 583.

rmvvm, to stretch ; raiSreu P. 393.

/L) Of Impure Verbs. n«, ocanm. Itrfm, to satf hd, O/umw A. S45.

XfiVw, to leave; Impf. Ixi/vr* Ap. Rh. 1. 45.

rl^ to lay waste. Inf. Pass. («'i^.#/ai, § 60) w-S^^m IL 708.

fi(t, to bear; Imp. pi^t L 171.

fuki^wm, to woateh (r. ^i;X«».) ; Imp. ir^«^vX«;^^f (c£ $ 288. /3) Horn.
Ap. 538.

Z>. Flexxbuk Endings.

% 347. a. 2<i Perf. ^n^ (a) For the ibnn ^«, see § 182. H.
(h) For nnoontraeted, rarioosly contracted, and protracted objective fcHins,
■ee § 243. (c) The Ep. sometimes drops r m the Perf. and Plop. pass. ; as,
(Ai/t^nm <t. 442, contr. ftiftfif 0. 18, Theoc 21. 41, ^iCXnm E. 284, U^v
n. 585. (^ On the other hand, in the S. S., we find «■ retained in some
fo&tract ibrms, and in the Presents having the sense of the Fat 9'U/tm, ^my-
/MM* thni, {ftmyx^ms) Mm»x»^»» Bom. 2. 17, HmMtu Lk. 16. 25, ir/irou.
p£ywm Id. 17. 8.

b. lie Ptrs. PUamd Du. The Dor. nses -/Mf for .^t (§ 70. 3) ; as, ^i.
hixofut Theoc I. 16, tSi^fMi 2. 25. For the endings .^r^« and .^t^0y,
see ^ 212.

^ 948. c Sd Fers. PL (a) For the Dor. .m-i, see § 181. «.
^6) The iEoL oses -wtj for .mi#4, and -Mt^t for -d^t (^ 45. 5) ; as, »^r«iri

Digitized

by Google

212 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATIOir. BOOK H

Ale. 7 (t), rr^^Mr/ Find, P. 9. 1 10, fair/ Sipph. 35 (88). (c) In the Alex-"
andrine Gre^ we find -at for -m^t of the Perf., and -omv for -«» of the Ini|}f.
as, vi^^Txav Lye 252, l^y^xay St. Jn. 17. 7 (SO j«^7«i» Horn. Batr. 179)
U^ei^offuv Lyc. 21, Ma^at LXX. Ps. 79. 1, «J«X«aw<r«» Rom. 3. 13. So, in
the Opt., i7vif»9 Ps. 35. SSf vomveti^ett Deut. 1. 44, for iItmiv, <r»tnrtM9
{d) Rare instances occur in the poets of -art in the Perf. with a short penult
(cf. § 45. 5) ; thus the old reading Xt\cyx^^** A.. 304, nvivKxvn Antim

(e) In the nude Impf. and 2 Aor., and in the Aor. pass., the £p. and Dor.
often retain the older ending -» (§ 181. y) ; as, la-r** A. 535, Pind. P. 4.
240 (frrD<r«« N. 488), ?•» M. S3, Pmd. I. 1. 34, n'Mt Id. P. 3. 114, H/^v
Horn. Cer. 437, ty*»t Pind. P. 4. 214, and lytot* lb. 9. 137, l(pSt i. 481,
Pind. P. 1. 82, ^yi^iv A. 57, rg«^i» 251, (pimtht 200, Mosch. 2. 33, i^/x«-
ht Theoc. 7. 60, ^«»iv Pind. 0. 10. 101. So, in imitation of the Ep., 1x0.
^i^^ff Ar. Pax, 1283, U^v(pht Eur. Hipp. 1247. We even find, as 3 Pera.
pL, nti^M Ap. Rh. 4. 1 700, ftuf 2. 65,

(/) In the Ion., the endings -areu and -ar*, for .fVM and -tr* (§ 213. &;,
are the conunon forms in the Perf. and Plup., are very frequent in the Opt,
and are also employed in the Impf., 2 Aor., and nude Pres. ind. Before these
endings, a short vowel in the root is not lengthened (§ 218), except in the
ooets for the sake of the metre, the connective .i> is used instead of -0-
(§ 203), a. and sometimes it become i, and consonants are changed according
to § 213. R. Thus, •Wiarett Hdt. i. 142, for cfXfivrott, tarctt P. 131, Hdt. it.
8f>, uarat (§ 47. N.) B. 137, tmrt H. 414, tlctro V, 149, for tfvreuy ^tra, «•«.
(poSnart <I>. 206 ; \CouXiar6 Hdt. i. 4, for ICevXtfrt, a^txtetrt 1 52 ; ^uuecreu
Id. ii. 142, iiunaro W, 114, atet^rfrrieirat ix. 9, for tufecvrmt, &e. ; xUreu
A. 659, Hdt. i. 14, xtUreu H. 527, Ixiar* Hdt. i. 167, xiiarc ^.418,
i,T9x%xXi»T» Hdt. ix. 50, for xtTvrat^ &c (so, with an intervening consonant,
iffi^itetreii Y. 284, i^n^Har* n. 95, from i^tiiJ) y Tivfi^r»i (r. r^/C-) Id*
ii. 93, JiJi;^«T«i (r. hix-, Ion. h»-) 65 (yet J^^ixeirai vii. 209, cf § 69. «),
«f;^«^i)a«-«i i. 1 40, Uxtvaiaro vii. 67 (so, as if from verbs in .^«, UifX.«^«r«
n. 86, axfiX'^^etTtti P. 637, X^etietrat u, 354, -r* M. 431, UretXai^etrt Hdt.
vii. 89) ; ^ovX$iaro Hdt. i. 3, vti^cfetro iv. 1 39, yivveLictro ii. 47. The Opt
forms in -ara are likewise used by the Att. poets ; as, ^%%xietv Soph. CEd. C
44, rtftypctmrt 602, vv^omt§ 921.

(^) In the Imperative, a third form is found in Dor. inscriptions, made b}
prefixing » to the flex, ending of the Sing. (cf. § 172) ; as, ^ofvvri (com
pare Lat. /octtmto), i^t^ivtit, cf. § 177) Ithiwti Inscr. Corc3nr.

d. For the Subj. ibrms in .fu and .r/, see § 181. /3. For the Dor. Sing. 3
in -Tj, see § 181. «. For the Dor. Sing. 1 in -^p, and Da. 3 in -vi^ '^$i$
(for -^nf, -«»», -r^fff), cf. §§ 44. 1, 24.3. c iS.

§ 3 419* e. Iterative Form, The Ion., especially the Ep., to express
with more emphasis the idea of repeated or continued action, often prolongs
the flex, endings of the Impf. and Aor., in the sing, and the 3d Pers. pi., tc
-«-»«f, -9*if, -tf'xi(v), '^xoy in the subjective inflection^ and to -tf-xd/Kut, -rxu
(-11/, -0(/), -#xir«, -rxtfyrtf in the objective. This form, which is called the iterw
tive (itero, to repeat) is likewise used by the Dor. poets, and sometimes in
lyric p*)rtion8 by the tragic. It sometimes appears to be used for metrical
effect, rather than for special emphasis. It cummonly wants the augment.
Thus, Impf. i^tvxtt, luHU in the habit of carrying^ N. 257, i^ta-xis E. 472,
l;t»*»« 126, Hdt. vi. 12, PL S lx*'»»^ J. 627, for tJ^'v, -m, -i, -•!., vipaiu^utw,
the kepi wearing, $, 104, i,X\vt9Xtv 105, ri^Q-irJti, MfATi^nn Ildt. L 100,

Digitized

by Google

GH. 9.] DIALECTIC FOHMS.

113

^i^tn Theoc 25. 1 38, )r«vir»i Soph. Ant. 963, ^;tir«iT« H. 1 40, ^tXt9Kta

X. 43:i, i/(£/ryir««vr« i/. 7, ^wvyi/tf-xir* £. 857 ; 2 Aor. Iha-xt l\ 2 i 7, kd^s<rK$
Hdt. iv. 7fii, iX«Cir»*» 130, ^vtrxtv 0. 271, yi»ir»»T« X. 208, oXiirxtro .>8d
1 Aor. (only poet.), rr^iypetrxov 2. 546, «r«r»f X. 599, yuv»i<7arxfr0 A. 566

Notes, (a) That the connecting vowel before -•■»- is i rather than •,
follpws from § 20;J. (6) Before -r»., a short vowel remains, and i takes the
place oi u; a&f 9ri.9x%v T. 217, for t^rin (r. rr«-:, Wxav I. SSI, avit^xt
Hes. Th. 157, for avin, ^m»«i» A. 64, for l^avn (^ 199), wx«» H. I5S, for
i}y, »«Xfr»f Ap. Kh. 4. 1514, fur UaXu (xttXitrxt (. 402, for IxaXii), waXt-
r»ir« 0. SS8, for IxaXtTra^ xirxtro ^.41, for txuro. (c) Verbs in -«a» have
commonly the iterative Impf. in -««■»«», sometimes doubling the a for the sake
of the metre (cf. 24y. b) ; as, iag-xts T. 295, for i?af, lanreietfxov B. 5S9 ;
so PI. 1 vixtirxt/itv X. 5 1 2, for iuxUfisv. (d) There appears to be a blending
of Impf. and Aor. forms (or formation as if from a theme in -««), in »(i/<r-
reirxt 0. 272, y$xr»ffxn O. 23, fei^a^xt Hes. Th. 835, «y«rrfi«#»f Horn.
Ap. 403, from x^uvrtt fi^rrtf f*t^ify and dtttwi'nt,

§ 3tS0« f. Injbdtioe. In the Inf., instead of -vc/, the Dor. and i£ol
commonly retain the old ending -v (§ 176), or, with the Ep., reduplicate this
entiing to -^i» (cf. §§ 174, 176), which may be still farther prolonged (chiefly
by the poets) to -^iv«4. (a) Thus the .£ol. forms the Aor. pass. inf. in -dv,
the Dor. in -S/uiy, and the Ep. fwhich also employs the common form) in
-M/(£ff<M as, fAiHrfinit Ale 28(29), o^ycr^nv (for ava,fi,tnriii*at) Theoc 29. 26 ;
%tax^JvifAtit Til. v. 79 ; ofAOMt^v/nvat A. 1 87. (b) In other tenses, the nude
Inf. has commonly in the Dor. the form -/uiy, in the i£ol. -v and -^cy«i, and
in the Ep. -mm, -fuv, and -^ivoj ; as, ^i/ttv Theoc 5. 21, Pind. P. 4. 492,
X. 315, BifuvM Inscr. Cum., B. 285, Pmd. O. 14. 15, ^7wu A. 26 (cf. 57),
fifiif Pind. O. 1. 55, Ufttp Th. v. 77, A. 379, )«^cmm A. 98, 116, «. 317,
hZfcu 316, ywfUfms «. 411 ; »/»£» (§ 251. 2) Ale. 86(15), ivrXtif 11(3);
«-f^»«»f» O. 497, TUvdfttfot it 225, n^iv A. 719, iifAtWi N. 27S. So i<rr«-
fAtvat Hdt. i. 1 7. Before -fuv and -^i»«4, a short vowel in the 2 Aor. does
not [Mss into a diphthong (§ 224. K). (c) In likti manner the non-Attic
poets employ, for -m (originally -i», § 1 76), the prolonged -ifis* and -i^«»«i ;
as, v<ij»«tf-tv) ixouimf A. 547, Pind. O. 3. 44, Theoc. 8. 8S, itxwifjuvat X. 380,
itlifjtit Y. Ill, itlfifAifat 50, ;^«x«ri/(£i» A. 78, ix^i^fMEi 151. ((i) So, in the
Perf., vtvXnyifAw 11. 728. For the Perf. inf. in -ii» or -if», see § 246. 2.
The common form in -^mm first occurs in Hdt. (e) Verbs in -um and -ut have
a contract form in -^futat ; as, {ya-iv) ynfin^M S. 502, ruvn/tivM u, 1 37,
xaXftfMVM K. 125, irtti^tuu r. 174, from ^«««, «*»»««, xaXuv, $rfv^i*». Tet
{kifAtittt) "dfittvtit 4>. 70. In iytfifAtitat v. 213, from itytviaa^ and »^ifitfitven
lies. Op. 22, from «(««, the connecting vowel is omitted.

g. PartieipU, For the .£ol. contraction into «m and m in the Part., see
§ 45. 5 ; thus, xi^fmtt Ale. 27, yi^^mt Pind. P. I. 86, ^^iyi^a$r» 8. 37, |ii;^«i-
r« Sapph. 1. 9, ix»*^» 77(76), Pind. P. 8. 4, Theoc 1. 96. For the Fem.
••»#«, the Laconic uses -«« ; as, UXifTMa, »Xuv«, Sf/^ra^^««y (§ 70. V.), for
\xXt99wmy xXutfwm, ^tt^^^^avfiif, Ai. Lys. 1297, 1299, 1313. So M^«
1293 (§ 45. 5).

E. Verbs dt -^i*

§ 3ff 1* 1. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att Hm
IbnnB with a connecting vowel (§ 325), especially hi the Ptes. sing, of verba
mhom Gharactflrialio is • or • ; aa, rsPut Pind. P. 8. 14, rtfum. 192, Hdt. t

Digitized

by Google

214 AFFIXES OF OONJXJtATION. [bOOK 11

1S3, IthTt I. 164, ^>«r519, Hdt. L 107 ; Urf lb. W. 109, Imp. suJi^rm I
202 ; it^t^'uvrt (nxiradnpL, for 9r^»rt$i£n) A. 291 ; 2 Aor. Opt. it^900{Mr»
Hdt L 5S ; Inf. rvf<«r» Theog. 565, hiSt (§ 244. a) Theoc 29. 9.

2. On the other hand, the iBoL, Dor., and Ep. retam the form hi -^ m
Bome verbs, which m the Att. and m Ion. prme have only the form in -« ; a^
tttiXtifu Sapph. 1. 16, i^fu 2. 1 1, fiXtifu 79(23), alnifu Hes. Op. 681, vmn*
/At Theoc. 7. 40, for mcXU, «(««, &c; AAxn^h ^'^nri, fi^itnn r. Ill, 112,
for «vc;^M, &c. (nnlesB rather Subj. «»t;^fyr«, &c) ; f«(*iMii B. 107.

3. The Ion. changes a characteristic before another « to i (cf. 242. a), and
8(»metimes inserts i before « (§ 48. 1) ; as, {Ifreid^t, § 58) Uridn Hdt. v«
7 i , luuarat (§ 248. /), tfrimr0 Hdt. iv. 166. So» in the nude Perf., Uridn
Hdt i. 200, irrUrc v. 49.

4. The Ep. sometimee differs tram the common language in the length of
the characteristic vowel (§ 224) ; as, Int ntnfiutat H^. 247, 'itiwtai H. 4*25,
^tvyw/At^ n. 145, for ri^MM, Ac; FaiL ri^i^^tM* K. d4 ; Imp. 7xir/«, ^I'UA
y. 380 (so nude Perf. Umrt A. 243, 246, for 7rr«rO : 2 Aor. ^j^r«v M.
469, fi»Tti9 A. 327, for fCnrav, &c

5. For the Impf. Irsfn* and i|iir, the Ion. has Irih* Hdt iii. 155, and jf«
3. 313, onaugmented f« A. 321, Hdt ii. 19. So !«$ Hdt i. 187, ^» A. 381,
l«n Hdt iv. 119, }«r«v tx. 31. C£ §^ 179, 201. N, 252. b.

§ StS3. 6. Diaketk fomu of i<>;, to 6e (t 55). (a) Those which
arise fixmi different modes of lengthening the radical syllable (§ 230. 3) :
lf»fii Theoc. 20. 32, Sapph. 2. 15, Irr/ (i assmned after the analogy of the
ether persons) A. 176, Theoc 5. 75, S. 3 Uri (» hiserted instead of f) Id. 1.
17, ufitiv £. 873, Hdt i. 97 ; Inf. i/ntv (for which some give the form iT^if,
of. § 70. 3) Theoc. 2. 41. (6) Uncontracted forms, and forms like those of
verbs m -«»: Uftf B. 125, tm A. 119, Hdt iv. 98, Ipn B. :i66, U^t I. 140,
Hdt i. 155, Ut I. 284, U 142, Hdt vii. 6, U» B. 27, Hdt i. 86, Uvta V,
159, U7ra Pind. P. 4. 471, Theoc. 2. 64, i^ir^ 76, (l-vrr«, § 58) 7tf<r« or
ktrr^ Tim. Locr. 96 a, in A. 762, i^vrtf Theoc 2. 3. (c) Variously pro-
tracted forms: In* (1 P.) A. 762, (3 P.) B. 642, Hdt vii. 143, Im Theoc
19. 8, ftfr/« X. 435, iTif* A. 808, •?« Y. 47; Impf. iter. (§ 249. b\ Xtrxn
n P.) H. 153, (3 P.) Hdt 1. 196, Um Ib^ E. 536, iEsch. Pers. 656.
Id) Middle forms: Uo, commonly Ur» a. 302, Sapph. 1. 28, c7ar« v. 106
(for ff»r«, cf. 8. 1 UfAfiv • others read i7ar«, Ep. for n*Ta from fT/iMM). (e) Old
•ihort and nnaugmented forms : i^iv Call Fr. 294, Uav A. 267, Pind. P. 4.
371, W«» Id. O. 9. 79. (/) For tTg U, 515, Hdt vii. 9, see § 230. «;
for P. 3 if ri Pind. O. 9. 158, Th. v. 77, Theoc 5. 109, § 181. « ; for l«, ?»,
tttft ^(i), 7«rf, f«r«v, § 251. 5 ; -for f^s T. 202, and i^ri, § 181. /3; for
i7«r^« Theog. 715, fW«, § 182; for tTf*ig, Zfttt Theoc 15. 9, ifuf 14. 29»
§ 247. b ; for Imp£ S. 3 (^^r) it Theoc 2. 90, § 2r>0. 9^ ; for Inf. jf^i* A.
299, l^iMu r. 40, ifi/tif Pind. O. 5. 38, Theoc 7. 28, Soph. Ant 623, f^
^i»ai A. 117, Sapph. 2. 2, i/uf Theoc 2. 41, il^* (for which some write
itfAtf, cf. a above) Th. v. 79, Tim. Locr. 93 a, c^ivm or H/Mfm* Ar. Ach. 775»
§ 250. 6; for 70'r«^« A. 267, 7r0^fT«< A. 164, .£sch. Pers. 121 {Utrm A.
21 1), § 71 ; for Uuu A. 563, frruM 2. 95, § 243 ; for U^f Theoc 10. 5,
iffttroi Eur. Iph. A. 782, Wwurm B. 393, Theoc 7. 67, Uwfrm Th. y. 77,
§ 245. 2.

7. DiakeOe Fomu t^ gjfu, to ffo (^ 56), (a) The protractiQii of 7 U m
f § S24) likewise appears hi P. 3 tlrt (or Iri, or perhaps liW from iVA <» ^

Digitized

by Google

CH. 10.] ROOT OF THB VEEB. 216

Hei. fie 1 1», Tbeog. 11«, tU only Sophr. « (23), iftr (by some ascribed to
ilfii, to be) I. 496, it 1^9, f7r«#e«i S. S, tUmr* A. I5J8, fiimr* O. 415, iii-
r«r^»)» 544, (b) In the Impf., we find both nude forms and fbnna with a
oonnecting vowel, from the root /-, both miaugmented, doubly augmented
(^ 1^9), and doubly augmented with contraction ; thus, (ntt, of. 251. 5) n'm
(from which may be fonned by contr. the Att. J«, § '2S1. b) J. 427, Hdt. *.
4ii, art A, 47, Hdt i. 65, J« M. 371, U B. 872^ Plofut ». 251, /#«» A. 494,
tC^av K. 1 97, adt i. 62, ^h)* a^'. 370, trn* A. 347'. (c) The Opt. Uin (only
T. 209) is formed, as if from the root U- (cf § 231. d). (d) The Inf. "t^*
Ath. 580 c, is the regular nude form, (e) For th see § 230. « ; for gUfim
K. 450, ry^^a K. 67, § 18if; for Jywi I. 701, § 181. /3; for 7»fitif B. 440.
§ 246. 3; for 7^» A. 170, Find. 0. 6. 108, r^iy«« T. 32, 7ftfMf<u i^65^
I 250. b,

F. Pebfbct Pabticipijl

§ 9^3. 1. In Perf. Participles ending in -«$; pore, the Ep. moiv
frequently lengthens the preceding Towel ; and the Part, is then declined in
•««>•# or -i?r«#, according to the metre. If the preceding yowel remains short,
the form in -«r«f is commonly required by the metre. Thus, 0tim^nirtf y.
139, »cx/wii«r«r A. 801, »i»/»tfA;T« x. 31. See, also, §§ 237, 238.

2. In some fiam. forms, the antepenult is shortened on account of the rerae^
as, XiXiMviat ^. 85 (XcXDJM^r X. 141), /«c/MUvr«i A. 435 (j*t/Aii»tit K. S62)
Jk^i^vUt r. 331, radkytmv L 208.

CHAPTER X.

ROOT OF THE VERB.

^ 3ff 4. The root of the Greek verb, although
not properly varied by inflection, yet received many
changes in the progress of the language. These
changes affected the different tenses unequally, so
that there are but few primitive verbs in which the
root appears in only a single form.

Note. The earlier, intermediate, and later forms of the root .
may be termed, for the sake of brevity, old^ middle^ and new
roots. The final syllable of the earliest form of the root is
commonly short ; and the oldest roots of the language are mon-
osyllabic.

§ 988* The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the
degree in which they exhibit the departure of the root from it9
original form^ in the following order.

I. The Second Aobist and Second Future.

RmfAltra « TbB 2d Aor. act and mid. it aimpty the Impf. of im old root

Jigitized by VjOOQIC

216 ROOT OF THE VERB. [bOOK li

(§ 1 78. 2) ; thus tki^4P and Ixswifin* (1 37) are fonned from the old root X/w^
in precisely the same way as IXM«'«y and iXu^rifinv from the new root Xuif,

jS. The 2d Aor. and Fat. pass, are chiefly found in impure verbs which wani
the 2d Aor. act, and tnicL They affix -«» and -n^sfMu (§ 180) to the slm*
plest form of the root.

y. These tenses (except the nude 2 Aor. act, § 224. 2) have commonly a
short syllable before the affix (§ 254. N.).

^. In a few verbs, tiie original root appears to have received some change
even in the 2 Aor. ; chiefly, in accordance with the prevailing analogy of the
tense, to render the root tnonost/Uainc, or its last syllabU short (§ 254. N.), or
to enable it to receive the nude form (§ 227. ^).

^ 3tS6* II. The Perfect and Pluperfect Passive.
These tenses have not only a more complete, uniform, and
simple formation than the Perf. and Plup. act, (§§ 179, 186
235), but are likewise more common, and are formed in some
verbs (see tQiqiia^ § 263, qt^Bi^m^ § 268, &c.) from an earlier
root.

m. The Perfect and Pluperfect Active. For the van .
0U3 formations of these tenses, see §§ 179, 186, 234 - 238

IV. The First Aorist and Future.

V. The Present and Imperfect. These tenses, with
very few exceptions, exhibit the root in its latest and most pro-
tracted form.

§ 8t57« Remarks. 1. The 2 Aor. and 2 Put are widely distin-
goi^ed from the other tenses by their attachment to the original farm of the
root ; while the Pres. and Impf. are distinguished no less widely by their t»-
clination to depart from this form. The other tenses differ comparatively but
little from each other in the form of .the root. If the verb has three roots,
they are conmionly formed from the middle root See, for example, XafiCavm
(§ 290).

2. Many verbs are DSFEcnvE, either from the want of a complete forma-
tion, or from the disuse of some of their frrms. In both cases, the defect is
often supplied by other verbs having the same signification (§301). .In the
poets, especially the older, we find many fragments of verbs belonging to the '
earlier language. These occur often in but a single tense, and sometimes in
only a single form of that tense ; as, 2 A. S^. 3 lff^«;^«, rang^ A. 420, J«a«
(r. ^f«.), appeared^ ^. 242, 1 A. XxMuvvtit, hreaihed^ X. 467, X/y^i, twanged,
A. 1 25, Pf. Ft, Kixa^noret^ gasping^ E. 698.

3. On the other hand, many verbs are redundant, either through a douhU
formaiion from the same root, or tiie use of forms frt)m different roots. It
should be observed, however, that two or more forms of the same tense, with
few exceptions, either,

(«.) Belong to different periods^ dialects, or styles of composition; thus,
»rf/Mv, and Uter xrifvC/u (§ 295) ; ra^f»/ (§ 274. 7), A. P. Irdx^h and
later Irdynf * »«/*» (§ 267. 3), A. P. \»mv4nh and Ion. \»ainf * itnfdvfMmt
and poet ^%v4»fMu (§ 290); wtiU (t 39), A. 7riir«, and poet %^tUu

Digitized by VjOOQIC

10. J ElfPHONlC CHANa^t^ ^ ♦^\" . ^ " ^Vf/

Or, (0.) Differ in thdr «m; tlmik 1 ?f. wimuntr P^
erf, 2 Pf. «-S«W«, mtransitive, / <rMt^ (^ 39) ; i A. Urnray trans. / placed,
2 A. Urtiv, intrans. / stood (^ 48). The second tenses are more incfined than
the Jirst to an intransitive use. From the prevalence of this use in the 2d
Perf. and Plup., these tenses were formerly caHed the Perf. and Flup, middle.

Or, (y.) Are supplementary to each other. See §§ 201. N., 237. a.

NoTK. From the varbos changes whieh take place in the root; many
v«cba» together with their common themes, have others, either derived or ool>
lateral. In r^ard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they ahookl be
rather viewed as redundant forms of the same verb, Qr as the fbrms of disUnct
but kindred verbs.

^ ^8S. The changes in the root of the Greek
verb are o( three kinds ; euphonic, emphatic, and

ANOMALOUS.

Note. The lists which fbUow ate designed both to exsmpISfy the vaiioHi
changes of the root, and likewise to present, in a olassified anrangement, all
those verbs upon whose inflection farther remark seemed to be required. It
wiU be observed, that some of the words ndght have been arranged with equal
propriety under other heads, from their eidiibitlag more than one speciss of
change in the root

A. Euphonic Changes.

^ 3ff 9« 1. Radical vowels are sometimes changed by'
pii£C£SsioN (§ 28)) a becoming », and $ and o becoming c

a. Change of m to %•

IfoTBk If the « is praoeded tsr Mowed by a KqvH, it is somatunas mtaioed
in the Perfect ^ particularly the Perfect paesioe,

%i^m«tiMt (r, ^f»-, ^i(»-)i and t2 Pf. ^«(m», to sm, poet, F. S4S; Qopk. CEd,
T. 389, 'J A. n^»e» (^ 262) Eur. Or. 1456, 1 A. P. S^M Ma^ £fc

53, 2 A. P. Q^aztif, Pind. N. 7. 4.

ii^m (r. >«e.)* to PV» P* ^cf'^* ^* ^<<e«* ^* P' >^/«««, 2 A. P. tU^HH
iii. 5. 9. Poet and Ion. Uf^i, Ar. Nub. 442, hifm, Hdt ii. 39.

i^i'Ttt, topluckj poet ^(ivrrm (§ 272), Mosch. 2. 69, F. ^(i'4^t, A. li^^pm.
2 A. 2)^«««y, Pind. P. 4. 231.

rXi»*», to wreaA, F. ^ki^t, A. fv-Xi^*, Pf. P. wUXiyftmt, f A. P. Uxix'
$n^ 2 A. P. lieXm»n»t A. M. lwXfS»^«ff. hi Hipp., Pf. IfA-niwUxa* ^
9riitX0x*»

^T^i^t0f to tunetf F. rr^(^^«#, A. t^r^^pm, Pf. P. trr^ftfMUy 1. A. P. Ur^.
Aif^ 2 A. P. Wrfdfnn Pf. JU-t^^r^*^ Ath. 104 e. 1 A. P. Ion* and Dor
Wr^Aftnh Hdt i. 130, Theoc. 7. 132. Extended forms, chiefly poet, #«^m.
^*r, ^. 53, er^dtfuu, Eur. Ale 1052, Hdt it 85, F. tr^^nfiuu Theog;
837 ; ^ftfUf, Ar. Pax, 175.

r^iwi (Ion. r^tr** Hdt il. 92), to turn, F. r^i-^, A. fr^^*, Pf. rSr^«^
(§ 236. a) and <rSr^^, Pf. P. rirfaf^fiat, 1 A. P. U^i^v, 2 A. P* Ue^Cnif^
1 A. M. commonly trans. lT^i^pdf$r.9, 2 A. M. intrans. Ir^«'«/Mi9. 2*A. 1^
|c««T«t, K, 187, F. Ft ^^efd^/mt BMgrolk

Digitized

by Google

218 HOOT OF XHfi VERB. [bOOK II

b. Chanffe of • and »to i.

The change of • and « to i is ahnost wholly confined to sjOables which be>
come long in the Pros, and Impf., by the addition of one or more conaonantB
as, ri»T», C§ 272. fi), »i^nifAi (§ 278. J), ifj^^Xirnm (§ 280).

§ 3G0* 2. Some roots are contracted ; as,

fimt to ting, F* 4^»fMUf ^ ?*"*» ^' ^' f^/*»h A. P. frfin* * contr. froiB
ill')**, A. 1, iti^afiMi, X' 3^^ (Juiett Theoc. 22. 26, £url Here 681), &o.
For milru, see § 185. 1.

f^vm or ^Trtt (§ 70. 1), to ruth, F. ^$m, A. jf|»« contr. from mUtm, B.
88, &c. A. P. «V»»»» r. 368.

X«««, to UMiM, F. Xowm, A. fx«v^«, Pf. P. xiXavfuu, A. P. Sx«v^fiy • contr.
from £p. XotM, ). 252, F. X«i«-*r, &c. Fitm the old r. X«^we have the £p.
Impf. or 2 A. X«i ». 361, X999 Hom. Ap. 120, Mid. Inf, xiiUm or x««r^«i
Hes. Op. 747 ; and from the same root, or from X«v- with the omission of
the connecting vowels, are the common Sorter forms of the Impf. act. and
Pres. and ImpC mid. ; as, (for Ixm^cv ix Ix«m/«cO ix«v/«iy Ar. PI. 657, Xm/^mbj,
\tSirm QjT. L 3. 1 1 , Xw€$mt ^. 216.

§361* 3. Some roots are stmcofated in the theme^
chiefly in cases of reduplication ; as, (r. yiytv-^ /</»'-) yip'ofim,
nimw, filfAvw (^ 286) : others in the 2d Aor, (§ 255. h) ; as,
it. iys^-, iyq-) ^yq6(iTip (§ 268), ^X&ov (§ 301. 3), Ep. defect
(r. Jtgi') hetfiop {\ 194. 3), found : others in other tenses ; as,

MXitf, to eatt, F. »«xSrM, tut)Ji (§ 200. 2), A. Im^Xi^*, Pf. (r. mXi^
«Xi.) »i»Xfi««, Pf. P. xUXtifMu, F. Pf. »i»Xif#«^Mu, Ar. Av. 184, A. P. UXif-
099 (U«xi^ir», Hipp.). Poet, xMvXi^rxw .£sch. Snp. 217, «v«-iMcXi^«/MM,

r. 19.

f$iXm, to ooncem (§ 222. 2) ; Ep. Pf. P. f*i/^X%rm, .fr#f, T. 343, Phip.
^/»CXM'«<fr. 516. See §§ 64. 2, 222. «.

NoTB. In regard to some forms, it seems doobtM whether they are best
reftned to syncope, or to metathesis with, in some cases, contraction ; thos^
(r. MtXt-, »X4ii-, »Xii-) »i»Xn»»»

% S69. 4. In some roots, metathesis takes place, chiefly
by changing the place of a liquid. This occurs, (a) in the
theme; as, /5Xo)axo), ^yj^axoi, &Q(oaxw {^ 281) : (b) in the 2d
Aor. (§ 255. 3) ; as, hxXfiv (§ 227. /?), s'riiji' (§ 301. 2] r^-
nor (§ 259. a), sitQa^ov (§ 288) : (c) in other tenses ; ts, /Jt-
^Aijxa, iSkii&fji^y KixiAfixa ($223).

§ S63« 5. A few roots are changed to avoid a I)DUBL1
aspiration (§ 62) ; as,

r^l^m (t. ;»^^-, ;»^i^. § 259, r^.^^ «^^-)» to Jwnrii* (Old rM^«, PInd.
^ 4. 205), P. ^^^p,^ A. f/^t^ Pt ri*^«^ Ft P. rii^M^ 1 A. P
Jfi^y, commonly 2 A. P. Ir^i^ny. Hsp. 2 Aor. intrans. or pass, ir^m^
L 55£^ Pf. «wv.(r^«^ Hipp.

Non. Sesb also^ t^m (§ 300), Mr««, »|Ar«» (§ 272). Mr (§ Slt]^

Digitized by V>00QIC

GH. 10.] EUPHONIC AND EMPHAIIC CHANGES. * 219

r^X*' (§ >^01), T^^tt (§ 270). A few other roots have both aspirated ana
cmaspirated forms ; as, rv;^- and rvx- (§§ 270. 9, 285, 290), ;^«^. and x^e^-
(§ 27.5. O* '4'^xft to cool, F. ^^it, &c, 2 A. P. i'4^vynf, Ar. Nub. 151, and
l'4^vX'f'» .£sch. Fr. 95.

6. In a few cases, a consonant is dropped or added for the
sake of euphony or the metre ; as, XbISo), to pour out^ Ep. etSat,
77. 1 1 ; dovniw, to sounds A. idovnrjaa^t i. 8. 18, J, 504, and
fydovTtriaa^ A» 45 ; XUxfo^ to liek^ Pf. P. hlstxfjtfog Hes. Th. 826.
So, in reduplicated forms, nlfinlfjfii^ nlfinQtifii (§ 284), and in
the Att. RedupL, iygr^yoQa (§ 268), ^fivm^ to bow down^ ifivrifiv^
X8 X. 491 (for ifiT^fivxs, ^/i- being prefixed according to analogy,
§ 191. 2, ahhough the 17 is radical). With xoXoo/iaij -waofim^
to be angry, we have also the Ep. (xooofiaij § 29. a) x^^t'^^h X^^
aofieuj A. 80 (see r. 413, 414).

§ 3^4. 7. In some verbs, the omission of the digamma
(^ 22. d) has given rise to different forms of the root ; as,

AXt6»t (r. AXtf', AXt-, AXtV'), to atfert, poet. .Ssch. Prom. 568, F. «Xi^«
Soph. Fr. 825, A. i|fXivr«, .ffisch. Sept. 87 ; M!d. JtXUfuu and dXt^^ftmi, to
avoid; 2. 586, «. 29, A. iXtdfutv and nXtim/inif (§ 201. 2> Deriy., AXniftt^
A. 794, JkXu0»t0 ($ 273. «).

Jkm'wvimf Ep. a^-rv^ (§ 48. 2 ; r. rNp-* rN-, rvMr-, irvv-, «>i«- $ 277),
to reoooer 6r«a<ft, X. 222, A. P. kft^nwin*, E. 697, node 2 A. M. ifAwtSf
A. 359. iVom the root mv. are formed the extended ^nU»m and wnwwm,
to make wise, JBach. Pers. 830, H. 249, and the Pf. P. itimff/uu, to be unte,
fL 377, reftned by some to «iriw, by others to *nv9»m.,

fw (r. /cF-, f»'\ to flow, F. ftvr»f»«u (§ 220), A. Ifftv^m, and better Att.
F. M. (or 2 F. P.) ftm^tfuu, 2 A. P. (or 2 A, Act r. /m-) Ij^i^ify, Pi. ^f^J^m.
Ion. Free, i^ ffifutM Hdt. viL 140. Late F. ^ivr».

9%&»ftm and rM/MM (r. #iF-» rf»-} rv-, ri-, whence r«- § 28), to rusA, poet.
Soph. TV. 645 ($ 246. «), .£sch. Pers. 25, A. ^tuAfunt (§ 201. 2) H. 208,
Ft, as Pros., Irn^/Mu, Z. 361, A. P. UUn* or U(rUw, Eur. HeL 1302, Soph.
Aj. 294, 2 A. M. UV«v» or UrV*f»> Eur. HeL 1162, S. 519. Ep. A. Act.
Unva E. 208. Lacon. 2 A. P. in^-twewm, H. Gr. i 1. 23, for kineevn. Ob-
serve the angm. and rednpL

xi^ (r. ;c«F-, X»')> *> l»w» ^« A;^ (§ 200. 2), A. f;^;«« (§ 201. 2), rare
•nd doabtftil tx^rm, P£ P. «(;^fMM, A. P. \xvhv» Ep. F. x'^^i X*^
fi. 222, A. l;t;«^«> ^X*^> ^ ^69, 2 A. M. i;^l$iiHf», A. 526» .Asch. Cho.
401. Late Ft »(;^««, Anth. Late ibrm, ;^w«.

NoTB. See, abo, 5U», »^, «-xS*» (§ 220), )«/«», »«/«s »X«i^ (§ 267. S).
An Ep. and Ion. ibrm of rxU i$ <rX4^, ^^*», &c., t. 240, Hdt. vi. 97, 2 A.
I<rx«w, y. 15 ; extended, rA^l^w, Th. L 19.

B. Emphatic Changes.

^ 36ff. Most impure roots and many piire
roots arc proxr^cted in the Present and Imper-

Digitized

by Google

220 KOOT OF THE VERJ^ [bOOK Ij

fect^ to express with more emphasis the idea of
continued action. This protractioa takes place,

^366. I. By LENGTHENING A SHORT VOWEL

as follows.

in mute verbs, & becooies i^ ; m liqmd verbs,, and is some
mule verba, I aod i/ are mij^Z^ lengthened ; in other cases, the
short vowel is usually changed to a dipJUhortg,

In mtUt verbs, the change commonly extends to all the reg-
ular tenses (§ 215. 1).

I. Change of 4 to «.

•n<rf (r. r**--, r»j«-.)» *» »^i tr«W'» F. «J4'«^ 2 Pf. iirtrtns. (5 257. ^) irV-
rf)*-*, iv. 5. V2y 2 A. P. Udvrtiu

^luh to nffH (]>or. vwMi Theoo. 2. 2a), F. Wg», A. ?4nf^«, S fl fntaaiB,
rirfi»m, iv. ^ 15, 1 A* P* lir4%h^ CoamoDiy % K P. kriv^u Pf. P. «4
r«>7bt«4 Anth.

^36>7. 2w Gh«ag» of « to «4.

htinpuu (r. }«., Im.), It» dlml^ eliie^ poet «. 140, F. ^tffut'h A. I)£nf-
^y, (£c 7. 24, >fW^Mu, A. 125, >U«</««i, «. 2S. Kindred; Ui^**, -^l**, to
tend, Maok. Ag* 207, UrUfMUf <» tfftvici^, 2. 204, Hdl. L 216, A. )»rUr/M
{§ 201. 2>

xahti^m (t. »ac^#.), A> /^ci/^) F. Kuia^Sj A. I««^if^« (sometimes written
Uii&^tL, ct ^ 56. «>, Ff. P. »tx£ht^ftcuy A. P. U«^<^e^fiy.

xaivtt, to km, chiefly poet., F. xaw, 2 A. ?x«v«v.

9»ut (r. »«.)> to dioeO; poet., Soph. Tr. 40, F. vJieetfuu (§71) Ap. Rh. 3.
747, A. hnftra, huUt, ). 1 74, P£ P. vUttfftat, Herod. Att, A. P., i»<^r^«ir Eof.
Med. 166. £p. deriv. vmt^, A. 45.

v^AiVM, to weave, F. v^«»«, A. jlf^ffm, Pf. P. S^^/mu (§ 217. /3)> A. £•
v^«»/tfv. From the pure root v^«., £p. v^*r#i (§ 242. b) n. 105.

f«/»«r (t 42), to jAow, F. fM^ , &(x The Pf. «i^yiN» i» late, first ecow-
cmg in Dinarch., who employs it m composition with •««. Kindl«d poet,
verbs, ^attPM, to shine, ft, 383 ; from r. f «., Imp£ ^ |. 50% F. wi^n^t^fm
P. 155 ; from r. (^aiA^ Ft. ^aifimt A. 735, $oph. El. 824.

X'k" ('^ TCH-* X»^i-)> to r^wse, F. x**^^^'^ ($ 222. 2)„ PC »ix«e«»«b
]h& P. tux»tn/*tu and jU;^«te/««i« 2 A. P. i;^«(v. £p., redupL F. »ix«e*>'«^
tnX»t^fcfiuu (§ 239. 6), 2 A. M. M^«e^i|y (J 194. 3), 1 A. M. Ixn^mftmh
n. 270, 2 Pf. Ft. mx»^tit (§ 253. 1), H. f 12. Jtfie, 1 Aor. ix»'^^»,
2 F. P. xH^f**"*

3. Yariims Changee of ••

Uim (r. I«F-, }«-» >««-), to 6tir«, poet .^sch. Ag. 496, 2 Pf. as Pros, in-
trans., iOnm, T. 18. 3 A. )L lW^ii», T. 916, Pf. P. ViUvfiuu, GalL £p. 52.

mam and mm* (r. »«F-) nao-, »%- § 259, Mti^ xi'\ to bum, F. »«vriy and
HAimyMM, A. fiMiitf« avd poet Um ($ 201. 2), ibeh* Ag. 849 (Bp. Ian* A.
40, Utm, fk 176), Pt jftisMUM, Pf. P. »(»#»«m, A. P.l»#^l«f. Ion. »A* P
U&i^ Hdt tt. 180.

Digitized

by Google

«*.H. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 221

m^Mim «Dd mkimt «» weep, F. ttXmv0ifuu or »>Mo095fimt (§ 20a 8), mnd
»>Minwtt or mXdwf ($ 222), A. txXmv^, Pf. P. MkxXmuftmt, S F. OT»X«»tfr«^Mei,
Ar. Nub. 1436. F. »Xmvf^ Tbaoo. 23. 34. Late, A. P. Ux«c/^^«», Pf« P
»i»Aatfr/i««, Anth.

Note. Kiuv and »X»t are Att ftyrms, and an not contracted ($ 21S* fi).
For HMueiy »X«f/r0/MM) 2(2«i//mm, from maf^tf xXaffoftmt, yt^ttFfiuu, &C.) see
^ 220.

r(«$y*r (r. r^y-, r^tty- § 28. l), to ea«, F. r^4^^«/u«4i 2 A. Ir^yw, Pf P
oi^YA^^/MM. loB. 1 A. f^-^AT^* Horn. Batr. 126*

§3^8* 4» Cfaango«f t toM.

kyti^m (t. ^y«f-f i^Tfi^-}, to coBeetf F. Ayc^A^y A. ^y*tf», A. P. ^yi^/tft.
Ep., Pf. P. Aynyt^fAmi, A. '-'1 1, 2 A. M. nyi^if*»i9$ B. 91, Pt, sync iy^ofAtvtf,
H. 134. Ep.^fbrms, nyt^Uofiat, V, 231, i(7c^c0/««i, K. 127 ; later Ep. ityk^
^^uu Ap. BlL 3. 895.

4kJifw <r. At^-, ilfi(-), to raiee, poet and Ion., F. it^ cMitr. *«^«?, .fisch*
Pen. 795, A. ifii^m, Pf. P. iTi^/mu (for «f«^T«, see § 236. </), A. P. itie^tiv •
coramonlj «3^m (r. '«#., syna, from ili^. § 261, «;^. § 267), F. 'Af«i, A. ^^a,
5uA;. "•e*' (§ 56. «), Pf. ^^»«, Pf. P. ;r«^tMM, A. P. 4(^ify, 1 A. M. n^ficti^,
'a^mfitm, 'a^aifAfiVy Eur. Or. 3, 2 A. M. poet. n^e/Anvj 'i^tptat^ *&^oifititf Soph.
EI. 34. JEoL Aif^, Sapph. 44(7 3> Poet, deriv., iit#f^*/MM, F. 108, it^rei.
{«r, Ap. Rh.- 1. 738, &^fun Soph. Ant. 903, a7»i}fAat (§ 29S. 3), ^. 144.

iyiiftt (r. l^c^., i^^. § 261, lyu(-), to rmcie, F. I^^, 2 Pf., as Pies, in-
trans., (the sync, root prefixed, by a pecoliar Att redupl., § 263. 6) ly^nyo^ct,
Pf. P. lynyifftttiy A. P. nyi^^f, 2 A. IL ny^ofinv. For ly^ny^u ly^nyofjOai,
see § 238. ^. 2 Pf. P^ 3 iy^fiyi^iwt (as from r. lyt^-) K. 419. Hipp, haa
Vl^'^yt^v and i7f/^r«. Deriv., E^. i7^fi^«^«*'» v* 6, Xy^w^ti «. 33; late

f?>^ (r. &X-, iX*. § 259), to ro2/ «p, jireM Aorc^ Ep. E. 203, A. fXr«
($ 56. /3) A. 409, Pf. P. UX/Mu, n. 662, 2 A. P. iiXny, N. 408. Att
forms, i7xx*» or c7xx«^ Ar. Nub. 761, Th. ii. 76, and 7xx«r Soph. Ant 340.
Deriv. i/Xuv or i/xU, .^rjM^ i/Xvm, -vr*» (Ef>., A. P. cXvWWv, "i^ 393 ; Deriv.
ilxSfdm, A. 156, uXUpmZttf T. 492), ixi^^M, -ilt (poet and Ion. i<x/rr« or
i;x;rr«»,.«:fich. Pr. 1085, Hdt u. 38), iXtXit^, .i^t, Ep. A. 530.

3>iiy«r, to «m£te, poet, F. 5tv*l, 2 A. Umv, Ar. Av. 54, 1 A. tfuva, T. 481.

»ti(m (r. zm^^ «f^. § 259), to aAeor, F. xt^S, A. l»Ci#a, Pf. P. xixatftuh
F. »(^rM, Mosch. 'J. 32, A. 7»f^r«, ». 456, Ui^^«/»D«, .£sdi. Pers. 952 (§ 56*
^), 1 A. P. Ui^fi9, Find. P. 4. 146, 2 A. P. i«i£^tfy, Anth.

f*tiff4/Mmi (r. /Mc^-)) ^ obtain^ chiefly poet, I. 616, 2 Pf Ifi/M^a, A. 278,
Pf. P. ilftm^rmt (} 191. 1), it Aa« been fated, PL Rep. 566 a, P». tifut^ivsu
lifter Ep. fAifiiffirxt Ap. Bh. 1 . 646, Dor. fuf$i^»xrtu Tim. Locr. 95 a.

a^i/XA*, to owe, ought (Ep. ;^XX« S. 462), F. i^Xnftt (§ 222. 2), 1 A.
«^4Xi}^«, 2. A., used only in the expression of a wish, A^iXn, Pf. m^iiXnxa.
Kindred verbs, ipixxt, to aetitcty poet, (for ^xxiii, see § 245. 5), i^Xirxdvttj
to buiur (§ 289), li^tXuv, to OMMt.

iri/Mr (r. r*^-), to- fierce, F. «'ff«^, Pf. P. friwrn^fuu, A. I«t4^ A. 465,
2 A. P. lT«e«f»f Hdt 4. 94, Ath. 349 c

r«'«4(f «, to 9oWt P. riri^, A. twufo, Pf. P. teTm^fuu, 2 A. P. iff^i^^»ji».

rtifw (r. r«».), to «<retoA, F. rf»^ A. Xtmb, Pf. «-iT««« (§ 217. «), Pf. P
rUikfuu, A. P. lr«#ii». Kindred £p. fonns, r«r«<M», B. S90, A. iV. rtthm$
it;*

Digitized by VjOOQIC

it^^ ROOT Ot THE VR&6. [bOOK H.

N. 534 ; r«y&» P. 890, F. rtt'tt^m^ Ac. ; Jmp. rn (ootftr. from rAt, r. r»-*
H. 219 ; 2 Aor. Pt, nrmytip (§ 194. 3 ; r. rtPy.) A. 591.

^^ci>*», to dettroy, F. ^^i^iS, A. I^iif«, 1 Pf. tpia^M, 2 Pf. f^/«^ Pf. P
i^tcffuuf 2 A. P. l^^i^^if*. F. ^ifr«, N. 625, F. M. pU^uf^u Hdt yiil
108, ^tt^Upuu ix. 42, 2 A. M. l^«^U«-« (§ 248. /) Id. viii. 90.

§ S69. 5. Change of r to r.

»xt»«, to 6etM2, F. »>.US, A. l»Xry« (§ 56), Pf. P. mUxtf^m (§ 217. «/
1 A. P. UXSt99 and IxXiVtiv, 2 A. P. Uxt»i}v.

r^tfiat, to n(6, to loeor, F. r^i^atf A. fr^i^j^a, Pf. rir^t^, Pf. P. rSr^^c^MU^

1 A. P. Ir^^n*, commonly 2 A. P. Ir^Ctif*

6. Change of r into ii.

^XiiV*' (r. i(X«^-« AXtip.), to anoint, F. 4lX«;<4^«, A. HXit^P*, Pf. 4Xi(xrfM
(§ 191. 2) and Hxu^m, Pf. P. kXrtXiftfAcu and HXtt/tfuu, 1 A. P. 4Xi;^#ii«,

2 A. P. liXi^y.

l^t/««, to AreoA, F. \^*im, 1 A. 4ffii|«, Ar. Vesp. 649, and 4ffi|«, Hipp.,
2 A. 4ff<»«y, P. 295, Pf. P. l^^iyfiat, Hipp. Collat., Ep. l^ix^m, t. 83.

l^fiVw, to cost ctoum, F. X^u^atj A. ^(ii>^a, A. P. h^pinf* 2 A., eomm.
tntrana., tt^tTn, £. 47, Plup. P. c^i^i rr« H. 15, late Pf. F. l^^ttufMu.

See, also, XiiV« (t 37) and rtiV« (Y 39).

7. Change of • into «».

i!»«^ (r. «»«^ A»«v.)i ft> ^^^o*** P* kmoirofMUt A. i!f»«vr«, 2 Pf. A»««««»
8 Plup. 4»ii«;iiy (§ 191. 2), A. P. «»«vV#«». Late, F. ^x^Jr**, Pf. P. 4f»«9.
r/MM. Ep. kuMJUtty Horn. Merc 423.

^370* 8. Change of if mto 0.

IXytm, to aj^ltcf, F. kXy9tS, A. 4fXy9Mi, A. P. iiXyMnf,
9%u^»fMu and )v^«/MM, to lament, F. i^d^*?/!**!, A. »)i^i{/«fi».
wxtuty to woMh, F. rX^nS; A. twXffwmj Pf. P. wi^XSfuu (§ 217. •), A. P
IwxUfiv.

rt(p»» (r. Sd^., ri;^. § 263), to fumigate, to hum, F. SuV**, Pf. P. rUuftfrnt^
2 A. P. IrlJ^iff.

9. Change of 9 into iv.

«iv^« (r. kyt-y »ii^.)> A> A><^ poet 2Sach. Pr. 571, F. »cvrM, 1 A. I»im»»
«. 263, 2 A. I»i^«», 7. \6 (jiixutn, § 194. 3), 2 Pt »(»iv#c. Soph. EL 1 12a
Ep. KtvUiim, r. 453.

Tii/;t;*»^ <» prepare, poet., F. n^«r, A. Ir««;5«, Pf. P. rirvyfuu, A. P. M^h^
Pf. P«. intrans. riTii;;t;'^f A*- 423, Pf. P. nTiJ;t;«r«i (^ 248. /) ^. 63, Plup,
lrirff;;^«r« A. 808, Pf. P. Jnf, nrii;;^W«< X' ^04, F. Pf. rint^«;MM, M.
345, A. P. Irtvxhh Hipp. ELindred verbs, rtfyx**^ (§ 290), rtrmt/mt
(5 285).

^iwy^S and sometimes ^«yyig.« (§ 200), to ^, F. ftv^»/Mu and ^tft|«S>Mi.
(§ 200. 3), 1 A. t^tu^a, commonlj 2 A. tpyyov, 2 Pf. «^ft»>^ I^ PH Pt.
^fvlirtt (cf. 274. >) «I». 6, ff-i^t/y^Sy^f «. 18.

Digitized by VjOOQIC

OH. 10. 1 EMPHATIC CHANGES. 22A

10. Change of i, in the diphthong ci, to «.

»Xt/« and xXptff to shut, F. »Xi«r*r and xXiir«, A. IzXu^ai and tttXy^m,
Pf. P. »%xXue/tMi, »(»Xii/BMM, and MtKXif/Mti, F. Pf. »f»XiiV«/»«i, Ar. Lys.
1072, A. P..UXf;r#fff. Ion. »Xtff*», ./r**, Hdt. iii. 117; Dor. F. ttXafsfi or
»Xf(M llieoc. 6. 32, A. I»X«^«, &c, as from xkd^m or »Xf^*r (§ 245. 1).

^ 371. II. By the addition of consonants,
usually either t, ct, v, ctx, or f.

Of these consonants, t is chiefly added to lahial roots ; a, to
palatal and lingual roots ; y (without further addition, § 289. 2),
to liquid and pure roots ; ax, {;, &c., to pure roots. In a few
instances, the close terminations are affixed to the protracted
root

§ 373* 1. Addition of r (see § 52).
«. To Labial Roots.

drvi (r. il^., ib«'r-)» A> fauten to, to tet on fire, F. iVa^'**, A. l^^^«, Pf. P.
iT/t^AM, A. P. ^^tfv (of^^tf*, Hdt. i. 1 9, U^^i}», y. 543). Kindred, k^Jut, to
kmdie. Ion. ^^«err*r, A. f|f^a«-dt, Hdt. iii. 69, ArapUxt (§ 296).

^aitTM (r. /3«^., ^cvr-), to dip, F. A«'«^*'> A. IC«^^4t, Pf. P. fiiCm/A/iUUt
1 A. P. lU^ftiv, commonly 2 A. P. iU(ptif.

fi^Jirrtt (r. /3X«C0> to hurt, F. ^X«^;'ftr, A. KXtt^^a, Pf. fiiSXm^m, Pf. P*
fiiCXmatfuu, 1 A. P. ICx^fiP, 2 A. P. iex«^Ci}y. F. Pf. fi%Zxi^»iM, Hipp.
Ep. fiXdSofMu, T. 82.

2^(v«'r*» (r. ^(vf •)» to fear tAe ^/letA, poet Ear. EI. 1 50, F. ^^u^J^t, I A.
U^v^a, n. 324, 2 A. Op*. ^r^^^f^^M T. 187, A. P. S^(v>^tfy, i. 435.

^^rr« (r. S«f .)> to 6ury, F. ^l^^^*r, A. Um^^a, Pf. P. rUafifuu, 3 F. rt-
ii^4fMu, Soph. Aj. 577, 2 A. P. iriC^ (§ 263). 1 A. P. UJilpif,^, Hdt iL
8 1 . From the r. S«f - in another sense, come tiie Ep. and Ion. ^2 Pf., as Pres.,
vk0iinr», to he amazed, A. 243, Hdt ii. 156, 2 A. Ir«^«v, I. 193 ; and the
late 1 Pf. trans, rita^, Ath. 258 c

^f^trr^ (r. ^^'\ to brook in pieces, F. ^(i^i, Pf. P. rii^uptfrn.
A. ^^(va/'*, Hipp., 1 A. P. U^y(p9m, Anth., 2 A. P. ir^6(pn* (§ 263), P. 363*

»mpt9rrm (r. X4t/tfr-), to bend, F. xtifi^ptt, A. I»«e^^^«, Pf. P. »i»af*fuu
(§ 217. ^), A. P. Udft^tif. Kindred, yvc^v-r*^.

»X««'«-*' (r. »X«r., »Xtfr. § 259), to «toa/, F. »Xi^t, A. l«Xf^^«, Pf. »f*
»X«^« (§ 236. a), Pf. P. »UXi/AfMu, 1 A. P. Uxc^tfv, commonly 2 A. P.
UXi^rtfv. Late 2 A. txXturov.

mirr»f (r. am-.)* to etU, to strike, F. »«^», A. I»«^^•, Pf. «Sx«^«, Pf. P. »(•
jM^VMM, 3 F. MjJs^ipM, Ar. Ban. 1223, 2 A. P. l»««-iiir. 2 Pf. /^ Mjct^tif
N. 60.

«(v«^« (r. »(vC.)» to Aid^i F. »fv>^«r, A. U^a, Pf. P. xi»^ofmm, 1 A. P
Ufv^nv, sometimes 2 A. P. U^vCiry. In Hipp., Pf. »i»(vpm, F. Pf. »t»^in^««
f$m4. For »^Mrr«r»t, see $ 249. d,

f^^m.ir. fa^.), to stitdi, F. fJi^m, A. ?//«^^«, Pf. P. f/^A^ 2 A. P

ftd^rm (r. AMie«'-)* ^ '"^ V>^ F* A<^«»f 0. 137, 1 A. tfut^^a, Ar. Bq

Digitized by

Goo^e

tiil^ ROOT OF THB VERB. [bOOK II

197. Ep 2 A. pAfm^wn, shortened ^//u««-«» (§f 194. 3, 255. >, 263. 6j,
and ItMMxn, Hes. Sc 231, 2 Pf. ftifui^^a. Id. Op. 202.

r^«-9w (r. rvtr., riMrr.), F. ru^rwrn (§ 222. l), 2 A. 4r«Nr«s PC P. virtf
wvnfMu snd rirv^^Mu, 2 A. P. Iruwnu Ion. 1 A. Irt^«, A. 531, iri/^c/tii*
Hdt. u. 40. For nrvvrstnt, aee § 194. 3.

fi. To Other Boots.

kfta^t avtrt (t. iw-, Jtrvr-), to aoeompUihf F. a^tw^t A. ^fvfimn, Pf. ht'mm
Pf. P. nvv*tMMu A. P. ntvffintt Hes. Sc. 3 1 1 . The simpler form '£»« like*
wise occurs in the Prss. and Impf. For il^w, &c., see $ 246. «

«•/»«» (t. ri»-» r/»c. § 259), to h^gei^ *> 6r% /©rK*, F. rVim^ ^tnUMAj
rVitfuu, I A. 2r4»i oommonly 2 A. 7rf««v, 2 Pf. rWMMh A. P- irix^wt*
Late Pf. P. rtrc^r^M. For rtzufffas, see § 200. y.

§ 373* 2. ADDITION OF r.

This letter is sometimes simply prefixed or ^!a^ to the
characteristic^ but commonly unites with it, if a palatal^ to form
aa (tt, <J 70. 1), or less frequently f, and, if a lingwd^ to form
f (§ 51. N.), or less frequently oa (rr).

Notes. (I.) Palatals in .^» are mostly onomatopes. (2.) lingaals in
-Zm are mostly derivatiyes, wanting the second tenses, and, by reason of eu-
phonic changes, nowhere exhibiting the root in its simple form. The charac-
teristic may, however, be often determined from another word. It is most
frequently ^, and may be assumed to be this letter, if not known to be another.
(3.) In a few instances, r unites with yy to form ^, and even with a labial to
form ^ or rr.

a. Prefixed.

^X60nm (r. iXvs., AXiirx-), to avoid, poet, F. JkXv^, A. ilfXn^. Extendea
Ep. forms, «Xvr«^ Z. 443, «Xvr»4ra x- 3^*

Urm» (r. ir»., f2». § 260, liVie.), to UkeH, Ep. F. 19? (also U%m ). 279),
PC P., as Prss., Ipyftm, to be like, Eur. Ale 1063, Plup P. AT^/kuv, ). 790'.
llie common trans, form is ii»«^«, .<^r*r, &c., and the conmon intrans., the
prat. %•*%• (^ 238. /3), for which are also used the simplet s7«« (having in th€
3d Pers. pL the irr^ular form iii&in Ar. Av. 96 ; cf. Irik* *» ^237. Zhm\ antf
Ion. Jtxm, Hdt i. 155 ; Plup., as Impf., i^»iiv (§ 189. 5,, F i?|*r, Ar. Nub.
1001. Ep. Impf. mtrans. (or Pf.) tlm 2. 520.

hivtt and Wt'rtt (r. Ivir-, iy^*'. § 259, iMrr-), lo ^eol^ fc^ poet. A. 64.),
a 761, Soph. (Ed. T. 350, F. Ui^ot, H. 447, and Iw^fiwm (^ 222) t. 98
2 A. iMrv-jf, Eur. Sup. 435. Kindred, Ui^rm and Iv/r^-^ (<i 276. 0, to re-
|iroac&, £^. P. 438, O. 198, 2 A. nnv&wn and Uivrrfy (§ 19 ^ S). BeUifed
to iTr^f (1301.7).

Aiir»*r (r. Xmm'}, to srmwd; to utter, poet, F. Xauntofuu (^ 222), A. ix«xi}.
#«, commonly 2 A. Ixa««», 2 Pf. Xix«»« ( <) 236. £.). 2 A. M. XtXaxavro
(^ 194. 3). For UXAjtvla, see ^ 253. 2. Deriv. forms, Fp. Xnitiw, /. 379
Dor. XMnim, Theoc. 2. 24, Att X«»«^«f, .£sch. Sup. 872.

^. AflUxed.

«xi|« (r. «Xi»-, 4tXi5.), to iwirvf q^, poet in the Act, F. IXtlwt, Z. 109^
'Kl|iir«, y. 346, and ^Xi^«, ifisoh. Sup. 105 J, 2 A. «X ;i»w (i§ 194. %

Digitized by VjOOQIC

«m 10.] SMPHATIO CHAIfOES. S2S

261), ;fx»«/«. (5k 299) -ffiach. Fr. 417 ; Mid. to repel, P. «Xi£|rr^ci, viJ. 7. 3
A. iiXtlafinv^ i. S. 6.

i)«^«fMi<, to 6tte, Ion. and Poet, F. »i»liv»fia$j Hipp., A. 4f)«|iS/ufy, Anib^
Ft P. iHmyfMu, Act •)«(*>, to gmart from a 6tto, Symp. 4. 27.

^ 974. 7. Uniting with a Palatal to ibnn r^ (rr).

»3LXA0^»t or «XX4irr« (r. rnXXmy-^^ to cAonge, F» aXXi^at, A. iTXJL*!*, Pd'
4iXX«;^«, Pfl P. jfXXayyMM, 1 A. P. nXXd^^nv, 2 A. P. 4xx«yif».

rX4r#w (r. 4'X«f7.), to eirS^ in «6mpo8itioD with in or xaroj to s<rtAe trt^A
Urror, F. «>Xif|«, A. {vXtf^c, 2 Pf. Tri^rXn^, Pf- P' irf«rXny/M««, 8 F. fl^v-Xi?-
(o^MM, Ar. Eq. 272, 1 A. P. iwX^x^mf eommofUy 9 A. P. l^rXnynv, bat iff.
wx;^7#f, Mrt«>X<{7«f (wifyiff, r. 31, 2. 225). For ♦i-rXuyw, 4c., see § 194. 3.
The form irXwy^^fuu ($ 293) oocuK Tk. iv. 1 '25k In the simple sense to
sHlIhe, the Att wiitere associate the Act of ««M^r#w with the Pass, of rXiir.
r*r (§ 301).

•'WMv (f. «'r»»-, «yi»»« § 26^)^ to ctpmcA ^si y«ar, F, rri»^ 1 A.
f«rr«|ih poet 2 A. f«^«»«», iEsch. Etna* 25^^, Pf. %wnfix»- £p*i A^ni r. irr«^
2 A. Z>. 3 ^-rw'm* H.136, PC Pt, inwmm (§ 253. 1), B. 312 (cf. § 238. «>
Kindred, «Wr#Jl^ A. 371, «'«««#»iC*', A. 372.

TA^tt (r. r«^;^.), to ciM<Mrfr, F* <ni^^, A. Ir«^«|«, Pf. P. rffr«^«7«
«MM, A. P. i«vif^;^^ir«. From rm^iktr^m 'm forvied, by metathesis^ oootraotion,
and the aspiration of r before ^(§ ^5* N.), ^jp/U^at (rw^A^rr^ «^»«0-r., ^^m^0'\
F. ^e<^ A. c^^«SiH A. P. i#^#ii». ]^Pf.,asP^.intraoB.,«ir^;^«(§62),
H. 346.

raeem (r. rdty.), to orrai^ F. r«^«. A- It«5«» Pf» Tir«;^«» Pt P. ri*
riLyfuu, F. Pn rtriil|«^iMM, Th. v. 71, 1 A. P. Irm^^tif, rare 2 A. P. lriJyi»n

f^Urtt (r. C^i»0* ^ s)b«dd!er, F. f^tiat, A. 7^e'^«, 2 Pf. rc^^r»«. For n.
f^Unrmf, see ^ 846. 2.

I. UnHiiig with a P^tal to Ibrm C*

»fa^t *and 2 Pf. »i»^£ym. (§ 238. /3), to er^, F. Pf. xiK^ilo/Mtt (§ 239. c),
2 A. \»^»yu Kindred, »x£iii (§ 277. «), »fiv?«, -a^Ia*, xX^^«.

«i/u»^«» (r. •lfA^y-\ to bewail, F. *l/uuil^afuUf A. f/AM^et, Pf. P. elfftatyfiuu
(c 189. 4). A. P. JPl. •ifMtx^ttf Theog. 1204, late F. «;^|Af, Anth.

iX«Xv^*r (r. iX»Xvy-), to shoutf to shriek^ F. iXtXil^oftMij A. ivX«Xv^«.

rny«^^ and poet rnv«;^*», to ^roan^ F. rrcv«^a>, A. \rrU«t,l^a, Poet forms,
rrM«;^M», Soph. EL 133, rrmax'^*' O' '*'««'*AJ'C*'> B. 781, A. lrr«v«;^ii#«y
2. 124.

r^«^d» and r^«rr« (r. r^«7-), to day, F. r^«|a», A. 7r^«^<x, 1 A. P. l^^d^"
inh commonly 2 A. P. lirpmynv* Pf. P* irpayf$at$j ». 582. The shorter
root ^«. appears in the Sp. PC P. tI^^mm, £. 531, F. Pf. vi^nffuih N. 829.
Hence (r. f«., ^ty. §§ 259, 277), the poet 2 A. liri^o (§ ) 194. 3, 261>

I. Uniting with yy to form ^.

«'X«C'» (r* vXmt^.), to coKM to tmnufer, poet (s> ff-XMVM**), B. 132^
A. WXmyia, m. 307 ; Hid. irX«^«^«, to «NiM^, Soph. Aj. 886, F. v-xiy^.
^« #.312, A. P. irxiyx^f £ar. Hipp. 240.

wtiXvi^t (r. rotX^-iy^.), to fOMul a trumpet^ F. r«X9r/7^*r, A. WmXm^/f^
Late F. waXviw, &c

See, also, «Xi^« Ci 277. •).

Digitized

by Google

•<J2R ROOT or TH» VEKB» [bOOK IL

§ 37S« C* Uniting with a lingaal to fona ^.

»mPi!^m (r. i., 22. § 282, i;., i*^. §^259), to teat, to ji/ac«, F. mafiU*,, »mtm
(§ 200. /3), A. i»i^iV« and ««^ir« (^ 1^*2. 3), Ar. Ran. 91 1. Mid. »«^;^«
/«M, and rarely »a§V^o(Attty Fl. Ax. 371 c, to ««, F. »a^t(n<r»fAmt (§ 222), PI
Phsedr. 229 a, and »tihhvfuu (§ 200. )^), PI. Theaet. 146 a, ^ A. commonly
trans. Ua^4<r«/»f}y, Dem. 897. 3, and »etturi/Ant {^ 189. :«), Eur. Hipp. 31
2 A. intrans. Ua4tt^mti9, u 5. 9. Late, A. P. Ijut^i^tit, Anth., F. M. »«/•
2it«-«/«a«, Diog. Ldiert. ii. 72. The simple forms are chiefly poet, and dialectks
i^*», to teaty sit, B. 53, iEsch. Earn. 18 (extended U^mvtf, Th. ii. 76), A. J^u,
B. 549, Pt Umts »• 361 (Ion. v«r.f/r«f Hdt iii. 126); Mid. T^^^mm, F. 162,
and rarely i^«^m, Soph. (Ed. T. 32, F. ip.Unffa4 L 455, later i7r«/MM Ap. Bh.
2. 807, I A. tUa/ttiP, Theog. 12, irr^^^nv, Pind. P. 4. 363, i«rr«/M(ir, {. 295,
2 A. IC^^Di, .£sch. Earn. 3 ; Pf. P. ^^mm, to tU (^ 59), A. 134, Eur. Ale
604, of which the comp. jtmin/Mu is also common in Att. proae. Derir*
(i^uaiy .vr*r, &C., A. P. ti^Unt and th^w4w (§ 278. y),

ivtfiui^tt (r. ifftf/iMir.), to name, F. mti^^m, A. mtifutra, Pf. mtifMtmm, Pf. P*
mafAa^fuu, A. P. ivv«^MM'^irv. lon. «tfv«p«^iv (§ 44. 4), Hdt. Iv. 6, .£oL •»»-
^4^«^ (§ 44. 5), Pind. P. 2. 82, chiefly Ep. iftftctiw, B. 488.

^^«^«r (r. ^^c).), to'teU, F, ^f«ra», A. If^««w, Pf. Wf^x*, Pf. P.>i^.
r^MH, A. P. i^r^«y. Ft F. PL «'^.«'c^e«)^»««, Hes. Op. 653. For «ri.
^^«2w. &c see § 194. 3. Extended, 1 A. ^«Wrt Pind. Nem. 3. 45.

Xdl»> (r. x*^'* ««)- § 263. N.), to <2r»M 6aeft, rttirt (iva-x^** ^' 116),
more frequently, bat chiefly Ep., BGd. x*X'f**** ^ reih^ F. ;^4^«^mm, 1 A.
ix»^^»f*fi9, A. 535. Ep. 2 A. i'^. «i»«Uy, 2 A. M. »c»«2«»r« (§194. 3;.
F. MxM^m (§ 239. 6).

«. Umting with a Tiingnal to form 99 (rr).

itniieettt to he vnuted, Ep. K. 493, A. «if/cr«, Ap. Bh. I. 1171.

itff*i^i*, and Att etffisrrs* (r. il^^.), F. ib^/Mr«r, ^^^fuu. Dor. A. P.
l^fAoxhtj Diog. Laert. viii. 85.

^Xt00-t or fixirrt (r. /«iXir-, /«X«r- § 261, jSAjt- § 64. K.), to toA« Aofaqf
^m ^e Aire, F. /3X/r*r, A. cCXir«.

*«e«''<^«' (r. »«e*'^-). to arm, poet., Pf. P. PL »%M^t4fs,Ut (§ 53), V, 18
Eur. Andr. 279. A. M. PL »«(vrr«^cMf (§ 71) T. 397, Dor. A. Ui^v^di
(^ 245. 1), Theoc 3. 5.

9Fi99tiy to tpnnJdty F. <r«r*r, A. X^tawat^ A. P. iv'iir/ifv*

«'XiC«-7*r, to fouhion, F. )rX«r*r, A. l)rX«r«, Pf. P. itWXm^fuut A. P. Wxi.

i^. Uniting Wth a Labial to form X <"* •'•'•

»/{a/ (r. M^.)> *o washf F. »A^*», A. hi^», Pf. P. fUs/A/uti, A. P. Iyi>ln»,

Hipp. Late v/Vrar, Pint, but iito-viwrt^fw r. 178.

9riffa0 or «'irr*r (r. ^-cr-), to cooA, F. «'i^^M, A. frt^^«, Pf. P. ritrf/A^uw
A. P. SiTi^^nv* Late ftiitrtt.

See, abo, IriVr** (§ 273. «), XiC«/MM (§ 290).

^970. Rekakk. As verba in -T^v and -erm are formed lh>m both
palatal ^and lingual roots, and as pure yerbs often pass into verbs in -^d», it ii
not strange that in some yerbs there should be an intermingling of fonnf.
Thus,

Digitized

by Google

CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 227

ktwi^t, to match, F. i^drtt, A. jf^ircr*, Pf. ^(it»»m, Ff. P. H^wmtfuu^
A. P. ^i^r/nir. Non-Att. F. ile«ri^A», X. 310, A. P. «f«-4£;^j^ii», Hdt u. 90,
&c Late 2 A. M. P*. (r. &^:, § 227) i^^df^tf^, Anth.

Iwee/?:*', to «%, tir^, poet., F. U«(i'|*», A. 191, A. W^i|« P. 187, and
ny^if»t Anacr., Pf. P. 4»«^ir^Mu, Soph. Aj. 26, hmfi^nf, JBach. Cho. 347,
Primidye, l»«;^«» 0. 296, 2 A. i|fy«^«». Soph. Ant 871, 1 A. M. ifuf^ftnv,
E. 43.

7^« (or T{>«) and /iC<» ('• lcy-» hy § ^62, I^J-), to do, poet and Ion
ifiech. Sept 231, 4>. 214, F. I(|« i. 360, and /i^, Ear. Ale. 262, A. l^lm
JEsch. Sept 924, and tffi^a or f^t^M, L 536, Soph. (Ed. G. 539 (observe tha
augment), 2 Pf. I«^y«, B. 272, 2 Plnp. U^yi/y (§ 189. 5), >. 693, U^yMS
Hdt L 127, A. P. Pt. ftX^iit, L 250.

oi^fAn^il^tt, to ponder, poet, F. fAt^n^il^ r. 261, A. i/«i^ii^«S», A. 189,
and IfUffin^i^m, At. Yesp. 5.

<r«;{;«r, to phj^, F. irttil»/Mu, wa^wfuti (§ 200. 3), A. IrMr*, Pf. w^wmrn^
Pf* P. wtwtu€fuu. Later, vai!^, twatl^m^ m^rmxa, irivrmiypuu, lr«/;^^«v.

Note. See § 245. 1 . The Dorics sometimes extend the palatal fbrms to
other tenses, besides the Fat and A<nr. act and mid. ; as, iXvyix^m (far Jwhu)
Theoc. 1 98, riiX»Y/*»* (^Xi^) Id. 22. 45, i^ftix^m (§ 275. n).

§ 3 7 7* S. ADDinON OF ».

In impure roots, y is commonly prefixed to the characteristic «
but in jnir^ roots, affixed.

Note. In a few poetic forms, » is prefixed to a diaracterlstic For the
changes of » before a consonant, see § 54. A short vowel is sometimes
lengthened before ».

A. IVefixed to a Consonant

dXXtfuu (r. 'AX-, JkfX', AAA.)> to hap, F. kXwfuu, A. hxifunh Smbf. *aXm
fMu (§ 86. «), &C., 2 A. M/iim, 8ubf. 'ixifuu, &g. Ep. nade 2 A. iS. 2
^Xr» «•. 754, 3 iXr» 755, PL &XfUf$t A. 421 (§§ 13. 4, 185. }).

fLaXXm (r. ^«X^ ^X«. § 262, ^0X1- §§ 28, 288), F. fimXi, &c., see § 223.
Ep., F. fiXwtfuu, T. 335, 2 A. KXnf (^ 227.^), f. 15, lSx^f$tit, U. 39,
commonly pass. A. 675, Cipt. 8. 2 fiXp* or (r. ^Xi- § 259, cf. xt^**ii «•>•«^»f^
§ 284) $Xm N. 288, /n/. ^Xifr/«i A. 1 15, &c. ; Pf. P. fitCiXnfuu, L 9.

»Xii^« (r. »X4iy-« »X«yy-, «X«{^. § 274. •), to c&xn^, to scream, F. »Xi^^w,
] A. txXmy^m, 2 A. IxXa^o, Pf., as Pres., »i»Xetyyat or »i»Xmyx»i Ar. Vesp.
929 (»«*Xny«, B. 222, see § 246. 2), F. Pf. fnxXdylof^mt (§ 239. c). Ex-
lecded forms, xXmyyUt, Theoc. Ep. 6. 5, uXmyymUm, JSsch. Eam. 131,
«X«y7i6»*' Soph. Fr. 782.

r^«XX*» (r. r^«X.)» to discetw, F. r^Xiv, A. fr^i|X«, PC P. te^Xfttu,
9 A. P. Ir^tfXiry.

#rlXX« (r. ^raX-f mX- § 259), to teiid^ F. #nX*l, A. UruXm, PC lrr«X««y '
FT. P. UraXftmi, 9 A. P. Wrdx^h rarely 1 A. P. Wrtixfn*. For Uv«xi2«rt,
■ee $ 248. /.

fi. Affixed to a Consonant

Unm (r. )«»^ >9s. § 266), to bite, V. ^^l»^t, 2 A. »«»•», Pf. P. I0«
y^MM, A. P. Uii;t/n». Poet Mid. >«*»^^^«i, -^^sch. Pers. 571.

Digitized

by Google

ROOT OP TBB VBȣ. [BOOK 11

44^yi» (r. rafit-, rif*- § §59), to cnrf, F. ^-i^iP, 2 A. ttmutf tend in^fun, Pf
viTf»tr»M (§ 361), Pf. P. ^irftfifiiah 3 F. ^irfinvtfuu, A. P. Wfi.Mw. Io&
r«/»»M, r. 105. FVm- nr^«r#«is aee ) 234. ^. Kindred Ep. rfuiyat, 11. 390
(fyMiV«w, B^>flch. 2. 81), F. r^^«», 1 A. 7r>i»^^ )2 A. Ir/M^yM^ 2 A. F,Upd
y9i9, laur i<iyM»y«». Some read ri/ifi, us Praa^ N. 707.

fl0d, idao, »i/»y«» (§ 223).

§ft78. y. Affixed io a YvfreL

^#;»», and poet ^»wnm ({ 279 > n /3«.X to ^ F. ^n^fuu^ 2 A. H/kp
(T 57 ; see § 227, 242. b, 251. 4), Pf. ^iUttm, (see ^ »2S8. «). Poet anf
Ion., F. /3i;rM, J tottf cauae to go, finr. Iph. T. 742, 1 A. 7C>i^c, Hdt. i. 46
In composition, Pf. P. fitCmfAat and fii€et<r/*at (§ 221 . «), A. P. ICdB^nV' Fot
/3ff0t«, &c, see ^ 185. i. Kindred forms, /3«« in Dor. ixCStras Th. v. 77
£p. /3iC^, r. 22, /3;Cii^, H. 213, fitCmrf,0 N. 809; Ion. fiiUem*,, Hipp.;
tiie coramon oansative ^tCmt^tt ; and apparendj the Ep. IVm. nsed as Fat.
(^ 200. b) A(«|i*«i, / tkaa watt, /hh;, O. 194, X. 431, PL ^if^tHm (or /3i«
^<r^«) Horn. Ap. 528.

)</M» (r. I|}.)> to mtar, F. }vw0f$mt, 2 A. I^v (f 57 ; flae ^ 227, 926. 4),
Pf. Ms»m, For ^vfMvri, sea $ 243. 4. Tha (Mimitiva aU is comm«nly
caosative, to make to enter (jet = ^wm, i. 272), F. U^tt, A. I^f7r«, Pf. «l«'«.
)f^t;»« V. 8. 23, Pf. P. ri$vf^, A. P. ilt^tif. <M€tfy Ep. and Ion., Pres. M.
ivoftMs, £. 140, A. M. llufftifftnfy 6. 578, 2 A. P. iiinvt Hipp. For Wir«,&c.,
see <^ 185. 1. Later Ep. Mm, ^wnrm, Ap. Bh. 1. 1008, A. Pt. }v^ms 1326.

iktittf commonly iKmvttt, to drive, F. IXart, tX» (^ 200. 2), A. jfJUtMi, Pf.
tXifXc»A(6 191), Pf. P. UiiXa^ci, A. P. ^Xa^D». loa, Pf. P. \>.nXtt9fUU
Htpp., A. P. hxdein^, Hdt m. 54. For iA.iiX«)«r«, see § 248. /. Ion. and
I'bet U«rr^f«, 2. 543.

fAotfiai and fMiUfims (r. /««•, /iMii- ^ 267, /tiv- ^ 259), to «eeA after, poet.
Soph. (Ed. C. 836, ». 367, Ep. F. fteiirrtfuu (^ 71) A. 190, A. Ifimffifinp,
f. 429, 2 Pf. yKS^«M (§ 238. «). Pres. Imp. fuiu (§ 242. b) Mem. u. I. 20
(Epich.), Inf. (as from r. fta».) fiSrfat Theog. 769. Extended, fiat/Um,
.ffrw. Soph. Aj. 50.

vtw (r. «••-, «•!- § 259), to rfrtnA, F. •'f^/KOi (^ VOO. b). later mwf/^mt
;§ 200. 3), 2 A. i^Tn (§ 227. «), /mp. Wi, commonly «•»#, Pf. «->«'•»»«,
Pf. F. tJ«-«a*«'. a. p. WiSnu

rltt (r. r<-), to pajf, to expiate, F. rttf-M, A. trt^; Pf. rfrtua, Pf. P. riW-
r/u«<, A. P. IrUhv. Mid. r/v«/u«i, and rlrUfMu or rlfvUfMtt (^ 293), to avenge,
to punidi, chiefly poet P. 279, 366, Em:. Or. 323, 1 172, Hdt v. 77. Poet
TM, to pay honor to, F. <n9t I. 142, Irira, Soph. Ant 22, Pf. P. Pt. rtriftitH,
r. 426.

^^«v» (r. ^^«-)* to anticipate, F. ^fiavm, commonly ^4nr§^ou (§ 219), 1 A.
l^i«r«, 2 A- iipfint (§ 2J7). Pf. tp4ax», Ep. 2 A. M. Pt. ^^^^iMf E. 1 19.

^^/iri* (r. ^i-), to pertsA, to destroy, F. trans. ^^*V«», ^^/*i. Soph. Aj. 1027,
intrans. (pSlffAeu, A. trans, i^fitm, Pf. P. t^^ffiai, Plup. P. and 2 A. M.
(^§ 227, 226. 4) l(pfi1f^nf. Ep., ffm, 2. 446, /5. 368, A. P. I^^^n^ ^^. 331,
3 A. Act t<p^4of (cf. § 299) E. 110. Extended poet fbrm, ^ftttU, A.
491, «. 250.

I. Preixed to «.

See iifivaftrnt (5 298), mifvnfiii, K^nf^vufAM, 9'Irtnfiu, r»iX«^ (^ WS), «r(^v«-
•M r§ 285), 9rsXm»,, Wx»«/mj (§ 28-').

Digitized

by Google

%:R. 10;] BKiVATie t;BAi7<iB^ 239

The addition of these letters is commonly attended with the
precession or protraction of the preceding vowel, with metathe*
ra« or with the h$i of a eotwmani.

«. Without fnrther Changs.

i^r»» (t. k^t-), 10 piBOie, F* Jtfi^tt, A. |^ir«, A. P. ^Whif. Sto Jt^it^U
w»m (§ 285).
•^ yn^im and yn^ivnty to grow old^ F. yn^wm and yn^mfttttf I A. Iyii(«r«,
i A. iynfav (§ 227), Pf. yiyn^dma.

iXetfxafMU (r. /Aa-)i ^ propitiate, F. IXarfim^ A. /X&r«/M»)<A. P. Iktir^f.
Kindred Att foiins, skUfiat Mach. Sup. 1 1 7, iXtit/uu, PI L^. 804 b. £p.,
IdJUfiott, B. 550) Pf. iStt^. iXifJMf, f. 3^5, OpL iXmsi^ Horn. Ap. 165 ;
forms as from 7kn/u, Imp. fjicA Ap. Bk. 4. 1014. TxnA (§251. 4)^ Mid.
7;uE^MM H(«m. Hym. 20. 5 ; later £i>.» F. iX#(iyMu Ap. Rh. 2. 808, A. ;a«|«.
fuiw. I. 1093.

l^irjMt (r. ^M#»-), A» tnterieolK, Fw fuitwm, A. I^«l#«#», A. P. ^t^i/rAf».
Tb% iatrant. ^m^^ Io de ^rtpiA, oocnn i» tha Pras. and Impf.

^ 3 80# 13. Towvl diangod bj Preoessioit.

A/iCkiat, commonly i^CXiVx# (r. A/»CX»., i^CXiriiK $ 259), to imtttmy,
F. AfiCXsirit, A. UfA^Xm, Pf. tf/itCXttxtt, Pf. P. ^^uCXw^m. 2 A. 4^Cx«»» in
Said. Ion. S|^^Cxiir«/ Hipp.

^irCXiM, commonly ApdXiwiut (r. ix«-, IXiVx-)* ^ expend^ F. AtXXiiirat,
A. ^yiix»r«, Pf MXMxm, PC P. MxmfMu^ A. P. kvnXmiw, This verb often
retafaiB « in the augment (§ 189. 4), espedaOy in the older Att ; and some-
times, in doable composition, augments tira second preposition (§ 192. 3);
thus, A. A»ix»r«, Soph. 4|. 1049, tutrnfdXmm, Isoc. 201 b.

7. Yowsl Lepgthened.

fiitirsM/uu (r. ^«., fim«r».\ chiefly in the comp. Am-Cuirxtfuu, to revwe,
both trans, and intrans., F. fimwfuu, I A. trans. iCmrmftn*, 2 A. intrans.
iCim (§ 227), /i/i;, /3m;*i» (§ 226. 2), ^•r^i, /l«M«i, /SiWf. Primitiv«, /Bm«*, *»
Aw, Fat. /Ii«r«, commonly fimnfMu, 1 A. iCiWa, commonly 2 A. iCim*^
Pf. IhCmtcm^ Pf. P. /Siffm^oM. Shorttf Ep. ibrm^ ^ti^usU {fitifu^^ Wolf.,
§ 278) Hom. Ap. 528, F. jS^wrir^i Ap. Rb. 1 . 685. For ^itt, we commonly
find, in the Pros, and Impf^ ?•«», winch again in the other tenses (F. J^ifet or
Xnre^mtt A. 7^if^«, &C.) is rare or late.' For the contraction of ^««, see
§ S3. «. From the contr. forms of the Impf. (I^atf) V^ntt <(*)> appears ts
have arisen a Ist Pers. f^ny Eur. Ale 295, and a late Imp. ^«^i Anth. The
prolonged J^mm and T^im (§ 242. b) have given rise to A- W-ii«tw% Hdt.L 120,
Inf, liw Simon. Fr. 231. 17.

^981. I Metatiiesii.

BXtim40 (r. ^«X^ ^X«-, /3x«. § 64. N.), to go, to come (in the Pros., Ep.
and' found only in composition, v. 466), F. ffXwfMu^ 2 A. I^Xtfv, PfL
fiiicikmnm (§ 223)

5»ifr)M» (r. S«ff^ &N(-), lo diie, F. Scvm^mm, 2 A. 7^«m», Pf. rt^»ii»« (§ 237),
F. Pf. r«#>if(.» and rtif^Ui^fmt (§ 239. a). See mrtita* (§ 295).

20

Digitized

by Google

290 ROOT OF THE VEBB. [BOOlt ir

^^9»m (r. S«^^ ^V')i to bap, F. ^wfuu, 2 A. U*^n. ColUt. ^^Smm
Hdt.iil 109.

t. Consoiiaiit Dropped.

X^»^ (r. a:«»-» § 55), to gape, F. ;^«m«/mm, 2 A. tx»9§9, 2 Pf. »l;^ffMb
Late ;^«/r«. Extended -;^«r»«^M, Ar. Yesp. 695.

*^ex*» ('• «'«'-» •'••'^- §§ 259, 277, wafie»', •'•r;^-, the aspiration of the ^,
which is dropped befine r, being transferred to the », which thus becomes ;^),
to suffer, F. «'i/r«^/ (§ 58), 2 A. ;«-«^«f, 2 Pf. ^i^otia. Poet 1 A. PL «^.
r«r (bat rr«iV«r Dind.) iBsch. Ag. I6*<24, £p. Pf. Pt, ^%^a4vi^ (§ 253. 2)
e. 555, Dor. Pf. «'(«'«r;t;'*> Epich. 7(2). For «rf«'«r^i, see § 2S8. /3.

^98 3* 5. Addition of ^, ^, ^, and ;^.

l^i/^« and i^i^ (r. ^/«i(-)> ^ dqprwe, poet Find. P. 6. 27, r. 18,
F. dlM«e^) A. 4>«ier», S. 64, A. P. niM($w, X. 58.

}m» and }f4')« (r. I/., lu^ § 269. 6) both £p. I. 433, A. 470, oommoidy
l%im or ItUjim (^ 58, § 237), to /wr, F. Ep. )iiV«^«i, O. 299, A. ftu^m,
Cyr, L 4. 22 ; Mid. )/«/mm, to frigkien, poet £. 763, ifisch. Eura. 357. Deriv.
^s^iVm^mw or itiirrtfMu, to friglUen, ^M%m ($ 299), and Ep. lin/M, to ekaee.

ntim (r. »t., mi. § 266), to ipm, F. mwt, A. P. bii^iiy. Ep. yi«r, Hes. Op.
775, A. tmrm, T. 128, imw^/Ant, «. 198. Late Pf. P. AmtrfMu.

•hrmim (r. «vrff-), to.acotuMi^ F. •hriwm, &c Ep. «vr«M, X' ^^^t ^* •Mwt,

1 A. «^r«, 2 A. 5. 3 «^r& (§ 224. E.), /n/. ^^rii^f, w»^»m, E. 132,

2 A. M. Pt., as Pass., §vrAiA%9ot, A. 659.

^txil^m, and poet ^%xt4m, Eur. Bh. 555, or irxi/ar, Soph. EL 220 (r. nX«t^
«'tX«^^ «'iXi^., irXiil^, «rXiE/., §§ 260, 262), to approach, F. nA«rM, ^%Xm
(§ 200. 2), A. Wixa^m, A. P. Im'tU^ifif and poet Iv-Xa/h* (§261. N.),
.£sch. Pr. 896. Ep., nA«Ur, Jion^ Bac. 44, Pf. P. ^i^Xn/uu ^ 108, 2 A. M.
irXif/Kifv, A. 449 ; «'/X»iS«, to 6rtii^ near, Hes. Op. 508, wiXntfuu, to approatdi,
T. 93.

ir^w and t^/^m* ^ *<>*<^> P* ^ff'^^t A. Ir^/r*, Pf. P. ^i^^tw/uu, A. P.

»;;«' (r* r««^ r». § 261), to save, F. r«;r«», A. Um^a, Pf. rfr«»«, Pf. P.
wiwrn/uu and rirwr/uM, A. P. I«^«». Ep., mw. Call Del. ^'i, r««r», A. 83,
&C. ; Fines. Imp, (rii«t, ri(«v, wi, § 242. b) ri£«» ». 230, Impf. 5. 3 (lriS«i)
Ui«r or ri^«» n. 363, <l>. 238 ; contr. wttm, Ap. Rh. 4. 1 97 ; rim, in the Subj.
r;^L681,#i9 424.

T^vM, to afflict, F. T^tri, Pf. P. rlr^i/^MM* and «'^</;^<v (>*. v^v-* ^^X"*
r^vx»' § 298), F. rfv^m, Pf. P. nr^vx-f^^h Th. iv. 60. So yU> (§ 220), to
wim, poet irn;^^, i. 375 ; ^i^« and '^'nx*'* ^ mb,

^ ass. III. By INCREASING THE NUMBER OF

SYLLABLES, either, 1. by reduplication^ or 2. by
syllabic affixes^ or 3. by exchange of letters.

1. Reduplication.

Reduplication in the root is most frequent in
verbs in -(ii and -crxo. It is of three kinds :

Digitized

by Google

CR ]0.] ^ EMPHATIC CHANaSS; 231

a. Proper^ which belongs to roots beginning wiA a single
consonant^ with a mute and liquid^ or with ^y, and which pre-
fixes the initial consonant with *, or rarely with «. See dlr^
dotfiL^ xlxQni^i' (^ 284) ; /^t^^oiaxoy, fiifivT^axto (§ 285).

b. Attic^ which belongs to roots beginning with a short vowel
followed by a single consonant^ and which prefixes the two
first letters. See aga(jlaxa) (§ 285).

lostnad of rapeating the initial vowel, t is sometiines inserted, in inutatioo
of the proper reduplication. See ititnfu (§ 284).

c. Improper^ which belongs to roots not included above, and
which simply prefixes i with the rough breathing.

Compare §§ 190, 191. 2. 4.

§ 3841* «. YertM in ./m.

9U, to Umd, nanfy ^%i/m (r. )t., li^i.), v. 8. 24 (Impf. )/}« A. 105).
F. ^V«». See §§ 219, 216. fi.

ItlnfM (r. )«., )»)«-)* *>* P^ ^* ^'*^ ^ ^i^ivctf, f. 358. See ^ 51.

7ii/M (p. 1^ ;•-), to swirf, F. ^r«#. See T 54, § 229.

Irrn/M (r. rrc-, trr»'), io place, F. rn^r^. See ^ 48. Poet 1 A. Irrar«,
M. 56, Late Pf. trans. trriMm Anth., Dor. I A. P. UrtJnt Call. Lav. 83.
Kindred fbrms, i^rdw in composition onlv, Dem. 807. 6; rare Ur»i»»t
(§246. N.) Ath. 412 e; late rW»», Bom. "l4. 4 ; rrfi7^« (§ 246. «).

»/;^:e«»Aw (r- ;t:f«-» ""AJe*- § 62), to &im^ F. ;c^Va», A. I;tf •»•*«» P^- P- »i
X^n^M' Mid. zixt^fiuth ^ borrow. The primitive sense (xf the root xt*'
appears to be to nijify need. Hence we have,

1 . tf%(9i/*h to euppfy the need of another, by tending him what he reqmreg,
liid. ttix^etfiat, to nqtply -onie own need by borrowing,

2. xt^" (^ 218. «), to aupfiy the need of one who consults an oracle, by
answering his inquiries, F. ;^^r«>, A. 7;^f nra, Pf. P. ^ix^n/^tu and xix(*i'fi»h
A, P. ix^nvfin*' Mid. xt^^f**h ^ consult an oracle. Poet. xziK^ ^^ Xi^Z"*
Fur. Hel. 516.

3. x^f^*h ^ ***PP^ <'"^'' <'(<''* "^^ ^ making use of a thing, F. x^^»f^»h
Pf. »ix(fifMu* A. P. Ixt^'^^^i A. M. i;^^0-«^ir». In the Att. contract forms
of ;t;(«i» and xt'^P^h n takes the place of « (§ 33. «), which, on the other
hand> is commonly retained by the Ion. ; as xt^ ^^^ ^ ^^*

4. ;t^ (3 Pers. sing., for ;t;f«i/ or ;t;f nr/), t* supplies need, \. %. Uis useful
or necessary, it must or o«^A/ to be, impers. ; SubJ. xH^ Opt, (XZ'^'* XO'

5 259) x(***'* ^^f' xi*'f*** ^^ P^^' (;t:e««'0 xe^^^ ^°^*' ^«*'- (;t:e««»'» « *"**

serted after contraction, § 35) xt***^ ' I^P^* ix(*i^ (with » paragogic, for tx(»h
or ?^^, cf. § 21 1. N.) or unaugm. (§ 194. 1 ) xe*i* * F"*- ;ee'»'»'' Tb® Par-
ticiple xt*''* ^ sometimes used as an indeclinable noun ; thus, r^a xt*^**
Personally, 8, 2 xfi'^* (§ ^82), yo« must, Ar. Ach. 778 (Meg.) Pf. P., as
Pres., nixfnfiMi, to need, want, Eur. Iph. A. 382, «. l.'l, F. Pf. »tx(^^»f»»h
Theoc. 16. 73. Kindred^ xnl"* ^ voant, desire, Ion. xi*'*^ ^^ ^* ^^
Dor. xti^^** Theoc 8. 1 2, and ;te^)««> Ar. Ach. 734. (§ 70. V.) ; Ion. d^on.
XcntwMfms, Hdt. iii. 117.

Digitized

by Google

333 ROOT OP m TsmBi | Bodk o

5. A>ri*xt*h ** f^ mpjpHes need; i. e. «(tu^Ee«i, it •• «no«9&| ii|f. k*§
Xi^* ' Impf. iitix^fi, F. i^axinffiit A. ^^f;^if^ik Ion. a^^^^f^ -AJW*** ^
(see 3 above), Hdt. ix. 79. So ^^tx^itrt {^. 2^1. a) Id. viii. 14, ttmret'Xif
i. 164, \»-xznvu iil 1 87. These verbs are also used personallT-.

Wtimfu,{T. iva-j oMva-), to benefit^ F. ntiffttj A. tSftitret, A. P. tivn^nh 2 A* li
^i^Kif* and ^y^nir (^ 824. 3), 0^ •mi^cmiv, /f|f. JtwrAti, Ep. and IDO. Aip
onr* T. 68, /n/. it^i^eu Hip^^., P^. «^iuMf ^ 33. Doubtlul 2 A. Act Inf
i^nvtu H. Rep. 600 d ; late 1 A. M. meia^fAvtj Antb.

vrlfi'srkfiiM (r. w-Xai-, «r<-^-«rX«- § 263. 6), to //4 F. «rXiir«#, A. Iw'Xifwi,
Pf. fl^i«'Xftx«, Pf. P. riirXitr^ffi (Plnp. h'tTi'ttXttrn L^s. t80. 4),
A. P. i^XnsSnv, 2 A. M. lirX^fint ($ 224. 3), Ope. (ff-Xn.i.^ir*) irk^fit dr
(ff-Xtf-, irXi- § 2.59) 9'Xti^v (cf. ;^;i/«* 4 above, ^Xir^^ § 277. a), /n^y. v-X?**
re. i'art. «-Xi7/*iMf. /m/>. i^-«-iVx»j^i (§ 251. 4) <I>. 3ll, P^ (r. «-Xf-) W-
witXtif, Hipp. CoOat. Ion. forms, irt/u,vXKM, -!•», Hes. Th. 88<), 9'i^Xtt, Hei.
8c. 291 Gaisf., trifitirkmvafitai I. 679. Kindred, ^-Xii^^ai, and the intraofl.
itk^^i (2 Pf. «-iirXfi^«, Theoc. 22. :}8), whence vXnSvm and ^Xn^*M,

9'i/*ir^fifM (r. «•;«-, T<^r^-), to fttirn, F. «^^m» A. Ir^u*-*, Pf. P. vri^^n-
fAtu or «rir^n'/^«') A. P. W^n^Snv, Pf. ^«'tf.4ri«'^fixa, Hipp., F. Pf. ••nr^r*-
^Hw, Hdt vi. 9, A. l«-^frf Hes. Th. 656, Rp. Stib^ (as fVon ^r^wfw) W^mti^-
ri (§ 181. ^) Ar. Lys. 248. Rare Ep. form, ^^m, I. .589.

Note. The epenthetic /» of ^IfA^Xtifu and vifAv^^fu is conraibnly omitt^
when these verbs, in compositioD, ate preceded by /m ; thuS) ijK«nVXi!^ bat
lyitri^KirXifv.

r«Vfi^ (r. di., n#i^ § 62), to jnd, F. S^r^. See f 50.

Remark. Oq/m/ (^ 53) is the only verb m -fu having a moiiosyllabio
root, and beginning with a consonant, which is not reduplicated.

^ S 89* /3. Verbs in .r»a».

dl^rM* (r. dl;., &^t^ i^«^r»- $ 296), to fit, Ep. |. S3, 1 A. ^Tf**,
H. 167, a, 280, 2 A. H^m^o* A. > 10, Soph. Sa. 147 (§ 194. 3), 2 Pf. in-
trans., as Pres., of^o^a, N. 800, also Att. £^a(«, iEsch. Prom. 60, H. Gr. iv.

7. 6, A. P. ii^§fi^ II. 2i 1. Pf. P. i^^^tfia,, Hes. Op. 4^:9, Ap. Rh. 1. 787.
For i^i^vTei, see y 253. 2. Deriv., ^^irxw (§ 279), A^ri/« and m^rtnt, &C

fiiC^M9xc* (r. jStftf., fitC^MO'x-, ^ 280. y), to ea< (the Pres. rare), Pf. jSfCf«»x«
(see ^ i;38. «), Pf. P. M^otftau Ep., 2 A. Jfff^A»r, Horn. Ap. 1 27, 2 Pf. Opt.
(r. /a^W. ; or fix>m new Pres. fitC^iiftt) fitS^diatf A, 35, F. Pf. ^^mfftftai,
$. 203; Ion. A. P. iC^ai^fif Hdt. iil. 16 ; late Ep. 1 A. SfC(«$M, Ap. Rh.

8. 27 1 ; late F. ^^ti(f»f*etu The deficiencies of this verb are supplied hy Ufi'im
(§ 298) and r^tiiym (^ 267. 3).

y$ywxtt (r. yv9'\ to know^ F. yft^vftat, 2 A. l^^-vwir (^ 57), Pf. {yv^xa,
Ff. P. tyvatffAau, A. P. 27>Mr^}fv. 2 A. M. OpU rvy-ytnTt i£f>ch. Sup. 216,
Ion. 1 A. av-tyv«ra, persuaded, Hdt. i. 68.

Note. The Ion. (not Hom.) and the later Greek softened y y^u^xtt and
yiyvtfMU (§ 286) to ylvuvxtt and yly^^a/.

Ztid^xM (r. ^«^ ^i^a;^-, ^i^«r«-), to toacA, F. di^«^«, A. i^i'^^a, Pf. )Ui'^s;t'«,
Pf. P. }<2i^a9.^«i, A. V.ihUx^fif. Ep., 1 A. f)4^«^0-»iK«, Horn. Cer. Hi,
2 A. tha0f, Ap. Rh. 3. 529, iiUmaf (§ 194. 3). From the r. U- are alsi
formed, with the sense to team, the poet. F. %awftuu ( 222^ y- 1H7, iY
)t2«)i»«, /3. 61, )f^«i>^u«i, Theoc. 8. 4, Vthaa, ^.519 (hence ^fW<r#«/ >r. .1.6

Digitized

by Google

^ 246. 2), 2 A. P. tidfif, Sepii. £2. ie% Hence, Bkewise, the Ep. F. contr.
(UcrA*, ^«i«», § 200. 2) liiV, I. 418.

)/l#<irsM (r. )^ff.), to nm, used only in compodtiob with i«^, ^td, or f^
F. delr^yMi, i A. 2le4#«, 2 A. U(B9 i^ 57). Ff. it^^MMm. Kiadied, J^iutm^^^,
Lys. 117. 35, J^nrrip**, Hdt. iv. 79.

/MfAvnwntt (r. ^y«-)> ^ remind, F. ftfn^ty A. tfifnrM, Pf. P. fiiftvnfiau (see
$ :^34. ^), S F. fttfftvne^fuu^ C.vr. iii. 1 . 27> A. P. ifju»ft(rhv* As from ^i^»«.
iMKi and fAtftva/Aat, Imp. ft.ifi,n» Hdt. v. 105, P/. /ui/«y«/»iv«f Archil. Fr. 1,
O^X. n. d fAifAvetiatr* Piod. Fr. 277. Prim. Mid. fAvAoft,ttt, to remember (Ep.
1 106), to iroo, viii 3. 18. CoUat. forms, /t»<r»4», Orph. Hytfk. 77. (>, ^»ii
/xd/Mt/, Anacr. Fr. 69.

4r4«'^«r»«, and poet vri^vnfu (r. irt^*-* v^f- § 261, rt^M- § 'i78. ^), to wff,
Pf. vri^fdKu, Pf. P. «'i«'(«^«M, 3 F. «'f«'^d^t«4N, vii. 1. 36, commonly used
ibr the rare r««^nr«/MM (Ath. 160 f), A. P. W^ah^, Ep., Fut /nf. (s-i^c.
wm) rte«f » (9 ^4.5. 3) 0. 454, A. i«-i(A^a O. 428, Pf. P. Pt. «-i«-f^f}^<v«;
<I>. 58. The Fut. and Aor. of this verb are supplied by «<r«^«^0-«^»«i and «ti.
lifAnt, mid. tenses of ^rf^i^Ar^.

Ttr^enm (r. tj«-), to wound, F. r^iet, A. ir^«r«i, Pf. P. rir^ttfAM, A. P.
irf«^fiir. Kindred, r^«^«, Ep. ^. 293, ro^it, to pierce, Ep. Hom. Merc. 283,
F. ra«ii«-A>, lb. 178, 1 A. irtf^ura, E. 337, 2 A. lr«^0v, A. 236 (for rira^at
and riro^n^M, see §§ 194. 3, 239. 6), rtf^ti/w, Ar. Thesm. 986, rtT^aitt*
ii 286).

rtrveufuu (r. ti/«-, §§ 263. N., 273, «), to prepare, Ep. <&. 342, 2 A. «.
rwnTf (§ 194. S) «. 77, rfT»*«/t«», A. 467.

§386. y. Other Verbs.

mnax'^i" 0^« d^-, dn»X'> »»''X*K' § 297), to o/^, Ep. «•. 432, F. Ana^^
9t. 1 A. ^xa;^ifra, commonly 2 A. i!xax»9, Pf. P. ii»a;^n/c«/ and Ji»tix*f"^
(P. 3 ^»if;^i^«r«i § 248. /). CJoUat., &x^f*as r, .129, and &x^f^h Soph.
Ant. 627, to Borrow; Pres. P^ i^;^t«rv B. 694, dl;^fMv» £. 869.

y/yttfieu (r. y«-, yi»- §§ 259, 277, yiytv-, ytyv- § 26l), to become, F. yt
PV^ofMu (^ 222), 2 A. iyififAfiv, Pf. T^^fim^ci, 2 Pf. yi^fM (dee § 2".8. «),
F. P. ytvnH^^fMu, 1 A. trans. Iyiiy«/i«ifyt / ^o' or bore. Ion. and late
A. P. iytvfiStit, Hipp. For yivTt, see § 1 85. i ; for 1 Pf. Dor. ytyaxnw,
^ 246. 2 ; for Uyiy»»vTmt, § 245. 3 ; for '^vfutt, % 285. N. Kindred, yi/-
»*/Mju, Ep. X. 477, yiftetm, -n^tt, to beget.

XsKaU/Mtt (r. X«., Xikm-y ^ 267), to <festre eameetfy, Ep. N. 253, Pf. P.
(one X dropped, § 263. 6) XtXin/iMi, A. 465. The prim. Xdtt is used by the
Dorics; Theoc. 1. 12.

fAiftt, and poet ;»/^v«, .Asch. Ag. 74, F. ^iitm. See § 222. 2. Ep. derir.
fuftvm^iit, B. 392.

«"<Vr«» (r trir-, trir- § 273. /5, trurr-), to /off, F. ^xewf^on (> 200. 3),
I A. \xi9tt, commonly 2 A. 7«'tr0», Pf. (w-ir-, «•«- vS 262, w-t*- § 236. a)
^t-KTmxa, (see § 238. «). DoT. • 2 A. 7«-ir«», Find. 0. 7. 1 26 ; late Pf. «••-
irrfiiMe, Anth. Poet, forms, ^i'rtm. Soph. (Ed. C. > 754, and perhaps 'Tirvu
(Eur. Ph. 293) and vtritdm (Find. I. 2. 39), with which some connect iTtr
»«* as 2 Aor.

Ttr^aifi* (r. T^«-, riT^f- § 277), to bore, F. r^^-A*, A. ir^vh Pf P« '^-
v(tifi*t, A. P. iT^Vnt, A. M. lTtr^nMt/w*}y< F. rxrcuat, Hdt iii. 1 2, A. ir«-
«>(n*«i 1. 247, A. P. Ir<r(«»^if», Anth. Late or doubtAil, nr^mtf, rtr^mntt.

Digitized

by Google

2Sti ROOT OP THE YBBB. [bOOK n

2. Syllabic Affixes.

^ aST. The syllables which are most frequent
\y affixed to protract the root are a, «, dv, ye, w,
iaxj and it*

a. Addition <^ m and i.

Rdcabks. (1.) When m is affixed, i in the preceding syllaUe OBoaDy
becomes » ; bat, when i is affixed, «. See rr^mptiv and rr^t^Mi (§ 259. a).
(2.) The vowel which is added is more frequently retained before the dose
terminations.

«. Addition of «.

fifOx^t^fMu (r. /S^ffjc-), to roar, F. fi^vx^fafi**, A. lC^vxfif»/*n9, A. P. IC^v-
;^;»)Vu», 2 Pf., as iW, fiiCfS^a. Kindred, fift/tM, later /3e«;t;A» (Hipp.), to
^luuift Me teetA. Similar onomatopes are fiXnx*'/*'^* '^^ ^fixm0ftMt, to bleat,
and ftvxdofiuiif to hWf F. •^^tfuuf £p. 2 Pf. fttiftn»eij K. S62, ^c^i/xc, 2. 5bO,
2 A. l^»0y, n. 469, tf*ifx0f, E. 749.

ystitt (r. 7«.), to AezraO, Ep. fL 664, F. yn^^fMu, 2 A. fyd^ir, Z. 500. Mid.
yMitfMt, also Att., Soph. CEd. T. 1249.

9m/tM«t, F. tm/tmrtty poet for vi^ (§ 222. 2), to dtstrilmte. Also Ep. ImpC
M^i^0»r« A. 635.

itir»fiaty poet, ff-trc^f, Pind. P. 8. 128, and 9r0rti»fMu, B. 46'i, iEsch. Sqit.
84, later WrifMu, Eur. Iph. A. 1 608 (r. <riT-, ?riT«-, «'»t«-, irr«- § 261, 7Tr«-
§ 283. c), to jf2y, F. «'frfir0/iMii, commonly ^rnrt/tth 2 A. Ifrrnv, 2 A. M.
litrdfitw, commonly f«rr«^i}v (<5 261), Pf. P. ff-ifrfm/MM, A. P. Iir»rnin9>
F. trarnro/Mti, Mosch. 2. 141. Other collat. forms, ^ttU/mu, T.'S57, wttrtU*
fuu, M. 287, vtrtuftM, Hdt. iiL 1 1 1.

^388* /3. Addition of i.

ttfittfuct, and poet. mUt^funy Madi. Eom. 549 (r. «i)-, «i)i-)' ^ retpeet^
F. MiiUtfimt, A. M. phtrdfitiv, Pf. Jf2<r/MM (P. 3 o-^f-^^iar*, § 248. /, Hdt. L
61), A. P. ^^tr^n*.

£«f, t. 478, and Ih/m, I. 5 (r. «-, Ai .), to breoAe, Mmo, Ep. ; /n^. Anrtt,
Inf. miivett, FL kiif • Pass. Afi/iuM, t- 131. Deriv., Aim, 0. 252, and AiW«^
n. 468, to ^rao/Ae out, expire. Kindred, A. Sitwm, to breathe m deep, to i/eep,
y, 151, contr. Siea, «*. 867.

ynpAm (r. o^«^), to marry, said of the man, F. y«tf*Z, A. lyn/iM^ Pf. ^lyAr
fii;»«, Pf. P. yf^«/»ii/CMM. Mid. ya^0^«i, to marry, said of the woman,
F. yafMUfAat, A. lyn^/tiiy. Late F. yftnvtt A. iy«/*iir«, A. P. iym/An^nf
(7«/»f^f7(r« Theoc. 8. 91). Ep. F. M. ym/^irrofMu, will provide a wife for,
I. 394.

^/^M, to €bi(M, eonnder, poet and Ion. TI. 713, Mid. ii^fim, commonly
^i^fifMu (§ 224. 3 ; r. Ji^;., Ji^i-), to sedfc, Theoc 25. 37, X. 100, Hdt i. 95,
F. h^nrgfiuu, A. iii}^fif»fitfi9.

)oxl« (r. ^«».). to Mem, to <AtnJi, F. ^«|«, A. i^«^a, Pf. P. ^<l«y/MM, A. P.
iii;c^9it. Poet and Ion., F. l»»inf»f, A. {)««ffr«, Pf. hiiMn»», Pf. P. )tl^»if^Mu
A. P. i^tfxftVuv. Impers. ^axi?, i< eeems, F. dtf^fi, &c.

l«-4/»ix«/M«i and iv'tfukiofMn (r. /»iX.» /aiXi.), to toJbe core (2^, F. IwifaKie*
$Mtt Pf. P. iwtfiifAiXnfMth A. P. Ui/»fA»}^frv.

Digitized

by Google

CH. lO.J EMPHATIC CHAN0B8. 235

mrvv'itt, te mmnd, to ertuh, poet, F. Mrtnt^^m^ 1 A. knrvimem^ 2 A. t»r»

xvXitht and »vX/ir)i«, to roU, F. (»t>X«>).r«, § 58) »vXtrM, A. IxvXCf
Pf. P. »i»vXir^MM, A. P. UvXir0fi9. Late F. »v7aMft,* Bare Pres. »i/Xi*',
Ar. Yesp. 202. Kindred, »«Xiydi«^««, to be buned in, Cyr, i. 4. 5, aX/ir^fM or
iX/y^**, A. tfxjra, Ar. Nub. 32, Pf. Hkixa, lb. 33.

xi;^« and xSfint, to meet with, to chance, chiefly poet, and Ion. Eur. Hipp.
746, Med. 23, F. »i/^r*r (§ 56, /)), Soph. (Ed. C. 225, and nu^wt, Eur. Herad.
252, A. U»(0'm, r. 23, and Uv^n^M, Hdt. L 31, Pf. M»v^n»ti, Pf. P. xtKu^n-

fUU.

wttrUfuu (r. ▼•r-)* <» totfe, Ion. and Poet. Hdt ii. 37, F. 9'i«r§fiuu, A. l^A^
mdfuit, A. 464, Soph. Ant. 20i, Flap. ir$v£^fitfif H. 642.

ff-^^iw (r. 4r«(^., Ti^- § 259, iTtf^^i-), to lay waste, F. irt^inrm, Pf. ••ir*^-
^)f««, &c Poet vi^m, F. 4r/(rM, Soph. Ph. 1 14, 1 A. W%^w»^ «. 2, £p. 2 A.
U^$Jn (§ 262), A. 367. For vi^4»t, see § 246. /3.

/iVt«» and ^«rri«» (r. /<^-, ^nrr- § ''?72), to throw, F. //i^», A. tfftyptt, Pf.
If^r^a, Pf. P. Vpfifcfiat, 1 A. P. i^^>^», 2 A. P. l^iJl^. For }l*rmwx»f, 806
§ 249. (/. Deriv. pt^ralt.

ffxivrafutt, commonly ffxtTim or ^xt^Uftm (r. rxir-), F. fxi^t/uu, A. Ir»i«
^'i^^ifv, Pf. U»%t/kfMu, F. Pf. Ifxi^tfuu, PI. Rep. 392 c

«/!•» (r. i9.\ to push, F. 4Sr«». and poet. «^nV«r, A. 7«»r« (§ 189. 2), Pf. P.
itt^fuu, A. P. hivin*' Late Pf. ?«««, Plut. ; Ep. and Ion., A. S^m, A. 220
(w^0m(, for «-^«^r«f, Anth.), Pf. P. iSr^Mu, Hdt ▼. 69 ; it^-sttint Hipp.
Deriv. ier/^fuu, to jusUe, Ar. Ach. 42.

^389* b. Addition of itn

Remarks. (1.) Roots which receive tiv without further
change are mostly double consonant, (2. ) MtUe roots recew'
ing av commonly insert v before the characteristic. (3. ) Roots
which do not insert v sometimes prolong av to aiv or av,

m. Without fhrther Change.

M!Mt§/m4y and rardy nS^fafMu (r. «/W^ mlwimt-), to pereewe, F. mltH^sfuu .
{4 222. 1). 2 A. j^if^nv, Pf. P. ^r^n^cMu.

Axfmtt (r. iX^.)* <c ./^»<^} poet. Eur. Med. 298, 2 A. ^X^«y <I». 79.

itftmfrAfi (r. k/Au^r'), to err, to miss, F. kfut^r^vafutt, 2 A. tlfuc^<r§f, Pf.
f(^i(^r«»«, Pf. P. iifii(rnfi»i, A. P. nftx^r^hf* F. kfJiM^rnwat, Hipp., 1 A.
iifJifTnwm, Orph. Arg. 646, Ep. 2 A. (kfim^r-, kfjt^mr- § 262, kfitC^tr-, § § 1 3. 4,
28, 64. 2) KfiCcr**, £. 287 (c^;/ A. 491). Hence 0* dn^ped, cf. dlrX«.
mJv, § 296) kC^ordt'^ only in A. i9tc6;. kCfsr^ftn R. 65.

Awtx^»*«f*»*i <u>d sometimes k^ix^^fuu (r. l;^^-)> ^ ^ Aa^ F. k<r*x^^^
f$M», 2 A. kfcnx^'^f^^h ^* kirnx^^fi^*' •

«fil^ and a^tr«, poet and Ion. «li^« (r. ilFir-. »tty-, kty-, § 22. ^, «^^
^., § 273), Z. i^61, to increase, F. «^^iiV«», &c See f 43, and ct Lat

fiXtcwrdw, and poet fiXm^ritt (r. /3x«rr-), to i7>rottf, to 6iMf, F. i8X«rr«(^w,
9 A. tfiXm^Ttf, Pf. i/SXirruM (§ 190 i Plup. 2CiCX«rnf«u Th. iii. *2€). 1 A.
ICxd^rnrm, Ap. Bh. I. 1131.

Digitized

by Google

2S& ROOT tp TEX vnnm^ [bo^ku

U^dtm (r. Uf9:\4o$le^, unuSj bi ooBiposttiMiifitii mi«< S A. I^m
Pf. ^fSa^^nxo, 2 A. P. poet. iU^^nt' Ep. 2 A. ti^a^»r ^. 296, 2 A. P. i^f«.
^ny, «. 471 (§ 262).

ipXifMmvM (r. i^., ^Xirx- § 296), to ihcwr^ F. ^Xi{r*r, 1 A. m^Xnra
tiommunly 2 A. w^Aw, P£: a^^Xjukm. Iod. impt, or fi A. «lf Xm (§ 248. 4}
Hdt. viii. 26. See ;^iX«f (§ 26S).

<^ 990* fi. Wiili the Biaeitioii of « (tee§ 54).

i^y)«v« (r. a^ , Ji-t-'imv"), to piUeue, poet, and Ion. B. 114, Soph. Ant. 504
F. i^4tw»,y HdC V. 39, 2 A. &^, id. L 151, S»bj. ^L,y^&e^ 2 P£ 1^ L 173
{Ui», Tbeoc. 27. 22 ; 1 P& ^»», Hippon.)* For the imgm^ we § 18a. S.
Kindred, ^«, to please, commonly ^•fuu, to be pleated, F. fi^Hrt/Mu, A. «fr^n«
(A. M. ^irmr* t. 353).

ifvyyeift/ (r. l^i/y-)* ^ ^^^V^rge, 2 A. i^ifv^fiu loB* i^v^i^Mw, O. 621»
F. l^w^ofAtUy Pf. i^ivy/jMtt Hipp.

^tyyamt (r. dv^-), t» toucA, F. i^<|«/iMM, 2 A. Uiyn. Lttt. loi^o.

xr;^av« or tuyx&vm (r. «/;^-)» *^ fi^t V^^' EuT. Alc. 477, F. xY^rtftrnti
Soph. <£d. G. 1487, 2 A. l«/;t:«'i Etff. Alc 22. Ep. M^x^y ^' 672, «ad
m4Xi»' »• 284 (Mid. Pt, xt^nfituof, £. 187), F. »i;^i$r«, Ap. Rh. 4. 148'^
2 A. (from r. «<;c«-f ^^ P*^* ^^h s^se of Act.) lxfxn»f «*. 379, 5tt^*. (»^S)
Kixtitf (^ 243. b), A. 26, &c 1 A. M. Utx^rm/Ant, A. 385.

Xayx^t9m (t, X»X'> ^1X' § ^^^* >^*yX' ^^ 259, 277, XMyx^t-^ to ^ktan
by lot, F. k^lof*mi, 2 A. 7A«;^«», Pf. i7A}f;^a (§ 191. l) «od XtX«>x«> ^ ^*
i7XifyM«i, A. P. IXfix^iif* Ion. F. kdl^fuu, Hdt. vii. 144. For 2 Aor. Subf*
XfX«;^A>, caosative, see § 1 94. S.

ketfACetftt (r. X«C-, XdC^ Xa/*S-), to take, F. Xn'^tfAeu, 2 A. 7x«C«ir,
Pf. f7Xfi^a <§ 191. 1), Pf. P. t1xtifit»ai, and poet. X<X*f^«,(MM, Eur. Iph. A. 363,
A. P. fXn^iiy. Iod., F. Xi^/k^^^/uu, Hdt. i. 199, Pf. P. xix«^i^w, iiu 1 17,
A. P. iX^fA^hf, iL 89, Pf. A. XiXaCnxA (§ 222), iv. 79. For XfXaCf<r#«i, see
§ 194. 3. Poet, forms, X«^^«i and Xmlvfiieu, A. 357, Ar. Lys. 209.

Xdey^ffHv, and sometimes Xif^*» (r. X«^^ Xn^-), to lie hid, to escape notieef
F. XhVm, 1 A. tXfic-etf commonly 2 A. lx«^0», 2 Pf. XfXn^«* Mid. Xavfivo/Mu
and Xn^afiunj to forget, F. Xfuro/uu, 2 A. fXa^tf^nv, Pf. XiXiir^4, F. Pf XiXti-
M^MM» Eur. Alc 198. Ep. Pf. P. XtX^r^i, E. 834, kte 1 A. M. IxirM^ni,
Qoint. 3. 99, Dor. A. P. {Xtieinh Theoc 2. 46. For X«X«#mi» &c, set § 194. S
Collat. U.Xii^«v«, If. 221.

XsiV« (r. Xi**., Xii**-), to leave, and sometimes in composition Xtft^dvm, Th
Tiii. 1 7. F. XiiV«», &c (^ 37). Late 1 A. ^Xu^p»,

/uty/ay** (r. ^-), to team, F. fm^n^sftm (§ 223), 2 A. I^M^ff, Pf. f»tf»dh»
JM. For fuJtSfuut see § 20a y.

r»9^M99puu, and poet w^Utfttu JSsch. Ag. 9B8 (r. ^ti/-, «^«;#. $ S70), #
tnqtdre, F. ••t»r«^uu (rivriiV^i iBsch. I^. 988, § 200. 3), 2 A. UrOiftnh
Pf. «-i^«/M(/. Ep. 2 A. QjD<. *tTvi»tr» (§ 194. 3), Z. 5a

^vyX»^t (r. rv;^-, riv;^-), to happen, to obtain, to kit, W. nul^fun, 2 A. ir»»
Xsh Pf- rtT»x*i»» (§ 222), rarely rirtvx** Ath. 581 e. Ep. 1 A. lrv^«#%
A. 106. Seerfi;;^«r (§ 270).

X^'Uiw (r. ;^«)^ ;^«»)-> ;^<»^- § ^59), to contotii, poet. Ar. Ban. 260^
F- G;<i^M/M(i, §1 58) x**^*/*»h '• 17, 2 A. f;K«^, A. 24, 2 Pf. »i;^«vl%
Y. 268.

Digitized

by Google

CH. 10.] BMriiAtiG cHiuracs; 237'

mX'iaivM (r. ix'i'), to nourish^ poet JBsch. Pr. 540^ 2 A. 4XS«»m. r. 70. AIm
4^x)ifrx«, to nouruhf to grow, Y. 599, late A. iter. Axin^a^xtf Orph. Lith. 364.

AXsraitm or «Xir^/vM (r. mXtT-), to nn, poet., Hes. Op. 2:)9» :)28, 1 A*
IXirn^a, Orph. Arg. 647, 2 A. ifXiV#^ L H75, Pf. P. Pt, aXifrn^Uft J. 807.

niitt and M)«iM» (r. «d., m')*. § ^88^ to stoe^ f . «/S>i^«, A. ^i}ra» Pf. fin
»«. Also atieivMf trans., I. 554.

iXtr^tiyt* and 0Xi4i«iyw (r. «A.ir^.), to Wtdle, to tUp, F. iXtr^^ftty 8 A. JSktrfou
1 A. ttxiwhem, and PC ixish»i^ Hipp. Also «X<^^4^«, Ath. 2:^6 a.

hf^mivsfiatt rarely «r^(««^«i, Ath. 299 e (r. 0r^^-, ^(«- ^ 287), to fmeS,
F. ir^(n0f*»i, 2 A. irff^iftnu A. P. m0(p^nu Ion. 9 A. Aw^^imt, Hdt.
i 80» late 1 A. M^^nmrnfin**

Sm, also, ;»i»« (§ 292), »/;t:«»«*^ (§ 2^)*

^ Sv3* c Addition of m.

^j7vMr (or fioU), to ttop tip (t. /3«.), F. /SSvm^ A. 7<?r«, Pf. P. ^iCv^ftmt,
Abo Pass, fiuffuu, Hdt. ii. 96.

A«M«^iMtf, and poet. *7»««m (r. /»-, ;«i?v. ^ 291)1 ^ ^o"^ P* ?S«/mUi 2^ *c«^-
lups Pf. 77/MM. £p. *r»«», K. 142. For Txr* and J^m, see § 185. S, •.

»mriat (r. XV.), to ktMB, F. Mint^afims, A. s»^«. The COmp. vc^xnim, tO
wonhip, is regular : F. w^or»iftn^»0j A. «'^««^t»virifMh and poet. r^oeixSn^ Ar«
£q. 156.

vTt9x*i»tMu (r. r;^-, /r;^-)» *** promise, F. vTtvx^^^f*'^* (§ 222), 2 A. ^<n.
^X^f*n9» Pf. v«rir;^if^Mii, rare A. P. u«*i^;^t^nN PI. Phadr. 235 d. Poet, and
Vm. Mrxofuu iEsoh. Earn. 804, Hdt. vii. 104. See t^" (^ 300).

§ 9ftS« d. ADDmON OF VV.

(1.) If ff, f, or o precede, the v is doubled, o becoming «,
(2.) If i precede, the •» becomes 2. (3.) A lingual or %ui(i
preceded by a diphthong is dropped before w.

«. To Pure Roots.

tfwOfu (r. n., i- § ^ )). todoAe, poet., chiefly £p., F. Xrrw ($ 71), «. 337,
A. 7rra, E. 905, Pf. P. iJftm and 7rMM, r. 72, Hdt. i. 47. Ph)ee form, «l^.
^tUwfju, F. kfit^nem^ kft^tS (§ 200. t^), nfM<p'nwm (§ 192. 3), Pf. P. ^/ir^i.
Ion., x«Tw-iivf/«v ^.^35* iT'iUvvfim Hdt. iv. 64.

^i^vviT^ (r. ^«.), to gird, F. C'^rw, A. f^«»r«, Pf. P. ti»0ffMu. Late Pf.
V(^a0$tmf Anth.

xt^avvSfu (r. »!#«., »^«. § 261, M^s. §§ 259, 278. 9), to miar, F. xtfirm,
»t^, A. Uf^jitf» (»^«i «. I64\ Pf. P. xtMi^mrfMn, Ath. 576 a, oommonlj
si«(«^MM, A. P. Ut^drtnt and i«^«^iif. Ep. »t(««r, 11. 363 (»((«it, § 242. b),
Subf, )U(»t9vat A, 260, aafrom »i^»^uu. Poet, and Ion., mifvnfUt Ar. Eod.
841, and ju^vmt, Hdt. iv. 52.

Mt^99§fu (r. Mff-)* ^ MtMito, F. Mffnw, A. l)U^i«w, Pf. P. «iw^<r/>«ri,
A. P. U«eWn». Ep.. F. »i^i*» (§ 245. 3), 0. 379, 2 P& intrana. mt»»^
(§ 853. 1), r. 378 ; Ion. P& P. »$»i(9/mt 2. 887. Tlie verb m^ to mm^^
k icigiilar.

ji^i^ApH^i Ct. afy X to wywwl, F. m^tfJUm, »^tfm ({ 800. 8), A. ki^*

Digitized

by Google

■888 BOOT OF THS VBEB. [bOOK II

fU^m, A. P. l»^fUr0fn, Wd. u^fAfuit (Mxt. Pt, mftfUifrts Ath. 25 d\ ana
poet. M^nftvifMu (§ 278, >), Ar. Nub. 377, to hang, F. M(mn0'0fiun. Also »^-
fina»fiuuf Horn. Bac 39, P». »^i(^i>iSf, Pind. P. 4. 43, late »(tf*m»t.

^trtivvBfu (r. ^irm"), to ^rtad, to expand, F. irtrirM, tnrS, A. iiririUm
Pf. P. «-^r«/Mu (§ 261), A. P. IriTiirAtv. Ion. Pf. P. xiv-irAr^cMM, HdL
L 62. £p., v-Ztmi^ X. 392, v/tm*, Hes. Sc 291 Gottl. ; late v^rtut,

fmnSfu (r. ^.), to iCrayfAm, F. fai^m, A. !//««#•, Pf. P. tfft^fuu, A. P. i/^
r#«r (§ 221. «).

irCiff9fu (r. «tfi-X 'o e«tfM^icu4, F. rCtr«, 1 A. IrCtrc, A. P. l#CUAr«*
UM. rCivv^^MM, to 6e earimguuhed, to go out, P. eCnffMu, 2 A. Act. frCnf
(5 227), Pf. Act IrCiiM.

nti^tiftSfu (r. r»i)«t-), to acoftor, F. extlurm, rm%^, A. Irxi2c^«, Pf. P.
\9tk'%im9/uu, A. P. lr»<^«#At». Collat. fonns, cfaieflj poet, «i)«4v, Ap. Sh*
4. 500, »ii«id/MM, Id. 2. 626, »t^»»9^ Anth., A. \»i%mw9», E. 88 ; rxt^m^
(|§ 259, 278. 1), Hes. Th. 875, Th. vL 98, «i'^»f}^, Hdt. vu. 140, Eur.
Hfic. 916.

% 994« /S. To Palatal Boots.

to fo droAeM, 2 A. P. Uyn* (Alt £, Ep. comm. &). Ion., A. ^«, Y. 392,
2 Pf. 7si)^ Hdt vii. 224, fym, Hipp. ; Ep. A. Opt. (»«r«.F4«<«* ««F
Fi^^Mf, §§ 22. ^ 48. 2) MtM^aMf Hes. Op. 664. In the comp. KmrmytSfu
the I of the aogm. is sometimes found out of the Ind. ; as, A. Pcu-t, »«rf«^
Ljs. loa 5.

Ji»4ty»t and kuiytdfu (r. •iy-), to open, Imp£ ni/imyM (§ 189. 2), 11. 221,
>r. 5. '20, and later H^tytf, H. 6r. i. 1.2 (Ion. ivtfyrf, H. 168), F. «»«;^
A. knifS^, and later ^ir«i^«, Pf. »fitfx»i Pf* P* «»i^^MBi, A. P. MuLx^n^t and
later Yiuix^n*, Acts, 1 2. 10. 2 Pf. A»if >«, to <AkiMf open, Hipp. The simple
•TyM and iSyf^/u are poet, i£sch. Pr. 611, F. «}^*r, A. ^« H. 457, au(c,
a. 446.

hUtOfu (r. }MJK.)t to 'l^ow, F. ^fi^**. I%e f 52. Ion. (r. hn-) K|«*, Oi^
Ac.. Hdt iii. 122. Mid. hinvO/uu, Ep. to ^reet, I. 196, Pf. htUyfuu
( § 47. N.), n. 72. The primary sense of hinvvfu is to UrefcA ouf <A« hand,
and kindred rerbs are hx»f*»* (Ion. ^S»«^i, Hdt vii. 1 77, § 69. 1.), to reortM
F. Vtl^fiteu, A. l2t^iS|Uirv, Pf. lihyfMu, F. Pf. )i)<|«|U«^ibr Uiy^», &c, sea
§ 1 85. )), and the poet. )i)ir»9^MM, iu^iena/Mu, iunnvnt, Vtx^OfUU.

t%ytVfii (r. i(7-, i/^y. § 268), to ahnt in, to conjine, F. iSfim and l((«r,
A. Je|«, Part, imat and ?f|«f, Pf. P. t^^yf^h A. P. i7fi;^»i». This verb ap-
pears to have been originally the same with %i^ym, to shnt out, and the dis-
tinction which afterwards arose, and which was marked by the difference of
breathing, appears not to have been always observed. Ion., in both senses,
t^ym, .^t0, Hdt Iii. 48, 0. 325 (E^ ^^7^* B. 617), and t^ytCfis or $7^yfSfUf
Hdt A, 86, iv. 69.

Zivy*Sfu (r. ^uy; ituy- $ 270% to poke, F. (fv^«», A. 7C«4% ^' ^' ^{••T-
/Mu, 1 A. P. Kivx^np, 2 A. P. iZ^ynp.

puyf^ (r. ffuy^), to mingle, to mix, F. /m$i», A. l/^iin, Pf. P. fiifuypm$^
8 F. fHfJJ^tfuu, JBacfa. Pen. 1052, 1 A. P. ifuxhv, 2 A. P. i^/rn*. The
elder foirm fiieym (§ 273) is always used in the Pres. and Impf. by Horn, and
Hdt For ifunr$, ftc, aee § 185. ).

^ySftt (p. 9ny^ wny. $ 866), to /uton, to /Ix, F. n^f*, A. twnl^ «J*

Digitized

by Google

CH. 10.] eMfHATIC CHANGES. 4d&^

tntrans., as Pres., trUmym, 1 A. P. Mx^nt, commonly 2 A. P. UJiynt. Ep

2 A. M. S. 3 J«^»T# (§ 185. Y) A. 378. For w^ytBr*, sec § 226. 4. Lat«
wn«rrt0^ Pf. P. ^ivtiyfAat,

fwytSfu (r. ;«y-, ^»r-)» <» *»■««*» F- /•»l*'i A. f^«, 2 Pf. mtrans. %Hmym
(§ 236. b\ 2 A. P. ip^*«yi»». Ep., ^^ee»0, 2. 571, Pf. P. iy^nyf^h ^. 137 ;
Ion. 1 A. P. lf^n;c^fift Hipp. Kindred, ^«rr*r and «^«rr*>, .^«, to «mtte.

^^eurfat, and rarely ^^ayvOfu^ Th. viL 74 (r. ^^7-, ^^m*'*'- § 274), to/eiMM^
F. ^e«i«, A. 7^e«^*' ^* ^* «'Sf(«7/MM, A. P. l^^a;^^!!*. Late 2 A. P.
Ip^^ynt,

^ SOS* y. To Lingual and Liquid Boots.

%MSiAt (r. ^flur., ^ai»v.)> to etUertaiH, to feaai^ poet Y. 29, F. Wr^^ .Aseh.
£um. 305, A. I)«4r», A. P. ihmlvinv. For Opt iKtwrof see § 2l'6. 4.

xahSfAcu (r. «a^-, »ai^- § 267), to excd^ poet 7. 282, Pf. mumm/mm, Ear.
£L 616, /*! «i«ar^»«« A. 339, and »ts«^»0r, Pind. 0. 1. 42.

»rt<»M, and later xrivfOfu or mtuvS/u (r. »r«-, »r«y- § 278, »rfv- § 259^
mruv- § 268, ttrtvtU' § 259. b, »rii»7-), to alajf, usually in composition with mvi
or m»t£, F. xnvSj I A. ?»Tfivc, poet 2 A. Iktuw Soph. Ant 1 :i40 (also in
Xen., who was partial to poet forms, iv. 8, 25), and poet }»t£» (§ 224. E.),
Soph. TV. S8, 2 Pf. Kr«»«, 1 Pf., leas daaaic, inrmxa or Urmyxa) and i»r«-
MfMS 2 A. M. poet. UrafMiff i£sch. PerS. 923. Ep., F. arayiM, Z. 409,
1 A. P. Ura^ify, ). 537 ; late iMrdfint, Anth. For the passiye of »nif«§,
Hm Attic writers employ Mr»M (§ 281). ^

i^XXiVM (r. ix^ ik.9u-), to destroy^ F. aXm'w (§ 232. «), commonly JAif,
A. iSXt^a, 1 Pf. ax«ixi»«, 2 Pf. intrana. /X*>X», 2 A. M. ikifin*' Poet tXi.
»A>, A. 10^ Soph. Ant 1286 ; Impf. iter, ixixfrxiv (or ikUrxtv, as fhnn «Xim)
T. 135.

ififSfu (r. J>».)i A> MMor, F. ifuS/uu, A. i8^cm#iii (§ 222. /3), PC Ifm/umm
(§ 191. 2), Pf. P. ifMift00fMu and ifui/M/Mi (§ 221. «), A. P. ttfU^inf and
«/M#i(v. Pres. PC. ^Mfyrif Hdt L 153 ; late F. i/^^m^ Anth.

iftifytO/u (i/M^y'), to wipe o/f, poet. E. 416, F. a^^^m, A. 4M0fS«, Eur.
Or. 219, A. P. tif^x^^ih Ar. Vesp. 560, A. M. «)k«^^/mii», 2. 124. Collat
ifu^yd^^ Hom. Merc. 361, hite /*i(ytSffu,

ifiymj to gtreteh out, and Ep.' ifiyw/M, A. 351, F. i^l^, A. *r^i^» A. P.
m^X'^^^i P^' P' ^t*yf*^ Hipp., ifii^iy/MU, IT. 834. .

^ir0/M (r. j^.), to roMe, F. «I^0-m (§ 56. /3), A. w^^*, 2 Pf. intrans., a|.Pres.,
i^m^m. Ep., F. M. i(0Vi»at, T. 140, 2 A. £^0^0* (§ 194. 3), 2 A. M. Z^ifint,
M. 279 (see § 185. ), 1) ; from r. ;^i^ Impf. i^i/Aiih B. 398, Pf. P. i^ai^t-
/Mu (§ 191. 2), r. 377, Subf, i^fnrat M. 271. Kmdred, chiefly poet, ^^^
^uu, i^ifm, i^9^M», i^tvm * Lat orior,

WTtiffriiftas (r. rr«^-), to mesK, 2 A. firr»^n, 2 A. P. Pt. irra^tif^ Hipp*

0ri(9Vfiu, 0T0^*vS^tf and rr^MffSfti (r. rri^-, rr«^i- § 288, rr^«« § 262)»
to streMy, F. rT«^«l and r«-^«, A. Irrtf^r* and Irr^w^A, Pf. P. frr^^Mu^
A. P. Irr^t (lrr«e«'^«'» Hipp.).

§ 39 O. e.. ADD^non OF ir».

i^MrX«««#«« (r. dl/MrX«».), to trrt poet S A. I/m^tX^mm* Soph. Ant 91C
Pt k^kmumf and, to ihortMi tba initial • (§ 263. 6), dlv-x^M^ Eur. Ak
Ml.

Digitized

by Google

2¥^ M01 •» TSB ITBMB. [bOOI If

dv'et^mm (r. dp^, iSir«f.), to dleemM, "6^ X. 917, 7« Amm^^m^ A* «in(4hk
M, Hook Ap. 376y eommonlj 3 A. Hv^m^t, I. 379.

yi>'«y«« and ytyMvif-Kit (r. >'«'»-, yiywv* § 28 S, yi^wM- ^ 288, yiyattt^*")
iQ call ahud, F. yi^wyiirAr, A. vytytivnamt 2 Pf., as Pres., yiyvvaj Subf, ytyti,
*>, Itt^ yiytni (§ 235), &C. Ep. Imp. or 2 A. iyiyttuw (or Pf. yt^wvtv)
S. 469. S«e § 246. N.

Iruu^ntofuu (r. «v^-, to ^), * to ^ at, to reach^ to enjoy, poet, and Ion
N. 73.^ F. Ua»^fi^^m4t 2 A. i«^v^, A. 572, 2 A. M. hrtiv^mnv Eur. Hd.
4f>r, 1 A. M. Wmvfdftnf, Hipp. Also Wxv^i^/tat, Theog. Ill, and Wmu^,
Hes. Op. 417. From the same root, ««-«t/^«A» (^ 2f<7. «), to get from, ta
take away, poet. A. 430^ 1 A. M. mirnv^d/Mtf, iEsch. Pr. 28 ; and from the
kindred «v^. (§ 28), Ep. Aor. Ft. uTou^af A. 356, •v'av^a^iv*;, Hes. Sc 1 73.

i^^iVxw (r. tv('), to find, F. iv^nrw (§ 222. 2), 2 A. tvpn or hJ^m
(§ 188. N.-, Pf. t?^»«, Pf. P. f^^fl/MM, A. P. ti^ihf (§ 219), 2 A. k
ti^ifkfm, and lets Att. 1 A. M. ti^aftnv,

^rt^it/ and ffri^ivnm (r. rn^-), to deprwe, F. rri(i^^*>, A. irri^Dr«, Pf. irr^-
^^HM, Pt P. UriffifiMt, I A. P. i#«v^'^», poet. 2 A. P. /^ Mn^V Eur* HeL
9l'>. Mid. wri^tfMu, to want. P., often ia P&ss., ert^^^um {M0'9r%^h
Andoo. 19. 25). Ep. 1 A. Uri^r«, ». 263. «

^397* f. AnDmoN OF <{.

Wi'5»» (r. I/-), to aecuatom, IS. \0w6», -m (§ 200. ^), Pf. i7^iJMt (§ 189. S)
&c ; 2 Pf., as Pres. intrans., iWa (§ 236. c). Ep. Pres. Pt intrans. Um
1.540.

U«'/^M (r. FfX«'.), to hope, F. lx<r/ra», ^, &c. ; Ep. IXv-w, to ^ hope, /S. 9ly
tXTfieu or lix<r9fMu, and 2 pf. foXv-a (§ 191. 3), to &o/^ H. 199„ K. 105»
T. 186, 2 Plup. Uik^u* (§ 189. .'>), T. 328.

»«v#C«C*' (r- M»«C.), to ring, Ep. B. 466, A. U«McCifr% B. 334.

iwe«C«» (r. ««(-), to furnish, F. frffirM, •/«, Pf. «*ir«(4JMi, Ac Poet, 9 A.
I«r«e«». Soph. (Ed. T. 921 (see § 194. 3), Pf. P. ^rifr^rci (§ 'i2S), it U ftttd^
2. 329, Pi. wtr^»0/M90s, Soph. Ant. 1337, Mem. ii. 1. 33.

^ 39 8* g. ADDrn(»r of Other Stllabtjes.

&» (p. •', tih-\ to de sated, to satiaie, Ep., F. "m^t, A. 818, A. l(r«,

E. 289, and aifira (Opt. mh^^Mf or '^i7riif» «. 134), Pf. Pt. mSinw, K. 9A,

F. M. "SrtfMu, IX. 717, A. M. "dira^fitu T. 307. The F. 4'«' and commonly
the A. irm. are trans., the other forms intrans. For Pres. Sfthj. {&»tf*t9, tSfAf^y
ittfitf (also written UifAtf, as if from 1««) T. 402, see § 242. a; for In/l
u/ttmuu, see § 250. e ; for Pres. Mid. ii»Tait see § 242. 1 . Deriv. *Atrm»fA»tf
Theoc 25. 240, A. P. ^n^y Hdt ilL 41.

U/it£Z»0 (r. U^\ to subdue, F. Uf^^^f, A. Hm/iLm^m, I A. P. liUfUtrtnw,
and poet. U^i^^ (§ 223), A. 99, Eur. Ale. 1 27, 2 A. P. poet, iUfifiv, Eur.
Med. 647. Ep. Pres. and perhaps Fnt. (§ 200. a) i»fiaet, A. 61, Z. 368^
Pf. P. hifttifuu, E. 878, F. Pf. W/*^f0fuu Horn. Ap. 543. CoUat poet,
forms, Ufivmm, X. 221, Uf*ni/$t E. 893, JSsch. Pr. 164, }»f*mXil^»>, Plnd. P.
5. 1 63. hat. domo.

Ixttm (r. lx»., lx»v.)i to draw, F. 7x^ (IXxv^w, Hipp.), A. tlXnS^m
(§ 189. 3; ijx^ Orph. Ai». 260), Pf. «Tx»il»«, Pf. P. $Sk»vffuur A. P,
fi>MMnt. Ep. U»M*, P. 395, IknJiwtt, iX»90M, X. 580.

Ir^rdm (r. le-X to odk, F. Ie«rr4#«» and I^AiuM ($ S88), A. Hf^i^fHrn^

Digitized

by Google

Cfl lO.J EMPHATIC AND ANOMALOUS CHANGES. 241

Ffi 4e*rr«»«, PC P. i^timfuu, A. P. Af^^rifAit, S A* M. 4e</Mrv. ]^ «ad
Ion., t7;d^MM A. 553, Hdt. iii. 64 {t!^t»fuv0f Ib^ § S43« 4), F. itfnef$mh 61 ^
i;(#>r«Ar, .t«», h 347, Hdt. iv. 145 *, l(i«», H. 198 ; l^u/»«» Z. 145.

ir^;«, and poet M»f, H. 415, JEech, Ag. 1597, or l^*r, t. 341, Eur. CycL
245 (r. d., Ir^. §§ 282, 52, IWi.), to eat, F. A«^mbi (§ 200. b), Pf, Uii^***
(§ 236. e), Pf. P. UTi^ir^Mu (§ 222. «), PI, Phsedo, 110 e, A. P, i^Mnf
2 A. f^«7«» (r. ^«y., § 301). Late F. ^aytfuu (§ 247. d). Ep. 2 Pf. I^^
P. 542, PC P. i^i(^«^iMBi (§ 236. c).

2;t^*'> Soph. Aj. 459, ix^Mi^^ Ear. AJc 179, and l;^^^^/**, Ag99. 11*5
(r. 1;^^-), to hate, chiefly poet, F. Ix^^^*** ^ ^X^^t*'

i9$fim$ (h't i99-\ to seom. Ion. and poet, o«r<ii, &c (see T "^Oy ^ 378
F. Mwofuu, A. mo*»/A99 P. 173, and livi^^ny, P. 25, A. P. liv^^ity, Hdt ii
136. Peciy., i»ii^«r, and poet ivtri^, iSsch. Sap. 11.

n»r^, £p. iri/xw (r. «^»-), to esMfi^ lAear, poet, Ar, At. 714, «^ 116,
F. n^ (§ 245. 2) Theoo. 5. 98, A. Uigtb i«ri|i^y, U, 176, A, P. M;c^v,
At. Nub. 1356.

f x(9^«s and poet ^XAyiitt, Soph. Tr. 99, to 6Kr>> F. f xi^, A. I^Xi^,.
A» P. If Xi;t:^ifn Late 2 A. P. l^Xtynv, Antb.

§ 999* Remark. A few verbs obtain & 2 Aor. with a short pentdt'
(§ 255. )), through an extension of the root ; as, ^utnty to purtue, U«M»a^«v,
Ar. Yesp. 1203, PL Gorg. 483 a; •?«•», to yield, iUifiov, Soph. (Ed. T. 651 ;
tT^AT, to exclude^ t1^$n. Soph. (Ed. C. '862 (JL^&ia^, A. 437, ii^^A/w^
£. 147), tl^y&4ifAw, iBeeh. Earn. 566; ^/«iv«, to toard off, nftotA^tf, Ar.*
Nub. 1 323, iiftuviiifitif, iBsch. Eum. 4^i8 ; »/«», to ^, /Mir.t»fa^«f A. 52 ;
|x»«/«» ($ 273. /3), fr;t:(^" (§ ^^)- ^- ^^*^»* (h ^78). These extended
Aorists, which are chiefly poet, are regarded by some as Imperfleets, and are
commonly so accented.

§ 300* 3. Exchange of Letters.
In the two following verbs, 0 passes into s aspirated (§ 50).

tw«t (r. r**., IfT.), to be occupied with, Impf. i7«'0y (§ 189. S), F. t^tt, ^ Ar
frrav, 5tt6/. 09rSj &c Mid. 270^«i, to follow, Impf. u^iftn^y f, typ^fuu, 9 A.
ir«'«/»n'. ^tf^'* rvSftMt, &C. Poet Sfr<raycMu, 2. 826, Impf. (considered by some
2 A.) W^ifunv, r. 'i39. A. P. -ri^i^ip^tif, Hdt vi. 15. The act ?«••» scarcely
occurs except in composition.

ixt* and 7rx»t (r. r;t-i i;^;-* I*;- § 263, Ux' §§ 283. c, 263), to *«>», to
Mi (in the sense to Aaoe, th^ forms tx" and l^« are preferred ; in the senae
to AoW, 7'r;^«» and r;t4r«»), Impf. «7;^#f and Tr;^#», F. !$« and rx*i«'*' (§ 222) |
2 A. fr;^;OT, ^tt^. r;^;*; (oomp. im^x** <"" ^'«'^;t*'. >■• ^X' ^ ^X*')» PP*' ';C"W
(§ 205. «), /mp. «r;^;4# (r;^;*- § 288 ; compare ;W#, If, § 210. 2), and rarely,
in composition, r;^i, /n/. r;^ir», jPfc ^x*^* ' 2 A. poet 7r;^i^M (§ 299), -fflse*.
Pr. 16; Pf. Ir;t;if«», Pf. P. ttrxnfMih' A. P^Wxi^fif, 2 A. M. Ir;^i/tf»». Ep.
Pf. i^ rvf .«;C«»«n (§§236. 1, 191.2, 62) B. 218. For l^-^x*^ ^^
§ 236. </; for if.tix^t, Me § !243. 4. Ep. deriv. forms, l^x^**'* ^* ^^7*
irx»9dt0t E. 89. For the compound i-rt^x^^^f^^h Me § 292 , ftr A»f;^i^«/,
§ 301. 2. For the <r in kf*^x*' (Af*fh '^X")'! see $ 62 ; and fbr the vaciout
forms of the angm. (ImpC ifivr^uxifm*, 2 A. ^«'i-r;^i^if \ i/t^'i^x*/*^'^ ^\
5 192. 3.

C. Anomalous Changes.

^ 30 1 • Forms are sonietimes assodated, which moit be
21

Digitized

by Google

24U ROOT OF TUB VBKi^ [bOOK It

referred to roots originally distinct^ or widely removed from
each other (§ 257, 2) ; as,

1. ttt^Uf (r. «ifi-)f to take^ F. «/^«*-«#, Pf. ^(t}x«, Pf. P. ^^n/AWt A. P. ^^i^n*
(§ 219) ; 2 A. irx« (r. U-, § 189. 3), 2 A. M. tixif*t,f. Poet. 1 A. M. I|.
•i;<frAr« Ar. Thesm. 761. DoubtAiI or late F. ix«, iXtftYM/ • Ion. Pf. «^a/.
{ffxtf, Hdt. V. 102, k^ttt^fi/Mti, iv. 66; Ep. 2 A. M. S. 3 ^i^r* for FiXr«
(§§ 69. III., 1 85. ^) 0. 43. In the sense to capture, the Pass, is commonly
■applied hy ixirm^/un (r. «X-, whence U- § 259, Jkx*-, AXiA**- § 280), Imp£
fiXir»ifAfih F. Jt3^r0fiat, 2 A. Ux*>9 (§ 189. 2) and JKx«», 5u6;. **x;;, &c,
Tt UiXm»m and tlfX^MB.

2. inix^f^h to endure, a componnd of t;^*r (§ 300), F. Avi^^fMu and ^m-
wX^»ftMt, 2 A. »iMr;^;«A*n» (§ 192. 3); F. rXn^9fMu (p. t«X«., cX«- § 261),
2 A. fcXiff (§ 227), Pf. rWXn»a (see § 238. «). Ep. 1 A. lr«X«rr«, P. 166.
Later 1^ Wxim, Ap. Rh. 3. 769, ^Xtv^v 2. 1008.

8. i(x*/*^ (j' UX'\ to go, to come. Imp. n^x***^ ' ^- l>-tv99fMu (r. Ix»^^
\Xtw$- § 270), 2 A. *Xt;^#», commonly ;rx^«» (§ 2^1), 2 Pf. lx»iXt?^« (§ 191. 2).
E^. 2 Pf. ^Xty^«, Hes. Th. 660, •;x«X#»^« (§ 47. N.), Dor. 2 A. hfiof (v 69.
m.), Theoc. 1. 77, Lacon. ^x«m (§ 70. 4), Ar. Lys. 105. The Pres. (ex-
cept in the Ind.), the Impf., and the Fat are commonly supplied in the Att.
bytheverbir^(§23l).

. 4. i^iu, (r. «(•.)> to we, Impf. \^^mt (§ 189. 2), Pf. U^a»« {M^&xa Ar.
PL 98), Pf. P. U^&fMt ' F. S^Pofuu . r. m--). Pf. P. i?/»^ai, A. P. Zp^n^ (^i^^
ifhm PL Def. 41 1 a>, 2 Pf. poet and Ion. Ut^m Soph. Ant 6, Hdt ilL 63 ;
S A. in«v (r. i)-, the aagm. uniting with the i to form u), S^c^*. j^«, &C.,
S A. M. Mftnt, Subf. i^A>^«i, &c. ; 2 Pf. aT^a, (/ Aaoe ffeen) / know (§ 235) ;
Idld., poet, i]f^«/MM (r. ti*^. § 268), to Mem, to resemble, i£sch. Cho. 178, 1 A.
tifdf^nh /3. 791.

NoTB. In the preteriHve «T^« (^ 58, § 237), the root has fbur forms,
(1.) 4*).; Ir/Mf (Ion. T^^iv A. 124), 7m, 7r^/, 7rr*r (Bceot Ivrtt Ar. Adi.
911), &0.; and Ep., Inf. n/»i» A. 719, U/^tftu N. '?73, i^. i'J«/m, A. 608,
Flap. PI, 3 {li-rai) 7ft 2. 405 : (2.) i «2. ; li'^imi, li^^^f , ^f/y, if^ro^flM • and
the Ep. Svbf, iT^o^i », iT^in (§ 246. 3) : (3.) »!i. ( 3 '236, 1 ) ; «n», «W«,
&C : (4.) tlit- (§ 288) ; (i/2m) li^i;, ii2iiff», s/'3ii^a» (rare, A. 546, Isoc. 5 b),
i7^f)r« (late). The Plup. is sometimes doubly augmented (§ J 89) ; thus, Ep.
Mut or h^t X. 280, Mu or Mn i. 206, Ion. Mt Hdt I 45 (for Mt^ii,
one f dropped, cf. § 243. 2). In the Dor., we find the verb Umfu, perhaps
soggested by l^drt (§ 237, •T^«), Pind. P. 4. 441, 7rnf Tbeoc. 13. 34, trdTt
15. 146, U»ftu Pind. N. 7. 21, P<. rr«#, Pind. P. 3. 52. The deficiencies
of §Tia are supplied by yiywict (§ 285).

5. r^x*' ('• ^(*;^-> ^(*;t- ^ 263), to run, F. i^£t|0/(MM, commonly ^^h/mv-
iMM (r. «^«^-)> i A. i^^t^a, commonly 2 A. I^;«^«», Pf. )f)^«^ii»« (§ 222),
Ft P. %i^^n/it, Ep. 2 Pf. ^i)^#^iu», I. 412. Late and rare F. ^^mft^i Ath.
416 f; 'i^a/MftMt (§ 200. b), Anth. Deriv., r^ox'^l*'* ^* ^* ^^> ^P* '^^X»^*
«. 451, r^tx»^y X. 163, ^^«^««, Hes. Fr. 2. 2.

6. ^«^« (r. ^i^-)» to fceor, F. «7r« (r. «;.), F. M. •tr^/uu, F. P. oUinva/^^t •
1 A. ^M7»« (r. l»f»., iyiy». § 277), 2 A. ^M7»«», A. M. nttyxtifinv, Pf.
Iwim;^;« (§§ 191. 2, 236. a), Pf. P. U^ny/tas, A. P. nuxhh F. P. l«;^;/.i
r«/MM. Ion. (r. Uux- § 268 ; ftn-tnUtrett Hes. Sc 440) I A. Unttut, E. 885
Hdt iii. 30, 2 A. Opt, luUtt 2. 147, /n/. ImMifttt T. 194, Pf. P. Mtuyfiuu,
Hdt ii 12, A. P. *fi/;^;^f»», i. 66 ; 1 A. Inf, (i^a-wirm/) ^tfr»4 lb. 157
Late Pf. P. <r^#.#rrT«/ Ijuc. Paras. 2. For Jr*, Ac., «ee § 185. i ; for fi^

Digitized

by Google

*m. ll.J FORMATION OF WORDS. £43

$ S46. fi ; fbr fi^^ $ 251. 2. Berhr., f«(l«s ft> carry, h(#w, &o. (pfim
$ 851. 2), X«^ tiV., Ix^^ (fe«''*^ Ar. Yesp. 125), to /!ee /xisf, '^^m^
'i^^^m, 't^^rtti*. I^at. ybt*. — The Aorists UnyMu and iinyift are both
eommon in the l<t Per«. «t>i^. of the IiuL, and in the Opt; but in the
2d Pert* nng. of the Imp,, in tiie /n/1, and in the Part,, the forms of tfuyMw
are preferred ; and, elsewhere, those of ilny»M.

7. ^fi^' and ^eUtut (^ 53, § 228 ; r. ^«^ ^«r». § 279;, to toy, to affirm,

F. i^;;; (r. i^-, /•- § 262), Pf. t?^*!*. (§191.1), Pf. p. ti^nitcu, f. Pf. i/enV*.

iMti, Cyr. viL 1 . 9, A. P. \f}n$9i* or i^^'t^nv (Ion. t/^/^t or tJ^nhv, Hdt iv.
77) ; 1 A. tJ^rm (r. !«•-, tiV- ^ 268), 2 A. tTa-^. Non-Att., Pies. •7e«' /5- 162,
litfftf, Hes. Th. 38 ; Ion. I A. M. ««'.ua^^«», refiued, Hdt i. 205 ; Poet.
1 Aor. itFtt^M) tuitm Find. N. 9. 78, 2 A. iur»f K. 445 ; £p. 2 A. (r. W^
Uir- § 273, cf. Uiirm) tr9r09y B. 484. Bedapl. forms, vri^auvMi i£sch. Sum.
620, m'tptUMtff Hes. Th. 655. — The forms of ^d^»at, with the F. ^if«-«», the A.
t^fift, and the Mid. voice, have commonly the strengthened sense, to affirm
The 1st Aor. inf. iTrtu and part, ittrmt are not used by the Attics.

8. mUfuu (r. «ft-)» ft> ^) Impf. U»0ty«if» (§ 189. 2), F. M^»ft,mt, Pf.
Umi/m4, a. p. Utnih* • 2 A. M. Ir^Mt^Mif* (^ 49 ; r. «^i«-). Ion. and late
1 A. M. Ut»nf^f*nf, Hipp.

CHAPTER XI.

FORMATION OF WORDS.

§ S09* The Greek, like all other original languages, is
the development, according to certain natural laws, of a smaU
number of germs^ or primary roots. These primary roots
(which may be termed r(idicais^ to distinguish them from the
mere roots of inflection) have a significance which is not ar-
bitrary, but founded upon instinctive principles of the human
constitution.

NoTB. The moch agitated question, whether the radicals of language are
mntnt or verb§, has no propriety, inasmudi as the origin of these radicals waa
prior to grammatical distinctions, and the same radical was used as noun^
adjecthef verb, &c, as the case might require.

§ SOS* Those words in which the radicals appear in
their simplest forms are termed primitwe ; and all others are
termed derivative ; while, at the same vjme, a distinction must
be made between simple derivatives, and those words which
are formed by the union of other words, and which are termed
compound.

Notes. «. Of those words which are commonly diBtinguished as primt-
Ore and denvatire, some are directly related to each other as parent and child*
^n^He othen are merely formations from the same radical, which, however.

Digitized

by Google

24t DERIVATION. IbOOK It

Qommonlj appMrs in a simpler form, in the one ilian in tbe other. It U bnr
portant to observe this distinction, tiiough the saxBA language is commonly
for the sake of convenience, employed in both cases.

j3. In tracing derivations, it is sometimes convenient to assume a theme,
either as a primitive, or as a link of connection. We must, however, b«
cautious in pronouncing that to have been essential in the actual formatiin
4ii the language, which we find convenient in explaining that formation.

I. Formation of. Simple Words.

§ 304. Simple Words are divided in respect to their
Ibrmation into three classes.

(I.) Those which consist of the mere radical, without
change, except for euphony or emphasis.

(II.) Those which have, in addition, merely the affixes of
.inflection. *

(in.) Those which receive farther modifications.

Hie Rules and Remarks which follow have respect chiefly t& the third dasi.

A. Nouns.

§ 309* I. From Verbs. Nouns formed from verbs (or
from commoL radicals, § 303. a) denote,

1.) The action of the verb. These are formed by adding
to the root of the verb,

a. -ets (Gon. -rftt, ftm.), or ^/£ (G. -r/ag, f.) ; as, fufti-s/umtt to tmUate,
fJfAn-rtt, imitatwn ; nr^kerm (r. ft^Ay-^ to cut, {vr^iy-vtf) r^oiii, actifm ; S^
to Bocrificet ^vr/m, tacr\fice ; ^•«i/M»t'v, to try, ^iitfAtgimt trioL

b. -«, -« (G 'fit, 'St, f.) ; as, ^i$7« (r. ^»y-), to JUe, fyy-n, j^t

fitifVf to corrupt, f^^ corrvpium. Some verbs in .smt have abstraoto in
'tid (§ 9S. ^. a) ; as, m'athim, to Uutructt m'mthid, imtruction.

c. -«t (G. -•«, m.); as, Xiy-v, to tpeak, Xiy-sf, speech; #irt/(^«, to tow,
0^o^»s, $ounng,

d. -rtf (G. -^w, m.) ; as, Mwrv^, to wail, kwcS-tU, waStimg*

6. '$t (G. 'ft, n.) ; as, »ni'»fMii, to care, »tii-ot, care,

f. -ftit (G. -^w, in.), or .^ff (G. -mw, f.); ««> i^^-^f^tt^ to lament, Qv^-fdt,
kKmenUatioH ; fii-ftm-fuu, to remanber, fifn-fin, remembroMce.

Bemabk. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals
of Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as the effect or obfeti
of the aotion, and thus blend with Qaes 2 ; as, y^aftf^, Hne*

§ 306. 2.) The effect, or object of the action. These
are formed by adding to the root of the verb,

"fm (G. -fsmrtt, n.) ; as, ^»si-t0, to make, compose, ^sin-ftm, <&% 4Wl%

Digitized

by Google

cmi IL] ifcmNS. 9tt5

po$m ; €W*i^ k> jow, ^iri^fut, tkhg mmm, §eed$ y^dpif, to wriit, (jy^-fjM^
y^fi/ut, letter. See also § 305. B.

3.) The DOER. These are formed by adding to the root of
the verb,

a. -T«f (6. -r^v^ m.) ; as, ^%m-»fMit, to bdiold, S^td-rng, hdwider; ir»tim, to
vompote, wtfii^tt poet ; »v/^m, to founds urifrtift founder,

b. -rt^ (G. -'ni^tt nu), or .t«^ (Cr. 'r»fa(j m.) ; as, ^i^MfM (r. ^f.), to give^
h-rn(t gioer; r«^«, to tcaoey fairn^, saviour; r. /•-, to speak, fn-rtt^j speaker
yrator.

Note. The feminines corresponding xa the above (a. and b.) end in -r^
or -rii^i (proparoxytone, G. -£;), or in -t^k or -rts (G. -Hof) ; as, ff'^nr^ios,
^0etoi5, nvrf^«, fmak deHeerer ; «^X«nif and -nt^, ftute-pUyer, ttvknr^is and
-r^Mi flute-^irl ; ^^^^rm, prophet, x^t^T^, prophetess,

c ^tff (G. -i«f, m.) ; as, ><^i^^.», to jiom^, 7^«f-tvf, painter; ^tti^tt, to
corrupt, ^•^%vt, corrupter; »ti^t*, to shcme, mv^ivs, barber,

d. -«f (G. -#v, m. £); r^(^«> ft> noum^ r^»^U, nurse; ittlim, to smg,
mniiti mhutrd,

Rkmark. Some verbals of Class 3 are appHed to things; as, /«/«, to
heat, f»tvrn^, beater, hammer, Zm^rn^, girdle, itnrnit unnd (blower), I^CfXtvr,

^ S97* 4.) The FLAGS, uiSTBUMSMT, cft Other means of
the action. These are formed by adding to the root of the
verb,

a. -nifMf (G. '4V, n.), more frequently expressing place ; as, ^m(-4^mm, to
hear, «»^Mi-r«^i«y, place of hearing, auditory ; it»mrrn(t49 (^ma^m), court of
Justice; 9r»ri^ (Wvw), dHnktrng^cup, Of. §§ 314. b, 315. m,

b. -r^«» (G. -•», n.), or -r^ (G. -«#, f.), more frequently expressing
means; as^ |uw, to citrry, |M^r^«» and l^rr^a, currycomb, Xut^m (Xv«), ran-
som (means of releasing), i^x*^''*'i'^ (}iX^»l^*)t orchestra.

Remark. TerminatioDs of verbals are affixed, in general, with the same
euphonic diangee as the similar affixes of inflection ; i. e. those beginning
with r follow the analogy of -«■« of the Put. or -tm of the Petf. pass. ; those
beginning with ^ and r, of -^eu and -rat of the Peril pass. ; and those be-
ginning with a vowel, of the '2d Perf. It is convenient to remember, thai
verbal nouns following the 1st Pers. of the Perf. pass, more frequently denote
the thing done ; the 2d, the doing; and the 3d, the doer. Thus,

wtrinlfffuih wtrifivfrmt, ^%'W0tifrm,

w^ifi'fub, poem^ iraiffrtf, poesy, ^tn^rmt poet,

% SOS* II. From Adjectives. Nouns formed from
adjectives (or from common radicals, § 303. «) usually ex-
press the ABSTSACT of the adjective, and are formed in,

a. -/# (G. 'i&t, f>)j o^i i^ the root ends in t or •, -m farming, with the
final vowel oi the root, -ui or -atai ; as, vo^-is, wise, 99(P'li, wisdom ; tifitci/Mif,
-•v-4f, happy, u4m$fMfim, happiness ; ikftPnt, -S-«f , true, mknfui, truA ; tlht-stt
eenlie. §&nus, kiisd, tihmi, kinduess. See §§ 92. fi, y, S15. a.

2i»

Digitized

by Google

•24S ' DERIVATION. [bOOK It

b. 'Tfii (G. ^mrif, t)y from adjecthres in -«; and -vt ; as, fr»f , ejuoi, /r^nf
equdlUy^; ra^vf, swift, rax^rrK, mmftneu,

c '^tvn (G. -Jif, f.)» from adjectives in -»» and -•»» ; as, iituu^fj jutt, hxtu4
9Wfi* justice; €m(p^»tf, discreet, «-«^(0rvy«, discretion.

d. -«r (G. -t«r, n.)> chiefly from adjectives in -vr ; as, ^eJut^ deep, fia^ag,
deplh ; tv^vst broad, tS^ot, breads,

e. '»$ (Or. 'ttisf, f.), from nmnerals ; as, ^110, two, Wf, duae^g Se«
If 25. III.

§ 309. III. From Other Nouns. Nouns derived from
other nouns are,

1.) Pa-trials (patria, native land)^ and similar words de*
noting persons related to some object. These end in,

a. 'Ttif (G. -Tfltf) masc., and -vtf (^ 1 34. « ; G. -nhf) fem. (with thi
preceding vowel long iq patrials ; thus, Arns, -nrm, -urns, 'tarnf, -«wfc t
and also in other nouns in -irns) ; as, "SvSa^is, Sybaris, 2vf «^trDf , a man of
Sybaris, a Sybarite, 'IvGet^irtg, a woman of Sybaris; Aiytvnrfih Tlt^irng^
l^ret^nirns, 2/*iXi«5T»ij, a man of jEgina, &c. ; voXtg, city, vaXtrtif, citizen,
woXtrif, feihale citizen ; ro\ot, bow, rJ^irns, archer, ro^irts, archeress.

b. -ii/f (G. -Utf) masc, and -ts (G. -thg) fem. (^ 118. S) ; as, 'Miytt^m^
Megara, M^ya^tvt, Megarian man, It/Uym^is, M, woman; ^ai^/tM»ov, drug,
(pa^fiutHiut, dealer in datgs, soreerer, pn^fumit, sorceress; Ivritds, horse, Urmt,
horseman, knight,

^310* 2.) Patronymics (so called from containing the
father's or ancestor's name, nntgog ovofia). These end in,

a. 'fitis (G. -ov) masc (uniting with i or « -.preceding), and -t* (G. -t J«j
fern.; 'oivs (G. -cv) masc, and -»s (G. -ethg) tern., from names of Dec I.;
and 'io^ng (G* -«v) masc, and -tag (G. -taiog^ fem., from names in 't»g, and
(especially in hexameter verse for the sake of the measure) from many which
have the hist syllable of the root long ; as, Ufitt/Aos, Priam, Yl^totfJlmy »on
of P,, Il(Mf*4g, daughter of P.; KU^a^, Ei»^««'/^«f , Kix^avig • TlnXtug,
•*•»$, IlffXii^nf • *B^m»Xngt 'i»vt, *H^nxkilhis • Atirti, 'iog, Anrtiing • B^^uifi
Boreas, B«^ue^i», son of B,, Ba^t&g, A»g, daughter of B, ; &irri»gi 0«#tmU«^
0trri«f • OifDf, -nr-ag, ^t(nT4tt^ng • linXwg, Ep. G. -w, Ep. TlnXmdht»9
A. 1.

b. -««y (G. '/vfag, rarely -Uvos) masc, and -uivn or -Im (G. -ng) i^*. only
poetic ; as, K^iv^g, Saturn, K^antv, -ttvag or A»9»g, son cf 8., A, 397 ; Ilir
kiug, IltiXu»>p, A. 188 ; *A»^irt0g, 'An^^tmni, daughter of A,, S,S19; "A^^
0r«gf * A J^fltf-rtf fj E. 4 1 2.

Rbmabk. Patronymics appear to have been, in their origin, diminutives
thus, n^ia^Anf, little Priam. See (^312. Akin to the above are a few
words in -sites, contr. -Hevg, — son, -tiis, contr. -<JJ», — daughter ; as, ^»y«-
r^t^ovs, -'^«, daughter*s son, — daughter, itiiX^iiwg, -1^, n^hew^ mece.

§311« 3.) Female Appellatives. These end in,

from those iB<
See § 134.

Digitized by VjOOQIC

a. 'tg (G. '»i»g), chiefly from inaaculines c^ Dec. I., and from those ia •sis
as, "hMvirng, master, itewirig, mistress (%i80 ^trvMMt, cf. b). See § 134. «•

CH. ll.J. NOUITS. 24il

b. -«<y& (G. -Iff), chieflj from maacnlines in -mv; as, xUv, -•f «#, fiioit,
kiatva^ U(mesa ; ri»r«v, -«v0f , cirtuoit, r%»recn» • A«xa>v, -*>»•;, j9/>artoii, AiC-
»«<m. Also from some in -•; ; as, i^iAf, ^focf, S-ioivo, goddeat (^ 74. i), X^»«f

c -fiil (6. 'umt\ frt>m fi»^iXivf, king, and /i^ivf, priest; thus, fim^/XMu,
fueem, H^tm, priutesa, ,

d. -##« (-«•«, § 70. 1 ; G. -nf), from several endings of Dec. IIL ; as,
KiXilt -mty CUicianj KiXi#r« (cf. § 273), «f»«^ -»«f, sovereign, ivarrm, ^i,
^iif hireling, Siirr«, AiCug, 'uog, Lybiecn, Ki^vftra,

Note. See, also, §§ 306. N., 309, 310.

§ 319. 4.) Diminutives (sometiines expressing o^ec-
tum^ oflen cotUempt). These end in,

a. -Mv (G. 'too, n.), with a syllable often prefixed (-i}<«y, -^^f*, -vXkitv,
-»)^i«y, 'v^tof, &c.). — b. 'i0xos (G. -•», m.), -iVjsn (G. -w, f.). Thus, <r«r#,
dtildt Diminutives, ff'm^itfy, /t^ cAi/<f, 9raihtr»oi, young boy^ 9ruiiiv»fii young
girl, itmiia»i»9j v'eu'iafi^tsv, 9raihet^vX>jof, 9rattia^t9x»'i, trttiiiv*£^tov * fnit^aJ^
youlk, /Ai4^ti»409, fiu^x/ii»9, fAU^axvXXt»¥t /Ati»a»uXXiii09j fAH^Kxiaxos, ftu^etxi'
•"»« • xi^rij gif'U xo^tovt »»fU»fi, xt^tffxiov, xo^iho*, xt^iriov (for 'a^tov, on ac-
oowit of the preceding ^), xe^xrihcv • tH^ot, isUmd, ^nfvh^tof • T^Sin, animalf
{J^ntfitw) ^iih09, Zatid^iavj ^mu^tov, *€i iMx^xrif, £ iMx^etrtiw, O Socrates /
i&or Soekyt Ar. Nub. 22'2.

c 'if (G. 'ttof and -tiaf, f.) ; as, »^wn» fountain,^ x^wU* -7^«« • rivM^
tabie, xncbxUi 'i^9t, tablet*

d. 'ihut (G. -<«r, m., only of the young of animals) ; as, atrig, eai^%
Atrtiius, eaglet; Xeiym, hare, Xttyt^ivs*

e. 'ix^n, -axvn, 'vXXit, 'uXoi (Dor.), &c. ; as, iroXti, city, ^•xix^n • ^Uh^
wine-Jar, ^t^dxtti • kxaviis, finch, itxavtuXXit • i^Mf, 'ttr^s, love, i^mvuXf^
darling, Theoc 3. 7.

Note. Some diminutives (especially in -taf) have lost their peculiar force *
thus, d^^, commonly in prose ^^iov, wild beast. Some proper names have di«
minutive forms, sometimes made by abbreviation ; as, MiytXXaf \juymty
great), 'A/Aa^uXXU (JtfAa^et, channel), Atevvs, "M-tifits (§ 1 26. 2).

§ 3 1 3. 5.) AuGMENTATivEs, words implying increase^
either of numhery size, or degree. They end in,

a. -«» (G. -«v«(, m.). This ending may express either a place, an emunal,
or a person, in whidi any thing exists in numbers, or in large size or degree;
as, &fjtwtXt, vine, ift^rtXtiv, vineyard, /«•«■«> {Iwoi), horse-stable, «v^^«», yv-
MMJMvv {&fn^, yvvn), apartments for men, women, slwt {tnof), wine-cellar ; x**'
Xt, Up, x**^h A fish with a long snout ; ytai»t, jaw, yvaJtv, glutton ; irXmr
ros, breadth, IlAirtfv. As & designation of place, -mm is also used ; as, p»-
^Mutt (Jtitf), rose-bed.

b. -«( (G. -ux»f, m,), applied, like the preceding, to persons and animals,
but harsher in its expression ; as, 9rX»ur»t, .wealth, irXavraJi, a rich dtwL So
XdS^^S, greedy, Xx^ttl^ sea-wolf.

Remark. Many derivative nouns are properly adjectives
used substantively.

Digitized

by Google

34(< DEBITJITION. [hOOK I

B. ADJEcmrBs.
^ ft 1 4. L Prom Verbs. These end in,

a. 'tftif, 'fit -«>, acHve; as, i^X"* ^ ^'^f &(X**'fi ^'^ ^ ^^* ye*^*^ **
^ktcHh*, ycf»mif^ ekaoipHve, fftaphic. This endiog is mofB freqnendy pre*
oeded by r (cf. ^ S06. a, b) ; as, wMnrmif (wMtm), poetic. Bat sm § S15. b^

b. •^t^^tdti 'd, '0f, ttcthej as, r^^Ar, to »mv6f vmtn^t$t, »avm0 (cf. § 306. b).

0. 'if*»tt -«* (and -ff, 'fi, *«f )» impljing fitnesi, both aelxoe and poMtee, ano
annexed after the analogy (^ different verbal noons; as, r^i^i», r(«^fi
(§ S05. b), r^i^ifMs, ftttBd to impart or to rtte<M mmMment^ fuOritUma, dig*
aromt, Xi^if*H {xi»»/*^ xfi'*t\ JU foriue.

d. 'fMtt, '/M9 (6. 'fMf»t)t active i as^ Uil«, ft> jxty, Ulii^imms cfwpawioiiaii;
ftf^i/Mn (jiifAvnfiMt\ mindfuL

a. -«vr, -If, -^y, pamoe, signifying Mcrf wluck is done, dther as a matter of
fagt (like tiie Lat Part pass, in •'tut)j or m(H« commonly as a matter of kabU
Qi pouibilityi thus, i^dtt, to see, i^drht seen, visible.

t "tint, '&, '•vt passive, expressing necessity or obUffatton (Bke the Lat
Part. In -ndus) ; «8» irstiv, to make^ wun^Usj Aa^ loAtcft is to be made.

'. NoiBb Verbals in -rit and -riis commonly follow, in respect to the ibrm
if the root, the analogy of the 1 Aor. pass. ; as, mt^w, to take, Pf. P. fj^nfmi^
A. P. ^^Unv, m^trit, Mt^tridt • vmvM, to stopy Pf. P. ^iwmitfutt, A. P. Wmwtn*^
^awrift irtufT^iat* •

g. -fi#, -If, 'iff passive (compare the Part, in -fttwi) ; as, #tC«, to revere^
{nC-vig) 0tf»,fi(j revered, m'^fuvit (vr^Hm), longed for.

h. 'iifiU (-4 -•»)» '»s (6> '£iH\ &c ; as, ;^«X«4», to slaeken, %»> m^it,
Atck; pi^v, to bear, p»(as, frui^ul; Xiyv, to choose, X^y^g, chosen; Xmth
(Xi/r^^ remaining.

§S1S* n. From Nouns. These have the following
atidiQgs, with, in general, the significations that are annexed :

a.* 'ft, belonging to ; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it in a
diphthong (-«Mf, -uos, -^toty -««(, -moi), and often, without respect to this,
assuming the form -iMf (Ion. -ti'toi, § 46. B.), especially from names of persons
and animals. Many patriuls (properly adjectives, but often used substantively)
belong to this class. Thus, •vfavis, heaven, •h^titnf, bdonging to heaven, heaven-
llh fvw i^^t\ of mtader, murderous ; ky*^9% {ky^£), pertaining to the
/w'lwa, *Ain9mt QAJUfeu), Athenian, ^t {^'u), divine, 'AfytTn ("A^Hi
^-•iX 'drgivCf if«f (tm), Ion. «•/> (imt, -•-•»), of <At morning, wmx*'***
<«ri;ttf|)i of a cubits length ; M^w^uog {Avifttvos), human, *0p4(ii»t (•O^nf^),
MomenOi ^(u»f (B4(), of wild beasts.

^OTBS. m. From the neuter of these adjectives has come a class of sub-
stantives denoting an appropriated building or other place, instrument, &c ; as,
ktimtw QAJnvm), ^nfiTut, Mavtf-iTfv, temple of Minerva, of Theseus, of the
Muses, M0v^$&9 (»«»^ivf), barber's shopf y^ninfuunlsf {y^fAfimrtut)^ writing^
tablet, cf. § 307.

«k Before -*^ and -tt (§ SOS. a), «• oflen passes into •• ; as, iMUifrii, gear^
l»Wi»f, of a gear, UtXnrut (TAtknrof), MUesian, ii»f4t*M (u^mturt), i»-

Digitized

by Google

•?H. 11.] ADJECTinS. — PSOfTOUNS. 3»19

b. -/«««, •«, 'if Qf y precede^ -jmi ; if simple t or ii, -S»«f ; while -miot
oommouly makes -«i'»««), relating to. These a^ectires in jm; are often formed
from words that are themselves derivative. They apph to things rather than
to permma. When used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in
^^lalUy* or Jit for^ and are mostly derived from personal appellations. Thus,
vijcm, art, T»x*t»ot, relating to art, artutic ; J«»X»,-, stew, l«9Xi»es, »ervile ;
AiCvt, Libyan, AjC»»§t» pertaimng to the Libyam or Ubya ; E^ivitH, Carina
dUuit, K»^it0ta»if • ^wov^ut, spondee, ^ff^Himxis, spondee ; *Axmit, jichaan,
*Kxntnis, and less Att. 'A^^iixis • ^unrns, poet, ^Mnrtxis, poetic, ftir»^M»tf
Qn'TM^ rhetorical, rr^mrfiytxit {ar^ctr»yos), fit for a generoL See ^ 314. a.

c -i«f, -«, -•», an4 'Tt»f, -«, -•» (proparoxytone), denoting material, -en ; aa,
Xei^^*Sj 90^ Xi^^**f (T 18)» golden, IvXiwg j(^'x#»), wooden,

d. -/mi, seldom -f »•«, expressing time or crsonfaiot ; as, ii/in^ffit (l|^S^«)»
^ f/«|f, n^iirtfr (^ri^**), 2n>e/, Ji^iivof (^«;, -•-•0» mountainoue,

e. -rvff, -ifNf, -4ry«r, patrials, from names of dties and countries oat of
Greece ; as, T«^«»rr»«f (Tn(»t, -mvrtt), Tarentine, Kvlt»ti9«s (Kv^tM^f), Cyzif
eene, 2a^tt»0s {Im^htt), SartBan.

f« -^if, -•^•»» -«f^»#» -«Ai»f, -«X«f, -ArXif , "Ut (-4#ri, -t», G. -«»r#*), 'tHing (-•#,
G. -i«f ; oontr. from 'e-uint, from in*!, form), expressing fulnes$ or 9110^ ;
as, aUxi*f i»*^X*f)» tihameftd, paU^is {^oCh), feeufnl, irsffi^ig irivtt), pau^ul^
^m^emJiisf {Bm^r^s), courageoua, d^rnrnXit (^nvrnm), deceitful, ^tietXit (jP*i«i\
parmmoiwme, iXniH iJiXn), woody, m'v^ius {^ru^, -i/^«f), fiery, ;^«^W (xH*f\
gtaeefid, efnntSht (*f ^)b wasp-Ske, yJ^aftfiuHins {^aftftof), sandy.

^ S 1 0. in. From Adjectives and Adverbs. 1. From
some adjectives and adverbs, derivadves are formed in the
same manner as from nouns ; thus, xa^a^o^, dean^ xaddgiog^
cl^eanlyj iXfv&igiog {iXtv&f(fog)y liberal^ &iiXvx6g {^^kvg)^ jemi'
ntnc, x^joipog {x^ig)y of yesterday.

2. The adjective has in. Greek, as in other languages, two
strengthened forms, of which the one may be termed dutd^
denoting choice between two objects, and the other plural^ de-
noting choice among a nitmher of objects.

The most obvious examples of these atrengthened forms are the eomparathe
and superlatioe degrese, oommoaly so ci^ed. Other examples of the oon^Mtra^
tive or dual strengthened form are, (a) the correlatives vrirtff ; whether of tht
two f wTt^ig, Xrt^H (formed from the 3d Pers. pron. as the podtive, ^ 28,
$ 1 4 1 , or, as some think, from the numeral its'), one of the two, olVirt^^t, •«*«.
rt^os, U«rt^«(, ifA^irt^»s (see f 63, and compare the Lat. uter, neuter, alter,
and the Eng. whether, either, ndther, otiier) ; (6) the following impl3ring a con-
sideration of two objects m properties ; hJ^rt^it (poet.), Lat. <texter, right
(rather than left), n^tm^f, sinister, left, hun^Hj second, hfitin^ti noster, our
(Mt|Mr than yours, or any one's else), &f*ir$^, vaster, yomr, e^irt^, their, &c
r*| 84). Other examples of the euperlaUve or pbiral strengthened form are,
(r) Hm conWiitiwi wirrt \ whdeh m order f or, one of how many f iwiern^
UmeTH (1 6S) ; (d) all ordmak axoept ^t^rs^ (tee f S^)*

C. Pronouns.
^317. For the formation of the most commrn pronoam,

Digitized

by Google

250 DBRTVATIOlf. [bOOK It

see §§ 141 - 154. The Greek abounds in correlative pronouns
and adverbs (see fl 63), in respect to many of which it will be
observed that, when they begin with w-, they are indefinite^ or
interrogative (with a change of accent) ; with t-, definite ol
demonstrative ; with the rough breathings relative definite^ and
with 07r>, relative indefinite. Thus, itoaog ; how much 7 noooq^
of a certain quantity^ loaog., Toaoviog and toaoadt (^ 150. a),
so much^ oooq^ as nrnch^ onoaogy how much soever ; noxs ; when 7
TroTc, at some time^ tots, then^ ore, wlien, onotey whensoever.

D. Verbs.

^318* I. From Nouns and Adjectives. Of these
the chief endings and the prevailing significations are as fol-
lows.

a. 'itfy -ii/«, and (mostly from noans of Dec I.) -i^, to be or do that
which is pointed out by the primitiye ; as, ^/Xof, friend, ^ikint, to be aftiaui,
to lovty tt^atfMvim (jkv^mlfMt*, -•99s)t to be proaperoutj Atv^w {^'''^X^f)* to be
unforUmatey w«ktf*itt (^triXtfiUf), to wage war ; ^•vXivm (^•i;X«f ), to be a slave,
to eerve, f^ftXivm (fimnXtuf), to reign, XH*^** (x*t*f)* ^ dance; rpkfuut
{rikfim), to be bold, to dare, rtftAm (rtfin), to honor,

b. 'om (mostly from words of Dec. II.), -«/»» and 'vim (mostly from ad-
jectives), to make that which is pointed out by the primitive ; as, ^nX«f , m»-
dent, ^nkim, to make evident, 'havXut (J^wXtt), to make one a elave^ to enaUxoe^
Xi^^*" (x(*'^^^)» ^ *"^'^ golden, to gild, wrt^im (^rn^v), to make winged, to
furnish with wings, rTt^etviat {ffri^aift), to croum ; Xfv»«/»« {ktuxis), to
whiten, rti/Mtifm (ftifjia), to signify, niuvv (Jiivf^, to sweeten,

c. -i^Af, and (chiefly when formed from words which have « or n in the
last syllable, or when preceded by i, cf. §§ 310. a, 315. b) -«?»; from names
of persons or animals, imitative (denoting the jadoption <^ the manners, language,
ojnnions, party, &c.) ; from other words, used in various senses, but mostiy
active ; as, Mt>^i^A> (M^af), to imitate or favor the Medes, 'ExXkiti^a*, to speak
Greek, Am^i^v and A«^i«^w, to live, talk, sing, or dress like the Dorians, <l>iX4ff'.
r/^Af, to be of Philip^s party, iXMVtxil^t (^iXiivtil), to play the fox ; ^Xturi^m
(frXft/Tvf ), to make rich, tuimfA^til^v, to esteem happy, ^i^i^« (^^C^^)* ^* harvest,
Ifi^tif (^(ts)t to contend, i^^rd^tit (b^rn), to wtake a feast, ^ix«^« (}*M$i), to
j^uige, ^mvfiui^M {^mSftu), to wonder,

d. -*> with simply a strengthening of the penult> more frequentiy active $
as, nu^i^of, pure, xaiai^tn, to purify, ftuftiXXtt (xTMittXot), to variegate, ftttXue'-
9m (jiaX&xos)j to soften,

§819. II. From Other Verbs. These are

1.) Desideratives, formed in -ftiat, from the Fut.; as, ytX^ to laugh,
ytXartw, to wish to laugh, PL Phado, 64 b, ncoXifttfi^um (r^Xi^U), to adM
for war, Th. L 33. Desideratives are also formed in 'idv (rarely -dm), diieily
from verbal nouns ; as, ^v^mvm, to team, fteJtivtit, disciple, fsMtnrtdm, to wiak
to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 1 83, ffr^ttmydat {rrfarnyit), to desire military
command, vii. 1. 33, ^»furdw {^»itmr»s), to desire death, PI. Phaodo, 64 b.

2.) Tarioufl prQl(mc«d fbnns in -C«, -r»», &c. (see §§ 265 -SOO), mbm-

Digitized

by Google

CH. ll.J VERBS. ADVERBS 2&I.

timet freqiteiUatieB or mfeiutoe, as, /iVr^, to iknm^ fs^Tdlm, to throw to imdfroi,
rrS»«, to »igh, #rt»«^«», to iigk deeply ; sometimes utc^ve, as, i^i^ to be a$
the age of puberty^ fi€eif»at, to come to the age of puberty ; sometimes coMo^ttw^
as, fitt0uttf to be intoxicated^ fufvfxM, to intoxicate ; sometimes diminutioe, as,
l^ttrn'mrdrnf to cheat, l^av-mrvXXv (cf. ^ SI 2), to cheat a Utile, to hutnbug, Ar.
£q. 1 144 ; bat often scarce differing in force from the primitiye fonn
(§§ 254-258,265).

E. Adverbs.

^ 390. Most adverbs belong to the foUowmg classes.

I. Oblique Cases of Nouns and Adjectives, employed
as circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective
thus employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of
these oblique cases have antique forms, and many belong to
themes that are not in use. Examples,

1. 6ENTnvBa» (a) in -#», denoting the place whence (§ 91) : (6) m •«»
denoting the place where ; aa, tS [sc rmv or ;^Aff i«v], tn which place, where^
§tiirw, Acre, iftau, in the tame place, ttHaftw, nowhere: (c) in -nr ; as, alftmif
of a sudden, l^nt, in order : (d) ir^unif {'e'^«i&, cf a gift, gratie, &c

2. Datives, (a) in -m, -«#i of Dec II. sing., and in -ifr4(»), -#r4(v) of
Dec. I. pi., denoting the place where (in adverbs in -m derived from pronoons,
this commonly passes into the idea of whither, see f 63. and compare the &-
miliar use of u^ere, there, &c,, in English) ; as, *Ajfvtntvh ot Athene ; see
§§ 90, 96. 5 : (b) in -p (-n), -f (-«), -m of Dec. I., and in -i of Dec HI,
denoting wag, place where, or time when ; as, rnvr^ [sc i^f ] m Ait wag, thMt^
[sc x'^^f] ^ ^^ P^^i^ A^*^ ^rntrmxnj cverg wag, eoergwhere, irtl^, on foot^
tiif, prioatefy, ;^«^/, on the ground, ^riXtu, m olden time, Innrt, bg the wUl of^
X^ (§ 89. fi, d), Ayx** ^*^^9 V» '^^H* I* ^^^*

Note. Adverbial Datives of Dec. I. are written by most editors with an
i snbsc, except when they have no Nom. in use, and by some even fheo*
See § 25. fi,

S. Accusatives ; as, infun*, at the moment, x^i ^ account of, }{»n9f Sktt
and the Neat sing, and pi. of acyectives. ,

^391. II. Derivatives signifying, (1.) Manneb, in,

a. -^, from a^ectives. Hie adverb may be formed by changing y of the
Gen. pi. into t ; as, ^a^it, 6. pL ^9^£v, wise, v^Zf, wisdg, rm^vst rax^t
wwift, rmxi»Ht wnfUy, ^a^Ss (fn^ns, ^i^vv, -«?»), Ion. ra^ivf, eoidentig.

b. -«)«v or -^ay Tperhaps kindred with iitt, form), chiefly from noons ; Ant
or -4^ifv, chiefly from verbs (those in '£ifi* commonly conforming to other
verbals) ; and -}« ; as, ^Xnfiniof {trXifi^i), in the form of bricks, Hdt. ii. 96,
^TfSiiv {fi»T(vs)t in clusters, B. 8$, Jitetipatiiv, or 'im (^y«^«/y«), openlg,
AtfvC^itv, or -itc {x^u^rrai), secreUg, 0ir»^£ifiv (#«'i/^«», vwa^aii), ecatterisigfy
lliese appear to be Ace forms (cf. § 320. S) ; thus, Sing. fern, -hv, neat
•}#y, PL neat -^a,

c -I or -ti, especially trom hnitative verbs (§ SIS. o, -iC« becoming 't^Ot
and in oompoands of i- prtoaHoe, mbrit^ and «*&# • as, Mii^«r4 Uhe the Msdee,
'EXXnfi^h in the Greek language, dfurti (juHit)t without pag^ ^^ft»X^ M^

Digitized

by Google

ni OOMPOSXTUUf . [ BOOK fl.

dj^Zff^ <» '^ irfrtoW *■«&, «^;^<e< (x**^)* "^ O'*'* ««» *«»< •^A^^
(lii^), wM M« wAofe P^opie. These appear to be Dat. forma (cf. § a£0. SC

^ •! added to a palatal ; as, mtet-uiyvvfu (r. fuy-, \ 294), to nujr up,
4n(^X confusedfy, pdhttell, «'a^aAX«^(9'a^-aXX«rr«, ^ 274. 7), atUmatefy.

(2.) Time when, in -t* (Dor. -jc«), or> for more specific ex*
pression, in -/xa ; as, aXloit (olkXo<;)^ at another time^ txiiUa
(avTo;), €U, the very momejU. See tl 68.

(3.) Place whither, in -at (which appears to be a soAened
form of -de, ^ 322. HI.,, or at least kindred with it) ; as, oi^
popSfji^ id heaven^ iniiat^ thither^ kej^cutfe, to the other side*
Bee IT 68.

(4.) Number, in -dxig. See fl 25. II.

§ 393* in. Prepositions with their Cases ; as, (91^0
«(^ov) n^ovgyovy before the work^ to the purpose^ naoaxQfifia^
i^Mfi the afairy immediately ^ (dt' o) d<o, on account, of which^
wherefore^ {^p nodw idm) ^Tio^coy, in the way of the feet,
*A^nvait (from U^ip'o^, and -d^, an inseparable preposition de-
moting direction towards^ %% 51. N., 150. 4), to Athens.

rV. Derivatives from Prepositions, or Prepositions
u«£D without Cases ; as, fya (^£), vjithout^ %Xa(» (ai;), witMn
^is, Ifesides.

II. Formation of Compound Words.

^ 33 d* In composition, the word which modifies or limits
the other, usually precedes; as, vofio-^itfig (vofAogj tidr,fii)
law-maker.

The exceptioDB ooDnst mainly of a verb or preposition followed by a notm,
§tA ace fbr tha noet part poetic Among the verbs which are moat frequently
80 placed in proee are f rxMr, to love, and ftr^ut, to hate ; thus, ftX-avi^WHt
i'lomng^ fuart.^ifrns, Fersian'hcUer.

§ 334. A. The first word has commonly its radical foi-m
with simply euphonic changes. These changes, besides those
which die general rules of orthoepy require, consist chiefly,

1 .) In the insertion of a union-voioel, which, after a substantive or adjective,
18 commonly -«-, but sometimes -»»-, ►«-, or -/- ; and, after a vtrh^ -1-, -/-, -•-,
-•I-, or -M-; as, m'aii-i.r^iCtit (»«<*>, -ieSi TflMj instructer^ tt*-6->,oyH (^/»«,
\iyM)f advocate, iufjuw^yis (Ion. '^vtfAi-o-i^yify from "hnfAtoe and ?gy#v), artisan,
(yd-d-fur^la, from y««, contr. yn, and^tr^U, §§ 35, 98. «) yiMfntr^loy ge-
ohtetry, (fM-9-»»^»t • f£es, tuit, and KOQU0) u»/»o(»t, keeper of a temple^ ^ettarm
•-pi^ot and 'ti'^ifPt {B-avarof, ^i^«>), death-bringing, JEach. Ag. 1 1 76, Cho.
869, ^p-n-fi^tt and ••-fi^Af (I'P^s, -•«?, pif), sword-bearing, iya^-m-tiftf
i^cyt^ ti^\ ^hr% of the markat, ii^-t.n^^f (ir^^s, ^^\ foot-btdk, Hdt.
iLm, w^^.yn^ (wv^^ yiy*futt\ fsre-hmm. H^n-^tf (fiiti ^h\ W^
W»WS ^semt^wUsH (pmn, 9rsXiii)^ half-gray, N. 861 ; l^-i^«e« i^K^

Digitized

by Google

*M. IL] FIRST W1>UX<->^LA8T WOBD.

A. 419, X4«'-«-««(m (Xt/rtf, «'«^)» Uawing tm^Bfoat*

S.) In the inaortioii of r, Mmmonlj eonnaMed bj n unioii-Ttfwd efthef to
tbe saocMding or prtcodiag word, mA MmetunM fv«a to both ; aB» {^it*^
ao'm'tt) ^^pa^vrit {fiv'ra^ tifitit), coward, rtXt-r-^ifs {riXti 'i-^fy ^«(«')»
fu^UiiHg, »t^M€^(«f, homedy f «»#^«^*f, hght-bringing ; XS-^frikiif (Xww, rU«),

^^^•f (j§iy*B/mf fi^Cte^gf), mixed wUh barbariant; Bf9^^^4j^Ut {Btcti l^

iMNiiidM^, A. 5 1 1 . &I Dome of thne oA6es» th« «r appMn t6 kat« been bor-
rowed from the theme or the Dat pL of nouie, «nd ia «tketB| pertuipa> ftott
the Aor. of yerba^ fa a yerbal.

3.) In adopting a thorter form from the them«^ or an eariy root ; as, »//•-
^Ca^ns {joufMif •«r«f, ^9mt), hiood-ba£hodt iptk'i'WMg (piki'tt from ^i^Ht
v^Mf), labor-Mag, *

NoTBs. «• Tbe mode in irkaA. the ooostitQeBt words are united (rflen
depends, espeoial^ in verseb upon the quantity of the syllables which oompese
lliem.

/}. In some oomponnds, cidefly poetic, the first word has a ibrm like that
of the Dat. sing, or pi. withont change ; as, 9¥»rt-iroXtt roamh^f by nigkt,
Ear. Ion, 718, tttxt^f^^nrfitt wcH-approatket, £. SI.

§ S9ff» RsMASKS. 1. If tlMfiivt word is a iNirtidlK, It fs commonly
VBcfaaaged except by the general Unre of eapfaony. For elision in pxeposi*
tions, see §§ 41, 4i', 192. 1. *A^^i, like ri^/, often retains its voweL in
the other prepodtions, tbe elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., par-
Henlkriy in the Ep. belbre some words wMch begin with the dtgamfiia. For
elision before a consonant, see § 48. 2. 11^ sometimee' unites witli a yowd
Islkming by crasls; as, ir^^trr*; ^r^»Swr»f, ^^r-ix'' *fhc*'> *• ^» MO
^ 192. 1.

2. Some particles occur only in composition, and are hence called uuepara^
Ms. Of these, the most important are^

a.) JU, commonly denoting privathn or negatidnf and then called A" pfha
the, as, i'lraig, without ckUdrem, 2-#«^, unwiee; but sometimes denoting
MnioHj collection, or intensiiy, as, a-ltX^^f (hx^vt), brother, m-rivng (rtivw),
atrcdmed. *A- privutive (commonly «v- before a vowd) is akin to &nu, without,
to the Lat. m-, and to the Eng. and Germ, un- ; «- ccpuiadve i^ipears to be
akin to af/Mt, together. Akin to H priv. is vti- (Lat ne) ; thus, vn^ans (tkta),
metdkae,

b.) ^vr-, iU, mu-, mi-; as, ^U-^nfMt, Hl-omemd, >vr-rv;^«K, nde-fmrtuHe^

&) The ixtmeioe m^ (kindred with 'A^, § 161. B.), <(<-, W* ^^ ^' t
as, «^P^«»^(v, very tearful, T^A-itXtvTt, very rich.

% 336* B. The form of the last word depends upon
the part of speech to which the compound belongs.

1. If the compound is a Nouif or adjective, it commonly
takes the most obvious form which is appropriate to the daas
22

Digitized

by Google

254 COMPOSITION. [book u.

of words to which it belongs. Often, the last word, if itself a
noun or adjective^ undergoes no change ; as, ofio-dovlog^ feU
low-sUmey a-natg^ ehUdleu. If the last element is a verhy
the compound adjective <Nr masculine substantive ends com
monly in,

a. -H* This encUiig (whidi is fiff the most oonmon) has both an actum
and a passioe seose^ distingniwhwl, fiv the most part, by the accent, which, if
the pennh is short, the aetwe com^wand commonly takes upon the pemmU, but
the paubee upon tiie imtepenmlt; as, kJt-CiXH (xUt, fidXX^), throwing atoim^
kJi-CsXttt throttm at wUk ttmuu

b. -ns (-if} O. -ui) ; as, ti-^f^ir^y becoming, aurn^nnt, tdf-Bt^jScing.

c -Iff or -at (G. '•»), and -n^ or -«^, denoting the agent (§ S06. a, b) ; aa^
9«f*$'fimf^ UgUiatar, fitu^0-iriiXnf (§ 92. 2), i^tit-in^s, Urdrcatcher^ /miX«-
C«nf^ Aepherd, 2. 529, irm^sXittf^, diM-wuttrderer,

Rkkark. In compounds of this class, if the last w(»d begms "with &, t^ot
«, fbHowed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to « or
«» ; as, ^T^mrnyit (fr(ar»t, &yi , general^ )vnix«r«f ()»r-, iXmyfJ), hard to
drive over^ avrnvfui («-, •••ftm, § 44. 5), namelen.

% 337. 2. If the compound is a verb, it is important to
observe that verbs are compounded directly and without change
with prepositions only ; and that, in other cases, compound
verbs are derivatives from compound nouns or adjectives ex-
isting or assumed.

Uma, XMftCdtaty to take, unites directly with the prep, iv^ tqa, to ibrm
mfM>MftiCm9»0j to take iqi ; bnt it cannot so unite with the noon t^yew, work, and
hence the idea to take work, to contract, is expressed by i^ykaCim, derived
from the compound verbal l^7«-x«C«f, contractor. So the verb compounded
of TflTflrff , horee, and T(i^v, to feed, is !9rwT^0(piv from l^vr^ipuf, horee-keeper.
Sometimes the form of the verb happens not to be changed in passing through
the compound verbal ; thus, from 9-tT»t and vatit, is formed ftrt-wMf, bread'
maker, and from this again nrf^ratut, to make bread,

Rekakks. 1 . The union of the preposition with the verb, as not afiecting
the form of the verb, and admitting of separation by totem (§ S28. N.), is
termed hou or improper conqMrntion^ in distinction from that cloee or prcper
compotition which forms one inseparable word.

§ 33 8* 2. In PBONOUNS and pabticles there Lb a still looser form
ol composition, consisting in the aggregation of words, sometimes really and
sometimes only apparently combined in sense. In these aggregates, the or-
thograpby varies, the words being sometimes written together, chiefly when
the last is an enditic, and sometimes separately. Among the chief words
that are thus affixed to others axe,

a. The niDEFZinTB fbonouii rU • as, Img, whoever, aSnst 'X' o**^ *^*^'»
if any one.

b. ThePABTIGLES,

Mv (Ep. »l or niv. Dor. »«), contingent or faidefinite; as, 3t if, whoever, Un

VKtW i*,\ '

Digitized

by Google

CH. 11.] PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 255

yi (Dor. yA)f at katt, emphati' as, tymyu lot least, ^^yt^ pou twrefy^
rmiri yt, thit eertainfy, Iwti yt^ ghtee at leatt»

hi, now (shorter form of jf^) ; as, Srrif H tofioever now, nh ^ Juat now.

^fiir§Tt (^ff fl'trt), ever now; as, UrteHvrt, wKotoever now, ri ^nwr% \ what,
in the worldf

0Z9 (oontr. from lif, it being eo, ^ 55), dun, therefore, yet, often added to an
indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of indefiniteness ; as,
ifr$^»v9, whoever ^en, ivm^^tiwrtm, howeoever now then.

iri^ (shorter form of ri^O* ^^^* partieutarfy, juet; as, •r«Y(, who m par*
Heular, Hwt^, Just as,

m'«vi, at any time, ever, often added to interrogatiyes to strengthen the ex-
pression ; as, ri w«ri Urt rwr» \ [what at any time is this^] what m ths
world is this 9 w, u^at cqn this be f

ri, the simplest sign of connection, and hence oft^n joined to other connec-
tive words, before their use was established, to mark them as such. In the
Ep. and Ion. this is finmd to a great extent ; bat in the Att. scarce oecnni
except in In, and Jrrt, as, aUg n, able, possible, and i^* frt, on condition that*

NoTB. In cases of loose oompoeitian, other words, especially particles, are
sometimes interposed. When a preposition is thus separated from a verb, the
figure is called Tmesis (r/Mt^tf, cutting) ; as, l« ^ irnU^nt, and leaping fartK
Sor. Hee. 1172.

Digitized

by Google

BOOK III

SYNTAX.

Homer.

<^ S39. Syntax, as the doctrine or senten
CES, treats either of the offices and relations of
words as arranged in sentences, or of the offices
and relations of these sentences themselves.

KoTB. F(ff a general view of the offices of words, as nUfftet, f>rt£*
eatCt copula, attribute, compellative (person addressed), aj^Msitht (8abstantiv%
in apposition), adjunct (modifying or limiting substantive not in apposition)^
whether oomplem^fit or drcumstanoe (i. e. r^arded as completing the idea cMf
the modified word, especially as a direct or indirect object, or as denoting some
drcunutanee respecting it, as time, place, means, &c.), whether exponential or
node (i. e. attached with or withont a preposition), exponent (sign of office t^
relation, as preposition, conjunction, &c\ &c : of their relations, as c^/ree^ ■
ment or concord^ government or regimen^ &c. : of the distinctions of senten-
ces, as eimpU or compound, distinct (in which the predicate has a distinct form
as a finite verb) or incorporated (in which the predicate is incorporated in
another sentence as an injinitive or participle), intellective or voHtive (expressing
an act of the understanding, or of the ten^), declarative or interrogative, actual
or contingent (having respect to fact, or founded upon supposition), positive or
negative, leading or dependent, substantive, adjective, or adverbial (performing
the office of a substantive, adjective, or adverb in another sentence), protasis
(introduction, condition) or apodosis (conclusion), &c: of then: modes of
OONNECTlbN, incorporation, subordmatUm, coordination, and simple succession :
of their exponents, as connective or characteristic (denoting the connection
of sentences, or simply distinguishing their character) ; conjunctions, copula-
tive, final (denoting purpose), conditional, complementary (introducing a sen-
tence used substantively), &c. ; connective pronouns and adverbs, whether rela-
tive or complementary (referring to an antecedent, or introducing a sentence
used substantively) ; characteristic particles, pronouns, and adverbs ; &c : of the
arrangement of words and sentences, as logical, rhetorical, rhythmical, pe-
riodic, &c : and of the Figures of Syntax, as, ellipsis (omission), syllepsis and
zeugma (varieties of compound construction, according as the word referring to
a compound subject has the form required by aU the substantives in the subject
taken together, or that which is required by one of them taken singly) ; pleo-
nasm (redundance), periphrasis or circumlocution ; enallaoe (use of one word
or form for another), metaphor, metonymy, synecdoche, synesis (when the con-
struction follows the sensSf m disregard of grammatical form), attraction
(when a word is drawn from its appropriate form by the influence of another
word), anaeoluthon (a want of agreement between two parts of a sentence,

Digitized

by Google

OB. 1.] eBMimiL B£aCASXS.-^«frBSTAIITlVE. 251

Mkittg A«di a diaage of ooaMnKtkli). vm^ ^IUmf$ <if mmiber$ Htpbsba
TON (dbrogard of the coouBoa Umi of anjugamentX mmattnpki (inYenioa)
pttttnthetiM, &o^ see Qederal Gnunmiur.

§ 3S0* Among the especial causes of varibtt in the
syntax of the Greek are,

1.) Its freedom in the me of either genene or qfecifie forms of expres^n
In the development of a language^ new forms arise to express more specifically
what has been generically expressed by some older form. This dder fonx
thus becomes narrowed in its appropriate q>here^ and itself more spedfic in its
expression. But habit, whidi is mi^ty everTwhere, is peculiarly the arbiiei
of langoage;— >

"Uses,
Qoem penee aibitriun est et jna et norma loqaendi**; —

mid, whererer the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to em
ploy the <dd and fiwniliJM- form in its originid extent of meaning. The result
is, that an idea may be often expressed by two or more forms, which difibr
from each other in being more or less specific ; and the same foim may have
dliftrant OSes, according as it is employed more generically, or more specifically,
lliese remarks apply both to the words of a language, to the fbrms of those
words, and to the methods of oonstmction. They apply with peculiar force
to the Greek, fttoi the freedom and originality of its devek^anent, the oopi-
of its Toeabolary, the ftdness of its fonn% and the variety of its

2.) The prevalence of diffbrent dialects in states intimately connected with
each other by commerce, by alliances, and by national festivals ; and also in
different departments of literature, without respect to local distinctions (§ 6).
It cannot be thought strange, that forms of expression appropriate to the
different dialects should have been sometimes interchanged or commingled ;
or that the laws of syntax should have acquired less rigidity in the Greek,
fiian in languages which have but a single cultivated dialect.

3.) The vimdnett of eonceptkm and emotSoH, the ipirit of freedomf the versa
Ulihf, the hve of variety, and the pcudon for beauty , whidi so preeminently
characterized the Greek mind, and left their impress upon all its productions.
The Greek language was the development in speech of these characteristics,
the vivadoos, free, versatile, varied^ and beantifhl expression of Greek genius
and taste.

CHAPTER 1.

STNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.

I. Agreement of the Substantive.

§ dSl* Rule I. An appositive agrees in
case with its subject ; as,
22 •

'Digitized by VjOOQIC

358 SYNTAX OF FHB SUBSTAMTIYB. [boOK Ua*

wrmf^, the rkftr Mommder, i. 2. 7. Ti^ )l i^X« ^r«» ^rXtyylUt lb. 10.
•O wrafU< Xiytrm M«^rv«« lb. 8. 'Ov^^mi «pr^ iTmu 'JLyiUnm PL Pro*,

. 315 e. *Hf mhrh emr^^^n* Ivf/nri i. 1.2. A«Cit» Ti^^m^i^mf itt f«
X«v lb.

% SS9« Remarks. 1. Appodtivos, more freqimitlj, agree with
their subjects in gender and nmtnber, as well as in case ; as, 'Ev^m^o, 4 2mm i
0tci ypfiit r$S KiXman fimrtXims^ EpyaxOy the wife of 8yeime$i$, ihekim§
of Ae CUieiana, i 2. 12. 2«^«/Mr«v T^ rov 2rvfi^XMf, »mi ^m»^£mf r»r
'A;^«4^, J^iftvf SfTttf' »m} r§»T§vf i. 1. 11.

2. Ellipsis. The appositiTe or the snbject may be omitted, when it can
be supplied from the QoniMction ; as, Au»t0s i ll»Xv^T(mr9if [sc. vlit'], Lycms,
the ton of Pofygtrahu^ iiL S. 20. 0i/urr«»X?f ^ju* vm^k A [sc. \ym\y 1%
Themieiocles, have come to thee, Th. i. 137.

3. The fflgn of special appUcation (it, cu) is often omitted ; as, /^^fifug, &t
i7;^«v vMinkfffMtra, the s/une which tiiey had as cooertnjj», i. 5. 10. KA./a^«r
^f »a) ttffm VA^ixdcXtri vv/btCcvXcv i. 6. 5.

4. Snncsis. An apposittve sometimes agrees with a subject which is im
plied in another word; as, 'A^nvmlat mv ^oXttt rns (uyifms, bemg am
AthemoH, a city the greatest^ PI. Apol. 29 d (here ^iXutt agnsa with 'A#«m»,
of Athem$, imi^ed in 'A/ffv«7«f). *A^ix«vr« i<V K^riW^a, 9-iXif 'ExXumI*^
%9$t9'itt* tufttftttf *liuStrmt v. 5. 3 (here mtmovs refers to «'«x/«'»f, im-
plied m iriXtf) ; cf. iv. 8. 22, v. 3. 2. 2«v r«v ir^irCiA^f Ar. Aoh. 93.

§ 333* 5. Attraction. A sabstantive intimately related to anoth-
er is sometimes put in apposition with it by attraction. In this construction,
the appositive usually denotes a part^ or a circumstance, and is often joined
with a participle, taking the pla^ of the Genitive absolute. Thus, ES^ktuv*
Yt r« w^ifo^m ttvTZvf (p»ivT»»t fMf ml ^v^ai <ri<rM*iyuey«u, their portals are
easify set on fire, the doors being made of the palm-tree, Cyr. vii. 5. 22. "AxXe
T^im i(f*» llinytTo, ^ornKtat zttTatnvretfAivoi ti lirw«i lb. viii. 3. 12.

6. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an adjunct;
and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the othv would seem
more appropriate. Thus, T«vr«v r« tS(9s )v« ^xif^m, of this tkM breadth
is two pldhra, L 2. 5 ; but, T«v il Ma^rv«v r« tZ^ig Wm it»ft »a) «'ivn
wtSiv, and the breadth of the Marsyas m twenty-five feet, lb. 8. Titraftis
iZf$f )m irXiff^f lb. 23 ; but, Tei^^tt • ., to f*\v tu(0s i(yvim) wivrt
i. 7. 14. AixM f*va7 tUpo^ti' but, AvoTw fAva7it ir^iroiev, Vect. iii. 9, 10.
"Em K n A^^f • • tfS tt»9€t rr«)i«4 v. 3. II. Yimrtit 'Atntmt rtfuttrmTti
weXis Soph. CEd. C. 108 ; but, IS^r if 'APnvS* Ut kvi^tfirot ^ikit JEach,
Ten. 348.

7 Anaoolijthon. An appositive sometimes differs in case from its sub
ject, through a change of construction : as, Mnr^/ r , 'E^iUimv Xiy«, and to
my mother, Eribaa I mean (for Mur^Z r' *E^«C«I^, and to my mother EriUsa),
Soph. Aj. 569. See also § 344.

§ 33 4*' 8. A word, m apposition with a aentence not used substantivefy,
is commonly in the Accusative^ as expressing the effect of the action* ; but ia
sometimes in the Nominative^ as if an inscription marking the character of
the sentence. Thus, 'Exiw nri^mf^t, MtMXty Xvvffv vtn^mv, let us ih^

Digitized

by Google

CH. L] USE OP THE mTMBBSS. 25M

Hden, [wtiidi WoaU be] a bUkr'gnef to MmelSua, Ear. Or. 1105. Irifn
fuminvm ^iXu ^ S*n^§f nmi BtSv Jtrifiimj our garlands ar9 profanedf a
diahtmor io the eUjf, and an uuuit to the gods, Eur. Herad. 72. T« )i wmvrmt
i^iyiffTtf .., r^f ftlt rJkv x**^* «6^«»«^(fff» ^ff, hut Ike greatest thing of all,
you tee yottr own territory inereaeingtCyT.Y, 5.24. Ti XtUftpp li, ^(iy»is
iJXimt nm»S9t hvXn yvfh y#«vf *Exx£^ ur»p'i^9/imi Eur. Tro. 489. *H^i> Tli
yt99»tf*i9tf9, ri rov »ttft^d§T9t9Uj «v^ M yuT09t$ 0^oi^m rt «<V^«v«yrai, 'as
the comic poet says,' PI. Ale 121 d.

KoTB. This use of the Nom. and Aoc. may be often explained by attraction
(§. S J3) to the subject or object of the verb.

9. The whole and its parte, or a part, iae often found in the same case,
either by regular apposition (as when the whole is simply divided into its parts,
or the parts united to form the whole), or by attraction (§ 333), or from their
sostaining sunilar relations to the same word. This constmction has received'
the general name of rxni*u »tJ* %>m9 %mk ^i^«#, oonOrwElwn by the whole and
Uie part

IL Use of the. Numbers.

<^ SS«S« I. The Singular is sometimes used for the Plural
in die Greek, as in other languages, to give to the expression
greater individuality or unity ; as, t^p ''£lXtivtt^ the Greek
(-ss^iht Greeks) y Hdt. i. 69. "Effnu dauffvor omiaxfav ano^ the
tear trickles from my eyes^ Soph. £1. 1231. nifinX^/i* cv^tv
S(A(Aa daxQV^p lb- 906.

•Ra-MA^K-. A dwTue, from its strict nnity, commonly qpeaks of itself as aa
imdieidual, and is oflm so addressed or spoken of by oUiers. Not nnfreqnent-
ly, the two numbers are mingled ; as, XOP. '£>>« ^v, Z ^ui, xmi «•« r«»
rwtv^eoe'* eifut, juu r§vfni9 mvriit, if X/«v • ti ti f>tii ttrnXif Xly«, #»
fiJMK • r«} yk^ l^if*tr0* »f*m Soph. EL 251. ^Cl I^Mot, ^ Hr* i^ixntS r«)
iTi^nv^mg Id. (Ed. C. 174. *H^r» ^» ifhi «'«» rtriltvrm ^iXf ^iv« ti
JSsch. Emn. 676. *0^yks Iwiret r«i . . *Tf*u$ ti lb. 848.

§ SS0« n. The use of the Plural for the Singular is
particularly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns^
m adjeetives used syhstantu?elyy in the names of things com-
posed of distinct parts^ and in vague expressions for persons
or things ; as,

Ku} ^vx^ '^ ^^Xirn nui «'«»«crf ^i^u9, to endure both heat, and eoldf
and labor, iiL 1. 33. Ti^ t^\tk rw Mi^ir^g, the ri^ of the wing, L 8. 4.
JlArcnXt, h #M. irmr^if ^y rk piXrurm, Pntrochta, who was thy father*e
best-beloved. Soph. Ph. 434. T« Si/iovinat j3«r<Xii«, the palace of Syeune^
sis, L 2. 23; cf. iii 4. 24, iy. 4. 2, 7. Su9 roTrh riltts, with this bow,
Sc^h. Ph. 1335 ; oH T«^«» ritt 288. TSt Atit r' Ix^fS* Swt^ erUut, 'for
the foes' (Prometheos), iEsch. Pr. 67. X«X« r«»ivr«y tinirms ^vf»4tifti9§tf,
* parents' (a mother), Eur. Hec 403.

RiSMARKS. ft. An individual often speaks of himself in the l^lur^ at If
others were associated with him ; and a woman so speaking of hersdf, uses
the tnaseuHne, as the generic gender (§ 330. 1 ) ; thus, Aitw/atiim yk^ rk Xi-
Xfvttiiw ^i, for J am ashamed of what I have said, Eur. Hipp. 244. 2«S

Digitized

by Google

wo • SYNTAX or THE SirBBTABTIVB. [bOOE Hi. .

T^e ^if^im tUit* if Aif' U ^^ r Uf^ ««> ^ miI^U. iOe. 277
*AAEL. [A^aStfuf h^uf W wfthnv^vtrtt 9iht lb. 863. MH^ *H^f srwMM
futj ^ir*( i^t^vrafU9 Id. Med. 1341. 'HA. ELmw^^', m' x^ wmt;^} rtfu^
(•vfuut Soph. El. 399. So a chorus of women (^ 3S.5. R.) usee the masCi
«iag. (if the text is oonect), Ktv^mp XtMrp^uu, . . A.tMvw» Eur. Hipp. 1 lOi.

/3. The Plur, may be used with a nngutar compelhtwe, when the person ad-
dressed is associated with others; as, *Ir*, %pi, vfiutt, S 'HMviri^o, xai )i^i£r»i.
rt «vc«v fiovkn^iivm ttitif nfittTf, 0/ /»iv ^ av«rr«vri( S)idarx«v H. Gr. iv. 1.
11. ^a rinw, i wti^tmv i Sopk. CBd. a 1102. n^«riX#ir', Z 9'mZ, wmvfl
lb. 1104.

^ 337« III. In speaking of twoy both the Plural md the
Dual are used, the one as the Tnore generic^ and the other as
the more specific form (^ 330. 1 ) ; thus, Jlaldtg dvo, two children ;
but, Ta noupB^ the two children^ i. 1. 1. Compare Tmv apdi^^p
vi. 6. 29, T(u avd^s 30, lov; uyd^oe^ * • • xovioiy^ • • iflo ofy^^ 31* -
Toviaiy 32, rti t< ay^^s 34.

d«f«vr*, Its) §S fut ^ahri y* mv0tt 7^(r«».

BXir^yr' Iro^iir^' «?#!«. Soph. CEd. C. 1435.

Rkharks. «. Hence, the unkm of the Phtr. and Du. is not ngardtd at a
Tielation of the laws of agreement ; e. g. n^«ri^i;^«» Iw M«Mr»M, CA«re ran
up two young men, iv. 3. 10. ^u^mftus ^t it/A^ori^t im*, ^« n »«< Ivirnf*
un PL Rep. 478 b. 'EyfX«r«rny «?t «^^«» ^Xii/«»r(f iiV itXXnXm PI. Euthyd.
373 d.

/3. In the old poetic language, a few examples occur in which the Dual is
used of more than two (§§ 85, 172) ; as, Hith n nm.) rv, lloiaf^yt, x*«
Kl4m9 Ad/Jtirt CI ^f, 9U9 ftM rn* »»fAi^ti9 «ir«r/»ir«y . . • JtXX* l^f^M^riT-
r#» »mi mv^iTtfv 0. 185. 1X1/^10-^1 . . • »dPtro9, Xvirnvr* jiMimt
Horn. Ap. 486. Some think that the Dual is never thus used, except when
two pairs or sets are spoken of.

III. Use of the Cases,

§ 888. Cases serve to distinguish the relations
of substantives. These relations are regarded, in
Greek, L as either direct or indirect, and, II. as
either subjective^ objectivey or residual.

I. Of these distinctions, the first is chiefly founded upon the
directness with which the substantive is related to the verb of
the sentence. The principal dirbct relations are those of
the suiject and direct object of the verb, and that of direct ad-
dress. Other relations are, for the most part, regarded as

INDIRECT.

n. The second distmction is founded upon the kind or char^
acter of the relation. The relation is,

Digitized

by Google

na. 1.] vsB or the cases. 961

1. SimrBOTi'VK, whetk the siifoetsuitiTe denotes the souses, or
SUBJECT, of motion^ action^ or it^tuenee ; or, in other words

THAT FROM WHICH ANY THING COMES.

2. Objective, when the substantive denotes the end, or ob-
ject, of motion^ action^ or influence ; or, in other words, that
TO which ant thing goes.

3. Residual (residuus, remaining)^ when it is not referred
to either of the two preceding classes.

. ^339* The latter of the two distinctions appears to have
had its origin in the relations of place^ which relations are both
the earliest understood, and, through life, the most familiar to
the mind. These relations are of two kinds ; those of motion,
and those of rest. Motion may be considered with respect either
to its SOURCE or its end ; and both of these may be regarded
either as direct or indirect. We may regard as the direct
source of motion, that which products the motion, or, in other
words, that which moves ; as the indirect source, that from
which the motion proceeds ; as the direct end, that which rc-
ceives the motion, or that to or upon which the motion irnmedi'
ately goes ; and as the indirect end, that towards which the
motion tends. By a natural analogy, the relations of action
and influence in general^ whether subjective or objective, may
be referred to the relations of motion ; while the relations
which remain without being thus referred may be classed to
gether as relations of rest. These residual relations, or rela-
tions of rest, may likewise be divided, according to their office
in the sentence (% 338), into the direct and the indirect. We
have, thus, six kinds of relation, which may be characterized
in general as follows, and each of which, with a single excep«
tion, is represented in Greek by an appropriate case. .

A. Direct Relatiomb.

1. Subjective. That which acts. Thb Nohinativk

2. Objective. That which it acted upon. Thb Acx^usattve.
S. Reeidual. TTiat which i$ addretted. The Yogattve.

B. Indirbct Belations.

1 SabjectiYe. That from which any thing proceedt. The GENrnvE.

S. Objectiye. That towards which nny thing tends. The Dative.

S. fieddual. TViat with which any thing is associated. The Dative.

^ S40« Remarks, m. For tbe historical development of the Greek
ctsee, see §§ 83-88. From the primitive indirect case (which remained aa
the Dat), a special form was separated to express the subjective relations, but
none to express the obj^tive. The primitive form, therefore, oootinnsd to ex-
press the objective rJations, as well as all those relations which, from any

Digitized

by Google

262 SYNTAX aP THE SUBSTANTIVE. [bOOK ni

eanae, were mat rtferrBd to either of tbese two daseee ; and hflnoe the Dat u
both an oltjeetwe and a rendual case.

/3. In the LAtin case-system, which has a dose correspondence with the
Greek, there is a partial separation of the indirect objective and residual, or, as
they are termed in Lat., Dative and Ablativb cases. This separation,
however, does not appear at all in the Plural, or in Dec II., and, wherever it
occurs, may be explained by the mere precession or contraction of final vowels.
A more important difierence between the two langaages appears in the exten-
sive use of the Lat. Ablativb. The Romans were more controlled than the
Gre^s by the power of habit, idiile they were leas observant of the minater
shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Hence, even after the Aill de-
velopment of the Lat case-system, the primxtive indirect case continued to re-
tain, as it were by the mere force of possession, many of the subjective rela-
tions. It is interesting to observe how the old Ablative, the once undisputed
lord of the whole domain of indirect relations, appears to have contested every
inch of ground with the new claimant that presented himself in the younger
Genitive. But we n\,ust leave the particulars of the contest to the Latin
grammarian, and content ourselves with merely referring to two or three fa-
miliar illustrations. Thus, in Lat, the Gen. (as well as the Dat) was ex-
cluded from all exponential adjunet$ (§ 3*J9), because in these the relation was
sufficiently defined by the preposition. The Gen, of place obtained admission
into the Sing, of Dec I. and II., but not into Dec. III. (the primitive deden-
mon, cf. § 86) or into the Plur. The Gen, of price secured four words {tunUt
guantif plurisy and mtitorts), but was obliged to leave all others to the AbL
After words of j)lenty and wanty the use of the two cases was more neariy
«qual. In the construction of one ntbttnntioe as the complement of another^ the
Gen. prevailed, yet even here the Abl. not unfrequently maintained its ground,
>if an adjective was joined with it as an ally. In some constructions, the use
of the Gen. was only a poetic license, in imitation of the Greek.

y» The Nominativb, from its high office as denoting the subject of dis-
course, became the lending caecy and was regarded as the representative of the
\vord in an its forms (its theme). Hence it was employed when the word was
spoken o( as a word, or was used without grammatical conetruction ^ § 34:i),

^ 34 1 • There are no dividing lines either between dirbct and indi-
rect, or between tubjedive, objective^ and rendual relations. Some relations
seem to faU with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to
the view which the mind taked of them. Hence the use of the cases not only
varies in difierent languages, and in different dialects of the same language,
but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the same author.

A, The Nominative,

^343. Rule II. The Subject of a finite
VERB is put in the Nominative ; as,

'E«'iiH K IriXivTffri A«^ir«f, »«} nmrirrn t/r r^f fiaetXtimf 'Afrmf^i^"
|iif , Tte^m^i^pns itMUiXXu r^ Kv^«v, and when now DarUit was dead^ end
Artaserxes wa» established m the royal authority, Titsttphemei accuses C^rtui,
L 1. 3.

^343. Rule IIL Substantives independ-

Digitized by VjOOQIC

OH. l.J NOMINATIVE. 963

ENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION are pUt in

the Nominative.

Note. The Nominatiye thus employed is tenned the Nominative independ'
ernt or absohttB (ab8olutus» rdeated, free, so. from grammatical fetters). Set
§ 340. y.

To this rule may be referred the use of the Nom.,

1.) In the inscription of names^ ^t7Ze9, and divisions; as,

^vQov UvdSuaig^ The EXPEDITION of Cyrus; BiSXlov n^fw^

toy, Book First,
2 ) In exclamaiions ; as, !a dvaraXaiv* iyi»y O toretched me!

Eur. Iph. A. 1315. OdXajtay edlattay the Sea! the Sea!

TV. 7. 24.

3.) In address.

The appropriate case of address is the Voc. (^ 85). But there is often no
distinct form for this case^ and even when there is, the Nom. is sometimes
employed in its stead (§ 8l). (a) The Nom. is particularly used, when the
address is exchtmitory or deacriptive^ or when the compeilative is the same with
ttie iutject of the sentence ; as, *Cl ^iXtty Z ^«X«^, my beloved I my beloved I
Ar. Nub. 1 1 67. 'Wirimt i xmkif ri xm) r«<^«r, O Hippm»^ the noble and the
wi$e! PL Hipp. Mi^. V8I a. {b) .To the head of descriptive nddreee belong
those authoritative, contemptuous, and familiar forms, in which the person who
is addressed is described or designated as if he were a third person ; as, O; II
sixiras, . . Wthffh, but the servants, . . do you put, PL Ck>nv. 218 b. 'O 4>«-
Xn^titf . . •vr«« *A<r«XX«^Mf •«, w m^ifiuitt t TTie Phileriun there, ApoUodorus,
stop I wont you? lb. 17'2 a. (c) In forms of address which are both direct,
and likewise exclamatory or descriptive, the Voc. and Nom. may be associated ;
as, *il fk»t Z piXt Bci»x*i Eur. Cycl. 73. *il tSrot, A7a» Soph. Aj. 89.
OSrgf Z, v7 r«y ^riV at^us, iUirora Eur. Hel. 1627. *A^ia7t, x«2 «/ tiXXat
& 5. 39.

§ 344. Anacoluthon, &c. From the office of the
Nom. in denoting the subject of discourse, and from its inde-
pendent use, it is sometimes employed where the construction
would demand a different case : —

1.) In the introduction of a sentence; as, 'Tfitif Ikj . . tuf^h xm^ie vfitTf
laxi? iTvAi ; You then, . • does it now seem to you to be just the time f vii. 6, 37.
"E^Jv/iZv i Kuftf . ., tio^tv avrif, Cyrus desiring . ., it seemed best to him,
Cyr. vH. 5. 87. Kal IrrttvPm ft^ifituu xm) ^M^iXtvf »a) Kv^»f, mm)
si «ft(p* mvTthf M^ Ixmri^t^v, Mvt fAh rSf &f»f} fitt^iXia inrifpfi^tuv i. 8. 27.

X»vT9 Cyr. vi. 3. 2.

2.) In specifcation, description, or repetition; as, 'AxXous V i fiiyett . .
NiiX«« i<ri^^if • ^0Virir»M9titi Tinym^vSyait, », r. X., and others the
ffost Nile hath sent; Susiskanes, P,, ^., ifisch. Pers. 33. Tk rt^} UvXov v***
^/»^«ri^«y xmrk x^drtg l^aXtfiurg • 'A^nt«i«i fth . . irt^i^Xurrtt . ., 11 !•
X»it§9fnfi»i ti . . rT^Tir%htfCf*%v4 Th. iv. 23. Aiyu V iv iXXnX»i^t9
lffiS»»9 nm»s), f vX«| Ixiy^t^v puXmum Soph. Ant. 259. Quyirn^ fAtymX^
r«f«# *H(ri«»«f, *Hiri«v, 2$ }i*«m Z. 395.

Digitized

by Google

t64 SYNTAX. ^ GBMITIVB. [bOOK UL

8.) In Qwakiog of momm or wofdSp m «im:A t tbxm, Jlf0^Xnp$ vh «w» wmi '
^«» »Mfnv W^ytf/MMiy rv»»^mfrtis, he ha$ obtained the common mppeUmHon of
the vile, STCopuAitTy iffiWchin. 41. 15. Tim^tyyvm. i Kv^»t fwin/Am, Zthg I6f^
f^nx** **^ ^yc^ii^y, Cjfme gave omt at the paee'Wvrd, Jown oum ally anm
LMADMaf CjT. iU. S. 58.

B, The Genitive.

^ 84«S. That from which ant thing pro
CEEDS (§ 339) may be resolved into, i. That from
which any thing proceeds, as its point of depart
URE ; and, ii. That from which any thing pro-*
ceeds, as its cause. Hence the Greek Genitive is
either, (i.) the Genitive of Departure, or, (u.)
the Genitive of Cause ; and we have the follow-
ing general rule for subjective adjuncts (§|^329,
338) : The Point of Departure and the Cause

ARE put in the GeNITIVE. .

Note. The Gen, of departure 1$ oommonly expreaeed in TCng|i«h by tbf
preposition from, and the Cfen, of caiMo, by the preposition of.

(i.) Genitive of Departure.

§ S46« Departure may be either in place or in chamder.
Hence,

Rule IV, Words of separation and distinc-
tion govern the Genitive.

Note. There is no line of division between the two classes of words
which are mentioned in this role. Many words which are oommonly used to
denote distinction of character referred originally to separation of place (cf
i SB9), And, on the other hand, words which nsoally denote separation of
place, are often employed, by a metaphorical or transitive ose, to express d»
partore or difference in other respects.

1. Genitive of Separation,

§ S4y« Words of SEPARATION include those of removal
and distance^ of exclusion and restraint^ of cessation and faiU
ure^ of abstinence and release^ of deliverance and escape^ of
protection and freedom^ &c. ; as,

Xf^i^t^Pmt IXXnXm, to be mparated from, each other, Pl. Conv. 198 «.
Tit^)s vm iXXtn, apart from the rett, i. 4. IS. 1^fikmr§t iix» Oyr, viiii
7. 20. *X9'9X''tV ^'(^ iri2uW lb. ii. 4. 24. Ati^x*^ AkknX^t*, were dis-
tant from each other, L 10. 4. ILi^^t . . rnvrMt, far from him, i. 8. 12.
KfXy^iit r»v nmiup, he wamld prevent them from burning, i. 6> 2. BJ d««
Xdrmg i7(y«ifr§ H. Or. vii. I. 8. Tsuwfit IfU wXi^uv ir«vr#W«o *»

Digitized

by Google

CB*.l.] OF SSPABATION. — OF piSTUfCTION. 2Sb -

eeoaf from 0je war againti me, 1 6, 6. T«»r«vr • * w. «r« v#« rSff Jk^ns Cyr*
viii. 6.3. B/«» rlXivriir*^ lb. 7. 17. Ovr«f ftXv ttvrw UfAM^rnf, pU§
mtm misMd him^ L 5. 12. 'E^i ^r^n rnf iXwi^Bfil 6r. vii. 5. 24. ty
>«u««« Ir^Xiif i|^«'X««if Eur. Ale 418. *£«'i^;^«^iy rfv iaxfvtif, we r^
fraxned from weeping^ YLVhsadxit ll7e. KjettUit . . Xvrti^tct Soph. £1. 1489.
2*lr«4 x«»Mi Id. Ph. 919. K«r«if rt^tv^lvci, lb. 1044. 'AXv^ir«»
fitiftu Id. Ant. 488. Av« tivi^eit I|i4 rtfv ^if Mtrtt^vvdM, wiU keep two mew,
from nnhxng^msS* 11. *£Xii/^i^«4 ir0VA>y, iAii;^i^«i , , 'Etv^vrtitit Eur.
Heracl. 873. 'A»i» ml^x^f *m).^X»int ii. 6. 6. VaftMv r« Ayy«} ^«^if
PI. Leg. 840 d. ¥.mia^is HtxUi, m. Rep. 496 d. "Eat/ &* »at^^y r«.
Pft^vtns lb. 573 b. Ntf^^iiTf ^ki cmI}* ituri^ov mx^«v ; Eur. Ale 43.

§ 348* Remarks. «. Words of sparing imply refraining fnm^
and those of conceding, resigning, REMrrriNG, and surrendering, imidy
parting with, or retiring from. Hence, rSif f^h ufAiri^mv iHu ^m ^i i^(r^««,
ii itmy pUasure to tpare your property^ Cyr. iii. 2. i^8. K«xfr*0ir vrt;^*^!!-
r I » «vT<^ r«v ^^«f«v, omf A^ [Sophocles] conceded to him [.^sehylus] the tftrone^
Ar. Ran. 790. *AXX« rns ifyns itvifrtsy but resigning your anger , lb*
700. Tns rmv *ExX)iyM» iXtvft^Ut . . ira(ax*'fn^»i ^iXivitft to surrender
to Philip the freedom of the Greeks, Dem. Cor. 247. 24. T^tg ^fftrCvri^m
• • tuti ^iv »ai ^«x«y ttai X»y*i* u9%iM.ti9 Cyr. vlii. 7. 10.

/3. The Gen. denoUng that from which motion proceeds is, in prose, common-
ly joined to words not m themselves expressing separation by a preposition ; bat
in poetry, often without a preposition (cf. 0 429. m.) ; as, Ai^Mry . . ^t^«vr«y,
hnnging from the house. Soph. El. 324. Ttfvr^t treiiittt ynt ixSv, to driee
these Mldren from the land, Eur. Med. 70. 'Ay«xof/^/r«i »«^« j30^«ii
Soph. (Ed. T. 23. 'Tfius ^|y fidtf»ff 7«-c«r^i lb. 142. Ti r* pv^aw rt-
tf-n^M Eur. Ipb. T. 1384. For adverbs in ^iy, properly genitives, see §§ 91»
320.

y. In a few rare phrases, the Gen. denotes the time from which, withont a
preposition ; as, Mtr' ixiyn ti r«vr*fy, and [after a little ftom these thhngs]
a little after Aese things, H. Gr. i. 1.2. T^iVy • . trgs ravri»/9, m the third
year [from] before these things, Hdt vi. 40. AiuT$^^ H Irtt rgurUtp, * [firom]
after,' lb. 46.

2. Genitive of DistincHon,

^ 349. Words of distinction include those of difference
and exception^ of superiority and inferiority^ &c, ; as,

Ait^^i^rmt rix*nfi w distinct from the art, PI. Polit. 260 c *Uxi»r^»
§v^9 iii^t (t 9, differed in nothing from amber, u, S, 15, Hmrut rXi^y Mi-
X^rov, all except MiUtus, i. 1.6. Ai«^«(0y rZf &XX»/v viXis/f, superior to
the other sttites, Mem. ir. 4. 15. Ilxii^u . . ii/iiSv Xti^Mtnt, vlferior to
us it number, vii. 7. 31. T« iinmm . ., t} «fxx« rZt li/x«/wy { Mem. It. 4.
25. "En ^fy K T« ii^v r«v ifc7<«^«v PI. GrOrg. 500 d. Tliri^iv irriy im^r^fMi
4 ^irl^ «} 4KXX«r«y lirirr^fitnt Pl. Meno, 87 c Ov^^y aXXir^ttf ^rtSf
•Srt wnf Upr«v ^mr^itts »Sr» rou r^i^tv (cf. § 405) Dem. Cor. 289. 14.
OSrat irXwrw J^trh ^ilrrifxiv PL Rep. 550 e. T«ly i^^jMvyrt^y «'(^im(
Cyr. viiL 2. 21.

Remark. The verb Xti^rofMu governs the Gen. in a variety of senses,
which are naturally connected with each other, but which mig^t be rafemd,
« syntax, to different heads. Thus, St^^to . . riv XiXttf*f*ifs9 )«;•»» 'laft

Digitized

by Google

9M^ SYNTAX. — GENITIV*. [bOOK lU

§ttm {jft by] ilie «pcar,* i. e. * the reKcs of war* (§5 347, 981), iSech. Ag
517* S^sM viXka^^ «» fuex^kf XtXtif»/titotf 'not left far behind,' t. e
' doftdy pursuing/ Id. Pr. 857. FyM^ff y •JiX^«5 MiXti^^cv XiXij^
/*iv«f , • left behind by/ «. e. ' infferior to/ Eur. Suppl. 904. Em) tU fiUt f*m
0$v XiXu^^ivfi ^iXof \ *bereftof* (§ 357), Soph. Ant. 548. Tvmpuaf Xu-
ir»fiiiMf devoid of underttanding, Soph. EL 474. AiXufitf»»t rSt iv ^'EkXnnw
vifitff, 'am ignorant of/ Eur. Hd. 1246.

§ 3 SO. Words of SUPEBIORITY include, —

a.) Words of authority y potoer^ precedence^ and preemirience
Thus,

Ti#r«fS^vnt &iX*** thrSt, that Tissaphemes should govern than, I. I. 8
*^y^mri7t . . wAfrttt sovereign over all, v. 4. 15. 'HyiTr* «••£» tf-r^a*
TtvfMtTOf, led the army^'tv. 1.6. n^trC«i/ii» tmi* vttXXHv atoXimv, to IoAs
ronil of most cities, PI. Leg. 752 e. *E»e «<•«»'*'' '*•'» 'ExXiiiraJir iii. 4. 26.
•Of »(ai9tt vT^etrw Soph. A/. 1050. "Of ttifvf*ff x^**'^* ^^* lAe^ 19-
B«r4X(^*>y tthrmf ▼. 6.37. Aitf-r'^Kv ^A^EMwr Eur. I(m, 1036. See
also § 389.

Otfx «tfr«f IflirXttf^fv, in mortS x^ttrSf i
II«v r» ^r^«ri}yirf ratr^i t «*•? ^ ^a) Xt«y
"E^irT* d^vAr^tfD tSv oi* iyttr* eSxohv i
Svdc^ritf » f « r tf- *f V ^Xfts, »ux *lf^f » ^ « r *» y • Soph. Aj. 109!/

ItKKARK. The primitive sense of the verb ^^x" &PP^ra to have been to
tahe the lead. But, in early warfare, the same individual led the march, ruled
tiie host, and began the onset. Hence this verb came to signify to rule, and
to begin ; and, in both these senses, it retained the Gen. which belonged to it
as a verb of precedence. Thus, *A.¥6^ti<rmv &^x^n, to rule men, Cyr. i. 1.3.
^uyns ti(X"*i ^ ^^ fivhtf iii- 2. 17. Tav X«y«» tk ^x**^* J^ iit 2.7
K«iMy Xiystf nmrfi^x** Symp. 8. 1. *

§851« /?.) Adjectives and adverbs in the compcaralio^
degree^ and words derived from them.

An comparatives may be ranked with words of superiority, as denoting th*
possession of a property in a higher degree.

Rule V. The comparative degree governs
the Genitive ; as,

K^i irrfvi lauT9u, more power^ than himsdf, i, 2. 26. T*rv lititmf ir^s^
X»9 hmrrpf, they ran faster tiuin the horses, i* 5. 2, Ttvrtv ^ti/ri^«» PL
Lsg. 894 d. *Av*>ri#« rHv pMriiv i. 4. 17. *TfAaf »v itoXu if^ou tfm^**
i. 3, 16. *ACfo»»fA»t dl i0'Ti(fitrt rnf fitaxitt hut Ahroconuu came after Iht
battle, i 7. 12. T$ i^rtfaitf. Tti$ fitmxnt PL Menex. 240 c 'Hrr«^t^«
•hrwOjT, Y. 3. 33. Ttfttu$ ravrt/v l9'X$§ftMrurt ilL 1. 37.

§ 3S9« y.) Multiple and proportional words (§ 138)
Thus,

n«XX««-X«r««tff ^:a£y tturSf^ many times your own nvm^er, iii. 2. 14,

Digitized

by Google

OK. l.j OF GAUSS. 267

^vrifttff TftwXatrimf )) riif ^^tinif rtrdfrnv IS^, rnf 4iori^»t 'itirXiiv
9rif»trrfit Ik, r^i^Xti* rUf r^inn • riit V t»Tti9j t« ir^tiirns ixrmvXmg-imf
lOtf^ffv ^ l«'r«x«ii<»«r««'X«r/«» riis ir^tims (a. b = 2 a, c=s1^6bk
S a. da 2 6. tsSc. f=^8a. gmsQT a) PL llm. 35, b, c A); vUtt
W »rt/M»« ii^iX^if {«;r«f Eur. EL 1092.

(it.) Genitive of Cause.

^3S3. To the head of cause may be reter-
red, I. That from which any thing is derived,

FORMED, SUPPLIED, Of TAKEN ; II. That which

exerts an influence, as an excitement, occasion,
or condition ; III. That which produces any
thing, as its active or efficient cause ; and
IV. That which constitutes any thing what
it is.

In the first of these divisions, the prevailing idea is that of
source ; in the second, that of infu&nee ; in the third, that of
tuition ; and in the fourth, tnat of property. Or we may say,
in general, that the first division presents the material cause :
the second, the motive cause ; the third, the efficient cause ; and
the fourth, the constituent cause. It scarcely needs to be re*
narked, that the four divisions are continually blending with
each other in their branches and analogies.

^ 3«S4. I. That from which any thing is de-
rived, FORMED, supplied, Or TAKEN. To this

division belong, 1. the Genitive of Origin^ 2. the
Genitive of Materialy 3. the Genitive of Supply^
and 4. the Genitive of the Whole^ or the Gemtive
Partitive.

1 and 2. Crenitive of Origin and of Material.

^9SS. Rule VI. The origin, source, and
material are put in the Genitive ; as,

^mfti§9 tut) Uttfu^drtigf yiytofrmt weuiu ^m, of DariuM and Posy'
tatU are bom two children^ L 1. 1. <P«/vr»«r /i»U mi S-v^m Wiwainftiveut tkt
doon being made of the pahn'tree^ Cyr. yii. 5. 22. 'ULias /tnTfit . . (pvvrtf
PL Menez. d39 a. "Tl* V Kxm^nt Sofdi. Tr. 401. Ot^i rh ua^Sy^
pvfttfns rt»N^n# vrMTl* Eur. Med. 804. T/ kie^Xminut £f rnt ^(A^nfi
ITActf adptmtage tkemld ytm derive from ytmr atfAorittf f Cyr. viL 5. 56. A«.
ffif#»# rSi9 iHi^rmf it»rSf Ji^»Xm6^rmi lb. SI. "K^nfttdrnv iv^ftm EuB.
Hal. »S5. E^«» THt Xiypp PI. Rep. 3S9 b Th »^^»X^t j?«» Ar.

Digitized

by Google

96b SYNTAX. — GENITIVE. [bOOK |U .

Bod. 524. OTm; fttfUmr wXii iL 3. 14 (cf. 07»«ir re ». r. X. L 5. 10/
IIi^M-rt^ . . iiv^|*rv Soph. El. 895. A/^my . . ^i«vr«y v^crff »«) «'«
X«i/, 'boiling with water/ PI. Phsdo, IIS a. 'M.tfvo'fth <rw vixr«^«fPL
Conv. 203 b. Imit Xiyt*t vfuit Avri«f iiVr/« t PL Phaedr. 227 b.

■ Note. The Gen, of taurce or material oocnra, especially in the Epic poet^
fbr other forms of construction, particulariy the instrumental Dot. ; as, Il^rw.
' }\ irvfig tfitu0 ^u(tT^», and bum the gates with raging fire [from fiie, as tht
source], B. 415. W.u^i ftuXa^AfAtw H. 410. X»t^ vtypmfAivas wXtnt k>JH,
having washed his hands [with water from] m the foaming sea, /3. 261. Atw
t^fat lufptTaf wrafiflo Z. 508.

§ 3<S0. That of which one discourses or thinks may be
regarded as the material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we
speak of the matter of discourse^ a matter of complaint^ the
mbject-matter of a composition^ &c. Hence, not unffequently
both in immediate dependence upon another word, and even in
the introduction of a sentence,

Rule VII. The theme of discourse or of
THOUGHT is put in the Genitive. Thus,

T«tf T»l»r§p •It nmXSs ix** Xiyuf, 7r<, ». r, >.,^ it is no^ well to sajf tf tk§
bowman, that, ^., PL Rep. 439 b. Ai«^f«^iv«f «tfr«y, S^n* ftlv ;^«^«» nmi
plttv t%M9f observing in respect to diem, how great and what a country they Aoee,
iiL 1. 19. Tiff ^ y'jveitnttt t* • . xttaa^rMTf but in respect to the wife, if the
manages iU, (Ec 3. i i. T«v »«^i^y)fr«v ri ^ns { l^ph. EL 817. KXvttr-
r« irtniif, having he ird respecting Xer son, Id. Ant. 1 182. Mayri7c, . . M «-mD*
IXV**^^ r^^crff Id. QiAi. C. 354. ILmrmfuJitfti rov Kv^tv ioxguftw, if
. . MfuZ* Cyr. viiL 1. 40. T«S il tltnah irk»v ftSiXXav inftti^rom^ S<rn jm«
fttwin^vtrau Th. i. 52. 0W« yn^ iro» rHv ytwtiitt nufZv^n rmirt (pvru my*
rHv ri ^4»e PL Rep. 375 e. Ti^tym^itv ^np^/Mt nmieu^iit Id. L 140 (cL
Ti irtfi Miya^itn ^n^ir/iM umhXwvt 139). Ti ti rSv irtXXiiv naXS*^
mof ktt^mirmjtyn 7<r«'*rv» i} i/jtmrivf, . • S^m xmrit va rnvrii l^u i But
what ofj ^,9 PI. Phsdo, 78 d. Tnt Hi 0ns pfi^is, tf vv Mu»m Eur
Andr.361. Cf. ^ 438. 7.

NoTB. For the Gen,- of the theme may be often snbeiitated another case^
more frequently the Nom., in the sacoeeding danse ; ihna, Ei tk i yytk »m»
tuTMU, but tf the wife manages ilL

3. CrenUioe of Supply.

^ 8«S7« Supply may be either abundant or d^ectwe.
flence,

Rule VIII. Words of plenty and want gov-
ern the Genitive ; as,

«. Of PLBirrr. 'Ay^mf ^^/Ar* wX^^nt, fuU of wUd beasts, L 8. 7«
^pik^mt . . l«'//M«'X«V«» %^(r§uj theg fOled Iks skuu with h^ff, L 5. lOu
Itvvmv iXttt enough of these things, ▼. 7, 12. Ktifutf ittXXSf mmi iym$m9
yt^«^r««hr. 6, 27. Mif'rj^ yk^ ^•XXnt lirs^iuf IrWv iL 5. 9. T^ ^
Unrimp i Xifn IvtwX^trfn I 10. 12. n«^«}iiV«v . . infiet rctvcWf K«>.

Digitized

by Google

cjr. l.J oFstrpiLT. — PAniista. . _, ' 969i*

umf V %t fti irXpv^iPf zmxiif Ear. Or. 394. 3^^Mp^. v. ^A«rvij^ 7.
42. Tfin^nf • • ^t^ttyfiifn M^i^iv GSc 8. 8.

3* Of Want. Tory Iwirn^t/ofv ^^avuT, he win loarU provisions, n. 2. 12,
2^<y)«yiir*fv . . ^i?, there is need of slingers, iii. 3. 16. Otuv av ix^riitt
iftauTov rri(iir«4^4, of what hopes I should deprive myself ii. 5. 10. *Av-
fi^iHt^mt &^»(iiv i. 7. 3. 'H ypvx** yffit^h rou rMfturts PL Crat. 403 b.
Vvfiyttrigf ifi ireifTt^v PI. Rep. 361 b. *Oxiyov itn^avrot xaraXtvffSn
vat i. 5. 14. IlokXSv Ivi^ti ethrSff ^0-Ti vii. 1. 41. 'TfAUf V l^nfit*'^*'
i. ;5. 6* *'A^fcmra . . x t y « nui^^tt i. 8. 20. Ot/AMy ri ^^a,€m }(nTa vou (a $
ftv/itvct i Eur. Ale 380. 'O^^ay^v ^/Xtft/ irar^eg Eur. £1.914. X^if.
fAATott ^ ^h riynrif lb. 37. *£^^4X«t/r« V • Xi^og rSt l^^tMV L 10. 13.

Note. The Gen. which belongs to yiofAou and x^K^ ^ ^'^^ ^f ^"^^ ^"^7
be retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to ewtreaU
Thus, 'AXAfv §vrtv9t «y Hn^^t, whatever else you may desire, 1.4. IS^
Efiti ;^«(4r«M Jv Af 99V hn^S, grant me what I would entreat of you (^ 380),
Cyr. y. 5. S5* A/r;^^«y yu^ &fifm rtu fiaxgw XCV^**^ fii*u Soph. Aj. 473*

4. Genitive Partitive.

§ 858. Rule IX. The whole of which a
PART IS TAKEN is put in the Genitive ; as,

*B/u^tf r«v 7Xtv rr^«riv^«r«f , half of the whole army, yi. 2. 10.

Note. This Gen. has reoeived the names of the Gen, of the whole, and Xh»
Gen, partitive ; the fooner from its denoting the whole, and the latter from its
denoting this whole in a state of dwisioh (partio or partior, to divide, from
fX9,part).

% SS9« JIem^rks. 1. The partitive construction may
be employed, —

a.) To express quantity y degree^ condition^ place, time, 6cc.
considered aa a limitation of a general idea, or as a part of an
extended whole. Thus,

Mi»^^ y iw» XMx*»^t obtaining a Kttle sleqa [a SQiaH portion of deep],
iiL 1. 1 1. *£» rtoCrif , . r«v ntMfu it^Mrrn* in such imminent danger [in
sach a degree of], L 7. 5. '0 V $U rtSji* SC^mtf IXnXu^tv, ' to such a pitch
of ins(deiioe,* Dem. 51* 1. Kmi «i ft>h h rourcf ^a^a^Ktvns ^fett, 'in this state
(^ preparation,* Th. ii. 1 7. SwtWim U rt!ur» avayxtif Th. i. 49. *Efr} /jtiya
I;^M^*ir«y ^tntifitvs lb. 118. *^/AC»ki7y irpv rm Xnuvmv x*'t*fy ^ make an m«
eursion somewhere upon their territory, or upon some pirt of, 8^c., Cyr. vi. 1. 42.
*Hy fitUn fifAi^as, it was mid-day, L 8. 8. Tns Sif*i(»s i'^l h, it v>as late in
theday [sXb. late hour of the day], H. Gr. ii. 1. 23. E/f rSi* nui^etf, to this
day, Eur. Ale. 9, Phoen. 425.

/J.) To express the whole as the sum of all the parts. Thus^

•Ef rwf kyaUm Si trifyr* fyi«-r«v *'#^««f, and in the good dwell all the quaB^
Um of wisdom, Eur. Ale 60 J . Oi ^b 'Atntam it «'«yr) Ih k9vfdmt ^#«y Th.
vii. 55, 'Ey «'«yT} XCX0V %U PI Rep. 579 b.

% 360. 2. The whole is sometimes put in the case which
23 •

Digitized

by Google

970 STlfTlX. — GBNTHTB. [BOOK Uf

belongs to the part, the part agreeiog ivith the whole mstea^a
of governing it (^'^ 333. 5, 334. 9) ; as,

*A»»u9fAt9 ufitZt • . Uiauf o^xnvovv U rttTg «ix««if , toe ftear Aat you, aome of
you, quarter in the houses ; for Vjcawv Uitus, x. r. X. v. 5. II. HtXoiraffwrt*
»a) «/ J^vfAfim^ot rit 2uo fii^n . . WtCetXoVf for Tliko^ttfnrSMf xa) rZv ^vfi/tei
X***» *• *"• ^« 1^* U. 47. A/^v/Mft cixia <rir%^os &(» irirt^ef aifui^u Eur
Ph. 1289.

Note. ThiB form of construction chiefly occurs when several parts ara
sucoessively mentioned ; as, Oi»ieu, at ftU ireXXxi lirnrTtixtfavj ix.iytu ^ irc-
(tno'uvf the houeeSf the greater part had been demolished^ and but few renudned^
Th. i. 89. Op yk^ rA(P»v fSfv rei Ka^tyy^rat K^tAfv, rov /uin it^orWas, row )*
arifMifut tx*t I Soph. Ant. 2K In the following example, the second part
has three subdivisions ; Ko) «/ ^ivot, •/ ^iv . . &vrox^(*^'^** * m ^, . . «? f^h • .
iiri^X^vreut «/ ^i . ., i«V« ^* 97 Th. vii. iS.

3. It is often at the option of the writer whetho* he will employ the Gen.
partitive or a simpler form of construction. The two forms are sometimes
combined; as, £7r* tZv ^tig^ ttrt fi^grSt ^t i t»vt» 9'^a^f»t%, 'a god, or
one of mortals,' Soph. El. 199. n«v th B-iUp H !«<>«»» iv-a^yit \ Eur.
Hec 164. Otii , , ^aivoort nAs ImSfttvtt, H ^i«lv w gltfavmf Id. £L

Mess.

§ 301* According to Rule IX., any word referring to a
part, whether sukstantive^ adjective^ adverb^ or verby may take
with it a Gen. denoting the whole. Thus,

A. Substantives.

T^ r(tT99 t*i^»s T9U . . i*wt»»v, the third part of the eavaby^ C^ ii, !•
6* Tft^y xiXr«0-r*l» ng &9ii^, a certain man of the Uf^geteers^ iv. 8. 4. T«r9
*£xXiiy*f» Tli tx"* iirXirmg aviCti r^tuxttrUvg i. 1.2. Xf<«»«yr« ptv^tm*
^ag ^rfmrtmg L 4. 5. ETir' mfh^ riHv fnri^tf Ar. £q. 425.

Rbmarkb. «. When place isdesignsted foymentioning both tiie eoimiry and
file tamm, tha fomNr, as tiie whide, may be put in the Grcn., and may precede
the latter; as, 0/ ^ *A/nv«?M • • i^fti^ttfr* rtig Xi/»^«vifr0f/ iv *EA4Mivri, ant^
the Athenians touched tqton the Cherroneae at Eleus [at Eleiis, a town c^ the
Cherronese], H. Gr. ii 1. 20. Qi XliXtfronfffMi <ntr *Xvr»mng ig 'EAjmtiVm
»«} 0f/*r^i itfC«X«fr«f, <A« Pafoptwwgwant innmdatg AtHom ae far as Ekusia
and ThriOf Th. L 114. *0 ^ rr^«r»f rSf HtXt^f^m^iut w^7it9 kpi»sr»
rng *A'rTt»nt U Oi^nrt w^Srof^ 'came vpon Attica first at CEnoe,' Ji, ii. 18.

{i» The Gen., in all cases in which it is strictly partitive, may be regarded
as properly depending upon a substantive denoting the part ; and therefore
the use of this G«n. in connection with adjectives, verbs, and adverbs may
be referred to eUipeis. Thus, TSv &x.Xmv 'ExXifvwv rms [sc. A^^tg"]. *E^i»v.
ftMtvi rt [sc. fti^9g2 rng (pak»yy«g (§ 362. /3). E/Vi J* avrSf [sc ^rtrmfAst
r4¥tg^t otg oLV £9 ^avraT&ft haCecinn, TLgXi/MV^ zm f*Mxm oh fAtt^f [sc
i*^«f] tLvr^ ( § S64). Ynt y* mIm/imv, Le.lv •iHivi fti^i rm yng (§ S6S).

y. If the substantive denoting the part is expressed, and that denoting tht
whole is a form of the same word, the latter is commonly omitted ; as, T^ut
&»^^tg tSv ytfairifMf [sc. avl^eHv], three men of the more aged, v. 7. 1 7. Ave
rSv r^ifCvraTttf t^T^urnyi, iii. 2. 37. E«Vi^«»»t« r^ i^x^^'^'t*^* ^t*K^ ^^
•Sfmftiu»£9 Symp. 7. 2.

Digitized

by Google

im. l.| *PAETITIVB. tTl

^ 863« B. AiMBonvn.

NoTB. The ad*ebt3veB which are most frequently nsed to denote a part
are termed partUives.

«. Thb Abtiglb. T«vf ^ mirSv Jiwixruft, r§hs )' l^C«X(9^ tbif
MOW of Ihem, and iamiahtd odurs, L 1. 7. -

fi, AixiEcnyB Pronouns. TSt &xx»tf *Exxiiy*ry rtvit, tome of ^
other Greeks, L 7. 8. 'Otrrtt . . tSv ira^ Ba^iXitts L 1. 5. 07 S^n^w
Ikn^n^ttv rSv ifXiftiw i. 7. 13. Tatv ^ fiet^Cei^MV . . iXX«4f i. 2. 18,
T94f T»t9vr»tt r«» «^r*'» Mem. iL 8. 3. £1 ^i « »«} iEax* biy 2a.««
4 s«X«/u«v i. 5. 1. '^txvfMtivi rt rnf ^aX«yy«f L 8. 18. *£y rf
ipfit^efif iit^M^tif I Soph. Ant. 1229. See.^ 359. «.

^. Numerals. ETf rX^v er^mmySv, one of ihe generals, vii. 2. S9.
Ttfvf r^iTf' . . rSv immrvXufv Ar. Vesp. 95. EiV Iv f^oifttf Eur. Andr.
1172. 'Or^rtfi /tlv rA>y «^^) fiag-tXia &9rif9ti0-»9f u 8. 27. n«XXi^ m
iirtJ^uyiMf i. 5. 5. *Ox/7«4 ^h nh^i* iiL 1. S.

). Superlatives, and words derived from them (by virtue of the indoded
adjective, cf. § 351). *Ey vi>7t &,^i^r9$t llt^vtiv, among the best of ih$
FersietnSy L 6. 1. Tw wtrrpTmrpv rSv Kv^av r«i(«'r«v;^*>y lb. 11«
'E**} «'X(7r«'«y Iff^tiirt^vTh^L I. Tnt yns h it^Umlh.'i. T«;y»«#*
Xmvrtut «y^(«(r*>y Jt(t f^T$v€*9rtt [^ et^i^TMytvifttvai], being tkebest of tke^
men of their age, Mem. iii. 5. 10. Aat^*, «S xaXXimui r«i ta^v yvy If
M^tiv-Mtf Eur.Med. 947. O^ l^ari^mt w^»tr*u6V€ti> Ages. L 3.

c. Partichflbs. 2^ rtTi; vm^tv^i rSv iri^rSf, with those present of
his faithful attendants, L 5. 15. K^ii r«y «fXX*>y «-«y j3«»X«/M(y«f , cmtf
qf the rest any one that withed^ i. 3. 9. *H»ci ^c r/f ^ r^ly ^^•Z&r4t» X«X»«

^. Other Adjectives. *E;^*>y r*ry iirirfg^vXaxttv rouf iifAl^tttf
having half of tXe rear guard, iv. 2. 9. ^H ri^Xaiy« ira^Pivw, O (Br
fated of virgins, Eur. Herad. 567. ■ Tfvf Jly«^0v« rSv itft^iw*tf, the
good among mm, Ar. Plut. 495. AfiX«/« )i«X«/«y »v^ii>, wretchsd </
<Ae wretdied art Ikon! Soph. EL 849. T« X«ir«y Tnf-if^l^«# iiL 4^ (i.
'En/««y r«f ^«« r«y «r«XXny Th- ii 56. ^Xl f/X« T^vjrai**)* Eur. Ale.
460. ATc niXc^7«>y .£8ch.SuppL 967. *Ay«iW ^y«X« XiiVtif l;^#^«^f
.l:^^e«y Eur. Andr. 521. T«>y tExXivy ^niumt rm irt^trr mm» 2. 28.

§ 363. G. Adverbs.

•. Of Place and Tdib (§ 359. «). O^^' iwtv yvt Wftiv «})«, / hmost
mot where on eartii [upon what part of the earth] we are, Ar. Av. 9. I^ ys
«tf)«^«tf PL Rep. 592 b. Ilmvrmx'v rnt ynt PL Phaedo, 111 a. !!»«
«-«r * i7 ^(tf^y { Soph. El. S90. T if X « v y«^ «i»i? m ay^t, * in a reniAte part
of the countiy/ i. e. 'fiir from town,* Ar. Nub. 138. *EfT»uf» r«v «^«v««
nui€T^t^i^$at Mem. iv. 3. 8. *Eyr«fiV« »|[^n t7 «-«( hXtxUtt, you are now at that
point cf life, PL Rep. 328 c. Ait;^« r«v Xiyu PL Conv. 217 e. Ohn i^ft
If* ti »»»§vi Soph. Aj. 386. or ••{•iXwXw^iy ag'tXyt/at &ffi(t9'of Dem. 42.
24. n «r Tif ^fifvi^H tXty I Soph. (Ed. G. 170. 'E^vXcrr** iiXX«f 2XXa.
ftf r»y *Oni$v H. Gr. vii. 1. 15. Wi m-^irst }>i rw it»Tafit»v «r^«Ca/yiiy, but
mot to advance far mto the river, iv. S. 28. 'Endhviet fiizi* ^'f)'* *^ ^f*^
Mf H. 6r. vii. 2. 1 9. *0 «■ If y /» « . . riif S(»$'y at whatever point of time, iii. 5. 1 8.
Iltfy/x' Urlf «f^« T« V^«f t At. Av.'l498. n^«r«/r«T« . . rni iXi
•Uf. at tlu earliest age^ PL Prot. S26 e.

Digitized

by Google

^i^ SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [bOCK lit'

^ Of State or Condition (5 359. m ; etpecially with the verbs l^** *°o
|»af). Tiff rix^f y'^t '^^* ^X*** for I am thus in [have myself in this Btat#
of] fortune^ Eur. Hel. 857. ' Af afAvn^aty its **x* ^ *>■*»( ^^'s «•» rh . . «••
Xi», *in what a state of inendship he was,* t. e. *what friendship he bore,
H.Gr. iL 1. 14. AMw^Avn^, it r«;^avf t»ec0^»s tT^iv, having pursued^ at
each tme had himself in respect to speedy i. e. eoery man according to his speed,
lb. iv. 5. 15. 'Hi i^yiis J;c«» Soph. CEd. T. 345. USg &y£ipot n»«^ii*
how do we come on in the strife? Eur. El. 751. Ourt r^i^av . . tx**s Cyr.
TiL 5. 56. ri»#i/r p.h Hxus JJ« rwVJi, thus are you related to theses Eur
Herad. 213. "Extf rat tv (p^ttHf, of good judgment, Eur. Hipp. 462. 'At-
2^^t ^>.X9»&n ii ^M/jtarts %\it9 PI. Bep. 404 d. "Orut , , vyatifSs^ rtt ix9
mttrit uvrtS lb. 57 1 d.

y. Of &e SuPBRLATiVB Dboreb. 'A^ii^i^r«r« (r»M'«y, mott vnsparingfy
of ali, L 9, IS, TlftrtfAfiitiftu /u^A^rrm rUf *EXXw^9 i. 6. 5. 0/ fi,lf iyy»»
nrmrm rSv wXifniotf ii. 2. 1 7.

^ 364. D. Verbs.

The Grenitive partitive, in coDnection with a verb, may per-
form the office either of a subject^ an appositive^ or a comple'
ment ; taking the place of any case which the verb would re
quire, if referring to the whole. See § 361. /?.

•• The Genitiye Partitive as a Subject

(1.) Of a Finitt Verb, EjV) i* ttbrSfy edt wV &t vrxtrA^atrt ^/«C«iirrt,
smd ihere art some of them^ which you could not pass at all, u. 5, 1 8. *H» Si
Tsirm9 rm ^rmfftSf, attt iravu /ut»^»ut ilXaouv^ i, 5, 7, TUv Tli "Sttfuit^f
• • l^tniifufst • . hiCti^Mf Th. i. 115. n«xi/t»«tf, »») ftrnx^t *y ^<rn»
«v«f, of war and batde^ there fell to her no share^ Cyr. viL 2. 28. Oii* At
ifuf W9 ^^»fn»u §urt 9'ktir/t99$if «'*> •3rt /uiffit Cyr. iv. 2. 20.

(3.) Cf an Infimtioe. Ka) Wt/uytSvau v^S* rt ir^it i»*lf»»t, »mi l»*t
fmt iTfit m^rtvt^ that there even mingled some of themselves with those, and soms
•f Aom wiA them, id, 5, 16. Ov» aftrt w^arnxm tvitti k^x^** ^ thought
thai mo autiwrity bdonged to any one, Cyr. vui. 1. 37. A§»ii linmrnr tltuu
^ri^i rSf m^x*** f^^ruuu Bep. Ath. 1. 2.

§ S0«S« /S. The Genitive Partitive as an Appositive.

The Geo. partitive in the place of an appositive is most common with sub*
ttenlMW Mrftt, but is likewise found with other verbs, particularly those of
vedtoning, esteeming, and making. Thus, Ov» lym rairtf tl/Aiy I nm not one
of Asm, Cyr. yiii. 3. 45. T^> ^iXr^Tott iffty* i^tiftnru rl«»An>, thou shaA
he numbered as one of my dearest .children^ Eur. Bacch. 1318. *Er6yx*9i yu^
nmi fisuknt iSv Th. iii. 70. Ka) l/d r«/vvv .. S^t rSv irtrn'ti^fitfttv Tl.
B^ 494 0* T«Vf itvktvf , . vJv ittfi la»T99 "it^yfifMif irsiwu^^ut lb.
567 6. TSv p%»yi9TU9 «««^«^«r^aM Isocr. 380 d.

§ SO0« y. The Genitive Pftrtitive as a Complement.

The Grenitive partitive is used as a complement,

L) Generally^ with any verb, when its action affects not the
whole object, but a /?ar^ only ; as.

Digitized

by Google

3H. l.J PARTITIVE. 273

AMCiprmt Tw fim^Cm^ixav 0T^mr»u, taking a part of Me barharian amof,
L 5. 7. T«f» »if^/«r . . tifmytt €ite of the haneyeombn^ ir. 8. 20. *Xptie }li
rSf mt^f^mXairmf, and §eiuUng tome of £Ae captive*^ vii. 4. 5. 2vyx«Xi.
r«vTtf X«;^il)^«Vf imk) «'tXr«r<ri^ »«2 rXly i^XTrSit iv. 1. 26. Hu^i99<p9t
wi/AVu rHv l» rnt »mf».nt 0»%'^tAu»vt iv. 5. 22. K«} rns Tt yns Irtftct Th«
fi. 56. 'MmrrtMnt tx»» ri^^wns Soph. GBd T. 709. Bu9tXi'y4*T0 tSv xtietw
Ar. Ach. 184. Ti»r »^tSt imXivrw Ax. £q. 4t^0. n«^«4«f rnf 0i/^«f«
jtȣ opemng the door, Ar. Fax, 30.

^867. II.) Particularly^ with verbs which, in their or
dinary use, imply divided or partial action.

Note. The Gen. partitive may be connected with other parts of speech
njion the same princi|je. Hence tiie rule is expressed in a general form.

Rule X. Words of sharing and touch gov-
ern the Genitive.

1. Words of SHARING include those of partaking (part-
taking), imparting^ obtaining by distribution^ &c. Thus,

Titff »ir)Mr«n> /ttri^*"* ^ thare in the dangen^ ii. 4. 9. Tiir^t »»tf»»rm
ru^ns, I partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. SOS. T«y lu^^t^tnSt ^ir«)<.
)«>rir, imparUng our jogt, (Ec 9. 12. "Ktt^atfvt kftdwrttv, vii. 2. 38.
"AvS^if M Jiit9m^dfi$9»i r«»^i T§u mvivfBv Th. iv. 10. SvXXnyp»f^ut tt
r»m ei nkyit «*«*•» Eur. Med. 946. Mtitvixrir rSt ty^fte^wSt i TU^mmet,
' has less 0^' Hier. 1.29. Ttv i^xUu «'Xi«»iiKr«Zf*r«, 'bearing more oC
C}T. L 6. 25. nSf-iv k^iitms l^rn^mt rSv Ui/r«v Mem. i. 2. 60. Tav
Xiy^if W(§e^§it Em^> Suppl. S50. Sv/t^^XXirMi . » rtuh hi/iaT0f Ear.
Med. 284. *Ay*0n tt r»XXfi«'«'^/« tUv U ti^nvif <r«v«r, /kCam tt rSt if we*
Xifceit ^ufAfA»x*f '^iy*'** k^i^^n tt (ptXiuf xottmtof Mem. ii. 1.32.

§ 388. 2. Touch may be regarded as a species of par-
tial action, affecting only the point of contact. To this head
belong, either by direct connection or by obvious analogy,
verbs of laying hold of^ hitting^ meeting vnth,^ &c. Thus,

"Awrtefm rnt Hm^pn$t to touch Ae hajff L 5. 10. 'EeriXuftCdftTut uvt»u
rm Jrtftf, l*tjf$ hold of hie sAteU-run, iv. 7. 12. ^t^muXa rvyx'^^n, kite
PheratdoM, Cyr. viiL S. 28. 'E(i»ri7r^«i r£f .e^tvhttirSf, to reach the
eiingerSf iiL S. 7. *Ay^*»r kymim w»ti»t pwmfrnrctg, having met with the
eon of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. "Orar tt ravrm nvis Biyi/t Cyr. i. S. 5.
T«v( Tt init rfmytntit wtneutf kerr»/»U§ut VL Rep. 602 b. A«r;^i^)f ^uvuf
t%0§uvTt kfifif Eur. Or. 793. Avrtt tt X«C«^t»«r riis ttliSf rtv KvetJ^ti^wt
Cyr. V. 5. 7. *AfT»Xn'^»9r»t tSp w^myfUrvf Cyr. ii. S. 6. *E|j/«i^«
uivu, we ehatt keep hold o/T Am, vii. 6. 41. K«iv^ Tnt ^MTfi^Ut tx'^^'^f ^
wtrirn in eouunon for our eafetg, vL 3. 17. 'E;^«^i*« tt vvrmt, and fdUowvng
theee, L 8. 9. Ttit iXwi^t yk^ Ux^/uu 'itl^mynkiwi Soph. Ant. 235. Ai-
ytTut rnt TtXiurnf rv;^!?*, *to have come to his end,' ii. 6. 29. *Ow§Mf
mSw iifim tr9%»f, what kindof men theg found m, v. 5. 15.

^ 369« Remarks. «. Hence, the part taken hold of is
put in the Gren., in connection with other forms of construe*
tinn ; as,

Digitized

by Google

^4 SYNTAX. ^ GENITIVE. [bOOK III.

''Ex«C«» riit iti*nt TM 'O^fmtt they took Oromiet bg the ginBe, i. 6. la TA
irmtim^t* thivf «viX»M . • riif X**(*f Ar. Yesp. 568. Tkt ik mixufm^tm
iytf^ms . . «'X«»«/»«r .^sdi. llieb. 326. Niv • . i^««tiv X^t** ^^' H«fa
968. T«y ftXt m^tftm^rn* mbx'^*»* ^P^ '^^ \^2U

/3. To the analogy of yerbs of toach maj be referred expresrfons like tiM
following : 'tns Mi^mXnt xmridyt^ he broke [was fractured in] his head, Ar.
Ach. 1180. Smrir^/Cn rns M%p»Xns Ar. PftX, 71. 'ILrmtra rif K^«Tr*«9
rt/vr^r-t^M riff »tf«Xiif «vrifr, (A^ charged CraHnm with having brokem her head*
Isocr. 381 a. E!ra »ardlui rtt mitT$v fAttumt riif »tf«AiM Ar. Acfa. 1166
Cf. § 437.

^370* 3. Several words of obtaining^ attaining^ and
receiving, govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily
either to distribution or to touch. Thus,

*1mb eUs 9-(»en»»v^f fifi^ms Xay^^dfp, that it mag receive Ut proper portkm^
PL Leg. 90S e. KXif^«v«^i7v $vlMtf to inherit mSdng, Don. 1065. S5«
T*»» '^$nnlm rvy^'^***** ^ obtain gour righttf vii. I. 30. 'EIIEIAH
eNHTOr BIEN SHMATOl ETTXES, •AeANATOT AE YTXH2,
IIEIPXl TH2 YTXH2 •AeANATON THN MNHMHN KATAAinEIN
Isocr. 22 b. Ki»ii/^if, sSrt r§v rd^tv ittrta^mt, avrt yimt «r«^* i^^r Sof^
£L 868. 07«f kfMiSnt 1^ *I«r«v«# xv^tTEur. Med. 23.

NoTB. TbB student can hardly foil to have remaiked the great nuriety of
■etaphorioal and tnmaitiYe meaningn in which words of sharing and of
touch are employed, not only in Greek, but likewiae in our own and in other
languages.

^371. II. That which exerts an influence as

an EXCIIEMENT, OCCASION, OF CONDITION. To

this division belong the following rules, respecting,
1. the motive, reason, and end in view; 2. jprice,
value, merit, and crim^ ; 3. the sensible and m^en^
tal object ; and 4. time and place.

1. Genitive of Motive, Sfc.

§ 373. Rule XI. The motive, reason, and
END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive.

To this rule may be ref<5rred the use of the Gen., both in
regular construction and in exclamalion, to express the person
or thine, on account of which, in consequence of which, /or the
sake of which, in honor of which, or to ajfed which, any thing
fa feh, said, or done. Thus,

a. Wfth Vbrbs. T§ut$u et . . ^hXm, on thie account I envg gou, Qyr.
viii. 4. 23. "iit^ftv v9rfiftT»v9Tt(f eerving for hire, lb. vi. 2. 37. tin^U
mirSf »Tat%Ut pf*gi»g nothing for them, lb. iiL 1. 37. T»v ^ ir4^«»f
^mrtifiv mitrif lb. T. 4. 32. -ZnXti 0t tm * •» , rns Tli %*tXimt ereyS Soph.
KL 1027. "H fiX»y yj»mt . . H ;c««r«« Id. (Ed. T. 234. T«vrei 2»Mi-

Digitized by VjOOQIC

€■. 1.] OP MOTIVE, EBASON, AND END IN VIEW. 871^

fmi r$f I heteeeh yom far har take, Eur. Or. 67 1 . *I«trf v« n rSt^i yvtmrttt
»ai ^»v yttiitv )f|ia# r' %vimifA»*9t, 'by these knees/ &0., Eur. Hec 753
2«^«v mymi»» lmifM9»St * in honor of/ Ar. Eq. 106. T« v ltih»» ftfif n«#<f •
l^or loAof do I [owe] PasioM twelve mimat Ar. Nob. 23. IX^ATiflrtfTflM rUf ftm
•mvrtMt 4)«y9f »«j x^t^*^** ^^ ^^^ «r«xt*>f «'(iiy^«T«, 'for the fiake of
present pleasure and favor/ Dem. :^4. 23. KMrmff»^0i^ r§S . . ^j^ kwtr%
XiTv mvrtTst * 80 that it may not profit,' Qyr. i. 3. 9.

/S. With AiXTBCTiyBS. Fjihtifut* . . r*v r^iwv PI. PhsBdo, 58 «. ^C\
umtui^n riir Ti;^»if # , Bfetaqfi m <% ^mcfe / Ar. Av. 1423. ^H riAjiif* l)^
wUif Soph. EL J 209. ^H )vrr«X«/y» v^if </»«ff mvim^ims Eur. Mid. 1026.

7. With Adverbs. Tetvmt Inxm rn$ rn'm^ilav, on account of this pass,
i. 4. 5. T«tf ^n iftuyttt innm, lest they should escape, ill. 4. 35. Ill^n
^' Ut/m r«i!^t r*? ^iC»v x^i" Soph. B3. 427. Hiv^tnSf ti tx'vraf r«»
A)iX^«i; r$ifn»ir0t^Cyr, v. 2. 7. X«X««'«ff ^i^M mhrSv Th. iL 62.

t. With Novks. *E^«} «'i»;ibf i!^ut »hr»u «^«rC«>^y, 'pangs on hS#
account,' Soph. Tr. 41. n«XXi^; yt^tUv r«v^* iv 2»nrv«i Xiri(#, 'hythii
beaid/ Eur. Or. 290. 07«f, r« T^t/atf ^r«r ilv«^^*ry «'«r^i lb. 432.

t. With Imtbbjisotioks. ^tv rmi itf'i^ht Alas far Ihe nMs mamt Oyt.
iiL 1. 39. AiW »m»Sf Eur. Here 899. 07/mi ^i^M^rtr »«) rixf^f,
slfiut V l/»«v lb. 1374. *0A n.tf^t»$v 0T^ar%6fAUT»t rtiii^t iEsch. Pttl
116. 'LitrTMrMi^ riwf umxSf Ar. Eq. 1.

C* Is StifPUB Exclamation. T«f rix^t, My iO-btck I Cyr. If. 2. 8. T9$
ftt0^i»t. What folly I Ar, 'Svih, 9\S. *il Ztu fia^tX%v, ^f Xirrtmrtt
«wf f^iMwy lb. 15"). "AfircXX** iLWr^Htun, rw ;^«r^ii/»«r«f Ar. At. 61.

^ 373. Remabks. 1. The Genitive of the end in tiew
is put with some words of direction^ claims and dispute.
Words of direction include those of aiming at^ throwing at^
going towards^ and reaching after. Thus,

'Av^^«'*ry rr«;^ii^ir/«4, to take aim at men, Cjr. i. 6. 29. Avr«v XH
ftmimt . . tffi9'T09'j they threw stones at him, Eur. BaMl^ 1096. Eltfv IIiX.
Xiivff; ff'irtr^flM, fl> ^y straight to Pellene, Ar. Av. 1421. T/r ya^ mvrf Irrtv
I^Tif Ttig it0xni iifr$wtUT4tt\ For who is there ^lat disputes wUh him At
mvereignty [mains for the sovereignty m opposition to him] ? ii. 1. 1 1. "fUvt
relireit #»««'0tf, V0ltvtr* Jif%0O( raiHt So(^ Ant 1033. 'Xljf, fl^i0
«rir^«v r«;^a f-fv Eur. Cyd. 51. *Iiv«i r«t; w ^ i r t , to go towards that which
is farther on, i. t. to go farther, to proceed, 1. 3. 1. Anyu i* t(tt ^^nffvfm
T$v 9-(OftraT0t Soph. Aj. 731. Otfru £»Ti«r«i«tf rr« i^irntp these
were rivals in valor, iv. 7. 12. B«riXi»ii« ffuru^ttavfitifut rix*if*
laying claim to the kingly art, PL PoL 289 e. T»v ll ^^^yiTt •? . . Af$^f
wCnrH Isocr. 96 c.

2. The student cannot fiill to remark the ease with which verbs of motion
pass into those of simple effort and desire. Thus, Itfttu, and, more commonly,
i^Uftmsy to send one*s self to, to rush to, to strive for, to seek, to desire ; i^iys'
fLMt, to reach after, to strive for, to seek, to court, to desire ; as, 'JifitfM Xi;^Uw
Soph. Tr. 5 1 4. T»7t "Hint ipifiiftt Cyr. iii. 3. 1 0. •Oei5«'#«' w ^X*«# ni
r«v Mem. L 2. 15. 2m»^aT$v( et^%x^nrn* lb. 16. Tiftins iiiyi^im Hier. 7.S«

Digitized

by Google

276 SYNTAX. — GBNltlYE OF PRICE, &C. [bC >K If* '

2. Genitive of Price^ 8fC.

^374. Rule XII. Price, value, merh,
ana crime are put in the Genitive.

m» Price. *l«r«r«r, h . . u.^ii»T» «'i»rn»«vr« )«^ti»*»», the horsCf which h»
had told for fifi^ doaricty vii. 8. 6. *^n'i0$m.t . . iu*(k /itirfm wtXXsu «^yv-
|/»v uL 2. *^1. n«XX«v TMf <XXMi i«'«X«i>v Mem. L 2. 60. T«v ^* i^v
wmt^tff puyetf ^vx^t ^ ^X«(«MM^*y •» Xt*'^*^ ftivtv Eur. Med. 967
A«(« )l ;^^il^ar«f •»» mnrn Isocr. 21 b. *Af*fiX»;^»f . . ««'fXvr{i»#'i r«-
A.«f cA'v lr»f« Dem. 159. 13.

jS. Yalub and Merit. n«xx«v £!^§t «f fr^mritf, worth mtteh to the armif^
ir. 1. 28. "Ajfi^tt S^M Tiit iXtv^t^ /«# L 7. 3. T«fv »«XX/«'«'«v Uvr^
A^uvTMyrM Hi. 2. 7. T« fiftiftm 9'$yX*) ;^«^r«vr<» a^/tvf t;^*>v Cyr. vii. S. II.
Ilmim . . Avc^«v ^v rtv, »«r»^» )* iffu Soph. Ph? 1008. 'Em^tm ^ifTf
rir 7<r«f itl^imt PI* PoL 257 b. Mt/^«v«f avtik n/tSfrtu m XmfiCmvtfrtt
Oyr, iL I. 13. £j «?r iir^i lutrM «■• ii»au»9 rng »^i»g nfMtaitUf r»vr4»
rtftSfuu rns iv Tl^vTanif rtr^ftmt PL ApoL 36 e. Ti^iwf yi rm,f ^9 W^-
Mf r«l^tf r£it Soph. Aj. 534. Il^tffvrwf rSv w^tJ^frm PL Mtfiex. 239 0
(for tbe common coii8tracti<m of «'ei«'«s see § 403).

y, Crimb. *A#iCii«f ^iv^ttrM, acoMttf of impiety^ PL i^L 35 d. Ai
«4(^«tfri ^ imk) I^»Xif^«r«r, • . hxmft^rimt Qyr. 1. 2. 7. AuSl^fuu n
)t<x;«f Ar. £q. 368. Km^w/mu TlMfiraij^tf SC^tug Ar. Av. 1046. T^
«'«r^ fifsv (w^i^;^4/iat PI. Euthjph. 4d. *E«'«uri«ri(^Mf fit fifv Dem.
55;^. 1. Ovhif h»x»t ^'** Xt4«r«r«(/«ar «v^ %itX'ims Lys. 140. 1, Ti<
mirmt »yfpi»f uwiu05ft H r»tt ifXXMf Dem. 293. 28.

KoTB. The Gen. is sometimes used to express the /yimuAment ; as, 0«vi(-
r« V ^ ^Stm t^ivtvrt, and these pronounce mntence of dMth, Cyr. i. 2. 1 4 . 2»X-
X»/ttCm949Tti vviiytv B-avartv H. 6r. ii. 3. 12. 'Ar^^«'*»v xetrn^n^pif^fivrt/w
^nfdrsv ^ ^vyns PI. Rep. 558 a. "flrr* h»x** ^*^f^ov ytyita^t Deau
1229. 11. — In this construction (which is rare except with Sa»«r«v), the
ptmithment appears to be regarded either as the deeert of the crime, or as the
md w view (§ 372) in judicial procedings.

3. Gtnitive of Sensible and Mental Object.

^97S» The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may
be regarded as its exciting cause^ and, in this view, may be put
in the Genitive. Hence,

Rule XIII. Words of sensation, and of men-
tal STATE or ACTION govem the Genitive ; as,

m. Or SeKSATIOX. 2iV«v iyturavr; tasted of food^ Wi, 1.3. 7<vrc
rif# ^^»t, * have a smack o^* i. e. ' try/ or * knock at,' Ar. Ran. 462. Tm
wm'iat . . ^ivrritfy ettptmrast 'give a taste of/ PL Rep. 537 a. 0?mv . .
i0p^mi9$^4aiy to catch the scent of taine, v. 8. 3. 0»^uC»v lixav^i %ik c-*»»
r«4**^ ***^»ft 'heard,' L 8. 16. T$u ^ vrnwTMV iliUrau it*»vvft,a,TaSy i^aiM*
rtmvTtif^ §tvn»»os i7 Mem. ii 1. 31. Ou» A«(««i^i»«i ti rod ifiovras Cyr. L
S. 10. KXi;«» ^aXactyyt Soph. AJ. 290. Oii^us H wu^ari 2* «^r«iv
ettw ^%fX% suit itvtria}! ouTi Tpirra^rat i7)f», evrt Xiyatrat K»a»0t Mem.
tl.ll.

Digitized

by Google

CB. l.j OP SENSIBLS AND MEI9TAL OBJECT. 977

/3. Of Pbrcbptton, Enowudkki^ BBFLBcnodr, Expertencb, and Habit
Ttif . • WtC»vXnt «v» ifw^tiftr*, he did not perceive the plot^ i. 1. 8. *OrM
AXXifXwy IvfUfmf Th. i. 3. 'Effff/ttv ^ r£v tiiir^tt Mem. iU. 6. 17
*£«ri«'ri}|W«v fTvM r*rv £^} ri^fij iL I. 7. &iXit 2* A'/i^tf ficmXXcf 4
r§^»i x»»£t tJvtu .^sch. Sap. 453. ^l^ttirnt • • ravrav r»v *(y«Ut *vni
•killed in,' CEc 3. 9. Tiit «^irSf . . •I'iifm 2t7 <^i«rf vny PI. Prot. 3i6 e.
Ki^4U . . Iv «'(<^f yivM^ to have teen well acquainted with Cj^rus {in the
knowledge of Cyrus by proof], i. 9. 1. Hgt^tifAtfai rttims rtis ra^ietf,
' making trial of/ iii. 2. 38. TSv rtt;^Sf hftMf trK^^y, 'attempt/ Th. vii.
19. 'EtfAWtt^tt yk^ jfrar e^s Ti.m^X.myetmf V. 6. 1. "A «r 11^44 hrti »uvm
iii. 2. 16. T*ry l/»«'ii^4tff aurw i;^«y«'M» ii. 6. 1. Sifts t^t rins if4£i%
Xiltatt PL ApoL 17 d. Ov r^iCtf if i^9t»iig Ax.Yesp. 14-29. *H.4a( tl/ti
^mt rZw r^git fikv4m Soph. £L 372. *Aff^tif r«S »tt/rm»evM Dem. 15. 27.

§ 37o« 7. Of Memory. Tauretv pMg fiiftttirmt, these Mngs no
one remembers, v. 8. 25.. Ovhvii irt rUrm Ift i/Avntp, 'made mention of/
vii. 5. 8. Tiif »^x*if fiiffif*»9%»PfA%9 Isocr. 12 c. Tpvtsv ^ mbvwt vv*
fHftfi^xtTi Cyr. iiL 3. 37. Mii ^* ^y«^yiir;if xaxSw Eur. Ale 1045.
Bi«if % Ttft; vetfivrat »u fipismf tx**t I Soph. £3. 392. TJy irA^6$it fiif Xiymv
Xm^MfAti* mft^et, 'forget,' Eur. EQpp. 288. "Tw^tt r«, Xn^tif rm >ca0'
li/tifmf »m»i9 Eur. Bacch. 282.

%. Of Gakb. K«)ir^«4 2tv^«v, to care for Seuthes, vu. 5. 5. T«vr«»
rM ^t? /»iXt«f , o^ Mif <ft«re mnaf fe to you a care, i. e. you must take care of
this, Cyr. L 6. 16. T«v «r«^' UtM-^ ^) ^^a^m kwifitiXi7T§ i. 1.5.
*A^iXi7y if/tMrv abrSf, 'to be careless of/ 'to ne^ect,' i. 3. 1 1. 'E^tfttxht
kymHtj eifitiXi^t ««»*lv PL Conv. 197 d. *H rnf vy$%las Ivt/AiXtsm Cyr.
L 6. 16. M«^ fA%ra/a,ixttit #m riir IftSit ^*>^i««» * repent o^' Cyr. viii. 3. 32.
"Eu vftl^ttfu ^iwf M^MVtn Tt ^(«vr/^iir, avx Av Ji/AtXsinf «vr«r» Mem.
i. 4. 11. ^uXmgg6'fti9»vf tSv rutfv Th. iv. 11. "O^mt mitrSv i9»»S$
tli»urt9 Id. viii. 102.

f. Of Desire. 'EfSvnf r^uvav, desiring this, iiL 1. 29. Efrtg ^^ Xi"'
ftarm \irt40fitt7, 'desires* [sets his mind upon; cf. § 373. 23, iii. 2. 39.
rx«;^«^ftrtf f rw ^f, eager for life, or clinging to life (J^ 370. N.), PI. Phaedo,
117 a. Titttn^ui x^f^^*"'f having hungered for wealth, Cyr. viii. 3. 39,
TloXts iXitf^t^mt ii^pnet^* PL Rep. 562 c. KirrSfr$t rns it^vns Ar.
Pax, 497.

•

^. Of Yariods Emotion. "Aymfitai Xtifcecrag, I (ubnire the spirit, "Enr.
Rhes. 244. Ov; ov» Af ^»«r;^ir^«f rnvrau /SariXiMrr^f, who would not en-
dure him as their king, ii. 2. 1. *ftf iyti ^t $1 ^icvnrtt, which I shall not
grudge to you, Cyr. viii. 4. 16. AlexV^ ^riyns y* f^«v«r«i, it is mean to
gruilge him our roof, i. e. to refuse ham admission, Symp. 1. 12. Mn^i ft.t
^hfif^s %vy/uiri»f, 'deny/ or 'reject,' .£sch. Pr. 583. 'Axx* sh fAsymt^t*
rwii et 'ttt^nftMTt lb. 626.

^377* Remarks. 1 . The idea of hearing passes, by an easy tran-
sition, into that of obedienee (obedio, to give ear to, to listen to, to obey, from ob
and audio, to hear). Hence, words of obedience govern the Gren. (cf. § 405. n) ;
as, Ttirevf . . ^tkfiXims eln ii»9VM, that these did not obey [or were not subject
to] Me ibtn^, iii. 5. 16. 01 7MLn^»Zx»* »Srt xaXwrvv turnKavat, * regarded
thdr invitations [listened to them calling]/ iv. 1 . 9. *T«rif»«M rei* M«#rv»04-
jMfv, subject to the MossynascL Ktcrnno^i n ^ettt rSv fi/Mtt PL Crili. 1 20 e.
'AvuffM^mr* ti rHv trmrfif Xiyff dliv n *St ; .£sch. Prom. 40. 2f«?» ni-
0twfat Th. viL 73. Ilitff xi^ »*X»vitr»$ itviJuf Cyr. iv. 5. 1 9.

;i4

Digitized

by Google

998 8TNT1X. — GBMITIVB OF Tlltt AKO PL4CE. [bOOK HI

8. Yfirbs of tijiht oommoBly fOv«ni the Aoo. { ud many y«rbs vbleh are
followed by the Gen. aooording to this rule flometimee or often take the Aca
(eepedaOj of a neuter adjective) ; as, Et^ft$» rwt wa.tfttmt$ vL 5. 10. Ai
€0i»nTm %Km0T» Mem. L 4. 5. See §$ 424. 2. 432. 2.

4. Genitive of Time and Place.

^378* The time and place in which any thing is done
may be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as
tooperating to produce it. Hence,

Rule XIV. The time and place in whicb
are put in the Genitive (cf. §§ 420, 439) ; as,

1. TiMB. '^x*'^* '^f fvxrif, he went in the night, Tfi. 2. 17. Ttivrm
ulf rnt nf*i(nf lyinr*, 'in the day/ vil. 4. 14. Tns ^i/Xnf >t iTxiiv, *in
the evening/ vii. 2. 16. "iUrt nis nf^i^nt Ixnt ^niXf§f . ., k)iXk liiXnt
£^i»«yr« iii. B. II. ESVi fvxrit ^im rtf tfrt »«} ii/ti^mti 'whether by
night or by day/ iii. 1. 40. hm^tXtvt 0v ^;^i7r«M hnm nft$(Sf, 'within
ten days,' i. 7. 18. *Orf «i^r« ^ ^sXXtS ;^f «v«v . . Iv-irv;^*!, 'now for a
long time,' i. 9. 25. '£^««vri# V Ifuiertif i/Ai(»ft 'evetyday/ vL 6. t.
IltkXMMit Tn$ iftifMt, man^ Hmee a de^ Ar. Eq. 25a IImu )t rsSn «iX.
X«Mf r«tf fttifit Cyr. L 2. 9. T^ n^^m^utut r0v /An* is 9 three ha^f-dariee
a month, L 3. 21. Tm? )' mbr^ ^ifvs Th. IL 28, 79, 80. Tw )' Wi^^iyv*.
ftifw x**f^*^*'s Wi»v, IS, 36, 51, 56, 116. '£$ lr*lv iXe^ts Ar, L^
280. Ovn ri; ^y«« «lfr««WM X^'''<' rv;^vM> PL Phiedo^ 57 a. JAirum . .
0V fucMfw p^(i9»¥ Soph. £L 477. 0«i»lri r«t/ X«4«r«v [so. X^ifee] wd^^ifUf
&* jMtxMf I>6m. 44. 12.

^ 3#If« 2. Place. Aut$u [bc ritrtu] f^tivafrif, remaining m tiiat
place, i. 10. 17. T«»)* t<Vf^i^4» rttxif*, 'within the walls,' Eur. Ph. 451.
*E(»(«f . . \'yxt»X»fAi9$vf Soph. AJ. 1274. KcriieX<«r«y . . M«»f}«v/«f
*Ainf»Toi XltfiiiMMtcv Th. v. 83. Tiif )• l4tf»/«r »«} kXXoti ^r$XXnx''^ **^X€^*
9%90fu^rou PI. Conv. 182 b. MijT* \fAinrt6ttt wnr^t'itt Soph. CEd. T. 825.
Tfif h ftn >C«iV 'e*" I^ CEd. C. 400. Hi J/*,, l«-i»/ririr«i lb. 689.
*Er;^«<r>K J' «^ itv^ae ntifi fii^r^ux^t Soph. El. 900. ^'S.^rimf fAWfAipti-
X§v%fTn»i9 Hin fttnXec JEach. Ag, 1056. AMtig i\ X**i^f '' ri^f#Ti«r«»tf
•Uw^t XnXyCis Id. Pr. 714. KTKA. Utri^as rif ;^i^f {* XOP. *£» )i|<f
r«t; Eur. Cyd. 68 1 . •

Remarks. «. This use of the Gen., to denote the place where, occurs very
rarely in prose, except in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives
(§ 320. I ) ; as, 0? [sc riv-av], in which place, where, ahrw, there, if^w, in the
same place, ovhetfAtv, nowhere, &c Cf. ^ 421. /3.

/3. In Epic poetry, this Gen. is sometimes employed to denote the place np/m
or over which any thing moves ; as, "^x^'*'** *tli»f, they advance upon th^
plain, B. 801. "Ennftn vtXiae wi^Ut* ^i«pr«f A. 244. *EX»if»um HtM /3«-
iiins irtinrif m^m-^** K. 353.

y. The ideas of plice and time are combined in expressions like those which
follow, rdating to jonmeying (Fr. joum^ a da^s-march, from Lat. diumus,
from dies, day) ; *E^Tanaiitx» yik^ rTaffUiw tSv lyyvrarm aviU t7xf^* Xoft
C«Mi», ' during the last seventeen day's-marches/ ii. 2. 11. *II^t^swyr«r •
fMnt^ttf KiXiv^aw JBsch. Cho. 710.

Digitized

zed by Google

Ofi. i.) «BKITIVX ACTIVX. 9^

. I. In the phiaae /mSi x^^itt in the fbDowing pssaage, the idea «f <uae is
combined with that of actum ; *E^n fumg mm x**i^ '^ ^Wm ri^i, ' at a ehiffle
stroke,' ' once for all,' £ar. Here. 938.

^880. III. That which produces any thing,
as its ACTIVE or efficient cause ; or, in other
words, that by which, as its author^ agent ^ or giver ^
any thing is nuiLde^ written^ said, done, bestawedy
&c., or jfirom which .any thing is obtained^ heard
learned, inquired, requested, demanded, &c.

To this division, which must obviously refer chiefly to per
tons^ belongs the following rule, which will of course be un-
derstood as applying only to adjuncts.

Cremiioe Actioe.

Rule XV. The author, agent, and oiyer
are put in the Genitive ; as,

«• Witii Vertw of Obtitfnfaig, Heiaring, Learning, Inqoiring, Beqaesting, A«
TWSrw ^i 0»v T¥x«9^ti «id iibtammg tkU of jfou, vL 6. 32. ^Hv 2i r«»
r»xi^^ l^iifituit SkMwn (§ 370) Soph. PhiL 1315. *A»«^wf Kv^«v X\i hrm
» . fiM^tXim i. 8* 13. T«ff »ar«XtXtij(«^i»*»y iitwidfttrs, in tl ft\t
0^f»ir. ,fx**^*t Meamed by inqoiiy fixim,' tL 3. 23. Kmi \wv9iAv§9T» 4
*A^»£i%t tHw ff*!^} Si9»^9rmt ri rk w»^k mmra^i^ttrnff 'inquired O^' lb. 25.
M^f a f)i0v, Z vrttTf »mi r«^f Cyr. i. 6. 44. Auvrat ii rsv »m} r«tlr« vL
6. S3. *Efit^ x^e*^'^ ^' ^' •'«<' ^*i^ (§ 357. N.) Qyr. v. 5. 35. 2»y yit^
• . fi(»x^* ^"* »t^i* f*^»9 Soph. (Ed. G. 1161.

§ 38 1. fi. With Passive Verba and Verbals. Uxtiyih ^uymr^ig
rif i/t,ns, tmittem by my doMghter, Enr. Or. 497. ^ttTig nwrnrnftUn So^
Aj. 807. TZv ^iXtitt vuutfMttVb, 135S. II«/«f fn^ifivnt rtZi* vwfr^m
^tis \iyut \ Soph. (Ed. T. 728. T«? »»»•» wir/ittu (pvni^ut Id. (Ed. C.
1S?3. 'A0i»vot n'yfirn^0s lb. I52i. Fi^^A^r IXO*** lb. 1519. KaxSw
yetf turdXttrt 4yiu$ lb. 1722. OiX«v JixXayras Soph. Ant. $47. Rf /vitl
)/2a»ri Id. El. 343. — TUs nse of tiie Gen. is poetic, and is most fi-eqaent
with the Partieiple.

y. With Substantives. S^fo^Sfras Kv(§v 'XftiCm^tf, Xenophon*8 Ex*
pedittan of Cj/rus, Oi fi>h Wm rut vSf w^trCtt^^atf Ivuifdtf ;(;a/|»«vr<y, «< il
yt^miri^H r«2f rSv »•»» rt/utTf Ay^XXnTOSf the yomng rejoice in the praitee of
their eUerif and the old delight t» Ae honon paid them by the yotrng^ Mem. !!•
1. 33. 'H^Af &Xmrtimft wanderinge comh^ by Juno^ JEach, Pr. 9(X). 'Sirew
I B»iia . . »ifutr» Soph. Tr. 1 13.

.^ 88«. IV. That which constitutes any thing
WHAT IT IS. To this head may be referred what-
ever serves to complete the idea of a thing or prop*

Digitized

by Google

280 STMTAX. — OBNITITB. [BOOK lit

erty, by adding some distinction or characteristic
Hence,

Genitive Constituent.

Rule XVI. An adjunct defining a thinc
OR PROPERTY is put in the Genitive ; as,

T« Mif«»«f ^(£r$¥fu$, the arm^ of MenOj L 2. 21*

<5 S8S. Remarks, o. The xHrno oh property defined
may be either distinctly expressed by its appropriate toord^ or
may be involved in another word ; as, fiaadevg in fiaailivi% oa-
xQanriQ in aaiQamv^a (§ 389). Cf. §§ 351, 362. 5, 391. 6, 394
395. d.

Note. In particular, a4iective8 in which a substaottve is compounded with
ii'pnoative (§ 825), hare often It Gen. defining the substantive. See § 395.

§ 384* /?. A genitive defining a substantive is sometimes
connected with it by an intervening word, which is usually a
substantive verb. See, for examples, §§ 387, 390 ; cf. § 365. —
This fonn of construction may be referred to ellipsis ; thus,
Hv [av^Qunoq] ixoiv wf tgiaxovxa, he was [a man] of aboui
thirty years (§ 387).

§ 9S8. y, A substantive governing the Gen. is often tmdenUfod^
particularly vlUt son, «7»«f, houae, and other words denoting domuiie rdatkm
or abode. Thus, VXwt $ Ta^, Glus, the mm of Tamos, ii. 1.3. ^H Ai«f
[sc ^vy»T%^ "k^TifAtt Eur. Iph. A. 1570. Bv^riviK rns *lwvi»u [sc. yvmt
M§f'] Ar. Eq. 449. 0i/(«^i /»' iliuyxmr is ran liirraXw [sc «r»0v], 'to
Pittalus's [house],' Ar. Adi. 1222. £jV •viifit ^i2«rx«X«v «r««r«ri ^trn^m^Tm
Cyr. ii. 3. 9. Tm It 'A^^nrtfi/ ««»*!» Eur. Ale 76 1 (cf. '£» 'Aifctirtv ^ifuts
68). 'Ev "Ai^tfi; Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. £/» *Ai)«» )«/(Mif 1241). 'E» 'ArxX*
«Mv [sc /f(^] Mem. iiL IS. 3. EiV T^^^mUv [sc irr^tfv] Ar. Nub. 508.

). The Gen. is often used in periphrasis, particularly with xfif^** thing, and,
by the poets, with )i/cM(f, form, body, »d(»i head, ntfut, nnme, and similar
words. Thus, Aifucf *Aya^t^»0r0( = ^Aym/Aifufta Eur. Hec 723. *11 f /x-
rcr^v 7oir«i»«f 'laxda^rnt »«^« Soph. (Ed. T. 950. *il wtitttn h§f^ i/uXime
Ifniif Eur. Or. 1082. See § 395. «.

t. A substantive governing the Gen. is sometimes used by the poets instead
of an adjectioe ; as, X^vov . . iwHt, the gold of words, for 'E*^ Xi*'''^ 9'*^*^
words, Ar. Pint. 268. *0. fMirfis \/Ans riC«f uEsch. Pr. 1091. Iia>in%i»Mtt
fiUf Eur. Ph. 56.

§ 388* An adjunct defining a thing either expresses a
property of that thing, or points out another thing related^ to
It. An adjunct defining a property points out a thing rekUed
to that property. Hence the constituent genitive is either,
1. the Genitive of Property^ or 2. the Genitive of Relation. *

Digitized

by Google

CH. 1.] OP 7R0PBRTT. — OP RELATION. 281

1. Crenitive of Property.

§ 3 8 7* The Genitiye of property expresses quality^ du
mension^ age^ 6cc, Thus,

^» irSf tt$ r^m»§frm, he wot about thirty years old [of about thirty years],
it 6. 20. n«r«^» ffrm ri tZ^at itxi0^av i. 4. 9, a river being [of] a pie-
thrum in hreadA (cf. TlovetfAh ri tZ^t wXiffiaTov i. 5. 4, and see v> 333. 6).
[Ttixt^ iv^«r tJx»0i 9'»^S», S^f tk Immvcf fin»»s V Ixiytra iJvai $7x»-
#*< wm^afuyyiiv u. 4. 12. *0 ^ rSf «rv;^/«« fiioratf but a Kfe of quid
[sjB/S/M-ff iif»X*f9 ^ V*^ ^]* ^^* ^^^'^^ ^^^* 2r0X/)« . . T^i/^i; [ssV^v.
^f^«r] Eur. Ph. 1491. T*^^^^* tx^t T*Xftn$ ^^•rm^at [= *i/t*» t«X/ccii^0»] i
Soph. CEd. T. 533. T« )) euf/t^nu^ai . . ;^(«»«i> «'«XX07 [i«'ri], »«} «'«7;^«.
At«'M PL L^. 708 d. "E^rtv i itiXtfUf tvx I^Xatf rtf«'Xi«y, ^AXA }»^£vti§
Hi. L 83. *0r« 47ff «Mf yfmfAfit n^ttf lb. 113. TaZS* i^S vXXau wifau
Enr. Ph. 719.

. NoTB. It is obvious from the examples above, that the Gen, of property
perftnns the office of an adjectioe. Its use to express quaUty, in the strict
sense of the tenn, is chiefly poetic

2. Genitive of Relaiion.

§ 3 8 8* The Genitive of relation, in its full extent, in-
cludes much which has been already adduced, under other and
more specific heads. The relations which remain to be con-
sidered are, (a.) those of domestic^ social^ and civil life ,
(b.) those of possession and ownership ; (c.) that of the object
of an action to the action or agent ; (d.) those of time and
phice ; (e.) those of simple reference^ of explanation^ &c.

The Genitives esqpressmg these relati<ni8 may be termed, (a.) the Gen* of
todal rebUkm, (b.) the Gen, jootseistoe^ (c) the CTen. lAfeetive, (d.) the Gm.
of local and tniponi/ relaikm, (e.) the Gem» of rtftrmce^ of eacplamation, |ne.

^ 389* ^ GsinTivx OF Social Rbulteon.

*0 9m ^ai^tXitg yypamtit rnhx^at, the brother of the 1dn^$ wife, ii. 3.
17. Ti?y *O^^v0m* ^rtXU vii. 3. !6. AauXavt ravratf L 9. 15. *H»
•^•y fatr^A^nv iminn i. 1. 2. BetanXtuatv [=s Ba^iXtlff £$ § 383. «] aivraif
V. 6. 37. T^ ^mr^mtrtvam [=» raraei^if avrt] r^s X*'^*^ iiL4. 31. (See
also § 350.) Ttlvan , . rnt 'Exx.Jdf (cf. § 399) iii. 2. 4. Tw ir^Xi^f
l;^^(«rf Yen. 13. 12. Taut i»f/y«v Ix^ifraut, , , ravt Kufatf fiXaiff iii, 2, 5,
/Lk ns laturSf waXifuatt X^f^** through the country of their enemie$, iv.
7. 19.

Remabk. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. fbr he
Dat., with scnne adjectivea implying intimate connection ; as, *0 ^i ^nfot ^ari
fuyytaiif raS Kv^«t; ittaity and he who once eaid Ant he was related to Cyrus,
or a rdatice of Cyrus, Gvr. v. 1. 24. OvV h J^vwatnaf raav nmrat ^i* ^i»fi
Soph. Ant. 451. Aantimifiavas tk yau» rt< %vvMvvft.ai \ Em". UeL 495.
^»X** <^««) I^Lii»«^«» ifia^raXav Soph. CEd. T. 21 J. Ta9 laan^dnvt fakt
i/aaififtaav Fl. Soph. 218 b. Tnt Uaft.at^* Jlif^ Soph. £1. 87. 'AxaXaviai
rmSrat rdfrm AXXfiXatv (Ee, 11. 12. *il piyyat S^tap )i«)«;^«» Soph. Ph.
H67, *0 xvCt^nivtif ra rnt 9tm »«i aatvrZt ki) \uft,^%^at vat^pvXdrrata

Digitized

by Google

969 8TUTAX. — GWriXXV* ^OWMBiyp. [ BOOK Ik

PL PoL 396 e. Tk w^Jt^ft^m rSit wit lem^si^m ^9f*P^f ^mr. HeL 508
Cf. §§ 399, 400, 403. — It will be observed, that, in some of these ezampleB
the ac^ectiTB maj be r^gwrded m used substMitivvly, and fliat this eonstruflF
tion is not confined to the names of persons.

b. Gemhivb PossBignrx.

§ 390* The Genitive possessive denotes that to whick
any thing belongs as a possession^ potoer^ rights dvly^ qudLUy^
k>c. Thus,

Ik Si>iyy(ri«f /3«riXi<«, the palace cf SyennenSf L 2. 23. ^r«v mi '!».
unmi wiXuf Tirr«^i^r*0f , the I<nuan citiei bdonged i» T^i»$(i^phernei, L 1,6,
TSv /Uf yk^ 9t»m9Tt09 ri »mrm»etiftiff rSv il nrrmfAiitmf r» itvrttvnfmuB
l^rit for iti$ the part of vietore to hUl^ but of the vanquished to dtCj ilL 2. 39.
X^iivn h Mi)«i> »aX»o/Aifn L2. IS. Aut»u yk^ tJvai ^n^tf, IwtUn^ Kv^«i»
UtC9 ii. 5. 38. T4UT§v ri tZ^as ^v* vXU^m, L 2. 5. T^f yk^ tt^mtTttt
Irri »«) rk l«vr«r r«^m, »m.) rk «w» htrmfititttf XafitCJintf iJi, 2.39.
*Hv*v/««fv «tfr«l» UiXn^rt yniHmtt 'your own mfXk* L e, ' independen V
Dem. 42. 10. Tik wix.ta0s hrut, true to the state, hoar* IBS b. 'Hr*^ «l
K(i»9rst «'f#rrir#i/ yty^eiyl^aftoi Soph. CEd. T. 411. *AXX* Ur) rtS xU
ytrttt h f^Uui Xtyif, *at the mercy of tlie speaker,' lb 9l7. MnJ' tt fu^
"^tyu ittw rt«arriif, ' make youre,' Id. Ant. 546.

v391» Rkmarkb. «. The idea of possession is sometimes modiiled
or strengthened by an adjective or adverb ; as, *Ii(^r i X'*Z*^ *''*' *A^«^^
the spot tt sacred to Diana [consecrated to be Diana's], v. 3. 13. 'I)/*»v Uv-
r«v %TnfAir»0Vt of his own acquisitions^ PI. Menex. 247 b. 0/ )i xii/tovt tm
X^i^nxTit Uitt Dem. 26, 11. Ti tU^Ttv \»etri^ov ^fiftuav PI. ThesBt
193c. T«v t^sfrmrovm m'ort^m »$tf»f efu Uteu vuvrtn M^mwiw \ H. Conv;
205 a. T«f hfuri^ut tlUmt Xwtx^V^ ^ 189 b.

fi. A iMMfer adjeaHee used substanthefy takes the Geo. poesesnve, in connect
tMfe with verbs of praise, bUuney and womier ; as, TtSr* WmvH 'AynrtXmem, I
^mmemd ^is m A^esikms [this characteristic of Agesilaos], Ages. 8. 4. S}
ftift^svrm fJiXi^ra nfiuiv Th. L 84. "AxXa ri «*•!> «r«XX« iyecfuu Symp. 8.
1 2. *Eim»f$m0M airsS WfSrsf fiU t*St» PL Phndo, 89 a. TsSrs . . iv rtit
»vr} JMtri^'i'y ' ««^ i^«* ^avfuifau r»u ^(i»v PI. Bep. 376 a.

y. Ellipsis. Hie possessor is sometimes put in the case belonging to the
thing possessed, with an ellipsis of the latter, particularly in comptxrison ; aa,
^A^fMtra • . t/Mt* IniUif [^s r»7$ lutivty Mffuc^t], chariots similar to his [char*
tots], Cyr. vi. 1. .50 (cf ["A^^arc] tfMtu rt7s Kv^»v 2. 7). *0^«i«» raus ^$4-
Xettf tSx* fl^" Uinru Cyr. v. 1. 4. *n«rX<r^iv«i . . ratt atltratf Kv^f K^Xms
Cyr. vii. 1. 2. '''E;^of&t¥ rtifAarat IxtciniTt^a ravratv, we have bodies better ahU
than theirs, iii. I. 23. Mi^' i^fft^ri^s- r«r^i [== rk rHvh »«»«] raTg •^•Tf
matxaTf Soph. GSd. T. 1507. "A^x^vrtg fiUaf ix^rtt r« aturmt L 8. 22 (ct
B««'<Aiv; ^ rart ftifav tx**^ ^^' mvraZ erfurtit 23).

). The verbs «^«, to «me/Z, frvi^, to breathe, and «'(«rC«XX«, to cmtif, may
take a Gen. defining a noun implied m these verbs § 383. «) or understood
with them; thus, "OT^avn trirrtig, they smell of pitch [emit the smell oi
pitch], Ar. Ach. 190. Tm xt^Xns aim /tu^au (% ^55) Ar. EccL 524. T^
tfMtriiw a^nvu it\$arnTaty ' there wiD be a smell of/ Ar. Vesp. 1058. *iU
iiv fiM «r^«#«<rMvn x**i^'*'* xttit Ar. Ran. 338. llaitt fiparay /m «>«ri«
Ukti Ar. Pax, 180.

DigitiKd

by Google

oil. I.] OBJECTIVE. 9S§

1. It vin b« ftbtemd, that the amUim jwMHirfni |p tlw exact oonvmeof
liie Chniiwe of proper^ (§ 387), the one denoting Aat wUek potmnu, and
the other, that which u po$$es9mL

0. GuNiTivK Objjeutivk*

^393* The object of an action, regarded as wch^ is pot
tn the Accusative or Dative (^ 339). But if the action, instead
of being predicated by a verb, is merely represented as a thing
or property (or as implied in a thing or property) ^ by a noun^
(fdjective^ or adverb^ then its object is usually regarded simply
as something defining thai thing or property^ and is conse*
quentiy put in the Genitive. Thus,

1. Genitivb of tub DutBcr Object. *0 Pi»v(»^XH rht ^»>.m»ht
i^ftr«^ii, the commander of a garruon reviews Mm troops, CEc 9. 15; but,
V^t i^ir«r<ff wm'rm rS* '£xx«y*»v, (^rus makes a review ef the Greeks,
L7. I ; Tjvv TMtfVTA^v '^cy* l|fr««'ri»«r, Jitted to review su^ matters, "Menu
L 1.7. T«» Sx.t4^»9 tSv ^vrrfmTiMTiv L 2. 26. 'lit yafus . . iX'ti^tti
fiXttf JEsch.Ag, 1 156 (cf. l^iyyet iikt^tv yi^^nf 1329). T^ wrt^CtXp
r«v S^0Vf iv. 4. 18 (cf. *T«ri^iC«XX«» ra S(ti 20). Ka^)/«f )it»n}^<« £ur.
Hec 235 (cf. AaMfU ^^iwrn Id. Heracl. 4 83). AiW»«Xi»«» • . rt^ims PL
Both jph. 3 c JAM^nrki lar^$Mns PL Rep. 599 c. "AxXfi/r T»t9urm*
Titit fiahriKws lb. 475 e. *A^Tifia0ni »»xSi Eor. Hec. 686. 'O^t/Aafi
• , tZv «rXi«»i|«*?y Cyr. L 6. 35. T«^i»^f ri ««} Jl»«»rirt«f ^tktftM-
ii^T»T»t i, 9, 5 (ct, 2«f^0rvrifv «ara/(Mc^M 3). A§i4^» 'Si'rmt fr^ttrim*
rSf, Imt without the knmoUdge of the soldiers, i. 3. 8 (of. AtJitv aitrn Atrtk*
$m 17). JL^u^m, rZt 'Xintulmt Th. L 101. *A.wmin »«»«» viL 7. 33.
'AwasityTsvf fA99fi»nt Cyr. Ui. 3. 55.

S. Gbmitivb of thb Indibbot Objbot. ESx*^^»i rut • • ^ftt, it
puy to <A« ffods, ir. 3. 13 ; but, 0t«?v stx^f* prayers to Iha gods, PL
PlMdr* 244 e. Ti^ ref :»i«v i^^Mir« Ear. Iph. T. 399 {cL Bptn 5t^ 1035>
Tj^f rSv »^$if0ift0f hvXiiaf Th. L 8 (c£ Tm4t Iti^fmtt hvXiUn Mem. i. 5*
5). '£«'iC«i>Xttrr«v rr^«r«?, of a plotter agaxHtt the host. Soph. i^. 726
(o£ '£«'iC«tfXiM4 mvr^i, 1. S). 2v><7rf«j^f r^rf ^y^^i^ir/Mnr k^a^rn/A^rmv
Cjtm tL 1. 37 (c£ *^tyJ» Wi funyiyut^iu^ lU TlL 5. -SQ).

^ 303* RmffARKB. «. In like manner, the Qtn. is employed irith
MOMM, to denote relations, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted
hy Hub Dot.; m, Tim «w» *£xxiff»f tvMMM, />«m good-wUl to the Cheeks,
Vf. 7. 20 (cf. "BOfmt )S r«« £f viL 3. SO). T^ In^ Jt A»)^ j| tVi'toif U.
UXm r$$mlh Soph. CEd. C 631 (cf. Th shfum «'Sxt4 Id. Aat SIS).

/^ Tlie Gen. is-sometimes employed; in like manner, fbr a preporitlon with
its case ; as, *Ef kifCdru ritf yiis, in a descent upon the kmd, Th. L 108
(cf: 'AitiCn if rJ^f ynn H. Gr. I. 1. 18).

y. To the Oen, cf the direct ol(fect may be referred the Gen. with «7rMf and
its derivatiTes ; as, Ti mTtmv riif r«'M»&, M« CMtMe </ <Ae hasU [that vdiich
was causative o^ &c], iv. 1.17. Tturttw w ro mMa, you are not responsibU
for [the canse of] these things, CEc 8. 2. Ol r*» wXi/^v uirmrmrM, Ike prin>m
eiptU avthors of the war, H. Gr. iv. 4. 2. T»vr§» 2«f»(«mv ^ mmrfiYt^ mMU
r«i, fortUsthe accuser blames Socrates [makes S. tiM autlior of thk], T'
L S. 26. See § 374.

Digitized

by Google

984 8TKTAX. — aENtTivB. [book xh'

). The Gen. in its mwe active uses (^en employed to denote agettt^ posses'
tor, &C.) has received the special designation of the Gen, subjeetwe^ in distinc*
tion f5rom the Gen. objective. The following passages contain examples of botlt
kinds: T^» niA.««'0( fch ettrirfit IliXffrtfyyiirfv xaraXft'^t^, Pe^i^** eeiz'
ttre of ail Peloponnesus^ Isocr. 249 a. Tat rHv 0i»iifl#» ^^av^XatxiffUs r«tf
yi^ett PL Bep. 329 b. Th ixtivwy ^ixXir^i* rUt if hftmt }iii«»« Th. ilL
12. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. are, in like nkaansr^ naed both
subjectively and objective^. See § 503.

d. Genitivb of Local and Temporal Selaxion.

% 394. The Genitive is extensively employed in defining
local and temporal relation, particularly with adverb$ of place
and timey and with words derived from them. Thus,

"Xyx* y^ff *»*'"' ^ ^^^f Soph. CEd. C. 399. *Apri»v rni Aafitypaxea
H. Gr. ii. 1. 21. T»ut6u l»ayri«y vii.' 6. 23. 'Ayr<«r«^af rSt ^Xaytttt
Qyr. viL 1. 7. "At *> t£v iV^'iAry iv, 3. 3. 'A^f* t»u fcri w'l/yj* Symp. 4
37. 'Eyyuf tra^ethUtu ii. 4. 14. *Eyy*»f fAv^ia/v^ nearly ten thousand, V.
7. 9. E7r» r*lir j^iarv i. 2. 21. *E»r»f t6u T%lx»vt Mag. Eq. 7. 4. '£».
r«f iksyuwf except a few (§ 349), H. Gr. i. 6. 35. 2»*}w twiav Soph. Aj»
218. 'Evi^^t ytis iBsch. Pers. 229. '^y^iv »a) iv^i » r^*!* iv. 3. 28.
Tierm.ftMt itrof iL 1. 11. Teu TlXavrttvos i^ns Ar. Ran. 765. '^|« r«v
«rv>^y L 4. 5. Kiv^ii x«r« )jf ynr Soph. CEd. T. 968. Kv»X« tav rr^«.
r«<rf20v Cyr. iv. 5. 5. T$ ftirav t£v rti^^iif, the distance between the walls,
L 4. 4. *Ey fiiir^ iifitSf xai fianXivs ii. 2. 3. Mi«'0V«'i • . rns 9'o(^ia( PL
Pol. ^265 b. Mir«^ti r«i; ^aretfAov »a) rsif r^^^ou i. 7. 15. Mi;^(< r««
Mfj^/eef rufous lb. "OiTiV^ir lai/rik>» i. 7. 9* A«i/Xnf <r«)Anr «r«^«iVt»
Enr.'Hec 48. B*»^0v itiXms .£sch. Ag. 210. ITXnr/fv iTvaM r«D rf/^tv
viL 1.39. 'E«'Aif«'ia^«r . . ri^v ix^m Cyr. iii. 2. 8. ITf^Mv r«f; «'«r«.
/Mv ii. 4. 28. U^iri$9 rm oirXmf iii. 1. 33. "Tvt^ii ^ttfMU iEsch. Ag.
232. -^ It will be observed, that, in some of these examples, tbe word gov^
eniing the Gen. is used in a secondary sense. For the Dat. after some of thesg
words, see §§ 399, 405.

e. Gknitivib of Besxbiengb^ Explanation, Emphasis, &a

^39S. The constituent genitive has likewise other
iises, of which the principal are those of simple reference^ of
explanation^ and of emphatic repetition.

Note. In some of these nses, the Gen. rather denotes a relatioii between
two expressions for the same thing, than between two different Udngs, In such
cases, an apposUxoe might be snbstitated for it (§ 333. 6) ; and, indeed, in
some of the examples which follow (particularly with the compounds of A-
privaHve, § 383. N.), we might regard the Gen. as in apposition with a sub-
stantive implied.

«. With Substantives. H^i^rtt • . r«v xf^tit^uf, pretext for assembling,
L I. 7. T^mvv fAwwf fu^iif, three monthi pay, i. 1. 10. &uf£r*u rSx«f, the
snd [sc, of life], which is found in dtath, or amply, deatii, iEsch. Sept. 906.
e«»«r«i; rtXtvriw Eur. Med. 1 52 (cf. BUv riXtvrn Soph. CEd. C. 1 473). TI^^m
Tfit fttrm^lxt Soph. (Ed. C. 725. E/ ^i^xs fAniSi* t^rxt ff<pUt t$v A^xXXxyn^m
rtS xttStwv Th. vii. 42. Miy« . . xV^f^ * * "^^^ l/Avrihos, a monster of a gmA
(§ 385. l). At. Lys. 1031. 2m( fi,'ty$9r»v Xt^f^» S<^ ^- 357 (cf. E«««.
tdXXu r«» Ix«^«v, xxXit rt xi^f*'^ '^ <^« Gyr. i. 4. 8). Ti xA*^ **^

Digitized

ed by Google

C^, 1.] OP R£FER£NGB) &C. DATIVB OBJECTIVB. 2S&

9v»vSf At, Nab. ^ 'S^thimrS*. itdfurtXv n xfi/'^ QT'* ^ ^* ^* ^'^ *^'
«4lf ^iX^f mrtfiMt TUt »mfti^»^4ttf, on account of hU $igter*s being denied tht
fionor of bearing the aacred baeUt, PL Hipparch. 229 c See also § 333. 6.

/3. With ADJEcnvBS. "A^'msg ii tl/At affUuit itetttttf^ and I am ehUdleee at
to nude children^ Cyr. iv. 6. 2. *fi rUia itar^it itvirt^m, Eur. Here 114.
"XpXtt ^/x«» Id. HeL 524. "Av-tv-X^s ^tt^iu* XtuxSt Id. Ph. 324. TlxtiyHf
Ja^in Ar. Nab. 1413. X^ti^rm . . Jti^firetTcs Th. ii. 65. "Atrxtvtf . •
it^ittUtt Soldi. EL 36. 'At^Jf^H S^t ^(nww lb. 232. "Afttut tM* rnt
Ae»i Id. (Ed. C. 865. *£» A^pmXu $Ui r«v ^4f^» «'«^srr Cyr. iii. 3. 31. 0(«.
m iT wpXXdv [sc d^««'«i>;], j/vm ors very audaeioue [bold with mach boldnees3»
Ar. Nub. 915. 0v7«ni^ . . yof^su i^n i^aia Cyr. iv. 6. 9. TiXfi«v iimm
r«f . . i^tr^f PL Leg. 643 d. Tv^X«« ^ r«v «UX»v Iwdfrmf Sjmp. 4. 12.

y. With Adverbs. *E(Srr»4 A^v, i»i/f«v 7i*t»4is cT will be permitted wt, at
far a$ respect* him, Cyr. iii. 2. 30. "O/MtPt r»Ts rvpXdtt Hv ^fAif, Xnnti yt rSw
iftirif^f i^^mkfuift * ^ aU the good oor eyes would do as,' Mem. iv. 3. 3*
KjKkSf «'«^ii«'X«v nuratf it is well mtutUed in regard to the voyage, Th. L 36*
T«v ir^U *ASnfm,Uvf wXiffV MrnXSt $Uit»Ts U««m ^ ^iXtf nttiitiraficu Id. iii. 92*
tnt ri I**} 0^f»n( vm^»w x^'*l^i ^' ^* (See also § 363. /3.) ^TpAt
Avrtu ifiit§iit9 yttUimt r«v i^t mvTtvt rSn *£XXifr«fy H. Gr. vi. 5. 38.

%. With Ybbbs. Tiff WtiCiXm§ . . nn^SnUrrm [» it »iv^vv« •'«-«], 6e%
in danger of the fine for faim aecueation, Dem. 835. 14. Td^dv . . r«» fth
w(0Tifa(, rif V UrtfMi^nfj having bestowed upon the one, and denied to the oUter,
the honor of eepuiture (r«^«v defining «T^iiv implied in WfrUmt and AnfiUifmu
$ 383. «), Soph. Ant. 21.

§ 396. General Remark. Great care is requisite in
distinguishing the various uses of the Genitivo, inasmuch as,

1 .) The Gen. may have different uses in oonnec^on with the same word ;
•8, with linsim and «Xva* (§§ 356, 375, 380), with hpfutt (v^ 357. N, 380),
with «'XMfi»ri« (5§ 351, 367), with ^tftTrif (§§ 349, 362. Z), with ^if^
and vfUet (§$ 347, 363). — The ose of the Gen. with substantives is ea*
pedaCy various.

2.) A word may have two or more adjuncts in the Gen. expressing differ-
ent relations ; as, ^AsAtm^tt (§381. y\ V^m (§ 391. t), rvyx»*»t and ^iumt
(§ 380. «). See § 393. ). , •

C. The Dative Objective.

^ 397. That towards which any thing
nJNDS (§ 339) may be resolved into, i. That
cowards which any thing tends, as^ an object of
approach; and ii. That towards which any thing
lends, as an object of influence. Hence the
Dative objective is either, (i.) the Dative of Ap-
puoACH, or (ii.) the Dative of Influence; and
we have the following general rule : The Object
OF Approach and of Influence is put in the

Digitized

by Google

1t8$ WfJKtAt. — SATITB. [BOOK H&

Dative; Or, m other words, irfnce neither ap-
proach nor influence are regarded as direct action^
An Indirect Object i^ put in the Dative.

KanBB. «. Hie Dot, of afproaeh ia cowmonly asLpreaaed in Eng. by
file prepoation to, and the DaU cf m/Inmce^ bj the prqxMitlona to and for,

fi. The l>jasvK oajBorpn ia the uimww at the GENmrs ; Ihe AA
^ approach oontraathig whfa the Otm. of dtpartme, and the Dai. of h^mtmm
fpHh the Om, of oaum. See §§ 8S8, S99, 345.

(i.) Dathtb of Appkoach.

§308. Approach, like ita opposite, departure {% ^4IS^^
may be either in place or in eharaeter* Hence,

Rule XVII. Words of nearness and like^
NESS govern the Dative.

KoxBB. •• Worda of ffttmw aie ra^ated to thoaa of ncarmw, m the aame
mauner aa worda of dutmeikm aie ralated to thoee ci aqMratkm (§ 346. N. V

/S. Fbr the OeMm after aome wwda 6t ncamem and Bkenea, aee §§ 389^
894.

1. Datwe of Nearness.

^399* Words of nearness may imply either being near^
coming near^ or bringing near ; and to this class may be re-
ferred words of union and mixture^ of companionship and ti»-
tercowrse^ of meeting and following^ of sending to and bring"
ing to^ 6£c. Thus,

TltXArmt • . rjf tUHf, to approach the entrance, iv. 2. 3. 07»w xt^d^mg
mMi9, havhg mited it tM wine, i, 2. 13. *£^/'0rr«i ^/»rv, <A^ wtU foBom
fcm, iii. I. 3(?. ni/i«'«f avr^ £^^1X09, sentUng a maunget to him, i. S. 8.
1R»rif v'Xnrtairdr^ ^i^^tt 2fv^if »m^4fiw( vM. 3. 29. 2«} «'iX«# S^»MPf
f;^ii* iBsoh. Sup. 208. ^Eyyiig nftTv yr/Mau Cjr. iii. 2. 6. Ini^ru X^
f^, ri^ 1 1 iff Ut/vMf PL PhflBdo, 100 c (Cf. § 394.) Vtirif •i»m «$
*Exx«^^i ii. 3. 18 (cf. § 389). "^rtra^tvnrt , . Jlfim Tt^rmpi^nt iL 4. 9. "Amm
«f l«'i«iVi| 4^(f fr»«frffr, <at dayln-eak,* i. 7. 2. 'Oftau . . r^rir *£xX9r
wr^^TMrthv^dfutM H. Gr. iiL 2. 5. *Ay«^fpiy^if«i 70?; *nBxXn«viv* 8. Si
£i ifAtXtif»i'rti9 l»i/vy Mem. i. 2. 15. 2«f»^«rii J^iX«r<k ytuftitm lb
12 (cf. lb. 48, and § 389). 'A^m<V . . einitirmft U. 6. 28. E«i»»f t^
4/imV r«v wXtx^Uv ($ 367) PL Bq>. 370 d. Kattmvttf «XXi(XMf PL Legi
844 0. '^X^ »«ir«ria» aXXnX«if 11 «>*>? ytw$ ^vfts PL Soph. 257 a,
'AiTtffrf r^ Stf^Zvrt ISilxXithftt Vu, 8. 1. Ot/ri r«n Kv^y /Sf«/ 4liX<
L 2. 26. AlrSf &pix»9r» lb. 4. 'Aptttunktu 2«^iW ^X^i Th. L ta
*H»ti fifiut ifii^ A^tfTds Cyr. vL 3. 15. *H»i ^0/ ^ivu, it belonged [came] to
me by birth, Soph. (Ed. C. 738. TA !<«*«) <r^«<ni»#fr« Cyr. v. 1. 15 (see § 364>
IXiiTTtfvrtr iri^y Soph. EL 747. Tk rourott tnix^via «'i(r;^«fr*f VU
Tim. 88 d (cf. § 389. R.). 'A»«X«v#«^f «f ^^ru PL Leg. 836 o. Tf
^l(4v^ ^»iXf» *>•• vuKTt^niv ^$a'i%')^iff4at C^T. vlii. 6. 18. A<i)«;^«i

Digitized

by Google

m^ 1.] OF APPiaAOS. — or iim.WNCB. 967-

MxU^f v«. 2. 5 (er. $ 889. B.). "H liml»x^ «9 «^^«> ^•^Um)! pyr.
i. 4. 17. Am^ Mytr^g «vrf viL 3. 16. Air^ r« »S^ •C^S*' lb. 29«

RwifARica «. Traffic is a species of interoonrse ; henoe, IlirM w^imftai
wm rk x^**^ ^^^ ^^ ^ ^"^^^ "^ ymfm- your pigsf Al. iiik. 813
(§ 374). 'Clfirtfim/ f0$f I wiU btqf of you, lb. 815. '^ym Wfutfuu rlfkt
At, Ran. 1229.

/S. A substantive is sometimes rqieated in the Dat^ with an ellipsis, to ex-
piess auccesshn ; as, 'AxxA ^ « v « ^if»t OHntQM ^ofAw afXt^'ty, but daughter
t^nm Mlaughtar [aUnghtm' foDowitag daoghterj hoi destroyed the houee of CEM»
put, Eur. Ph. 1496. Vk ri»ruf e^ir»9 Ar»it 9oph. EL 295.

2. Dative of Likeness.

^400* Words of likeness include those of resemblance^
0ssimilatian^ comparison^ identity^ equality^ 6cc, Thus,

*0/»tfi«i tmV iXXuf, Uke the rest, yi. 6. 16. "E^ ^ Sa^ fih »v» tf/ta^w,
hut me he <Bd not likem to a god, Apol. 15. T« AXn^u Uifut^i to uhri rf
iXJt^ HvMi, he thought smeerity to be the same with foUy; ii. 6. 22. 1r«arf
• . rtirttf k^$ifMf, equal to these in number, Mag. Ec^. ii. 3. 'OfAtitt rett
iXXati Mem. iv. 7. 8. *Offta»^ \a»rh iXXf PI. Rep. 893 c '0^«i«r4|
Si^ PI. The»t. 1 76 b. Ti rf »«>^ Jl,v«/»tf<«v Mem. iii 8. 4. *0^«7v*»m«*
9« #M mJ r«tfr« Mem. iv. 3. la *0^tf)^«/ft«f liXiV'PL Epin. 987 b. 2ii.
MM 7^ ^* IfASfi iftTf Cyr. ▼. 2. 25. 'AxxnXott i/A»0»tif0vfrit lb. iL
I. 25. Kxtd^xV ^"^ 0/t,»r(»iw${»f yttifk%t§f iii. 2. 4. *0^<i$»v^«f XfAsi
PL Rep. 330 b (cf. § 389. R.). Utt^^tiyfimrm, 9/A§taw»in t»7s w»9n^»7s
lb. 409 b. n^p^^^if 4 rvxn rt»/t^ ^Afu Enr. Ion, 359. 2^^ i^f t-
f irrirfVf Ar. Vesp. 1102. Tk ik »^im . . h wu^avXn^iM rctg lXa^:»
mt i. 5. 2. *AA.>A ^iXtrip^ /tk* i»tm»t ii* 1* 13. n#T«^? ^ Jl«Vim^«r9
«^ j^r« PL Crat. 402 a. li^^iiriM tU T»{iri\j^ ri uvri, § 39] nfut mi*
rut iiL 1. 30. 'By rf myrf 4Mv^v»y rsTt ^vX#T«r«if »Mt^§»fMu Th. vii. 77.
*0^ ifiuii fttmt lyinr* l» futr^if Enr. Ph. 151. Ov imk) «*» rvirru rks tfmt
wXnyht ifui I Ar. Ran. 636. TmIt I» «-•» 7r«v 4^9 t^rj, ' on an eqo^ly with
«■»' Hkr. 8. 5. *0 #i)ii;«f ktt^el r«^ k^iuitt r$h l^xH*'^ ^* ^^ ^*
65* AiiiXt '<^uxkt if»^ii^49t T9tt JUf^f *PL Tim. 41 d. 'JfiiXiust
rstt kisy^fift Buig ^ymp. 8. !• ,

(ii.) Dative of Inflitbmce.

^ 401. The Dative of influence expresses a
person or thing which is affected by an action,
property, &c,, without being directly acted upon.

Influence has every variety and degree. On the one hand,
it may be so immediate^ that it can scarcely be distinguished
from direct action, and the Dat expressing it is used inter-
changeably with the Ace. ; and, on the other hand, it may be
so remote^ that it can scarcely be appreciated, and the DaU
expressing it might have been omitted without impairing' tha
lense.

Digitized

by Google

Jfi^r 8TNTAX. •^ DATIVB* [bOQ^ lOk

Rule XVIIL The object or influence is
put in the Dative.

§ 4L09* The Dative is governed, according to this rule

by,

o. Words of ADDRESS, including those of call and commcmd^
of convefsdtian and reply y of declaration and confession^ of ex»
hortaiion and message^ of oath and promise^ of reproach and
threatening^ &c. Thus,

Ovr«f Kv^^ f7«'f f, tAif man «i«f to C^nM, L 6. 2. Tf KA.fi^;^f IC**,
etJlfd ami to ChareluUf L S, 12. Ai«Xf;^^ifrff AXXnXMf , Aaoen^ conueraaa
iptM each other^ ii. 5. 42. Tm> n Mtv»Xii^Mf mvrttitt /tii h»ytn vii. 2. 12.
At y^< rh* ftavniav r^ 2«»^rfi ilL 1. 7. T^ 'EytMcX/y IXfXi^«vri L 8«
18. T»T( 9t»firx9i( tyx*** IxiXfvf iv. S. 13. *H flrc^MxiXf tfr<f r^ i^Svrt
itm^k vrdvTtut ^tivftetrrn PL CoDT. 182 d. 'AXXiiXoif ^<f»iXfV0»r« iv. 8. 3.
*A^ifyifr«« T0i/r^, ri rM ttvrtti^ttifAnt y'lL 2. 26. 'AyyfXX«vr< «'«^
rr^armraut L 3. 21« IlA^ii^yKXf rtilf ff^v^^^X^ ^* ^*^- *T«'<r;^f«S»
^«i rM ^«x« T«X«vrflc i. 7. 18. Ov /tifA^t/Aat^ i^tit raurMs Mem. iii. 5. 20*
E/ ^ rif flcvTf^ . . •yt<^/{«i lb. ii. 9. 8. 'H«'i/X«vv cvrf Y. 6. 34. *£«if.
^v^f rwf *'EXXf)r< fv^xttmrarfat iii. 4. 36. *Oiroraf vrXaravs «'«-iX«f ^#-
/v^/^i) Ar. Nab. 1008. 'AvirXi * cvrf j *A«'0XXa>v iii. 1.6. 'Onri^ avrf
^mtriurii if* vL 1.22. *0 0^*}^ fAmtrtt, the prophet to the ThradanM^
\»t,the Thracian prophety Eur. Hec 1267. 'Axx' ^v</ iti^l vatra Eur. Med.
1157.

§ 4L03* /?. Words of ADVANTAGE and disadvantage, in«
eluding those of benefit and injury y of assistance and <«roice»
of favor and fidelity ^ of necessity and sufficiency ^ of fitness and*
unfitness^ of convenience and trouble^ of eo^e and difficvlty^ of
sa/e^y and danger ^ &c. Thus,

n«(vr«rif . . vflTif^;^! rf Kii^f, ParytoHe favored Cym»f i. 1. 4. X^4^
9tfAa , . rtlt K^fir^ twe/v/ <o tAe Cretane^ iii. 4. 17. "Ov^ iSv r^ mr^mrtf
0-vfi(pifP iii. 2. 27. 11^ ir^^^ii i^' «a*'*'» Soph. (Ed. C. 1774 (cf. §'389. IL>
A^'flc^A afjt^9ri^»tt Cyr. viiL 5. 22. IL^tirvM lavr^ iii. 1.4. Xf«^«»
Irr/y Avry viL 6. 4. Avf/nnvifittv** vmV ftu^axUtf Ar. Nab. 928. OS^mt
\C»nt»yt aXXnXut iv. 2. 26. T»6r§it \9r%»»v»%7r% ▼. 8. 21. 07 rM
d^D^f r«r^fy 11.5. 14. T«7(r ^avave-t «'X«f>r«f tfvdb ^S^iXi? iEsch. Pem.
842. 'AvfifM^'tint mf%Xnfik»r» Id. Pr. 501. T»7t p'iXms a^nyttv Cyr. L
5. 13. *0j ^^iXnn rtf*»ffi79 vrar^i Ear. Or. 924. 'Ei* mhr^ rmvra X**
^irtttrat ii. 1. 10. riircf) Jvrif Kv^^ ii. 4. 16. AiT Wt^miut rie
1m^09 Ui^^ &^fi iii. 4. 35. U4kx£t ftiv eu htiru (§ 357) Cyr. i. 6. 9.
^'Kfiui ftif »fxii flTf^) r^vritf rm tifn/^itm Y, 7. 11* Xaf^<«v «»«y«v fMt^Un
M^mvrti tiixn^tu vL 4. 3. *Ev«;^X«iirvT« ^i) r^ v/Mtrt^f tuitufAouf ii.5. 13,
*E^i^ TiM ifAvf^Mf tlfu I V. 7. 10. *£/M«'«^<«f y«^ rM j Zfvf viL 8* 4«
Tff nXtxtef. ffl-^fflTf i. 9. 6. E? il^^«rr«vr« cv^-f Cyr. L 4. 18. 'Axxy
vi^4 V«^ X^^ y* rnr^* «(^;^i<v ;^^0»9f I Soph. Ant. 736. *^rei/A»»t iTmu
•irf r«vf iVflTMif L 6. 3. 'OJ** » . ififix»*»i tl^Xtut rT^r$vfMirt L 2. 21.
*H r^ttxutt TMf ^wh JLfiMxi^. Uwn ivfAtvig'Tt^m iv. 6. 12. *Ar^«
^&rrf^«» yl r«i «7)«A> viL 7. 51. '£«*<»/» ^0 v« v /m/ Urit lb. 54.

Digitized

by Google

♦« 1 ] Oy INFLTTBNCE. 9R

§ 404* /. Words of appearance, mcluding those of
seeming^ sJunoing^ clearness^ obscurity ^ &c. Thus,

n«ri ^ffX«» lyitir; it was evident to aH^ B., Gr. vi. 4. 20. !S«} mS %n
XiwM Uiv iyit flTi^} r«i/ ^»«tf*» iL 5. 26. ''A)ifX«v ^iv flravr} itvfi^mvt^ t^rif
ri f*iXK§9 Viu vi 1. 21. A/V;^vvir^«/ ^imi ^«»« L 7. 4. M« inttliJii/ AfuV
iL S. 9. TmIf ^ «'ciW» Uf<»vvr«f iv. 5. 33. n2(r« r«^Sf Yect 4. 2*
AvTMir «'^X«» ^Aivirai i "ilLffiiarfif iii 4. 2. A«^C«v<iv t«w itoXtfAitvg . •

d. Words of GIVING, mcluding those of offerings paying
distrilnUingy supplying^ &c. Thus,

Aiittri TH mvT^ Kif(«f fAv^Uvt ^a(u»6Uf, ccnd Cyme givee him tern thotua$td
dories, ii. 6. 4. Tp Z* 0S9 fr^mrif rirt ikve'tim»% Kv^t furfit i. 2. 12. Ti^
}\ £Xka ZtmftTfimt r»it g^^artiy^ti yu, 5, 2, T»if fT^aTtiytf iai^tu lb. 3.
T»7s Xa^SyTi maTifAt^ig'fin lb. 4. ETn^ l^f) lriXf< Ti 2f^ni, «v;^ filfrwr
IriXti i^v-aUf if St rt l^«} ^«/ir ffrt^»7rtj »mt HXXa bfut k^tt^ititt^ vii. 6*
16. 0«i^axf$ «V4'«rir l«'«^ir^ff^«yiu. 3. 20. Tnv r«fr ^«t> ^«ri* JptTv PL
Apol. 30 d. 2^ 'H^axXir 3«^ff^ar»» Soph. Tr. 668. B«r<Xtr ^m,0^it
iy. 5. 34. Ovn iMimf fri 1^1^111 /Ata-ft'^iriti i. 3. 9*

«. Words of OBLIGATION and value. Thus,

T«7f rr(«rM^«i( iftiktrt fisffios, pay urns due to Ae eoldiera^ i. 2. 11. B«*
riXir j» «-«XX0i/ «^i«4 yf»MM'« (§ t;74), *worth much to the kio^/ iL 1. 14.
*A|i»# . . ;^ay«r0v rj ^iXu, meriting death from [to] the city, Mtm. i. 1. 1«
*Ilf «v» £|4«y ffjf $MfiXi7 itpuvtu, ' unworthy of the king/ or ' disgracefbl to*
the king,* ii. 3. 25. *TfU9 $tnrat ;^«^iv L 4. 15.

§ 4cOS. (• Words of OPPOSITION, including those of eofi'
eerUion^ dispute^ enmity^ resistance^ rivalry^ warfare^ 6do,
Thus,

Asftif vfth JifTtrd^mi, fo oppoee to you famine, iL 5. 19. 'E^/^avriC
M 9-1^ r«f Mf, contending with him in tkitt, L 2* 8. *^f IImXXi^}/ t 2^v Eur.
Iph. A. 183. *Avt/«i Hfrnt vtuf 9t»X%fAmt L 8. 17. ^rnftJU^tvrn nbr^
iL 5. 28. Tv^mtft i^-ttf \x^Of ^*v^H'9 '^ *•(*•*( l»«yr/«f Dem. 72. 2.
*H/«ry ltafTti^$Tmi viL 6. 5. 'AyriflTf^fv X«^o r^ fiairrf iv, 2. 18.
Otfri fimnXiT itfTttrtf^fA^tm, rnt k^x^* (§ ^'^3) '^ ^* ^^' *AXX«r(i».
r«r«r Taunf Dem. 72. 1 (cf. ^ 349). 'TflrfrrifvMi «VTMir ^Atnteut r«X.
^r«mf iiL 2. 11. T^ 8^ li^iX^ «'«Xi^4«f L6. 8. Tte-en^i^fu , . ito-
Xtuavvtmi, 1. 8. O&^iJf ttitrf i/i««;^f<r«L 8. 23. <|>«/Mb ya^ M«^«^«lv/
rt MMM «'(«»iy)tfyiv«'«« t^ /3«(C«^y Th. L 73. 'IX^rftfvvTdci . . «XXif<
Xmt. Ar. Ach. 24. *Clf l«'<C«vXiv«4 «vrf L 1. 3. 'E^-iCtvXti I/m/t.^
29. Ai»m^ifH90g rf ff-AT^/ PL Euthyph. 4 e.

tj. Words of YIELDING, SUBJECTION, and WORSHIP, including
those of homage^ obedience (cf. § 377. 1), prayer , sacrifice,
&c. Thus,

TLmtra r$it ^Mt 9it0x»* oU thinge are iubfeet to Aegode, ii. 5. 7. *E^
•i SiXirt w%ittff4Mt, you are not wUHng to obey me, i. 3. 6. *£iv /mm «'ti
r^ff ri, (^ yoK unfl Utten to me, L 4. 14. ESxt^^»t ^9it • • ^•7*% *o pray to
the god§^ iv. 3. IS. *H rr^rtd #m ifttr* vi. 6. 31. Tirtxat^n-e-mi rit
itemftip K^f i. 4. 18. £i iir»x*^t**t t^rm Amu^t/tefits 'viL C 43*

25

Digitized

by Google

2fl$ SYNTAX. — DATIVB. [bOOK III.

(V yiw r« &it4»**t TU. 7. 29 (cf. § 377. 1). Kv^^ )r«X^f «'i«^«^;^f T
L 9. 17. 'AflTi^rtry IWv^ ii. 6. 19. "E^vt rf A</viL 6. 44. Quffiatw
iirtUi rjf d«^ ▼. 3. 9. S^ayfcfcr^Ai ry «M^f iv. 5. 4. '0^;^ifr«/ftt<-
»•< SfMrjy Ajt. Lys. 1277.

§ 406* &. Words expressing a mental act or feeling
which is regarded as going out towards an object ; as those
of friendship and hatred^ pleasure and displeasure^ joy anc
sorrow^ contentment and envy^ belief and unbelief trust and
distrust^ &c. Thus,

Kv^y ^<X«/ri(«v, more friendly to Cyrua^ i. 9. 29. '£;^«Xl«'«4»«9
CMir r«^niyMV, loere aii^ry vnth Ihe generals, L 4. 12. 'E«*/rriMv ^i^ «»«'t^
ybr <A^ irusUd himj i. 2. 2. £vy«r»«r ';C'^' «vr^ i. I. 5. Kaxiraus
TMf ''ExXdw ii. 5. 27. T9UT4tf Hfffti Kvf0t i. 9. '26. Mi»*r» ff^^xxtr*
T^ i|a«r«ray ii. 6. 26. ,Ov^im «?r«f X*''i**f ^f ^/X««f «7a^«7( Mem. ii. 6.
S5. £!? r<y« fS^Mn »«} v/iTv »«) i^M a;^^ifAiv6v yi. I. t&9. *ll^^/^«»r«
*^X^f*'f Tf> KXm»^;^^ i. 5. 11. X«Af«'«lf ^t(« v'tf'V flrM^tftfri ir^M^/teMr^*
1. 3. 3. 2ri^7«<y T«7f itmf»vrif, 'to be content with,' Isocr. 159 e. *Ay«.
«'nr«f rMJr «^«'(«y/t6i»Mf Dem. 13. 11. <I>^«»a>v r^Tf (paufiHf vrXevrovvn
i. 9. 19. 'Xl» \y«* rw ov ^0»iiV« (^ 376. C) Qyr. viii. 4. 16. 'H^mf Aflri-
rTir* ii. 5. 15. Tif rixv IXr/r^j Th. iii. 97. *'£rr«#ffy ««'«(«t/y7i; w
«'^9^^Miri i. 5. 13. 'AfCfiiip T0t( ytyttnfAtvMf vi. 'J. 14. 0ai;^«^« ))
tS ti ««'«»Af/ru ^«tf w» «rvX*rf Th. iv. 85. *T«r«<rr •»#"#••» •/ n>J»*( ««rff
Cf^r. i. 5. 1. — Some of these constructions may perhaps be referred to the
instmmental Dat. (§ 416).

§ 410T. i. Words expressing the power op exciting,
emotion ; as, pleasure^ displeasure^ care^ fear^ &c. Thus,

'A**! ;^^«vt##«i rtlti er^atrmrtuiy to dufUaae M« aoldierSj ii. 6. 19. *£{^^
fttknfitt it thaU he my caret i. 4. 16. *0r< «vrf ^Sx«<, [that it should be
A care to him] that he womld take care, i. 8. 1 3. Atk ri fitikuf S^-drn, thromgh
«ft« interest which all fett^ vL 4. 20. Zti*) rSv fZt, «7)' iyit, f*ixu ^ittn
(§376. ^)£mr. Herad. 717. ^£i ^i\rar»v /t,iXfifA» 'itliftam ^ar^t JBsch.
Qu). 235. Ml T«/MiXfi fAst, it is a regret to me, I repent^ Cyr. y. 8. 6. Bft-
«i«/B»iXm ri rM t^n^a i. 6. 7. (See § 376. X) TmV ^Iv ff-AXXflr^ , , H^texst
iL 4. 2. *H^«» fufjtftMSivn ri veifut ^v iy. 5. 27. *T^y Mvo-aw Xv«'ir(«tff
ifTst$ iL 5. 13. <^fCi («r«r«v r»7s vrtktfAitif iii. 4. 5.

X. Verbal Adjectives and Adverbs, having a passive
signification. The property expressed hy these verbals nas
relation to an agent ; which, as if affecied by the property, is
put in the Dat. Adjectives of this kind usually end in -rd^ or
:Teo«(§314). Thus,

SaofAmerh vras-i, wonderful to off [to be wondered at by all], iv. 2. 15.
"H/iTv • . tfT/MM itdtrm iftnrim, I think that every Ihxng should he done hyns^VA*
1. 35. T^ /»)v «7jM»)i fi»»X»fiUf§9 Jtvttftu, TMf *f»s« ^n X»r«v ertnwM ««tX#i7f^
'an object of envy to his comitrymen,' i. 7. 4. *!»• ^mi i ^flr^cxf «r«;«t
2 iL3. 20. 0/ vTTafUi . . er^»7»v0i v^ot rat irnykt ^i«C«r«) yiytsyrm^ *cao
be passed by those who ascend [become passable to those who ascend]/ iii. 9.
2S. 'SLlteritirsw ^ IwrmZtm roTf •'•Xi^W iii 4. 20. TlTmme§ . • i/A l»«v
l««C«TiM, 'Ibv ■■ to past [to be paasad by ua]/ ii 4. 6

Digitized

by Google

€B. 1.] OF IMFLUBMCB. Wfl

§ 408. X. Substantive Verbs, when employed to de-
note possession. These verbs and their compounds are used
with the Dat., in a varifety of expressions, which are variously
translated into English, Thus,

'Evvavfia, Kv^f (iet^ikum j^v, here Cyrun had a palace [there was a palace to
C^TUs], i. 2. 7. TtfiV }^ tnrt'^ia t^h ^y, ihey had a suspicion, or they suspected,
i. 3. '21. Ase/Ms ^yi9^T• rtit fr^etritiTMs, [to the soldiers there came to
be a nmnmgj the soldiers began to run^ L 2. 17. 'IW-i v-m^tf eiU;^6vtiv ii>eti,
so Ihut all were ashamed^ u. S. 1 1. ffCitd^x** y'^f ^ ^1"^* ^*'^'** ^' ^* ^ ^*
'fit vi/ff uvroif tif f**Xf* [.^^ Wrt] 1. 2. 1 5, *As«iy»fi i^ fMi [sc. i^rt]j I cam
now compelled, i. 3. 5. *'Hv aurf v-iXtfietf he made war, i. 9. 1 4. UiXts • •
^ Svtfita 2<rr«»ff» a dty named SittacCf ii. 4. 13. *lS,yivtr» xui "ExXnvt ttmi
]^a^Qeify . . W9^ivtffi»i, both Greek and barbarian cotdd go, i. 9. 1 3. Oh yk^
Sv afi^cMs vi^irrn^tn iv. 7. 2, Ntif vm lf^frr<y.. eith^) ytvirfiai vii. I. 21,
OiiintfiS fif^f fttrtifi iii. 1.20 (see § 364). T/ ya^ ifr *£^i;^^<r xo) »»X»ms i
for what has Erechtheus to do with jackdaws [what is there to ErechtheuS) and
also to jackdaws] ? Ar. £q. 1022. Mf}^v Civat ro) »eci <I>/X/«'«'« v'^ayju*,
that you had no connection with PhiUp, Dem. 3-^. 7. T/ r^ vo/a^ xa) r^ /3««
r«»^ ; Id. 855. 5. 'Exi/v^ fiovXtfAtvf rmvr* Irvi, these things are [to him
willing] according to his will, or agreeable to him, H. Gr. iv. I. 1 1. Ei alrSf
y% fti fiovXtfiivf Ur)9 A^»K^inf6tu PI. 6oi^. 448 d. E7 vet HhofAittf ifrif, if
it is your pleasure, PI. Phiedo, 78 b. QiX»frt xdfAt) t6vt &v Hv Soph. CEd. T.
1356. *H» ^ «v rf *AytifiXdf «;^^«^«y^ rauva, 'displeasing to Agesilaoi,'
H. 6r. V. 3. 13. N<»/f -«r(«r^i;^0^iyf H* v» itt^'i rZv 'Eyt^raivvf * were ti»
Hicias had expected,' tL vi. 46.

^ 400* ^. And, in general, words expressing any action^
property^ &c., which is represented as being to or for some
person or thing. Thus,

n^titiw rM, / drink to you, vii. 3. 26. Ktvard^tet uvnTf lirtinfof, Ihqf
node for them a cenotaph^ vL 4. 9. Mtyirrty xiwfASf mfi^i, the greatest orna-
ment to a man, i. 9. 23. "il^m h ivtUm r»7f «-«X<^Mf , it was time for tht
memy to withdraw, iii. 4. 34. 'Sr(aTtv/»* mtrf rvnXiytra L 1 . 9. *0i Xi«-
|«r«^y umvr(»r4yu V. 6. 36. B«#<Xti«y «T;^i ry g^ar^av-if iv. 4. 2. *E;^^«»
yk^ xmi avrif »vrf fut^vvfi^mt vii. 6. 39. *H^v «-0y fiuffit dfrnv-fiJlen lb. 40.
"E^v e-mv-S rfiti Ar. Ran. II. 34. "Etfyuv r%x9Wif ^*f^^ vfXifut* ^i^
^h. Sept. 416. '£^ 2) f»/f»H4 ^x^ff*** »f*^u 2»(t, ' awaits me [is wait-
ing for me],' Id. Ag. 1 1*49. Jfifn/Mv &^m vftTv Unw iv. 6. 1 5. n««>i xMit
iTvAi xAi «ya7»«r«v M^ivrut ilL 1. 43. Aatiriv /Mt %W%it iii. 2. 29. *Ay«-
/«tf . . «7r<9( TJi rr^avtf vi. ^ 20. *H . . iretr^tftt vfiTv oi»ia PI. Charm. 1 57 e.
Sivf Zt irvyx^nv alfrf i. 1. 10. 'T/mms if^^ ttnu jtai irmv^tia »eii ^IXttfg
I 3. 6. *I^Kri« «f ^VMMJKJ vii. 3. 27. T(<if(i< . . trXeus vl 4. 2. Ai 3)
07r«^ TtTir ^» v^'tH^vyUtt i^sMrmi iv. 5. 25. 'H ^ [sc iJif r<w] 3««C«»« ri»
wTfiip iii. 5. 15. KfltjMbf lyiw 7»v«MMf Mtri ervyS Soph, ifait. 571. Ai/r«
n ^^MMT ;^i^«'/rrf atam; Eut. Hipp. 189.

^410* Rebiarks. 1. The remoter relations expressed
by the Dat (§ 401) are various in their character, havii|^
lespect to place^ time^ sensa^ion^ thought^ feelings expression^
action^ Ac. Thiey are expressed in two ways; (a.) by the

Digitized

3* by Google

SS93 SYNTAX. -^ DATIVE. [BOOK IR

Dat. simply, and (b.) by an elliptical form of conatruetion, in
which the Dat is preceded by tig. Thus,

'"H. 0ffKti ecSrti itrriv , » M it^it iiV rov Tlivrtv iifvrXiefri [ac ript or
tft\t this Thrace it upon the right to one eaUmg into Gie Pontus, or as you sou
\nto the Pontus, vl 4. 1 (cf. Th. i. 24). ^Hv V nfMt^ ff^n ^tirifov «'Xi«f ri
»»i, and it was now the second day of my voyage [to me sailing], Soph. Ph.
S54. Svoftipf •/ . . • «|X4<« d/*av(tifitit while he was sacrificing the sun icaa
ecHpsed, Hdt ix. 10 (this mode of defining time by a Dat. with a participle
te especially Ion.). K4# r<V ;^««'»f r^fV UrU w^ikti^i^t^s i 'siaee this
evenV Soph. (Ed. T. 735. T« fth i^mv kversfAi^^ ^SfMi evx &yei9 S«#.
ftiv nv, * to the external tonch,' Th. iL 49. E7 ytvfaT^Sf m tiifn [sa ^aivu},
*• as you appear to one beholding/ 'in appearance,' Soph. (Ed. G. 75. 'E/uo}
ya^ twrts £it»4S if fp»$ Xiyttv 9'i(pd»tf frXi/mrv J^fiftiat o^Xtrnautf ' accord-
ing to my judgment,' Ear. Med. 580. Kmirot r' ty*» V/^»»r« roTs ^(•^•li
019 tZ Soph. Ant. 904. . E^uw yc^ «iv Z^>Mrift is l^«2 [sc Hixtt], ^»ri,
' as it seemed to me,' ' in my opinion,' lb. 1161. Oh fta rn Ai\ tpi, «v
»9Vf, tSt y ifiti u»^$ar^, *AXk' m ^f-^'it ^* ^' i7<v? ^nf^t PL Itep.
536 c. Ti fAh oZ% *iwn(Mii «'«>.X« »tii uXXot ira^aXi^itri • •, TMwm ^t
Th. ii. 51. 0i«f yit^ Ur«^ii fu, rf^i V »ix»f^'*h * so far as lay in him,' Soph.
Ji^» 1128. ILtx^v yei^f if yi^tvrtf ^^cvfra.Xftt oiit, ' for an old man [aa
joumejrs are to an old man],' Id. (£d.'C. 20. T«^i )t ftAXt^rm. ^avnn (mX-
fSfnfi f*»i, f»D^«fr«rt uvafAivut, but this most of aU remember [for me], Ipraig
you, never to defer, Cyr. L 6. 1 a *£« ri ftot (ixi^pdfa ^aX^u Soph. EL 887.
Offi»i r«i IxtUouf rsitt iymitvf ra «rf^<iM^ peciitts nxnffut Cyr. i. 3. 15. OS'
rm$ \yi r«« . • ruyt iixata ^etvrawitwn idn cix^xCti lb. 17.

Note. The use of the Dat. to express remote relation is particularly firo*
<pent in the pronouns of the first and second person. In the Greek, as in our
own and in other languages, the Dat of these pronouns is often inserted, slmfdy
to render the discourse more emphatic or subjective. Observe the exampkt
Just above.

J 41 !• 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take
a Dat. in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence ; as,

*'S.yt7Ts y uhrm§ i nm/id^xtif, and Ute bixiUff led the way for them, L «b
guided them^ iv. 6. 2. Ol yk^ ^Xiirvrru rots rufXeltf iiy»ufiufiu An Hut 15*
'HfitTv vmnv ilnyv/ntft Soph. (Ed. C. 1589. *Ay««^r«i (ia^Ck^Mi /3«f.
Cx^9s 0««f Eur. Iph. T. 31. ^H SnCat^i* thiw^m £y«| Id. Ph. 17. Aa^
ya^ tux «(^|f4 SfMf .£sch. Prom. 940. Mmx»f ^^ '- f^*^ vXifMVt mptct^m
C;yr. vii. 2. 26. ^ fiiCnxtf hftTw i ^itn i Soph. (£d. C. 8 1 . Tli^t»y$9
Xtris rHvii flit fttrn^iut Eur. H^ticL 452. T« k»^» fi/uh . • irfcxmTaXm/*^
Ctifttf L 3. 16. Tv^»»Mf U«-«^y fA%il<rraf El*. Ph. 40. Cf. §§ 347, 350^
424. 2.

§ 4L 1 3* 3. A Dot, depending upon a verb is often used
instead of a Gen, depeAding upon a substantive ; as,

0/ . . Tr***! u&T»7t ^QiVTUit the horses are tied for them, = «/ Tnr«« aurSs
ZQiPruit their horses are tied, iii. 4. 35. *H . . rov itarrit a^x^ Xit^ig-ipf

tttv^a xartXt^ti vL 2. 12 (cf. "15 r« Xf<^ir«^«v *^;C^ ''•'' «'«>"'»J xurtXv*
vi. 3. 1). Atk ri 2iir«riS(^«i airf ri fr^Artvfin ii. 4. 3. T«r; fia^Cd»
f»if r«y n itt^t uwiPavew .«'«XX«2, xai rSt /«*«•{«? . . iXn^iti^mv iiL 4. 5.
h/ttf yvm^ur0% Ts\fs U ff x*^f ^^»* mt^i^ws [•« i» rjf \^mt X^'A

OUvt

Digitize!

H Google

C& L] RESIDTTAL. — IMSTEIXMENTJl* AND MODAL. 398

S9. Ovxlri #«! rixMi 44»rrM ^«0; £ac Ph. 1547.

Note. The Dat. (chiefly of the po'sonal pronoun) is sometimes placed M
a simple adjmict of the substantive ; ibid in some instances, whoi so placed,
appears to depend strictly upon a participle understood. Thus, 'Av-iSktirt . •
«r^0« Tfif viaf hfAlt iriXtv, look upon our new state (i. e. the new state estab*
lished for. ns in the dialogue), PL Rep. 431 b. 0< ^i ^^< fiitf . . «v vra^t'
ymvT9 Hdt. i. 31-

§ 413* 4. Sometimes two datiyes following the same
word, especially in Epic poetry, appear to be most naturally,
though not unavoidably, referred to the 2^fjfici xa&* oXov xal
fidQog (§ 334. 9) ; as, 2&ivoq sfiSaX* ixaa?^ xa^^/^, imparted
strength [to each one, to the heart] to the heart of each one,
-^.11, *A/a/Affirovi ijydavs &vfi^ A* 24. Cf. ^ 438. /?.

D. The Dative Residual.

^414. The Dative residual is used in ex-
pressing adjuncts, which are not viewed as either
sulgective or objective (^^ 338, 340. a). It simply
denotes indirect relation, without specifying the
character of that relation; or, in other words, it
denotes mere association or connection. Hence we
have the general rule : An Attendant Thing or
Circumstance, simply viewed as such, is put
IN the Dative.

Notes. «. In aooordanoe with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes nsed in
expressing an a4jimct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its char-
acter, would be expressed by dther the Gen, or Ace, See §§ 340. «, 341.

fi. The Dattvb residual is expressed in Eng. most frequently by the
prepositioa with, bat likewise by the prepositions 6y, in, ut, &c. C£ §§ S45. N.,
S97. «.

^ 41tl. ThB Dative residual may be resolved
into, (i.) the Instrumental and Modal Dative,
and (ii.) the Temporal and Local Dative.

(i.) Instrumental and Modal Dative.

Rule XIX. The means and mode are put in
the Dative.

§ 4 1 H. Instrumentality and mode may be either ex*
ternal or internal^ and mode may apply either to action or con*
dition. Hence, to these heads may be referred,
25 •

Digitized

by Google

294 * SYNTAX. — DATIVE. [bOOK Itt

1.) The instrument^ force^ or other meanSy with which any
thing is done, or through which any thing comes to pass
Thus,

AifTov a»09r/{u rtt «'aXrf , one shoots him with a dart, i. 8. 27. 'E^iAtm
<« . . ifrnx^, pursued leith cavo/ry/ vii. 6. 29. Qaveir^ ^h/mm/h, to pun^
ish with decUK Cyr, vi. 3. 27. ^^tiimn itetCuivovrts i. 5. 10. *lff«'i rif
»|/»>i lb. 12. Aif»tg ^ptviov^viii. 3. 17. Ati^ctf irifuiL 9. 1*4. A«.
y«if Jffrfi«>i ii. 6. 4. Ttx/Mti^tg'fieu J* 5» ry ^»Pv iv. 2. 4. Fc^jf^a % ivSt
l^iwyfAtfti ^Xoiotf Wra i. 2. 5. *0<rXi«/tiyM S«(a^< L 8. 6. *fltx6io/*n-
f^ivov frX/y^tfif iL 4. 12. £<;(«« ayiCi} |f v/xf ii. 5. 22. Tots ll XttitofAi*
votf U Ilk«ram9 ikfiifrtfj rhv yiiv i'ipov* Th. ii. 12. £7;^0y htvUg Tjf &»^«/^
vi. 4. 23. *A<r«^»fir»ii ti^-y vii. 2. 32. <I><Xif ^ly *«) tvvti^ Wt/AUtot
ii. 6. 13. 07^^^ «'a^my, Tourtvg fiyura n uxfanie^ rifi ^ &^t»ie^ i?
kfuXiief, avtivai Cyr. viii. 1. 16. H^avattt fiiv y% Sf|« «'avr« r^ af^^tftriwf
yvufAi^f rxTf ^i x*i^*^ oirXepo(n^»t, itev^ofiuu ^i r^ TfTiry, Wy ^* iv«v4*/«ff
tivuT^iypM tJj Taw Virir«t/ pufitip Cyr. iv. 3. 18. Yioivets jtivnrtts rSf fiiptart
PL Leg. 6si c. 'H ro7i /StXt^'/y l^io-/; lb'. 717 a. T^ yk^ )«X^ tS ft^
Itxetlcf KTvtfAar ovxi rfl5^«T«i Soph. (Ed. C 1026. — The Dat of the missilo
with verba of throwing will be specially observed.

§ 4 1 7. Remark. Dative of the Agent. The Dat.
sometimes expresses that through whose agency any thing takes
place ; as,

Tlavd* rifiTv trurwuTflM, aU things have been done hy tw, i. e. our worh is done,
i. 8. 12. El Vt rt KaXit . . Mw^axro UfAtv vii. 6. 32. Tit vru^et »t»avfitifm
t7n rf 2i«^»» vii. 2. 18. To7f Tt Kt^xv(eci0n , . 4vx l«f»w# Th. L 51.
TeTf "EXXi}*'! fjufo7vT» Id. iii. 64. Ti^orviXois ^vXeiv^treu Soph. Aj.
539. "TW «•«/ iv^(pa{ tl^yafrect xetxei Eur. Hec. 1085. T<»i y«f <r#r at
. . ir^of<pe^»y eixovffetifi ivesi * through whom,' i. e. * from whom,* Soph. EL
226. Ai^xTo 6t ^xrivT^af, received from him the sceptre^ B. 1 86 (the Dat.
following. Uxofieii, instead of the Gren. with ita^Aj is especially Epic, and
might perhaps be referred to § 409, thus, took for him the sceptre), (difu^n
• . lixrt V%ira$ 0. 87.

Note. This use of the Dat. is most frequent with verbs in the Perf. and
Plup. This DATIVB OF THE A6EMT with passive verbsj and that with passive
nerbals (§ 407. »), might periiaps have been referred to the same analogy.

§ 41 8. 2.) The way or manner ^ in which any thing is
done or affected, together with attendant circumstances. Thus,

Ou yaf x^etvy^, dkkk rty^ . • vt^or^trun, for'Hhey advanced not with
clamor, bid in sHence, i. 8. 11. tla^t^Juv ohx ^9 /3ia i. 4. 4. Tlf<rt^ *^?
i xiXtua-i i* 5» 8. *^^xii9«0V ivk x^»r9s ii^»v9Ti rS 'i^'wy i. 8. I. "Ti-
XaTf Tu7s xi<p»Ka7t Ir rtji vroXi/Aif ^tttxiviwtuuf lb. 6. A^o/am ^Uf Ib^
18. Ttvrtf rSf rfoit^ Wt^tvfinw vroLdfAWt rirvot^ iii. 4. 23. Wt^ttAfU"
fei.,r^ 0^f lb. 30. Tag-fiitf it^d^ug PL Pol. 280 d.

Remark. The pronoun avrig is sometimes joined to the Dat. of an i
ciated object to give emphasis ; as, M*!r ^fiZf avTa7s ra7s Tftv^tn »ar«)vrji,
test he should sink us, triremes and all [with the triremes themselves], i. 3. 1 7.
Ho)<.k»vf yk^ idn avTott vols ^ivvtts xetTax^fifAtig-fittv'a.t Cyr. i. 4. 7. T^m^ttf
mirtlis vkn^M/AMfi hi.^fiei^nvav Isocr. 1 76 b. — The preposition vvp, whidi is

Digitized

by Google

vH. 1.] OF MEAN? AND IK^ODE. OF TIME AND PLACE. ' 295

omnmon in mch adjimcts if the aMs be omitted, is sometimes expressed eren
with it ; as, *0«'»f . . ^«w mvr$7ft r«4t xfi^its Urtrf*M*» Pl« Bep. 564 c.
Gf. H. 498 and T. 482.

3. ) The respect in which any thing is taken or applied (cf
^437). Thus,

IlXn^u yt nfiSf Xu^ynf , infenor to u$ in number [in respect to nmnberj,
vn. 7. SI (§ 349). TliXtf . . Qa-^Prnxt iwoffrt i.4. 11. T9 iv-i/tef Xii>
n^ntvat rSf ^ikttf i. 9. 24. T^ ^"^P ^C'^X^'f ii« 6. 9. X^iv^ari ttal
rifintif r*&rmt W'Ku^tKrtt'n (§ 351) iiL 1. 37. Tawf ^v^'^'f lp/«^«»i-
0ri^9t lb. 42. 'kv) II /Aiv^ it(4i^ott0-if »t iit^'tTg hftSit iiL 2. 19. Tf ^i X*
rig'Tf T»v U-XsTiMV fiXm^fot Th. iv. 73. 'P/^^ fih ftikav tf»i «. 304.

§419. 4.) The measure of (ii^crence, especially %illi
the Comparative. Thus,

X^«»^ ^ t-vx^f S^n^^h and mmetime after [later by a considerable time],
L8. 8. n«XXf^ 3^Tt^99 ii. 5. 32. N«^i^*fv, iff /aIv ^»rr49 tXfioi, t0-
09VTf aivm^mrx tuM^rtri^f fiartXu ftM^^^fiat^ $ff it (rx^Xasart^ePf r « «■ « v r y
itxiw rv9ayti^%f4m (ianXu fr^anvfioj thinking that [bj how much] the more
rapidly he should advance^ [by so much] the more unprepared he ehotUd find the
hhtg for battle^ §fc,, i. 5. 9. 'Eviayvf «'(irCim^«;, a pear older, Ar. Ran*
1 8. n^vXaU flr^XXfTh.vii. 80. X^«v^ ^iriarfira «'«XXf Hdt. iL 1 lOw

5. ) The Dative with xQoiofiai^ to use [to supply one^s need
with, § 284. 3]. Thus,

M«yri»^ X^M**9f ^t^ng dtvination, Mem. i. 1 . 2. *E;^(«ir« reTg ^htss, ' em-
ployed,' i. 3. 1 8. Tm( 1v9-»it i^i^rtt xfi'^'^h * manage/ i. 9. 5. Xit/Uivt
;^^w§ipk%w, ' having met with,' Dem. 293. 3. T«vf X€»if*Mvt ^vrff ' asso-
datmg with,' Mem. iv. H. 1 1. *Hi Ku^st ^'•Xtfiitf i;^(ifr«, which wa» hoeiile to
Cjfruty ii. 5. 11. Ipoi^Bt 9rtJafii¥Mi ix^n^* ^ b\ 13.

NoTB. N«^/^*» has sometimes the Dat. after the analogy of ;^^««/mm •
•a, BurUut inrnftMs M^j^«rTf # , ' observing,' Th. iL 38. Eve-tUif ^ly «»)•.
0%0i iu'fuZ** Id. iii. 82.

(11.) Temporal and Local Dative.

^ 430. Rule XX. The time and place at
v^HicH are put in the Dative (cf. ^^ 378, 439) ; as,

1. Tdcb. T^ Vi^rt^ai^ [sc. «^i^a] Hxtv tiyytXtf, but the next day
Aere came a messenger, i. 2. 2 1 . "pMtro ya^^ mmuriti r^ fifAi^f fAaxuf^ett /3«-
tttXia i. 7. 14. TJ vm^atet ov» ipavna'af ci iraXifuai, «v)i rjf r^irif •
r^ ^)*7fr«(rff, vuttrit ir^tfriX^tfVTif, tcaretXatfjtCivtvrt X"^^'^ v^t^il^ov, *but
on the fourth, having passed them in the night (^ 378),' iii. 4. 37. Av^av-
%(»( Tt rri WfVfif vv»r<, Ivti S^fi^of «i', Ir^fittivtv H. Gr. ii. 1. 22. Tf/ry
tcriv) avnx^n •'' "A-vi^ov lb. i. 4. 21. T^ ^* Wicvn ?r«j, ^ nv *OXvft.wikt,
^ ri frmhitv h/»a K^txipas lb. ii. 3. 1. T£ i* aurci XC^*^* ^'^ ^ ^ same
time, lb. t. 2. 1 8. *0 Tt ^Ayn^ixdaf XV^V *^'*^ «7iriy, * at length,' lb. ir.
1. 34. *tit ^xarvi^f XC*^V «X«;^«i/f n xmi rixv itft^tnf Eur. Tro. 20u
Cfc §§ 378, 439.

2. Place. Tm r^iitam rd rt f/La^miiwi xtti "^atXaftTin luti IIX«r« .

Digitized by VjOOQIC

696 STNTAX.*- ACCUSATIVE. [bOOK Ila

m7(, the victorie$ at Maraffum and Stdamii and PlattBo, PL MeoAS. 245 a.

841 b. Tnf v-aXmitf ^riyiv tcviti^mt vfrt SmlZvt Soph.Tr. 171. &u^m,t0^
K%tf*.U»» Id. (Ed. C. 401. 2«?f «r«y rrS^n vti(p9ts lb. 4)1. *0^«7f «»-
»Ai?v i^f/rov Id. Ant 226. Ki/>fy«» ati ^^ ASytf^ov £iir. El. 763.

§ 4S 1* Rkmarkb. «. To the local daitvis maj be referred the
use of the Dat to denote person* among whom, or m it^Aom any i&tn^ oceure ;
«8, Avvafitf tivfi(atit§if l;^c<9, * among men,' Eur. Bac 310. £v^i/ft«ruf
TMf r«rf oivfi^miftt PI* Prot. 343 C* Ovx «y i^tv^»u ifit) itfut^rUt UtHf
<«^«», 'in me/ Soph. (Ed. C 966. Oat »«) *0^if^^ Ai«/tif2iif xi^ii, 'in
Homer/ PI. Bep. 389 e. 'OWnij y«f «ir^ C^/»*w] >^«f «'' «» *Ayii-
mfAvova, PI. Leg. 706 d. 'A^iff'^trU T^wirrii* Z. 477. "Otfv »(ir«f Irr} ^.
Yt0^r0 itaf» Kv^A^vim «. 7 1 .

/3. The nee of the local datths in prose is chiefly confined to those ad--
ffer^ of place which are property datives ; as, TM/ry [sc. ;^^f ]• in AU region,
here (iv. 5. 36), v^i, here (vlL 2. 13), f and jTatc^, loAere (iL 2. 21), ^UUL^^
sIievAere (ii. 6. 4), »v»Xy, w a eircuUj around (L 5. 4 ; iiL 5. 14), «Zmi
(.s«7»y), erf Aome (i. 1. lO), 'A/iiMiri (» *Ainuui), ai Athene (vii 7. 57).
890 §§ 320. S 379. m,

E. The Accusative,

^499. The office of the Accusative is to ex-
press DIRECT TERMINATION OF LIMIT (^ 339) ; and

the general rule for its use is the follovnng : An
Adjunct expressing Direct Limit is put in
THE Accusative.

RKMARg. In a genera] sense, all the obliqub oases may be said to ex-
press limit ; bnt the Gen. and Dot, express it less simply and less directly
than the Aee* In some connections, however, these itutirect caeee are used
interchangeably with the Ace. See §§ 341, 401, 414. «, 424. 2.

The Accusative, as the case of direct limits is
employed, —

(i.) To limit an action, by expressing its direct
object or its effect. — 'Ace, of Direct Object and
Effect.

(lu) To limit a word or expression, by applying
't to a particular part, property, thing, or person. — -
Ace. OF Specification.

(hi.) To express limits of time, space, and quan-
tity. — Acc. OF Extent.

Digitized by VjOOQIC

CH. l.J OF DIRECT QBJ5CT AND BPFECT. 29t

(iv,) To limit a woid or expression, by denoting
degree^ manner^ &c. — Adverbial Acc.

Notes, (o.) These nses are not only intimately allied, bnt sometimes blend
irith each other. (6.) For the tue of the Acc to denote the tubject of the Iff
/initive, see the syntax of that mode.

(l.) ACCUSATIVB OF THE DiRECT ObJECT AND EfFECT.

^493. Rule XXI. The direct object and
the EFFECT of an action are put in the Accusative.

AmC^ Tirr«^i^vn»} taking THssapheme^f L 1. 2. 'l^onTro rnv rvX*
X»yn9t he made the levy, i. 1. 6. *T«'4tf«'riv< riAi vrifr i. 1. 1. Ai«C«X»
Afi Tot Kv^«v lb. 3. ^tXtluwa «^r«y lb. 4. *0 ^\ Ki/^«r vifiXaCm r»vg
ftvy4vraf, fuXXil^etf rr^ArtufAm IvtXii^nu "M-iXnrof lb. 7.

Note. The distinction between the direct object and the effect of an actioil
Is not always obvious, and i^ sometimes appears doubtful to which head aa
adjunct is best referred.

^ 434* Resiabks. 1. The term actum is employed in this rule to
denote whatever is eigni/ied by a verb ; and the rule properly applies only to
the adjuncts of verbe (§ B92). Adjectivei and noums^ however, sometimet
take the Acc. after the analogy of kindred verbs ; thus, 21 . . ^v|<^«f , abk
to escape you. Soph. Ant 788 (cf. *B /Ah ^vyt> rt{ Id. £L 1503). 'Ea'4.
rrtj^fvif ^ ^ftt.f rk «'^«rir«0yr« Cyr. iii. 3. 9. *£|ii^ir^ %i*tu rk l^titrtifum
PL Charm. 158 c. T« ri fiUTUt^» ^^ttrt^rtif PI. Apol. 18 b (cf. T^9
furtii^v f^evTtrrm Symp, 6. 6). X»k§ ^^•vffAV'it iBsch. Cho. 23. Tn$
B^vfitCiftv ^^im Xuirns Id. Ag. 103. Ivvifrc^a . . Maxk lb. 1090. See
atso ^ 431. 1.

2. Many verbs, which according to the preceding rules govern the Oen, or
the Dat; are likewise construed with the Accusative (see §§ 341, 401,
42!2. R.); as, *il^tXtif f/u* t«cv ^tXavt, . . /SA^rriiv ^\ rtiiit Ix^fvs PL
Bep. 3S4*b (cf. § 403). n^«i;^«tfriv W /«Hrm nf^it iit 2. 19 (cf. § 350).
*Ami^ uarn^X^ ^h*^ ^* Euthyd. 283 b (cf. § 350. R.). Avtrnfiut •Sri n
mlfiivtat ii. 5. 4 (cf. ^ 375. /5). Mfr«)«rf » murttf wu^»vf iv. 5. 5 (cf.
Tb. 6, and § 367). Aiytn n UUivty »vr«vf vii. 5. 9 (cf. § 402).

^ 43tS* 3. Attraction. A word which is properly construed other-
wise sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attraction (§ 329. N.),
especially in the poets. This sometimes results in hypaUage, or an interchange
of construction {tnraXX»y4i, exchange). Thus, E/ 3f fA £^* mt) Xiyn V^n^x**
[^« fAi Xiyntt or Xiytnt]t if you bad aboays begun your addresses to me thuSf
Soph. £1. 556. Atrv'irmv yitg . . »«r«(^«, / will begin lamentations for my
r, Eur. Andr. 1 199. Cf. §§ 427. 9, 431, 433.

%l. A verb, of which the proper ol^ect or effect is a distinct sentence, often
takes the subject (or some other prominent word) cf that sentence in the Acc,
bgr attvacUoB ; as, "Htiu alrlw.trt ^ir«« ix*h he knew [him] that he aeeu-
pied ^centre, L 8. 21. Tkt yk^ iittfStXnf r«v i^utv Mttnteap, fui «'ff»
MM'«A.«f#t/i| iiL 5. 18. "B-Xtyx** «^» nvxXf 9t»9»9 x^f^** ^'** ^^'^^^^^ ^
lb, 14. OU»f l^f»t i^» f* mmre^tt^vy^fH ir. 5. 29. 'CU kf ^
KmXXif*ax»*t ^ Urslu iv. 7. 11*

Digitized

by Google

296 SYNTAX. — ACCXJSATIVB. [BOOI II

5. PERiFimAsis. The place of a verb is often supplied by an Ace. of th§
kindred noun joined with such v^ba as v-otiv (or more frequently v-dnofAtu),
Myvyl^Ut Tifififiu, &C. ; thus, Kv^fit l^irmnv xai ti^t^fii* rHv *EXX«y«> ivoinr$^
[= V^^ru.ff% mm) fi^iP/iti^t T»us "EXAifva*], Cyrut made a review and numbering
of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeka, L 2. 9. ^l^firant ^•mrm lb. 14.
Tnv ito^tUf WattTra i* 7. 20.

6. Such periphrases sometimes take an Aoc by virtue of the implied verb ,
as, 2»ivi» fih »«} «v2^««'«3« i^vmyiiv <r«»ir«/*iMf [= i^a-ar* J, Th«
viii. 62. Th X'^i'^* »«T«Jf«/a»7f Xi/av Wm7t» [^ Ix«»A«ti<] lb. 41. 'A
Xfif ri fitr^ivf . . f9-ovihf ix^tv [= rwnJ^i/y] Eur. Here. 709. T« J* •» /m«--
rf H Xnrrtv lirxuf 3oph. (Ed. C. 583. T</ »ti raxuf i5J* «»•««■«■»» •Ifittyaf
• . 'A^ajMi^ytfVA [^ r/ wX* a»0^i«>«-A>i tl/Mt^ug *AyetfAifAUva\ Id. £1. 122.
In like manner, Tovr* K&f* t^u vrifits [==t r4vr» »a) iy^ 9r»tu\ Eur. Ixm^
fi72. Yet see §§ 333. 5, 434.

§430* 7. Ellipsis. The ver6 which governs the Ace. is sometioMS
imStted; particularly,

«.) In EMPHATIC ADDBESS ; as, OJ«f , S ri ♦•! [sc xiyat OT »ax£], Tim
Ihere, hoi you / mean^ Ai. Av. 274 (§ 343. 6). 21 J^, A rnv uvtvfat U
leQtit xa^a, <phst n xara^nl f»,n ^ti^axiitat r£i% \ Soph. Ant. 441.

/3.) In ENTREATT ; as, M^, it^U ft SiMV [sc ixtrtv»i]y rX^s /t,t v'foiaSwtUf
I beteech you by the gods, do not forsake me, Eur. Ale. 275. (Observe the
arrangement, which is frequent in earnest entreaty ; and compare, in Lat.,
Per omnea te deos oro Hor. Ode i. 8. 1. Per te ego deot oro Ter. Andr.
ui. 3. 6.)

y.) In PROHlBniON; as, Mi^ r^tias Irt [sc vtott7T%\ No more delayg!
Soph. Ant. 577. Mii fttt /lu^iavf, fttiil "iiffcofUos ^ivovs [sc Xiyt], Doni
talk to me cf your ten thousand or twenty thousand mercenaries^ Dem. 45. 1 1.
Mn fMi ir^i^aurn Ar. Ach. 345*

J.) In swearixg; as, Oy, rotV "Oxvfi^cv [sc ofitvvfu. Cf. § 428], No,
by this Olympus I Soph. Ant. 758. Ov rkf Atis ttfr^avait Id. El. 1063.^
By this eUipsis may be explained the use of the Ace with the particles vW,
»«/, and ftei (of which the two first are affirmative, and the last, unless pre-
ceded by mt, commonly negative), acc(mling to the foUowing

Special Rule. Adverbs of swearino are followed by the Accusative ;
as. Nil A/«, Fes, by Jupiter I i. 7. 9. Nee) r^ 'Sui vi. 6. 34. *A>.X«, fiuk
rovs B^uvg, ohx tyotyt tiurovg hti^M, but, by the gods, I will not pursue them^
i. 4. 8. N«i fiti. Aia, Yes, indeed I v. 8. 6.

§ 4b» # • 8. The Ace, required by a .transitive verb is sometunes omU'
ted; as, 'Ov-irt n vr^is S^m^ fitvXMrt hmrtkUmt [sc. rtiv #)«»] i. .5. 7. (X iv.
5. 11. Avxiof Hxxft [sc w !«•«•#»] i. 10. 15. Compare Tltt^tXavfws
CjT, viii. 3. 28, with ^'EXauwrdt riv lit^tf lb. 29 ; and Ha^t^Mutrnf j^
TrfTtfy, with n^««-fX«i/yA>i* xhrdlt Cyr. v. 3. 55, ^

9. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Ace is sometimes
employed, especially by the poets, «)r energy of expression ; as, "E^i^
[= Ki't^m W«'tu'\ ^oXvxtfMv ^efof Soph. Aj. 55. AJf* i^tuf» [«» m/ia rnv yn9
hutf txtx, or alfitart rh* ynt iJii/ra] lb. 376. Tiyyu imx^um 4;^w»f Id. tr.
849. Thrift fiw Eur. Sup. 1205. Cf. §§ 425, 481, 433.

Digitized

by Google

ea. L] OF DIRECT OBJECT. 288

1. Aecusative of the Direct OhfecL

^498* I. Thb Ace. is often translated into English with
a preposition ; thus,

'Ofitpg/u Si«vf nmi Stif, 1 twear by godt and godde»$e$, vi. 6. 17. OZru
ft^f yk^ «vr««v Wui^»^»Afnt for them have been gmUy of perj^try against tftem,
UL 1 . 22. *H/tf«f . . %Z vfiS*, doing well to m, L e. treating m$ wdl, ii. S. 23.
*0 h giyXts iuvmrmi Wrk iC»X§»f, the siglut te equivalent to ieven obdU, i. 5. 6.
OtXif iXX» itnufitivfi U. 2. 13. M«;^«r B^a^^tTrt, you have no fear of batHetf
i'lL 2. 20. ^uXnrrifittf»p . • H/tms, guarding against au, ii. 5. 3. *A,*'»ii\u
uirti itari^t, having run away from ^eir fathers, vL 4. 8. *0 neXaut fi
•tXirui, the jackdaw hat departed from me, L e. has ^ft me, Ar. Ay. 86. 'H/-
^xMnfUv »mi ^0Vf »mi Mf^vrtvf vr^aitttntu nvriv, we were ashamed before hoUh
gods and men to desert him, iL 3. 22. A/V;^vvira< ri ir^»yfim, he is aJutmed
of the act, Eur. Ion, 3G7. T^vf yk^ tuftCtig Sf«} ^vne^ntfrm ai ^ni^twi, for
the gods do not refoice in the death of the pious, Id. Hipp. 1340. A7 n .
Xo^vtvri, r«v r«^iav Immx*** *danoe in honor o^' Soph. Ant. 1153. *Ex<ir-
rtr . • "A^ri^Mf Eur. Iph. A. 1480.

§ 430* II. To this head may be referred the use of the
Ace. with VERBS OF MOTION, to denote the place or person to
which (§§ 339, 422) ; as,

*X^ti%Tat riw dX4^, wiU eome to a woody spot. Yen. 10. 6. 'Arrv Ejt>.
f$ii49 /MXtif Soph. (Ed. T. 35. *Hx^«« trnr^is i^x»'^* '^^^" ^^' ^ ^93.
Ilv^«tff yns frXii/r "htXnimf Eur. Med. 7. *A^i»tT» ;^^«v« lb. 12. Tiiy^t
MBtfrr«Xt7f ;^^«v« lb. 682. "BCnt rikf fuXiprnt lb. 92a X^tU r'n n Btr.
r«X«^f ;^^«Mi «'S^«'K I Id. Ale 479. Ky/#nv )* «&^»My r»fi* A. 317. '^Cnt
fUt y, 162.

NoTBB. «. Hus nse of the Aoc is chiefly poetic, and eq>ecia]ljr Einc^
Instead of the common o(»istniction with a preposition.

/3. The poets soYnetimes even join an Aec of the place with verbs of stand
ing, sitting, or fying (as implying oeet^pation) ; thos, 2rif/* at ^» i^ rifi*
k/u^n^ r^iUt, ml V \fimi* kXX»9 atfitw Ear. Or. 1251. 0«rr«vr* k»(a» lb.
S7 1. T^iwain nmfitlttv <p6tCH lb. 956. Tiir§9 . . hntn xtTrai Soph. Fh. 144.

§ 430* III. Cattsatiyes govern the Ace, together with
the case of the included verb ; as,

Mj^ /» kfmfAf^0fit nnnSf, do not remind me ef [canse me to remember]
my woes, Ear. Ale 1045 (§ 376. y), 'Ay»^yffr*» yk^ iftrnt *ni rah . •
mfltnaus iii. 2. 1 1 (§ 424. 2). 3»uXu n y«v#» it^Sraw kn^drav ^U» i Ear.
Cyd. 149. T««v ^mhtt .* ytverie* nlfmrtf PI. Rq>. 537 a (§ 375. «).
UoXXk Moi nUa nni vntrtUvk imv;^mw &/»mt PL Goi^. 522 a. See alw
S 357.

Rkmark. Hie verbs h? and xt^ axe sometimes constmed by the poets aa
eamsatives ; thas, 2) hi n^«^if#i«f , you have need of Qt needs yoa of] a Fro-
metheus, JRactk. Prom. 86 (§ 357). Uifu itaXXau ^i hi Ear. Blpp. 23. Ti
yd^ /» titi vrKihut { Ear. Sappl. 789 (cf. 2f/ n yk( vemiimt ri h7 Id. Med.
565, and § 403). Ti xr* ^'^•^ « ^^ ^' ^^"^ (^"* Person reads T/ hit f i'-
JUv, denying that this use of x€^ '^ Attic). 1\ x^ • • «m)«w y» 14.

Digitized

by Google

9QP STKTAZ. — APCyfATlVE. [bOP|[ W

2. Accusative of the E^ect.

% 4l3'It The EFFECT of a verb includest whatever the
agent does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Ace.
expressing or defining its action. The Ace. thus employed is
either, «. a novn kindred^ in its origin or signification^ to tbs
verh^ or /?. a neuter adjective used substantively^ or /. a noun
simply defining or characterizing the action,

m. KiNDBED Noun.

had ffomed ^is ncce$9, vi 3. 6. 'Cls «»/v^vy«v fiUv ^Sfith A<^ teeun a Hfe we
Uve, Eur. Med. 248. ^r^avnynfofrei ifitl raiirnf rhf wv^amytav i. S. 15-
Tafju7v ya/Mf rav^i Eur. Med. 587. Ti <r(««'yf XSn t«9 TmvpfTcir4f yi>MV i
lb. 1041. *^Eitrtf*tXovvrai ira^aw iirtfitiXtiaf PL Prot. 325 e. B«^<XiuB» itatrmv
iiKMiardrnv fiartktvofAtvM PL Leg. 680 e. ^tvyiraf Jtutpvyim* lb. 877 c
T«v hfiv MMXoOfAttov itiKifMV Wr^arfuffrnt Th. i. 112. *H«^ay ^^o^nfitu ^tnit
£ur. Ph. 1379. Ilt!itif*» »ovpot U ni/f i^n^art iEsdi. Pers. 305. Atutmtf
^«ir/«tf Vt^yfia i^eixtfrof lb. 79. Tifv^' 0 ^'^•wfiaxai* Xh^av Soph. (Ed. C 1166.
*n^;^0«>y«'0 rfi9 »a^it»/ay vL 1. 7. Tlo^turth i* ^fuf r»vf ir^Tw$ fraJfAt^
U. 2. 12. "Ex^w rh Sin iu. 1. 6. "^^if hyn<nw«M . . Hn iv. 1. 24. T^i.
«*! r«i r^i^^fiui Siwt Hdt. yi. 1 r9.

Beuabks. 1« In like maimer, an adjective sometimes takes an Aoc. of the
Ipnjlred noun (§ 424. 1) ; as, Mitri rt tf<p»s m r^r Ixtnttt g^^flat, ftnrt kftM-
ths «^» eifiuifimv, being neither wise wiUi their wisdom, nor foolish with their fol*
ly, PL ApoL 22 e. 1Smx»us vtarat x»»iav PL Rep. 490 d. A0vX«f rkt ^-
y'trrat B^ttvrtmi xui i»vXtm$ lb. 579 d.

2. It win be observed, that usually an adjective is joined ynih the Ace.
of the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for an
adverb. Thus, *Xls &xiv^Sv0v fiSew l^£fi.$v = 'fU atxtt^vvMt ^Sfitv. This ad-
jective not unfirequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun ; as, T0 Ht^ftxh
'fix**'*'* ['^ hx^f^^ ^i- ^* ^0* Hence appears to have arisen the c(»i8tnio-
tion in § 432.

^ 4L33* fi. Nbuteb Adjectivb.

Tttmvra /th vrt^aitixit vttaura ^ A. t^i, [he has done such things, and
sajs such things] such has 6ee^ his conduct, and such is his languags, I. 6. 9.
Xiyui ovx <^;^«^i«'ra iL K'l3. T»vt« x^^igantTcu lb. 10. Ti^ Avx»*»
Uu^t L 2. 10. Mfi^U '^%uitv0en L 9. 7. W%ya ^^wnf»s iii. 1. 27. *A»i.
x^ayi TI •••Xi^ixiir viL 3. 33. 'SL^ntarhti ri rp fr^xrt^, to maie soms
use 0/ the army, Cyr. viiu 1.14. Ti aorS Xi^^V * ^^ would you do with
him? lb. L 4. 13. T/ vtftitiw »«) ^tip^avrtxig fixiirtif i why do yom
(ook gram and thoughtful? Eur. Ale 773. K«X»» /SxStr* Id. Cyd. 553.
Kxi9'ro9 (IXtTti Ar. Yesp. 900.

Remarks. 1. This construction (upon which see § 431. 2) ia closely al-
ii^ with the adoerbial use of the neuter adjective § 440), and is, perhaps^
its origi^.

2. The Me, of the neuter adjective is very extensive in its use, and oftea
occurs where a substantive would have been constnicted differently ; thua,
T^#i ftUrt «rXi«yixr«v »i>x p0';^i/vir«, It fnh rf B-i^tt r#? nkUv, i» h r^

Digitized

by Google

^

en, 1.] OF EPFSOT. -*- DOVBLB AOOUSATIVB. 801

Xtif^t rtS ^^;^««# Agw. 5. 3. XP. 'Of^^m rt\ AIK. T«if ^v;^fvi
At. Plat. 896.

S. The Ace of the neuter pronotm is sometimes used to denote that on oe»
eowU of which any thmg is done (viewed originally as the effect or reeuH of
the action); as, *A V 9x009, but what I came for, Soph. CEd. C. 1291.
T« vr' iyi t^itivhv, therefore [on acoomit of these things] / made haste, iv. 1.
21. T; rA ity^k Mr«#Ct#i<av, 'why/ vL 3. 25. T«vr* i^inifkn* Id. (Ed.
T. 1005. 'AXX' »hrk rmura mmi y«w Hm PI. Plot SIO e. Ni^r«r«f V
If n^Mi^lwv i xmi fu y^t i9r%\%infA'^%9 'Btxa, Hec IS. *E»«7v« ^ ktOfui,
irt fMi ^MiTMem. iv. 3. 15.

NoTB. So with ;^fii>Ms thitig, expressed, Ti ;^#ii/m( »fr««i i «% db ifnw
A« th^ret Eur. Herad. 633. See lb. 646, 709 ; Id. Ale 512 ; &c

§ 433* y. DsFoimvB Noun.

<t»iC«y fixiit»t9, lookmg terror, Mach, Sept 498. *H fiwXh . . KXi^p*
fivrv, the eemate looked muetard, Ar. Eq. 629. 'A^n Wt^uiratf .£sch. Sept
53. *Ax^ii«» Wtttt Ar. Av. 1121. 'At^ttv r«v 2ir»Xj»«» vi. I. 6.
*EXa'i)«f XiytttL 2. 11. *0Xvfii9ria uin»v»o'ri, having conquered in tht
Olympic gamci, Th. i. 126. Nm»ffx«rf vauf^axi^t Id* vii. 66, Nimxhxo.
r« •vriv «'ay»^«Ti«y Symp. L 2. 'H9r«v/^«vr0 ti irmi%s (Mf eirmit»9, • .
^dXn* ti »mi flTvy^^v »«) ir«7»^i»r<«v Iti^m iv. 8. 27. n«XX«|
0^dxng irmfrm IscMcr. 71 e. Xt^nytvvrtt ^mg') Affie-tm, Dem. 535. 13.

3. Double Accusative.

^434. The same verb often governs two ac-
cusatives, which may be,

I.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the effect, in apposition with
each other (§ 331) ; as with verbs of makings appointing^
choosing, esteeming^ naming, dsc. Thus,

'BmriXim n Ivtin^mt^ they made you king, vH. 7. S2. Sr^Aruyty ti mMv
kiriittlii, and he had appointed him general,!. 1,2, Tlmri^a ^fiti inaXttrt,
you called me foAer, vii. 6. 38. *0m; V kv iaivriv tXnrai rr^«nfy«v v. 7.
28. OSg ti 2v(M Si«tff iv«/(*«^«v i. 4. 9. *0v *rv«^a^f AMfeif^ny «'«rii^
Eur. Sup. 1218. "OtoftM ri n uaXtTv iftZf XV^* * I^ I^^^ ^^^* ^f^-
rr«»XSi RXm^avto t«v uiit ivt^Ut /tM* i^^^M^ar* kyaiiit PL Meno, 93 d.
0i}( nytfAitnt eriX%M9 ivrasitvftt^ft PL Rep.' 546 b. Ku^h t» er^tinv/im
mmritii^t }»)i»« fM^, Cyme divided the army into twehe parte, Cyr. viL
5. 13.

NoTR. The infinitive $Thu is often used irith these verbs ; as, N«/im^« yk^
ipMt I/m) iTvm Ml) ir«T^i^» »«2 fiXtvt L 3. 6. 2«^<rrj^» ^ tm Ufuml^tpet , •
cjf if»)^ ibm PI. Plrot 311 e.

§ 43«S« II.) The DiBECT OBJECT and the effect, not in
apposition ; as with verbs of doing, saying, ^. Thus,

Ef rif rt kyatif 4 nmnU er»t^0%t%9 ahrn, if any one had done him any

good or evil, L 9. 11. Tk ^iyifrm nnxk l^ya^i /»!»«< rkg itiXut PI. Rep.

495 b. *H)i»i$r«^tf revTtf •»)•» vii. 6. 22. *Hx/«m( rmvr 4SfiX««-ti

itrnfrnt IHm. 855. 7. ^AvrtrUetrfni iUnf Ix^^*^* Eur. Herad. 859

2t>

Digitized

by Google

803 SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE- [bOOK IQ

TmSra nmi »«/vC^ir* mMv Id. Bac 616. *Orav U ra7t r^ayaf^ieus mXXH
>.»vs ra Ux»Tm xiyttwif, 'say the worst things to each other/ Mem. ii. 3.
9. II0X3S 9-($s vKXwf fit^ii ilit7ir»f Soph. £1. 520. T« # t ^ v ' l«-ii » « -
X«^' l»%h»»$ Id. Aj. 1107. "Emi »Xv«f, «S vvv rv niv^* mrtfAal^tts wiXtp
Id. (Ed. T. SS9. '£^fv#i(^«» •»)» #« Id. (Ed. C. 1145. T/ . . y^d^
ypii$9 it n fMVwetii U rm^ifi Eor. Tro. 1188. TtfZrn t^^'t i;^^«i^<r
r* lyti Soph. £1. 1034. *n^»«r«» «ri^vr«f row fr^ariwrdtf r»tn fttyU'rtvf
if»»vg Th. viiL 75. M«Xir«f ^ iy^aypetra rnv ^^a^iiy ravmv PL
ApoL 19 a. Tm^ti fu lvfT»xi*^t^ 7*^^** Eur. Tro. S57. Krvflrnrs
xfira fAiki&v trXttytiv Id. Or. 1467. *AA.X' ^7y«v 7^»«ir #0 imc^a »««-«#•
/«0«>« Id. HeL 835. 'Avmitig-ai ^•vXfiat ioayyiXim f$ Ar. Plat. 764.
"ilLXTtminf i rii9 &» "Mm^Sih fudx"* ^'^ ^m^ta^tus ftnnfttf /Rftchin.
79. 36.

§ 436* ni.) Two OBJECTS differently related, but which
are both regarded as direct ; as with verbs of asking and re-
quiring^ of clothing and undothing^ of concealing and deprvo"
ing^ of persuading and teachings &c. Thus,

Kv^v mirttt 9rX»m, to ask vetseU cf Cyrus, or to asft C^n» for oetteb
i. 3. 14. M«V«i /Mi K^v^ffi r«f>r«, i& not Aide <Au /rom me, .£sch. Pr. 625.
*H/euBf ^ kvrtfTt^tt T»v /Aivfiit, but us he robs of our pay^ vii. 6 9.^
^ I ) a «* » ( < y rhv ffr^arnyUt^ to teach you the military art^ Mem. iii. i . 5. 11^
rl /A% ravra l^vr^f ; Mem. ill. 7. 2. 'Avn^i^' n^f ^#wi r i» *IXi^ «»•
Mt/;, ..ay}}^«^r« r i/»< ytfy«rx«, <r«r)ai t« Eur. IjA. T. 661. T«rAtfr« «^
^ Ziv, «r(«r7(i«r« Soph. Aj. 831. 'Tftas Tt 0 fia^tXtht r« cvXa avmtrs
ii. 5. 38. *E«» «'^«rT*fri atwrw t« ^C^f^'^'h ' demand,* * exact,* vii. 6. 17
Oi A«x^«} . . riXn Ttuf xarairXiofraf il^iktyov iEschin. 69. 29. TmSrst
it^$v»mXt7T» root fvMPrat Cyr. 1. 4. 4. Tovr» ftlt ^ /Uff mvaytia^i f»
PL Rep. 473 a. T«»^ly latvrtv [sc ;^<riwya] Uimy n/i^/t^t C}T. i. 3. 17.
T«» ^tifitof vfiSv ^Xetitecv Hfi^'ifx*^ Ar. Lys. 1 156. 'Ex^i;*r» l/ul x^ffni-
^Mv Wfinra Msch, Ag. l'J69. *A^atftta'lfat revs U^txtutraf "lEXXfiimf ri^w
yh i.«3. 4 (cf. § 41 1). "O; ^i . . -^tXav SfAfi avrov^artts Soph. (Ed. C
866. . T^y /Mi* yk^ Sf«y rov^ m^awwt fftf^vXttxAft Dem. 616. 19. 2)
ravTA ^ff T%i§»tii Soph. (Ed. G. 797. Sv ri ytt^ ^1 iv^vf rtvra . . iitmi^
iivts Cyr. i. 6. 20. 0^» iti^n rwri y h lixfi rt Soph. Ant. 538. "Of
ri KttXvrn r« )(^v Id. PhiL 1 24 1 . ri/v«r»' a^iVrar Xi^va* 'A;^i^«yr/Ay «*••
^%urm,t Eur. Ale. 442. IIw ^* v<ri^«7i<f «-«J« ; Eur. Hec 812 (cf. '0
»«X0««( /M* «7;^ir«i, §428). Xf«« y/(ir« . . alXfitiv (. 224. Atar^iCif^a
'Axeutus St yeifAov fi, 204. See also ^ 430.

(11.) Accusative op Specification.

^437. Rule XXII. An adjunct applying a
word or expression to a particular part, prop-
erty, THING, or person, is put in the Accusative;
as,

T^ x*'i* hhfitUav, [bound as to the hands] with his hands bound, vi 1. 8«
H»r»fAift KtUvdt 09 » fit a, tZ^»s ^ud vXii^ttv, a river, Cydnus by name, two
plethra in breadth, i. 2. 23. Tldfra x^airtarot, best in every thing, i. 9. 3
(cf. §359. /»). *AitorfitnPi»ru rag »%^ttXa.(, beheaded, ii 6. I, 29. T« Zrm
Ttr^virnfAMv iiL I. 31. &«ivfAtiruu ri ntiXXtt »mt ri fitiytttt ii. 3. 16.

Digitized

by Google

CH. l.J OP SPECIFICATION. — OP EXTENT. 8©3

llXniof m W;^/Xi«i iv. 2. 2. Timt^ttg . • §h mXXw iUfr»f 1^$vs rl ftti»*t
»») ri itXmraf tivMi, WMttiXaut il rk fSrttf »a.) rk f^«'^««'^f» «'»»r«
IvrtyfAifvt mvfiifitufV. 4. 32. Atifif u/u r»6m9 rjf» rix^n* CjT. viu.4. 18.
n«A.4v rnt •i'ilt tbiriav viL 1. 25 (cf. § 393. y), 'Or* H /am ;^^«'j^Mi
lr«iL5. 23. Cf. §§ 369, 418. 3.

§ 43 8* Rkmarks. ft. This use of the Ace is oft«ii termed tyntc
docket from its analogy to the rhetorical figure bearing that name.

fi. Where a verb is in this way followed by two accusatives, the constmo*
tion (which is most frequent in Epic poetry) may be often referred to the
^^^tifiia Ktt^' 7X*9 »mi fiii(§S (^334. 9); as, Utitof ri t^of ^vytv %^x§t ciif-
TM9, What language has eecaped [you, the hedge of the teeth] the hedge of your
teeth! «. 64. T^yyi . . AiV i^ria ^vfMf T. 406. Cf. § 41.S.

y. An Aoc of specification sometimes introduces a sentence ; as, T«^
fftitTM "EXXn^etfy rovt iv r^ *A.fif tlxavvTatt, •iitU tt g-m^lg Xiytrmi, i2
itrovT»4, 'but as to the Gre^l/ Cyr. ii. 1. 5. Ti filv »vf ^vvray/ia riit
rirt w^Xtniat »«) r«v XC^**** *''"' *^^ XC^f^*^** htrtXig-mfittv, V^u^xavvrtf
%tinX»tTat Isocr. 264 c To ^ «r«v«v r«y xttrilt r«v wiXtfiavi fitti yiimrmi n
VtfXvf Th. ii. 62. T«vr ity^99ifAtvt rtvrtvf , • iniin ^t^tr^^rasv PL Leg*
761 e. — This construction may usually be referred to anacoluthon or eUiptis,

y The Aoc. is sometimes used in exclamationSf to specify the object of
emotion (cf. §§ 343. 2, 372. •, ^; as, 'Lw, m Xiy*ims /a 0^99 mn^MSt oh, oh
for the fate of the mehdhue ni^dingale, .£ech. Ag. 1 146. Aiivo yt rit x^
^Oxtb ri9 v'm^k r«tff fi(»r»tH «/;^0^iMy, 1/ ftnii^on vtrnirf i ^dXn Ar. Av«
1269. — This construction, whidi is unfiiequent, should periiaps be referred to
•Dipsis.

(ill.) Accusative op Extent.

^439. Rule XXIII. Extent of time and
SPACE is put in the Accusative (cf. ^^ 378, 420) ;
as,

«. TiMB. "EfAtMP ftfti^mf Wri, he remained eeven dags, i. Q, 6. *'E2dtt(0»
«r«Xvf X(**** ^* ^* ^* ^^* mlxt^itU Uiavrcp ii. 6. 29. "KvXto* fifAi^mp xai
wvxTx vi. 1 . 14. TL»(tvi/Aif»t r» XiT»f rns nfitf»e iii* 4. 6. Tevs fth ym^
xvvat v«y( ;^«Xi«'«vi rkf fith nf/ii^f itiia^tf rkf il vuxrxf it^taivt • tovt$9 ^^
fiv f§0^(0tnTt, rk^ 9VXT» fU9 ^iftf'in, T9IV il nfti^av i^n^trt V. 8. 24. 01 t^m-
x»9rm, irn ytyvirit, * thirty years old,* ii. 3. 1 2. Tni* ^vyari^a rav xtfAm^x'*
iv«rffy if^c^«y yiyatfAnfa>%fH9 iv. 5. 24. T^«rifv ftfti^xf mvrtv Uxovrot Th. viii. 23.
Aixartv atixf^T^uf ir»s Eur. Bhes. 444. *0t vUmxi rmvrm t^/c frn, ' these
three years,* Lys. 109. 12.

/3. SpACB. *EJ^XtiV9U %tk ^(vyimi ffrtJ/Mt Tv«, ^m^a^aiyyas ixrttj he adr-
vaneee throu^ Phrygia one daj^B-march, eight parcuangs, L 2. 6. 'A«'t;^«vr«
rw ^TttfAW 0Tmii»ut «'tvrt»«i)t»« ii. 4. 1 3. lAv^ittf lf*i yt xmrct ynt ifyviott
ytvUfixt vii. 1 . 30. T« fiiX»f ttvrSv xm) ItvXm^itD [sc. hmrr*)fitm] ^t^tr^oj rSt
Iltf^ixHv ff^tvhnZ* iii. 3. 1 6. '0«'«r«y ^\ x^thtttlluaf u "EXXtivif , rt^wrn
iftiXsf Wtn>mj^»0(t7v ^««;^«/civ0v« Hu iiL 3. 10.

Note. In the simple designation of time and place, the oENmvE common-
ly expresses the time and place m which (■> 378) ; the dative, at which (i 420) ;
imd the agcusattve, through which. To a certain extent, however, the officiet
9t the •e\'6ral cases blend with each other.

Digitized

by Google

904 SYNTAX. — VOCATIVB. [bOOX m

(iv.) Adverbial Accusativb.

^440. Rule XXIV. The Accusative is often
used ADVERBIALLY, to cxprcss degree^ manner^ ot"
devj &LC. ; as,

To^f r«» r^««'«». tn this way, or tfnUf L I, 9. T«» ttltrw r^iirow tI. 5. 6
(cf. T^ «vr^ ^e*^V iv. 2. 13, and § 418). Tix.»s ^l f7^i, and Jhudfy [at
the end] he $aidj ii. 3. 26. *A^;^ji» fth ^Xtvrnfeu, *in the first place,' 'at
all,* yii. 7. 28. *0 «(^X«f kx/^hv ^iiCam iv. S. 26. 1»vt$v ^i^tv^ on ac-
eount of thisj Mem. i. 2. 54. Kvvit ^i»n9, Uke a dog^ iEsch. Ag. 3. K«i
^•v y i^xiif, ' opportonely/ Soph. Aj. 34. *Xm^iett iHxt^rit At. Ach. 23.
T*i» J^nv i^etymuv Hdt. ii. 2. SvrT^mr^ai rifv r«;^/«'rify [sc. ^^ov] L 3.
14 (cf. i. 2. 20). Ovxtftfv, i^n, »«i w*!^ ^«XkfMU 0vptC§u>.ivu9 rnv yt irftirm*
litt^j^na-»fu», ' for the present,* Mem. iii. 6. 10. See § 3^0. 3.

§441* Remabks, «. This mle applies eqsecially to the Aoc nemt,
of adjectives J both sing, and plur. ; as, T« «^;^«(r«v, formerly, i. 1.6. T^
fuv . ., r» Ii, partly . ., parUy, iy. 1. 14, y. 6. 24. M<»f «> ili^vyt W /m^
Kara^tr^a/inviu i. 3. 2. Tu^'h perhaps, yi. 1. 20. T« A.M«r0», henceforth^
ii. 2. .5. E7 rivtff fiXytt ^f r« r«>/&« ^i/rii n v^«^^ n «^^0ri^« PI. Gorg.
524 b. T»fvT»t yk^ *Xn6n irt^i^v /Sar/Xit/f i. 8. IS. ©fz/ctfu^i^ri^M ^
«r«X« iv. 5. 36 (cf: § 419). See especially § 162.

/}. A strict analysis would refer the adyerbial Ace in part to the Ace. of
^<!c£ (§ 432), in nart to that of specification (§ 437), and in part to that of
extent (§ 422. m.).

^ F. The Vocative.

^443. Role XXV. The Compellative
of a sentence is put in the Vocative (^^ 329. N.,
340. a) ; as,

Kxia^X* ««< n^tf^f vi, . . »vx Ivrt « n w'Mirri, Clearchut and Proxetms^
you know not what you </6, L 5. 16. ^Xl ^mvfMtffuiratrt «»^(*r«'i, 0 mosl
wonderftdman, iiL 1. 27.

§ 443* Remabks. ». The t^ o/* address, in Greek, as in other
languages* is commonly £.

/S. The term of respectful address to a company of men is kfi^tg, with
which may be likewise connected a more specific appellation ; thus,

*0^«ri fihy Z kfl(tt, you see, gentiemen, iii. 2. 4. "Axi^ts ^rfmnSTtu, ^
BmvfUX^Ti, feUowsoldiers, do not wonder, u 3. 3. *fl iv^^H "EkXnvif IL 3. 1 8
*0 Iv^^ff ^r^timyti »»i X,§;^£yi iii. 1. 34.

Digitized

by Google

olS.] abibotitb.— *aobebiceict. 805

CHAPTER II. *

ST19TAX OF THE ADJECnVE.

- 1 Agreement of the Adjective,

^444. Rule XXVI. An Adjective agrees
mth its subject in gender j number^ and case.

Hie word adjeetive is here used in its largest sense (§ 7S). Thus, n«^.
hi^t ftiyttt ky^itt* ^f/*>» itXti^nt, a largepark fuU of wild beoMti, L2,
7* Tif wm%i Aft^oriftt, both thg chUdrem, i, 1. 1. A/ 'I*>y<»«) ^ikttf
. .liid/Mttti lb. 6. Ttv^i rif r^i^tn lb. 9. *£;^*>y Wxirmg ;^iX/«tff
»«} ff'iXrcrri^f 0^f »«; •»r«»«r/«tff L 2. 9. 0i«vf wafr«n tuti «'ii-
r«f vL 1. SI.

Notes. «. An a^ective either assists in describing the thing which is
■pdien of, or forms a part of that which b said a^ it. In the former case,
the adjective is said to be used as an ^pith^ (i«'iVir0v, from \w$Tl§nfAt, to add) \
in the latter, as an attribute (attributus, ascribeS). In the sentence, " A good
man is merdfol,'* " good " is an epithet, and " merciful " an attribute. The
l^greement of the attribuf with its subject is fiir less strict than that of die
tpithet ; while the agreement of the pronoim (§ 495) is still less strict than
that of the attribute,

fi. An exception to this rule, which is merely apparent, consists in the ose
«f the maeculim form for the femtnime in a^jectiyes of three terininationB
(S 133. y, ^).

^ 44tS« Remarks. 1. Infinitives, clauses used substan-
tively, and words or phrases sp<^en of as such, are regarded
as neuter ; thus,

"ESniif ifn llytfiiivm mru9, it would be fooS^ to aek a guide, LS, 16* An
X»9 it trt iyyvt irtv fim^sXiut ^9 ii. 3. 6. Ov r« ^9 wtf) irXiUrsm wm-
ri»9, &XXit ri iZ ^ FL Crito, 48 b. 'Tf^Uf, Z Si^^u 'A^iim7«i • ri V
*TM£I2 hruf tSitttf rk9 wiXt9 Xiytt, Tou, meu of Athene ; and when I eay rov,
I mean the etate, Dem. '255. 4. T« MH »») rl OT ir^on/i/^ivft, the not
fmd the jropri^fixedf PL Soph. 257 b. I^n^tu . . r^ »»i* m&ri, to uu the
phraee neJ* uiri lb. S52 c.

KoTB. Grammarians often speak of a word, with an ellipeb of the part of
speech to which it belongs ; as, "Ernv « [sc rvyW^ci] AkXu «vt) r»v li,
the [coniunction] aXXA ie instead of H Soph. CEd. C. 237, Schol. At/**!/ 4
[sc «'ei/irif] ^li, Ithe proposition] itd te wanting^ lb. 1291, SchoL

^446. 2. In COMPOUND construction, both syllepsis
and zeugma are frequent (§ 329. N.). («.) In syllepsis^ when
persons of both sexes are spoken of, the adjective is masculine ;
when things are spoken of, it is commonly neuter ; as,
26»

Digitized

by Google

306 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVB. [bOOK IIU

XfMt>MT»ut ytytvfiftMVf Cyr. iii. 1. 6. AJht ri xal irXlvht x») ^vXtt tuu
»i^»fMt itraKTMs (aXv t^fiftfAtta 9V^h ^^^i^^tfiM Wrn Mem. iii. 2. 7.

(/?.) In zeugma^ the adjective sometimes agrees with the most
^prominent substantive, sometimes with the nearest ; as,

'E«rT» ifidXivt »«J tifiuoCoXttf *A.rrixavs, seven Attic oboU and a half, i, 5. 6-
Uv^ifitv^s ' • T'v ^T^t/tCixt^n* »«) T»s 9KVS Av'tXnXtffiira Th. yiii. 63. . I^u»
im fi ytnaTxett fuv»^f*»^»v^ae Cyr. vii. 5. 60. Mnr^of ri »ai reo foS «r«l|lr
Soph. (Ed. T. 417.

§ 44 7. 3. Ellipsis. The subject of the adjective »
often omitted, especially if it is a familiar word. The words
most frequently omitted are,

a. I^Iasculine, avfi^ or &v4^M9rest man, XV^^** time; as, ^otra^i ft t»a-
0^ro9 rav$ Xaurov [sc. av^^a;], and that each one should arrange his Mn [men],
I. '2. 15. TaI» iret^a fiaa-iXiaie i. 1. 5. Tti/s ^tvyotrast the exUeSy lb. 7. Tmtf
meixov^yevs xa) xhtxovg [sc ay^^jw^rtft/;] i. 9. i 3. *lS.fTKvfiei tf*uvxf tifci^as r^Uf
iy if [sc X^^*v\ Ki/^0s tffrixrf /vf y i. 2. 2> >. *Ey tovtm xa) *&ti0tXtvs 3i|A.«f «» L
10. 6 (cf. 'Ev revT^ rif XV^V i^* 2. 17).

/3. Feminine, ^vvn, woman^ yn or x'^S** ^*^ *^^ff t^^^y* fi/t(^«, <^ayt A^**S
hand, yvuftfiy opinion^ fAot^n, portion, m^x, season ; as, 'H YLiXtrra [sc ytfVH\
i. 2. 1 2. Uo^tvtr^ut atf ha (piXixg 11* 3. 27 (cf. *'Oms hx (f>iXixs tUs X'^C^
itv-ulu i. 3. 14). E/; r^y (piX'txv \Xh7v vi. 6. 38 (cf. £/; ^/X/av ^fi* x^ixMT§
V. 1. 1. See also 5 421. /3). Tijy Xw<rn» [sc S^ov] Tro^iuirofAiSx iii. 4. 46.
Ka/ ttVTd} /&iy ay We^tufiyiffxv p at aXXot^ rx ft inrol^uytx ovx np xXXi^ «| txptj
ixSfjyui iv, 2. 10. 'lifTts fAxxfXf iii. 4. 17. T^ uffrt^a'a [sc if/Kf^a] '^
i^xvno-u¥ ai ^oXifAiat, avhi r^ r^ln^t v^ ft Ter«^r»! iii. -J. 37 (§ 420)« *E» ft
<T ^'?'? [^^' ^•'^'3 ^* ^' ^ 2' '^^ ^*l'^ <"* *^* '^V^^ i. 5. 1 . 'Ev x^ivTt^x vi.
1. 14. 'E* rns vtxurns [sc yvAr^u;] ivr^xrrav irxvrx, ' according' to the vota
of the majority,' vi. 1. 18. *Acra Tins t^ns [sc. /tta/^ay], on equal termSy Th. L
15. *E<ri r^ ?rsi xxt ofAolx Id. i. 27. *H fri^^aifAtvn, destiny ^ Eur. Hec 43.
•A«-« o-^aJruf [sc af^af], from the firsts Th. i. 77.

y. Neuter, ^^xyfix or xfif**^* affair, thing, fAi^as, part, irXnfiat, coHectum,
hodtff cr^xrtv/AX, military force, xi^xg, wing of an army, x^V'^t ptace, ground;
as, Tx fUf ^h Ki/^09 [sc. ^^xy/xxrx^ , ,, TX fifiiTt^a L 3. 9 (cf. Tie 'Oi^ufSit
ir(xyftx*rx vii. 2. 32). EiV re tttov [sc. XZ^C-*^ *• ^' ^- T* Wtr^^ux, the
necessaries of life, i. 5. 10. T^ Svn, really, v. 4. 20. Btva^Svrag *Ex.Xn-
fnxx, Xenophon*s Affairs of Greece, or Greek History. ^E^txvfiunA ri [sc
fiti^as^ rni <pxXxyyaf i. 8. 1 8. Ta ft^ia rav xi^Xras lb. 4. Tau . . l^tvtxaS
Jsc. ^XnSavi or vr^xrivfAXTai^, the mercenary force [= taJ? |tya>y, t»c merHe-
naries'], i. 2. 1. Toy 'EXXwyiXfly [= rZv 'ExXji'yAiy] i. 4. 13 (cf. i. 2. l). T«
^vviCTHxaf (cf. T^r^ ^vvt^To/a-i) Th. viii. 66, Ta d-^Xt; ^«^ «*«( ^XX«y alxvfit
x^ffitiuv Eur. Here 536. T0 xa/vov to fifitin^ov v. 7. 1 7. T0 ft tvaivuptav L 3.
15 (cf. T« tVMvvfitav xi^xf i. 8. 4). 'Ey vto hfiJtXif [sc. X'^(^v] ^^* 2» 16. 'A^i
rtfi/ v'v/'uXtfv i/« Ttf v'^atb iSxXXav iii. 4. 25. See also § 379. a.

Notes, (a.) In cases of familiar ellipsis, the adjective is commonly said
CO be used substantively. The substantive use becomes especially prominent in
•uch expressions as, TaTs fiiv uuiri^oti iutrfttvi^i, ' your foes,' H. Gr. v. 2. S3 ;
•O T Ixtivav Ttxeiv, * his father,' Eur. El. 3S5. (b.) The substantive omitted
if lometimes contained or impUed in another word ; as, ^AfitvyiaXiva* U rm

Digitized

by Google

•-H; 2.] * SB OF NEVTER. 807

WtKfSv [sc. AfnuyitiXMv} iv. 4. 13. Titt^ytTt rif filt irtXXnv [sc. yyi*] Ar«
RccL 592. KjbX«(7#» y 'I«»«rrn» ^i • rturo [sc 0V0^] ^a^ trarTi^ thro EuT.
i^. 1 2. (c.) In the phrase Iv n/uiri^tfy, m our palace^ at our court (Udt. L S5,
yii. 8. 4), there is either a doable ellipsis for the sake of dignity (Iv tifAtri^^it
§txov ^ttfiMfiv) ; or a blending of the two forms of expression, iv h/Mtf o7»ff
and if iif/UTi^f »f»^

§44 8. 4. Many words which are commonly employed
as substantives are properly adjectives, or may be used as
such. Thus,

'O^frtit TH indent Mff (xnd Orontes, a Persian nuxn, L 6. I. *'X1 afv^^w
^r^ttviSrtki^ . . ^v^^aIv wr^mrny!*^ iii. 2. 2. *Av^(« vf«v/«y Cyr. ii.
2. 6. Nt«v/«f kiytus Eur. Ale. 679. "^XXnf rts ivn^ Cyr. vi. 3.
11. *ExXiiv' U $4x»f Eur. Med. 1331. 2r»Uv y *^XXifv» Id. Herad. 130.
'£xx«t)«f yni Soph. Phil. 256. 2r^«er/a( 'EXA.«^0f Eur. Rhes. 233.
rc/v«rx« T^««^c Id. Andr. 867. T^«^^«( x^i^vU Id. El. 1001. 2xi;^})v if
«7/Mv .£sch. Prom. 2. Ti;;^«i 1\ ^trrt^ Id. Ag. 6G4. — These words, as sub-
stantives, are commonly appellations off persons or countries, M^y ytnn, yn,
Ac, being understood.

§ 449. 5. Use of the Neuter. The substantive use
of the neuter adjective (§ 447. a) exhibits itself in a variety of
forms. Thus,

«.) A neuter adjective with the article often supplies the place of an a6"
tiract notin; as, T« )' k^rXwt »a) r§ itXnfii XtifjuT^t re mt/re rf iiXtPt^ iTvam,
Imt nncerUy and truth he thought to be the same with foUy, ii. 6. 22. Svv r^
}<»«/y (cf. Mir« i^$»im.s) lb. i H. Tc ^aXi^rcv [= n ;^«Xi«'0rif(] r»v trvtv/Mi-
T»f iv. 5. 4. Ov yaif i^tiftif irr/v i i^t^v* ro m'oXv xeu ri oXiyov, *the much
and the little,* vii. 7. :t6. T« vri^riv [==: *» vrUrtf] lli. i. 68. Aim, ri avaU
0^tir0f vfAiit lb. 69. *twi yk^ rsu ^t^tx»(»y( rni 9i»nt Id. vii. 73. To y
Xftiv Tr^iiviAw Eur. Med. 1 78. T^ ^^xAXcrr^vn rns yvtifitttft the [differing]
difference of o^ptnion, Th. iii. 1 0 (Thuc. is especially fond of this use of* the
Partic). T« ^iv hhit mvrou . ., ri ^\ ^a^rtft/v, his [being afraid] fe(ir . .,
htU his confidence. Id. L 36. *£y rf f4.ii fAiXiritrt lb. 142.

/3.) Neuter acyectives (both with and without the article) are used with
prepositions to form many adverbial phrases ; as, 'Avi rov mtrofieircvt of their
own accord, i. 2. 1 7. *Ev yt rf f«vf^^, openly, i. 3. 21 . Atit r«;^tA>v, rapid'
fy, i. 5. 9. 'E^ Uw iii. 4.47. '£« rti* ItnarSr iv. 2. 25. 'A*** r»v ^^iir«9
iv. 3. 9. KjBTft raurti, m (Ae «ame way, v. 4. 22. *£«•) 'htl^m. vi. 4. 1. Am^
<ratfif, throughout, vii. 8. 11.

§ 490* y.) Neuter adjectives are used in connection with words of
difi^vnt gender and number (commonly as appositives, § 331) ; as, 4>«Ci^4(.
rmm V k^nftim, and toUtude is the most terrible thing of all, iL 5, 9 (cf. Svf*^
CsvXh ii^o xvif** ^ Theag. 122 b). Ti «Zv raura Urif t ii. 1. 22. Tavg
tk ^TttfMvs i9'0(»f 99/itiZtTt iifeu iiL 2. 22. 'M.uxnvmt fux^iv «v, Mycena was a
small affair, Th. L 10. EuCm» y»f avrsig . . wsivTtc fTv, for Eubcsa was every
thing to them, lb. viii. 95. 'Ar^ivSrrf^tfv yuwh Avi^ie PI. Rep. 455 e. "At^^tf
H iiftirtfM irXwe'tM iiV)v tviiv lb. 556 d. ^Enrafm ri fiti^iv iTvtfi Eur. Rhes.
818. 11^;^ rif «v^v [sc 0vr«] lb. Ph. 598. TJiv /in^h uf ri ^iv Soph.
EL 1166. T«i;r» ^ ^vv«r«v i^cvn, 'an impossibility,* PL Pamu 160 «•

Digitized

by Google

906 8TNTAX OF Tfl£ ASJECTIVBr [bOOK Itf

Aju^m tut^M w »»^f \ Id. Hipp. Haj. 288 c. "^lyt f ;Xr«rw wiXif E«v
Med. S29. Otftat ykf vf*ii r^r^i yn* Ktftvfiiat rk ^^Zr ictg^ett Jb. 916.
K^ivd^m. V ifrHv tSp ifuiv r« fiikrarm j£8ch. Eum. 487. — In these casefl^
■n adjective agreeing in gendei and namber with the sabstantive would either
express a different idea, or would expi»8s the same idea with less emphasis.

^.) The neuters itXtUf or rXMv, fttTdv or lx«rr«v, ?r«y, Ae*i^<V) and «>} ara
•ometimes used as indeclinable a^jectiyes or substantives ; thus, 'Mu^tm^g
trXirtfv 11 i^hxtt, myriadt more than twelve in number, y. 6. 9 (cf. Kfirts «'Xi/-
• Vf H i|9»«vr« iy. 8. 27). Mirltff irXUr 4 r^tSf fiifitSv L 2. 11. OSnts ttu^
rm irHv wXitv n rirr«^«»«yr« H. 6r. iii. 1. 14. "AXtn, $h fimt ^udif rrm*
%mvf the Haly»f not leu than two ttadia in breadth^ y. 6. 9. Oaiu^ ^ifuXm-
0ms «v /Cf r«y n *Xtiq^utmt Cyr, yii. 5. 11. *A«'«»ri/y«v«'i rSf iiii^v »v fjkun
^vtrmMfUut vi. 4. 24. 4>^«t;^«t»f ^a^ tturS •v» 7X«rr«y rtr(at»i0;^tXit09
H. Gr. iv. 2. 5 (cf. 'S^tv2»fnrmt . . tint IXmrrcvs rir(mxo0'imv lb. 16). IIsA.-
Tdfrm.) «r0y [= Ttfturt §foi\ ^ia»W6t, targeteere as many as two hundred,
yii. 2. 20 (cf. 'H^iTf rM-Ai/rtfi Sdtu t^cvt rv «f«f ii. 1. 16). Aiitn . . Sfn
ftfmaiv* Eq. 4. 4. AiPavs • • «r«y fivaaUyg »») 9'Xi7$9 »«) ^ir«» Mi^. £q. 1.16
(cf. *OXoir^ix"^f ifia^iaievs xa) ftti^tvg »«) IXarrtug iy« 2. S). "Or* «b)^y ^
r»u ftfi^h Avrig-Ttit vTt^ Soph. Aj. 1231. - Tl^wrat • • t« ftniXv Svth Eur.
Herad. 166. K^i/rr*> tatv W ^n^t* Id. Tro. 412. Aantwrtt i7v«i ri, appear-
ing to be something, i. e. of some consequence, PL Gorg. 472 a* (If ^f|)<y and
r2 did not here remain without change, they would be confounded with the
masc, and the expressions would lose their peculiar force.)

Notes, (a) So, with th^^lur. form instead of the sing., Ilft^^^ivii nftU
^( ^Xiit ft r^tTs PI. Menex. 335 b. (b) In some of these oases, the neut.
•4jectiye appears to be used like an adverb. See § 529. i3«

§ 49 1* t.) A neuter adjective used substantivdy, or as an attributa
of an infinitive or clause of a sentence, is ctften plur, instead of sing. (§ 336) ;
as, £i r6ur$ ri i^uXifAivct Atrt^ohitit Hi it ravrd rt lf%iXuvr;^ this which
is due should be paid, or if both this should be due, viL 7. 34. Ov r«i7r«
Af^^y lf;(^«^MM . . • *t y»( retvrat Xiytfin A^^2,7, *Or»y /eiy ri Jkyniiv
tX'^'h «'<Bf«»«AM/ri /M iiri ravrn Symp. 4. 50. IX fU» ro^tburn XC'I
r«iiry, xXatuv iXttvUg Ar. Thesm. 1062. *A^' thx S^c*t raU » Soph. (Ed. C
883. *AiteXX»n TaV nf . , i naxk nank rtXSv, ' it was Apollo,' Id. (Ed. T
1329. Ovx "latnt r«J« liV/y, there are here na^onians, Th. vi. 77. 'A)iiy«
rm jfy i«'i;^fi^iry^Id. i. 125. Ati^yftiv*, itt 7m»i, nfy^i xmrinvuf Soph.
Ant. 576. OSt 9lt wa^tb^arin ratt *k6n*mUts Urn Th. L 86.

Note. This use of tiie Plur. for tiie Sing, appears to have arisen from
the want of a noun, or definite object of sense, to give strict unity to the con*
option. It is very frequent in demonstrative pronouns, «Qd in verbals in ^«i
and -r'ff-

§ 493* 6. An adjective often takes a substantive in the
Genitive partitive^ instead of agreeing with it. In this con-
struction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the
substantive, or in the neuter (commonly the neut, sing.).
Thus,

"hUai rk ^waviaTa rSv w^ayfAirttJt [for ir^Ayfutrtt], fAtiSi r«vf iZ ^(•uSitmi
nm Mv4f0w»n [for ktfi^^ws}, nether virtmms actions [the virtuous of action^],
•ar wim mm [tha wise of men] Isocr. 34 d. AmtMt^mrii rt [for Xm^m'f^^

Digitized

by Google

^B. 2.] STNBSIS.

nif Tjf], mmte distinction [something of distiw..^
*^>*« [for kZ^kit ^atfnfha^ soft cheek [softnesseB
'kMfiM^ . . ^tmt Soph. Ant. 1209.

Note. In this way, greater prominence and distinctness of expression,
and sometimes a species of independence or abstractness (§ 449. «), are given
to the adjective. Upon the whole sabject, see §§ 358 - 862.

§493* 7. Stnesis. The adjective oflen agrees in gen*
der and number with the idea of the speaker^ instead of th^
subject expressed ; particularly with,

m. Ck)LLBCTnrB Nonifs^ and words used eoOectivefy ; as, *H Tt fi9vxh . ^
^M A'yf0W9Ttfj and the aewtte, not ignorant^ H. 6r. ii. 3. 55. K^etoyii i* r$v
*EX>.f;M»0v ^r^artVfAartt [^^ 0^^»rtmTtii\ "tiomiXiv^fiivrnv ill. 4. 45. Tj^v iroXt*
[w»Xirati] . . Sfrat Th. iii. 79. hivZet , , ivrUrti k^ *A0nfetlot9, ^tfi/Xn-
/ < y r • c lb. 2. N « t7 V i» rait *AfitivSv Hxat/^av !«*/ n *AXxiCi^'ifiv, is «tXt(/r«y-
rms Id. vi. 53. Ov)' S(9i$ ivg^f*»uf A«'a^^uCii7 fiaitt, itvh^a^fii^w fitCfUrts
iSnMvs XiVtff Soph. Ant. 1021.

^. Words in the fhiral used for the emgukir (chiefly ri/*us for iyi) ; as,
'LsfrtM^tv • . ir^arwirvvv, tpe [=» /] AewecA you, falHng down, Eur. Here.
1206. *HXi«» fitter ufifAif 6m, %^tif A ^^^» $u ^•v>.6fMu lb. 858. Aut»ifu^4m
• . »(«rif^rr« Id. Ion, 1250.

^. Nouns of which the gender does not foUow the sear (§ 75) ; as, ^fi
^/Xr«r , I? «'i(i«'rc r//M<t^*^f ruivn>, 0 deareat, 0 moat fondly cheriehed aon,
Eur. Tro. 7S5. T^^' l^»«f . Mar^awrm. Id. Bac. 1307. Ti»f» ^af^ti Urn*
tmCaivrtf Ar. Pint. 292. KtXXino^tiyt Buvrtliof Ar. Ach. 872. Tk riXn
n»TttCa9r»( Th. iv. 15.

X Words for which othdk? might have been used ; as, *H vig'st [as urn*
ftm,^ w^Sre* tl^^ara yiufiat rtUg *A/«ir«/«<f, XtyiiAtftt Th. iL 47 (cfl Tj ^»
•Zf *i^/*m lb. 51 ; yet see § 450. y). IlSra il yifttt [ss x»«f] ^^v>-ar*
..^jir*»» Eur. Tro. 531.

I. Words governing a ftenitioef to which, as the more important word, th«
Adjective conforms in gender and number ; as, ^iXrtir AJyt^hv fim, dearest
majei^ of JEgisthus, iBsch. Cho. 893. T^«/«y Ikivrtg inir»r *Afy*iM* wvix§t
Id. Ag. 577 (cf. «). To 7fk rSv irgtrCuri^$t9 . . ^tm^tuvrtg PI. Leg. 657 d.
Tit rit ^mniftn • . «'«i«i/^|y«i Soph. Phil. 497. *A%»vm ^fayy»f ifvifiattf »««^
mXMl^»9r»t oUr^f Id. Ant. 1001. — In these expressions, the Gen. and the
word whidi governs it usually form simply a periphrasis^ and are treated ao-
OOTdingly.

§ 494* 8. An adjective sometimes agrees with a Greni-
dve implied in another adjective (commonly a possessive) ; as,

Ti ci9 [» rMTj pJfnt U^fut, the gift of you alone. Soph. Tr. 775. ToTg
ifHTifit [j^n/uif] ttbriiv ^ix§t9, <mr own friends (§ 505. S), vii. 1. 29.
T« v^iri^' aurSf ^MiXiVxiri Dem. 25. 5. 0^«fy«v . . iftif rit ttltrnf
MbcUl Ag. 1322. T«v i/»«y fdv mitrtv rtZ r»X.mt^m^99 . . /3/«» Ar. Pint
33. TOif^k %w0rnfv nnnd Soph. (Ed. G. 344. 2k f il»V«' "^ t^iytU*
fe«rv*«ff 4fc»«C«i>«»r«i PL Conv. 194 a. G£ §§ 332. 4, 383. «. — Inlika
masoar, a« the Dat. mii^ be used tat the Geo. (§ 412), '^/Ut^n [— ^J
Utem iftsx^ n^n^ • • ti^M^f JBa6b, Fkw 144»

Digitized

by Google

810 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [bOOK III

§4»55. 9. Attraction. An adjective is sometimes at-^
tracted by a substantive either, (a,) governing^ or (/J.) in ap*
'position with^ its real subject ; as,

«. Taiif/LOf mlfAet . . ^ttr^ify the blood of my father. Soph. CEd. T. 1 40O
OvfAdf . . 9raif xatiif Eur. Andr. 584. H'uuv m'^os &Xkti9 l^riav 0'»(tv0'»fim*
Id. Ale 538. MtX«va g-ToX./tc¥ «'i«rX*)y lb. 'il5. ^tTnes «»^^«y ^vtmtfcm
Soph. Ant. 793. HaXtag xo*r»u ^ivit Id. Ph. 1123. *H ri*»«» Jjfr c^^tt
. . (ikafrov0-a Id. CEd. T. 1 375. — In most of these cases, the Gen. with the
Vord which governs it may be regarded as forming a complex idea, which thf
adjective modifies. This construction is chiefly poetic

^. 0/ yct( i^fimXfM), uAxXjwtw St [for *»M-«f ], for the «ye«, bang the i
beautiful of objects (§ 450), PI. Rep. 420 a Twg y«^ fniyt^rm i^fifMifrnxi"
Tag, avMT»Vf ^ Svrettf ftiyirrnv ^\ aZ^Bt* [for 0vr«(] fiXdCriv xeXiMf, ««'«X-
Xdmiv ilvhv PI. Leg. 735 e. TLeivTa & ^n »>s l^iag alrks auras [for athrit
«rr«J if1lraXMfAZi1^afA^9 PL Parm. 1 53 a. "HXiCf . • <r«yr*)v XafAT^ararai, the nMy
the most splendid [sc thing] of all things^ Mem. iv. 7. 8 (this is the common
construction when the superlative is foUowed by a Gen. partitive of different
gender from the subject of the sentence).

Note. An adjective is sometimes, in the poets, attracted by*ja Yoc ; aa^
"OkCn »S(t yifota [for SxCiag, »*f(c, y,], may you be happy, boy, Theoc 1 7. 66»
. 'lit ^vcTfiv* rv, Ivrrnn [for -•f] . • ^etnif Soph. Ph. 75d. Cf. Sic venias ho*
dieme TibulL L 7. 58.

§ 4«SO* 10. An adjective sometimes agrees with a sub-
stantive instead of governing it in the Gen. partitive (§§ 358-
360) ; as,

Ili^i fiiras fuxreiti about midnight [the middle of the night], i. 7. 1 (c£
"Ev fitU^ fvxran Cyr. V. 3. 52). Ai« ftivnt ^\ rns iraXtatg, and through the
midst of the city, i. 2. 23. T* &XXa rr^arn/^o*, M« rest of the army, lb. 25.
'Ey V Hii^etft fiks itwi, and going on [the extremities of the feet] tiptoe. Ear.
Ion, 1166.

§45y. 11. Adjectives are often used for adverbs and
adjuncts, and, by the poets, even for appositives, and dependent
clauses ; to express,

•. Toes; as, *A.^tx9Wfrm • • r^tratTst [= rn '•^'«» V^ff ]» **^ arrive on
A« third day, y. 3. 2 (g£ iii. 4. 37, and % 420). l,»»Tctia$ ^r^anitrtt U. 2.
17. n^tfr^^ft Kii^tfv . . a^intr^ L 2. 25. T$X$vr£f ij^aXiitaunv, at last
he became angry, iv. 5. 16.

fi. Place; as, ^xfivavfM* l^atii^tat, we encamp in the open air, v. 5. 21
(cf. 'T*** ttis ail4(iecs iv. 4. 14). At^tof ^ftyyifitvaf vi. 1. 23. 'E^i/M^
l<pirTi»i Soph. CEd. T. 32. 0tiX£ffftaf lx(i^PaTt lb. 1411. ^atrft %'
vtrt^irovTiaf Id. Ant. 785. 0i;^«/«v 9t;^nh Id. EL 313. Mir«»v/«i«f
&T»e, nmid the waves of woe, Eur. Ale. 91 (§ 383. a). UaXXk 3* a^S ravras
[srr«vr*} or r^i, § 421. /3] ir^aCaTa, and I see here many aheep, iiL 5. 9.
*T3^afAfif S^av atvrie tin* Our at, i^*f, i^trhv ^^a^i^^trat, *here he COmes,'
PI. Rep. 327 b. *Cii init S^^«) as CAe man if Aere, Soph. CEd. C. 32. II*.
ftvavrati yk^ •T^i ^ rtfts lb. 111. *AXX* SfV iwdlsiv l» Hfntn rig t(X%rm
Eor. Ale 137. 'Or %1fi *0(irrir# Id. Or. 380. *Ie«f \%%'!%st . . ^i^rms.
* aiU there.' #. 339.

Digitized

by Google

CH. 2.] ATTRACTION. — ANACOLXTTHON. 311

y. Maivnkr; as, TLvnZM\y.nr6 . . at *EXXif rircvrMKXA) VtfXf if }»«0r»4, <ft«
HelluponHc eitiei contributed wittingly ^ i. I. 9. *0 fih \»ifv itttvUf (cf. *0 fih
Ixavfitf raXewrntfSf) Mem. ii. 1. 18. Oi ti ^r^mriZTm,* i^f^«yr« n^imf xa.)
th4ut i?«'«yr« JLg'fAtfti vii. 2. 9. Kar^ytriy raS' 9(xi»f i^acut Soph. (Ed*
C. 1637. 'A»i/#«i r^i;t:*» '^'> *<^^ *^^ speed, Ar. Plut 229^ Tws nxpeht
uwfiriviovf ««'i^i^«r«y H. Gr. U. 4. 19.

i, Effect; as, l&S^ti/i»f [^^m tS^ti/Mf iJvtu] . • tutfAnvtf ^rifia, hutk
your mouth to silence [bo that it should be silent], ^sch. Ag. 1 247. T*ly «**>»
^^S^xTMv if/tfiMTttp ntrtifuptst [deprived of your sightless eyes] rendered
sightless by the loss of your eyes, Soph. CEd. C. 1200. 2v xai ^ixatif «)/-
»9Uf ^^tvetf wa^ag-w^ Id. Ant. 791* Mi/^«»' IxnvS Xiyn Id. Tr. 679*
X«^ rtlin^n • . iirxUetf Ear. Ale. 35.

I. Various Relations and CmcuifSTAirGEB ; as, *Axx«i il ^r«v l|«.
xt&x'*^*** iV***?;, * bemdes,' i. 7. 1 1 . Ov ><'«^ ^v X*f*f '^^ £ X X « «v$iv ^Iv*
)^0» i. 5. 5. SvXifas watatfi/iiftUt made of wood, y. 2. 5. *A9^(o^ii(»»
[ss ^y^^«; ^«(iyr«f] . . »1fMir»f, hondddcd blood, Soph. Ant. 1022. M«r^«.
xrir«9 aJfui, the blood of a mother slam, Eur. Or. 833. ll»Xvl»x(v9
[sss ^-oXXHv imx(v»09] itipvav Id. El. 126. MiX«^<rft<rX«i/f wr»kfAtvi Id.
Ale. 819. *A(ifrix**( • • «y^» Soph. Aj. 935. *0$«/;^ii^i [=•$«''
;^ii^«ir] rtrv xrcMT^ .£sch. Cho. 23. YlafA/tnTif [= «'«»rwy /ciirt^] ri yij
Id. Pr. 90» Tovit iffAfi^rtt^ [=> «'«»rw( or xxri 9ritr» fji,nrfi{\ vix^w
Soph. Ant. 1282. *EXiy«| »^<rr«^«»Tif[= i^tvrtt fAOtfrtf] Id. Ph. 1338.

§ 458* Notes. 1. In cases like the above, the adjective form ap-
pears to be assumed through the attraction of the substantive, or in other words,
for the sake of binding tc^ther more closely the different parts of the sen-
tence, and giving greater unity to the expression. It will be observed that,
m some of the examples, the adjective simply forms an emphatic pleonasm.

"?. In some instances, a Genitive unth its adjective appear to have been chang-
ed into two adjectives agreeing with the governing stUtstantive ; as, Uivrtif r*
Aiymitn [for «'«vr«» r AiyttUu] Iv* a»r«v «X<^iy«v, and upon the harbourless
coast of the jEgean Sea, Eur. Ale 595. ll§rxfAi^ ^^f^Hf *"• ^^^^ irtrxfuS
N^ri^«tf] xm^f, unth the oar of the nether stream, lb. 459.

3. Derivative and compound adjectives are formed in Greek with great free-
dom, and the latter, especially among the poets, often appear to have taken
the place of a simple adjective or noun, by a species of emphatic or graphic
pleonasm; as, 'iitvtifiiruxMt [s^ /juvavfl irtiXtvf, singly-bridled [=s single]
horses, Eur. Ale 428# *Ay'%Xate fiovfUatf [= ^«5»] Soph. (Ed. T. 26. —
The poets often repeat a noun in composition with i- privative or a similar
word, to express emphatically the idea of negation or of evil; as, "M-nrn^ Afin'
Ttt^, our [unmotherly mother] mother, yet no mother, Soph. El. 1 154. Tafi»f
AyMfM9 Eur. HeL 690 (cf. Innvptis . . nuptiis Cic de Or. iii. 58). *Cl wmrt^
mvi^atrt^ iEsch. Gho. 315.

^ 4«59« 12. Anacoltjthon. An adjective sometimes
differs in case from its subject, through a change of construc-
tion (cf. § 333. 7) ; as,

Bifif . . fifxiiv iret^xyyiXXu XaCirrH r«wf iv^fxt, he commands Xenias tit
• eome, taking his men (cf. HmfmyyiXXu ^4f ri KXia^xf >^^»*'*'* ^»m), i. S. 1.
^imCanUrmt /aUtu i TX»u$ ahr»it U^f«yi} ii 4. 24. *K^»Cx't^ns . . t^
^m PL Lig. 986 a. See the syntax of ^he Infinitiy* and PartidpU.

Digitized

by Google

9112 SYNTAX OF THE ADJBCTITX. [bOOK III.

NoTB. The VM of other cases with the Oemiue partUkfe (as in §§ 3M
866) maj be referred to simple ellipsis.

IL Use of the Degrees.

[The following observations apply both to adjbgtivbs and advebbs.]

^ 4mO« I. Words are compared not only by inflection
(§§ 155-163), but also by the use of adverbs denoting more
■0 and most ; as,

MeikXtP flx«*i mon agreeable^ Soph. Ph. 886. Tdn ft^Ju^a ^iXwt, <ft#
moit Jriendfyy viL 8. 1 1. *il wXitfTtt fui(M Soph. EL 13^26.

NoTBS. (a) The two methods are sometimes nnitad for emphasis or
perspicuity (c(. ^§ 161. 1, 462) ; as, 0av*w )' «y tU fuiXXev ivTvx*f^*tt <9
T^ifj and dying he wovld be happier, /or happier Acm Umng, Ew. Hec 37 7«
Tif tiXXff fiaXXtv ifitm^^(»s i Mach. Sept. 67 3» TltXv 0S9 t^iTrTtv . . fuHX-
X^f «Mv. 6. 11 (ef. lb. 12). yUXt^rm hnirttrtf Th. vii. 42. TJ^y vrXts^rw
n^ivTwt ^sSv Kf/g-^/v Enr. Ale. 790. *ft fiiytrrtt Ix^/rrti ywmt Id. Med. 1 323.
(6) So the Comp. and Sap. are united, ^H wm^Zf tnhm wxi»f afti^m IxfitS^
Ix^i^rtt In fiet Soph. £1. 201.

§461. II. The COMPARATIVE is commonly construed
with the particle ^, than^ or with the Genitive of distinction ;
and the superlative with the Genitive partitive. Thus,

^XwffK morn (AaXXn n • • 'A^ra^S^^ny, hmng him more Ihan Ariaxerxea^
L 1. 4. See §§ 351. 362»^, 363. y.

Rebiarks. 1. The Comp. is sometimes construed with other partides,
which commonly strengthen the expression (cf. 460. «) ; as, "EAxxtt* . • w^i
TOO ^tvytiv, more honorable [in preference to fleeing] than to flee, PI Ptuede,
99 a. *Kvr) r§9 «'A.i«y, more [instead of you] than youy Soph. Tr. 577.
Tlv»voTt^at «*«(« r« . . fitnifianuifttftbf more frequent [beyond] than lAr
recollections^ Th. i. 23* Hfh i^ttfretf . . irXiiAr, more [in comparison witk
all] than aU, Id. vii 58. IXi^ft r^v ^utraf ft^eirt^u PI. GoTg. 487 d.
"Err/v 0 woXt/A^f evx (i*Xciv re w'Xitfv, ikXXk ^aveivfis, [war is not of arms tha
more, but of expenditure] war does not require arms more than money y Id. L 83
(§ S87). Tat»r l^rl x^iivvtt ^xhv ux *A^'yt!ois frwtTvf 'better [but not to
fall] than to fall,' Eur. Heracl. 231. *A.'roSvnf»cv^^ *^oTt^§f irftp inXt
ylynirfiat o79t n^ttv Cyr. V. 2. 9 (cf. Hfiri^of n 01 ^iXtt itet^n^Kp lb. vit 5. 41),
Otf ir^oTt(»¥ Wa,v0ttfT»y Xms . , xari^Tfi^av Lys. 174. 6. 'Eir} yet^ri^t xvvn-
^•f n, 216. — In the most of t!iese examples, two forms of construction ap-
pear to have been united.

2. The construction of the Gren. with the Ck>mp. is often dliptieal; as,-
*Eirii irXttMv X(^*^y ^' ^*^ f* Ji^i^xuv toTs xirttf riiv Mait, since the time ia
greater, which I must please those below, than those here [than that during which
I must {Jease those here], Soph. Ant. 74. See § 391. y*

S. By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to th«
Comp., — (a) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows ^Xmss^
itXim, ixmrrtfy or ftt7»v, ii is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em*
ployed; as, * iL*«»'rti*tv^i rHv ivi^Sf §v puTdv v^vraxa^icuf, *not less than 500^
vi. 4. 84. See § 45a ), andof: Abn ompfiMt erant qtdngmUi, C3$m. yUL lOu—

N

Digitized

by Google

OIL HI. I trSE OF THE DEGREES. 8tS

QH) To the Gen. gvnnud by the Oomp., a qwdfieatiaa if somedmes mmeud
with if ; a8» T/ r«i)^' Av tv^nf* ii^«y ivrv;^i#Ti#«», j| «r«i^ ^i/iMM ^«#vXi4v#i
Eur. Med. 553. Tmt y«tv r «^/y*> rtii ^^ttZv, i vuf ^i^u Soph. Ant. 1090*
OJ ri &f ftM>iX$9 ^w«tiim0ui rtg . ., H t»ut» i PI. Gorg. 500 0. See also
§ 464. N. — (o) The Gen. sometime^ follows Ht instead of the appropriate
case ; as, Oi it^fu itxitf rns iifU^s, I ^m 9 i^»m rrm^mf H. Gr. iv. 6. 5
(see § 4S9).

§ 403« III. The positive is sometimes added to the su-
perlative for the sake of emphasis ; as,

*Sl momSp udrnt^rtt O mkst rf the vUe, Soph. (Ed. T. S34. 'kymiSt Iwwim
M^mrt^Tdt £9 iit^'tvt Cyr. L 3. 15.

Elj() ^i«^), iMiJ it»f*fti»^», »ti) fAta^mratr%y

T/ #•/ «r«r' Irr m«^' { •v» i^U( i TP. lL»^mrH» kl* Pax, 189.

Notes. ». By dombUng the Pm. or fhe Stip., we obtain simibr forms of-
expression, the one lees and the other even more emphatic than die above ; aa^
'Ajpnr affnrvt, horribk of the horrible^ i. e. most horrible^ Soph. (Ed. T. 465.
Aukaia itikaittt Id. £1. 849 (§ 362. t). "Erx^r Ux'^^"* muxd, the mod
molent of the most vioieiU reproaches. Id. Ph. 65 (of. §§ 161. 1. 460. «> *0
)fi itxit Iv raTf fi.%yi^T»$t ftXytgrn Hitat PI. Crat. 427 e.

^ FVom the doubling of the Sup., as in the last example, appears to have
•risen the phrase U r$!t, whieb is used with the Sup. to increase its force, and«
as an adverbial expreasion, without ch&nge of gender ; thus, '£» rt!I$ [se. ir^
rtt] «'^M, Jirwt [among the first] of aUj Th. L 6.. 'Ev rtltf w^n Id. iii.
81. 'E» ro7t ^y.u0Tm ^n 9n%s lb. 17. 'Ev r97t ;^»XtvtiTtirM hny9f Id. vik
71. 'Ef r9Tt fUXt0T9t, most of aU, PI. Crito, 52 a.

y. The numeral tff is sometimes used with the Sup., to render the idea of
hsdmduoKty prominent ; as, ^kj?^« \i ^"kuwrst . ., Js y% 999 9t9n(, IXm/iCavi, he
received the most presents^ [at least being one man] for a single indioiAuti, i. K
more than itmy one man besidef L 9. 22. liktT^rm tst lifit^ . . h>9AfU9§s S9pe»
Xu9 Th. viiL 68.

). The Greeks are fond of expressing the Sup. negatively ; as, Olx ^»mv«
[=s fuiXt^^tb], not the least, espedaUyy Mem. L 2. 23. *A»^^*rv sit r«>y aitnst^
r9tvAT999 Th. L 5. Msyirr«y ti K9ti ou^ lixt^rat Id. viL 44.

§ 463* IV. Certain special forms of comparison deserve
notice ; e. g.

1.) The Gomp., with a (3en. expressing Aope, duty, power of deteriptton^ &a ;
•i, MaT^m lx«'i}«f , greater than could have been hoped, above hope^ Modi* Ag.
iG6. M«XX«v rw V9fr9f, mare than is proper, too much, Mem. iv. 3. 8. K^t>
#>•» X9y9», beyond description, Th. ii. 50.

2.) The Ck>mp. followed by ^ netri, or sometimes jf ^9$ ^ as, Mii^, I
Mttrk ^ait^9t [sc. irrif], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great foe
tears, Th. viL 75. BiXr<«v9$ n *mr &»f (999-99 Mem. iv. 4. 24. Mft4^«# . . H
nar \fu iteti c\ \^iu({t9, too great for me and you to discover, PI. C!rat. 392 b.
*E»}utrTi(9H . . 11 ^(9t Tfi* i^flc;ri'«f Th. iv. 39. Cf. PraHum atrodus,
ptQ mmnero pugnantium Liv. 21. 29.

a?

Digitized

by Google

ftl4 SYNTAX OF THB ADJECTIYB. [bOOK m.

S.) Hie Comp. fbDowed by < *Wi (or ii) and the InfinitiTe ; as, B^«;^m*
fm iiMivri^tv 4 m i&»>t7W««, they ihot [a shorter distance than they most in
order to reach] too $Mort a dUtanee to reaeh, iiL 3. 7. ULit^»v n »f^Tt ^i^tn
ivtrnffPtu , »«»o Mem. iii. 5. 17. — We likewise find the Infin. without m^t* or
mtt and also the Pos. for the Comp. ; as^ T« ytu vUn/** ftul^cf n ^i(tt9, for the
malady i$ too great to bear. Soph. (Ed. T. 1 293. Ttt^uvh vfJSf n IrnvMi lytut^*
T*(ii9, your mind i$ too loeak to pereevere, Th. iL 61. "^ux^if, t^ Ji^rt X««.
earfm lerlf Mem. iiL 13. 3.

§ 4 S 4* 4.) The Comp. and Sop. (tsx the moat part joined with ah^)
followed by a reflexive pronoun, to denote the comparison of an object with
itself; the Comp. representing it as above that which it has been or would be
in other drcomstances, and the Sup. representing it as at its highest point.
Thus, *A»^(Mrt^9s yiynreti »urH aurtS, he becomes more manly than he waa
before, PL Bep. 411 c "O^^ lufmrmrt^M aorti atvrSn Xyiyvnr* Th. iiL 11.
"On luflTmr9f vrnvr^ rmvrtt ^fffia, uhem you were thf moit skilled m these mat"
ter$ Aat you ever were, L e. u^en your Mil in these matters was at its highest
point, Mem. i. 2. 46. "W avris a&rw Tvy;^a9U fiiXTt^r9i A* PI. Gorg. 484 e.

Note. To the Comp. thus construed, a specification is sometimes annexed
with if (§ 461. 6) ; as, Avtm \avrSt [S«^/«Xuwt<^«i ^Viv], WuBkw f^ttfn, n
Wfh fuJuf, they have themselves more confidence when they have learned, than
tikey had btfors learning, PL Prot. 350 a. T« y vviXt^a* nvrSp rns lil^m
Mifie'Tt^w »M itburov Urtv, j} it ftnV tfnfinfa* Th. vii.' 56.

5.) Two eomparatives connected by tf, to denote diat the one property exista
in a higher degree than the other ; as, ^r^nrnyti ^XtUnt n fitkrUng, generah
more numerous than good, Ar. Ach. 1078. 'jTU k»y$y^^»t Itn'tismv M ei
ir^»ymyirt(»9 rp kn^anwttf 4 •X«^l#n^«» Th. L 21. Il^i^S/A^ fmXkes I
^efmri^a £or. Med. 485.

^469. V. The comparative and superlative are often
used without an express object of comparison. In this case,
the siTFERLATiVE increases tfie force of the positive, while the
COMPARATIVE may either increase or diminish it, according to
the object of comparison which is implied. Thus,

*A ^ofMi0mrar% M^mwty O most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. *£i Sm^
fmnirmr§t viL 7. 10. Tiii» r«;^imiv, immediately ^ iii. 3. 16. IlXt/iv [sc r«5
Yt»9T9f^ XiXtnrett, [more than is proper] too much has been said^ Eur. Ale. 706
(cf. M«XX«y r§u ^i$vT»tt § 463. 1 ). Nuwri^*; £t is ri &(X***> heing too young
for the command, Th. vi. 12. Mec^^ort^tP . . lmyfi^»^^eu, it is rather long
[than otherwise] to relate, PL Conv. 203 a (cf. ^ 464. 5). *0 ^ avialUrt^is
ri rt Amn^ivttT*, but he answered them [somewhat more insolently than ha
might have done] with a degree of insolence, Th. viii. 84. MiXot iSmtt,
ity^tinirt^n, an energetic strain, somewhat rough, Ar. Ach. 673. Tm h Irl-
(Mv nmi Akaytirt^n, ' quite confounding,' Th. vi. 46. Tit riv ^«'ii^«ri^«v, one
of the more inexperienced, v. L 8.

Note. The Comp. and Sup., when used without direct comparison, an
said to be used absolutely. When thus employed, the Comp. is often trans-
lated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too or rather ; and the
Sup. by the Pos. with very. In addition to the examples above, see § 466.

^466. VI. The degrees are more freely t»/^cA«ii^«l

Digitized by VjOOQIC

CB. 8.] 8TNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. — EPIC USB. 315

and mixed^ than in English. It may be however remarked in
general, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders
Sie discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus,

TavTtif fUXicrtL [for ir^Xv ^XXm] rnt »i^nf k^^att^ivekty this the chooies far
rather than the mrgin. Ear. Iph. A. 1594. Si?* . . fittxa^rmr^fj more completefy
happy than you, X. 482. 'A|i«X«y«ir«r«» rSf it^tytytvti/iitMf, [the most re*
markable of thoee which had preceded it] more remarkable them any which had
preceded it, Th. i. 1. ^fl fiiXrtm riv a-Kvrov ^iXtt Ai, Pint. 631. T« »«X-
Xtrrn • . r*** «'^«ri^«#y ^ti»t Soph. Ant.. 100. *H^» i yt(mirt(»t [for yt
^irartf], the oldest of tw (though none of them were old), Cyr. v. 1.6*
"E^) ^t»(it ritnixt* [sc faiWot^ § 460], j} »t/y«if yXvxis, his death has beem
more hitter to me than sweet to Ihan^ Soph. Aj. 965 (cf. ^ 464. 5). *Ayi«^.
yn iri^vrtf mt ixiytbt [so. *Xnyki] irc/n/iv, ^tey all cried out ihat he had given
him too fao blows, y. 8. 1 2 (cf. § 465). 'XI ^iXa yvfrnxSp^ O [beloved of]
dearest of women. Ear. Ale. 460 (§ 362. 0* Oi waXXdt, Ae greater number,
or th^most, Mem. i. 1. 19 (cf. 0/ wXtTrrts lb. 11 ; Tmi ^Xu^rt H. Gr. il. 3.
34). 'Oxly»vf . ., ri h W0k6 1. 7. 20. 0< ^ yt^atrt^H, but the [older] old
men, Cyr. i. 2. 4. 0/ ftiw tin rnt rin ir^trCvrifttf l^ttttttt ;^«/(»«(^My Mem. iL
1. S3. 'Iirff'av • • *mXmir%^»9 iy. 5. 35. T< vuvn^tfy, Z ^x^xrtt, yiyw*9y
what new thing has happened, Socrates, PI. Eutiiyphr. 2 a. Ni*>ri(»v nvkt
WitvfAtlviTH ir(ay/Amrm9, * a revolution/ H. Gr. v. *2, 9. Oifih xmfeTif**,
nothing [more recent] new, PI. Ph»do, 115 b. Ov yk^ %*i(«p w»XXtixJs
kxwM lb. 105 a. n«XXi^ J» «v ^iXrr«y nurait ffri^irixt, ' not well for them,'
Cyr. v. 1. 12. T/ ^m ^^y Inrm xtHtn \ what then does it profit me to livef
Eur. Ale. 961 (cf. T/ W i^«2 0y ni^hg Mach. Tr, 747). <t>Mif»«» kf^fih
Wftytvirrt^BS, 'oldest,' «. 156.

CHAPTER III.

STKTAX OF THE ABTICLE.

§ 467. The article (o, ^, to) appears, in the Epic lan-
guage, as a GENERAL DEFINITIVE, performing the office not only
of an article as usually understood^ but still more frequently
of a demonstrative^ personal^ or relative pronoun (see §§ 147,
148) ; as, ^ ^

•O yi(m, Oie old man, A. 33. T« r Utrx, ra r Irrifitm A. 7a T£ ^

M^Mvn Ji;^ir^«M, and accept this ransom, A. 20. *0 yei(, Jbr he, A. 9. *Ei^
i r»v$* ZffMiiH A. I 93. T«y, u^iom, A. 36. Tk f4.h wcXit* l| W^iiafAU, rk
^iiUtrrett, 'tiiose things which,' A. 125.

Rekahks. 1. These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, — (a)*Th«
art, as usually understood, is amply a less emphatic form of the detmmstr*
pron. Compare, in Eng., " That man whom you see,** and '*The man whom
you see." — (6) Tho personal pron. of the •'d Pers. is a substantive demonstr, proiu
Compare, in Eng., * Those that love me,** and " TTtem that love me ** ; " Those
that seek me," and " Th^ that hate me," Prov. viii. 17, 21, 36. (The per

Digitized

by Google

818 SYNTAX OF THE JlRticls. [book HI

•onal pron., like the art, is oommonly ten wn^fhaHe fban the demeintnitiTt
osually 80 named.) — (c) The demonstr. pron. used conmctively becomes a
relative ; as, in Eng., " Blessed are they that mourn." — Observe the resem-
blance in form between the English article the, and the pronouns thaty thisj he,
they, &c. ; the derivation of the definite art in the French, Italian, &e^ from
the Lat demonstr. Ule; and the extensire use of the German articla (kr
die, doB,

§ 4:S 8« 2. Ib Epic poetry, — (a) The article, in its proper nae aa
Boch, b commonly not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great ex-
tent in other kinds of elevated poetry. — (b) When used aa a personal pro-
noun, it is most frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek
(§§ 490, 491) ; and is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the
substantive to which it refers ; as, 'H 2* 2r«'ir# n.»XX»s 'Ainvn, and $he,
PaUas Minerva, followed, «. 1 25. AJ V iitifiolimv *Ainvmm r% nmi "Yi^n ^
SO. Cf. § 499. — (c) As a demonstrative, it sometimes follows its substan-
tive before a relative ; as, 'Aittmi/AWM itifm r«v, «« »• ^iMnv i^ix^fi^mt n,
73. Sw/iricw* TMiv, Ai WinXXi E. 319. — {d) The article when used as a
perseoal or demonstrative pronoun has sometimes, from its position (see
$ 491. B.), or for the sake (xP the metre, the same form in the Kom. with tha
oommon rehitive ; as, *0t yk^ huraurn Miv^ for he returned last, «. 286.
Mff^ Is ^»yu Z. 59. *0 y«^ yi^s Uri ^pifrm*, ' for this,' Y. 9.

3. In the later Ion. and in the Dor. writers, this extended use of the articU
was, in great measure, retained. £. g. in Hdt, the relative has in iha Norn,
aing. and pi. the forms it, iu ^'t »^f »h v*^ * f>^^ ^^ elsewhere the r* forma
of the article, except after prepositions which suffer elision, and in the phrases,

4. Traces of the earlier and freer use of the article likewise remained la
the Attic and common Greek ; so that we shall treat of the Att use of the
article under two heads, (i.) its use as an article, and, (n.) its use as a pro'
noun, combining with the latter the use of the relative forms (§ 1 48. 2) aa
demonstrative or personal. We ou0it, perhaps, te premise, what might ba
inferred from ^ 467. 1, that no predse line of division can be drawn betwee*.
the use of the article as sud^ and its use as a proaoun.

I. The Article as an Article.

^469. Rule XXVII. The Article is pre-
fixed to substantives, to mark them as definite.

NoT^i^ 1^ The Greek article is commonly translated into English by the
dejinite article the ; but often when used substantively, and sometimes when
used adjectively, by a demonstrative pronoun ((§ 476, 479, 486. l). With a
participle following, it is most frequently tran&'ated by a relative and verh^
preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, by a personal or demonstrative pro-
noi^ (§ 476). It is often omitted in translation, especially with proper nameSf
abstract nouns, nouns used genericalbf, vmdi pronouns (§§ 470, 471, 473); and
must be often supplied in translation when not expressed (§§ 485, 486).

2. A substantive used ind^itdy wants the article ; as, E«X^ yk^ Sv-

0avf^, ^mfl itv'h^t ffWMtiai^ ^^f i(pu\»fAini, a favor due from a ^ood mum k
•A excellent treasure^ laoct.Sh, See§518.«.

Digitized

by Google

CILS.] with GEIfBSie^ ABSTRACT NOUNS, &C. 317

§ 470. A substantive used definitely is
either employed in' its full extent^ to denote that
which is knoum, or, if not employed in its full ex-
tent, denotes a definite part.

A.) A substantive employed in its full extent^ to
denote that which is known^ may be,

1.) A substantiye used genericaBy, i. e. denoting a whoU ckua; as, i &*t^m
irofj fiuM (referring to the whole race), n ywtit woman, «/ &vi^m^»i, men, «/
*A^ifP«7M, t^ ^MenioiM (the whole nation). Thus, '0 ivi^ttires ^Mftfirtf'*
mttfMivfin, man wa» named &f6^at^9tt PI* Crat. 399 C. *0 yc^ fVfitCavXog mm) I
^int»(p»9Tiu • • tv ravTf wkiicrov »XXn>.tff iui(pi^9V^iv Dem. 291. 1.5. Kau rSp
'£xx4y*>» h.tx''^ i^Xirai . . r^teutsfUvg, *of Greeks,' L I. 2. Of. § 485. /S.

Note. To this head may be referred substantives used dtstrilmiivefy, whidi
eonsequentlj take the article ; as, KS^»s vvirj^vcTr^i . . r^ «^«^/x« r«S
ftmm rif ^r^armTif, Cyrus promises three half-^kirics [the month to the sol-
dier] a month to each soUiery i. 3. 21. — Even with %xmfr»s • as, "ISjumrm vi
th^u eoch nation, i. 8. 9. Ejira r^ i^Xlmt titatwrt ^u» /Atm Th. r. 49 (cH
*£»«rr«y «rx«» iiL 5. 10. For the podtion of i»»rr»s, see § 472. u,

2.) A substantive eiq>ressing an abstract idea ; as, *H «^ir«, virtue, A tutnim,
vifie, 4 fft^im, wisdom, r« iimXiv, tins beautiful (§ 449. m)» 'H rtt^fo^Am, »«2 4
lyj^ruet, »ui n Jik»n Gyr. vii. 5. 75. Ct § 485. fi.

3.) An injinitive or clause used substantively, or a word spohen of as suchf
•8, T« ^y, to live, Kfe (^ 445).. Atk ri ^tUlfiou, through fear, y. 1. 13. E/f
r« fiin ^tk r« iyyuf titmt ^Mf$au vil 8. 20. T« «y0^« I &v^(t>9'»f, the name
HtS^i^of PI. Crat 399 c. T« /m/mk h fAtix»9^ lb. 415d. T«ih»ft» r$if
4^(1 r If V lb. e. (In the three last examples, the article conforms by attraction
to the noun following, instead at being neuter (§ 445), inasmuch as the word
iftfiui expressed sufiftciently shows that &*t^mic»t, &c., are spoken of merely as
woxds.)

^471* 4.) The name of a monaSc object; i. e. of an object which
odsts singly in nature, or which is so regarded {fMw%tx,U^ single) ; as, i ilTast,
Ae sun, If riX^rif, tite moon, fi yii, tite earlh, i »b^mfit, the heavens. Thus, "Exu
«^«^» 11 yfi ti^i rav •h^fav, the earth receives nutriment from the heavens, (Eo.
17. 10. Cf §485. ft.

5.) The name of an art or science ; as, *H Ur^tz^ mmi n ;t;«Xxii;r/xii jmiI
I rtnrsftxn, medicine and brasiery and carpentry, (Ec. i. 1. Of. § 485. ^.

6.) A proper name, which has been before mentioned or implied, or which 19
well known; as, Kv^n H fAiret^i/A^trtu . « 'AvaCamt aZv i Kv^tff, But he sends
for Cyrus, Cyrus therejfore goes up, i. 1.2. Asa ^(uyiag . .. Trie ^^vyiat
w»\$9 i. 2. 6, 7. Ki7^«f 9^» K/Airr«r tU rn* KjXixtav A^a^ifiiru, Cyrus sends
the aiician qeeen to Cilicia, i. 2. 20. 'T«4( rnt *£A.X«$«f, in behalf of Greece
(their native land), i. 3. 4. Cf. § 485. #.

NorcBS. (a) Fcoper names appear to take the article, from their being, m
their origin, either adjectives used substantively (§ 448), otjummfA nouns used
distincti^ (§ 479). Thus, *H 'ExXmt [sc. y«]. [the Greek land] Greece
(plOBp. JSw^imd, the land of the AnglM» in French UAnglettne^ Seetland,

27*

Digitized

by Google

fill

818 SYNTAX OP THF ARtlCLE. [BOOK HI.

Ireland) ; 'O TXXiirrM r«f , [the sea of Helle] the HeUeiptmt ; 'O Ili(i»xSi
[sc. i»i»J, [the Illustrious Man] Pericles; '6 ^'i\t9"r»St [the Horse-lovwTj
Philip ; 'Afn^ Mprt; t# yivof xat rtSfOfAa rwr» tx*** ▼• 2. 29. (ft) The ad-
jective coDBtniction is especially retained in names of rvoerg ; as, *0 "i/Laiafi^H
wrufitif i. 2. 7. T«(/ Um^fv§u ^•ret/Ativ lb. 8. So, in Eng., the Qmneeticid
river,

479. B.) A substantive not employed in Us
extent may be rendered definite,

I.) By a limiting word or phrase.

This word or phrase is usually placed, either between the article and its tub-'
ttanttve, or after the eubstantive ; and in the latter case, the article is often re-
peated, either for perspicuity or emphasis. Thus, ^*x(' «'«v Mfi^/af r%ix*»t% <u
far as the wall of Media, i. 7. 15. T^ «'s^} Wv Ilii^KMi rfr;^«f H. Or. iv. h, 9«
Ta fiMKfii T%$xn VAPV K»(i*fii$0f lb. 4. 1 8. T« ri?;^*; r« IIi^iy^/«r vii. 2. 1 1
(cf. K«; T«NB7(«i«w r« rt?;^*; •'micTXav Th. i. 108). T« ^v lrw/i» [rtTxtl
«"(• rfff EaXix/«f . ., r« ^ il^tt r$ itfi rns ^ufittf i. 4. 4. *0 r^ff /3«nXu»f
^«yM»«f «^X^«f iL 3. 28. T« rns v*u ^ifotrtt ri^vfif 7^«» Pl« P(d- 281 a*
£y r«rf tuif*m4f rmTg piri^ r*? «y)/«v r«tf «'«^<^ r«r Ktyr^/rifv «'«r«/iMv iv. 3. !•

Notes. «. On the other hand, words and phrases not belonging to the
definition or description of the substantive, but to that which ia said about U
in the sentence, either precede the article, or follow the substantive wUhout (Af
article; as, "On »tfof i ^iUf tin, tea) «/ k^x'frtt g'Sot, ti^at the fear was ground*
less, and the generals safe, ii. 2. 21. IftXnf ix**^ ^^^ ««^«A-ffi>, having the head
bare, i. 8. 6. '£x«i/v«v a»i^ »f»'r&f fi^ouvrt r^ Iv'V'^ lb. 1 . Karirrtf riy «yr/«
•» rhf ^tikayyti L 10. 10. "Eirir^f nytfAoti rSf 'H^^xXtT, follow ffercu^
les as leader, vi. 5. 24 (cf. T^ 'H^i/aw *H^axXi7vi. 2. 15). A/a /Kir«v )l
TM va^aitiwtu, throng the midst of the parh, L 2. 7 (§ 456). *£y «^ ^y^ff
/tir^ Dem. 848. 13 (but, To /uiroy ^ripof, the centre division, L 8. 13). IlA*
ilMv r«v l^trMm ffttfrat, full of the necessaries of Ufe in great abundance, iv*
4. 7. Tit li Wiritiim w»XX» h kafcCatUf iv. 1.8. 2uf ikiydif rats «^
mvTOf, with those about him few» i. e. with few attendants, L 5. 1 2 (but, 2m
^0tf ixiyuf trtfi ultrif, with the few about him), *£«'i;^«r^r«i 0X99 r^y fi
Xa77», i. 2. 17. Tfff mf*i^»f aXns iii. 3. 11. !!«#'< . • tm; x^truTf »u) rasg
^iSruTf ff'Sriy, to all the judges and aU the spectators, Ar. Av. 445. TiXJ^ i|v
Siicava t) ;^itf(«, ^ country UHU all bare, i. 5. 5. *1S»«rr0y r« i^y^f L 8. 9
(^ 470. N.). T^ »i(«f U<iri(0y vii. 1. 23. *Aft,(piri^a ra Zru, both his ears
iii. 1.31. Abrif riv A«»«yi, tM^jpartofM themselves, vii. 7. 1 9 (but, T^^ «»««
AAxttn, Ihe same Spartans). Touf rt ati^ctg ctur^vg ii. 5. 39.

/3. When the substantive is preceded or followed by successive modification^
the article is sometimes repeated with each ; as, T« |y *A(»«2if ri r»u Ai«f
Avxulau h(9f, the temple of Lycaan Jove in Arcadia, PL Rep. 565 d. *Ev rS
Tttv Aio$ rjif f^tyia-Tif U^rp Th. L 126. T£ n nixn rit lavrSf rk fuut^
HutriXtectv lb. 108.

§ 473. Remarks. 1. It is common to employ the arti«
cle even when the substantive is rendered definite by a posses*
sive or demonstrative pronoun ; as,

«. POMBBEVB. 'O i^ «-«n$e, AQf father, L 6. 6. 'O^/m f^/»i» [«-«i

Digitized

by Google

CH. 3.J WITH A LIMITING WORD OR PHRASE. , 819

1^ § 39] Cyt. yiiL 7. 26. T^y i/t$ri^t x^i''^ ^^' ^* ^- '^t **l^ ^t ^f^'
Wff yii. 3. 39.

/3. Demonstrauvb. The pronotms «Jr«( and Xt%^ as themselves beguming
with the article ($ 150), do not take it before them, and {K%im follows thdr
analogy. Hie arranganent, therefore, with these pronouis is the same as in
§ 47 i^. «. Thus, T«vT«f rk% wi\u%^ thete ettiet, L 1. 8. T«y &9i(» rwr»9
L 6. 9. T«y^t rif r^i^»p, L 1. 9. *0 /cl» Jifhf Hi ApoL 29. '£»iifiif rnr
i^i^«f 1. 7. 18.

Note. Hi proee, when the article is omitted with a demonstrative pronoun
and a common noun, the pronoun is usually employed as a mbject, and the
mtnm as an aUrUmte; thus, "Ern ^v 70^ «'ii>mi «0m rafitfr f^ <^ «* mait»-
fttt poverty, CEo. 8. 2 (c£ Ajj^m 11 iv^tm lb.). EJvnng yii^ mSm fttyiem . •
l9^nr« Th. i. 1. 'ASm a,Z &xxn v-^ifanf HfU 1.7.

§ 4:74. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is pre*
fixed to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper
name or a personal pronoun to give definiteness or emphatic
distinction; as,

T^ /3«riXiv0yr« *A^r«^t(^iiy, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artaxerxei Ute khiff,
L 1. 4. MtMry i 0irr«X«f, Meno the ThesMoHan, i. 2. 6. 'Evvm^m, « SviyvU
ri«f ywfh, rtS KiXiiun fim^tkittf lb. 12. 'A^irrtf^nAMv riv fit x ^99 \wt*ctX»&m
/tiMv Mem. L 4. 2. 'Eyw . . i V^nvarmUtt . ., v/At7t ti »l l^nxarn/MiyM v. 7. 9*
H ri\iu¥ Xyv, /, <ft« wretched one (by eminence), i. e. mo«< miserable. Soph,
EL 1 138. *0(«v ^1 riv 2v^rnv§9 Id. CEd. C. 745. '0 watrknfittP lyti, /, the
aa-wretched. Id. (Ed. T. 1379. Tip war^o(pirrni, rh itetCn /«i lb. 1441. So,
iHien the pronoun is implied in a verb, *S\x%Ki(Mt9 i raXeif Soph. Tr. 1015*
"O rXfifun . . K»m Eur. Andr. 1070.

KoTB. If, on the other hand, no disttncHon i$ detignedy the article is emittedi
m, Bif^ *A/«N»r«f, Xenophon^ an Atheman, L 8. 15. Tltfrayvt M^
TUf^f lb. 1. *Eyef rdkat, I, unhappy man, Soph. (Ed. C. 747. 'A^X»«»
fuu itiernfs lb. 844.

§ 47ff« 3. An adverb preceded by an article has often
the force of an adjective. This construction may be explained
by supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly ofv or ytwo^
fitvog. Thus,

To vvv X(*^^* ^ [00^ *^«] /»*•»»* time, vi. 6. 1 3 (cf. T« Strn W9 xt*'
»#» Eur. Ion, 1349). *E» r^ v-^iehv [sc ytPd/Ait^i] Xiy^ii, 1. 1. *0 rav
$«r«Xit»« •PT«f, »mXieafr4f v» rir$ fia^tXintSy ^'ar^if % rw 9V9 CJyr. iv. 6. 3.
Tj^y rnfU(w V*e<*» i^* 6* 9* 1**f« «?»«)• i^tfP iii. 1. 2. Tm« ir«vi/ r«y #v^.
rimrZ9, the beet toldiere, Th. viii. 1. KtHfAtu rtv fl'«X«i Soph. CEd. T. 1.

l^OTBS. (a) This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used
cither embttantivefy or adoerbiaUy (§§ 476 - 478). (h) A prepotition with it9
earn may be used in the same way ; as, T«v ir AiX^m; x^nfm^Uu, ^ Deiphie
otade^ Cyr. viL 3. 15. 'A^fU9ia . . h «'^«f Irfri^av, IFestem Armenia, iv. 4. 4.

^ 47<l. 4. The substantive which is modified is often
•omitted ; in which case the article may commonly be regarded
as used substantively with the word or phrase following (see
^^447,469.1). Thus,

Digitized

by Google

880 , BTNT/IX OF THE ARTIOLS. [60'>K Itl.

TSf irm(k ^anXitt [sc it^^Siii], of Hum fhm Ae ktng^ i. 1.5. T»» in^l
Tfif Bfi(»ft those engaged in the hunt, or the hunters^ PI. Soph. 220 d. O/ rtS
\nfAMt Th. vlii. 66, 01 t hhf . . xai m I|«, ^oCA those wWiin, and those wkh-
mitj ii. 5. 32. T« iriftif roS woraffv, the opposite side of ^ tvoer, iji. 5. 2
Tm; «'^r«, i. 3. I. £iV ToSf*9'aXt» [to if^mXtv], back, i. 4. 15. Oi i» r«»
lfl'i»uy«| Mose o^ the country beyond, y. 4. 3. T«V rn'm^ov^t rSf ^iwrmv i. 5. h5.
Ti r« nttXvov t7ii i/riX^irv| u^Ao^ ^ toot which prevented their entering, iv. 7. 4«
'0 Mn^v *l», he that is nothing, Soph. Aj. 767. T«v /«i}^ty [0»r«f] lb. iSSl.
See ^ 450.

Note. The phrases «/ a^f / and $i wtfi, fbllowed by the name of a person,
commonly indude the person himself, with his attendants or aseociatcB ; and
Qometimes, \>y a species of vague periphrasis, denote Utde more than the permm
merely. Thus, Oi »/w^i 'A^ieiTof, [those about Ariseus] Artceus and those with
him, iii. 2. 2. 0/ ^t^) StvafUvra, Xennphon with his men, viL 4. 16. Oi il
hft^ Ti^a-apifvtiv iii. 5. 1 {cf. Ttgva^i^vnf xa) ot rtw etur^ lb. 3). T^ht' AfA^i
&fn^»)L^of xai *E(«riyi^ffv, Thrasyllus and Erasinides with ihdr eolleagmes,
Mem. i. !• 18. Oi fut irt^) rahg Ko^ivfiUut if ry Nf^^ n^nv, *i ^l Aunihufii^
nt »«} tl ^vfAf»a;^9t l» r!f 2t»uiifi, ' tiie Corinthians with their allies,* H. Gr. iv.
2. 14. TltrrantS rt net} Siafrtg, net) tSp i/^t row MiXiiritfy &nXn9 Fl. Hipp.
Maj. 281 C.

^4yT. 5. When the neiUer article is used substantively
mm a word or phrase following, (a.) the precise idea (as, in
English, of ' thing ' or ' things^) must be determined from the
connection, and (/J.) not unfrequently the whole expresaon
may he regarded as a periphrasis for an included substantive.
Thus,

», Tk rw y^^t$, ffte ecHa of oZi age, ApoL 6. T« &fA^) rh iriks/xav, rntZf-
tmy exercises, Cyr. ii. 1. 21. T«* ••if) Xl^o^itov, f^ fate of Proxenus, ii. 5.
37. 'Ey tmV i^ttvt0, [in tiie above] m tAe preceding narrative, vi. 3. I . Ti^
^|y ^ Kvftv )«X«y «Ti tfifrA»f t^u ir(»f fiftaf, £a-9't( ru ^fcirt(» 9'(§( lxt7f»f, * the
relation of Cyrus to us is the same as ours to him,' i. 3. 9. Ta wm^' iftsi
IXi^im ifr) rSif alxot, to prefer remaining with me to returning home, i. 7. 4.
*£«ri3 ft rk rSf di«ry xeikiis t7;^fy, and when the gods had been duly honored, ilL
2. 9. Tk m^) rUf ^xtif, the circumstances of the trial, PI. Phsedo, 57 b.
'Xm(Uo<P9s jotlv if^fi TtTiXivrnxti, . . ra )' ixttvov Ni*ry *A.e-iva7ct ff'MfiXatCi, 'ksB
place or office,* vi. 4. I 1. *&9r$ffrnfjfint tnett r«y afupi tx^us, to be skilled in
tactics, ii. 1.7. Toug rk *Afintxittt (pfovauvrxf, those that favor the cause of the
Athenians, Th. viii. Si. <^^09t79 rk v-^os o-i vii. 7, SO. T« r£f kktittf, the
habit of fishermen, CElc. 16. 7. 'flf Ti r» rou ^trxfitov tvrttt i^c^rwnro, * tb«
diversion of the river,' Cyr. vii. 5. 1 7. Tl rov ^Ifivxiiw l^ww vt^tfiUai, to be
in the condition of the horse of Ibycus, PI. Parm. 1 36 e. Athinn ri rZt ^xiimt,
ft> have the boyish fear. Id. Ph»do, 77 d (§ 432). T« r»d 2a<paxXioi/f, what it
eaid by Sophocles, Id. Rep. 329 c. T« r«y ^x^cfran, the convenience of thoet
who are present, Id. Gorg. 458 b. See § 447. y.

$, To Tw Tu;^fiSf the course of fortune, = n rvx^i fortune, Eur. Ale 785
T^ rSf tmuftdrtitf, the state of the winds, s= rk irnvfiutra, the winds, Dem. 49
7. Ti ft rZv ;^f ff/MKr«y, but the matter of the money, 5= rk %(nf**'ra. Id. 47 *
24. Tk rns i^yns = n i^yn, Th. ii. 60. •Ea-iftii rk fixtrtXittt, extoUed <fte king^
H. Gr. vii. 1. 38. Tk ^tSt atrtt fiauki/ctv Uroi Eur. Iph. A. 33. Tk ^
tdfmt ykf Wx« w^tra vXw W»$ Id. HeL 276. Tlj ^Jk rtr rtJff Ar», rkfui [ti

Digitized

by Google

CH 3.J PSEYIOTTS MBNTIOV, &a 321

i^ n iyttj S* tvxi rtt^9m Id. Andr. 235. £i ri cM' f^«m «^i(f« Soph.
EL 1203. See §4 447. y, 453. u

^4T8. 6. The neuter accusative of the article is
often used in forming adverbial phrases (^§ 440, 441), in con-
nection wifn,

«. AiyVERBS (§ 475. a) ; as, T^ «'aX«i [sc. ^], a« to Aat whidi wtu ofdd^
L e. fbmurhf, aneientfy, PL Phodr. 251 b. Tl w^Miw, before, L 10. 10. T^
w^it Eur. Ale 977. ItSfitweiXn [ri fft^-aXtv], back^ vi. 6. 38. T9 yt wa^ecu^
v/m Ar. yesp. 833. T« VK^tCw-ay Ag. 7. 7^ T« o-^^r** PL Tiin. 41 b.

/3. AixmcnvBS ; as, T« w^Sra*, at /irst^ L 10. 10. T« ^^Zrm, firU^ Soph.
Tr. 757. Ta w^irt^f, before, W. 4. 1 4. T« r^/rdv i. 6. 8. T« w^Latn iii.
4. 7. T«tfX«;^irr«y [r« lxi;^irrM], of /leof^ y. 7. 8. See § 441.

7. PBEPootnoMB followed by tiieir cases ; as, Ti &^i rM^i, <m toAat cfUr
this, I e. henoefbrth, €jr. v. 1. 6. T« l» r$Stt lb. 5. 43. T« it^h lrflrie«», to
<fte •oett, vL 4. 4. See § 475. b.

^479. 11.) B J previous mention, mutual un»
derstanding, general notpriety, or emphatic distinc-
tion ; as, ^

k0ard a noi$e paatinff through the rani$f andinqtnred what th* nam imu, L 8.
16. 0/ I' lirftiMUMf (tXxi'^ Miifittn nnic i»Tw^» i* tg^^rneat »4 *%X>'ims •
ivi^ yof rnt »«tfitnf ynkt^tf ^v, . . r*>v ^ Ivwivt i Xi^at IrtwXnr^
L 10. 11. Tit wXtTa alTU9 L 3. 16 (cf. AiVm ^Xo7u lb. 14). A«t/A4^
^ff ^f«rf, « r4 «'«r* fiV)v «i ^f«/Eur. Or. 418. "On Si^^ns S^rt^^v ay%U
^ ri^v ita(i0fimr«9 ^Tfmrtat i)Jify 'that innameraUe army/ iiL 2.
13. Tiv«i 9'0$9tif ra wkkk irvtvftar* U^ Sv AifXtit $opb. EL 56S.
Tif Afifa ifSf I u$ TBB MAir [L e. Artaxerxes], L 8. 26. 'AvMMXtfvimi
r«v ir(«l«r4i>, exclaiming, ' the traitor I ' vL 6. 7. *A»a»»X»v9ris rit $u»
i^yirtif, rif Mfi^m r«» mymfit Cyr. iiL 3. 4.

^ 480« Remarks. 1. From a reference to something
which precedes, or is mutually understood, the article may be
even joined,

m.) With an brcBBSooAnviB PBOSomr ; as, 'AxXa roUtn, tfn i *Ir;^«^-
XH^ ^iXm 91 . . hnyn^»*i»*» • • Tk «*«?«) I^nv \y«t, I will then, taid Ischom*
achus, relaU to you other thingt, [The what ?] What are they f said I, (£a
10. 1. KP. *A Y ift^^t fUXier», raZi* Stxtt Pfdettu *ET. Tit ^$7m
r»yrai EuT. Ph. 706. TP. Ila^^jM h ^aufia^rif. 'EP. To rs % Ar.
Pax, 696. *EP. OJa ft UlXtu^it ifairvHeiat 9W, TP. Tk r'n lb. 693
(Tk plor. with reference to «mi, and rt sing, for plur. ; cf. Ti «vy raVrei Uriv i
$ 450. y). Etf « rt wahTt ht' rt fA% ri itivif l^yartt i Eur. Bac. 492.
n«ri^y «p» iftnirtfov r^ t7}n PL Phado, 79 b. See § 528. 1.

/I. With a Pbbsonal. Pbokouh; as, Atv^* ^, JT )' ^f» »v^t iiftSv n
9m^aCmXX$*t i . . IIm, l^f iy«M, Xiyf4f, nmi ireifk vitat r§us vftut \ WtB
pou na^ said he, e&me hither directly tousf Whither, said I, do you say, and
to whom [as the you ?] do / po, in going to you f PL Lys. 203 b. Tiv i/»l,
Hbf iNi^ L e. MM, o^ whom you spoakf U. PhiL 20 a.

Digitized

by Google

822' SYNTAX OF THB ASTICLfc. [bOOK III.

7.) With a Proboun of Quautt or Quabtitt ; as, T« rtwvv Um^
much a dream aa I have de$cribed, or, nuh a dream a» Ais, iu. 1 • 3. *Ay4^m»
#«^y r«» rf»r§f Mem. L 5. 2. Tiif mXMamv J^^nv PL Leg. 755 b.

2. A naameral preoedeJ by &fnfi, about, has commonly the artide, the roond
namber being apparently regarded aa an object familiar to the mind, or as a
definite standard to which an approach is made ; thus, "A^fiarm . . a/&pt rk
•7x«ri, chariota about ffte [number of] twenty^ L e. about twetity w namber, L 7
10. TliXru^rmi ^ Jifi^l r«vf 3wr;^<X<Mff L 2. 9. 'Aftfi rm Wfrnnavrm Im ii.
6« 15« So, £/f r« |jMtr«v m^ftMTm Qjt, vL !• 50.

^481. III.) By the connectioihin which it is
employed; as,

'had sooceeded to the throne [sc of Persia],* L 1. 3. *Ic9mt M rut Bu(m»
L 2. 11. Ai k0y;^ut uui as rm^ttf uuru^puf iyty90fT« u 8. 8. 0< )'
iflTM ixfi0f v^if VMS tr^t^iXuuug, l^nrtin r$uf af^;^«vr«f n, 3« 8.

§ 483* Remark. With substantives which are rendered
definite by the connection, the article has ^ften the forc«» of a
possessive (see § 503) ; as,

*EC»vX»ro rii wu7^% u/Ap^ri^m vu^mui, he withed [the] hi» diUdren to ba
boApreaetU, L 1. 1. Ti^va^i^fnt liaCtiXXu rap KS^op ir^if r«v Ji^iXpi* Ib«
3. KSfif n uuru^ni^auf atari r$» £ffaur§f r§9 B-aifdum Uiiv, ««)
damCkf M ri* ?«'«'•» ru ituXrk iif rkf X*T(Uf tXuC$u8,S,

§ 483. IV.) By contrast.

This may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which
are otherwise quite indefinite ; and may even lead to the em-
ployment of the article with the indefinite pronoun tig. Thus,

*£y ixeia-r^ r^tTf &t^fUf, Jy di ftif ivd IxCdvrif tts ru^t litfro rk ov^Xm, i ^
iif tfitttf 'of whom two . ., bat the third,' v. 4. 11. T£v }i irtXiftittv ai fitiv
rjnt aiafiofit$9»t araXtv Xi^u/Mf . ., 0/ ^ artXXoi • • (puufM ^auw ^tvytarif,
* some . ., but the most,' iv. 3. 33. "Iw^tug . ., rahg fiif ntuf aru( ifui^
rdht }il rf KXtd^xv *»ruX$X$t/*fii»0Vf iii. 3. 19. Cf. § 490. R.

§ 484. General Remarks. 1. The article is some-
times found without a substantive, through anacoluthon (§ 329.
N.) or aposiopesis {anoaitontiaig^ the becoming silent, i. e. the
leaving a sentence unfinished, from design, strong emotion, or
any other cause) ; as,

'H TsJt &XXu* 'ExXnyMV f i^Ti ;^(fi »uxi»9, t7r ayf^tav, i7rt uui

kfA^irt^a ravr* $iviTv, the , whether I ahould aay cowardice, or /oUy

cf the rest of the Greeks^ or both these together, Dem. 231. 2i. Tnt yu^
Xfinsy tl^n rig iari a^»(piu xa) •?«, fiei^Tu^et v/tTt ira^t|0/MM PL ApoL 20 e.

Mu riv 1 oh au yt. Not youj by (the name of the god omitted, ai

the old grammarians say, through reverence), lb. Gorg. 46*6 e. «

§48ai. 2. Omission of the Article With substan*

Digitized by VjOOQIC

eB. 3.] OMISSION.

fives which will he at once recognized as definite without the
article, it is often omitted ; particularly with,

m. Proper names, and other name* reeembUng these from their being speeialfy
appropriated or familiar appeUaiioiu of pereoru (§ 471) ; thus, AsaCeiXXu rev
KSfou . . "2vXXa/AU9u Kv^«» i. 1. 3. U^if KS^n lb. 6, 7. Il^it rif Kv^m
lb. 10. *a ^ K»^6( lb. 7, 10. KSe^f ^^ L 2. 5. See L 5, 1 1, 12. EiV rJb
K$Xt»mf i. 2. 20, 21. Elf KiXutiat lb. 21. *A^m nXif ^vf$fri ii. 2. 13.
"AfMt r^ hxi^ iu$/*i9f lb. 1 6. Ttitt &^x^w* ^' S«X^ A**}; , . . tms rnt yn§
Rep. Ath. 2. 4. Ttfr* /ub xark ^^X»TTa9 A(;^»uft9, . . rtig il »«t« ^y lb. 5«
n^tf Irff-i^^v, . . W(os tilt v. 7. 6. "On fii(ut$ • . f i^ii, virsf 'ii lb. 7. T2
Ituivttw irX«r*y. • • "E;^*r yt etirSv *a) ri»9a »ai yufrnxat 1. 4. 8. Amiuf i*
xmi «vr«y »«2 ^y»?»« xm.) «'«?)«; »«) ta ;);(i}jiM(r« yii. 8. 9. St** r*?; B^t
lu.1.23. n^ tSp ^St lb. 24. 2v» :^Mr« yii. 7. 7. Xl^of i^i«fy v. 7. 5.
Aixtuit Irri xmi w^cf Buiv xmi m-^ig mvi^m^vn L 6. 6. T« r^*; rout ^ttUt • •
rk w(0t rths M^am^iut Lac 13. 11. — Hence fiafiX$v(, in its fiuniliar appli-
cation to the ^ng of Pereia^ commonly wants the article ; as^ Tie^ivirmt
m fianXUf goee to the king, i. 2. 4. Cf. T«y fim^sXU iL 4. 4.

fi. Abstract nouns, names of arts €tnd sciences^ and generic t^rms (§ 470) ;
thus, E?^0f iTxtri ^a^Sv, S-'ptf 21 Ixarov IL 4. 12. T« iv^ts wtmatrra wMf^
»x) ri 3yf/6f w%9rnxo9ra iiL 4. 10. *T^» xiXXavt «c) ^tyiStut itimynrtv Cyr.
Viii. 7. 22. Qau/Ativieu r« xaXXtt xmi rl fiiytias ii. 3. 15. R«) kfiftUt, mU
0t0^(00-vni, xai 2txM00'vfn PL Phsado, 69 b. Fut^ySav n xm) rht wtXtfumk*
rix^nv (Ec 4. 4. 'On W) S«»«T«y MyMTo L 6. 10. 0i«riCirr«T«y • • (Am
if0^»i^0t PL Leg. 902 b.

§ 41 80* y, Sabstantives followed by Ae article wUh a d^/bung word
0r phrase ; thns, Kv^io kwri/Anrm A xi^mXn xa) x*k ** ^'^ ^* ^^* ^* '^^
rxffi^y tivrit riif Htw^ivrt vi. 4. 1 9.

KoTES. 1. Proper names, followed by the article, are rarely preceded bgr
It, exo^ with special demonstratiye force. Tlius, lia^urmrtt • . A f/^n^ni^
L 1 . 4. ^d(pxinTtt }i i ^rv/x^xXtit . ., ^ttx^eimf ^ i A^xtif i. 2. 3. '£»
Xij»/»0y))r9» r^ xmrxtrt^i^xf *ACuiou L 1. 9 (of. *£» rw ^^^avn^au L S. 4)u
Bat, '0 % iiXavtV « *AfAC(axuirti(, but that Silanus the AmJbraciot (who had
been the chief soothsayer (^ the army), vL 4. 13.

2. In this ccmstructioQ, the sabstanUve is sometimes first introduced as m*
definite, and <ft«M d^ned; and this subsequent definition sometimes respects
simply the kind or class. Thus, K^^yn A M/)«i> »«X0v^iv«, a fountain [that
called Midas's] vAtcA teMU coffcrf the fountain of JUidas, i. 2. 13. n«XX#} ))
rr^tfv^tf) «/ /(»fy«XM, afu/ mof^ struthiy the large ones, i. e. ostriches, L 5* 8
Ei^MB . . wxx» rx 9'Xxrix, * of the broad kind,* v. 4. 29.

X 7W or more nouns cot^pUd together ; as, IIi^} ^ r*>f rMMv^i t/ n »«»X^
litX^iiV, •?«» 'Hx/tfv n jc«2 nXnvfif xx) iwr^mv xx) yiis xxi xtfii^dg xmi ki^t xai
wv(it xx) Smarts xx) ifif xxi \nxur0U \ PL Oat. 408 d (cC Th HXtn, 'H n-
X^Mi, T;^ ifr^x lb. 408, 409). See other examples in § 485.

I. Ordinals and Superlatives; as, Kx) T(ir»f irt rl^wtXifut InXi^fw Th«
fi. 103. EiV 'Irrtfiv, rnf KtXtxixt U^eirnf viXif L 4.. 1.

§ 41 8 7* 3. The PARTS OF A SENTENCE may be ranked as foDow^
with respect to the frequency of their taking the article : (a) An appositiMf
Impended for distinction. See ^§ 472, 474. {b) The subject of the sentanosu

Digitized

by Google

WM SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [fiuiOS IH

(e) An cuguHct not yovermd by a pnepotkion, (d) An edjunet gooenud iy m
prepoiition. (e) An attribute. This commonlj wants the article, as amply
denotmg that the subject is one of a dass. To this head belongs the second
Ace. after verbs of making, naming, &c. (§ 434).

4. Hence the article is often used in marking the aubfect of a tentence, aiMi
aometimes appears to be used chiefly for this purpose. Thus, Wi ^uyh t7ti i
i^e!i0S, kU ibe departure abtnUd be a JUght^ vii. 8. 16. 'Eifitv-iftov I' mv r« x^-
fi$M I 4. 6. *Ra-af H l^tttci ui wXu^rat, and the greater part was apdt, v. 4. 27
(-§ .455). YirnXwri y% aMoXa^iav ri u«ci rSf fihwt i^^trfiat PI. Phaodo^ 68 «b
*A^* eZv wm^*k$iwim Mf ayai§) m^ *a»u »i kyafiJ rt xat 6t tutMsi { Id.
Qotf^ 496 c T« ht in»r* iitut Uri*, twice fne i$ ten, Mem. iv. 4. 7. Oi
fti^t htvug •vhh &K\» n fU^ui tiViv ivt^m^ot, ten thousand horsemen are noA-
ing dse than ten thousand men, iii. 2. 18. K«} GEOS h *0 AOFOS St.
Jn. 1. 1.

lit y s^h "' ^ K?* /^i* i*^' nnripnut, «

T« narhifuv ^t ^jfy nari ftfiti^iratm £ur. PoL Fr. 7.

^488* 5. There are some words, with which it is especiallir impor-
tant to observe the insertion or omission of the article ; as, "Axxo ^t rv^riv
ftm, and another army, i. 1. 9. To &XX* fr^anvfia, the rest of the army, L 2.
^5. ^Aftptx^ivnt »«} AxXst, 'and others,' iv. 2. 17. *£ir0(ti/^«r»y, S »! £X}iM,
*Qie others,' 'the rest,' lb. 10. tlaXu rw fr^artafcecr^s, 'much (^, iv. 1. 11*
*£• /At ^ ireXo Tw *ExXti9t»dS, 'the greater part,' L 4. 13. TlaXXdi^ mang,
hr. t>. 26. TtfVf woXXouf, the most, lb. 24 (§ 466). *0xiy9i a^ihtifn^fj fm
died, iv. 2. 7. IIXi/ap r§vrt0f JiirtXmvtt i ix^*f ^ ** ixiyi, 'the few,' *tha
aristocracy,' Bep. Ath. 2. 10. See § 472. ».

6. When two words or phrases are connected by a conjunction, if th«y no*
fer to different objects, the article is more frequendy rioted; hut otherwise
not ; as, T« Ti fiafCa^mot »eti to 'ExXv mxav ivravfia 0r^tirivfA» i. 2. 1 . T*l»
^XX^uf ntt) rZf fiei^Cufw lb. 14. Tcvg itt^roht »») tSvoug »et) fitCaiouf i. 9.
90. Tiif Wfiefitv pdX/ae o^oftv^fAara xee.) ^iffriots i* 6. 3. '0 $' etu ^tit *rkX»»t
rSy &9r»rr» XV^* ytyoftig ri neti A 9 net) i^ofittvif U-n f*ov9f PI. Tim.
38 e.

7. When two nouns are related to each other in a clause, and have the sama
extent of meaning, the article is commonly Joined with both, or with neither s
4U, HXnhi f^v X''t** **^ M^tt^ttf i0';^u^a««v«'«, t»7s ^ ^n»in vm «2«iy »«) rf
Xt#«^r^«4 vkt ivvdfutf a*^*ns i. 5. 9. Ovii^or &^a . . Xv^trtXkm^s* ikiinim
%ix»tominm Pl> Rep. 354 'a. Avr<riA.i^ri(0y h atitxiet rnt %tmai»^9fit lb- bb
*H ^tofAttwt ^dffMtna [awoi4^ov^» rix*fl]* • • *H tms i^^ott rk i^irfiutra lb*
SS2c

§ 4 8 9* 8. The Insertion or omission of the article often depends, both
in poetry and prose, upon euphony and rhythm, and upon those nice distinctumM
in the expression of our ideas, which, though they may he readily fdt, are often
transferred with difficulty from one language to another. In general, the inser-
tion of the ardde promotes the perspicuity, and its omission, the vivacity of dis-
joaana. It is, oonseqaently, more employed in philoeophiad than in rhetoriccu
compoation, and far more m. prose than tn poetry. It should be remarked,
however, that, even in prose, tiiere is none of the minutise of language in
rhich manuscripts differ more, than in respect to its insertion 'or oniisaiony
••pedaUy with proper names.

9* The article is sometimes so dosely united with the word JbDowlng, tiftal

Digitized

by Google

CM. U,] . IT&E AS A PRONOUN. 325

» Mcond article u prefix^ as if to a shi^e word ; thus, Ao'^^f ^l i xatrk
rmlrif [a* r# avri, § 97. N.] «Xf}^f yiyvifiuat, sri^i r$ B^atn^tv [= t$
I«V{«», § 39] <Sv, »«) «^f) r^ T«|iT«i> . ., xai i r»v ^mri^ov ic6»Xef PL
Tim. 37 b. Ti n ^tirt^^v jmi) ta r«&r0» lb. 44 b (see §§ 479, 480). TS*
r$ ftnytf [sc. S¥rt0v]i thote who are Hiat which i$ nothing^ Eur. Tro. 412 (see
5§ 450. 1^ 476>

IL The Article as a Pronoun.

§ 490* A. The ARTICLE, if we include both its aspirai*
ed and its t- forms ^ is used as a pronoun, by Attic writers,
only in connection with certain particles.

Note. By the use of the article as a pronouny is meant its §ub$ta»ahe mm
independent of a modifying word dr phrase (§ 476). This use is explained,
as in the case of otiier adjectives (§ 447), by the dlipsis ift a noun. As a
pronoun, the article in Attic writen is either demonstratioe or personal, the
cases in § 493 excepted.

I . "With fiWand H; aa, *0 ^ [sc. miiX^s] v'lihraty and he ^the brother]
kpemutdedy i. 1. B. 0« ft.h fx*^^** KA.i«(;^«« )t wtf/tfitUf they (Ghirisopbus
and Meno) wentf but Clearchtu stayed, IL I. 6. lilas n Ktti/At'ntv Xt«/ nxXu
%4xam$j U II rSf fteiXjer lyti Soph. (Ed. C. 741.

HmMAHK. The artide with ^iv and ^i is commonly used for contradisHnc
(ton (cf. § 483), and we may translate i /i,h . ., « ^t, this . ., that, the one , ,,
the other, one . ., another, &c., and ti f^h . ., «i Vt, these . ., those, some . ., otpers,
&c Thus, *0 ft,h fietivtreii, i il ^tt^^nT, Ae one is mad, the other is rational,
PI. PhiBdr. 244 a. O/ f^h i«-#^it/*fT», «l V tixtrr; the one party (the Greelss)
marched on, and the otfier (the Persians) followed^ iii. 4. 16. BanXsw rt ««)
el "EiXXmis • 't cl fAiv iui»o9Tt( . ., o* ^' a^^d^tvrtt, ' these . • those,' i. 10. 4.
Tivt fi,h ttirSf a^izrun, rtvs V i^iCaXir, ^some . . Others,' L 1. 7 (§ 362. «)•
*Ev fiXv &fa T»7s ^vfipwufAiv, U il r»7t *3 PI. Phsedr. 263 b. "E^urx f«vfry
9'afftiv ti»»u6VTts, i^tXi^avrt rovro ^iv \» rnti 'rovro ^\ l» rns Rep. Ath. 2. 8. Tit
fat iiretfitt, , . riXot ^l Ketrixretu, he received some wounds, but finally- slew,
L 9. 6. *0 /4v ^f;^fv, «/ Ti WttiotTa, he (Gearchus) commanded, and the rest
obeyed, ii. 2. 5. Tff fuv yk^ »f»l»¥, rp ^\ tSoiov, iu^iw6/A%f ro S^of, for we shall
find the mountain, here easy, and there difficult, of ascent, iv. 8. 10 (§ 421. /3).
Ti fiiv ri fia;^if*tfoi, ra ^ *ai av»ir»vafAtv»t, * [as to some things . • as tO
Others] partly . # partly,* *now . . now,* iv. 1. 14 (§ 441).

§ 419 1« 2.) In poetry, with yi^ ; as, n«^' Av^^tff ^avarim Sfn^f
I y^ fciyifraf etlrtif ruyp^tuu %$^vl^uit, * fijT he,* Soph. EL 45. Tnt yii(
wi^nm. fitirfig Soph. (Ed. T. 1082. T« yof . • ^irawf fti^n, for this is a rare
ht, Eur. Ale 473.

8.) As the subject of a verb, after xec), and ; as. Km) rh mtXtwrn "iav^eu,
and that he bade him give it, Cyr. i. 3. 9. K«2 «•«» k^ax^iimwieu Xiytvtu lb. iv.
S. 13.

Rbmark. The j7roe/t^« m the nominative (i, 4, tt, at, § 148) require, from
the very laws of accent, that the particle, in connection with which they
are used, should follow them. If, therefore, it precedes, Uiey become orAotone,
•r, m other words, take the forms which commonly belong to the relatioe pro-
SMN ($ 148. 2). This ehange takes pkee with nmi onifiMrmly, and with U
28

Digitized

by Google

820 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. [bOOS TO

when it follows iT foi t^n (§ 228) ; thus, Km) is yetv/Min, ond he uxmdenif i.
8. 16. Em) a, "Ov» ituptifinfUf i** iipti PL Conv. 201 e. E«) t1 il*«f vii
6. 4. ^ }' 7f, said he, H. Rep. 327 e. ^H i' is, i Tx»v»m, coai Ae, L •.
Olaueo, lb. b. *B, V H, ecdd ihe, Id. Cony. 205 c

^ 493* B. The article in its t- forms likewise occun,

I.) As a DEMONSTRATIVE OF PERSONAL PRONOUN,

1.) Before the rekOhee it, iwt, and tUf ; as, T«tf ; 7^riy, of that whu^ ia,
PL Phffido, 92 d. Ili^) ri l^* f XomTrcu Id. Phil. 37 e. Em) rip if f^
^ifitirtif vourau t4itMt LjS. 167. 15, Tlt^ rt^wi rSf ireu wt^) recurd %ln
PI. Soph. 241 e. n^flntxfi na) fuvth rtus olit^t^ oSrss Dem. 613. 9. — The
sentence introdnced by the relative may be iQ^uded as a defining claute, to
which the article is prefixed (see § 472).

2.) In particular forms of expretdon ; viz.

«. n^0 rod (also written ^^drau), before this; thns, T« yt ^^i tw wmTf
Met PL Ale 109 e. 01 V eWtrai fiyxtvwn • «XX* •vk at w^irw Al, Nubb
5. 0/ ir^o r$v ^/Xm, ' former friends,* Eur. Med. 696. See § w5. b.

$. T^, [through this as a cause, § 416] for tfiis reason, therefore; thoa^ Tf
rgi . . ftSikXev vM^rUv PL Thest. 179 d.

y, T« yty followed by in ; as, T« 71 1^ aHa, irt * ., UUs I loeU know, thai
• ., PI. Euthyd. 291 a. T» 71 l^ xaretfanriof . ., iri Id. PoL 305 c

%. The article dotdded with »«/ or ilf ; as, E/ r» »m) t« mln^if iffi^mitH
«vT«r}, 0V» »y ««'i^«yty, tf this man had done this and that, he would not ham
died, Dem. 308. 3. T» nau rk ^iwtnim Id. 560. 17. *A<pt»ft!vfMu in ris
km) rffv,. I go to this one and that, Lys. 94. 3. With the article again re-
peated ; "Oil ya^ ri »«2 to ^un^Mt, not) ri fin votnrait for this and that tof
ought to have done^ and this not to have done, Dem. 1 28. 1 6. "Of %(pn )«ry aSrm
Wfa^ifUff^xi xtv^uvtvtn rif fr^etrnyn, i*m /mi rk ti ret yttnrtreu, kXX* i^mf
ret, *• not these or those, but these,* Id. 1457. 16. The nominative it neu Z§
(§ 491. R.) occurs, Hdt. iv. 68.

3.) Through poetic license, in imitation of the earlier Greek ; as, T«y . •
fiUef, him destroy, Soph. (Ed. T. 200. TeiTf ft,et f4,i\iff§eti, take care of these far
me, lb. 1466. M/« yat^ ^i^X^ * ^^^ uv't^akytit fiir^iew ij^iet Eur. Alc 883«
'Arri^tff, eretv ^fitvetrtv, ittreXat r% rHv .£8Ch. Ag. 7.

§ 493. II.) As a RELATIVE PRONOUN.

This substitution of the r- for the aspirated forms (§ 147) occurs in no
Attic writers except the tragedians, and scarcely in these, except to avoid hia*
tus, or lengthen a short syllable. Thus, Krtltde-a roht »u xs^* xratttv, having
slain those whom she ought not to slay, Eur. Andr. 8 ) 0. T^r ^h, rev fvt >^i-
yut, the god, whom you now blame, lb. Bac. 7 1 2. l^etTt inufav, hrn a^rtees
fiekuf \pifAiw6et, TO ^* eZrei Xiytt \ Soph. (Ed. T. 1054. 'Aydk/^et^' 4»(kf
rSt . . a«'t0-Tf(i)/ IfMtvrev lb. 1379. "Ayet . . ittxvuveu, ri f*nr$ yn . • it^eer*
"iilirm lb. 1426.

Remark. On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes foand
with fnU and Vi for the r- forms (§ 490. 1 ) ; thus, HeXut •Exx^f/'W, 1$
pX9 ktettiSw, tit ett ^ ravt ^vyxiett uardytf, * some destroying, and to otben»

Digitized

by Google

CA. 4.J FRONOU?f. — AGaEEMENT. 327

DeDU 248. 18. *A# ^v ttardXupt m-ikug r«rv i^ruyiirifsfff rnkf ^ if^0u
[d. 282. 11. Tfiiftm y •$§ ft^9 SuMu^t SxC0¥, rtltg )* tig ftiwf il»u Eur. Iph.
T. 419. So, '0«4 A^y • ^ M )•, mmdimu • ^ a< oCAer time*, Th. TiL 27
tM M Yen. 5. 8.

CHAPTER IV.

SnrTAX OF THE PBONOUH.

L Agreement of the Pronoun.

^494. Rule XXVIII. A Pronoun agrees
with its mbject in gender ^ number^ and person.

By the $utjeet of a prommn is meant the tubttanthe which it repremHta,
The role, therdbre, has respect either to ttibttantive pronowuy or to adjeetiee
pronoun* tued 9ub$tantivefy. The constmcticni of adjective pronouns regarded
a$ $uch belongB to Rulb XXYL, and even their substantive use is explained
by ellipsis (§ 447. a). Thus,

"Bm^tXtvf riig /th ir^is Ittvrif p. e. /3«riXS«3 ^fiCfifX)); «^» jMnr^y Ihg
king did not perceive Ihe plot agahut himedf^ L I. 8. 'Av* rnt Jt(X**f* ^9
[so. it^x^*\ mt/r§9 ^ttrfdwnv Iv-tinn, from the government, cf which [goverm-
ment] he had made him eatrap, i. 1.2. Hmfrvt ifi . • &fi^*4^o¥Tttt lb.
ll^ig r$9 tiitX^off itt IwtCdvXtMi air if, *0 H WilStrm {% 490) lb. 3.
*Tm«« • *, ^«'«' i^^i iv. 6. 14. &tuffAmm» wttug, h . . %thttg Mem. iL 7. IS.

§ 49«i. The remarks upon the agreement of the adjec«
TivE (§§ 444-459) likewise apply, so far as gender and nam'
her are concerned, to that of the pronoun, and some of them
*o even a greater extent (^ 444. a). Thus,

a. BfAScuLons Form fob FEMmiNB.

"O^^rt^ tl rit x^t^i ^* ^ ^*f ^^^ ^^ nfXXafiCantv AXXnXtt* Woinrt^^
dkfi^ivAP T0vr«v T(a«'«fyr« w^ig ri itaxt^Xvtn iXXnXat Mem. ii. 3. 18.
See § 444. fi.

Note. In speaking of persons vaguely , or generally, or simply as permma,
the masculine gender often takes the place of the feminine, both in pronouns
and in other substantive words which admit it: thus, Uh •Ig r oh xcn*
l.'^ r^ fttir^f] ft 0/wrX4?y Soph. (£d. T. 1184.. Ov^i y«^ xetftHi ira^;^0rri
fuett Jf ri»«i v'^dey/yurm Id. El. 770. "H ^rtT^^t ovva fitoe-x^t »w» ati^trmi
Ttnvtvrttg &XXd»g [ss rixr«vr«r SxXn»] ^ur. Andr. 7 1 1 . ^vuXtiXuifaet*
mg i^ »mratXiXufAf»,Utu ihxptti rt »«2 i,hX<piiaT Mat «»i<v^<«i r«rat/r«4, Ji^r
fShtu If «^ UKtif Tt^wm^avxathixm T»t/g IXtvfiftvg. . . JLaXtiriv fAv *Z»
Wrtf, Z S^^x^n;, rtvg tiniitvg wt^io^Sf difXXvfitifdug, miuvmrtf ^
re0'eir§»g r^iftt Mem. iL 7. 2 (cL lb. 8). See § 336. «.

Digitized

by Google

SYNTAX OF THE PBONOUIf. [BOOK III.

§ 4l94w b. UsB or itaE Nbitibr.

T/ yik( T«ur»v f/ntxet^tMrt^ttf r»v yp fiu^in^^t i Cyr. viii. 7. 25 (§ 44 5} •
'Efii(ivr»f*t9, %*i^ hfitZf xeii avet^rnvrat Wtin^t iv. 1. t^2« T/y *um m9 if»s»
Xtyn^Mv ahrU ^»vX.%fffi«t fitnr nkifitot finr aXm^ava ipaitiwimi rut vtnwrtt %
*EJ«*i4 y &9 afA^ori^tt rauraf tt . . Mem. i. I. 5 (§ 450). — The nemier
referring to words oj other geuders, and the neuter plural for the mngmUm
(§§ 450, 451), are particularly frequent in pronouns.

c GoKPeuND GoM/nsvoinHr.

*A^Ta«^0« »c) 'HUf^liairntt ol ^wav iu 5. 35. Ti§\Xt>ut ti &*i^ tuti ym
9m7naf xetXett xt^^i^, tSt $v Xfli^tr^oi )inrii, aXX* aUT0) • . ira^i^atrmt ylL 3
3 1 . *Aff^a\u«tTf »eti tSxXnaVf M §vr» ituretwn^ircu CyT. viii. ^. 22. n«XXA
V i^ w^oCara »a) tttyaf »c) 00Vf xiti §960$, & it^»ia^i9rct iiL 5. 9. 'AfrotX-
XtiyuTtt wtXifittv »m) »4fiu90it9 »ui Ttt^axnit i'f i» • • s«^rr«t^ty fsocr. 163 b.
See ^ 446. — Zeugma is fiir less frequent in the construction of the protunm
than in that of the adjective,

§497* d. STjnfiSis. .

T« 'A^m)/»m iwXirt»h, Jv 3l(x$ KXta9t0^ iv. 8. 18. T« )0|«»v« Iv 9-Xi^
Pttf •?«'i( h»tU»»^t9 PL Phadr. 260 a. B«riXtw • . • «/ I' ^«qi^«i>rff i.

10. 4 (cf. lb. 2 and 5). Oi»r^« yk^ wtwi9fiaf*»9, 4 . . »•«!» xaHrx'* IXv-t^
Eur. Iph. A. 985. *n ^iXl« >^tr;^«b. If . . iT^^ff Soph. PhiL 714. ^H i7«#ik
•«} trserti ^vxh, tlxv ^ i«'»Xi«'«»» hftmt i Qjnr. vii. 3. 8. TlxMrt, ..••>;
Eur. Suppl. 12. See § 453.

Notes. I. In the construction of the pnmonn, the number u often eham^
for the sake of indwidualizing or generalizing the eKpressaon ; as, "O^rtt I*
Jip»9t7T9 . ., ir«£yTCf . . ^miri/ufrcrd, oimI whoever came, he tent them aM
back, i. 1.5. 'ArWZ^iTAi Wirraf, ^J" iSv «ri^irpy;^iiw» PI. Rep. 566 d. *0< ^
»a/A9if rZ9 atx%TZ9f 'r»»rt9 ft X^tfAtXfiTMt 9'£9rt09f tvttt ^t^awivfirmt
(Ec. 7. 37. T«c;r«i/f . ., f I9 , , w«XXa) Xvnritt lb. 21. 8. "AXX^Wf >*
UtXiPi Xfyiiv, di« r/ ?»a^T0f WXnyfi, and he bade the rest say, on what ae-
eount each one had been struck, y. 8. 12. H^fiin Ivi Xniwr^, •Z9'ti9a$
ftr» tx^9 Tt vii. 3. 16. nir^Mtv XtfCm . . fT*; T««^r«f Irri, »m} t«» m^*
Indfrotf hti9tTfuu vi» 6» 33. *Hv et^i49ia r«>v d-iX0»r«v JMfiwivfi*, Tr**
r<f «70ir0 Kv^dv ttiffin^trfat L 9. 15 (see lb. 16). 'Hv Vt rtf rwran Tt irm»
^aCai9u, ^nfititt9 avTtif Wi6ifa9 Cyr. i. 2. 2. Ei )i ri iSaxt? irXi«v Irr*
&y»fi97s, T0VTM9 /utrt;^0v^« Eur. Ale 744. *AXnffit ^* ^iXag • . • tSw
mftfifitof w woXvf, he was a true friend ; of whom the nunAer is not great. Id*
Suppl. 867. AuT»v(y§t, «?iri^ nai fM9M ralt^ov^t yn9 Id. Or. 720* d«-
(rctv^»9r»ii$ «V4^ • sSs ^h net} Wuivit ts 9'Xn^»s PI. Bcp. 554 a.

2. A pronoun often refers to a subject which is implied in anoAer word («f.

§ 454); as, Oipyii • . if 'Ki(»v(a9, M9 tLVTSi9 [i. e. TMV %M^XV^il9'\
sli^yiTtiu he flies to Corcyra, being a benefactor of tlieirs, Th. i. 136. 'Avi
TltX0ird99in^ov , ., tl TATir^i »^i<Vr9i/« iiri Id. vi. 80. Tiis ift^nf ivtt^Hav,
Ir [i. e. i/ui] fitriT 0xyi7rt Soph. (Ed. C. 730. UlaT^^a ^* irrla xaiTt^xd*
^n, auT$t ^ . . fTiVyii Eur. Hec 22. *Avv/(»iy«i«f , Jv [i. e. d^(v«/(V»3 ^'
l;^^r TUX*** lb. 416.

§498. e. AiTRAonoir.

A pronoun is sometimes attracted by a word in its own dause, or a word In
•Hwtition with its real talas^ct (cf. § 455) ; as, Btedv^n* ^7Mr4» }m0if, ^irie

Digitized

by Google

ca. 4] FBB80NAL, POSSBSSITE, AND KEFLEXIVB. SUB

[A>r lori^] l^ mA\Xi^09 x**^^^ ^^** ^ *^ 9^ y^> °* ** retidenee, Bium^
toftidi u my jmult town, vii. 2. 38. *£^r/«f , •»' oSrt ivuuri^cit x^V^^ ^^* "^
5« 56, Ottih S^m»v itetyiyiftifiat irM^v * ^rfrt^ [for flfri^, § 445] vofii^v fiiXi*
mv ft7N»4 x«XA,i«'rffv ^ir«X07i«; ApoL 3. 0«(ri7v • • . avr« yk^ tif »v ^tifiti-
Tvf k^uXXmyn JEaxAk. Pr. 754. *£ir2 vvXcf rnt KtXtxiat xai Ttig 2t;^/«f«
THrtfv ^ r«»r« [for « Jt«i] )v« «^<;t'' ^* ^* ^* ^^ ^'*^ ^' avfi^tivtif irig •u
maXif, S wdfra V*f **** ^^ Mftiittm i PL Leg. 937 d. — This oonstroctioa
may be commonly explained by dlipna ; thus, 'E^ritifi tZ [x''V*^'i '^' *'^'
rt^tv X'*€^» ^ hearth, than whkh [spot] tii€n it no hotter ipot,

§ 4199* Additional Remarks. 1. A pronoun, for the sake of
perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in anticipation or repetition of its eubfeel,
or is itself repeated; as, T/ yikf r»vr§u fMtxafMTi^tv, t»v y^ /Atx^^at i For
what i$ happier than tftif, to mingle with the earth f Cyr. viii. 7. 25. T«i/r««
rtfi£fMUf rnt b VL^uratviicf rtrn^tttt PL Apol. 37 a. , KiTytf xaXXro, Ttxv*^
Sfi'trtira rtft,^f Eur. Ph. 535. 'Ayim$ ^ i *A^xat xa\ '^atx^xriti i *Ax»i*s,
xal r»urtt &^i§xfirtif, ' these also died,' ii. 6. 30. BaB«-iXi« . .^ wx tila o rt
^u air 09 ifisvat ii. 4. 7. *AXxiZ$£hns . .» f^TM »axiry«( nfAtXnffiv avrcv
Mem. i. '2, 24. 2»i>^«4 ^t, aT^^ Avri fioi trt^t ri, aT^f mv 4-1^1 I/a), t^urd fAts
ftift^ Cyr. iv. 5. '29. 0W« U vt . . 7;^;*" ^^ Wt^tilxi r«i Q£c. 3. 16«
"Em ^«^ r4f «v v^iwct Ytva^rnt ^iXtg rts £ur. Andr. 733.

Note. Homer often uses the personal pron. cS^ with its noun following ;
aa, *Hv &^ «i ^t^tiwtt9 ix* vtf^in Xmtn N. 600. *nS ftn iyu^n '^auftxmaw
tlhrt^k»9 \. 48. Cf. ^ 468. b.

^ oOO* 2. A change of person sometime^ takes place ; — (a) From
the%nion of direct and ineUrect modes of speaking, especially in quotation ; as,
'Ajyur m9 fimrtu99 tivif ixw^iittt Sf . . xxxratof, take o^ of the way a eente*
Jem man, me, who have elain, Soph. Ant. 1 339. Kmi tvrt t<pn ** i/iXuv ir«(iv.
t^§xt, v^a^kmCaltt UtXvTxe Ix irmtrit v«v ^rfxrivfiartf, 'Ey« ya^i** 7^*f»
•*#T^«" iv. 1. 27. S^i. 3. iiO; iii. 3. 12; iv. 1. 19; v. 6. '25, 26.—
(&) From a speaker's addressing a company, now as one with them, and noir
tm distinct from them; as, Aupfixwut v fit is ut i^n* T«(a;^^y 4 artfAj; nfiSe
naiiernxit* i$ixxrt yik^ . ., «7riMf vtivxafittt Isocr. 141 d.

II. Special Observations on the Pronouns.

^ ffOl* Of the observations which follow, many apply
equally to pronouns and adverbs of the same classes,

A. Personal, Possessive, and Reflexive.

§ ff03» In the use of the pronouns, especially those of
the classes named above, it is important to distinguish between
the stronger and the weaker forms of expression ; that is, be-
tween those forms which are more distinctwe^ emphatic^ or
promincTU^ and those which are less so.

I. In the weaker form, the first and second personal pro-
nouns are omitted in the Nom,<t and are enclitic in the oblique
cases sing. ; but in the stronger form, they are expressed in the
iVbm., and are orthotone throughout. In the weaker form, the
THIRD personal PRONOUN is omitted in the Nom.^ and is com-
28»

Digitized

by Google

380 SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUW. [bOOK m

monly supplied hy avrog in the oblique cases ; in the stronger'
form, it is supplied by o and og, whicii are simply distinctive
and are limited in their use (§§ 490-492), and by oviog, ode
and ixBivog, which are both distinctive and demonstrative. Thus,

'AfTArrA rAMt £iri^««a rM, Siri« »«) rv I/U0} d^iiu^as rov av^A, I gave ytm
back every thing aafct when you. aiso had shmon to me the man, v. 8. 7. 'Ey^
^tr, 4v alv^^if, ^n vfAUf l^ecitH • ^Vm; 3t xeii vfAUf S^i l^atvig'trt, Ifiui fitiXn^t
^ finlKtri fA% KX>^0r 9t/t,/^iTt i. 4. 16. OJti yct^ fifctTf Ixtifcv trt fr^artSTtu,
Ivt/ yt oh 0un^9fA%6et ethrSf^ dSrt ixitfof in rifup fn^fioiirns !• 3. 9* OSrt rv
ixiifas <ptXt?s, tSrt ixuveu A Mem. ii. 7. 9. ^X^ ^^ '''^ A''" ^*^'^* MsvAry jMEi M
^vv Afi'T^, rtf ^\ thiivvfitov K-Xiet^p^of, xeii at Ixtivov i. 2. 1 5. Kv^»s ^< x«< l^^iit
r»ur$u i. 8. 6. Tovrf fvyytvofutivos 9 Ea/^d;, nya^^n rt ttvronj xa) ^livfiv avrSf
i. 1. 9. 'H^* aZv d-«ytrrai Soph. Ant. 751. Kcr^f r« xi/ir4t/ 0'ri^9^ir«>, xa^
r£ii Id. Aj. 10S9. See §§ 490-492.

§ tJOS. II. In the stronger form, the Gen. subjective
(§ 393. 5) t^i^A a substantive is commonly supplied in the pirst
and SECOND persons, and sometimes in the third, by the poS"
sessive adjective (cf. §§ 457, 458) ; in the weaker form, it is
often omitted, especially with the article (§ 482). The Gen.
objective (§ 392) sometimes follows the same analogy. Thus,

** Olu yi^ rw fiaxii'^^eth '' ^^^h ''«•' a^*^^** ; ** " Nfl Ai*,** f^i» 6 KZ^ot^
** f7fri( yt A«(»i»v xat Tla^ufeiTitog Itrri ^ats, Ifcis ^i «5iX^«f ** i. 7. 9. T«S»
^MfAtirw wrt^ninveu, . . Ilf ^2 taIv v/Atri^etv tiyafiHt ii. 1 . 1 2. Kf /y«v rt jmb)
rnv t^ ?0'0v »0iv^v ;^<^^4f Soph. Tr. 485. Ta von kix^d the marriage you talk af^
Soph. Ant. 573. T0 rh .yk^ "A^yts «v Vtltx lyti Eur. Heracl. 284. 2«»
%(t¥, Z 'E\i9n, *the dispute for you,' Eur. Hel. 1160. Evm/^ »«} fiX/^ vy
l/ttjj, good-will and affection to me; Cyr. iii. 1. 28. OiX/oe ti? r>», foue to you^
vii. 7. 29. Mn fAiruf^ikuf rat rvs Ift-ns ^et^ieisi that you may not regret your
present to me, Cyr. viii. 3. 32. Qfi^t avfMf Mach. Pr. 388. See §§ 454,
482.

Notes, (a) The possessivb pronoun is modified like the personal pronomm
of which it supplies the place ; as, Tof yt rh {}^§et>.fAh\ rod v^tvZitits, at least
yours [your eye], the ambassador, Ar. Ach. 93 (§ 332. 4). See § 454. So^
since trirftog may be followed by the Dat., as wdl as the Gen. (§§ 403, 411),
AfttTt^ou [= hfMf\ 9'eTfAoUf xXutoif Aadeixi^etig'iv Soph. Ant. 860. (6) The
only POSSESSIVB of the 3d Pers., which has a place in Attic prose, is o-f irt^«f.
their ; and even this is used rejUxiodyj and with no great frequency. Thus,
£ls Xv^an ^otoufrae ravf w^iri^ovfy when they saw their own men in distress^
Cyr. i. 4. 21. (c) The Dat for the Gen, belongs particularly to the weaker
form of expression. See § 4 1 2.

§ tS04« III. In REFLEX REFERENCE, the Weaker form is
the same with that of the common personal pronoun ; the
stronger form is the so-called reflexive (§ 144). The weaker
form belongs chiefly to those cases in which the reflex refer*
ence is indirect and unemphatic ; the stronger, to those in
which this reference is either direct, or, if indirect, is specially
emphatic or distinctive. Thus,

Digitized

by Google

Oir. 4.] PEBSONAL, POSSESSnrE, AKD reflehve. 331

UfdrTtri iw7»9 Af r$ ^ftTw J!ntr4% ftdXifra ^»/i^i(U9, do whatever you think
win be moat advantageous to your$elve$y ii. 3. 2. KtXtvtvtt ^ta^tiffecvTit ahv»7t
wit m'^dCarUf rii ft^v uvt»9 XmCttty ra ^l r^iV/r tLweicvvat vi. 6* 5. Kui •ur»t
^ Sv ^%T6 wiwiv 04 tifUi, raxv uvrov tZ^t Kv^f* ^«Xa/ri^«y, n laurSf I. 9* 29.
*iU 1^09 i^ftSpTus xaJ* avT0Vft fu^Sf 9af*ii«9Tt( iir« f^»( firlai V. 7. 25. Al*
ytt* ri ixiAfviff «»«■««>;, 7ri 0iiih £f Srrdf r^iTf uyayutv rj|y rT^urteit, n Stf§»
pSn vii. 5. 9« £iV Thf laurtu rxjfv^y • • tS* vi^^ avrov • . . irt^) rhf avT0y
ff»n9in9 L 6. 4. 'ExtXivi r«t)# ^iXtvg tms ra ItturSv wat/AKTu ayounv t^^ut
^C«XXfiv rc!ur0» rn ;^'A.«y, in fnh vttfUvru raits \uurtiii piKovf aytffm L 9* 27t
Tiaiu9 y hXtxiut Ifutvri^ ix^up uvti/iU»\ • • *£«» rnfi$^$9 w^aiti Ifuturov iU. !•
1 4. *'Et/MtvTSf yt ^tJMM rtf*(i^JMM vii. 6« 1 1 • Ti»XX»v /am ^axaI ^irv lb. 1 8.
2v fi%9 iiyovfAivtg mvTMS WtJ^nf^Uvf cTroM ftmvr^ ixitvat il ri i^Steci ti;^^ifiivt9
Ip' Uurauf Mem. ii 7. 9. 'A^iXi?* i(^« «vr«ly L 3. 11. TiaXXet^kuytdVf
ifuiv aurSi* Uixurt ilL 2. 14 (§ 352).

§ tSOtS* Rebcabks. 1. As prononns are used mainly for distinction^
the ehoioe or rejection of a pronotm in a particular instance depends greatlj
upon the use of other pronouns in the connection. The use of the pronouns
is likewise mnch influenced in poetry by the metre, and even in prose^ to some
extent, by euphony and rhythm.

2. "With respect to posmoir, the weaker form of the Genitive^ fh>m its want
of distinctive emphasis, commonly follows § 472. «, but the stronger form, and
the possessive adjective, § 472. I. Thus, 'EfriX«/uC(ivt7ai tthrtlv rnt Jruas rv*
7. 1 2. "Hr ii Tig uvrSt r{t^^7 Tat y^vfiat iii* 1.41. T^ €oift.tt.vt ttvrav • •y
ri filv Xttvrau vSfca 1. 9. 23. *H Ixttvatv SS^tf «a2 n tifAtrifa viraypia iii. 1. 21.
Tk inral^vym rk tninaui, 3. 1. *Avi^tfii^t fAav rn iiro'orf}* Ar. Plut. 12.
T«r ^9 rh Xfuiurw PL Gorg. 488 a.

S. The place of the Oen. possessive of the reflexive pron. is commonly sop*
pBed in the phir. by the possessive pron. with «vr«w. In the sing, this fbna
of ezpressioii is poetic ^ See § 454.

§ oOo« 4. The Aird person being expressed demonstraiivdy in other
ways, the pronoun sS became simply a retrospective pronoun, L e. a pronoun
xefening to a perstm or thing previously mentioned. As such, it p^ormed
the office both of an unemphtUic reflexive (§ 504), and of a simpie personal
pronoun, and was sometimes used as a general reflexive, without respect to per-
■on. ^Q this last use, it was sometimes imitated by its derivatives (even in
the Attic, by lavraS and e^pirt^ag). Thus, BaoXtuatn fAirk v^ivn [rss tz/ttTv],
' among yourselves,' K. 398. Aai/uifn ata-tp [=> ^atg'\ aivMratg at, 402. 0{i.
fh ^riv [<Bs IfAetig'^ ^X"* 'itiaTyfaivav ^ri,( nXm/*ti9 v. 320. Ai?' n/tSig dn^ir^eu
\mvravg [=b i^futg avravg'], ace ou^ to €uk ourselves, PL Phtedo, 78 b. EvXa-
Cti/^iVM, iwaag fiii lyi iiri w^oivfAtug iftm \atvrat \jsst ifAaturat] rt »ai) uftug
Viatvatr^watg lb. 91 c. EJl«/« . . uM w^ig tturtif Soph. El. 283. AUx^ntg
waki9 rhf atirig atvraS, you yourself disgrace your own city, Id. (Ed. C. 929.
OS^ yat( ril9 iatvraS [as rutvraSf] 9U y% "^^x)^* ^Vf* Mem. i. 4. 9. Mi^«» rh
mhrng Mu SmS^ Ag« 1397. £7n^ M^ wtmfUtg avrah [s> ^^v ahrZ'9\
f^M^i^in Dem. 9. 13. l^%r\^ C** ^^•^'^f?] ^^^ f^nri^t rinr dfisiCns
Ap, tOi. 4. 1327.

^ tSO 7* 5. Some of the forms of «^ are used with great latitude of
Dumber and gender ; thus, (a) f$if and »/v commonly sing., but also plur.
(flspedaHy v/v) ; as, tit, him, .£soh. Pr. 333, her, Eur. Hec. 515, it, Soph. Tr.
145, Am, masc So(^ (Ed. T. 868, fem. Id. G^d. C. 43, nent. .fisch. Pr

Digitized

by Google

932 SYNTAX OF THE PROIfOTTH. [BOOK III

55 ; fcU, them, Ap. Bh. 2. 8 : (&) rf c properly plor*, but also (egpec^ILy hi
the tragic poeto) sing. ; as, 0*^1, themj masc. A. Ill, fern. Soph. (£d. T. 1 505,
him. Much. Pr. 9, Aer, Eur. Ale 834 : (c) *^f /» rarely smg. ; as, Horn. H. 1 9
1 9, JEsch. Pers. 759 : (d) t commonly sing. masc. and fern., bat sing. neuU
A. 2:^6, plur. Horn. Yen. 268. (e) So the derived possesnves; as, !«;, their
Hes. Op. 58 ; ^pinfos, his. Id. Sc 90, Find. O. 13. 86, my, Theoc 25. 16S
(§ 506), thy. Id. 22. 67 ; wipmlrt^, his, Ap. Sh. 1. 643.

6. The place of av as a reflexive is commonly supplied in Att. prose by
ImvTdv, and as a simple personal pron., by mvrit. The plund occurs f^
oftener than the singular, Tdiidi, except the Dat., is in Att prose very rare.
The disuse of the Nom. sing, of this proh. (§.143. 4) is explained by its re-
flexive character (cf. § 144).

7. A common reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal pronoun ; as, 01
yt, a¥Ti ^fv Tou (Tvn^ytTf lavrtTe rat fv/A^i^afra, l^rti^iaH^ouffif dkXnXoif, ««)
^§cf9U0n imvreiis fit»XX.ev n 'rotg dXXote «ii/fi^u9r«ts Mem. iii. 5. 16. 'Atri i(p9^»t
fiiimtv \atvrks, nhioti iXXnXoLt loi^tut lb. ii. 7. 1 2. 2t/yNyi»if»«rt /kit «XX«XMf •
r*>» ^ ^oXtfMttf ti fl'tfXA.oi ft,h wvvnrrnvTm,i fAti* letvrSit Cyr. vL 3. 14.

B. ATTOS.

§t5©8« The pronoun alxoq marks a return of the mind
to thp same person or thing (§ 149). This return takes place,

I.) In speaking of reflex action or relation. Hence
avioq is used with the personal pronouns in toiming the re*
FLEXivES. See §§ 144, 504.

II.) In designating a person or thing as the same which
has been previously mentioned or observed. When thus em-
ployed, amog (like the corresponding same in English), being
used for distinction^ is preceded by the article (§ 472). Thus,

T^ tX ahriji *>/^i^j ond ujton Me same day, i. 5. 1 2. %U ri mM •';^i^iMi
1. 10. 10. Ourof ii 0 airif, and this same parson, vii. 3. 3. 'GxiTmi vk »»vA
Mem. iv. 4. 6. Tttlrit Utt^x** ^- ^- '^^ (§ 3^)* ^^ § 4^*

^ t)i09» III.) For the sake of emphasis, one of the most
familiar modes of expressing which is repetition. When cRiog
is thus employed in connection with the article, its position con-
forms to § 472. a. Thus,

Avrot Mi»«v iCtuXtrt, Mono himsdf wished it, ii. I. 5. "Ofrts . . «Mf
fMtat hfMjf, »lros ^il^atf ^tius, eturif V^a^arnwus rmiXmit rsitt rr^arv^wf
iii. 2. 4. Kv^fff ^a^tXeivvtf aurat ^Vf Tliy^urt i. 8. 12. Avra rm d^'i
r*>» oiKtSf l^vXet, the very wood from the houses, iL 2. 16. Kai SjoriCitf'rK-
<r»y »v7o IfTi ^ravTotv ^vut at^^viff, ' the very most religious,* PI* Leg. 909 b.
OvTot y ttZ <rf* alrtlv ^etwiX'tvs rtrayfAtfiia-ay, 'before the person of the
king,' i. 7. 1 1. H^cf etlrS^ ry fr^nuiJuiTt^ [by the aanjiy itself] close to the
army, L 8. 14. 'Ttri^ eeirov rav i»urZf vr^otrivfjtarot, ' directiy above,' iii»
4. 41. Ei ethroi oi vr^aTtZrai . . a*;^wvTa, *of their own accord,' vii. 7. 33.
E4 etbralf rait dfl^^t ffv'ipletra icmtri, * with mm|5ly the men,' it 3. 7. *E«»
rts &vtv rav wirov ra a-^a* etvra iff^iifi ' by itstif,' or * alone,' Mem. iii 1 4. 3
Altravs ratff vr^atrnyaus d^a»aXi^»$f having eaUsd the generals apartf viL 3. 35*
8m §§ 418. B., 472. •.

Digitized

by Google

cv. 4. J Avtog. 333

^ St 0» Remarks. 1. Hie emphatic mirof is joined with pronouna
in both tlieir stronger and their weaker formM. Hence it is often used in the
Nominative with a pronoun which is understood (§ 502). Thus, 0/ li vT^otTtS*
rmtf •* Ti avTtu Ixutav »«} •/ &XX«tf * both his own,' i. 3. 7. Avt9v nvrett
Xnx^tf on thii very account^ iv. 1. 22. Avr^ l/no) . . io^u PI. Phsedo, 91 a.
AvTf ft$4 Uiztf lb. 60 c 'flf muTos ^h ifitXoytTg i. 6. 7. *ils t^n ethris lb.
6. Abrit 0v WmtUv0tii (£c. 7. 4. Aurit i^rathiuroi lb. 7. Avrif gifUf
h ^n^f ii* 4. 16. Avtm »mi§u0t%t they themsdoes bum^ iii. 5. .?. ^leUfias «v.
r«# r^ r^Atf/M^ ^nr«, ' that he himself healed,* L 8. 26. Xm^u mhrif, he gom
mlone, iv. 7. 11. Avra) yA^ if/iu, for we are l^ ourselves^ PI. Leg. 836 b.
2TP. Tit r«f «Jr*f Av*-; T^s n^ifAai^a$ «i^f^\ MA0. Avr«f. 2TP. T/f
«vr«f I MAe. ^mM^mmt. < [Himself] The great man. What great man? '
Ar. Nub. 218.

2. In like manner, mvrJf is used without another pronoun expressed, in tha
oblique cases of the third person ; as, AH^m mysvru mlrSf ri mm) rp yinmuif
\ringing presmts both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3. 16. "Etn/t^^^if . •
fTfrnrmrmf sSg Mitivv iT^i, tut) mvrov i. 2. 20. IlekXevt filw rSt «f«'«^«yr«f
diriznivrnv, $1 Ti »m,) mvrSt iritaw i. 10. 3.

Notes. «. From the gradual extension of this use to cases in which there
was no special emphasis, appears to hare arisen the familiar employment of
mirii in the obUque cases^ as the common pronoun of the third person. Sea
§ 502. In this unemphatic use, mvrit must not be^ a clause.

/3. SoraetiiQes (chiefly in the Epic), mMt occurs in the oblique cases, with
the ellipsis of a pron. of the Ist or 2d Pers. ; as, AirSv yk^ mwvXofMfi* «^(««
ViffiP [sc nfcHf] M, 27. Avrnv [sc. ri] Z* ^7*

§ S 1 1 • 3. The emphatic miris often precedes a re/lexioe, agreeing
with the subject, of the latter. Hyperbaton (§ 329. N.) is sometimes employed
to bring the two pronouns into immediate connection. Thus, 'AirsxriTmi Xi*
ytrmi mttrig r^ \mvT»v ;^i/^2 *A^rmyi^0fiv, and he is said [himself} tviA his own
hand to have slain Artagerses, i. 8. *24. 0/ H ^ExXnuf . . mureii If lavrSw
lx^(»»f*t * by themselves,' ii. 4. 10. T« il r^«y uM tuti* mvri MUpra Mem.
iii. 14. 2 (cf. lb. 3, and § 509). * TmV r aMt aurw ^riftM^tv fim^uvtrai Maeik,
Ag. 836. T«%y wakeufrhv rvv 9'a^af»^vdti%Tmt I*' nurif morf Id. Ft. 920.
See §§ 464, 506.

4. The emphasis of alirif sometimes lies in mere contradistinction ; as, *Axx*
mbrk ftyS • . . rd* ^i»r»it % ^rnfAara nutvfmru ' those things I omit ; but
hear,* iEsch. Pr. 442. "Ort »m) W) rk nVia, hp* elirtf ftitm h»u n in^a^m
Ttibt M^iwvt tiyuf, mMi fih sv ivfrnras &yuvj n V lyx^eirtim Mem. iv. 5. 9.
*0f, £ ^-Mi, ri r* 9V» Ixifv mdnretfVt rl r murdf, who involuntarily have slain
icth you^ my son, and you, too, my wife, Soph. Ant. 1340.

5. The use of mvrig with ordinals deserves remark ; thus, Utftukiit . . rr^«-
mytf &* *AJwmit0f yt»mr»f mvrif, Pericles being general of the Athenians [him-
self the tenth] with nine colleagues^ Th. ii. 13 (cf. * A^j^^^r^Jirsv . . (itr «Ex-
X«v Ttna fr^mrnywvrtf Id. i. 57). *E^iirtft'4^eif Au^tzkiu 9'if/t9'r»f mMf
^T^myiv Id. iiL 19. 'IL^iin vr^t^Cturnt h*mr»g mvrit H. Gr. ii. 2. 17.
But, with the omission of mvritt Am^tTt' . . XmC»n mMw [i, e. r^y t^X^*!
tOsMttt * with six confederates,' PI. L^. 695 c

C. Demonstrative*

$ ff 1 9* I. Of thd PBIMIRT DEMONSTRATIYBS, the mOTO

Digitized

by Google

S4 suTTAX or THE FftoicouK. [book hx

^ and f^irfif is imw9( * the nearer and mare famHiaf
m mm; or ^dc ^§ 150). Thas,

"Eo l«i;«««f im^ Ml m^miTmmt mmmm rmmmn, if thom tkomU wish Up
ihy wJ «w> lygg tfcw^ PL rWdr. 231 c *£»f7f«« /u* rsJUif^, ««r«f

Kom. «. TW tw waarht tamUmtd to Mik the comwetMn of the morb
■Bnn with tlH xbab^; m «r the ^oT wUh the pntad, oi a «9n^ with
in JbafiMfiw, of that whkk km iam ■iiitfimrf with that wfaidi a pmea^ be-
fmz n, 4c TfaH» T«fr [ec Stf-n] Um* «v>« UiyM, Atf tv <*at vftusft / 9aidL,
Ar. Ach. 41. T«vr tttM- " Ktwf IrBJjgwt, i^k r* rvyyim lainn^ EoE.
HceSOC T3'l»;W,il0VH*«f/9«k»^ U-llfid. 98. *m* Irr' Ui/y*
r>;^^ i 'If.^YmMfkm Soph. AbL 384.

^ Omr witlein BSifci the iJuMim and Uiw the extraordmary ; to,
*E^«rrff rMrrwc rs tmc vaJLvnXaTf ;^«twmc, A«am^ o« CAe ricA Umics wpkkk
Aof are im Ok kmk ef mmrv^ L 5. 8 (see Cjrr. L 3. 2). rcy«*«ri ^ifw
Wi^t s^ /uy«JL« «^ i^M*^ Kg>>iirrywt LuJm; , x. «>. X^ ' that wcHiderfal
CaffiatzatuB.* Deat. 301. 17. Tm *A^imi^ iMtI»0w Id. 34. 20.

§ S 1 S. n. The proDouDs ovroc aod odi have in general
the saine force, and the choice between them often depends
upon euphony or rhythm ; as, rovrm %pil(lv x^^^ jtods /^^ nartag
aiSuw Soph. Ant 981. Yet they are not without disdnction.
oirog^ as formed by composition with avro^, is properly a pro-
noun of identificalum or emphatic designation (it may be re-
garded as a weaker form of o auro^, the same^ ^ 502) ; while
odty arising from composition with dt^ is strictly a deicHc pro-
noun {dtixuxog^ from dtUrvut^ to point out)^ pointing to an
object as before us (see § 150). Hence,

1.) If reference is made to that which precedes^ or which
is contained in a subordinate clause^ ovtoc is commonly used ;
but if reference is made to that which follows and is not con-
tained in a subordinate clause, ode. Thus,

Ttitfiv(t0f % r§vT»v xmi v-t^i, and cf this (which has been stated), this (which
follows) i$ alto a proofs L 9. 29. '£fr2 tovvi$ Hif«^» raii sTri, to thU Xtm^
ophon replied as fottown, ii. 5. 41. T«vr«, X rt av ^m^ r«4# StMf, 4r«r;^ii» HL
y. 6. T«vr« y% WUrm^t^ §rt fio^img , . fi^u V. 7. 7. T»ut» ir^ifT§9 n^tfrm^
woTiftf Xiftv f7if iii. 1. 7.

Note. To the retrospective character of 0vrf may be referred, — (a) Iti
use, preceded by »«/, in making an addition to a eentence, the pronomi dther
serving as a repetition of a tubttantive in the sentence, or, in Uie neuter Aee,
or Nam, (commonly plur,\ of the sentence itself (cf. §§ 334, 451). The oon-
Btruction may be explained by elHpsis. Thus, BU§vf w^»mu wu w^XXaW K-
X*^f»h »«2 roirtuf [sc Vix^eieu] /ityetko^^tvrSgj it becomes you to entertam
many guests^ and these magnijicentlg, (Ec. S. .5. lufufJix*'* }tiirir«M, »«} r«^
ran vrXuitti* Mem. iL 6. 27. *F,Can^tirBt9 rp AaMtlalftout nmi reuiru {tC imm*
9'ttv] ttioTUt they assisted Laoedamon, and [they did] that knowing^ Ag. 1. 38.
Mt»w»« ^l Ptm l^ifrf/, Ku) ravrtt wetf 'A^iaitp ^v, but Meno he did not nsk fit^
md that althongh h<e u^u from Arimis, ii. 4. 15. ^tfvXmJ^ ri^ wijutt msi

Digitized

by Google

CH. 4.] DEMONSTRATIVE. 335

rm.»rm Jtrtixi^rtp •Zrm* Ag. 2. 24. — (6) The lue of rwr» and rrnvrm in of-
toU ; as, " ^A^' ti wXtwlost athwart fAaj^wvrat tiUToi Svng 9fXifA§v kiXnreii \ **
" N«) v^M y% [sc Ur^:* \^n, * Certainly it is so/ PI. Rep. 422 b. 11. 0*f.

Pax, 274. BA, *AXX* tlfm/Uf, O. Taurd ftn, i^Wi^ ^miT Id. Yesp. 1008,

^ S 1 4« 2.) "Odt surpasses in demonstrative vivacity ; but
ovTog in emphatic force and in the ex^en^ of its substantive use.
Thus,

01 A. *B. Tofh ^f»Zug I 'AFP. TtST»9, hin( ttrtffs, (Ed. I* this the mm
you speak off Mess. The rsar man, whom pou behold, Soph. (Ed. T. 1120.
0£P. n«r«» &^'i^a »«} Xiyu$% 01 A. T^y^', it irA^iimt lb. 1126. 2^
rcT^^t T»7s 9ra^9U0t fin ii. 8. 1 9. 'EjitraXi^rivru rtft^i o*** «lly}^« • . . Wii »uTog
muT»§ ifMk0yu yi. 6. 26. 'H^f «'«iir}i ketCivrtt, taking u$ who are hert^ Th.
i. 53.

Note. To the dmc^ power of 0^1 (§ 51 3), may be referred the very fre-
quent use of this pronoun by the Epic and Dramatic poets for an adverb of
place (§ 4.57.*^) ; and perhaps, in no small degree, the general fact, that it is
£» more extensively employed in poetry than in prose* '

^ S 1 S* 3.) In the emphatic designation of the firsi and
second persons by a demonstrative^ odt commonly denotes the
* frst person, as the nearer object ; and ovrog^ the second. In
denoting the frst person, the demonstrative may be regarded
as simply deictic {§ 513) ; in denoting the second^ as expres-
sive of impatience^ authority^ contempt^ familiarity ^ &;c. For
the use of ovto; in address^ which is employed both with and
without av, see § 343. 3. Thus,

^ ^^'X ^^ *'''^* kfi^ [=> S/MtQ, •uV lym iTfi rMf, do not you dig for
this man [for me], nor yet I for you, Eur. Ale 690. ^Mvt £f reSt^t rkti^it
[» ItUS] Ifn^fSt Soph. GBd. T. 534 (but, *Afiif ^* [» ri/], m l«i»i», tU
TfiCmf iXf lb. 1 1 60). Ttirii yt T^^rnt irt, at least, while I am yet aUoe, Id.
Tr. .305. T£i% [b iifuTt, § 450] . . wtfra naXurtit, nmi fuXaxtf JEacYu Pers.

1. Our$ffi Afh^ [aa ry] 0y irmv0irai ^vd^Sv- Eiiri fA»t, Z "^x^ttrif, »vm
•Ir^C^if PL Gorg. 489 b. OZrof vv, m irfieCv, [This you, or Ton there,
§ 457.' /3], Ho there I old man, Soph. (Ed. T. 1121. OSret ru, ^Zf hv0
ixfiif X Ho vtUain I how earnest thou hither f lb. 532. Atfru vv, ir$7 vr^i^it %
Ar. Thesm. 610. OZth, ri ri^Mt . . fikiirus i Fellow! why that solemn look?
Eur. Ale 773 (§ 432). See § 348. 3. — This use of 3fJi is very frequont in
the tragedians.

^916* ni. Other compounds of aiiog and ^« (§ 150. a)
are distinguished in like manner with oviog and oSt ' thus,

*0 KS^t k»9vrat Tov TmC^vty rtimurm, r»tdit ir^if nvrit IXf^i Cyr. V.

2. 31 (§ 513. 1). *0 /A\f •Srt0s ifwt* ii. 3. 23. Kxie^x^s fiU tow r«.
wuvra tWf Tt0^m<pi^nf tk Zii itirniAupin ii. 5. 15. OS rat t Irr) ^in»$
XiyAn, Z^Tt n m'ti^mi Ib.« *EyinT» •Zvtt, Zrirt^ fh tkiytg vii. 2. 27.
T«r«vr«» tt^tv, 7r« §h rZv nxZtrm* %1n ii* 1* 9. *H^i7f r»rour»t Strtf,
ZfVf rv ifff lb. 16. *^ft»Tt r«r«i^i Svrtf lin»Zf*t9 rot ^riXi« ii. 4. 4
(§ 514). *0P. "Tirtirrtt •Jrai yiyfZr»u iroXu. FIP. Tosavrm * fttrttrm
ykf kfUtH yvf^, 'Even so,* Eur. El. 644 (§513. b).

Digitized

by Google

336 PEONOUN. -mDIfINIT£. [bOOK UK

D. JWQEFINITE.

§fflT. Of the indefinite pronouns^ the most extenshro
in its use is ti^, which is the simplest expression of indefi-
nileness or general reference. As such, it is not only joined
directly with substantives^ or used by itself substantively or
adverbially, but it is also joined with other pronouns^ with nw-
merals and other adjectives, and with adverbs. It more fre-
quently follows the word with which it is thus joined, and is
never placed at the beginning of a sentence, unless perhaps
when it is emphatic. It is variously translated into English,
and is sometimes best omitted in translation. Thus,

"Ji^i^vrii rif iftirn^h a certain man asM, ii. 4. 1 5* Ila^k Xm^ttvi Ti»<,
with a certain QutrOn, H. Gr. v. 4. 3. T^***^ mi, m 9ome way, il. 2. 17
£? ry v^irj^uri n, if he made any promim to any one, L 9. 7. Aciimry • r
«if tx*** ^ make a mpper of what one has, or each one has, ii. 2. 4. £^ ftb
rtf ii^v ^li^itt, *• each one,* B. 38'2. BLn? rtt l»t7949, there ,are those who
hate him, or many a one hates him, Dem. 42. 1 7. "U T4vm ii ait^Um »T^a, I know
[either some one or none] scarcely an individual, Cyr. vii. 5. 45. *H fi,h yk^
y(»^n M»r »iiT»d Totmit rtt nh f"*^ ^ accusation against him mas som^hing
Hie this, or to this effect, Mem. i. 1 . 1 . *0«r«/«y Tn£f liftiif trvx^** what sort
of persons they found us, v. 5. 1 5. Tlif^n rts tifi x^i"^ ^***^ extennve a conn' •
try it was, ii. 4. 21. Has JJ rtt . .*?» yi ri, tSu ttX^pu, HmfttT; and every
one presented at lea^ some one thing of what he had taken, Cyr. v. 5. 89. Aiyu
nf i7f, CI oertain one speaks. Soph. Ant. 269. *H^i^«f fiU iCh/Awavrm rimf,
some [i. e. about'] seventy days, Th. vii. 87. Tirra^' arrm ftvfMtru PI. Phsdo^
1 12 e. Tnv tXeifef, »»Xfp rt xt^f^"' ^7^* ^* ^* ^* ^^ wXXtjf rivi vwhirrt^sv,
not inferior in any great degree, Th. vi. 1 . Tl»XXwe 2i nvg iXtyftaig mum ntd
nnrtt, * quite a nomber of turnings,* Cyr. i. 3. 4. JAjMif n fii^^s, quite a
small part, Ifo. vi. 14. Mjn^v nvtg H^im, worth but little, Mem.il 1. 19.
*Oxiyi rMs Svrtf, being [some few] but few, iv. 1. 10. *flf iumt rttn kiyug
Ivimfuv r»v ^Xn/Mirts ttvau, ' what a fearful one,* or *how fearful/ Mem. i. S,
12. 'Eyit rvyx»*^ iwtktirf*»f rtg Zv nti^tt9»t PL Prot. 234 c £i/iM r»f
yt>.M§f inr^ii lb. 340 d. "iimXkiv rt tt^tuetmt, will tuffer somewhat more, iv.
8. 26. ^Urrov rt avrUanf ; Did he die at aU the less f v. 8. 11. 2;^i^f «v
irarit d ^r^arta vi. 4. 20. Oti w^vu^rt ftfi/Z" nf(pnXlt Ctvsu ravre vi. 1. 2d«
n^^ n iiruMtvtiv CBc. 9. 1. Ata^t^ivr^s rt Th. i. 138.

§918* Remarks. «. T)s may be regarded as the Greek uui^finUr
artide; but it is not commonly expressed with a substantive, unless somt
prominence is given to the idea of indefiniteness. See iv. 3. 11, and § 469. 2.

^. TU is sometimes emphatic and consequently orthotone (yet editors differ) ;
■8, 2iftvun0ieit ^s Tt Urt, to pride themselves as if they were something, PL
Phsedr. 242 e. £JsA«'if up^ Civnt r\ rilt rtrt)nvrnxo<rt, I am confident that
there is something for the dead, Id. Phsdo, 63 c. "E^t^t r) u^tTv, he seemed to
[say something] have reason or to be in the right. Id. Amat. 133 c

y. An indefinite form of expression is sometimes employed for a definite ',
thus, E/ »vf rtt rturttf v(pi^tt Itcvriv, if therefore^ one gives himself up to these
[s=if I give myself up], Cyr. vii. 5. 44. BavXtut^^t, wHf rtf rwt i^^^ne
Av-iX^, to counsel, how one [«= we] shall drive off the men, iii. 4. 40. Knnes
9»u rtfi [«= rw] At. Ran. 552. E; /liv rtt if fifins awtimt, if ome
'^■^ you permit] us to depart, iii. 3. 3.

Digitized

by Google

CH. 4.] RELATIVE. 3W "

E. Relative.

§ ff 1 0, I. Relatives refer to an antecedent either as <i^
nite or as indefinite ; and are, hence, divided into the definitb
and the indefinite relatives*

Remarks. 1. In the logical order of discourse, the antecedent, according
to its name, prteedet the relative, but this order may be wverted, whenever
the perapicmty, energy^ or beauty of the sentence is promoted by the change.

2. Indefinite BELAnvES are formed, either from the defiaite rdatioet by
adding vU or a particle (commcmly «»), or from the ftmple indefinitee by pre-
fixing h (in the shortened form'«.) ; tiins, tgrtt or U ttv, whoever ^ ««*•?«;, cf
what kind woever, i9rirHt f*ow much §oever, iirort, wheruoever. See §§ 153,
SI 7, 328.

§ S30. II. The definite relative is often used for
t le indefinite^ as a simpler and shorter form ; and the indef^
NiTE sometimes takes the place of the definite^ giving, however,
a somewhat different turn to the expression. Thus,

$aic ufiUing to incur danger ^ these he both made rulers^ i. 9. 1 4. '^x«i«y irMtrm
iffm umv^tfAa Uifttv vi. 3. 19 (cf. R«/iiy S<r»trtt ertjt Urvy^dvonv »m»0t/A(f
lb. 15 ; and, *lSJ»*T»f iratrMt i^-iv^tuf WtxAfA^mn rl xi^etf vi. 5. 5).
.*0(«ri 7li T^t TiT0afifM»us afrt^rimtf •0vtt Xiym . ., and »ee the perJUjf
of Tiuapherne$, [one] a tnan who saying . ., iiL '2. 4. Ov» «<V;^vMr^i tvrt
S-toi/f •St avfif^irufSf •Irtvif ifti^avrtf . . mx»kmXiX9ri U. 5* 39. Td^H
rux'^t >.ii^r«y ^m^ikitttt Irrtf . , /3<«rii/ri/, * one who will live»' £«r.
Ale 239 (see lb. 659). Nm?! IsiTy**, ifrtv* a^r'mt /mXiTv i^iS^tr^A i
Soph. (Ed. T. 1034. X«Xi«'ik ^y tx tra^vrm, Mrt ivi^Ht rr^ar«y«y rM«v-
Tt0w rn^ifAiSm ill. t^. 2 (> 521. ^). See § 525. /S. *

Notes, (a) After the phural ir^lyrf (, off, 3rr<r and 2t &* ai^ used in Hxb
singular^ but Xrt and tirAtf-M in the plural. See above and §§ 497. I, 521.
(6) The use of on indejiniie relative referring to a definite antecedent belongs
particularly to those cases in which the relative danse is added, not to diMtin'
guiihf but to characterize, thus representing the antecedent 9& one of a dose*

§ S31. III. The relative should correspond with its an-
tecedent in specific meanings as well as in grammatical form.
Thus, the definite relative with ovio^ should be og ' with lo*-
ovre^, olo^ ' with joaoviog^ oaog ' &c. The exceptions to this
rule arise mostly from the use of a simpler^ more familiar^
or more emphatic pronoun^ in the place of that which is
strictly appropriate. Some apparent exceptions arise from
ellipsis. Thus,

MnV WiiVfttt* Timomt W^nc iff [=« •7»f] ir»XX6i . . rvyx^**'^**i JkkXk e9§
TfiXixavTHf ri fiiytff ^y [«» ^X/jcnv] ftit$t Mv eh rSf wt |yr«y nr^eme4mi )0-
wfi§tm$ • finV (kyMir^v Xiett vkt vtoiurttt k^ivkt Jy [»■ a7ivy] nei tms fM^ktit
f/tirteTiv, Jixx* Iztifttg St cviiU &v ir«v*)^f »$ivt0vnetit, ' sudi glory as many ob-
. tain, &&,' Isocr. 40m d. ilrnvrttt, Seot [for J, or sc r«r«vr«ry] th KmerttXei
w^e9 A/^«t«»r«i, * of all who muster,* or 'of all, as many as muster,' L 1. »

Digitized

by Google

STHTAX OF THS FBONOUK. [bOOK III.
(dl IIS#»^ tU Myx''^ iC2« L 8. 1). ns>, Um lyJ^ Om^i** tu. 6. S«.

fmtf Srsmf i^ftiinrtu ^tk xmm KMfitmj^an hr. 3. 2.

F*-*»«^ «. *Of 11 abo «Md lor mW widi an dfipos of the antecedent ,
mtt *Emfwt^ iw fih [as r«M9r«f mW] i^ « lomg as yo« art anAa< [as such as*]
fM ore, PL PIuBdr. S43 a. *n* yt Sk t^^ Id. Tliect. 197 m.

$, Tht place </ a nlatiTa praioim ia often aoppfied by a bxlaiiyb advkbb,
chkdj in deaignatkna of jdaet, time, and wmmmgr; aa» E;^ X*»t^i «^" •^•^
rm ^rnXmrrm*, to a plaes [wfaeoce], from wluA Aof would bekoU <*« sea, rr.
7. SO. '£» rf S^ twiturtf U»«m»» It. 8. 25. T* miri rxifui . . ^rfri;
«{ WfSrtfw futx»yi^9H ^99fu, th€ aame order [aa] ii»A that in wkiek he Jint ad-
waurrd to the Aoltic, L 10. 10. *0/M<k y«^ /m» ^mmSti «>«r;^m, Srwt^ d
rm «r«XX« IWmw ^M'fTt i^^riw-A^ur* Sjmp. iv. 37. Kc} tf-M ^«2 «>«^f, «f
ly^ SiJUi Soph. (Ed. a 1124.

§ S93« IV. The relative pronouns belong to the class
of adjectives (§ 73), and, as such, agree with a substantive
expressed or understood. This substantive, or one correspond-
ing to it, is also the antecedent of the relative. It is commonly
expressed in hut one of the two clauses, more frequently the
former^ but often the latter ; and may be omitted in hoth^ if it
18 a word which will be readily supplied (^ 447). Thus,

her the toldiers, which [aoldien] Memo had, L 2. 20. *A9r§9'ifi^^)mt w^it U»-
Wf [ac ri rr^iCrtir/MK,] 8 tT;^!? rr^«rtv/MK, to $emd bach to Am the farce Mfhieh
he had [what force he had], lb. 1. KS^h % f;^«» •Ss c?^««, and Cyrue hav
img Ae wten whom I haoe memOomed, lb. 5. £<V ^ nv afUtpre msi^ns [ac
m8rn h mv^h] /AtydXm rt iw ir. 4. 2. Kartt0^Mttm?^»9rd rt ^f «^;^m X*^*
L 9. 19. A«i«yTif [ac. r^ravrevt fitSt,"] Ut iir«f ^tif vii. 8. 16. *£rs^
y^ fir«*, 9Ut9 %Sxf*^ ^'^f '^' ^*^ ^^* ^'^'t '7' l^^^^^f* *E^^cMMfv fiwm^
I^Eor. Or. 1184.

TtwafATtyg. 1. Other words, bdonging alike to both danses, are subject to
A similar ellipsis ; thus, Tsrrafiffns lin^u9ti [sc. tx»t*]t ^vt n ttlrit i«-«rUf
^X#i» ix'^i THsMophemee appeoared, haxing bc^ the canalnf tahich he had Ann-
aa^ brought [had come having], ilL 4. 1 .i. OTf v9r»vT»t9 irift rwi^c, h-m*
hfu»f trfixttrtu [sa OTe Wfi»urtu rxi'^tt iri^l rtwirtn, 9t^ Sratt hfuf rxi^tg
w^fUirmi] PL Bq>. 533 e.

2. It win be observed, that when the antecedent is expressed in the samt
danse with the relative, it is commonly pat at the end, as though the rest of
the danse were regarded as modifying it like an adjective. See § 526.

^ o33« 3. The ELUPSis of a demonstrative pronoun beibre the rela-
tive is veiy freqnent ; as, indeed, of the whole antecedent^ when it can be sup-
plied from the relative. When this ellipsis of the antecedent takes place, trr
often unites with the relative to form a spedes of compound pronoun or advert
remaining itself unchanged, whatever may be the appropriate number, tenae^
or mode. Hius, Tl^tfCaXXttrt m-^UCue w^Sr** fth 'Siu^lrt^v, Srt i^X"^
fffir*' trri V el [^ss $g-u9 J* ixtTvu, #7J »«) StvefUfTM, they proposed as oai-
bassadors, first Ourisophus, because he had been chosen commander } and some
also [therA were also those who proposed] Xencpho% vi. 2. 6. Uxk* *Ii^», »«•

Digitized

by Google

CH. 4.] RELATIVE. — ATTRACTION. 389

*Ax«uS9f »•) \frn Jtf Mkkttv livSv Th, iii. 92. K«2 7r<r< fih ttt mItSv xati-
CmX»9 H. Gr. ii. 4. 6. "Errjy eS^rtvets atfi^at^tn riPavfcetxaf Sir} r«^/f i Mem.
i. 4. 2. (Cf. EiVi y avrSf $S$ «v)* ^f m-mvTmv'dfi itetCaiuTt ii. 5. 18 ; *Hr«9
)i «7 MB) wv^ «'f«0-i^f(«f V. 2. 14 ; and, with the nngular for the plural in the
Imperfect also, *Hy m rtVTMt r«» ^^MifiSt eSs wmvu fiMx^aut HXatntv L 5. 7«
See § 364.) 'Hf m2 «vr^ /«ir«^iXm W 3fn, «o <Aa< [there were times
when] mmutimf he even. rtgreUed i^ IL 6. 9. *£rr4 % l»^«, om^ ihere are piaceg
where, or m «om« placet, Cyr, viii. 2. 5. 'E#r<9 ^r^c rif &» vftMf V^A^rttrweu i
/« there any way m toAicA one could deceive you 9 <nr, U it possible that one should
deceive youf v. 7. 6. Ob yk^ U4* Xwu /a iXu$ Soph. (Ed. T. 448.

Notes, (a) FVom a similar union of in [p-» in^rt] with the relative^ have
arisen the compounds f mm, some, and ImWi, «(Miie<»m«. (6) The ellipsis some-
times extends even to the substantive verb itself ; thus, *'Ow^v [for *Erriv
Trttf], M tome p2acei^ Lao. 10. 4.

§ ff34. V. The intimate relation of clauses connected
by a relative pronoun^ or a kindred particle^ often produces
an ATTRACTION, sometimes simply affecting the position or
form of particular words^ and sometimes even uniting the
two clauses in one. Not unfrequently a combination results,
which may be regarded as a species of compound or complea
pronoun. Thus,

^SftS. A.) A word or phrase is often made a part of
the relative^ instead of the antecedent^ clause ; and sometimes
the two clauses are blended in their arrangement. Thus,

A§y0»t iMMf^st, tSt eu i»er»x**f ^**' 9**t*'^y ^^^ ^ '^ tidings which 1
bring you, Eur. Or. 853. EiV 'A^^ivrnt n^uv, i$ *Ofivruf ffx* ^«^>-nf mm
tliaiff9»i [for wKXhf »ui ivimifAfm] iiL 5. 17. EiVI n-mtV, 8* l| l/sng
;^i^ n«Xv)«^«» t» rt vrmr^if Iv H/tMs tx^h ** ^> 'tell me respecting my
•on Polydorus, whom you have,' Eur. Hec. 986. Tavrti* y t^v ^iirwvuv,
h 0v ri9 9%n^i9 mwitirmf Soph. Ant. 404. *Eri^a rotavrm, d in nnt rk
f»9Tmef*UTa vv* iwu^iuf ixnin ftaX»uet9'Pl Theffit 167 b. OtTrM, lire)
tviittt 4ei99r$ ri ir^uyfun, kwix^^nm" [f<nr l«'t2 Sirf^vre ri vfiyfitUt ivfutt
A«^;^«^iir«»], ^ese, u^en they understood the matter, immediately withdrew, H.
Gr.iiL 2.4. See § 523.

Remark. We observe this construction particularly,

«.) In expressions of time and possibility with the superlative ; as, ITn^du
rtfiuin wtt^utm, trnv rJix**^n iinw^u^ftiim [fbr wtt^titm r«;^<rT«, irmw
hmir(uli^fi%^u], we ihaU endeavour to be present [most quickly, when] as soo%
as we have accompUshed, Cyr. iv. 5. S3. *iU «'«;t;irr« X»ff v^i^ttmv, Uuttrs
iv. 3. 9. '£«'t2 ixtt rnx*'^'h • • u^ii*^»t as soon as he had come, he sold, vii.
9 6. '^yuy9 . . iirseeut lyit wXiiertvs Hvtafttif* 1 have brought [the most
wuich] as many as I could, Cyr. iv. 5. 29. "^X"* lir^uf is n» iutnTut «'Xi/-
^rsvf, bringing <u many horse <u he should be able, L 6. 3 (§ 52 1 . ^). *0.f /«ii-
Xt^rm iiutUTS Wttt^v^TSfAiff i. 1.6. 'Awny^r* • . t^t liwavrt ^^•rtvarm
vL 6. 1. 'Ex«v»«»f if ^t/MKTo h rtix'^^'h riding as fast as was possible, Cyr.
T. 4. 3. Hi/etfMU f Itnarh [sc. irrtu] fiaXtrru L 3. 15. AiiC«if«f . . it
slew n [sc iv] fiaXteru in(puXayitiin>K ii. 4. 24. "Eats &9 ruvra it fn
[«■ Irtrri] fitem yUnrm Mem. iv. 5. 9.

Digitized

by Google

840 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUK. [rOOK IU

NoTBb The word denotiag potnbHity ia efteD underatood ; thus, *CU tA^
X*^^» [sc. %y9UTn i*] 9§^iv%v4mi, to marth a» quickly at postable^ i. 3. 14

S. 27. *Iy« ttf «'Xf7rr*i ftlv hfMtv It T0i( ttrXM; i^s*, m IX«;^irrM )i futui^*
^«ri lb. 28. AtmCiCm^tif ttf riit *Ar#«» art rd;c00rm [sc. mt ivtnrmt'] vii. jT. 8
(Sri in this oonstructioa with the Miperiativt i» the itrater o^ «0-r<r, used aI-
verbiaUy), "(hrmi §ri &irm^etir»%vet0'r§rmr9t kdCu fia^'tXitij that he might take
the king at unprepared eu poteibky i. J . 6. *0r> «rX(iVT0»f xa^ fiiXri0r9Us lt>
•Otr^j r JS^rr« -fiach. Ag. 600. •Or#» r.jt''*'* ^V^- EL 1433.

^.) In the use of the uuii^t^, which, even in composition with ot (§ 519.
f ), often seem to belong in force to the aBteoedent cla ise ; thus, 'HytfAspm
mirtTr Kv^«^ S^rn . • *«•«{•* ["" hyfii9m rmk, h]% to aek Cyrus for tome yuide^
who kvhU conduct them, i. 9. 1 4. "E^n in [=» W, •] ri ni,xnr» j Is there
aught in which I have wronged you f i. 6. 7. Kmi <Ux«y JfirrfWK «iii i^Mi/uist
V. 5. 12. Ov ^lAT^/Cwy, iir»v fin iin0trtr/A»u tnn» . . S»a^i^ir«, * [anywhere,
when he did nol] except where,* L 5. 9. See §§ 520, 523.

§ S36« B.) The relative takes the case of the ante-
cedent, - This is the common construction, when the antece-
dent is a Genitive or Datioey and the relative would prop-
erly be an Accusative depending upon a verb. Thus,

*£» rZf wiXtM9, Zw Tt00u^i^nf Iroyx*'** ^X**** f^^^ ^ cities, tMA 7^
tofihemM happened to Aaoe, i. 1.8. T^ uth(i, S av XXnvh^ ^lif/itut I wiU
9bey the wmn, whom you may ehoote^ L 3. 15. 'A^/m o^ UWc^wf, ^ M»r«irli
i 7. 3. (€£ '£* rmt 9er»Amu ^ . • iwHn^mf iv. 1. 1. Vtitf nrnnrtv^ A U
wm Tmix''* tXmCsw iv. 7. 1 7.) Tsortf*, J» rv h^irttS. ^== i rv )irir«i»«««
§ 434] mmXits (£c ii. 1 . 'A^:^«yr«; l«'«ii< iTf »ttTt0T(i^i'"9 ;^wf»« i. 9. i 4
(§ 592. 2). Htv f«^^ fl;^** Mxin^y w'irr^ ^v^ Soph. (Ed. C :i34. Mm-js.
ii^ivf «J«^ uMt ix**f ^'^«*f Hem. ii. 7. 13. JLufuivit yt S^th •leo k'tyut
V. 8. 3.

Remarks. «. If the amtbgedent is a demonttrative, it is commonly omit-^
ted; as, 2m> [so. Intifts] sis l;^«, with thote whom I have^ \di. .i. 48. 'A/*^
J» iT;^«» iv. 5. 1 7. *A»^* Jy iv Wait* i. 3. 4. *H/U4«X4«ff wuTt ^riiv «J c^*-
n(«» f^i^o lb. 21. *£^X4fri ^i v«vr« mc rjf v^rt^if 7«'^«rr< ii. 2. 18.

^. Sometimes, though rarely, the Dot, and eren the Nom, are attracted ia
like manner ; as, ^Clw [>= Ui/»«v, tTf j MrrUf w-oXXsotj many cf those whom
he distrusted^ Cyr. v. 4. 39. '£^ Jy [= ixf/v^y, 18] ^t^' ixttTi^iv yiytnt, from
oith either party^ Isocr. 69 c ( 450). BXeiv'Tt^fiat if J*?
fW w»^r»ftMir«-«M, to be injured by those things which have beer.
I respect to which preparation has been made by as], Th. viL
^rte rSf h ir»f4 2a^^<( Hdt. i. 78. — When the subject of a
the verb, If retained, becomes impersonaL CL § 529.

foUowod by fi^yXu may, as if a compound pronoun (§ 534),
iteoedent in any case ; thus, Hi^} l\»Xuy9»*T»v, n ixx»u ««•«•
, respecting Polygnotut, or any other one whom you pteattf PL
Urn, n Urit fi»vXu AXXsg m^Jftst Id. Oat. 432 a. OU re^
%9rm Id. Gorg. 517 b. Compare, in Lat., quivit.

LDVKKB8 are likewise affected by attraction ; thos, A«um^
■ UiiVif J{r«v] iiriiifitr* vteuhui^ they inunediatefy brmighi
[whence] from the places where they had put them fat m^ilg^

Digitized

by Google

CH. 4] RELATIVE. — ATTRACTION 911

TiL i. 89. *E» }i yiif, S^iy [«: •S] ^^»v»ut$ Soph. Tr. 701. Xm^up ^%in
Z^4t [^ IxiTri jffrtv] ;^^0y«t »^v^^«vrs Xif0'0^y ^f/Mif £ar. Iph. T. 118. (X
§$ 527. R.,5Sl./3.

^ ff37« C.) The ANTECEDENT takes the case of the relo'
live. This is termed inverted attraction. Thus,

AvfiXif «vr^ i 'ArtfAXivv ^iMj; [= B^tovfl •!( tiu d-vKv, Apollo made known
to him the gods to whom he muet sacri/iee, iii. 1.6 (cf. Q>uvafA%t§s »ts AnTXtf
i ^lit lb. 8). "Ori \m»{heufiin9t wmvrw [^s ^avT»]i <^' iiavreiij -rt^^etyirtt
i7iy H. Gr. i. 4. 2. *A»^«y0»r« /«b ^y^ 4r«XrnM> [:=■ 4r«X/rai$] J» k^ixtv
X^ova Id. Med. 1 1. T«r^f [=» AT^i] )* i!«'«'i^ i'VAf^i i| •xC/«»ff il^}}X«v iv^tv-
r«i ^/«i», x'^V^^* ^(^^ '• Soph. Tr. 28S. Aiyn y Sf l^friirr*rjBiy a^ritf ifui
rTi/;^»»Ti ^itf^t, ri;^C«X0tf TvwjMni' W. QEd. C. 1 150. T#» Jiy^^a rwr^y, ^v ariJ-
Xci ^nnrr, . . oSrif Urn Meih Id. (Ed. T. 449 (§ 499). Karv^^irtts K tdt
Vfctri^tuf ^«rl t%M, i? ri avrit ^ik^^a/uv, etvr*) alrft iiV/y V. 5. 1 9.

RwMARK. Inverted attraction appears also in adverbs ; thus, Bntm uitPif
[s «i7ri], «^i» «-!( iTxu, to retem MttA«r, valence he came. Soph. C£d. C. 1227.
Kec) «XX«ri [«=s JiXXax^u], hrt &9 m^imif, iya^-n^svfi 0% PL Crito* 45 b. GL
$$ 526. I, 531. /I.

^S38'. D.) The two clauses are hr aught into one by
tlie ellipsis of a substantive verb (cf. § 538). This is termed
condensed construction, or condensation. The verb is
omitted either (a.) with the antecedent^ or (b.) wUh the reUb*
tive.

a.) With the Antecedent. We here distinguish the foK
lowing cases : — •

1 .) After a demmutraiim proiunm or artieUt the rblatiyb is also om^ed^
and the auteckdjest takes its place in the construction. This form of con-
densatioD is particoUuiy frequent in qnutume and exclamatkmSf especiallj with
the poets. Thus, T/ r«)' mli^^t [» Ti Wn rih, 8 •vift'\ » What it (Ms,
which you tayf Eur. Ale. 106. T// 1»^^ riwV [=r/f AfVf irri ?^i, Sf"] M
fKtiwmt i^£ ^ What man it thie^ whom I tee by the tenttf Id. Hec. 733. T/
TWT a^x^^** ini^rut ttMxiv i Soph. CEd. T. 1033. Oiatv 7;|^i^yct rn*^* tipSvttsX
What a viper is this, which thou hast produced I Eur. Ion, 1262. T«vr« fch
ttiiU ^muftMvh Xiynt PL Prot 3 1 8 b. TiV • ^iict [== T«$ Wr$ t trofitt, Ss}
mlfrm 1»tra { Soph. Ph. 601 (see ^ 480. «). KaXi* yi f*»4 rtSnihs l^«ffii%«
0Mf, the reproach which you have cast upon wte is an honor, Eur. Iph. A. 305.
In the following sentence, there appears to be a union between an exclamation
without a verbf and a relative clause ; T«tv ift^g fit ^»rh( B^ttftiravg ttlxttt
[=*n ^«i»«T«i «/»!?;, 0tJf i^i fl'arJi^ If^it]! The cruel death my father saw!
Soph. EL 205. — Expressions like the following are still more elliptical ; "^vim
4 T^iiTVfyim [=s IrW x**V*^i ^ T^t^u^yiu] uttXuraty where there is a place,
which is called Tripyryia, H. 6r. v. 1. 10. 'Ev f nmXtvfitf ri ^^.v, in which
ii that which we call ufb, PL Phssdo. 1 07 c.

2.) OVU'it with iwTtt §u (or sometimes St •&) forms a species of compound
pronoun (§ 524) ; as, OtiUU Uvtt mm Ji^iltrat, there is no one^ who will not
not refrain, Ven. 1 2. 14 (c£ OvhU h, o^rtg $h» wit* H. Gr. vii. 5. 26). K«.
^mytXSf At nfu»9 »Mf t^rtt m/^ every body would laugh at us, F\. Hipp. Bf^f.
999 a. Oikk it six^ rZ^' mHiu Soph. CEd. T. 373. Ouitm ' - m^mi
29*

Digitized

by Google

840 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUK. [rOOK IU

NoTBb The word donotiBg posnbaity U eften imderetood ; thus, *CU rd-
X*'^» [sc ^mrh iTv] «'«fftfi^4u, to martk a» quickfy aa possible^ i. 3. 14
IKv £* ir»^tv0i/Atfid n «; ^r^Xirr«4«, mm} . . tn M^art^ra /mb;^«//«i/« iii
S. 27. *'!»• «f •'XfTrr*! /«if 4/U4v* iv tmV t<rX»n Znv, m iX«;^irq-M )l futtfi^p*
^«r< lb. 28. AMiCfCtf^i/T f/f rht 'Ar/«v 7r4 «^e(;^4irr« [sc. a» ivntteu'] vii. -^. 8
{in in this construction with the Miperiativt b the Nfoter o^ S^rst, used «^>
verbialfy), "O^mt %ri ivm^mir»iua¥viv»rot XdCt ^^tXim, that he might toAt
the king aa unprepared eu poeeible, i. 1.6. "Or* •'Xi/Vr^cf nai /9iA.r/#r«Pf Ih
"Owms y Sierra iEseh. Ag. aOO. "Or** r^;t:'^*^ ^^P*^ ^ ' 't^^-

/3.) In the use of the indefinite; which, even in composition with »s (§ 519.
2), often seem to belong in force to the aBteeedent daise ; thus, ^J^ytf^ita
euvti* Kv^«^ Uth . • m^aiti [»> hyp^itm r#vA, h], to tuk Cymt for some gmide,
who kvhU conditct them^ i. S. 14. *£>»» i n [=3 W, #] ri ii}4»«r« t /« cAere
aught in which I have wronged you f i. 6. 7. K«j «biX«v 7yr<v« jn i^M^fuim
V. 5. 1 2. Ov har^iCMff Wtu fth iwt^trtrftdv tvtnm . . i»«^i^iT«, * [anywhere,
when he did not] except whera,' i 5. 9. See §§ 520, 523.

§ ff 36* B.) The RELATIVE takes the case of the ante-
cedent. • This is the common construction, when the antece-
dent is a Genitive or DativCj and the relative would prop-
erly be an Accusative depending upon a verb. Thus,

*£» rif iriXimv, Sw Htf^m^i^nt Irvyxan* t^**** from, the citieSf which 7^
gaphemee happened to have, i. 1 . 8. T^ «»)('• tf at tXn^h, irtifeftast I wiO
obey the »um, whom you may ehoootj L 3. 15. 'A^im v^^ 2xWi^i«f» nt MM»mvh
L 7. 3. (Gf. '£* rrni ^^niaJu ^ • • Wtin^at iv. 1. 1. Tm; nrnn0t%, A U
«-«? Taix'^ tXmUt iv. 7. 17.) T^vr^v, Jt 0v h^wtvS. ^^tl 0v )i«'ir«/ff««,
§ 434] maXus (Ec li. 1 . "A^^^fvrMf I«'«<i4 iSs HotTtw^i^'^t X'^(*f i. 9. 1 4
(§ 522. 2). Htv ^1^ t^x** M««T4^ m'l^rif /lipf Soph. (Ed. C :i34. Umv-
)/^( f^*!^ «vWf ix^'f 0'*T»u Hem. ii. 7. 13. XAtfiitit y% Svth •^•o Xiyaif
V. 8. 3.

Remarks, a. If the amtbgedent Is a demongtratine^ it is commonly omit^
ted; as, Svv [so. Im/vm;] tJg tx*** *'^^ thoee whom I have, vii. .i. 48. *A^«fi2
«v iT;^*! iv. 5. 1 7. *A»^* Jy itf f «*«#•» i. 3. 4. *H^«Xmv waft 3iwrt<» tJ »^-
ri^0» i^^t lb. 21. *£^X4fri )i 9'«(ilr« •!$ rj p^ri^itf tir^arrt iL 2. 18.

^. Sometimes, though rarelj*, the Dot, and even the iVbm. are attracted im
like manner ; as, ^Hp [»= Ui/y«», tTf] M^rtt, m-oXX^uf, many cf thoee whom
he distrusted^ Cyr, v. 4. 39. *£^ Jy [= i«i/i»«y, 18] /«f^' Ucri^«>v yiyut, from
what he has been with either party^ Isocr. 69 c ( 450). BXam-rtf^at h^* tSw
[»B l»t/Mf», iS] Ji^ vw^rxftMrroM, to be injured by those things which have been.
prqKured ^ m [in reelect to which preparation has been made by us], Th. viL
67. Oi/ii* »« %tBiri$ rif h «-•;< la^hf Hdt. i. 78. — When the subfect of a
verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. CL § 529.

7. The relative fallowed by fi»yXu may, as if a compound pronoun (§ 524)^
agree with the antecedent in any case ; thus, Hi^i llaXvyt^ireVi Si ixx^u •t0»
[==> i*rtva] ^tuXUf respecHng Polygnotus, or any other one whom you please^ PL
lo, 533 a. T« }U«, n Urtt fi»vXu ixx$f i^Jfjut Id. Oat. 4S2 a. 0& r«^.
r«» St ^wXu tl^yatwrat Id. Groig. 517 b. Compare, in Lat., quivit*

>. Bbuitivb adverbs are likewise affected by attraction ; thus, ^tnfsk
K»9T9 ibfttt Ui* [s» Imuiiv in-tv] £«'(^«^i»r« wattat^ they hnmediatsfy Umighi
over their children [whence] from the piaees where they had put them fat mfii^

Digitized

by Google

CH. 4] RELATIVE. — ATTRACTION 911

IIl i 89. *E» ^ yiit, Uif[^9Si] w^»S»tw Soph. Tr. 701. Xm^v ;0^
i^4, [^Xxuft iirtv] x^**^ M^uyprntrt kn^»fU9 Viftrng 'Ewr. Iph. T. 118. GL
§5 527. R., 531. ^.

§ ff37« C.) The ANTECEDENT takes the case of the rela-
live. This is termed inverted attraction. Thus,

AfiTXiv «tfr^ i *AirokX.vf SfMir [= ^cvs"] •!$ tiu ^tip, ApoUo made known
to him the gods to whom he mu9t Moerifieef iii. 1.6 (cf. 0v^mftt9§s ols ittTXif
i S^tit lb. 8). "On \a»iimfMnt 9rm*r»09 [=» ir^fTm], Zt ^Uvrmt^ -rim'^ayirit
i7i9 H. Gr. i. 4. 2. *A»^«»0vr« f^h fvy^ 4r«xrnklv [ss irtXirois] Sf k^ixiv
X^ofa Id. Med. 1 1 . Tcr^i [^a AT^i] )' il^-rf^ *i^»ift* ^ •A.CiAry il^}fX«» idftv-
0'<Bi /3i«r, ;^«»««vr< «'^«f ff"! Soph. Tr. 288. Aiyf V Sg IjMfrf «rr«xf » A^ritti ifiei
rrf/;^«yr4 ^iv^«, fufiCmktv yvtifui* H. GSd. G. 1 150. T«v 4iy^^« r«tfr«y, jv rii-'
X«i ^UTtT^, . . iSrof Urn Mah Id. (Ed. T. 449 (§ 499). K«ri;«(/r«f ll, »St
vfUTi^cvt fmri i7mm, i7 r< «vr«v f iXn^/Miv, «vr«2 cTnti iiV/v ▼. 5. 1 9.

RwMARK. Inverted ftttraction appean also in adverbs ; thus, Bmmm Muhw
[s xiTrt], Syiv «^ iTxM, to retem MttA«r, u^ience he came. Soph. (Ed. C. 1227.
Kect «XX«#t [b3 JLXXmx^t ^m £» 4^/»|^, iyttm'n^twi n Fl. Crito* 45 b. C!&
$$ 526. 2, 531. /L

^S38'« D.) The two clauses are hr ought into one by
tlie ellipsis of a substantive verb (cf. § 538). This is termed
CONDENSED CONSTRUCTION, or CONDENSATION. The Verb is
omitted either (a.) mith the antecedents or (b.) wUh the rela^
tive,

a.) With the Antecedent. We here distinguish the fol«
lowing (^ases : —

1 .) After a demotutraUM proiunm or ar<ae&, the relahvb Is also amiOedf
and the aktbckdksit takes its place in the ooDstmction. This fonn of con-
densatioD is particiilaiiy A-equent in queetione and exclaauiiiomSf espedallj with
the poets. Thus, T/ rSi* mit^^t [» Ti Urt rSii, 8 »viff'\ » What ie this,
which you May f Eur. Ale. 106. Tiw ivi^ rirV [= r/f Jifn^ Un t^i^ St] M
wxntmt i^ i WTuit man ie thie^ whom I nee by the tenttf Id. Hec. 733. T/
r«t/r «^;^«r«f Intirut nmxip i Soph. (Ed. T. 1033. OToiff l;^i^v<Bf rifv^* t^S^mgl
What a viper i$ this, which thou hast produced I Eur. Ion, 1262. T»vr» fiit
ttiilv ^ttofiet^rif Xiytit PI. Prot. 318 b. TiV • 9ri4»s [~ TU Urt i irifitf, Se}
mvTtof 7»fr« I Soph. Ph. 601 (see ^ 480. a). 'KmXot yi /its rtSfU^og i\mni^t»
0mgj the reproach which you have cast s^pon me is an bonor^ Eur. Iph. A. 305.
In the following sentence, there appears to be a union between an exclamation
without a verb, and a relative clause ; Tcvs If^ig lit v'arhf ^avaravf mUug
[=*n ^dpaTM aUus, stg tl% varii^ ^f^i] ^ 7^ crud death my father saw I
Soph. EL 205. — Expressions like the following are still more elliptical ; "^vin
4 T^i9v^yim [ss Uri x*'V**y 8 T^iW'v^y/c] naXtTrtUi where there is a ptace,
which is called Tripyryia, H. Gr. v. 1. 10. 'E* ^ nnXwfti* r« ^Jf.y, in whidi
is Aat which we eaU ufb, PL Phssdo. 107 c.

2.) Olflitg vnth (Urtg sh (or sometimes tg »lt) forms a species of compound
pronoun (§ 5^24) ; as, OiihU i^rig him Ji^lirai, there is no one, who will not
not rrfram, Ven. \'2, 14 (cfl OvliU S»^ •rrtg •h» £%f H. Gr. vii. 5. 26). K«.
vmygXif Af nfuif tliiiig Xertg «/^ every body would laugh at usj Fl. Hipp. Mai*
999 a. Oiitk is «A%^ rii»r i»i^tu Soph. (Ed. T. 373. 0^im# ^ - sy^sk
2d*

Digitized

by Google

M2 SYNTAX OF Ti; - FRONOtTN. [bOOK Ifl

!#«,] tr§tf »i wJifrmv i* vfiZt xmi* nXtxieiv v-aTtif itnv PI. Prot. 317 C Ov*
itv) irf •&» Jt9r»xfnifnt»f Id. Meno, 70 c. FIi^} tSv ttiiifa zitiUfw [=«v^m-
»/v^t/f«# iTf,] iprt9* $vx ivifiutttv »t ir^iytvti Dem. 295. 7. — So, with an in-
terrogative for siiiiif, Titm tU^h hriva $v /3^«;^i<f vr^t^ivu AirorTvrt«rfmt
Th. iii. 39.

§ S30* b.) With the Relative. This occurs with
the relatives of comparison^ oloc, otto^^ rilUoq^ which then unite
with the substantive or adjective following, to form a species of
compound adjective. To this, as to other adjectives, the article
may be prefixed (§ 472). Thus,

X«^i^0/«ir«» «7y rM itftf^t \j=» itvif^ vmvt^ ms rv *T], obliging a VMtn such
a* you are [a SUCH as tou raan], Mem. ii. 9. 3. 0/ ^1 «7«i kti^ vf/n7{ ati^tf^
but [the SUCH AS TOU men] men of your rank^ or men like you^ Cyr. vL -J, 2.
n^0( An^^at r«X^ff^«vf MUf mm) *A0nfmUvs Th. vii. 2 1 . "Ovth t»v *tiyu Htw
iu*»T»T»v [= TttwroUf »li{ irrt ^i/»0r«r«f3« ^^ ^*^ bang [such as is mopt
dreadful] of the most intense kind PI. Conv. 2'20 b (see iv. 8. 2 ; vii. 1 . 24).
M«;^«i^/«y trtfy ^t/iiXut Aa»»tnxn* [=» roo'cuTtVj t^n irr) ^tmXti Acxmmjbii], a
knife about the $ize of the Spartan tmall-awordf iv. 7. 1 6. £ix«; Hvl^m nvpiv^
nXi»09 0»vuu^t%i9 \j= TtiXixavTtf, nXixcf &»uxvi/inf i^rs^t i^tXMeu At, Ach
703. Auvcf rMTif fiXix»i^t 9^9 Id. EccL 465. — In like manner, Tev m-g^trrm
•9r$i »vx 0vvn( rns r^ta^cg PI. Phsdo, 104 a.

Rebiarks. ». A sabstantive of a different number following the relative
remains in the Nominative ; as, Nf«yisf V »uvf [= rtwrovft '''^3 *'^* ^ y****^
men such as you, Tm •Imn^ mvrif ivrttv^ of men Wee him, H. 6r. L 4. 16.

^. In this construction, 7r«f is commonly used in the neuter form ?r«y, as
indeclinable^ and may be often regarded as a mere adverb (§ 450. }, 6) ; thus,
0< IvrirtTt T§vT§u §e»9 l^axi^tot, * as many as 600/ or, * about 600/ i. 8. 6.
AmCin , , Sf0f r^i^^oiuMt* i^rc* vii. 3. 23. 'Airi^u «ir«v irtt^u«ruyyfif, * about
a parasang/ iv. 5. 10. Ka) v'^oCxret U»* ^uftmra, and sheep [as many as the
sacrifices would be] enough for sacrifice, vii. 8. 1 9. So, doubled, •Or#i» Set9
0riXn* Ar. Yesp. 213. See § 450. %,

y. In the Epic, the demonstrative is sometimes expressed instead of tha
relative ; as, TvfiC»9 , . liriuxia r^tot [==s r»T»9, Mt Irn Wtitxnt] It, 246.

§930. E.) A eelative pronoitn takes the place of a
demonstrative pronoun and a connective particle.

The term demonstrative pronoun, as here used, includes the personal oromatm
and the article. See § 467. 1. Of this form of attraction there are tw«
kinds, according as the demonstrative bdongs to the first or the secotd of tbt
two dauses which are united.

a.) When the demonstrative belongs to the first clause. In this kind of
attraction the pronoun is commonly either governed by a preposition or adverb^
or is itself used adverbially. Thus, '£^' f [= i^ri tovt^ iirrt] fih xuiuf rat
xvfAxs, upon this condition^ that they ijiould not bum the villages, iv. 2. 1 9 (cfl
•E^ri TdiVJi, *frTi Th. iii. 114). "E^* f « [=s M Tturtf, Hfrt] tXmu rvX*
Xiyut, for the purpose of coUecting [for this purpose, that we might collect]
vessels, vi. 6*. 22. Mi;^^^ •!> [= tw xt^****'> ^""j •'^•»» •"•'*' [***« ^i™* when]
they saw, v. 4. J 6 vcf. Mi;c^i reiriwV.f/, X»k Th. L 90). 'ULixV •^ C=" «'•«' X***
^fi/, Mm"] im xxvfMt w iutxtrxt •ixuv At^Qntwdt, * to the region where,' i. 7. 6

Digitized

by Google

CH. 4.J RBLATIVB. — ATTRACTION. 849

Aamfyit ^Xt* *^ {r^ ^*^ riwpj «?] ^^A.if fir* i7v«i, ' M fkr 88,' QjT, ▼. 4«
16. *£«^ 9'(»wifi^umf rwt *kfnv»Xmtut f*ixi* •*'«''«(' uvr»i mktutHf H. Gr*
It. 5. 12. *£j^ Sr»v awt^n/^n^ «inot A« Aoif been abroad, viL 8. 4. *£v ^ )l
wrX/^MT*, oiui whUit they were arming, ii. 2. 15. OJr^f ^i ^0i fix»t fiiyi*
rr«f, «?!»««' [«J tn»m "b r«vr«v 7n»«, 7r«] *Arftiiaf ^rpytT, * becanse,' Soplu
Ph. 585. *Ar/' Jf [-» *Avr} r«^M«, 7r«], 6eeaMM^ Id. Ant. 106*8. Ov )mi7

fmyu m*f «ir«ri fiauXtsra Mem. ii. 1. 18.

NoTB. Hdt. sometimes uses ftixv ^ '^^ ^^'^ ^ * oompoond adverb goy-
sniiig the Gen. (§ 394) ; as, Uixt' •^ **^** wv^ymt L 181. Mi;^i U99
wXniti^f Jiyefit iL 1 73.

^ o3 1 • b.) When the demonstrative belongs to the aecond elauee; aa.
Tit •Srt0 /tmiurt, i^nt [3=3 ti^rt i»fif«#3 $v /3«vXir«i f§i ^iXf in»t % WTut ii
90 mad, that he doet not wish [or as not to wish] to be your friend f ii. 5. 13
(see lb. 6. 6 ; viL 1. 28). *AwiiM9 Irri . ., •Irnu i^iXti/ri, it i$ the part of
thote without reeouree^ that they should wish, or to wish, ii. 5. 21. Oln Imp
•0r« fA£^»§, 8s S«»i7» iff Soph. Ant. 220. T«#0ii^ro ikyg, tu [«= JSwrt «^
r«v j 9'0r 9U XtXnnrmi, such grief, that he will neoer forget it, Eur. Ale. 1 98*
KmTtittTtiftf* rn* n yuvTuM, »1»u Jiti^if [aaSfri rtsoureif Jtvl^eg] rrf ^Mr«, mk)
riv Avi^f «7«ff l^in rMCvrnvj yiftaixm KaraXtvif* •vxir S^tr; comimiseralt'
ing, bodi the wife, that she had lost such a husband, and the husband, that, leaving
eueh a wife, he would never behold her more, Qyr. vii. 3. 13. 0/ ^ Itw^iviw
rrlff«r4», eUv U h/itt k^iXiwmt Ear. Ale 948 (§ 425. 4).

Notes. «. Akin to this oonstmction is the extensive nse of the rdativi
hi explanation, or the assignment of reason or purpose ; aa, Q^nufutm* wttttt
it • . 2t^tt you conduct strangely^ [who give] that you give, or m giving, Mem.
iL 7. 13. "OirXn nrSitrm, Mt ufttnevM-su r»vt Aitxwtrmt, they prepare arma^
that with these they vmy repel assailants^ lb. 1. 14. R«) v'oXu wifA^^n' rti^
Zertt ^nf^vu, and send »w«« one to the city, to give notice, Eur. Iph. T. 1208.

/}. Belativb adverbs likewise exhibit this form of attraction (cf. §§ 526«
%, 527. R.) ; as, £v)«//«<v9 ya^ ^t 0 ktn^ X^nmr*, . . «f [ss«r< «0rwf] itUme
•ei yivwim XriXtvrn^ for the man appear&i to me happy, that he died so fear^
lessly and nobly, PL Phsdo, 58 e. 2«^'y r ii^i-^tf *EXXkt, m ff^^tf nnXSt
Kor. Iph. T. 1180.

^ S33* Rebiark. Forms of comparison are especially
liable to attraction and ellipsis (cf. §§ 391. y, 461) ; thus,

M«Mf n Svrtt t/Mtn t^r^nrrtt, i^if [=» Intlittf, i^t^^ £9 fctr iXX«09 Jhrttt

[like things, which] things Uke to those which,* v. 4. 34. *Ekv ftU ii m-^mJ^t
I trn^u^Xn^ith •itf**^ nni ^^irivt i;^^nT« tmV l^iftt i* 3. 18. OSrt yk^ wv^it
4tr ktr^Mit vvrifTt(99 fiiX»t, mp {j=^ T»tovT»v, •?«*] ri rmt *A(Pfaiirut In^t* In
^t^ "^tft Eur. Hipp. 530. T§e»vT0if Tg hm^i^uv n/tis ht rHv ^96X009, *r«»
4 fU9 ^tyXM k»9fTit TMt i%f^irati vvif^irtyr^y, rtfikt Tt . . Inivrnf itt trtsiTf,
' insomuch as this, that slaves,' Cyr- viii. 1 . 4. 'tt^tZw ftivw rt iyiyftt^uev,
3#«y [^7r«» rwT*^ in] Hxcv* 'AJtitetTot tttat, *so far as this, that I heard,'
tu. 1 . 45. T«f julv kfi^n v§r»VT09 iyiyvM^»»f, in [= i0»9 r«vr«, in] iTf nfftS*
gfti V. 8. 8. Aiiftfn^ff yiyfivm Ti» Tt;^w»» r$vvr^, i^cf 0 iU9 rk adrw fiitM
Iwtiu PI. Euthyphr. 1 1 d. 'Efri / w rUth irXti^T^p fnn^a fiXwvf, Sry«^
umi ff»9M 0i)iy fftittii * inasmuch as,* Soph. Tr. 3 1 2. HfuXSitrtt 2m» £•
isMf nM4fit I4MM tit ri ^um»irtu00m4, 'until,* vi. 3. 14.

Digitized

by Google

844 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOTJlf. [BOOK lit.

NoTB. *Or0» «v, [jtist to ranch as not to be] onbf not, bR but, is used tm %
•mple advorb (aUo written ir«r«v) ; thus, T«» fiixxowm »tu ?«-«» «v ^ra.^»rrm
9§X»ft4f Th. i. 36. "Or** w m-m^im K^n vn. 2. S.

^ ff 33. VI. A RELATIVE sometimes introduces a clause
which ^cr.) has another connective or a participle absohtie^ or
wluch (/?.) is properly coordinate; and, on the olhor hand, a
COORDINATE CLAUSE sometimcs {y,) takes the place of a rela^
live clause^ or (d.) is used in continuation of it. Thus,

«. TI«X>.i^ Mv ttiftTv 7;^Mii» 'OXe/y^iM ftfi», d rir u Vfott^ofrt, tint £» ««n»*
A.«y«v, <fte Olynthians could now mention many Odngs, which, had they then for^
seen, they would not have pervthed, Dem. 128. 17. "Oc WtHii narifMht . .,
UiTvff . . my»m0tt [when who perceived . ., he compelled] who, when kt
pereehed . ., compelled, Lac. 10. 4. Olf i|0y [= «?, i|«9 «vT«r«j Wtr* l;^!!*
ret rZf wnriw, 0vo » Ix^nv PL Rep. 466 a. Cf. . 539. 2.

/L Tuaur» ^nfMu fAatrmm) im^i^mw • J» itr^krMr r» /Mf^lt, SucA tMngs went
decreed by prophetie reaponaee ; to which do you pay no regard, Soph. CEd. T.
783. 'OP. lfnf»f Jif»f fiftHf ifX/rat M f^p^ ^^ Xt*^*- IITA. *H
u^mt W xf<>A*« > ' I Wl^ will decide what ?J Jiiu2 what will Htit decide f
Ear. Qb. 756.

y. *lS^tTd0€U . • '0}i;rrl«, ^ 2/re»^«y, ^ a(XX«(;f /ivfiwg «y ri; i?***!, to c
t%Me«, or Sisyphue, or [one might mention ten thousand others] ten thouaaud
o^ere whom one mij^ mention, PI. Apol. 41 b.

^ 034« ). KSfi— }lk furctwinnn^^t Jtiri rnf i(X^*i ^f tcirif emr^timn
U'Mitf'i, nmi fT^Tfiyif Si avriv airdt^t L 1. 2. This constmction is adopt-
ed chieflj to ayoid the repetition of the rdatiTe, in aooovdaBoe with the Mf
lowing

Bemark. The repetition of the relative is commonly axiold*
$d^ either by ellipsis^ or by the substitution of a demonstrative
or of a personal pronoun , as,

*A^«UK i\f Sf ifUif n^iX»fuv ^nXia nmttVTavmt, nai [sc if\ X^t»mmf»tit *mk
[sc. *mi tfJ] lX«C«/«iy 9rt0rk fail ^^•iai^M etXy-nXtutt and Ariaua whom we
wished to make king, and to whom we gave and from whom tee received pledges
that we would not betray each other, m, 2. 5. 'ExirMi, tif rt fsiX-u riif morih
^vxnft ky-Xk fih ^iftaret ^kmtTofnf ^Urt PI. Phaedo, 82 d. 'H^«f h, Mf
nfitiftitv ju^v cv^iU ^tifirm, irr^etriwafAtv }>\ i«^ avrif iii. 1. 17. IlMf. ^
\»%7iit im» i «M^ if iru9%4n^a iif^^y »«•* '^ jMm f$eika i^ixttt B-muf*d^tiv mtnri* %
Where now ie that man, who hunted with ue, and whom you seemed to me greatly
to admire f Cyr, liL 1. 38. *£»•?»«/ reiwt, olt 9V» i^a^H^evi' $i Xiynrig, $Vi>*
\fi>Mn Mttreut Dem. 35. 3. Kut »»» W xt^ ^^» i ifrii IfifmvSf ^aTt Ix^ai^t-
ftmsf fu^u h ft 'ExXnwt gr^mrit Soph. Aj. 457. — So, when the pronoun is
ftpeated in the same sentence (§ 499); as, VvtetTna fidfCm^, iv xt^ ^
\Xm99%i9 r^itV v«^ NiiXtir foAt, 'whom you ought to drive [her],' £ar
* • , 649.

F. Complementary.

^ ^3tS. From the connective^ and, at the same time, tii-
definite character of the complementary pronouns and adverbi

Digitized by VjOOQIC

en. 4.] COA.PLBMENTART* 34fr

(§ 329. N.), their proper forms are those of the indefinite rel-
tUives, (^ 519. 2). But, when there wiH be no danger of mis-
take, there is often employed, for the greater brevity and vi-
vacity, in place of the full compound form, one or the other
element, either the relative or the indefinite. Of these, the
latter is far the more frequently used, but 'with this distinction
from the indefinite in its proper sense^ that the accentuation of
the compound form is retained, as far as possible. Thus,

n^^f lnX»9 t%mif t ri §i «EXXm *£>.Xf}fif ifr«»(«ir«vfr«M, befbre it it evident^
mduit the other Oreek$ will answer^ i. 4. 14. H^h ^Xtv f7m<, ri ir»tnf»v0n i
iXXt "EKXnns lb. IS. 'iU InXtin, eSf rt/tf i. 9. 28. 'H^ir*, rit i ^i*
fpC»t ifff. . . Kmi 4iffr«, i rs tin ri wuvinfMi i. 8. 16. ^my^v^n f^vSt,
irrtt r AXnSns Irriv, tf n ftk fiX^t Ear. Hipp. 924. *Oir •'*•*$ /aU >.••
yMg Wun KS^oVf iXXy yiy^m^rmt ii. 6. 4. *0^*ly, Iv 9lot$ Wfiiv iii. I. 15.
Ovx «T)«, »St inr§ wi4V i* rax**** '^^ Ivt Sit rtt ^%vyt* aw$^Uy$tt •S^
tit «'«r«» &t fttirtf ^4r«)^«/if, «m^' 7<r«»f Mv.tls l;\;v(«t x^t^*^ iirt^rmin H*
5. 7. T« rUf r»x9f 7^ J^^»fU, «7 itftCn^trmt Eur. Ale. 785. "HvnCtvXtmr^
n vftif £* rhv f^X*** irttMrti. 7. 2. 0/ )* nf^r^tw auriv r$ ^r^drtpftM^
iwiff ri tin »«2 M rifi ^»mXtyf»if»9 ir* 4, 17. *H^r« ttvrif, wir§9

§ ff 38* Remarks. 1. The mdefinites thus employed
and accented are termed in Etymology, from the most promi-
nent of their offices, interrogatives (§§ 152. 2, 317). As
complementary words, they were employed in indirect ques-
tion ; and hence appears to have arisen theur use as direct
interrogatices^ through an ellipsis. Thus, from the indirect
question, Einiy ilva ypwfitjp (jc^ig nfQi j^g nogtlag^ say^ what
opinion you have respecting the march (ii. 2. 10), by the omis-
sion of finiy comes the direct question, Tipa yywfttiP exfig nfQl
j^g nodtUb; ; WhU opinion have you respecting the march 7
So, from M^cnt ovy nqog ftt, il iv v^ tx*it^ tell me, therefore^
what you have in mind (iii. 3. 2), comes, Tl iv v^ l^crc y What
have you in mind 1

Notes. «. In other languages, as the Lat., with those derived from it,
and the Eng., the oomplementaiy use of the nmple relatives has prevailed ;
and hence, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the tn-
terrvgaiives, Thns, who, which, when, &c, are both relative and interrogative.

$. In direct qaeetion, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter ibrms
above mentioned, bat in exclawuUum it employs both ; thus, 07/iam, m-mrtfj rt
C*»t I ««« /*' tl^y^ut ! O my fatiw, toAo/ have you said! how you iremi
met Soph. Tr. 1203. OV t^y k»»vft^i\ «?« %* tWo'^%ir0\ ir»9 T k^tl^h
^fitl Id. (Ed. T. 1223.

§ ff37. 2. A COMFLBMEIfTART PRONOUN Or ADVERB, USed

as an echo to an interrogative^ has, for distinction's sake, its
full form ; thus,

AAM. T/f 9^ Ji AIK. [Sc 'Ef^fr] *Orr«f i TUximt xa^t^^ri^.

-Digitized

by Google

846 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [bOOK III.

Lam. For who are you f Die [Do you a«A] ifso f A good citizen^ Ar. Adi.
594. XAP. OJr«, ri ^itlt i AION. '0 r» ^•mi Id. Ran. 198. ETe.
Tiv« y^»^n^ n yiy^at^rtu \ SUKP. "HvriyAt Ov» ttyivvnt ifA9ty% %9»%t
PL Euthyphr. 2 b. KA. n«>f iS» r«tfr« y %rt ^vyx^t'^f*** t 'A0. "Owttti
VJ Siif nfuf • • i»in rtt rv/A^ttvietf Id. Leg. 662 a.

3. A complementary clause often expresses merely a con-
dition or a circumstance ; and the complementary construction
is sbme times used where the relative might have been. Thus,

Aii\ Krtt lrr«, give it, whoever she may be. Soph. EL 1123. T«y ify^
iitmviii r0ur0ff Xfrtt irr}, ynt Id. (Ed. T. 236. AavXtvi/iut ^taTg, i rt «'m^
i<V2v •/ ^i«/ Eur. Or. 418. Ka4 l»»ftivt »(inn twi^ytin iTnt/, 2^ n rtfy;i^df4
fi»vXifiH9»( »artfyei^ta-^ai i. 9. 20 {cf. "Stn^^yif . . ttvau rtvrtff irtu lb. 2I)«
"HJirr iSy »»aua'eitfn t» Sf9fA», rig gSrtf irri ^tsvos Xiyiit [= Mr«/EM( r#iJT#«, ##-
rtf], most gladly i^iotdd I hear the name, who there is of such power in speaking
[ss the name of him who is], iL 5. 15. ^AJXrn i^in^ti &* n/Mif iti^ts a/ui*
90ttt Zfn iii. 1. 21.

^ «S38. 4. Condensation. The antecedent and com-
plementary clauses are sometimes brought into one by the el-
lipsis of a substantive verb (cf. § 528). The verb is omitted
either (a.) in the antecedent^ or (/J.) in the complementary
clause.

«. In the AMTECBDENT CLAUSB. This occuiB with adjectives of admiration,
which unite with the complementary word (commonly S^ts or ig) to form a
complex adjective or adverb (cf. §§ 528. 2, 529) ; thus, 0««^MtrrJiy «r«y
[ss (davfitc0riv la-rtv, Srtiv] «'f(i rl 9'^0fvfiiat l^'h ^ ^ ufonderful how much r»-
gard he has for youy PL Ale. 151 a. 'i/Ltrk ti^tir^t ^avfitcrrw irw Id. Rep.
850 d. 0fliv/ii06rr«y 7iv«;^^0y0ir 0r0t Id.Epin.982 c ©«v/K«rTiwr ifr; [assGcv.
fMLfriv irr^v, <&;] Wtlftn^ Id. Phiedo, 92 a. QatUfActrrcis /mi iTirif 4w$ 9rm^
Jtf|fl5» lb. 95 a. 'AfAn^ayov ««•«» X('*'** **" inconceivably Inng time, lb. 80 c
*A»ij3Xi^/'i ri ^01 rarif i^6aXfAo7( ifAri^ava* r$ tlof Id. Charm. 155 C 'T***^-
^uZ( if x^k" ^^' Conv. 173 c. *Hj» «•!{} mhrn S^Xtt u^t^^vnt •^•s Ar. Plut
750. 'A^0V0i or«i Hdt iv. 194.

/3. In the complementary clause. To this ellipsis may be referred the
employment of a complementary word (commonly with tZf or ^ii ), as a mere w-
dejinite; thus, Mn^ ivvnaovv fjttfSif [^s^ fuffiiv ma^ irrtt oSf iTtj] <r(«rc4nf-
0-as, not demanding any pay whatever [it might be], vii. 6. 27. "H «A.X' •ri-
ft/?, or any thing else whatever^ Cyr. i. 6.22. 0«5' irtoin 9rt^t tout»v WifAttiftm,
he made not the least mention of this, lb. 1 2. *Oirti0fov*, in any way whatever,
lb. ii. 1 . 27. *'Ot»u 'hn ^ra^nyyvnfMrosi some one whosoever it might have been J
having suggested it, iv. 7.25. "Err* yac.^ iriavf ^r^iyfiet orv in #«••»#■»»•
tx^^'Ti &fAtiv»v uyvaitv tt yiyftia-nttf ; PI. Alc. 143 C. Migr* Imnaviav fimV iu
vnm KtM,rn(*.U$$ PI. Leg. 919 d. E7 t<# <Ui»«if» i^ri^out Cyr. iii. 2. 23.

Note. For an additional remark upon complementary words, see § 539. S«

G. Interrogative.
§ ff 39. The interrogatives are, in Greek, simply the in-
deAnites toith a change of accent. For their origin^ their com*
plementarv use, and their use in exclamation^ see §§ 535, 536

Digitized

by Google

CH, 4.] INTBRROOATIVE. "AlXof. 847

For the ase of the article with interrogativefl, see § 480. For ezmnplet
of comieH$ed mttrrogative §eiUencei, see § 528. 1.

Remarks. 1. The netiter rl anites with several pariiclet to form tUiptiad
exprt$mon$ ; which, with various specific offices, s^rve in general to promote
the vigor and vivacity of the discoorse ; as, T/ yti^ [sc. Irri», or xiytrt] %
£(}C»frMt mf»»ftifnit9 v^y, iyti rtfi Ifititt^tit tifu t ' What then ?' v. ?• 10. Ti
•Sv I V. 8. 1 1. Ti a t Mem. iL 1. 3. Ti inrm ^ Yect 4. 28.

2. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than the English, in the
eofMfniefMm and poeiHon of both interrooaitvs and oompuekkhtabt
WORDS ; and even (6) allows the use of more than one in the same clanse.
Thus, — (a) T/ . . i%wv ^0t0V9Tm, r«i;r« zttriyttitjuif m{fT$Z \ [Having seen him
doing what] What have you eeen him do, that you thue Judge of himf Mem. i«
8. 10. "Or** Ti Win^MO't, 90fA4tii muT0Vt r«tf ^^•vr/^iiv i lb. 4. 14. '£y« «?v
rtv l» «>«/«« «r«Xi«»« rr^arnyif ir^0r%enm ravrm ir^til^ut t iii. 1. 14. £7 rtt
i^r9 ^fuitt «'*'» rl f^mv ti^tv «/ ^tty^tip^i iwtrr^fitnt PI. Prot. 812 0. '*Imi ri
[so. ^yinirmi] vmurm, Xiytts i [That what may be] WWi what intent, or Wky^
do you eay thief Id. Apol. 26 d. HTA. *ilt ri ^ ri^t t 'OP. "iU m /m-
nv0tit ^i rSrm Eur. Or. 796. 'On ^ r/ yi [sa l«-r/y] i [Because there is
what?] Why to f PI. Charm. 161 c. ETr ix«v*«^iy«»», »«) pC(«^0f»iv»f, »«)
r/ »a*0f 0u^) ir««';^«yr*>», «'«#« 4 »i»0Vfii9n furrii y%y09% w^iI^tmv, ' what evil
not suffering?' i.e. 'suffering everj evil,' Dem. 241. 28. Cf. §533.-^
(ft) Tif rivpt ufrtii irrt, ytfnrtrtii ^«m^«v, it will become evident who ie
guilty [and] of what, Dem. 249. 8. Titatt «?»» Ipfi, v«*« rivm* iS^0i^%» Mv
fiui}^09M tU^ytrnftiuott 4 «r«i)«f ^« y0n0n t Mem. ii. 2. 3. II«rf(«f d^
irirtf09 mlfJSiu \ Eur. Phcen. 1288. Tit it «r« wif0t nmnSv ykwHrai Id.
Ale. 213. Aivrriri, . . •7« ir^^f •7«»» i»)(«ly «r«#;^M Soph. Ant 940. Oi)*
l;^«f, lir« w^ff ir«ri(«y Tlw Id. 1342.

H. 'AAAOS.

§ tl4LO. The pronoun aXXog is not only used retrospect^
weiy^ but also pros^pectively and distributively ; that is, it may
denote, not only a different person or thing from one which
has been mentioned, but also, from one which is to he men-
tioned ; or it may, in general, denote a difference among the
several individuals or parties which compose the whole num-
ber spoken of.

When &Xk0$ is proepeetive, and is followed by another 4ixx«f or an equiva-
lent pronoun used retroepeetively, it is commonly translated by one. When it
is dtetributive, it is combined with another 4txx«f , or with one of its derivatives^
and is commonly translated by two pronouns, as one . . another^ titie • • that,
&e., the sentence being resolved into two. Examples are subjoined of &kX$t
and its derivatives, as used, ■

«.) RErROSPBcnvELT. "0^0^ ^ Snmfif t^ytp U) t^uv »({«, IXXy iirrf »•
ik>M li ix^vf i'«^iiv, «lxXf iwTfh AxXf iH^r^vf W0n7f, ' for one man to boil
meat, for another to roast it, &c/ Cyr. viii. 2. 6. MiiMtrif H rm^f vke
l^»l^f, rjf «lXXif iir«^iMfr«, ' on the next,' iii. 4. 1 . See § 457. ••

§ 94 I • /3.) Pbospbctivelt. Ti n 2XX« Ir/^urt, mmi fuf(t§¥t Umnt
im^u»0vt, both honored me in every ofher respect^ and gave me ten thouaand da^
rice, i. 3. 3 (§§ 432, 488. 5). Ov»y £XX« ^^ila^rtt 4 )«f«r«trif , hamng done
mtthing eHee Hum ravage, H. Gr. vii. 4. 17.

Digitized

by Google

' Bit SYNTAX OF THS V£Rfi. [bOOK lii

Xkmii. (a.) Hie neuter 4XA.« is often used wkh r«, r)^ «v)m» and put^
with the ellipsis of a verb, coaunonly v-oim, ^^g^^tfy «*««%«*» «</m'* or yi^f^fuu
thus, Ti iU.X« fJrM [sc. \^»lnfeti\ n ivtSovktv^av i What el»e have they done bm
plot agamti utf Th. iii. 39. "AXXt t/mv ^ . . ayuvtt^tlfAiSa \ ii. 5. 10. *Ymuvh
§»Si* ixx««} r«vf itt^rMximts ^i^nXavtutf ihar»y Mid nothing but,' Crr. !. 4. 34.
El . . /»i»^v &XX* *f fAirifiyxtt lb. 6. 39. — (b.) Hence arises the use of &XXt
rt Ht or, the H omitted, »XX» rt (also written AXXan), as an hUerropatiM
phrase ; thus, 'AXX* t< j} «-i^i irXi/rr^w <r«^ » /)o yoi» [do any thing else than
i^aid] iwt rtjfard k qf the kifhat wntnpUnctf PI. ApoL 34 o. "Axx* « «
•i)if MvX^ i Does amy Hhimg whatever forbid? W, 7. 5. 'AXX* rt «v» M yt
^tXMti^hSi ftXni^i r§ mi^^H t -Oo not them ihe CMMtoM /ooe ^<a» f PL Hipparchi
836 aw *

^ S49« 7.) PnOHPgUMVBLY and ReTBOSPBCTIVKLT. 'AXX«s 4[XX9f
iI^jM, OM d!re» up anoAer, v. 8. 1 5. 'Axx«f MXX09 . . U^tuny th^ were daek^
vtgy im4 agamti mother. Soph. EL 738 (of. $ 145> Tir tiXXn, «XX«#' &t*.
ftt, mmome, and them the other, lb. 739. "AxXtfn mtt) &XX»Tt, [at one tane
and at aaetiier] now amd them, ii. 4. 36. So, when two are spoto of, *OU%*
fH <r^ ln^#» mtiu, M« out <lrtAa M« otfAer, vi. 1. 5.

).) DiBTBZBunysLT. OJrM /mI», i? Kxam^x^ <xx«« 1xx« xs>^ t&ess «m%
CZMTCsftiM^ at^, one o»« Am^ omf another anotiier, iL I. 15 (§§ 451, 497. l)k
0/ tt w«XvwM . • MxXh ^X^ Ir^crir* iv. 8. 19. Ov /ikv trt «f»«M, «XX'
4A.X«f iUuu/«% na Ibnpier m a body^ hut tome in thia direetUm^ and othert hi Aai^
L 10. 13. ia»mZ» )i ixXm iXXm U 6. 11. 'Axx«n ^XXy mtfUipm GU
Or. t 6. 8a

CHAPTER V.

SYNTAX OF THE VERB.

L Agreement of the Verb.

^ ff4S. Rule XXIX. A Verb agrees ^ tb
its subject in number and person ; as,

*%ym X^^^uu, Ishaa take, i. 7. 9. 2u ^f; u. 1. 13, *H<r^i»u Ac^tTcy
t !• 1. *TfAt7t J«$iri i. 4. 15. Atttxiritr rit faXttyyt 18. 17.

KoHb. AoBSEBrEMT, whether in the appotUhe, the adjective, the prow win,
ir the veirft, has the same general foundatiuQ, and, to a great extent, the sama
irarieties and exoeptiooa. The four roles of agreement may be thus presflBtad
In a tabular form : —

AnAppoarnvB^ ' "J Cask.

An AixnscnvB f agrees with f Gendeb, Number, and Caae.

A Pronoun f its subject in f Gender, Number, and Pbrsos,

A Verb J J Number, and PersuiV

Digitized

by Google

CH. 5] AOREBMBlfT. — ELLIFSIb. ^9^

§ 944. Remarks. 1. In compound construction, both
s^Uepsis and zeugma ave common (§ 329. N.) ; thus,

*Air«XiX0iirA#i» nf^t Htvimt »mi Ylmwimv i. 4. 8. Kv^0v dmrifmrai n »••
^aXh mm) ^tif h )i^c. B««'iXivf )) »«) «4 rvf cthrSf 2j4wxmv uVvifrrii i. 10. 1
B«riXitff )) »«2 •! rtrv «VT^ r« ri ifXX« vaXXa ^/fli^fr«^«v«'i lb. 2. Ki/^df ri
»«2 « rr^ATi* iTfli^Hx/i, »«i \yi ftT9 i. 7. 16. 'Ey^r jmb) ^-^m fia^titf #i;/»^a^ff
«^«'Xiiy^t#« Ear. Ale 404. 2v )' 4 /tMxm^lm f/utxti^tit B-* i vis 9'iri$ if»tr»f
Eur. Or. 86. A»»ut rv n »«} Si/*/«;«« PI. Pluedo, 77 d. Cf. §§ 446, 497

NaTB& «. WlMn the sabjeot is divided or dUirihmted, the verb sometimefl
agrees with the wkok, and sometimes with one of the parts ; thas, "O^'n Uv.
/«tr0 %K»0r»fy where they each could, iv. 2. 1 2. 'Ai»f«r«M»r« ^, 7ir«v Irvyx'^
Mv tumo'TOf iii 1. 3. n^^yrif ^ t^rM »««-« lf^y% it wXaifiif *\n^u mvi^atvtn
t»»0'r»9 ri Uttf W$^to*r9 L 8. 9. 'AXktg vfit &kX«9 ^^iCaXXo H.Gr. iL 3. 23,
OJtm . . £xx«r ifXXAc Xiyu u. 1. 15. See §§ 360, 497. 1, 542. ).

fi. In syllepsis, the poets sometimes adopt the following arrangement (termed
by grammarians l^^ifiM *Ax»fAmn»if) ; TYp^^Xtyiiat* r« fuvrn ILmn^rit w
». 513. El )i »"A^fi« i^x^nfUxnt 9 OmCai T. 138.

§ S4LS. 2. Ellipsis. When the subject is sufficiently
indicated by the form of the verb or the context^ and no stress
18 laid upon it, it is commonly omtted. This remark applies,

a.) To the first and second personal pronouns^ and likewise
to the thirds when its reference is sufficiently determined by
the connection; thus, *ETif\ df f^ax^vu Jagtlog . ., //SovAero,
and when Darius was sick^ he wished^ i. 1. 1. See § 502.

Note. The personal pronouns are implied in the very affixes of the vert).
See§§ 171, 172.

§ ff46« b.) To the third personal pronoun^ when refer-
ring to a subject which is indefinite^ or general^ or implied in
the verb itself; thus,

*E«rt} 0VH9»ira0%^ when U ffrew darh^ Oyf. iv. S. 5. "Erurt, then wa$ am
earthquake, Th. iv. 52. EctSw^^i ;^mm rn* G^axiry «Xiiv, mmH rovt it^rmfuvt
iffilt Ar. Ach. 138. '0^/') h, it was late, ii. 2. 16. ^» &f^} Ay0fitf xXn-
Stufav L 8. I. *!!( ?0ixi», as it seems, vi. I. 30. 0^r*> ^i ixu, [and it baa
itself thus] and thus the matter stands, v. 6. 12. *Ey rovref Zr;^fr« vi. 3. 9.
fittXit Urat vii. 3. 43. *E)iiXM#i )i Mem. i. 2. 32. *n# ft avr^ «» x»tv-
Xt*^* InU when [it did not succeed to him] he met with no success, Th. I 1 09.
Kicrib htx^ifu »vT0it iv. 8. 20. tinx^f ^*h ^^^'^ ^ "^^ ^f <* ^o^ or tAer«
must be fghting, ii. 3. 5 (see §§ 357, 430. R.). '£>W fttXwu rt^) r(«^nf
«vr»», [there shall be to me a care] / will take care of 0uir support, Oyr. iv.
5. 17 (see $ 376. ).). Ta?; /mI» ir$t00ftitts avr^ a-tni^t^t, rttf ti fiii truhfAtvMt
fiurifittXi Mem. L 1. 4. Aiysv^th irt W) r«t;r« tfx**rai, * they say,' Cyr. i.
S. 6. K«2 a&ftv fiirrM «&ft r0vr«» •••^•rt Ifeirat (cf. Ttltv^tni ra iXiyiT#)
i. 8. 20. "Ov-if «'«#;^*v«-iv If rMf fttymXott iiymrt Th. vii. 69. OJri £;« «v-
««2MM7f V^ . . i^^Mvv ^^X^ it is not ri^ then to return mn injury, whatever
om may suffer^ PL Ciito, 49 c *H rw •Itehu itiiftu 1«^mb/;«1, J wn JUss,
Aefolfy oftmis supposing that he knows what he does not know, PL ApoL 29 b.
%ni IriXriy^ [sc i 0nXnr$y»rns], when [he blew the trumpet j tht trun^ekf
30

Digitized

by Google

^50 SYNTAX OF THE YBEB. [BOOK in

Mov, or at ike mmmd tf the tnmpet, L 2. 17. '£r«^(irM ^•It *£XA«ri Wf rmX
irsyyt uL 4. 4 (ct *E* r»»rf wn/uittu i r«X«'4y»nif iv. 3. 32). '£»n^k>^ tu§
VSD^Xnrt [m. ; sii(»^ frodamatiom waa wuMde to the Greek$, iiL 4. 36. Tm m.
#M9 v^v «vr«» «MKyMvrtr«4 Demi. 465. 14. Oi90p^Miu [sc a mm;^**;] ^ 142.

Konoi. «. When die pronoon is wboOj indefinite in its reference, or, in
other words, when the verb simply expresses an action or state wUboat predi-
cating it of anj person or thing, the verb is termed imperwonal (in, not^ persdna,
per9tm\ A Yerb thns employed is a compendioas form of expression for the
kmdred nomn with a $mb$tamthe (or oAer appropriate) verb; thns. It raime
s= There is rma, or 22am foBs, An impersonal verb» from its very nature, is
in the Sdpere, ting,; and an od/eefme joined with it is in the fteat. $i»g*^ or sk
the nemt. pbtr.for the §ing. (§ 451).

A. A Terb is often imtrodtued as impereonal, of which the subject is after-
wards expressed in an Inf, or dittinet damm ; as, 'Erti V i^»u mirS On «v
^ivfr/«u, amd when, now it teemed beet to Am to marekj L 2. 1. 07t umin»u us
Km^TttXtS «'•)/•* ii^^tritu i. 9. 7. AiX«« jf», iri \yyv$ mv ^mrtXtus n* ii*
3. 6. Ou» h XcCiTf, [it was not, to take them, t. e. there was no such thing
as tailing tbem] it waa not poeeible to take Aem^ L 5. 2. "E^n km^Cifut lb. 3.
'E^irrtf vfM v-trrk XttCuw^ it i$ permitted pom to take pledgee, ii 3. 26. *£(•-
e^if iffPt you earn see, iiL 4. 39. *£ytffr« . . 9r*^%vtH$u L 9. 13. See § 523.

y. Personal and impersonal oonstnieti<His are so blended and interchanged,
that it is often difficult to determine, whether a verb is to be regarded in a par-
ticular instance as pereomal or impermmal^ and whether a neuter pronoun or
adjective connected with it is to be regarded as Nom. or Aec,; as, T/ iu «»r*v
miruf t [What needs him, or. What does it need him, § 432] What need i$
there that he ehould aekf ii. 1. 10. For the change of impersonal to personal
constructions by attraction, see § 551.

I, For the construction of verbs with the Gm. pabthive, see §§ 361. /i,
364.

§ 547. 3. The SUBSTANTIVE VERB is very often omitted^
especially if it is merely a copula. Its omission is particularly
frequent with verbals in -tiogy in general remarks and relative
clauses^ and with such words as avayxti^ Xff^^'^t <<x<Ki ^<f<^t
xaiQOQ, (upa, dijlog^ hoifiogy ipifovdog, dvvntog^ olog le, ^^diog, z^"
X%nQg. Thus,

Tm/t* $¥ «roifiTi$f [ec irrij, Ai$ must not be done, L 3. 1 5. *£? rf i'^ff
§Stv at vtiyeii, in the cave, whence the springs, i. 2. 8. nM*«/M», «v ri tZ^t
rrmhft (cf. Ov ^9 ro iv(os) L 4. 1. Av#;^^n«'r««« <7mm mvdynti tirmxr^vf m«f
(cf. *A*ay»ti yif l^rn) iii. 4. 19. *ilt ri t!»it iii. 1> 21. "^^m Xiytr L 3«
12. Ankof ydf u. 4. 19. Cf. §§ 528, 538.

§948. 4. Stnesis afiects the number of the verb in
two ways : —

I.) A plural verb may be joined with a singular NonLy if
more than one are referred to ; as,

Ti irXn40t l'^tifi0»9T»j the majority voted, Th. i. 125. 'O IXX«r rr^M^
dwiCttt909 Id. iv. 32. Atifitariivnt f^trk rSt J^vrr^arnySv ^Kum^vAvtv wwit^m
^m Id. iii. 109. Ti Tli tm? r^crCvrt^Mt if^v . . nyvf^ttm PL L^. 657 ^
8es %^ 458, 497, 544. «.

Digitized

by Google

CH. 6.J STKESIS. ATTRACTIOW. 851

§ 940. II.) A singtdar verb may be joined with a pZu-
ral Nom, regarded acs but a single object of thought This
occurs chiefly in two cases : — (a) When the nominative is
neuter, according to the following

Special Rule. The Neuter Plural has its
VERB in the singular.

That the want of agreement has in this case become the nile, seems to haTO
arisen from the fact, that the- neater plural commonly denotes a mass of lifeless
things, and likewise to be connected with the usage in §§ 336, 451. Excep-
tions are, however, frequent ; chiefly, when things that have life are denoted,
or when the idea of plurality is prominent, or in the non-Attic poets for the
sake of the metre. Thus, T« ivirn^um ifriXivi, provisions failed, iv. 7. 1.
Ilk»7a T vfiTf 9'aftrTtf V. 6. 20. T«vr« iii»ii ttipikifAa tivat, these things [or
this] seemed to be useful^ i. 6. 2 (cf. § 451). *EfTeiv0» Kv(^ ^aviXim h U
2. 7 (cf. lb. 8). *Efrm.Z9a ^r«v^ rk "ItntvUtot ^mfix%m lb. 23 (§ 336). Ik
•rtXn rSt Attztiectfitviatf ifiio'tipra ectHriv i^S4r(ft>^«y, * the rulers,* Th. iv. 88
(cf. § 453. y). 'Tv-f^v^M AfAMTa ii. 2. 15 (cf. iv. 5. 25). Tk vvoT^vytm,
iXtivnTt iv. 7. 24 (cf. I. 5. 5). *Hr«v ti rmvr» Ivo v%txn i« 4* 4. ^etvi^k
if at ami Tr^r^v »«) M^itmp tx^n ir«XX« i. 7. 17. T« V H^fAttrtt I^c^avt* i.
8. 20. 'Arr(« It rj fvsr) «yi^if»«», H iifM9 rkt S^*t rnt fu*r»( Ifi^mfi^u
Mem. iv. 8. 4. '^ym yifsfr* A. 310. For such examples as 'Orri iaUrmt
?. 131 •see § 837.

Note. In the following example, apparently upon the same principle, a
series of feminine plurals denoting natural phenomena is followed after an in-
terval by a substantive verb in the singular ; Km) yk^ wtix^au xeu ;^«X«^«i
»«} ifvriCm l» «rXi«N|/«« »mi titfWf^Ui «*!() ikXnXa rSf rfvratf yiytireu S^««
^iuHf PI. Conv. 188 b. Cf. b.

(b) When the verb precedes^ and is hence introduced as
though its subject were, as yet, undetermined (cf. § 546. fi).
This construction is almost confined in prose to tan and ijy
(compare, in French, the use of il est^ and il y a). Thus,

'E#ri yk^ Xfjt9ty% *a) fim/t0) »a) U(k, for [there is to me] I have both aUar$
and sacred rites, PL Euthyd. 302 c *Hv V kfifiWXtxrtt nXifMtKtt Soph. Tr.
520. Trri T»6rt Itrrit rit fiiat PI Gorg. 500 d. Tiytnrmt . • k^X'^* '*'* **^
yA/ii Id. Rep. 363 a. See ^ 523.

Remark. A few other examples of the Nom. pi. masc. or fbm. with m
verb in the sing, occur in the poets ; as, K«/emm »«riy«>»«^iv Hom. Cer. 280.
TfA9$t , . rtXXir«i Pind. 01. 11. 4. This construction was termed by the
eld grammarians "Sxnfut Il$9^ei^i»if or B«Mwri«f.

^ SSOm 5. Attraction. The verb is sometimes attract-
ed by a word in apposition with the subject ; usually an attri'
hue coming between the subject and the verb ; as,

r^ X»»(*»9 r»»r; 7wt( r^^n^o *£?»{« '0)«} U«X«i/»r«, this placet wkidk
VM before called The Nine Ways, Th. iv. 102. "li^m li )^« Xipm I
Dt^iMi y'4'nXti Id. ilL 112. 'Airct ^ r§ /*ir«» ralv ru;^*fv j?r«f 0rii%iot
^t7s L 4. 4.

Digitized

by Google

8^ sri^rAX of thb verb. [book in

^ffSl. 6. A verb, of which the proper subject b an
bij. or distinct clause (or which is impersonal with an Inf. or
clause dependent), oflen takes for a Nom. the subject of tha
Inf. or clause. In this case, the Inf. sometimes becomes a
Part. Thus,

Aiyt^mt 'k^iXXttf \»1%7mu TAat^vvat^ ApoBo i$ mid to have ficoftd Maratfat,
•« \iy%Ttu^ *Aw$XXm9m i»M4^«i M«^rtfa», it if aotd^ that Apollo flaytd Mar^
t!fa»y L 2. 8 (cfl Xiyvrm ti ami r«m rnXX^n nt^«-«{ . . )i«»i»)v»(vuv L 8. 7).
*£X(^«vr« «Mf, it yty^ttVMWt Vect. i. 1. 'O *Ara'v^t9t iit rii* X'*i** Mvrti
iftiecXuv iiyyiXXtrtu CyT. V. 3. 30. *n« »yyiXXMr0 o fiU Il*la-»»'i^9$ rtrtXtth-
mx^f, that [Pisander was announced as having died] it was annou needy 0uU
Pitander weu dead, H. Gr. iv. 3. 13. *0tt.cX»y%7rett vfif ravrmv »^MnrT0t
in yivirfai i. 9. 20 (cf. ^OfAtXaytsTati . ., r0vs ^Mvr«c l» rSv rtfutirttf ytyt*
piwmi PI. PhflMlo, 72 a). *0 ftif 0V9 9'^trCvTt^H wm^itt irvyx*** [=»T«v fr^tr-
CvTt(09 v^fiTtat Irvyxavijt the elder, therefore, happened to be preeent, i. e. it
happened, that the elder was present, L 1. 2. "On vmn^iratvi yi ilrn, 0vh\ A
Xm,vfeiv»u0'tf [= Xmvfeifti] (£c. 1. 1 9. *A^«iri» ^nrn^vr Xyt* [ — *A^»myi Ifi^
^tnrnuv], it will be enough that I should die, Soph. Ant. 547. "AXts [sc U/^]
wovouo"* iyti Id. CEd. T. 1 06 1 . T«^«i;r«i* m^nii ft rM^firtu f^Mt, * it is enOU^
that I communicate/ .^sch. Pr. 621. Ou wf»^n*$fU9 n»Xa^M rMt, it doei
not belong to these to ptinish us. Ear, Or. 771. K^i/r^«» ys^ "Ai^t ntv^mf^
for [he were better lying] it were better he were lying in the grave, Soph. Aj,
635. AiiXit Tf iv trm^iP, Srt v^t^t^oCtirc, it was manifest to all, thatjte wag
exceedingly alarmed, Cyr. i. 4. 2 (cf. "On fih r^eH^a htiinf^v, wttrt VnXts
lytrcTtf H. Gr. yi. 4. 20). AfiX«f h &vmfitv»ti it was evident that he was sad,
or, he was emdenHy sad, i. 2. 11. "^rifym* i\ ^»n^s fi\f h stiiivm, h'f ft
f «i*f <p/X6t tJvas, T»vrif 7i»^X«f lyiyftr* IwtCtvXtvttf ii. 6. ^3. Sir »h h/Mv )/•
ntust *t itvnx»^*^trittt, it is therefore Just that ymt should requite us, Cyr. 'rr. 1.
20. TfVf 0$^ovt . . ^•XX9U y%M [_=vXX»v iu ifu] fimT^mx*ft Xiy$t9,
(much is wanting in order that I should call] / am far from calling the wiss
fVogs, PI. TheflBt- 167 b. 07 rt^avrtv Vtoun fAifitivfiat r«» ir^^irfirm rnf vfU'
ri^f Isocr. 300 a. In like manner, Avroo iXtyu hn^atros ««r«Xit>r^M,
when he had [wanted little of] narrowly escaped being stoned to death, i. 5« 14.
See § 546. y.

Note. Sometimes the two modes of construction are united ; as, 2m yk^
in Xiytrat iraw yt rt6t^mw%Zf$au i 'Av^XX^v, nmi #< fr«yr« \»%t9f «nJifU9t9
ir^cTTiiv Cjr. vii. 2. 15. "JlyytXreu » » n rt ftaj^n vaw Ifj^b^k ytytAttu^
»a\ U ai/Tfi vaXXoiff . . rt^vavxi PI. Charm. 153 b. "Eio^tt tivrif, fi^ovrnt
ytwfiUnt, a-xnTTis wmm %U t^v ^ar^tfttv »tMi»9, jmci i« T«vr«v XtifiTtfiai
«*««■«» jii. I. 11.

§ tf 53* 7. The verb t^n is often separated from its sul^ect bj sonM
of Uie words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonasticalfy ; as, " £^ Xiyut,^
t^n, '*£ ^iftftia,** i KiCn#, " Vou speak well, Simmias,"* said Cebes, PI. Ph«dis
77 c 'O 'H^dc«Xiif &*»U0at rmvrai, ** *n yvffu,^ i^n^ " Svcftm ii 0m r/ irnt i*
Biem. ii. 1. 26, •A«-#«^mr«M i Xfi^/r«^«f • "Bxii^o," ttfn, "<r{#f rk i^"
W. 1.20. Scev. 1. 2; vi. 1. 31.

II. Use of the Voices.

^ ff ff 3. For a general statement of the use of the voices,
see §§ 165, 166. Irregularity and variety in their use arise

Digitized

by Google

OH. 5.J

VSB OF TOIGEb. 359

eliiefiy from the follo\nng sources : — (a) From the use of
the same verb as transitive and intransitive^ or as causativn
and immediate. See § 555. — {b) From the formation of v
new theme^ with a strengthened meaning. See ^^ 265, 319. 2
— (c) From the variety and extent of the refiexive uses of thf
verb, and their intimate connection, on the one hand, with thi
intransitive^ and on the other, with the passive use. Sci-
^§ 165, 166, 557-561. — (d) From a transition of meanin*
in the verl^. See %^ 556, 56 L 2. — (e) From ellipsis, Se~<
§ 555.

§ tlff4« As m most of the tenses the same form is bo^
tnid. and pass.^ it is but natural that the distinction should ht
sometimes neglected in the Put, and Aor. (§ 166). This oc
curs chiefly,

«.) In the use of the Fut» mid. for the Fut. pass., as a shorter and m<m
flophonic form ; thus, *E| ifit0u Tifn^nrtu, he shall be homored bjf me. Soph. Ant
SIO. "^Yn^t »«/* n^» »J0-tTaci rri* fif^iff Eur. Or. 440. M««'riyM0'i«-«
0r(tCXM0trtUf itin^treiiy \»xotu4nff%T»i rit^fiaiXfMt PI. Rep. 361 e.

/3.) In the nse of the Aor, pass, for the Aor, mid. This occurs chiefly b
dqxmemtM (§ 166. 2), and in other verbs in which the proper passive is want
log or rare. Thus, *B.'ytir^ti n »vTiv» admired Aim, i. 1.9. Atei)nx^ifr$,
JiXXiikMS, having conversed with each other, ii. 5. 42. ^vmKXayivn i. 2. 1
Atn^ten lb. 14. *H^^if lb. 18. *'Eivwihv»v iU. 1. 35. *EinfttktiPtifirt lb
88. OtfCff/iyrif AxXnXtvt ii 5. 5.

Notes. (1.) Whether verbs of the classes jnst mentioned employ th(
wwL or the pass, form of the Aor. must be determined by observation
(8.) Sometimes, though rarely, the Fut. pass, occurs as mid., and the Aor
wtid, as p€tss. ; thus, *Eirtfukn^n0i/*»Mu Hem. il 7. 8. K^cir;^!?* I^mtj iutf
Knr. Hipp. 27.

A. ACTIVB.

§ tl«5tS. I. In many verbs in which the active voice i«
commonly or often transitive, it is likewise used intransitively
or reftexively (§ 553). This use may be often explained by
the ellipsis of a noun or reflexive pronoun (§ 427). Thus,

*0 21 ^a0tX%vt rmvnf /»!» «v» nytv [sc. r« rr^tirtvftM'^ , but the king did not
pead on bis army] advance in this direction, i. 10. 6. "A^i ^ come now, ii.
2. 10. <I>(^i 2jf r»/9V9 Rep. Ath. 3. 5. B«>.A.* [sc. ff-ict/ro] I; ne^Mxeit !
[Throw yourself to the crows] Go, feed the crmos ! Go to the dogs ! At. Pint.
782. 'H2«vJ| iwf fsc iavrivl, giving [himself \ up to pleasure, Eur. Ph. 21.
*A»«»«X(Hrr , J netrtyvnr»9 ntt^m Id. Or. 294. 'Evrct/^iv i^iXavftt i. 2. 7 (cf.
§ 427). OSt« 21 txt*f and thus [it has itself] the matter stamfx, v. 6. 12.
£T;^«» htuif, they were in a sad condition, vi. 4. 23 (see ^ 363. B). Tl^om
rS;^ii» [sc. rif 9w»], to give attention, Mem. iv. 5. 6. *T«'«2(i« vi/nv [sc.
ImtfTs] V. 7. 12. Ilct/i r*? X6y0v Ar. Ran. 580 (cf. i. 6. 6, and see § 560. 1).

Notes, (a) T<;^m nsed reflexively with an adverb is commonly equivalent
it sS/14 wHfa an adjective; thoii EvMixiwf l;^Miv »> Evva/jmi cW** i. 1. 6.

Digitized

by Google

354 STMT AX. — USE OF VOICES. [bOOX IIL

^AHfitMi T;^«yrtf wm'AJOfMt Svrtt iii. 1. S. The poets even join l^« wi& aa
affective ; as, 'E;^' ^fvx*e, [hold still] be quiet, Eur. Med. 550. (6) For tba
'uUranwtioe use of the aecond tenses^ see § 257. fi.

^ tSSG. 11. The active voice, through a transition of
meanings sometimes supplies the place of the passive ; as,

Ev k»»vmt to hear agreeably^ and hence, from the bewitching sweetness of
praise, to be commended or tpoken, well of; as, lAiy» ^\ tZ mkoum u^i t\an4ff»
X*^'*"* M^atwut vii. 7. 23. *!»« /mi avrd k»$VMVt »»»£f, that thef
themsetvei may not he tpoken HI of. Rep. Ath. 2. 18. ILXv^t^JivmXxtSt to he
called a coward, iEsch. Pr. 868. (Of., in Lat, bene audire, male audire.)
'Ari^Mviv VW9 N<x«»)^«tf, he [died] woe killed by Nicander, t. 1. 15 (see
§ 295, »TtIfJ). *^v9ar» . . IXfiV . . Ovr^f i«X«. He was able to take
it . . /if ac^tM lAttf toi^, iii. 4. 12 (see § 301. 1). 01 ixv^vretxiTts '^-
)/*>y vvri T0V }nfitov, thoee of the Rhodiant who had [fallen out of the city] been
banithed by the people, H. Gr. iv. 8. 20. "Ori ^tvyttv otxthv vvi vw ^li-
fitu, that they were [fleeing] banished from home by the people, H. Gr. i. 1. 27.
ArsCii«f (ptvynrm inr* MiX/tav, accused of impiety by Melitus, PL Apol. 35 d
(§ 374). Kmra^rkt v^' vf^St, appointed by you, Dem. 49. 11. Cfl § 561. S.
— For the Inf. act, instead of pau,, see § 621. ^.

B. IVflDDLE.

§SS7, The reflexive sense of the middle voice is far
from being uniform either in kind or force. It not only varies
in different verbs, but often in the same verb when used in
different connections. It is,

a.) Direct ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the Aee,
of the reflexive pronoun; as, A»vTat [= Advu iauriv], he is washing himself^
or bathing, Cyr. i. 3. 11. Uatrtf fih 9iXu<pa»T0, they all anointed themsehcM^
H. Gr. iv. 5. 4. '2rt^eiv»v^^at frayr«f Ag. 2. 15. "Orttv V iyit iyxmXtrs^et*
^tu C3T. viii. 7. 26. *E«-/^iftf^«»ii», bearing herself on, i. e. rushing cm, L 9.
6. Tm ithUmf iwtx*f^**o(i refraining [holding himself] from injustice, Mem.
iv. 8. 4. *0 V &XX»f rr^etrU . . i^MirX/^rr« ^oXX$7s f^h xa) nm.X97f xtrSn •
• . Mff-X^^fv h »mi I^Wtue *^0ft,%Tat«'tVtMt Cyr vi. 4. 1. Ovyff &XX»s iXXif
Ir^Asrir* iv. 8. 19 (cf. EiV ^vyii* tr^typt r»v§ V^mMt^xtXlevf i. 8. 24).

§«S«S8« b.) Indirect; bo that the middle is equivalent to dM
active with the Dat, or Gen, of the reflexive pronoun ; as, 24-^r«-
yavf fih IXs«-/«i [s= ixiiw l»uT§7t] &XX»vt, e-k V WirnUui ity^i%Hm
[= iy$^il^in \etvr»!t\ to [take for themselves] dutose other generals, ^emd
to supply themselves with necessaries, I. 8. 14. Hmt^m . . «i ^rtimfuu, I fmaks
you a son to myself or / make you my son^ Cyr. iv. 6. 2. 'A*** ytt^ymt r«f
/5j*j» W0tt7rfKt (Ec. 6. 11. •On ri^) srXiirrfv ^cmt; that he [made it to him-
self] esteemed it of the utmost consequence, i. 9. 7. K«r««'r^l^^«/Kir0f //.U 9rArrm%
2i/^«vf , * having subjected to himself,* Cyr. i. 5. 2. Ki/^fv )i fA^Ttivift^nrtu,
but he sends for Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1. 2. Tavrtv ^vXarrtr^M;
to watch him for your own safety, to be on your guard against him, i. 6. 9. <l^t-
fotreit ^i «7»«^(» . . mi^atvei, itt iiri rav irarafiau i^Cftiffeu Cyr. i. 2. 8. Svai
0-aifittvo9 rif duivA»fif, drawing his scymitnr, i. 8. 29. Qifieii rk WXx l. 6. 4
K^«« i^(/Mi»«f iv) rk yitarm, * upon his own knees,* vii. 3. 23. 'A«'«^mu
VM»M<f»i express your opinion, i. 6. 9. Xlmt^n fi ii»«^«^iT«, hs caUod me A*i
^m. Soph. (Ed. T. 1021. — 'Arf^i'^ff/Mu, to give up for one's own profit, I

Digitized

by Google

OR. 5.J MIDDLE. (iUa* * 'S55

C» «eff ; as, T«evr«e m^^iifttwt, •Srt 1^1$^ §i*iim»IS^tA3hyi^ytotAVtttt hav- .
ing »old the$e thingt^ 1u hat neither paid over the ptJBwC^ ^euthes nor tojtef
yii. 6. 41. Aut/uu, to loose for one't ae(f, todeUver, tor^imm^ U tuhVm; as,
£7 rif«e( i» riv ircXtf^wf IXvg^tiftnt Dem. 316. 3. Ti^tiftt or y^i^n vofitVf to
make a law for another, rUtftat or y^iipaftMt tifA$f, to make a law for on£t adf;
as, 0i«t>f $*fA»t T9Vt 90fii»vf T§ur»ttt tut Mfi^wif B^tptUf I think that the gods
have instiitUed Aeee hxwa for men, 0/ M^m^t tthrtvs ihfr*, men have intti'
tuted them for Aemtelvee, Mem. iv. 4. 19. N«/My »vt»i ly^ei^mt, these men (the
Thirtj) enacted a law, H. 6r. it 3. 52. "Hv vifuvt jutXthg y^m^mrratf if they
(the citizens) should enact good laws, (£c. 9. 14. BavXiva^, to give counsel to
another t /3«vX»i/«^mm, to give counsel to one's self, to deliberate^ to resolve (^ 35).
TifMtfUtt to take vengeance for another, to avenge, rt/Am^U/Amt, to take vengeance
for one's sdf, to jmtush,

^ SS9m c.) Reciprocal ; so that the middle is equivalent to the ac-
tive with the reciprocal pronoun ; as, Ma;^tf/itivM xeu fiartXtvt »«) Kv^ff *a) m
tifi^* Mtrwt, * fighting with each other/ i. 8. 27. 'A/i^) Jy i7;^«y itupfifitvdi,
* quarrelling/ iv. 5. 17. AtnXXmlmvr* (r«t»j 1fr^$ut], ^ exchanged,' C}n*. viii.
8. 32. — Hence the middle is extensively used in expressing actions which im-
ply MUTUAL RELATION ; as those of agreement and contention, of greeting and
companionship, of intercourse and traffic, of question and answer, &c Thus,
^vfr'Jtfuu, to agree, }mXu»f€t, to become reconciled, a'vititfMn, [to pour out li-
bations together] to make a treaty, aytitvl^ofiai, to contend, kfuXXiofim, to vie,
ftd^fuu, to fight, d^irdZ0/Mu, to embrace, to salute, l^-tfAot, to attend upon, to
fotlow, ImXsytf^MM, to converse, mtUfuu, to buy, rvv/^M^dt/, to inquire, m*»*iiu^
fuu, to answer, &c.

d.) Gausatiys ; to that the middle denotes what a person procures fo be
dome for himself; aa, 0«»^»« l^rMtttf-cr*, she had a corselet made, Cyr. vi. 1. 51.
*A i erJierwH • • ienw0itir0 lb. i. 4. 1 8. *A«r»XXm¥»s mviSufAa 9r»ififtifAt9ot v.
8. 5. '£y^ yti^ ri ravr* WirfHtf ih^hal^tiftn^, for I had you taught these things
M purpose, Cyr. L 6. 2. T^cv-s^ity n Yltf^tniif irm^irihr* Th. i. 130. *£»i.
Ajmv ify^m^%00m ermtrmt, they commanded all to [have their names registered]
^iM m their names, H. 6r. ii. 4. 8. — T^ti^fuii ma, to have the name of any ont
taken down as a criminal, hence to accuse ; as, 0/ y^ay^afAtvt "^vx^arnf Mem
L 1. 1. n^irffi^w, to go as an ambassador, ^^iffQtvtftMt, to send an ambasso''
dor ; as, 'Orirf^ W^irCiint mvrf «r«vr«ri viL 2. 23 ; 0/ «r«Xi^M l«'^irC«v«vr#
Ag. 2.21. Mur^im, to let upon hire, fAtHUfuu, [to procure to be let to oneV
nlf QDOO hire] to hire ; as, llx»tn fueim^^tn vi. 4. 13.

^ S80« e.) SuBjEcnvE; so that the middle represents the action aa
wwfe uearfy eameerning the tmbjeet, than the active (see § 174). Thus, (1.) if
the active is a causative verb, the middle may form the corresponding immedi'
ate , (2.) if the active expreases an external or physical action, the middle may
•xprsas the analogous isOemal or mental action ; (3.) if the active represents
a person as having a particular office, condition, or character, the middle may
fepreeent him as making it more his own by acting in accordance with it. llius,
«->n.) Fi^ to make another taste, ytvofun, to taste for one's self (see § § 375,
480). n«tfM, to make to cease, ^a6»fi»i, to cease ; as, "Eiravo'^ ftlt 7«vt*>» ir«X-
Xe^ Mem. i. 2. 2 ; Tmurm tltrttt Iwtivrar* i. 3. 12. <^»QUt, to cause to fear,
to terrify, (ptC'uftai, to fear ; as, T»hf WtfAuavt irtXtfiti»v$ <poCn^an iv. 5. 1 7 ;
'E^ttnra mirif i. 9. 9. Al^xf^tot, to piit to shame, m.t<r^Cifft.mt, to be ashamed,
Irrif/M, to make to stand, to station, ^term/Aat, to stand {% 48). Km/mmi, to pat
tie sieip, nsifUfuu, to sle^. *0^iyt, to stretch out, i^iyofimt, to reach aftsr^

Digitized

by Google

356^ ITNTAX. — U8> or VOICES. [Boorm

henoe to detirt* UtSimt to penuade, irtH^fMi, to bditve^ <• «&ay. Ilt(aui0, to
carrif acro9$t ^t^iiafittit to go acrot, SrUXw, to fit otU^ to tend, o'riXX^ftmi,
to net out, to go, ^ciVm, to aftoWj ^/n^mm, to appear, — (2.) 'O^i^**, tobound^
i(i^9f*m*f to determme ; as, TltrafAi*, , . Ss *^/Ji< rn» *A^^i»i«f iv. 3. I ; 01 irXtr.
0'Tfi i(I^09ren TW$ tincytTmt imuraiw »pi^as iyatfieUtt %i*tti EL Gr vii. 3. 12.
2»c9-iMf to viewj to ob$ervej ^u^tU/mu, to contider ; as, 0/ X«;^A70i l«-»0«-Mrv, li
MO ri liJi T^v iSx^«v Xflif in* • . . mt^wft^Utt %\ tivroTf i3«^t «r»9Ta9'Artv MimXm'
r«y iTmu r« ;^*>^/«v v. 2. 20. 'A^cXXm, to cu^om, «^ftXX«/««M, to f^rtdle mm's Je(^
<I>^«^«», to to^ ^^mX»fMu, to tell ott^B self, to reflect. — (3.) UaXirtvm (from «-••
A/mf , citizen), to be a citizen, wXiriu»/*m, to conduct one** adf as a citizen, to
engage in police, to manage state affairs ; as, ^vymht i^ 'A^jwv, . . «r»XtTt»'
»pr» 9ttf uvTtTt [i. e. T0it 0»^ifti#i] H.Gr. i. 5. 19; 0/ fup wsXtrtvifMift h
ratf irar^/rt »a) pifi^vf rthvrat Mem* ii. I. 14.

§ SG 1* Remarks. 1. If the reflexiye action, is direct or prominent,
the reflexive pronoun is commonly employed ; more frequently with the actrra
voice (if in use), but often with the middle ; as, 'Ext79»$ itircr^c^y Uvr**, hs
slew himself, Dem. 127. 3. 0/ fitiv ^9i fimrtXia mXtu^mi ma Wtrtpi^imi morit
Kt/^y, M )t iauriv Wtr^al^nrfimt 1. 8. 29. '£«'/0-^X(rri^v «vr«v . • «««-•«
rxiMKXif \avrif Dem. 22. 13. *£«vr^ •i»0^« nai iv9m/u» wt^i^iwaHai T. 6.
17. AttXiycfri rt Xavrut, they talked with themselves, T. 4. 34 (cf. § 559).
Hiriri/Mirtr* tav 2t/ivv<ny ir^^f lauriv L 2. ^6 (cf. § 558). StwiyitMrfU «X*
XiiXMf lb. 27. See ^ 504.

2. The middle voice, by a transition of meaning, (a) often becomes hi iti
force the active of a new verb ; and (6) sometimes, like tiie active, supplies the
place of the passive (§ 656). Thus, — (a) Kfl<rr«, to stnite, niTTOfMu, to
smite one's self through grief hence to bewail; as, Ki^n^* 'AJientf Ar. Lys.
396. See §§ 558-560. — (*) *Awtix»9T« Inri r% rSt wtXtfutn nm) x*^*^
'were destroyed by,' v. 3. 3. *A»ovvfAat xmniu I shall be called a villain^
Soph. CEd. C. 988 (cf. § 556). OuSi r0urmf #rs(jfr«fr«4, th^shaUnoi [want]
be deprived of these, i. 4. 8.

8. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so indistinet, that it
may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the sense ; that is, the
active or the middle may be employed at pleasure; thus, AinJaMf i. I. 10.
'Htrovfittif fiartXim ii. 3. 19. IIoXv <pi^ott9. . . Mix^ov pt^o/iivtv Mem. iii. 14. I
IlfXtff yt fi,tv$C9 . . ^i^tf/r* (Ec i. 4. "Marfiif t9Vt$v ^i^m lb. 6. Zla^Xaye
fcit ^uftfika^tvf wunrta'h • . • ^iX«v ^rotnrofiit ro Hec^Xayiva V. 5. 22 (cf. lb
12, ^ 558). 0/ 0r^rt£rmt iiyi^»X»* '*'» i^irnium i. 5. 10 (cf. i. 3. 14, ^ 558)
ETnv Ihrt ^vo'ai rt ficukttrt. Kai cvsX^mv i^i/ir* vii. 2. 1 4. 'Err^^rf vr«f l«
iB««-iXl« ii. 6. 29. 'E**! ret &hXfo9 'A^r*ft^|ny la-T^mrt^re ii. 1. 1. — III
some verbs, the use of the mid. form is poetic, espedaHy Epic.

4. It follows naturally from the distinction between the two voices, that tlu
middle is more inclined to take its object in an ind&rect case than the activ^
thus, 01 ^\ fuXanti r^riXircyrif iXM^«^«i/» «vr«y Qyr. 1. 4. 8. *0 5tM» mim
rf iX§4io^tTr» lb. 9*

C. Passive.

§ «S G3. The passive voice has for its subject an ohfed
of the active.^ commonly (a.) a direct^ but sometimes (/J.) an
indirect object. Any other word governed by the active re-
mutitu unclianged with the passive. The subj£CT of th« ac-

Digitized

by Google

cH. 5 ] VASsmi. 857

TiVE is expressed, with the passive, by the Gen. vdfh a prrpesi*
tion (commonly vjio, but sometimes otno, ^|, tkxqu^ or tf^oc), or,
less frequently, by the simple Gen, or Dat. (^§ 581, 417), or,
yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry, especially Ep.), by the Bat.
with vno. Thus,

«. Hi(ttfft7r§ y murh viri r«v M«r»«, and U was ntrrounded hy the Maaeai
[aaa Jltfti^^u ) * aMi* • M«#»««, and the Maacae eurrounded it], i. 5. 4. Ov-
Vtm »^/»*r iwi wXttifmt *iftXnfffi»h I judge that ao one ha$ been hved hy tnorf
[■M K^/f « rXiitvf n^nxiy*! gtiiivm, I judge that more have loved no one}, L 9.
28. E/ ^rnXmrnif ilfynv, if they ihould be excluded from the sea, H. Gr. viL
1. 8 (§ 347). TSt r ;«vs«» ; X^^ luitk4<rfin i. 10. 12 (§ 357). *H|iW . .
Za^tat «/ r»vraf ci^f itiXut i. 1. 8 (^ 404. T), Mtfvrix^v /c)y vir« Aeifiirf»it
^rmhvhit, having been taught music by Lamprus PI. Menex. 236 a (§ 436).
'E^ i«'i40'/ir» ri rmvra &^i rw Qyr. v. ft. 16. Si/Xn/i); )^a^ 'H^«t»X?; T»f
^»i/f . . uwl NnXiA^f, y^ Herctdes having been robbed of his June by Neleus,
Isocr. 1 19 d. T/ ^r« . . «t/ »«) rv rvKrru rat tff»t vXttyA^ 2^«i, tcAy Men art
not you beaten the same number of blows with me, Ar. Ban. 635 (v 435). T«#»
»VT0¥ TfitifMt rifAnrett ri TtT/infitM*, »J09 ri riftvav rifivu, the thing cut is cut
such a cut as the cutter cuts, PI. Grorg. 476 d. T* fnymXtt [sc. fMffrn^ttc.] fit'
fiuti^mi, ^fit T« 0fin»^mj you have been initiated into the greater mysteries be
fore the less, lb. 497 c 'AxXoi rt yvSftett k^* Ixdrrmt ixiyotro Th. iii. 36.
*£« fim0iXia^ it^fitUmt i. 1. 6. Ildt^* ^reitratt ifiaX»y»trcu i. 9. I. *Oft«X«-
yurmt w^is wtitrttD lb. 20. *Tir^ wiXtm rtrnyfiMi, H v«r§ rtv )i7r/ci 4 &XX^
rm avmyxif xanx*/^*** ii* 6. 13. Tlit vtri rf irmrft r%i^afifM9»St 'brought
Up [under] by hU father/ PI. Rep. 558 d.

/3. 'KMTt^^»9ninv V9r murMv, I was despised by them [=» Kurt^^otn^iiriiv /fv^
they despised me], PI. Euthyd. 273 c $ 375). T« n^rtif ti^ovm, . . K(»r07vT
i» &^i rw 'E^trts Id. Conv. 196 c (^ 350). *Ari«-c«vvT«i V up* atrdnrvv
niX««'«yyif#Mwy, and they are dUstmsted by all Ike Pdoponnesians [= 0/ Ik Ilc-
XPWvwnftM £v§ttT%t m^t0rtv0t9 mhriiii], Isocr. 92 a (§ 406). 0/ rSif 'AJnvetittf
Wtrtr^ftfiifM rh* ^vX»»ti9, those of the Athenians who had been intrusted with
the guard [= ajg n ^vXMMn iirtrirfm^r*, to whom the guard had been intrustecTly
Th. L 126. 0/ Rtf^iV/M rmvrm Wt0r»Xf»>Uot, the Corinthians having received
these directions. Id. v. 37.

^ t(63* Remabks. 1. When the active has more than one object, it
U commonly determined which shall be the subject of the passive by one or
the other of the following preferences ; — (a) The passive prefers, as its sub-
ject, a direct to an indirect object of the active. — (6) The passive prefers, as
its subject, the name of a person to that of a thing, — If these preferences con
flict» sometimes the one prevails, and sometimes the other. The latter prefer^
ence often leads to construction by synecdoche (§ 438) ; thus, 'AirtTfin^itru
rkt Mt^XMf, cut off as to tiieir heads [= 'AvroTfiti^tirHf rSt xnpaXtiv, their
heads being cutoff], ii. 6. 1 (cf. Ku^ou l^trifAvirat ^ nKpmXn i. 10. 1). Ai:
^x^fAtvM . . T0Vf i^frnXfASve [='''Ex»9rn rout i^fiaXfjtwt %a^0tt^f/%f»ot] iv. 5«
12. T« Zrm TiTfvwnftMf, having his ears bored, iii. I. 31.

§ SO 4* 2. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middle rather
than of the active ; and hence deponents may have a passive. Thus, Mir^«r.
0nfmt % sU M rsvTf l^«r«f, * that they had not been hired,' L 3. 1 (4 559. d).
Sti^dMMf $i tl^ymefiiff, corselets weB made, Mem. iiL 10. 9 (cf. *Afi^tdfr«s
SMXm tlfysiefUssp, 'havfiig made,' lb. ii. 6. 6). 'Bfyme0iiesrms, U thaO 6$

Digitized

by Google

8&S SYNTAX OF THB VBftB. [bOOK in

ptrfomud^ Soph. Tr. 1218. 'Ewvii^n li fyu, and wool wot bought, Mem. it 7
12 (> 301. 8). Ti »uaif Th. ui. 38. *il« fit»lifuu r^h Soph. Ant. 66. —
This passive occurs chiefly in the Ferf», Plup., and Aor,

3. If an active or middle which has no object is changed to a passive, U
becomes, of cour$e, impbrsonal (§ 546. «e) ; and it may become so, with an
indirect object. Thus, 'Trq^xr*, a beginning had been made [= *T«'^^«9, they
had begun\^ Th. i. 93. 'E**!/^ auTMt wtt^tvntuMrT*^ when preparation haa
been made bg them [■■ *£«'ii^ ra^irxiiwr^ivM iFr«y, when theg had made prepa^
ration], lb. 46. K«X«« if 01 A^nnUftT* [» Jif ^rixlx^*] 1 FPbiiic/ [it hare
been answered well by you] gour amwer have been a good onef PL Goiig.
458 d.

III. Use of the Tenses.

^ «S6S« A general view of the distinctive offices of the
Greek tenses, particularly as employed in the Indicative, has
already been presented (§§ 167, 168). In explanation and
completion of that view, it is essential to observe,

I. That, out of the Ind.^ the lenses, except the JW., have
no direct reference to a distinction of time, but simply to the
RELATION or STATE of the action as indefinite^ definite^ or
complete^ or, in other words, as doings done^ or having been
done (§ 168).

Hence^ if we omit the Fat., each of the three states or relations has bnt a
gingle tenee-form out of the Ind. This form, as it maito the distinction of
time only occasionally and indirectly, may be termed achronic («., not, x^^'
nit, relating to time) ; while the forms of the Ind,, as they properly and directly
mark this distinction (thongh sometimes used ackronicaUy), may be termed
chronic. The time of an action expressed by an achronic tense must be in-
ferred from the connection. Thus (the star denoting that a form is wanting)^

SuBj* Opt. Imp. Imp. Past.

^^^K^iTy^^ffi AchrmiCy AduomiflL A^brff^iffi Achrooiflb

AdiropfflL Aduooio^ Aduooio^ Achronic^ Admaiob

• Future^ • Fntoie, Fotnrt.

Achronic^ Achronic, Achronic^ Achronic, Achronia

• Future, * Future, Future.

§ ff 66. II. The use of generic forms for specific {% 330)
has a peculiar prominence in the doctrine of the Greek tenses.

Digitized

by Google

eH. 5.] V8B OF TENSES.

BsicABKS. «. The Prbs^ in its widest generic sense, includes all the other
tmuea (see /3) ; as a definite tense nseii achr<micaUy (§ 565), it includes the
Imjpf, The Impf^ in its widest generic sense, includes all the past tenses
(§ 1 73) ; and the Aor., all the indefinite and complete tenses. The Pbbf., as a
generic tense, includes the Plup.

fi. The distinction of generic and specific belongs not merely to grammaticai
forms, but also to the ideas which these forms represent. Thus the idea of
PRESENT TIME, which applies specifically only to the passing moment, extends
in its generic application to any period including this moment ; and we speak
of the present months the present century ^ &c. In its widest extent, therefore,
it includes aU time. Hence general truths, existing states and habits, and oft-
recurring factSy belong appropriately to the present time.

§ t5C7. III. The relations of time have nothing sensible
to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges therefore with
freedom through all time, the past, the present, and the future ;
and, without difficulty, conceives of the past or future as
present, and even of the present or future as already past.
That the Greek language should have a peculiar freedom in
the interchange of tenses, is but the natural consequence of
the wonderful vivacity of the Greek mind. See §§ 330. 3,
576, 584, 585.

Rebcab's. «. The Pres. tense, when employed by the figure of owMm, in
speaking of past events, is termed the historic pbesemt. See § 576.

fi. Common facts, imagined scenes, and general assertions, not being oon-
fined to any particular time, may often be expressed in the present, past, or
ftiture, according to the view which the speaker chooses to take. £. g. we
may say, " The wisest often err," or " The wisest have often erred," or " The
wisest will oftm err." Thus, *H m^» ^«^ ivra^m viiZ*'* ^mu *i ^ itral^ia
iraXX«w ^ iiwXttXtxi9t for good order seems to preserve^ but disorder
has already destroyed many, iii. 1. 38. Oviiw irn xt^iecXttiTt^tv rau m«^» •
i ykf m^mrSv dfm wtivTM rw/n^^cmxt Cyr. iv. 2. 26. *H ^ '^vx^', • •
ii^aXXmrrsfiivfi t$v rttfutrtt, th$vt hmirtpva'fiTai **i a^iXttXt* PL Phsedo,
80 C K^«ri7 ^ /Mf;^fliv«7f JtyfciuXau dtf^tf; i^tffrtQAret, XA0'/«v;^iy« S-' ?«**-«»
v«'«^ir«i Soph. Ant. 348. "Air«^«; i«^ suih f^;^ir«i ri ftiXX^v * "Ajiat fii-
f«» ^tu^9 »vm Wti^trat lb. 360. *Ev waXXtiif ftlv, i Af}^«vr«i, ^oXu ^iffTdi^
r«f %ufn09fA%t Tstf r% tZv r^raviaiatp yvtifiect xcti rkt rSif ^xvXstv itavaiat * traXh
^l fAiyUrn* hti^sfmf tiXn^Affn U valg ir^U itXXfiXtvt 9^vvfihicu(. Oi fiU ya^
fiXsvt irdc^«vr«ef fiifov rt/Uig-iv, «/ Si »«} fitax^mv airifTxs aymirZvt * xai rets f*9
tSv ^mvXatf 0vmi*mt Ixiyt Xi^^^ ^uXuvi^ rets il rm riraoieiiatv (PsXixf s»i'
it i itat «Mvy lZmXi'i'4'M9 Isocr. 2 a'. See §§ 575-578.

Note. The use of the Aor. by Homer in comparisons is particularly fre*
qnent ; as, 'H^i^ri V, is •» rt$ l(vt ^^iv'tv 11. 482, cf. F. 33, &c. See alsft
§ 575. 2.

y. A past tense may be used, in speaking of that whu h is present, with ref^
srenee to some past opinion, feding, remark, action, or obligation ; thus, Kvtr^tt
six M{ fw Si0f , Venus was not then merely a goddess (as we supposed her to
be), Eur. Hipp. 359. ^A^* su rSit j(» r« SiyS(«», l^' strtf $ytt hpMs \ t*l. Phsedr.
230 m. AiM^t($ZfU9 ixttvs xm* XmCn^ifM^x, i r^ /mIv hx»tf fiiXflav iyiyurt,
Cf Kk iHix^ k^tixXursy we shnU corrupt and injurs that, which (as we said) "ts

Digitized by VjOOQIC

S60 gniTAJU — USE OF TCNSE8. [bOOK Ul

'm^proimibf JusHoe, and nAied by injudiee, PI. Crito, 47 d. Ifvw r' UUwit
«; rr^nf^«} rt^M Ar. Ach. 1073. 'nfcAi /mI» Kv^'^ Ipp, [Cyras oo^t to
be living] Would that (^ru» were hvmg I iL 1.4. Ov» ix^h ^Utm r»M^» »
JSu/ ought you not to be congktermg t ApoL 3. Cf., in English, the familiw
use of oughtt the Imp£ of owe^ as a Pres.

§ «5C8. IV. The tense may vary according as an action
IS viewed in its relation to the present time^ or to the time of
another action^ either past or Juture, The tense of an Inf.
or Part, is commonly determined by its connection with anoth-
er verb, without regard to the present time. In the Jnd., the
tense is properly determined by the relation of the action to
the present time ; but in Greek, if the Ind. is dependent upon
another verb, its tense is often determined by the time of that
verb, particularly in indirect quotation. In the Sabj. and Opt,
modes, from their very nature, there is commonly a union of
the two considerations. Thus,

*Tfri#;^ir« itvi^t i»d^r^ ^ivri/v, he promued to give each mum (the giving
future at the time of the promise ^ i. 4. 13. 'Extf* U'Xirmf »tiCn r^m**.
0-itvs, he went up, having (at the time of his going up) three hundred ht^ptiteM,
1. 1.2. 'AyiVracvr* . . X(|«yrif & iyiyvtu^Kot, they rose to say (future at the
time of the rising) what they thougfit (past at t&e time of the narration), L 3.
13. Jli^TtvfiU »Xfih»^»i9t A IXiyif, Wn^Ki vii. 7. 25. ETfri . ., rr^ttrnyvt
uu \>.iff6au &kk9Vt is r«;^/rr«, fj fth ^ovXtrnt KXfa^;^0s iv^iyuv • . . ny*f»s$u
«/ti7v KtJ^tfy, avTtt . • a^K^tiy recommended^ that they should immediately choose
other genercUsy if Qearchus [is] was unwilling to lead them ; thai they ^umld
ash G/rus for a guide, who [will umuld conduct them bach, i. 3. 14. Tmc ft
vV0ypiei ftU h, on ayu ir^oi ^KfftXiat, and they htid indeed a nurpctON, that he
was leacUng them against tlte hing, i. 3. 21. '£^«tf^ae«-f, rif ^-a^myyiXku i. 8.
16. 'EvtfuktTro, S r$ irot^g-u ^ufftXivt lb. 21.

RxMARK. An iNFiinnvE, denoting an action which must be future, from
the very nature of the governing word, often employs the FuL, but far more
frequently the appropriate dchronic tense ; thus, Ivfi^^ciliin innrx^iTr* • Uf7r«
ft rat KtafAat fih mtiiu* vii. 7. 19. 'T«'ir;^v«i*T«M v^»ivfAirt^»f ttitTotf rvfr^m
Ttviffim lb. 31. "M-tftynrfat vtnffx^**^^* ^^^' 6* ^^' 'Tfri#;^sr« fut ^ovktu
9urim4^ i^Ufeu tt fti i/fnis UiXivrtv ii. 3. 20. See § 583.

A. Definite and Indefinite.

^ «S69. The indefinite and the definite tenses are
thus distinguished. The former represent an action simply as
performed ; the latter represent it definitely as performing.
The former merely express that an action has been, is, or will
oe performed ; the latter present a picture of the action in the
course of its performance. The former take a single glance
at it, as one complete act conceived of as momentary ; the
latter observe its progress, as begun and going forward by con-
tinued or repeated effort, but not yet complete.

If action is conceived of as motion in a ttrdight lin&, the definite tensee vij

Digitized

by Google

CB. 5.] DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 361

be said to present a tide view of this line, so that it if seen m it§ fiiU lengthi
but the indefinite tenses to present onlj an eiui view of it, so that it appears la
a Mere pomt. Thns,

Definite Yiew. Indefinite View.

( ) ( • )

^ S70* Hence an action is represented,

a.) By the definite tenses, as continued or y olonged; but
by the Aor., as momentary or transient. Thus,

iTr** #/ am'^jrmj lr^mwnT4m Km) «/ ^iv wiXTa^rm) tvPvt tlvtvro htixavrtt. The
barbariame then received the targeteert (momentaiy) and fought with them (con-
tinned) ; but when now ffte hopHtee were near, they turned to flight (momentary).
And the targeteert immediately followed pursmng them (continued), v. 4. 24.
"Urn 4 - • hfux'tt* tx^t «l • • ^^vX««r«f X»i^^ Dem. 45. 2. AtMkiytv, *ai
fidit w^Sim Tint i/r/t, coMveree with them, and learn first who they are, iv.
8. 5. ''Enniikf JtwMVTM kntve^uTt, K^l^an, ttmi fih w^irt^ov ir(«X«^C«vin
Dem. 44. 2. Agiiitmi «i Tttvrtts rkt iriXuf /(e«XX«*« H Tirra^i^vuv &^x*** *^'
rm i. I. 8. A«CMi, AooM^ toAen (momenta^). ''£;^i»», Aawt^ (continued),
L I. 2.

Notes. I. Any dwelling c^ the mind upon the agent, mode, or ctrcMin-
tUmces of an action, and any attempt at graf)liic description, commonly lead to
the use of the definite tentes; thus, *A«'ix(/vavT« ( KXia^;^*^ }* iktyt*), they an'
$wered{and Qearchue waa the tpeaher), ii. 3. 21 (cf. ii. 5. 39 ; iii. 3. 3). "Exi^i
Stf*^, fi(f*fif*»* Ii TifAn^iiut y. 4. 4. See § 576.

2. In the Imperattvk, the momentery character of the Aon. is peculiarly
favorable to vivacity, energy, and eamettnete of expression ; tlius, 2h avv wfis
^Sv rv^C«^Xfi/r«v nftXv u. 1. 17. *A«0i;r«ri tut fMV w^if B-tHf V. 7. 5
"Bki'^Ptv,** i<pny "^^is TM S^n, ««) 7)i «; HCmrn wi^rm, Uri" iv. 1. 20.

§ tS7 1 • b.) By the definite tenses, as a habit or continued
coturse of conduct ; but by the Aor., as a single act. Thus,

*E«^} Xi i7)«v nbriv, §Sirt( 9'(ir0tf w^o^ixvfout, »m) rirt w^»^*»tnnem.f, cm/
when those saw him who were bejbre in the habit of prostrating themselves before
him, they prostrated themselves even then, i. 6. 10. Atitp^uftf yxf ^^ivtifrtt
Tthf ^T^arutratt, nml tva yt Xa^^yif %ii<piu^af iii. 3. 5. ^'Orrif V m<pt»ftTT»
. . 9'(»s aturif, vdvmt aSrv ^taniuf ivtviftVtTs i. 1.5. TloXX£»t( UfTif iv)
rkf B^vfat it^tfirav*, 'O % \>.vtittt >.*yttt ^tnyt i. 2. 11. '^r^auin ^\ avhtis
lx«Civ • M %\ im^xfTU tSv Iwriatv ra^v in'avatra i. 5. 3, — Hence the great
use of the definite tenses in the description of character. See Auab. i. ch. 9 ;
iL ch. 6.

§ S79. c.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time
q/*, or until anotlier action ; but by the Aor., simply as done in
its own time. Thus,

T«VT^ rf Tfiir^ l«'0(i^f»r«v ^ratifUut rirrat^at. 'Hf/ita Tlk raw vifiwra*
Wa^vatra, iHav fiet^iktiat r$. In this way, they made four day* s-mareltes. And
mkUe thq^ were making the fifth, they saw a palace, %. 4. 23. 'A^'Urum* rv-

Digitized by VjOOQIC

S0i SniTAX. — T78B OF TBUVES. [bOOjC HI.

^<ibiy low, ▼. 4. 16. T^mt iiviXtMt liJt^»Xi|fci «j^ vt^t rt tvmbmm
jMti T^v ^Kn^w Cyr. v. I. 2. TA^rnv «^v SxiXii/nv • K£i^ di«^#X«<'«'«i»
r«> 'A^Mr**!!!, ^A^f iSy murit XiCCii lb. 3.

§ S73« d*) ^y ^^^ definite tenses, as ^^rK'^ aUempted^ or
designed (doing, not done) ; but by the Aor., as accomplished
(done). Thus,

virrirai fittirm^iat. Clearchus attempted to force kU aoUiers to proceed; bmt thetf
began to atone him. He then narrowfy mcaped behg atoned to death (the com-
pletion of the act of tftonuig) ; and a/terwardM, when he became com^need thai
he ehduld not be able to prevail bgf force (to aooomplish his attempt), i. 3. I.
"Oirm 9f9 iyinf* vtit •vrtrl, . . wt^s rtSni/uurt ^ 'vrctVfv \>.§t%$^»vfA*im. *H
/tiX* yk^ 19'9'tf ^^•0triiu ir^Af rMf9»f*m, . . iyv ^ rtv wtivartv 'TsHfiun €>«•-
}«y/^itv. . . Tf x^itif MMffi IwiCfi/uvj »«/i^i/a ^ii^iw'iri^if v. Wlkemthu
mm wa$ bom to uSj thereupon we began io quarrel about the name, F&r jAc
immtted on tacking Wwh to hie name, and I wa$ for gimng him hie grand*
fath»^$ name, Phidonidee, At last we made a compromiae, emd named A«m Phi*
d^ppidea, Ar. Nub. 60. "Or S(^C«XX«v rtlt ^uut, wheni waafar axpeUang the
goda, lb. 1477. *£»«/v«^ii» |/^m • «xx' t^Uxt-^tf . . " A^rt fut Eur. Iph. T.-86.
*VLn»f*i9Mri tittM ^ttrim^ Hdt. i. 69.

NoTBS. «. Hence the definite toises wtt often naed with a Degativv 1
the attempt as well as the aecompUthment of an aetioB ; thus, 1SJXim^j0af aim
. ^nCX»Zt9 In'i rif Xi^tf, Clearchus did mot wukrtahe to march Mpon Ike MB, t.
10. 14. Ht9»^Sf rti/s fth wtXraa'Tat «i» Sy tf m, 4. 39. 'E«^ 2t tti^h am
rtXiyfv, iTriv iii. 2. 38. 'E**!} TH tuSit «^iXi/Mv fXiytt, ifStrat rtS iTa^n mm*
vtr^ayn, *0 Hi Xatwit fXi|i». And whan he would sag nothing uaefui^ he mua
put to deaA in the eight of the o&ur. But the second aaid, hr. 1. 23.

fi. A person is often spoken of as having done what he haa attempted to do;
thuS) MEN. Aa(«i« ykf vavi* turv^Uf »Ttifatru fu i TETK. K«'i/v«vrai
Ai<f«y y tJm'atf u nm) ^^f ^awf, MEN. 0««f yk^ ix«w^M /a, ^y^ ^' alf^fam.
Men. For ia it right that he should p-osper, having slain mef Tenc Having
Jain you 9 You tell a wonder, indeed, if, being dead, you are yet aiioe. Men.
For kedoen preaervea me, but, ao far aa lay in him, I am no more. Soph. AJ.
1126 (§ 410). 2i^y •<^tf;^«v nm'iCaXw, rinam- Urnni a ixaavm Eur. loB,
1498.

§S74. e.) By the definite tenses, as introductory; but
by the Aor., as conclusive. Thus,

01 Hftirmt K«lf «y • . . i 2* A^ixfimre, who naked Cyrus ; and he i
L 3. 20 (cL *A^»u9 ' . . m9ayyt7)iMi lb. 19}. 'Antvanvrts ravrn \wtii§9T§ naJl
XiCffr«» L 4. 1 6. 0/ "ExXifvi; \UvXiv»9V • m) k*$n^im»Ts IL 3. 21.

Note. Verbs of asking, inquiring, commantRngf forbidding, ddSberaiimg^ «*-
tamptingy endeavouring, besieging, wounding, and some others, are introdnctoiy
hi their very nature, aad hence incline to the use of the definite tenses ; tho^
Ti JiT Murit alnTv, na) »u XmCuf ix^ivrm i Why muat he ask for them (whioh
of itself accomplishes nothing), and not come and take thorn (which ia tnal} t
ii. 1. 10. 2oXXil»f ar^dlhvfiui, U^Xti^Mi M/Ahtm »«) nmri yn» mvi ms^

Digitized

by Google

tm. 5. j 4»FIMTB AHi) INDBFINME^ 4983

«cT«WT^r»«y, 4MU iK^r«ra|« r*rf *£XAiiiiMr UL 4. 26.

§ S7S« Remabks. I. As the Aor. is aa achronic tense, except in
the Ind. (§ 565), it is in this mode only that the Pres. indefinite is wanting
(§ 168. «). It is oommooly soppUed by the Pre$, definite^ bat sometimes by
the Aor. or Paf. See Rebi. 2, and §§ 233, 577, 578.

2. The AoB. in the Ind, is properly a pcmt tense ; bat, fh)m the want of the
Pret. indefinite^ it often sappUes the place of this t^ise, or is used achronically.
In these uses, it differs from the Pres. definite, in representhig the action either
more timpfy or «tn^y, or with a certain expression of nutantaneousnees, energy,
deeinoenus, or cmnfUeteness. *Atr^^ V Srmp r»tt l»)«v «E;^^nr«i |(/Mk>*, l^« fA»\mf
tirmve't nm^ymv io-tUj and when a num becomes weary of the society of those at home,
going cAroad he relieves his heart at once of its disgust, Ear. Med. 244. K«}
veivs y«f itrm^iltrm w^h fiiav waVi iCa^^iw, tvrn V auPtSt n» X"'^^ w»ha, Id. Or,
706. *0«wv y In wXttfi^utf ntti *6tti^i»t rsff Sv^t^ oSros, Itry^v^t n 9^mrn
w^^Mftt »mi fUMfiv ^reit^/ui i^nvrn «N;^aiVirt nn) )if JL0riv, ' instantly toSSes
off and dissipates,* Dera. 20. 25. T«;^tf Jiriv PL Bep. 406 d. 'Etritvir t^n,
I fulhf approve the act. Soph. Aj. 536. 2m raurm . . irm^jft^a Id. Phil. 1433
"Si . . iT<r«v rMt ynt tit •'i^fv, ' I bid yoa peremptorily,' Eur. Med. 271.
*CUf»^fyk %* «r«» l(7«* t^*^ \fyaffti$9 lb. 791. 'A«'i«'rtf0'« tmav^c ffoyyUtmf
kXXiXtn win^t Id. Ipfa. A. 509. *H#Arv ikWuXtut, lyiXx^a ^tXtnoiAwicnu
kwtwvin^trm, ftiimni^ wtfstninnvruy I enjoy your threats, I laugh at your boasts
ings of smoke, &C., Ar. Eq. 696. *E2t$«^Birv ri fn^if, I wdcome the omen, &ojgh»
EL 668.

§ tS 7 O* 3. The Greek has the pewer of giving to narration a wonder*
lul variety, liib, and eneiigy, from iha freedom with which it can employ and
Intavdiange the Aor., Impf., and Histerioal Pres. Withooi drcumlocation, it
€an represent an action as oontinaed or momentary ; as attempted or accom-
plished ; as introductory or conclusive. It can at pleasure retard or quicken
the progress of the narrative, k can give to it -dramatic life and reality by
exhibiting an action as doing, or epic vivacity and eueigy by dismissing it aa
done. It can bring a scene ibrward into the strong light of the present, and
instantly send it back again into the ahade of the past. The variety, vivaci-
ty, and dramatic life of Greek narrative can be preserved but very imperfediy
in translation, from the fiict that the English has no definite tenses, except by
cjroomlecutwii, and has far len frteedom than the Greek in oniting.the past
and present tenses. Thus, *£«^ K nai ivmu^* \x»^»fn tl^^xxiint, Xiiw»¥9t
^ x«) rn Xi^§9 ti twirug • sv fa^9 in iti^ioi, ^XX* iXXt &XX»itt • l^piXwr* V
i Xi^s rSf lirwui9 • riXt ^ ms) ^nvrit i^i;^«^ffr«v. *0 aZf KXut^x*^ ^^
JinCXmi»9 Iff) r49 Xifev, «XX* v«r« ahriv 0rnr»t rl ev^artv/*a, w'tfAWU AvM*e9
riv 2vfMxotrut umi iXXcv M rif Xi^tf, »m} niXttnt, nmriiwrns rk 0«ri^ r»v Xi-
f0v, ri l#ri», k^nyytTXm, Km) i Avxm« ^Xjtrc ri, xai liin n^nyyiXXu, Irt
^luytvrif Jttk n^krtf. 2;^f^ V in ravra ^v, »n) liXttf i^utra* *Eyr«v^ V
t^Tn^up •* ^XXnnt, nni §i/*t9ei Ttk SwXa ku^avavr* • ntii tifMi ftiv UmufAnl^af,
%rt tii^MfUS KjS(0( fnitatrt, 0vV &XX»t k^ mvrtv tvitif va^dn i. 10. 13— 16«
See iiL 4. 25 -27, 38, 39; L8.23-27; iv. 7.10-14; v. 4. 16,17; vi. !•
i-13.

4. Therelsno precise Hne of division between tiie offices of the defieite and
Indeffnlte tmsat. In somecaees it seems to be indiffiftrent which are empk^yed.
And the defaite tenses, as the generie ^fin-ms (§ 666. «), often occur, where the
iiidollHile wottW seem to be more strictly appropriate. The nse of the ImpC
Ibr the Aor. ooews especially in Hom. and Hdt.

Digitized

by Google

864 SYNTAX. — USE OF TENSES. [bOOK m

5. In verbs in which the Aor. was not fbrmed, or was formed with a differ
ent signification, the Impf. remained as both the definite and indefinite past
tense ; as iTv and i^n* (^^ 53, 55, § 301. 7), wliich are more frequently used
as. Aor.

B. Indefinite and Complete.

§S77« I. The indefinite and the complete tenses are
thus distinguished. The former represent an action as per
formed in the time contemplated ; the latter represent it as, m
the time contemplated^ having already been performed. In the
former, the view is directed to the action simply ; in the latter,
it is specially directed to the completion of the action, and to
tlie state consequent upon its performance. Hence arise two
special uses of the complete tenses ; the one to mark emphat-
ically the entire completion or the termination of an action;
and the other, to express the continuance of the effects of ao
action. Thus,

Tiatvrat ^|y «'i«'«i«i«i. Much titmgi hat he done (and is now upon trial for),
I. 6. 9. '^friir atayxti^ti wmXtv l^i^iTv £tt xv »t»X»<ptfi ftttv, * whatever
they may have stolen from me (and may have in their possession)/ Ar. Eq«
1147. ^X^0v •/ 'Iv^M i» r«v wtXtfiit^v, tSg iwtcrift^u Kv(§g itri ma^m^**^^
■»mi IXiytfv, ATI K^«rr«f ftlv nytfulnt . . ^^tifitivas i<n TaJ* .ir^Xtftif* • ^f )«7/»s»«v
y t7ti itSivi rt7( ^vfAfjMX*** • • ^et^Matt • • . irctrtf/u^ivAi T% K^«r<rv* «c) tU A»
»iieiifAaf» wtf) l^vfifAec^saf Cyr. vi. 2. 9. Tltfi ftlv «vv rSf thtatf vttvrm fct v^-
%t^vfit • «'i^) %\ TU¥ MMvUf . . , Met these things have been premised/ Isocr.
43 d. 'Cl^i^ia^ vfjuiv n fi^aivrnt • vifv ^ . . jStu/ifrari, let your thiggitknesM ham
reached itsfuU limits ; and do you now aseistf Th. i. 71. Tavra ^i» «?», Z E»-
iuinfAt ri tteii Asavoaraifft, w%9rati«^4t* t% VftTp, »eu Iwf ixavSg tx** * r« )) ^ /u-
rit ravTo, l«'/^i/|«r«i« PI. Euthyd. 278 d. Awu^yiffiea %n nfuv »m,) mum . . n
wXtrilm, Id. Rep. 552 e. litvu^^iat^ pet it have been tried] let a trial be
made^ Ar. Yesp. 1 1 29. 'E^^^vrif oi %Wm TWf ^v^»f xixXi rr^«M, emd going oarf
they commanded the door [to be closed and to remain so] to 6e k^ daeedf H.
Gr. v. 4. 7.

^ O # 8« Remabks. «. The consequences of an action are nsnaSy
more obvious and niore permanent in that which is acted upon, than in that
which acts. The receiver feels the blow more deeply and longer than the giv-
er. We find here a reason why the complete tenses are used so much more in
the passive than in the active, and why, in the active, so many verba waot
them altogether (§§ 256, 580).

fi. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the consequences of an
action, rather than to narrate the action, they naturally occur more fineqnenUy
in the Part, than in the other modes. Some modem languages, aa the £n^
lish, the French, the German, have no pass, form by inflection, except tha
Perf. Part

y. For the same reason, the transition in § 233 is natural and easy. Wa
iubjoin an example, which marks strikingly the distinction between the Pert
nsed as a Pres. and the Aor. ; Ti^tanp ai ^aififnt, those who ham died (leftr*
, ring to the past event) are dead (referring to the present state oonseqiMi
the event), Eur. Ale 541 (but. 0»v^»«. / am dying, lb. 284).

Digitized by VjOOQIC

on. 5.] INDEFINITE AND [COMPLETE. — FimTRB. 365

}. In the Epic, the use of the Flap, as Impf. or Aor. is more extended than
in the Attic, and has perhaps some connection with the usage in § 194. 3«
Thus, BiCifxM, went, A. 221. BiCXi{«fi £. 66.

^ S T 9* I. The Perf. is sometimes called a past, and sometimes a
present tense ; and neither without reason, since it marks the relation of a past
action to the present time. The action which it denotes is past ; bat the state
consequent^ to wliich it also refers, is present. The tense is therefore in its
time, as in many languages in its form, compound, having both a past and a
present element. The comparative prominence of these elements varies in dif-
ferent languages, in different words in the same language, and in different uses
of the same word. We remark, in general, that the present eiement has a far
greater prominence in the Greek tlian in the English Perf.

Z. An action is sometimes so regarded as continued in its effect, that the
Free, supplies the place of the Perf. This is the common use of the Pres. in
Hicv, to come, and »7x»fimt, to go (cf., in Eng., / am come, and / am gone) ; and
is not unfrequent in «»«i/« and »Xva0, to hear, ftttfiatt, to learn, nnmat, to con^
quer, and some other verbs. In these verbs, the Imp/, may supply the place
of the Fltq>. Thus, Eit »«X«v i|f««ri, you [come] have come opportunely, iv. 7.
8. K^Mf ^ »5*t iTjttv, and Cyrus had not yet come, i. 5. 12. OSrt kv»i%i^ti»
M&^tf, atim yk^ Z^n »7;^$frMt, * whither they have gone,* i. 4. 8. *SU n/*t7s
A»«v«yi*iv, as we [hearj have heard, v. 5. 8. "A^n /laf^dft Eur. Bac 1297*
Nix^^iv n fimwtXim ii. 1. 4.

^tS80« II. Unless the attention is specially directed to
the effect of an action, the generic Aor. more frequently sup-
plies the place of the specific Perf. and Plup. (§ 566. a), as a
more familiar, giore vivacious, and often a shorter or more
euphonic form. This use prevails especially in the active
voice (§ 578. a). The Aor. of)en occurs in immediate con*
nection with the Perf. or Plup. Thus,

*E^* f [»^vi|l Xiytvtu Mliag rif Isirv^ts Strfivr«4, sfvf ntfd^Mf mM», at
whidi [fountain] Midas is said to hone caught the Satyr, having mixed it with
wine i. 2. 13. Tavthv rn» iriXtv iJ^iXtrn'tv §1 l»M»«»vrif, this city its inhabitants
had left, lb. 24. Kanr} ^ QtrruXtis . . t/SMf^nri , and now it has aided the Thes-
9atiams, Dem. 22. 7. Ttmvra wtttin nui ^t^x"^* Aovtnj^ suffered and suffering
mtch things. Id. 576. 18. 'Am'M^mnirts vatri^mt nmi finri^mf, •! h net} rixfm
umreiXt^ifTU vi. 4. 8. Titneri^tvf Wt^ainnt, »ai wXXavt nttiutavf vv'tfitivuf
Mynm^i, xttl 9'fH rtvt "ExXnvttt h»€iCXn»s Isocr. 1 63 a. Ovx i is'ntfA/nift
siV i fAi^iftnirms rk ^tntiim Xiytsf Dem. 576. 22. 2TP. "hu /At hluliyi, Ztir%^
etnn' iXnXuim. 20. VOjJsf ^ nark ri i Ar. Nub. 238.

KoTB. Hie use of the Aor. for the Pert b especially common in the ParU

C FuTimE.

§ ff 8 1 • . I. The dim, shadowy future has little occasion
for precise forms to mark the state of the action. It is com-
monly enough to mark the action simply as future. Hence
the inflection of most verbs has but a single Put., the indefi*
mile ; leaving the definite and complete Futures^ if they require
81» r- T

digitized by VjOOQIC

366 tnf TAX. — usK op tenses. [boos m

to be distinguished fipom this, to be expressed by a ParticipL
and substantive verb ; as,

S»i7^ar i\u,^»»vvm f^t lrr«i rl X«<«'i», Scyroi thall hereafUr content me (ooiitin»
ned. § 570) Soph. Ph 459 T»;,r Urm f^ixn Id. (Ed. C. 653. 'A^^ mm
rmuKvifrtf frtWs, yoM wiU have uatH «* Man, viL 6. 36. Tk Imftc WifuSm
ly9§t»i<nsj MM XJyttp ffrmutv tUrnXXmyfAiut Dem. 54. 22.

^S89« II. The Future Perfect expresses the sense of
the Perf. with a change of the time ; that is, it repreeents the
state consequent upon the completion of an action as fiituro
As it carries the mind at once over the act itself to its com-
pletion €md results, it is sometimes used to express a future
action as immediate^ rapid^ or decisive^ and hence received its
old name of paulo-post-Juiure (pauk) post futurus, abotU to be
a little after). In verbs in which the Perf. becomes a new
Pres., the Fut Perf. becomes a new Fut. (§^233,239).
Thus,

*Hii li fiii yivtirtUf fUtrnt 1^ »t»XMvrtTMtf but if there thould not be^ 1 1
hiwe wept m vaan, Ar. Nub. 1435 (4 564. 3). OMs • • f^tvtyy^m^nnrmi^
«XX*, Jr«'i( h ri 9r(£r»9y lyyty^dyptTms^ no one shall be enrolled (the siraple
act) dsewhere, but ehall remain enrolled (the state consequent upon the act of
enrohnent) at he was at firtt. Id. Eq. 1370. ^(«^i nai «'i«'(«S«t«w, tptak
and it [shall be done at once] i$ done. Id. Plut. 1027. *Orav ^ ^ ##fMw.
wiwmwafMUy * I shall desist at once,' Soph. Ant. 91. '^•fitt^trt U «^ ^
iif^*(f Ifiti Tt n»Ta»%»i'^%0fiau, »mi vfjutt au wtxit IfntH Srn^M^ * shall be imme-
diately cut doWB,' L 5. 16. 'E«v yk^ &^m IfUi h'l^ Tttk • . ttvriMm, ^UXm
}mV r$ip»9U4, ri^Mf|u tSrttt * he shall be dead,' i. e. * he shall die instant^,
PL Gorg. 469 d (cf. Kmndyift tvratf Aii«-;^i^/»iv«y Irwu lb.). J/L»fttni0ifU/$m^
we $hall remember, Cyr, iii. 1. 27 ({ 233). Ev^hg 'A^tma »firrii^ • 4?m
ftXtf hf*4f «v)t}f XiXi/^/'f r«i, Ariaus will immediatdy withdraw; to tikat mt
friend will renuan to «•, iL 4. 5.

§ S 8 3* IIL A ftitore action may be represented more expressly it
on the point cf acoompUthment, or as connected with dettinpy iwcesnfy, wiU, pur-
pote, &C., by the verlM fiiXXn, i/iA^ or S-cX^v, /3«vX«^mu, ^ x€^ ^^ ^^ *^
Inf. This Inf. may be Pre*,, Amt^ or Fut^ aooording to the view taken of
the action in respect to definiteness and nearness (<j 568. R.). Thos, 'Dw*
^mthet . . fUxkofTo. it^tiv^g^uvy teeing a boy about to die, xn, 4. 7. *0 ^rmtfut
ttia. tfinXXt nuTaXuM i. 8. I. MiXAif r«vr« rt wnhlf Cyr. vi. 1. 40. £1 ^t
wXma Jfrir^M fAiXXu \um9»iy if there are to bt vett^ enough^ v. 6* 12. Om
UiXtt iXittfj lam not willing to go, or I wUl not go, i. 3. 10. 'Eyit iHXmt ^
&v2(Ui ^taCtCm8-»t vfiZg m. 5. 8. BcvXtvt«r0tu, 7 rt Xi^ ^ittv i. 3. 11.

Remarks, (a) The ideas of destiny, purpote, &a, are often expressed \j
the simple Fut. Especially is the Fut, Part, both with and without mg,
used oontianally to express purpose (§ 635). Thus, Oi $U rn* tUttXtmh
Ttx^i* ^uthvifAtUi . . rt ha^i^avn rmt l^ itviyunt JuuiavttiU^rtt, i7 y% mt-
jn^eufft mm) hyj/nfovft »ai ^yat^twi xu) ay0VW99ifoVfi, ' if they muSt hungST
and tWrst,' Mem. ii. I. 17. T«» i^iSf fimy^ftiv^^, he that would Hoe weO, PI.
Gorg. 491 e. "SvXXa/itCdvu Kv^tv m A^oxTtpSv, he appehends Q^rut [as about
topathbatodeath^ with the design of putting him to death, I U 3. IBtn^^i

Digitized

by Google

CE. 5.] USE OF MOMSS. — INTELLECTIVE^. 3^

rim t(«Svr», he miU cne to Mjf, ii. 5. 2. Htft^ttf mt^k /3«r/XS«^ mtXtwrm ii.
1. 17. tlLaxwfA**»( rw^ii i. 10. 10. See y' 531. «. — (b) Insttad of the
Fat. Part., the Pres. is eotnethnee emplojed to denote purpose, according to
§ 573, espedallj with verbs of motion ; thus, Tmvr Ixhxat^u* ^X^«v, / went
^n avenge Mt« wrong, Ear. Suppl. 154.

§ S S 4* lY. A fhtore action, in yiew of its neamee$, its certainty^ its
rapidity, or its connection with aiwther action, may be conceived of as now
doingf or even as already done (§ 567) ; and may hence be expressed by tba
Preset Aor^ or Per/, Thus, R«««» ^»u rtu, evil is coming upon some one, Ar.
Ran. 552 (cf. Atie-u rtt 2/x)iy lb. 554). 'A«'ArX0^i«'^' i^, i/ xa»«v ^r^ovtlft-
ui9 9U9 wmXatSfy w^n rSi* i^))vrXi>««y«j Eur. Med. 78. £7 /ui roJ^tv iyx^ct'rr,<
mUinnrtu, SXttXm, mu) ri ^^»vh»^i^<, if, while possessed of the bow, he shaU
disoover me, I am undone^ and I shall destroy you besides. Soph. Ph. 75. Ei Ii
ifl MBTMcrfviTrc fu, i ufitt duTrtu Eur. Or. 940. Ov» tS l^tnif^ut^ ^/»* ^
9i9i9fM,%§m MttvHf /3i0v r«^'«iir0f, j| •l^iftt^fi* SfAtt % Soph. Tr. 83. *A«'trr«Xx«
0$t ritit rU Xiytf }S(»» Isocr. 2 b. — For presents which are commonly u&ed
as futures, see § 200. b.

^ 8SS» V. The Future sometimes occurs for a present or past tense,
as a less direct and positive form of expression, or as though the action were
not yet finished; thus, Tolftav V iy« . . ^^ri^ft tiiTv fiouXn^o/Acu, *I shall wish,*
i e. * am resolved,' Soph. (Ed. T. 1076. XOP. UaThf rtitan x**t^ f^^UVf
ri^iv. *IAS. Os/Mt, vi XiliUf i "ilt ft* i^atXtratf, yvfeti Eur. Med. 1309.
TUt f Iff { ri Xiiut \ "tU ft aitmXtvai, yvvat Id. HeL 780. This exclama-
tory use of r/ A.i|«if for r/ xiynt or ri tkt^eis, as though the conmiunication
were not yet finished, belongs particularly to Euripides.

IV. Use of the Modes.

§ S 8 6« For a classification and designation of the modes
according to the character of the sentences which they form
(§ 329. N.), see H 27.

A. Intellective.

§987* Intellective sentences express the actual or the
CMiiingent (§ 929. N.). The idea of contingency is expressed
in two ways ; by the form of the verb, and by a particle, com-
monly aiv (Ep. xc or xfiV, Dor. x«). The two ways are often
united for the stronger expression ; and they may be both neg-
lected, if th6 idea is either not prominent, or is too obviotis to
require expression. The forms of the verb which in them-
selves express contingency are the Subjunctive and Optative
modes (§ 169). Intellective sentences not emplo3nng these
modes (either because they are actual, or because their con-
tingency is simply expressed by a particle or is not expressed
at all) employ the Indicative^ which is the generic mode
(§§ 177, 330. 1).

Rdcarks. 1. It may be said in general, that the Ind, expresses the actual;
He 8ubj, and Opt,, the eomtmgenL But it must be understood that this, lik*

Digitized

by Google

atf58 SYNTAX. — USB OF MODES. [bOOK IIL

all similar statements In grammar, has primary reference to the conoeptioiis of
the mind, rather than to the reality of things ; that is, to employ the techni-
cal language of philosophy, it most be taken mbjectiveUf, rather than objecticely
The contingent is often, from strong assurance or vivid fancy, spoken of at
actual ; while, on the other hand, the actual, from diffidence or courtesy a
some other cause, is not unfrequently spoken of as contingent. This state-
ment is also limited by the generic use of the Ind., as mentioned above.

2. An action which is now future has, from the very nature of things, somr
degree of contingency ; and therefore, in the Fut. tense, no distinction is made
between the Ind. and the Subj., but any rule requiring in other tenses th«
^ubj. in this requires the Ind. And even the use of tha Fut. opt. appears t«
be limited to the oratio obliquay in which it takes the place of the Fut. ind. in
the oratio recta (§§ 607, 608).

§ S 8 S« 3. The particle of oontingence, &9, may commonly be dis-
tinguished from the conjunction eiv for lav (§ 603) by its position, as it never
stands first in its clause, which is the usual place of the conjunction. It chief-
ly occurs with the past tenses of the Ind. and with the Opt., to mark tbem
as depending upon some condition expressed or implied ; with the Subj. after
various connectives ; and with the Inf. and Part, when the distinct modes
to which they are equivalent would have this particle. It is extensively used
with the Subj., in cases where it would have been omitted with the Opt., fat
the reason, as it would seem, that the separation, in form, of the Subj. from
the Ind. was later and less strongly marked than that of the Opt. (§ 177).
The insertion or omission of &* for the most part follows general rules, but in
some cases appears to depend upon nice distinctions of sense, which it is diffi-
cult* to convey in translation, or upon mere euphony or rhythm. Upon its
use in not a few cases, manuscripts differ, and critics contend. Verbs with
which &9 is connected are commonly translated into Eng. by the potential
mode.

§ 589. Contingency is viewed as either present or past;
that is, a contingent event is regarded either as one of which
there is some chance at the present time, or merely as one of
which there was some chance at some past time. Present
CONTINGENCY is expressed either by the Suhj.^ or by the pri'
mary tenses of the Ind. ; and past contingency, either by
the Opt.^ or by the secondary tenses of the Ind.

The tenses of the Subj. and Opt. are therefore reUted to each other as
nretent and past tenses, or, in sense as well as in form (§§ 168, \96),aB priauuy
and secondary tenses ; and the rule above may be thus given in a more ooa.'
densed form : —

P&B8ENT OONTmOENCT IS EXPRESSBD BT THE FBIMABT TENSES; PASI
OONTINaENCT, BT THE 8EGONDABT.

Note. Future contingency is contamed in present ; for that which wiB A*
contingent, is of course contingent now,

§ tl90« Rebiarks. 1. It cannot be kept too carefully in mind, that
the distinction above has no reference to the time of the occurrence of an event,
but only to the time of its contingency. Thus, in the tv«> sentences, " I din
go if I wish," and " I could go, if I wished," the time of the goiny itscU is in

Digitized

by Google

en. 5. J INTELLECTIVE. 369

botb the Mine, i. e. future. Bat in the fbrmer sentence, the eontrnpency is
present, because it is left undecided what the person's wish is, and therefore
there is still some chance of iiis going ; while in the latter, the contingency \a
pnstf becaose it is implieil that the person does not wish to go, and therefore,
although there was some chance of his going before his decision, there is now
no chance. Hence, in the former sentence, present tenses are employed ; and
in the latter, past. ,

2. Tlie limits of past are far wider than those of present contingency ; for
there is nothing which it is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may
not conceive that there was some chance at some distant period in past eternity.
The dividing line between present and past contingency may perhaps be thus
drawn; whatever is supposed wWi some degree of present expectation^ or in
present view of a decision yet to be had^ belongs to the head of present contin^
gency; but whatever is supposed without this present expectaHon or view of a
deeiaion, to the head of pagt contingency. Past contingency-, therefore, mdudes,

il.) all past supposition, whether with or without expectation at that time;
2.) all supposition, whether present or past, which does not imply expectation^
or eontempiate a decision^ that is, all mere opposition ; (3.) all suppositioii,
whether present or past, in despite of a prior decision. Thus : .

.A. PBESENT OOSmVOENCT.

JwiU go, if lean have leave (and I intend to ask for it).
/ t/UnA, that I may go, if I can have leave.
I wisht that you may go,

B. PAST ooimzroBHcnr.

(1.) Past supposition.

I thought, that I might go, if I eomUL have leave.
I wished^ that you might go,

(2.) Present suppositiim not implying expectation or oontemplatuig a de>
diion.

J would go, if I should have leave (but I have no thought of asking

for it).
I could go with perfect ease.
I should like to go,

(8.^ Present supposition in despite of a prior decision.
«. In regard to the present.
/ iM«/<f go, if I had leave (but I have none, and therefore I shall
not go).

i3. In regard to the past
I would have gone, if I had had leave (but I had none, and there-
fore did not go).

§ S9 1« 3. As the differe ice between the Subj. and Opt. is one of
time, rather than of essential offic*^ some have chosen to consider them as
imly different tenses of a general conjunctive or contingent mode. With this
diange, the number and offices of the Greek modes are the same with those
of, the Latin, and the correspondence between the Greek conjunctive and the
English potential modes becomes somewhat more obvious (see ^ 33). Ac-
ooniing to this classification, which deserves the attention of the student.

Digitized

by Google

370 SYNTAX. — USK OF MODES. [bOOI: IH

clthougfa it is questioiiable whether it k best to discard the old pbnseoto*
gy. the

Present Sabjanctive becomes the Definite Present (or the Present) Conjnncthre

Present Optative ** " Definite Past (or the Imperfect) Gonjonctive.

Aorist Subjunctive ** ** Aorist Present (or Primary) Conjunctive.

Aorist Optative " ** Aorist Past (or Secondary-) Conjunctive.

Perfect Subjunctive ** " Perfect Present (or the Perfect) Conjunctiva.

Perfect Optative " " Perfect Past (or the Piupecfect) Conjunedve.

4. Contingent sentences, lilce actual (§§ 566 - 568, 576, 584, 585), are
liable to an interchange and blending of tenses. Past contingency is often
conceived of as present ; and present, as past Hence, primaiy tenses take
the place of secondary, and secondary of primary. This interchange may be
observed particularly between the Subj. and ()pt. modes.

§ 89ft» The Subj. and Opt occur, for the most part, in
dependent clauses ; and indeed some grammarians have re-
fused to regard them as being ever strictly independenU It
results from the principles alr^y laid down, that, in their usa
as dependent modes, the Suiij,^ fir the most part^ follows the
primary tenses; and the Opt.^ the secondary. To this gen-
eral rule, however, there are many exceptions.

KoTB. In the application of this rule, the tenses of the Imptrat., as firom
its very nature referring to present or ftiture time, are to be regarded as /Tn-
mary tenses ; those of the Inf. and Part., as primary or tecondary, according
to the finite verbs, whose places they occupy, or, in general, according to those
iqx>n which they themselves depend.

§ 598. In the expression of contingency, the Ind. is
properly distinguished from the Subj. and Opt by the greater
positiveness with which it implies or excludes present anticipa-
tion. Thus supposition with present anticipation is expressed
by the primary tenses ; but there is here this general distinc-
tion, that the Fut Ind. anticipates without expressing doubt,
while the Subj. expresses doubt. On the other hand, supposi-
tion without present anticipation is expressed by the secondary
tenses ; but with this general distinction, that the Opt. supposes,
either with some past anticipation, or without regard to any de-
cision, while the secondary tenses of the Ind. suppose in despite
of a prior decision.

Remarks. «. Tn the expression of contingency, the Imf^f. ind. has com-
monly the same dif erence from the Aor. and Plup,, as, in English, the Impf.
ind. and pot^tial from the PIup. In respect to the time of the ec^n,
therefore, tiie contingent Impf. ind. commonly refers to present time, and the
Aor. and Plup. to pa$t. See §§ 599, 601. ^j 603. h

fi. We may, say in general, that suppositum as fact is expressed by the ap-
propriate tense of the Ind. ()9 587, 603. «) ; suppontum that may beeom§
fact, by the Subj. ; supposition without regard to fact, by the Opt. ; and m^
position contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the Ind. ; whUe in these tenaot

Digitized

by Google

Ind.

CB. &.] IITTBLLEGTIVE. 371

tkert is tliis distmction^ thai the Impf. ezfMiesses 8ai;^)oatioii contrary to premii
fact, but the Aor. and Plup. contrary to past fact

y. The Epic sometimes joins «( with the Fut ind., when it depends upon a
condition expressed or understood ; as, £< )' 'OWtv^ txtt . ^ tS^i »i • •
««'«r/rir«i ^. 539. A similar nse of &t in the At^ is rare and doabtM.

§ S94« %. Indefiniteness constitutes a spedes of contingency. Hence
(1.) the oonstniction with the relative indefinite (§ 606) ; and (2.) the nse
of &9 with the past tenses of the Ind. to denote on action, not as occnrring at
a definite time, but fitmi time to time^ as the occasion might occur, or, ia
other words, to dmote a habitual action $ thus, n«XAi»«f y«^ i^n f*^9 &t nft
I^Sf, for he would cften say, that he was m looe with some one, Mem. iv. 1. 2.
£i if riftt i^^n ii/»«v ivrtt •IxaitifUf . ., •it^ittt &9 wttwavt «^<iXfr«, «XA.' m)
wXi/w w^ttrtViltu i. 9. 19. £7 %it iUfrSf )«»mii . . fiXatmouv, • • t^eu^tt Hf, nai
ifiM rnvrit w^trtXdfitCttvtt iL 3. 11.

I S9S» The contingent modes are oflen used where the
might have been employed. The Opt. with av for the
(o.) Pres. or (/5.) Fut. ind. is particularly frequent ; and often
serves, by suggesting instead of asserting, to give to the dis-
course that tone of moderation and refined courtesy, which
was so much studied by the Greeks, especially the Athenians.
(See ^§ 604. b, 605. 5.) The use of the Subj. for the Ind. is
more limited, and occurs chiefly (for the Put.) in (/.) earnest
inquiry respecting one's self, and in (5.) strong denial. Thus, .

«• Avri £v . . r« hn tin • ^'irr§f yk^ «vaXivM»r«, tlds [would be] if tft«
very thing we want; for th^ will sooner expend, iv, 7. 7. Ka) ^^Utrts /*h
9v» £9 «^irrifr«4iv, Hv ^i rt itn^y . ., ^^Hvt fti^V ^<<^*'f Cyr. i. 2. 11 (cf.
§ 594). 2HK. Anfitiy^ti £(» rig fVnv ii ^otnrtxn* KAA. ^nfii. ZHK.
Olnem ^nrt^t'ch ^fifitfiytfU £f tU PI. Gorg. 502 d. This use of the Opt. is
particularly frequent in argumentative conclusions.

/3. <Pff^, naU 4u» £9 &(fnitim, I confess, ctnd [would not} will not deny it,
Dem. 576. 1 7. 'Axx' «^«Sr' «» n^u^^uifu Ar. Plut. 284. MEN. Oin if fuStU
^if». nP. OvV \ytty u^sfMu £ur. Iph. A. STlO. — This use of the Opt. m
particularly frequent in the firat person.

y, IIm fiS I «*« 0tS i ri \%ym \ Whither [can] shall I go? where stop f
what sayf Eur. Ale 864. E^r^^iv, j? nyol^iv, «f rt^^»ff»fi.%9\ Id. Ion, 758.
"Euftlf rt 2«ri4f| n fr^et^tif tSrvf 7«r 1 Soph. Ant. 315. "KAfAvrXAnm r»v r«»
f^fsv I lb. 554. See § 61 1. 3:

NoTB. In the Epic language, the use of the Subj. for the Fut ind. is more
extended. V

2. Ott y^( ftft,h.. Y'uv* »vV v«'«frnJr«tf»v, for they [cannot] wiU not know
nor suspect you. Soph. El. 42. AJ^n^uf, »») iirax*'^*'* *^ f^^ hi^ift vii* 3. 26.
*0 wXn^Uf fitfi^nru * ^9 rt , ,, »uiit( funnirt finifif iv. 8. 13.

NoTBB. (1.) This use is most frequent in those forms of the Subj. whidi
have no forms of the Ind. closely resembling them, viz., the Aor. pass, and the
2d Aor. It is, on the other hand, less frequent in the Pres., resembling the
PMb. ind;^ and in the Ist Aor. act and mid., resembling the Fut ind. (cf. 601.
N.). In this emphatic negation, the Subj. is regularly preceded by a double

Digitized

by Google

872 . SYNTAX; — USB OF MODES. [bOOK IC

negadve, tu ftti. Tbe construction may be explained by supplying a word ot
phrase expressing fear [cf. ^ 602. 3) ; ttms, Ov ttiotxtt fin yvivn, / have ne
/§ar that they would know. Compare such passages as, Ov ^iCaSf fin rt ityi^
ym Meni.iL 1. 25 ; Obxl V^ty f*n rt ^iXuVii Ar. Ecd. 650. (2.) The similaf
UM ot •» fi^ with the Fut^ ind. is to be explained in the same manner ; as,
O^ ^04 fitii fitft^tfuii ifrt, never mU I follow youj Soph. EL 1052.

§ S96« We proceed to the application of the general
principles which govern the use of the distinct modes, to par-
ticular kinds of sentences, which may be termed, from their
offices or connectives, desiderative (expressing wish, from de-
sidero, to desire) y finals conditional^ relative^ and complement
tary (% 329. N.).

( I.) Desiderative.

^ S9V. A wish is expressed either with or without a
definite looking forward to its realization. In the former case,
it is expressed by the primary tenses ; in the latter case, by
the secondary. In the former case, (o.) if the wish is expressed
with an assurance that it will be realized, the Ind. Fut. is used -
but, {p.) otherwise, the Siibj. mode. In this use, both the Ind.
Fut. and the Subj. may be regarded as less direct modes of
expression instead of the Imperat. In the latter case, (/.) if
the time for realizing the wish Is already past^ the secondary
tenses of the Ind. are used with n yng and tti^s ' but, (5.) other-
wise, the Opt, mode. XSee §§ 590, 593.) Hence ^he Opt
becomes the simplest and most general form of expressing a
wish ; and from the frequency of this use, it has derived its
name (§ 169. 3). Thus,

(«.) 'Hf «Sf wunfirtj Ktti nritttffii fit, thus then [yon will do] do, and litten
to «e, PL Prot. 338 a. Un^h ri^V i^ttt i£sch. Sept 250.

Notes. (!•) A wish is often expressed in the form of a question. Hence
in Greek, as in other langoages, the interrogative Fut. often supplies the place
of the Imperat ; as, Ouk Sil^tfi* m rd^t^Tm i »») ■ . a<ptT% f*09n*t [Will you
not carry] Carry her away instantly ^ and leave her nhne^ Soph. Ant. 885. "A^ii
T$t iXfiitf ^tZ^o TO* fiorn^ei fA0t ; T«t/rn* 2* iirt Id. CEd. T. 1069. Ov fik XcA.fi-
riif, «A.X* aKoXovfiwus tfioi t [Won't you not talk] Don^t talk, but follow me,
Ar. Nub. 505. (2.) For the Fut. with o<r«f in the place of the Innierat, see
§ 602. 3. (3.) The Aor. and Pres. are also used with ri 9V9 el, or ri w, in
the earnest expression of a wish ; as, T< avv, ipn i Kv^*;, »v . . iA.i|«; fi»t i
IVhy then, eaid Cyrus, have you not told mef i. e tell me, Cyr. ii. 1. 4. Ti oSw, 4
y Is, •V* i^traf ( PI. Lys. 2 1 1 d.

§ tS98« (^.) M;^ &9mfiifufM9, let us not wait, iu. I. 24. M^i ^iXX«».
fitf, Z Afi^Uy <lXX' a^nXfitru Kin otl^iTcit lb. 46. At;* ruv w^tfCvrarti* rr^-
my^i l«r/yu«Xt/0-/«y • i^t^ftipuXetxHfiitf l* nfiiTg iii. 2.37. 'AXXa^' l» yt r?r)t
yiif ^o^ifA%uirov MS Teix'9'rei, f^nV attr»u ^ttfu Soph. Tr. 801. Oif*, \K9rv0tfimt
Eur. Here. 529. Mii Toinfr.f ruZra, do w>t do this, vii. 1 . 8. Mn^i* iJujuiwa^rt
tuxm rif ytyitn/iivatv • im yd( v. 4. 19.

Digitized

by Google

«H. 5.] Ill DESIDBRATIVE SENTENCES. 373

Notes. (I.) The use dT the Sabj. as Imperat. occurs chiefly in the Isi
Per§, (where the Imperat. is wanting, § 170. N.)t and in the Aor witfi fin.
In the 2d Pers., the dbtinction is rarely neglected, that in prohibithna with fi4
and iti compounds^ the FreM. is put in the ImpercU.y but the Aor. in t/ie Suhj, ;
as, "bin l»2«iri fif,. ftnrt fr«Xf^i7ri vi. 6. 1 8. Mitr i^nTrt, f/tnr i^nr Wot
Soph. (Ed. C. 731. Mn)* i^-ixtv/i w. 168. UnV Wtxtv^^t ». 263. In the
3d Pers., the distinction is less observed. The foundation of the distinction
seems to have been this ; that the Pres. forbids an action more definitely than
the Aor. {< 569), and hence naturally adopts a more direct form of expresaion.
Thus, prohibition in the Pres. is often designed to arrest an action now doing,
while prohibition in the Aor. merely forbids, in general, that it should be done ;
as, Bin S-aufteil^tTtt be not wondering^ i. 3. 3 ;see Oi ^l i^Uvrtf UetifAat^ot lb. 2) ;
but M»$) . . %ilfiri^ nor ehouid yon think, iii 2. 17. (2.) The use of the Subj.
as Imperat. may be explained by ellipsis thus, *0(Sri fih ^va^ivw^iv, see thni
we do not wait, 2»i<rti /th wtnt^t rmvrm. See §§ 592, 601, 602. 3 ; and
compare §§ 595. y, 2, 611. 3.

^ S99. (7.) ETA ft . . rirt 0Uf%ytfifm*j fFould that I had then been
with you ! Mem. i. 2. 46. ETi^* tJxu • • /StXr/tvf ^^ifeif. Would that you had a
better spirit^ Eur. El. 1061. E< y«f rtravmv ivtafnv ttx^ Id* Ale 1072. —
In these expressions of wish there is properly an ellipslB ; thus, E7/* i7;^if /Si A-
rl§ut ^(ifaSi nuXSf if ttxh or nloftnv Av, if you had a better epirit, it would be
well, or I should be glad. See §§ 600. 2, 603.).

NoTB. A wish in opposition to fact may be also expressed by the Aor.
^fX0v C^ 268), ought With this verb, the particles of wishing are some-
times combined for the sake of greater strength of expression. Thus, "Il^i.
Xf /ilf KZ(»t JJn [C. ought to be living) IFould that Cyrus were living I
U. 1 . 4. 'OxU^m V £<ptX0f, Would that I had perished I Soph. (Ed. T. 1 1 57.
E?/* aI^iX* *A^y9vt fih im^rufUt r»ti^tf Eur. Med. f . Ei ya^ *l^iX«y PI. Cri-
to, 44 d. So the Impf. «^iiX«v, Eur. Iph. A. 1291. In later writers, J^iptkn
and «^«Xi are sometimes used as particles.

§ 600* ().) 0; ^#2 &9'«rUui9TSy May the gods requite I iii. 2. 6.
ITaXXiC fMi nkyaik yittrs V. 6. 4. Miin ^aXifA^iri Amxthu/MfluSi trmf^tt^ti n
▼L 6. 18. ll^£l^t V t t**t ^^X**f^ vtrrnruifAt ya^ Eur. Ale 1023.

Notes. I. Hie Opt. of wish is sometimes used, especially in the 3d Pers.,
as a less direct form for the Imperat. Sometimes the two forms are united,
and these again with the Subj. (§ 598) ; as, 'Aytfi', lifnTg irif fuv itwr^tTi-

T. 119. See Soph. Ant. 151.

2. The Opt. of wish may be introduced by the particles i<, t'ttu i^ 7«( (Ep.
and Dor. mJh^ ttl yif), m^ and in interrogation by vuf iv. E7 ^m yi *Mr« ^^ey-
yst, 0, that I had a voice I Enr. Hec. 836. ETA /in^'ort yto'mt Soph. CEd. T.
106?. .Ei yk^ yip0ir§ Cyr.vi. 1.38. *ilg SXotrt *tty»a»t( Eur. Hipp. 407.
Hit Hf'ikoifinv I [How might I die ?] Would that I might die I Id. Ale. 8u5
— These expressions, except the last, are elliptical ; thus, E7 fi«i yitoir* ^oy
yu H^ifirif iff If Mere toere a voice tome, I should be glad ; BtuXoifimf «v tn
iXMT$ w»y»d»titt. See §§ 599, 603. y. — Very rarely, i7(^i is jomed with the
8ubj. in the expression of wish ; as, E7(^' . . tXst<r$ Soph. Ph. 1092.

3. Except in interrogation, it is not used with the Opt. of wish, which if
tfuis often distingoished from the Opt in its other uses. Thus, *X1 wmT, yU
wets irmr^ ivrv;^f#rf^«f, r« 5* «XX* ifusH • »»* yiv^t* mt «v xmnit^My som^

a2 .

Digitized

by Google

974 STTfTAX. — V8E OT HODSS. [bOOK IB

HUjffOiibemonfarhmatBthmmjfomrJaiha', Ut ^ otktr rmpteUJOk Ate| «M
Am ^o« vpdtf MO' 6« 6(M^ Soph. Aj. 550.

(ii.) FinoL

^ 60 1* Afler final conjunctions (%va^ onmg, «^, ^ * Sgi^
poet), a present purpose is expressed by (a.) the Subf.^ or
(p,) in the 2^., by the Ind, ; but a past purpose by (y.) the
OpU^ or sometimes (^.), when the realizaHon is now impossi-
hhy by the past tenses of the Lid. (See §^ 589, 593). In
final sentences, introduced by a relative {§ ^1. a), the modes
are used in the same manner. Thus,

(a.) 1v« ui^rt, 90 that you may know, K3. 15. *£/»«} tU rnvrk, Zwatt . •

X*^rat • is /tn»iri hp I 6. 9. — After twmt and my &9 is sometimes inserted;
as, "A^tis n/MMSy i^is •» tsUfittf Cyr. iii. 2. 21. 0vfUf fimX\ it it ri^futr U-
^^f .£8ch. Pr. 706.

(fi,) *AXk* iwn rtt /An \w ituif^ yunt^ifttimt wavvw •'MivrtM» h^
must do every thmg^ that we may never come into hit power, iii. 1. 18.

NoTB. After ?«'*»;, the Ist Aor. sabj. is rarely used in the active and mid-
dle voices, but instead of it the Fnt ind. Gf. ^ 595. ).

(y.) Kv^»f rets fetvf f*tTi9'ifify^mr0, i^atg i^Xirats &9'*CtCdmt*f C^/rma mmtjbr
the ihipt, in order that he might land hopUtee, i. 4. 5. Boj^Cc^Aiy l^n^XtTr*, it
WtfXi^frv ri half) ilnrat i. 1. 5. 'E^tfxK mvro7$ iWtftu • »» fitn rtg Iwihnt yi»
»Mr« iv. 4. 22. E/Vcyci (Hist. Pres., § 567. c) ^f^vf, V iXXn fU th eiu^
Eur. Hec. 1148.

().) Ti />*•».. f»Tiif«r %h$tH, it fUtlim, fUiwart Iffurif i fThy did pom. moi
tnatantfy day me, mt that I might never have thown myself 9 Soph. (Ed. T. 1391*
*!/ ti Tvipkof lb. 1389. Ol/itavf t;^(n* «'t Tltiyif»tf ^tv^mi n'rtfiv, twmt Ifeuwem
Ar. Pax, 135. *'!>« fifiitit alrovt hi^fitt^t*, «XX' iwuin tt^ufnTa tit rj^ mXi-
»*»h Xt^^*/*^* yi.y90t9T» PI. Meno, 89 b. "Eiu rk Wi^^v^a rir% Xm,C%7tf it fitm^*$
ti ifi»vX.ir»y HvfMva civ returtt l^irttrfv vii. 6. 23.

^ 609* BfOTARKS. 1. A past purpose, still continned or cofnahned
of as i»eseRt (§ 591. 4), may be expressed by the Subj. ; and on the other
hand, a present purpose, viewed as doabtfhl or as connected with something
past, distant, or oontingent (§ 590), may be expressed by the Opt. The
Subj. for the Opt. may be •remarked particularly after the Aor. used fbr the
Perf. ( 580), and in indirect quotation (§ 610). The two modes are some-
times both used in the same connection. Thus, 'Etrlrniif #i cv» iytt^t, 7»«
it ^i^ret hdyi^s PI* Crito, 43 b. 'E^X/tfv ^ifiatf^ (An /mS vt /li/t^l^ne^t Eur.
Med. 214. "ih^^trt flr^frCuf &y»9ftLj •Wt^ ret ^^irt^a p^vurn Th. viL 25.
Ti^trtXfiit ixfXit/«», I? Tt< iln . •) 'MB mwetyyilkttg^t ii. 5. 36. Compare !«'<#«?»-
r« and i^rtfiu^rett iii. 4. 1, 34. Trw; Vt wtu n eL^t^Ktixru rt ii i9-»TUxi^u<, 4M
&W9^§t tin h Shis ii> 4. 4. ^rn^iv fiu icd^l^^Dfofy is TuitifAtitt Soph. (Ed. Ch 1 !•
AiVirv «'X0r«, is «(ir«irXtMiv • . . «'i^'\^«i 2i ime) w^KmrmXn^tfAMut rm ^M^m^
TcATf fAn ^6a.9t9i i. 3. 14. 'Hf ZZ^n "UT^fAvi ASyUPaw ^t^t, yicut «** iptim
Eur. £1. 58.

a. After words of fear, the final conjunction />*}, leat, is commonly naed, b«t
ametimes also the fhller iwtt M^t o^ aome other oonneotive ; thna^ *Efi:<C*S»r

Digitized

by Google

CH, 5.] IN FINAL ANB CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 375

fA Wi00i9T» «vrwf . . 01 wxifi$»$, they feared [lest the enemy gbonlJ attackj
Aai the enemy vmdd attack them, iii. 4. 1. Ail/«f, ^ A«C«^» fit )/»f»v iwt^^ i.
8. 10. ^tCtvfuu )!, ^if r<Mif jf^«yi^« n^opmsf tv(W»fitf if atrias PI. Phil. IS a.
*£f«Cirr« . . ^4 fv ^vvflur* iii. 1. 12. KtviUttt fin XaiZtrt vii. 7. 31. Ai^m;^'
«4r»f ^n rii^«^Mt<, / am, afraid [as to this, viz, how I shall not find] that I shall
findy Ar. £q. 112. "O^rtitt Xtiiu, )t^0i«Mt, I fear [as to this, viz. how I may es-
cape] that I cannot escape, Eur. Iph. T. 995. Mn r^irfif, o^-Mf ri r/f . . «V«-
r^ii^ti, /ear nof tAot any one k^ tear you. Id. Herad. 248. Mii ^iiViif v*^', ««
. . iylftrmi Soph. £1. 1309. 'E^^CcTr*, irt i^tn^tv^ttt l^iXXi Cyr. iii. 1. 1. 0«-
MfttfH ik, irSs X(^ AvciXfvyri v9ra»M«rtu lb. iy. 5. 19. *Ara^ ^oCtf^, i/ wiir^v
M^WMtcf Eur. Med. 184.

3. A verb of attention, care, at fear, is tomedmes to be supplied before
(hrttf or fin* as, *0«'«# tS* twi^h &th^is [sc ^Srt, r»««'i7ri, or iv'/^Aiir/i], see
then Aatyoube men, L 7. 3. Air[8C rsMVsTf] r, lirArf irmr^if h^ug iv *x^(Mh
•Sh l\ •Ittt *r^ipnt Soph. AJ. 556. *AXA.' lirw^ ^^ av;^ •!•; r t^tfiuu [sc. 2i^M-
mI PL Meno, 77 a. B£^ . . ^mf^i/^ff Eur. Ale 315. Cf. §§ 595. %, 598. 2.

(ill.) Conditional.

§ 603* In sentences connected by conditional conjunc-
tions, there is a great variety of conception, and consequently
of expression. The condition may be assumed, either (or.) as
a fact^ or (/9.) as that which may become a fact^ or (/.) as a
mere supposition toUhout regard to fact ^ or {d,) as contrary
to fact. In the first ccise (a.), it is expressed by the appro*
prtate tense of the Ind, ; in the second (/9.), by the Subj, ; in
the third (/.), by the Opt, ; and in the fourth (d.), by a past
tense of the Ind. (see §^ 590, 593). Of these modes, the
Ind. and Opt are usually connected by cl, and the Subj. by
idr (= (i and UP the contingent particle) or its shortened forms,
^r and atf' exceptions (?.), however, occur, though rare in the
Att. writers, and some of them doubtful. — The form of the
CONCLUSION is, for the most part, determined by thai of the
condition. In the first case (a.), the conclusion is regularly
made by the appropriate tense of the Ind, ; in the second (/9.),
by the Put. ind. ; in the third (/.), by the Opt. with av • and
in the fourth (^.), by a past tense of the Ind. with ay. The
form of the conclusion (f.), however, often depends upon other
causes, besides its relation to the condition, and cases of ana*
coluthon are very frequent. There is (i?.) sometimes even a
union of difierent forms in the same construction. If (^.) the
conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is commonly
determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con-
fcmns. Thus,

(«.) Ei fCkt ifUtf I^Xin S|«f;«f V M ravvm, Xirteicu bfiTf jiiuktfMu • $} V
iftut rarvrtrk fit hytT^im, •ftSkt w^^^mrlf^tfMu ill 1. 25. 'Elft^ IfUi IrlXu n
2Miu •^ •^m M^u yii. 6. 16.

Supposition is sometimes made in the Greek, as m other las-

Digitized

by Google

876 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [bOOK lU

gnages, by the Tnd. witboat a oonjonction ; as, Kmi Vi ictt^uMv • i7r« wSt . «
wmhwifnHti Eur. Hel. 1059.

()3.) *Hv ya^ TAVT* X«Ca>/*iv, «v ^tnnf9Tau ftifUVj for if we take this, Aey wiff .
not be able to remmn, iii. 4. 41. *Hf )i ^*vypt n/Usf l»u Wfit vrnvrm /3««Xfcw«.
ft%$a i. 3. 20. '£«» fAt wu0fnrt, . . «'^«Ti/*iirt#/i i. 4. 14. See lb. 15.--
(«. and ^.) Ov» a^ 2r4 fimx^^th << ^' rci^Mf «v ^u[i;^irT«< r»7f nfti^mg • f«f
S^* mXnttv^iffy iHrir;^vM7^i [=» )«ir«r] u 7. 18.

Note. The place of the Fut. in the conclusion may be supplied by tbt
same forms of expression as are elsewhere substitutes f(M* this tense ; thus,

«i ff'«Xi/«Mi ▼. 1. 9 (§ 595. fi). "Hr yk^ i«fi^$ Xiymt ft r»wr\ iymy tu U-
wt^vyain* w$Jh Soph. CEd. T. 839. "Ht %* h^s M«iir*r/u«, mfuit ^ • . «••».
0at i. 7. 7 (^ 583). K«v vwr^ t^n, w««/*if, «*«»#* ii/mv wi^0inrm L 8. 12
(§ 584).

{y») Ov» av tv9 ^mo/tmJ^MfUj ii «« r^Xl^M . . l«'«s«X«(^«rif, / tkomld not,
then, wonder if the enemy should pursue, iii. 2. 35. E/ «vv i^fn* v/*Sf rmrn^
Ti fituXtvtfiifvt, txittfu &t wfif ufMM$ iii. 3. 2.

(2.) Ei /*b ui(M» ««'«^«tfvr«f uftMg^ r»VT Ht lr»««'«M> • •> *E«y) )i 4f«^ »* «*•
X., i/* / sau; you in want, I should be considering this . .. But since I Me, &c^
T. 6. 30. Ov» <S* i«'«iffri» *Ay«r/a; tccvtm, ii ^« iyt» uvrit IxiXivrn, Aganas
would not have done this if I had not commanded Aim, vi. 6. 1 5. Ei H rtSrs
wntru WmZ/aiv, atvaPTU It §i9rttXift,%§n V. 8. 1 3. ISu fin vftuf lixft^t, iw^vi^
/»»^« it IL I. 4. — (y. and ).) E/ f^t ^r^irfu h^trrafAtit, •uV it rvtnn^Xtutn^m
9M • nnt tut ivu/Ai. Oiihl yn^ tit Mii^«x«# fit • (iartXthg i«'»/*«/it, u l^tXavfsfu
r$vt ttn^yirns- Sad I knoum tJiis before, I had never accompanied you ; and
now I shall depart. For King Medocus would by no means commend me, should
I drive out our benefactors. viL 7. 1 1.

(i.) E7 r«c; rTt(fi0£ Soph. (Ed. C. 1443. — The use of t! with the Subj. is
almost entirely confined to the Ion. and Dor.-

(^.) Ei fAtt ivaitii nirot, ^txaiatf it ftt »a) tttTt^rit ntu furMTi Tli. 6. 1 5*
E/ ti »«i ^utvhTrt ri rt o^fi »Xt>^«« . ., ^|crf ior) r«v; voTm.fMV( (cf. *£^* Iv 2X-
$$trt it, fi Tot''AXvt iietCuifiri) V. 6. 9. E/ lx»»f>h *H ri^tt^rm twXn im'uw
fAtit Cyr. ii. 1. 9. Ovn it w^oCa/tit rit w^a rot 2ri(«v, •/ ftii tout mM^iCtJn'
0trat At, EccI. 161. Ei yi^ yvtntxu U rSi* ti^ovftt B-(i^§vf, . • «'«^' «»&•
' rnvraitf tit it dXXuteu «'«ri4f Eur. Or. 566.

(n.) Ei tut ii^Mt TOUT* , ., litTt it Wi r§Uf icifVf . ., nml nmrt^yi^
^ostrs it nurnt Yen. 12. 22. Autot it t7ti, $1 tut ftit . . fuyyttt/MUt . •
ix**^h i' ti r^ rttitf Xi**V * * ^fi'r^ i»«Xa^iTi Lys. 179. 32. E/ /uiv
^X§Tm Xf%f$ttt fAtXXtt Inatk • ., iifAi7{ it irXutfA%f u il f*iXX»tftif V. 6.
12. Oun it . . dyi^ivtf, $uii »i . . atnitif /3. 184.

(^). 'Etroftuo/Atit, Itn, ilrt Viotrt, i<ptX§tnt murit i. 3. 4 (§ 601). 'E«-iC«vXi^<
suftt, titf, lit ^vtt^tTut, uirtXi^mftt iii. 1. 35. ETirfy, ti nurif itin iir^riuf p^tXUuff
STt • • »etT»»mt$i it L 6. 2.

^604. Remarks. 1. The condition is of\en (a.) under-
stood ; or (/?.) instead of being expressed in a distinct clause,
IS incorporated in the conclusion ; or (y.) is expressed by a
relative clause, or by an independent instead of a dependent
sentence. In all these cases, the form of the conclusion is

1

Digitized

by Google

CF. 5.]

IN CONDITIO^AL SENTENCES. 377

properly the same as if the condition had been formally ex-
pressed. Thus,

(«.) "Eri tv9 Jit yi9H9 r!f \fttf £iiX^ajf v-dXifusg, i^«2 ^ ^iX§f ^ Would you
then [if I should now forgive you] be in future an enemy to my brother^ and a
friend to met i, 6. %.

Notes, a. Among the conditions most naturally supplied, and therefore
most frequently omitted, are those of inclination with possibility and of possi-
bility with inclination ; since these are the two great conditiuns of human con.
duct. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with «»
to denote one of these ideas, the other being implied as a condition *, rhus,
Ov» &9 ^vtmtTtf he would not be able (^if he should wish), i. e. he could not^ i. 9.
23. Oitii TWT d» rtf tl^t, nor could any one say this, i. 9. 13. Avra) fiit
it ivsftv^nratf they could themselves have marched [might if they had chosen].
It. 2. 10. *H/cM^ ^' At i(pnt iyotyt ^^ntat^ and I might have said that we ought,
iii. 2. 24 Ol/V m,UT»t dvtKT^Ttat at i^ikoi/ittj nor should we wish to slay him (if
we could), ii. 3. 23. "H^t^r «» axautreiifii, I shmdd most ghuUy hear (if I
might hear), ii. 5. 15. Tfi» ikiv4i^iett U«i>*i» at i. 7. 3. ^OKtolm /tat &t i.

3. 17. '£C«vX«^ff» y &t, I shmdd have wished, PI. Phsedr. 228 a.

b. To the use of the Opt. with of* just noticed, may be referred its em-
ployment to express permissiony or command in the softened or indifferent lan^
guage of permission ; as, 2v ^iv xofti^att at ^tavrot, you may now betake ya/ur-
sdf [might if yon wished], Soph. Ant. 444. "Xyatr pit /Aaraiot ati^* i»4r«-
hit lb. 1339. Xtt^Ms it ilirm rvtrdx** W. El. l49l. — Its use for the Pre*,
and Put. ind. (§ 595) may be referred in like manner to ellipsis.

c. From the different idiom of the two languages, the Opt. is often best
translated, as in the examples just given, by our Pres. potential ; thus, *Axx*
it9'0irt At, but you may say [might if you were disposed], vii. 6. 1 6. ^ainrt
Mt lb. 23. See also § 600.

(/3.) B«oX«</*ffv ^' atf tix»tT»f a^iitt [=k $! mi^i»tfAt\ K.vfru, Xa4t7t avTct L
8. 17. Ot>ri yatf, fitif at ?;^*>* rUfitm [ss tt fiesf ti^i r£fAa^, dt^^tivou l\ ytti.
fitit, vhvtar at v^arrut tt iCouXirt Mem. i 4. 14. "Atty rou va rotavra
tx*'^ [= •/ fMt Ta TtaZra ux**\ • • •i/x at tJit r nt PI. Phaedo, 99 a. N/.
»£trt( flit etiiita £t xataxatttu, hrrnSitrttt })\ avrZt »vi%it a* Xit^hin iii. 1 . 2.
"ilrorf^ &t }(Afi«t rt( ^t(} tixnt i. 5. 8. "A^ri^ itt at^^atvn it l^nf^tef. vctnfuat^
iXXmt 2i 0hx it r»X/*^tt V. 4. 34.

(y.) "Oa-Tif ^ ^vrnt 0vtoih%t [== if ri% rvvii^t/if] airtf ita^ti/bttXtixini roZm
Xyit wwr at lu^atfAsti^atpu ii. 5. 7.

^ OOS* 2. The place of the Opt in the conclusion is sometimes
!rapp1ied by the Ind. expressing such ideas as possibility, propriety, necessity^
habit, or unfinished action, commonly without Sit • as, Ohx nt XaUTt, %l fin . ,
^ti^Sfit i. 5. 2. OvSk ya^, ti ^atv v-foiu/ioira, fifhtot h iii. 4. 1 5. E7 rts ah'
rif ^att^if yitttrt Iviitixtv^fat ^»uXoft,tt9t, ^if>i iratrog Won7r9 i. 9. 16. See
lb. 18, 19, 28; ii. 3. 11 ; iv. 1. 14 ; and 594. "Duxrti^^t, tl kXttnutro i.

4. 7. AJr^fit yaf ^t ra filt Ifut ha^t^-faxf^h *for it would have been
baiW5,' vii. 7. 40 (§ 604. ^).

3. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, to which itp verb con-
forms; as, 'Ear y 1^1 tXnrh, eux it B^avf/Urasfti, %1 rtta tS(9iTt vL 1. 29.
"Hx«v«9 . . St4, II }nXf«nt . ., nt fitlt fiovXmtrai, iiaCn^ttrat iv. I. 3.

4 The particle it b sometimes omitted where it would regularly be insert-

Digitized

by Google

S78 iTNTAX. — USE OF MODBS. [bOOK m

6d ; tA, 'Virxnift^* ftiprti^ it . . V^nwmrfitn^ I c^rtamfy AomU hi adorned, if
I had 60M deceived, vii. 6. 21. £/ )' a/ui/v«v* m ^«2 yuifinf ix^^'^i tv^^x^i
itnv \ytt Eur. Pb. 1 200. Ei l\ /mi . , fa-fitt . ., ^oCat ra^tr;^!* Id. Hec 1111.
Atfy«riv r/f mpi^Sv ik'i^CWr/f kutAvx** > Soph. Ant. 604. O0v» Sj^iiwr iA«9
/«»<», nor eould Ae have done H unobaerved, Id. EL 914.

5. Attic oourtesy (§ 595) often gives the conditional form to complementA*
17 dauBes after words of emotion ; as, TSit Umvfjtava, d [^ Its\ . . Tiinft
tkU I wonder at, that you place, PI. Rep. 348 e.

(iv.) Relative.

^ 606* A sentence, which is introduced by a relative
(or by a similar particle of time or place) referring to thai
which is indefinite or general or not yet determined^ has a
species of contingency (§ 5M), and may hence employ the
Subj, or Opt, ; the Subj., when a future determination is now
contemplated, but otherwise, the Opt. (§ 590. 2). Which
mode should be employed will commonly depend upon the
preceding verb (^ 592). After these connectives av is regular-
ly used with the Subj. (sometimes compounded with the con-
nective) ; but not with the Opt., unless for some additional rea-
son. Thus,

"EiSn^it i7ff, fiytfiivet Mtrtif «'«^a TtuTov, ^ [definite, viz. Cyrwi] Xvftmnift$im
rnv «'^«|iy. Ei i\ km] ref iiytfAovt ^tirrivfcfitit, ^ [indefinite] at Kvff ^'^
' the guide whom Cyrus may give us/ i. 3. 1 6. *Eyat ya^ invinv fut «r %lt
rk «'X«ra ifitCetmsPf £ hftTit icitii . . (pcCalfinv J* «» ry tiytfAaiHj y Jdi'u, Xvrt^itu^
*the vessels which he might give us,* lb. 17. *'0 rt it ?(>i, vtUofteit lb. 5.
*0r^ ^f (p»ifi ^iX0( iJtxt, rwTf tt'^nXos iyiyttTt WtCayk^vmt ii. 6. 23. Svv
^tt flit it UfAtu {iteu rifMos, c^tp at i i. 3. 6. "Ovu ^ir a-r^rtiyis r**»S t*th
Wv ffT^arvtyot ^a^tKeikou* * i^oht }\ ttx^tr*^ rit uvrt^T^ttmyot iii. 1. 32.
II«^ii;ri0V ^' hfut r«vf v^tt^avi fret,$fMUt i>i at ivttu/At^et fiax^^raTovi ii. 2. 12»
'^tTovtrai . ., Xrat [= trt eit'\ •/ «^;^«»r«f ^fintm^t C/r. i. 2. 8. "Ort V i§a»
v#» iiittv yit0itr§, . . afTtXfifl'M' iL 6. 12. *EyM ^^.iiTM'cv [sra ivari £9} mw-
ftff ^1 ^l** vii. 3. 36. *FJn^iVit a*o l^irevy i^ort yvptta^mt fiwXtsTt i. 2. 7«
Ti »St, Ipn, ^otovfftt^ iirnv [=» ifri) ay] aUfiutrat \ Cyr. iii. 2^. 'E«'«i> [=» S arg)
&t\ 2i waXtt aXt<r^^ ii. 4. 3. 'Evii rtt iitixat, v^oi^afitotr^f irra^at L 5. 2
"Ems flit at «'«(f Tift xt'^f^'^* * ^*'*'^^' [^^ l^tihii it] 2i a^iitat ^ovXtiTat, •
JMixttIf «'«iAr L 4. 8. "Ea^; Rt/^w fv/ttfiti^tiat ii. 1. 2. 'EfTf/^^ ^^ n Xf^paytn^
mtirTatT$ iv. 5. 8. J^tirat ai/Tov, f*ii v^ocfist xariXvrat • ., Vfut it ah'^^ rv/w-
CovXivrrirat 1. 1. 10. W^tt avrovs Karayayct i. 2. 2. Mi;^^i «» x«rarrrry
i. 4. 13.

Notes, (a) The omission of at with the Subj., in sentences like the pre-
oeding, is most frequent in the Ep. poets, and rarest in Att. prose. (A) In
Epic similes, as presenting imagined scenes, the 8ubj, sometimes occuro in rd-
ative clauses ; as, *'£lrr% X.7f rivyitticf, ot pa »vt%t . . Vutrrai P. 109. *£U ^
Zrt 9r»(^t(i/ ^iXay9t H. 16.

( V. ) Complementary.
^■.o07* As the complementary sentencee which it is most important

Digitized

by Google

CH. 5.J IN OOMFLEHTBNTART SHNT^NCES. 8W

here to notice occur in what is termed the arcOh obUqua, it wiB be Booeswrjr
to remark upon the character of this form of discoorae, and upon its distinc-
tion from the oraiio recta.

There are two ways of quoting the words of a person. In
tlie first, we simply repeat his words, without change or in-
corporation into our own discourse ; as, He said^ ** / will go^
This is termed direct quotation, or in Lat., oratio recta.
In the second, we make such changes and insert such connec-
tives as will render the quotation an integral part of our own
discourse ; thu8» He said^ thai he wovld go. This is termed
indirect quotation, or in Lat, oratio obliqua. This dis-
tinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of persons,
and even to general truths and appearances.

NotB. Of these two methoda of quotation, the former is dramatic in its
character, presenting before ns the speaker in the utterance of his own words ;
but the latter is narrative^ simply relating wtiat the speaker has said. This
relation is made in Greek, by the use either of the distinct modes with their
connectives or of the incorporated modes. We have occasion at present to
treat only of the use of the distinct modes. For the use of tbe incorporated
e § 619.

§ 608* In the oratio ohliqua^ a thing is presented not as
actual, but as dependent upon the statement, thoughts, or feel*
ings of some person, and consequently as having some degree
of contingency. Hence it is properly expressed by a contin-
gent mode. This use, however, is confined to the Opt., which
limitation may be explained as follows. The oraiio obliqua^
from the very nature of quotation,.commonly respects the past,
and the cases in which it respects the actual present are too
few and unimportant to require special provision ; while in
those cases, so constantly recurring, in which the past is spoken
of as present, the very vivacity and dramatic character of this
form of narrative forbids the use of a contingent mode. Hence
the Subj. b used in the oratio ohliqua only in such cases as
would admit it in the oratio recta, while, on the other hand, of
the distinct modes.

The optative is the mode appropriate to the oratio obliqtta in
past' time.

With this Opt. Sp is not joined, unless for some additional
reason. Thus^

*H«i» ^yytXt Xiyettf Irt XtXt^ut ttn Si/Svyir/f ra &n^m, a matenger came
tojfing, that SyennesU had left the heights, i. 2. 21. ASrai n^Mratt tthrout^
Ttm tSi9, '0 7ii X^nnvf iTri Ili^r/rr}, trt ^et^et /3«0-/Xt*^ vrc^titur* xr^os rh
wttr^^rw. A/ T% a^rtx^/favro, irt outt XvrttZfia f7if, «XX* a^i^M »w xrafttrmy^
ym* iy. .5. 10. Tli •Tsriv « ^tirv^of on »]fi,v%»tTo^ %t /ih ritt^n^tit*, t<rii^fr« •
•"• A» Xi ^i^'tZ, 9VK &{,**» l^f», " •Ifjto^lafjuu » ** H. Gr. ii. 3. 56. "0 n }>\ v»twt.
ek %nrnf»n9% ii. 1. 23. *Hir^»r# m ftU "EXXuvk, trt fiurtXitu , . l» rtiti fM$y*

Digitized

by Google

8M 8TNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [bOOK m

fifif iffli $MrtXiuf V mZ il»ovn Tirrc^i^rdt^, SVi «« *ExXff»if tix^tf i. 1 0. 5
'"EtytytttextTtf irs b^im/A^T^t iTW iit 3. 4. "^etipXs vafn ^^ Hcxtt iJvmt, srt §
rriXsf i7fi iii. 1. 10. ^H-yvoiSf i n ri ireifftt •?*} iv. 5. 7. *^^vrtifA%*0s ^i, w
^»^it lift iv. 4. 1 7. '£«'i/v#aMT« «'i^} T9V - "Stv^oVf ^rirt^et 9r»xifAt»s ■?» n ^'A-«»
vii. 1. 14. '£x«A.f/ . ., fcfjifcfff itetXatSv fVi^fiUtTett ix^^'^'i *>'P* ^* B-eivu ftlf
tiurit Soph. (Ed. T. 1245. ^%9viv, tl hciCaivMP ii. 4. 24. 'O ^' ix^ki^roi.
ftv, tvt . . ^^tA Xiy9t i. 5. 14. *E/av^a^«y, •» «v^a^at7 Kv^^c (pttif6tT$ i. 10.
16. Tif^eiipi(»fis itetCeiXXu (Hist. Pfes., § 567. a) Tov Kv^ot *^os rav tQiX<pit,
m IriCtfi/XivM »hrif i. 1. 8. See L 6. 3.

§ 609* Remarks. 1.- The Greek, from its peculiar spirit
of freedom, vivacity, variety, and dramatic life (^§ 330,576),
often mterchanges and blends the forms of indirect and direct
quotation, commonly passing from the former to the latter, but
sometimes the reverse. Thus,

A.) A sudden change is often made from indirect to direct quotation.
This change mav be made either («.) after the introductoiy particle ; or
(j3.) in the body of the quotation, commonly after a relative, a parenthetic
clause, or one of the larger pauses, and in the last case with the frequent
insertion of f^»j. Thus, -^ («.) Il^ol^ivs iTsrir, or* " Kvrii •//*<, U ^nrtTs^^
Proxenus said, " / am the very person you inquire for,** ii. 4. 1 6. Oi Ji iTsrav,
tn **ix»99$ i^fAtp*' V. 4. 10. "IrATf &9 litrMiv, Srt ** £ ^ti»^mng, fth Buv/tAa^§
r« Xtyifttvet ** H. CritO, 50 C — (j3.) *'E^$^iix9U( ^, ^ it tSfi^tt •?»»» nytftifm
mlnTv vrafot rtvrtv, Z XvfietivifAi^a r^y ^r^Zl^n** 1. 3. 16. " \.iy$9** c^arsf
^ Xi'f*"-* ^*^ot»4j /lifAtfifiinvs 9ff»f ri vavfAtc^Ms avro) *»6* avraifs nuxn*MTt
xtti fuvf tlXvipxTt** Bk Gr. i. 1. 28. "EXiyif, Sn " i^iSf ^riSvrt . .. *AXX*
iyt^i" 1^, " itxyxdrPfit" * A^tx^itecTdf trt " 9vih &f rturatv iJWw tlf rht ^v^m-
rtav • vfittTf h ^vXXi^xfrK,** t^n, " tl fiovXt^^t, xiytrt ** Y. 6. 37.

^010* B.) Indirect quotation, without losing entirely its character,
often adopts, in whole or in part, the modes and tenses of direct quotation, at
the Pres., Fut., and Perf. ind. for the Opt., the Subj. for the Opt, &c. Thua^
*£<rf} I4«'0y, 0T/ W\ TO CT^artufita iixovrtVt tXtytf, art to vT^aTiufAct i^oii^m^t.
When titey said^ that they [arel ujere come for the army, he replied, that he \t9'
signs] resigned the army (here the regular forms of indirect quotation would be
Uxonv and avromoint while those of direct quotation would be ^xofit» and xvo^L
^ufiUj so that the person of the one form is united with the mode of the other),
vii. 6. 3. "Eyvtit, tn $v Ivvfunrat i. 3. 2. *T«'«>^<« fjth iff, trt oiyu (cf. "Ot*
}l !«■} fietsiXia eiyti) lb. 21. OJr0< iXtyov, on Kv^^f fth ri^xiv, *A^ia7«f ^
wtiptvyats U Ttf g'Tet^f*^ t7ti ii. 1. 3. *H»«» XiyovTtf . . irt oix *^m*( «*''»»
%XX» uvolvyta fi/Aottro ii 2. 15. See iii. 5. 13; vi. 3. 11 ; vii 1. 34. 'E)«.
si4 ^riXov i7v«i, ?ri xi^n^otTon auTov, tl rtf lirt'\pn^i^ot vi. 1. 25, "EXiyf*, in
n^} ffvoiihtit ^xoitf, avtftf, tlTiUf ixetfo) la-ovTm ii. 3. 4. See lb. 6.

§ O 1 1 • 2. The use of the Opt. in the oratio obUqua may extend not
merely to the leading verbs in the quotation, but also to verbs joined with
these by relatives and other connectives (cf. ^ 619. «) ; as, "EXtyn, ort . . stn
. ., V ^ff^%^ ^xottf, * through which they had come,' iii. 5. 1 5. "EXtyov . .,
oTt ^xvTOi «|ia xiyot 2«w^»)f • xtifitMf yk^ i7»», * for it was winter,' vii. 3. 13.
Even^though an infinitive precedes ; as, 'E^m, «yi/» to ^T^etrtufta xark /*irM
r# Tmv voXtfAtttv, on ixti (ixrtXtuf iTjj, * because there was the king,' i. 8. 12.

». In complementary sentences, where floubt is expressed, and a primaiy

Digitized

by Google

CH. 5.] VOLITIVB. — mCORFORATED. 381

tense precedes, the Subf, is «>metiines,iised, especially in the Isi Per$. The
connective is someUmes omitted, and even Uie leading verb itself. Thus, Ov»
9it\ 14 X^tftf'ftfrf rwT^ 'ii Cyr. viii. 4. 16. h9uXu [so. if] kdCmifAan Wilt
thou I take f Soph. Ph. 761. Q'tXttf ^ii»«»/cfvi Id. £1. 80. £7ri n fiouku
^^•vfint i k^ix^t PI. Phasdo, 95 d. AI. Wa^mt^i sm vtm^^t. . . AI2X.
[So. lV»^mtn7t is] *^yi ^irn^H i Bacch. / adviu you to be siient, iEsch. /
60 gUentf Ar. Ban. 1132 (cf. § 537). — The use of the Sul^. in § 595. y
may in like manner be explained by ellipsis.

"^ B. VOLITIVE.

^ 6 1 3* The most direct expression of an act of the will
(§ 329. N.) is by the Imperative mode (% 169. 4). For other
less direct methods, see §§ 597-600, 602. 3, 604. b.

Remarks. 1. From the fondness of the Greeks for passing ftt>m indirect
to direct forms of expression (cf. §§ 576, 609, 670), the Imperat. is some-
times found in dependent sentences ; thus, &vnrif V 'O^ia^rtu • i9^ri fih Xiar
rTt»i, and Oregtei was mortal ; to t/uU [do not grieve] you should not grieve to
excess. Soph. £1. 1172. r^«'\^M it, JSrrt^ £v /3«t/Xiir#i, ;^fi^«r«fifr«Ti, and 1
will propose it in writing, so that if you will, [vote itj you may vote it, Dem.
129. 1. Afi^flM, irt, £9 /aX* iipUvTdti, . . Kririatffuv, to show them, that, what
they desire [let them gain they must gain, Th. iv. 92. *£irai>i^«r*l ^AXiv,
rm IxfAuytimv rmjf fiauf 11 ^(irtt Iv rwf hf-^v k^irns* xiUim PI. Leg. 800 e.
Otvf »v9 I ^^i9S9 \ Do you know then, what [do] you shvuUl do f Eur. Heo.
225 (cf. 07r#* sSt I ^^ak0Ut \ Id. Cycl. 131 j. OZri* if ^•'m^st \ i,vri r£v i/^-
ftifttp 7r JifrduMV^sv, nlrti »(7t murif fiaim Soph. CE)d. T. 543. *Axx' sJg'f
t fMt fVfMT^al^in Eur. Heracl. 451. 07r^« yi/» i /tot yin^^t \ Do you know
then, what [let be done] mutt be done for me 9 Id. Iph. T. 1203. 4>f/X«»«i/r.
«7 XiyMr«f» Hdt. L 89.

^ O 1 3* 2. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Im-
perat. is sometimes used with vr»(, or tU, or both, instead of the 3d Pers. ; as,
yji^%t )iv^ «'Sf vvff^inif * r«^ivi, «'s7i • r^f y^«»fff rit fA9t 2«tm, Come hither *
every man alias, bird^ of you I Shoot, smite. Let some one give me a sUng^
Ar. Av. 1186. ^ikmrrs «'«# rn lb. 1191. Irat rtf, iUmyytXki Eur. Bac
173. See § 500. a.

3. Such familiar imperatives as &yi, i/Vt, JUi, and ^i^i, may be used in the
smgular, as interjections, though more than one are addressed ; thus, 'Ayt ih,
i»9vr»n ApoL 14. EiVi ^«<, r/ «'«r;^fr , ivl^tt \ Ar. Pax, 383.

4. An act of the will maj respect either the real or the ideal. Hence in
Greek, as in other languages, the Imperat. may be used to express supposition
or condition ; thus, ^'O/^tt ti tlfnrit f^t, but yet [let it have been aaid by me]
suppose me to ham etdd, Mem. iv. 2. 19. Hxtvrn n yit( . ., umi Xr. Soph.
kat, 1168.

C. Incorporated.

§614. I. The Greek has great freedom in respect to
the employment of distinct or incorporated sentences, and in
respect to the mode of their incorporation. Thus (a.) a de-
pendent clause may be preserved entirely distinct ; or (/?.) its
9uhjtci or most prominent suhslantive may be incorporated in

Digitized

by Google

WBBt sniTAJC. — 9SE or moves. [boos in.

tiie leading clause, leading k otherwise disdnct; or (/.) ill
verb may be also incorporated as an Infinitive; or (d.) its verb
may be incorporated yet more closely as a Participle. The
union oAen becomes still closer by an attraction, which renders
the subject of the Inf. or Part, the same with the subject or en
adjunct ofAe principal verb. This attraction has th^ forms ;
in the first (c), the principal verb adopts the suliject of the de-
pendent clause ; in the second (£.), the. Inf. or Part, referring
to the same person or thing with the principal verb, adopts the
same grammatical subject ; in the third (i^.), the Inf. or Part
adopts for its grammatical subject, an adjunct of die principal
verb. E. g.

«. Ilirlf r«, U"! r« HlM»»tf vr^mrtv/MM ^n h KtXini^ iTv, he peteehed, that
th$ army of Memo wom now in GUcia, i. 2. 21. Afo^«»r«f, In iwi Tti^0 t^**'
Tw C)T. i. 2. 6. n«(ir«iMi{#fr«, htmf ttark ue^v^ iwCtiJLMm Th. ii. 99.

' fi, "H^r^iTtf ri Tf ^litmut sr^irtuftOj trt n^n U KjXsmie^ if>, he perceived the
army of Meno, thai it woe now m GUcia, i, 2* 21 v. L '£x/v«v«-« nnsj it
ytym^Mofi Vect LI. See §§ 425. 4, 551. — « and j3. For exaimJf^
•ee § 551. N.

y, MpimjtifAiJff ethrcvf f*iy» 9'afk /SftriXiT A«^i/y ^V9mr$at^ peteeiving Aem
to have great influence wi^ King Dariue, Th. vi, 59. Tlm^trmstm^tT* ^teihh
Th. iU. 110. lltr^$vs irifAiru Wtv»»iru9 (£c 4. 6. *HA^if . . ^•ntut t^ «s-
r^thi Ages. L 36.

%. Oh Ivfttfim . . el mlviiriat wu^mfAtmt, I eamnat perceive yam attempting^
fi. 5. 4. n«^tr»itMe^fr« yxf v$^iuvif*t9t H. Gr. iv. 2. 41 (§ 583. a)-
'^mfiypi rtfec l^ovfra ii. 5. 2. 'E(;^«/ti^« . . fisn^nrttrtf r»vrots vii. 7. 17.
— y and ^. "Eie^w mvTMt era^trmrut if rtiitt Amntiaift^vitPf AtUf «wf fAe
lymknfUiTmt vi^ ^n^t iifXdyn^ftif^t/Sf . . ^Xmtm ^i Tb. L 72.

f. For examples, see § 551.

X' *E9«fti{$ffUf i^M tStmt [bt ^^Sf i^i0ttt flMti], we thenght that we were war*
thy, Cyr. vii. 5. 72 (cf. 'Sofs.iXu/As yei( IfMvrh Itxiwat IU v. 1. 21). N«^i
. . ati^a otyafin diraxrtiput [=3 ^taurow d*6Kr*if$9Ta[, consider j^mrattf pttttimg
to death a good man, vi. 6. 24. OT/moc/ Jvci rifiiief i. 3. 6 (cf. Oiftett fuv, iv Y
iyMy XfifM /ti PI. Charm. 173 a). 'O^^ fiU ilafta^atttf Eur. Med. 350 (cf.
'0^*1 ^t /I i^yew infof H^ti^yav/uiftip Soph. Tr. 706). Oitx & K^urrttv niu iS»,
retVTa ir^ai/xaXfTr* T»hf rufnrut^ «XX' &n^ tZ Ifhtt \eitfrn HrrttM mt«,, ravrm
i^n^X^ Cyr. i. 4. 4. A^Xm r/^v t«» vXevrav Ar. Plut. 587 (cf. 'Av^nvm
/AOffif ayniuv iireitTttt wfKt itiriat tf^i lb. 468). Sa^w vnfftt!* (pmiuif W^Xig
tig V«r riywrSoph. EI. 23. See §§ 627, 633. — { and ). 'E»^» •« mm*
T»^^ov9Ttfy »»} raht vr^rmrat «;^^«/tfiy0t;f , they saw that they were uneueceeefiu
and the soldiers dtspleased^Th. vii. 47.

ff. "E^d^iv 9U9 ecvroTf rvrxtvavetfAivotf «3 *^X^* "^^ 0«'Xir<B/*iMif «'^«itMti, H
thertfore seemed best to tiwrn^ that having packed up what they had, and equipped
themselves in fuU armor, t/iey should advance, ii. 1. 2 (§ 627. «). E? >4f
f(»90V9T»s Sfifut 99U narny^it, for your eye proves that you feel kindly, iEich.
Ag. 271 (§ 633).

^ ^ i «^* RvMXBXB, 1. An especial variety of oouatnietioB it oiK

Digitized by VjOOQIC

OH. 5.J IMGORPOSATED. ' 883

mr^-ed with flvdl words is ^umim, nyymttuM^ titm, Tf—iit *tfu. '£7^ 0m
w69uim £bc. r<] • . ^^t m9i^rmf4tM9 (v. L awrT«/*t>f ), / [know with joa
your rising] rtmtmbtr jfomr rimng ^arfy, (Ee. 3. 7. l,tnl^tL9t y«t^ to7t ^y . »
^'lyiMf/Afyoif (o. il TtfVf . • y%y%*ftfttUM/t)i ^•vt ^ • . ilXn^irat Isocr. 319 6*
Sv99tia Xfutv^tf 0»<pU if Pi' Apol. 21b. *£^avr^ y«^ \tivifhuf tutu i^trrm/At*
9if lb. 22 cL 'E^v7« IvMf^o, «« . . Xkym lb. Ion, 533 c "Enitut fUnUui
iSfttij jfou teem to bt kim§, Cyr. L 4. 9. 'EaitutTt rtr^arMri ^AJCA 11 «-«X/rfMMf
niifuvttt *7oa seem more pleased,' H. 6r. vi. 3. 8. . "EUom^ «Xiv^n fA^nxi^')
you Mem like one who hat tpoken the truths i. e. you teem to have tpoken tfte tmthf
PI. Ale 124 b. "Ettxi yit^ mrwtf etlfsyftm IvrrJifrt PI. AfM)l. 26 e. "Optntti
Wm-^ «v» iftiif mpfXtynx'*^! Id. Meno, 97 a. "O/mm j(r«» ^twuiT^uv (t. L
Bmtf/AMi«fTtf), they teemed to be wondering^ iii. 5. 13.

2. The contingent particle it may be joined with the Inf. and Part, whee*
ever it would be Joined with the distinct modes of which they supply the pla(«.
The Inf. and Part are then commonly translated into Eng. by the potential
mode (§ 588). Thus, £< Vt nt l^et^-mmfiftn it •Urat, \f any me thinkt that
he ootdd be deceived^ y. 7. 11 (§ 604. a). *A^n »m ti$uT7i* at ytivai vi. 1.
31. Ti Jif MfAiim itm0u9 (of. W »lifc^0m wti^tehtt) 1 iii. 1.17. See vi. I. 20,
and § 595. ^ *CU »Srtt m^iytvi/Mft §9 tZv rnvrt^rmrttTStt *** though ht
would thut prevail over hit opponenttf L 1. 10. 'Xl; &Xo9T0t Av rw x^i'^ ^«
2.8.

^ O 1 0» 3. From the faitimate union prevailing between the Inf. or
Pirt, and the principal verb of the sentence, a word property modifying the
one is sometimes placed in immediate connection with the other. We remarlc,
in particular, — (a) Such adverbs as ifim, mvr'ma, tv^vst ileiipfih And ^irtt^^
Joined with |he Part instead of the principal vert) ; as, "A/ut ravr* il^itv itA-
rm [saying this, be at the same time rose up], at toon at he had taid thit, he
rote tip, iii. 1. 47. "Owttt ftn, Sfut kw4vfier»nros •rw titi^tHTWy ^tarxtititvOrtu
n yl^yx^ P^* Phsdo, 77 b. Ev^hf tSt /At^fUtt i Ki^Xof nrvrnT^tre, immediate^
fy, therefore, t^nm teeing me, Cephalmt tahded me, Fl. Rep. 328 e. *Hv ethro7$
hrtx^ffh ri fitra^v wo^iv^ftittyt ftmn Mm* fUin wmtt, it wat their cuttomy
tvkUe marching [in the mean time], neiiker to eat nor drink, Cyr. viii. 8. 1 1 . —
(6) A partide joined with the principal verb instead of the Inf. or Part, par-
ticularly it, and 9bn with (pn/M • as, 2vy i/uTt ftlt it $lfint then ripuHt ^oith
yoM, I think that I thould be honored, i. 6. 6. X^^ifttt at liUaut iitat v. 6. 1.
Ov» tparmt }ita$, theg taid they would not go, l, 3, I. '£«'n^cr« aitrit, u 09 Xs'
rtvM. OuM i^n [so. iwXiTtvut], * He said iVo,' v. 8. 5.

4. In the use of the incorporated modes with adjuncts, there is often a union
of two constructions ; as, 'AyytXkt 2 * i^n^ ir^wnfiiU [uniting &yytXX% ^ '
7g»f and iyytXJa )', t^ntt 9'^0^rJti(\ and announce [with an oath, adding it],
adding €m oath, Soph. El. 47. "On fiakXtit hnsm atat(»uf»it»vi rait $mXt4t
Cyr. ii. 3. 17. Ti SifUit hnnsSt x(^'»^^»* [uniting ri nfiHt h^rt^^t and ri
StifriWi nfiTt ;^^^a^/«i] i [What shall you Want of us to do with us?] In
tohat thall you with to employ utf v. 4. 9. ^Eri^i/^i^ rUt atl^Zt rmt U rnt
M^rMT Hfgivaeiai Th. v. 1 5.

^ 0 1 #• 5. The Infl and Part may be used impertontzBy, as wdl aa
flie inite modes (§ 546) ; thus, "CUrt not ahrtf ttiraf^ixut ii. 6. 9. Mir«.
^Xm mirtug PI. Phndo, 113 e.

6. PVom the familiar association of the Ace with the Inf. (§ 626), and the
Qen. with the Part ($ 638), words commonly governing other cases are often
1 by these in connection with an Inf. or Part Thus, *Tfimt ^^H»u

Digitized

by Google

384 SniTAX. — V8B OF MODES. [bOOK Ifl

mm} ift^^itnmt mmi ^^yfUMri^ttt iTnu UL 2. 1^ (cf. *k.ymiut « wfuw w^^^mmm
Htmt iiL 2. 11 ). TlttfayytiXms riit m'f^Tnv ;^i>j«rr»» •«'f##s4 Cyr- iL 4. 3 (set
§§ 402, 424. 2). O^r ilx^ira mvrZv vXtf^uwrtn, he mnu not at aU ^yL*rm
with their being at woTj L 1. 8 (cf. Stv^itf )t ilx^trt min-^ Tii 5. 7. Set
§§ 372. m, 406> 'iU X^<ftT0s U9«^^ i^w Soph. Tr. 394 <§§ 375. 377. 2)
Sometimes the Aoc. ocean for another case with the Part., if its sse is analo-
gous to that of the Inf. ; as, SI ^r sJ ir^«rr«*r W$xm^^ Soph. J^, 138.
"Htinv , . fix«^MW« *t Id. PhU. 1314. Cf. § 406.

^618* IL The relations of dependent sentences are ex
passed with greater explicitness by the distinct modes vyith
their connectives ; but with greater brevity^ and often greaier
energy and vivacity^ by the incorporated modes. There are
few of these relations which cannot be expressed by the latter.
Hence, in the wide range of their use, these modes may ex-
press the subject^ the direct or indirect object^ the time^ cause^
purpose^ manner^ means^ condition^ restriction, preliminaries^
result, &c., of the verbs with which they are connected.

Rkmarkb. 1. The use of both the incorporated modes is far more <
sive in Greek than in English. Hence we often translate the GredL Inf. and
Part, by finite verbs with connectives (thaty when, while, aa, and, if, althomgh,
because, eince, in order that, &c). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom,
the Inf. and Part, are interchanged in transhition ; as, T« ^ r»n pixmv fiitn
tfirc ttiivai fSfi'Tdt Sv m^vkmrnrm Xm/itCmvutj but he thought that he alone knew U
to be moit easy to seize the unguarded property of friends, ii. 6. 24. n^Arq-sMi?
«'«^' $7f iC«i;Xfr« \m»To* ^tXtifSmt, to hold the first, jdace with thou by whams he
unshed himsdf beloved, Cyr. viii. 2. 26.

^»

§019* 2. The nse of the 'incorporated modes, particularly the Inf.,
is very great in the oratio obliqua (§ 607), sometimes («.) extending even to
Bubsidiar}'^ danses (cf. «^ 611. 2); and being iiiterchanged and blended not
only (j3.) with other forms of the or€Uio obliqua, but also (y.) with those of
the oratio recta. Thus,

«. TlcXXohf ^m/n *A^ieiTof iivett Tii^ems \mvr»u fiiXviefat, »ts svn mftcg'^i^Smt
ii. 2. 1. "E^n ^, lirij^^ tfiTix/SnvaM rrif ^u;^hi m'»($v*f^»t • . i/V tsu-sv • ., b
S m ,^ff iivmi ^m^fiturt Fl. Bep. 614 b.

/3. 'AyyiXXtt Ai^xvXXi^Af, Srt fi»^if rt uZ Aamtienfiavtst, met} murSt /U*
T%i*mven SMTu H. Gr. iv. 3. 1. *Vls f^9 tT^etrnynvsvrtt \f/A . . fAtiius ufuHv Xs^
yiru . . • i$ti iTiigsfAat i. S. 15 (§ 640). *A.*nyyiXXo9 vSf YLv^m, oTt ftmvr^m
tin t^'iov uya^m, 'U» , . fth av ifTiXtiViiv Cyr. v. 2. 4. See § 628.

Note. 'Or/ and if are sometimes even followed, after an intervening sen-
tence, by an Inf. or Part., instead of a finite verb ; as, ETrt II, en, '^ i^uimv
vA^tvrm n tr^mrua. Xn\^, thivs mm't^i/t^ptif mitrov** iii. 1. 9. 'Evtf/Kiriv «n,
tS rs svrof ^eiht^ avTSs &9 XmdTt Cyr. V. 4. 1. 'Kyi yet^t u> l^f sn, ms
^MtVTst irtt^M, . • Ifil %\tai vvrmf %vm Fl. Gorg. 453 b. Atr4ai*9f*.at 9Z9 0sm
• •, in, im'oo'* &9 ip^ . ., ev ivvafAivsv lb. 481 d. Vtovi 21 i KXt^vv xmi i
£^fifA6riitnf, 6rt, %l Jta) i^offn^vt /AmXXav Whm^tvri, 2ta^6m^vifof*U»ut mursug Th.
Iv. 87.

y, 'E^n "i^fXm vro^iuiriat . .. ''E.yi, yi^," 1(pn, "•I3«" iv. 1. 27. Kxl-
mvifot, "MaX« f^aXtty** l^u, " J/a^rja^a^iwf tixM - Xiyttv yk^ 'Aym^iCtsv srs «&»
IwtTKittot ttt). . ."O^w^ yt titriifett,** Jf^n, " WtXtutf" vii. 1. 39.

Digitized

by Google

OH. 5.] INFINITIVE. 3B5

H and y. *A«i«e/Nir^ 9Vi **«»«»! *ACf«««^«v, 1;^/^ M^m, M rf E*^e^r«
ftyyy, hfUn I»i7 «*(«! rcM's ^9vX%v0i/A$ia* i. 3. 20.

(i.) 7%6 Infinitive.

<3 630* I. The general rule for the construction of the
Infinitive is the following : —

Rule XXX. The Infinitive is construed as
a neuter noun (§ 445), Hence,

(a) The Inf. may be the subject of any word which would
agree with a noun ; whether appositive^ adjective^ article, pro-
noun, or verb, {b) The Inf. may depend upon any word
which would govern a noun ; whether substantive, adjective^
verb, adverb, or preposition, (c) The Inf. may be used, like
a noun, to express a circumstance ; particularly such as are
denoted by the instrumenkil and modal Dot, (§415), and by
the Ace. of specification (§ 437). Thus,

^tuyuf mvr$7f it^^tiXiwrt^n Wrtv n h/An, to fly U »afer for them than for tcf^
lii. 2. 19. *dt $i» «x«X«(/#<B ttm ri n ivt^nt'tff^ai ka) Xvmt rht yi^D^etf ii. 4.
19. AiVif* Iviznnt /mXm r«4 Soph. Ant. 233. Ouht^ tJiv Icr [= rtaurit
lr«w, 9tn\ k»M/ffmty there is nothing [such as] Wte hearing, or, it it best to hear,
Ar. Av. 966. OvSiw «r«f r« tiurif l^mr^v PI. Gorg. .447 C. '£» ym( rif x^m*
rir* leri mmI ri XtifiZann v. 6. 32. Tl^o^a^if . . rod ^^^«/^i/y rr^arit/^ii«,
pretext for attembling an army, i. 1. 7. II^A^Ari* er^ariwn W) r^hs 0«f.
CmUuf H. 6r. iii. 5. 5. *A9vtvd^x**^ ^* «»^«}( niv^Dvat ii. 5. 17. "A^^avTis rtiS
^tmC»i9U» i. 4. 15. Tv;^f| r««3* Wi^Tti, B^vfuiffeu fti* a^/tc, r^witif yi fiitrn
Tfit \fint •un a,\i» Soph. CEd. T. 776. lS^»tXv<rui rw xctltit isirtovr»f i. 6. 2
(§ 347). Oltx IxtiXtn fiaciXivf t§ Kv(«v trr^drivfiet ^taSaiutt i. 7. 19.
*Airtyft0M{9tu T0U fid;^t<r^ett lb. A/a r*v i^'io^xtT* ii. 6. 22. *Hy«XA.ir0 r^
l^axraTff iita^ffett, rtf ^rXira,eia$ ^^it/)n Ih. 26. M«y^«»iiy yet^ lixofAtv Soph.
CEd. C. 12. 4>«C0v^fVM «v;^ n/tiif /tov»t, aXXk xa) ri nxrxvurtlv iii. 2. 19«
Am» t» w»XX$vt %x**^ v9ni^iT»t x&u )i« rnv WtptiXttav i. 9. 27. 'Xlf ^9Xtf>***
ri lxm9M t7n^K9 L 1. 5. 'Af«fi;^«v«f i/riX^tTv rr^artv/AXTt i. 2. 21. <i>xytT»
)fiv«f, a terrible fellow to eat, vii. 3. 23. Akm; Xf^'iiv ii. 5. 15. *0^fv rrv-
^^v^f j^y, xm.) r^ ^*»9^ ^fX^ ^* ^* ^* H^iirfi ya^ is vv^avft tle«^^t Soph.
Kl. 664. *£<r2 yk^ ratf wave) ^^^rtl tlertt afiwutiat Th. iv. 10. *P^Tai tk
if r0 ^Xm^nrfiett Id. vii. 67. flivrii ^ ;^d^/MM fAuf^n Ix^fios xXv%if .^E^soh.
Ag. 266. nxi« Xiyiiv lb. 868. JAZios xv^tmvt^^s Xiyu^ Eur. Iph. A. 318.
*il, <rX^v ytntuxof wttxa er^xTtiXxTuv, t£xX* evih, S xdxtfrt rtfMt^itt ^iXen
Eur. Or. 718. Ovfi* tfAtn tvih •ur te§9 fi^trtTf, wXh if»f*»^eci, * in nothing
excq>t name,' Eur. Ph. 501.

^ 03 1* Notes. «. In some cases it seems indifibrent whetiier the
Inf. is regarded as the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb nsed
impersonally. See § 546. /3, y,

fi. In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act. is often used, where the Inf. Faee,
might have heen itsed with reference to a nearer, more explicit, or more natu-
nl sabject ; as, 'tvwruf «'«(i.'^m«-«, giving himself up Jot beating] to be beaiem^

Digitized by VjOOQIC

880 SYNTAX — USB OP MODES. [bOOK t^

FL Ihrg. 480 d (cf. Um^drx^ . . 5ff««t«^rNM H. Obgmtk. Ifr^ b> ITa^
•^ftrif H/uli «^0^r tS CMiiV ii. 8. 22. Aihtft fiinuXmrn hJufmt fi^if^g Btf
Ph. 25. Tm'V /^r«if IfTuyxm^up, the eaakd tkingi to meat wHl%, Idea*. L ^ 9.
*A»wfm ftlf Ifmt Tirlv Mn, ^nin*»* )* «v» m^vf*^$^»9 iBOcr. 265 c

^ 03 3* Remarks. 1. The article is often prefixed to
the Inf. to gire promineDce to its substantive character, or to
define the relation which it sustains as a substantive, by mark*
ing the case. If the Inf. is governed by a preposition, the in
Sertion of the article is required. The article is oflen prefixed,
especially in the tragedians, where it would not hate been ex*
pected, and is oflen in the Ace. (of direct object^ effect^ or
mecification)^ where another case might have been expected.
Thus,

Ti )(^ «&» iiiiXnrmf, [wOIed not the douig it] were not willing to deUi
Soph. CEd. C. 442. Tlt/00fuu ri ^^f» Id. Ph. 1252. *'0f n »«>.v'ru ri i^
lb. 1241. 'EXitiif , , ri /iui vu$M Soph. Ant. 235. Tiv|ir«4 r« ft^ ^^mTv
lb. 778 (cf. § 370). YLa^'^t X ilUraf^ ri l^^v lb. M05. 'Eyi, aTTtt . .
e-i gi kKfn^Uafiai PI. Lacb. 190 e. T« rt'/Ah j^XM^tv lr§iftu, and ready te
leave the Hght, Soph. El. 1079. T« ftikv wf^frmXm^tffiTt . . ^'(ciSf^ Th. S.
68. T« nySf »v wHftt Eur. Iph. A. 655. 'Eyit y»( UCmXm ftU eu^^fuu
hin^p, ri /^h 6m»(vfm t mv0tt mthw/ieu raiXmt lb. 451. For other example^
aee $$ 620, 623.

Now. The Inf. with t»w niiMb Gen. of motive ($ 872) it partieiikr^
freqoent with a negative ; aa, T$v ^ rtm$ inrn^m^ m order that worn wemg t»-
fMT^ Th. i. 23.

% 633« 2. The Inf., both with and without the article, is
used in a great variety of expressions which may be referred
to the Ace, of spedjkation^ and the adverbial Ace. When
thus employed, it may be termed the infinitive of specifica-
tion, and the adverbial infinitive. In these uses it is van*
ously translated, and in some of them it is often said, though
not in the strict sense of the term (§ 343. N.), to be absohde.
Thus,

*£» hiftmrif r§v wmrifotf, hxuf I^m, from aome ni^ vifum, [according t*
the eeemingl at it eeeme to me^ or methinhsy Soph. EL 410. 'Axx* timm^m ^U%
4^, Imt to pueeSf JoyouSt Id. (Ed. T. 82. *Ey J yit( it fit vatrtty y$yMigxu9
mmXit Ear. Med. 228. 'E; ri Ax^lCit [^a»(ic£st § 449. fi] unTt, to epeai
eorreetfy, Th. vi. 82. 'Oxiy«u ittt erXtUvt ««rt«r«yAriv, Aooe elam. [to want
little] almoet a greater number^ H. Gr. ii. 4. 21. Mix^d? hTf Isocr. 70 e.
*Oxiyo» [sc. ^cTy] atS^m, tUmost all, PI. Ph«dr. 258, e. Ka) ^u^w so. ltl*1
»aK^7909 i^ir(ec;^nXt0-it Cyr. i. 4. 8. *Ef ^itfv vd^trf* ttt K^Ufv, ri vftirmf
Moi ri /3«»XiM/f Soi^ CEd. T. 1416. For other examples, see $§ 620^ 622.

Note. The use of tttat as the Inf. cf tpecificatumj or the adverbial Inf^
will be particnlarij remarked, («.) with Utit, chiefly in negative sentenoen ;
O.) with some adverbe and prepoeUiona, followed by their easee, chiefly pr«oeded
by r<. Thus, Oitri rvtHnmt At ^Pti^eififi* U^» iTvAi, nor wo»'ld I pnme fmlm
■^ «iir engagemente^ [as to the being wilting] to far at depemde y^^ ntyotem miM

Digitized by VjOOQIC

bH. 5 ] ncFiNiTivB. 88J

Cyr. t. 9. to. OH) (Sf«r l«i^ i^ ^ksttM ^M^ix^u ' i^flUbg^** lb* 0* S* l^
T« vM i7hw, w I* <ib« fpow beinf] ;97«iM( jto* •/ affmn,for ikepnasntt Hi. 2.
87. Ta /Kiv W/M^y tlfMiyfor to-day, PL Grat. 396 d. T« »*r«K r«»r«» i7nb».
oc lo lA« $Uuatum of affairs wiih re$fect to Atm, i. e. to/ar a» r^ards him, i. 6.
9. Ta Wi roirnt iTmm, 90 far at Upentk upon thne, Lys. 180» 41* T« M
r^Sr iTirdM Th. ir. 28.

§ 634. 3. Plbonasm and Ellipsis. The Inf. (a.) k
sometimes redundant^ and (/?.) is sometimes omitted. It (/.)
not unfrequentiy depends jpon a word omitted, or implied in
another Verb, especially in indirect quotation. Thus,

(«.) lA^tt kfrthltmw»9 %x^* ^ return give* [to hHV«] pleature. Soph. (Ed.
C. 232. AJrn^fiMi h r ti ftmit^h yi^mt Km^^t Id. ij. 825. The Inf. added
for tiw sake of expresnng an idea more fuUy or precisely is termed the Inf
^pesegeUe (Iwilnynrinit), — (fiJ) EiV ^ ^Xmfua* fit^Xaftm [sc. Hvms] At. Ran.
1279. '£»iXivri . . r«tv tfy)i»« i*-) tm ^fifm/^imw H. Gr. ii. 8. 64. n&^ i
'O^vmt [ec. aSvm CMffrci}, Or<mte$ [said that he had so done] oMoitod^ L 6.
7. -^ (y.) 0/ % r^rrtif ixiXiv** • th yk^ lit tv9»r0tu vt^utiwttu [so. lf«0'«y],
fcce (%ted^ Aim Attt IAcm; yi)r-[they nid that] tA^ wett tmabk to proceed, ir.
6.16. S6eTiL7. 19.

§ 63S« 4. The Infl oAen forms an elliptical eotmnand^
request^ counsel^ salutation^ exclamation^ or question^ as,

2^ f$4» ft^uf [so. l/ix«], do^on [/>feaM to] tea me, PL Soph. 262 e. Hi^
1^ mlrmwimt «vtfr*ry» do not blame me far theee, lb. 218 a. 07« ^ rfXiiC<^
JEaoh. Pr. 712. 6>m) «'«AiWM, ^ ^ ^A.tMif rv;^!?* [sc )«rt] I P« ^ocb </
theeiiy.O [pnnrt] IM /suy moI/o/; mio sAnwy / Id. Sept 253 (cf. ^Xl Zf»,
)^ /*! rUaf$m ^#y «'«r^f Id. Cho. 18). N/k«, l^ynw, . . ^iriat r^^rm*
•» il^, O Vietoryf befriend, grant that we majf erect a trophy, Ar. Lys. 817.
Kmi <r«^rritNu iTAM*/ [sc. Urn, wn^mni, or ^sT], a)ui kt it be impreseed upon
eterjf one, Th. yL 84 (cf. llm^nrr^rm )• nu »n} rah lb. 68). KHP. *Ax«^.
•n, Xif • r«W iwXirnf . . iriiNu [sc. ntXiitrm, ht, or ;t^. Herald. Seary ye
ptofU ; U ie ordered that the hoplitee depart, or <A« hopHtee mutt depart, Ar. Ar.
448. Tiphtx^rrm . . mmrmUut T. 8. IS. Ta»1«r»« ;^«4(i<» [Se. »iXl&t»], 1
bid Ion hail, PL Ion, 680 a. *EfA ^'mhTt rdik [sc tuth lert], ftut That I
ehotdd euffer ttuA Ainge [is hofriUe], aiaet ifisch. Earn. 887. *il fianXiv,
nirtftp Xiyup . . 4 nyf9 [sc x(^ <* miXtSus'} i Hdt. L 88. TA ^A.«i, ••J/
l^MO t s. 481.

NoTBS. «. In exdamatioa, tin artick is nsoally prefixed ; as, ^tS, ri s«)
AtfCirr v-^r^yftm rtMii* Af^^ I Ah, the hearing <A« voice of weA a man /
tfopfa. Ph. 284. Tnt rvxntt T« ipi vh nXnfifrm hv($ rvx^t Mg iU4ucht
That I thoutd happen now to have been tmnmoned hither t Gyr. 11. 2. 3 (^ 872.
C). nEI20. Ta V I^U JMf^tif mtiifitfn, rh iiXiat I «l«v •^/•X/tTv rriUi«
«'Xf7> 1} ;^<%«/ ET. Ti V i/^ MtXcif wtJSfitPtf, rhtUfu^ewt kvfrwihnnu
rtk bex^i rm }n»rfiXM I Ar. At. 6.

/k In a fttw poatie passsgoi, the In£ foOowa mi yd^ot iSiu to eocprMi wish
(ft $$ 697, 600. 2) ; as^ a; 7<^ • . Ix^f % 811. See m. 876.

^ 6d6. IL The mibjeU of the Jkf is very often, either
pioperly or by attraction (§§ 425. 4, 614), the ditrMl obf9€t of

Digitized

by Google

388 STlfTAX. USE OF MODES. f BOOK nx

a preceding verb, and cooseqnendy in the Ace, Henoe hem
arisen an association between this case and the Inf., which has
led to the following rule.

NoTB. The Inf., on the other band, extenshrdy. constitutes an indirect ob
jeet at the verb or other word on whidi it depends. From the preTalenoe of
this ose appears to have arisen the reeemblanoe in form of the Greek anc
Lat. Inf. to the Dat., and the nse of the prepodtuMis to and 21c before the Int
fai Eng. and German. Thus, IIiv^Mti ro fuitrn Xiyuv, had persuaded the
prophet [to the saying] to mjf, vL 4. 14. TtHn ^vyaiat UiXfvrs rv» «vr^
€TfMTtitritu, he hmoited the exilee [to the serving] to eerve wi^ him, L 2. 2.

Rule XXXI. The Subject of the Infini
TiTE is put in the Accusative ; as,

he requested that Aeee atiee ehouid be gioen to himj rather than that Tissaphemm
ehould rule tham, L I. 8. Ej*iitttuu9 o»m tCM/X^w*, u^i A^«v ti weifuv tUrrtmg^
did not mA to imeur the rish [that they should soffer any thing] of their suffer*
img from hunger, Th.hr. 15. Nuvv ^em^n hrifuvn nXt^in^eu Id. iiL 2. 4^
9$\' tl r*^*}, . . 3««tff uui ati^mwt rnt u»9ttia,9 0wi;^U9 FL Giorig. 507 e.

§ ff37« RKMABini, 1. nils rule applies to the subject of the In£
touiidered tia^Jjf «• such. If, on the other hand, («.) the sabject of an Inf.
has a prior gramwuMtical relatiom, it may be in any case which this pricn- rela*
tion reqoires. If it is the same with the subject of tbe prindpal ymh, it is
addom repeated, except for special emphasis or distinction (§ 614. ^) ; and is
. then commonly rq>eated (as in other onphatie repetitions) in the same case
(cf. § 499). Not nnfrequently (/3.) there is a mixture of constructions whick
may be referred to etUpns or amacoluthon. Thna,

u. ^Hx^o ivi rnu van ^t^aitran ra^an ittau, I came to one of Anae who avert
Aou^ to be wiaey PI. Apol. 21 b. T«v; au^tvi i^rtr^t'^^arras kuk^ dvau, asAi
wiU permit no one to be bad, iiL 2. 31. NtJv rai tit^Tiv, i Stta^aiv, «»2^) ye
»tr#«i vii. 1. 21. *OftaXayuf aZf m^i \ftti Stitnat \f=^ uitxat rt] ytytvnr^au %
Do you confeee then [to have been unjust] that you have been unjust to me f i.
6. 8. Taura V ivaiu Ix rau ;^«Xi4*«f clyci, and this he effected by being severUf
iL 6. 9. 'I<Br#«M a^itras ra r^avfiai ^n^t, he says that he lumself healed the
wound, i. 8. 26. 'O ^ iTariy, art ffw%ig^ar$au fiavkatraf t^' ^ //tnTt rnvrif Tain
"EtXXtipaf mUtuuVf fitnrt lutivavf naiiut rat alxiats iv. 4. 6. N«/»j^Uf nfunt
fti* JB» f^f r#»i r«v, avras $« Tvv'nirsir 1 naU hftaif fUr a^a^n^iu^iau rMr, rai
^ avU aSrat ^uur^riau » Dem. 580. 9. See § 614. ^.

/3. Attfjcuc/ UfitSfj £ aitiftt ^ixurvau, rak itnauu [sc Ufitaf"] ^^^t0$Lr$miy Iv-
0vfiiavf*ivavs, I entreat you, JudgeSf [that you would Tote] to voU what ts
right, reJUcting, Lys. 118.2. Ketnav^yau /mw ym^ Uri, n^ivr kitaiainlf
0'r^»<myav Zi, fut^^a/Attat ra7s waX.tf*ia4f Dem. 54. 1. Ov yn^ Sf ^(it TaS K»->
^av T^a^rav, t^avrat fin ^tiateu i. 2. 11. 2v/e«C«vXiVii r^ Stva^aivTif lX#«v-
r a iiV AtXpauf [sc 2xt7y«f] avanatvai^au r^ Bt^, he advises Xenophon [thai going
to D. he should consult] to go to Delphi and consult the god, iiL 1. 5. "E^n
aiiraTf, ^^a^Xetnatf »«r«mfrsvr«f evynaiXiTt iii. 2. 1. Twf «'tX«>«.
rTmtt vaU-t watf^yyiXXi ltny»vXMfa.i9avf n9au, . . naii ravg Talarar l«»-
MxMatt V. 2. 12. or? i^ &zx^: ^We?i», « /34er<X<4»f v/lri* Jhu, U n^Te^g
W pvnt lmm9ait PL Gorg. 492 b. ''Hi w-i^irTi ^» rrf«u» wXauram i

Digitized

by Google

CH. 5.] iNFiNiTiyE. dSIr

Mtvfmf Soph. EI. 959. 'Evvlrw r\ [for which f»i might have been used, if
aDowed by the metre] r^ nn^uy/Aart^ Z^ wpaT^rati IfAftivuff . . i»r- itrs yni
T^^y Af»rif f*iJifro^i Id. (Ed. T. 350.' See § 459.

2. Cases of special attraction and anacolathon likewise occur in connection
with the Inf. ; as, '£Xiri^«r . • $vi* Sv avrit^ tvSi tl [for T»ut\ l^ ttyrdUf «*«!/-
rir#«i Hdt. L 56. T«v# ti iiit»»^iv»a^Seu, . . aitrt) ituftit lb. 2.

3. The aubject of the Inf. is very often indefinite, and is then commonly
omitted. It follows from the rule, that words agreeing with this omitted sub-
ject are in the Ace. Thna, ZHK. Ouim/uh &^ lu i^tMt, KP. Ov Vnra,
SlIK. OiXi ith»»ufM9»f i^m Jifralixut* Soc. Oite ought then by no means to
injure, Cr. Snrefy noL Soc. Not then, when injured^ to injnre m turn. PL
Crito, 49 b.

^ 63 8* in. By a mixture of constructions, the Inf. is
often used afler a connective (commonly tog^ wate^ ology or
oaoc), instead of a finite verb, or of the Inf. without a con-
nective ; as,

Kmi »mriCmf§9 in M rh trt^tf mwCttttist, and were deecendmff, §o a» to ao»
cend the eeeond [■■ «^ «»«C«riv, that they might aecend, which is the reading of
Dindorf and KrUger], iii. 4. 25. 'T^rtXm^as m ^utxtrnfm, riding up to meet
ktMy i. 8. 1 5. Tl0rmfiif r»g$urof ri fimhs, it f»ff^i rk %9^ara u^t^i^ut iii. 5. 7.
*Vit fih ^vuXifTt [sc xiyf] iiVio, [so as to speak with a discourse bringing
all together] to »peak eomprdkeimvdy^ to $ay all in a word, iii. 1. 38. *Cis V
Xjt ^^x** <'«^**> ff^ to ipeoA tn Mef, Ag. 7. I. *fi( tirot nViry, so to epeak,
PL Gorg. 450 d. "£1$ yt avrmfi Vain* Id. Bep. 432 b. *£U fM»^h f*iymXf
tUd^m Th. iv. 36. "iU y ifui xt»^^** ^V*"^ ^^* ^^^' ^^^' *I«>>*f» 7>^<^«f»^
St y Iwumal^uf i^l, yon epeai of lole, [at least for me to conjecture] metldnk$f
Soph. TV. 1220. *X1« icuXmik cTmm, eoneidering [that they are ancient] their
antiquity, Th. L 21. BavXtrmt ^-wtTt, aim ir§X.t/*uv, chooaee toil, $o as to be [or
that he may be] at war, ii. 6. 6. '^X'* 7*^ r^*n^tt§, Swn iXio vl Ui/vArv rX*?-
#», * so as to take,' t. e. 'so that I can take,' L 4. 8. 'Ewf/uro, Svt% ^^^m «v.
w!f L 6. 6. K^«vyj^v KtaXXnv Waitn nrnXtuvrtg ukXnkwtt S^r* nmt r«vr itoXt-.
/Mtut d»4^U9' JSm 04 ft^f Xyyirttrn rSv o'tXtfiintw »tu t(pity»f ii. 2. 17. '£^*
f fui nmiuv iv. 2. 19 (see § 530). *E^' f n trX^et evXXiyuf vi 6. 22. "Owms
rnf ti^x^9 /Ml ritvTM l^sfrnt W vfXurmt, ««« ^am^w riwr if al^xV'* ^y* •^-
Mtm^ * such as to desire ' f =3 tmutm «T«i «y l^ioivrt, such as would desire],
Cyr. L 2. 3. ^Mur»vt M^m^wt, «?«t/f /AtfvrfivTat §(x**^^'^* Dem. 23. 16.
"0^99 0UM9 y%wn^teu XnurSf navnXtirttt [= r»r«t7r«r fM*»t Svtt tip yivrcira]*
leaving for himself so much only as [he could taste] to totte, i. e. merely enough
for a taste, vii. 3. 22. Nf/*0^i»M rt rat nvrtiv tnugrat i^ev nv-al^nv, ' merely
enough for subsistence,' Th. L 2. 'ExuVir* rnt wnrit SV«y citoraUut inXfiiTw
ri n^/fv iy. 1. 5. *0r« f^itrt t(^n ^attuf nurcf, but so far as [seemed to him^
he eouU Judge at present, Th. vi 25. "Orot yi /a M»»t At. Nub. 1252. "O
n nlfi M»mt Id. EocLS50.

^ 039* Rkmarkh. 1. It will be observed, that, in some of the ex-
amples above, there is an dlipsis before the connective, and that in some the
ooniiecCivB itself suffers attraction. FVom the frequent use of •lat as above,
with an ellipsis of its correitponding demonstrative {< 523 , it seems to have
been at length regarded, especially in connection with rt. as a simple acyectivt
•f ^loalUy, and to have been construed accordingly; thus, ""Olsi ri UtW

Digitized

by Google

i^ Rill >t'g •y •» XA»;* Of&j;rM»;r» ";««.•; W|«f«ii«<« 2?»

tr^ r. 4. 9. *0 ymm •Jit vt «* ^f ■■ raiii rf tmv BfiXyiM^ ««t«<j;« W
«Wtwf )»»«^f ••( nM^ t«i^Bps<* mXXnXmf Sfvp. 4. 64 (^ 507. 7). Of;^
CM* n il* . . fa^itii, [^f^ ^vvs Bot sack a state of tUns" >''>' <>b^ coald pv-
■■ej ir awa mtt pmaSUk t» pmrwmt, SL S. 9. 0»^ aS* r« #w A«i#awii, ah mat
/ Mlli>rj— »««M»/ie,Ta.7. « (^40S). 0«y^«> «e« «3k ^ ««^
««iMi»>r ar«aiMi«Ciiw[McfcaB to iR^gata) mtitMe/m I'l i if ■<taj l*e jfaa^
ii.X IS. Ti a;M)^a /»*y '^'"^ aa»#i^^ Miiriff /lip1,i»fa»<is 'notaoita-
tie Car a jma^ bmb to dantt^ Th, tL IS. H>y|{rffi##Bi X«y««f mnv dc

«T» a.

hjtht ImL bmUad of awitkar Bods ; fi^ *T#>r^#a . . «
t liar »rn^ a ^Mammt or S^rt^ rm uMi^mt, TIl ¥L 4.

(II.) 7%^ Participle.

^ 0SO. I. The Participle, m its corameD uses, is eidier
preliminary^ droarngtaiUial, eompiemaUary^ prospective^ or
dUfimiice; that is, it either (1.) denotes something preceding
the main action of the sentence; or (2.) it expresses some
circumstance of that action ; or (3.) it serves as a complement
of the actioa (^ 329) ; or (4.) it denotes a porpese or eoDse-
quence ci the action ; or (5.) it defines some person or ^ling
connected with the action. See ^ 618.

% 6S 1. 1. As a PrdindHary Partj the Aor. is especiallj
common. It is olTen best translated into Eng. by a finite verb
with a connectiYQ, or by the Pres. Part ; as,

Kc^ i^aXsXttv Ttmg ftmymrmf, 0mXXS^ rr^rfritpa, lairi^wipait MiXmow^
Cffrtu received Ae crifat, mmd rmmg m mrmjf bmieftd Wkhu, L 1. 7. lUv
Aw' iJjt^, ۥ amd barm, Ar. Nob. 89.

KoTB. To ^le prdimunarg FarL may be refttrad flie nse otftmi^w aad mrn*
$Jn witli ri or X r<, to fonn an intensive (and often seven or sarcastic) ' aaiy*
or 'AeeoKie'; thus, T/ yk^ futi'nr U r^f ^%a^ vCf^rm i For kammg km mod
what mew wisdom did you mjvft Ae godrt Le. Wky tBd ym tmrult themt or.
What pooaetred you to nuuH Aemf Ar. Nnb. 1506. T/ #«/mmci . . i3|a#s yir.
m^f ( Hadrng experienced what change do Aey rerembk womem f L e. How tt if
Iftol they retemblet lb. 340. ^juuirt^ r«v •/*frf^ ««rl^ rvvrtfu^ I r»
fuJan r§f»ue vUsg wrtts I^n», ' because be b^gat,* PL Bnthyd. 299 a.

§ 633* 2. The Circumstantial Pari, is very commott in
Greek, especially in the Pres. It may sometimes be tnmslated
by an adverb or a circum$tantial adjunct ; aSf

Avpuftsw 4/f M^fy it fjtmXtvwu %^tnu^9 l«v»^tnrr«^Mf, ' as seorellj i
t 1. «. "Kwt^ »tt\ m^x^fitftf ilr#», *in the beginning,* Th..iv. 64. T«af «
if'i^l ' *** ^i'^'»f**x^*' u^plUms, the moat [beginning with] m^pmitmk
Hf Thmaymachiu, PL Kep. 498 c TtXtorit ixuXkirmsna iv. I>. 16(5 ♦*'•

Digitized

by Google

CM. h,] Pi^TlGlFLE. 991

'Av^ffff Tii;^ Ax. Plat 229 (§ 457. 7). ^H»i M*»mi « QtrrmXig, i^Xivmt
^X"' X^^***^^ * ^^ 1000 hopUtes,' L 2. 6. O? Xniiift^^ ^«^^ wAo ^ 2y
gUmdering, Cyr. UL 2. 25.

Note. The participle ?;^*ry, both with sad withont an Accusative, is joined
with some verbs, cliieflj of triJUng and delay, to give die idea of cotiHnuance
ot pertUtency (dt. § 637. a) ; as, TioTu im-ainfiutrec ^kuS^ut i;^vv i [Holding .
on upon what shoes are yon trifling?] IFhat shoe* are you tHjhng so pertina
emuhf about f Pi. Gorg. 490 e. *'E;^«»» ^XuA^tls, [you trifle, holding on upon
it] youperskt m trying. Id. Enthyd. 295 c Afi^ir^ f;^«y Id. Gorg. 497 a; •
Ar. Ban. 512. Ti »iMrr»J^ut txttf tn^t rk* ^^9 1 Ar. Nob. 509. T« inrm
tx*f9 f^c*^p I PL Phsdr. 286 e.

§ 633* 3. The Complementary Part, is particularly fre
quent with verbs of sensation^ of mental state and aciion, of
shotoing and informing^ of appearance and discovery ^ of eon^
cealment and chance^ of conduct, and success^ of permission and
endurance^ of commencement and continuance^ of toeariness and
cessation^ of anticipation and omission. Thus,

"Mmwet K%«v iv Kikiulf ivrm, hs heard [of Cjrros being in C] thai Cyru§
was in CSUeiOy L 4. 5. *Eiw^« irXunt li^i»y, Ac saw that there was need of
more, vL 1. 31. IrSi /tivrti avinrtt *(», 6u< know that you are senseless, ii. !•
13 (§ 614. I. Cf. "And knew not eating death," Par. Lost, ix. 792),
KMTtfteihf avetfrms fiikif V. 8. 14. E/Mvai fv^divtv, to know that it tpould b$
adoantageouMf Dem. 55. 2. II^h ati^os ^^B-tr fiitxnfitifn Eur. Med. 26. Svt-
M^a l^Mcvr^ «'avr« i-s^tu^f^ivof L 3. 10 ( 615. 1). <I>^h« /3«f#; Soph.Ant^
996. *E/iif€9nr0 yiif tivatv Cyr. iii. 1.31. Ti^/t««v«/ ^ai^avfiv, they delight
in bang honored, Eur. Hipp. 8. 'AfrfXtiVoyrtf ocvrtf* mx^ovr^t. » .'H^^vrtfi
flT^arrfvrff Mem. 11. I. 33. M<rf/t«i>.»»r» ^4r02«^««0rff Tb. v. 35. Ai^^*
uv7a9 ytX^jt Soph. Ant. 483. *E9reu9x^9tffS% . • xntZtru Id. CEd. T. 635.
Aci^AT fr^«rr« ^^y #0^; 'yKyitf, trura vv^^etv Eur. Med.- 548. Kt/^^y n IfTi*
^T^rtU0frn v^StTot ifyytiXa U. 3. 19. 'EfAfitM/Atf c7f ' iifioXaynfnftis ^»aUtg
sd^if I PI. Crito, 50 a. Ou ya^ p4nan To7t ^em^Sg 9rX6UT6v^tv Ifet/nro i. 9. 19*
£9^0'»«v •uia/Uii df AXX^ft Toir* ^utv^a^ifAgvl Isocr. 811 C 07 otv IfiXiy*
;^/«l^i ^CaXXtfM-ii ii. 5. 27. T^i^i/Atwof Uay^sMv, [was secret being mala*
tained] was secretly maintained, i. 1.9. Aa^iTr cvror M^riX^tf^*, to conceal from
him <mr dqfmrturc, or, to depart without his knowledge, i. 8. 17. *'Qir»n ftii X«-
$if$ rf««r«y Ity^sm, that you may not be unconsciously ignorant, M^m. iii. 5. 28.
"Err £9 Xdfivm* [sc. nfiii avr«tn^ v2^«sr«rM ytfifitvt, till insensibly we become
water-drinkers, Cyr. vi. 2. 29. Ilu^itv irvyxn^h happened [being] to be
present, L 1. 2. ^Ovns \x^t** ^* xv^t? Eur. Ale 954. *AS««t7ri . . 9r0Xif*6y
M^X*^^** f*"^ ^ wrong in beginning war, Th. L 53. 'ISxXt'tVifiett tZ vr^tSt
"MBm. it 6. 5. EJvrtf thrvxngsfAiv . . Ix«m-«i Eur. Or. 1212. *H vriXif mbrsTt
•v» iv'tr^ypu ^rmfttCahovvi riv toftov Isocr. 268 e. Nix*r^ivff y«( TittXXoit su^
Jkv^X^rnt Eur. Herad. 352. *T4rit^|s/»tv xaxUs 9'0t»u*T*f v. 5. 9. £^iyu9t
fAt$9i»f09rn hx0U0^v9fifi they spend their time in learning justice, Cyr. i. 2. 6*
AtmT(iC0Vft fitXirZ^0U lb. 12. ^0ty00tn^ofM,if0t . . iiari>-0V^t9 lb. Mq xifiifi
fiX09 ifi^n ivi(7fr«ly PI. Gorg. 470 c *E'rau^m9T0 9'0Xtft0VvTi( vi. 1. 28.
*A 0i/uti if vretvseu \90xX0u9ra ii. 5. 13. *0«'«r f^h ^tf««-«0-i fAnr% 0 Kvfst /•«-
CI W KiXi»ii x0$T»XaC0fTUt that neither Cyrus nor the Cilicians might anticipate
^hcm m taking possession, or take possession before them, i. 3. 14. ^Sa90V9if W)
rf 4U^f >«M/«iy«4 T0vt W0X%fii0»t .iii. 4. 49. Ohx t^tnfi* trvPif^ttsi ^if 9r$^
wi» 'ATT.nnv iriXtMsv, nmi . . insf, they no sooner heard of the war armtmd J^

Digitized

by Google

803 8TNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [bOOK 111.

Km Aam Aeyeame, Isocr. 58 b. ^wnwf m'tuimt •v»Sr Jtv ^i£»Mf, yom eammm
mow U too »oon in b^ifeUing chUdren^ Eur. Ale. 662. Olx mv fStivMs . . Xiyan
pom camtot teC nte wo $oom, Lb. tall me at onctf Mem. ii. 3. 1 1. "AxXm. ^ Id
f»9^U lirtXtiirf Xiysn PL Phil. 26 b.

§ 834* Notes. «. With these verbs, the Part «» is aometimet
omitted (cf. § 547) ; as, 2Sg USt [sc ^f], know Ihat you are aafe. Soph. CEd.
C 1210. El y$^t0f xv^a lb. 726. 21 inXiif»t jutxif [sc •v'r«3 lb. 783
.A«Xm r« yMfif* ^fit09 Id. Ant. 471. Nvt i* ity^Mi vvyx^'^^ Id. £L 313.

/3. Many of these verbs likewise take the Inf. ; but often with this distinc-
tion from the Part. ; viz. that the Inf. denotes something dependent apon the
action of the verb, bat the Part, something which exists independent of \U
Thus, "Av iwm\ fAmivfAiv a^y) ^^», if we should once have learned to iive m
idlenem, iii. 2. 25. *Imi fi»4p rt^tfrht •!*, that he may learn that he is a
tchemer, JSsch. Pr. 61. F*^ r^i^ttf «^v yXS^^ttp nrt;;^*rr«^ay, * learn to keep^'
Soph« Ant 1089. 'E«^2ay ^yvUftv iitiVT»vfMfUj when they perceive that tke^
are dietrueted, Cyr. vii. S. 1 7. Mtfiffir^tt mni( ityetiU cTvom, let him remember
to be a brave man, iii. 2. 39. Mt/AVD^ai . . etK^vrns 9rori, I remember to harm
once heardy Gjr. i. 6. 3. Tcvt$ fAtt abx etSr^vffiat ksyt^v ■ r« ^ . . mtp-y^in^-
^v if xiyMi I am not ashamed to say this (which is said) ; but I shouidbo
ashamed to sou that (which from the shame is not said), Gyr. v. 1. 21.

y. The complementary Part, sometimes occurs with an impersonal expres-
sion, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple verb.
When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is sometimes implied in
the Part. Thus, 'EyBcfl) ^r^ivos &f i/.&Xivrx i^ifitXcftiv^ it would become me
wsostofaUto attend, (£c. 4. 1. 01s tiXi i^etli iXurtriXfin vrtJofiLipdn Isocr.
174. 14. £/ ^oXif*»vrif AfAinov irvett^ whether it would be better for them to go
to war, Th. L 118. TAtrvlt h S-u/A«vfitfct, I was sated with passion, Soph.
(Ed. G. 768. AHX«f ^v »utif$tfae i> 2. 11. K»r«2«XM yiyft*rau «'^««'irM«»-
fU90t fUf Mpos, tnirtfh tvhv H. ApoL 23 d. See §§ 551, 614. i.

§ 63«S« 4. Prospective Part, This appears chiefly in
the Put, Part, denoting purpose^ commonly translated by the
Inf. (§§ 583. a, 618. 1).

§ 636* 5. The Definitive Part, is equivalent to a relative
pronoun and finite verb, and is most frequently translated by
these. It is oflen used substantively, and may not unfrequently
be translated by a noun. It occurs chiefly with the article, but
sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. Thus,

AZiif m $ nytirif*tf«f cMs Irnti, and again there will be no one who wth
guide us, ii. 4. 5. OS avr6f*6XvravTtf (cf. 07 Sm^ot lXfi^<r«») i. 7. 13.
Tw»f Ixm^rrtxirag, those who had been banished, or Ae exiles, i, 1.7 (§ 556).
TiStf yMKfAifdif (cf. T»Tf yonvri) Apol. 20. "Sutayaymv , , rovt r^fiXftirmt
nirSf xai rSf xXXuf riv fiovXef*t*ot, * and of the rest [him that wished] any
one that wished,* i. 3. 9. *H Asofiinhtet Xtyofiivn ivxyxn, the so-^:aUed neceuity
of Jhamed, PI,' Rep. 493 d. *!/, Hvri^ Xxuvti t^u ^uvafiU9 rtif xii*tiftvrM9
»«2 xxToiovXttrafikifu* af<ra»T«f rouf "ExXfivat, »uT»t tti* r^rourxv ifuTf »«)
fitflHrtorav S^airti, l<r«<^i,» i^^ttrt l)em. 101. 10. "X-ravTm yk» TtXftSfihiui
fmtPirmi, for every thing appears fearful to those whti are venturintf, Eur. Ph.
870. ni«r«»^i»«i . . %U fiXxCfif ^{^»w, to have suffered [what tends to harm]

Digitized

by Google

OH. 5.J particii'lE. 393-

any injury ^ So)»h. (FA, T. 510. A^a^i^ii })i wAfAX4kp fuJm fk^ futUvTH* »^
i yu(AteifatA%fi rw ftM yfyvfttmrfAiw PL L^. 795 b. See §§ 447. «» 449,
469, 476.

§637« II. The Part, with such verbs as %lfil^ ylyvofAai^
tx^t ti^x^ixat^ otxofiai^ dz«., often takes the place of a finite verb,
either to supply some deficiency in inflection, or for the sake
of more definite or emphatic expression. Thus,

Tl%^otfi%itt tin iv. 8. 26. TiTmyfi%9§t Sfct* i. 7. 11. *M^mf Ixm^rttzirts
ii. 3. 10. ^H» ^ tliih ^rtvofitif vi. 1. 6. E7ti !;^«y iv. 4. 18. Taura cSrt^t
%X»^^ i^rn H. Leg. 860 e. USf . . ISn ir«r;^«yTtf rmh » Eur. Cycl, 381.
'ESn fTuyn^tif Id. Ale. 464. 'Afnhvt tvu Soph. Ant. 1067. fAivdv^rU rt
7<V»«»T«i, H. Leg. 908 b. M« 9r^»itvf hftMt yivp Soph. Aj. 588. IIiXi^
hxawitis ifisch. Ag. 392. IlcXX^ ;^^^fAmTa l;^«/«iy afn^wetxirtf^ [having
plundered many things we have them] we have ptuniiered many thingst i. 3. 14.
*A fin xarafr^f^eiutiof tx**^ ^* ^' ^^' •'^^ Wtr^itet irxtret i7;^«y etvaxixo*
ftu^fiifH iv. 7. 1. Ta t^rtrnitm U rwr«$f ittrnxtxtfAttfAivM ^rav lb. 17. T«»
Xiy* }i\ tw vrmXat B^mufni^as tx" PI* Phsedr. 257 C. T«» ftXf ^^ori^ttf, t«v )'
itrtfAMvaf tx^t Soph. Ant. 22. Kfi^v^xfr f;^tiy lb. 32. *ArtfMifaf tx* lb.
77. BfCtfvXivMvf f;t;ii Id. CEd. T. 701. Oh rtZra X(^«y t^x^fiaty I am not
going [or come] to $ay this, Ages. 2. 7. ''£^;^0jMai itv^iavufAUti tutt Fl. Theag.
129 a. ''XL;^i7« mttMv wxrig^ he [departed going off] went off in the nighty
lii. 3. 5. 'lL;^ir« iinX«v»«y, mfa off, ii. 4. 24. 07;^ir«4 S»y«y Soph. Ph.
414.

Notes, (a) The Per/. Part, irith fi>c/ b especially common, particularly
in the passive, either to supply the deficiencies in the inflection of the complete
tenses (§§ 168. m, 169. ^ 213. 2, 234), or to direct the attention more ex-
pressly to the state consequent upon an action, "^x" occurs most frequently
with the Aor, act, part, and in the dramatists, commonly conveying the ac-
cessory idea of pouession, continuance, or permtency (holding on upon an ac-
tion. Cf. § 632. N.). "Efx^f^* with the Fut, Fart,, forma a more immediate
Fut. The Part of a verb of motion with »7xofMu is a stronger form of expres-
sion for the simple verb, (b) The substantive verb is sometimes omitted
(§ 547); as, Ati»yftif [sc. Urit], it !•<»<, rnvii xetrimvuf Soph. Ant. 576.

§ 63 8* III. A Part with its subject, or an impersonal
Part. (§ 617), of^en forms so distinct a clause, that it is said
(though not in the strictest sense of the term, § 343. N.) to be
put ahsolvie. This occurs most frequently in the Gen.^ and,
after this, in the Ace, The far less frequent instances in
which the Nom. and Dot. aite used in the same way, may be
commonly referred at once to anacoiuthon, or other construc-
tions already mentioned (%% 344, 401, 410, 420). The Gen.
and Ace. absolute may also be referred, though often less di-
rectly, to the Gen. and Ace. of time (§§ 378, 439) ; and as, in
this use, a Part, and substantive commonly denote an evenly but
an impersonal Part' a continued state^ the following general
rule has arisen, which is not, however, without exception.

RUL£ XXXIL A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTA5-

Digitized by VjOOQIC

^«»- f I <!■■

--- >

» i»

. i

'« T«Mi;

Digitized

by Google

C9.&] FAJftTIClFLB, dM

^ tf 49* IV* A Part 9 whether absolute or depeade*it, it
often preceded by ng (or a similar particle of speeUd applU
cation)^ chiefly to mark it as subfectwey i. e. as expressing the
vieWy opinion^ feelingj intention^ or statement of some one^
whether in accordance with or contrary to fact The Part
thus construed often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf.
Thus,

Tlm^iyyuX* • •, m i«'iC«»XiMfrtfi Tirr«^S^MVi, ha gave command [as he
would give command, T. plotting] a$ if T^MBophenui were plotting, or vnder
pretence that T. woe ploOrngf L I. 6. '*fU$fr$ i«'$Xttkiftu, mt Ux«x»/«f rtii
woXtmy ^A^ tiumgkt tkgif were loetf jnaanmck ae Ae city woe taken, viL 1. 19.

^m9 UnrASf i. 1. 11. *X1# IfMv tSf ic*r0i, » • *Srst rnv yim/Mif l;^4n, [^as if
then I should gOj bo have your opinion] be assured, then^ that I shiU go, i. 3.
, 6. llXiyf B^af^tTt, iff xmrae'rn^ftivtrv rtvTttv %»( t$ iisv lb. 8. T« irk»7m
mlrttt »tXiv$rroi, Sfvrt^ wmXn rit ^riXn Kv^ov f$h w-dtwftipgp lb. 16« 'ilf
•vmV S»rt09 m riwttn^ f^ri^i ^ Ear. Med. 1811. 2r^«riAy woXXh Hyt**,
m fisn^n^tff fi«etXt7, bringing a large force to aid the king, ii. 4. 25 (§ 588. a)
R«r«r»fva^ir/«i if attrtv «*«!/ tixnfafTeit (cf. M/vkv va^otrxif/dt^f/ctivfVf) iii. 2.
84. K#nuu(ifti/»» iSre^ i|«» hevxit* 'y*<»» ve & down, as if it were permitted
tie te enfoif omr ease, iii. 1. 14. A*nynvXti0^i»iit mm$, ig, iwirm^ nsf/tntif^
k—fTtl^uf %inr99,Y. 2. 12. Kiyvn i/ucs if iXetXirnt iBach. Ag. 672. An-
XMf )* tSf Tt enfMiwf Soph. Ant. 242. 'fit ^rtXifMv cvth wa^' vfuit k^my*
ytXi { IL 1. 21. *H# ft,h VT^rnynrnrm \f^ rmirnt «^v rr^artiyieiP, f^tihit
^fuen Xsyirm, let no one of yon speak, cs t&oii^ / were to take this commtfnd, L
8. 15. 'Atin^ym, if §»il» 2i«v vL 4. 22. 'Air« r«ly «'«y«^4wv kvi^iarti* sJJf-
yertv, it ri^y pX» tSm j^fnfrm i/uXimf A^»n0i9 rnf A^trit, whf ^ rmt f «y«^*^
mmrmXvrn Mem. i. 2. 20. ^;^tT» h W(if r»of ^$»f rnTKHf rmymtit ^nm^
if rtitf ^ichf miXXirrm uii^mf lb. iii. 2. *H ^ yiifun !», if %\% 'tki r£^
tS» '£xx«»4Vff IxSrra [sc rk i^funrn], and ^ plan was, that titey should drim
eigainst the ranks of the Greeks, i. 8. 10. See § 662.

§ 64 1 • V. Anacolhthon. From the variety of the of-
fices and relations of the Part, and its frequent separation from
its subject, its syntax is peculiarly afl^cted by anacoluthon ;
consisting either (a.) in the transition firom one case to another,
or (/J.) in the transition from the Part to another form of the
verb, or the converse. Thus,

«.*Hy 3) 4 yvifitti rw'A^trrittf ["s 0«^f t^ 'A^irru], ri /th f$tr Inerti
rr^«r««>i^0» ij^ovrt U rSf Ir^fMf Iwtm^tT* Th. i. 62. "lEidl^it avrttf [bb ^^p^.
fimvTt] . ., lw$»aXovfrif Id. iiL 86. Kmi ^nfi^trif M^irirTn itmiivrm
Tk r«v wXi/Mu, filtt t»»rr0t r»7f lertrnittifiuirif a^Tcv ix^teiivrtf Id. vi. 15.
AlUif ft tx^ [~ mtiwftMt] h rSji^% worfuf rvyxi^ttf^a Eur. Hec. 970. III.
ernXrm4 )' nvri i/,9t ftX09 xU^ [sa r^i/Atf t^** f^*]* ^vht nXetvrat efnrep
.£ich. Cho. 410. "Tm-trri fitct ^^mrtt, . . nXyturnt Soph. EL 479. 'H^
[«> iftSf, 9 412] V aSn n»r%nXi^tn ^/X«v Ar^^i )»r«vr*r» ^icyyet u 256.
For other examinee see §§ 344, 459, 627, 639.

$• 'AxXtf ri r^i^if ^tt^ifmifrif, nmi funx*^* w^^rnyny* Tluiv. 100«
Ayue . . • Ttf«M9M9 % w(0tfiv/iHiT§ vn, 2. 2. *Xl( rvx** '«"* '^ Wfe^m

Digitized

by Google

894 SYNTAX. — USE OF MODES. [bOOK m.

TiVE are put absolute in the Genitive ; an imp£R«
SONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative ; as,

[NoTB. Among the following examples of the role have been iaieited
tKoeptioBS, for the sake of comparison.]

Ttfvr* ^ kiy$frog avrwt wrd^vrtti rift and [he saying this] upon his t
thi$f mme one nteezet, iiL 2. 9. *Orrir, l^0v ftiv i/^vfi» 1x^9 , ., Mi^uTms w»Xt»
fitif, who, [it being permitted him to have] while he mi^ have peace, preftBrg
war, ii 6. 6. "biirk Ik rmvr», l)« nkUw IvfoprH ii> 2. 3. *AAin Url rk S^n^
•iHuig »ttkv»9r9t9 *' without opposition,' i. 2. 22« OliSi ftn» ^inrmt, «'»XxSw Sp*
rmp wi^mti $v^ mltrtitg iufti^irmt, XaXufdftit rng yt^vftt nor, altimmgh there were
many upon Ae other side, could anjf one come to thdr assistance, if the bridge voere
destrojfed, ii 4. 20^ S/tav ^ WtXaKtirirH, J^w Ik ftni* irf^hwim wm^ iri
)i «'04M> «'«AA.*iy i.«tty»^%vafratt Y. 8. 3. '£v nnX^ Wfli^Mrv^v rfUt l^ufiCmXupf
»«4 «'«vr«;^«/t» murUt ««-0»t»Xfir^<f<#y T\u V. 60. EJ h wn^m^x*** ^ when
a favoraMe opportunUy offers. Id. L 120. Ov «'^«Wmm«, when it is no interest
of ours. Id. iv. 95- 'Afc^gri^Mg ftlv 'ioxtuf dfnx^'fUh • • »v(«f/l» % cvAv • •
iirnvium x^ 9(/i»€^a*, fvxrif n iwtyt^fiiftu lb. 12&. A<2«9'/uv«ir ik «vrMf
Id. i. 125. A«^v «vrMf diri |v»d«v, sUrt %tavmu/tmx*** ^^ ^'^ ^^* A^^s**
Tsg il r»ur9y H. 6r. L 1. 36. A«|«vr*ry 'hi x«} rwrtn lb. V. 2. 24. ^l«(«»r»
tk rmirm »«) wt^avSivrtc lb. iiL 2. 19. A«|«y tk r«vr« [so. <rMuV, or the sing;
and plor. joined, see §$ 450, 451, 549], and Ais seeming best, iv. I. IS.
Ai^fltf nfu9 rmtirm, l«'«^nM^t/« PL Prot. 314 c "AhiXsf Jh, Mrt rit . . d$mtm
^rir»4 Th. i. 2. hi'Xfh ^' *** ntTtXiyut CjT. ii. 2. 20. II^«rr«;^Ay )m^
«ivr^ . . dfay^n^eu LjB. 183. 12. AffX4tf/fvr«f, in Iv r«ri v«vr2 r«iy '£aAi(n»v
rA «'^7/tf4tr« iy|yfr« Th. L 74. 'E>»y7flX/i»rAry, Ir/ ^•'mmu nkr I*' «••
«w^f irXftfv^w lb. 116 (§ 451). Ilg^) rmrnflni [sc /S«vXitfi#l»/] A^MMi^tM
At. £ccL 401.

^ 839* Bemarks. I. Absolute and connected constructions of the
Part, are, in various ways, interchanged and mixed ; the former giving mors
prominence to the Part., and sometimes arising from a change of subject ; the
latter showing more clearly the relation of the Part, to the rest of the sen-
tence. Thus, AmCtuf09T»tf [sc avrUt] (aUtm, o VXtvs nlrc7t Xwi^fn [= )m»«
tethwfif etif<r»7s\ as theg were crossing^ however, Gius appeared to Aem, ii. 4.
24. Tatf «'^0r«^Mf /urit "Kv^ov afaCivt . . * xai rmSra, tvz M ftMX'f mm^*'*
[ss /tfvff'il, otXXk xaXevfTOf T9U ^rttr^is Kvfov i. 4, 12. Ai tifiif, fv rm^u r»
iifrtip xai fitttx'f^***" ^* ^* ^ ^* Ovxtri eSv oSvat »A.t«'r0vriv ifyi^ivh, aXX* Z*
mitrd XttfiCmftrt X'^i'* l^rt, St^vrt^ vfittTs rit rcvrett fur^t^t^tSvrts, hXX' ei t»4»
r«Mr rk vfiirt^ mXtwrctrtn L^'S. 178. 38.

2. The substantive is sometimes omitted^ and sometimes, though less fVe-
qvently, the Part of the substantive verb (cf. § 547) ; as, 'Evrtv^i* vr^tli^rm
[sc tutrZt], ipminrt fx**** * ^ ^^^ ^^"^ advancing,* L 6. I. 0/ )' tSw**,
l(ttrnrtttT9t fsc airav], in "UdKfMMf iv. 8. 5. TLifif fth if f*t, x«r#«M»rff
[sc 9rir%tt], &XX»t ff Soph. Ant. 909. OSrtt )* lx»ffrat9 [sc Imvrm iffmyfU,
Tt0f], and affairs [having themselves^ § 555] standing thus, iii. 2. 10. OZrm
fclv yfyfOfAtfrn*, eet^Sg «!itt Cyr. V. 3. 13. " Ax0f ros ^a^iXit^s [sc MTfi] U. 1. 19.
*£^i0Yi ^itnTf, if l/t6v fMtfii iriXnt Soph. CEd. C. 83. *H« v^ynrsi rmt
Id. (Ed. T. 1260.

3. The use «f the Ace for the Gen. absolute chiefly occurs after «# {$ 640^
sr when the subject is a neuter adjective (cf. § 432. 2).

Digitized

by Google

C9.&] FAJKTICIPLBt dM

^ tf 49* IV. A Piirt« whether absolute or depeadeut, id
often preceded by «$ (or a mmilar particle of special appU*
eatien)^ chiefly to mark it as eubjectkxe^ i. e. as expressing the
view^ opinion^ feeling, intenHon^ or statement of some one^
whether in accordance with or contrary to fact The Part
thus construed often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf.
Thus,

Umf^iyyuJu • ., lif WtC§itki»»9T0g Tirrc^S^MVf, ^ ^ave command [as he
would give oommand, T. plotting] as if TiMMt^^henus were phttmg^ or under
preUmoe thai T. woe ptottmg^ L 1. 6. "CUttr* kw^XttXUm^ t^t \aXm»wUs «^r
wiXtm, they tkomgkt they were hei, inaemuek ae the eify woe takem, viL 1. 19.

^m9 Uu^iUtf i. 1. 11. *fie IfMv «Jf ti9r»s, . . tSnt r«v yvtifjmif l;^4rf, ^88 if
then I shoald gOj so have your opinion] be assured, then, that I shall go, i. 3.
. 6. "SXiyi B-ecf^tTv, iff xaTeirTti^4fU»t*9 Twratt %U T§ 2f«v lb. 8. T« irXoTm
mirtvf »tXiU4fTos, Sv9'%^ irJiXn riv rr»\n Kv^0» fth wdtdVfiivop lb. 16. 'ilf
•v»iV (l9Tt09 m A»iHt%t ffWTi^i ^ Eur. Med. 1311. ^r^m^nkf woXXh iyt^h
it f^miHren fiaetku, bringing a large force to aid the king, ii. 4. 25 (§ 588. a)
YiMvmwKiuAT^tvitu it mhvv vrtu »l»nf9VTa( (cf. M/y«y irafei9Ktva,7^oft,ifovs) iii. 2.
84. K#r«ju^t/«» &rw%^ V^ «rv;^/«» «tyf<», we Ue down, as if it were permitted
tie to enjoif omr ease, iii. I. 14. A<ity»vA.«^*»«iw iiimt, it, iwfrmp ^nf/twf^
k—fTtf^M %tn099, V. 2. 12. Aiytertp ifiig it iXetXirnt iBscb. Ag. 672. Ae-
XmIt )* Jf rt rufAmtit Soph. Ant. 242. *£lt iroXiffu cvth «'«f* vf*£f it*my»
ytXm\ IL 1. 21. *H# fith fr^myn^ewTn Xful rmortif rnv wr^etmyimf, ^fi^r
V«^ Myivm, let no one cf yon speak, as thou^ I were to take this commtfndf L
8. 15. 'Avi»f«y«r, it eSiH* ^am vL 4. 22. *Air« r«lv *oim^Zf kvS^ttttt J^-
ywwn, it rk* f^ tSm ^^ftie'ren ifuXimf ke»n0i9 rit k^trns, wnv ^ vm» f «»V(*ri^
mmrkXp^tv Hem. i. 2. 20. Ev^ir* tk er^it r»ot Btevt nTXit rkynik ^ivm^
it T4vt ^teiff uiXXtrrm uii^nt lb. iii. 2. *H ^ yvifui I*, it lit ^ki rsl^
rSf '£xx«»*w Ixifrm [sc. rk mffumrn], and the plan was, that they should drive
eigainst the ranks of the Greeks, i. 8. 10. See § 662.

§ 64 1 • V. Anacolhthon. From the variety of the of-
fices and relations of the Part, and its frequent separation from
its subject, its syntax is peculiarly afl^ted by anacoluthon ;
consisting either (a.) in the transition from one case to another,
or (/}.) in the transition from the Part to another form of the
verb, or the converse. Thus,

rr^«r0«'f^o l^ofrt Iv rSf lir^/Mf Wtm^ut Th. i. 62. "l^tl^tt rnvrett [b: i^pn,
fie'atfTt] . ., l^i»ak0UVTtf Id. iiL 36. Kmiin/M^i^ n^irtfra ^imtivrm
e^k rei wXifAcv, tila txnrns T»Tt Wtrn^tuftne'tf niT»u k;^ifiriivrtt Id. vi. 15.
AlUit fA %xu [» ntiwftMt] U rifhi vir/Mf rvyx^ftv^a Eur. Hec. 970. III.
eraXrm )' auri it,9t fAX«» xiu^ [sa r^ifA^t tx** ^*^> ^'^' nXeevfat elnrep
.Asch. Cho. 410. "X^ivri /*•» ^(i^ct, ..nkveu^nf Soph. EL 479. *H^
[«" iftSt, 9 412] V aSn »nrt»Xa^tn ^/X«v Aro^j %%tfavrt»9 ^Hyyt 4. 256.
For other examples see §§ 344, 459, 627, 639.

$• 'AXAf « r(««^ <rii^«r«»rii, nni ftnx*^* ir^#riiy«y#» TTl.iv. 100.
Ayue . . • Ttfitneien ^ w^ttitvfAilre viL 2. 2. *IU ri^** *'^ 'nt Wf^Hn

Digitized

by Google

896' VERBAL IN -Tioff. — PASTICLB. [BOOK m^

m8mh IXA ri ^tvyttP, H Jxx^lirffrXicarrA Th. v9. 70. In die foflowing
•samptob t^Mra is a remarkable CraneitioD from the infinitive ooiietraeti<m t§
the participial ; Aiti^trmt, ri fui ^^rufs ti^m [for iSmm], m teforated, m m
mat to U mam Uatd (aee ^ 622), Th. vi. !•

(ill.) Verbal in -xios.

§ 643* From the verb is formed a passive adjective in
"tiogy expressing obligation or necessity (§ 314. f ). This verbal
is oflen used impersonally^ in the neut. sing, or plur., with ioxl
(§ 546. a). In this use, it is equivalent to the Inf* act. or mid,
with dtl or XQV ' thus, ^gnxiov ftoi doxn thai [= a*inttadai
duy], it seems to me that it is to be considered [= that toe ought
to consider]^ i. 3. 11. *Ed6nu dmnxiov thai, it seemed that they
must pursue, iii. 3. 8. Hence it iniitates in two ways, as fol-
lows, the construction of this Inf., and is therefore treated of in
this connection.

^ 64S* Impersonal verbals in >Tioy, or -no, (a.) govern
the same cases as the verbs from which they are derived ; and
(/}.) have sometimes their agent in the Ace, instead of the DaL,
(§407. x). Thus,

(«.) *CU truriitf tin KXiii^;^^ ^at ihey mwit obey QmrtkuMy ii. 6. 8
(§ 405. n)* Ti»^ivrUf V hfuf r»ht it^rtvt rrmifA§»( ii. 2. 12 {k 431).
Hdvrm itttfirUt iii. 1. 18 (cf. the personal form, Ilavrc wmitU lb. 35).
0S$ ti Tm^mt0Tim ru$ *Aifi9»ioit irriy Th. i. 86. Tvfmtzif siiimftMi lir
0firim Soph. Ant 678 (§ 849). — (/3.) KmrmZariw «Sy l» fti^u t»a^r§9f
meh one therefore must descend in htmy PL Rep. 520 d. 'fls •urt /it0^40f0^'
rU* titi iXKtttt 9 T»tff vr^aTtvfA%*9tt(, oSrt fAihxritf rSv Wfmyfit»rw»
wXi'fett 4 wttr»»te^t\'ftt Th. viii. 65.

§ o44* Rkmark. Constroctious are eometimee blended; thus, — «
(a.) The impereoncd with the pertonal construction of the verbal ; aa, T^f
i^tiient rkt w^mrmt, n^ ii ^tsera) vft4f i/r<», 7/M^f i«'4r»f«'r««i r«-
fierifv [for rag vm-t^Utif WtfMitTiot, or a$ v^rtikfus Wiext^rtat] PI. Phsedo,
107 b. — (6.) The Dot. of the agent with the Ace, ; as, *H^r» MivrJ*» .
Ix«-<;«»r«f R Rep. 453 d. — (c.) The verbal with the Inf.; as. 'Ev-i/*.
MMI ^ •& ji«X« rritfy, . . uifrm ii mvrkt , . lr«4/ft«^iiv PI. Gorg. 492 d.

CHAPTER VI.

SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE.

§ 64^. The particle, in its full extent, in-
cludes the ADVERB, the preposition, the conjunc-

Digitized

by Google

Cfl. 6.] ADVERB. — FBEPOSITIOK. 897'

TiON, and the interjection. Of these, however,
the interjection is independent of grammatical con*
struction. The other particles are construed as
follows.

A. The Adverb.

(^646. Rule XXXIIL Adverbs modify sen-
tencesj phrases^ and words ; particularly verbsj ad-
jectiveSj and other adverbs. Thus,

IUiXt9 4)^twnf#fy i Kv^h, agam Qyrut asked, i. 6. 8. *B2ittt lw$i0$9T» L S*
S. *Ofiiei ivx5i»*t lb. 21. *lS.fA%>.nfU9Vi /MiXX«y L 7. 19. Tifv •» m^tvux**
0t9, the not blockading, Th. iiL95. *H ^« 'f^u^im Ar. EccL 115. Tnt kiti
r«» '£«'<«-«aJ;v wmXi9 xmrmUtfutu 'the descent back,' Th. vii. 44.

Rbmabkh. 1. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase is usoally parsed
as modifying the verb or leading word of the sentence or phrase. Such parti-
eles may also give a special emphasis, or bear a special relation to other words
fai the sentence or phrase ; thus, 'H^i 7f y% tsxHfiUf, we at leaet are metoru>u$
(hers yt, in modifying the sentence ifU4§ HJtaifu*^ exerts a special emphasis
upon nfitut) ii* 1* 4. 'HsMvif tuitU tt y^ r^ ^«vf^^ i. 3. 21. 'Afsmtt
)), . . »«} tSrgf . . mtfmrmt, and Ariaus^ even he attempt*^ iii. 2. 5. Ka)
fura^tftwtftivav aiiTovy tit* i/ix« U/t7v, etfen though he tends for mCf 1
son not wUtmg to ^, L 3. 10. n^«#i»vniraii, »»iwt^ ci^crtf L 6. 10. E/«
)«ri r««/Mi ToA* myytJJmt U* UmSJ^tt .£8ch. Pr. 1040.

§ 847* S. Of the negative particles $h and ^4 the fbnner is nsed in
timple, absolute negaikm, and the latter in dependent or qualified negatUmf hence
in tuppositiont prohibUion, &e, ; or, in the language of metaphysicians, oi is
the obfeethsy and ftti the subfecthe negative (cf. § 587. 1). It follows that «&
is most nsed with the Ind., and /*n with the other modes ; and that, with the
same mode, olt is more decided and emphatic than ftn> Thus, Ov» «!)«, / do
not know, i. 3. 5. Ouwrt l^iT •v^tif lb. 'E«y tk f*h h'if, and if he would not
give, i. 3. 14. "O^rttt f^h ^ieivttwt lb. Mfi»iri ^i Ki7^0» ytf/K/^tn i. 4. 16.
Ohx i»*^9 frri, na) f^h )^f» «S f^il Xii'^^'f > SoP^* ^^^ C. 1175. 'E^ r«»
ri?» X«7«y m^i^rit cv^v, jM«tf * m^trhln •'•ri Id. Ant. 499. T« /<j| ivrm m «v«
lfr« iv. 4. 15.

Note. Interrogation is sometimes expressed by negative assertion, and
assertion by negative interrogation. Hence negative particles sometimes ap-
pear to pass into interrogative or affirmative ones ; as, Mi( ^m )««m>/m» » [We
do not seem to yon, do we ?] Dows ssem to gout iEsch. Fers. 844. *H fi4rti
• • IXm»9U I f fi^rtt / tf^r^ mrthif t 4. 405. OuxtSf . • m^m-mu^tfuu i [Sliall I
»ot then cease ?] / shaU cease Amt, Soph. Ant. 91. 0^j»«tf» . • UawSt lx^*f
PL Phadr. 274 b.

B. The Preposition.

^ 648. Rule XXXIV. Prepositions gov-
34

Digitized

by Google

8^ SYNTAX OF THR flXTlCLK. [bOOK HI

era ttibstantives ib the oblique cases, and mark
their relations ; as,

wrmfutf kt Miomi from SartKi, mmd marrkm tknmgk LftBm to Ikenmr M^
mtderj L a. 5.

Or, more paiticiilailyi
Ut^L, ino^ 4, and n^ govern the Grenitiye.

*Arm and Ug u u AccyaatiFe.

*AfA<pl^ ditt, xetTo, ficTtt, and ind^ ^ ^* Gren. and Ace*
*£»/, naqd^ n'tql^ ngo^^ and t;;io ^^ ^* Gen., Dat, and Aoc.

Nom. «. Hm Dativ« Minetiiiras fbHovs d/ifii •Ni» and /urd in the pMte;
and dpipi even in proae, chiefly lonie. TInia, *A^2 wXMfMf .Asch. Ft. 71.
*Am n MMv/ Eur. Iph. A. 754. Mirk xi^U Soph. Ph. 1110.

fi. The words above mentioned (with their euphonic, poetic, and dialectie
ftnna^ as l» fiir i(, ^ 68, ^^ tar 0^ l§ ibr f/#, M for !», «r^«W and «*««» ftr«^
»«»M inr d*^) are afl which an eonmonlj termed prepoeitioM in Greek, the^gh
other words may have a ptepoettienal force (§ 6K.«). These preyoaitkiBa Imvs
primary reforenee to the reUilieM of jpfaoe, and are naed to express other lela*
tions by reasea ef some mmrnhg^ eitiier real or fimeied (cL ^ 839).

y, *£# and w^i, by the addition of t (expressing motion or aetiom, cf. § 84),
become (Us, § 58) li^ or if (cf. § 57. 4), and w^h • thos, {», in, uf, Mto.

%, Te the prepositions governing Ae Aec, most be added the Ep. siffiz ^
fo (cf. §§ 150, d22) ; as, OSkvf$itii^ A. 425 (cf. U^ig 'OXi^^'m 420). "AJUi.
)t A. 308 (cf Eif dXm 314). 'Anis^t [» liV 'An«f ^^a^v. § 385. y] H. 330.
It is sometiflMS used pleonastically ; aa» "OtU hfit9$t fi. 83. Eh iXmi* •.
851.

§ 64 9« Remarks. 1. The use of the difierent cases
with prepositions may be commonly referred with ease to fa-
miliar principles in the doctrine of the cases ; thus.

Genitive, — («.) Of Depabtube or MonoH from (^ 347). 'Atri riw
«(;^*>f« from the province, i. 1. 2. *£» Xtppanirov o^fMtfAtfs lb. 9. Ylm^m Tk
fittfftXutf ^oXX$i «'^0f Evftt ««'4A./o i. 9. 29. *AkXi/At9»i xmra Tiff ^tTfmt,
leaping doumfrom the rock, iv. ii. 1 7. — (/S.) Of Origin and Materux. (§ 355).
Ttycfitf avri ^mfui^drtv ii. i. 3. O7v0* rt \» rii$ fiaXmuv «'f«'Mi}/t«iy«v rms ««*•
rtS ^tiwrnH i. 5. 10. — (y. ) Of TuBafB ($ 356> Ilt^i ifiin hUtf 4r»M>«», Ihettrd
Tuptdtimg 9&me ofyoUf vL 6. 34. Tjir ilxfif . . rtw d/t^ rmi wmr^ Cyr. ia.
I. 8. — ().) PABinnvE (^ 358). Oi «vr«/MXiir«vrif U r«ff yXi^Wt L 7.
18. — («.) AonvB (§ 380). For examples, see § 589.

Dathtb, — ({.) Of Nearness (§ 399). Itn rtSt fvyd^h wiA the exik$
L 1. 11. TS9 ftm^* Uur^ Ib. 5. — («.) Of Plage (§ 420). B«r/XMi b

2.8.

AocusATivE, — (^.) Of Momow to (§ 429). 'AptMfUT$ . . vfis mMs
oame to him, i. i. 5 K4crfC«iyt» tif vj^/cv L 2. 22. rXv*'^''^ • • «^« f*^
^e«r«9<«^ a. 17. 'AmCh fV; r« ;^ii Ib. 22. K«c^ 2eX«C^ af^M* viL

Digitized

by Google

C«. 6.] PR£P<M»TlOlf. 309

S. S8 'Tir^ mirk rk nixn ^h^ C^T^^ ▼• ^- 48.— (a) Of SFWamOMTKm
(§ 437). Aaf*9'(it Mmi Mr* ^/«« jwi2 ^»r4» Soph. Tr. 379. B^tk ymfim
n^ Id. (Ed. T. 1087.

§ OSO* Nans. «. It is common to explain manjr of the osee of tlw
casei roeBtioaed in CSi. L by supplying prepoeitione ; when, in reality, the
conneotiOB tf the easee with the prepoMtiooe ie rather to be explained, as abonr^
bj reftranoe te these nsea, and to the principles on which thej are founded
In maqy connections the preposition may be either employed er omitted, a«
pleasure ; as, "IWe'i^ Vt vtt iymXXvrm I**) diM^Ci/f . ., •Zrm Miy«y liytiXXtr.
rSf i^a«'«rf» ^vfM^Smt U. 6. 26. Kmi m^mvy^ r^XXj WtAfif L 7. 4. 2trv «'«X
A.^ »^aify^ Ml) e^M? ^»f»9 iv. 4. 14.

fi. The poeti sometimes omit the preposition with the first, and insert it
with the second, of two nouns slmilaiiy refaited ; as, *Oiif . . AtX^v »dirk
AsvXi«# Soph. (Ed. T. 734. 'Ay^wt #ff tri^^ »fM w$i/ntmf f*fU$ lb.
761.

^ ^9 1 • y. In the connection of the preposition with its case, we are
to cAnsider not only^the ibree of the preporition in itself, but also that of tlie
CAMe «rfth which it is joined. Thus wu^m denotes the rdation at*dde or nemr^
ttetf ; and with tlie (jen., it signifies from the tide of, or from; with the Dat.,
at ikt §uU of or h§mdt, maty with ; with the Aoe., to tht mA of or to, E. g.
T«»«w mMUemtrti tr» •& ftttn wm^h$m^tXi» m^t^tfiutt iwfn^tuf trm^A U
Si vi«» mmi Haeim9»t wXi/mv f Xt^^aXim^ X^Mrr^g «^ hrkm «•) rh ^uim
fi^ UntfrnrHnM^m^rt w^h Kx»d^xf ^ 8. 7*

). An eOIptic use of the atiQeetiye after a preposition deserres notice ; thns^
*lx«^a) m h*r) r««#^«Mr«y [sa yinmtmiiw, or ms hni r«v mttrhf iTvom ^xuSfst-
9'ttH] W»h »^ ^'^^ v^mfdtm* layrkf i^W kXX^Xmt Ut^m^ they were cheerful
itutead of [being] dowmetut, ^, Mem. iL 7. 12. *£( ixCimp «l^eX«y iv(«vr«i
fiUf SofJi. Tr. 284.

f . The omission of the preposition with the second of two euhetmUwes hearing
a shmUar eotutructkm will be observed, not only after a eoHjtmctkm, but also in
the case of the rafotnw, in the queetioHs' emd atuwerg of a diatoguet &c ; as,
'Air# r% Ttn nai* umi r^ yiit B.. Gr. i. 1. 2. 'E* r^ Xt**^ f ^f^' A»#^
Symp. 4. 1 (cf. 'A*' Utifoy 9^ r«v xi***'^ ^' **^ «'«vr«v n^deSnv PL Coav,
213 C> ^Twrteyli a-i^i." ** T;»«» Wj" •'T#5 UrcXmf^dpuf " PL Bep.
456 d. *n« «w^ f<X«H »mi eU^y^mtt £sc. «'«f^] *ASnmit>t it^iZt k^dnu
Th. vLfM).

^. The complement of a preposition is often omitted idten a relative follows.
See § 526. «. So Eif [sc ro xt»**A ^^ ^* ^9. *E« iJ, wUii, Hdt. L 67.

§ Off 9* 2. A preposition in composition («.} often retains
its distinct force and government as such. But (/9.) it com-
monly seems to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. § 657. /?)»
and the compound to be construed just as a simple word
would be of the same signification. Hence (/.) the preposi-
tion is oAen repeated, or a similar preposition introduced.
The adverbial force of the preposition in composition is par-
ticulariy obvious (d.) in tmen$ (§ 328. N.), and (s.) when tHnm
proposition fs used with an ellipns of its verb (cluefly Itil)*
Thus»

Digitized

by Google

9fB SYNTAX OF THR flXTlCLB. [bOOX HI

era substantives ib the oblique c^ses, and mark
their relations ; as,

wrmfMt, ktmitmi fiom Sardiif mmd mnrrkm Anmj^ Ljfdim. to 0m timr Jfi»-

Or, more partioularfyi

*AvtI^ ino^ 4, and «^o govern the Genitive.

!^ and ow (i a Dative.

*A]m and «^ a m Accusative.

*Aii(pl^ dia, xoTo, ficra, and intQ ^ ^ Gren. and Ace.

*Enl^ na(fd, n'tql^ n^og^ and vno ^^ ^* Gen., Dat, and Aoc.

Nom. m. The Dativ« sometinies foOovs dfitfii mmk, aad ^ri in the poeto;
and il/»fi even in prose, chiefly lonie. TInia, 'A^2 wKtm^mt Matii. Pr. 71.
'Afd n uutfi Enr. Iph. A. 754. MtrA ;t;ie'^ Soph. Ph. 1 1 10.

^. The words above mentioned (with their euphonic, poetic, and dialectie
IbnuB^ as l» fiir l|, ^ 68, l^ tar 0^ i# ibr i/#, M for !», «r^«W and ir«ri ftr«^
vr«< for ^i) are afl wfaldi an eonaimonlj' termed prepoeitioM in Grwk, thwigh
other words maj have a prepositional lbNe(§ 6i7.«> These prepositioas Imm
primary reArenee to the relatiens of phee, and an naed to express other vria*
tkms by nassa ef some anc&fy^ eitiier nal or fimded (cL ^ 839).

y, *£# and w^i, by the addition of f (expressing vtoium or aetioHf cf. § 84),
become (l«f, § 58) li^ or i# (cf. § 57. 4), and tr^it • thus, i», in, i/f, tnto.

). To the prepositions governing Aa Aoc, most be added the £p. suffix -h,
to (cf. §§ 150, d22) ; as, OSinf^^f'i* A. 425 (cf. U^h "Okt^^tp 420). "Ax«.
)i A. 308 (cf. Elf ixa 314). 'Ai'^f^i [» uV 'AT^^f 20/<«v, § 385. 7] H. 33a
It is sometimes used pleonasticaUy ; aa» "O*^ hfuvht fi. 83. Ek M>mU m.
851.

§ 64 9« Remarks. 1. The use of the different cases
with prepositions may be commonly referred with ease to fa-
miliar principles in the doctrine of the cases ; thus,

Genttivb, — («.) Of Departubb or MonoH from (^ 347). 'A*-* rm
»iX^i^ fi*>^ ^ province, i. 1. 2. *£» Xippo9n9«p i^ftm/Atvct lb. 9. U.m^k ^
f^ufftXims «'0XA.«} «■(«; Kv^«» ««'nX/«y i. 9. 29. *A>.X«^fMi xmrk ^ ^r(»f,
leaping down from the rock, iv. ii. 1 7. — (/S.) Of Origin and Material (§ 355).
Tiyotitf Jkvri AMfimfmrw ii. i. 3. OTmv rt i» riif fiaXmvtv «'i«'Mi}/<t»«» rms tl^
Tw ^•'utttH i. 5. 10. — (7. ) Of TuBafB ($ 356> Ilt^« iftZ* 1m«v 4r»N>«v, / Aacrd
rsygrtny some of you, vL 6. 34. TS« lUns . . riif «^^ rw wmr^if Cjrr. iiL
I. 8. — (3.) Partitive (^ 358). O; av«-«^Xiir«ynf U r«?» w^xpim L 7.
18. — (i.) AonvB (§ 880). For examfdes, see § 589.

Dative, — ({.) Of Nearness (§ 399). Sv* rori ft/^cri, anfft <ft« eriXw
I. 1. 11. T^v flr«^* Uc/r^ Ib. 5. — («.) Of Plage (§ 420). Bcr/XcM b

2.8.

AocusATiVE. — (S.) Of Monow to (§ 429). •Af«»Mrr# . . ar^i* m«^
eoMe to Aim, i. i. 5 Emr'Amtn^ tit «*«)/«» L 2. 22. IZvaV^'^ • • «^ ''•^
rre«r«9<«^ a. 17. 'A»tC« fV2 ri^ l^n lb. 22. K«c^ 2eXi<e««» ^f^ viL

Digitized

by Google

C«. 6.] PR£P<M»TlOlf.

S. 28 *Tir^ M^* r« ri^« AyrM Qyi. r, 4. 4a. — («.) Of SntGlFlOATiov

(§ 437). A»fi9r(a »a} mar' ififtm umi fvr«y Soph. Tr. 379. Kmrm ymfun
n^t Id. (Ed. T. 1087.

§ 8SO* NoTSS. «. It is common to ezplaki man^ of the uses of tlw
casei meBtkuMd in CSi. L by mxpfiymg prapoutioni ; h^m, in reality, tlie
connectiOB tf the eaeee with the prepoeitioDs is rather to be expUined, as aboir^
by reftrenoe to these nses, and to the principles on which thej are founded
In many connections the preposition a^y be either employed er omitted, a«
pleasure ; as, "Hrw't^ )• ng dytik^.treu i**) Sm^'iCi/^ • ., •Stm Mif «» nymXXir.
Ttf i|a«'arfy %wme§eu tl. 6. 26. Km) »^»»y^ «'«XX$ WUbfif L 7. 4. 2in trtX
y.y »^tt$fyy Ml) fii*^ fir«v iy. 4. 14.

fi. The poets somedmes omit the preposition with the first, and insert H
with the second, of two nouns slmUarly refaited ; as, '01^; . . AtX^«f» »dig%
jlatvXmt Soph. (Ed» T. 734. 'Ayfwt r^ iri/^^m utM 'Wotftvim* m^i lb.
761.

^ ^9 1 « 7. In the connection of the preposition with its case, we are
to consider not onlythe ibree of the preperition in itself, but also that of the
CAMe wkh which it is joined. Thus v-*^* denotee the relation at* tide or nemt*
ne»f ; and with the Gen., it signifies from the tide of, or from; with the Dat^
at the $uU ef^ or kemde^ mar^ with ; with the Aoe., to the eide of, or to. E. g.
Tm¥rm umU^mwrtft ^ ^ ^*^ wm^k fimftXim we^tm04u$t itefnvmt* wm^^ 21
Bivi«¥ mmi Hmeimteg wXtie^t 4 )iM%<XiM^ X«CtfvTtf «^ hrkm «•) r4 rsMw-

). An eOIptic nae of the atiQeetiYe after a preposition deserres notice ; thus^
*lx«^«} ^ Jt»ri r»tti(«^Sf [sa yvfmmSt, or hb ^v^:} r«v «^ikf iTy«4 v»vi^»t*
wut] ilr»», Ml) «vr) vp»^t*/»iwf htitrkt n^un hXX^iXmt Uif^h ^^ ^oere cheerftd
instead of [being] dowmeoMt, ^., Mem. iL 7. 12. *£( tkCm* il^nXw U^turtu
fi/»^ Soph. Tr. 264.

I. The omission of the preposition with the second of two eubstasUives having
a timilar eomttruction will be observed, not only after a eonftmctioH, but also in
the case of the relative^ in the queeiioHs' emd atuwert of a dialogue, &c. ; as,
•Air« ri rSt nit »tu tJJj y^f H. 6r. i. I. 2. *£» r^ Xt**V» f ^f^* A»#^
Symp. 4. 1 (cf. 'A«' itctivcv yk^ rov xi^**^ ^* *" t0vt6p n^arlev PL Cony.
218 c). ^TtSrfyit wift,** ** TW Wi* •'T.5 i«-.X«^«»M» " PL Rep.
456 d. *SU itm^ f*X»¥i Ml) ^^yivmsy £ac. ir«^4] 'A/eMMHf ^mv Ic^vm
Th. vL 50.

^. The complement of a preposition is often omitted when a relative follows.
See § 526. «. So Eif [sc rh xi****\ ^ /3. 99. *£« iJ, wtU, Hdt« L 67.

§ Off 9* 2. A preposition in composition (a.) often retains
its distinct force and government as such. But (/?.) it com-
monly seems to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. § 657. /?),
and the compound to be construed just as a simple word
would be of the same signification. Hence (/.) the preposi-
tion is oAen repeated, or a similar preposition introduced.
The adverbial force of the preposition in composition is par-
ticularly obvious (d.) in tmetU (§ 328. N.), and («.) when Hbm
pireposttiOQ *e used with an ellipns of its verb (cluefly Itil).
Thu8»

Digitized

by Google

400 8TlfTAX OP THB PARTICLE. [bOOK IU

a. 2tfv(«^^i^iy mM rr^atrtmrai^ h» went wiA her 9oldier$, L 2. 20.

^. I1^0A9rtfi^i m alrif rh^ ^vymri^a Cyr. viii. 5. 18 (cf. Tlifi^ru 'AC^
CiX^nv . . «*(«( Utv^pZvrm vii. 6. 43). '£«'i«'A.ivr«f «vr^ U Gr. L 6. 29
;cf. IlA^Tv iir* «&rm lb. 1. 11>

Nonss. (1.) H«iioe v«rbt oompoanded with iir/, «'«f^ and «^ are oont-
moBly fbUowed by Um ZAirt. of approach (6 398). (2.) The prepositioB. af
•nob, and the general sense of the oompouad, oftsa reqnfare the sune oaae, as^
partieaUriy, hi oompoimdi of kwi^ V^ and rvv. See §§ S47, 399.

7. *En4(«fr« ti'rCaXXMv tit «^y KiXi»i«» i. 2. 21. Ilc^i^ li fitwtXuft mwiX
$n i. 9. 29.

§ OS 3* ). Tmesis oocors chiefly io the earlier (especially the Ep.)
Greek, when as yet the union of the preposition and verb had not become firm-
ly cemented. In Att. prose it is very rare, and even in Att poetry (where it
occurs most frequently in the lyric portions), it seldom inserts any thing mors
than a mere particle between the preposition and the verb. Thus, *A^o Xm^t^
itfunm [:>B ko$yh ifrafMiimi]^ to wcard off desMiction^ A, 67. II«^A )' ^yx**
fm»^ iriwnyt* F. 135. *Axl ^ nmwrw JiXtrmt Hdt. iiL 36. *£» Hk wM-
r««, and Ucqtntg forth, Eur. Hec. 1 172. Atm fi t^4$4^, umrk )* Imruwmt Id.
Hipp. 1357. *Ayr' 1^ ^rtiftrm PI. Goi^. 520 e.

Notes. (1.) The preposition sometimes follows the verb; and is some*
times repeated without the verb ; as, II<^«vr«f , S ywett, /urJi Ear. Hec
504. 'A«'0Xir «'«Xi», ««-• ti «'«r«^« Id. Here 1055. iLttrk /4v 7x«Mr«» A^.
/A6f rtfXiv, »»rk ti Hm^m^^nv Hdt. viii. 33. So, 'Ci^vpr^ . . * Aymf»tft9tnj «*
[sc. iJ^yur*] Y 'OWiw r. 267. "^X/irw . ., xk'i Vi E. 480. (2.) In the
earlier Greek, what is called tmeau is rather to be regarded as the adverbial use
of the preposition (§ 657. ^), than as the division of a word already com-
pounded.

t. 'Axx' itu [for avarm^i] S| U^attn^ but [rise] up from the etats, Soph.
Aj. 194. EiViX^fo «•«(« [for wm^trrt] Eur. Ale 1114. '^t [for iNm] )*
If Tf it^^ X'^if "^ Xii/Mwy XM4 «X0'4 V. 3. 11.

C. The Conjunction.

^654* Rule XXXV, Conjunctions con-
nect senteiices, and like parts of a sentence ; as,

'Hff'/iyfi Aa^tTcf xa) uvatvrtvtt DariuM was sick and apprehended, L I. 1.

wilhreti ri »«) ruXXeifACeini Ki;^«f i. 1.3. "il^n avr^ /tfSA.X*v fiXtmt iT-
rai If /SariXir lb. 5. IlXt/tfVf j| %t^xt^6t i. 3. 7. *EC^« ««) ^^'U^txif »»
*EXA.f}v<x*rf i. 8. 1.

Remarks. 1. By like parts cf a sentence are meant words and phrases of
like construction, or performing like offices in the sentence, and which united
by conjunctions form compound subjects^ predicates, adjuncts, &c. Some con*
nective adverbs also may sometimes be regarded as uniting like parts of a sen-

2. Like parts of a sentence are commonly, but not necessarily, of the same
part of speech and of sunilar form. In many cases, it seems to be indifi^rent
whether we regard a conjunction as connecting like parts of a sentaBoe, or (sop*
plying an ellipsia) as connecting whole sentences.

Digitized

by Google

JH. 6.] CONJUNCTION. — CONCLUDING REMARKS. 401

3. A conjtmction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not Sft
mnch to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word (xt
phrase in it; thus, n^0rC«XX0V0'« . . xmraXtv-ovrgg &^<iio9 T$Tf m-cXtfiiuf, tifiau
XtitTo <ptuyuit iy. 2. 11.

§ 8«S9« 4. A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, accord
Ing as a word is regarded as bdon^ng to a compound part of a sentence, or to
a new sentence ; thus, Wxtvwtetri^if fjth Kt, •/ Uw^^mir, « l^«2 }kiltouf Gyr.
viiL 3. 32. '£» lu9Ti^t j} r^iUvti b-iw^fir«v Th. vii. 77. Tins 'hi metri^otf
M^ /tSiXXtt kKfAol^wfitt 4 \ym [sc. ^x^^iv], vret^anai Isocr. 188 a. *H/(«a>»
ti tiftuivff i i»iry««, ri //tiXXtf w^oa^ta/tivttv Dem. 287. 27. Oifhmfiov yet^
l#ri» 'Ayi^m *ASntm9t %Stmty Jr**!^ 0^«rvC«v>.«v Lys. 136. 27* 'E^f-
#ri ^\ Sf^i^ *ILyiX»x»fi n^9 xiyuf Ar. San. 303.

5. In many connections, two forms of construction are etjuaDy admissible^
the one with, and the other without, a connective. The two forms are some-
times blended. See §§ 461. 3, 609, 6i9. N., 628.

6. A conjunction is sometimes used in Greek, where none would be employed
ill English ; e. g., when vrcXvg is followed by another adjectiye ; as, n«xxa n
»mi im-trnhum ^nXiytvr^ ▼• 5. 25.

§ 999m 7. The GredLS, especially the earlier writers, often employ the
more generic for the more specific connectives (§ 330. 1), or instead of other
ibrms of expression ; as, 'Ei»^«y^avi • ^x*^^ ^^ *Xti»tv tS ^Xt* vi^ivri ^41,
' [and] for I have more leisure,' iEsch. Pr. 817. Tuyx»*'>' rt xXnfi^ xvav^nt-
€^w irvXnt ^rnXSra^ xat /$t (p^oyyoe »l»tUu xeixav fiaiXXu ht* urvf, 'just as I am
drawing the bars, there strikes,* Soph Ant. 1186. Ka) ilhn r ^* i* <r^ r^inf
ermifMJf^ jUe) X.$i^ifo^Of mvr^ t^mXtvtivfit iv. 6. 2. Ov;^ if4,oia/s vtvatnKdff^tj
nmi "Oftn^i (cf. ^ 400), they have not composed in the satne manner [and] a$
Homer, or wiA Homety PL Ion, 531 d (cf., in Lat, nmUis atque, &c.).

Note. The student will not fiul to remark, — (a) The frequent use, in the
Epic, of )i for yaft and in general of codrtUnatinn in the connection of sentences,
for BubordhuOkm. — (b) The frequent use of 7«# in specification, where we*
fbonld use thatf mamefyf aav, &c. ; as, T^ lnX»f «» • r$ ^» yk^ w^ifht hft,%*
ff . . U'iUtn iL 8. 1.

D. Concluding Remarks. .

§ Off 7« I. In Greek, as in other languages, the different
classes of particles oflen blend with each other in their use.
Thus, (cr.) adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions ;
(/J.) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad-
verbs ; (;'.) the same particle is used both as an adverb an i £is
a conjunction, or as a connective and a non-connective ad-
VQi*b. E. g.

«. For examples, see §§ 347, 349, 372. y, 894, 899. — Horn, uses tf^tt and
lr*r as protracted forms for tit * thus, 'AyyuXw . • 1Xi#v tUm CI. 145 (cf. Kit
IXiM 143). *AyJiyfift9 U«0 xXi^itiv H. 155.

$, ^ fihf MiXtu(ri0, xit^Jmtltt n v^if [sc T9vr$f\ * in addition to thi^
'besides,' ifisch. Pr. 73. n^^f V tn til. 2. 9. 'E» )S [so. r«vrMf], and vmom-
" Soph. (Ed. T. 27.

34*

Digitized

by Google

4M BTJifAX OP TW PABT^IUK* [bOOK HI.

16. S«^/yfT«i» M r«v 2Ti;^^«Xi«v, »«) (conjunction) 2«r«^cTay r«v *A;^m«%
(iMtff SfTMf »«2 (adverb) T«vT«i;f, Ixixivrir L 1. 11. TI^Sr§9 ftlv tia^x^H • .
i7r« )i IXifi i 8. 2. "AAJltf ft X«#^ m) iXX«f» i7t« ff-fXX*/ i. 5. 12
T«v«w Iff-MMW, /•i;t;e« riMr«f iyirtr* iv. 2. 4 (c£ $ 394). 11 Xj^* m.vA
MMmXim l;^«vrtf L 2. 24 (of. § 849).

Note. The adverb v^/v is oonstraed in ftmr ways; (1.) *s * co&neoCivi^
witti the appropriate mode ; thus, Mji w^irhv tucTrnkofm , ., «r^ Jv mit^^ mfn^
C«vXivr«fT»i, * before he should consult,* i. I. 10 {w^n is followed by tlM Sslg.
»r Opt., only when a ne^tive or interrogative sentence praoedes) ; (2.) as har-
Ing a prepositional force, with the Inf ; thus, 11^ tittmmi r^i^ \»%>Jkm^
be/br$ [oompleting] Mfy had oampUtedfaur stadut, iv. 5. 19 ; (3.) as a simple
adverb, with H and the appropriate mode : thus, Tl^U n • • iyitovra, before duU
they had comey Oyr. i. 4. 23 ; (4.) with 4 and the Inf. instead of another
mode ( 629. 2). This construction is less Attic

§ 688. II. Both adverbs, and prepositions with their
cases, are often used substantively. An adverb and a preposi-
tion governing it are often written together as a compound
word. Thus,

*Or«v }li r0urttf SXif txnru but when you ham had enough of fAu^ v. 7. It.
lEuf fiXf £ira^ xtii fi^mxv* XV^*** f^ ^'"^ ^^ *"' *hnrt Hme, Dem. 21. 1. Eif
W9 PI. Tim. 20 b. Uix^t UrauPm V. 5. 4. U^i^'aXmt Ar. Eq. 1155. *E>(.
w^tfr/fv iii. 4. 2. UafmvrUa Cyr. 11. 2. 24. *Hv . . M^ 9fiuev rtS «Xm
^r^aTtvfiMTcf *A^»«$ff, eUfove half of ihe whale army were /Ircadians^ vL 2. 10.
Alrtt etvriv %U ^/r;^iXitft/f l^uws i. I. 10. *Ex rit itfi^) T0US fiv^Uuf V. 8. 8.
Svfii^afM,o9 iff %U Wrano^Uvs H. 6r. iv. 1. 18. "ZuvuXtyftitmt uV <^ ^»X^
«f^} WrnjitrUut lb. ii. 4. 5.

§ 6S9* III. One preposHtk>ii or adverb is oft«n used for
another (or a preposition is used with one ease for another), by
reason of something associated or implied. This constnietioa
is termed, from its elliptic expressiveness, conftructio prog*
nans. Thus;

«.) A PREPOSiTK^ of ma^on for one of rest, 01 U rnt iy^ . • i^vym
[U for In, by reason of X^uy^ following], ihoe/e in the marhet fled [from it], i.
2. 18. Ai % v'nymi mitrav i/riv in rSf ^nriXuvn lb.. 7. 'A^ixMiwvwi r*>v \m
T9V x^V^^ ^t^^s &»^(tg V. 7. 1 7. To7f Ix rivXtfi/ Xn^ftt^i, those taken at Fylne
and brought thence, Ar. Nub. 186. 0/ awi tSp nara^^fnArit rut nn—ri-
. M^ . . \x^ti9r» Th. vii. 70. E/f A^Ayxnv mifufm, we' hm come into nu tmity,
and He there, Ear. Ipti. T. 820. *E» 1^ ri ^«ri#C«X« rSf ^ rm iiV ri wt^
1.2.25. . -^ T -^

/3). A PBBPOsrnoN of raff for one of fnotion, *Ev Aiv»«)if n^rprmw [l« for
iif, to imply that they were still there], had gome to Leucadia, or were abeent m
Z., Th. iv. 42. O; y if rif '^C»*f nnTmwi^tyyirtf (cf. Eis ^ ri *H|«m* m-
ri^tfyi) H. Gr. iv. 5. 5. *£» r!f warn^*^ ttnrw Ag. 1. 32.

y.) An ADVSRB of motion for one of rMt T£p f ,W*» [for }»)m] rtt tUeny
mdr»0 Ar. Plut. 228. iUraUn^it rw riwtr rsS iviiwU tit 4XX#» r<*»» A

Digitized by VjOOQIC

Off, &} KlflPI^S,

U57.

).) An ADTEBB of reft ibr one of mofum. "O«'0v [for S^tm] fiiCnxtf, §Mt
•Hi, mo one AnoiM wAcre [for whither] he ha» gone. Soph. Tr. 40. n«yr»;^«#
«^^urCiv«'«^iy Ar. Lys. 1230.

^ 660. IV. In the doctrine of .particles, especially con-
nectives, the figures of syntax hold an important place ; thus,

A. Ellipsib.

Ellipsis here consists either (««.) in the omission of the par-
ticles themselves, or (/I), far more frequently, in that of words,
and even whole sentences, connected or modified by them.

a. Among the particles most frequently omitted are copu*
lative and complementary conjunctions (§ 339. N.) ; as,

Tftn^t, ix**f KV^f**^*^ ^X**f '^'^Cf rowovTout vii. 1. 21. Ovrt wXt*4u^us 2«-
fMm w^ftiXtH $'•«• •& [for tUri] X/uXdv^y^t .£aeh. Pr. 450. *OfAwm ifiTw
S«Mi# irmtrmf mmi «^«f, [ee. irt] i fun* . . UvifAw vi. 1. 31. 'A^X»^iif,
ipfktyZ V. 6. 17. *lLit§iyyuk0» wi^t^ ^sii» Wttt tAx*^ l^ai^fiun itSku*
ymmtmm wsrriiv }* b lifudi tp(M JB^ck: Ag. 604. See § 611. 3.

NoTB. Hdt. sometimes uses dStttv with the ellipsis of a conditional or other
€QiijnnatioB ; ai, OAmmw ittmnrt Ttuhm, iftus . . UX4i>|'«^iv, if tiun you mU
fWl <&» tibic, iM MoU dbiert, iv. 1 18.

§00 1* /5. Connected sentences especially ab6und in el-
lipsis, from the ease with which the omission can be supplied
from the connection. We notice, among the great variety of
oases that might be mentioned, the frequent ellipses,

1.) In replies; as, ^^ISt^rtt • r< n Wi»fifat\^ *0 %* i^ix^Uart, trt tS
^^ tlx frr<v] L 6. 7. 'Euwitrtt Tt rtiu *0^«»t««, irt «^i» altxnhlf lb. 8.

Nam. (a.) In a dialogue or address, % speaker often commences with a
connective (most frequently* an adversative or causal coogunction), from re£N>
coce to something which has been expressed or which is mutually understood ;
as, *AXX* i^MTi, hutyau»e$y iii. 2. 4. 'E/m) T th ^avX$9 hxu fT««i vi. 6. 12.
07m 7«f rM fftrnx^tat^ Z Eof^i, r«» «^tX^«v { i. 7. 9. (6.) In like manner the
Voc is often Mowed by a connective ; as, *n yvfau^ tpn, i^tfM V% r« ri Urn %
Mem. iL 1. 26. ^H Ki^»«, rU yk^ • • hytf^ni^u \ ». 501.

9.) Between two connectives ; as^ *Aaji^ [sc. «'«m«imm] yk^ »mi itt^ttint*
iUid^m UL 2. 82. Cf. y. 7. 11. *Axxk yi» Vthwa in, 2. 26. U^^m ^
^Xmrrmv fiu • mmi [sc rmunf fti] yk^ ifin Mi*u vi. 2. 18. 'Km) yk^ »m\
mm^m Ifminr* iL 2. 15. — And yet, perhaps, in such examples as these, »X.
Xk ytif or luii ym^ may be regarded as forming but a single compound con-
Bective^ or one of the particles may be regarded as a mere adverb (§ 657. y).

§ 669» 3.) With if^ especially in expressing compariaon, de$ign^
pretoKe, possUnKtjf, 6c. ; as, 0iTr§* 4 [sc 0utid ra^^ £f nt &9 ^ir«, quicker
tk&m [ao quick asj one wotdd have thintght, i. 5. 8. M(i{«*« i^yn^fUfH Chu 4

Digitized

by Google

4M SnCTAX OF THB PARTICLE. [bOOX lit

iSy M niir/)«r «^» mt^enttm^t Mtking Ihat Ae preparal&m wom greatet Atm
[so great as] it would be against the Pisidiaru, i. 2. 4. B^a;^vTi^ ifMtrj^MV
j «f l|i»MiWM, Aatr/lnf [a shorter distance than so as to reach] too Jtort a dn-
tance to reachf iu. 3. 7. *Epa9fi tfuafTOf, i9riri^ vi^iXn ktuxn i* 8. 8. *ii$
tit fMcx*f* «'«(ir»f(Mcr^iy«f, arrayed a« [he would array] /or battle^ lb. 1.
*£«'i»«^«'rfv, 1^ %U «v»X*»r/v lb. 23. 0(t^«i;rj» «»» jc^airtt iit ^(*f «^y ««*•
<0v v'^rafMS txC^nrtf iv. 8.- 21. 'A/t(ti^Uf m M t«ut§vs t 2. 1. "iifirt^ ^79*
imiXtv0t L 5. 8. 'Xlf i» taIv v'kfivTttf [flC t}i/»«vr«], ^i/yT«^»^iMf Th. vL 70.
Ki^««'»^r4M, lif 4v ami l*r^»«rif t« va^' Xaturut v^S^/mk, ^i/rcvrif, <fte CIsra
sunliaiu akuvied, as they would naturally be having seen what had happened
among themselves^ v. 7. 22. *fU Iwi r« wfXv, as 0ungs are far the most part,
commonly. Hi. 1. 42. See §§ 410, 525. «, 640.

. NoTBS. (a.) From the frequent use of «f with the aocosative after Terbt
of motion to express the porposed end of the motion (§ 429), it came at last
to be regarded as a mere preposition, suppljing the place of wfif or tU, bat
chiefly before names of persons ; as, ri«^Mr«4 J*f fimnkim, goes to the king, L
S. 4. (6.) *fLf is often used to render expressions of qoantitj less posittTd;
as, 'E;^*** [sc. «jlfr« 9vXkevt} if nfT»»»vUvs, having such a number as 500, L
«. about 500, i. 2. 8.

§003* 4.) With adversative coi^jnnctions, with which we most soni*>
times supply the opposite of that which has preceded ; as, Kmi ^ ft* mrifsm
r^tf")* mcrcrriiXnrt yns, aXX* a^^iwXtvm »eti nnrmrrsimf iifiun [sc. ^•^•A]
Soph. El. 71. E; fth ^«(/XiT««, l^inv • ii )' [se. ^ /}«^i«w<], i n fi*uXsrmsf
Ttvrd ^Mtrti PI Euthyd.^285 c.

5.) With 4, before which there is sometimes an ellipsis of /uiXXn • as, Z««
^rw0t $H(^aifU9 [sc fAaXk§f]fii ufimt ^itut Lys. 171. 8. T«y rnt hfuri^
wixtttf Tvxnf it iXtifttiv, , . 4 rkf Iju/fiv Dem. 24. 16. See § 466.

6.) With conditional conjunctions ; as, £< ^v fi r< tx"f> '^ M«)«r«^
it^if tifiuis kiyuf [sc. Xiyi In] • «i ^l ftfi [sc. 7^i<f ], h/*Uf v^if ri Ix^f**^ ^
7. 15. E7ri «XX« rt ^iX»t XV^^*^* **'*'* ^^ Mywrrn rr^aTiuttfj ^vymmm»
0TA^Pat9T if mvrSf iL 1. 14. Kjt) vvy, ^y ^v « Kv^t fi§oXnret4 [mmX^s ix**] •
•4 el ^«, ufitiit yt rj|» r«;^iVTffv wa^ttrt Cyr. iv. 5. 10. 'Ewaitfir sac) ;^4Xm luit
fH n &XX0 x^"f^*' ^* [^* }»«'«* T«ur§] i. 6. 1 (•' ri; SO used is equivalent to
jkTTJf). 0/ ^\ «XXm Mff-aSXtyr* v«r« rt r«fy waXtfttivv xtc) X****f» *^* '^ ^'^ ''''f
T. 8. 8. *E{rtiV«»r«, TX»i» if ris rt fsXi^/^fy iv. 1. 14. £?vm JTrcen, trXit «•-
^^«* 14 rj^v 2«»iX/«y ^«vr« «vr«W %§vXme%w4m Th. vl. 88. 'AXXm fA%ti—0t , . •
•4 %\ nmH MVTcH [sc. «v /«iv/«tfril, ^luyitrvt I. 45. Ei )* lyi [»■ gi )| /i«vXi%
i^ (m/ t/ yoK vfitt^ corns'] A. 302, and oft«n in Horn.

NoTB. When two similar danses are connected, a pronoun, preposition, or

tther word is sometimes (chiefly by the poets) omitted in the first clause, uid,

for the sake of emphasis or the metre, or by reason of other ellipses, inserted

.in the second; as, Ztty^*$, 'Ar^i*; mV, 9»%* Sl^u tt^m Ivmmi Z. 46. "Ea

lUXsv X^ <^r«e«f .^iiiy%»mi ^ird^mitf ^ 326. See ^ 650. fi.

B» Plbokasil

§ 00 4. Under this head we remark,

1.) The redundant use of negatives. This appears chiefly
«.) In connection with ind^nites, which in a negative sentence are A

Wgnlaj^ combined with a negative ; as, 0^«r« l^u •Mt I. S. 5. OUsA

sUm/^i slUmfuSt •HitftUn nMtmtmv %xu PL Parm. 1 66 a.

Digitized

by Google j

0B.6.] PLEONASM. 405

/S.) Id divided ooDstroctieii ; as, Oim mUx^^ •Sr% ^imv tSv M^otn
ii. 5. 39. Mfi^t Ttktiri funrt IfUi finrt &XXf vii I. G. Ov ya^ l^rn Z^rtt
ikwi^tt^mv rW«rtr«if ^r% Vfttt 0St% mXkf tvitti ^Xnfu yvn^mt ifetfTioufitfOf PL
ApoL 31 e.

y.) In the emphatip lue of §bM and fni^i • as, Ou fih Ih »uit rtur &f nt
ilwti L 9. 18. Mil r«iytnr /AtiH vii 6. 19. 0S»9Uf fiovktrat . ., $i^ v^XXf"
2<7, he does not titerefore wish, no, far from it, Dem. 100. 9.

§ OOo* I.) In the use of ^n with the Infinitive, after words implying
■ome negation ; as, N«vxXii^«if c«'fr<ri fth isayM, he forbade the thipnuutere to
etoet [saying that they shoidd not cross], vii. 2. 12. 'TS^i^vyt r§ /mi »atra-
9tr^m$nnu L 3. 2. "E^u r«v ^^ tcmrtt^Ztm iii. 5. 11 (cf. 2;^if0'«f.rt vn^fv Ear.
Or. 263). EiwXMVTir ftniet/An . . Vtf^/^fr^oM vii. 6. 29 (cf. KuXvfut too xaitn
i. 6. 2). Ea^Xv/mta ^jf mi^ninim Th. i. 16. *^if%itf rw /in ^fi tttat iv.
8.14.

Note. Ob is sometimes used in like manner, with a finite v^5 supplying
(with 7ti or ttf) the place of an Inf. ; as, *A^f u^0at g ., »rt «» vafiry, to denjf
that he woe present, Bep. Ath. 2. 17. *iU )' •»« ImTvh lyu*^yu rnt ynw^ •Im
iHwrnr it^fnfnttu Dem. 871. 14.

§ 000* I.) In the use of /Ml «^ inth the Infinitive and Participle, as
A rimpte negative* This chiefly occurs (1.) after negative and interrogative sen-
tences, and (2.) after some expressions of ehame and fear. Here ftn §u takes
the place of nmple /mi, and (3.) may even be wholly redundant after words
where fin would be so (§ 665). Thus, (1.) Oihig yi ^* «y trt/ruty mvi^Mwiv
ri ftn «v» Ix^m, none of men eon persuade me not to go, Ar. Ran. 65. Ou ya^
At fimMfkf 1x^tv*9 atirit, fin »if» tx^* v fUfit»X*9 Soph. CE)d. T. 220. Tit
fMux'^^^ f^ '^X^ ir»vr« nmrmtaXa^ttu \ BL Phfedo, 74 d. (2.) "VUrt v'art*
ml^x^^^ ^*»h f'^ *** fPVv'iM^itf ii. 3. 11. (3.) Ov» iimtrute^fiai r» fin •»
y*y»ttu9 JBsch. Pr. 787. Tj inr» fiiXXus fih »v ytymUxuf % lb. 627. T/
^fiwMf fik §vxi • • J^^^a9t^9^ iiL 1. 13.

^.) In the occasional use of »u to strengthen the negative idea implied m
M, than ; as, T/ $^9 ^iT Imm** rip XV**^ avmfiivuv, . . ^XXw n »vx »ff r»x*^'*''^
• . rht ilftivn* vtu^itu, ' rather than make peace,' = ' and not rather make
peace,' H. 6r. vi. 3. 15. E/ r§iftf9 rtt vfiSf . . &kXttf *it ixu rn* i^ynv Iv)
Mtti*m9, H ^ §y ^i«y avrh T%4vAvtu Dem. 537. 3. *^»ii yk^ • Yii^ffnt ovhit
w$ fiikx.\*9 W n^Utt, ^ w »mi Wl vfii»s Hdt. iv. 118. (Compare, in French
and Ital., Vous icrieez mkux que vous ne parkz, Egli era piu ricco che voi non
" s.)

Notes. (I.) Two negatives in the same sentence have commonly their
distinct force, («.) when one applies to the whole sentence, and the other to a
part only ; and (fi,) when two sentences have been condensed into one. Thus, •
(«.) Oi; Vi^} fiXt fu X\ym . ., *tf>) Xfiav TH •S, I do not say it of you, and not
if myself, PL Ale. 124 c Oi vSw Imtivti iraiofitvot, . . •iJ^ ^«'#^«»i7» •/ rXi»-
sunt )tf*c»r«ii iii. 1. 29. (/3.) See the examples in § 528. 2; to which
miy be added, with an ellipsis of the relative, Oihig sun t^m^x* Symp. i. 9.
(S.) For si fi^ see §§ 595. 1, 2, 597. 1.

$ 667. 2.) The repetition of various particles for greater
clearness or strength of expression, particularly after interven-

by Google

Digitized

STBTAX or t^ fAmcLE. [book ai

OiTiHeQ dmmucDDii, am wbb uiiponnK or o^
pfafttic wofdi; as,

'EltfytiW Ir«» u fJk mmrmCmmrtu i'«<Mirif sa* wtUmm, Sri ■■rBM^iii

M^r ^» &;t^ ^Uj^mAm L S* €. KWs «« j— !■■■ i^nmt mmXai/ut Mw
8o|*. Am. 68a Til;^' £* >^* iS» rw>ffy ;t^ «Vmi«i» ^^^ U. CKA. T.
139. 'n c«»M» iS yi»-i» Jd. AiL 799. Ei ^ $7 «« ^nA«C« PL Gaqg^
480k

3.) The miihiplicitfioo of particles of sbnihr fefce, aad the
emplojineat of Deedleae coDoectives ; as,

^vtmL 1. 10(cf:L2.2). Oiw^iritw ^^U li ..lf^mmr*kg,%.A. ^3m»
dl«ra Mf»7'«*« Tk Tm. 92. TW 24 x«f ^'s** ^ W> 701 d. Sit
f^ 4C1. 3, 809 «, 619. N^ 628^ 855^ S.

a

§ %% 8. The influence of attraction aomedmes passes
eyeo beyond a cotineetiTe ; as,

Omii^ tbe attnKtkm of «f) PL Goer. 205 ow 'B^^m^ AW^m* ^ ^ ifc«»-
Imnu (r«vf Ag»»Xci^»w>Pf), Si ^ ^tiXtnrm * AtdCmnnt [ior di»#Crf»rf , bgr
ttttneHaa to the tnli^ of fisiXtwrm] )l . ., ««'i^Mr» Tlu r. 50. 'Eygil
CMT »«} J r«9 IXA«» «WS»r»* (see ^ 868. 8) Tk TiL 21. See 4 627. 2.

D. AsAOOVOTBlOlh

§ SO 9. Anacdutbon is frequent in the connection of sen
tences. The clause completing the construction is oflen either
omitted or changed in its form. Hence, also, the regular cor-
respondence of particles is sometimes neglected. Thus,

*Xlf yi^ iym • . ^Mt/^m. Tnn, Sn KXmi^^s i im Bv^«y«^ A^/furr^ fdXXm
if^9 [for it HxMHrm, Kximti^ fiiXXtt, Or |»«tw«« «<n KAi«^^«i ^tsAXu] vi. 4.
18. 'Afiif Ti' if !«#««« *i nfkM [fbr it fM«f»» «y H^i^ or Umm •» vMm**!
Soph. Tr. 1238. 'Axxk f^hf, — i^ yk^ xmi «wrf^ If J» f;t;«' >A«^'^, uti
n /StfvX^rir/ci ^<Am 4^> i7»M • — - ««)« /»if yd^ [for ^Ai^ ^, i^ y^ «Qtt,
or «A.X<t ;mv9 i(£ ' JUm. yai(\ iL 5. 12. See iii. 2. 1 1. TUv )i *A/if»«Mr» lr»<t«
yk^ «^irC«4« ^r^irt^t Iv rn Amtit^ifMVi wt^i &XXm9 mftSrmy tut) . . 0«|»
«0rMV TIl L 72. 06» W0* S rt /Mt>.X«v, Z ati^tf 'A^ffMMM, Wfiiru aSr^s^ m
riv rMMfrn ifint U Il^mrmni^ etruritu [for 2 rt ftSiXXn ^r^t^n^ i, or 7 n
«r^iru oSrtittj ig] H. Apol. 36 d. Eliirtg turn, at ifMimt %V9tt4itT%t^ nmi i! U
rm fuif 9'(it v-afirtuvaffiifBvt i»C<C«^«iv, i [for »mi ti] »mrm ynv Hftu
ytmtfun^etv Hi. yL 64.

§ O yO. Note. After a connectiTe, « distinct aenteoce often takes tlM
place €ft a part of a sentence, and sometimes the reverse ; as. '^;^mt«i . .

«if^p»« • •; ^i» ixx*i /5iie^«e*'» ^^ ^* ««''-'5f <i>«xrM; t]^ ^ExAny [for tU V «•-

'I^' *L*^^' ^**^* '''^ A«-flW.,. tte rett barbarians, but [theta wasT om </
Cftem /%dr/mw», a Gre^A H. 1.7. See i. 10. 12. Um^nMi^Hn /rrtr 'i#»«i«-

Digitized

by Google

CH. 6.] AKAcoLtmtow.-^GftiiBmjLtioifs. Kit

might be tnacte tegoUtf by repeating «'«^«/*Sx«0f] Th. i. 25. See M41. /I.

^6T1. V. The Greek especially abounds in combina-
tions of particleSf and in elliptical phrases having the power of
particles. The use of these sometimes extends farther than
their origin and structure would strictly warrant. A few ex-
amples of these combinations and phrases are given below,
hut the subject in its detaib beknigs to the lexicographer rather
than the grammarian.

1. AXXm ym^, mmi yA^, See § 661. d.

2. dxx* H [from 4Uuu i or iXXm 4]« oOm thtm, metpt; as, *A^^i§» fth

hr. 6. 11.

8. IXX«f rt Mm!, both otherwim and m parHcuhr^ tiptdaUy ; as, 0^9 y«*
Itu^tt diifif iiXXM§ n »mi &^x***'» »»>-^»* cTv urnfim vii. 7* 41.

4. tnX*9 Ui^kU aridemt tftot, mridemtfy, U J)*^ Ui, J)' irs, 9^4 M' 2r%
and sinular phrases, which are often inserted in sentences (qnite like adYerbs),
or annexed to them ; as, Tib ^y ^ Em^§p t$ix$9 In tSrmt tx** i* 3. 9. OSw^
If ^AM^, if ^' 2n, UaWm^s Dem. 72. S4. U^p^i^mrH t^ ^ ^h . ^ ti UT
Ui Ar. Ffait. 182%

5. i; yd^, tU' 4f$Uf, see $$ 599, 600. 2.

6. t! tk fi9f but if not, aUmrmm, used etven after n^gattre sentences ; asy
m ir§tn0ift rmSrm • ij ft ^ 1^ ^rimrV^ «h net do Mtf | oikerwim, mud
k§, fom wiB havo hlamo, viL 1. 8. Oth^ i» rf SUn rk hrXm h ix^ • m' )I
/4> le««^i» i wrmftif It. 8. a

7. Ivm ri, in rj, and In r/, see § 589. a.

. S. ft4 ri yt, not to oay aufkt mardjf, I. e. wmtk Ut$y or ffmaft «ors; «% 0I»
Im I* AM*^ Jk^tSwrm «vft TMir ^iX«if iwtrArrnn M^ a^m ri VMto, /m^ ri ^t
^ ru$ ^utt Dem. 24. 21..

' 9. "Ort f^n after negatives, exetpt [as ? «, ^,( 1^4, wked ia not] ; as^ 0^ ^^i^
h «^i$»% In ^ ^ik Th. iv. 26.

10. t^ >';k^ ilxxi, for Hit mi otk&rwioe, btit,l9,f>t indeed; as, 01 yk^
iXX* 4 0^ fiif fx»i4 Ar. Nob. 282.

11.0^ ftivTM mXXdf «v ^9 dXXdf pti no, bmtf L e. noperthek$$f or im^ roM-
dXX* Uei^ufif i Ks^ Qyr. L 4. 8.

12. tix Iri, ^ lr<, t^x ^•^ •^a; ^'>'f> ^ t^m, 0^x *'«*> I do not eatf Aat^
M* te My <fta<, Ac, L e. notf on^, or not miy not (die three first phrases nsu-
■Dy mean not onfy^ and the three last not only not) ; as, Oitx In /tivg • K^<.
r«»» 1« ^ryx'*f 9** kkXk »mi m ^/Xm Mbrav, not only woe Crito himrnlf unmoleet'
od, but aim hie friende^ Hem. ii. 9. 8. Wi yk^ In ifx^vra, Axxk tnH «^
eft ^»C«XnTM4f . . aiI»u9Tmt Cyr. ViiL 1. 28. "Ax^nrrdi yh^ xtii yv*eulf)f . ^
ftk In itth^n, * not to say men,' PL Bep. 898 e. Olx •«'«» «v« V^*^«»
kX3C m)* iriv^r«v Th. iv. 62. 'flf «7 \a*titttfti9t0i •hx I*f( nfiitff^^mtvr*^
kXXh nmi Wmniftui*^ that the Larethrmmiinnt hnd mtt tmfy mtt pnninhed, hmt

Digitized

by Google

408 SYNTAX OF THK PABTICLE. [bOOK IU«

H. Gr. V. 4. 84. Oi^x ^^ U^ )«n vu. 7. 8. W,

lil^lr} 9^x ^^"f '^ VMvrt/Kiy Soph. £1. 796.

NoTS. Oix St' iB sometimes although [not becaum, denying an inferenos
which mi^t be drawn] ; as, 'ILyyuifMu /mi itriXiirir/tfj, §bx ^^* iral^u mmI
^0tt Utkiwtun tifot PL Prot. 336 d.

13. 4Sn»m and i^aSftxa [.s=r«t/r«i/ Tn»«, trt, §§ 530, 40.), 372. yj,
poet^ on account of this^ that — y becati$e, and, with certain verbs, that; as,
ZnX£ r* iS^ovttt l»rif airmt »»(us^ I envy you [because] that you are fret
from blame, i£sch. Pr. 330. 'Ir^i twt* v^Jr**, »Svt»m. "ExXnfit U^i* Soph.
Ph. 232. OStvut is sometimes used by the Att. poets, like a simple adverb,
with the Gen. ; as, rvf«4»«f tSnmmt [because of] for At $dke of a woman^
Jilsch. Ag. 823.

14. When two prepositions are combined, which oecnrs most frequently in
the Epic, dther one or both the prepositions are used adverbially (§ 657. 0),
or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement €ft tha
other ; as, *Af*^i vi^) »f ifvur, round about the fountain, B. 305. At* U fttym^
^0 «. 388. rit^ wfi ym^ iyx** ^^*' ^' ^^^- Asavr^i P. 393. Tltiftl
rtS . . Jk^v^iw Hdt. iii. 91. 'Tv' U fitkutv, from beneath the weapons^
A. 465.

§ 6T9» VI. Position of Particles. 1. Prepositioes
regularly precede the words which they govern. For the ac-
centuation when they follow (which is chiefly poet, and in Att
prose occurs only with ntf^l governing the Gen.), see ^^ 730,
731. N.

KoTB. The great fondness of the Greeks for connecting kindred or ctm
trasting words as dosely as possible often produces hyperbakm in the oonstroe-
tion of the preposition with its case, as well as ta other constructions ; thoi^
n^«f &XX$r &kX99, for dkX$Tt 9'($f dXk«9, JEBct, Ft. 276. Uafit plXnt fiXf
^(^•iv ywmt»it it^i^l Id. Gho. 89. See § 511. 3. For hyperbaton in earnest
entreaty, see § 426. ^

§ 073* 2. Connective and interrogative particles, with
the exceptions mentioned below (Note a), commonly stand
first in their clauses.

Notes. «. The following particles cannot stand first in a clause ; An (not
for U», § 588), &^a (parozytone), mZ (poet mZrt), mZ4tt (Ion. nvrts), yti^,
yi, ^al, Vt, ^n (except in Horn, and Find.), %nhf, dnra, B^nv (poet.)» «< (£pO>
fiif, fitivTM, /inf, 9tn (enclitic ; Ep. also vv, § 66. «), •»», vi^, ri, r0i, r»i*v»,
and the indefinite adverbs beginning with «■ («'«ri, v^u, &c, ^ 63). Thus,
*0 }l vii^irM ri xai fvXXMfiCaivu, and he u boA persuaded and apprdundtf
L 1.3.

/3. *0t4 is sometimes placed after a subordinate clause ; as, Km^ f ttrtt, li
nbrSf hifi S^-vriaf x*^'**f* *'*'* • • »»'rana9$t [for irt, u . ., narunuvM] L 6. 2.
"E^ nvTif rmvra rvfur^tivfm^ivri, Srt au /ttrnfiuXnfti vii. 1. 5.

y. A sentence introduced by a connective often follows the Vocative, instead
of including it. By this arrangement, immediate attention is better secured.
Thus, "Hipatrrt, ft) il x(h ftiXtT* Ut^toXng [for fsi ^, "H^mirrt], and you,
Vulcan, must heed the commands, ^Esch. Pr. 3.

Digitized

by Google

> &] posiTion . 409

§ 074* 8. Hie adrerbs tnnm and x^i" ^ommaafy foUow, bat som^
mm precede, the genitives which they govern (§ 372. y). Observe the ar-
tangementy Tng ir^i^tt twutm ri^) IfU Ji^tvnf L 4. S ) and, 0 Jri^ aitrct trntm
L 9. 21.

4. A partide is sometimes placed in one danae which belongs more strictly
to another {cL § 616) ; as, Ov»* JX i9 $i wtinufu [for J)*, i/ mirmtftt It]
Eur. Med. 941.

ft. In emphatic address, the sign S is sometimes placed as fisOows ; '^»Ch
S fmnUmr$9 8aph, Ai. 995. 0«v^Mi#/ iS E^^vw* PL Enthjd. 871 0. 'H^t
•i^Sit^^^ MiXtn U. ApoL 8ft o.

Digitized

by Google

BOOK IV.

PROSODY.

JEachjhaM,

^679. Prosed J treats of Quantity, of Ver-
8IF.ICATI0N, and of Accent.

CHAPTER I. .

QUANTmr.

^676. In Greek, all vowels and syllables are
divided, in respect to quantity (i. e, the time of
their utterance according to the ancient pronuncia-
tion), into the long and the short; and the long
are regarded as having double the time of the short.

Note. Hence the unit in measuring metrical quantity b the short syflsf-
ble, or the breve (brevis, short), and a long vowel or syllable is equal to tav
itreves. For the marks of quantity (— ^), see § 16. 4.

§ 077. Quantity is of two kinds, natural and local.
Natural quantity has respect to the length of the vowel in its
own nature ; but local quantity, to the effect which is produced
by the position of the vowel in connection with other letters
or syllables. With reference to the first distinction, vowels
and syllables are said to be long or short by nature ; with ref-
erence to the second, by position. Thus, in o^<jpa$, both sylla-
bles are short by nature, i. e. in the natural quantity of the
vowels ; but both become long by the position of these short
vowels before two consonants (|§ 51, 688).

Note. The quantity of a syllable is alwaj^ the natural quanti^ of
the vowel which it uontains, unless some change is [Hmlnoed by p«fi4tfiTy-

Digitized

by Google

CH. 1.] NITURAL QUANTIFT. 411

Hence it is nnial, in proeody, to regard the vowel as the representative of the
■yllable ; and language is often applied to the vowel which in strict propriety
belongs only to the syllable. Thus, in Sft^m^ it is common to say that the
vowels are bng by position ; while, in strict accuracy, the quantity of the
voweb themselves is not changed, but the $^llabU» become long from the time
occupied in the otteranoe of the successive consonants.

I. Natural Quantity.

^ 6T8. Rule L The vowels iy and ci, all
diphthongs, all vowels resulting from contraction or
crasis, and all cu'cumflexed vowels, are long ; as
the vowels in ^/iSvj nksiovs^ yXtoaads (§ 34), 8vs
(§ 68), xav (§ 40), XdSi ^fJ^tv, nvg.

RmffARK. An vowds which result from the union of two vowels have^
from their very nature, a double time. See §§ 25, 29 - 31, 723.

^ C79. Rui^ IL The vowels « and o are
short ; as in fpigo(uv.

% 680. ' Rule III. The doubtfiil vowels
(^ 24. j3) are commonly short ; as in x^^iviii.

To this general rule for the doubtful vowels there are many
exceptions ; which renders it necessary to observe the accent,

the SPECUL LAWS OF INFLECTION AND DEBIVATION, the DIA-
LECT, and the usage of the poexs.

A. Accent.

^081. From the general rules of accent ($726), we
learn, that in natural quantity,

«.) Every drewmJUxed vowd is bng (§ 678).

fi,) In jMrojryftmet, If the vowel of the ulHma b Aori^ the vowel of the pa*
miU is also short ; and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the penuli is hng^
the vowel of the tMma is also long. Hence, in fimtmUt^ »«^»/Mf, and ;^x«-
ftpif^ the vowd of the penult is short ; and, in Aif)«, ^m^ and tutfuiu tha
Towel of the ultima is kog.

y^ In pnparoxytomtt and pniperi9pomes^ the vowel of the ultima is short ;
ti in it^M^«i IvM/Mf, wix$»¥$ * ^X»^ ^i't^Si )m7^i/^

B. Inflection.

^089* In the common affixes of declension and conju*
gation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of contrac*
tion, -a in the Sing, of Dec. I., and -^oX for vol in the nude
Present.

Digitized

by Google

419 NJLTxraAt quantitt. [book rr»

thtl^ Dee. I., PL Aec -tff (§ 84^ Dil Horn, s (§ 86), Aor. Pt ^«c, -HMt
($$ 68, 182), Pf. PL 8 .»Mft (§ 181. 2) ; see 11 5, 29, 80. — For spedtl
rnlee in regard to the Sing, of Dec. I., see §§ 92, 93 ; for -U, ^Uf in Dee.
JII., see § 116. For the dialectio affi^ see ^ 8, 10, 15, 32. For -Mr,
Vsooming ••mt in Deo. II., see { 98. /I. For the doobtflil Towds in tbe «q^
ment, see § 188.

§^683. Special Rulbs of teb Thibd Declension.
1. The doubtful vowels are long in the last syllable of the
root^

m,) If the chsracteristio is t; as, vam^v, irmuuH* )iX^/f, UxfSm* ^S^
Mf, ^^»0f«f . Except in the a^jeetnres ftiXMg, /tixMntf rdkStt rmXim, and
in the pronoim rtg, rr»««.

fi.) In motit palaialM^ if a long s^Dable precede ; as^ Bwi^mli Bm^£»H • ftd^

y.) In words fai wf, -tiot, and in some oxyUmeg in .i^ .J«f ; as, Ijryif, jj^.

X) In a few other words ; as, »l^«#, mi^Mrn • i^i^, i^«^«« • re^> Tf'*^*
» None of these words are pura, except yfavg, y^iii^ and mmv, viUf • Koiie
U them are ^oMo^ except a few monosyllables, in which «• is the ohancleri»>
tio ; as, //i^, fiwit ■ yv^, yS^i$, None of them are neuters in .«, .«hik.

2. Monosyllabic themes are long; as, xtg, niof* ftvf, fiwg'
nv^, nvgof* Except the pronoun itg,

HoEB. In aooordance with this analogy, the neater ww (f 19} it kngtfi-

8. Nouns in -aw^, and in -uov, 6. -lopog^ have commonly
the a and i long ; as, onaior, xi«v (G. utovog) ; but JtvnaXtmp
(G. -t(oyo(). For comparatives m -ioiy, see § 159. a.

§ 084* Special Rxtles of Conjitgation. 1. Bef<He
the open terminations,

a.) « is thort, except in lm«ftat, to heal, »«m, and »Xtu0 (§ 267. 3). — fn
Epic and lyric poets, the » is sometimes long for the sake of the metre.

b.) i is commonly hng; thus, uontt, to cover with dust, ^^m (§ 282) But
iiW (Jf; § 189. 4), U^U (§ 298); 2i)/« (1 58) ; .--t^/u^i, Win (§ 278).

e.) » is oortaUB; thus, k^tm (§ 272. /3), ^»^im, to we^ Srtm (§ 219X
m40Ktm, to hmder; Iffttif (§ 264).

2. Before the begitlar close terminations,

«.) In Ungual and /t^Mu^ verbs, the doubtftd vowels are thort ; thns, Im^
r«, mifUna, iwatra, IfiXUa (§ 275) ; »«/Kt0'«f, »txi/ir»» (f 40) ; »X«;*r, f
rinte, F. xX^a'm, A. f»X&r« • rireitx4e, ira^nv (^ 268) ; »i»^7s«, six^/^Mb
(§ 217. «); ff-irAO/MM (§ 270). Except fi^Utt, to weigh down, F. fi^nt, A.

^.) In pure fferbe, — (a) m is «Aor(^ except when the theme ends in -dtt pan,
or ^i^ i thus, rwift,, iwwAM (§219) ; lir«i}«#«, ytxU^fAm* (§{ 219. «, 293)}

Digitized

by Google

Zm. I.] BEE.VATION. — DIALECT. — AUTHOBITT. 419

bat, iZAtwh ^ntiir00 ($ 218).-— (i) * is cominogtily lotig; tims, »«if«» (1. |>).
F. »Mi#vw, Pf. P. zt»i¥r/uu. Bat tpitf^u, i^t/tfif, md, in the Att. poets, ^/ .
rM, f^/r« (§ 278). — (c) v is variable; thus, F. «yi/r«, )««^^r*r (1. c).
See, also, ^i{« (§ 219) and ;t^ (§ 264>

3. Before the terminations of verbs in -/it, the doul^ul
vowels are shorty except in the Ind. sing, of the Pres. and
hnpf, act.^ and in the 2d Aor. act. See ^ 224.

4. Before a characteristic consonant,

L) In the thenu, m is commonly ghort, bnt t and v /!t>n^ ; thus, XafiC^pttp
futtiettm ($ 290) ; »>!tfm (§ 269) ; kXyvtJy Siv^tfAat (§ 270). But <»•»#
(§ 292), v'fM^, ^f»« £p.. ^tt«r Att (§ 278).

ii.) In the Vqmd Fut^ and in the 2<f Aor, (^ 255. %\ the doabtfbl vowds
•re $hort, but in the Uqidd Aor,, and in the 2d Perf,^ they are long ; thus, x^
9p, 9'XlhS, f«^»«, l«'Xt7»a (^ 56) ; fA&C«y, l^/y«f; l^Oiifjtnw (h 290); iv-iyvf,
l^^t, l^tytipO 29^) > >-«^«i««* »U^7«, ^i^l;»« (^ 236. 2). — Except 8
A. Uyn* (§ 294 ; Att. d, £p. commonly a). See, also, § 286. £.

C. Derivation.

^ 68t5. Rule IV. Derivatives follovr thfl
quantity of- their primitives.

This rale applies to oompoundsj as well as to simple deriratives. In applying
the rale, observe § 307. R. Thus, Bn^itt, F. ^n^krtt, Pf. P. TiH^g/^m • Sh^am.
^f, ^^Sfut, ^(dr^fy B^^drtt • tr^itOfff (w^, ^f*6f)y f»rr^#f.(l», vfftn).

Notes, (a) For the quantity of the different terminations of derivation,
•ee f 62, §§ 305 - 321. For r paratfogie, see §' 150. y. The final < in com-
pound adverbs (§ 321. c) is likewise sometimes long. (6) For the lengthen-
ing of an initial rowel in the second part of a compound, see § 326. R. In
some coinpoand% • is lengthened without passing into n ; as, X§xdyit O^x***

D. Dialect.

§680* The Doric a for 17 is long; and a, where the
(onic uses ij, is commonly long (§ 44. 1). See also § 47.

E. Authority.

§SS7« For douhtful vowels which are long, and which
are not determined by the rules already given, observe the
usage of the poets, and the mariss of quantity in the lexicons.

Among the most familiar examples are Vnr, destruetionf ivrM^tf, foQawtr^
^(dyUf mo/, r(dx^fi '^>*Hf^ ^Xvd^is, talkative^ atitltt, outrage^ *dfU ('/), grief,
JtM(i€nt, exact, dl%n, axe, iUti, whirlpool^ »«/«fy«f, oven, tUfMy to mtme, xxfvff,
bed, ktfiitj hunger, fax^ot, ematt, n »«, victory, 2/tfX«r, eroivd, #t>4, aUenee, ;^«.
Xtfit, bridle, dy»3^», anchor, yi^fffth bridge, tvSvvn, account, Wx^V** «<«>»H^
nitiOm^ danger, kt^n, grief, 'wSfit, wheat, ^oxitt, to plunder, "OXn, foreet, ^Xn,

Digitized by VjOOQIC

414 QUANTITY. ' [book IT.

KoDL Yowds, whoM qtumtityis not determined by general or spodtl ialfl%
AN nid to be long or abort by omAority, L e. the sathority of the poeta.

II. Local Quantity.

^688. Rule V. A vowel before two con-
sonants or a double consonant is long (^^ 51,
677. N.) ; as in ofi^a^j iXni^ovxss iidxp.

Kois. TUB mle ci poeition holds, when either one or both of the oooa^
Hants are in the same word with *the rowel ; and commonlj, also, when both
consonants or the doable consonant begin the next word.

$089. Exception. When the two consonants are a
nmte followed by a liquid in the same simple word^ the quan«
tity of the yowel is offen not affected, especially in Attic po
etry.

KoTSB. 1. TUB exception lesolts ftom the easy flowing together of the
mote and liqoid, so that thej produce the efiect of onlj a single consonant.

SL In the Att, the quantity of the vowel is commonly not affected, if the
mute is tmooth or rough, or, if micUUe, is foBowed by ^, A middle mute fd*
lowed by any liquid except ^ commonly renders the vowel long. Urns, the
penult is regnhuiy short in rirX*;, r(»Mi>, «:«r^f, %ii^mxi*»ty ytniXn, MtAMM

8. According to PorKm, the tragic poets sometimes leave a vowel short be>
ftte the two liquids fAu

§ 890. Reicabk. a short vowel is sometimes length'
ened before a single consonant or another votoel^ especially in
Epic poetry. This occurs chiefly m the following cases :

1.) When the consonant may be regarded as doubled m pnmuiuiaHon. lUs
applies especially to the liquids, and in the case of these (chiefly initial /,
cf. § 64. 1) sometimes extends even to Attic poetry ; as, AtoXdv [as if ^XX-]
». 36, it fi^H A. 274, ^6XX€t yje^t/iifn £. 358, 1^ ftwn Soph. CEd. T.
847, ftiyA fdmtf .ffisch. Ft. 1023.

8.) When the digeanma ($ 22. I) has been dropped ; as, yiCs S^i* [Ftliv,
§§ 142. 4, 143. $] I. 419, »/v i x6nt X. 42, v'^i't ^i^f [FmmvJ L 147.-*
Epic usage ^>pears to have been variable in respect to the dlgamma. It some-
times appears to have had the force of a consonant, and sometimes only that
of a breathing.

3.) Before a tMuetdine eamtra (§ 699. 4), and sometfanee, without a <
by the mere force of <the arm (§ 695) ; as, SfftA • OSrtt «. 866, Aw^ Un Z.
62, kw9i^^ ^, 283, *dimtarSs St (. 309, ^Hyttrif^i h E. 371, «/ iXSnn A.
342.

NoTB. In Hexameter verse, one of three successive short syllables, a short
between two long syllables, and a short syllable at the beginnmg of a line^
must of necessity be made long. The second case sometimes occurs in the
Amk (§ 695). Thus, *A^»fUf4mt S, 46 ; 'ArsXif«r«« iy» B. 781 (e£ 'A#»A^

digitized

by Google

CH. 1.] POSITION. 41ft

wtm VIM A. 194)» fiXs^fims lrrf^»»«»r« A. 36, "Ettg *l rmvi' A. 193 ; "E*^.
hi (r) X. 379, ^txt xmwlymrt A. 145, Arib /«(« F. 357 (<£ K«) ^4 358%
*A^f, 'A^if £.31. See other examples above.

^691. Rule VI. A long vowel or diphthong
at the end of a word may be shortened, if the next
word begins with a vowel.

Remarks. I. In the theds of Hexameter and Pentameter verae (§§ 704,
705), this shortening is the general rule ; as, *H/Mr{^ Iv) d»^ U 'A^yt7 TiiAi4i
m(r^. A. 30. T7i#, I ^b KrUr«P, i I* if Etf^^tH 'A»T»^UnH. B. 621.

2. This rule does not apply to the Iambic and Trochaic metres of the drama,
aa there the hiatos is not allowed.

8. A long yowd or diphthong is sometimes riiortened before another yoirel,
in the middle of a word; as, V«-«yM m. 379, •In («r) N. 275, ramtrn Soph.
Fh. 1049, %%iXm!t Ar. Pint 850. See also § 1 50. y.

4. Some explain this shortening by supposing the bng vowel («, «, «i ti, m,
{ 29. •) or diphthong to be half elided bdore the following vowd («7jc« U) ; or
the sat(iimcttve of the diphthong to be used with a consonant power (l^r^^ft).

^693. Rule VII. The last syllable of every
verse is common.

That is, the metrical panse at the end of the verse renders the quantity of
Om last qrOAble indiffinen( ; and it may be regarded aa either hmg or diort
aooording to the metre.

KoTB. In some kinds of verse, the scandon is oontinnoos ; i. e. the verses
are formed into systems (§ 700), at the end of which only a common final
pliable is allowed, the preceding syllables bdng all snbject to the roles of
pfosody, aathoogh in the middle of a verse.

§ 093* Bebiabkb. 1. In respect to qoantity, both natoral and lo-
cal, the different dialects and kinds of poetry vaiy greatly. The greatest li-
cense appears in Epic poetry, which arose before the laws and usage of the
language became fixed ; and the least in the dialogue of comedy, which con-
formed the most doeely to the language of common lift. Of elegiac, lyric,
and tragic poetry, the two former approached more nearly to the Epic, and tha
latter to the comic.

2. In giving the rules of quantity, never adduce position, unless some
diange has been made firom the natural length of the vowd. For convenient
distinction in metrical analysis, a vowel whose quantity is to be referred to
Rules I. and II. may be said to be long or short by nature; to Rule III.,
ly the jfeneral rule for the doubtful voweU ; to Rule IVtfiy derivation ; to Rule
v., by portion before two eon§oMant»f or a doiUtk eoneonant; to Rule VL, by po*
tiHon before a word begimming wi^ a vowdf to Rule VIL, by poeition at the end
of Cft« veree. When the quantity is not determined by general rules, dto spa-
dal rulea ; or if these do nM apply, adduce authoH^ (§ 687)» Mturo, mnk^
the mteeetity of the veree (§ 690), Ac.

Digitized

by Google

41* THamumm. Iboociv

CHAPTER II.

TSB9IFICA.TIQEr»

^ 094* Greek verse is founded apon shtthie, L e.th$
regular nufcemem 4if lomg tmd short quantiiies. The simplest
w^ most faoHliar rl^rthms are those in which a long syllaUo
alternates with <m«, or with two ahoii syllables (_ w — ^ w -.f

«r ,_. . — ,J).

ISfcrrm, Im ▼eiwifliaitSon, thedamgitaiycombinationaof gyflaMegare t6Hii6<
Mbt; mgolar oonbiBatioiii of Aet, vxBSps (¥cmi\ « tern) ; and rognlir
WW thittioM of ^Mne% bujsxjlb, sibopbbb (rr^«f«, a temji^ rotmd), or sxa-
i ($ 700).

§ 999. The knag ^Uables are natoially pronounced with
a greater stress of tl^ yoioe than the short This stress is
termed arsis {uQaig^ eleoation)^ while the alternate weaker tone
is termed thesis (^iai^, depfission). Th^se terms are also
applied to the parts of the rh3rthm which are thus pronounced.
In the exhibition of metres, the arsis (also termed metrical ictus)
IB marked thus ( * ).

Noim «. Aa one long syBablt is eqad tp two Aart, ^b» putiid solwtf-
tntioii of ^ ^ for J, in the anoB, and of _ ^ ^ ^ in tbe tiiesia, may bt
made without aflMing the ifaTthm. In this way, as the short ^llables have
more vivacity, ease^ and Kghtiifiss, and the loog i^rOables, more gravity, dig-
nity, and strength, the poet baa the power of greatly varying the exprea^ioa
of the vase ; wliile, at the same t|me^ the fiuality of versificati<m is very modi
fauxeased.

C In the oommen Unds of verae, the metrical ictus is defeenmaed by the
prevailing (hot Henoe in TrodtuAc and Dactylic vase, every Ibot leuJiii
tiie ictns upon the^frgf syllable ; while^ in Iambic and Anapnetao veraa^ eveif
foot receives it opon the weeomd, except the anapwst and proceleumatlc^ whiflh
feceive it npon the Aird,

§ 696. In the series ^^w^ww^wwt the thesb is
equal m time to the arsis (^ 676), and the rhjrthm is termed

equal or quadruple ( ^ = 4 breves) ; but m the series

X w X w X w9 the thesis is half the arsis, and the rhythm is
termed triple (_ ^ = 8 breves).

Rbbiabks. L. Of 'theses the ibrmer is the more statefy in its movemeqi^
•ad the more an^iropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed
from oommoa dlBcoorBe; while the latter has more nearly the movement of
flomnum oonverBati<m, and is henoa better adaptHed to the more £uniliar Idndi
of verM^ and to dialogue.

!• Not only do the equal and triple rhythms diffiar from each other bk •»•

Digitized by VjOOQIC

€■. 2.]

RHTTBM.-^— nXT.

4n

preMicn; iNit the same rhyUim has a dMbrent expresnon, aceording to it
coimeaeta wHh the arns or the thesia. In the ftnner case (DaetyHe ± ^ ^

I J. I J. , and Trochak ^ ^ | ± ^ | j. ^), the movement, passing

from the heavier to the lighter, has more ease, grace, and Tivaeity ; in the

latter (Anapaatie ^ ^ ±\ ^ ^ J,\ L> «nd Iambic ^ ±\ L | ^ -Ot

the movement, passhig from the lighter to flie heavier, has more decision, em-
phasis, and strength.

S. Other rhythms ar^ formed by donUing the arris, Or hy prolonging the
thesis, or by varioosly compounding simple rhythms. Thus, by doubling the
arus, we obtain the r^rthms, ^j_±^j^j.^±j_^9 and ^ _ j. j. ^ ^
j.j.,^j.j._. Of these, the first, according to its division into feet

(§ 697), is Cretio j.^j.|jl^ lI-L^-L* Bacchic ^ J. J. | ^ J. _L |

w jL J.> w Antibacchie J.J.^|_Lj._|j._L ^; *n<J ^ second, Chori-
amluo jLwwJ.|_L^wJ.|J-ww-L» Antispastic ^ _L J. . | ^ -L _L w

I ^ J. jL ^ Bising Ionic LjL|. ± ± \ ^ ^ J- it-Of Failing Ionic

,.j.^_|_i, ±w^l_LJ. ■• Verses, in which the equAl and triple rhythms

are united, are termed hgaoBdie {xoytfiiixist from Xiyt^ discoune, and JUsin,
mmg; see Rbm. 1 above). The most irregular kinds of verse are termed poly^
BchemaHit (w«Xvr;^if/Mir4#'r««, multiform) and euynartete (jk^uvm^mrog, disjointed),

% 69 7« Feet of the sartie metrical length are tenned
isoehronom {laoxQovo^^ of equal time). In the table of feet
below, the measure of Class I. is two breves ; of Class U.,
tfiree ; of Class III., four, dec.

I. UoffSx^Hf

n.

F|3nriiiiV

pihu

IV.

V.

i«^c*#.

Iambus, lamh^

^__

fUfi0*

Te«>:wif , Xs^m^

Trochee CaMMS

^ w

MBH.

'^t^X'^

IWmch.

^* y>0 ^0

^*^n

^»r»XHf

Dactyl,

—» w «^

hinru

'AfmwmrTHj

Anap«sl«

^0 >0 m^

Uikm.

2w04uH,

Spondee,

0»tX»»,

'Aft^iC^X'^*

Amphibrach,

W — ^

Um»%u

Procelensmatic^

Xiyifiifi*

%tir»fuu.

Bmmxuh,

Bacchius,

W «. «.

*A9rtCd»x"*t

Antibacduufl^

^^ ^

0ti^»tfA%*

Ummw m\

Paxm L,

«- W ^ W

^mtiM-* ••«•

TlmUnfit,

Pa»n IL,

W . ^ W

lyf«>c^»».

TUUn y,

FtooB HL,

^0 ^0 •^ -^

W» \I»TI.

iL^r.

Fteon IV.,

>««nC4f.

^•(imftCH,

Choriamb^

r«^«/Mi»M».

*A»Tir«'«rr«f,

Antispast,

Xyu^ttfttu

Diiamb,

^ — ^ —

'0»ptri^m9,

£i^^X»*ty

Ditiochea,

•> ^ — ^

1mi»4t Jkwi fittZtftt

FaOmglonkb

M» ^_ ,^ ^

fi0ttX^v$ru

'UffiMit ki^ UirrMff,

Bashiglonio^

^ ^ mm ^

Utki^u.

IfAX^rfff,

Mdossus,

.. — .»

Digitized

by Google

41B TsmsiFicATiOH. [book !▼.

TL 'Er/fVfnf •'» Epitiito L. lyt^f-«*w.

'ErirfirH fi^t Epitrito IL, tirft^^irmu

'Efir^irH r'f Epitrito IIL, iym/^Mif.

'E^iv^$rH ^f Epitrito lY^ ^ fitttXOnm.

YJL ^xf*^9 DodunnM^ ^ lCMa.M»^i«fc

^u^witiuHp Di^wndea^

Kona. c The ^^nbic appears to have been ao named fimn its use in tiit
^ war-daiice (w-pffixn) ; tlie Iamb, from its eari/ use *in invective (Imwrmt te
onat/) ; the Trochee from its rapid movonent (si^X*^ ^ '^'"} * ^ Dactvl.
from its resemblance to the fimger i}m»rwX»i) in containing one long pari and
two short ones, or from the use of the finger in measuring^ or in keeping time;
th^ Anapawt, as the Dactyl reversed («N»«'«Mrr«s, gtnuJt bad') ; the Spondee^
from its use in solemn rites (^Yct^ Hbatitm) ; the Bacduos and Peon, from
their nse in songs to Bacchus and in psans ; the Tribradi as consisting of
three short syllables ; the Amphibradi, of a diort on each side of a long ; the
Amphimaoer, of a long on each side of a short ; the AntibsochTna, of a Bao-
chias reversed ; the Choriamb, of a Choree and Iamb ; the Diiamb^ IHtrochei^
and Dispondee, oi two Iambs, &c I shall be pardoned, I trust, for adding a
few lines from Cderidge's Metrical Lesson to his Son.

<* Trodifie I trips frdm I long td I short.
From long to long, in solonn sort.
Slow Sponldee stalks ; | strong foot I | yet ill able
t:v«r td I c5me dp with { Dactyl til]syll&bl&
Iam|blcs march | frdm short | td long.
With ft leap I ftnd ft bound | the swift Aniftprt'its throng
One syllable long, with one short at each side^
Amphibrft|chys hastes wIUi | ft statelj^ | stride."

fi. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapsstic verses are common^ measmed, not faj
dngle feet, but by dipudies or pairs of feet (}t^0iim, double foot, from )«# and
irovs). When they are measured by single feet, a verse «f one foot is termed
a monopody ; of two, a dipody ; of three, a tripodfy ; of four, a tetnpod^, or
^uatemarius; of six, a hexapody, or seaorncs, &c.

§698. Verses are named, — (1.) From the prevailing
foot; as, lamhiCi Trochaic^ Dactylic^ AruxpiBStic. — (2.) Prom
some poet who invented or used them, or from the species of
composition in which they were employed ; as, il/catc, from Al
csBUs ; Sapphic^ from Sappho ; Heroic^ from its use in cele
brating'the deeds of heroes. — (3.) From the number of
measures (i. e. of feet, or dipodies^ § 697. /J) which they contain ;
as, monometer (fiovofingog^ of one measure) <^ dimeter (di/Mttgog^
of two measures), trimeter^ tetrameter, — (4.) From their degree
of completeness ; thus a verse is termed acatalectic (axaiolii-
xTOff, not leaving off^ sc. before its time, from «- priv. and xaTo-
iiJ/«), when its measure is complete ; catalectic (xorraJlijxfixo^),
when its last foot is incomplete ; brachycat^dectie (/5^«rvff,
9hort), when it wants a whole foot at the end ; hyperctUalectic
(vnsQy over), when it has one or two syllables over ; and ac^*

Digitized

by Google

<«.2.J KINDS OF YERSB. O^SURA. 419

phalotu {ixitpaXog^ headless) when it wants a syllable at the
beginning.

RwMARKB. m, A catalectio verge is said to be eaialeetie on one BjfOaiik (in
fylUibam), on two tyUablu (in dissyllabum), &c^ according as the imperfect
foot lias one, two, or more syllables. Dactylic ver&es ending with a spondee
or trochee (§ 692) are by some regarded as acatalectic, and by others as cat-
alectic on two syllables ; e. g. the common Hexameter (§ 704).

/S. A lyric Terse sometimes begins with an introductory syllable, termed an
muMtnuU («M»^«vri«, ttrUdng vp) ; or with two such syllables, forming what
b termed a bam (fiti^is, foundation). In these introductory syllablei^ the
quantity is commonly indifferent. A base sometimes consists of more than
two syllables, and the term is sometimes applied to a monometer in any spe*
des of Terse.

y. In the dramatic poets, exdamations often occur extra metrum (L e. not
included hi the metre) ; as, ^ivl Eur. Alo. 536, 719, 1 102. Ti fS % Soph,
(Ed. C. 315. Tdkmifm I lb. 318.

^ 000« CiBSURA. Composition in verse consists of two
senes ; the metrical series^ divided into feet and verses ; and
the significant series^ divided into words and sentences. These
two series must, of course, correspond in their great divisions ;
but if this correspondence is carried too far, it gives to the
composition an unconnected, mechanical, and spiritless char-
acter. The life and beauty of poetry depend essentially upon
the skilful and varied interweaving of the two series. The
ciUUng of the metrical series by the divisions of the significant
series is termed ccMura (Lat from ctedoj to cut). It is of two
principal kinds ; the c<esura of the foot^ and the casura of the
verse. The former is the cutting of a foot by the ending of a
word ; the latter is the cutting of a verse by a pause permitted
by the sense (termed the caswrdl pause).

RBacABKS. I. (a) The csssura of the verse is more frequently, but not
Decessarily, a ccsura of the foot (6) When a foot-cssnra separates the arsis
from the thesis, it is likewise termed a aesitra of the rhythm, (c) A caesura is
. aometimes allowed between the parts of a compound word ; as, Kmj /* «ff|rr
^XJ^ykmrettf \ wtii»Df. JEach. Pr. 172. (d) A syllable immediately pre-
ceding a csBSura is termed a e*Bmral tyUabU.

2. The coincidence d the diyisions of the metrical series with those of the
significant series is termed dueresie Osmi^i^sf, dimeion). The most important
diiBToees are those at the end of verses, systems, or stansas. A foot-diaeresis
occurs whenever the division of words corresponds with the division ot feet.
Hence a verse-caBsnra may be a foot-diaeresis ; e. g. the pastoral (Rbk. 5).

8. The verse-caBsura (often called simply the caBsura) not only contributes
to the proper interweaving of the metrical and significant series, but affords ^
gratefbl rdief to both the voice and the ear. See Bsm. 6. j»

4. When the caesura follows a syllable pronounced with the arsis, it ii
ivmed wuuaJine; with the thesis, feminine. A caesura in the second foot ii

Digitized

by Google

[loot »▼

mmt\ Ac TW»

Metnod eoampmilkm b eidKr id HOKOsn^as,
' srAwrA%, (m) lf<»08ncBS (^ww^ag, of c m^
by die repetiliaB of die same metiicml line, as
(§ '3MX b^bic Ttiineter (§ 712), &e.
(^) SiMJm* are femed bj die repedtioo <^ aiiiiSar rfajthms,
w& coetimiooa wtaiwkw (§ 693. N.) and an appro|Hiale ckne.
Stt§§-7€6,714,7ia (c) Sta^izas (also called xtrupte) are
fimed bj die onioa of different kmds oi v^se. A stanza
r laaiiliin^ of two liaes k calkd a disUck {dimwtjtog^ efiwQ hmes) ;
of diree, a trutick ; and of four, a tetrmstiek.

Sa TbB GlCCk CuOKmL OQBi WVB WlitlCB IB StSBXSS of VCIJ lUNlI ^BCtUTB^

%■! cMimly arnmgri n dmmd$ or triadt 'aoaeCmias in fefrwdb or pemtatb).
A daad conscUa of two wtanIa1^ eocraponfing in metre throagfaoiKL Of tbcM
the first is termed tiie ttrofie (rrg«f«, Iwmn^ Tmosd; jtema^, and the seeand
the imlnfropAe (^mwn^^^tfi, tommter-imrm, or •«tas2a). A tried ooBsists of a
itrapbe and antistroplie, preceded, £viM, or followed bj a third staioa of
dilBaeal metre, whidi eccordlng to its place is termed prnode («r^««3^ from
w^ b^cn, and ^U, ode\ maode (/u#ay, muddk\ or epodt (Iv-i, afirr). Of
flkBse, the cpode is fiv the rooet commoo. The odea of Rndar are writtea
caefa in a peealiar metre, bat nearly aD in strophes, antistroiibea, and epodes.
In the sme ode, the strophes and antistrophes are all written in one metres
and the epodes aD in a second, <fifRerent from the first In the drama, on the
contmy, the metre of ooe dnad or triad is not repeated in a second.

% 79 1 • Rbxaskb. 1. In 8CA3RnKO, obrarve not oolv ^ divlskB
into dipofies and feet, bat also the arsis or metrical Ictos (§ 695), and the
▼sueuusurm (5 ^9). Unless these aracarefaOy marked, tin mebical duv-
•eter and expression of the verse are loet.

^^nnzBsis (5 30;. (a.J In Epic poetry synizesia is ver^ ftv^Mdt

Digitized

by Google

Cfl. 2. J' DACTTUC TBRSB. ,4SU

espedally when tiie first vawel is i ; thus, tm, tf, um ; t«, im, m» ; •«» t^ ,
as, niiW<(^M> A. I ; %(uy$^ i\U 15 ; see ^ 121. 2, f 23. We find more
rarely m ; m, mi, <n> «^ «« ; «< ; m ; vm ; &o. Synizesis sometimes occurs
between two words, when the fint ia tit Ht )<ft f*^, i^ni, or a word ending in
the affix .« OT .^ ; as, f»ix & 349, %S^Sy^Zf n. 261, Unkgsin^Utk' A. 277,
*rCi#ryr«i^ P. 87.

(b.) In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly, — (a) In the endings .<««,
••Mv, .M of Dec in. (§ 116. «)• — (6) In a few nngle words and forms ; as,
Stit Ear. Or. 399. — (c) In the combinations H oh and ft,^ ov, which are
always pronoonoed as one syllable. — (<f) In some other combinations in
which the first word is 4> i* ftti, l^rti, orlyti • as, f^hit^iuu Eur. Hipp. 1335,
tytTtlf* Soph. Ph. 585.

8. Hiatus. Hiatus between words was admitted the most fi:eely in Epic
poetry, where however it may be <rften removed by the insertion of the di-
gamma (§ 22. )). It was the most studiously avoided in Attic poetry, es-
pecially in' the Tragic Trimeter (§ 712), where it was scarce allowed, except
after the interrogative r/, and some interjections, or words used in exclama-
tion; as,«7lyi;i lyii! .£sch. Ag. 1257.

§ 703« 4. In the following exhibition <^ metres, the division of feet
win be marked by a single bar ( i ) ; the division of dipodies by a double
bar ( II ) ; and the verse-caesura by an obelisk ( f )• sometimes doubled ( ^).
A base is denoted by B. In the examples which are given, the accents and
breathings are mostly omitted, that they may not interfere with the marks oi
quantity ; and these marks are employed alike to denote the metrical quan-
tity, whether natural or local. Hence the common syllable at the end of a
Hue (^ 692) is marked according to the rhythm in which it ooeurai. Some
examples are added of analogous metres in our own language.

A. Dactylic Verse.

§ 703. The place of the fundamental dactyl is often sup-
plied by a spondee (_ w w = ).

§ 704. I. The common Hexameter or Heroic Verse
consists of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or
spondees, the fifth commonly a dactyl, and the sixth always a
spondee.

Remabks. 1. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed ijimdatc^
and has commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs
most frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables;

2. The favorite caesura of the verse is the penthemim, which is almost
equally masculine and feminine (§ 699. 4). After this, the most frequent c»-
suras are the masculine hephthemim, and the pastoral (6 699. 5). — Even
when the penthemim is not the principal verse-cseeura, it is yet seldom wanting
as a ibot-CiBflura. It is stated, that in the first book of the Iliad, 290 lines
tigve the masc penthemim, 315 have the fun., and only 6 have neithv.
36

Digitized

by Google

498. VBfiSlFlCATlON. [bO&C IT

ScusMB A2ii> Examples.
1 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

r--li-jli:-:-lt:---:h--h-

AXA* Mm\»m •^r'lr.t »(&rt(n9 r *rwt I fiuP6f VlrfXXff. A. 25,
2n>/MAT' '• x*^ '•'» I ;c«"C'^» t V>«CoX#fi I 'Aw^XiAiSi^j. A. 14.
Ar Mi** I «'M '«<|Niy »«rrirjff f «f lr«» vi' «^ Xir«v. A. 66.
•H-r#r 'dy I 'iSj iriiri5» »«It •«j I *f^/r« • f. «'«f'^ ^* '«.«Vt»i. A 68.
Bf 2f Mtr I O£X0/»|«r«ro »A|^vwy, t| X'^f^^^^f *^e* -^^ ^^'

Ookridg^B "Homeric Hexameter Deteribed and ExempUfied/*

StnSngly it I be^ us a! long f in I 8^<^lllDg and I limitless j billows,
Kdthing bejfdre and I nothing be, hind, f but the 1 sky and the i <5oeaii.

§ 70S. II. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of twc
dactylic penthemims (§ 699. 4), the first containing two dac-
tyls or spondees with a caesural syllable, and the second two
dactyls with a final syllable. It commonly alternates with the
Hexameter, forming what is termed, from its early use in plain-
tive song, the Elegiac Metre.

Scheme and Exampl&s.
'A#riV ' ^«5^«!wi» t ^Sy«lrf{ Ar«f. t: •#. *ky&\fa/MO»

Described and Exemplijied by Colerulge,

Tn the Hexjdmeter | Hises f the | fodntain's | silvery | column ;
In the Penltdmeter | i£ye ft faUing in | melody | back.

§ 706i III. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a.) Pure, con-
sisting of dactyls only ; (b.) Impure, consisting of dactyls and
spondees ; (c.) Molic, containing, in place of the first foot, a
mere base (^ 698. /J) ; (d.) Logaoedic (§ 696. 3), in which
dactyls are united with trochees. Thus,

1. Dimeter.
(a.) Uv0t6W»Ss ^Sf^iS' Ar. Nub. 303.
(b.) Adonic ( j.^^ | i__)- TifrvTij | B^Sfd*. Sapph. 1. 4.
(b.) Hypercat., Dactylic Penthemim. 'Ax^ijIfjT* «-*|j#"». iEsch. Sup. 844.

2. Trimeter.
H).) n«XX« y«^ \'S^r '&xA fi£frce. Soph. Tr. 112.

(e). Pherecratic(B. 1^.^^ I J-_)- "'-ExSr mKpixs^ | W«{. Find. 0.1. 8.
GLTcoNia 1i rdv | r«r «-if*JJi/y^* '(x»**i

TAcAMff 1 OilJr6\U, fieirA,. Soph.CEd.T. 119&

Digitized

by Google

CH, 2.] tACTYLIC AHD ANAP^STIC VERSE,

^d.) Mjirr* •«!«•< pS\yafi* "*». JEa(^. Pr. 907.

U.) Hjpejcat. n«xxi /3^!r*^ Jr&|^»rC«^-l,*. iEsch. Sup. 643.

3. Tetrameteb.

(a.) Alchanian. Mtfr*. 'Ayr, | Kiixx/dk* ^0y&\Ti( Ayai. Alcm.
(b.) Spondaic Zti;; ««Xi;i«»df^or | «^^r yfil»ar«ffj. ^.sch. Ag. 62.
(c) rMM6. itl»^9*i\fUx^*i' {"ie'^iTdf. Sapph. 20 (37).
(d.) Lbsseb Alcaic (^ww|j.^^|j_^| j,^).

X^pr<»i!^^ ZipOf^ fiOlyari, Ale 5^(24).
(a.) Hypercat. Tth faym\Kth A&9i\m •««-«|«xf^«^»l*». Soph. Aj. 225.

4. I'emtambter.

rb.) •ATfir!^«# f$&x^\M*^(y tViiU A«y«|J«/T«f. -^Esch. Ag. 123.
fc) Or»«j, I *S pTki I «r«r, t Xiyi rcti-', mT 'm\X£^fi. Theoc. 29. 1.
(d.) 'a- wiXtf, I '^5 yfff ;• r& X«r»«, I fDf H. Soph. EL 1314.
H-^^^t I V# tJtT I fiecif6fa\f^ J;Cv | 'fff^^. Soph. Ant. 135.

Sapphic (j_^ |i.^|j |j_w|i_^).

Kta ydf I cr ^iD'yir, T&x'\«if li^sitr,
Ar 2r I 2iS(« I ^if SfAj-r, I '£XX& I d«0-ir. Sapph. 1. 21.
Phat/kcian (B. I ^ _ ^ I j_ _ I ^ ^ I I ^ ).

TSv Xir.«yrtf^|;^«v, rcSr j 'S^S x»'\»' TheOC £p. 20.

5. ff ICT ATW lei'ICIL.

(a.) U^f ft yTlttiAUsj I '« ^rxXr, I « ^»^ fASririt \ "Exxc^. Enr. Sup. 277.

ib.) 'Ax^i' 's I «ri?vr0r|ir« ^rAJ'ritrSf 'a|^irC0^*|Mr x^t^*' Soph. EL 134.
0.) KiXi[fM rUi I rtfy ;^«^r |f trii M/|»«»« M)Xfrr«r. Ale 49.
(d.) "H- iriX&lfnf rtfi | r«y ^r«|X«rov 'i\XH rU | '««;c«'* ^^Bsch. Pr. 165.

B. Anapjestic Vebse.

§ 707. The place of the fundamental anapsest is often
supplied by a spondee or dactyl, and sometimes, though very
rarely, by a proceleusmatic (^^_ = = =

^708* I. The Anapsestic, from its strong, even move-
ment, was a favorite metre for marching songs ; and it was
greatly employed in systems, by the dramatic poets, as inter-
mediate between the Iambic of the common dialogue, and the
lyric metres of the choral odes.

Kemarks. 1. The general distinction (to omit modifications and excep-
tions) was this. The Iambic portions of the drama were spolcen while th«
performers were stationary ; the lyric, while they were dancing ; and the Ana-
pnstic, while they were coming in, or going out, or marching to and fro.

2. These systems are scanned continuously (§ 692. N. \ but are usually ar*
ranged, so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of thia
•pecies of verse, the Anap.vstic Dimeter). They uniformly close with tht
dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (irae(0i^««i), the parctmiac
vene (see ^ 700. 1). The use of the paroemiac, however, is not confined tm
tiM dose of regular systems.

Digiti^by VjOOQIC

498. VEKSIFICATION. [sodiE IT

ScusMB A2n> Examples.
1 2. 3. 4, 5. 6.

AXX* »Si\xAt *i^r\a,^ m^AtV^Z* V V«-r I ftm* VlrfXXff. A. 25.
IrifAfOt^ 7 x^ '^* I ;C'V^» t V>«CoX#fi I 'Aw^XiA^St^r. A. 14.
Ar Mfy I «r^ *4i^|vMV »»rrir<ff t mr\yt*9 r{ ri Xir«». A. 66.

Bf ^r »£r I Oi/X0^|«r«ro xAl^vwy. t| ;^«d/eti'ii^r x^e* A. 44.

Colendg^B "Homerie Hexameter Deecribed and ExempUfiedJ*

StnSngly it | be^ us a!l6ng f in ' 8^<^ng and I limitless j billows,
Kdthing belfore and I nothing behind, f but the 1 sky and the i <5oeaiL.

§ 70S. II. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of twc
dactylic penthemims (§ 699. 4), the first containing two dac-
tyls or spondees with a caesural syllable, and the second two
dactyls with a final syllable. It commonly alternates with the
Hexameter, forming what is termed, from its early use in plain-
tive song, the Elegiac Metre.

Scheme and Examples.

I I f i I

JS:t0i0%''6T' I 'is Teir|«f tl To-xri' I tnO^i ^\nu
'^a ftif I rtfvrj, :^ », t> ^/a»^9, i\f*0l it (d\y€, Theog. 11
Described and Exemplified by Coleridge,

Tn the Hexjdmeter | riises f the | foiintain*8 | silvery | cdlumn ;
In the Penjtdmeter | aye tl £EUlmg in I melody j back.

§ T06i III. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a.) Ptare^ con-
sisting of dactyls only ; (b.) Impure^ consisting of dactyls and
spondees ; (c.) Molic^ containing, in place of the first foot, a
mere base (^ 698. p) ; (d.) Logaoedic (§ 696. 3), in which
dactyls are united with trochees. Thus,

1. Dimeter.
(a.) Uo^rSWuSs ^/as, Ar. Nub. 303.
(b.) Adonic (_l«^ | j__). n»-r»r«, | B^Dftiv. Sapph. 1. 4.
(b.) Hypercat., Dactylic Penthemim, *Ax^^|r»T* 9ri\^iu i£sch. Sup. 844.

2. Trimeter.
.) n«XX« y&( I 'SiTT 'cixH f*mi>Tlf, Soph. Tr. 112.
[e), Pherecratic(B. 1^.^^ I x_)- '•ExS? mnpixSt \ V«f. Pind.O.l.ft.
GLTCONia T« rd» I Tri wif-tJJi/y/t* 'ix''*y

(B- i J. ^ ^ I X « ^ ) Ttf» rtf» I ietTfidvi, I TO* trCt, *A

Txd/idw 1 Or$/«-dl$4S. fieirAK Soph. (Ed. T. 119&

£

Digitized

by Google

CH. 2.] tACTYLIC AHD ANAP^STIC VERSE. 48ft

^d.) UHrtf '8\9r€ ^jy^r/"**. JEach. Pr. 907.

'*•) Hjpe^cat. HiXki fi^Win li&\fiiiC9/*i:\vM. Mach. Sup. 643.

3. Tetrameteb.

(a.) AlchaniAN. MiSr*. 'Ayr, | KdXXr8\m'd ^Sy&lrif AtSg, Alcm.
(b.) Spondaic. Zgvt ^ks\&*6fct | 'd/A^r yOlvmiKot. -5^h. Ag. 62.
(c.) rM»6.itl»^v 'i\fAAx^»89 I "B^v'iTiv. Sapph. 20 (37).
(d.) Lbsseb Alcaic (^ww|j.^^|j_^| j_^ ).

X^i/r«»i!^^ Zr^C^^ ^/lyifff-A. Ale. 5'(24).

(a.) Hypercat. Tm fUymlkdp A&fi{ih *ii9r6\»>.y^8faf\df. Soph. Aj- 225.

Ar ^r I )<?(« I ft^ ^ixir\ I 'iixx& I Wt7. Sapph. 1. 21.

Phat/kcian (B. I J I J_ w I 1.W I '. w).

Tsv xa ,i9rifM\xd9, rSv j *«^i; ;^ir(«. Theoc £p. 20.

5. ff ICT ATW lei'ICIL.

(a.) U^t H yglvad'itt, I '« ^rxXr, I 'i? ^»t ftSrarSg \ "Exxs^. Eur. Sup. 277.
(h.) *Aa.V 'iS I irdfTar\dt ^rki'TiirSf 'i\fttlC6fti\9mT xi*'^*' ^P^* ^- ^3^*
(o.) K/Airi/Mr r/Ml | rtf» ;^«^r |f tr* Mr|y«»« M)Xfrr«r. Ale 49.
(d.) "H- flrftX«l/«^ rj^rf I r«» ^Wl|XiBro» YlA-il r/r | "&VC^9' -^^sch. Pr. 165.

B. Anapjestic Vebse.

^707. The place of the fundamental anapaest is often
supp'lied by a spondee or dactyl, and sometimes, though very
rarely, by a proceleusmatic (^^_ = = =

^708. I. The AnapcBstic, from its strong, even move-
ment, was a favorite metre for marching songs ; and it was
greatly employed in systems, by the dramatic poets, as inter-
mediate between the Iambic of the common dialogue, and the
lyric metres of the choral odes.

Kebcarks. 1. The general distinction (to omit modifications and excep-
tions) was this. The Iambic portions of the drama were spo'ken while th«
performers were stationary ; the lyric, while they were dancing ; and the Ana-
pestic, while they were coming in, or going oat, or marching to and fro.

2. These systems are scanned continuously (§ 692. N. \ but are usually ar*
ranged, so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of this
■pedes of verse, the Anap.vstic Dimeter). They uniformly close with tha
^meter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (ir«(0i^«««), the pantmiae
vene (see ^ 700. 1). The use of the panemiac, however, is not confined tm
tiM dose of regular systems.

Digiti^ by VjOOQIC

4M

VERSlFICATlOn.

[book it

3. This verse requires a ctBtura after eadi dipody, exeept in the psnJbniMO*
This cflBsora is sometiines deferred, so as to follow a short syllable at. the begin-
ning of the next dipody.

4. In respect to the feet, the following should be observed, (a) An ana-
past most not follow a dactyl in the same dipody, and rarely follows it in sue*
oessive dipodies. (6) A dactyl rarely follows an anapant or spondee in th«
lame dipody. (c) The third foot of the paroemiac is r^ularly an anapcest ; so
that the system may close with the cadence of the common Hexameter. A
•pondee, however, is occasionally admitted (cf. § 704. 1).

SCHBMB AND KyATH'T^inir

1.

Dimeter Acatalectie.
2. 3.

4.

— -L

^ w

1.

w w X

— i-

Pansmiac
2. 3.

- xlK. x)

'AXX« r V I M«r«f til ^fAVmVif 'if mi
n/XcriTl' ^fiioTf, til '<5» r *fVrlyM«l»
"Iv^dUTs I itarix*** til *{«5«<l«#, *imi

Mytuy I woif fftM II Sf'^/xJiVar. Ear. Med. 759.
j^fX^^^* I •**^* t II «r«r Ur*-r». JBsch. Pr. 93. ,

•H'wfe I ^Sif^n^lWSs t Vt 'iir I kol^a- Soph. Aj. 146.

Though her 4ye I shone otft, t || yet the Ifds | were fix'd.
And the gl^ce [ that it g^ve t H was wild | and immix'd
With i£ught I of change, t II ^^ <^® ^7^ \ i^ay seem
Of the r&tjless who wilk t II ui * trodblled dr^m.

Bt/ron*8 Siege of CormdL

§ 709* n. The combination of the regular dimeter with
the paroemiac (cf. §^ 713, 717) forms the Anap-«stic Tetra-
meter Catalectic of comedy, also called, from its use by the
great master of comic verse, the Aristophanic:

Scheme and Examples.

1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

- ^tll _ ^
_^^tll_.^^

-stl-

4,^

H_A^

II

K«r ict«f I tmt y 1 11 "&«^ i3«x|CrJ«» t II <rfer riff j "s.^x'^s || a««^«r!^

Tffr 'al/iciTi^&t t H 'e!f aO'hiftiB.t X II '«Tra5» | 'i^rU || /S-Jsr/XiTJAf.

Tr ya^ iZ\1a'ifAA9 t || ««»" ^«%l(rr<r6» J l| ftdXXSv | »Pi» 'ftf-llrf J/««rlT*ff,

*H' T^v(l^\^a>ri^69f X\\ *^ iultOTt^f J II ^A>dy» | x«i T«c||Ti yf'(5» rSf,

Ar. Vesp. 548,

At your wdrd | off I g<5, t II and at stalling will sh6w, J || convinciing tka

stfffllest op& ion,
That reg^llia and throne, t H ao^tre, kfngjdom and crown, } || are but dirt •

to judfjlcial domm ion.

Digitized

by Google

en. 2.] ANAPJBSTIC AND IAMBIC VERSE. 425

Fint in pl^^ore and gl^ 1 1 ^^ aMund | more than w^; { | who with

ItCxIniy B^ljer are welded?
Then for iM(nlic and fights, f || the world thiodgfa | none excftes, % || ^hat

your df|cast does, ^en || tho' gray-h^Bdjed.

MUcheWg TranOatum.

§ 7 1 Q« in. ' Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of
other kinds of Anapaestic verse, both common and logcuBdie
(§ 696. 3) ;

Monom. Hypero. T^r#«X0^|«'ro»r||»av. Find. O. 13. 1.
Dim. Hyperc Tiri fU* | wi(uJ{\ftir&rig | »mX 'mft^Hg. Eor. Here 1018.
Irim. Brachye. ^ ^i fa* «0v | jar«Xti7||#o/a\ '«|^A^ || ^fiX9- Ar. Aoh
285.

ioGAOEDia 1 An., 1 lam. Ni>i'^ | ^ rft. Find. N. 6. 34.

1 An., 8 lam. Ai';^o^v|#« »«r | ^Sf \ yifSs. Ar. Thesm. 312.

1 An., 4 lam. Cat. XSk^trOv \ V»A|n rJv|^* »«tA<oV Find. O. 4. 14.

S An., 1 lam. T« fu* *k^\x^XfX'^ \ t^^^-^t- Find. O. 9. I.

S An., 2 lam. Cat. 'O'xiyfl'i^Mm* \ "ixTiuSf, iEsch. Fr. 547.

S An., 3 lam. ^iffg»c^\0' 'i^Mn]rot 'Hl^pa i | itSit*. Ear. Ion, 1447.

8 An., 2 lam. ASxtfSf | ^*» *Aif | »irm wdfWi ^ | r^^Sf, Ar. At. 451.

4 An., 1 lam. 'lirm\n yi^t^ \ "iri ««» | *o>c«««|r^rdv. iBsch. Ft. 558.

C. Iambic Verse.

§ 71 1. The place of the fundamental iambus may be
supplied by a tribrach (^ _ = w w w)» except at the end of a
line. To add dignity and variety to the verse, the first foot of
a dipody is very often lengthened to a spondee, and not unfre-
quently to a dactyl or an anapaest

Noras. The comie poets admit the am^mt in every place except the last
of a TerM or system. The same license exists in trage^ in proper names
eootaining two short between two long syllables.

§ 7 1 9. I. The Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic (oflen
called the Scnarius^ § 697. p) is the principal metre of dra-
matic dialogue (^ 708. 1).

RmtABKB. 1. This Terse has for its caesura the penthemim at the heph-
tkemim, the former much the most frequently. The latter is sometimes an'
iic^paUd by the elisioo of tlie syllable after which it would properly fall, form-
ing what has been termed by Person the quan-e^Bsura. lines occur, though
fwely, which have neither of these ccsnras.

2. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last ;
IhB spondee in the let, 3d, and 5th places ; the dactyl in the Ist and 3d ; and
the anapmt in the 1st. The feet which are admitted only in comedy or in
proper names ($ 711. N.) are placed within parentheses, in' the following

86*

Digitized by VjOOQIC

4ae

yBRSIFICATION.

[book IT

w ^ w

3.

KTAMFr,1W.

4.

-t J.

6.

~ J.

I. 2. 3. 4. 6. 6.

%i* ^ w

— -L

"EV^B I y '&T5X^fiof u\fiX t 0Vy^yiHi \ ^it, .£8ch. Pr. 14*

Sxt'lny I Vf tfrll^Vf t *aC«|««y fF; |j Y^nl/uTAy. lb. 2.

IlAtrwf I r "i9a,y\x^ f rtfyl^" ^fT || rtXftdv \ 0JC^$^u lb. 16.

Til* •«^#()C«i;||x«o 0i'/ur|)«( t «r||«/^n;T« «-«r. lb. 18.

T*Va^|ro» *I«-| NroVJivT f I •&«rii|rTirx»» | «-«t»ij. Soph. (Ed. C 1817
KTrnrki' ^» p ^irhCwt* • 1 1 VyiS II V«"*r» I rii^r*. Eur. Hec 387.
^%*%\m\i ItuAly^ifjMt I *i/«r«-jjrr>)r«« | r«><7f. Soph. Aj. 1091.

Love w^tchling M^||nes8 f wfth | iinfl|',terilble mien.

ByroiCg OtUde Harold,

^713. II. The Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic is pe-
culiar to comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cal»
alectic (cf. ^§ 709, 717) ; and has commonly a caesura after
the first dimeter.

Note. The same metre (following of oonrse accent and not quantity) is a
fiivorite verse <^ modem Greek poetry. In onr own langnage, it is diSety
used in comic songs and ballads.

a

SCHKBOS AND

Examples.

1.

%

3. 4. . 5. 6.

7.

^ ±

wX

w X

wX t

w X

w JL

w J.

'i,w

wXw

w^w

^^,^t

w ^ w

wX w

« ±

_ -L

-. -i.

^t^

— i- ^

^^^t

-X^

(--i

*^±.

wwj.

wwX

WW X

w w JL

•0"r#ff I ;j;ifT» || ^* 'o Jf^^Uor^ 1 1| *« •^H ««Xf |!*i Jii;'^'.
Ot7x«J7v I iraX«r || 2^«'ot; | Xfyw t 1 1| W/ d' «j;!rOf •?« jj *iKbQ\ilt*
'QT Jitf-jwoV^f II y£^ ^altrrf 'y\\f*df *M^tAs || 'ecwdwirig, Ar. Hut 260.

Aar<5Ira rfeQes <5'er j the hills, f || by gr^lful Hoiirs || attend ed,
And in j her trtun, || a m^rjry troop 1 1| of bright-ieyed Loves ) are U6id!fld

FerdveWs Claanc Mdodm*

§ T 1 4. III. The Iambic verse sometimes occurs in srs
TEMS of the common form (§ 700. 1) ; as,

Kmf Tsff j «dx«rf,
Xfiirm I «oX^ II riy 'df\lf&, Ar. Bq. 453.

Digitized

by Google

CH,

2.]

TAMBIC AMD TROCHAIC VERSE.

427

§ T 1 S. IV. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of
other kinds of Iambic verse (for the iambus in logaoedic verse,
see § 710).

Monom. Hyperc 'EV«r!^'( *^^||'«v* Pind. P. 6. 7.
Dim. Brachyc. 'f <rfr rl fAti \\ ^^&v6s. Soph. EI. 479.
Dim. Hyperc 2tf T#r | rt? ra || ««rfil5/«5|[r«f. Soph. Ph. 1095.
Trim. Cat. *0-« «r i* V«>!|oV | *^^^s || »tirai\6t, Msch. Pr. 429.
Tetram. Tav 'hii\foi rXS^f&Vf ^ifjvs V tH^l^oD^&t | w^( m1i\i»ifAm \ wuAi. Sopit
(Ed. C. 1077.

8cAZ02f («-»«^«v, limping) or Cholumbus (;^«X/s^C«f, ftune /am^iM), a
form of the Trimeter, introdaced by Hipponax, and having, for satiric or
comic efiect, a spondee in the last place.

£r y 'i#|rr M^WyifSs I ri t »»r || ira^£ I ;^^9r«-«f. Theoc Ep. 21.

D. Trochaic Verse.

^716* The place of the fundamental trochee may be

supplied in any part of the verse by a tribrach ( = w ^ w).

The last foot of a dipody is often lengthened to a spondee or
anapcest. The dactyl is admitted in proper names, except in
the 4th and 7th places.

•

§717. I. The Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic oc-
curs in both tragedy and comedy. It consists of two dimeters,
the second catalectic (cf §§ 7(M9,713) ; and has commonly a
csesura afler the first dimeter.

1. S. 3.

^L ^^ ^L ^^ jL, ^^

/.W W /.WW X w w

J^

SoHxiiB xsD BTAiiri.m,
6.

4.

JL w

^ w ..

JLww

6.

-L w

^ w w

7.

J- w
^ww

8.

^ w w n prop, names.)

T#i?f r^«'m mT II riiv lr.«f«-a» f || ^^^J^' | *r^-||^rr*|r<»Pf.

• Ar.-Vesp. 1101.

8m£n relfl^on || tfnd in'sp^ion, f || n^ieda it, j fri^ds of R m&e, to | 8^
Tn the | wispa and || ils your j chdros, 1 1| w<5ndrou8 | 8fmi||liri|ty.

Mitcheltt Tranilatimt,

§ 7 1 8. n. The Trochaic vetse sometimes occurs in
systems of the common form (§ 700. 1) ; as,

*a-» wiUtOfir*, II *it9rr I r«(;r«f

TfffU I 9M

Tf» 5r'l» ir^rjlfnr* rT. Ar. Pkx, 578.

Digitized

by Google

428 V£RSIFI0ATION. [bOOK IT

§ 7 1 0« m. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of
other kinds of Trochaic verse (for the trochee in logacedic
verse, see § 706).

Trim. Aa^rlf f«||»ft» *tf\A(fi8Har ^\kXf. Find. O. 3. 9.

Trim. Cat Tr» vA^ | 'f» wStJirf MSiCfffJh^Tta det«r. lb. 12. 4.

Tetram. *E'^r \ /mT ^tiSh 'i\Mart || /a^r\m «'A»||r« Mi\Xni4it. Find. L 4. 1

£. Otheb Metres.

^730. The metres which remain are Lyric, and for the
most part admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the
substitution of two ^H>rt syllables for one long, or of one long
for two short Examples are given of some of the most im-
portant.

1. Gretio Syttem. ^fjtfrtgi* \ »ar 7f%«0

Tftf *(»itit I *i»Ci>Mr$

£Ji0ii»U I *i^fJfAu .£flch. Sap. 418.

8. Biusohio Tetxttm. Tr$ *ax^ | rU 'S^^ | ^Hirrm \ /*' 'ifiyyU*
CjljJ -toduPr. 115.

8. CSboriambic System, ddbing, as is nsnal, with a baocbins.

TDfum^ra I Xiy$Tf tT ^a

KmttSv '5*m | f&w^m. Ar. Vetp. 526.

4. Bifliiig Ionic System. UfH^xif | fUf *S wi(0t\^r8XXf *nU

Aifi^^fUi I ^x^tt^ 9i^P[fA0f AfAti^pis. iEsch. Pen. 65.
0. PaBonic Tetram. Cat ^VT f^x&^f \ AsHfa^U, f | *<5f W ifAMlk\^^fJ%,

Ar. y^>. 1275.

6. Dochmiao QjTBtem. M/lirrMf rrecrSr | rr(«To«f ^dt xr^*^
(^ J.^;. ^ J.) 'Pit srixUs 'oir kiSf | «-^)^^f Vr«-«r«f.

*Ava0}Sf, rH^S, I 'trSfAOf *»'yyfkSt» JSsdl. S^pt 79

§7^1. NOTB. An aadtpcut (Jtfri0wa0r$t, dramm in etmtreiy dhte-
turns) is a combination Of an iambic with a trochaic rhythm, and admits in
the first part any foot which is admitted into Iambic verse, with the appro-
priate ictus ; and in the second part, any foot which is admitted into Tro>
ohaic verse, with the appropriate ictns. The addition to this combination
of a long syllable (which, in connection with other rhythms, may be resolved
into two short) forms a dockmits (ioxf^*h obUque^ crooked), which baa ooii«
sequently a triple ictus, with great variety of structure. Thus (l.)wJ.-L^-Li

K^O _ ^ w ^ . L I &c

Digitized

by Google

CB. 3.] Moan. 4USt.

CHAPTER III.

ACCENT.

^733. In ^ery Greek word, one of the three last syl-
lables was distinguished by a special tone of the voice.

Bemabks. I. This tone \a oommonfy' spoken of simi^y as Ae ta/M, or IhB
accent. Its precise nature we cannot now determine. It seems to have re-
sembled, in some degree, but with important difitsrences, that which we call
accent in English orthoepy. That it never fell upon any syllable before the
antepenult, shows that the Greeks fdt the same difficulty in the utterance of a
long train of syllables after their accent which we feel after oura. See also
§ 733. 2.

3. The Tersification of the andent Greeks was founded upon quantity with-
ont regard to accent ; that of the modem Greeks is founded upon accent with-
out regard to quantity. We cannot resist the conclusion from this, that in the
ancient language the distinction of quantity was the more prominent to the
ear ; while in the modem language the reverse is strikingly trae (§ 19). At
the same time, the distinction of accent was evidently the more intellectual in
Its character ($ 734) ; and, if less marised by the ear, was far more so by
the understanding.

3. To those who pronounce the Greek in the usual method, according to
quantity, the study of the accent is still highly useful, as serving, — (a) To
distingnlBh different worde, or different tense* <^ the same word ; as u/aI (en-
clitic, § 732), to be, tffu, to go; i, the (^ 731), I which; wirt t when? wM
(encL), once; iXXm, other things, «>.X«, but; XtMiXof, throwing stones, xJi»
C«X«(, thrown at with stones (§ 739. b). ~ (6) To distinguish different forms
of the same word; as the Opt fi0uXt6^»t, the Inf. fisuktug-at, and the Imp.
fi«»Xto0'tu (f f 84, 35). — (tf) To ascertain the quantitg of the doubted vow-
els (§§ 681, 726). — (d) To show the original form of words. Thus the cir-
cumflex over Ti/uiy pxS, ^n\S, marks them as contract forms of the pure
verbs rifUtt, f iXltv, IhXm^. — («) To show how words are employed in the
•entenoe ; as in cases of anastrophe, and whoe the accent is retained by pro*
clitics and enclitics (§§ 730-732).

4. Upon some of the minute points of accentuation, authorities and critics
differ. But this only ftimishes another point of analogy between the Greek
accent and our own. Indeed, there is no subject, either in grammar or in any
other science^ upon all the minutiie <^ which there is a perfect oneness of
opinion.

^733* In accentuation, a long vowel or diphthong in the
ultimoy and oflen in the penalty is regarded as forming two
syllables (§§ 29. ix, 676). — We may say, in such cases, that
the vowel or syllable forms two accentiial places.

Remark. In accentuation, the inflection-endings m and m
are not treated as long vowels, except in the Optatioe (cf.

Ml)

Digitized

by Google

4SIK^ ACCBKT. [book IT.

Note. This treatment of final «i and m as short vowels appears not to haw
prevailed in the earliest form of the langoagcf, nor in the Doric dialect, which
• was characterized by its closer adherence to old usage (§ 735. a). In the
Opt, it seems not to have prevailed from the natural dwelling of the voioa
upon the termination (§ 177). Traces of the old usage appear hi the i
nation of so many Inf. forms upon the penult (§ 746) ; although tbe <
flex accent is not here excluded (cf. 726. R.).

§ 734* I. Accentual places are counted according to the fbllowipg
method. The ultima is counted as the 1st place, if its voied is shortj but as
the 1st and 2d places, if its vowel ia long, U the ultima forms two places, the
pmuU forms, of course, the 3d place, and completes the number which is al-
lowed. If, on the other hand, the ultima forms only a single place, then the
penult forms the 2d place ; and, besides this, if its votod is long, it aboayn
forms in dissjfllablei, and aometimet forms in polysyUablet, the 3d place also. If
the ultima and the penult form but two places, then the antepenult is the 3d
place. In the following words, the numbos denote the accentual places ;

1 81 3 21 2 1 3 81 S2 I S8 I S SI

&ig, naig^ Xoyov, XoyoQ^ nXoviov, nXovrog^ nXovroi^ n^Qamnotq%

8 2 1 8 81 82 I 88 I 8 81 8 8 1 S S 1

ngoaianoyy kKOvaatg^ kxovaa^ kxovaai^ JtoXtfiovg^ noXffiog, noXiftoi.

2. An ascending line ( ' ) was adopted by the Greek grammarians as the
mark of an accented place, and a descending line ( ' ) as the mark of an nn-
•ocented place. A syllable in which an accented was followed by an miao-
cented place received, of course,. a double mark ('^). The words above, in
which the accentual places are numbered, are all accented as far from the end
as possible. I^ therefore, all their accentual places were distinctly marked,
Ihey would be written thus ;

^sg^ ntug^ Xoyov^ Xoyog^ nXovtov^ nXoinog^ nXovtol^ JtQoacinoigy

ngoatanovy iKovaalgf ixoifoa, kxovaatj noXifiovg^ noXifiog^ noXi/ioh

3. But it is evidently needless, exc^t for grammatical illustration, to mark
miaccented syllables, and when the two marks (' ' ) fall upon the same sylla-
Ue, it is more convenient in writings to unite them into one (^, or, as rounded
for greater ease in writing, " or " ). Dropping, therefore, the marks over
the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus ;

S^ig^ naig^ Xoyov^ Xoyog^ nXovtov^ nXovrog^ nXovtoi^ 9r^oae#3voi^,
TtQoaoinoy^ ixovaaig^ kxovaa^ kxovaai^ noXifiovg^ noXtfiog^ noXtfiot.

4. The following words are accented upon the first place ; tit, 5ef, ^^A
Xti^t ^tt^it, yvvmilif fiarsXtvt* The following. Upon the second ; jSm, pit,
9V^t ^»P»v, TtfAnt, *<«f, vSm, A.^yi, ^/Xm, C'^vAi, rifA9t, irritfy fia^iXUgj TtHtTt,
The following, upon the third ; X«y<v», «'«?)•#, yvfaT»a, ^Sf^h ^tifucTt* rmftM-
r*>y, Xt<V«, XiiVtf/Aiy, Xi/r«i/ri, iXuw, xikMirm, IXtXtiw^uv, XfTn.

§ T2«5. A syllable is termed acnte^ if it simply forms an
accented place ; drcumjiexed^ if it forms an accented followed
by an unaccented place ; grave^ if it receives no accent ; as
the final syllables in i^j^p/, fiaaiXsvg ' aog>ov^ Tifir^g ' Xoyty o^fta,

A word is f ^^^one, ^ / Acute,

termed an i Perispome, > if its Ultima n < Circumflcxed.
I Barytone, ) ( Grave.

Digitized

by Google

JB« 9.] OEIfERAL LAWS. 48}

A won! is f K-\7-|^, J if its Pehult is { Ac«- ,^^^,,

rme ^ Proparoxytone, if its Antepenult is Acute.

Notes, (a) The terms above are formed from the words roftg (Lat. ac-
dSDtiis), tone, iH^vs (Lat. acutus), sharps Tt^t99r4ufAivot (Lat. circumflexos), beni
round, circutnflexedf fia^vg (Lat. gravb), heavi/t grave, va^ei, near, and v^it
before, (6) The paroxytoneSf properispomes, and proparoxytones are all in-
cluded in the general dasa of bcarytonet,

^ T26. To the principles of Greek accentuation which
have now been given, may be referred, almost throughout, the
following general laws of accent and accentual changes.

I. General Laws of Accent.

1. One accent, and only one^ belongs to each word.

Hence rv» and Siitt compomided, become ^vvtiot • rvv and ^i^m, ru/*^i^tt, -^
For apparent exceptions, see §§ 731, 732.

2. The accent never falls upon any syllable before the ante-
penult

Hence Jm^«, fiiyttt become, in the Gen., Mfietr^tt fttyiiit,

3. The antepenult can receive only the acute accent, and can
receive this only when the ultima is short.

Hence 0«X«rri^ M^ttirttj «'f«r«Mr«y, become, in the Gen., B^aXm^ftit, M^m*
«••«, ir^«r««'«v. — For ^«X«rr«<, «»/^««'m, see ^ 723. R.

NoTEa «. If the ultima is long merely by position, still the antepenult
recdves no accent ; hence i^tCHxal («), though l^iCttX^t,

fi. In accentuation, i before m in the terminations of the Gen. and of the
Attic Dec IL is not regarded as forming a distinct syllable (§§ 35, 95. 3. «,
98, 1 1 6. «, )) ; hence, *Ar^ii)i*r, «'«Xi*rr, viXiiv • ikvatyimt. So, also, with an
intervening liquid, m adjectives compounded of yiXit and »i^a,$ (§ 136. 1) ;
aa, piXiy%X»tt, &K%^»tt • and, according to the same analogy, the compound ad-
verbs tnwmXmiy v^iwmXtu*

4. The eircun^lex never falls upon any syllable that is no'i
long by nature.

Hence fim, fiZt, wmu become, in the Nom. pi., ^i%tt /im Q}\ irmvrtf («).

5. The penult can receive the circumflex only when the uZ-
iima is short by nature.

Hence /£mV«, *n^»<i 9u»69, become, in the Gen., /itums, yitr«v, ^ux»u, — For
fUvrmt, ySrM, see § 723. R.

Remark. In the old language and in the Por. (cf. § 723. N.), a final
pliable long merely by position appears to have forbidden both the acute upon
the antepenult, and the druumflex upon the penult. From the common ac-
centuation (which forbade l^iC*rX«& but permitted l^<C£xs{, tee N. « above).

Digitized

by Google

ACCENT. [Boot. VT

the drciimfl«z upon the penult appears not to hare been deemed quite ac

great a remove from the end of the word liftthe acate upon the antepenult

.(cf. 723. N.). Even after the dropping of r m the 3d Pets. pi. of verba

§ 181. 2), Boma forms of the Doric retained the old accentuation; as, ly^

6. If the ultima is short hy nature^ and the penult is long hy
nature and accented^ it must be circumjlexed.

Hence ^(^ ttldvf y^ttfttij 'Ar^ii^nr, become, in the Nom. pL, S«^ff, mSSnt^
yvSfuit (§ 723. R), 'Ar^ii^M. — For ^74$, feci^h ««^> ^ see § 732. d.

II. Accentual Changes.

§ T2T. The accent is subject to the following changes :

— (a) The acute may be changed to the circumflex; as, Otjg^
&^Qff, — (b) The circumflex may be changed to the acute ; as,
ftovaa^ fjiovafjg. — (c) The acute may be softened upon the uttt-
ma (& 729). — {d) The accent may be throvm hacky that is,
transferred to a preceding syllable ; as, ygaqxa, tyqatpov. —
{e) The accent may be brought forward^ that is, transferred
to a succeeding syllable; as, ^17^, ^i^^oV — {/) The accent
may be thrown upon the ^preceding word ; as, ow/ua nov (^ 732).

— {g) The accent may be omitted ; as, tatvio ' naq iftol '
0 rovs' (piXta as (§§ 728. b, c, 731, 732).

§ T28« Changes in the accent arise, principally, from,

I.) The ADDITION or loss of syllables ; as, Svofia^ ovoftarog
(^ 726. 2) ; ^/tttco, ^mxm (^ 288) ; novspog^ novq>6xtgog (^ 156) ;
nottegog, ncngog (§ 741). See III. c.

II.) Change in the quantity of vowels. See § 726. 3-6.

m.) Contraction, crasis, or apostrophe, as follows.

a. Contraction. An acute syllable, folUnoed by a grave,
is contracted with it into a circumflexed (§§ 724. 3, 725) ; other-
wise the accent is not affected by contraction, except as the
general laws may require ; as, voog vovg^ tifiam tijum * t/^o*
t/juix, TiftaolfiTiv jifnafifiv ' kataorog karmTog (§ 726. 6).

Remabk. Some contract forms are accented as though made by inflectioii
without contraction ; or fall into the analogy of other words. Thus,

1.) In contracts of Dec U., — (a) The accent remains throughout upon the
same syllable as in the theme ; as, w't^iVXMf , «'f^<«'XMv, contr. «'t^/«'X«vf, «^i.
irktv Gen. ay^^M (^ 17). — (b) The Nom. dual, if accented upon the ulti-
ma, is always oxytone ; as, »«, Urt^ (^ 9). — (c) Except in the Nom. dual,
all simple contracts in .avf or .«&» are perispome ; as, ;^^vri«f xt^^*^ (K 1S)»
xAntv Mavtvf, basket, — (d) In oxytones of the Attic Dec., die Gen. sing, hat
the acute ; which ma^' be explained by supposing one • to have been dropped
from the original form (cf. § 243. 2) ; thus, Htit (% 9), G. nm« (§ 86), nU;
bjr contraction n^, vui (§ 98. fi).

Digitized

by Google

cm. 3.] ACdBNTVAL CHANGBS.

f .) Tbe oontraot Aoc o^ noniit in ^ it oxytaoB ; as, i^im h^ (T 14)«
So Dat (xi'*^'d XiV perispome (§ 104). These cases follow the analogj of
§744.

3.) The oontcaot Gen. pL of r^tn^ns (i 14), avra^Kns, and compounds in
^ns is paroxytone ; as, r^tv^utt r(/«^*>».

4.) The 8ubj, pat$. of verbs in -/m, and of Perfects used in the sense of the
Pres., is often accented as though uncontracted ; thus,- ri/Ar/Mu, r/Vji, rihrai •
^ii»0fuu • M»r»ttuu, ia.%fi,ttftuM (§ 234). And, on the other hand, the Opt,
pa$$. of these verbs is accented by many as though etmtnuted ; thi^S ritfiT*^

Kora. In diarem, or the resolntioa of « diphthong, a oucomflexed ^jU*-
"bU is resolved into an aeute and a grave ; as 90$$ w»tt.

b. Crasis. In crasis, the accent of the first word is omitted*
The accent of the second remains wi^ut change, except as
required by ^ 726. 6 ; as, tamo, for to avro * TaiUa, for xa SiUM
(yet some write raUa).

c. Apostrophe. When an accented syllable is elided^ the
accent is thrown back upon the penult, as acute ; thus, d$lv*
BJifji for dsiva BTtij • iro'iU* ma&ov {noXla). — Except in preposi-
tions, and ^6 particles aUd, fifidiy ovdi, and the poeUc lidi and
ids ' as, na^* ifiol, all' fym,

§ 799* IV*) Tbe connbgtion of words in discourse, as
follows.

A. Grave AccENt. Oiytones, followed by other wordtf in
closely connected discourse, soften their tone, hnd are thefl
it\arked with the grave accent (§ 14) ; as, 4nl tit nala xul ajra^d,

ExcsFTiON. The interrogative rigj and words followed hy enditics (§ 732),
never take the grave ; as, Tit (t » Who art thou f

Notes. «. In the application of this rule editors vary. The best nsag^
liowever, retains the acute accent only in the case of unconnected words or
phrases, and before the period, colon, and snch Otho* pauses as require to be
distinctly maiioed in reading.

fi. The syllable over which the grave accent is written is still rogaided as
meute, although its tone is softened, and the word to which it belongs is still
tenned an oxytone. Syllables strictfy grave are never marked, except for
grammatical illustration, as in § 724.

^ TSO. B. Anastrophe. In prepositions of two short
syllables, the accent is usually thrown hack ui>on the penult,
when they follow the words which they would regularly pre-
eede, or lake the placof of compound verhs^ or a^ used adner'
bially ; as, doinov vnsQ^ for vnig dofifov ' oliamf Siro t, 5W, for
inoli^ag (§ 653) ; niigrif for na^t^ti * mvOf for ard^tri^t
(^ 653. s) ; TTcm, in the sense of exceedingly (§ 667. fl). This

Digitized

by Google

ACCBNT. — PBOCLITiCb, BMGLITICS. [bOOE !V.

ohange of the aceent is termed anasfrophe (ayudt^o^if, turning
hack).

KoTBi. (a) Grammarians except %t£ and Avm (except for mrtU^^s), to
dbtingnish them from the Ace Aim, and the Yoc. &9a (^^ II, 16). (6)
Both in anastrophe and in the common accentuation of prepositions (§ 750. 2),
the attraction of the accent towarda the word upon which the prqxwitlcm ex-
preasea ita force will be observed.

§781* C. Proclitics. A few mono^ZZo^Z^, beginniDg
with a vowel, are commonly connected in accentuation with the
following word, and lose^ in consequence, their proper accent
They are hence called atonies {aiova^ tonel^s)^ or, with more
precision, proclitics {nQo»livt>, to lean forward). They are,
(1.) the aspirated forms of the article, o, ^, ot, orl* (2.) the
adverb ov, not ; (3.) the prepositions u$, into, ir^ in, H^outof;
(4.) the conjunctions el, tf a>(, as.

Nans. The proclitics retain thdr accent when they close a sentence^ or
fbOow the word which they would regnlariy precede. Hence, »i %ivw • but^
wSf yk^ §S' m Stif, but| Bt$t tit * •» nauSvf bat, tuttcSv f^.

^733* D. Enclitics. Some words are attached^ it
accentuation, to the preceding word, and are hence called en-
clitics {fyxXmxog^ from iyxUvfo^ to lean upon). They are, —
(i.) The following oblique cases of the personal pronouns;
1st Pers. (Aov^ (aoI^ /ue * 2d P. aov, aol, ai * 3d P. ov, ol, c * r*r,
oq>lai, aifd. For odier enclitic forms of the personal pronouns,
see IT ^- (ii*) The indefinite pronoun %lg, in all its cases,
and the indefinite adverbs ntog^ nto, wij, nol, novy no&l^ no&dr,
noxi (U 63). (ill.) The Pres. ind. oSf ft/*/, to be^ and gwy/ii,
to say^ except the 2d Pers. sing. — (iv.) The particles yi^ rw,
91^^, T^, jol ' the poetic &i^yy xi{v)y vv^ (d ' and the insepara-
We-^«.~See§ 152.2.

Remabks. a. (a) An enclitic throws back its tone, in the form of the
acute accent, upon the uUima of the preceding word ; as, kv^^^rif Un • ^7|m
fits • i7 T4f mm ^tiri fMt «'«(irva/. (b) If the ultima of the preceding woid
has already an accent, the accent of the enclitic unites with it, and disappears ;
as, «m)^ r/r • ^tXi n. (c) The accent of the enclitic, if a monosyliabiley ia
also lost after a parox3rtone ; as, ^ix»t fMu.

b. An enditio retotns its accent, — (I.) At the htgvming of a dause ; as,
2*5 y^i ft^mrtg Ur) fiiytg-rtv. — (2.) After the apostrophe i as, irtkXai %' wV*»
— (3.) If it is emphatic; as, $h Ev^^y, cXX* ri, not Cyrtu, hut ywu — (4.) If
it is A pertonal pronoun, preceded by an orthotone preposition whi(^ goyems it;
as, wm^k nl, irt^} 90U, m-^of gi. But v-^if fit, and sometimes «^^/ /m» and
^is n, occur. — (5.) If it is a tHesyllable, preceded by a paroxytones as, h

c. Whsn irW is prominent in a sentence, it beoomea a parozytoiie: •%

Digitized

by Google

CR 3.J LSTSBMINATION OF i^CGENTED SYLLABLE. 435

d. («.) An enclitic is often joined in writing to the preceding word, as if
forming with it but one compound word ; thus, finrtu eviivtTi^ £rT%, (/3.)
This is always the case with the preposition -^i, to ; as, "Oxvfivefh, to Olym-
pus, 'EXivrrMB^i. (y.) In pronouns and adverbs compounded with -M (§ 1 50,
^ 63. IX.), the syllable precedmg -ti always takes the accent, which is acute
or circumflex according to the rule in § 744. (i.) In iy^iy ifi»i, and i^i,
the accent is thrown back when yi w affixed (§ 328. b) ; thus, iyt^yt, tfioty*^
ifny%, (i.) Yah and vrn'tx^ are accented as if formed by the attachment of
enclitics. •

§ 733« Notes. 1. A word, which neither leans upon the foUowL^f
por upon the preceding word, but stands, as it were, erect, is called, in distil «-
tion fVom the proclitics and enclitics, an orthatone {i^timt^ erect in tone),

2. Both proclitics and enclitics are more abundant in English than in Greek,
and these classes of words furnish another strong antilogy between the Greek
and the English accent (§ 722. 1). The words in English which are used
iu translating the Gredc procHtics and enclitics are themselyes, for the most
part, either proclitic or enclitic. Thus, in the sentence, Give me the book (pro-
nounced Girnne thdkkik), the pronoun me is encUtic, and the article the^ pro-
clitic In the sentence, If John *s in the house, donU tell him a word of this,
the words If in, the, a, and of are proclitics, and the words w, not, and him,
enclitics.

III. Determination of Accented Syllable.

^ y84« General Principle. In eXch word, the accent
belongs to that syllable upon tokieh the attention is most strong*
ly Jwtd.

NoTB. I^ Arom the general laws of aooentuation> this tyU. cannot receiTfe
the accent, it draws it as near to itself as possible.

RmfARKii. 1. In the origin of hmguage, the attention is absorbed by the
greater distinctlona of thought ; but, as these become familiar to the mind, it
passes to the lees, and then to those that are still subordinate. Hence, in the
progress of a language, its accent is subject to change, as well as the forms oi
its words, its vocabulary, and its constructions. In the Greek, as in other
langnagea, the accent was originally confined to the syllables containing the
essential ideas of words, i. e. to their radical syUables (see §§ 83, 171). But,
in proportion as these became familiar, there was a tendency to throw the
accent upon those syllables by which these ideas were modified, either through
inflection, derivation, or composition. Thb tendency would of course vary
greatly in diflerent classes and forms of words. It would naturally be the
strongest where the root was the most familiar ; or where the formative part
was the most significant or characteristic. On the other hand, any strength-
ening of the radical, or weakening of the formative part, would have a ten-
dency to produce a contrary effect. In illustration of these tendencies (which
of course are subject to the general laws of accent), it will be observed, that,
— (a) In neuter nouns, the affix, from its inferior importance, almost never
attracU the accent (§§ 737. t, 738. d). — [b) In demonstrative pronouns, the
deictic -^i always draws the accent to the preceding syllable (§ 732. y), and
the still stronger -< always Ukes it upon itself (§ 150. y), — (c) In verba,
the aooeat is always attracted by the augment, while it can never pass beyond
K (S 748. 4).— (<i) The okl weak root of the 2d Aor. (§ 257. 1) yields the ao-

Digitized

by Google

496 ACCENT. [book it.

eent to the affix in sereral cases irbere the strengtheAed root of Uie Vna re-
tains it (§ 746 - 748). — («) In derivative adjectives, those endhigs whi<^ ex
press most strongly character or relation attract the accent (§§ 737 — 739).-^
(/) In composition, the accent is usually attracted by that word which definef
the other, and thus gives its special character to the compound (§§ 323, 739\
In the active compound verbals, the idea of th^ action is more prominent th^oi
in the pusnve ; and hence appears to have arisen the distinction in § 739. 6.

^ § 73«i* 2. That the different dialects should have often varied ia
accent will occasion no surprise in those who have compared the prononciatioo
of our own language in different parts of its native isk. That these differaioes
are often neglected in our copies of the classics has arisen from the late period
at which the marks of accent were introduced (§ 22. »), and the tendency at
that time to conform every thing to the Attic standard (§ 4). From the
testimony of the old grammarians we learn, that, — (a) The Doric was char-
acterized by its adherence to geno^ rules and dd usage (§ § 723. N., 726.
R.). — (6) The Lesbian JEolic was characterized by its tendency to throw
the accent as far back as possible. In words of more than one syllable, it is
said to have admitted the accent upon the ultima in prepositions and oonjuuo-
tions only. — (c) The Attic (to which the Ionic appears to have more neariy
approached) was characterized by an expressive variety of accent, and a
greater incUnation to mark the minuter shades of thought and species of re-
lation.

A. Accent in Declension.

^736* I. Tfafe accent of the tbsiu must be learned
from special rules and from observation.

a. Rules jfor Simpls Wobds.

Spbcial Rules of Deo. L All contracts are perisponis ; as, *£e^, ^h&
Of other words, — (a) All in ^f are paroxytone ; as, rafi'mg, — (b) Most in
.Iff are paroxytone, except verbals in -ruf from mute and pure root$ of verbs m
.*>, which are commonly oxytone ; as, 'Ar^i/^irf, murm^ ^^«Xr*ff, w^t^^tmsj
^•Qo^Ttirfit ' ^t»et0vrnt ^dtfirif. — {c) Nouns in •« short (§ 92) throw the
accent as ffa back as possible ; as, yxS^^ij Kieufi^ itXnttiiy fiv7&» — {d) Most
abstracts in .<«, those in .rvvii, and those in .f/^ from verbs in .tmv (§§ S05.
b, 308. a, c), are paroxytone ; as, r«^/ii, rM^^tdrvffi, ^mhlA, — (e) Most other
verbals in .« long or -n, especially those formed after the analogy of the 2d
Perf. (§ 307. R.), are oxytone ; as, ^vy^, ^e^a.

§ 737. Special Rules of Dec. II. (a) Adfeethes in ^h preceded
by a mute are commonly ox^'tone, especially those in .»•;, verbals in .r«f, and
ordinals in •cr^f ; as, »tc»is, a^x***ff o^Hriff tixa^rif, x'^Xtvie, ^»P*f* ^*^X***
&ya6oS' — {b) On the contrary, primitive nouns with a mute root are more
frequently accented as far back as possible ; as, xiyost tt^iftag, irk^vrf, ^ftm-
to(. — (c) All ordinals not ending in -^t»$ are accented as far back as possi-
ble ; as, ii/tttrof, — (d) A<Qectives in -X»t, .^»r, and -tn (except those in
't9ot denoting material or country , § 315. e, e) are commonly oxytone; as,
A^artikes, ^nitXig, >^iX«f, »i^X(^ft ^«Ciftfj, ^ofn^o$% Xtyu^if, X^-^^t ^f^*it»
flTf^iMf, Ki/tixuMf, "laffiidvis ' %vX$t»t* Tu^mfTivaf. — (e) NounS in -fMt with a
long penult are commonly oxytone ; while adjectives in -/Mt are commonly
accented as far back as possible; as, Hu^fiif, fi»,ftis • xV'^'fi^-^if) ^^foau
In -eg pure are more frequently ox.> tone ; as, y««y, Mf, yiig. 9t>lf, — ^J Vsi*

Digitized

by Google

Ol. 8.] IN DECLEKSION. 45*7

bals in •^$$t (§ 314. f), mtUtiplea in Hr/««;(^ 138. 4), and most adjectives in
'»t*s from nouna of Dec. I., in .0<«f , and in .9^$, are accented upon the penult ;
as, trtitiriasy ^4«rX««$, ayo^aiogf itroios, ii*»;. — (A) Adjectives in -ii*?, in -i»f ■
yrfceded by a coruonanL and in -»«f joiu«»xl immediately to the root, are com-
iiKinly accented as far back as possible , as, B'^^ties^ av^dvioiy ^^vtrm. — (t)
Very few neuters are oxytone ; and most neuters are accented as fur back as
possible (§ 734. a) ; as, fii^t«f, troni^soty «0gi^4«y, o^ftdi', tkatof.

§ TS8. Special Rules op Dec. III. (a) All nouns in .«r, -it/f, -•»,
t*s (G. -Mf), -at (-«3w), -r^ (-rJ«f), all miisculines in -w^, iiouijs of more than
one syllable in -€$, and almost all nouns in which the characteristic is » preceded
b}' «, t, fly or r, are oxytone ; as, m'atdvy lir<r%vsy itx'^i »*^*^ft Xa/u<ra^, •aitf^
0-^^myify -i}»fy i m'arn^y XsfinnVy -ifof, ^.n^iiv, •«»•;, JiX^<>, -ivcf. — (b) All nouns
in -te/vy names of months in -*>», and most feminines and augmentatives in •«*,
are oxytone ; other words in -*>» are more frequently paroxytone ; as, Kvxtwv,
'Avhrrfi^Utty ;^ixr2«i», «/i«'iA«» • K^««/*>y, r^iZi^vy ftXv^ttf, — (c) Monosyllabio
nouns which have the Aoc in -m are commonly oxytone ; those which are
neuter (see d below), and most which have the Ace in -», are perispome ; as*
mVij Touty ^^y ^mf * ri ^«r, r« <ri;# (so likewise the neut adjective «-ay, ^ 19) ;
fieZff taut. — (d) In neuter nouns (§ 734. a), in words in .| and -'n^, in verbals
in -rtt^y and in nouns in -<# or -vg with the Gen. in -i«(, the accent is thrown as
far back as possible ; as, »i^a(y r%7;^tty ^oiXtuftM • »tf^c|, xetXav^oy^ (§ 726 R.) ;
^vvet/Mty *i>.tjcu$, — (e) Female appellatives in -a (§§306. N., 309 -311)
have the accent upon the same syllable as the masculine, except when this is
a proparoxytone or dissyllabic barytone (in which case the feminine commonly
becomes oxytone) ; as, alXfirvny mifXtir^it * •'•Air^if, voktrtg • Tl^mfAiitiif
H^mf*if m;^fuiXmr0ff mij^fAmXttrit • nig^-nj, fli^r/f. — (/") Simple adjec-
tives are oommonlj oxytone, if the characteristic is a vowel ; paroxytone, if it
is a consonant ; as, 0*^s, iiivs • fiAXm$, x*V*^f (^1f ^7, 19).

b. Rules fob Compound Words.

^ TS9« In eompesition, there is a general tendency to throw the
accent as far back as posbible. But, — (a) Compound adjectivee in -nr are
more frequently oxytone ; as, ttur^ttrm (those in -Jing are always paroxytone;
so compounds of ^^«f, «^xi«, and some other words). — (b) Compounds in
which -tg is affixed to the root of a verb united with a noun are commonly
oxytone, if the penuit U tong ; but if the penult (9 shm^ tbey are commonly
paroxytone when active in sense, and proparoxytone when p<imve ; as, rir*-
witg (^ 327); W«C«x«« and W«C«x«f (§ 326. a).— tc) Compound adjec-
tives of Dec. III., with a palatal or lingual characteristic, in which the latter
part is a monosyllable derived from a verb, are common ly oxytone ; e. g. all
in -r^l, 'WXnly -^ly -T^^i .Cxni, -^vtigy -xf*fig ; as, i<r«^^$. — (d) Words
derived ftom compound words are commonly not accented as though them-
selx'es compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule ; thus,
jMr«#xiMK^*>, ««r«t#xiiM»«'r«f (§ 737. o), i-xaTetr»iua^Tog. — See § 734, f,

% T40« IL In declension, the accent commonly remains,
BO far as the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as in
the theme.

Kkmarks. 1. In Dec. f., the affix .«» of the Gen. pi., as contracted (VxMn
M9 v§ 95. 3), is always circumtiexed. — Grammarians except, chiefly (br
tlM salie of diatinotioH from otlier words, A ^^^ attchavy, m irm^im*, trmde^
ti7»

Digitized

by Google

ACCENT. — IN DECLENSION. [bOOK IT

mindt, i xXtvtnft wUd-boar, and i x^^nrnt, uturer ; Geo. pi. «^«», &c. Fa
nn app«rent exception in adjectivea in ^r, see 2 below.

2. In adjectives in -»e, the feminine is accented throoghont, so fiir as the
general laws permit, open the same syllable as the masculine ; thos, ^iXin
(Y 18), ^iX/«, PI. ^/Xi0i, ^/Xidi, M. and F. p\i»n (as if a common foann for
the two genders, cf. § 133. a, y,^\ tbe Dor. Gen. pi. in -«», § 95. /S, where
the feminine has a special form, follows the rule in 1 above, as ^tXtmv) ; while,
firom the noun h ^tXiicy friendship^ <piX'i»$y ^tXiZ* • so xa^Samait iv. 5. 14, as
properly an adjective. — In other adjectives, the feminine retains Uie accent
of the theme, but subject to the same changes as in i^ouns of Dec L ; as, ^ei>
Xaf, /Aixeuva, fAtXaitntt fiiXanZ* {\ 19). Except poetic feminines in -mk, be*
longing to adjectives in -m (§ 134. y) ; as, n^tytfiis, ^^lyinm. Observe the
accentuation of /lia, fiias, &c. (^ 21).

* § 74 1 • 3. In Dec III., dissyUabic Genitives and Datxoea throw the
accent upon the affix \ as, yvv'ot, atyi, r^ix^'^t ^o^ij »Xitias9 (^ 1 0 ; va^^isf
Jiti^ufy MVffiy i^u (^ 12).

Notes, (a) Except those which have become dissyllabic by contractiim^
participleSf and the Gen. pL and dual of these ten nouns, i^e, ifuif, it^t nM^m,
§vfy ff'^?!, fm, T^tisi ^«ff, ^Sf Qig^)* and of the adjective «>«; • thus, triXu
voXti (1 14), U(»t a^tt (§ 108. N.); J«»T»f, lifTt, tv9r60f (^ 22); itmis0t,
^ranff airttv (^ 11). — (6) The contraction is not regarded in accenting the
Gen. and Dat. of ah (^ 14, § 121. /), »Zs, ^ria^, ^^U^ (§ 104. NT.; yet
see cZs above), and 0^^ (G. -«if ). — (c) Observe the accentuation of Btiitt
i\ 21), r/f, r)$ (If 24), yu^^ (§ 101. y), ^uyirf,^ (§ 106. 2). — (d) The Attics
are said to have made the G^i. pL of numeral substantives in -tif perisDome;
thus, fiv^tetiUvf as if contracted from the Ion. fiv^tecVutw (§ 120. 2).

§ 743 • 4. From the natural tone of frequent address, the aooent of
the Yoc. in a few familiar words is thrown back as far as the general lawi
permit; viz. Dec I. ha^artis, master; Dec HI. ywn (^ 101. y), 'Av'iXXtn,
rLofttiSv, ^atrn^ (§ 105. E.), «*ij^, «'ant^, 3-i/y«rii^, AnfAnrn^ (§ 106), ^4^
brother-in-law; thus, ^ir«'«r«, ^y«ri^, ^finrt^*

Note. In the Yoc smg., iv and m final are always cinnunflexed ; as^ /r«
«■•«*, iix^h «'^« (^ 14).

^ 743« 5. The tendency in compounds and comparatives to throw
£he accent as far back as possible (§§ 739, 745) leads to the accentuation of
the antepenult in the Yoc and Neut. sing, of some nouns and adjectives of
Dec. III. whose theme is accented upon the penult These are, — (a) Cant'
paratives in •«» ; as, nSf«y, ^'ijtv. — (6) Most compound paroxytones in -im
and -»;, except those in .^^wy, 'n^mt -»>hnty -«Xii;, and -«^n; ; as, ivimi/Mtty
Keut. and Yoc. iuhaifAOt • au^a^rist N. and Y. aii6ait$ • *Aya/iift9mVf Y. 'Ayii-
. fUfAntf Y. ^uK^arts, *H^«xXii; (^ 14).

6. (a.) Observe the accentuation of finrn^t B^vyam^ Anft^rn^ (Y 12,
{ 106. 2), and of iixtti^ (-6 104. N.. 728. BL). — (iS.) The forms in -/<.X
-^<, -^t (§§ 89-91, 320), follow the general rule, unless a short vowel pre-
cede, in which case they are commonly paroxytone. — (y.) For the irregulari-
ties and peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and pronouns, tei
5^ 21. 23, 24.

§ 744. III. A long vowel in the ultima^ belonging to an

Digitized by VjOOQIC

CH. 3.] lit COBfPABISON. — IN CONJtT&ATION. 4S9

iiffix of declension^ can receive only the acute accent in the di-
rect^ and the circumflex in the indirect cases ; as, n^if, -^;, -^,

ij»', -a/, -mVf -aig, -ag, -«, -atf (IT 7) ; odov, -cjH, -o/, -cSr, -otg,

ovff, -w, -otr (Tf 9) ; /VTifloy, -oZv (fl 11).

Except in the peculiar datives l^«4 f^h ^•i (Y ^^ § ^^l)*

B. Accent in Ck)MPARisoN.

^ 749« Comparatives and superlatives, whether adjectives
or adverbs, are accented as far back as the general rules of
accent permit ; thus, r^dvg, ^diwv, riSlov (^ 743. 5), tldiarog,

C. Accent in Conjugation.

^ 746* Verbs are accented as far back as the general
laws permit, with the following exceptions (see §§ 723. N^
734. c, d),

1. These forms are aeoented upon the penuit; — (a) AH InJhUihm fit
••«4 ; as, fiiCtvXivmUtu, ^vkiviiifmif W«mi, i#r«v«< (^ 48). Except dialectio
'orms in -^smm (§ 250). — (b) The Inf, of the 1<< Aor. act, and 2d Aor,
mid, ; as, ^«vXivr«i, Xtm-i^mi (^ 37). — (e) The Perf. pass. In/, and Part.%
as, fiiCttfkiMmtf fitC»»Xi»fii90t' — Except a few preteritwe partieiple» ; as, Kfi*'
9f (^ 59). So MtifU9»Sf from xir^Mu (§ 232 ), which otherwise is accented as
an uncontracted Perf. ; thns, $tarm»itftMt, xmrtiMl^Uu In a few Epic forms,
the retraction of the accent extends even to the Inf. ; as, Jkfuixn^mt T. 33.5,
inutxfifiU9f £. 24 (§ 286). — (d) All dialectic uifinitives in -/«» (§ 250).

§747* 2. These forms are oxttokb ; — (a) Partidpiu in -t, G, -rt,
except in the Iff Aor. act. ; as, /3iC«tfXivjMir, fi«vXtu4tifi Urmt, 0^df • but,
/3«vXitfr«r. — (b) The 2d Aor, act. part,; as, Xtvtiv, ^if. — (e) The 2a
Aor, imperat, formtf f/«^ say, ixii, come, tvfij Jbid, and, in strict Attic, «)•»
•00^ and Xmfii, take. Except in composition ; thus, S^iX/i, aS^ih.

V 7 4 8* 3. Tliese forms are pertsfomb ; — (a) The 2d Aor, inf. m
M ; as, Xtmisf. — (b) The 2d Per». tmg. of the 2d Aor, mid, imp, ; as, Xi»
wwy )«v (^ 51 ). Except in eompomuU of more than two syllables from verbs
in •^; as, kTS^»v bat vr^tiw. Some exceptions also occnr in compound
and even in simple verbs in .*r.

4. The accent of a verb hi ooBrposmoN can never be thrown farther back
than the augment (§ 734. c), or farther than the tone syllable of the word
prefixed; thus, «'«f/^M (wat^i, Ix^t h 300), «'«(i/;^«y, «'a(ir;^«y, va^A^x***

§ T49« Remarks. «. In those forms in which the accent of tho
Perf. and 2 Aor. difiers from that of the Pres., a want of uniformity has some-
times arisen from different views m regard to their etymology. Thus, 2 Aor.
fbrms are sometimes accented as Pros. ; as, Inf. a/*v»ei^uv, r;^i^ii», Pt, r;^i/*rv

(§ 299) \ w(m0%y v^m, vr^U^iat (^ 49).

/S. MomrnfttabUi long by nature, except ParHeipiUe, are generally
/ItfMf ; thus, iT, h^ i, £f (^ 55) ; r^«, r^iTv, r;^»» (§ 300).

^ For the aoosotuatioo of fiMM' (f 58) and *ifu (f 55), see $ 782.

Digitized

by Google

440 ACCElfT. IN PABTICLSft. [bOQC FIT.

X Tlie Uniai, Ui dropt^ing one • froni '.imm, -ff«» do not dunge fiie cooeot ,
thos, f«CU (§ 243. 2). So Uroi (^ 55)« as if •Tucopated Cnm #««<-««• tof
nudni parozytone in composition ; thus, mt^Urat,

u Examples of irrtgular isft warmus aeceiUuatum are ^s, ^0i or pmiJ, (m^
•Itm or iiV«ir ( § 53) ; Ittv (§ 56) ; »i*r, to go, poet, /^. jmmv • Ion. m»» ^f 55} ;
Xf!^ ^Xfi*^ Xi*^ (§ 284. 4).

D. AcoBNT HI Particles.

§ 7SO« 1. Ai>^BB8. (a) Advsrbs in ^i deiiT«d from s^ectires
4n^ wi^ veiy ftnr axoeptions, aceented like the Gen. i^ of their priniitif«s
(^ 321. a) ;, as, r»^iv«, raxS^t. — ip) Derivativse adverbs in -Im, 4«, -*, -«^
and -\ (§ 321. b, e, d) are commonly oxytone ; those in ^ii», -mtut (§ 321.
b, 4), and -*r, paroxytoqa > as, irX^ylff^, »m(^^ Mulirr/, gLf^axA «'«^A.-

2. pREPoemoNS. The primitive prepodtions ( § 648. /3] are aU ozytaoe $
•s^ A«4, Mvi. Ibr the removal or loss of the accent, see §$ 780, 731.

3. For proclitic and enclitic particles, see $$ 781» 732. The
9f thoM pwrtidfls which remain is bert lewnMl by tbssivationi

Digitized

by Google

GREEK INDEX.

Pn this and the foHowinf Index, figures f romedfately preceded by the mark IT refer te
paragraohs in the Tables; other figures refer to sections in the body of the Grammar,
with their subdivisioiia. The rsrereaoas to the Tables are usually followed by other
references in illustration. The letter f immediate! v attached to a figure (thus, 32 f) sig-
nifies and the following. The signs >^ and <^ denute the change, by contraction or
otherwise, of the words or letters at the opening into ihoM at the angle. The sign X ^^
notes opposition or distinction. Tiie abbreviation cj- stands for conkigation, contr. for
contraction, const, for construction, cp- for comparison, dec. for ueclension, der. for
derivation, end. for enclitic, ins. for inserted, num. for numeral, pos. for position, r. for
root, w. for with, AoJ

Si, KSl 24; «>i,s.if,
«, 28, 44, 203. /5, 259,
266f ; iUt> • and n.
29. « ; « < », 50 ; con-
tr. w. other vowels, 32 f,
45 ; ountr. of « for »,
S4, 45. 5 ; < I, 59 ;
Dor. ft, 6, 44f, 95 f: •
in neut. pi., 80 ; in Dec.
I., 1 6 : 86, 92 f ; in ace.
of Dec hIm 100 ; conn,
vow. in cj., 5 31 : 178f,
203 f ; changes in r.,
259, 266 f ; added to r.,
287 ; .« in der., 305. b ;
it. privative, 325, 383 ;
copulative, 325 ; » F >
«!/,«. 22.), 117,267.3.

JLyetiiu cp., 1 60.

•y^iXXw, ^ 41 : 217,

myu^v^ cj., 268. [277. «.

«yii^»«f, ^17 98,

iyvCfM^ c)., 294.

16:t, « ; w. gen., 394.
iy,, q.. 194. N., 236.

e\ &yt, 613. 3.
M}mx(»s, dec., 136. «.
'dhis in der., 310. a.
"Ajitis, dec., 1 24. «.
£ii»0f, ^ 17: 1 30.
ptt < iiiit^, cj., 260.
it/^u > «7^«#, cj., 268.
-it^M in der., 3 1 8 f
^n^y, dec., 123. «.
ln/irrAr, (^., 275. «.
Anfu, JUea, <^ 288. •

*i added in 2. aor., 299.

•A^«»i»ri, 32». 2, 421./5.

«u, elided, 41 ; <^ ««, ct,
45. 5,S6, 132.2; >#
in aogm., 188. 2 ; conn,
vow., 205 ; final in ac-
cent, 723. R.

mlit/tmty 'Ufuttf g. 288.

m:i^s,i\4: 112f, 115.«.

.«if« in der., 311.

.«/»« in der., 3 1 8. b.

.75, 1 11 : 101.

.«;««, a^'. in, 138. 3.

tctm-vf, dec, 136. 3.

ai^'utt cj., 301.

i22, 5 109, 132.
mi^^avofucty .B-gfiai, CJ. ,

289 ; w. gen., 375. fi ;

w. dependent verb, 614,

633. [162.

»i^X^'^f* 't**f^ <Vm 159,
tttrimoftmtf et7ri0f, W. gen.,

374, 393.
Atv, 288 ; aogm., 1 89. 4.
«««;^<^«, cj., 286.
.«xi(, adv. in, 139, 321.
k»fA^9y adv. ace, 320, 440.
itft4X»uf»tj w. gen., 389.

R. ; w. dat., 399.
•«»«(, -ai«0f , in der., 315.
«»«M>, cj., 269. 7 ; w.

gen. and ace, 377, 380.

«E ; 18 pass., 556 ; w.

part., 633.
!»(«;, use, 456.
dkyufit, cp,, 160

»Xyvft, oj., 270.
«x)ai*w, .)«^«i, cjf 291.
aXu(pct, cj., 269.
«Xf|a«, cj., 273. /}.
-«Xi0{ in der., 315, fl
cXivM, g., 264.
«x;«)«, .U, cj., 288.
aXUxofiat, cj., 301. 1,

556 ; w. gen., 374. y.
eiXtrecifit •r^aittt, CJ., 291 *
aX»afiufy 2 aor., '299.
«XX« X sfXXA, 722. a ;

introd., 661. a; cXXA

y«^, 661. 2 ; «XX' 1^

671.2.
aXXtfrr^, cj., 274. ^
«XXifX«», 5 23 145.
SkkafAmt, cj., 277. «.
«XX»f, dec, 97. 2, 154 ;

use, 540f ; w. gen., 349;

as adv., 457. • ; X J

ixXtff, 456, 488. 5;

4SXX0 Ti ^, «XX« rt, 541.

b ; &XX9< <SXX«», 542.
aXXi^f rft xmij 671. 3.
«X*, dec, 105.
«Xi/rxw, cj. 273. «.
»X<pei*ott cj., 289.
aX«sr>i|, dec, 101. /S.
«X»<, dec, 124. y.
aftecy w. dat., 399 ; W.

part., 616. a.
afMM^rtifi0y CJ., 289.
«^i3x/r»«, ^*r, cj., 280.
d/Ativetff oompt., 160.
d/ini(My -f^^, g., 282.
«f^»;f, ^ 12: 106. 1. .

Digitized

by Google

442

GREEK INDEX.

mfAKtix^i cJm 300.

«]i««'X«»<r»M, g^ 296.

mfntnvMy qj.y 264.

i/AWM, cj., 299.

MfA^ij const, 648 ; •/
ifi^if 466. N. ; «^^2
r« i?x«ri, 480. 2.

mfApivtVfUy g., 293.

4iu^*r, 5 21 : 137. y.

mt added to r., 289 f.

.«v Dor. for ^», 95. /3.

4f» conjunct., -< ic», 603 ;
X &9 contingent, 588.

it contingent, 587 f; af-
fixed, 3^8 ; expr. habit,
594 ; w. opt. for ind.,
595 ; not w. opt. of
wish, 600. 3; m con
dosions, 603 f. ; w. opt.
expr. permission or com-
mand, 604. b ; in rel.
daoses, 606 ; w. inf. and
part., 615. 2; poe., 673.
«, 674. 4,616.6; omit-
ted, 605. 4, 606. a; re-
peated, 667.

«v«, const., 648 ; sc ern-
fiif 653. t, 730 ; w. num.,
137. 1.

»fecSuir»«fiUUf cj., 280. y.

ifttxZs Jf;(^«, w. gen., 37 6. J.

«y«XiVx«, -«M, cj., 280.

ivetfjtifivn^jctj w. acc. and
gen., w. 2 acc., 430.

Si,<tl, 5 11 : 102. «.

ivBLvrnctt ifcwuMf CJ., 264.

iylecttt^ cj., 290.

ti9i^0fiuci, cj., 301. 2.

&vivy w. gen., 347.

utn(, 1 12 : 106; Ivi^,
742 ; in address, 443 ;
eitn^t 'I'^^it 39.

ir^* tSvj becatuCf 530.

«y«iy*>, -tVftif cj., 294.

«i>t/, const., 648 ; deriva-
tives, w. gen., 394 ; w.
dat., 405. C.

•vv«, 'Vraty Afot, g., 272.
jS, 246. « ; Jhu^tct as
adv., 457. y, 632.

IfA*, cp., 161. 2, 163 ;
w. gen., 394. j

<»«^«,<^., 191.3, 238. /S.

dwyMv,^ 9: 98, 726. /5.
-«| in der., 313.
Ml^ttff w. gen.,. 374. fi ; w.
dat, 404. 1.
•A« >^ -l*r, ^ -«v, 95. 3.
««'«r«^, neat pi. 130. /3.

AfTAt/^dMr, cj., 296.

•ff-ic^fVjMtf, cj., 296.
•«-ft^^«», ^ 57 : 227, 285.
mvrix^t/uu, -au/uu, cj.,

289.
•«'X««r, -wf, ^ 25. 4;

q)., 156. b. [562.

««-«, const, 648; w.pass.,
A'^a'ht^fAmt, 9dl, 285, 558.
'A«'«A.Xmv, dec, 105. B.,

107, N., 742.
dv-ix^n, 284.^5.
^••TAJ, qj., 272.
ie«> ite, 48. 2; pes.,

673. • ; il^y'as pres., 567.
«^«^iV»M, <3., 285. [y.
^«f, ^ 22: 109, 132,
M^ftrjMf, q., 279. [268.
"A^fis, dec, 114. N., 116.
ei^4frect, pf., 238. •. [a.
&^t^rty superL, 1 60.
i^/Ao^Mt -rr^, cj., 275. «.
<^^V0;, 4 12 : 106. I.
^(is in der., 314. h.
«^0«, cj., 219.
«^«'«^w, g., 276.

1 30. « ; cp., 1 58.
%V. 1 17 : 105. 1.
ei^X^*i '^^' ^^^* ^'^^*
aeA;** <d-. 222 ; w. gen.,

350 ; p(X*f***^f ^ ^^^*>

632.
.cf in der., 1 39, 308, 314.
f^a-t* < dt^rmt 260.
Afrii^, •r^«r«, 59. 7.
;frTi;, ^,14: 113.2.

60, 213. 2,248./.
&rtcf = 7ri^«f, 39. N. 2.
•ArXaf. dec, 109. 1.
*Aritihfif,^T. 92^310.

1 24 : 152£
«v >- nv in augm., 188. 2.
«?, ff?^4f, pos., 673. ji.
•o|*r,.«»«,Y43: 222,289.

mtfTtxa, w. part, 616. «.

«^r«r, t 24. 149 ; com
poimda, 144, 150; cp.,
261. 2 ; w. dat of as-
soc obj., 418. R.; w
oompt and supert, 464
use, 508f ; as pers.proB.
5 1 0*. « ; « «vr«f, theaame,
508. n.; w. dat, 400;
muT0iUfU9, 51 0 ; ^immrt
mir^t, 511.5. [144

MVTtu -^ Itufrauy ^ 23

&X:^9fuu, g., 222. m.

&^»fuut -9VfuUt <U*> 286.

-5;ce'(^)»67;w.gen..S94

if;^^i «J, 530.

«4v in dor., S18C.
£m, 6reatAe, «<«, mt^^stj <).,

288.
£«, Mtuzfe, cjn 298. [3.
.A4W, >• -i**i», -«», -aff , 95.
/5,1 3: 49.2; /a#>if,

51; /Jr>«-r, ^>f/,

52 ; ^A* > A»A*. 53 ; /i«

/•CX, /5X, 64. 2.
iSciV cj., 278 ; Km9, 1 57 :

227 ; /3&for/3«/<,210.K.
iS«XX«, g., 223, 277. m,
^9rre*, cj., 272.
^etrtXUs (sc i), 485. • |

cp., ^61. 2.
)3«r»« = ^«/»«r, 278.
j3iXr/*>y, &C, 160.
fiiC^m^Mmj CJm 285; /k«

C^r, 238. «.
fitotfy -MfM»fMUt g., 280
^X«^, cp., 158. «.
fikdtrrat, CJ., 272.
fikasTMm, -!«, CJ., 289.

fikir^atj cj., 275. «.

j/jXj^r**, cj., 281. ^

^^^j, If 7 : 94, 96. m.

^i^xm, g. 222. I.

^tuXtvoty ^ 34 f ; trans-
lated, ^ 33 ; iUttXtimt
^ 22: 109, 132.

^vX»/tm4t g^ 222. 2 ; 1M^
526. y, 583, 611. 3.

iS«c;*, If 14: 112i; 117.

fi^aiuf, cp., 159. s.

fifirtttt dec, 123./k

Digitized

by Google

GREBX INDEX.

4M

/ImU, AvU, g^ 292.

y, doable office, f 3 : 49.

y4(x«, dec., 103. N.

ym/»Ut, <g^ 288.

yii^, w. art, 490 ; in

epedficatioii, 656, b ; in-

trod., 661. N. ; pot.,

673. «.
/mtr^ft dec, 106. 2, /i.
>4, affixed, 328 ; poe.,

673. m ; encL, 732.
ytytAm, ^V««, g., 296.
ytX^tf, g., 219. «.
yiXwf, dec, 104.
yk^mt, \ 14: IMfl
^iMw, w. aoc and gen., w.

2 ace, 430.
yif^, -rjM^, <^., 279.
,ytym%, ^ 13 : 109.
yiytftM^ 74M^MU,qj., 286,

338. • ; w. dat., 408 ;

w. part., 637.
yty^9»m^ yi94twum, <g.,

285 ; iyfut, 557:224.

2, 227 ; w. part, and inf.,

633, 634. /i.
yX^X*^* d^f 107. N.
TXmit, 1 16: 126.2.
yX«;rr«, t 7 : 92. 1.
yUff g., 287.
yif»j dec, 123. y.
r«f>% -^9, dec, 123. «.
y^, ^ 14: 84. «, 114,

117, 121./.
y^^^ If 36: 217 ; nae

in mid., 558, 559. d.
ywm, dec, 101. y^ 63,

742.
yi^,^ 11 : 831; lOK
r«C«^,57 9'f.Nn96.ii.
>. 1 3 : >r > rr, ^ >

W, 52; V>r/»53;)

ttfopped before r, 55 ;

bet*, 61; inserted, 64.

2 ; in r., 273, 282.
^ in declension, 117f.
^ ady. in, 321. b.
lm%^ TOC, 732.
%miin»m, Alt , 285.

^«{cMw,Y 12: 105.1,57.4.

laiiDfUy <^., 295.

^mUfuUf C|j., 267. 2.

^«M», cj., 267. 3.

^ii»MM, <^., 277. /S. [87.

liK»^«», -^», dec, 1 24. /3,

)«^^M, -I^M, -mU«, -mi/m,
g., 298.

Uf^^,^\S'. 109. y.

^ii*», qj., 289.

^i, conjunct, and adv^
657.9^; i ^ 490; fer
yi^t ^66 ; introd., 661.
N. ; pos., 673. «•

^1, insep. particle, 150,
322, 648. ) ; accent,
732. d.

htiat, q}., 282; )t>M»«,
^f^M, Y 58 : 237.

^;»»0m^ Y 5S : 225, 294.

)trv«,Y 23: 146.

^Kvn^iw, pf., 238. «.

)iXf«^ dec, 104. N.

^tX^if, •») dec, 105. 3, «.

^•^•f, dipt., 1 27 ; in pe-
riphrasis, 385. ).

)|y)^«9, ^«9, dec, 124. /3.

^i^»«/MM, C!)., 259.

li^tt, g., 259.

)ir/Mr, dec, 125. «.

)fr«'«r«, YOC, 742.

)j;^«/MM, .»»/MM, <^., 294.

yu,,bind,i^.,2\9, 284.

)i«, iwmI, g*., 222. 3, y ;
pt w. num., 140. /3 ; ^
impers., w. gen., 357 ;
w. aoc, 430. R. ; w. inf.,
583 ; fuM^Mt [^iTv], &C,
623 ; tufuu, w. gen.,
357. N.

K W«rfl affixed, 328;
H ^«^<»> ^iH**, pos., 673.
«.

^Xif t/^ 551, 634. 7;
^X«»7t», 671.4.

^x;«», t47: 216. 218<

ilnfAnm^, dec, 106, 742.

)niiM#. 1 9 : 726. 5.

4if», ady.in, 321.b.

^li, const, 648.

^MMr^w, pret, 192. 4.

226.4.

^i^irxM, <^., 285.

^^^n^i«, 284.

)i^^rsM, <^., 285 ; Ufm^,
\ 57 ; 227.

tthtfu, t 51 : 201. S»
224 f., 284; >«^, ^ 22^

^iXA'j.fr^MM, cj., 288, 224.3*

)/»«Mf iZ/M, w. inf., 551*

^MVf, dec, 126. 2.

%t«'>.i0i$( w. gen., 352.

Wxw, -Mv, f 18 : S3./i|
138. 4.

^/rtfvr, T17: ISa y.

^<<^«M, contr., 33. m,

)/m, .4/mm, qf., 282.

^mnm^ g., 298 ; w gCD.^
374. y,

)«»$«», g., 288 ; ISI^
rtwrm, 638.

4m, adv. in, 321. b.

}i^¥,^\6: 123. 9^

>.^, ^22, ^51: 109.%
132.

^^mfuSfuu, Art., 301* 5.

)(iiM, ins. of r, 221. «•

^(iiCM, g., 259. ,

^^virrM, g., 272.

^vf»fuiit angm., 189. 1.

}vttt, ^vtf, ^., 278 ; Um^
If 57: 227, ^^, 1f22:
109, 132.

);#, )iW, 1f21 : 137. yw

^»fuuf g., 270. 8.

^vr-, 325 ; angm., 193.

t^^tXif, ^3: 22. •,24;
• X «. 24 ; !>#,»,%
i», 28, 44.3, lllf, 1181
259. b; I > II, 44. 4,
203. «, 206. /S, 242. b;
11 > trend m, 29. «, 36^
44.4;.<r,50;l<r,
300 ; contr. w. othei
▼owds, 32 f; ins. aftei
contr., 35, 98. /3; bj
Ion., 48. 1, 120. 2,242.
a ; sign of plor., 83, 1 72 ;
charact., changed, 1 lOf ;
comLTOw.inpron., 141;
in qf., 175, 203f; in
angm., 173, 187f ; in
redapL, 190f; ins. ia
opt, 184 ; in Alt, 90a 3,
245.2; bsfiireoloseaftt

Digitized

by Google

6Bm I1I91Z.

SS8. m; ih«ngti in r^
959,298, 27aiOi>«
in 8 pf^ 836 ; added to
r^ 287f; «• in plofK,
179,803. N.; •F>Mi,

.i,ii,»,8a.>, 117, 121.3,
880, 2«4. [•;, 603.

U«, «QmpM., > 4»» is X

l«e, doc, 108. N.

A44; vtei 604f; ftn*
other [Nronoani, 506 £

U*s <j., 189. 3, 818.

fCiff, Sie $mfm,

lyyvtt cp^ 163. ^; i
gin*, 394.

|^«««, see ytymgrnf,
iyX^X^tt deo^ 119. 2.
iyA 1 83. 141 f; nae,
508 f} f7«»9^, 733. d.

Urn, qj., 298, 246. ^

V:»mh ^^ 275. c.

Uia4S <Vh 288. 8; \
inf., 583.

I^iv for «^ t 23 : 142.3.

Uilmy ^., 297.

•^<M, 29.•,36;>lrr,
46 ; in 8 pera., 37. 4 ; in
augm., 189. 3; in re-
dnpL, 191; eonnect. vow.
q£ pli^., 179, 203; >
ii, 236 ; urn in opt., 184.
«,205. 3.

-^ ady. in, 321.

V\ prodit, 731 ; •/ y4f,
ilh, cl, 597, 599 f, 625.
/8 ; •; X li«^ 603 ; w.
satg., 603. g ; i7r«f,663
6 ; %l ft^ W, 667. 8 ; f,
)t, 11^^^663.6,671.6.

M«s in der., 308. a, 31 1

t1i$fMHj tJi»9, q}., 301. 4 ;
**^f» 122, ^58: 112.
4, 132. 1, 801. 4; I^,
613.3,747.0.

ifi^i, 738. i; aee li.

•T»« 9s fM»iv 273. «.

i;M«^«f, 188. N., 273.4

ifti»r#(0, 5 25 : 66. «.

c^Mp, d^ igS. 3, 299.

•fiM^deo., 183. 19. I

Jkn, 8 aor., 901. I.

i7Xm, g., 268.

I V, te, 5 55 : 230 ; diaL
252;eiKl,732; X <^
728. «; w. gen., S64f;
384 ; w.dat., 408 ; omit-
ted, 547, 634, «, 6i9. 2 ;
aozil., 637 ; frro vl^
3^^StC.,32S; frrt,;*,
w. pL nom., 549. k ; fi9
as aor., 576. 5 ; iImm w.
verbs ef naming^ &c.,
434. N^} as int of spe-
cif., 628. N.

4iM, po,^56:23l ; diaL,
258. 7; as ftit., 231,
301.3; ufor3yi^2iaN.

i!|«M, 873. «.

i7«'«f, ^^ SS: 901.7;
ilri,61S.3,747««.

t1(YfOfth ^(y^, g*. 294,
299.

i3|»«^Mu, .^riiv, ^., 298.

•7#, 1 21 : 105. I, 187;
▼. gen., 362. 7$ w.di^,
400; w. siqieii, 462. >r.

•Kf, adj. in, 56. 4, 5, 8 1 5. £

tit, Is, der. and oonstr.,
648, 659. « ;. w. num.,
137. f ; prodit., 731
t!s Ui,4S, 65\.t

ltr»m, cj., 273. «.

iVm, if Mi w. gen., 394;
aec, 657. «.

i7«»^ cj., 236. c, 297.

U<i5,68. I,i8.

Uif, q>., 1 63.

Ui^vcf, 97. 2, 150; Itui-
y«r/, 150. y ', use, 512,

U»Xi»rii{M, pref, 19i. 4.

U«y iTmm, 623. «.

ika^e-if, 'TTe*9, cp., 160;

lAarrtv, asindeo., 450. t.
iXaupM, U«M, cj., 278.
IXaxve, cp., 160, 161. 1.
Iktiftfim, fat., 301 . 3.
IXnkty^Mu, ^ 44 : 217. y.
7x»w, -xi«>, cj.. 298.
tkfU9s, dec, 58. /S.
Uv-Z^w, -ff'd^MM, qj., 297.
lf*m»T0u, 5 23: 144; use,

504.

503.

fit, 142. 1, 502.

ifAirsimh 322.

i», in compos., 68. 3 ; pre-
clit., 731 ; v.dat.,648;
for tiV, 659. ^ ; i» m«
V. tfoperl., 462. 0 ; Sr
f, 530; iv^^S./S^; !■
ibr 7»tr«, 653. t, 730,
Imm, -Tt, 523. a.

}4«#i» for fv^M, ($59. y.
Ii>iy»i7», 2. aor., 301. 6.
I»iM, w. gea., 378. y,

pos., 674.
|y/fl^v, g., 273. ••
tv9Vf$s, cj., 893.
U^Ui, preH, 192. S.
15 > U, 68. 1 ; prooUL,

730; cp., Kl. 2; ▼,

pass., 562; w.gen.,648s

fbr It, 659. « ; i^ Utuk

530.
i|«i^MK w. part., 616. «.
S|«^f w. aec, 484. L
i^» absolute, 638.
.Mf in der., 315. c
7mm, cjn 27.'$. m, 238.11;

const., 615; tny/uH

238. /a.
i«^»^», augm., 189. 5.
lirmufiextfuu, 1^ 296.
t^n^tc*, f^., 274. I.
Wt, const., 648 ; w. anm.,

137. •; posn GS'i. 1.
lff'/»X«v, monepL, 1 27.
\^t93^nffttt9, cp., 158. /I.
Ifri/«(X«^MM, .f«yH«M,<9.,288

w. gen., 376. X
i'ri0^T»f4Mt, (Hnrf., 192. 3.
Mxtt^Ki cp. l.iS.
iff'«;^i$^M« w. gen., 391 •.
l^r^Mftn*, «ee w^lmHtu
Wr'trtis, -Tit, 134. /}.
Ifnw, g., 300.
\fyml^1»mt, aogiB., 169.3.
t^im, cj., 276.
iftUt, cj., 269.
i^f/vM, cj., 269.
Ifnrtftwt, fut, 298.
•E^^MM, HM, 1 7 1 94.

Digitized

by Google

immm*

4^

Xfirttt aagm^ 189. 9.
1^, g., 222. 1.
IffstfftWH, q>., 156, y,
X^vyytLvm, CJ., 290.
* l(M», nade forma, 246. tu
Ux^f^** <a» 301. 3, 238.

/3 ; w. Alt .part, 637 ;

U/i ozyt, 747. c
l^iS, ireii»«,t53S0U7
s^«f, dec., 104.
i^Afr^iw, q)., 298.
Utitty Ui»»t <3., 298.
Irrii^M, aogm., 189. 3.
irr«f, \ 22, ^ 48 : 131.

/S, 237.
Xwx'^'^ty CP«» 161. 1, 2.
trMJMf, cm 161. 2.
Mr •< M, MIV &C., 45. S,

121. o, 142. e, 243.
f^, angia., &C., 193.
tifytm, dec, 133. /i.
«vi«, qj., 222. 3.
*vii($\ 67. 2; w.

373; w. part, 616. a.
*v^ir»m^ q^ 296; le^s,

oxyt, 747. c
\u$j n^iy dec, 136. 3.

%v$ in der., 306. c, 309.
•^;t«e«, t 17: 102f.
.»v« Id der., 318.
l^'f^Wf ri, 530; w.

inf., 628.
^xU*f* <?•» 1^9* [398.

i;j;/«s -«/<f^ -e«"»*» ^a-j

Y;^«'i<^->800; augni.,189.

3 ; w. adv., 555. a ; and

gen., 363. /3 ; auxil.,

637 ; \x^ fXw^^iTf,
t^»», g., 222. [632. N.
.u#, -itft, Ion. gen., 95 1
-U in der., 318.
XmPf dec, 123. y.
F, ilf; in dec. 117; in

q}., 220, 264, 267. 3 ;

idgn oi pen., 143.
t T 3 : 51. N. ; > w,

70. 1 ; > rl, tt, ^ 70.

T.; inr., 273 £; 282.
C>M», cj., 280. 7, 33. •.
J^ivyit^fu, <^., 294.
ZMf, Ziif, t 16t 123. y.
C»9^, Cn^> dfl^H 125.A.

;^,dec, 185.

•, T 3 : 24 ; X I, 24 ;
IoiIh 44. 1 ; > m, 29,
37. 2; oontr. 31 f; in
plnp., 203. N. ; in anlg.,
204 ; ins., 222.

-« in der., 305. b.

4; w. compt, 461, 463 f
omitted, 461. a ; pleo-
nastic, 461, c ; 4 ««r«,
4«'e«r,<i^»j}«'rf,463;
JS •», 666. ^.

i^y?,, 491. R. [JJOI.N,

S^M, S 58 : 203. K., 237,

«)«(, monopt, 127.

AJiJr, IT 19: 112^ 117.
N., 132. 1 ; op.^ 159.

4)««, '•fuu, cj., 29a

j|f»irr««, si^mtL, 160.

|m», w. adv. and gen.,
363. /3; asperf.,579.C

AxiMr, V 63 ; in oondens.,
529.

;rM«i, V 59 : "275. ?.

iifut^ dec, 103. N.

fi^/ for ^/»4 228.

11^^ use of oompoonds,
140. y.

H* < U^ 6as.

^VtyjUB, ^VfyJK*!^ 301. 6.

^ff-*^, V 11 : 103.
*H^»Xw, V 14: 115.

A, 121.4.
4^1^ cp. 161. 2.
iie<yfM»rf -Hm, 134. ^
Jf^i, IT 14: 114. A
-nf ^'Ut'm nom., 37. 2.
-fif in form., 3^.
ifrrAry, ^r^*, COmpt, 160.
i^»X»h ^» * 56. y.

«, 728. 2.

4«;f,dec, 123. yw

5,ir3; ;^>rr,55>
r5, 52; V>'i-.53;
d^ dropped before r, 55
before », 61 ; sign of
gen., 84; ofpers., 172;
ins. in dn. and pi., 174 ;
changes of in g., 181,
210;daddedtor.,28i;
^ annexed, 182 ; J^
^r, tense-signs. 198f ;
38

^ omitted 1 99. n.
&mknty dec, 1 24. •.
^»kkm, pf. rUnKti, 236. 2
S-afdnv, use, 874. N.
^ii«'r«f, cj., 272.
d^mfftttf •rrm9, oompty ■

159.^
d«ri^«», -tPf 39. N. 2.

rr«if Mf, 538. «.

;»f«Mr, Q., 268. [583.

;^ix«», cj., 222. 2 ; w. inf.,

BifMt, dec, 1 23. y ; 3-f/Mf
irr^, ib.

^f», gtti. in, 91» 82a 1.

^(K9'09, d^ 123. y,

^0fA»u dec, 125. «.

eir^f, dec, 119. 1.

y%m, nfn, g., 22a [732.

^ifv, pes., 673. • ; end.

:W^ir 12: 57,8.

^^«A», g., 218.

^jyyiivai, qj., 290.

^MiViM', <U^ 281, 237,
239. • ; pass, of uTtttm^
295, 556 , use of tenses,
578. y. [y.

^^«rr«f •< «w^r««, 274.

d^«M#, ins. of r, 221. «.

^^ww, (iIm 272.

^^f»m, g., 281.1.

^vy«rif^, dec, 106, 74S.

^fmy IT 7 t 93.

;^Ar, qj., 219.

S^f, IT 14: 114.2.

I, IT 3t 24f; sobsc, 25.
3 ; in oontr., 31 f; in
crasis, 38 ; sign of dat.,
82. /3, 83, 176; affixed
to demonstratives, 150.
y, 734.6; connect vow.,
177, 205; r>Taiid«
in r., 269 ; i in redupL,

-I. adv. m, 321. [283

Jtm in der., 308. a.

*U»Mif, dec, 126. 2.

.Mu» in der., 319. 1.

th%7^ 2aor., 301. 4.

.i\%it in der., 312. d.

.1%!^ -iUst in der., Sia

tiff w. gen., 391. «.

;)^ OQRtr., S44. s.

Digitized

by Google

446

IBSBK INDEX.

ti^vm, cj^ 275. {.
t^^t, dec., 104.
St^t w. gen., S9I. ••
i^ added to r., 297.
-i^^Af in der., SI 8.
IT-, ^,.s «^., 275. ?.
Tn^ 5 54: 229, 284;

itfuu w. gen., 373. 2.
'Iifr«vf, dee., 126. 2.
.!»«, adv. in, 321. 2.

292.
wx«r in der., 314, 315.
1»rtftf dec., 124. ^
iXm0»0fuu^ ^., 279.
w/««f in der., 314. c
7y«s const., 601 ; Ipm n

539.0.
wvfi in der., 310. b.
Iff in der., 315.
^•v in der., 312.
-«•« in der., 315.
4V«pf, iri4,iri6:lll^

121.3.
49'W0r^0^, rednpl., 193,
I^TMfUU, cj., 287.

t( in der., 309 f.

<r» added to r., 296

-M-««f» -ff, in der., 312. b.

rrm/a, IT 48; 224^ 284;
Urntcm, 233 f; 237;
>rw, IT 22 : 1 32. ^5 ;
#r«for rrS/i, 210. N.;
Irnj^AS 239 ; if mem X
Jrnjf, 257. A.

^^X^i cJM X l;t;*'» 300.

i;^/yf, IT 14 : 83f, 117.

ix^ifj dec, 107. N.

Jttv in der., 310. b ;
quant, 683. 3.

w«^n in der., 310. b.

»,^3:»j>$.51;«J>
y^» -^ > X^* 52; »^
>■ yfi, 53 ; changes be-
fore », 6 1 ;.»(•)> ;^.
65 ; » annexed, 66. 2 ;
» •< «•, r, 69. n. ; tense-
sign, 1 98 ; omitted, 199.

tutt*i(at, cj., 267. 2. [n.

Maiit^»fittu, g., 275. Z'

ttmhiimt pi^i 192. 3.

»^f,/Mu, IT 59 : 275. I.

•^iZm, <^., 275. i.

Ml/, crasia, 40 ; w. num.,

140; w. #Jt#«, 513. a;

for other oonnectiTes,

656 ; conj. and adv.,

657. y; KaH Uj 491;

^aXvs »tti, 655* 6 ; »ai

ydff 661. 2.
Mt'nvfuu^ <^., 295.
Mii9my cj., 267. 2.
tcMtatf aMM#, g., 267. 3*
»m*», cp., 160.
mbX/m, g., 261.
MtiXiti cp., 159.
mkXav, dec., 123. y.
m»/itf0t, cj., 223, 277. fi,
tuif/nrrtf, cj., 272; »<-

xeifikfjuu, f 44t 217. 7.
»«^c, dec., 125. /}; in

periphrasis, 385. i.
muT^ const, 648; w.

num., 137. i. ,

»i(»), 66. • ; = i(». 328,

587, 593. y ; pos., 673.

• ; encL, 732.
xM^, dec, 108. N.
Kthitt, -mtwfiu, g., 293.
ziifiutt, IT 60 : 232.
»!<(«, cj., 268.
xtJMt^v, ^#M, g., 279. i.
xixmffuu, p£, 295.
»i«^«7«, cj., 274. ), 238.
«iAii;*s g., 221. [fi,

xiXafMu, aor., 194. 3.

Xt^MWfAtt "^t <9*> ^9^*
»f^c$,4ll :104,121.«,5.
»f^^0f, cp., 261. 2.
»ii^«>, cj., 270. 9.
xi^«X«ff, const, 369. jS.
xn^vfo^ sc • »if(v|, 546.
»<y;^«i»«», cj., 290.
»iivtlfu, cj., 293.
xttiuvtvtt w. gen., 395. 0.
xi^vfifitty -dttj cj., 293.
»/f, IT 14 : 117.
xtx»*»»i -«<*. cj., 290,
*'Xi*ff**i cj., 284.
»/«f, 2 a. in ^/ay, 299.
xXdhs, dec, 124.^.
xXdl^ttf cj., 277. «.
»X<ei«, xXaat, g., 267. 3.
xXiU, IT 1 1 : 104. •
xX^m, xXpat, cj., 270. 10,
xXi^rms, cp., 161. 2.

»x{«'r«>, <^., 272.

xXUi, cj., 269.

xXvM, 2 aor., 227. y

as pass., 556.
xvc^cf, dec, 1 23. /S.
xoni$j gram, term, 7 ; w

gen., 391. «.
X0tf0tfif, dec, 124. /3.
»#^i'^«», IT 40 : 273. 2.
xM«C;^«, g., 297.

»««'«'ltf, cj., 272 ; KSiTT*

fuu, beuHolf 561. a.
xJ^xS, IT II : 101.
x9(iv9Dfiu, -im, g., 293.
x«^vrr«f, cj., 275. «.
.x«f in der., 315. b.
«f <^C«»» cj-j 238. /S, 274. 1
x^ixf, dec, 115. 1.
x^t/rrAfy, x^rirr*;, 160.
x^i^yy^/Ki, -«/MM, x^if^vA-

fMM, -ff0/EUE«, cj., 293.
x^/y«v, dec, 124. ^. [x.
x^iVAT, cj., 54. y, 56, 217.
n^v^rrtt^ g., 272.
x^v^x w. gen., 292. 1.
xrxf/MM, pf. xixrnfuuj l»«

m/uu, 191.3,234.
xrt/Mv, •vff^ MTtti^fu, g.,
xTt/f, dec, 105. 1. [295
zTvrim, cj., 288.
xoxttSv, dec, 107. N.
xvXivitf, -t«, x»X/m, C^
xwi«, g., 292. [288
xt/^M, -U*, cj., 288 ; w. gen.,

37a
xi/Mv, tr 12 : 106 ; cp.,

261. 2,
xMf, dec, 1 23. /i.
X, IT 3 ; X < f, 54, 277

X ; X0^ 56, 59.
Xoxf, Xx«, dec, 124. X.
Xxy;^xw, g., 290; w.

gen., 370.
Xxydisj dec, 123. y.
XxitfiuUf -tf/EMM, cj., 290.
Xx^fx w. gen., 392. 1.
XdXoSt cp., 156. y,
Xx^CxMw, cj., 290; XxC

oxyt, 747. e,
XifA^m^ cj., 222.
Xx»^x»M, qj., 290; witk

part., 633
Xd0xm^ <j., 273. ••

Digitized

by Google

GREEK INIHUC.

4^

Xiytf,pt., 191, 236.0.

XiiVas V 37: 217, 236
1, 246. /3, 290; Xu9'»-
fuitf w. gen., 349. B.

xUff, t 13 : 109.

XtX^UfAmtf X««f, cj., 286.

x;^ll^1^12: 105.1,57.4,

XtfATtivm = XtAr«, 290.

X/Vft, monopt, 127.

X/fl-t^y, t 22, 5 37 : 109,
132, 747. b,

Xiyt, t 9 : 86.

.X«f in der., 31 5f.

A.M/M, cj., 260.

Xv»tt 2 aor., 227. y,

Xfttf, Xij!fr»f, IfiO.

«, IT 3; changes before,

53, ^X>/5X,64.N.;

lignof Ipen., 143, 171;

changes of in qj., 181,

209.
^, X wi, w. ace, 42^. I;

ftii riv — ^ 484.
./M in der., 306. 2.
^yaiiff dec, 119. 2.
fuitut^f 'tuufrnj 134. ^.
/utK^tf, cp., 1 59. u
fUxm^ cp., 1 63. • ; /trnX

X»v, fiiXtrrm in cp., 460 ;

ftMXX»9 omitted, 653. 5.
fuixntt monopt., 127.
futviavtt, cJ., 290 ; ri fik»

ittt I 631. N. ; w. part

and inf., 634. /3.
fUffMUi ftmUftm^ g., 278.
fU^^rm, q., 272.
fid^Tvt, dec, 1 23. y.
M«r»«f, dec, 126. 2.
fiMX9/uu^ cj., 222. «.
^iy««, V 20 . 135 ; cp.,

169;^i'C«^iri7:107
utiv^itm, -Mtf, q., 279,

319. 2.
^t/^«/i4ti, cj., 268; 191.1
futitn^ cp., 160 ; /»i7m

as indecL, 450. X
^X«f, IT 19: 105. 2,

132. 2; cp., 158. •.
^Ui, monopt, 127.
^iXi, dec, 103. N.
mUXm, <j., 222. 1 ; w.

inf:,58d.

/%Xm, q}., 222. 2, 261 ;

ft.ix%t impers., w. gen.,

376. ) ; w. dat, 407. $,
ftiftwrn, fufuuiff 238. •
fiif, w. srUy 490; ptity

fiitrpi, ftn», pos., 673. a.
fAtft, cj., 222. 2, 286.
/itff^n^ilm, cj., 276.
■fitff Dor. for -/uiy, 70. 3.
fiUa-»f, cp., 156. c, ^ ; use,
^iri, const, 648. [456.
^fr«|v, w. gen., 394;

w. part, 616. a.
ftirtfTi w. gen., 364 ; w.

dat., 408.
f*iX(<f\ 67; w. gen.,

394 ; connective, 657. y ;

^^A^e' '^j 530,
^, w. sabj. and imp.,

598,^ final, 601 f

words of fear, 602. 2, 3 ;

X «v, 647 ; rednnd.,

664 f ; fifiii empbat, 664<

y; fth §v, 666; fin ri

y%, 671. 8 ; fi^ trt,

Um, 671. 12.
fiiM$^ 137. /3 ; f^nlU as

indecl., 450. %,
ftn»A»fMt$j (j., 287. «.
ft,9i»%rt -^ fin fri, 68. «.
Mnrcf, dec, 126. 2.
f<fi*if, dec, 119. 1.
fAnrn^y IT 12 : 106. 2.
fAnr^tf, dec, 124. y,

fAt, verbs m, IT 48f . 208.

2, 224 f.
fMimt x**C*ft 379. >.
fAty^Vfih f**^y^ <Uv 294.^
^ij»(«^, cp., 160; fM»^Mf

(to), 623.

fuftf^f»»t, cj., 285 ; A*i

A«»i}/iaM, 191.3, 233f;
w. gen., 376 ; w. part
and inf., 634. C.

fiifet»t, -«^«, cj. 286.
fitity ace, V 23 : 142. S,

143. y ; use, 507 ;

end., 732.
Miy«f, d6c, 124. y,
^*iU, ^vS, IT 7 : 94.
ftvd»fiimi, cj., 285.
fAtXw/Amtt fiit, 281. ).
^<«f, V 9 : 726. 3.

.^•f in der., 305. f.

fii^v9, dec, 105. «.

^•v, ^1, fnif enclit, 732 ,
X ift^ &c, 142. 1,
502 ; fMi ins., 410. N.

fAux»$fAeuy cj., 287. %
236. 2.

fAu»nt, dec, 124. «.

f*Vft»i X fAV^Uty 137. ^.

-^iMtff in der., 314. d.

V* V 3 ; > «, 50 ; changes
of, 54 ; changes of y^,
56^ 105, 109; », final
cons., 63 ; paragogio,
66, 211. N.; inb and
rvv, 68. 3 ; sign of pL,
83,172, 177; of object,
84, 87, 176; dropped
and changed in r., 217;
added to r., 271, 277f;
ins. inr., 278. ^, 289 f.

y«<, X A^c, w. ace, 426. 2.

Mtjw, cj., 267.

yc«f,M«?,ir9: 98,728.1.

^mZt, ^ 14, IT 16: 34. «,
14, 117, 121. 6.

9ttvTns» IT 7 : 92 f.

M added to r., 292.

nmrf, snperL, 156. I.

Afut, cj., 222. 2.

tu», cj., 220, 282.

n^t, IT 9 98, 728. 1.

yif, X ^. w. acc, 426. }•

yif. privative, 825. a.

M»V*, wW, cj., 282.

»«^«», fi^rit cj., 275. 5.

M»««f, w. 2 acc, 433, 435.

fiy, acc, IT 23 : 142. 5,
143. y ; nse^ 507 ; end,
732

MAi/t«^, w. dat., 419. N.

>Mf , 9wsy IT 9 : 98, 728. 1.

.Mf in der., 314, 315.

»#ir^/i», -/^•», w. gen., 347

vv, added tor., 293 A*

vv(v), 66. at ; pos., 673.
tt ; encL, 732.
tii, dec, 102. «.

>«r, »ii, ^ 23: 141 f.

^ttftMm ^ vt/Mtft 287.

vA^r*;, dec, 125. •.

& ^ 3 ; < »#, y#, ;t;#,
51 ; > s, 68. 1 ; Dor.

Digitized

by Google

44»

OIB8X IKOBZ.

for r, $4&. 1.
UmPS*. it 18 : 109.

l^ ^ ^,, 648. /}.

S ^»^w, ^ 3 : 22. y, 24 ;
X •», 24; •>#i/, «, •,
44. 4, 111 f; 117, 156.
1, 203. •;««>«> and
«(i,29.«,36,44.4,244;
coDtr. w. other vowels,
92f, 45 ; conn. vow«> in
Dec n., IT 6 : 86 ; in
cj., IT 31; 175, 203f;
charaot, changed, 11 Of;
ins., 222, ^; in pf.
236; changes in r., 259,
269 ; tF > •I'. •> 22. J,
117.

i, IT 24 : 97, 147f; era-
sis, 39 ; prodit., 731 ;
X X, 722. a ; w. ga^
362, « ; early Qse, 467 f
use as art., 469 f ; use as
pron., 490 f; w. mf.,
622; i ^is ii, y^^
490 f.

4^ pron» and adv. begin-
ning w., IT 63 : 817.

•)«$«, -^fiuu, qj., 273. ^

Xi%,^2A. 150; X •St»s,
513f; = adv.,514.N.;
= t9^«;,515 \iiU\h0.y,

His, IT 9 : 744.

^0^1, IT 13 109. «.

i$vf»fiun, cj., 270.

*OW«-ti;«, IT 16: 121.8.

iZ»ff cj., 222. 1 ; w. gen.,
391. }.

-«/i>, gen. in, 91, 320.

-fl^i, dat. in, 90, 320.

HtSiUKeif 40. ^ ; const.,
530, 671. 13.

M < 9tty »if, 37. 3 ; <
M, 45. 5, 86 ; > ^ in
angm., 188. 2 ; <C » in
pf., ^36, 1 ; final in ac
cent., 723.

-M, dat in, 90. 4, 320.

•T3«, ir58 237, 301. N.;
•TJ* a^ri, 671. 4.

•<^i«f, •a(i»M, -4(y«, cj., 29 1 .

0/S/V#i.,,iri6: 123,124,
136. 2.

•oMTdf w. gAD., 891. •.

•7»«f omitted, 885. y.

•ifU^tty eg., 274. ).

-«M«, gen. m, 99. [3, y,

$7«fiuti > «:>MM, eg., 222.

«r««, IT 63 521 ; in con-
dens., 529 ; =3 Sn TM-
«vr«f, 531 ; in exclam*,
536. /3; w. in£, 628 f;
•Sf Tf, 629.

«Tf, IT 14: 114. 2, 121.
/, 741. k.

«7r^' ;)(««-•»{ 612. 1

mVt^U, augm., 189. 4,

«?#«, fat, 301. 6.

ttx'fMti, g., 222. 3 ; as
pLj 579. C; w. part,
637. [295.

iXt»0t >= SxxSfu, 246. N.,

•XiV«i, op., 160; ikty^t
X M iA/^M, 488. 5;
ikiytu {hif), 623.

iXir^«*M, .tfftAMM, cj., 291.

SxXvftij qj., 295.

«X«Xi/C4v, q|., 274. h

Ofinft^ in Homety 421. n

Sfitufi4t cj., 295.

ifAstis ufiUt const, 615*

ifM^yfu/Atj <g., 295,

«fm(, dipt, 127.

•vti^y, ^;, dec, 124. ^

itivfifttf cj., 284.

Svtftet in periphr., 385. ^.

itcfitai^u, cj., 275. ^.

«M/e«4, cj., 298.

««*-, pron. and adv. begin-
ning w., 317, 519. 2.

»r, IT 63 ; w. gen., 363 ;
interchanged, 659.

*0<rm, IT 13 : 109. 2.

flV«»f, const., 601 £ ^

d^aar, c|., 301. 4.

o^iyMy -yyCfu, CJ., 295.

«i»wf, dec, 123, y.

S^vufiUy cj., 295.

i^vvfUy red up!., 191. 2.

o^^Mfy dec, 123. 7.

h, rel., IT 24 147 (; 468;
use, as reL, 519f ; as
compJem., . 535f; w
modes, 606; »«;o;,491
R. ; Z^ fiif, H 493. R. ;
If fi4uXi4f 525. fi.

h possess., 5^24: 151
ase» 503 £ [32€

^ in der., 305, 306, 308

Uty^^^: 521; incM
dens., 529 ; w. adj. of
admiration, 538. • } w.
inf., 628 ; •«-•» as indecL,
4.50.2; asadv.,&29./S;
U»^ •», 532. N.

;«-#«, dec, 127. [728. I.

irritfy, ^vv, ^ 9 : 98,

;r0-ri$,ir24« i5s, 5)9.2-

irreg. forms, ?«•«», «r^
««-r«, tfT«#», Irciri, ^ 24
153; interchanged w.
«;, 520 ; eomplem. use,
535f; w. modes, 606,
608f ; i rt futimmy «-«
iit, 631. N.
-•tfT«f, adj. in, 138. 2.

#Tf w. modes, 606. [291.
•ri, ,not elided, 42. «;

w. supeil., 525. N. ; rs-

dund., 609 ; w. hi£ and

part, 619. N. ; repeat.

ed, 667 ; pos., 673. ^ ;

(in rii 539. a; In ft4,

671. 9.
•»<••. 29. •; <«, M,

••,36; <«F. 22.2,117.
»S, IT 23 141 f; encL,

732 ; use, 506.f.
•i>#i»,«i;C,68.2,^;X

^n, 647 ; redxmd., 664 f;

»u ftn, w. suliy. and ftit

ind., 595. 2, N., 597. I ;

•S pn/ity 616. ifr; •vH

emphat, 664. y ; cv yik(

akXtiy 671. 10 ; •»/£!».

TM 0«ji») cxx«, 67 1. 1 1 ;

•vx ^^h S^r^f, 2«'4tff, •3#»i

671. 12.
w^eis, dec, 123. ^.
•iXi/j. ir 21 137. fii

»v^i( »0r$s «v, 528. 2.
Mfx«v in Udt, 660. N.
•Z* <(•*, affixed, 328,

pos., 673. m.
»vn*tt <C «S htnmt 40. 2*

const, 530, 671. 13.
«^, 4»T«f •< •?•#, -««f

iril:88.y,1043.,74L

Digitized

by Google

OUBX INDEX.

4^

•^i(;«S Urn, (j., S83.
•Z'TH, V 24: 150; X

UirMf,512;X«^,513f;

in repetition and asient,

513. N. ; in addreas.

843. 8, 615 ; •ir^^i,

150. y.
•jr«'*<#), 67 ; XiRi, 516.
i^iXM, qj., 268.
Sip%\»$, monopt., 1 27.
•^X4r»«v«, cj., 289.
S^^m, oonstr., 601.
I4^t*at^ foU, 301. 4.
-««f in der., 318.
••, IT 3 ; w-r > >^, 61 ;

«^> A «-/>^, 52;

•V»>A*/^6S; «r»>f,

.61; «rC)>f,65;,.

>► «, 69. n. ; < f , 69.

41 ; pron. and adv. be-

ginning w. «r., IT 63 :
W»<T«» <9-> 276. [317.
«w7f, iril: 102,741.0.
vvKMT, (^., 223. 3.
WMXmtif, cp., 156. y.
«'«^«, consi., 648, 651. 9^,

652. 1 ; w. paas., 562 ;

wa^ for «riC(ircf, 653. 9,

730.
^m^Mim, piefn 192. 4.
VA^tfv, abeoL, 638.
«-«f, IT 19: 109, 132,

683. N., 738. c; w. 2

pen. imp., 613. 2 ; «r«v.

rff, w. reL, 520. a.
wA^0mt ej., 275. n.
«r«r;^«>, cj., 281. f, 238.

/3; r/ff-aAift 631. N.
VAfWtf-rw, cj., 274. y.
watrUf»mt^ CJ., 288.
w^ri^, IT 12 106, 742.
ni^r^«»X«f. iri6 121.4.
^'mrfrnj dee., 124. y.
«'«VM, ina. of r, 221. «.
«••;/•», IT 89: 217, 238.

/3, 269.

«rifM(i», oontr., 33. «.
lIu^cM^, IT 14: 116. /S.
«rti^, <dt 268. [281. t.
wiU^fuuy fat., IT 39 and
«>•»«■<«, «rtis«, (j., 298.

*i».*,282. I

«'Sx«# and deriv., w. gen.,

394 ; w. dat, 899.
«'«^«'«, pf., 236. a.
«-«»iif, 429. 1 ; cp., 157.

372. y.
«'f«'i^i, dec., 113,119. 2.
«'itr^«/Mei, pf., 297.
«'!«'«», cp., 1 58. /3.
••i^, aflixed, 328 ;- poe.,

673. « ; end., 732.
^i^imy qj., 288, 246. A<
«^^4 const, 658 ; not

elided, 42 ; as adv., 657,

730 ; M ff-f^i, 466« N.
^•i^tnfn = wiitftif»mf 285.
«-f(vr<(y), 66. «.
virrM, <rf«'r«, g., 275.5.
nrdtfBfttf -ti0tf cj., 293<
rirtfiM*, -mftMtt cj., 287.
*iu$§fuui ej., 290.
^t^ifitu^ cj., 274. X
ff-if Mr*, 2 aor., 274. X
wiiyitOfu, qj., 294 ; wnyvS-

«-«, opt., 226. 4.
r5;t;w,iri4:lll, 113f,

117. N.
«r<7t«'X«^i, <j., 284.
^•iftw^fM, qj., 284.
«-;»•», ej., 278.
tn^ftUm^t cj., 285.
w-IwTtt, viTMM, g., 286 ;

as pass., 556 ; «'itrm,

238. «.
^irttifu, -vw, <^., 293.
«-<«», fem. v-MifM, 132. 3,

134. J; cp.. 158. A.

'X«^«, ^., 274. I.
••XiuMiir) •«w> 109. 2.

«'X««-/*«, .ivy, num. in,

138. 5.
*X^0m, qj., 275. «.
«'Xi<«fy, «'Xia»y, cXirrrvr,

159 ; «rXir», 159. y;

^>Mn as inded., 450. ) ;

rXirM, ff'XtrrrM in cp.,
rXi^**, qj., 259. [460.
«'Xi0M»nir, cp., 157. R.
«XU. g., 220, 264. N.
«>Xi«f, dec., 135.
••Xiiy, w. gen., 349 ; as

connect, 657. y\ rXJ^y

•;, 663. 6.

«-Xit#4fft, cp., 161. 2.
wXww, qj., 274. y.
•<rX«0r, nun. in, 138. 4.
<rX !;»•#, qj., 270.
v-Xtfi^v, qj., 264.
«'vf«>, cj., 220, 264; w

gen., 391. ).
ff-vi;^, dec., 123. y,
viniv in periphr., 425. 5«
«-#X4f, IT 14, IT 16: 111,

2, 113f, 118, 121.
n'$Xvia»(i/(f dec., 136. 41.
wtku^-tusf dec, 136. 2.
v-tfXiyr, ^ 20 : 135 ; cp.*

159 ; w. »«/, 655. 6;

woXkti X •/ ff-iXXfi, 488.

'•^^••», cj., 288.
T«^i'^«#, qj., 297.
«•»//•#, wfi^i^ w. goi.,

347, 863. «.
«'«f^MMr, cp., 156. b.
n«rf <#*;», dec, 105. B.»

107. N.
vtftf-if, dec, 1 19. 2.
«'«r«0/MM, -t«/iMEj, g., 287.
«'#ri, w. interrog., 328 ;

•"•ri, «'«v, «vwf , &c., pos.,

673. « ; end., 732 ; X

«*•«■! I «'«i7 1 &c, IT 63

535 f.
•••ri, w-f^r;, 48 2, /i.
^irna^ fem., 136. /S.
«-#vf, IT U 102, 112. A.
••f«M/?ir20 135.
«'^rr«»ir38: 217,274.
9'^ifCvSi 136. • } fern.

«'^irCti^«, &C., 134. i ;

op., 157. 3.
r^W/tfi, IT 49 : 301. 8;

w. gen., dat. and aoc*

374. «, 399. «.
«'^iv, const., 657. N. ;

.-(^ «, 629. 2, 657. N.
v-^/m, r^/'C^t cj » 282.
•-^A, cp., 161. 2 ; const,

648 ; «-(« T«v, 492. «.
«•?•# < «•?•«•> 48. /3 ;

const, 648, 652. 1 ; vr.

pass., 562 ; as adv., 657.
«'^«r^XX«,w. gen., 39 1 X
«'^«n^«f, cp., 161. 1, 3.
r^n^ytfv, 322 ; cp., 1 6 1 . 3.
*t*H^** •^^r#«k 134. 21

Digitized

by Google

4M

OaSBK IlfBBJC.

9'(ix»**t -♦^» ^•^ ^*** ^

w^iT§tt cp., 161. 1, S.

wrti^v^Mu, <^n 295.

wTt^it^ IT 9 744.

••Tiirr^^, g., 274. y.

«'«';C^ -!♦ ^«C-» ^24. •.

irtniaiffttut g., 290.

«ri;^, dec, 124. ^.

irii i^, in wish, 600. 2.

^,ir3; aspirated* doubled,
13. 2, 690. I : ^r,
chacges << 56f, 70. 1 ;
^, final cons., 63.

/4ai.,,cp., 160.

fmv'rtt, g., 272.

/•^•», g., 276.

f'uf, qj., 264.

f^ytOffUt /40-^M, g., 294.

/ifV«»^, IT 12: 57.3.

f/yi0t, oontr., 244. a.

^iTTit, .U, hk{*», g., 288,
319. 2.

fit, IT 12 : 105. 3.

^•f in der., 315. t

fw9vv/iuy cj., 293.

r X ^ 10. 1 ; r, 10. 2.
ll.«;r>^50; > I.
300 ; r > r, Dor., 70.
2; changes of Unguals
and liquids w. r, 55 f;
68.3: ff^ rr, 70. 1;
0- dropped between two
cons., 60; final cons.,
63 ; dropped and assum-
ed, 67 ; sign of subject,
84 ; of pL, 84 ; of pers.,
143, 172 ; dropped in
g., 182, 210.8, 247. c;
tense-sign, 178, 198;
changes, 200 f; added
to r., 271, 273 f; -f,
adv. in« 321.

2 in declension, 117.

#«X«'<^«, g., 274. i ; .11,
fiC. i g'akwsyxrr.ft 546.

r«0<v, g*., 282.

r«^«, IT 17 : 112f; -tif,
-Hf, cp., 157, 162.

rjSivvi;^. g., 293.

.ri, adv. in, 321. 3.

«-fai/r«t/, rmvToVj 7 23 :
144 ; use, 504.

-^m in der., 819. 1.

n£»fuu, 4^ 264, 246. m.
1 0ii/tmin*j nom. omit., 546*
nf****, qj., 266.
rnt, dec, 123. y. {182.
^, ^^«, sign of 2 pers.,
-tf-i«, ^i$, in der., 305. a.
rTrtf, dec, 125. «.
r», added to r,, 279 ^

319. 2.
r»tUtfSfu, g., 293.
r»fXX«^ME<, Uxktitf 227.^.
rxfvvv/MM, rjMff'u^ cj.,
^mdy IT 7 : 88, 93. [288.
f»i^fu, cj., 293.
•rxtf, -0»ift,nv^ iter, form,
r^;^, dec 103. N. [249.
r^i|, dec, 123. 7.
0^o«fiuti, cj., 264.
r«f,ir24: 151; use, 503.
r«f«f, IT 18 : 131 ; 4t,

^f, cp., 156, 162.
tf-VAAf, g., 219, 221.
fwtiftf, g., 268.
r«'fi>^, cj., 222.
#«-•«#, IT 16: 121. 4.
■«-r« in der., 311. d.
^rtiifMSt dec, 125. «.
rrio^, dec, 104. N.
rriXX«, cj., 277. «.
••«»«^«», -x*^ <3'» 274. >.
rn^iAf, 'fi^xet^ -f§/t*4, g.,
rTtvrtfi, •«*«, 246. «. [296.

w/a, cj., 295.
rr^i^«f, fT^ifU0, ^Tfttfmm,

g., 259.
rv, IT 23 : 141f; UM,

502 f; r«v, #«i; ri, end.,

732; 0vyty 328; «-«;,

ins., 410. N.
0-uyyt'yftifXM, COnst., 615.
rv«dy, IT 9 87.
ri/», Ivv, in compos., 68. 3 ;

const., 648; w. num.,

137. 1.
.rt;«fi in der., 308.
0-i;v04^a, const., 615.

■^«^«, .rr*», cj., 274. X
r^«>.X*». g., 277. «.
r^i, r^iVi, #^/y, IT 23 :

141 f; use, 506f; end,

733.

rf Srt^, ^ 24 : UR^ 50f

6, 506 f.

rp^fif, cp., 156. ^

2;^tMfa MK#' «X«y jum ^
^«f, 334. 9, 413, 438
/3 ; 'Ax»/M(wx«f, 544. fi
Ihfimfixif, 549. B.

*^t, #«M», rMw, g., 282.

2«»«(i£rf((, IT 14: 111
113^743.

0if^ % 11 : 103.

m, dec, 135.

r^rf^. voc, 105. R., 742.

ett(p^v9j cp., 158.
•, IT 3 ; rr > rr, W >
r^, 52 ; r^ > r^ 53 ;
dropped before r, 55;
bef. », 61 ; rr ■< rr,
70. 1 ; r in nent. Un-
guals, 103; signof pere.,
143,147, 171; cfaaogv
of in cj., 181, 211 ;
added tor., 271 f; pvon.
and adv. beginning w.»
IT 63: 317.

TtiXaSf cp., 1 58.

r<^ == ly^ 477. fi.

Tmfiumf, IT 7 : 86, 93.

r«», monopt., 127.

va^me^m^ CJ., 274. y.

T«^r«^«f, dec, 125. «

TMwtt^ rir^m, <^n 274. >

Ttthrvt^ rmurij 97. N.

r«;^vf , -M»f , cp., 1 59, 1 62

TMaist ^v, dec, 124. y,

rtj afiixed, 328 ; pot
673. m, ; encL, 732.

-n, adv. in, 321. 2.

n«y«>, cj., 268; 217. «.

•rt<(« in der., 306. N.

rti>:««, IT 14: 113. 2,
115. 1.

rtXturZ^, as adv., 457. •
632.

nXf«, q}., 219, 221.

riXH, adv. ace, 440.

rS/K*w, rapLitt*^ g., 277. ^
rt««, verbal in, 314 w
dat., 407. »; const., 642 i

rt^f, dec, 104.

ri^lf^ dec, 132. 2.

rirr«^i«t rirr«^f, Y 21
137 { rMfMrv^t^ 65. H

Digitized

by Google

OREEK INDEX.

461

rtr^«iM», eg., 285.
Tiix»», cj., 270. 9.
ni»«s cj., 266.

150,516. [308,309.

Tfi^, -rut, in der., 306,
^n^tn in der^ 307.
-TV (tot in der., 314. b.
riV^if, dec, 119. 2.
r<Vif^,Y50: 224 ( 284.
TtHT^f g., 272. j3.
r<^«, i 45 : 216, 218 ;

ri/itu09f ^ 22.
«^n', 5 7 : 93, 744.
Tifi,nust Ti/uHt^ 109. 2.
TiW, ^., 278.
T>f, indcf.,^t 24: 105./^

152f ; end., 732 ; irreg.

formSa rtv, r^ irray

152, 153. «; affixed,

828 ; use, 517f ; w. 2

pen. imp., 613. 2; ri

as indecL, 450. X
v'/r, interrog., f 24 : 152.

2 ;729. £.;Q8e,535f;

w. art, 480. • ; in con

dens., 528. 1 ; rl ydf

Ti ^ % Ac, 539. 1 ; Tt

Xt^uf I 585 ; Ti •Sf #v ;

Ti §S I as imp., 597. 3.
'Tig in der., 306. N., 309,

311.
nr^^matf rfM», (j., 285.
nr6f»9fuuf ij^ 285.
r^d, q., 218, 278.
TXn^fuUf rirXnmM, 301.

2, 238. «.
«-iy^«i»«}W,492; r«

nv iTvcM, 623. fii CM,

w, 148. N. [a,

T#i, end, 732 ; pos., 673.
T§t«!vr§tt rm^ht, \ 63

97. N., 150,516.
r^^iAf, .1^ qj., 285.
-r«f in der., 138, 305,

314; verbal in, w. dat,

407. ».
TM-«vr«f, T»r«r^f, ^ 24,

^63. 97. N.. 150,516.
•T(» in der., 307. b.
r^iTj, 1 21 : 137.
«'{•«'«>, qj., 259.
r^lfir, <j., 263.

«'e«;t;'-»cj., 301. 5. [N
-r^iflc, -r^if in der., 306.
T^MxavrtuTfit, 'Ttgf 1 34; fi,
r^;/3*s cj., 269. [728. 3.
Tf^^ifiSf^ 14: 112, 115,
r^iVtff/;, dec, 136. 2.
TfivtfnfitrdktifTtft 140.y.
•r^n in der., 307. b.
T^o^ti, dec, 119. 1 .
T(v»t, r^vx*h <3»» 282.
T^atyt, cj., 267. 3.
Twy;^****, g., 290 ; w.

gen., 370, 380. a ; w.

part., 633,
ttnimZrdty ^ 63 : 150. «.
rv«>r«, qj., 272.
Tu^riSy dec, 119. 2.
rp^ftr, cj.. 270.
Tvtpmti dec, 1 24. y,
rSf, therefore^ 492. /3.
-r0t^ in der., 306. b.
S^J^tXit, ^3 : 22.«, 24f;

V init, aspir., 13. 1 ;

contr., 34, 36 ; w < F,

50 ; ir > p and t» in r.,

270.
vC^/r4-n#, cp., 157. R.
j^«^, dec, 103. N.
wi'if, t »6 : 123. y, 124.

^ ; omitted, S85.
-vutf in der., 318. b.
uirai taes ^iy 648. ^
v^a^, dipt, 1 27. [64S.
M(, cp., 161. 2 ; const,
v«'ii»«0f, w. gen., 377 ; w.

dat., 405. n, [292.

v«'«, cp., 161. t^; const,
648 ; w. pass., 562.

vfT^ti, cp., 161. 2.

u^ttntt, cj., 267.

f>, t 3; ^^ > ^, 51;
^ > «•«•, ^) > /SJ, 52 ;

fcyirv, 2. aor., 298. [61.

^«/»«», ^ 42 : 267, 236.2;

^«MiV, 122 : 109. 132;

^Mfivy ^ 22 : 56.

(p»U(it f/fu, 5.51, 634. y.
j»iir»«, Y 53 : 301. 7.
f tj)«^Mii, w. gen., 348.
piirt^H, •M'r««, &C., 160.

fi(»0, qj., 301. 6; ^

613.3.
^(tfy«, cj., 270. 9; as

pass., 556,
(ptifti, t 53: 228, 284.

R., 301. 7; end., 732;

7^«, 552 ; \^f as aor

576. 5.
^^«y«, cj., 278 ; w. part,
^/ti(«, cj., 268. [63»
^^i»«, ^/«i, g., 278
^«i*>, dec, 123. 7.
.^1, dat in, 89.
^iX{«, \ 46 : 216, 218
^iXi«f, 118: 131,740.2
^iXtfyf X*>f , dec, 1 36. 1
^iktf, cp., 156. y, a.
^kiyttf (pXtyii»tf qj., 298.
^Xi>^, 1 11: 101.
^0(f*», ^^S«, cjn 301. 6.
^e«C«. <3*» 275. ^.
^^arr**, (PftiyfOfittf g., 294.
^f««(, dec, 104. N.
^e'**>> -S> <^®c.> 124. A.
^jiVr«», cj., 274. y.
<P(difuof^ 65, N.
^f «t^0r. 65. N. ; dec, 1 36 ».
P(ovf0f, 65» K.
^tfyyi^y^ss^ivy**, 270. 9-
^(/X«r0'«f, ^;^^ 246. /&
pvlffftt w. acc, 424. 1.
^i;a>, qj., 21 8 ; t^tn, 227.'/.
^«^ t 11 : 103,741.0.
;t. t 3;;t;# > 5, 51;

;t;^>»r,;k;J>04,52;

;CA* > y^ 53 ; A;;* >

Xj6\; X* ioB,^ 9^9:

added to r., 282.
;t«?«. cj., 275. f.
A;«'>*'» <3-» 267.
;^«4ay«f, qj., 290.
X»(in(» t 19- 57, 109,

132; cp. 157.
X»c'h 1 11' 102 ; x<^^

^/y, w. gen., 372. yj

pos., 674.
;^;«*'*«#, A;«<Mtf, q., 281. ••
;Ci;e. t 12: 123. y.
;(;;ii>«», x**e*^^»ff 1^-
;^iXi)iiy, dec, 123. a
;ti4i». qj-. 264.
;^M;f, dec, 123. y.
;^««», # inserted, S21. «.

Digitized

by Google

4W

GRBEK INDSZ. £If«tl99 INDEX.

Xt^ X^f^ <li- 218.

«, 284 ; oontr., 33, • ;

X^Afuuy w. dat., 4 1 9, 5.
X^^^t, dec, 1 23, y.
X^ imperB,, <^^ 284. 4 ;

w. «cCh 430. B.; w.

inf., 583.
;triC*'»g-»284.2,4; w.

gen., 357. N.
xfif^ '^ periphTn 385.

J ; ri xfy^ » »Ay ^

432. N. [1.

:e«i;«-t«f,518: 181, 728.
^(i»r#»f ^«f«, dec, 1 36. 1 •
;^;^f, dec, 123. y, 104.
>^, t3;<«^'»/3#,^,31.
^M^iffy cpw, 156* B»

-J^«y«itS: 22.r,24f;

X •.24; in contr.,32f;

in subj., 204 ; verbs in,

\ 34 f: 170. 0; ^in

der., 318. d.
J in address, 443 ; pea.,

674. 5.
St% X •ur«;, 516.
^^iff in der., 31 5£
«^iA», cj., ^88, 189. 2.
.*ry, ^ytfi in der., 313.
in»fAaty q., 301. 8 ; w.

gen., dat, andaoc, 374.

«, S99. «.
4^^ < « ^viif, 39.
•H, proclit, 731 ; omitted

before appoa., 332. S

w. dat, 410; w.

5'25. • ; SB= ATv ^yrms

53 1 . /3 ; w. adv. of ad-
miration, 538. « ; w.
part, 583. a, 640 ; in
wUh, 600. 2 ; final, 601 ;
omitted, 611. S ; w. inf.,
628 ; ellipa. w., 66^
as pr^, 662. m\ m tI
3S9.Q.

^f, adv. in, S21.

Z^i^ w. I»rt, 640 ; il-
lips. w., 662.

<Jr«, w. infc, 628.

ATii, Ion., 25, 45. 6.

£^iX«n in with, 5€7. ^
599. K.

ENGLISH INDEX.

AUative in LatiB, 84a fi.

Absolate^ nom., 343 ; eompt and sO'

perL, 465 ; inf., 623 ; part, 638 £
Absorption of vowels^ 31.
Abstract noun, 305, 308 ; >- concrete,
Acatalaotic verse, 698. [305. R.

Accent, 722 f; marks of; 14, 22. « ;

princ^^ 722f ; uses, 722. 3 ; gen.

laws, 726 ; changet, 727 f ; in apostr.,

contr., eras., 728; ddertiimatitm of,

734 f; hist., 734 f; in dial., 735 ;

in dedens., 736 f; in Dec i., 7.36,

740. 1 ; in Dec n., 728. 1, 737 ;

In Dec. m., 728. 2, 3, 741 f; in fern.

adj., 740. 2 ; in oomp. pron., 732. i ;

in interrogatives, 152. 2, 535 ; in

compar., 745 ; in conj., 728, 4, 746 f;

in compos.^ 739 ; in particles, 750 ;

showing quant, 681.
Accentual places^ 723f ; changes, 727 f.
Accusative, 78, 34, 339 ; changes in,

34, 63. R, 84, 96. 4, 97, 100, 102.

y, 107, UOf, 1 14f ; in appos. w. sent,

«S4, 8 ; ezpr. dir. limit, 389, 42iif ;

of der. oftf. and ^., 4Sdf ; w. Terta
vad verbals^ 424 ; w. verbs gov. gen.
and dat, 424. 2 ; by attr., 425, 427.
9 ; in periphr., 425. 5, 6 ; w. verb
omitted, 426 ; with A^mi^ ftd, 426.
I ; omitted, 427 ; of <2tr. otj^ 428 f;
w. verbs of motion^ 4^ ; w. cansa-
tives, 430 ; w. )ir and xt^ 48a R. ;
of effect^ 431 f; of kind, noon, 431 ;
w. a4)., 431. 1 ; of neat acQ., 432:
of defin. noun, 433 ; doMt, 434 f;
w. verbs of making, Ac, 434 ; doing,
&C, 435 ; asking, &c, 436 ; of ^p»-
df. or tffneccL, 437 1, 563 ; in ex*
clam., 438. ) ; of extentf 439 ; mdo^
440f; of rel., attar., 526; w. inf
and part, 617, 626 f; abs., 638f; w
verbal in rUf, 643 f; w. prep^ 648 f

Acephalous verse, 698.

Achronic forms, 565.

Active ootce, 165, 174, 555 f; as fan
trans, or reflex., 555 ; as pass., 556
w. reflex, pron., 561. 1 ; intercfa. w
raid., 661 *, verbals, 305^ 314, 39S

Digitized

by Google

BNGUSR IMDfiSC.

451

A jhMl Btatenoe, ^9 ; mode, ^ '■27 :\ Alcaic, 698 ; I^stter, 706. S.

177, 587. Alcmanian verse, 706. 8.

Aeute aecentj 14, 722f ; ^ grave, 7^29 ; Alexandrine dialect, 8.

MylL 125, Alphabet, t I lOf, i! f ; Hebrew, 2l

Address, nom. in, 543. 3 ; voo. in, Anacoluthon, 'V29; in synt. of appos.,

442 f ; sign of, 443. I 333. 7 ; nom., 344 ; acy., 459 ; compt.

Adjective, 73 ; declens.^^ 17 f: 128f; 461 ; art., 4k4; verb, 609; inf. and

ofoneterm., 129j of two term., ^ (7: part., 619. N., 0'27f; part., 638 f,

ISO; of three term., f 18f : 131 f; 641 ; verbal in .rw, 644; particle,

irreg., 135f; nvrn., I37f; compar^^ 669.

155 f; disrtp., 314£; 458.3 ; compote, Anacrusis, 698. /I.

824, 326, 458. 3 ; lynl., agrtement, Analysis, fbrms of, \ 65 f.

444f; in comp. const., 446; used Anapaest, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696 ; yerse^

subst., 447f ; hm ofneuL, 449f; for 697. 0, 707f.

abstr. noun, 449. • ; in adv. phrases, Anastrophe, 730.

449. /3; w. words of diff. gend. and Anomalous nouns, I22f; adj., 135f;

sumb., 450 ; in pL for sing., 451 ; compar., 160f ; ehangea in r.of verb^

w. impers., 546. «; agreeing w,'%dea^ 301.

453 ; agreeing w. gen. implied, 454; Antecedent, def. or indef., 519 ; in

attracted^ 455 f; for adv., adjunct, clause w. rel, or omitted, 522 f, 525 }

ftc, 457 ; in amacol^ 459 ; was of in case of rel., 527 ; elauee united w.

ebgreeif 460 ; w. prep., 651. ). rel clause, 524 f, 528 f; w. oomplem.

AcyecUve clatm, 329, 492. 1 , 522. 2 ; clause, 5^8, [accent, 726.

pnmmMj 147 f; synt 444 f, 494 & Antepenult, in pronunc, 18. 5«; in
Aiiyonct, 829 ; eomplem. X drcumst., Antibacchins, 697 ; -io rhydim, 696. 3.

expon. X inide, 329. j Antispast, 697 ; -kvarse, 696. 3, 721.

Adonic verse, 706. 1.

Adverb, num., y 25 '. l.'>9; compar.,
155, 162f;deriv.,320f; «yi»t,646f;
657 f; w. art a adj., 475 ; attr.,
526. I, 527. R., 531. C ; as prep.,
as conn, and noo-oonn., 657 ; used
subst, 65n ; in const pr«gn., 659.

Adverbial dauae, 329; aoo., 440f;
phrasea, 478 ; int, 623.

iEolic dialect, 1, 3, 6f ; digamma,
22. ); opt, 184. «, 205. 3 ; verse,
706.

Affixes, open X dose, 82. f ; ef dk-
c&iu.,f 5f: 80f; analysed, f 6

83. 3; in diaL, 95^ 99, 120f; ^Appellatives, der. of fem., 311

fan, frwm^ 141f; tf vtrb^ ^ 28f:
171 i; 195f; claaaet, 195; orders,
196; elements, f 31 : 197 f; union
w. r., 216f ; in verba in .^ 224f ;
In complete tao8e8» 233f ; dial, 181 f,
241(1
Agent, deriv., 306. 3 ; w« pass, verba
and verbals^ 380^ 407. », 417, 462,
642 1

a4j.,444f ;cr pffon^494f; cT verb,
It

Antistrophe, 700. 2.

Aorist, 167^ 178; second, 178. «,
180, 199, 255 ; in puree, IT 57 : 227 ;
sign changed In, 56 ^ 201 ;. X praa.
and impf., 569 f. impn 570. 2 ; used
achronically, 575 ; X perf. and plup.,
577 f; for perf. and plup., 580 ; for
fut, 584 ; X impf., aa oonting., 593 ;
X pres.,w.^i(, 598. 1 ; aooent, 734.<<,
746 f.

Aphaeresis, crasis reftrred to, 38.

Apodosis, 329) 603 f.

Aposiopdsie, 484.

Apostrophe, 1 6, 30, 41 f ; accent, 728.0.

Apposition, 331 f; for part const, 360.

Appositive, 329, 331 f.

Aptote, 126. N.

Argive dialect, 1 ; n in, 58. /3.

Aristophanic verse, 709.

Arsis, 695 ; affecting quant, 690. 3.

Article, T24! 147f; fai crasia, 39,
OKd to maifc gend., 4bc., 74. fi ; pre-
pos. X postpoe., 1 47 ; tgnty 467 f ;

AgrtUnent, 329 ; of aobet, 331 f ; of Ep., Ion., and Dor. use, 467 f ; a$ an

art., 469 f; how tranalated, 469. 1 ;
Mbat in iti All axt, tbitr., fn£»

Digitized

by Google

^-Uki: wihl ■ Miwr t3MiMn&..<ffr = -ie ■!■■, PW.3, 7901

, 4»r. 4^ : ^hUii^ -«». :»:;*^H iiiafci maaa^ 14, TM£

%^

pftK, 4aa^ 49T. 54«.

I5SC Sl€; V. 8M,

B. dUL, 419; V. «aii

4CU 4CSf; dUpuaii

BMiL, 4€l. % S ; V. U«a«,

« .«^ 2 £0^ fte, 4es:

^4C4; feM^w. 4464.5;
! ^hK,4Si.

.IS5C3I6; «fad|^155A
S39f ; «K« 435^ ca« ; a^ 445f :| SICL 9; «f air^ ICSf ; af dkv
pnK. .$£4^ £3« ; v«k 330€z ■£> «w^ l^lihf mm mi air^ 460;
■■4pKl^,€l4( cas; I«lki^ CiS.! «nU^ l€t, 460 ; Mcoit in, 745.
C<SCS. CiiniMir iw 339^ 442.

ISTf; KOBpL^wti^ I99C

, 180^ S34. 583^ C37.
,697; -icTBi4 696.S»79a
ITiMjlii, 725 ; veA^ 3i6L «.
BMe,iBq^:a>3.«; mi«n,69e.iL
BoeoCiaa ifiaiect, 1.
Bfachreatafedic; 696.
Brackets, 16.4.

BnaOaa^^S: 13 ; boIb << SS. «.
Breve, 676. H.
BoeoGeaBMoa, 699.5.
dfzantiiie tfakcty 8.
Cmoxa, of fixiC, tcrh^ rhjllu, Baaci,

fem., Jec, -«1 paoK, SflL, 699 ; af-

fecdnir qiumt^ 690. S.
Cardmal niiiiibefB» ^ 21, ^ 25: 137.
Ctteil, dff. X mdir., eamt rteH X ob-

«9«^ 78, 8Sf ; hist. << 83f ; oae oC

179, 186;
186; mmi

240^ 256, 579 ; most vnd m part.

578.^; X Bdet. 57711
OBMpoMtioM. 323f ; ftm of lit woid,

324f; 2d«iird,326f;clow«rpn^

X loose or impraps 327 ; aooent i%

734./, 739.
ConpooDd mmd, 903 ; ftm. oC 923^

acrfti^ prefixes o^ 192. 3; warf.,

329, 446, 496. c, 544.
OoDciusion, fotmso^ 603fl
Coooord, 329.
CoDcreCe < abstr., 305. B.
Condemed oooatractioii, 528^ 588.
Condition, forna oi; 6031
Conditional awtanea^ modea ia, 606C

Digitized

by Google

ENGLISH 1^DBX.

45r>

Conjngatioii, ^ii6t: 1 64 f ; prindplea,
]64f; hist, 171 f; prefixes, ^ 28
I87f ; affixes, t 28f : 195f; root,
170. «, 254 f; quantity in, 682, 684 ;
accent in, 746 f?

Coiyunctions, 329; synt. of, 654 f;
generic for spec, 656 ; omitted, 660 ;
introd., 661. N.

Conjunctive mode, 169. 7, 591.

Connecting vowels of dec., IT 6 : 82. 3 ;
of verb, ^ 31 : 175, 178^ 202f ; in
ind., 203 ; in subj., 204 ; in opt.,
205 ; in imp. and inf., 206 ; in part.,
207 ; wanting, 208, 224^ 237 f; in
dial., 246.

Connective exponents, pron., adv^ 329 ;
position, 673.

Consonants, ^ 3 : 49f ; becoming vow-
els in Gr. alphabet, 22 ; euph. chang-
es of, 50f ; final, 63 ; paragogio, 66 ;
dial, var., 69f ; in poets, 71 ; added
to r., 271 f ; two lengthen sylL, 677,
688 £

Contingent sentences, 329 ; modes, % 27:
169, 177,587f ; particles, 587 f; con-
tingency, pres. or past, 589 f.

Contract verbs, IT 45f ; 216 ; in diaL,
241 f; forms of verbs in .^ 225f,
241 f; pf. part, 237.

Contraction, SOf ; omitted, 37. B. ; in
dial, 45 ; in Dec L, 94 ; in Dec. n.,
98 ; m Dec m., 104, 107^ 109. 2,
115f; inaugm., 188f; in verb, 216,
226, 241 f ; in pf. part, 237 ; in r.
of verb, 260 ; accent in, 728. a.

Coordinate eommmants, 49 ; in diaL,
69 ; tentetuei tx subord., 533 f^ 656.

Copula omitted, 547.

Coronis, 16.

Correlatives, pronomina], f 63 : 317.

Correspondence of «, 1, i^ with i^ r, F,
50, and page v.

Crasis, 30, 38 f; aooent m, 728. b.

Cretan dialect, 1 ; tf in, 58. /3.

Crctic, 697 ; ve^8^ 696. 3, 720.

Dactyl, 697 ; -ic verse, 696, 703f.

Dative, 78,84, 339 f; sing, not elided,
42. •; pL in Dec m., 51, 57^ 114.
3; obfective, 339, 397 f; ot approach,
897 f; of nearness, 398 f; w. verbs
of traffic, 399. • ; expr. snccesnon,
899. fi ; of likeness, 400 ; of influeHce,
40lt\ w.wofdBofaddrMa,402; ad-

vantage, &c, 403 ; appeanmce, giv-
ing, oblig., vaL, 404 ; oppos., yield-
ing, &c., 405 ; w. words expr. mental
act or feeling, or power of exciting
emotion, 406 f; w. verbals, 407. x ;
w. subst verb, 408 ; w. other words,
409 ; expr. remote relations, w. is,
410 ; fAoi, «"#<, &c., 410. N. ; for gen,
411, 503. c; residual, 339f, 4Mf;
ingtnan, and nuxL, 415f; of intitJU-
ment, &a, 416; of agent, 417', of
way, manner, respect, &c., 418; w.
M/rify 418. B. ; of meas. of cdfi.,
419; w. ^^Mf»M$ and ft/ti^m, 4 1 9. 5 ;
temporal and local, 420f ; of rel., nttr.,
526. /3; w. prep., 6^8 f.

Declension, ^ 4 f : 73 f , three methods^
79, 85 f; 185; gen. rules, SOf; af-
fixes,5 5f: 80f; Dec i., 5 7f: 86,
88 f, 92f; dial.. IT 8 : 9'f ; Decn.,
IT 9f : 86f, 97 f; diaL, ^ 10» 99 ;
Dec m., IT llf: 85 f, lOOf; diaL,
IT 15: 120f; special law of Greek.
110; urreg. and diaL, IT 16: 1^2 f;
defect, 1 26 f; of adj. and part., IT 1 7 f :
128f; of- num., i 21 : 137f; of
pron., f 23f 141f; quantity in,
682 f, accent in, 736 f.

Defective nouns, 126f ; verbs, 287. 3.

Definite teMce, f 26 : 168 ; X indeH,
569 f; descriptive, 570f, 576; in
verbs of asking, &c., 574, N. ; artide^
469; relatives, 5 1 9f.

Definitive, old, 1 47 ^ 467 f ; noun, 433.

Degrees of compar., 155 ; nseo^ 460f;
interch. and mixed, 466.

Demonstratives, IT 24 : 150^ 512;
omitted before rel., 523; hi attr.,
526 f; for reL, 534.

Deponent, mid. X pus** 166; past,
of, 564.

Derivation, IT 62 : 303 f; quantity la,
685 ; accent hi, 734. e, 736 £

Desiderative verbs, 319; sentenoo^
modes in, 597 f.

Determination of accented sylL, 734. f.

Disresis, 16.3,26,46; accent ia, 728*
N. ; in vers., 699. 2.

Dialects, 1 f ; Ion., Ep., Hom., 2 ; iBoL,
3; Att., Comm., 4, 6i\ Dor., 5;
Maced., Alex., Hdlen., Mod. Gr. or
Bomaie, 8; dialectic variations in
orthog., 23 ; vow., 43 f ; oons., 69 f;

Digitized

by Google

456

SMOLISH INDBX.

Dec 1., ▼ 8 : 95f; Deo. il, IT 10
99; Dec m^ ▼ I5ff 120f; a^j.
T20: ISJf; num., IT 21 : 137f
proa., IT 23 f : 1 42 f ; prefixes of verb,
194; affixes, 181 f, 241 f; evnt,
Sna 2 ; aooent, 735. ^

Diastole, 16. 2.

Digamma, 13. 4, 21 ^ 89, 117, 142f,
220, 222. y, 264, 267. S, 690. 2.

Dimeter, 698, 700. 1.

Diminutives, gender, 75 ; der., 312.

Diphthongs, ^ 3 : 24 f; prop. X in
propn 25 ; oorrespooding, 29 ; re-
solved, 46; long, 678; shortened
before a vowel, 691 ; forming 2 ace

Dipody, 697. /S. [plaoes, 723

Diptote, 127. iS.

Direct eama, 78, 83 f; 338f ; o6f., 422f ;

Distich, 700. [^mo^*, 607 f.

Distinct sentence, 329 ; modet, IT 27 :
587f; in depend, danses, 614*, X
incorp., 618.

Divided construction, 544. «.

Dochmius, 697 ; -iac verse, 720 f.

Doric dial., 1, 5f ; fbt., 203. 3.

Double consonants, IT 3 : 51 ; lengthen
iiyir., ^88 ; verbB,^ 43 f • 170. /3, 222.

DoubtfVd vowd, 24. /3, 680 f.

Duad in vers., 700. 2.

Dual, 77 ; old pi., 85, 1 72 ; w. pL, SS7.

Ecclesiastical dialect, 8.

Hegiae poetry, 2 ; verse» 705.

Elision, SO, 41f, 192. B.

Ellipsis, 329 ; in synt of appos., 332 ;
gen. part, 361. /3 ; gm. possess.,
391 . y ; dat., 399. ft 410 ; ace, 456f ;
adj., 447 f; compt., 461. 2; «rt.,
475, 485f ; pron., 502f, 513. N.,
521 f, 525. N., 528 f. 538, 539. 1,
541 ; verb, 545f ; inf., 624f, 627f;
part., 634. «, 639. 2 ; prep^, 650f ;
particle, 660 f.

Emphatic changes in r. of verb, 265 f.

Enallage, 329.

Enclitics, 732.

Ending, see Flexible.

Enneemim, 699. 4.

Epenthesis, see Inserdoo.

Epic language, 2, 6.

Epicene, 74. y.

Bpisdma. T 1 : 1 1, 22. 1.

Epithet, 444. m.

Epedfl^ 700. S.

Equal rhythm, 696.

Erasmian pronunciation, 20.

Etymology, t 4f : 72 f.

Euphonic chanffee of vowds, 27 f: at
consonants, ^Of ; in*Dec i., 92 f; in
Dec n., 9& i in Dec nC, lOOf ; ui
conj., 181, 2 1 6 f ; in r. of verb, 2o9f ;
tnfleetiony 86, 175f.

Exclamation, note of, 15 ; nom. in,
34:). 2 ; gen. in, 372 ; aoc in, 438. 1;
inf. in, 6^5.

ExponentSt connect. X eharact., 329.

Exponential adjunct, 3^9.

FalUng Ionic, 697 ; rhythm, 696. S.

Feet, 694, 697 ; exchange of, 695. •;
ictus o^ 695. fi ; cnsnra i^ 699.

Feminine, 74 f ; dec, 88 ; in adj., 1 31 f;
same form as masc, 129^ 1S3. N.;
eaewra, 699. 4.

Figures of syntax, 329.

Final contonantt, », ^, r, 63 ; tnujmm
tionsi 329 ; MenUneeSf modes in, 601 £

First tenses, 178, 180, 1 86.

FlexlUe endings of dedens., ^ 6 : 8S«
3 ; of verb, T 31 : 209f ; in dial,
247 £

Formation, ^ 62f: 72, .302 f; oittaf
{de words, 804f ; compound^ 3S3£

Fractional numbers, 1 40. y.

Frequentative ^*erbs, 319.

Future, i67^ 178 : wants snbj. mad
imp., 169. ^ ; sign changed in, 56^
200; second, 180, 199, 255; ute,
565 f, 581 f; part. expr. purpose,
583. a, 635 ; for pras. or past tense,
585 ; opt., 587. 2 ; ind. for iipp.,
597 ; w. ?«••»#, 601 f.

Future Perfect, 168. •, 179, 239,582.

Gender, 74 f; rules o^ 75 £

Genitive, 78, 84, 339; oi departure^
345 f; of Mepar.y 346f ; w. words of
sparing, &c, 348 ; of disHmcthm, 346,
349 f; w« Xtiwfiuuj 349> R. ; w.
words of authority, &c, !}50 ; w. J^.
X»t, 350. R. ; w. oompt., 351, 461 ;
and H, 461. o; w. multiples, Ac,
352; of eauMe, 353 f; of origm and
mot, 855 f; for dat.. 355. N. t of
theme^ 356 '■ ot mpphf, w. words of
plenty and want, 3J7 ; w. %i»fMu and
XiV^^ 357. N. ; partiHm, 358 f;
expr. quantity, &c, 359 ; w. snbet.,
861 ; expr. ooontry, 861. m ; W.a^^*

Digitized

by Google

ENGLISH

art., tnperl., &c., 362, 461 ; w. adv.
of place, time, state, &c, 353 ; w
Terb, as subj., 364 ; as appos., 365 ;
as complem., 366 f ; w. words Qf shar-
ing and touch, 367 f ; as part taken
hold of, 369; w. words of obtain-
ing, &c, 370; of motive, &c., 372 f;
w. words of direction, daim, dispute,
373 ; of price, vahte, merits crime, 374 ;
of punbhment, 374. N. ; of eeruibie
and mental object, 375 f; w. words
of obedience, 377 ; of time and place,
878 f; act. or ejffic,, 380 f; w. pass,
yerbs and verbals, 381 ; constituent^
adjunct defining thing or property,
382 f; w. compounds of <»- priv., 383 ;
w.subst. verb, 384 ; w. subst. omifited,
in periphr., 385 ; of property, 387 ;
of rdakon, 388 f; social, w. adj. of
connection, 389; possess., 390; w.
h^it, tii9t, &&• and verba of praise,
blame, and wonder, 391 ; > case of
thing possessed, 391. y ; w. S^0t, &c,
391. ) ; objective, w. verbals, 392 f;
w. abstracts, mtTt»f, &c«, 393 ; of loc
and temp, rdation, 394 ; <^ reference,
&C., 395; w. pwrt., 617. 6; abe.,
638 f; w. prep., 648 £

Glyconic verse, 706. 2.

Government, 329.

Grave accent, 14, 724, 729; syllable,

Hebrew Alphabet, 21. [725.

Hellenistio dialect, 8.

Hephthemim, 699. 4 ; anticipated,

Heroic verse, 698, 704. [712. 1.

Heteroclites, 122, 124.

Heterogeneous nouns, 122, 125.

Hexameter, 698. 3, 704.

Hiatus, how avoided, 30 f; in early
Greek, 89, ]17f; in poetry, 701. 3.

Historical tenses, 168 i present, 567.
«, 576.

History of orthog., 21 f; declens., 83 f,
117f: pron., 143f; con)., 171 f;
root of qj., 254 f; fonnatioo, S02;
accent, 722 f. 734.

Homeric dialect, 2.

Hyperbaton, 329, 426, 511, 672.

Hypercatalectic, 698.

Hypodiastole, 16. 2.

likmb, 697 ; -io rhythm, 696 ; verae,
697.^711£ [cal,695.

ktaa, in proDnne., 18.5, 19; metri-
3U

:457

82, N. /

',H,77, 61 2f; wanja
_^ 4S9ttt ,1,; perf., 235
depn^^«nt^64^^ 1 ; w.
«*«; and rjf, 613. 2 ; expr. supposi-
tion, 613. 4.

Imperfect, 167^ 178; generic vae,
566. a ; for pres., 567. y ; X aor.,
569 f; X aor. and plup., as conting.,
593.

Lnpersonal, 546, 564. 3, 617 ; part.,
in ace. abs., 638.

Improper diphth., 25 f; redupl., 283.

Inceptive verbs, 319.

Incorporated tentence, 329 ; modee^
V 27 : 614 f; w. adjuncts, 616. 4 ;
X distinct, 618 ; wide range of, 618f;
how translated, 618. 1 ; in oratio oU.*
6)9; -w, 9Tt and it, 619. N.

Indeclinable, 126. 1.

Indefinite pron. and adv,, 5 23^ f 63 .
146, 152^ 317, 517f; arf.,518. •;
rd,, 519f; tenses, f 26 : 168 ; X deC,
569 f; X complete, 577. •

Independent, nom., 343.

Indicative,^ 169, 177, 587 f; X buI^.
and opt, *587f ; ezpr. conting., 593 ;
habit, w. «Ev, 594 ; wish, 597 f; pur-
pose, 601 f; in condit. sent, 603f;
expr. possibility, &C., w. &v, 604. a ;
without &9, 605 ; in quot, 609 &

Indirect eases, 78, 83 4 338 f; o6f.,
397 f; 9110*., 607 f.

Infinidve, 169, 176,6l4f; «^.,614f;
impers., 617; construed as nent noun,
445, 620f; act= pass., 621. fi;
w. art, 622 f; as aoc., 622f ; of spe-
cif, and adv., 623; abs., 623; re-
dundant and* omitted, 624 ; in com-
mand, exclam., &c, 625 ; resem-
blance to dat, 626. N ; w. ace., 626f ;
w. other cases, 627 ; w. iSf, ««-n, tJff
Utt, 628. f ; w. «r(/v, i^]v ^, &C., 629.
•2, 657, N.

Inflection, IT 4f : 72f; three methods
in nouns and verbs, 185.

Inscription, nom. in, 543. 1.

Inseparable particles, 150, 325.

Insertion of • in contr., 35 ; of cons.,
64 ; to prevent hiatus, 89, 117f ; of
r in coig., 221 ; of «, i, «, «^ 222 ;
of r and p in root, 273. 877, 889 ; «f

Digitized

by Google

4M

SIfOLlSH INMSX.

vow. and r in oompoB., 324.

InteHectiTe sentence^ 829 ; modes,
IT 27: 687 f.

Intenshre vertw, 319.

Interjection, w. gen., 372. i; inde-
pendent, 645.

Interrogative pron, and adv,, ^ ^^>
t 63 : 152. 2, 317, SS6, 539; po-
sition, 673 ; wnfencef expr. wish, 597.

Intransithre nse of seeond tenses^ 257.
fi ; of act voice, 555,

Inverted attraction, 527.

Ionic dial., 1 f ; old, middk, new, 2 ;
letters, 23 ; Ibnns in pf. and ptopn

loU subscript, 25. 3, 31. N. [213. B.

Irregular noons^ 122f; acy., 135f;
compar., 160f.

Isocfaronona fbetf 697.

Kindred vowels, 28 ; nomi in aoo., 431

'lop«, 5 1 : 11, 21f.

Labi lis, V 3 : changes of, 51 f ; in
Dei . m., V 1 1 : 101 ; w^i, V 36 f.

Laoo lie dialect, 1.

Last sellable of veoe common, 69^

Lesb in dftlect, 1, 3, 6f.

Lett( re, IT 1 : 10^ 21 1

Ligai urea, f 2 : 10. 3.

Lingnls, ^ 3; dianges o^ 51 f; in
Dec m., \ 11 : 102f ; verit, ^ S9f.

liqniU, % 3; changes of, 54f; in
Dec ni.,tl2: 105f; iwrAf,^ 41f
56, nO.fi, 223, 266.

liqni 1-mntes, ^ 13 : 109.

Local quantity, 688 £

Loga edic verse, 696. 3, 706, 710.

Long wmels, IT 3 : 24f, 29, 676 ; fbnn
ing 2 aoc places, 723 ; vowel short-
«ne( before another vowel, 691 ; igpS:,
by uat. and pos., 67811

Kacedonie dialect, 8.

Masculine, 74 f; form for fem., 133,
495 ; pi., used by a woman speaking
eff herself, 336. •; ettmra, 699. 4.

Ifegarian dialect, 1.

Mesode, 700. 2.

Ifetaplasts, 122f.

Metathesis, 56 f, 59, 64 ; In vwbs, 223,
227. /5, 262, 281. • [699.

Metre, 694f; -ical ietos, 695; series,

Middle amfes, T 3 : 49 ; > and <
smooth and nogh, 52 ; inserted, 64.
2 1 vmc^ 165i; 180, 553f; inteieh.
ir. pais^ 454 ; w. dii; rtflsK; s«Bae,

557 ; indir. 53S ; redpr., em», 559

subjective, 560 ; w. reflex, pioa.

561. 1 ; as act. or pass., intarck. w

act., 561 ; root, 254.
Modem Gredc, 8 ; pronnnc, 19.
Modes, 5 27: 164, 169; hist, I76f,

conn, vowds, 203 f; use, 586 f; m-

telUeiwt, 587f ; in desid. sent, 597f

final, 601 f ; oondit, 603f ; rd., 606 ;

<sompIement, 607f; wiitim, 6i2fy

ineorp.^ 6l4t
Monometer, 69S«
MoDopody. 697. fi4
Monoptote^ 127. /i«
Monostichs, 700.
Motion, movable^ 74. 1.
Mnitiples, % 25 t I37f ; w.gm., 359
Mutes, f 3 ; changes ol^ 51f; 69f ;

m. and liquid as affecting qnaat, 689;

in Deem., 1 11: loif; wraa,^36f:
Names of tetters, 21 f. []70./3,2^
Nasals, f 3 : 49^ 53^ 64. 2.
Nature, long or short hjy 6771
Negative pn». and adv., ^ 63 : 1 37. jl;

subject X ot^n 647 ; as iaaUmog. «r

affirm., 647. N. ; rodmidn 664 f; w>

infl, 665t
Neuter, 74f; dee., 87; inMUn ISOf;

in syllepds, 446 ; use of, in ady. and

pron., 449 f, 496 ; i^nr. w. sing, vcrt^

549 ; impers., 546, ••
New root, 254.
Nominative, 73, 84, SS9f ; for roo^

81, 343. 3 ; in appos. w. sent, 334;

as suttject, 3S9f, 342, 543 ; l^ attc,

551, 614 ; independ., 343 ; in an**

ooL, 344 ; of rel., attr., 526. fi.
Noun, dedens., V 7f; 92f ; anom**

Ions, defective, &&, 122f; dcriv..

305 f; compos., 324, 326.
Nude, 224 f, 237 f; inflection, 84, 175,

208 ; adjunct, 329.
Number, 77, 83, 85 ; dgnt o^ 83i;

172; in verb, 164, 170f; osa ani

interchange of, 335 f.
Numerals, f 21, t 25: 1.37f; how

combined, 140 ; letters «% T 1 : 11*
Obelisk, 16. 4.
Object, 338f ; indir. in Ait, 539^ 397 f;

dir. in ace., 339, 422 f.
Ol>fective o^SaiM, t30f: 195, 909f»

toicof 174f; cases, 336f- c«L»898

dat S97.

Digitized

by Google

i

SNQLISB INDEX.

A»

ObliqM eaatB, 7». /S ; it adr^ S20.

Odes, choral, 700. 2.

Old root, 254.

Onomatopes, palatals in -^m, 273. 1.

Open vowds, 24 f; affixes, 82. •.

Optative, 169, 177, 587 f; X ind.,
587, 593; fdt. 587. 2; X subj.,
588 f; follows sec tenses, 592 ; w.
Mfi for pres. or fat. ind., 595 ; expr.
wish, 597 fj purpose, 601 f; forsofaj^
602; in oondit sent, 603 f; «xpr.
possibility, command, &o^ w. ohr,
604 ; in rel. s^t, 606 ; in indir.
quot, 608 f.

Oratio recta X obliqua, 607 f. [5.

Ordmals, T25: 137f; w. «Mf, 511.

Orthography and Orthoepy, ^It- 10 f;
hist, of, 21 1

Orthotone, 733.

Oxytone, 725.

PsBon, 697 ; -ic verse, 720.

Palatals, f 3; dianges o^ 51f; hi
Dec m., f 1 1 : lOl ; verbg, ^ 38.

Paragogic consonants, 66 ; % 150. N.

Parisyllabic, 82. N.

Parcemiac verse, 708. 2.

Paroxytone, 725.

Parsing, forms ot, ^ 65f. [487.

Parts of sentences as joined with art^

Participle, 169, 176; declmu^ f 22 1
128f ; syU., 614< 6aOf; as adj..
444 f; expr. pnrpoee, 583. a, 635,
640 ; impers., 615. 5 ; [M^lim., 631 ;
drcomst, 632 ; ass adv. or adjunct,
632; complem., w. verbs of sensation,
chance, anticipation, ftc, 63:) f; X
inf., 634. fi ; w. adj. and verb, &c.,
634. y; prospect., 635 i defin., 636;
w. tifih ix^'i Ux*f*^» •^X*f*^ &«•>
637 ; abs., 638 f; w. ««, &C., 640 ;
anacol., 641*

Particle, in compos., 325, 328 ; jynt,
645 f; as affected by ellips., 660 f;
pleonasm, 664 f; attr., 668 ; anacol.,
669 f; combinations, 671; position,
672 f; accent, 750. [N.

Partitive gen., 358 f ; adjectives, 3^2.

.''assive, 165 1, 180, 553 f; w. gen.,
381 ; w. (Ut, 417 ; interch. w.
mid., 554 ; how construed, 562 ; pre-
fers dh*. to indir. obj., pers. to thing,
563; ooovecM of midL, 564; impers.,
464.3.

Pastoral csesoia, 699. 5.
Patrials, derivation, 309, 315. a, e.
Patronymics, derivation, 310.
Paulo-post-^future, 582.
Pentameter, 698. 3, 705.
Penthemim, 699. 4, 704. 2. [726
Penult, in pronunc, 18. 5 ; in aooent^
Perfect, 167f; 179, 186, 233 f; com-
monly wants subj., opt, and imp.^

169. ./S ; as pres., 233 ; pt in dial,

253; X aor., 577 f; both past and

present, 579 ; for fut, 584.
Periphrasis, 329 ; in synt of gen.,

.385, 453. i; aoc, 425 ; art, 476 fj

verb, 637.

Perispome, 725 ; verbs, 216. «.
Person, 143; signs o^ 143, 171 ; m

verbs, 164, 170f; change o^ 500.
Ftersooal pronouns, IT 23 : 141 f ; w.

yi, 328; use, stronger and weaker

forms, 502f ; unplied in affixes of

verb, 545.
Phaloscian verse, 706. 4.
Pherecratic verse, 706. 2.
Pindar, dialect of, 3 ; metre of, 700. 2
Pleonasm, 329 ; in synt of gen., 395 ,

adj., 458; compt. and sup., 460f;

art, 468. b ; pron., 499 ; verb, 55S ;

inf., 624 ; prep., 652 ; particle, 664 f.
Pluperfect, 167^ 179, lh6, 233 f; hi

»« > n, 179, 203. N. ; as aor., 233 ;

X aor., 577 f; X impf., as conting.,

593.
Plural, 77, 83, 85, 172 ; forsmg., 336;

w. dual, 337 ; w. sing., 450, 453,

497, 548 i:

Poljrschematist verse, 696. 3.
Bpeitionof art, 472 ; of particles, 672f;
' in prosody, 677, 688 £
Positive degree, 155 ; added to super!.

and doubled, 462; for compt and

superl., 466.
Possessive pron., ^ 24: 151, 50fif;

gen., 390.

Postpositive article, 447.
Precession of vowels, 28 f; and page y.;

in diaL, 44 ; in r. of verb, 259.
Prefixes of verbs, t ^^'' 173, 179^

187f; hi dial., 194.
Preposition, w. case, &&, as adv., 323;

synt, 648^ 657 f; omitted and ins.,

650, 651. i; w. a^j., 651. 2; iu

eompos., 652 f; as adv., 657; ww

Digitized

by Google

460

ENGLISH INpEX.

msb, used subst., 658 ; in const,
pnsgn^ 659 ; position, 672 ; accent,
780^ 750. 2.

Ptepodtive vowel, 24 f; article, 147.

Present, 167 f, 178 ; as generic tense,
566; historic, 567, 576; X aor.,
569 f; for perf., 579. (; for fat,
584 ; X aor. w. ^n, 598. 1.

Preteritive verbs, IT 58f; 233 f.

Primary ictus, 18. 5; tetuei, 168, 173f;
X sec. in expr. conting., 589 f; fol-
lowed by subj., 592 ; afixet^ ^ 31

Primitive, 303. [196,

Proclitics, 731.

Prohibition w. /»i$, 598.

Phmominal correlatives, IT 63 : 817«

Pronoun, T23f: 141f ; m6«^., IT 23
141 f; pers., 141 f; reflex., 144
recipr., 145 ; indef., 146 ; adj.t f 24
147f; def., 148f; art, rel., 148;
iter. 149; demonstr., 150; poes., 151 ;
hidef., 152f; compos., 144 f, 149^
153, 328; art as, 467 f, 490f;
tynt,, 494 f; masc for fern., 495
w. subj. implied, 497 ; attr., 498 ;
repeated, 499 ; change of numb, and
pert., 495, 500 ; spec, observ. on, 501 f ;
pers.y poss,, and reflex.^ stronger and
weaker forms, &&, 502 f; use of w,
&C., 593 f; «vr«f, 508 f; demons,
512f ; as adv. of place, 514. N.; for
pert, pron., 515; indef,^ 517 f;
def., 518. y; relative, 519f; inter-
dianged, 520f; w. antec in same
danse, or omitted, 522 f; w. tg'Tt,
523; attraction, 524 f; of words be-
longing to the antec. clause, 525 ; of
rel. by antec, 526 ; of antec. by rel.,
527 ; w. ellipsis of snbst. verb, 528 ;
rel. omitted, 528. 1 ; = demonstr.
and conn, particle, 530 f; w. another
conn., &c., 533 ; repetition of, avoid-
ed, 534 ; compUm., 535 f; in con-
dens., 538 ; interrog., 536, 539 ; &K.
Xb$, 540 f.

Pronunciation, Eng. method, 17 f;
Mod. 6r., 19; Erasmian, 20; an-
cient, of vowels, 24. y,

Proode, 700. 2.

Proparoxytone, 725.

Proper diphthong, 25 ; name, w. art,
471. 6; redupl., 283.

PropeiiBporae^ 72^.

Proportionals, 137 f; ir.gan.y85t.

Prosody, 675 f.

Protasis, 329, 603 f.

Punctuation, 15.

Pure nouns in Dec m., T 14 : llOf '
verbs, \ 45f : 170. fi.

Quadruple rhythm, 696.

Quantity, 676 f; marks o^ 16. 4,
natural, 677 f; local, 677, 688f ; Id
dec, 682 f; in conj., 682, 684; it
deriv., 685 ; in dial., 47, 686.

Quasi-OBSura, 712. 1.

Quatemarius, 697. A.

Quotation^ direct X indurect, 607 £

Kadicab, 302.

Reciprocal pron^ T 23 : 145 ; nae of
mid., 559.

Redundant nouns, 122 ; veriM, 257. 8

Reduplication^ 179, 190f ; Att, 191.
2, 283; in corapb vvfoe, 192f; in
root, 283 f; proper, &c, 283.

Reflexive pvn., T 23 : 144, 502 f; w.
compt and superL, 464 ; of 3d iptt^
for 1st and 2d, 506 f; for redpr.,
'507. 7 ; w. mirity 464, 511 ; mm
o/mid., 165^ 557f.

Regimen, 329.

Regular affixes of verb, IT 29 f: 215.

Relative prom, and €ub>,, IT 24, T 68 :
148, 153, 817; synt, 5l9f; tern-
tenees, modes in, 606. See Pronoun.

Residual cases, 338 f; dat, 414 &

Resolution of diphthongs, 46.

Rhythm, 694 f; kinds of, 696; cason
of, 699. 1.

Rising Ionic, 697 ; verse, 696. 8, 720.

Romaic language, 8.

Roman letters corresp. w. Gr., T 1 : 12.

Root of noun, how obtained, 79 ; of
verb, 170. « ; union with affiixes,
21 6f; old, middle, new, 254 ; tenses
arranged in respect to, 255f; ekamges
of, in verb, IT 61 : 254f ; euphon.,
259 f; emphat., 265f; anom., 301 ;
primary, 302.

Rough breathing, 18 ; w. init ^ and »,
^. 1, 2; mutes, IT 8; >> smooth,

Sampi, IT 1 : 11, 21 f. [62, 69, 263.

Sapphic verse, 698, 706. 4.

Scanning, 701. 1 ; continuous, 692.

Second tenses, 178, 180, 186, 236,
255, 257 ; more incUned to
sense, 257. fi; X fint, 199. ii.

Digitized

by Google

ENGLISH INDEX.

46J

Secondary ictui, 18. 5; fensea^ IT 26
168, 173f ; X prim, in expr. con-
ting., 589 f; foUowed by opt., 592;
expr. wish, 597 f; affixes, IT 31

Semivowels, f 3 : 63. [196.

Senarios, 697. /3, 712.

Sentence, Idnds of, 329 ; words in ap-
pos. w., 334.

Short vow. and syll., T 3 : 24 f, 29,

676, 679 f; > long, in dec., 92,

1 lOf; incompar., 156 ; in verb, 183,
218 f, 224, 266 f; in compos., 326. &

Sign, see Tense-sign. [der. of, 304 f.
Simple vowels, IT 3 : 24 ; word, 303 f;
Singular, 77 ; for plnr., 335 ; w. plur.,

450, 453, 497, 548 f.
Smooth or soft breaihmg, 13 ; .£oI.

and Ep. for rough, 13.,4 ; muie*t f 3 ;

>> rough, 52, 65.
Sounds, abrupt and protracted, 17. N.
Special application, sign o^ 332. 3, 640.
Spondee, 697 ; -aic verse^ 704. I.
Stanza, 694, 700.
Strophe, 694, 700.
Subject, r sign of, 84 ; of finite verb,

342; of inf., 620.
Subjective afixet, T 29f : 195, 209 f;

voke, 174 f; caaes, 338f; temm of

mid., 560.
Subjunctive vowel, 25 f; mode, 169,

177, 687 f; X ind., 687, 693; X

opt., 588 f ; follows prim, tenses, 592 ;

for ind., 695; for imp., 597 f; expr.

purpose, 601 f; ibr opL, 602; in

oondit sent, 603 f ; hi rd. sent., 606 ;

in oomplem. sent., 611. 3 ; in qnot,

608 f.

Substantive, 73; synt, 331 f; agree-
ment, 331f; pnm., V 23: 141f;

synt, 494 f; verb, omitted, 547, 639,

2 ; w. gen., 364 i; 384 ; w. dat, 408 ;
omitted faioondens., 528 f; 538 ; mm,,
T 25 : 139, 308. e; elauee, 329.

4uperlative, 155 f, 316 ; w. gen., 362f,
461 ; w. dat, 419 ; w. pos., doubled,
w. iv TMf, w. Jf, neg., 462 ; w. re-
flex., 464 : abs. 465 ; attr., 525. «.

Syllabic augment, 187.

Syllable, affixed to r., 287 f; quant d,

677. N.

Syllepsis, 829 ; hi synt at adj., 446 ;

pron., 496. c ; verb, 544.

Syaoope, hi liquids of Dee. m., 106 f;

m ftit., 200. 2; hi r. oft verb, 261.

Synecdoche, 438. «, 563.

Synecphonesis, or S^niiz^sis, 81, 701. 2.

Synesis, 329 ; in s>'nt of appoe., 332
4 ; a^., 453 f; pron., 497 ; verb
548 f.

Syntax, IT 64 : 329 f ; variety m Greek,
330 : figures of, 329. N. ; of subst,
331 f; of adj., 444 f of art, 467 f;
of pron., 494 f; of verb, 543 f; of
particle, 645 f.

System in vers., 694, 700.

Temporal numbers, ^ 25 . 137f ; aug
ment, 187f.

Tenses, IT 26: 164, 167f; formation,
IT 28 ; hist of, 173f; signso^ V 31 :
178, 186, 198f, 245 : first X second,
178, 180, 186, 199, 255 f; how asso-
ciated, 215. 3; arranged in respect
to root, 255 f; ttse, 565f ; chronic X
achron., 565 ; generic X spec, 566,
576. 4, 580 ; mterchange, 567, 576,
584 f; def. X indef., 569 f; faidet
X complete, 577 f; fht, 581f; prim.
X sec. as conting., 589 f.

Tense-signs, IT 31 : 178, 186, 198f ;
changes ai, 56, 199f ; hi dial, 245

Tetrameter, 698.

Tetraptote, 127. fi.

Tetrastich, 700.

Theme, of noun, 79 ; of a^f.* 1S8 ; of
verb, 1 70. «. [690. N.

Thesis, 695 ; vowel lengthened in,

Thud future, see Future Perfect

Time of verb, 168 ; of vow. and syfl..

Tmesis, 328. N.,. 652 1 [676 &

Tone, special, 7221

l>iad ui vers., 700. 2.

Triemim, 699. 4.

Trimeter, 698; iambic, 713.

Triple riiythm, 696.

Tripody, 697. fi.

Triptote, 127.^.

Tristich, 700.

Trochee, 697 ; -aic rhythm, 696 ;
verse, 697. A, 716f.

Ultima, m accent, 723 i; 726.

Union of 8>'llables, 80 f, 45f.

Van, V 1 ; 1 1, 21 f. See Digamma.

Verb, eonj, at, V 26f : 164f ; dqx>-
nent, 166; hist, 171 f; prefixes,
IT 28: 187f; affixes, IT 28 f: 195f;
hi ./u X hi ^, 208. 2 ; m .^ ir48f

Digitized

by Google

me

EMGLISB INDEX. LIST OP. AX7TH0SS, dsc.

S94f» 2ftl ; pretoritivB, IT 58f : 283 f ;

root, 254f ; dial., IT 32 : 194, 181 f,

841 f ; tnmiaUted, IT 33 ; deriv., 318 f;

e(mpo9^ 323^ 327 ; lynt^ agreement,

543 f; w. subject omitted, 545 f;

impen., 546 ; pi. w. sing, nom., 548 ;

sing. w. pi. nom., 549 ; attracted,

550 ; taking nom. by attr., 551, 614 ;

quaiUU^ in, 682, 684 ; accent in, 734,

736£
Verbal noons, 305 f; adj., 314 ; adv.,

321 ; compound, 323 f; w. gen., 381,

392 f; w. dat. 407. » ; w. ace, 424 ;

in .ri«f, impers., 642.
Verse, 694 f; kinds, 696, 698 ; csBsoca,

699 ; systems, &c., 700 , scanning,

701; dact., 703f; anap., 707f;

iamb., 711 f; troch., 716f; various,
VUion, 567. [720 f.

Vocal elements, V 3.
Vocative, 78, 84, 339 ; same w. nom.,

80 f; synt, 442 f; accent, 742 il
Voio^ hist of, 174 f, 180 ; irse, 553f ;

mid. ai|d pass* interch., 554; ad,.

vsed intrans. or reflex., 555 ; as pa«i«

556 ; mu/., having dir. r^ex. aenae^

557 ; indir., 558 ; redpc and caoa.,
559; subjective, 560;|Nus., 562 f;
impers., 564. 3.

Volitive sentence, 329 ; mode, T 27 :
169, 177, 612f.

VowcJs, IT 3 : 24f ; < old conaonanta,
22 ; simple, compound, long, shor^
doubtful, open, dose, prepos., snbjanct.,
24f ; precession, 28 t, and page v. ;
kindred, 28; onion oC, 30 f; con.
traction, 31 f; crasis, 38 f; apostro-
phe, 41 f; diaL var., 43f; connect*
of dec, IT 6 : 82. 3, 86, 92f ; changes
in Dec. m., llOf; connect, of ooq|.,
V 31 : 175, 178^ 202f ; changes ia
perf.,^ 236; in r. of verb» 259 f;
lengthened. 266 f; added, 287 f;
onbn, in compos., 324; qoanti^,
676 f.

Writing, mode of, 23.

Zeugma, 329 ; in synt. of a^H ^^i
pron., 496. c ; verb, 544.

LIST OF AUTHORS AND WORKS CITED,
AND OF ABBREVIATIONS.

[The works of Xenophon ars commonly cited without naming the author, wmi tfat
Anabasis without even naming the work (by simply ftving the book, chapter, and aso-
tion ; thus, W. 3. 17). The Iliad and Odyssey are commonly cited by givmg simply the
letter denoting the book, with the verse, using a capital letter if the citation b made
from the Iliad, and a smaU letter if it is made from the Odyssey (thus, A. 232, for D. i
233 ; i6. 305, for Od. ii. 305). In Homer, the references are made to the verses of Woif;
in Heslod, to those of Gaisford ; in Pindar, to those of Heyne ; in the Dramatic Poets, to
those of Dindorf; and in the Pastoral Poets, to those of Kiessling. In HerodMus, Uni-
cydides, X«iophon, Diodorus Siculus, Dio Caasiua, and Pausanias, they are made to
hooks and chapters ; and also, in Xenopbon, to the sections of the usual nM>re minute
division as given by Schneider. Dindorf, Sec fn Demosthenes, theyare made to the pases
and lines oTBeiske ; in the other Orators and in Plato (including Timtfus Loerus) to the
pages and lines or division-letters of Stephens ; In Strabo to the pages, sad in Atheoarai
to the pages and division-letters, of CasauboQ. The fragments of Alccus, Sappho, Co*
rihna, Epicharmus, and SophrOn are numbered according to Ahrens, with the numbttt
of other wall known editions (as those of AIc«us by Matthis, and of Sappho by Neue)
usually following In parentheses ; those of Anacreon, according to Bergk; those of GtUi*
j^hus. according to Blomfield ; those of Hesiod, Simonides, and ^rtcus, according to
^sfOTd: those of HfpponaiT, according to Welcker; those of Pindar, aeCordhig to
Backhj the«ofttiaOianMti6Foet0,attooriingtoDliidocf$*o. ^Oasfs oTaWtopvlMisft

Digitized

by Google

UST OF AUTHORS AND ABBREVIATIONS.

not ||T6D below, and ihoae in which the same abbreriation or initial standa for diffiNeat
words, are either explained by the immediate connection, or (ae indeed many of those
below) can scarce fail of being obvious in themselves.]

Accusative (Aoc., A.).

Active (Act.).

Adjective (A^j.)*

.^lianiis.

u£olic (iEoU M.).

.Machines (.^Ischin.).

.^schylus (.£Bch.): Agft-
memnon (Ag.), Choe-
phori rCho.)* Eamenides
(Eum.), PefMB (Pers.),
Prometheus (Prom., Pr.),
Septem contra Thebas
(Sept., Theb., Th.), Snp-
plices (Suppl., Sup.).

Alcseus (Ale).

"Alcman (Alcm.).

Alexandrine (Alex.).

Anacreon (Anacr.).

•Andoddes (Andoc).

Anthologia (Anth.).

Antimachus (Antfan.).

Antipater Theeealonieensis
(Antip. Th.).

Antiphilus (Antiphil.).

AoFist (Aor., A.).

ApoUonius Dysoolus de
I*ronomine. [Bh.).

ApoUonius Rhodins (Ap.

Apad (ap.) »■ ^moted m,

Aratus (Arat.).

Arcbilodius (ArcfaiL).

AretsBus.

Aristophanes (Ar.) : Aeh*
amenses (Ach.), Aves
( Av.), Ecdeaiaxnsg (Eo-
d), Equites (Bq.), Ly-
sistrata (Lys.), Nubes
(Nub.), Pax, Plutus
(Plut.,PI.), RaniB(Ran.),
llie8mophoriazus»(The-
sm.), Vespa (Vesp.).

Aristoteles (AristL).

Article (Art).

Atheocms (Ath.).

Attic (Att, A.).

Augment (Augm.).'

Bion.

BoBodo (Bosot, B.}.

CMar(CM.>

^"' - i(CdL):E

grammata (Ep.), Hym-
ni in Delum (Del.), Di&-
nam (Di.), Jovem(Jov.),
LavacrumPalladis( L^v. ).

Cicero de Oratore (Cio. de
Or.).

Collateral (Collat.).

Common (Comm.), oom-
monly (comm.).

Comparative (Compt.
Comp.).

ConfiBr (Cf.) = compare,
conttdi.

Contracted, -ion (Contr.).

Dative (Dat, D.).

Declension (Dedens.,
Dec.).

Demosthenes (Dem.).

Derivative, -ion (Deriv.,
Der.).

Dialecto (IMal.>

Dinarcbus (Dinarch.).

Dindorf *8 Edition (Dind.).

Dio Cassias (Dio Cass.).

Diodoms Sicnlns (Diod.).

Diogenes Lagrtias (Diog.
Laert.).

Doric (Dor., D.).

Dual (Du., D.).

Enclitic (Endit, End.).

English (Eng.).^

Epic (Ep., E.).

Epicharmus (Epidiarm.,
Epicb.).

Euripides (Ear.) : Akes-
tis (Ale), Andromache
( Andr.), Bacche (Bacch.,
Bac), Cyclops (Cyd.),
Electra (El.), Hecuba
(Hec.), Helena (Hd.),
HeracGdBB (Herad),
Hercules Furens (Here),
Hippolytos (Hipp.), Ion,
Iphigenia in Aulide (Ipb.
A.), Iphigenia in Tauris
(Iph. T.), Medea (Med.),
Orestes (Or.), Phoenisss
(Phoen., Ph.), Rhesus
(Bhm^ Bh.), Snppllces
(SoppLy Sii^)» T^Midat

(Tpo.). — Pragmaita
(Fr.). Archdai (Arch.),
Pdeos (Pel.), Polyidi
(Pd.), Incerta (Inc.).

Exempli gratia (EL g.)
= for example.

Feminine (Fern., P.).

Fragment (Fr.).

Future (Fut, F.).

Gaisfbrd's £dition(Gai8f.).

Genitive (Gen., G.).

Gottling's Edition(GdttL).

Hellenistio (Hellenist.,
Hd.).

Herodes Aiticns (Herod.
Att.).

Herodotus (Hdt., Herod.).

Hesiodus (Hes.) : Opera
et Dies (Op.), Scutum
Hereulis (Sc), Theogo-
nia (Theog., Th.).

Hesychius (Hesydi.).

Hippocrates (Hipp.).

Hipponax (Hippoa.).

Homerus (Horn.) : Ba-
tracbomyomachia (Ba-
tr.), Hynmi (Hym., K),
in Apoflineoi (Ap.), Bao-
dium (Bac), Cererem
(Cer.), Mercurium

(Mere.),Venerem(yen.),
Bias (IL). Odyssea (Od.).

Horatiua (Hor.).

Ibidem (lb.) -a m Ms
game work or part of a
work.

Id est (i. e.) a tAa# tf.

Idem (Id.) as the eawte
author.

Imperative (Imp«rat>
Imp.).

Imperfect (Impf.).

Indicative (Ind.).

Infinitive (Infin., Inf.).

Inscriptiones (Inscr., In-
sc.), B<Botica (Boaot.),
Cretica (Cret.), Cumasa
(Cum.), Heradeensis
(HecacL), Potidaica (Po>
tid.).

Digitized

by Google

464

LIST OF ATTTHORS AND ABBREVUTIONS.

Intransitive (Intrans.).
Ionic (Ion., I.).
Isocrates (Isocr.).
Iterative (Iter., It).
Em) rk Xtvm (». r. X.)

Laconic (Lacon., Lac).

Latin (Lat).

Liviofl (Liv.).

Lobeck on Phrynichns
(Lob. ad Phryn.).

Ludanua (Lac) : de His-
toria Scribenda (de Hist
Scrib.), Paradtoa (Pa-
ras.).

Lyoophron (Lye).

Lycui^gos (Lycuig.).

Lysias (Lys.).

Masculine (Masc, M.).

M^^arian (Mfg).

middle (Mid., M.).

Mimnemms (Mimn.).

Neirter (Neat, N.).

Nominative (Nom., N.).

Optative (Opt).

Orpheos (Oiph.) : Aigo-
nautica (Aig.), Hynini
(Hym.), Litiiica(UUi.).

Participle (Partic, Part,
Pt).

Passive (Pass., P.).

Pansanias (Pausan.).

Perfect (Perf., Pf.).

Person (Pers., P.).

Philetas (PhUet).

Pindams (Pind.) : Isth-
mia (I.), Nemea (Nem
N.), Olympia (0.), Py-
tiiia (P.).

Plato (PL) : Alcibiades
(Ale), Amatores (A-
mat), Apologia ( Apol.),
Axiochos (Ax.), Char-
mides (Charm.) Gon-
vivium (Conv.), Craty-
lus (Crat), Critias (Cri"
ti.), Crito, Definitiones
(Def.), Epinomis (£-
pin.), Eathydemos (£a-

thyd.), Euthyphron (Eu-
thyphr.),Goi^as(Groi^.),
Hippias Major (Hipp.
Maj.), Hi|>parchas (Hip-
parch.), Ion, Laches
(Lach.), Leges (Leg.),
Lysis (Lys.), Menexenus
(Menex.), Meno, Pai>
menides (Parm.), Plue-
do, Pbsedros (Phiedr.),
Philebus (Phil.), Politi-
cos (Polit, Pol.), Pro-
tagoras (Prot), de Be-
pablica (Bep.), Sophista
(Soph.), Theietetas (Tbe-
SBt), Theages (Tlieag.),
Timsos (Tim.).

Plato Oomicos : Metoeci.

Plaotos (Plaut.) : Tri-
nammos (Trinnmm.).

Pluperfect (Plap.).

Plund (Plur.. PL, P.).

Plntarchus (Pint).

Poetic (Poet., P.).

Pollux (PoU.).

Positive (Pos.).

Pratinas (Pratin.).

Present (Pres., Pt.).

Primitive (Prim.),

Pronoun (Pron.),

Quintus Smymssai
(Quint).

Reduplication (BedupL,
Bedpl.).

Root (r.).

Sappho (Sapph.).

Scholia (SchoL)

Scilicet (tc.) => wnder-
Mtand, namdy.

Scripta Sacra (S. S.) :
Septuagint (LXX.),
Deuteronomy (Dent),
Psalms (Ps.), Matthew
(StMatth., Mt), Mark
(Mk.), Luke (Lk.), John
(St Jn.), Acts, Romans
(Rom.), Ephesians (Ep.
Ephes.), Revelatio]
(Rev.).

(Ep.
tionsl

Simonides (Simon.).

Singular (Sing., S.).

Sophodes (Soph.) : Ajaz
(Aj.), Antigone (Ant),
Electra (£1.), (Edipos
Coloneus ((Ed. C), CB-
dipus TyrannoB (CEd.
T.), Philoctetes (PhiL,
Ph.), Trachinia (Tr.).

Sophron (Sophr.).

Strabo (Strab.).

Subjunctive (SubJ.).

Superiative (Saperi.,
Sup.).

Syncope, -ated (Sync).

Terentius (Ter.) : An-
dria (Andr.).

Theocritus (Theoc) : Bn-
colica, Epignunraata
(Ep.).

Theognis (Theog.).

Thucydides (Tlipc, Ttu),

Tibullus (TibuIL).

TimsBus Locros (Tim.
Locr., Tim.).

Transitive (Trans.)*

TyTtBBUB (Tyrt).

Varia lectio (v, A) aa m^
rum$ reading.

Vocative (Voc, V.).

Xenophanea (Xenc^ihan.).

Xenophon (Xen.) : Age-
silaus (Ages., Ag.), A-
nabasis (Anab.), Cyro-
psdia (Cyr.), de Be
Equestri (Eq.), Hieio
(Hier.), Historia Grcca
(H. 6r.), Lacedaemom-
orum Respublica (Lac),
Bfagister Equitnm (Mag.
Eq.), Memorabilia So-
cratis (Mem.), (Econo-
micus (CEc), de Re-
publica Atheniensiam
(Rep. Ath., Ath.), Sym-
posium (Symp.), Vecti-
galia (Vect). Tenatis
(Ten.).

Digitized

by Google

INDEX

CITATIONS FROM XENOPHON'S ANABASIS

m "A
QRAMBIAS OP THE GREEK LANQVkGE, BT A. CROSBY, *a*»

'* AccompUsbed Zbitophom I thy truth hath aboim
A brother's glory sacred as thy own.
O rich in all the blended gifts that grace
MInenra's darling sons of Attic race I
The Sage's olire, the Historian's palm,
The Victor's laurel, all thy name embalm I
Thy simile diction, free from glaring art.
With sweet allurement steals upon the heart ;
Pure as the rill, Chat Nature's hand r^nes,
A cloudless mirror of thy soul it shines.
Thine was the praise, bright models to aflbid
To CiBSAR's riral pen, and riral sword :
Blest, had Ambition not destroyed his c
Tb Uw mild lustre of thy purer ftmel"

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

CITATIONS FROM THE ANABASIS

(TlM foUowliif Index coDtbniw to the Seeood (Steieotjpe) EdKion of the Gnumntt
The nomben inckwed in perentbeeee donote the eectione of the Anebeeie which an
cited; thoee following them, the eectione of the Grammar in which the dtationi are

BOOK I.

Chap.L a) 337, 355, 423, 444,
482, 543, 545, 654 ; (2) 331, 361,
389, 423, 434, 470. 1, 471.6, 494,

521, 534, 551, 558, 568, 570, 633,
649. o, 657. r > (3) 342, 392. 2, 405.
C, 423, 481, 482, 485. o, 490. 1, 494,
583. a, 608, 654, 673. a; (4) 331,
403, 423, 461, 474, 486. 1 ; (5) 362.
p, 376. a, 406, 447. a, 476, 497. 1,
555. a, 571, 601. y, 620, 649. C, 649.
;!^, 654; (6) 349, 390, 402, 423, 441,
444, 485. o, 525. a, 525. n., 562. a,

632, 640; (7) 362. a, 395. o, 423,
447. a, 473. n., 485. a, 490. r., 574.
n , 620, 631, 636; (8) 350, 375. $,
405. C, 473. /}, 494, 526, 562. a, 570,
617.6,626; (9)409,440,444,457.
Y, 473. §, 486.1, 488. 5, 502, 554. |9,

633, 649. a ; (10) 395. a, 409, 421. /9,
485. a, 561. 3, 606, 615. 2, 657. 1,
658, 667. 3 ; (11) 332. 1, 640, 649. C,
657. r.

Chap. II. (1) 447. r, 459, 488. 6,

522, 546. jl, 554.|9, 663; (2) 406,
606,696.11., 646, 667. 3; (3)211.n.,
486. 1, 663.»; (4) 399, 485. a, 663.
3,6e2.a; (5)333.6,390,416,485.
p, 522, 648; (6) 439. a, 439. /f, 471.

6,474,632; (7)331,357,408,444,
47L 6, 471. *, 472.0, 549. a, 555,
606, 659. a; (8) 331, 333. 6, 405. C,
471. 6, 547, 549. a, 651, 649. n ; (9;
425. 5, 444, 480. 2 ; (10) 331, 432 ;
(11) 404. t, 433, 450. a, 481, 551, 571,
627. i9, 634. r ; (12) 119. 2, 332. 1,
404. a, 447. /9, 474; (13) 390, 399,
486. 2, 580 ; (14) 425. 5, 488. 6. 554.
/J; (15) 137. 1, 408, 447. a, 447. r.
502; a7) 408, 449. /J, 472. a, 546,
649. 9 ; (18) 362. /}, 554. /}, 659. a;
(19) 403 ; (20) 440, 447. a, 471. 6,
485. o, 510. 2, 522, 652. a; (21) 394,
420. 1, 485. a, 608, 614. a, §, 630,
646, 652. r; (22)638,649.^; (23)
333. 6, 336, 390, 437^ 456, 549. a;
(24) 580, 657. y : (25) 456, 457. a,
488.5, 659.a; (26)351,392.1,399,
561. 1 ; (27) 561. 1.

Chap. III. (1)373.1,476,505.
2,564.2,573,616.6; (2) 237,439.
a, 441, 596. 1, 610, 657. r» 665 ; (3)
406, 443, 447. y, 541, 596. 1 ; (4)
436, 471. 6, 486. 1, 626. o, 603. ^;
(5) 408, 606, 647, 664. a; (6)357./!,
405. 1}, 409, 434. v., 606, 614. C, 616.
*, 640, 667. 2 ; (7) 510. I, 651. y.

Digitized

by Google

nr

CITATIOKS 7ROK

654; (8)992.1,399,640; (9) SGS.
•, 404. a, 447. y, 477. a, 502, 636,
671.4; (10)583,602.2,633,646.1;
(11) 376. a, 504, 583,642 ; (12) 347,
647, 560. 1; (13) 568; (14) 436,
440, 447. |J, 479, 525. k ., 525. |f, 558,
661. 3, 569, 602.1, 633, 637, 647;
(15) 431, 525. a, 586, 647, 601. a,

619. |J, 640 ; (16) 411, 445, 479, 606,
609, 640 ; (17) 194. h., 392. 1, 418.
R., 604. a, 604. |f, 606, 633; (18)
419. 5, 532 ; a^) 574 ; (20) 500,574,
603. |J, 610* /J, y ; (21) 140. y, 378,
382, 402, 408, 449. /9, 470. n., 626. a,
Sm, 610, &16. 1.

Chap. IV. (1) 486. i, 547; (2)
140; (3) 561.2; (4) 394, 4ia2,
172, 498, 549. a, 650 ; (5) 361, 372.
y, 394, 601. y, 683; (6) 487. 4; (7)
605. 2; (8) 426. S, 485. «, 544, 579.
H, 606, 638; 674. 3; (9) 387, 434 ;
(11) 418. 3 J aS) 406, 639. 1 J (13)
347, 4^. y, ^8. 6, 536, 668, ^ ;
(U) 405. 1,, 635, 603. |J; (15) 357.
M., 404. f , 476, 543, 603. /}, 630 ; (16)
407. t, 602, 574, 647 ; (17) 351 ; (18)
405. ij.

Chap .V. (1 ) 362. /», 447. fi ; (2)
351,400,486.2,546.19,605.2,606;
(3) 546. /», Wl ; (4) 387, 421. (1; 562.
or ; (6) 362. y, 457. t, 472. a, 549. a ;
(6) 428, 446. |J; (7) 364. 1, 366,
427. 8, 523 ; (8) 418. 2^ 612. /9, 604.
jf , 662 ; (9) 275. C, 419. 4, 449. |f,
488.7, 526. /f; (10) 332.3, 365^ 357.
as 368, 416, 447. y, 661. 8, 649. /};
(11) 406, 485. a ; (12) 347, 416, 472.
a, 485. a, 608, 6T9. ^ 657. y ; (13)
237, 406; (14) 357./?, 551, 608;
(15) 362. 1, 476 ; (16) 351, 442, 582.

Chap. VI. (1) 362. a, 448, 639.2,
663. 6 ; (2) 347, 402, 649. a, 603. ^,

620, 665, 673. |9; (3) 403, 488.6,
ZiQU.a, 608; (4) 504; (5) 332.3,
363. y ; iH) 347, 473. «, 4^. «, 610.
1, 566, Wi; (7) 407. •, 510. 1,.e25.

|J, 624. |J, 661. 1 ; (8) 405. Ct 478.^1,
831.0,627.0,646,661.1; (9) 43St
4r3./J, 558, 577, 601. o, €83. n.-
(10) 369. o, 485. /J, 671, 646. 1 ; (Li)
362. a, 542. a.

Chap. VII. (1) 392. 1, 456 ; (2)
399, 535 ;. (3) 191. 3, 357. /J, 374. §,
526, 602. 3, 604. a ; (4> 404. y, 407.
X, 412, 477. o, 650. o; (5) 234. jJ
359.0; (6) 530; (7) 603. w . ; (8)
362. |9; (9) 394, 426. a, 503, 543,
661. a; (10) 137. o, 480. 2; (11)
467. », 609, 637; (12) 351 ; (13) 362.
/f, 636, 649. a; (14) 333. 6, 420. 1 ;
(15) 394, 472; (16) 644; (17) 549.
a ; (18) 378, 402, 473. /J, 603. fi;

(19) 620, 646; (20) 425.5, 466.
Chap. VIII. (1) 418. 2, 472. a,

621, 646, 583« 654, 66^-, (3)482.
(4) 336, 447. y ; (6) 41b, 418- 2, 4?5i
o, 502, 529. /J; (7) 551 ; (8) 359. «,
419. 4, 481, 662; (9) 368, 470. ir.,
472. o, 644. o; (10) 640 ; (11) 4ia
2; (12) 402,417,509, 611. 2; (13)
380, 407. ., 441, ^72. o; (14) 509,
(15) 474. »., ^8; (16) 375. o, 479,
401. R., 535, 568; (17) 405. C, 543;
( 18) 263.6, 362. /), 402, 4ia 2, 447. y ;

(20) 357. |J, 546, 549. « ; (21) 426.4,
568; (22)391. y; (23) 391. y, 405.
C, 662; (23-27)676; (24) 611.3,
557 ; (96) 479, 610. 1, 627. «; (27)
344. 1, 362. y, 416, 559. o; (29) 658.
561.1.

Chap! IX. (1) 376. jl, 5G3. o ; 0
31) 571 ; (2) 437 ; (3) 392. 1 ; (5) 392.
1, 419. 5 ; (6) 403, 490. r., 557 ; (7)
153. y, 226. 3, 432, 617, 546. |9, 558;
(9)560.1; (10)226.3; (11)435;
(13) 363. y, 408, 447.0, 546. |f, 604.
a, 664. y ; (14) 408, 416, 520, 526;
(15) 389, 497. 1 ; (16) 497. 1, 605.3 ,
(17) 405. 17 ; (18) 605. 2; (19) 406, '

622, 694, 606.2, 633; (20)587.3,
651, 662. OS (21) 168. y, 637. 8. ^4.
3; (23) 462.y; <28^ 46», 9»,%

Digitized

by Google

tBS ' AJTAfiABIS;

604. a; (94) 418. 3 ; (25) 378 ; (96)
406; (27) 504)620; (28) 535, 562.
0,605.2; (29>406, 504,513,649.0,
652. y; (30)488.6*

Chap. X. (1) 486. r> S44, 563;
(2) 4^, 544; (3) 51^2; (4) 347,

4dO. R., ^7; (5) 161. 2, 497, 608
(6) 447. a, 656 ; (10) 472. o, 478. a,
4r8.|J,508,€21./?,583.a; 01H795
{12) 357. «, 562. o, 670 ; (13) 357. ft
542. a; (13-16) 576; (14) 573. o,
(15) 427. 8; (16) 608; (17) 379

BOOK n.

Chap. 1. (1) 475, 561. 3; (2)
606, 614. 1} ; (3) 385. y, 610, 649. |J;
(4) 567. y, 579. C, 599. n., 603. a,
646.1; (5) 509; (6) 49a 1; (7)
375. ft 477. a, 670; (9)516; (10)
403, 432, 546. y, 574. m. ; (11) 373.
I, 394; (12) 503,543,633; (13) 237.
400, 432 ; (14) 404. i, 663. 6 ; (15)
542. a« 544. a; (16) 450. a, 516;
(17) 570.2, 583. a; (19) 639. 2;
(21) 640; v22y 450. y ; (23) 608.

Chap. 1. (1) 376. C, 619. a; (2)
504 ; (3) 394, 638; (4) 517; (5) 441,
490. R.; (6) 140; (10) 536, 555;
(11) 379. y, 408; (12) 357. ft 431,
606, 643; (13) 428, 485. a; (15)
530, 549. a, 610, 661. 2 ; (16) 485. a,
509, 546; (17) 363. y, 457. o, 517,
628 ; (18) 526. a; (21) 421. ft 472.

4.

Chap. III. (1) 656. 5. ; (2) 481 ;
(4) 610; (5) 546; (6) 445, 546. ft
610; (7)509; (9)404.y; (10)637;
(11) 408, 594, 605. 2, 666. 1 ; (12)
439. o ; (13) 629. 1 ; (14) 355 ; (15)
349, 437, 485. |J; (17) 389; (J8)
399; a^) 514, 561. 3, 633; (20)407.
X, 568. R. ; (21) 571. 1, 574; (22)
428, 621. /?; (23) 405. C, 428, 516,
603. a; (25) 404. t ; (26) 440, 546.
ft; (27) 447. |J; (28)472.

Chap. IV. (2) 407. • ; (3) 412,
606; (4) 485. «, 516, 602. 1 ; (5)

BOOK

Cbap. I. (3) 47ft, 604. ^l; (3)
ae8.r,375.«,480.y, 544. 0,865. •,

582, 636; (6) 237, 407. «; (7) 499,
(9) 367, 399 ; (10) 511. 3; (12) 387,
416, 485. /}; (13) 408, 429, fi; (14)
357. o, 394 ; (15) 513. o, 517 ; (J^)
403,510. 1, 609 ; (19) 547, 620; (20)
6^; (21) 517; (24) 459, 525. o,
608, 637, 639. 1 ; (25) 640; (26)
542. y ; (28) 394.

Chap. V. (2) 583. «, 614. d ; (Sj
428; (4) 424. 2, 614. a ; (5) 554. |$ ;,
(7) 405. jj, 535, 604. y ; (9) 357. o,
450. y; (10) 357. ft 541. a; (11)
419.5; (12) 531, 669; (12^ 403»
407. i, 633; (14) 403; (15) 406»
516,537.3, 603. a, 620; (17)620;

(18) 364. 1, 523 ; (19) 405. C ; (21)
531 ; (22) 416; (23) 437 ; (26) 404.
y; (27)406,633; (28) 405. C ; (32)
419. 4, 476 ; (35) 496. c ; (36) 602.
1 ; (37) 477.0; (38) 390,436; (39)
343. 3, 472. a, 520, 570.1, 664. |J;
(41)513; (42) 402, 544. ft

Chap. VI. (1) 375. ft 437, 563 ;
(1 - 30) 571 ; (4) 404. a, 416, 421. ft
535; (6) 347, 531, 628, 638; (8)
648; (9) 418. 3, 523, 617.5, G20,
627. o; (12)606; (13) 416, 419. 5,
662. a; (15) 480. 2; (18) 449. a ;

(19) 405. 1,, 407. i ; (20) 387 ; (22)
400, 449. o, 620 ; (23) 153. y, 551,
606 ; (24) 618. 1 ; (26) 406, 620,650.
o; (28)399; (29)368,437,439.0,
561.3; (30)499.

m.

66^; (4) 408; (i) 60^. f; (6) 107
»., 400, 431,527; <7) 402,8^ an^

Digitized

by Google

CITATlOm PBOH

(^ 687; (^ ^9. v.; (10) 606; 0^)
359. a, 551. v.; (12)602. 2; (LZ)
666. •; a^) 504, 539. 2,640; (15)
685; (17)534,615.2; (18) 601. /9,
643; (19) 356 ; (20) 408 ; (21) 505..
2, 537. 3, 547; (22) 428; (23) 336,
391. r» 485. a; (24) 486. a, 598; (25)
603. a; (27) 432, 442, 465; (29)
376. •,666. a; (30)400; (31) 437,
472. «, 563; (32) 135, 606; (33)
394; (34) 443; (35) 407. jr, 554. ^,
603. ^, 643; (36) 399; (37) 351,
418. 3; (38) 554. ^ 567. /9, 628;
(40) 378; (41) 505. 2; (42) 418. 3,
eSi; (43) 409; (45) 532 ; (46) 596 ;
(47) 616. a.

Chap.il (1) 627. (»; (2) 448,
476. v., 520, 657. fi; (4) 389, 400,
443,509,520, 661. a; (5)389,534,
646. 1 ; (6) 513, 600; (7) 350. r.,
874. (f; (9) 477. o, 638; (10) 639.
2; ai) 405. C, 430, 617. 6, 669;
(IZ) 479; (14) 352, 504; (15) 617.
6; (16) 875. /J; (17) 350. r., 598.
I ; (18) 487. 4; (19) 418. 3, 424. 2,
620; (20) 428; (21) 374. a; (22)
407. jr, 450. r; (24) 604. a, 640;
(25) 634. /J, 661. 2, 667. 2; (27)
403, 525. N.; (28) 362. C, 525. v.;
(29) 409; (31)627. a; (32) 661. 2;
(35) 603. r; (37) 361. r» 598, 623.
F.; (38) 375. if, 573. a; (39) 376. •,
390, 634. /f.

CBAP.m. (2) 536, 603. r; (3^
51&r,570. 1; (4)608; (5)571,637 -
(7) 368, 463. 3,662; (8) 642; (9)
629. 1; aO) 439. ^; (11) 378,472.
a; (12) 500; (16) 357. /9, 439. /f;
465; (17) 416; a^J 483; (20) 332.
2, 404. a.

Chap. IV. (1) 540,602.1,603
2; (2) 404. r» 658- (4) 546; (5)
407. .,412; (6) 3®. C,439. a; (7)
478. jl; (10) 485. /> ; (12) 556 ; (13)
522. 1; a^) 605. 2; aQ 490. a.;
tl7) 403, 447. fi; a^) 547; (20)
407. jr, (21) 137. •; (23) 418. 2,
572; (24) 336; (25) 447. y, 628;
(25-27) 576; (26) 350, 574. v.;
(28) 508; (30) 4ia 2; (31) 389;
(34) 409,602. 1 ; (35) 372. r, 403,
412; (36) 402, 546; (37) 420. 1,
447. /», 457. a; (38) 576; (39) 546.
fi, 573. a; (40) 518. yi (41) 509.
603. /9; (45) 453. o; (46) 447. f;
(47)449.|»; (49)633.

Chap. V. (i) 476. h. ; (2) 476 ;
(3) 476. H.; (5) 510. 1 ; (8) 137. •,
583 ; (9) 259. a, 457. /J, 496. c ; 00)
470. H.; (11) 347, 665; (iZ) 610,
615. 1 ; (14) 421. jl, 425. 4 ; (15)
409, 611. 2; (16) 364. 2, 377. 1;
(17) 525 ; (18) 237, 363. a, ^5. 4.

BOOK IV.

Chap. I. (1) 526; (3) 605. 3;
^5) 628; (6) 350; (8) 472. a; (9)
377. 1 ; (10) 517 ; (11) 488. 5 ; (13)
638 ; (14) 441, 490. r., 605. 2, 663.
6; (16) 232. «; (17)393. y; (19)
237, 600; (20) 552, 570. 2; (21)
432. 3; (22) 496. b, 510. 1 ; (23)
673. a; (24) 431; (26) 366; (27)
600, 619. y; (28) 374. /f.

Chap. II. (2) 437; (3) 399, 450.
ii (4) 41^ 657. y ; (7) 488. 6; (9)

362.5; (10)447. /f, 48a 6,604. a,

(11) 654. 3; (12) 544. a; 03) 440;
(15) 407. X ; (16) 447. y ; (17) 237
447. a, 488. 5, 649. a ; (18) 405. C >
(19)530,688 ; (23) 449. /J ; (26) 403.

Chap. III. 0) 472, 560. 2; (2)
521; (3) 394; (6) 671. 6; (9) 449.
^,525. a; (10) 337. a; (ll)5ia«,

(12) 220; (13) 392. 2,402, 405. v;
(21> (562; (26) 440; (28) 363. «.
394; (31^ 646; (33V 483.

Digitized

by Google

THS ANABASIS

Chaf. IV. (2) 119. 2, 336, 409,
622; (4) 475; (6) G27. a; (7) 336,
472. a; (13) 447. b; (14) 457. fi,
478. /1, 650. a ; (15) 647 ; (17) 535,
608; (18)392. 1,637; (20)392.1;
(22) 601. r; (24) 461. 3.

Chap. V. (4) 405. 17, 449. a ; (5)
424. 2; (7) 608; (8) 606; pO) 529.
(»,608; (11)427.8; (12)266,563;
(15) 266; (16) 457. a, 624. r>632;
(17) 526. a, 559. c, 560. 1; (19) 657.
V. ; (22) 366 ; (24) 439. a; (25) 409,
^9. a; (27) 407. «; (29) 425. 4;'
(33) 404. Y ; (34) 404. a; (35) 466;
(36) 4a. /J, 441.

Chap. VI. (2) 411, 656; (9)
475; (11) 460. 0, 671. 2; (12) 403,

460. a; (14) 494; (LS) 409; (91)
488. 5; (26) 488. 5; (27) 357. a.

Chap. VII. (1) 549.0,637; (2)
408; (3) 579. C; (4) 476; (5) 641.
J>; (7) 596. a; (9) 237; (10-14)
576 ; (11) 425. 4, 510. 1 ; (12) 368,
373. 1, 505. 2; (16) 116. a, 529;
(17) 526,637; (19) 389; (20) 393.
a,521./9; (24) 343. 2, 549. a ; (2Q
538.^.

Chap. Vni. (2) 629; (3) 402,
(4) 361 ; (5) 213. b., 570, 639. 2;
(6) 473. a; (8) 399; (10) 490. r.;
(13) 595. a; (14) 665; (18) 497;
(19) 542. a, 557; (20) 236. e, 366;
546; (22) 332. 4; (25) 295,521. (»;
(26) 51 7, 637 ; (27) 433, 450, a.

BOOK V.

Chap. I. (i) 447. (»; (2) 552;

(8) 465; (9) 603. v.; (10) 220; (13)
470.3;a5)556.

Cbap.U. (5) 457. •; (8) 615.
2; (12) 627. (», 640; (14) 523; (15)
642. r; (20) 560. 2 ; (29) 471. a.

Chap. 111. (2) 332. 4, 457. a;
(3)561.2,658,663.6; (5)559. d;

(9) 405. ir; (11) 333. 6, 653. • ; (13)
891.0,625.

Chap. IV. (3) 476; (4) 570. 1 ;
(9) 616. 4,G29. 1; OO) 609; ai)
483; (12) 447. jl; (15) 350; (16)
690,572,576; (19) 598; (20) 447.
r ; (22) 449. /}; (24) 570; (27) 487.
4; (29) 98. a, 486. 2; (32) 437; (34)
53^ 561. 1, 604. p.

Chap.V. (3) 332. 4; (4) 140,
658; (6)140; (8)579.C; (9)633;
(11) 360. 2; (12) 525. jf, 561. 3;
(16) 368,517; (19) 527; (21) 457.
f;C»)561.3;(25)65&.&

Chap. VI. (1) 375. /», 616. » ; (4)
600; (9) 45g. a, 603. C; (12) 220,
546, 555, 583, 603. 17; (17) 561. 1,
660; (20) 649. a; (24) 441; (25)
500; (26) 500; (29) 405. C; (30)
603. a; (32) 620; (34) 402; (36)
409; (37) 350, 389, 609.

Chap. VII. (5) 485. a, 570. 2;
(6) 485. a, 523; (7) 485. a, 513; (8)
478. p; (9) 394, 474; (10) 403,
539. 1; (11) 403, 615. 2, 661. 2;
a2) 357. a, 658;' a7) 361. y, 447.
r,659.a; (22)662,(25)504; ^
234. a; (28) 434.

Chap. VIII. (3) 157. lu, 375. a,
526,638; (4) 192.4; (6)616.»; (6)
426. a; (7) 502; (8) 532; (11) 517,
539. 1 ; (12) 466, 497. 1 ; (13) 603.
a, 639. 1 ; (14) 633; (21) 403; (28)
157. R.; (23) 278; (24) 284, 439. •;
(25) 376. r.

BOOK VI.

Chap. I. (6) 542. y, (5-13)
mS} (jSi 433;€a7; (7) 431; (8) «7j

(14) 439. «, 447. ft; aS) ^t- 2
(18) 133. a, 447. (»; (20) 400, 441,

Digitized

by Google

CITATIOIIS VBOX THS ANABASIS

C15.9;(Sl)404.r; (28)4M,640;
(23) 4S7. fi; (25) 610; (26) 517;
(SB) 633; (29) 406, 603. 8; (30)
A46; (31) 444, 668, 615. 2, 633, 660.

Chap. II. (I) 119. 2; (6) 523;
(10) 358, 658 ; (12) 412; (14) 406;
(15) 472. «; (18) 661. 2.

Chap. III. (1) 412,477. a; (2)
137. f; (6) 431; (9) 546; (11)610;
(14) 532; (15) 520 ; (17) 368; (19)
600; (23) 380; (25) 380,432. 3.

Chap. IV. (1) 410, 449. /J; (2)
409; (3) 403; (4) 478. y ; (8) 428,
580; (9)409; (U) 194. 1,477. a;
{13) 194. 1, 486. I, 559. d; (14)

626. H.; (18) 669; (19)^6. r> CW)
407. (, 517; (23) 416, 556; '(24)

^o.a.

Chap.V. (5) 620; (6) 440r (10)
284. or, 377. 2; (24) 472. a.

Chap. VI. (1) 378, 625. a; (5)
504; (7) 479; a^) 661. «; (13)
475; (15) 603. d; (16) 400, 657. r;
(17) 428; (18) 598. 1, 600; (S2)
530, 628; (24) 614. C; (26) 514;
(29)337; (30) 337; (31) 337,406.
C; (32)337,380; (83)380,497.1;
(34) 337, 426. 1, 6^. y ; (38) 447. ^
457. a, 47a «.

BOOK ni.

Chap. I. (5) 673. fi ; (6) 664. fi ;

(8) 598, 671. 6 ; a4) 608 ; (19) 640;
(21)408,627. «,660; (23)472. a;
(94)529; (25)437; (^531; (29)
454; (30) 370, 439. |9; (34) 610;
(39) 394, 619. r; (41) 357. /J.

Chap. II. (2) 641. /9; (5) 399,
582. N.; (6) 525. «; (8)525. n.;

(9) 457. Y ; (11) 472 ; (12) 402, 665;
(13) 421. fi ; (14) 661. 3 ; (16) 378 ;

J}7) 378; (18) 417; (20) 450. a;
(23) 559. d; (26) 402; (27) 516;
(28) 649. ^ ; (29) 362. r ; (32) 416,
447. y; (38) 367, 498.

Chap. III. (3) 508; (13) 611.
2; (16) 389, 399, 497. 1, 510. 2;
(20) 194. 1, 393. a; (22) 628; (23)
629. p, 558,620; (26) 409, 595. 6;
(27) 409; (29) 399; (31) 496. c;
(32) 119. 2; (33) 432; (35) 509;
(36) 606 ; (39) 161. 2, 473. « ; (43)
546; (46) 301. 5; (48) 526 a.

Chap. IV. (5) 366, 667. 2; (7)
583; (14) 378; (16) 476. h ; (19)
237.

Chap.V. (2) 404. a; (3) 4MM.
a; (4) 404. i; (5) 376. 8; (7) 617.
6} (8) 876. r; (9) 424. 8, 504.

Chap. VI. (1) 137. y ; (3) 610 *
(4) 403, 491. wl; (5) 405. t; (?)
436; ai) <^} (IS) €03. C; (16)
404. a, 608. a, 604. e; (17) 436,
(18) 504 ; (19) 664. y ; (21) 605. 4 ;
(22) 435; (23) 394, 601. a; (34)
158.y; (27)538./!; (29)416,665;

(32) 417 ; (86) 521, 581; (37) 344.
1 ; (38) 434, 668. r.; (39) 409; (40)
409 ; (41) 368, 558; (43) 405. ?, 658
fii (44) 405. ,.

Chap. VII. (6) 237; (7) 485. «
(8) 671. 12 ; (10) 465 ; (11) 603. a,

(15) 663. 6; (17) 614. S; (19) 472
a, 668.11., 624. y; (28)434,629.1;
(23)556; (25)568; (27)637; (8B
440; (29) 405. 9, 503; ^) 477. «
(31) 349, 4ia 8, 568. R., 608. 2

(33) 509; (34) 451 ; (86) 449. «
(40) 605. 2 ; (41) 671. 3 ; (48) 357.
« ; (51) 403 ; (53) 671. 8; (54) 403^
(55) 200. ». ; (57) 124. /I »., 421. /I.

Chap. VIU. (1) 399; (tiQ 535
(4) 403, 530; (Q 374. a; (9) 485.
a J (11) 449. /J, 460; (12) 119. 8,

(16) 487. 4, 522; (19) 589. fii (^
470. 3; (26) 140,

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google

Digitized

by Google